JP6903271B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

In pachinko machines and other game consoles, obstacles that change the direction in which the game ball falls, and a winning opening, starting opening, and variable winning opening where the game ball can win are provided in the game area of the game board. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and the like).

Further, such a game table is known to have a display means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-20302

However, in the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means.

In view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game table having a characteristic display means.

The game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display.
The third display is a display indicating that the timer notice display is waiting for the start of display.
The display of the timer notice display is started via the display of the third display,
The timer notice display is a display that counts the time until a certain effect is started.
After the symbol variation display is started, the third display may be started in the state before the super reach is started in the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first state").
The display of the third display may end in the middle of the state in which the super reach is being executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second state").
When the count in the timer notice display ends, the certain effect is started.
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display.
In the first state, the hold icon may be displayed,
In the second state, the hold icon may not be displayed,
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed on the back of the hold icon.
The hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed, and the hold icon can be displayed.
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed.
In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the third display.
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display displayed halfway in the second state are the same display position.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game console of the present invention, it is possible to realize a game console having a feature in the display means.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2, and (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. An example is shown, and FIG. 1D is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure look-ahead processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead result storage part for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit / fail determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of the process, and (c) is the flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is the flowchart of the process, (c) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the effect device 206. It is a figure explaining the effect example applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 16 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 17 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure explaining the mode of change of the remaining time display meter in a button effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice production. (A) is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on processing, (b) is a flowchart of the return activation processing, and (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation processing. It is a flowchart of the main control part main loop processing. It is a flowchart of the main control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure state update process. (A) is a flowchart of the special figure-related lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special figure per lottery process. It is a flowchart of the process during a symbol change. It is a flowchart of the special figure display confirmation weight processing. (A) is a flowchart of the hit start weight process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special electric function opening process. It is a flowchart of a special electric function operation process. It is a flowchart of a special electric duty control process. (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of the special electric service operation pattern data table, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the contents of the special electric service operation data table. It is a flowchart of the special electric duty residual sphere detection processing. It is a flowchart of the special electric duty operation end processing. It is a flowchart of a hit end display weight processing. It is a figure which shows the content of the customization which can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the option menu screen in the state where the member service is not used. It is a figure which shows an example which calls an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from a demo screen. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 65. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 66. It is a figure which shows the other modification example. (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen, and (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen. It is a transition diagram of the Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows the top menu screen and the Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows the model customization screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect using a variable icon. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 75. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the example shown in FIG. 75. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the change effect of the hold icon and the change effect of the variable icon by the navigator character YM. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 78, the modification example, and the like. It is a figure which shows the effect example that the holding frame becomes invisible temporarily. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS. It is a figure which shows the modification and the like shown in FIG. 81. An example of an effect in which the effect of the button hold icon is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which there is a period that a navigator character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the example which there is another period in which a navigator character YM is not displayed. This is an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed. An example of the production in which the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure is entwined with the navigator character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which the change notice display is standby display. It is a figure which shows the effect example using the holding frame different from the holding frame explained so far. It is a figure which shows the example which the icon I1 of the treasure box which has been used as the icon of the change notice notification appears as a hold icon. An example of the production in which the meter effect is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 91. It is a figure which shows still another modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 91. An example of a production in which a telop effect is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entwined the navigator character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of another effect which entwined the navigator character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of still another effect which entwined the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entwined the navigator character YM by the effect device 206 provided with the 2nd display device below the decorative pattern display device 208 (the first display device). It is a figure which shows an example of the case where another effect is executed during the execution of the effect selected by a player. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a table which summarized the music which can be output from a speaker 120. It is a figure which shows the example in which the music selection described with respect to FIG. 101 is performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 102. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 104. It is a figure which shows the example which the holding frame selected by a player is changed. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 106. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine which was set to the auto button mode. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 108. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 108. It is a figure explaining the overlap relationship with the other display of each of the brightness adjustment window BW, and the display of the ball removal notification notified by the occurrence of the dish full tank error. It is a figure which shows the display example of the ball removal notification. It is a figure which shows the example which a plurality of types of error displays are displayed. It is a figure which showed an example of the error which the main control part 300 of a pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is a figure which showed an example of the error which can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of a pachinko machine 100. It is a figure which showed an example of the notification mode of the error notification by the pachinko machine 100. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows various notice icons and various notice displays. It is a figure which shows the icon for a mini game. It is a figure which shows the hold icon and the change icon. It is a figure which showed the example in which the notice icon is stocked by winning in the mini-game B, the notice display is displayed by using the stock notice icon, and the display mode of a variable icon changes step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the effect example shown in FIG. 120 step by step, and is the figure which shows the modified example of the effect example. It is a figure which shows the 3rd modification | 6th modification example of the effect example of FIG. 120 (A1)-FIG. 121 (A40). It is a figure which shows the 7th modification to the 10th modification of the effect example of FIG. 120 (A1) to FIG. 121 (A40). It is a figure which shows the other modification of the production example of FIGS. 120 (A1) to 121 (A40). By winning in the mini-game B, a plurality of notice icons are stocked, and by using the stocked multiple notice icons, a notice display is displayed and the display mode of the variable icon is changed step by step. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production example shown in FIG. 125, and the production example of the mini-game A of the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example of the mini-game A of the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice step by step. It is a figure which shows from the middle of the 1st modification to the 3rd modification of the production example of FIGS. 126 (1) to 127 (3). It is a figure which shows the continuation of the 3rd modification of the production example of FIG. 126 (U 1) to FIG. 127 (U 38), and the middle of the 4th modification to the 5th modification. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the 5th modification of the production example of FIGS. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted, and the modification example of the production example. It is a figure which shows the production example in which the notice display YH of a button appears from the notice icon YI step by step. It is a figure which shows the effect example step by step that the execution number of the button effect is stocked. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example in which the number of times of execution of a button production is stocked, and other production examples. It is a figure which shows the production example which the notice display YH which is released from the notice icon YI can be understood even before the release. It is a figure which shows the production example which uses one notice icon in stock a plurality of times step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example in which a plurality of notice display YHs of the same type are emitted from the same notice icon YI which is stocked, and other production examples. It is a figure which shows the example in which a plurality of notice icons YI were stoked step by step. It is a figure which shows the example which the notice icon YI is used a plurality of times in a state that the notice display YH which is released from the notice icon YI is known before the release. It is a figure which shows the production example which continues from FIG. 139. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stoked. It is a figure which shows the example of the roulette production for notice icon stock step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect using the roulette RLT for the notice icon stock, and the effect example which accompanies the button operation. It is a figure which shows the example which the display mode of the notice icon YI of a "button" changes according to a button operation, and other examples. It is a figure which shows the effect example which continues from FIG. 144, and the example which displays the same notice icon in a plurality of modes. It is a figure which shows the production example by the structure which the display means is arranged below the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L. It is a figure which shows the effect example using the 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M and the 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N. It is a figure which shows the production example which used the display of the icon change notice shown in FIG. 119 (b) step by step. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 148. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the effect example shown in FIG. 148. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the effect example shown in FIG. 148. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is executed, and other production examples. It is a figure which shows the example that the display of the icon change notice itself is promoted while failing to promote in the middle over a plurality of fluctuations. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example in which the display of the icon change notice itself is promoted via the meter effect, and other examples of the effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119 (b), and other production examples. It is a figure which shows the effect example which combined the display of a certain kind of hold icon and the icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the other production example using the icon of the bomber system as the display of the icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the example of various notices concerning the display of the icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L, and other display means. It is a figure which shows the effect example using the 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M and the 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N. It is a figure which roughly shows 7 production examples in which various icons and displays are used. It is the figure which showed the example of the production using the chance up meter step by step. It is the figure which showed the example of the production using the chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which showed the example of the display start mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY step by step. It is a figure which showed the example of the display start mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY step by step. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure which shows the state that the chance up meter production is performed during the super reach production. It is a figure which shows the appearance that another pattern of the chance up meter production performed during the super reach production is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of the change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure explaining another pattern of the change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure explaining another pattern of the change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure which shows how the chance up meter ranks up during the production by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the rank-up chance up meter. It is a figure explaining another pattern of rank up of a chance up meter. It is a figure which shows the state which the rank-up chance up meter preparation display MTY is displayed in the rank-up display mode even if it switches to a chance up meter CMT. It is a figure which shows the production example which announces that the chance up meter preparation display is displayed. It is a figure which shows the other production example which announces that the chance up meter preparation display is displayed. It is a figure which shows the production example in which the chance up notice is given at the checkpoint which is not shown in the chance up meter. It is a figure which showed stepwise about another production example using a chance up meter. It is a figure which shows another pattern of the production using a chance up meter. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 183. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern of the effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 183. It is the figure which showed the example of the look-ahead notice using the chance up meter preparation display step by step. It is a figure explaining another display pattern of a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the production example of the chance up meter executed in another super reach. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining another production pattern of the production by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect by the chance up meter performed in the probability change state. It is a figure explaining an example of giving a notice of an effect by a chance up meter by a display device other than a decorative symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the effect example using the 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M and the 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N. The correspondence between the display mode (color) of the effect display on the effect device 206 and the notation used in the present specification and the drawings is shown, and (a) is the correspondence relationship with the display color on the decorative symbol display device 208. , (B) are the correspondence with the emission color in the light emitting means such as a full-color LED. It is the figure which showed the example of the production using the chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which showed the production example performed in this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which showed an example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which showed the production example performed in this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which showed the production example performed in this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which showed the production example performed in this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which showed the other effect pattern of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which showed the production example performed in this embodiment step by step. It is the figure which showed the example of the production using the chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which showed the production example performed in this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which showed an example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which showed an example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 207. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 237 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise an example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 239 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another display example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 246 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 249 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 250 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect which continues from FIG. 250 (24) step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 253. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 255 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 257. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 260 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 260-FIG. 261. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 260-FIG. 261. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 263 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 263 to 264. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 260-FIG. 261. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 266 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 268 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 268 to 269. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 270 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 241. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 273 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 273 to 274. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 275 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 275-FIG. 276. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 277 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 279 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production which continues from FIG. 279 (18) step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 279 to 280. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 285 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 286 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise an example of the production in the jackpot game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise the display example when the error display is displayed in the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a timer notice display. It is a figure which shows an example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the display example in the tutorial display part TT1 applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the button repeated hitting effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect by the explanatory display applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the effect shown in FIG. 309 step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 312. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-continuous production which can apply to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the button notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the expansion effect of a hold display frame step by step. It is a figure which shows the display example of the ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows the display example of the ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows the display example of the ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows stepwise an example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 325 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 326 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise an example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 328 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 330 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 332 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 335 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 337 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 339 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 341 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 345 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 347 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 349 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 352 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 355 step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the hold notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 358 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 360 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise an example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the production pattern in which a mini game is executed in the button timer notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another effect pattern of a button timer notice effect. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the variation display of a decorative symbol executed in this embodiment, and (a) is the timing chart explaining the flow of the variation display of a decorative symbol which is out of reach state without being reached. Yes, (b) is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variable display of the decorative symbol which becomes a big hit or a miss after reaching the reach state. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 408 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production of another case following FIG. 409 (q) step by step. (A) is a diagram for explaining a display example of the notice icon, (b) is a diagram for explaining the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408, and (c) is a diagram for explaining the notice icon display area information storage area. It is a figure explaining an example of the digestion timing, and (d) is a figure explaining an example of the increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a notice icon before the change, and (b) is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon after the change. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 413 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 414 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 415 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 416 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 425 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 426 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 427 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 428 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the production example in which the notice icon changes step by step. It is a figure which shows the display example step by step when the power is cut off and is restored while the notice icon is displayed. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the advance notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 435 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the advance notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the modification of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 440 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise the production example using the movable means applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the notice icon increase production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the notice icon increase production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the notice icon increase production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the advance notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure explaining the lottery table related to a notice item. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 456 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 458 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a schematic explanatory drawing which shows an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows one example of the hold change notice effect as the look-ahead notice effect by the hold icon applicable to an embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 470 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect shown in FIG. 471. It is a figure which shows another modification of the effect shown in FIG. 471. It is a figure which shows one example of the super reach effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows one example of the symbol variation display applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the expansion effect of a hold display frame. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to this invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the machine 2000 of the holding, (b) shows the mobile phone 3000 which has the storage part which stores the electronic data which realizes this invention. , (C) show a portable game machine 4000 including a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) includes a storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. A home-use video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

Hereinafter, the game console according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 and a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage plate 108, and the like. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop. A speaker 120 (a bass speaker that outputs bass) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, it is in a state of being electrically connected (the main body 104 and the outer frame 102). When the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are connected to each other), and the speaker 120 can output sound. Become.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (game store) where the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor (inner frame opening sensor) for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened is provided. ing.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 109 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (a treble speaker that outputs treble) and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Has been done. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, or the like which emits light may be referred to as a lamp, and a lamp which emits light is an example of a light emitting means. Corresponds to.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pushing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. A door sensor with a ball storage plate may be provided to detect that the door 108 with a ball storage plate has been opened. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is provided with a door-side ball passage unit capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player. , The ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as the dollar box) by the operation of the player, and the game guided to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches a ball into the game area 124 of the game board, an effect button 136 (chance button 136) that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and an effect button. The chance button lamp 138, which is built in 136 (chance button 136) and emits the effect button 136 (chance button 136), and the ball lending instruction to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the amusement shop. It includes an operation button 140, a return operation button 142 that instructs the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided. In this operation key unit 137, the up and down keys of the up key and the down key, and the left and right keys of the left key and the right key are arranged as cross keys, and the enter key is arranged at the center of the cross keys. There is. In addition, a cancel key is also arranged below the cross key to the right. The pachinko machine 100 does not have a door 108 with a ball storage plate, and the front frame door 106 has an upper plate 126, a lower plate 128, a ball removal button 130, a ball discharge lever 132, a ball launch handle 134, a chance button 136, and a chance button. All or part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display unit, the lower plate full tank detection sensor, and the operation key unit 137 may be provided. When the front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (may include the door 108 with a ball storage dish) is open to the main body 104. If the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, the effect means (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, and the chance) provided on the front frame door 106. Button lamp 138. If the front frame door 106 is provided with an effect movable body, the effect movable body is also included), the display of the ball rental display unit, the chance button 136, the ball rental operation button 140, the return operation button 142 and It is configured so that the operation key unit 137 can be operated and the lower plate full tank detection sensor can be detected.
Further, in the present embodiment, since the power supply board case 184 in which the power supply board 182 constituting the power supply control unit 660 described later is housed is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102 and the front frame door 106 (with a ball storage tray) are attached. The door 108 may be included), and the game board 200 is configured so that the power supply voltage is supplied from the main body 104.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player, the launching device 110 launches the gaming ball into the gaming area 124 of the gaming board at intervals of a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right-handed button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 while being operated may be provided. The ball launch handle 134 has a launch stop switch (not shown) that invalidates the launch (injection) of the game ball accompanying the operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the operation of the player, and the player touches the ball launch handle 134. It is equipped with a touch sensor capable of detecting. It should be noted that a right-handed button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 while being operated may be provided. In addition, when the touch sensor detects that the ball launch handle 134 has been operated from the state in which it has not been operated while the demo screen is being displayed, a dedicated effect may be performed. .. For example, an effect display by a display means, an effect sound by a sound output means, a light emission effect by various decorative LEDs and a light guide plate, and an effect movable body (provided on a game board or a frame) can be mentioned. The production may be performed by four types of production means, or may be performed by one or more types of production means. Further, even if the same type of production means is used, there may be a production means that performs a dedicated production and a production means that does not. (For example, the production movable body of the frame performs a dedicated production, but the production movable body of the game board does not perform a dedicated production, or the production movable body A of the game board performs a dedicated production, but the production movable body B of the game board. Does not perform a dedicated production, etc. This example can be applied to other production means.)
The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the rear view is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is provided on the main body 104 and is detachable from the main body 104, and when mounted at a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 4). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 4) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launching a game ball (FIG. 4). A power switch that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices (see FIG. 4), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged. The main board case 158 in which the main board 156 is housed, the first sub board case 162 in which the first sub board 160 is housed, and the second sub board case 166 in which the second sub board 164 is housed are the game board 200. A power supply including a payout board case 172 containing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168, a launch board case 176 containing a launch board 174, a power supply switch 178, and a RAM clear switch 180. The power supply board case 184 for accommodating the board 182 and the CR interface unit 186 are provided in the main body 104.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary symbols are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The effect device 206 operates the effect movable body 224 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later.

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (Electro-Luminence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect, and is a decorative symbol. The display device 208 may also be used as a predetermined symbol display means.

The normal map holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are a predetermined number. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (details will be described later) that are held, and this implementation In the form, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number of special figure variable games (for example, four, eight when the first special figure and the second special figure are combined). The term "hold" as used herein means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on the start information described later.

The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is configured to perform a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the jackpot game, and not to notify the current symbol control state thereafter. There is. Further, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a time saving state (electric support state), and a probability change state, and a state with a special symbol probability change and a state with a probability change. It may be one of the states without the special figure probability change.

In this specification, the control state will be described using the wording indicating the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the wording of the control state includes the concept of the so-called gaming state.

Further, around the effect device 206, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged. ing.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200 in the present embodiment, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 1 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". Then, it is called a "ball (game ball)".

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is formed. One is arranged in. The ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure start port 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which its own size does not change.

In this embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is arranged below the first special figure start port 230. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure start port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 is provided. It corresponds to the variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second special drawing start port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the ball into the starting port 232 of the second special figure with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode in which it is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, when the normal figure variable game is won and the normal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure start port 232 is reached. The ball can be entered (easy to win), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are opened is easy to win. That is, the size of the entrance (advance entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure start port 232 is either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball, which changes from one size to the other size, is variable, and corresponds to an example of the second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing start port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, among the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second feature, which is a variable starting area, is larger than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230, which is a fixed starting area. Figure There are more game balls that enter the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special drawing starting port 232 are provided, but three starting ports may be provided. Here, when there are three starting ports, two first special drawing starting ports may be provided, one second special drawing starting port may be provided, and conversely, one first special drawing starting port is provided. It may be provided and two second special figure starting ports may be provided. Further, when there is only one special figure display device, the three start ports may be configured to correspond to the same special figure display device. Further, four or more starting ports may be provided.

In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a large winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are the stationary states, the closed state is the predetermined first stationary state, and in the closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is in a stationary state. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. In addition to the completely closed state, the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly open to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3, as long as the game ball wins a prize by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the jackpot symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening is provided, but two variable winning openings may be provided. Here, when two variable winning openings are provided, the other variable winning opening is always closed while one of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening is open. However, both variable winning openings may be open. In addition, three or more variable winning openings may be provided.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, there are a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 and game nails 238. An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning ports or the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

The ball housed in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or the starting opening. (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), or without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228, the out port 240 To reach. An out sensor may be provided on the game board. The out-sensor is a game ball that has passed through the sensors of the winning openings (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and a game that has passed through the sensors of the starting opening (first special drawing starting port 230, second special drawing starting port 232). It is a sensor configured to be able to detect a ball and a game ball that has entered the out port. The sensor may be configured to be able to detect only a part of the winning opening, the starting opening, and the out opening.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. .. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a game nail 238, or the like can roll, and a passing ball enters the first special figure start port 230 in the central part of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to ball is provided.

In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate a human right arm and a forearm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm portion 224a to the shoulder position A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-like left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice to be visible from the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portion of the holes in the lattice may be closed with a semi-transparent lens body to the rear. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the obstacle portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely closed (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 correspond to the effect means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208. Corresponds to an example of decorative pattern display means.

Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 indicating the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.), and a predetermined movable member, for example, an ordinary electric accessory. 2nd special figure for controlling various solenoids 332 including a driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the starting port 232 and a driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric accessory. The drive circuit 334 is connected to the drive circuit 334. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Stored in the value storage register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly set. Latch and store the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured so that signals such as commands can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control unit 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by bidirectional communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, and the like. , The sensor circuit 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 detects the pressing of various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, etc., the effect button 136 (chance button 136), and the various buttons that make up the operation key unit 137. The detection signal from the button sensor 426 is output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a CPU 504. VDP (Video Display Processor) 516 that reads out the image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And, are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. The ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has been opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened, and the like. When it is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the release signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the control unit 630 is supplied with the power supply of the predetermined voltage, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 start port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment in the "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure 1). Fluctuating game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed multiple times.

FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 5A, nine types of special figures, "special figure A" to "special figure I", are shown. In FIG. 5A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

In the present embodiment, as the stop symbol mode of the special figure, seven types of jackpot symbols (from "special figure A" to "special figure A"
Special figure G ") is prepared. "Special figure A" is a 15-round (R) jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, while you can expect to get the ball out in 5 of the 15 rounds, you can not expect to get the ball out in the remaining rounds, it is a real 5R probability variation jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all 15 rounds, and "Special Figure D" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 out of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that you can expect to get a ball in one round, but you can not expect to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure E" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 4 out of 15 rounds It is a real 4R-RUB that can be expected to get a ball in the round, but cannot be expected to get a ball in the remaining rounds, "Special Figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure G" is a 2R jackpot. It is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation that cannot be expected to get a ball in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit in which it is difficult for the player to specify how long the round in which the winning of the ball can be expected will continue at the start of the big hit, and is a specific round (for example, 5 rounds). It is a big hit that tells the player whether or not the round that can be expected to get a ball will continue when the eye or the 9th round is reached.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the jackpot game is completed. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal figure than in the low-probability state of the normal figure (probability change of the normal figure). For example, the winning probability of the normal-figure variable game is 1/100 in the normal-figure low-probability state (non-electric support state), whereas it increases to 99/100 in the normal-figure high-probability state (electric support state). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation and shortness). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 2321 is easier to open more than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 2321, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the jackpot game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and if the prize of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced, the player may be disadvantaged. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of opening the electric chew is performed, which increases the probability of entering the starting port 232 of the special figure 2, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure E" are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (normal figure high probability state) after the end of the big hit game to be performed after that until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and "Special Figure F" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained for 100 times of the special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, and the 101st time is non-electric. It shifts to the support state (low probability state in the normal figure). On the other hand, when a big hit without electric support (“Special Figure G”) is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when "special figure A" to "special figure E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent openings will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 5 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing number and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game in which "Special Figure G" is stopped and displayed and shifted. The number of times and the opening time) are substantially the same, but may be different. For example, at least one of the number of opening times and the opening time may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 5B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 5B, six types of special figures, "special figure a" to "special figure f", are shown, and five kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure f"). Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds. "Special figure b" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15 It is a 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to get a ball out in all rounds, and "special figure c" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it is expected to get a ball out in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected to get a ball in 4 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball, and "Special Figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 5C shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying the actual 5R probability variation jackpot (“special figure B”), 5R normal jackpot (“special figure F”), and 2R normal jackpot (“special figure e”), “decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three decorative patterns with the same number other than "3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" and "Decoration 1" Decorative 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R probability variation jackpot (“special figure A” and “special figure a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB, and substantial 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols having the same numbers, and the middle symbol display area 208b is the lord. The combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 1-lord-decoration 1", "decoration 4-lord-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or the small hit (“special figure H”) which is the big hit of 2R, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is set in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described so far (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by being controlled by the first sub-control unit 400.

FIG. 5D shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 lights up all seven segments and one segment in the center. Performs "variable display of normal map" (variable game of normal map) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the hit symbols "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special symbol symbol determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of the special figure in the RAM 308 may be referred to as the reserved number storage area for the special figure. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of the winning / failing determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for ordinary drawings is also provided. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored in each set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT314 is set. Allow the operation of and set the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit described later in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized). ) Proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like is turned on (indicating that the operation has been performed). In other words, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the basic circuit 302 is set to the initial state in step S113. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. Then, if the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and if the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is used. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example). It is determined whether or not it is 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Part timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. It is read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the area, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the detection signal storage area before the previous time, which is divided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting port 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is judged that there was a passage of. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been awarded. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special figure It is determined that the starting port 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. The random number counter for generating each special figure random number value is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the general figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a fluctuating / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying fluctuation / stop, a timer for measuring a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning in the winning openings 234, 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is displayed. Read and add 1 to set in the original prize ball number storage area.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize reception process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

Further, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display the lost symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 5 (c)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid (332) of the 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. The details of the special figure look-ahead processing will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The on / off drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R jackpot flag, a 5R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. .. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the timer probability fluctuation flag is also on, any one of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. 5 (a) is on, and the 2R jackpot flag is on. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure e, and the loss flag is on, the special figure f. The 7-segment LED is turned on / off, and the driving control is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), a 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), and a lost symbol (special figure e). Confirmation display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. Is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closure period in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in this example embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to be set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating the production waiting period in. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal figure, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal figure is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state (normal-figure variation / shortness). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be inserted into the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, and many game balls will be inserted into the special figure 2 starting port 232 until the game balls are entered. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the gambling property increases.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-order flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is read as "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , Special figure 1 The lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the starting port 230 is notified with priority. In this example embodiment, the special figure variable game (special figure 2 variable game in this example) having a high advantage is given priority over the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game in this example) having a low advantage. Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the acquired special figure 2 winning random value in the start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and also deletes the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the hold of the special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority fluctuation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 is held in the special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order. In the change in the starting order winning order, the maximum number of holds is eight regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the maximum number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holds.

Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special figures may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, etc. The command type can be specified), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is the symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and timers selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, which includes information indicating a number, etc., includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc., and the winning effect start command and end. In the case of the effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the like are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the number of big hit rounds are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 starting port 230 has been won, whether or not the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been won, and whether or not the variable winning opening 234 or 235 has been won. Including presence / absence. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area described later, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit is used as command data. Including.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure stored in the RAM 308 are stored in the command data. 2 Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned prize-winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the prize-winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300 depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the main control unit timer interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 51, a special figure look-ahead process is performed within the winning opening winning process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the hit / miss determination process, and predetermines the stop symbol (special figure pre-reading process). The figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 1 look-ahead result stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit and the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 look-ahead result is stored in the special figure. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 look-ahead decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 look-ahead result having the highest rank (first) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 look-ahead result is deleted. It is processed so that the rank of the data of is moved up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 1 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 1 look-ahead result data having the lowest (last) rank.

Further, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 2 look-ahead results stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 look-ahead result and the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 look-ahead result having the highest rank is deleted, and the rank of the remaining special figure 2 look-ahead result data is deleted. Is processed so as to be carried up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 2 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 2 look-ahead result data having the lowest rank.

In the special figure look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing (step S301). The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area. Special figure 2 Perform by comparing with the number of look-aheads. When the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 look-ahead number. If they are equal, it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is subjected to the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the winning / failing determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random number value storage area. Further, the process of step S303 is performed before the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 10, and the special symbol symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is specified. FIG. 2 Preliminary determination is made prior to the winning / failing determination process in the related lottery process (step S229). In the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later, the advance determination of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is performed before the display symbol lottery process S708. Further, this pre-judgment process may be performed using a special table for pre-judgment instead of the table used for the hit / fail judgment.

In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing. Whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number storage as in the special figure 2. This is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 look-ahead number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increasing, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated and the main control unit. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress based on various flags in the RAM 308. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress (in the electric support (high probability state in the normal figure)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game in addition to being in non-electric support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is displayed before the winning / failing determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random number value storage area. Further, the process of step S311 is performed before the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 1 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S231). In the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later, the advance determination of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is performed before the display symbol lottery process S708. Further, this pre-judgment process may be performed using a special table for pre-judgment instead of the table used for the hit / fail judgment.

In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In step S315, the increased special figure 1 start information is not pre-read, and the “undetermined” information indicating that the start information is not pre-read is stored in the RAM 308 as the pre-read result result for special figure 1 in place of the stop symbol information. Store in the first free space of the department. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-mentioned command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be performed. All the look-ahead results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, the look-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2 and the look-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special figures 1 and 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may decide, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold by lottery. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, the look-ahead is always executed and the look-ahead result is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the look-ahead is stored. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the effect using the look-ahead result.

FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which the look-ahead result information and the like are stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, "special figure I" (off) is stored in the storage area "hold 1" as stop symbol information, and "special figure I" is stored in the storage area "hold 2" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored," special figure A "(15R probability variation jackpot) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area" hold 3 ", and" special figure I "as stop symbol information is stored in the storage area" hold 4 ". "(Out of place) is remembered.

FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, "special figure f" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbol is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In FIG. 9B, the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 9C shows an example of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, "undetermined" information is stored in the storage area "hold 1" instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned stop symbol information, the hit / fail judgment result and the special figure fluctuation time are preliminarily determined, and these information are stored in the look-ahead result storage unit and are stored in the first sub-control unit 400 as the look-ahead result information. Can be sent.

Next, refer to FIG. 10 for the hit / fail determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7. I will explain while. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability table for determining whether or not it is correct, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability table for determining whether or not it is correct or not. When the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 is performed, the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. 10A is referred to in the case of the special figure high probability state, and in the case of the special figure low probability state. , Refer to the low probability table for determining whether or not the result is shown in FIG. 10 (b). Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is selected as a hit / fail determination result. It can also be applied to the winning / failing determination table used in the special drawing per lottery process in step S801 of FIG. 53 (b) described later.

Similarly, when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 is performed, when the special figure is in the high probability state, the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. 10A is referred to, and the special figure is in the low probability state. In that case, the low-probability table for determining whether or not the result is shown in FIG. 10 (b) is referred to. Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, a big hit or a miss is selected as a hit / fail determination result.

FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. When the hit / fail judgment result of the big hit is incorrect, the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit judgment table and the acquired random number value are used as the basis. , Select the winning / failing judgment result of the special figure small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 1, a small hit is selected as the winning / failing judgment result with a probability of 2000/65536, and a loss occurs with a probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, if the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected. It can also be applied to the small hit determination table used in the special figure small hit lottery process in step S803 of FIG. 53 (b), which will be described later.

Next, the stop is performed based on the winning / failing determination result determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The special figure determination table used for determining the symbol will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11A is referred to, and the special figure is based on the winning / failing result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the stop symbol of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit / fail result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, any one of the special figures A to G is selected, and when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, If the special figure H is selected and the result of the result of the special figure 1 is a loss, the special figure I is selected.

Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (b) is referred to, and based on the hit / fail result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value. The stop symbol of special figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of the special figures a to e is selected, and when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a loss, the special figure is a special figure. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed is set in the special symbol display device.

The special figure determination table of this example may also be used for determining the symbol in the special figure state update process of FIG. 53 (a), and the display symbol data of the special figure 1 is used in the display symbol lottery process of step S708. When deciding, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11A is referred to, and based on the winning / failing result of the special figure 1 by the special figure per lottery process in step S707 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the display symbol data of special figure 1.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 is converted to the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation according to the detection result. A process of changing the effect data according to the operation of the key unit 137 is performed.

In step S413 following step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S415 following step S413, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. To do.

In step S417 following step S415, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S419 following step S417, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S443 following step S441, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the random value value for other effects is updated. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S501 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. .. In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. 2nd sub control unit 5
The CPU of 00 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S509 following step S507, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If is necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S511 following step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S509, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S503.

FIG. 13B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S541 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543, which is next to step S541, other effects such as updating the random value for effect are performed.

FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S551, a transfer instruction for image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S555, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 504 uses image data information (VRAM518) that constitutes the display image in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S551.
(Coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of drawing the image, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S561, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, an example of the configuration of the effect device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and FIG. 14B is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the effect device 206.

In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front surface side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with the decorative members constituting the effect device 206 so that a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. .. The decorative member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may also be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are shown. It is omitted.

In the decorative design display device 208, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The first UI unit 280 is provided with a variable icon display area on the left side thereof, and a pedestal h0s is arranged in the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 can be displayed in a manner mounted on the pedestal h0s, and when the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is notified that the symbol variation is being displayed. When the symbol confirmation is being displayed (the symbol is stopped), the variable icon h0 is not displayed. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a character of the lord is displayed. The navigator character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 is formed with a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The stage may indicate the pedestal of the hold icon. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. Further, the navigation character YM does not have to be displayed all the time, and N specific notices and effects using the navigation character YM (for example, a look-ahead notice, a notice in the symbol variation display, and a hold of the symbol variation display are accumulated). It may be displayed at the time of the effect (such as the effect sometimes displayed), or may be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 14A, since the four variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-patterned and white display mode), but the display mode is changed according to the progress of the game. May change. As a result, it is possible to display a notice and a look-ahead notice. Here, the variable icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variable display. Further, the variation icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol variation display. The variable icon h0 does not have to be displayed.

The variable icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. Strictly speaking, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area to the variable icon display area, the moving icon may be referred to as the variable icon, or the variable icon may be expressed as moving. Good. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. This variable icon is displayed in a display size different from that of the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon and the hold icon, but they may be the same size. In addition, the variable icon may consist of a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can give a notice of whether or not the change is correct (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon can be seen as an icon related to hold, and can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of winning or failing the special figure variable game is held. The erasing timing may be a timing earlier than the timing at which the result of the change is notified, the same timing, or a later timing. The variable icon h0 does not have to be displayed.

Further, in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is displayed as stopped. The second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed by another display device for effect (for example, a 7-segment display, an LED, a dot matrix display device, or the like). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Some or all of the combinations of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (here, “4” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. The second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be good. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and displays the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. May be good.

Further, the background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background display corresponding to the effect and the game state (normal game state, probability change state, hidden probability change state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the pass / fail judgment result. In addition, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain gaming state (one or two or more of a normal gaming state, a probabilistic state, a hidden probabilistic state, and a time saving state). In this case, the rules may be changed (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A → ... If it collapses, it may be a notice of big hit confirmation (premier notice)), and it may change randomly regardless of the order.

Further, below the decorative pattern display device 208, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved or rotated in the vertical direction according to the effect content. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest accessory 224E is lower than the decorative pattern display device 208, but it can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 208, the first large board behavior character 224Ga, which is one of the movable objects, is given the letters "Large", and the second is given the letters "Board". A large board behavior character 224 Gb, a third large board behavior character 224 Gc with the characters "shake", and a fourth large board behavior character 224 Gd with the characters "Mai" are arranged. Each of these 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd can be rotated about the center and can be moved toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. Further, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the production.

Further, above the decorative pattern display device 208, a Senryobako accessory 224H, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect content. .. The Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be overlapped with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryobako accessory 224H has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

A transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the Senryobako accessory 224H. The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 14A, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that irradiates the light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol, for example, depending on the light emitting mode of the LED. The fourth symbol display device 284 is L.
It may be configured by an image display device such as a CD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. The LED is lit and displayed while the special symbol is stopped, but blinks or is turned off while the special symbol is changing. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be lit and displayed while the symbol is changing, and may be turned off while the symbol is stopped.

In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height of the display area is slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is second. 1 It overlaps the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. It should be noted that the effect operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above may not be configured so as to be able to perform all of them, and any one or more of them are performed. It may be configured so that it can be used. Further, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the effect operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the effect operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the effect operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different. For example, the number of effect operations that can be performed is different. Or, the effect itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can be moved and rotated to the right, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be moved in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured so that the effect operation can be performed. Specifically, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may operate, and one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate. 1 Only the decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. Further, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. The front surface side of the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is covered with a decorative member constituting the effect device 206, and a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. The decorative member may be made transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be made visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, and the first special figure hold lamp 218.
, The second special figure holding lamp 220 and the general drawing holding lamp 216 are not shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The variation icon h0 is displayed on the left side of the first UI unit 280 in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and notifies that the symbol variation display is in progress. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a character of the lord is displayed. The second UI unit 281 is formed with a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 14B, since the four variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In FIG. 14B, the variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-patterned and white display mode). The display mode may change depending on the progress. As a result, it is possible to display a notice and a look-ahead notice.

Further, in the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". The combination is displayed as stopped. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but it may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another display device for effect (for example, a 7-segment display, an LED, a dot matrix display device, or the like). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Some or all of the combinations of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second reserved number display may be divided into different decorative symbol display devices for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be done. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and displays the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. May be good.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. In this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, probability change state, hidden probability change state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the pass / fail judgment result. In addition, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain gaming state (one or two or more of a normal gaming state, a probabilistic state, a hidden probabilistic state, and a time saving state). In this case, the rules may be changed (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A → ... If it collapses, it may be a notice of big hit confirmation (premier notice)), and it may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be in a frameless form. Further, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. .. In the example shown in FIG. 14B, the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 14B is the upper end of the family crest accessory 224E. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. The Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

The above-mentioned light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of these decorative symbol display devices, family crest accessory 224E and Senryobako accessory 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. The movement of each production movable body is made visible.

Further, in FIG. 14B, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Next, an effect example using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A or FIG. 14B will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect applicable to the present embodiment.

15 (A1) to 15 (A2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). That is, when the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H operate from the state shown in FIG. 15 (A1), the mode shown in FIG. 15 (A2) is obtained. Specifically, from the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, until the characters "large", "board", "swing", and "mai" are first facing the front. Each rotates and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the Senryobako accessory 224H moves from the initial position to a position where it overlaps at the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged on the front side of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are the Senryobako accessory. Compared to the case where it does not overlap with 224H, it is considered to be more difficult to see. The Senryobako accessory 224H may be configured so as not to overlap the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. Further, the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the Senryobako accessory 224H and may be configured to overlap the Senryobako accessory 224H.

In FIG. 15 (B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. It is shown that it is. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL may be made easier to see by reducing the brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 or various lamps. ..

15 (C1) to 15 (C4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 15 (C1) to 15 (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body is provided instead of the family crest accessory 224E. The POV display 224I, also referred to as a versa writer, is movable in the vertical direction and is configured to be overlappable on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is set below the decorative symbol display device 208, but it can be set to any position. The POV display 280 has an elevating arm and an LED array rotatably attached to the tip of the elevating arm. The elevating arm can be elevated by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row in the LED array, and the posture extending in the horizontal direction is the initial posture of the LED array. The LED provided in the LED array may be a full-color LED or a single-color LED. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) controls the lighting of each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on the versa data which is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing so, the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs change during the rotation of the LED array, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated in the rotation locus of each LED, and a pattern is represented. Further, the POV display 224I is arranged on the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H. Can be set.

FIG. 15 (C1) shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

FIG. 15 (C2) shows that the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the elevating arm, and the LED array overlaps on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display screen is more difficult to see than in the case where the POV display 224I does not overlap.

FIG. 15 (C3) shows how the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. LED arrays are accelerating rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbol, and these are difficult to see while the LED array is rotating.

In FIG. 15 (C4), the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the characters "heat" are displayed, and a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is performed. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the one described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. Further, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the light emission brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is lowered to improve the visibility of the image displayed by the POV display 224I. May be good. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be set to dark display while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I.

In FIG. 15 (D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. It is shown that it is. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced to guide the light. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made more visible.

15 (E1) to 15 (E2) show that the family crest accessory 224E is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (E1), the family crest accessory 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position and overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM. The variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and at least a part of the navigation character YM are considered to be more difficult to see than when they do not overlap. After that, as shown in FIG. 15 (E2), the family crest accessory 224E is rotated in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest accessory 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may vibrate with or in place of rotation. Further, it may be performed only ascending and not rotating or vibrating. It can also be applied to the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a).

FIG. 15 (F1) shows how the Senryobako accessory 224H is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, it is shown that the Senryobako accessory 224H is moving from the initial position to a position where it overlaps the front side of the substantially center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (F1), it is considered that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped because the Senryo box accessory 224H is overlapped. In this production example, when the Senryobako accessory 224H operates, the family crest accessory 224E is not operated so that the Senryobako accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E do not interfere with each other. In addition, there may be a case where both the Senryobako accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E are in operation. Further, when the Senryo box accessory 224H operates, a retracting operation may be performed to move the family crest accessory 224E further downward.

In FIG. 15 (G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved by sliding so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is also scrolled. That is, with respect to the background image, the area that was not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N were slid to be visually recognized by the sliding movement. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a result, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. Can be displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M slides upward and the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides upward. 3 The decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

In FIG. 15 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged to display the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. It is shown that the display straddles the device 208N. That is, the left symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The enlarged first decorative symbol does not have to be displayed across the two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the enlarged first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the enlarged left symbol. The enlarged middle symbol may be displayed only, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

15 (I1) to 15 (I2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 15 (I1) to 15 (I2), the above-mentioned POV display 224I is provided in place of the family crest accessory 224E. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (I1), the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

In FIG. 15 (I2), after the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to the position where the LED array overlaps with the front side at the substantially center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates and rotates constantly. It is shown that the character "heat" is displayed after reaching the speed and rotating at a constant speed.

In FIG. 15 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is displayed. It is shown that the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281. That is, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

15 (K1) to 15 (K4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). In the examples shown in FIGS. 15 (K1) to 15 (K4), the outer circumference of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is also visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

FIG. 15 (K1) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial positions.

In FIG. 15 (K2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208
It is shown that M slides along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to a position close to each other. At this time, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scrolls along with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is displayed. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are adjusted to the slide movement. By scrolling the display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can perform a unified display. As shown in FIG. 15 (K2), the family crest accessory 224E moves downward from the initial position to the evacuation position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 15 (K2'), the displays on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid and moved without scrolling. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may rotate or vibrate at the initial position when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating. It may vibrate while rotating.

In FIGS. 15 (K3) to 15 (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in close proximity to each other and counterclockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that they are rotating together in the direction (CCW direction). FIG. 15 (K4) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated by 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N match the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. A display is performed in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N rotate in a direction opposite to the rotation direction about the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may appear that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated, but the displayed image is not rotated.

FIG. 15 (L1) shows a modified example of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (L1), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest accessory 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps at least part of the lower end. In the sub-display device 208S, the respective displays in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 described above are displayed. That is, on the sub-display device 208S, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is walking from the right side to the left side, but a part of it overlaps with the sub display device 208S and is sub. It is said that it is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the display device 208S. As shown in FIG. 15 (L1'), the display image (background image, Sabohani character SBH, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

FIG. 15 (M1) shows the operation modes of the sub-display device 208S and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. That is, the sub-display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position on the front side of the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are rotated to the positions where the characters "large", "board", "shaking", and "mai" are in front of each other, and then the decorative symbol display device 208. It has moved to a position near the left and right ends of the sub-display device 208S which has moved to a position on the front side in the substantially center of the above. At this time, the sub display device 208S performs the cut-in display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image, indicating that a predetermined advance notice effect or a look-ahead advance notice effect is being performed. ing.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. Here, FIG. 16 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 17 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 17 step by step, and FIG. 19 is a diagram showing another example of the effect shown in FIG. 18 step by step. ..

In FIG. 16, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a normal figure hold are shown. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following description, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) will be applied, but the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) can also be applied. In the following, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the light guide plate IL are not shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image (coastal background image) as shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. Further, the second reserved number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" in accordance with the stop display of the first decorative symbol. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 16 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the second UI unit 281, a hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons in special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 in special figure 1. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 16 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both default display modes. It is displayed in (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 16 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are shown by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 16 (1), for ease of explanation, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are divided by broken lines, but the broken lines are not actually displayed.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 16 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 16 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is the start of fluctuation in the special symbol display device → the start of blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → the start of fluctuation of the second decorative symbol → the start or deletion of the movement animation of the hold icon → decoration. It is performed in the order of the start of fluctuation of the symbol, but this order may be changed.

In FIG. 16 (2), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and decoration are performed. The design has not changed yet. The symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started at the same time, or the variation display of the fourth symbol after the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 is started. May start, or the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 may start after the variation display of the fourth symbol has started.

In FIG. 16 (3), it is shown that the second hold number display is updated from 2 to 1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. The update display of the second hold number display and the start of the change display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second hold number display is performed. The display may be started, or the update display of the second reserved number display may be performed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 16 (4), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement (decrease) animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the pedestal of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 14). At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern has not started.

In FIG. 16 (5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 16 (6), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the pedestal hs0 of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The display starts. When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be viewed as the change icon h0. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. The end of the movement animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the movement animation is completed. 1 The movement animation may end after the variable display of the decorative symbol starts.

FIG. 16 (7) shows how the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (8), it is shown that the navigation character notice is being performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice starts, a balloon in which the characters "opportunity" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the expectation for the big hit is high.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (9), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the navigation character notice is being performed. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. In addition, in the navigation character notice, the display of the balloon has changed from the character display of "opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation for the big hit is increasing. The timing at which the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "No", or the display in the balloon after the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. May be updated to "No", or the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "No". In addition, there may be cases where the effect of promoting from the previously displayed notice (for example, "opportunity") to the later displayed notice (for example, "extreme heat") (for example, "no") is not performed. .. In addition, the navigation character notice is not only a notice in the symbol variation display, but also a look-ahead notice, a notice for notifying that a certain notice will be performed, and an explanation display (various notices, game states, characters appearing in the production of the pachinko machine 100). , Explanation of the stage of the production, etc., also called tutorial display), etc. may be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that urges the effect button 136 (chance button 136) to be pressed within the operation valid period, and is a button image 136a that imitates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation valid period. It is composed of a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 16 (10), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In addition, in the navigation character notice, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "No" to the character display of "Intense heat", and it is notified that the expectation for the big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of this balloon overlaps with a part of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather. The timing at which the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is displayed and the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "super heat" may be the same, or after the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is displayed, in the balloon. The display may be updated to "super heat", or the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "super heat". As described above, in this production example, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be reduced and displayed (for example, the display of the same size as in FIG. 16 (9) is still displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (larger or smaller) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. The size (larger or smaller) may be different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

After that, the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (11). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 16 (11).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 16 (12) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (13), the game is played. It is shown that a person is pressing the effect button 136 (chance button 136). At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (12), the navigation character notice has ended and the balloon display has been erased. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the above operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 16 (14), in the old man's conversation image CI2, instead of the operation promotion notification image, "it is intense heat". Character may be displayed. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. In addition, the character display of the notice such as "It's intense heat" may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136). May be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without being operated.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (15), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible. It is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (16), after "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, "decoration" is displayed on the right symbol as shown in FIG. 16 (17). 7 ”is displayed as a stop and a reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to indicate that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 16 (17) to 16 (19), when the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the reach start animation. In the reach start animation in this production example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode of the reach start animation can be adopted. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by watching the reach start animation.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 16 (20) to 16 (21), the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 fluctuates. While leaving the icon h0, the frame is out below the display area, and the hold icons h11 to h14 displayed in the second UI unit 281 (in the production example shown in FIG. 16 (20), the hold icon h11) are also framed out. .. The start of the movement display of the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing as the start of the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is started, the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started. After the frame-out display of each image in the above is started, the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16 (22), the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to see. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. In addition, there may be cases where the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16 (23), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, both the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed, or the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior may be performed. There may be a case where only the operation of the accessory 224Gd is performed and the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is not performed, or only the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior is performed. Even if the operation of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or even if both the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il are not performed. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 17 (25), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are initially set. Return to position. It should be noted that the light emitting of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd have returned to the initial positions, respectively, or the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The start of movement of the four large board behavior accessory 224Gd to the initial position and the end of light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed at the same time. Here, in FIGS. 16 (22) to 16 (24), it is better to perform a series of effects performed by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light guide plate IL. It may be configured so that it is more likely to be a big hit than when no production is performed.

FIG. 17 (26) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (26), the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in large size, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. Animation is displayed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (28) displays the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT, indicating that the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (29), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (30) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (31), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 17 (32), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed to notify that the jackpot reliability is high. A notice production will be performed. The cut-in image CI3 of the lord overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is not displayed. The cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. It may be displayed even when the operation validity period has passed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (33), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is erased, and the animation display of the duel scene is continued.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the second button effect has been started since the development into super reach. ing. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (35), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (36) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (37), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed. It should be noted that the operation validity period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the first button effect after developing into super reach. In this case, it develops into super reach. The rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect after the development of super reach. Further, the operation validity period in the first button effect after the development of the super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the second button production after the development of the super reach, or after the development of the super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development of super reach may be the same length.

When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 17 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image. At the same time, the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left and right symbols of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character. It is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. Further, the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. It may be displayed even when the operation validity period has passed without being performed. Further, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is performed. In addition, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are performed, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th is performed after the effect image is displayed. The operation of the large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is started, or the effect image. And the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. Further, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may not be performed and the effect display may be lost, and further, the effect may be lost. After the effect display is performed, the revival effect may be displayed so that the effect display that becomes a big hit may be performed. When the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) is started, the displayed variable icon h0 is hidden, but it may be continuously displayed.

After that, in FIG. 17 (39), the Senryobako accessory 224H operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. It is shown that it is. Further, after that, FIG. 17 (40) shows how the light guide plate IL is emitting light. The display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the order in which the light guide plate IL starts emitting light are limited to those described above. However, it can be set as appropriate. In addition, the display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may all be performed. The part may not be performed.

FIG. 17 (41) shows how the light guide plate IL has finished emitting light. After that, as shown in FIG. 17 (42), the Senryobako accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, in FIG. 17 (43), the effect image fades out, and then, as shown in FIG. 17 (44), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd move toward the initial position, respectively. Has started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed.

After that, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 17 (46). In FIG. 17 (46), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 17 (47), "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (49), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. .. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure A. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special figure display device 212 was stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 did not receive the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol determination has stopped, the first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 18 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively. In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped.

After that, when the jackpot game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 18 (52), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the jackpot start effect. The display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game that was started as a big hit by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a "special bonus" and the game. It has been notified to the person that it is a 15R probability variation jackpot. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (52), a mini right-handed display for instructing right-handed is performed in the upper left corner of the display area. The mini right-handed display may not be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 18 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to hit right is displayed, and then the first round is started as shown in FIG. 18 (54). When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a round effect display and displays "decoration 7" indicating a combination of decorative symbols when a big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen. It is done. Further, a mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and "1R", which is the current round, is displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive villas may be displayed.

After that, when the jackpot game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 18 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a round effect display, and in the upper right corner of the display area, The current round "15R" is displayed.

FIG. 18 (56) shows that the jackpot game is completed and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the jackpot end effect. Since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R probability change big hit, the game state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state with electric support) after the big hit game ends. Therefore, in the jackpot end effect display, "Yoshimune RUSH rush" is displayed to that effect, and it is notified that the state shifts to the probability change state with electric support.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (57), a display (warning display) is performed to call attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 4). In addition, this warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the game state that is not in the electric support is completed, or the big hit regardless of the situation where the big hit is made. It may be displayed whenever the game is finished.

FIG. 18 (58) shows a state before the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the probabilistic state with electric support, and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probabilistic state with electric support, the background image is the background image for the probabilistic state with electric support, and the decorative design also has a display mode different from the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). .. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed in the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold icons of special figure 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is a quadrangular patternless and white display mode, and the display mode (here, the shape) is different from that of the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the player Can be identified at a glance. The default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2. In addition, in FIGS. 18 (58) to 18 (63), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold that is not actually displayed is held. The icon is shown by a broken line. Further, in FIGS. 18 (58) to 18 (63), the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is divided by a broken line for easy explanation, but the broken line is actually displayed. Not done. Further, in the probabilistic state with electric support, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed, but it may be displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (58), a mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a character "bonus XX" indicating the number of consecutive villas is displayed below the mini right-handed display. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (58), since the first big hit game has ended, a "bonus x 1" indicating that fact is displayed.

Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60) instructs the player to strike right. Right-handed notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in such a manner that the characters "Please right-handed" are displayed on the translucent band image. The right-handed notification overlaps with the decorative design, and the decorative design is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric support state in which the first jackpot game is completed and shifted, but it may be displayed even in the electric support state in which the jackpot game other than the first jackpot game is completed and shifted. For example, it may be displayed every time the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the electric support state. Further, after shifting to the electric support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is hitting left. For example, it is detected that the first special figure starting port 230 has won a prize. In some cases, it may be determined that a left-handed hit has been made and a right-handed hit notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60), the second hold number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (61) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-handed notification is displayed, the right-handed notification is hidden as shown in FIG. 18 (62). In addition, the mini right-handed display is continuously performed.

In FIG. 18 (63), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is held for four times. That is, in the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, all four lamps are lit to indicate that there are four holdings in the special drawing 2, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h21 to h24 of the special drawing 2 are turned on. Is displayed. Further, also in the second hold number display, "4" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 2 is four is displayed.

FIG. 19 (49a) shows another production example following FIG. 17 (48). In addition, in FIGS. 16 to 17, the case where "decoration 7" is in the reach state and "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol has been described, but here, "decoration 6" is in the reach state and is in the middle. A case where "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (49a), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is shaken and fluctuated by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6". As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure B. At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, it has not determined that the symbol determination stop has occurred. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are each decorated with "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6". In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped. By looking at this, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot is either a substantial 5R probability variation jackpot, a 5R normal jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot.

After that, when the jackpot game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 19 (52a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the jackpot start effect. The display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "bonus" and the player. It is informed that it is either a real 5R probability variation jackpot, a 5R normal jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (52a), a mini right-handed display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

FIG. 19 (38b) shows another production example following FIG. 17 (37). FIG. 19 (38b) shows that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the decorative symbol is lost. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (40b), the variable icon h0, the second hold number display, and the second decorative pattern are displayed. It is left and hidden.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 19 (41b) to 19 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) scroll in from the lower part of the display area, and the holding icon is displayed. And the navigation character YM are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol starts to fluctuate with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure I. At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, it has not determined that the symbol has been confirmed and stopped. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", respectively. In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped.

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (45b) displays the variable icon erasing animation. In the variation icon erasing animation display, the variation icon h0 gradually becomes smaller, and finally, as shown in FIG. 19 (46b), the variation icon h0 disappears in the animation display. The variable icon erasing animation may be started before the special figure is stopped.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the timer advance notice effect step by step.

In FIG. 20, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (2), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer advance notice effect is started. "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect will be started when 10 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. In this production example, the countdown is started when the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is started, but after the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. 20 (3)). You may want to start the countdown (afterwards).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 20 (3) to 20 (7), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 20 (8), the timer notice display TM1 "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 20 (11), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, and then shown in FIG. 20 (12). In this way, a cut-in display consisting of the character of the lord and the character display of "continue" is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. Here, the pseudo-ream is a variation display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times in one variation display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, the more likely it is to become a big hit. In addition, the pseudo-ream symbol may be framed out downward without being stopped and displayed. If the pseudo-ream symbol is framed out downward, the pseudo-ream is not started and the decorative symbol is lost as it is. The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach state may be reached and the reach effect may be started. As described above, in this production example, the timer is announced to announce that the pseudo-ream will be started after the countdown is completed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 restarts the variable display of the first decorative symbol. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap with the first decorative symbol.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (14), the display of "x2" is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

In the timer advance notice effect, when the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is counted down to "00:00", a certain advance notice effect such as a pseudo continuous effect may be performed without fail. It may or may not be done.

FIG. 20 (3a) shows another production example following FIG. 20 (2). In this production example, "20:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIGS. 20 (10a) to (11a), the first pseudo-ream is performed as described above. After that, as shown in FIG. 12 (14a), the second variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Note that FIGS. 20 (10a), (11a), and (14a) are effects corresponding to FIGS. 20 (10), (11), and (14), respectively.

Then, after "decoration 7" and "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, as shown in FIG. 20 (15a), 20 seconds have passed since the timer advance notice effect was started, and the timer When the timer display of the notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 20 (16a), in the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the character "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed. Is displayed. At this time, the design on the right has changed from "decoration 6" to "decoration 7". It should be noted that the design on the right may remain as "decoration 6" so as not to change. Then, as shown in FIGS. 20 (16a) to 20 (17a), the second pseudo-ream is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo-ream. As described above, the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 20 (3a) to 20 (17a) foretells that the second pseudo-ream will be started. In addition, foretelling the start of the second pseudo-ream means that the start of the first pseudo-ream is also foretold. It can be said that the start of the first and second pseudo-reams has been announced. In the timer notice in this production example, the start of the second pseudo-ream is announced, but other types of notice and the occurrence of the effect may be announced.

FIG. 20 (7b) shows another production example following FIG. 20 (6). 20 (7b) to 20 (11b) correspond to FIGS. 20 (7) to (11), respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (7b), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (8b-1), the face image of the character of the lord with the balloon line "Ikuze" added instead of the character display of "attention" in the timer notice display TM1. YMF is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (8b-2), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. In this way, a display other than the timer notice display TM1 may be used to attract attention to the notice. The means for attracting attention to the notice after the countdown in the timer notice effect is completed is not limited to the display, but may be performed by voice or a lamp, or by combining two or more of the display, voice, and lamp. You may do so.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (9b), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying that the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (10b), the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously performed, and the face image YMF of the character of the lord is erased, as shown in FIG. 20 (11b). After the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 20 (12), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed.

In this production example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the corresponding effect (pseudo-ream) is started, but the timer display becomes "00:00". However, there may be cases where the corresponding effect is not performed.

Further, another notice may be given while the timer display is being counted down on the timer notice display TM1. In this case, this notice may be a notice related to the timer notice effect, or may be a notice unrelated to the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

FIG. 21 (a1) shows another production example following FIG. 20 (7). When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 21 (a1), the timer notice display TM1 "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a2), the navigation character YM is displayed to face the variable icon h0 and point the sword. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a3), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a4), a state in which a beam is emitted from the sword held by the navigator character YM toward the variable icon h0 is displayed, and then shown in FIG. 21 (a5). As described above, the notice display in which the character "heat" is added to the variable icon h0 is performed. The look-ahead notice display may be performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon instead of the variable icon h0. After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (a6), after the navigation character YM returns to the default display mode, a reach state by the "decoration 7" occurs as shown in FIG. 21 (a7). As described above, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect in this effect example is an effect of notifying that the advance notice will be performed.

FIG. 21 (b1) shows a state after the timer advance notice effect has started. In the timer advance notice effect in this effect example, the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is started at "30:00", that is, a certain advance notice effect 30 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Suggests that is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 21 (b1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "29:69". In this way, a plurality of types of countdown times for the timer advance notice effect may be prepared. For example, the longer the countdown time, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, or the countdown time may be set. The shorter the value, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, or the reliability of the jackpot may be the same regardless of the countdown time.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b2), about 8 seconds have passed since the countdown started, and in the first decorative symbol, the reach effect by "decoration 7" has started. It is shown.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 21 (b3), the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is left and displayed in the first UI unit 280. Along with frame-out at the bottom of the screen, the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out.

After that, FIG. 21 (b4) shows how it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4), the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character and the enemy role Animation display of the duel scene with the swordsman begins. During this period, the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b5), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 21 (b6), the timer notice display TM1 gives a notice instead of the timer display. The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a notice display in which the characters "heat" are added to the variable icon h0. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is continued even after the timer advance notice effect shifts to the reach state.

FIG. 21 (b4'-2) shows another production example following FIG. 21 (b4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4'-2), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "02:37" after the animation display of the duel scene is started. There is. That is, the state when about 27 seconds have passed since the countdown by the timer advance notice effect was started is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4'-2), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to show that the button effect is started. It should be noted that this button effect is different from the effect announced by the timer advance notice effect. After that, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" as shown in FIG. 21 (b5'), the timer display is changed to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 as shown in FIG. 21 (b6'). The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7'), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a notice display in which the characters "heat" are added to the variable icon h0. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice display (or effect) performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect is being performed during the execution of the button effect.

In the above-mentioned production example, as an effect performed as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect, an example in which a change display of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is performed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other effects may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7 ″), the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT may change to give a notice.

FIG. 21 (b6 ″ ″) shows another production example following FIG. 21 (b5). When the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 21 (b6 ""), the timer notice display TM1 "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character display is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b6 ″ ″ -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed and a notice display is performed, and the animation display of the duel scene is a big hit. It is shown that the cut-in display is switched to indicate that the degree is extremely high. In this cut-in display, the princess character is displayed large on the right side of the display screen, and the characters "Suddenly hot" suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high are displayed. In addition, this cut-in display may be a notice display in which the big hit is confirmed. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that two or more notices are displayed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect. The display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change, and only the cut-in display may be performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 21 (c1) to 21 (c2) show how the lever effect starts as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (c1), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is set to "00:00" during the execution of the animation display of the duel scene, and the timer display is changed to the timer display to call attention to the notice. It is shown that the "attention" character of is displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 in this production example, a production lever 136V is provided in addition to the production button 136 (chance button 136) as an operation means for the production.

After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (c2), a lever image 136V imitating the effect lever 136V and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, indicating that the lever effect is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (c3), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the lever effect starts as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect, but the above-mentioned button effect may be performed instead of the lever effect.

There may be a plurality of types of button effects depending on the degree of expectation for the jackpot (for example, the button image 136a in the default mode, and the button image 136a having a color different from the default mode (for example, red or gold)). , Button image 136a with character notation (for example, "super heat", "expected large", etc.) and characters added to the default mode, button image 136a with a size different from the default mode (for example, big button effect and mini button) (Direction), the number of button images 136a displayed is larger than the default mode (for example, when three button images 136a are displayed, the same number of operations as the number of button images 136a (for example, three times) is performed). The operation may be performed a number of times different from the number of the button images 136a (for example, once or twice, four times, etc.). Further, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) may be operated. In the response display according to the operation, a number corresponding to the number of button images 136a may be displayed, or a number different from the number of button images 136a may be displayed.)).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 21 (d1) to 21 (d4) show how the effect movable body operates as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 21 (d1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the reach is achieved by "decoration 7" in the first decorative symbol, and the reach effect is performed. In the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is left and the frame is out downward, and the hold icon displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out downward. Further, a timer notice effect is also performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (d1), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00". After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (d2), on the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the character "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (d3), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (d4), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this production example, as a result of counting down in the timer notice production, it is shown that the first large board behavior character Ga to the fourth large board behavior character Gd as the production movable body operate, but the role of the family crest. The object 224E and the Senryobako accessory 224H may operate, and two or more of the first large board behavior accessory Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory Gd, the family crest accessory 224E, and the Senryobako accessory 224H operate. You may.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect step by step.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22 (1), the timer advance notice effect described above has been started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2), it is shown that the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon displaying the characters "addition" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the countdown time performed in the timer advance notice effect is extended. It should be noted that, for example, a button effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a chance-up notice, a look-ahead notice, or the like may be given between the start of the timer advance notice effect and the start of the timer addition effect. ..

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 22 (3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed, and the time to be added is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4), the time is added by the display of the count-up animation in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 fluctuates at high speed. It is not necessary to display the count-up animation. Further, instead of displaying the count-up animation, as shown in FIG. 22 (4a), the effect images may be overlapped in a manner in which the display state of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is difficult to see. After displaying the effect image shown in FIG. 22 (4a), the count-up animation shown in FIG. 22 (4) may be displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (5), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .. That is, it can be said that the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of adding the timer. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (6), when the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased and a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds after the timer addition effect is completed) elapses, the first pseudo continuous effect is produced. Is started, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (7), and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed.

In this production example, when the timer addition effect is performed and the time is added to the timer display, it is easier to make a big hit than when the time is not added, but the reliability of the big hit is increased. There may be no change, or it may be difficult to make a big hit.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 22 (1b) to 22 (6b) show a state in which the timer addition effect is performed by the conversation notice instead of the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM described above. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1b), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1b), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22 (1b), the timer notice effect described above has been started, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1b), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69". Further, in FIG. 22 (1b), the conversation notice has started, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord, in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord, is displayed. The timing at which the timer notice effect is started and the timing at which the conversation notice is started may be the same, the conversation notice may be started after the timer notice effect is started, or the conversation notice may be started. The timer notice effect may be started after the start. Further, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2b), the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed, and the character of the grandfather moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather with the character display "It is an addition of 10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed. As a result, it is notified that a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM. The timer display countdown in the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed. Further, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather also partially overlaps the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4b), the time is added by the display of the count-up animation described above.

After that, after the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, as shown in FIG. 22 (6b), the count-up animation display ends and the timer display on the timer notice display TM changes. It is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display. In this production example, the count-up animation display ends after the conversation notice ends. For example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (4b'-1) to FIG. 22 (4b'-2). The conversation notice may be continuously performed until the count-up animation display is completed. Further, the timing at which the conversation notice ends and the timing at which the count-up animation display ends may be the same.

The production example shown in FIGS. 22 (1c) to 22 (6c) shows another example of the timer addition effect by the conversation notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1c), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1c), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22 (1c), the timer advance notice effect described above has started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1c), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69". Further, in FIG. 22 (1c), the conversation notice has started, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord, in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord, is displayed. The conversation image CI1 of the lord is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2c-1), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. The conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the above-mentioned operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the character of. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. In addition, even during the execution of the conversation notice, the countdown by the timer notice effect is continuously performed.

After that, the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2). FIG. 22 (2c-3) shows that about 1.5 seconds have passed since the operation valid period was started, and the length of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT corresponds to the elapsed time. It has decreased so much. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136), as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT disappears, and the player is informed. You will be notified to that effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (3c), the display of the old man's conversation image CI2 is changed to the character display of "10 seconds is added" indicating the time to be added from the operation promotion notification image, and the timer notice display TM is displayed. It is notified that a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display. If the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated during the operation valid period, the time may not be added in the timer display. In addition, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation validity period, the gauge on the remaining time display meter MT is once erased, and then the character display is changed to "Add 10 seconds." Alternatively, the character display may be changed to "Add 10 seconds" without displaying that the gauge on the remaining time display meter MT disappears. Further, on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period, the characters "10 seconds are added" may be displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed. Further, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period, 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display at the timing when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. You may. That is, a display may be performed in which 10 seconds are added to the remaining time at the time when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4c), the time is added by the display of the count-up animation described above. In this case, the count-up animation display may end after the conversation notice ends, the conversation notice may continue until the count-up animation display ends, or the conversation notice may end. The timing at which the count-up animation display ends may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display ends.

After that, after the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, as shown in FIG. 22 (6c), the count-up animation display ends and the timer display on the timer notice display TM changes. It is updated and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (6c), it is shown that the timer display counts down to "09:85" after adding 10 seconds to the time in the timer display.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (2c-2) to (2c-4), the countdown in the timer advance notice production is continuously displayed even during the operation valid period. After the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-3'), the countdown update display in the timer advance notice effect is not performed during the operation valid period. (Timer notice display TM1 timer display is "06"
(Leave: 00 ”), time the internal time, and at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4'), the internal timekeeping result (for example, FIG. 22 (2c-4'). ), The remaining 2.00 seconds) may be reflected in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 to restart the countdown update display.

Further, for example, after the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-3 ″), the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is updated during the operation valid period. Without displaying (keeping the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 as "06: 00"), the time is measured internally, and as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4 ″), the operation valid period has elapsed. However, it does not reflect the internal counting result, and as shown in FIG. 22 (3c ″), the display of the grandfather's conversation image CI2 indicates the time to be added from the operation promotion notification image. At the timing changed to the character display, the internal time measurement result (for example, 1.23 seconds remaining at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (3c ″)) is reflected in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown update display is displayed. May be restarted.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

23 (1d) to FIG. (2d) show another production example of FIGS. 22 (1b) to (2b). In FIG. 23 (1d), the character display displayed in the conversation image CI1 of the lord is "attention to the timer notice". As a result, it may be possible to pay attention to the effect (notice) performed as a result of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 being "00:00". That is, it can be said that the advance notice is given by the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord in FIG. 23 (1d).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (2d), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. In 2b), the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather described above is displayed. In this way, after paying attention to the timer advance notice effect, it may be notified that the timer display changes.

FIG. 23 (1e) shows another production example of FIG. 23 (1d). In FIG. 23 (1e), instead of the conversation image CI1 of the lord, the timer display is set to "00" by performing the scroll display SC1 that scrolls from the right end to the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 above the timer notice display TM1. You may want to pay attention to the effect that is performed as a result of ": 00". That is, in the scroll display SC1 shown in FIG. 23 (1e), the characters "attention to timer notice" are scrolled in a loop from the right end to the left end of the display screen.

The production example shown in FIGS. 23 (1f) to 23 (6f) is another example of the timer addition effect, and shows how the added time is counted down by a display different from the timer notice display TM1. Shown. FIG. 23 (1f) is an production example following FIG. 22 (3), in which the additional timer display TM2 is displayed below the timer notice display TM1 on the display screen after the additional time is notified by the balloon of the navigation character YM. It is shown that the frame is in from the right end. In this addition timer display TM2, "10:00" indicating the time to be added is displayed. Here, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is performed while the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted. The additional timer display TM2 overlaps with the balloon of the navigation character YM, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM.

FIG. 23 (2f) shows how the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed. At this time, the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. Here, after the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be deleted, or after the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted, the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 may be deleted. Animation may be completed, or the timing at which the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed may be the same as the timing at which the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. In FIG. 23 (2f), the additional timer display TM2 is arranged below the timer notice display TM1, but the timer advance display TM1 and the additional timer display TM2 may be arranged so as to overlap each other, for example. , As shown in FIG. 23 (2f ′), the additional timer display TM2 may overlap with the timer advance notice display TM1, or as shown in FIG. 23 (2f ″), the timer advance notice display TM1 may overlap. The additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 23 (2f) to 23 (4f), the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (5f), the countdown of the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is framed out to the right end of the display screen. .. Here, after the timer display countdown on the additional timer display TM2 is started, the frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 may be started, or the timing at which the timer display countdown on the additional timer display TM2 is started. , The timing at which the frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts may be the same. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 23 (5f), the timer notice display TM1 is framed out when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, but the timer notice display TM1 is not framed out. At that time, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (5f'), the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed with the character "attention" to attract attention to the notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (6f), a pseudo-ream symbol may appear in the middle symbol and the pseudo-ream may be performed in response to the completion of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. This is suggested, and the additional timer display TM2 counts down the time until another effect is performed. The pseudo-continuous symbol may not appear when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may appear when the countdown of the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 is completed. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the added time is not added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, but is displayed on the additional timer display TM2 separate from the timer notice display TM1 to perform the countdown. ing. The notification of the time to be added may be the notification of the total value of a plurality of timer notice displays. For example, the value obtained by adding 3 seconds to the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and the remaining timer display TM2 is displayed. A value with 7 seconds added may be displayed. The additional timer display TM2 here may be a timer notice newly displayed with the addition of the timer, or may be a timer notice originally displayed before the addition of the timer.

23 (3fa) to 23 (8fa) are still another example of the timer addition effect, in which the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display countdown on the addition timer display TM2 are performed at the same time. It shows the situation. FIG. 23 (3fa) is an production example following FIG. 23 (2f). After the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 counts down together with the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. It is shown that the timer is starting. That is, in this production example, the time to be added is notified as 10 seconds, but the addition of 5 seconds is substantially performed. It should be noted that the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 may be the time obtained by adding the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 to the additional time of 10 seconds so that the addition of 10 seconds is substantially performed. For example, in the case shown in FIG. 23 (3fa), "15:00" may be displayed on the additional timer display TM2.

After that, the countdown is continued as shown in FIGS. 23 (3f) to 23 (6f), and in FIG. 23 (7fa), the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-ream is performed. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8fa), it is shown that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted and the first pseudo-ream is performed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started is displayed below the second decorative symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8fa), the countdown of the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 is completed, and instead of the timer display, a character of "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is displayed is displayed. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (9fa), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-ream symbol on the middle symbol, and notifies that the second pseudo-ream is started. .. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 23 (9fa'), the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to give a notice. Further, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed after the pine pattern CC is stopped and displayed. In this way, as the effect performed as a result of the countdown by the timer advance notice effect, it may be suggested that the advance notice effect or the big hit is performed in addition to the pseudo-ren. Here, the replay symbol RP and the pine symbol CC overlap with the additional timer display TM2, but may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display is increased as one aspect of the change of the display mode of the timer display. The timer display may be split.

FIG. 24 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 2, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed, and the second hold number display , "2" indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (2), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed overlapping the left symbol. The display of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is a notice display that may function as a look-ahead notice, and is a notice that time will be added in the timer notice effect. It should be noted that the timer advance notice effect may be announced. Here, the timing at which the left symbol stops and the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed may be the same, or the clock notice icon MI1 may be displayed after the left symbol has stopped. The left symbol may be stopped after the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed. The display timing of the stocked notice icon is not limited to the case where the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed along with the decorative design, and various types such as temporary stop of the notice icon symbol, navigation character notice, conversation notice, etc. It may be performed at any timing such as a notice or hold in the symbol variation display due to the effect, or a look-ahead notice by various effects such as the navigation character YM.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (3), it is shown in the first UI unit 280 that the table on which the navigation character YM stands rises and the notice icon display area 285 is formed. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, five areas, and the areas in which the notice icons are displayed are arranged side by side in the row direction. The number of areas configured in the notice icon display area 285 can be arbitrarily set.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (4), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is moved to the notice icon display area 285 and is shown to be stocked. In the first decorative symbol, it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Here, the timing at which the right symbol stops and the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 starts moving may be the same, or the notice icon MI1 may start moving after the right symbol has stopped. , The right symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 starts moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (5), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is reduced and displayed, stored in the leftmost area of the notice icon display area 285, and the state in which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked is shown. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (5), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are a combination of lost decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is shown that the confirmation is displayed with. The timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stored in the notice icon display area 285 and the timing at which the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed may be the same, and the notice icon MI1 of the clock is set in the notice icon display area 285. After being stored, the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed, or after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be stored in the notice icon display area 285.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (6), it is shown that one hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is performed. Further, the timer notice effect has also started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (6), the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69", and the countdown is performed. It should be noted that there may be an effect display (for example, a navigation character YM) that overlaps with the timer advance display only during execution of a certain effect (for example, a stock effect of a notice icon). On the contrary, there may be an effect display that overlaps the timer notice only during the execution of a certain effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (7), an effect is displayed around the notice icon MI1 of the clock stored in the notice icon display area 285, foretelling that the notice icon MI1 of the clock will be used. .. In addition, "07:31" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (8), the notice icon MI1 of the clock pops out from the notice icon display area 285 and is enlarged and displayed at substantially the center of the display screen. Although the effect is still displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it may be deleted at the timing when the notice icon MI1 of the clock jumps out of the notice icon display area 285.

After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (9), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased, and the display of the count-up animation is started. The timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is erased and the timing at which the count-up animation display is started may be the same, or the count-up animation is displayed after the clock notice icon MI1 is erased. It may be started, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be erased after the display of the count-up animation is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (10), the notice icon display area 285 is framed out downward.

FIG. 25 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25 (A1) to 25 (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A2), it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. Further, the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 has been completed, and the timer display is "00:00".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A3), a balloon displaying the characters "addition" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. Even if the character "addition" is displayed, the timer display time may not be added, or other effects may be performed. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3a-1), after displaying the character "attention" to encourage attention to the notice instead of the timer display, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3a-2). The balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed, and "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added may be displayed on the balloon to notify the time to be added. In this effect example, the effect to be displayed as "attention" is not a notice display but an additional time of 10 seconds. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-1), instead of the timer display, the character "still" indicating that the timer notice effect is continued is displayed, and then the display of the timer notice display TM1 is added. It is also possible to switch to the display of "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added and notify the time to be added. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-1), after displaying the character "still" on the timer notice display TM1, a balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and "+10" indicating the time to be added to the balloon is displayed. You may want to display "seconds". Further, after the display shown in FIG. 25 (A3) is displayed, the display as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-2) may be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (A4), a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is updated to "10:00", and the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is restarted. .. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A4), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol in response to the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 being performed to "00:00". It is shown that it is. The timing at which the timer display is updated and the timing at which the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed may be the same, or the pseudo-continuous symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display is updated. The timer display may be updated after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25 (B1) to 25 (B5) show an effect example in which the timer is shortened in the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and "06:99" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and a countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), a balloon in which the characters “subtraction” are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and time is subtracted from the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time for which the timer advance notice effect is performed is shortened by a predetermined time.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B2), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display shows "05:89". In addition, the balloon display of the navigation character YM is changed to the character display of "subtraction" and is set to "-3 seconds" indicating the shortened time. That is, it may be recognized that the timer advance notice effect is shortened by 3 seconds, and the period until the countdown is completed is shorter than the initially displayed time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (B3), the time is shortened by displaying the shortened animation in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 fluctuates at high speed (timer shortening effect). It is not necessary to display the shortened animation. Further, the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to see.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B4), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "02:00", and it is shown that the time in the timer display is shortened (subtracted) by 3 seconds. ing. That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of shortening the timer. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer shortening effect is being performed.

After that, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 25 (B5), the character "attention" to call attention to the notice is displayed instead of the timer display, and then the middle A notice is displayed by stopping and displaying the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol on the symbol. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 25 (B5'), the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-ream symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-ream is started. The timing at which the character "attention" on the timer notice display TM1 starts to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, or the character "attention" may be displayed. The pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) may be stopped and displayed after the display starts, or the character "attention" may be displayed after the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed. May start displaying. Note that the appearance rate of the content of the effect performed when the countdown is completed may change depending on whether the timer display does not change or changes in the timer advance notice effect. For example, the timer may change during the execution of the timer advance notice effect. If there is no change in the display, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and the pseudo-ream notification is likely to be performed. However, if the timer display changes during the execution of the timer advance notice effect, the above-mentioned pine symbol CC, etc. It may be easy to give a highly reliable notice of the big hit. Further, when the timer shortening effect is performed, the pseudo-ream may be notified earlier than when the timer shortening effect is not performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25 (C1) to 25 (C2) show another effect example in which the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes in the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed.
Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, "06:99" is displayed and a countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), a balloon displaying the characters "timer notice level UP" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the reliability of the jackpot for the timer notice display TM1 is increased. It is suggested that there is a possibility of improvement.

Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (C2), the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 changes from white to red, for example, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot of the timer notice display TM1 is improved. ing. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display, it is notified that a notice with extremely high reliability may be given as a notice to be executed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25 (D1) to 25 (D5) show an effect example in which the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted and restarted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (D1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), a timer notice effect is performed, and "06:99" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), a balloon in which the characters “stop” are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted. The timing at which the balloon with the character "stop" starts to be displayed and the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is interrupted may be the same, or the balloon with the character "stop" starts to be displayed. Later, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted, or the balloon with the characters "stop" may be started to be displayed after the countdown of the timer display is interrupted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D2), the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is shown that the pseudo-ream is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 25 (D2), the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, and the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 remains "06:99".

After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (D3), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol again, and shows how the second decorative symbol variable display is performed by the pseudo-ream. Has been done. In addition, below the second decorative symbol, "x2" indicating that the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D3), a balloon in which the characters "restart" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the timer display countdown is restarted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D4), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is restarted, and then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D5), the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted while a predetermined effect such as pseudo-ream is being performed, and the countdown can be restarted after the effect is completed. Has been done.

As an example of the change in the display mode of the timer notice display TM1, the number of timer notice display TM1 may change (increase or decrease) as compared with that before the change. For example, if one timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the change and it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes, the timer notice display TM1 may increase to 2 or more, and conversely, the timer. When three notice display TM1s are displayed and it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced to 2 or less. Here, when the number of timer notice display TM1 increases, the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed separately from the time notified by the originally displayed timer notice display TM1. The displayed timer notice display TM1 may be increased as it is (for example, if there is one timer timer notice display TM1 that notifies 10 seconds, and the two timer notice display TM1 are increased, 10 There are two timer notice display TM1s that notify the seconds). Further, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 is reduced, the total value of the times notified by the timer notice display TM1 originally displayed may be displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced as it is. (For example, assuming that there are two timer notice display TM1s that notify 10 seconds, if the number is reduced to one, the timer notice display TM1 that notifies 10 seconds becomes one). Further, when there are a plurality of timer notice display TM1s that have changed due to an increase or decrease, the countdown of the timer notice display TM1 may be started at the same timing or at different timings.

FIG. 26 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect. In the effect example shown in FIG. 26, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest accessory 224E. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 26 (A1) to 26 (A6) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:89” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (A1), a balloon in which the characters "+10 seconds" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S, and the timer is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. The time to be added is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (A2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and the upper right corner thereof overlaps with the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (A3), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts the effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding the time.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (A4), the sub-display device 208S descends and returns to the initial position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (A5), in the timer notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. It is shown. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (A6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased in the sub display device 208S. In this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed, the operation of raising the sub display device 208S is performed, but the operation of raising the sub display device 208S may not be performed.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 26 (B1) to 26 (B7) shows another example of the timer addition effect using the sub-display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:54” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

After that, in the sub-display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B2), the display of the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icon is switched to the display of the characters "+10 seconds", and the timer is added to the timer display in the notice display TM1. The time to be done is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), when the sub display device 208S moves upward and overlaps with the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the count-up animation display is started on the timer notice display TM1. The time is added to the production. It should be noted that at least a part of the timer advance notice display TM1 overlaps with the sub display device 208S, and it is said that it is more difficult to see than in the case where it is not overlapped. Further, the timing at which the sub display device 208S is located on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display starts, and the sub display device 208S may display the decorative symbol. The count-up animation display may start after being located on the front side of the substantially center of the device 208, or the count-up may be started before the sub-display device 208S is located on the front side of the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation display may start.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 26 (B4) to 26 (B5), the sub-display device 208S performs a countdown display of the additional time. More specifically, the addition time displayed on the sub display device 208S is reduced by 1 second, while the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is added by 1 second. .. In this production example, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted while the countdown display of the additional time is being performed, but the countdown may be continued without being interrupted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (B5), when the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S becomes "0 seconds", the timer display time on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is reached. It will be updated and displayed. At this time, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the sub display device 208S, and the timer notice display TM1
Although it is difficult to specify the time of the timer display in, it may be displayed so that it can be specified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (B6), the sub-display device 208S switches from the display of the additional time to the display of "Restart" indicating that the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is restarted. The sub-display device 208S starts descending toward the initial position.

FIG. 26 (B7) shows a state in which the sub-display device 208S is lowered and returned to the initial position. Further, in the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is restarted, and the timer display is "14:23" at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B7). After that, the display of "Restart" displayed on the sub-display device 208S is switched to the original display (display of the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the notice icon) as shown in FIG. 26 (B1). Here, the timing at which the timer display countdown resumes and the timing at which the sub-display device 208S starts descending may be the same, or after the timer display countdown resumes, the sub-display device 208S starts descending. Alternatively, the timer display countdown may be restarted after the sub-display device 208S starts descending. Further, the timing at which the display of "Restart" is started on the sub-display device 208S may be the same as the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is restarted, or after the display of "Restart" is started on the sub-display device 208S. Then, the countdown of the timer display may be restarted, or the display of "Restart" may be started on the sub-display device 208S after the countdown of the timer display is restarted. Further, the timing at which the sub-display device 208S returns to the initial position and the timing at which the timer display countdown resumes may be the same, and after the sub-display device 208S returns to the initial position, the timer display countdown resumes. Alternatively, the sub-display device 208S may return to the initial position after the timer display countdown is resumed.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 26 (C1) to 26 (C6) shows another example of the timer addition effect using the sub-display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:89” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (C1), a balloon in which the characters "+10 seconds" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is notified. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the timer notice display TM1 has started to display a suction animation for sucking the balloon displayed on the sub display device 208S, and sucks from the timer notice display TM1. An effect image showing how it is doing is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (C2), the sub-display device 208S moves upward to overlap a part of the display area of the sub-display device 208S with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. , The display mode of the character "+10 seconds" displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM extends toward the timer notice display TM1 and is displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Navi character YM has a surprised expression on the appearance.

FIG. 26 (C3) shows how the sucking animation is continuously displayed. Specifically, the display of "+10 seconds" sucked by the timer notice display TM1 by the sucking animation further moves toward the timer notice display TM1, and the display of this "+10 seconds" continues to be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Is displayed across the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, on the timer advance notice display TM1, the display of the above-mentioned count-up animation has started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (C4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "+10 seconds" absorbed by the timer notice display TM1 completely moves from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is shown that the timer is heading toward the timer notice display TM1 while shrinking. When the sucking animation is displayed, the navigation character YM performs a surprising animation (animation accompanying the sucking animation) by seeing the sucking animation, but it is not necessary to perform the animation in particular. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (C5), when the display of "+10 seconds" is completely sucked by the timer notice display TM1, the sucking animation display is completed, and then, as shown in FIG. 26 (C6), the timer. In the notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed. When a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided, the timer advance notice effect may be performed by only one decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 27 (A1) to 27 (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the production example shown in FIGS. 27 (A1) to 27 (A4), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) will be used for explanation. However, in order to facilitate the explanation, the family crest accessory 224E, No. A part of 1 large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and Senryobako accessory 224H will be described without illustration.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:99” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (A2), the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb and the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (A3), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts the effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding the time.

After that, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In this production example, the timer display is displayed by operating the 2nd large board behavioral character 224Gb and the 4th large board behavioral character 224Gd among the 1st large board behavioral character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral character 224Gd. Although it is notified that the second is added, the addition time may be different depending on the number of operating accessories among the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, for example. When all of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are activated, 20 seconds may be added to the timer display. Further, in this production example, it is notified that the timer display is added with 10 seconds by operating the 2nd large board behavior accessory 224Gb and the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd only once. The time to be added may be different depending on the number of times. For example, when the 2nd large board behavior accessory 224Gb and the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated 3 times, the timer display is added by 30 seconds. You may.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 27 (B1) to 27 (B4) show an example of a timer addition effect using the family crest accessory 224E. In the production example shown in FIGS. 27 (B1) to 27 (B4), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) will be used for explanation. The illustrations of the 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:99” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (B2), the family crest accessory 224E operates, rises to the front side slightly below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208, and moves up and down at that position. Move in the direction. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, it is shown that the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of times and displayed around the overlapping family crest accessory 224E. Specifically, one "+5 second" display, two "+2 second" display, and one "+1 second" display are displayed so as to surround the family crest accessory 224E, whereby the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It is notified that 10 seconds will be added to the timer display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (B3), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts the effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding the time.

After that, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In this production example, it is notified that the family crest accessory 224E operates only once to add 10 seconds to the timer display, but the addition time may differ depending on the number of operations. Often, for example, when the family crest accessory 224E is operated three times, 30 seconds may be added to the timer display.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 27 (C1) to 27 (C6) shows another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 27 (C1) to 27 (C6), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The family crest accessory 224E and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 27 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (C1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is in the hold display area in the second UI unit 281 formed on the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed, and in the second hold number display arranged in the upper right corner of the display area, "1" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. Further, a first UI unit 280 is formed on the lower right side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed on the first UI unit 280.

Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer advance notice effect is performed, and a timer display countdown is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 27 (C1), "05:00" is displayed as the timer display. In this production example, when the timer display becomes "05:00", the countdown is interrupted and "05:00" is displayed. The display is maintained. The countdown may be continued without interrupting the countdown.

Further, the character "additional 10 seconds" is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the time to be added to the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (C2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 27 (C3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest positions. At this time, the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps a part of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (C4), the display of "15:00" indicating the time in which 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed in the second position. It is displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (C5), the display of "15:00" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the timer display is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. 2 The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timing of starting the display of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be the same as the timing of starting the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After the display of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving, or the second decoration After the symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving, the display of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (C6), after the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restarted. To. The timer display countdown is displayed in a state where the display of "15:00" is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N (for example, the state shown in FIG. 27 (C4)). May be restarted. A case where the timer display is displayed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than a case where the timer display is displayed on one decorative symbol display device. The susceptibility to a big hit may be the same, or it may be configured so as not to be a big hit.

FIG. 28 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 28 (A1) to 28 (A4) shows another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 28 (A1) to 28 (A4), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The family crest accessory 224E and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer advance notice effect has been started, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this production example, two timer notice effects are performed. In this production example, the timer advance notice effect performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M is set as the first timer advance notice effect, and the timer advance notice effect performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N is used as the second timer advance notice effect. explain. At the timing shown in FIG. 28 (A1), "05:89" is displayed as the timer display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and "15:89" is displayed as the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Has been done.

After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this production example, even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving, the timer display countdown is continuously performed, but may be interrupted. Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest positions, as shown in FIG. 28 (A2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device The time indicated by the timer display displayed on each 208N is added up, and the display of "20:00" indicating the result is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. To. At this time, the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, but it does not have to be interrupted. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L also displays a timer of "20:00" at a position corresponding to the display of "20:00" displayed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap each other, making it difficult to see. After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 28 (A3) shows how the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions. Here, the timer display of "20:00" displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As the movement of 208N is performed, the displayed coordinates are maintained and the display is scrolled. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M scrolls the display of "20:00" to the right in response to the movement to the initial position, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scrolls the display to the right in response to the movement to the initial position. Scroll the display of "20:00" to the left. In the process of moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display of "20:00" is the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decoration. When "20:00" displayed across the symbol display device 208N and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is completely scrolled out, FIG. 28 (A3) shows. As shown, the display of "20:00" will be displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (A4), the timer display of "20:00" displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is erased and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After that, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restarted. The countdown may be started while the display of "20:00" is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the state shown in FIG. 28 (A3)). Here, the likelihood of a big hit may differ depending on the decorative symbol display device on which the timer display is displayed (in this production example, the case where the timer display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first. It is more likely to be a big hit than the two decorative symbol display devices 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed separately, but the big hits may be the same or less likely to be big hits).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 28 (B1) to 28 (B3) show an example of a timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices. Here, in the production example shown in FIGS. 28 (B1) to 28 (B3), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) is applied, but in this production example, instead of the family crest accessory 224E, FIG. The POV display 224I described above is provided with reference to. In addition, in the production example shown in FIGS. 28 (B1) to 28 (B3), in order to facilitate the explanation, about a part of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H. The description will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:71” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 28 (B1), the POV display 224I has reached a constant rotation speed and is rotating at a constant speed. Then, the characters "+10" are displayed by the simple display by the lighting control of the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array, and the time to be added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is notified. As shown in FIG. 28 (B1), due to the rotation of the LED array of the POV display 224I, all of the first decorative symbol and the variable icon h0, the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 are removed. It overlaps the rotation area and is difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (B2), the character "+10" displayed on the POV display 224I moves in the lower right direction, and the display of "+10" previously displayed only on the POV display 224I is displayed. Will also be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the character "+10" is displayed across the POV display 224I and the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the character "+10" may be a decorated display mode. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "+10" are displayed so as to match the display of the characters "+10" on the POV display 224I. As a result, it may be possible to display a sense of unity between the display of "+10" on the POV display 224I and the display of the characters "+10" displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this production example, the font of the numbers displayed on the POV display 224I is different from the font of the numbers displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be the same.

Then, after the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I decreases, the display stops in the initial posture as shown in FIG. 28 (B3). At this time, the display of the character "+10" displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to see than the state in which the LED array is rotating. In this production example, after that, 10 seconds are added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 28 (C1) to 28 (C5) show another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices (decorative symbol display device 208 and POV display 224I). Here, the configuration in the production example shown in FIGS. 28 (C1) to 28 (C5) is the same as that shown in FIG. 28 (B1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:87” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 28 (C1), the POV display 224I is raised from the initial position to a position on the front side at the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the initial posture, and is not rotating. It should be noted that all of the variable icon h0, the first decorative symbol, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 overlap with the POV display 224I, which makes it more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, when the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to rotate, reaches a constant rotation speed, and is set to a constant speed rotation, as shown in FIG. 28 (C2), the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 The timer display displayed on the POV display 224I is displayed on the POV display 224I, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. The timer display displayed on the POV display 224I is "05:17", and the countdown is continuing. Further, at this time, it is shown that the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of times and displayed around the rotation area of the LED array. Specifically, one "+5 second" display, two "+2 second" display, and one "+1 second" display are displayed so as to surround the family crest accessory 224E, whereby the timer display is displayed for 10 seconds. It is notified that the addition will be performed.

After that, on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 28 (C3), an effect that the timer display bursts is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 28 (C4), the timer display after being added is "15:00". Is displayed. In this production example, when "15:00" is displayed, the countdown is interrupted, but it may be continued.

After that, the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I is started to decrease, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed again on the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, as shown in FIG. 28 (C5), the vehicle stops in the initial posture. At this time, the timer display of the displayed timer notice display TM1 is "15:00", and then the countdown is restarted. The countdown may be restarted while the timer display is displayed as it is on the POV display 224I. Here, the case where the timer display is displayed by the POV display 224I may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the timer display is displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, but it is easy to be a big hit. May be the same, or it may be difficult to make a big hit.

In the timer advance notice effect described so far, when the timer is added, shortened, interrupted, etc. in the timer display, the countdown from the beginning to the end of the countdown after the change is internally performed. The total time may be counted down. Also, internally, the time until the change may be counted down before the change, and the time until the change may be counted down after the change (for example, if the change occurs 10 seconds after the start of the countdown). If you count down 10 seconds and display "Attention" 5 seconds after the change, count down another 5 seconds, etc.). Moreover, the display of the countdown and the time for internally counting down may match.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 29, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in this effect example, the effect lever 136V described above is further provided.

FIG. 29 (1) shows another production example following FIG. 17 (25). FIG. 29 (1) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (1), the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in large size, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (2), the animation of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. Is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The chance-up meter CMT is, for example, a meter that shows the progress of the reach effect, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current progress of the reach effect is outlined according to the position. Is informed. Here, the progress speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the production, but it may be constant. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a specific notice may occur. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but the display of how the super reach has been developed as shown in FIG. 29 (1) is started. The display may be started at the same timing, the display may be started when the reach state is reached, the display may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative symbol may be changed. The display may be started when the display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (3), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the start point SP.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (4), at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the appearance of Boy's character BOY. It can be said that this Boy's character BOY functions as a chance-up character.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (5), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and a notice is given by displaying the character of chance up. I am informing you that. The timing at which the boy character BOY starts to be displayed and the timing at which the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH starts to be displayed may be the same, or the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed after the boy character BOY starts displaying. It may be displayed, or the character BOY of Boy may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. The Sabohani character SBH stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the announcement by displaying the Boy character BOY is given, but it may not stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (6), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed. Further, in this production example, when the Sabohani character SBH approaches the checkpoint, the chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed. In this case, the entire chance-up meter CMT may be enlarged or displayed, or only the relevant checkpoint portion may be enlarged. This is also applicable in the following description.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (7), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible.

After that, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (8), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (9). It is displayed and the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (10), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). Here, the Sabohani character SBH is stopped at the second checkpoint CP2 until the player operates the button or the operation valid period elapses, but the character SBH may not be stopped.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 29 (11) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (12), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 29 (13), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed to notify that the jackpot reliability is high. A notice production will be performed. In this production example, the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is surrounded by a golden frame, and is a cut-in image of a special display mode showing a state of riding a large motorcycle while wearing sunglasses and smoking a cigar. It informs that the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically high. Instead of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord shown in FIG. 29 (13), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord (see FIG. 17 (32)) having a lower reliability than the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed. You may. The cut-in image CI1 of this lord shown in FIG. 29 (13) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation valid period, or may be displayed. The button 136 (chance button 136) may be displayed whenever the operation is performed within the operation valid period. Further, the cut-in image CI1 of this lord shown in FIG. 29 (13) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136). It may be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136), or the operation valid period without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136). May not be displayed when has passed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (14), a balloon with the characters “Chance up gold cut-in” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and the cut-in is surrounded by a golden frame. Notifies that a notice has been given by displaying an image. The timing at which the cut-in image CI3 of the lord starts to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the balloon of the character SBH of the lord starts to be displayed, or the character of the sabohani after the cut-in image CI3 of the lord starts to be displayed. The balloon of SBH may be displayed, or the cut-in image CI3 of the lord may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. The character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second checkpoint CP2 while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, but it may not stop. Further, in this effect example, the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 and the timing at which the button effect is started may be the same, and the Sabohani character SBH becomes the second checkpoint CP2. The button effect may be started after the button effect is reached, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the second checkpoint CP2 after the button effect is started. In addition, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is configured so that the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is not displayed when the operation valid period elapses without being operated, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) Even if is not operated, it may be notified that a chance-up notice has occurred in the same manner as when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or a chance-up notice has occurred. It is not necessary to notify that, or only a part of the notification that the chance-up notice has occurred may be notified (for example, only the character "UP" is displayed without displaying the balloon).

After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (15), the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (16), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible.

After that, when the character SBH of the balloon reaches the third checkpoint CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (18) displays the lever image 136V and the balloon. A balloon with the characters "Chance Up Lever" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH to notify that the notice by lever production has started. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (19), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The operation valid period of the effect lever 136V may be started while the balloon with the characters "chance up lever" is displayed. The remaining time display meter MT may overlap a part (plastic card) of the chance up meter CMT, but the whole may overlap, and the chance up meter CMT is displayed while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. It may be displayed so as not to overlap a part or all of the chance up meter CMT while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed, and conversely, the chance may be displayed so as not to overlap a part or all of the chance up meter CMT. The up meter CMT may overlap a part or all m part of the remaining time display meter MT, and a part or all of the remaining time display meter MT may be overlapped during the display of the chance up meter CMT. May be good.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V starts at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (20), the player can accept the operation of the effect lever 136V. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. The character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third checkpoint CP3 until the lever is operated by the player or the operation valid period has elapsed.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 29 (21), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani is located in front of the final point GP.

After that, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (22) within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 29 (23), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to No. 4 The large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are activated, the light guide plate IL is emitted, and the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is notified that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, but may be displayed. It should be noted that the effect performed when the effect lever 126V shown in FIG. 29 (23) is operated (1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and Senryobako accessory 224H are activated, and the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is emitted. The effect image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208) and the effect performed when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) shown in FIG. 17 (40) is operated are the same, but different. You may be. After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is terminated, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H return to their initial positions, respectively, and the decorative design. The effect image fades out on the display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. The chance up meter CMT also fades in with the duel scene animation display fade-in, but the chance up meter CMT may be redisplayed after the duel scene animation display fade-in is completed. .. The operations of FIGS. 29 (23) to (24) are performed as described above, for example, as shown in FIGS. 17 (38) to (44).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (25), it is shown that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and restarted. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the swordsman who plays the enemy role shows an expression of faint in agony, and it seems that he is about to lose. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, and the placard shows the letter "V" indicating that it is a big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (26), it is notified that the main character, the lord, defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol to be a big hit. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (27), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 28 (28), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. Although the chance up meter CMT is hidden, it may be displayed even after the reach effect is completed. Further, only a part of the chance up meter CMT (for example, the character SBH of Sabohani and the placard) may be displayed.

In the effect using the chance-up meter CMT described above, the chance-up meter CMT may or may not be displayed. In this case, the case where the chance up meter CMT is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where it is not displayed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may not be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT is displayed or not.

In addition, there may be a notice of chance up that appears only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

In addition, there may be a notice of chance up that appears regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

Further, the position of the checkpoint may be moved or the checkpoint may be deleted during the execution of the effect on the chance up meter CMT.

In addition, during the execution of the effect on the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH indicating the current position returns to the position before the current position (the position indicating the past) or the position ahead (indicating the future). You may move to position).

Further, the effect itself in the chance-up meter CMT may be a mini-game. For example, when the effect is performed at the position indicated by the checkpoint, the effect may be performed to increase the chance. Further, for example, an enemy character may be placed at the checkpoint, and an effect may be provided in which the chance is increased when the enemy character fights against the ally character and wins.

Further, as an effect of increasing the chance during the execution of the big hit game (for example, rank-up bonus, probabilistic promotion, promotion to a big hit game with more balls, etc.), an effect using the chance-up meter CMT may be performed.

Further, the chance up meter CMT itself may be hidden by the power interruption and recovery. Further, the chance-up meter CMT itself may return to the display, but the history of the checkpoint timing and the occurrence of the chance-up effect before the power failure may be hidden.

Further, the effect displayed after the countdown of the count display in the timer advance notice effect becomes 0 may or may not be notified by the chance up meter CMT.

Further, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint, the chance-up effect may or may not be performed. This also applies to the production of the chance up meter described later.

FIG. 30 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 30 (3a) is another production example following FIG. 29 (2), and the same production as in FIG. 29 (3) is performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (4a), the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, but no notice is given. That is, it is shown that even if the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the chance-up notice is not given. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (5a), the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 30 (5a) to (7a), the Sabohani character SBH is the first checkpoint. It passes through CP1 as it is, and the marking and the character "UP" at the first checkpoint CP1 are not displayed. As a result, at the first checkpoint CP1, it may be possible to recognize that the occurrence of the notice has ended unexploded. If the chance-up notice is not given at the first checkpoint CP1, for example, as shown in FIG. 30 (7a'), the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may be deleted. Also, as shown in FIG. 30 (7a ″), instead of the character “UP” displayed at the first checkpoint CP1, an “x” indicating that the chance-up notice was not given was displayed. May be done. In addition, even if the chance-up notice is not actually given, it is assumed that the chance-up notice has been given after the Sabohani character SBH has passed the checkpoint, and the marking or "UP" at the checkpoint is assumed. The characters may be displayed. For example, after marking at the checkpoint or hiding the characters of "UP", the markings or the characters of "UP" may be displayed. The Sabohani character SBH may return to the checkpoint to give a notice of chance up and display markings and the characters "UP". In addition, for example, an effect of rewinding the reach effect to the beginning or halfway is performed, and then when the Sabohani character SBH passes the checkpoint, a chance-up effect is performed, and marking or the characters "UP" are performed. May be displayed.

FIG. 30 (17b) is another production example following FIG. 29 (16), and the same production as in FIG. 29 (17) is performed. In addition, at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the placard is a question mark display, and when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, some event may occur. Is suggested.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (18b), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136V, and the lever effect as a notice of chance up is not started. It is shown. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (19b), the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 30 (17b) to (20b), the Sabohani character SBH is the third checkpoint. It passes through CP3 as it is, and the marking and the character "UP" at the third checkpoint CP3 are not displayed. Note that FIG. 30 (19b) shows that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) has started, and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). ing.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 30 (20b) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani is located in front of the final point GP.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 30 (21b) within the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Along with the words "Did you remove it ..." from the character and the swordsman who played the role of the enemy, the appearance that the victory or defeat is not decided is displayed. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character "development" is displayed on the placard at the final point GP, and it is notified that the reach effect will be developed.

After that, after the cut-in image CI4 is displayed by the character of the lord shown in FIG. 30 (23b), the effect that the panda character appears as a helper in the swordsman reach as shown in FIG. 30 (24b). Is started. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH rides on a flying carpet and heads toward the starting point SP.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 30 (25b) to (29b), on the way to the starting point SP, the Sabohani character SBH is displayed to change the chance up meter CMT while overlapping with the Sabohani character SBH. Do. Therefore, due to the movement of the Sabohani character SBH, for example, as shown in FIGS. 30 (26b) to (27b), a part of the changed chance up meter CMT appears and the fifth checkpoint CP5 appears. , As shown in FIGS. 30 (28b) to (29b), the fourth checkpoint CP4 appears.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (29b), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is located at the starting point SP again. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display state before the change of the 4th checkpoint CP4 and the 5th checkpoint CP5 (the state where the red marking is not attached and the character "UP" is not displayed). It has become. Then, in the chance up meter CMT, the movement of the Sabohani character SBH is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (30b), it is shown that the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach in which the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 30 (30b), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach in that the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other, but he follows the panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (30b), the Copanda cheering party KPD composed of three Copanda characters cheers at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4. A notice is displayed to show that the player is in the game, and it is informed that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach jackpot has increased dramatically. It can be said that this Copanda cheering party KPD is functioning as a character for increasing chances. The Copanda cheering party KPD may or may not appear in the SP swordsman reach.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (31b), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Copanda Cheering Party" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and a notice is given by displaying the chance up character. I am informing you that I have been struck. The timing at which the Copanda cheering party KPD starts to display and the timing at which the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH starts to be displayed may be the same, or the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH may start displaying after the Copanda cheering party KPD starts displaying. It may be displayed, or the Copanda cheering party KPD may be displayed after the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed. The character SBH of Sabohani stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the notice is given by the display of the Copanda cheering party KPD, but it may not stop.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (32b), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the fifth checkpoint CP5. Then, the display of "collaboration deadly" to the effect that the chance-up effect is performed is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 30 (33b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the lever image 136V together with the display of "blow". Will be done. Further, on the chance-up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters "chance-up lever" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that the notice by the lever effect has started. Here, the lever effect, which is a chance-up effect, may not be performed, and the button effect, which is an effect of operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136), may be performed. In addition, the lever effect may be always performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (34b), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the fifth checkpoint CP5 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. After that, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, the effect is performed in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 29 (24) to (28), and it is notified that a big hit will occur.

FIG. 30 (23c) is another production example following FIG. 29 (22). In the lever production shown in FIGS. 29 (18) to 29 (22), the effect lever 136V was operated by the player. It is shown that the production failed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, but the placard is shown with the letter "x" indicating that it will be lost, and the Sabohani character SBH looks disappointed. ing.

FIG. 30 (5d) is a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 29 (5). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (5d), a large number of Boy character BOYs (boy groups) appear from the left side of the display screen and move toward the right side. .. That is, it is shown that a notice is being given by the appearance of the Boy group. When this Boy character appears in a group, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the Boy character BOY appears alone. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT displays a balloon with the characters "chance-up BOY group" in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and notifies that a notice has been given by displaying the character of chance-up. In this way, even if the chance-up points are the same, different chance-up effects may be performed, or the same effects may be performed at the same chance-up points.

FIG. 31 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 31 (7e) is another production example following FIG. 29 (6), and the same production as in FIG. 29 (7) is performed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 31 (8e) to 31 (9e), in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH jumps over the second checkpoint CP2 and reaches just before the third checkpoint CP3, and the third checkpoint CP3 is reached. Wait at that location until the chance-up notice corresponding to checkpoint CP3 is given. It should be noted that while the effect of the Sabohani character SBH jumping over the second checkpoint CP2 and reaching the third checkpoint CP3 is being performed, the effect corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 (for example, FIGS. 29 (9) to 9). The button effect and the like described above as shown in FIG. 15 may be performed, or the effect itself may not be performed. Alternatively, although the effect is not performed, the second checkpoint CP2 may be marked in red and the characters "UP" may be displayed as if the effect was performed.

FIG. 31 (2f) is another production example following FIG. 29 (1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 31 (2f), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 29. Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT is configured in the shape of a green bar, and instead of the Sabohani character SBH, the current progress of the reach effect is roughly notified by the position of the marker MRK. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRK in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the progress speed of the marker MRK is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the effect, but it may be constant. In addition, the display mode of the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 is represented by a question mark so as to give a sense of expectation that a notice of chance up will be given. Also, the start and end points are indicated by the start and end of the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT.

In FIG. 31 (3f) following FIG. 31 (2f), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move from the starting point.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (4f), the boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side at the timing when the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1. It is shown.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (5f), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" was displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and a notice was given by displaying the character of the chance up. Is being notified. As shown in FIGS. 31 (5f) to 31 (6f), the marker MRK stands by at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 31 (7f-1) to (7f-2), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move. At this time, instead of displaying the question mark at the first checkpoint CP1, the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. The Boy character BOY is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (7f-2).

FIG. 31 (4g') shows an example of an effect in which the boy character BOY does not appear even if the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1 after the effect shown in FIG. 31 (3f) is performed. Has been done. Specifically, when the Boy character BOY does not appear at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (4f), as shown in FIG. 31 (4g'), the chance-up meter CMT at the first checkpoint CP1. Instead of displaying the question mark, an "x" indicating that the notice did not appear is displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31 (4 g ″), the display of the question mark at the first checkpoint CP1 may be erased so that no display is performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31 (4 g ″ ″), the display mode may not be changed while the question mark is displayed at the first checkpoint CP1.

FIG. 31 (2h) is yet another production example following FIG. 29 (1). In the production example shown in FIG. 31 (2h), the display mode is the same as that of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 31 (2f), but the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are hidden. It differs in that. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the start timing of the chance-up notice, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to when the chance-up notice will start.

At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (5h), a balloon with the characters “Chance Up BOY Passing” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to notify that a notice has been given by displaying the character of the chance up. At this time, a part of the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice has appeared.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 31 (6h) to 31 (7h), as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the hidden characters "UP" appear. Appear.

FIG. 32 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 32 (A1) to 32 (A11) show that the chance-up meter CMT notifies the timing at which the pseudo-ream occurs and the number of times the pseudo-ream occurs during the execution of the pseudo-ream effect. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A2), the characters "Secure Echigoya" are displayed, and it is shown that the chasing effect as an example of the pseudo-continuous effect is started.

After that, FIG. 32 (A3) shows how the chasing effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display in which the main character, the lord, chases the unscrupulous merchant, is started. Further, below the second decorative symbol, the chance-up meter CMT of the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. 31 (2f) is displayed. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (A3), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a pseudo-ream may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the markers MRK reach the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a pseudo-ream may occur. In addition, it is suggested that by reaching the final point, the unscrupulous merchant will be captured and it will be easier to shift to a highly reliable reach production. In this production example, the more pseudo-reams occur, the more likely it is to become a big hit. When the pseudo-ream occurs four times (that is, when the pseudo-ream occurs when the final point is reached), the big hit is confirmed. It should be noted that the jackpot may be confirmed when the number of pseudo-reams is other than four, and for example, when the number of pseudo-reams is 1 and 4, the jackpot may be confirmed. The number of pseudo-reams for which a big hit is confirmed is less likely to occur than the number of pseudo-reams for other pseudo-reams.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A4), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move from the starting point.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A5), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first checkpoint CP1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (A6), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. The state is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode. Even if the display of the main character chasing the unscrupulous merchant and the timing of displaying the characters "continue" and the timing of switching the display of the first checkpoint CP1 from the question mark to the display of the characters "continue" are the same. Alternatively, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may be switched from the question mark to the display of the character "continue" after the character "continue" is displayed together with the display that the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant. After the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continue", the characters "continue" may be displayed together with the display in which the main character's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A7), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A7), it is shown that the distance between the hero's lord and the unscrupulous merchant is shortened.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A8), the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the second pseudo-ream will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the second checkpoint CP2 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A9), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third checkpoint CP3. In addition, the angle showing how the hero's lord is chasing the vice merchant has been changed, and the expression of the vice merchant who has been able to afford it has become impatient.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A10), the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the third pseudo-ream will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the third checkpoint CP3 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (A11), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "secured" and the state in which the main character, the lord, has captured the unscrupulous merchant. At this time, the chance-up meter CMT indicates that the marker MRK has reached the final point, and thus the pseudo-ream has been performed three times in total in the symbol variation display this time. Further, at this time, in the first decorative symbol, the reach state is reached with "decoration 7", and the reach effect is started.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 32 (B1) to 32 (B14), the chance-up meter CMT is displayed during the fluctuation display of the normal decorative symbol, and the appearance of notifying the timing when the notice of chance-up occurs is shown. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance up meter CMT of the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. 31 (2f) is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (B2), the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 and second checkpoint CP2 indicate that a notice of chance up may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B3), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move from the starting point. In addition, a balloon displaying the characters "opportunity" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigator character YM, and the navigator character YM gives a notice of the navigator character. In this production example, the notice by the balloon of the character "opportunity" of the navigation character YM is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but is a chance that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice of up.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B4), the chance-up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first checkpoint CP1. Then, the characters displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM are changed from "opportunity" to "no". In response to this, a balloon with the characters "Chance up or not" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, notifying that the navigation character YM has given notice of the chance up. The marker MRK is waiting at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but the marker MRK may proceed without waiting. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the conversation notice has also started. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The conversation image CI1 of this lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The conversation image CI1 of this lord is a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a chance-up notice that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B5), in the chance-up meter CMT, as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT changes, the hidden character "UP" appears. The appearance is shown. This shows the history of the occurrence of a chance-up notice. In addition, the characters displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM have been changed from "No" to "Intense heat". In this production example, the notice by the balloon of the characters "super heat" of the navigation character YM is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice of. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the second decorative pattern. The conversation image CI1 of the lord is also overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the chance-up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2. Then, as a continuation of the conversation notice, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 16 (10) is displayed is displayed together with the character of the grandfather. The conversation image CI2 of this grandfather is a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a chance-up notice that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative pattern is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather. Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. Further, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is partially overlapped by the balloon of the navigation character YM and the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the marker MRK that has reached the second checkpoint CP2 is in a standby state.

After that, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B7). By operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B7), the player may be able to see the effect according to the operation.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 32 (B8) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses. At the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B8), the navigation character notice has ended, and the balloon of the navigation character YM has been deleted. After that, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B9), as shown in FIG. 32 (B10), in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Instead, the words "It's intense heat" may be displayed. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. Further, in this production example, the display mode of the outer frame of the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is a display mode emphasized by a thick golden line, and it is more likely to be a big hit than in the case of the normal display mode of the outer frame. Is being notified. In addition, in the chance-up meter CMT, in response to the change in the display mode of the outer frame of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather to gold, a balloon with the characters "chance-up gold frame" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK. , Notifies that the notice of chance up in the conversation notice has been made. The marker MRK is waiting at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but the marker MRK may proceed without waiting. If the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated within the operation valid period, the old man's conversation image CI2 may or may not be displayed. When the old man's conversation image CI2 is not displayed, it is not necessary to notify that the chance up notice has occurred in the chance up meter CMT, or it may be notified, or only a part thereof may be notified. (For example, displaying only the characters "UP").

The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (B11) shows how the position of the balloon has changed. At this time, the balloon overlaps with the grandfather's conversation image CI2, and the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The position of the balloon may not change from the position shown in FIG. 32 (B10), or the display position of the balloon may be the position shown in FIG. 32 (B11) from the beginning.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B12), in the chance-up meter CMT, as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT changes, the hidden character "UP" appears. The appearance is shown. This shows the history of the occurrence of a chance-up notice. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the balloon displayed on the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the conversation notice is also completed. The display of the balloon may be deleted at the timing when the conversation notice ends, or may be deleted after the conversation notice ends. Further, the conversation notice may end after the display of the balloon is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B13), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is in the reach state in the “decoration 7”. At this time, the marker MRK of the chance-up meter CMT has reached the final point, and it is shown that the production by the chance-up meter CMT is completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B14), the reach effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance up meter CMT is erased. The timing at which the reach effect is started and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is erased may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may be erased after the reach effect is started. The reach effect may be started after the upmeter CMT is erased.

In addition, although the production by the chance up meter CMT in this production example is terminated when it reaches the reach state, the production may continue even if it is in the reach state, and it continues even if it shifts to the super reach state. You may do so. Further, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, it may be continuously performed until the symbol variation display is completed. At this time, for example, when the super reach starts, an effect by the chance up meter CMT, which is different from the effect by the chance up meter CMT that is continuously being executed, may be started. Further, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may or may not always start during the normal symbol variation display. Further, in the normal symbol variation display, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may or may not start, but in the reach effect, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may always start. Further, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is possible, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be started when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. In this case, for example, a display to that effect may be displayed so that the player can recognize it.

FIG. 33 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 33, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to 33 (A5), the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, but it is shown that the effect is erased in the middle.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GM, and the current position is used depending on the position. The progress of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur, but at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (A1), the Sabohani character SBH is the first. Although the 1st checkpoint CP1 and the 2nd checkpoint CP2 were reached respectively, the display of the 1st checkpoint CP1 and the 2nd checkpoint CP2 was erased because the notice of the chance up corresponding to them did not occur. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1) shows that the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2) displays a cut-in indicating that the character of the grandfather holding the energy drink is speaking "fight". The display of this cut-in is, for example, an effect of promoting the super reach being executed, and when this cut-in is displayed, it is more likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. Further, the display of this cut-in may be a premier notice, and when it is displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. Also, when this cut-in is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the production by the chance up meter CMT is completed because the notice that the chance up is likely to be a big hit is given rather than the notice of the chance up related to the chance up meter CMT is given. There is. The display of this cut-in is a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance-up that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the production by the chance up meter CMT ends before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that it is shown that the production by the chance up meter CMT ends before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint. In this production example, the chance-up meter CMT may always end in the middle, or the chance-up meter CMT may or may not end in the middle. At this time, for example, the content of the subsequent effect may be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle or does not end, or the same content may be performed. .. Further, the case where the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle. In addition, the reliability of the jackpot when the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle is the same as when the chance up notice occurs at all the checkpoints and the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle. It may be. Alternatively, the case where the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed together with the character display of "blow" to show that the button effect is started. This button effect is also a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance up related to the chance up meter CMT.

After that, the operation valid period is started, and when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. 33 (A4), "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol. Is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" will be a big hit. In the case of loss, as shown in FIG. 33 (A4'), "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle pattern, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. Will be done.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A5), the animation display of the duel scene fades in, and it is shown that the hero's lord has defeated the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. ..

FIG. 33 (A2a) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 33 (A1). Specifically, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2a) displays a cut-in indicating that the princess character is saying, "I will rewrite the reach." The display of this cut-in is, for example, a notice for improving the reliability of the jackpot by assuming that the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display is produced with other contents. When this cut-in display is made, the chance up meter CMT is erased. The display of this cut-in is also a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance-up that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT. As described above, also in this production example, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that the chance-up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2a), the variable icon h0 is also erased, but it may not be erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a), the state after the reach effect is rewritten is shown. Specifically, in FIG. 33 (A3a), the erased chance-up meter CMT is displayed again. In this chance-up meter CMT, the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 appear, and they are red respectively. In addition to being marked with, the characters "UP" are displayed. That is, in reality, the notice of chance up corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1 and the notice of chance up corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 were not given, but both are expressed as if they were done and a big hit. It is shown that the reliability of is improving.

FIG. 33 (A3a'-1) shows another production example following FIG. 33 (A2a). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-1), it is shown that the SP swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach described above with reference to FIG. 30 (30b) instead of the swordsman reach. SP Swordsman Reach is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than Swordsman Reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-1), the chance to show that the child panda cheering party KPD is cheering at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3 is increased. A notice is displayed to inform that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach jackpot has increased dramatically. The child panda cheering party KPD may or may not appear. Further, in FIG. 33 (A3a'-1), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but the display mode thereof is the same as the display mode before the chance up meter CMT is erased.

FIG. 33 (A3a'-2) is an effect example following FIG. 33 (A2a), and shows an effect example different from that of FIG. 33 (A3a'-1). In the production example shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-2), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from that in FIG. 33 (A3a'-1). That is, the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-2) is a chance-up meter different from the chance-up meter CMT before the cut-in of the princess character is displayed. As shown in 30 (30b) and described above, it is a chance-up meter CMT displayed when the swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach. That is, according to the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-2), it is shown that the Copanda cheering party KPD appeared at the fourth checkpoint CP4 that passed after shifting to the SP swordsman reach. Therefore, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the Copanda cheering party KPD is displayed, indicating that the chance up is announced. When the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the Sabohani character SBH may be located at the start point SP and the SP swordsman reach may start from the beginning, or the Sabohani character SBH may be the final point GP. It may be located in and start from the end of the SP swordsman reach.

FIG. 33 (A3a ″) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 33 (A2a). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a ″) shows how the full rotation reach starts. The full rotation reach is a reach in which a big hit is confirmed, and since it is not necessary to give the player a feeling of expectation any more, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed again, but FIG. ), The chance up meter CMT may be displayed again. In this case, it can be said that it is notified that the jackpot will be confirmed when the full rotation reach starts, so the position of the Sabohani character SBH is changed to the final point GP without passing through the 5th checkpoint CP5. , The placard may be labeled with a "V" indicating that it will be a big hit. The timing at which the full rotation reach starts and the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP may be the same, or the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP after the full rotation reach starts. Alternatively, the full rotation reach may be started after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Further, the timing at which the full rotation reach starts and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT displays again may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may display again after the full rotation reach starts. Then, the full rotation reach may be started after the chance up meter CMT is displayed again.

33 (A2b) to 33 (A3b) show another production example following FIG. 33 (A1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2b), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased. After that, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and they overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. It should be noted that the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and the overlapping effects on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 are completed. Then, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed again.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 33 (B1) to 33 (B4), the production by the chance up meter CMT was started, but the production by the chance up meter CMT was completed because the result of the loss was displayed in the middle. It is shown.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GM, and the current position is used depending on the position. The progress of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur, but at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (B1), the Sabohani character SBH is the first. Although the 1st checkpoint CP1 was reached, the red marking and "UP" were not displayed on the 1st checkpoint CP1 because the corresponding chance-up notice did not occur. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1) shows that the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the first checkpoint CP1.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B2), the cut-in image CI5 of the swordsman is displayed, indicating that there is a high possibility of loss. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B3), it is notified that the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, resulting in a loss. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT displays that the Sabohani character SBH is lost and shows a disappointing expression. Here, as shown in FIG. 33 (B3'), although "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol and it is notified that the character will be lost, the character SBH of Sabohani is finally set in the chance up meter CMT. The state of proceeding as it is toward the point GP may be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (B4), the first decorative symbol is shaken and changed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", and then stopped and displayed.

FIG. 34 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 34, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 34 (A1) to 34 (A5), the chance-up meter CMT is temporarily erased during the production by the chance-up meter CMT, and then displayed again.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. The character SBH of Sabohani is shown to have started moving from the starting point SP.

After that, FIG. 34 (A2) shows that the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light emission of the light guide plate IL is a notice of an increase in chance corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1. At this time, the decorative pattern display device 208 darkens the display to make the pattern on the light guide plate IL easier to see. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A3), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene whose display was interrupted due to the darkening display is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the chance up meter CMT is also restarted. Further, in the chance-up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters "chance-up illumination emission" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to notify that the chance-up notice has been given. The light emitting of the light guide plate IL continues.

FIG. 34 (A4) shows that the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is finished and the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is continued. In addition, the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown.

FIG. 34 (A5) shows how the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move.

In this production example, the light emitting of the light guide plate IL was performed as a notice of chance up in the reach production, but the effect is not limited to the above. For example, the character SBH of Sabohani is at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT. It may be applied in the production of reaching and inciting whether it is a big hit or a loss. In addition to the production that incites whether it is a big hit or a loss, it is also applied in the production that incites whether it will be a big hit or something else (for example, the production develops or a loss is displayed). You may. Even in such a case, the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily erased during the production by the light emission of the light guide plate IL.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 34 (B1) to 34 (B6) show how the chance up meter CMT is displayed or erased by the operation of the player.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen, and moves toward the right side. Is shown, and it is shown that a notice of chance up is being made. Further, in this production example, a guidance display is performed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Specifically, in this guidance display, an icon indicating the up key and the down key of the operation key unit 137 and the character "Hide the meter by operating the arrow keys" are displayed, and the player can display the operation key unit 137. It is displayed that the chance up meter CMT can be hidden by operating the up key or the down key. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the swordsman reach starts, but it may be displayed by a display operation by the player after the swordsman reach starts.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B2), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and a notice is given by displaying the character of chance up. Is being notified.

Then, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B3), the chance up meter CMT is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 34 (B4). .. After that, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B5), the chance up meter CMT is displayed again as shown in FIG. 34 (B6). At this time, the character SBH of Sabohani is in the position where it should be located when the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed. In this case, for example, the balloon shown in FIG. 34 (B2) may not be displayed, and the effect of the chance up meter CMT may be restarted from a good point. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (B6'), when the effect between the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 is omitted and the chance up meter CMT display is resumed, the Sabohani character SBH May be located in front of the second checkpoint CP2 and wait at that position until the timing corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 is given. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIGS. 34 (B6) and 34 (B6'), the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red due to the appearance of the Boy character BOY, and the "UP" is displayed. The letters are displayed above it. At the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B6), the characters "UP" overlap with the Sabohani character SBH, making it difficult to see.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 34 (B1) to 34 (B6), the display / non-display of the chance up meter CMT can be switched as many times as necessary according to the operation of the player. After being displayed and then hidden by the player's operation, the chance-up meter CMT may not be displayed until the next production by the chance-up meter CMT is performed.

Further, in this production example, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be displayed first, but as shown in FIG. 34 (B4), for example, the chance up meter CMT is first hidden. It may be configured to be in the state of being.

FIG. 35 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter. FIG. 35 shows an example of an effect in which a plurality of chance up meters are displayed.

In FIG. 35, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 35 (A1) to 35 (A2) show how the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb display the same contents.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A1), two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the variable icon h0 in between. In this production example, the chance up meter arranged on the left side is referred to as a first chance up meter CMTa, and the chance up meter arranged on the right side is referred to as a second chance up meter CMTb. The chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb are shown in FIG. 31 (2f) and have the same display mode as those described above. In the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (A1), the first checkpoints CP1a and CP1b, the second checkpoints CP2a and CP2b and the third checkpoints CP3a and CP3b are arranged, respectively. These first checkpoints CP1a (CP1b) to third checkpoints CP3a (CP3b) are represented by question marks to give a sense of expectation that a notice of chance up will be given. Here, the checkpoint indicated by the first chance-up meter CMTa and the checkpoint indicated by the second chance-up meter CMTb are intended for the same chance-up notice. In this production example, two chance up meters are displayed, but only one may be displayed. For example, two chance up meters may be displayed as compared with the case where only one chance up meter is displayed. The case where it is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit, or the ease of being a big hit (reliability) may be the same. Further, when the effect is performed by the chance up meter, two chance up meters may be displayed without fail. Further, three or more chance up meters may be displayed. Further, in this production example, the traveling speeds of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are the same, but they may be different. For example, the traveling speed of the second chance up meter CMTb is higher. However, it may be faster than the traveling speed of the first chance up meter CMTa.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2), in response to the fact that the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first checkpoints CP1a and CP1b and the boy character BOY appears, " A balloon with the words "Chance up BOY passed" is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and it is notified that the chance up notice has been given by the character display.

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (A2'), the first chance-up meter CMTa displays the characters "Chance-up BOY passage" in the balloon, and the reliability of the balloon of the second chance-up meter CMTb. May be displayed to notify the reliability of the jackpot due to the appearance of the character BOY of the balloon.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (A2 ″), when the appearance of the Boy character BOY and the appearance of the Boy character BOY singing a speech bubble are displayed as a rare notice, the first chance. The characters "Chance Up BOY Passed" are displayed on the balloon of the upmeter CMTa, and the characters "Chance Up Nose" indicating that a rare notice has occurred are displayed on the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb. May be good.

In this production example, the traveling speeds of the markers MRKa and MRKb are the same for the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but they may proceed at different speeds. In addition, in this production example, the first chance up meter CM
Although the balloon is displayed on both Ta and the second chance up meter CMTb, only one of them may be displayed.

35 (A2a-1) to 35 (A2a-2) show another production example following FIG. 35 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2a-1) following FIG. 35 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb and the boy character BOY appears. Then, a balloon with the characters "Chance Up BOY Passing" is displayed near the markers MRKa and MRKb on each of the 1st chance up meter CMTa and the 2nd chance up meter CMTb, and the character display gives a notice of chance up. It is informed that it has been done.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2a-2), only the first chance up meter CMTa is erased from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and the second chance up meter CMTa is erased. Only CMTb is displayed. In this way, after displaying the two chance up meters, one of them may be erased. For example, if one of the two chance up meters is erased, it is not erased. It may be more likely to be a big hit than it is, or it may be more likely to be a big hit when it is not erased. Further, the reliability may differ depending on the erased chance up meter. Also, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

35 (A2b-1) to 35 (A2b-2) show still another production example following FIG. 35 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2b-1) following FIG. 35 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb, and the boy character BOY appears. Then, a balloon with the characters "Chance Up BOY Passing" is displayed near the markers MRKa and MRKb on each of the 1st chance up meter CMTa and the 2nd chance up meter CMTb, and the character display gives a notice of chance up. It is informed that it has been done. At this time, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed to a thick red line, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is further improved. That is, in the display mode of the balloon of the first chance up meter CMTa and the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is the display of the notice with higher reliability of the jackpot. It can be said to be an aspect. It should be noted that the change in the display mode of the balloon may be performed by only one of the two chance up meters, or may be performed by both.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2b-2), the first chance up meter CMTa displaying a balloon having a low reliability from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb. Only the second chance up meter CMTb, which is erased and displays a highly reliable balloon, is displayed. In this way, after displaying the two chance-up meters, the display of the chance-up meter on which the highly reliable balloon is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance-up meter may be erased. Further, after displaying the two chance-up meters, the display of the chance-up meter on which the balloon with low reliability is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance-up meter may be erased. Alternatively, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 35 (B1) to 35 (B2) show how the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance-up notices.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side with the variable icon h0 in between, at the bottom of the display screen. Of the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (B1), the first chance-up meter CMTa has three checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1a, second checkpoint CP2a, third checkpoint CP3a). Have been placed. On the other hand, in the second chance up meter CMTb, two checkpoints (fourth checkpoint CP4b and fifth checkpoint CP5b) are arranged, and the fourth checkpoint CP4b and the fifth checkpoint CP5b are the first checkpoints. The timing of the chance-up notice and start corresponding to any of CP1a to the third checkpoint CP3a is different. In this production example, when the arrival timings of the markers MRKa and MRKb of the first checkpoint CP1a, the second checkpoint CP2a, the third checkpoint CP3a, the fourth checkpoint CP4b, and the fifth checkpoint CP5b are arranged in chronological order. , 1st checkpoint CP1a, 4th checkpoint CP4b, 2nd checkpoint CP2a, 5th checkpoint CP5b, 3rd checkpoint CP3a.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B2), after the marker MRKa of the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the first checkpoint CP1a and the character BOY of the boy appears, the marker of the second chance up meter CMTb It is shown that the MRKb has reached the fourth checkpoint CP4b and the Boy character BOY has begun humming. In response to this, the second chance-up meter CMTb displays a balloon with the characters "chance-up humming" in the vicinity of the marker MRKb, informing that the chance-up notice has been given.

In this production example, both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. In this case, for example, if one of the first chance-up meter CMTa and the second chance-up meter CMTb is not displayed, the chance-up notice corresponding to the checkpoint in the non-displayed chance-up meter is given. It may not be performed, or a chance-up notice corresponding to a checkpoint on a chance-up meter that is not displayed may be given. Further, there may be a checkpoint that does not notify when one of the first chance-up meter CMTa and the second chance-up meter CMTb is not displayed, or even if the checkpoint is notified. Good.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 35 (C1) to 35 (C4) show how the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance-up notices.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side with the variable icon h0 in between, at the bottom of the display screen. Of the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the second chance-up meter CMTa is a meter that shows the progress of the entire reach effect, and one checkpoint (development point CPA) is arranged. Has been done. This development point CPA indicates the points at which the reach production may develop. On the other hand, the first chance up meter CMTa indicates the period from the start point to the checkpoint, the period from the checkpoint to the checkpoint, or the period from the checkpoint to the final point in the second chance up meter CMTb. When the period in the second chance up meter CMTb is changed, the first chance up meter CMTa is also changed to the display mode corresponding to the changed period. In this production example, the period from the start point SP to the development point CPA in the second chance up meter CMTb is referred to as the first period, and the period from the development point CPA to the final point GP is referred to as the second period. Further, in this production example, the display modes of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are different, and the first chance up meter CMTa is the same as that shown in FIG. 31 (2f) and described above. The second chance up meter CMTb has a display mode similar to that shown in FIG. 29 (2) and described above. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa has a display mode corresponding to the first period, and three checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1, second checkpoint CP2, The third checkpoint CP3) is arranged, and it is shown that a notice of chance up may occur when the marker MRK reaches each checkpoint. Further, the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa and the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMTb are also starting points.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C2), it is shown that the button effect is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (C2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation valid period started. In addition, on the first chance-up meter CMTa, the characters "UP" indicating that a chance-up notice has occurred at the first checkpoint CP1 are displayed, and the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2. It is shown. The second checkpoint CP2 corresponds to, for example, a notice of a certain chance up that appears as a result of the button effect. In addition, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the Sabohani character SBH is progressing toward the development point CPA.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C3), the marker MRK reaches the final point at the first checkpoint CP1 and the Sabohani character SBH reaches the development point CPA at the second chance up meter CMTb. , It is shown that the cut-in is displayed to show that the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach". At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is erased. When the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the final point, the first chance up meter CMTa may not be erased, only the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased, or the first chance up meter CMTb may be erased. Both the meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C4), a cut-in image of the panda is displayed and a state of shifting to the SP swordsman reach is shown. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second period, and two checkpoints (fourth checkpoint CP4 and fifth checkpoint CP5) are arranged, and each check is performed. It has been shown that a chance-up notice may occur when the marker MRK reaches the point. In addition, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is proceeding from the development point CPA to the final point GP.

FIG. 36 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 36 (A1) to 36 (A7) show that the chance-up meter CMT notifies the timing at which the pseudo-ream occurs and the number of times the pseudo-ream occurs during the execution of the pseudo-ream effect. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A1), the characters "Secure Echigoya" are displayed, and it is shown that the chasing effect as an example of the pseudo-continuous effect is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A2), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, a chance-up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged in this chance-up meter CMT. , It is informed that pseudo-ream may occur at each checkpoint. Then, in this chance up meter CMT, it is shown that the marker MRK has reached the first checkpoint CP1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (A3), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. The state is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A4), it is shown that the first decorative symbol variation display (that is, the second variation display of the decorative symbol) is performed by the first pseudo-ream. ..

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A5), although the unscrupulous merchant missed it, it is shown that the Senryobako is recovered and the product develops into reach. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2, and the display of the second checkpoint CP2 is indicated by the letter "R" indicating that the question mark has changed to the reach state. It has switched to the display. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect is terminated in the middle, and as shown in FIG. 36 (A6), the display of the pseudo-continuous effect fades out together with the chance up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (A7), when the reach effect is started, the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is left in the first UI unit 280. The frame is out below the display area, and the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is erased when the fade-out of the display of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed. In this way, it may be configured so that the chance up meter CMT can reach the end is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the checkpoint is completed in the middle. In addition, the susceptibility to big hits may differ depending on the checkpoint reached.

Further, as an example of the effect of hiding the chance up meter CMT, it may be performed as shown in FIGS. 36 (A6a-1) to (A6a-2). Specifically, in FIG. 36 (A5), when the pseudo-continuous production is terminated in the middle, as shown in FIGS. 36 (A6a-1) to (A6a-2), the chance-up meter CMT The chance up meter CMT may be hidden by frame-out outside the display screen.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 36 (B1) to 36 (B7) show that the chance up meter CMT is used between the start of the reach production and the development of the super reach. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (B1), it is shown that the reach effect of “decoration 7” has been changed to reach. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Then, in this effect example, when the reach effect is started, the chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the effect using the chance up meter CMT is performed. The effect using this chance up meter CMT is performed until the shift to the super reach or the loss is displayed without shifting to the super reach. Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B1), when the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 in the reach production, a notice of chance up corresponding to each checkpoint is given. Is being performed, and the characters "UP" to that effect are displayed. Further, the chance up meter CMT overlaps a part of the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (B2), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and in the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is left below the display area. At the same time as the frame is out, it is shown that the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third checkpoint CP3. The chance-up meter CMT overlaps the left symbol of the first decorative symbol after movement, and the left symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (B3), the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to see. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. Further, in this production example, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. ing. In this production example, the marker MRK continues to progress while the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd are operating, but the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board The progress of the marker MRK may be stopped while the behavioral object 224Gd is operating. Further, the chance up meter CMT may be hidden while the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operating. Further, in the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 36 (B3), a balloon with the characters "chance-up large board behavior" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior role. It is informing that the notice of chance up by the thing 224Gd has been made.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the chance up meter CMT overlaps the light emitting portion of the light guide plate IL.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 36 (B6), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are initially set. Return to position. At the timing when the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is finished, the marker MRK has reached the final point in the chance up meter CMT, but the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is finished after the marker MRK reaches the final point. Alternatively, the marker MRK may reach the final point after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Further, in this production example, after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT, and the left of the first decorative symbol. The design overlaps with the chance up meter CMT, but before the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the 1st decorative symbol is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first is After the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the 1st decorative symbol is arranged on the back side of the chance up meter CMT, and the 1st decorative symbol is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT. You may do so. Further, the context of the first decorative symbol and the chance up meter CMT may not be changed before and after the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. The chance up meter CMT is erased after the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd have returned to the initial positions. After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (B7), it develops into super reach.

FIG. 37 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 37 (A1) to 37 (A5), another production unrelated to the chance-up meter CMT overlaps with the chance-up meter CMT while the production using the chance-up meter CMT is being executed. It is shown how it is done. Here, another effect may overlap only a part of the chance up meter CMT, or another effect may overlap the entire chance up meter CMT.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the progress of the current reach effect depends on the position. The situation is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (A1), the marker MRK becomes the first checkpoint CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding notice of chance up occurs, and at the first checkpoint CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A2), the treasure chest BX is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, the chance-up meter CMT is more difficult to see than the case where the treasure box BX does not overlap with the chance-up meter CMT. The treasure chest BX is a notice production that has nothing to do with the chance up notice corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, the marker MRK does not stop even while the treasure box BX is displayed, and continues to progress.

In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A3), when the marker MRK reaches the second checkpoint CP2, a corresponding chance-up notice is generated, and the second checkpoint CP2 notifies that fact. Is displayed. The treasure chest BX still overlaps with the chance up meter CMT.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A4), the treasure chest BX is opened, and the characters "extreme heat" appear from the inside. This character display of "super heat" is also a notice production that has nothing to do with the notice of chance up corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, it may be a notice of chance up corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (A5), the treasure chest BX displayed overlapping with the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the chance up meter CMT becomes easily visible.

FIG. 37 (B1) shows how other effects unrelated to the chance-up meter CMT are overlapped with the chance-up meter CMT during the execution of the effect using the chance-up meter CMT. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (B1), the wipe is made so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT during the execution of the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter CMT. A screen WP is arranged, and it is shown that a simultaneous effect is being performed on this wipe screen WP. Here, the simultaneous production means, for example, using an RTC (Real Time Clock) as a timekeeping means or a built-in timer, the same model of pachinko machine 100 mounted on the same game island, and the same production content is the same. It is a production performed at the timing. The wipe screen WP is displayed, for example, when the simultaneous effect starts, and is erased when the simultaneous effect ends. Further, the wipe screen WP may be displayed even when an effect other than the simultaneous effect is performed.

FIGS. 37 (C1) to 37 (C2) show how an error display is displayed during the execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT.

The decorative pattern display device shown in FIG. 37 (C1) shows that the display device has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the progress of the current reach effect depends on the position. The situation is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (C1), the marker MRK becomes the first checkpoint CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding notice of chance up occurs, and at the first checkpoint CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, for example, a radio wave detection provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 indicates that a radio device such as a transceiver outputs a strong radio wave that causes fluctuations in the signal voltage of the pachinko machine 100. When it is detected by means, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2), an error display is performed by displaying the characters "Radio wave detected" to that effect. In the effect example shown in FIG. 37 (C2), this error display does not overlap with the chance up meter CMT and does not affect the visibility of the chance up meter CMT. This error display may be applied to other errors, for example, a ball removal error that occurs when it is detected that the lower plate 128 (see FIG. 1) is full, or a front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1). It can also be applied to a door opening error that occurs when it is detected that the door member has been opened, such as (see 1). Further, depending on the type of error, the error display may not be performed, or the error notification may be performed by voice or a lamp.

37 (C2a), FIG. (C2b) and FIG. (C2c) show other display examples of the error display. For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2a), the error display is a chance up meter CMT. It may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (C2b), a plurality of error displays can be displayed at the same time, and when an error occurs, the error is displayed vertically from the upper left side of the display screen. There is. In this case, for example, when the fourth error (error D) occurs, the fourth error is displayed so as to overlap the chance up meter CMT. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (C2c), it is shown that the error display is performed on the entire display screen. Specifically, it was detected by, for example, a magnetic force detecting means provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 that strong magnetism was emitted to the game board 200 (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko machine 100. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2c), an error display is performed over the entire display screen by displaying the characters "Magnetism detected" to that effect. As a result, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, and other effects are also hidden. When such an error is detected, the game may not proceed by not performing a part of the processing in the main control unit 300 until the power is cut off, for example, not performing the big hit determination. .. If the power is cut off while the error is displayed and the power supply is restored after that, the symbol fluctuation stop command is issued after the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display that was being executed when the power was cut off has elapsed. For example, "preparing" may be displayed over the entire display screen until it is output to the first sub-control unit 400.

FIGS. 37 (D1) to 37 (D2) show how the chance-up meter CMT overlaps with other display devices. In the production example shown in FIGS. 37 (D1) to 37 (D2), in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S replaces the family crest accessory 224E with the decorative symbol display device 208. It is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (D1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, a chance-up meter CMT is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is shown that the effect by the chance-up meter CMT is being performed. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the progress of the current reach effect depends on the position. The situation is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. 1st checkpoint CP1
~ When each of the third checkpoint CP3 is reached, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (D1), when the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1, A notice of corresponding chance up has occurred, and the character "UP" is displayed at the first checkpoint CP1 to notify the fact. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2. Further, on the sub-display device 208S, the characters "vs swordsman" indicating that the swordsman reach has been developed are displayed, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

FIG. 37 (D2) shows that the sub display device 208S moves upward along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display device 208S overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Has been done. At this time, at least a part of the chance-up meter CMT is overlapped with the sub-display device 208S, and the chance-up meter CMT is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the sub-display device 208S displays a cut-in image of the main character, who has a balloon with the characters "Game".

In this production example, the chance-up meter CMT is overlapped by the sub-display device 208S as an example of the display means, but the chance-up meter CMT may be overlapped by another display means. For example, a display means composed of a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, a 7-segment display, a dot matrix, a lamp, or the like can be applied.

Further, in this effect example, the chance-up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (E1), the chance-up meter CMT is displayed on the sub-display device 208S. It may be. Further, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

In this production example, an example in which the chance up meter CMT overlaps with another display has been described, but it is also applied to the case where the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with another display instead of the chance up meter CMT. can do.

FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an mode of change of the remaining time display meter in the button effect.

In FIG. 38, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 38 (A1) to 38 (A9), the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed by the navigation character YM and the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed in the conversation notice. Is shown to be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A1), the button effect by the navigation character YM is started, and a balloon including the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A2), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). The operation validity period in the button effect by the navigation character YM is, for example, 10 seconds.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38 (A3) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A3), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the button effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of this lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the conversation notice is updated. In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is composed of a button image 136a2 imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) a and a remaining time display meter MT2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the operation valid period in the conversation notice has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. On the other hand, in the button effect by the navigation character YM, since the operation valid period has started, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the effect corresponding to this may be performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather partially overlaps with the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM.

After that, the operation valid period in the conversation notice is started at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A5). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A5). The operation valid period of the button effect by the conversation notice is, for example, 5 seconds, which is shorter than the operation valid period of the button effect by the navigation character YM. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 38 (A5) to 38 (A7), the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is more than the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM decreases. The rate at which the gauge decreases is greater. In other words, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice decreases faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A8), as shown in FIG. 38 (A9), the old man's conversation image CI2 is replaced with the operation promotion notification image. The text "It's intense heat" may be displayed. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. On the other hand, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM on which the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 were displayed is "extreme heat".
It changes to the character display of, and informs that the reliability of the jackpot is considerably high. That is, in this production example, it is shown that a single production button operation is performed according to the button operation result for both the button production in the conversation notice and the button production by the navigation character YM. ing. In addition, the character display of "It's intense heat" displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather and the character display of "Intense heat" displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM are displayed even when the operation validity period has passed. However, it does not have to be displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A8), for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-1), the button started earlier. The production may be performed according to the operation result corresponding to the production. That is, in this production example, the button production by the navigation character YM was started before the button production in the conversation notice. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-1), the production button 136 in the button production by the navigation character YM. Only the production according to the operation of (chance button 136) (the character display of "super heat" in the balloon of the navigation character YM) is performed, and the production button 136 (chance button 136) in the button production by the conversation notice is performed. No production (displaying the characters "It's intense heat" displayed on the old man's conversation image CI2) is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-2), when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) for the second time, it is started later as shown in FIG. 28 (A9a-3). An effect is performed according to the operation result corresponding to the button effect. That is, the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) in the button effect by the conversation notice (the character display of "It's intense heat" in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather) is performed.

In this effect example, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated when the operation validity period is started in each of the two button effects, the button effect in which the gauge on the remaining time display meter decreases at a high speed is large. The effect may be performed according to the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136), or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) may be prioritized to produce a button with a small gauge decrease in the remaining time display meter. The effect may be performed according to the operation of the button 136).

Further, in this production example, the change speeds of the display modes of the two remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 are different. For example, until a certain time, the change of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the grandfather's notice image CI2 The speed is the same as the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the blowout of the navigation character YM, and the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 may be changed when a certain time is reached. ..

Further, in this production example, the operation valid period related to the grandfather's notice image CI2 is set to 5 seconds, but for example, the case of 5 seconds and the case of 10 seconds are prepared, and the remaining time display meter is prepared at the speed corresponding to each. The display mode of MT2 may be changed. That is, when the operation valid period is 10 seconds, the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM is the same. In this case, the case where the operation valid period related to the grandfather's notice image CI2 is selected to be 5 seconds may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the operation valid period is selected to be 10 seconds.

In addition, in this production example, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather whose extension was started later than the case where "super heat" was displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose production was displayed earlier is "super heat. Is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher, so that the notice display displayed later is more likely to be displayed at the time of the jackpot, and the notice display displayed later is the one that is displayed later. It may be possible to surprise the player by displaying the image while the attention level is relatively lowered. In addition, "It's intense heat" was displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather whose extension was started later than when "Intense heat" was displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose effect was displayed earlier. In the case, the reliability of the jackpot may be lower, or the reliability of the jackpot may be the same.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 38 (B1) to 38 (B11) show that both the timer advance effect and the effect using the chance up meter are performed at the same time.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 38 (B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current position is used depending on the position. The progress of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 38 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. It has been shown that when the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur, so that the player has a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B2), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the starting point SP.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, and the timer notice effect is started. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the start of the timer advance notice effect functions as a notice of increasing the chance. Further, "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B4), a balloon with the characters "chance up timer notice" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, indicating that the chance up notice has been given. I am informing you. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is counted down, and "09:17" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B4).

After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (B5), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and “08:81” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B6), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and “08:31” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B7), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the second checkpoint CP2. In this production example, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2, a notice of chance up (for example, occurrence of a cut-in) is given, and the second checkpoint CP2 is marked in red. At the same time, the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice, indicating the history of the notice. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and “04:14” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B8), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the third checkpoint CP3. On the other hand, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (B9), on the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, a character of "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed. According to this production example, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 started later is higher than the rate (speed) of the change in the display mode by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. It can be said that it is early. That is, the time from the start to the end of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 started later than the time from the start point SP to the final point GP of the Sabohani character SBH by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. Can be said to be faster.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the characters “chance up lever” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and the lever is displayed. It informs that the notice by the production has started. The display of the lever image 136Va in this lever effect is a notice of chance up displayed in response to reaching the third checkpoint CP3, and at the same time, it is a notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown of the timer notice effect. .. That is, it can be said that the target of the notice of chance up shown in the effect of the chance up meter CMT and the object of the advance notice performed as a result of the timer advance notice are the same. Alternatively, it can be said that the notice of chance up when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the third checkpoint CP3 and the notice indicated by the character "attention" shown on the timer notice display TM1 are the same. The target of the chance-up notice shown in the production by the chance-up meter CMT and the target of the notice performed as a result of the timer notice production may be different. For example, in the production by the chance-up meter CMT, the third check The notice of chance up when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the point CP3 is the lever image 136Va, and the notice given as a result of the timer notice effect shows the display mode of the appearing lever image 136Va with higher reliability. (For example, it may change from red to gold).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing another example of the button effect step by step.

In FIG. 39, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (2), it is shown that the button effect is started. In this production example, six sets of operation promotion notification images including a combination of a button image and a remaining time display meter are displayed. Specifically, the first operation promotion notification image composed of the first button image 136a1 and the first remaining time display meter MT1 is arranged at the upper left of the display screen, and the second button image 136a2 and the second remaining time A second operation promotion notification image composed of the display meter MT2 is arranged in the upper center of the display screen, and a third operation promotion notification image composed of the third button image 136a3 and the third remaining time display meter MT3 is displayed on the display screen. The fourth operation promotion notification image, which is arranged in the upper right and consists of the fourth button image 136a4 and the fourth remaining time display meter MT4, is arranged in the lower right of the display screen, and the fifth button image 136a5 and the fifth remaining. A fifth operation promotion notification image composed of the time display meter MT5 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen, and a sixth operation promotion notification image composed of the sixth button image 136a6 and the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 is displayed on the display screen. It is located at the bottom right of. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts for any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (4), it is shown that the gauges of the first remaining time display meter MT1 to the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 are decreasing after the operation validity period is started. Has been done. In this production example, of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, the operation validity period for the first operation promotion notification image is the operation validity period for the other operation promotion notification images. It is shorter and the operation validity period elapses earlier. In this production example, the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image all have the same length of operation validity period. Therefore, the gauge of the first remaining time display meter MT1 decreases faster than the gauges of the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6.

After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (5), as shown in FIG. 39 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first operation promotion notification is given. The image is changed to the character KP of Copanda, and it is shown that the notice is being given. The second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image have not changed. That is, in this effect example, only one operation promotion notification image among the plurality of operation promotion notification images is changed by one operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). Further, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the first operation promotion notification image, the second operation promotion notification image, the third operation promotion notification image, the fourth operation promotion notification image, The display mode is changed one by one with priority given to the fifth operation promotion notification image and the sixth operation promotion notification image. The order of the operation promotion notification images that change the display mode is not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate. Further, the display mode of two or more operation promotion notification images may be changed by one operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

In this effect example, the remaining time corresponding to the first operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes with the highest priority when the first remaining time display meter MT1 (effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated). The gauge of the time display meter) decreases faster than the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6. For example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4a), the third remaining time display meter MT3 (effect button 136) is used. When the (chance button 136) is operated, the display mode changes with the third priority. The remaining time display meter corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image) is reduced by the first remaining time display meter MT1. It may be faster or slower than other remaining time display meters MT1, MT2, MT4, MT5, MT6 including the above. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4b), when the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 (effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the priority for changing the display mode is the lowest. The gauge of the remaining time display meter) corresponding to the operation promotion notification image of 6) may decrease faster or slower than the other remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5. Further, the remaining time display meter for accelerating the decrease of the gauge is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set to an appropriate one.

Further, in this effect example, the button images 136a to 136a6 are configured in each of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, but the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth For any one or two or more of the operation promotion notification images, another image may be displayed instead of the button image. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4c), as an image constituting the sixth operation promotion notification image, a sixth button image 136a6 is used instead of the sixth button image 136a6 to promote the operation of the effect lever 136V. The lever image 136Va6 of the above may be displayed. In this case, any of the remaining time display meters of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image may have the same rate at which the gauge decreases, and as shown in FIG. 39 (4c), the sixth operation promotion notification image. The speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT6 corresponding to the sixth operation promotion notification image constituting the lever image 136Va6 of the above decreases is made faster than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5 corresponding to other operation promotion notification images. It may be slowed down. With this configuration, for example, when the button effect is started and the display as shown in FIG. 39 (4c) is performed, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated five times and then the effect lever 136V is operated once. It may be possible to facilitate the operation.

Further, in this effect example, the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter in any one of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image decreases is displayed as the remaining time in the other operation promotion notification image. Although it is made different from the meter, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4d), there may be two or more different gauges of the remaining time display meter. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (4d), the decreasing speed of the gauges of the remaining time display meters MT3 and MT5 of the third operation promotion notification image and the fifth operation promotion notification image is the other operation promotion notification. The fifth remaining time display meter MT1, MT2, MT4, MT6 of the image is different from the third operation promotion notification image corresponding to the fifth operation promotion notification image than the third remaining time display meter MT3 corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image. The remaining time display meter MT5 may decrease the gauge at a higher speed.

FIG. 40 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 40, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 40 (A1) to 40 (A6) show that a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed at the same time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, FIG. 40 (A1) shows that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Specifically, when the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 frame in from the right side of the display area, the timer advance notice effects are started respectively. "10:00" is displayed on both timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2, suggesting that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this production example, as will be described later, the countdown speed of the timer display on one timer notice display is faster than the countdown speed of the timer display on the other timer notice display, so that the time until the countdown is completed is faster. It's different. In this production example, of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, the one displayed above is referred to as the first timer notice display TM1, and the one displayed below is referred to as the second timer notice display TM2. is there.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A2), it is shown that the frame-in of the two timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. After that, each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 starts the timer display countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A3), it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed on each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2. In this production example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that of the first timer notice display TM1. The first timer notice display TM1 counts down according to the actual passage of time, but the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that. At the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A3), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is "09:73", and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is "06:73". It has become. The countdown speed is not limited to the above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 is set to a speed that matches the passage of the actual time. The countdown speed of the timer advance notice display TM2 of 1 may be slower than the countdown speed of the second timer advance notice display TM2.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is set to "00:00" and the countdown is completed. On the other hand, the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is "06:00", that is, the state when 4 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer notice display started is shown. Can be done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (A5), in the second timer notice display TM2, the character "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed instead of the timer display. On the other hand, the countdown of the first timer notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display is "05:87" at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A5). After that, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 may be given. After the countdown is completed, the second timer notice display TM2 is deleted by, for example, frame-out.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A6), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is set to "00:00" and the countdown is completed. After that, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 may be given. After that, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased by, for example, frame-out after the countdown is completed.

In this production example, the case where the two timer notice effects are started at the same time has been described, but the two timer notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer notice effect started earlier may be used. The countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display may be faster or slower than the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 40 (B1) to 40 (B4), a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed at the same time, and the time until the countdown is completed is added to one of the timer advance notice effects. Shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, FIG. 40 (B1) shows that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Specifically, when the timer notice display (first timer notice display TM1 and second timer notice display TM2) is framed in from the right side of the display area, the timer notice effect is started respectively. "10:00" is displayed on both timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2, suggesting that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this production example, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display is the same.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B2), it is shown that the frame-in of the two timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. After that, each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 starts the timer display countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B3), it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed on each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2. Both the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 count down according to the lapse of the actual time. At the timing shown in FIG. 40 (B3), both the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are "09:73". The countdown speed is not limited to the above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed may be slower or faster than the actual passage of time. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B3), it is shown that the timer addition effect is performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time to be added is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (B4), the timer display on the first timer notice display TM1 is updated to "19:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1. The state is shown. At this time, since the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is not added, the difference of 10 seconds between the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2. Is occurring. Therefore, although the two timer advance notice effects have been started, the timing at which the countdown ends is different because the time is added to one of the timer displays in the middle.

In this production example, the time is added to the timer display of one of the two timer notice displays, but the time may be shortened (subtracted) or during the execution of the timer notice effect. The countdown of either one of the timer displays may be paused so that the time until the countdown is completed is different.

Further, in this effect example, the case where the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time has been described, but the two timer advance notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer advance notice started earlier may be started. The time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display related to the effect, and after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice display started later is completed, the timer notice effect started earlier is added. The countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display may be completed. In addition, the time is shortened with respect to the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later, and before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. In addition, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later may be completed.

Further, in this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed while the two timer notice effects are being performed, the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display related to one of the timer notice effects. However, by adding time (or shortening the time, pausing the countdown, etc.) to the timer display in the timer notice display related to any timer notice effect, the display mode of any timer notice display can be changed. You may change it.

In addition, after the two timer advance notice effects are started, two timer addition effects (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) corresponding to each timer advance notice effect are performed, whereby the timer advance notice related to the timer advance notice effect is performed. The time may be added to the timer display in the display for each of them.

Further, after the two timer advance notice effects are started, three timer addition effects (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) are performed, for example, for one of the two timer advance notice effects. The timer display may be changed by two timer addition effects or the like, and the timer display may be changed by the remaining one timer addition effect or the like with respect to the other timer advance effect. Further, three timer addition effects and the like are performed, and for example, the timer display may be changed only by two of the three timer addition effects and the like, or only by one of the three timer addition effects and the like. The timer display may be changed, or the timer display may not be changed by any of the three timer addition effects.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 40 (C1) to 40 (C4), in the effect of urging the operation of any of the plurality of operating means, the remaining time display timer indicating the operation valid period for each of the plurality of operating means is set. The state of being displayed is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C1), the button effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are displayed side by side. Corresponding to the left door image DRL, the left key image 137aL imitating the left key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping with the left door image DRL, and below the left key image 137aL. , The remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed. Also, corresponding to the right door image DRR,
The right key image 137aR imitating the right key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping with the right door image DRR, and the remaining time display meter MT2 is displayed below the right key image 137aR. ing. After that, the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 is started, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 by the player can be accepted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C2), the gauges of the remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 corresponding to the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are reduced after the operation validity period is started. The situation is shown. In this production example, the operation valid period of the right key corresponding to the right door image DRR is shorter than the operation valid period of the left key corresponding to the left door image DRL, so that the operation valid period elapses earlier. It has become. Therefore, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 corresponding to the right door image DRR decreases faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 corresponding to the left door image DRL.

FIG. 40 (C3) shows a state in which the left key is operated by the player to select the left door image DRL. Specifically, the left door image DRL is moved to the center of the display screen and enlarged and displayed, and the left key image 137aL and the remaining time display meter MT1 are erased. Further, the right door image DRR is erased together with the right key image 137aR and the remaining time display meter MT2. As a result, it is notified that the left door image DRL has been selected.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (C4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the door of the left door image DRL opens, and shows how the replay symbol RP appears. As a result, for example, it is foretold that a pseudo-ream will be performed.

On the other hand, in the case shown in FIG. 40 (C2), when the right key is operated to select the right door image DRR, as shown in FIG. 40 (C4a), the decorative symbol display device 208 has the right door image. The door of DRR may open and a pine pattern CC may appear. The word "Gekiatsu" is added to this pine pattern CC, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot has increased dramatically.

As described above, in this production example, when the one with the faster gauge decrease is selected from the two remaining time display meters, the notice display with higher reliability is performed, but eventually. You may select to display the same display. Further, when the one with the slower gauge decrease is selected from the two remaining time display meters, the notice display with higher reliability may be performed.

Further, in this production example, the operation valid period of the left door image DRL is shorter than the operation valid period of the right door image DRR, but the length of the operation valid period may be the same. For example, even if the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 of the right door image DRR becomes 0, wait until the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 of the left door image DRL becomes 0, and operate the right key. It may be enabled, or the right key operation may be disabled while waiting.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 41, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 41 (A1) to 41 (A12) show that the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and the hold icon h11 is displayed.
In the second hold number display, "1" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size (default display size), and when the timer notice effect is started and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it is displayed in a small size. .. Here, when the countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started, the size may be at least small. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 is large before the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in a size, may be displayed in another size, or may be displayed in a different display mode itself.

In the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (A3), when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are left, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also decorated. It is changed to substantially the center of the symbol display device 208. At this time, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. It should be noted that the first decorative symbol may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 which is enlarged and displayed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the enlarged display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the enlarged display animation is being performed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the size of the timer display portion may not change, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged. Further, in this production example, when the timer display becomes "03:00", the timer notice display TM1 is always enlarged and displayed, but it may not be enlarged. For example, the timer notice may not be displayed. When the display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be easier to win a big hit than when the display TM1 is not enlarged. Further, in this effect example, the display position is changed when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the display position may not be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A4) to 41 (A7), the countdown in the enlarged timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes "0:00". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to see due to the enlarged timer notice display TM1. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 41 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 instead of the timer display calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed. The characters "attention" are enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notice display TM1. After the timer display becomes "00:00", the character "attention" may not be displayed, or no effect may be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). The timer notice display TM1 may be deleted as it is without being reduced and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (A10), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying that the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A11), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 41 (A12), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is notified that the pseudo-ream is executed.

In this effect example, in the timer notice effect, when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the timer notice display TM1 is reduced. It may be displayed, the color of the frame may be changed, the color of the timer display (numerical part) may be changed, the shape of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer notice may be changed. The orientation of the display TM1 may be changed (for example, changed from landscape to portrait), the timer notice display TM1 may be rotated, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer may be changed. Other elements such as characters and symbols may be added to the notice display TM1, the time may be added to the timer display, the time may be shortened to the timer display, and the timer display may be added. The countdown of the timer may be stopped, the countdown speed of the timer display may be increased, the timer display may be counted up (rewind), or the timer notice display TM1 may be split and newly added. The timer notice display may be displayed, or when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed, these timer notice displays may be integrated and changed to one timer notice display.

Further, in this production example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to two sizes, a small size and a large size, but it may be changed to three or more sizes, for example, a timer display or the like. When displaying the character display of "attention" in red, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in medium size, and when displaying the timer display or the character display of "attention" in gold, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in large size. It may be displayed in size. Thereby, for example, the display mode may be changed according to the reliability of the jackpot.

Further, in this production example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from a small size to a large size, but for example, the size may be changed from a small size to a medium size and then to a large size. For example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "05:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a medium size, and when it becomes "03:00", the size changes from a medium size to a large size. It may be changed to the size. Further, although it changes from a small size to a medium size, it may not change to a large size.

Further, in this production example, when the remaining time in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, for example. When the remaining time in the timer display becomes "0:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a large size, or when the character "attention" is displayed, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The size may be changed to a large size.

Further, in this production example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the frame of the timer notice display TM1 and the background color (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the size of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of large size> medium size> small size). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the shape of the timer notice display TM1.

Further, for example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the color of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 or the character display of "attention" (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold>red>green> blue, etc.). ). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the size of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the character display of "attention" (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of large size> medium size> small size, etc. ). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the shape of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the character display of "attention".

Further, a certain effect may be likely to appear when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. For example, when the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, the pseudo-continuous symbol is likely to stop. You may do so.

Further, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, a specific effect is performed, but even if the countdown is completed, no effect may be performed. You may. Here, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect may be easily performed when the countdown is completed, and a big hit may be easily performed.

Further, in this production example, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 starts, the timer notice display TM1 is set to a small size display mode, but at the start of the countdown or the display start of the timer notice display TM1. It may be a large size display mode.

Further, in this production example, when the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, the timer display also changes to a large size, but only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, and the timer display You may not change the size of. Further, the size of the timer display may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a small size. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a large size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a small size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the color of the frame portion or the background of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may also change. Further, although the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may not change. Further, although the color of the timer display changes, the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may also change. Further, although the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may not change. Further, although the shape (font) of the timer display changes, the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

Further, the form of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by animation. In this case, for example, when the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes its form due to the animation, the form of the timer display may also change due to the animation. Further, although the form of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes due to the animation, the timer display may not change. Further, although the form of the timer display changes depending on the animation, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 41 (B1) to 41 (B4) shows another example in which the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (B1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "00:31" and counting down the timer display. Further, in the first decorative symbol, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are being displayed in a variable manner.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 41 (B2) to 41 (B3), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes "00:00". Here, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (B2), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, but it is overlapped by the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 41 (B4), the timer notice display TM1 instead of the timer display calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208.
The characters "attention" are enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notice display TM1. After the timer display becomes "00:00", the character "attention" may not be displayed, or no effect may be performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In this way, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed not only during the countdown of the timer display but also when the character "attention" is displayed. Further, when the timer display becomes "00:00", the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

The production example shown in FIGS. 42 (A1) to 42 (A3) is an example of displaying the timer notice display TM1 after the change in the display mode on another display means when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. Shown. In the production example shown in FIGS. 42 (A1) to 42 (A3), in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S replaces the family crest accessory 224E with the decorative symbol display device 208. It is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the sub-display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 42 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and the timer notice display TM1 is arranged in the upper center of the sub display device 208. On the timer notice display TM1, "09:69" is displayed as a timer display, and the countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, when the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size on the sub display device 208S. When the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a small size.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (A2), the decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the sub-display device 208S, the timer display countdown continues on the timer notice display TM1, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (A3), when the timer display has 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the sub display device 208S moves to the decorative symbol display device 208, and further. Timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. When the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be moved and enlarged by animation. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208, or the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed from the sub display device 208S as a decorative symbol. The enlarged display may be performed while moving across the display device 208, or the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed before straddling the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The countdown continues while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the movement and enlarged display animations are being performed.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 42 (B1) to 42 (B3) is another example of displaying the timer notice display TM1 after the change of the display mode on another display means when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. An example is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the sub-display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, "09:69" is displayed as a timer display and a countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B2), the decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (B2). Further, at this time, the sub display device 208S is operating, rises along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, is located on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is located on the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps with the displayed decorative pattern and timer notice display TM1, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, while the sub-display device 208S is rising, the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S are erased. The variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S may be deleted before the sub-display device 208S starts moving, or the sub-display device 208S completes the movement. It may be erased at the timing when the sub-display device 208S starts moving, or it may be erased at the timing when the sub-display device 208S completes the movement. Further, only one of the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be deleted. Further, the display positions of the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be changed to the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (B3), when the timer display has 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the sub display device 208S, and further, Timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. When the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be moved and enlarged by animation. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub display device 208S, or the timer notice display TM1 may be sub-displayed from the decorative symbol display device 208. The enlarged display may be performed while moving across the display device 208S, or the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed before straddling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. The countdown continues while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the movement and enlarged display animations are being performed. In this production example, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer notice display TM1 is erased from the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed on the sub display device 208S, but the decorative symbol display device 208 is used. May continue to display the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced for display. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S, the timer display on these timer notice display TM1 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. ..

The production examples shown in FIGS. 42 (C1) to 42 (C9) show another example of the display mode after the change of the timer notice display TM1. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

In the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 42 (C2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (C3), when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are left, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. The timer notice display TM1a after the change has a mode in which the timer display is arranged inside the circular meter. As shown in FIGS. 42 (C3) to 42 (C6), the display state of this circular meter unit changes in a manner in which the gauge decreases clockwise from the 12 o'clock position with the passage of time. Although a part of the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode overlaps with the variable icon h0, the variable icon h0 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a. Further, the timer notice display TM1a has the same size until the countdown is completed, but the size may be changed depending on the remaining time, for example, the circular meter portion is enlarged when the remaining 1 second is reached. It may be displayed. Further, the timer notice display TM1a after the display mode is changed may be composed of only a circular meter unit so that the timer display is not performed. Further, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the timer notice display TM1a after the display mode is changed, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The first decorative symbol may overlap with the timer notice display TM1a whose display mode has changed. Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the change display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the change display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the change display animation is being performed. Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed and displayed, the timer display portion may not be changed, but only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 42 (C4) to 42 (C6), the countdown and the gauge decrease display on the timer notice display TM1a are continuously performed until the timer display becomes "00:00". In this production example, the countdown effect is performed by both the countdown by the timer display and the decrease display of the gauge of the circular meter unit. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to see due to the timer notice display TM1a. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1a.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1a becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 42 (C7), the timer notice display TM1a "continues" to the effect that a pseudo continuous effect is performed instead of the timer display. Character is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the pseudo-continuous production is performed. In addition, characters other than "continue" may be displayed. For example, when the timer display countdown is completed and the process shifts to SP reach, "SP reach" or the like is displayed and SP reach is displayed. You may notify that the transition will occur. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, "attention" may be displayed in order to pay attention to the occurrence of the notice.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (C8), the timer notice display TM1a is erased, and then, as shown in FIG. 42 (A9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the lord is displayed in the middle symbol. The display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved from the top to the bottom at a low speed is started. After that, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-ream is executed.

In this production example, the character "continue" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1a to notify that the pseudo-ream effect is performed. However, for example, a question mark is added to the character "continue" to notify the pseudo-ream. The display may be performed so that the effect may not be performed. Further, in such a case, for example, when a pseudo-continuous production is performed, the big hit may be determined.

Further, in this effect example, when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed for the same effect, one of the timer notice displays may be displayed in a large size, or both. The timer notice display may be displayed in a large size. Further, one timer notice display is displayed with a timer of "03:00", and the other timer notice display is roughly displayed with, for example, "3 seconds left". A countdown may be displayed.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 43, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 43 (A1) to 43 (A8) show that the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 43 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A2), it is shown that the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon displaying the characters "addition" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. You will be notified that it will be done. That is, it is notified that the countdown time performed in the timer advance notice effect is extended.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 43 (A3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed, and the time to be added is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "05:00" indicating that the timer display has 5 seconds remaining, and the display position is also a decorative symbol display. It is changed to approximately the center of device 208. In this production example, the countdown is temporarily interrupted at "05:00", but the countdown may be continued. Here, in this production example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the timer advance notice display TM1 is added to the timer display. Is enlarged and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A4), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the balloon of the navigation character YM, but the timer notice display in which the balloon of the navigation character YM is enlarged is displayed. It may be overlapped with TM1. Further, the condition for enlarging the timer notice display TM1 is not limited to the addition of time in the timer display, and when the timer display changes, for example, when the time in the timer display is shortened, the countdown is stopped, or the like. The timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 43 (A5), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 displays a count-up animation, and an effect of adding time in the timer display is performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A6), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (A7), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size. And the display position is also changed to the original position. After that, the timer display countdown is restarted.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 43 (B1) to 43 (B7), the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed when the timer display time is added in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 43 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol, the left symbol shows that "decoration 7" is stopped, and the right symbol shows that "decoration 7" is stopped. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown display of the timer display is completed, and "00:00" is displayed. There is.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (B2), the timer notice display TM1 moves to substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "attention" to attract attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character is displayed. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched for display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (B3), when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer display is performed again, and "00:00" is displayed as the timer display. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol is displayed to move at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. The pseudo-continuous production by this pseudo-continuous pattern is continuously performed from FIG. 43 (B3) to FIG. 43 (B7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (B4), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 displays a count-up animation, and an effect of adding time in the timer display is performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B5), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 15 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. ..

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B6), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown is restarted thereafter. The timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in its original size without being reduced. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped at the middle symbol, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (B7), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed, and then the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is counted down, and the timer display is "14:92" at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (B7).

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 44, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 44 (A1) to 44 (A8) show that the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the display mode of the timer notice display changes and the rank of the notice is increased. ing. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1), the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that the swordsman has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "20:35" and counting down the timer display.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A2), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role of the main character, the lord, has started to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (A2).

FIG. 44 (A3) shows how the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (A3).

After that, as shown in FIG. 44 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display has 15 seconds remaining, and the timer notice display TM1 The color of the frame has been changed from white to red, and "LvUP" is added to indicate that the reliability of the jackpot has increased. Then, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 has been upgraded. Although the timer display countdown is continuously performed, the countdown may be temporarily interrupted while the enlarged display is displayed. Here, in this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a display with high reliability of the jackpot. The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed by changing the mode.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A5), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). At this time, the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 remains red, but the display of "LvUP" is erased. The timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in its original size without being reduced.

As shown in FIG. 44 (A6), the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", and when the countdown is completed, the timer notice display TM1 is replaced with the timer display as shown in FIG. 44 (A7). The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (A7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the jackpot reliability is high. In this cut-in display, along with the princess character, the characters "Suddenly hot" suggesting that the jackpot is highly reliable are displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A7), in response to the timer advance notice display TM1 being ranked up, the character display of "expected large" is added. As a result, it is easier to win a big hit than when a cut-in display without the character display of "expected large" is displayed. The character display of "expected large" may or may not be displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up. Further, the character display of "expected large" may be displayed on the condition that the timer notice display TM1 is ramped up, or may be displayed even if the timer notice display TM1 is not ranked up. You may. In this production example, the character display of "expected large" is more likely to be displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up than when it is not ranked up. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A7), the display of the variable icon h0 is also changed to display the notice. The change in the display of the variable icon h0 may be performed as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect, or may be performed regardless of the timer advance notice effect. That is, when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, a notice different from the notice given by the timer notice effect may be given.

As described above, in this effect example, the rank-up of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be a notification indicating that the advance notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is promoted, or the timer advance notice. The rank-up of the display TM1 itself may function as a notice of chance-up. Further, by increasing the rank of the timer notice display TM1, it may be notified in advance that the expectation that a notice with high reliability of the big hit is displayed has increased.

Further, in this effect example, the rank-up of the timer notice display TM1 suggests that the notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer notice effect may be promoted. It may suggest that the design of the reach in is likely to be promoted. Specifically, for example, when the reach is produced by "decoration 2" in which the probability change jackpot is not confirmed, the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, and if the jackpot is reached, the probability variation jackpot is achieved. May change to the reach of "decoration 7", which is likely to be a big hit.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 44 (B1) to 44 (B7) show how the effect using the chance-up meter is started when the timer advance notice effect is being performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1), the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that the swordsman has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "20:35" and counting down the timer display.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B2), the animation of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy has started to be displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 44 (B2), in addition to the start point SP and the final point GP, the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B3), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the starting point SP. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B3).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B4), at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice of chance up due to the appearance of Boy's character BOY is being given. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (B4), when the Boy character BOY appears, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed so that the Boy character BOY stands out. That is, by reducing the timer notice display TM1 to display, it may be possible to prevent the display of the Boy character BOY from being disturbed, and that the Boy character BOY has given notice of a chance increase. It may be easily recognizable. Even if the timer notice display TM1 is reduced in size, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B4). The timer display countdown may be interrupted while the reduced display is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 44 (B4) to 44 (B6), the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1 is maintained until the notice of chance up by the Boy character BOY is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (B7), when the notice of chance up by the boy character BOY is completed, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed in the original size.

In this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced in size while the chance-up notice is being given to notify that the chance-up notice is being given. The purpose may be achieved by changing the display mode. For example, in addition to the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1, the enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1, the change in the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 or the timer display itself, the change in the display position of the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by changing the shape of the display TM1 or the like.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 45, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 45 (A1) to 45 (A3) show how to change the display position of the timer notice display that was displayed when shifting to the super reach. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of holds, "1" indicating that the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A1) shows a transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left and right symbols move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "21:37" and counting down the timer display.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A2), the title of the super reach in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that the swordsman has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (A2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A3), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. The timer notice display TM1 changes the display position when the animation display of the duel scene is started. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed in the central portion of the right end of the display screen is changed to the lower right corner of the display screen. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched for display. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (A3'), the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed to make the super reach effect stand out.

In this production example, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is moved at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene starts, but when the production shift to the super reach shown in FIG. 45 (A1) is performed. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the title of the super reach shown in FIG. 45 (A2) is displayed. May be good. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be configured to move to the original position again at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or when it becomes 0, the chance of the timer notice display TM1 is increased, etc.). It may be displayed as it is. Further, even when the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed, it is enlarged (for example, displayed first) at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or when it becomes 0, the chance of the timer notice display TM1 is increased, etc.). The size may be displayed or displayed larger than the size initially displayed).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 45 (B1) to 45 (B7) show how to change the display position of the timer notice display displayed when the effect movable body operates. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of holds, "1" indicating that the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (B1) shows a transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left and right symbols move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (B1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "27:37" and counting down the timer display.

FIG. 45 (B2) shows that the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "25:34" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B2). Here, the timer notice display TM1 has at least a part overlapped by the second large board behavior accessory 224 Gb and the fourth large board behavior accessory 224 Gd, and the timer notice display is more than in the non-overlapping state. It is said that TM1 is difficult to see.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (B3), the timer advance notice display TM1 changes the display position to a position where it does not overlap with the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed in the center portion of the right end of the display screen is changed to the upper end portion of the center of the display screen. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched for display. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed. If the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate, the display position may not be changed, but the display position may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the effect image that appears when the light guide plate IL emits light is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, but the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is not changed accordingly. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the light guide plate IL emits light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 45 (B6), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are initially set. Return to position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (B7), the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the original position (center portion at the right end of the display screen). In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "21:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B7). The timing at which the timer notice display TM1 moves to the original position may be the same as the timing at which the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd start the operation of returning to the initial position. , The timer notice display TM1 may be moved to the original position after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd start the operation of returning to the initial position, or the timer notice display TM1 may be moved. After starting the movement to the original position, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may start the operation of returning to the initial position.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 45 (C1) to 45 (C5) show how the positional relationship between the timer notice display and the decorative symbol is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, "29:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. Further, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C2), it is shown that the “decoration 7” is stopped in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and is in the reach state. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "22:04" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C2). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C3), the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is displayed. , Navi character YM and hold icon h11 are framed out and hidden. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "21:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C3). At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol, and the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the right symbol of the first decorative symbol. The timer notice display TM1 may overlap with the first decorative symbol.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C4) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C4), the title of the super reach in which the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C4). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C5), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C5). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the above-mentioned chance up meter CMT is displayed, and an effect using the chance up meter is performed.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 46, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 46 (A1) to 46 (A10) show how the display position of the timer notice display is changed by the operation of the player. At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of holds, "1" indicating that the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A1) shows a transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left and right symbols move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "21:37" and counting down the timer display.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A2), the title of the super reach in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that the swordsman has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A3), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role of the main character, the lord, has started to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A3). Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a guide display is performed in which the characters "reduce timer" are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and the player can lower it. It has been notified that the timer notice display TM1 can be reduced and displayed by operating the key. In this production example, the guide display is displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but it may be displayed from the time when the timer notice production is started, or when the reach state is reached. It may be displayed in.

After that, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed and its display position is displayed as shown in FIG. 46 (A5). change. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed in the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the upper part of the guide display. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed. When changing the display position, an animation may be displayed in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves while being reduced, or the display position may be switched for display. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be reduced in size after the display position is changed, or may be reduced in size and then the display position may be changed. Further, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A5). In addition, FIG. 46 (A5)
In the guide display shown in, the characters "enlarge timer" are displayed together with the icon of the upper key of the operation key unit 137, and when the player operates the upper key, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed in the original size. Also, it is notified that the display position will return to the original position.

After that, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A6), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed and returns to the original size as shown in FIG. 46 (A7). , The display position also returns to the original position. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "17:81" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A7). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 46 (A7), the guide display is performed in which the characters “reduce timer” are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the lower key. As a result, it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 can be reduced and displayed. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 46 (A3), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display size and the default display position, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, The timer notice display TM1 may be further enlarged and displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A8) shows that the animation display of the duel scene is continuing. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A8).

Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (A9), when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are left, the guide display displayed at the lower right of the display screen is deleted. , It is shown that the display position (display size) of the timer notice display TM1 cannot be changed. The display position and display size of the timer notice display TM1 may be continuously changed. If the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed when the timer display becomes "03:00" and the timer display is reduced, the display size returns to the default display position at this timing. Alternatively, the display may remain reduced at the changed display position.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A10), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is set to "00:00", indicating that the countdown is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 46 (B1) to (B9) show that the timer notice display is divided and displayed during the execution of the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1), the title of the super reach in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that the swordsman has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "20:35" and counting down the timer display.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B2), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role of the main character, the lord, has started to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B2).

FIG. 46 (B3) shows how the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B3).

After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (B4), an effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display has 15 seconds remaining, and then FIG. 46. As shown in (B5), the timer notice display is divided into two. Here, the timer notice display displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays may be referred to as the left timer notice display TM1L, and the timer notice display displayed on the right side may be referred to as the right timer notice display TM2R. The timer displays on these timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R each indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B5), they indicate "13:56", respectively. In this production example, it is suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number of divisions of the timer notice display is not limited to two, and may be three or more. The larger the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. Further, in these timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, the color of the frame is changed to red, but the color of the frame does not have to be changed, and the case where the color of the frame is changed to red is the case of the frame. It may be easier to make a big hit than when the color does not change. Further, only the color of one of the frames of the timer notice display TM1L and TM1R may be changed to red.

After that, when the timer display on the timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R becomes "00:00" as shown in FIG. 46 (B6), the timer display on the timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R as shown in FIG. 46 (B7). Instead, the word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (B8), it is shown that the decorative pattern display device 208 is displaying a cut-in indicating that the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach". There is. This cut-in display is an effect performed when the countdown of the timer display on one of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the left timer notice display TM1L) is completed, and the reliability of the jackpot is high. It notifies that it will be promoted to a higher reach production. It should be noted that the effect may be performed when the countdown of the timer display in both of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is completed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B9), it is shown that the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach in which the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 46 (B9), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach in that the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other, but he is accompanied by a panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B9), a notice display showing how the Copanda cheering party KPD composed of three Copanda characters is cheering is performed, and the SP swordsman reach It informs that the reliability of the big hit is dramatically increased. This Copanda cheering party KPD is a notice character displayed when the countdown of the timer display on the other timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the right timer notice display TM1R) is completed.

In this production example, the chance-up notice and reach production are developed corresponding to each of the two timer notice displays, but one production (development of reach production) is provided corresponding to the two timer notice displays. It can also be said that the chance-up production is being performed even in the developed reach production.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 47, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 47 (A1) to 47 (A5) show a timer advance notice effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 47 (A1) to 47 (A5), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The family crest accessory 224E and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (A1), it is shown that the animation of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed, which has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). .. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (A1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. The indicated "1" is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer advance notice effect is performed, "15:47" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (A2), the animation of the duel scene is continuously performed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A2).

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (A3), a predetermined effect is applied to the display area in the vicinity of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the display area in the vicinity of the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An image is displayed, suggesting that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operate. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display countdown continues, and "14:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A3).

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (A4), it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N reciprocate left and right along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. At this time, the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, it is shown that the timer notice display is divided into two. After the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completed, the timer display may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The timer display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N each indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A4), "13: 56 ”is shown. Although the timer display countdown continues even during the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. May interrupt the countdown of the timer display. In this production example, it is suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number of divisions of the timer notice display is not limited to two, and may be three or more. The larger the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. For example, in addition to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the timer display may be performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (A5), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to their initial positions, respectively. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display countdown continues, and "12:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A5).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 47 (B1) to 47 (B5) show a timer advance notice effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the production example shown in FIGS. 47 (B1) to 47 (B5), a mini display device 208P is provided in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. The mini display device 208P is provided at an appropriate position such as the game board 200 or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1). In this production example, for example, a dot matrix type display device in which full-color LEDs are arranged in a matrix is adopted, but other display devices such as an LCD, an EL, a 7-segment display, a lamp, and a drum may be used. The mini display device 208P is provided with a shutter member, and the mini display device 208P can be changed between an easy-to-see state and a difficult-to-see state by driving the shutter member.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “18:19” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display is counted down. In addition, a timer advance notice effect is also performed on the mini display device 208P, "6:19" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that two timer advance notice effects are performed in parallel, and the timer display is set to "0" in the timer advance notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In that case, an effect such as a chance-up notice may be performed, and even if the timer display becomes "0" in the timer advance effect on the mini display device 208P, an effect such as a chance-up notice is performed. In some cases.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (B2), the timer notice display is displayed at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has 15 seconds remaining. The effect image is displayed around TM1 and the countdown is interrupted. On the other hand, even in the mini display device 208P, the countdown is interrupted at the timing of "3:00" indicating that the timer display has 3 seconds remaining.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (B3), in the mini display device 208P, instead of the timer display, the timer display time indicated by the mini display device 208P is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a timer notice display. The character "UP" indicating that the timer is added to the timer display of TM1 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (B4), a time of 3 seconds is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the time is updated to "18:00".

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (B5), the timer advance notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 restarts the countdown of the timer display. At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (B5), the timer display is "17:99". On the other hand, mini display device 208
In P, the display screen is difficult to see due to the shutter member. In this effect example, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM on the decorative symbol display device 208 is added with time, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P is terminated, but the decorative symbol display is performed. Even if time is added to the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM in the device 208, the timer effect in the mini display device 208P may not be completed, and the timer display may be counted down thereafter.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 48, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

An example of the effect shown in FIGS. 48 (A1) to 48 (A10) is a state in which the timer advance notice effect is notified by displaying that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared before the start. Shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 3, the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the second hold icon h13 is displayed. , "3" indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A2), it is shown that the timer advance notice preparation effect has started. Specifically, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer advance notice preparation effect is started. The timer advance notice preparation effect is intended to give the player a sense of expectation by displaying that the preparation is in progress until the timer advance notice effect starts. At the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A2), nothing is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. In addition, for example, the display of "STANDBY" described later may be performed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A3) shows that the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 to notify the fact. That is, in this production example, it is a production performed as one mode of the look-ahead notice for notifying that the timer notice production will be performed in the hold. Further, the timer notice display TM1 on which "STANDBY" is displayed functions as a preparation display. It should be noted that the change notice may be used to give notice that the timer notice effect will be performed in the changing symbol display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed changes its display position to a position below the second hold display unit. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced in size and becomes a mini size display size. When changing the display position, an animation may be displayed in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves while being reduced, or the display position may be switched for display. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be reduced in size after the display position is changed, or may be reduced in size and then the display position may be changed. Further, the timer notice display TM1 does not have to be reduced and displayed, and the display position does not have to be changed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A5), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 9-Decoration 1". At this time, the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A6), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer advance notice display TM1 is still displayed below the second hold display unit. As described above, it can be said that the timer advance notice preparation effect is an effect that may be performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A7), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A8), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer advance notice display TM1 is still displayed below the second hold display unit. The symbol variation display this time corresponds to the hold that was the target of pre-reading.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed and returns to the original size, and the display position also returns to the original position, and the timer is displayed from the display of "STANDBY". It is shown that the display is switched to "10:00". As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect has been started. When changing the display position of the timer notice display TM1, the animation that the timer notice display TM1 moves while expanding may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed and then enlarged and displayed, or the enlarged display and then the display position may be changed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. The display of may be switched to the timer display. Further, the timing at which the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display may be the same as the timing at which the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A10), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has started.

After that, for example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes a display at a specific time (for example, "03:00") or when the display mode changes, the display size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. You may change from a small size to a large size.

In this production example, the timer display countdown is started after the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. However, the timer display TM1 switches from the "STANDBY" display to the timer display, and the timer display is displayed. After starting the countdown of, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 48 (B1) to 48 (B8), a plurality of clock notice icons MI1 that function as pre-reading notices are stocked, and timer notice production is performed for the number of stocked clock notice icons MI1. Is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 3, the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the second hold icon h13 is displayed. , "3" indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B2), a state in which "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol is shown. A clock notice icon MI1 is added to this "decoration 3", indicating that one clock notice icon MI1 is stocked. In addition, the notice icon MI1 of two or more clocks may be stocked at one time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B3), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “Decoration 3-Decoration 9-Decoration 1”. Further, below the second decorative symbol, a timer notice stock display area TMst indicating the number of stocks of the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, "timer notice stock x 1" indicating that one clock notice icon MI1 is stocked is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect is performed at least once during the hold. It should be noted that the time may be added to the timer display in the timer notice effect by the number of stocks of the clock notice icon MI1. Further, the remaining time to be displayed on the timer display when the timer advance notice effect is started may be determined according to the number of stocks of the clock advance notice icon MI1. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, the number of stocks is added each time the notice icon MI1 of the clock appears. In this production example, it can be said that the display in which the number of timer notice stocks is displayed in the timer notice stock display area TMst functions as the preparation display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B4), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. In addition, it is shown that the navigation character notice is being given by the navigation character YM. This navigation character notice is performed by displaying a balloon in which the characters "get" are displayed together with the clock icon in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The navigation character notice in this production example functions as a pre-reading notice that the timer notice production is performed in the hold. As described above, the number of clock notice icons MI1 stocked in one symbol variation display is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, there may be a plurality of types of effects performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. Further, in the effect performed when the clock notice icon MI1 is stocked, the number of the clock notice icon MI1 to be stocked is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B5), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7”. Further, in the timer notice stock display area TMst, "timer notice stock x 3" indicating that the notice icons MI1 of the three clocks are stocked is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect is performed at least three times during the hold.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B6), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B7), it is shown that one of the three stocked notice icons MI1 of the clock has been digested and the timer notice effect has been started. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, and it is suggested that the chance-up notice may be given 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Further, in this production example, one clock notice icon MI1 is digested to start one timer notice effect, but two clock notice icons MI1 are digested and two timer notice effects are performed in parallel. You may do it. Further, in this production example, one timer notice icon MI1 is digested to start one timer notice effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 48 (B7'), the clock notice icon MI1 is used. The timer notice effect may be started without digestion.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position to the substantially right center of the display screen, and the timer display countdown is started. At this time, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by a movement animation. When the notice icon MI1 of the clock is digested and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may not be displayed in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed in the center of the right end of the display screen from the beginning. ..

In the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini. Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the timer notice effect in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 22 (1)].
The first display includes a certain effect [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 20 (11) to (12), or a notice display due to a change in the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 21 (a5). Decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device, such as lever effect shown in FIG. 21 (c2) and notice by stop display of pine symbol CC as chance symbol shown in FIG. 23 (9fa'). 208L, 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M, 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N, effect display using mini display device 208P] is a display that notifies the timing of execution.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to 22 (5)].
The second display is a display for notifying that the timing at which the certain effect is started changes [for example, the navigation in the timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to 22 (5). "Addition" and "+10 seconds" displayed in the balloon of the character YM],
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to 22 (5), the timer notice effect on the timer notice display TM1 is performed. When it is broken, a timer is added to the effect, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, even if the first display notifies the time until a certain effect is started, the second display foretells that the time notified will change. Don't just wait for the time to start a certain production, but also enjoy the first display with the expectation that the time may change. You may be able to.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. .. Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may notify a timing other than the timing at which a certain effect is performed. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when a certain effect is performed, or may not notify the timing when a certain effect is performed.

In addition, the second display may only foretell that the timing at which a certain effect is started changes, and also foretells other than the change in the timing at which a certain effect is started. It may be a thing. In addition, the second display may always give a notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started will change, or may not give a notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started will change. It may be a thing.

Further, only the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or a display other than the second display may be displayed during the first display. Good. Further, the second display may always be displayed during the display of the first display, or the second display may not be displayed during the display of the first display.

The start of the timer notice display may be the start of the display of the first display or the start of the display of the countdown display (for example, when a number is displayed). (Start, etc.), and the countdown of the countdown display may have started. Further, the end of the timer notice display may mean that the first display is hidden, or that the countdown display is hidden (for example, the number is erased and "attention" is displayed. It may be (including the displayed state), it may be that the countdown by the countdown display is completed (for example, 0 is displayed), and the display displayed on the first display after the countdown is completed. (For example, the character display of "attention") may be hidden.

Further, "It is configured so that the display mode of the first display changes after the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to 22 (5). After the timer addition effect is performed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated, the time is added on the timer display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the first display.

Here, the display mode of the first display may be changed only after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display may be changed after the second display is displayed. The display mode of the display other than the above may also be configured to change. Further, the display mode of the first display may be configured to change after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display may change after the second display is displayed. It may be configured so that it may not change.

Even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change, and the display mode of the first display changes only when the second display is displayed. It may change.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 20.
8 mag]
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, sub-display device 208S or the like].
The first display is a display displayed on the first display means.
The second display is a display displayed on the second display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player's line of sight may be concentrated on the first display means until the first display is completed, but by displaying the second display on the second display means as well. , It may be possible to focus on both of the two display means without focusing the line of sight only on the first display means.

Here, the display means may be composed of only the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured to include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. .. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means. May be good.

Further, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed on a display other than the first display means. Further, the first display may be always displayed on the first display means, or may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, the second display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed on other than the second display means. Further, the second display may be always displayed on the second display means, or may not be displayed on the second display means.

Further, "The second display means is arranged on the front side of the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the sub display device 208S is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Located on the side, etc.],
The first display means may be overlapped by the second display means on which the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 26 (A2) to 26 (A3). , The decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps with the sub display device 208S on which the timer is added.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the second display means may overlap with the first display means while displaying the second display, so that the second display is noticed and a certain effect is started. It may be possible to make it easier to recognize that the time to reach may change.

Here, the second display means on which the second display is displayed may overlap only the first display means, or the second display means on which the second display is displayed may overlap. Depending on the display means, display means other than the first display means may also overlap. Further, the first display means may always overlap with the second display means on which the second display is displayed, and the second display means on which the second display is displayed may cause the first display means to overlap. One display means may not overlap.

Further, the first display means may be overlapped only by the second display means on which the second display is displayed, or the second display on which the second display is displayed may overlap. The first display means may be overlapped by the display means other than the means.

Further, "the first position [for example, the initial position of the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B1)] and the second position [for example, the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B3) is a decorative symbol display device]. The second display means is configured to be movable between positions that overlap with the front side in the substantially center of 208].
The second display means is a display means that overlaps with the first display means at the second position [for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device. At the position where it overlaps the front side in the substantially center of 208, the sub display device 208S overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the second display means may be configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, or other than the second display means between the first position and the second position. The display means of the above may also be configured to be movable. Further, the second display means may be configured to always move between the first position and the second position, or the second display means may move between the first position and the second position. It may be configured so that it may not move.

Further, the second display means may be configured to be movable only between the first position and the second position, and the second display means may be configured to be movable other than between the first position and the second position. May be configured to be movable.

Further, the second display means may overlap with the first display means only at the second position, or may overlap with the first display means at positions other than the second position. It may be anything. Further, the second display means may always overlap the first display means at the second position, or may not overlap the first display means at the second position. May be good.

Further, "the first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to (7)].
The countdown display is a display in which the timing until the certain effect is performed is performed by the countdown [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (7), the timer of the timer advance notice display TM1. The countdown on the display informs the timing of the pseudo-ream, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may always include the countdown display, or may not include the countdown display.

Further, the countdown display may be such that only the timing until a certain effect is performed is performed by the countdown, or the timing other than the timing until a certain effect is performed may also be performed by the countdown. .. Further, the countdown display may be such that the timing until a certain effect is performed is always performed by the countdown, or the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be performed by the countdown. Good.

Further, "Even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is continued.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, even when the second display is displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, and even when the second display is displayed, the countdown other than the countdown by the countdown display is continued. There may be something. Further, even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued, and even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not continue. May be good.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only in the state where the second display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display is continued even in the state other than the state where the second display is displayed. May be good.

In addition, "During the display of the second display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, during the display of the second display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, or during the display of the second display, something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted without fail during the display of the second display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the second display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the second display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the second display is not being displayed.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a display of the character" attention "in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (8)".
The third display is different from the first display, and is different from the first display.
The third display is different from the second display.
The third display is a display that is not included in the certain effect.
When the first display indicates 0, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (7) to (8), the timer in the timer notice display TM1. When the display becomes 0, the word "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the countdown by the first display may further enhance the expectation for the third display.

Here, when the first display shows 0, only the third display may be displayed, and when the first display shows 0, the third display may be displayed. Display other than may be displayed. Further, when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display may be displayed without fail, and when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display is displayed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the third display may be displayed only when the first display indicates 0, and the third display may be displayed except when the first display indicates 0. The display of three may be displayed.

In addition, "when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the second display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation by displaying the second display.

In addition, when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed. There may be.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 20 (9) to (12)].
The certain effect is an effect including the fourth display.
The fourth display is an effect display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain effect may include only the fourth display, or may include a display other than the fourth display. Further, a certain effect may always include the fourth display, or may not include the fourth display.

In addition, "the effect movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements [for example, family crest accessory 224E, Senryobako accessory 224H, 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M" , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of movements is the first movement [for example, the movement of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd shown in FIG. 21 (d3)].
The certain effect is an effect including the first operation.
The first operation is a directing operation.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the effect movable means, and it may be possible to further improve the effect.

Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of actions, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of actions. Further, the effect capable means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

Further, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only the first operation, or may be capable of executing an operation other than the first operation. Further, the effect movable means may be one that always executes the first operation, or may not execute the first operation.

Further, a certain effect may include only the first operation, or may include an operation other than the first operation. Further, a certain effect may always include the first operation, or may not include the first operation.

In addition, "when the certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the certain effect is not performed [for example, FIGS. 20 (11) to 20 (11) to FIG. When the pseudo-ream shown in 12) is started, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the pseudo-ream is not started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that a certain effect will be performed.

In addition, when a certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and even when a certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed. May be good.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 16 (9) to (14) and the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 20 (9) to (12). Pseudo-continuous production shown in Fig. 29 (4) and notice display of chance up shown in Fig. 29 (4) and Fig. (13)].
In the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, the display of the fifth display may be started.
The fifth display is a notice display, and is
When the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the fifth display is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 16 (9) to 16 (14)). When the conversation notice shown in is given, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the conversation notice is not given],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the fifth display will be displayed in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display. is there.

Here, in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, only the fifth display may be started to be displayed, or the first display may be displayed. In the period from the start of the display to the start of the display, the display other than the fifth display may also be started. Further, in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, the fifth display may always be started, or after the first display is started to be displayed. In the period until the second display is started, the fifth display may not be started.

Further, the fifth display may be started only in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, or the first display may be displayed. The fifth display may be started in a period other than the period from the start to the start of the display.

In addition, when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and even when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed. There may be.

In addition, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini. Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a period display [for example, a display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1)].
The period display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 29, the chance up meter CMT is lined by the swordsman reach. It may be displayed during the specified period, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display [for example, the notice by the lever effect shown in FIG. 29 (18)].
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing shown at the checkpoint CP3 at which the advance notice by the lever effect is started, which is shown in FIG. 29 (18)].
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started.
The period display may be erased after the display of the period display is started and before the first timing is reached [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to 33 (A2), a check is performed. If the cut-in shown in FIG. 33 (A2) is displayed before the timing shown by point CP3, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game console, since the first timing of the period display is known during the display of the period display, there is a possibility that the display means will not be seen until the first timing is near. Here, the period display may be hidden before the first timing is reached. Even at the timing before the first timing comes, the line of sight can be directed to the display means to see the period display. In some cases.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to draw in the game from the time when the period display is displayed until the first timing is reached.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, a plurality of types of displays may be always displayed, or a plurality of types of displays may not be displayed.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the period display and the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the period display and the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the period display and the first effect display, or may not display the period display and the first display.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed in a period other than the above period. Further, the period display may be always displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the period display may be for notifying only the first timing, or may be for notifying other than the first timing. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

In addition, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. Previously, the display other than the period display may be deleted. In addition, the period display may be deleted without fail before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the period is before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started. The display may not be erased.

Further, the period display may be deleted only before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. In addition to the previous period display, the period display may be deleted.

The period during which the period display is displayed may be during the symbol variation display, the jackpot game, the demo display, the symbol stop display, or the like, regardless of the reach.

Further, the period display may be displayed during the execution of all reach, or may be displayed only during the execution of a specific reach, and may not be displayed during the execution of other reach effects. Good. For example, the period display may not be displayed at the time of long reach and may be displayed at the time of SP reach. Further, it may not be displayed in the first half of the SP reach, but may be displayed in the latter half of the SP reach. Further, it may be displayed in the first half of the SP reach and not displayed in the latter half of the SP reach.

Further, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the chance up meter is started to be displayed, and the end of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is finished. Good. Further, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing at which an effect such as a reach effect in which the period is displayed is started, and the end of the period display is the timing at which the effect is ended. It does not matter whether the chance up meter is actually displayed or not. Further, the start of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or the marker on the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or the marker on the chance up meter is finished. There may be. Further, when the chance up meter can be displayed / hidden by the operating means, the start of the period display is the timing when the chance up meter is started to be displayed by the operating means, and the period display is started. The end may be a timing at which the display of the chance up meter is ended by the operating means.

Further, the start of the period display means from the start of the period display effect (for example, a display suggesting that the chance up meter can be displayed) to the end of the period display effect (for example, the chance up meter). It may be until the display suggesting that can be displayed is hidden, or until the chance up meter is hidden).

Further, the period display includes not only the one displayed until the first timing is reached, but also the one that is erased before the first timing is reached.

Further, for a certain period, there may be two or more in the period during which the reach effect display is performed. At this time, the period display may be started and ended at certain periods, or the period display may be continuously displayed over two certain periods. In this case, in the first certain period, after the first period display starts and ends, the period display itself is continuously displayed, and when the second certain period starts, a new period is started. The second period display as a display may start and end.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second effect display [for example, display of a cut-in of an old man shown in FIG. 33 (A2), display of an effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b), etc.] And
The second effect display is different from the first effect display.
The second effect display may be displayed before the first timing is reached [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to 33 (A2) and 33 (A2b), a chance up meter. In the production by CMT, the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 33 (A2) and the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) may be displayed before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the third checkpoint CP3. Yes, etc.],
The period display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to (A2) and (A2b), there is a chance. In the production by the upmeter CMT, the display timing of the grandfather's cut-in shown in FIG. 33 (A2) and the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) are not notified, etc.],
While the second effect display is being displayed, the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to (A2) and (A2b), FIG. 33 (A2) is shown. When the cut-in of the grandfather is displayed or the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display that is not notified by the period display is displayed, the second effect display may be displayed even before the first timing, so before the first timing comes. May also have expectations.

Here, only the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing, or the effect display other than the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing. There may be cases. Further, the second effect display may always be displayed before the first timing, or the second effect display may not be displayed before the first timing.

In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only before the first timing, or when the second effect display is displayed other than before the first timing. There may be.

Further, the period display may not notify only the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may not notify only the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. You may. Further, the period display may not always notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. Good.

Further, only the period display may be deleted during the display of the second effect display, or the display other than the period display may be deleted during the display of the second effect display. Further, the period display may always be deleted during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may not be deleted during the display of the second effect display.

Further, the period display may be deleted only while the second effect display is being displayed, and the period display may be deleted other than while the second effect display is being displayed.

In addition, instead of the effect display, it may be a notification other than an error such as an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a firing position, or a notification for preventing forgetting to remove the prepaid card. Further, as the mode of the effect display, the display may be displayed by light emission by the LED, operation by the effect movable means, or light emission by the light guide plate.

Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may be notified by the period display. Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

In addition, "the second effect display is a second notice display [for example, a notice display by displaying the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 33 (A2) or displaying an effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b)]. is there,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display of the second effect display is displayed before the first timing, which suggests that there is a possibility of a big hit without waiting for the first timing. In some cases, the player can be expected even during the period until the first timing comes.

In addition, "when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the second effect display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and even when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. It may not be done.

In addition, "the effect movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements [for example, family crest accessory 224E, Senryobako accessory 224H, 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M" , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of movements is a second movement [for example, the movement of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd shown in FIG. 33 (A3b)].
The second operation is a directing operation.
The second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display [for example, the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the effect movable means, and it may be possible to further improve the effect.

Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of actions, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of actions. Further, the effect movable means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

Further, during the display of the second effect display, only the second operation may be performed, or during the display of the second effect display, an operation other than the second operation may be performed. You may. Further, the second operation may always be performed during the display of the second effect display, or the second operation may not be performed during the display of the second effect display.

Further, "One of the plurality of types of operations is the first operation [for example, the operation of the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIGS. 15 (E1) to 15 (E2) and the operation shown in FIG. 15 (F1). Operation of Senryobako accessory 224H, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the period display is configured to be displayed again after the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A2a) to (A3a), the character of the princess. After the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again when the animation display of the duel scene is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have expectations about the redisplay of the period display.

Here, after the period display is deleted, only the period display may be displayed again, or after the period display is deleted, the display other than the period display is displayed again. It may be configured. In addition, the period display may be configured to be displayed again after the period display is deleted, or the period display may not be displayed again after the period display is deleted. You may.

Further, the period display may be configured to be displayed again only after the period display is deleted, or the period display may be displayed again even after the period display is deleted. May be good.

Further, "after the period display is erased, the period display is not displayed until the certain period elapses [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A2) to (A5). In addition, after the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display of the old character, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the period display is deleted, only the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is deleted, until a certain period elapses. It may be configured so that a display other than the period display is not displayed. Further, after the period display is deleted, the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is deleted, the period until a certain period elapses. The display may be configured to be displayed.

Further, the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses only after the period display is deleted, or a certain period elapses even after the period display is deleted. The period display may be configured not to be displayed until.

In addition, when there are a plurality of certain periods in the period in which the reach effect display is performed, after the period display is deleted in the first certain period, the period display is displayed in the first certain period. Although not displayed, the period display may be visible when a second period after the first period is started. Further, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display may not be displayed in the second certain period after the first certain period, or the symbol may be displayed. The period display may not be displayed until the variable display ends.

Also, "The certain period is the period during which Super Reach is being executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of displays is a third effect display [for example, a notice of champ-up by displaying the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4), the lord shown in FIG. 29 (13). Notice of chance up by displaying the cut-in image CI3 of
The third effect display is different from the first effect display.
The period display is the second timing [for example, the timing shown at the checkpoint CP1 at which the advance notice of the champ-up by the display of the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4) is started, and the lord shown in FIG. 29 (13). The timing indicated by the checkpoint CP2, which starts the notice of chance up by displaying the cut-in image CI3, etc.] may also be notified.
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the third effect display may be started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the period display may notify only the second timing, or may also notify timings other than the second timing. Further, the period display may always notify the second timing, or may not notify the second timing.

Further, the second timing may be such that only the display of the third effect display may be started, or the display other than the display of the third effect display may be started. It may be a thing. Further, the second timing may be such that the display of the third effect display is always started, or the display of the third effect display may not be started.

The timing displayed by the period display may be 3 or more.

Further, the place where the effect display is performed corresponding to the reach may be fixed, such that when a certain reach occurs, the effect display is always performed three times, and when another reach occurs, the effect display is always performed twice. Even if the reach is the same, the effect display may be changed so that the effect display is performed three times and the effect display is performed only once at other times. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of "not notifying too much", and conversely, it may be more likely to come off. Further, the susceptibility to a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of notified timings. In addition, the larger the number of times the effect display is performed, the easier it is to win a big hit.

Further, the second timing may be the timing after the first timing, the second timing may be the timing before the first timing, and the first timing and the second timing may be used. The two timings may be the same.

Further, "The first effect display is the first notice display [for example, the notice by the lever effect shown in FIG. 29 (18)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The display of one of the multiple types of display is the third display,
"When at least a part of the first display becomes difficult to see" means "when at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the third display".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
The display means is the first display means, and is
The first display means is a means that may display the period display.
The second display means is a means that may perform an effect operation.
The second display means may overlap at least a portion of the period display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be composed of only a plurality of display means, or may be composed of other than the plurality of display means. Further, the display means may be always composed of a plurality of display means, or may not be composed of a plurality of display means.

Further, the first display means may display only the period display, or may display a display other than the period display. Further, the first display means may always display the period display, or may not display the period display.

Further, the second display means may be one that may perform only the effect operation, or may be one that may perform an operation other than the effect operation. In addition, the second display means may be one that always performs the effect operation, or may not perform the effect operation.

Further, the second display means may overlap at least a part of the period display, or the second display means may overlap at least a part of the period display. There may be. Further, the second display means may always overlap at least a part of the period display, and the second display means may not overlap at least a part of the period display. May be good.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini. Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the effect by the navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 38 (A1) to 38 (A9)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a display of the old man's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 38 (A4) to 38 (A9)].
The first display and the second display are different displays.
At least a part of the display mode of the first display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38 (A1)] is the first speed [for example, 10 It may change depending on the speed at which the gauge disappears in seconds, etc.]
At least a part of the display mode of the second display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather shown in FIG. 38 (A4)] has a second speed [for example, a gauge at 5 seconds]. It may change depending on the speed at which it disappears, etc.
The first speed and the second speed are different speeds.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In recent years, many displays have been displayed on the display means, and there has been a problem that a player who is unfamiliar with the game or a player who plays the model for the first time does not know where to pay attention. In this game table, by making the first speed and the second speed different, the player naturally guides the line of sight to the fast (slow) display in which the display mode changes, and the player having the above problem. May also be able to entertain the production.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed in a period other than the above period. Further, the period display may be always displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the period display may be for notifying only the first timing, or may be for notifying other than the first timing. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

In addition, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. Previously, the display other than the period display may be deleted. In addition, the period display may be deleted without fail before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. Previously, the period display may not be erased.

Further, the period display may be deleted only before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. In addition to the previous period display, the period display may be deleted.

Further, "the first display is a display including a time display [for example, a gauge display on the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38 (A1)].
The second display is a display including the time display [for example, a gauge display on the remaining time display meter MT2 shown in FIG. 38 (A4)].
The time display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time in a certain period [for example, the operation valid period] [for example, the remaining time display meters MT1 and FIG. 38 (for example) shown in FIG. 38 (A1). The gauge of the remaining time meter MT2 shown in A4) decreases according to the time from the start of the operation validity period],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize the speed of change in the display mode.

Here, the first display may include only the time display or may include other than the time display. Further, the first display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, the second display may include only the time display or may include other than the time display. Further, the second display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, the time display may change the display mode only according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may change according to other than the passage of time in a certain period. You may. Further, the time display may be such that the display mode always changes according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may not change according to the passage of time in a certain period. There may be.

Further, "In some cases, both the first display and the second display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 38 (A4) to 38 (A7), a button is displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM. Both the effect display on which the image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed and the operation promotion notification image displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather in the conversation notice are displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make the production lively by displaying both the first display and the second display.

Here, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, or the display may be other than both the first display and the second display. May be good. Further, both the first display and the second display may always be displayed, or both the first display and the second display may not be displayed.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of" intense heat "in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38 (A9)".
One of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a character display of "It's intense heat" in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather shown in FIG. 38 (A9)].
The third display and the fourth display are different displays.
The first display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode can be changed until the first time [for example, 10 seconds, etc.] elapses.
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode can be changed until the second time [for example, 5 seconds, etc.] elapses.
When the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed, the third display may be displayed.
When the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed, the fourth display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be such that only a part of the display mode can be changed until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode may be changed until the first time elapses. Other display modes may also be changeable. Further, the first display may always change at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the first time elapses. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the second display may be such that at least a part of the display mode can be changed until the second time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode is not changed until the second time elapses. The display mode of is also changeable. Further, the second display may always change at least a part of the display mode until the second time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the second time elapses. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, when the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed, only the third display may be displayed, or the first display may be displayed after the first display starts to be displayed. Over time, displays other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed, the third display may always be displayed, or when the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed. , The third display may not be displayed.

Further, when the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed, only the fourth display may be displayed, or the second display may be displayed after the second display starts to be displayed. Over time,
A display other than the fourth display may also be displayed. Further, when the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed, the fourth display may always be displayed, or when the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed. , The fourth display may not be displayed.

The third display and the fourth display may have the same display mode or different display modes.

Further, in the third display and the fourth display, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher or lower in the fourth display. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be the same in the third display and the fourth display.

Further, "the first display is a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 40 (A1)].
The second display is the countdown display [for example, the countdown display in the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 40 (A1)].
The countdown display is a display that notifies the timing until a certain effect [for example, display of a pseudo-continuous effect] is performed [for example, the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 40 (A1). And the second timer notice display TM2 notifies the time until the pseudo-ream occurs by a countdown display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the countdown display may notify only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may notify a timing other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. Further, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be notified without fail, or the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be notified.

In addition, "an operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, an effect button 136 (chance button 136), etc.] is provided.
The first display is an operation validity period display.
The second display is the operation validity period display, and is
The operation valid period display is a display indicating a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that has an aunt who is not operated by the player.

Further, the operation valid period display may indicate only the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or may indicate a period other than the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The operation valid period display may always indicate the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or may not indicate the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid.

Further, "The first display is a period display [for example, the first chance up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 35 (A1)].
The second display is the period display [for example, the second chance up meter CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (A1)].
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing at which the notice of chance up by the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 35 (A2) is started].
The first timing is a certain effect in the first period [for example, the period during which the duel scene is animated in the swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 35 (A1) to 35 (A2)] [for example, FIG. 35]. It is the timing when there is a possibility that the notice of chance up by the Boy character BOY shown in (A2)] will be performed.
The first timing is notified between the start and the end of the first period.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the period display may be for notifying only the first timing, or may be for notifying other than the first timing. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

Further, the first timing may be such that only the sixth display may be started to be displayed in the first period, or the display other than the sixth display may be started to be displayed in the first period. It may be something that can be done. Further, the first timing may be such that the sixth display is always started to be displayed in the first period, or the sixth display may not be started to be displayed in the first period. You may.

Further, only the first timing may be notified between the start and the end of the first period, and the first period may be notified between the start and the end of the first period. Other than the timing may be notified. Further, the first timing may be notified without fail between the start and the end of the first period, and the first period is between the start and the end of the first period. The timing may not be notified.

Further, the first timing may be notified only during the period from the start to the end of the first period, and the first timing may be notified other than the period from the start to the end of the first period. One timing may be notified.

In addition, "with the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may change at the first speed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, with the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may change only at the first speed, or with the passage of time, the display mode of the second display may change. At least a part of the display mode may change at a speed other than the first speed. Further, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may always change at the first speed according to the passage of time, and at least a part of the second display may change with the passage of time. The display mode may not change at the first speed.

Further, with the passage of time, at least a part of the display modes of the second display may change at the first speed, or at least a part of the second display may change with the passage of time. Other than some display modes may change at the first rate.

In addition, "when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed than when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the first speed". Is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed, the jackpot symbol may be finally fixedly displayed, or at least a part of the second display may be displayed. Even if the mode changes at the second speed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

Further, "The first display is an effect display [for example, an effect display by the navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 38 (A1) to 38 (A9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the second display is an effect display [for example, display of the old man's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 38 (A4) to (A9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini. Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A1)].
The first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A1)].
The countdown display is a display that notifies the timing until a certain effect is performed by performing a countdown [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A1) to 41 (A7), a timer notice display is displayed. The countdown in the timer display of TM1 informs the timing of the pseudo-ream, etc.],
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display changes from the first display mode [for example, the small size display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A1)] to the second display. The mode may change to [for example, a large-sized display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A3)].
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, since the variation of the effect is increased by changing the display mode of the countdown display, it may be possible to entertain the player until a certain effect is performed.

Further, according to this game table, the countdown display itself may be attracting attention by changing the display mode of the countdown display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may always include the countdown display, or may not include the countdown display. Further, the first display may be a countdown display, and the first display may not be a countdown display.

Further, the countdown display may be notified only by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may be notified by other than counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed. It may be something to do. Further, the countdown display may always notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by performing a countdown, or may not notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by performing a countdown. There may be one.

Further, the display mode of the first display may change only from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, or the first display mode may be changed during the display of the countdown display. The display mode of the display may change from the first display mode to a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, the display mode of the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, or the display of the first display may be displayed during the display of the countdown display. The mode may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

Further, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only during the display of the countdown display, and other than during the display of the countdown display, the first display mode may be changed. The display mode of one display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

The countdown display may be a timer display.

Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is ended. You may. Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the countdown is started after the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the countdown ends. Good.

Further, "The countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display is terminated by the end of the symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (1) to (7). , Timer notice display The countdown display in the timer display of TM1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display and ends during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the countdown display for notifying the timing until a certain effect is performed is completed during the execution of one symbol variation display, so that the effect may not be redundant.

Here, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and only the countdown display may be terminated by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display. Display other than the countdown display may be completed by the time the symbol variation display is completed. In addition, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be always terminated by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol is concerned. The countdown display may not end by the time the variable display ends.

Further, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be terminated only until the symbol variation display is completed, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol is concerned. The countdown display may end other than until the variation display ends.

In addition, "the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the first display size [for example, small size].
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size [for example, a large size].
Of the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by increasing the display size of the countdown display, it may be possible to change the degree of expectation for the countdown display (attention is paid to the countdown display with the increased display size).

Here, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the first display size, or the first display may be a display size other than the first display size. It may be the display mode that is displayed. Further, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the first display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the first display size. There may be a display mode.

Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the second display size, or the first display may be displayed in a display size other than the second display size. It may be the display mode shown. Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the second display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the second display size. There may be a display mode.

The size of the display size may be the same. For example, the display size may be the same, but the color and shape of the frame, characters, and the like may be different.

Further, the first display size may be larger than the second display size.

Further, "when the display of the countdown display is started [for example, when the display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 20 (3)", the first item is described. The display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first display. It may be displayed in a display mode other than one display mode. Further, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may always be displayed in the first display mode, and when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first. There may be cases where it is not displayed in the display mode of.

Further, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the countdown display is started, and the first display may be displayed other than when the display of the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, "when the display of the first display is started [for example, when the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 20 (2)", the first display is displayed. Displayed in the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. May be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. The display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the first display is started, and the first display may be displayed in the first display mode other than when the display of the first display is started. One display may be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, "During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 41 (A2) to FIG. (A3) show. As described above, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are displayed during the display of the countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1, the timer notice display TM1 Is changing from small size to large size, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to expect that the display mode will change during the countdown display.

Here, during the display of the countdown display, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode, and during the display of the countdown display, the first display is the first. The display mode of the above may be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode without fail. Further, during the display of the countdown display, the first display may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

Further, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode only during the display of the countdown display, and the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode other than the countdown display. The display mode may be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail.

In addition, "the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, as compared with the case where the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. If you do, the jackpot symbol will be displayed more easily in the end.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the first display will change to the second display mode.

When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally fixedly displayed, and the first display is the first display mode. Even when the display mode is changed from the above to the second display mode, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

Further, "The first display is a display in which the display position may change. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A2) to 41 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol display device. The display position has changed from approximately the center on the right side of the display screen of 208 to approximately the center],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by changing the display position of the first display, a visual change may be given and the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the display position may change, or one in which something other than the display position may change. Further, the first display may be one in which the display position always changes, or one in which the display position may not change.

Further, "When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes [for example, FIGS. 41 (A2) to 41 (A3). ), When the display size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a large size, the display position changes from the substantially right center to the substantially center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208], A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display mode of the first display changes and the display position also changes, it may be possible to draw more attention to the first display.

Here, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, only the display position of the first display may change, or the first display changes from the first display mode. When the display mode is changed to the second display mode, a display position other than the display position of the first display may be changed. Further, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may always change, and the first display changes from the first display mode to the first display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the first display is the first display mode. The display position of the first display may be changed even in cases other than the case where the display mode is changed from the first to the second display mode.

In addition, "the first display is a display in which a movement display [for example, an animation display of an enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1] may be performed.
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A2) to 41 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is animated by an enlarged display. Enlarged display, display position changes, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, a visual change can be given by the moving display of the first display, so that the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, the first display may be a display in which only the movement display is performed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, the movement display may change only the display position of the first display, or the movement display may change the display position of something other than the display position of the first display. May be good. Further, the display position of the first display may always change due to the movement display, or the display position of the first display may not change due to the movement display. ..

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, or the display position of the first display may change due to something other than the movement display. Good.

In addition, "While the movement display is being displayed, the countdown by the countdown display proceeds.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, while the movement display is being displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, or while the movement display is being displayed, something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be continued. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued even while the movement display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued even while the movement display is being displayed.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only while the movement display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be continued other than while the movement display is being displayed.

In addition, "During the display of the movement display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, while the movement display is being displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, or while the movement display is being displayed, something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted without fail during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the movement display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the movement display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the movement display is not displayed.

Further, "The countdown display is a display that counts down the time until the certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A2) to 41 (A7), the timer of the timer notice display TM1. The countdown on the display informs the timing of the pseudo-ream, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the countdown display may only count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may perform a countdown other than the time until a certain effect is performed. Further, the countdown display may always count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may not count down the time until a certain effect is performed.

In addition, "By displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it is notified that it is time to perform the certain effect [for example, FIGS. 41 (A7) to 41 (A8) show. As described above, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the character "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified only that it is the timing when a certain effect is performed, or by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. , It may be notified that it is not the timing when a certain effect is performed. Further, by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect, and by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified. It may not be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

Further, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect only by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, and other than displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. Also, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

Further, "The countdown display is configured to be erased after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A7) to 41 (A11). After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 is deleted, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the production may not be redundant by deleting the countdown display when the countdown is completed.

Here, it may be configured so that only the countdown display is deleted after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, other than the countdown display. The display of may also be configured to be erased. Further, the countdown display may be configured to be always deleted after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the countdown display may be deleted after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. It may be configured so that it may not be done.

Further, the countdown display may be configured to be deleted only after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the countdown display may be displayed other than after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. May be configured to be erased.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a display of the character" attention "in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A8)".
The second display is a display that is not included in the certain effect.
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is deleted after the second display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 41 (A7) to the same. As shown in FIG. (A11), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 displays the character "attention" instead of the timer display, and then the timer notice display TM1 is erased. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, when the countdown display is erased, the second display is displayed, so that the effect of the effect on the erasure of the countdown display may be improved.

Here, the second display may not be included only in a certain effect, or may not be included in an effect other than a certain effect. Further, the second display may not always be included in a certain effect, or may be included in a certain effect. Further, the second display may be included in a certain effect.

Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be deleted after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. Is displayed, after the second display is displayed, the display other than the countdown display may be deleted. Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be configured to be always deleted after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. Is displayed, the countdown display may not be cleared after the second display is displayed.

Further, the countdown display may be configured to be deleted after the second display is displayed only when the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. In addition to the case where is displayed, the countdown display may be configured to disappear after the second display is displayed. Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be configured to be deleted only after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. May be configured so that the countdown display is cleared even after the second display is displayed when is displayed.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, sub-display device 208S or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (A1), small. The size timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the sub display device 208S, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode may be displayed. Is displayed, the first display may be displayed on a display means other than the first display means. Further, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be always displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode may be displayed. When displayed, the first display may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, the first display may be displayed on the first display means only when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, or the first display of the first display mode may be displayed. The first display may be displayed on the first display means in cases other than the above.

In addition, "when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display changes to the second display. It may be displayed on the means [For example, as shown in FIGS. 42 (A2) to 42 (A3), when the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a large size, the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol. Displayed on display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display means to be displayed when the display mode of the first display changes is changed, it may be visually interesting and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Here, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed only on the second display means. In some cases, the first display means the second display means when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode. It may be displayed on a display means other than the above. Further, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is always displayed on the second display means. When the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display becomes the second display means. It may not be displayed.

Further, when the first display is displayed on the second display means only when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode. The first display is the second display even when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means is not changed to the second display mode. It may be displayed on the display means of.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The countdown display described so far may be a display performed only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be performed as a look-ahead notice. That is, it can be said that the countdown display also functions as a notice of the symbol variation display and may also function as a look-ahead notice. Here, it may be performed only as a look-ahead notice.

Further, when the countdown display is performed as a look-ahead notice, the countdown display may be displayed in the period between the symbol variation display and the next symbol variation display. In that case, the time notification by the countdown display may be stopped / interrupted / stopped during the symbol stop display (for example, the time of the timing of the final stop of the symbol is also displayed during the symbol stop display (however, the countdown). (Not done) or the time notation may be stopped. The time notification by the countdown display may be continued even during the symbol stop display. Also, the countdown may be performed internally even during the symbol stop display. However, the countdown may be stopped internally while the symbol stop is displayed.

In addition, when displaying the countdown display as a look-ahead notice, if there is a hold in which the fluctuation time changes depending on the number of holds (for example, a hold with an indefinite fluctuation time), the countdown display is not performed. May be good. This is because if the symbol fluctuation display time is indefinite, it may not be possible to know when the countdown will reach 0, so for example, it is necessary to match the occurrence timing (pseudo-ream or reach). In the case of development, etc.), it is preferable to perform only in the symbol variation display.

On the other hand, the countdown display may be performed even when the hold with an indefinite fluctuation time is in the hold. In this case, for example, an effect that does not cause a problem even if it occurs suddenly (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, an effect such as a round promotion during a big hit, a telop display such as "super hot approaching", etc. It can be applied in cases where it is sufficient if the timer countdown is completed by the end of the subject's hold digestion. In addition, a timing that is also when an effect that requires timing adjustment occurs (for example, the start of a pending symbol variation display that is a look-ahead target) n The effect is such that the time is forcibly adjusted. May be good.

In addition, the countdown display may be displayed during the jackpot. In this case, the display may be continued across the interval between rounds. Here, since the period of one round is indefinite during the jackpot game, it is preferable to set the countdown time appropriately. For example, the countdown display may not occur in the final round, or during the jackpot end interval (final). When the jackpot end display period ends after the round ends and the timer is set to 0 at the next timer interrupt (for example, 4ms), or when a certain round is reached, the book is forcibly booked. The combined time (for example, "00:00" may be forcibly displayed even if it is not 0 in the countdown display to generate an effect, etc.) may be displayed.

In addition, the time until the simultaneous production, the production by the RTC, or the like starts may be notified by a countdown display.

Further, the display device may be composed of a transmissive liquid crystal, and further, an effect means such as an effect movable means and a decorative member, and other display devices such as a drum and an LCD are arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal. They may be configured to be visible via. At this time, the transmissive liquid crystal may be configured so that the back side can be switched between a state in which the back side can be seen and a state in which the back side is difficult to see by the liquid crystal shutter.

Further, the operation mode of the effect movable means such as the accessory may be changed or the light emission mode of the lamp may be changed according to the notification of the time by the countdown display.

In addition, a display foretelling that the countdown display itself may be affected (for example, timer addition / subtraction, interruption, fast forward / rewind, enlargement / reduction of the countdown display, change in color or shape, etc.). (For example, a production that incites that something may occur due to the mini character, etc.) may be performed. For example, when a mini character appears, something may happen to the countdown display (when nothing is actually done or when something is done), and when another character appears, something is always done. Or you may perform an effect that always does something when another character appears. At this time, for example, the larger the number of characters appearing, the easier it is to win a big hit.

Further, when the number of countdown displays is large, it may be easy to make a big hit in the end, or when a notice of chance up is given, it may be easy to make a big hit in the end.

In addition, even if a part or all of the chance-up meter is enlarged / reduced, or a promotion effect (for example, the color or shape changes, the character or marker indicating the current position changes, etc.) is performed. Good.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game table equipped with an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display [for example, a notice due to the appearance of the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a period display [for example, a display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2)].
The period display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 29, the chance up meter CMT is lined by the swordsman reach. It may be displayed during the specified period, etc.],
The period display is a display including a cursor display [for example, the Sabohani character SBH shown in FIG. 29 (2)].
The cursor display is displayed at the first position [for example, at the first checkpoint CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (2)] from the start position [for example, the position indicated by the start point SP shown in FIG. 29 (2)]. By moving to the end position [for example, the position shown by the final point GP shown in FIG. 29 (2)] via the indicated position, etc.], the start to end of the certain period is notified. Is composed of
When the cursor display reaches the first position, the first timing [for example, shown at the first checkpoint CP1 in which the advance notice due to the appearance of the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4) is started. Timing, etc.]
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started in the reach effect display.
The period display is a display in which the first chance-up display [for example, the display of “UP” above the first checkpoint CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (6)] may be displayed.
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the display position corresponding to the first position (hereinafter, "the first display position [for example, shown in FIG. 29 (6). The first chance-up display is displayed at the "UP" display position above the first checkpoint CP1] ").
When the first chance-up display is displayed, the first chance-up display is continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the end position [for example, the first chance-up display is displayed. As shown in FIG. 29 (25), the display of "UP" above the first checkpoint CP1 is continuously displayed until the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of displays is a third effect display [for example, a display of a cut-in of an old man shown in FIG. 33 (A2), a display of an effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b), etc.].
The third effect display is an effect display different from the first effect display.
The display of the third effect display may be started after the display of the period display is started and before the first timing is reached [for example, FIGS. 33 (A1) to 33 (A2) and FIG. As shown in FIG. 33 (A2b), in the production by the chance up meter CMT, the cut-in display of the grandfather shown in FIG. 33 (A2) and the display of the grandfather's cut-in shown in FIG. The effect image shown in A2b) may be displayed],
While the third effect display is being displayed, the period display is hidden [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to (A2) and (A2b), FIG. 33 (A2) shows. When the cut-in of the grandfather shown is displayed or the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Further, "the period display is a display including the first checkpoint display [for example, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (4)].
The first checkpoint display is a display indicating the first position.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first checkpoint display is a display displayed until the cursor display reaches the end position [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (25), the first checkpoint display is displayed. Checkpoint CP1 is displayed until the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "when the third effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the third effect display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second effect display [for example, a display of the lever image 136V shown in FIG. 29 (18)].
The cursor display is shown in the first position and the second position [for example, FIG. 29 (2).
It is configured to move to the end position via both the third checkpoint CP3 position, etc.].
When the cursor display reaches the second position, the second timing [for example, the timing shown at the third checkpoint CP3 when the display of the lever image 136V shown in FIG. 29 (18) is started]. Was notified that
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the second effect display may be started in the reach effect display.
The period display is a display in which a second chance-up display [for example, a display of “UP” above the third checkpoint CP3 shown in FIG. 29 (19)] may be displayed.
When the display of the second effect display is started at the second timing, the display position corresponding to the second position (hereinafter, "second display position [for example, shown in FIG. 29 (19), is shown. The second chance-up display is displayed at the "UP" display position above the third checkpoint CP3, etc.] ".
When the second chance-up display is displayed, the second chance-up display is continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the end position [for example,. , As shown in FIG. 29 (25), the display of "UP" above the third checkpoint CP3 is continuously displayed until the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "only when the first effect display is started, the first chance-up display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (4) to (6), the character of the boy". When the notice due to the appearance of BOY is started, "UP" is displayed above the first checkpoint CP1, but as shown in FIGS. 30 (4a) to (7a), the first checkpoint If the notice of chance up is not started even if the Sabohani character SBH reaches CP1, "UP" will not be displayed above the first checkpoint CP1],
Only when the display of the second effect display is started, the second chance-up display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (18) to (19), the lever image 136Va is displayed. When is started, "UP" is displayed above the third checkpoint CP3, and as shown in FIGS. 30 (17b) to (20b), the character of Sabohani is displayed at the third checkpoint CP3. If the display of the lever image 136V is not started even when SBH arrives, "UP" is not displayed above the third checkpoint CP3, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the period display is a display in which the first non-chance-up display [for example, a display of" x "indicating that the chance-up notice has not been given, etc." may be displayed.
The period display is a display in which a second non-chance-up display [for example, a display of "x" indicating that the notice of chance-up has not been given] may be displayed.
When the first effect display is not started at the first timing, the first non-chance-up display is displayed at the first display position [for example, in FIG. 30 (7a ″). As shown, when the notice of chance up is not given at the first checkpoint CP1, instead of the display of "UP", the indication of "x" indicating that the notice of chance up was not given is displayed. Etc.],
When the second effect display is not started at the second timing, the second non-chance-up display is displayed at the second display position [for example, chance at the third checkpoint CP3]. If the notice of up is not given, instead of the display of "UP", "x" is displayed to indicate that the notice of chance up was not given],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the period display is a display including a second checkpoint display [for example, a display of the third checkpoint CP3 shown in FIG. 29 (4), etc.].
The second checkpoint display is a display indicating the second position.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The period display is a display including a display suggesting that the hit / fail determination result is derived when the cursor display reaches the end position [for example, the display shown in FIG. 29 (4). 3 Checkpoint CP3 display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "after the third effect display is displayed and the period display is hidden, when the display of the third effect display ends in the certain period, the period display is displayed again. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A2a) to 33 (A3a), after the chance up meter CMT is erased by the display of the cut-in of the princess character, the cut-in of the princess character When the display ends and the animation display of the duel scene is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "after the period display is hidden, the period display is not displayed in the certain period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A2) to (A5). After the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display of the old character, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also, "The certain period is the period during which Super Reach is being executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 116, an example of the effect applicable to the gaming table such as the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described so far will be described in detail. Here, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 49 to 116 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 48 and 117 to 193, and vice versa. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 1 to 48 and 117 to 193 to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 49 to 116. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

A power-on process of the main control unit executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 (a) is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on processing, FIG. 49 (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and FIG. 49 (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

First, in step S101, the stack pointer is initialized. In this stack pointer initial setting, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.

Subsequently, in step S102, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (this). In the example, it is determined whether or not the voltage is 9V) or higher. When the voltage value of the power supply is less than the predetermined value (step S102: No), the weight is waited until the voltage value of the power supply becomes the predetermined value or more, and when the voltage value exceeds the predetermined value (step S102: Yes). The process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the internal register is initialized. In this internal register initial setting, the process of starting the WDT 314, the access permission of the RAM 308, the process of setting the numerical value that determines the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit described later in each register of the timer circuit 312, and the process of setting the main control unit 300 The process proceeds to step S104 after performing processing such as initial setting of serial communication between the payout control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600 and setting of the maximum value of the hardware random number.

In step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is operated by a clerk of a game store is on (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary) (step S104: Yes), the basic circuit 302 is set to the initial state in step S108. Proceed and execute the initial startup process described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary) (step S104: No), the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and it is determined whether or not the power status information is information indicating suspend. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend (step S105: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to bring the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and the initial start-up process described later is executed. On the other hand, if the power status information is information indicating suspend (step S105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S106.

In step S106, a checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a register having a 1-byte structure having an initial value of 0, and the calculated check is performed. Determines if the sum result is a particular value (eg 0) (whether the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal) (step S106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S107 to return to the state before the power failure. Execute the startup process. On the other hand, when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal) (step S106: No), the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state in step S108. Proceed and execute the initial startup process described later.

Here, the return activation process will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (b). When the return start process is started, in step S201, the initial setting at the time of return start is performed. Specifically, the process of setting the information indicating "return start" in the power status information, the process of setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to off, and the device error (error flag due to magnetic detection, winning abnormality, etc.) Performs processing such as clearing, clearing the previous device error status, and clearing the device error status for security signals.

Subsequently, in step S202, after setting the address after the storage area that was initially set in step S201 as the address for starting the RAM clear, the return activation process is terminated.

In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (this setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area, and a power recovery command is set in this transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has been restored to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the sub-command transmission process in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later. ..

Next, the initial startup process will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (c). When the initial startup process is started, in step S301, the initial setting of the soft random number is performed. Specifically, the soft random numbers used in the lottery for special drawings and ordinary drawings are initially set.

Subsequently, in step S302, the address after the storage area that was initially set in step S301 is set as the address for starting the RAM clear, and then the initial startup process is terminated.

In addition, in the initial startup process, for example, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initial start processing of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the command setting transmission processing (step S405) in the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 49 (a), after the return start process or the initial start process is executed, the RAM clear process is performed in step S109. In this RAM clear process, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

Subsequently, in step S110, the sub-control-related activation setting is performed. In this sub-control-related activation setting, the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 is set, and in the present embodiment, the sub-command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 three times. Therefore, the process of setting the initial value of the sub-control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

In step S111, the output port is set. In this output port setting, symbol data, launch position designation signal, error status signal, prize ball signal, normal figure hit signal, normal electric accessory (2nd special figure start port 232, electric chew) operating signal, normal figure operation Medium signal, easy-to-win status signal, special figure hit signal, special figure small hit signal (however, limited to models equipped with small hit), special figure fluctuation signal, special figure fluctuation time shortened state signal, special electric accessory (variable prize) Port 234, attacker) Operating signal, condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, grand prize opening solenoid signal, ordinary electric accessory solenoid signal, symbol LED data, external terminal board signal, etc. are set. Set the output port, etc. Further, after the processing of step S111 is completed, the process proceeds to the main control unit main loop processing. Here, the easy-to-win state may indicate an electric support state.

Next, the main control unit main loop processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 50. It is a flowchart of the main control part main loop processing.

When the main control unit 300 finishes executing the above-mentioned main control power-on processing, the main control unit 300 then starts executing the main control unit main loop processing. In step S401 of the main control unit main loop processing, interrupt prohibition is prohibited. After making the settings, in step S402, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted (restarted). In step S403, the basic random number initial value update process is performed (step S403). In this basic random number initial value update process, a process of updating the initial value of the random number counter for determining the special figure and the random number counter for generating the initial value for generating the initial value of the random number counter for determining the normal figure is performed. To update the random number counter for initial value generation, for example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

In step S404, after setting the interrupt permission, in step S405, the subcommand transmission process is performed). In this subcommand transmission process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and if there is a command to be transmitted, a process of transmitting the command or the like is performed. In step S406, after performing other determination random number update processing, the process proceeds to step S407. In the other determination random number update process, processing such as updating the special figure fluctuation time determination random number and the normal figure fluctuation time determination random number is performed.

In step S407, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9V), and if it is equal to or higher than the predetermined value (step S407). : Yes), the process returns to step S401 to continue the main control unit main loop processing, and if it is less than a predetermined value (step S407: No), the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, a power failure process is performed. In this power interruption process, after setting interrupt prohibition, the power status information is set to "suspend". Further, a checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a register having a 1-byte structure having an initial value of 0, and the predetermined storage of the RAM 308 is performed. Store in the area. Then, after setting to prohibit access to the RAM 308, the HALT state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal of the main control unit is used as an opportunity to interrupt the timer of the main control unit. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S501, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S502 and step S503, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S403 is updated, and then the special figure determination random number counter used by the main control unit 300 is used. , The random number counter for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the random number counter for determining the normal figure fluctuation period are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as a certain random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original value is obtained. Random number counter Stored in the storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, set in the random number counter, and the random number counter makes one round next. In order to determine that, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value of the special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value of the special figure 2 may be provided separately.

In step S504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is limited (whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated), and if the interrupt function is limited (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated). In case) (step S504: Yes), the process proceeds to step S519, and if the interrupt function is not limited (when the first sub-control unit 400 is activated) (step S504: No), step S505 is performed. move on. Here, the term "interrupt function limited" means that the start wait counter of the first sub-control unit 400 set in step S110 of the power-on processing is not set to 0, that is, in step S504, the first If it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub-control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S505. When bidirectional communication is possible with the first sub-control unit 400, a command for confirming whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If a confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (magnetic detection error in the present embodiment) is occurring, and if a specific error is occurring (step S505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520. If a specific error is not occurring (step S505: No), the process proceeds to step S506.

In step S506, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the timer for updating the symbol display symbol for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for counting, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing / stopping the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period , Update various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S507, processing such as updating the input port state is performed. In this input port state update processing, etc., the special figure start port (first special figure start port 230, second special figure start port 232), normal figure start port 228, and out port 240 are passed through the input port of the I / O 310. , The presence or absence of signal input related to switches such as the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 and the winning opening (general winning opening 226) is monitored and stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time. Further, when it is determined that the winning of the starting port and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area is deleted as the winning is invalid.

Further, in step S508, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning opening winning process, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S507 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if detection is continuously performed for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the detection signal is input, it is determined that a prize has been won. If the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it may be determined that a prize has been won.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S507, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting port 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is judged that there was a passage of. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226 and 234 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won.

For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

Further, in the winning opening winning process in step S508, the winning opening counter update process is also performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, the RAM 308 is filled with each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in the winning opening winning process in step S508, the winning acceptance process is also performed. In this prize acceptance process, whether or not the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the normal figure start port 228, and the variable winning port 234 have been won or not match the prize determination pattern information. Judgment is made using the judgment result. When the first special figure start port 230 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is set from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And the value is acquired as the special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

Further, when the second special figure start port 232 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. It is acquired as a random number value, and the value is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a prize in the normal figure start port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is acquired as the normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When a prize is won in the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening. When the random number of the special figure is acquired, the special figure look-ahead process (pre-reading judgment, symbol, and variable time look-ahead lottery) is also performed. The special figure look-ahead processing will be described in detail later.

In step S509, a winning-related error check process is performed. In this prize-related error check process, a process of confirming and monitoring a prize-related abnormality and setting an abnormality according to the result of the process is performed. Some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S510, the outswitch input update process is performed. In this out-switch input update process, the number of game balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for the production.

In step S511, the serial command management process is performed. In this serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. The command transmitted by the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 is a communication confirmation command (communication status with the payout control unit 600) transmitted after the lapse of the start waiting time of the first sub-control unit 400 after the power is turned on. (Command to notify the activation method (initial activation, return activation) of the main control unit 300), the number of prize balls command to instruct the payout of the game balls for the designated prize balls, and the like.

The commands received by the main control unit 300 from the payout control unit 600 include a communication confirmation return command (a response command indicating that the payout control unit 600 has received a command from the main control unit 300) and a test firing test signal. Command (prize ball signal output request), command including information on the occurrence status of payout error (including no error), prize ball payout operation status command (prize ball payout operation / non-operation) There is a command to indicate and a display (instructing the first sub-control unit 400 to turn on / off the LED or the like) indicating that the payout is in progress).

Next, in step S512, the special figure state update process for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. The special figure state update process executes one of the following eight processes according to the special figure processing state. The special figure state update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

In step S513, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

Further, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so that the display mode is the out-of-order symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a definite display of one of the hit symbol and the miss symbol. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, during 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332 of the 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is out of order, the out-of-normal map flag is turned on as described later. When this out-of-normal flag is on, even in the normal-figure state update process at the end of the predetermined stop display period described above (the timing when the value of the normal-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S514 without doing anything.

Further, in step S513, a lottery process related to a general drawing is also performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Further, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal figure timer random value is then acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One of the time for variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

In step S514, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area are read out in step S507, the presence or absence of a predetermined error is monitored, and when a predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 is notified. Set the device information indicating the presence or absence of an error in the transmission information to be transmitted. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display are displayed via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S515, the external output signal management process is performed. In this external output signal management process, processing for preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. In step S516, the subcommand management process is performed. In this subcommand management process, preparations are made for transmitting various commands to the first subcommand unit 400. The output schedule information (subcommand) to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, and the bits 15 are strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is set). Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, The command type can be specified, such as a RAM clear command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol change start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included. , In the case of the command to specify the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the first special figure start port 230 has been won, whether or not the second special figure start port 232 has been won, and whether or not the variable winning opening 234 has been won. Including presence / absence. In the present embodiment, when there is a prize in the variable winning opening 234, a large winning opening winning command is set.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are selected. Information indicating the timer number, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 and is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game underframe lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the control information, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set.

Further, in the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game underframe lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, which is stored in the RAM 308. Information indicating the effect control information to be performed, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. Further, in this step S516, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300 depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S517, the display display setting process is performed. In this display display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as "number of reserved balls, symbol combination", status (during electric support or non-electric support), right-handed state, etc. of normal and special figures is displayed. Performs processing such as setting the data to be output. In step S518, output management processing is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting the control signal set in each process to the solenoid or the LED, a process of transmitting the prepared command to the first sub-control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

In step S519, the sub-control start wait wait process is performed. In this sub-control start-wait wait processing, in order to wait for the first sub-control unit 400 to start and become communicable, one sub-control start-wait counter is subtracted, and this start-wait counter becomes 0. If so, prepare to send the specified command. In addition, as a predetermined command, a power-on command, a command related to the payout control unit 600, one or more of the commands (for example, a command indicating that all errors are cleared, and a lower plate full tank error have occurred). Command indicating that there is, an error indicating that an insufficient number of payout balls error has occurred, a main control communication error command (a command indicating that communication with the payout control unit 600 is in an abnormal state), a CR unit unconnected error There is a command indicating that is in the generated state, a firing position command (a command for notifying the firing position according to the state), and the like.

In step S520, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S501 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main control unit main loop processing. ..

Next, the special figure state update process (step S512) in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the special figure state update process.

In step S601, the special figure processing state address is acquired and saved, and in the next step S602, processing is executed according to the value indicated by the special figure processing state stored in the RAM 308. Specifically, here, based on the value indicated by the special figure processing state, the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53 (a), the symbol changing process shown in FIG. 54, and the special figure shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later. Display confirmation weight processing, hit start weight processing shown in FIG. 56A, special electric combination operation processing shown in FIG. 57, special electric combination remaining ball detection processing shown in FIG. 60, special electric combination operation end processing shown in FIG. 61, FIG. 62. One of the following hit end display weight processing is executed.

In step S603, the winning easy status is set to ON. Further, in step S604, the state change of the special figure processing state is determined, and in the next step S605, the presence or absence of the state change of the special figure processing state (change of the value indicated by the special figure processing state) is determined, and the special figure processing is performed. If there is no change in the state of the state (when the value indicated by the special figure processing state has not changed) (step S605: No), the special figure state update process is terminated and there is a change in the state of the special figure processing state. If (step S605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the "variation waiting state", and if applicable (step S606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if not applicable (step S606). : No), the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the "hit start display weight state", and if applicable (step S607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if not applicable (step S607: Yes). Step S607: No), the special figure state update process is terminated.

In step S608, the transmission request of the subcommand is set (in the present embodiment, after setting the transmission request of the game state command including the game state of the special figure and the normal figure, the launch position including the information of whether or not it is in the right-handed state. After setting the command transmission request), the special figure status update process is terminated. The order of transmission requests for subcommands is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or transmission requests for a plurality of commands may be collectively performed in one process.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). FIG. 53A is a flowchart of the special figure-related lottery process executed in the special figure state update process.

This special figure-related lottery process is a process called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "variation waiting state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process.

In step S701 of the special figure-related lottery process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S702, it is determined whether or not the acquired number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 0, and the number is 0. In the case of (when there is no hold of the special figure 2 variable game) (step S702: Yes), the process proceeds to step S703, and when it is other than 0 (when there is a hold of the special figure 2 variable game) (step S702: Yes). No), the process proceeds to step S705 in order to execute the process related to the special figure 2.

In step S703, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S704, it is determined whether or not the acquired number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 0, and if it is 0 (special figure 1). When there is no hold of the variable game (step S704: Yes), the special figure-related lottery process is completed, and when it is other than 0 (when there is a hold of the special figure 1 variable game) (step S704: No). , Step S705 proceeds to execute the process related to the special figure 1.

In step S705, when the process related to the special figure 2 is executed, the value of the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 stored in the RAM 308 is subtracted by one, and when the process related to the special figure 1 is executed, the RAM 308 is used. The value of the stored special figure 1 number of reserved balls is subtracted by one. In step S706, the special figure random number transfer process is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process related to the special figure 2 is executed, the random number value stored in the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 2 to 4 of the special figure 2 is transferred to the hold 1 to the special figure 2. When shifting to the random number storage area corresponding to 3 and clearing the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 of the special figure 2 and executing the process related to the special figure 1, the hold 2 to 4 of the special figure 1 is supported. The random number value stored in the random number storage area is shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 1 to 3 of the special figure 1, and the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 of the special figure 1 is cleared. As described above, the game console (pachinko machine) in the present embodiment is the special figure 2 priority variable machine. In addition, up to four special drawings 2 and four special drawings can be stored.

In step S707, a lottery process for each special figure is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this special figure per lottery process, the winning / failing of the special figure 2 variable game (or the special figure 1 variable game) is determined. In step S708, the display symbol lottery process is performed. In this display symbol lottery process, the second special figure is based on the result of the special figure per lottery process and the random number value in step S707 with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table (or the special figure 1 symbol determination table). A lottery is performed for the special figure display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special figure display device 212).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, various customizations can be made.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the contents of customization that can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the symbol variation display is not started even after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the symbol variation display was stopped, the mode shifts to the demonstration mode, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to the demonstration mode. It becomes a demo screen. From the time when the special symbol symbol variation display is stopped until the transition to the demonstration mode, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the combination of the decorative symbol stop symbols, and the operation means such as the chance button 136 is used. When you operate it, a dedicated animation may be displayed. On the demo screen, a dedicated animation is displayed, or when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (decorative symbols are composed of images such as characters and character images (including numbers), images of characters etc. are displayed on the demo screen. Only is displayed and the character image may be hidden, or both the image such as a character and the character image may be displayed), or a movie including the model title (Note that the degree of expectation) In addition to displaying a production introduction movie that introduces high notices and reach with high expectations, there is also a period when menu icons, volume adjustment icons, and brightness adjustment icons are displayed. .. The demonstration mode may include a state in which a combination of stop displays of decorative symbols is displayed.

When the chance button 136 is operated while the menu icon, the volume adjustment icon, and the brightness adjustment icon are displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an option menu. Further, by operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, the volume adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the volume of the speaker 120 can be increased or decreased. Further, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137, a brightness adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the amount of LED light such as the game board lamp 442 and / and the game underframe lamp 452 is increased or decreased. Can be made to. Here, the game board lamp 442 includes the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 14 and the like, but it may not be included. If the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 are operated while the volume adjustment window is displayed, the brightness adjustment window is displayed, and conversely, the operation key unit 137 is displayed while the brightness adjustment window is displayed. If you operate the left and right keys of, the volume adjustment window will be displayed.

As will be described in detail later, an icon for "returning to the demo screen" is provided in the option menu, and if you operate the chance button 136 with the cursor on this icon, you will return to the demo screen. be able to. Further, when the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started, the option menu is automatically terminated, and the decoration symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Furthermore, if there is no operation for a certain period of time (for example, 1 minute) while the option menu is displayed, the demo screen is automatically returned.

If the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, the volume is determined, the demo screen is returned from the volume adjustment window, and the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137. When pressed, the amount of light is determined, and the screen returns to the demo screen from the brightness adjustment window. Further, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed, the demo screen is automatically returned after a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the left / right key or the up / down key. Further, when the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started, the volume adjustment window and the brightness adjustment window automatically disappear, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 63 (b) is a diagram showing the structure of the option menu.

In the option menu, it is possible to roughly divide and perform "effect customization", "character selection", "hold frame selection", "hold display selection", and "background display selection".

In the "auto button mode" of the "effect customization", the same response effect as when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated may be performed without operating the operation means such as the chance button 136. It is a mode. In addition, ON / OFF described in "option" of FIG. 63B means setting / non-setting and valid / invalid. "Long-press auto-continuous hitting" means that the operation means such as the chance button 136 is simply long-pressed, and the pressing is repeated at high speed during the long-pressing period (continuous hitting). ) It is a function that produces the same response effect as at the time, and the speed of repeated hits can be selected. The "group notice" is a kind of normal notice (notice of the change), and in this option menu, the player can select the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot of the group notice. For example, there is a 100% confidence that the fluctuation with the group notice displayed will be a big hit! ?? Although it is lower than, if you want to increase the frequency of appearance of the group notice as a notice of the change, set the reliability to 50%, and set the frequency of the group notice to appear as the notice of the change to 50%. Although it is low, if you want it to be displayed in the fluctuation as a notice of big hit rich (big hit confirmed), the reliability is 100%! ?? Set to. The "winning sound notice" is a kind of look-ahead notice when a prize is won at the special figure start opening and the number of holds increases. The winning sound notice may be a notice of the change. The back button means that it does not notify that the operation valid period of the operation means such as the chance button 136 has started and / or that the operation valid period of the operation means is in progress. When "Navigation" is turned on (set), for example, the chance button lamp 138 lights up during the operation validity period of the operation means, or a character display such as "It may be good to operate the operation means" is displayed. Will be done. "No look-ahead notice" does not mean all look-ahead notices other than the look-ahead notice by the display mode of the hold icon (for example, the look-ahead notice by the movable means (directing movable body) and the look-ahead notice display other than the hold icon by the display means) ( It is a setting to make it (corresponding to "ON"). "Premier up" is a setting that increases the frequency of appearance of a big hit rich or big hit confirmed effect (corresponding to "ON"). “No change in hold” is a setting that does not give a pre-reading notice (corresponding to “ON”) depending on the display mode of the hold icon. A "one-shot notification" is a specific notice about a big hit rich or big hit confirmation (for example, a directing operation by a directing movable body, a big hit rich (big hit confirmed) sound by a sound output means, a frame or a game board. A notice by a light emitting effect by a part or all of decorative LEDs can be mentioned.)

In addition, "big hit confirmation" in this specification means a symbol change in which the notice of big hit confirmation is displayed or a symbol change of pending look-ahead target when the notice of big hit confirmation and / or the notice of pre-reading notice is displayed. When the pre-reading notice of the jackpot confirmation is displayed toward the target, it indicates that the change or the pre-reading target hold is always a jackpot (the same applies to the following explanation).

Further, the "big hit rich" in the present specification means that the expectation for the big hit is high, and even if the notice of the big hit and / or the pre-reading notice is displayed, the notice of the big hit is displayed. It is shown that even if a big hit rich look-ahead notice is displayed for the symbol change that has been made or the symbol change that is reserved for look-ahead, it may be lost (the same applies to the following explanation). In addition, the jackpot richness may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed (the same applies to the following description).

Further, the description of "hot" in the present specification also means that the expectation for a big hit is high, but even if the notice of hotness and / or the notice of pre-reading notice is displayed, the symbol in which the hot notice is displayed is displayed. It is shown that even if a hot look-ahead notice is displayed for a change or a symbol change that is reserved for look-ahead, it may be lost (the same applies to the following explanation). Further, "hot" may indicate that the expectation of the jackpot is lower than that of the jackpot rich, and "extreme heat" may indicate that the jackpot is rich or the jackpot is confirmed (the following explanation). Same for).

In addition, "Daitomo" described in FIG. 63 (b) is a member service that accesses a Web server through an Internet line by registering as a member, and the level (lv) is obtained by accumulating experience points. It is a service that you can get various benefits depending on the level. When executing the membership service of "Daitomo", the pachinko machine 100 is set to the user mode. Some pachinko machines 100 have specifications that do not support the membership service of "Daitomo". For models with specifications that support the membership service of "Daitomo", if the user mode is set and the level of Daitomo reaches the 15th level, the setting of the back button navigation is released as a kind of production customization. Further, in FIG. 63 (b), the item described as "Daitomo setting" can be released only by registering as a member and setting the user mode. Therefore, even if the level is 0 at the time of joining Daitomo, the hold frame B can be used only by setting the user mode, for example, if the hold frame is selected. Here, the holding frame corresponds to a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 shown in FIG. 14 and the like. The "initial setting" means that the user mode is automatically selected when the user mode is not set. In addition, "Daitomo" can be enrolled before formal membership registration, and the enrolled person can use the old character in character selection as a trial play.

In addition, as one of the above benefits of Daitomo, there is an item that cannot be selected without raising the level of Daitomo. That is, among "character selection", "hold frame selection", "hold display selection", and "background display selection", the item in which the Daitomo level (lv) is displayed in the "open condition" is the displayed level. It is an item that can be selected only after reaching (lv).

FIG. 64 is a transition diagram of the option menu screen when the member service is not used.

By operating the up key or the down key of the operation key unit 137, the cursor moves up and down on the option menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Of the items "Customize production", "Character selection", "Hold frame selection", "Hold display selection", "Background display selection", "Initialize", and "Return to demo screen", they are connected by arrows. The cursor moves by operating the up key or the down key of the operation key unit 137, and a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor is displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, if the cursor is moved to the item of "effect customization" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the production customization screen. If the cursor is placed on the item "Return to demo screen" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the demo screen.

On the other hand, the "return" icon is displayed on each of the "effect customization screen", "character selection screen", "hold frame selection screen", "hold display selection screen", "background display selection screen", and "initialization confirmation screen". Is displayed, and if you move the cursor to the "Back" icon and press the chance button 136, you can return to the option menu screen. Further, the option menu screen may be returned to the option menu screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "back" icon.

Although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure start ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is the option menu screen, the "effect customization screen" is displayed. , "Character selection screen", "Hold frame selection screen", "Hold display selection screen", "Background display selection screen", and "Initialization confirmation screen" also shift to the screen of variable display of decorative symbols.

Subsequently, the matters described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64 will be specifically described with reference to a display example in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of calling the option menu screen, the volume adjustment window, and the brightness adjustment window from the demo screen. The example described here is an example of a pachinko machine 100 having specifications that do not support the membership service of "Daitomo". The opening condition of FIG. 63 (b) is ignored, and any item is selected from the beginning. It is possible. In the following embodiments, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an icon indicating the appearance of the cross keys (up key, down key, left key, right key) of the operation key unit and an icon indicating the appearance of the chance button. When the icon is displayed, the colorless and unpatterned icon indicates an inoperable operating means, and the icon displayed in another mode (colored or / and with a pattern) indicates an operable operating means.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, both the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display has not started since the final display of the stop symbol of the special symbol has been performed. In this state, when a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI shown in FIG. 65 (1) is started. Even before a certain period of time has elapsed, the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the special symbol has expired, and the next symbol variation display has not started (for example, the confirmation of the stop symbol of the special symbol in the state where there is no hold). If it is (immediately after the display period has elapsed), these icons MI, VI, and BI may be displayed by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136, the cross key of the operation unit, etc.). Even if these icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed, in addition to the condition that a certain fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the final display period of the stop symbol of the special figure has ended. Good. Alternatively, even if the display of these icons MI, VI, and BI is started, the option menu screen and volume adjustment can be performed for a certain period (for example, 3 seconds) by operating the chance button 136 and the cross key of the operation key unit 137. The window and the brightness adjustment window may be hidden.

Further, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI may include display (character display or image display) of the customized contents. For example, if it is a menu icon MI, it is a character display or icon display for effect customization, if it is a volume adjustment icon VI, it is a gauge display that indicates the volume level, and a brightness adjustment icon BI.
If so, a gauge display indicating the level of light intensity may be included. Further, the menu icon MI may include the display of major items shown in FIG. 63 (b) (for example, "character selection"), or may not be included as shown in FIG. 65 (1). May be good.

In FIG. 65 (2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit is operated. It is the same even if the upper key 137u is operated. The cross key is lit in white when there is no operation, but the pressed key is lit in red, but the cross key may not be provided with a decorative lamp.

By operating the down key 137d, the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (3). The brightness adjustment window BW has a larger display than the brightness adjustment icon BI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (3), the menu icon MI disappears and the volume adjustment icon VI shifts to the position of the menu icon MI. The brightness adjustment window BW, which is about four times as large as the brightness adjustment icon BI, is displayed. In this example, the amount of light of LEDs such as the game board lamp 442 and / and the game underframe lamp 452 can be adjusted in 5 steps, and the initial value is the brightest 5 levels.

In FIG. 65 (4), the lower key 137d is operated again, and in the luminance adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65 (5), the brightness adjustment window BW is lowered by one step to 4 levels.

In FIG. 65 (6), the upper key 137u of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in the luminance adjustment window BW shown in FIG. Even if the upper key 137u is operated in the state of 5 levels, the amount of light does not increase any more. Further, even if the down key 137d is operated in the state of one level, the amount of light does not decrease any more. If no operation is performed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), the demo screen returns to the demo screen in which the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed, but if the up key 137d or the down key 137u is operated, the period is fixed. The count start can be updated. That is, the period until returning to the demo screen can be extended. In addition, it may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this 0 level, the LED remains off.

In FIG. 65 (8), the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated. It is the same even if the left key 137l is operated.

By operating the right key, the volume adjustment window VW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (9). The volume adjustment window VW has a larger display than the volume adjustment icon VI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (9), the volume adjustment window VW is on the menu icon MI side and is about four times as large as the volume adjustment icon VI. The menu icon MI disappears, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the volume from the speaker 120 can be adjusted in 5 steps, and the initial value is 3 levels of the intermediate volume.

In FIG. 65 (10), the right key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again, and in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. Even if the right key is operated in the state of the loudest 5th level, the volume does not increase any more. Also, even if the left key is operated in the 1st level state, the volume does not decrease any more. Also, if no operation is performed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), the demo screen will return to the demo screen where the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed, but if the left key or right key is operated, the demo screen will be restored. The period can be extended. In addition, it may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this 0 level, the speaker 120 maintains mute.

After a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the last operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (13) displays a demo screen on which three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed. I'm back.

In FIG. 65 (14), the chance button 136 is operated and the chance button 136 is operated, so that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (15) displays the option menu screen. The chance button 136 emits red light when the built-in chance button lamp 138 is pressed, but it may be lit in red before it is pressed. On this option menu screen, the background display, hold frame UI, navigation character YM, 1st decorative symbol (3rd symbol), and 2nd decorative symbol (5th symbol) all disappear, and under the character display of "Menu". , In order from the top in a vertical row, there are 7 types of icons such as production customization icon, character selection icon, hold frame selection icon, hold display selection icon, background display selection icon, initialization icon, and back icon to return to the demo screen. It is displayed. On the left side of any one of these seven types of icons, a cursor icon cs that can be moved up and down with the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 is displayed. In FIG. 65 (14), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the effect customization icon is lit in red while the other icons are displayed in white. Further, on the option menu screen, a picture of an operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, among the operation key units 137, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. Further, among the chance button 136 and the cross keys, the designs of the cursor icon cs and the up / down keys 137u and d used for moving the cursor display are displayed in red. For the decision operation, the decision key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the decision key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

Here, even if the chance button 136 is operated during the brightness adjustment or the volume adjustment in FIGS. 65 (2) to (12), the option menu screen is not displayed, but it may be displayed. .. Further, the initial position of the cursor icon cs at the start of displaying the option menu screen may be the effect customization icon at the top, the back icon, or another icon. Alternatively, it may be the icon of the item currently being customized.

In FIG. 65 (16), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the effect customization icon, and as shown in FIG. 65 (17), the effect customization screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. A five-line list is displayed on the effect customization screen, and the list shows the five sub-items in the effect customization shown in FIG. 63 (b) from the top ("01 auto button mode" to "05 back". "Button navigation") and each option (for example, "OFF ON") are displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. Furthermore, below that, a confirmation icon for saving the setting changes, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, and an initialization icon for returning the settings to the initial values at once are arranged in a horizontal row from the left side. ing. Further, on the effect customization screen, a cursor display is used instead of the cursor icon. The initial position of the cursor display at the start of the effect customization screen display is the return icon for returning to the option menu screen. The back icon with the cursor display has a highlighted frame and is lit in red. In addition, among the displayed options, the currently set option is also displayed in red. For example, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (17), the auto button mode is not set (OFF). Further, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are also displayed at the lower right of the effect customization screen. On the effect customization screen, all the keys 137u, d, l, and r of the cross keys are displayed in red.

In FIG. 65 (18), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item of the auto button mode. That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (19), the frame of the item of the auto button mode is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and an explanation of the auto button mode is displayed.

In FIG. 65 (20), the right key 137r is operated while the cursor display is displayed in the item of the auto button mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65 (21), the currently set option of the auto button mode is changed to ON. That is, it was switched from OFF to ON. If the left key 137l is operated while the currently set option is OFF, the key operation is invalid, but the result may be the same as when the right key 137r is operated.

In FIG. 65 (22), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item one item below the auto button mode (long press auto continuous hitting). That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (23), the frame of the item of long-press auto-continuous hitting is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and an explanation about this item is displayed. When the up key 137u is operated instead of the down key 137d, the cursor display moves to the confirmation icon when the setting is changed, and moves to the back icon when the setting is not changed. However, it may move to the confirmation icon or the back icon with or without the setting change.

After that, the down key 137d is operated three times, and the cursor display moves to the item of the back button navigation at the bottom. That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (25), the frame of the item of the back button navigation is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and an explanation about this item is displayed.

In FIG. 65 (26), the down key 137d is operated once more, the list of 5 lines is updated as shown in FIG. 65 (27), and the auto is 01 in FIG. 63 (b). The button mode item has disappeared, and the cursor display has moved to the newly added item in FIG. 63 (b), which was 06 without pre-reading notice.

In FIG. 65 (28), the lower key 137d is further operated.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 65.

The list is updated in accordance with the operation of the down key 137d, and on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 66 (29) following FIG. 65 (28), the final sub-item of the effect customization in FIG. 63 (b) is 09. The cursor display has moved to the item of one notification.

As shown in FIG. 66 (30), when the down key 137d is operated again, the cursor display moves to the confirmation icon as shown in FIG. 66 (31), and the frame of the confirmation icon is highlighted. , Furthermore, it is lit in red.

In FIG. 66 (32a), the chance button 136 is operated as a determination operation, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which the cancel icon and the update icon are displayed) for confirming that the effect customization setting is to be updated may be displayed. On the notification screen shown in FIG. 66 (33a), a return icon for returning to the option menu screen is displayed, and the cursor display is displayed on the icon.

In FIG. 66 (34), the chance button 136 is operated to return to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 66 (35).

The return icon on the notification screen shown in FIG. 66 (33a) may be an icon for returning to the effect customization screen, and by operating the return icon arranged on the effect customization screen, the option menu screen can be displayed. You may be able to return.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 66 (36) (see FIG. 66 (37)), FIG. 66 (38). ), The cursor icon cs that was previously displayed on the production customization icon has moved down by one, and this time the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon is red. Lights up.

In FIG. 66 (39), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the character selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 66 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a character selection screen. Is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the character selection screen, and the list contains the top five options (“01 Yoshimune” to “05 Hani”) for character selection shown in FIG. 63 (b). It is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In FIG. 66 (40), the cursor display is displayed in the item of Yoshimune, and the character pattern of the item in which the cursor display is displayed (here, the pattern of Yoshimune) is previewed on the left side of the character selection screen. Has been done. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for character selection is Yoshimune, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated. Also, at the bottom right of the character selection screen, there is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and a red chance used for the decision operation. The design of the button 136 is also displayed.

The character set by the character selection here is always displayed, always appears at the time of production, or appears more frequently than other characters.

As shown in FIG. 66 (41), when the down key 137d is operated once, the cursor display moves to the grandfather of the item one item below Yoshimune as shown in FIG. 66 (42). The picture is previewed.

In FIG. 66 (43), the lower key 137d is operated five more times, the list is updated in accordance with the operation of the lower key 137d, and the character selection screen shown in FIG. 66 (44) is shown in FIG. 63 (b). The cursor display has moved to the item of Copanda in 07, which is the last choice of character selection.

As shown in FIG. 66 (45), when the down key 137d is operated again, the cursor display moves to the back icon and the back icon is highlighted with a frame as shown in FIG. 66 (46). , Furthermore, it is lit in red.

Here, when the down key 137d is operated only once instead of the chance button 136 (FIG. 66 (47)), the list is updated, and as shown in FIG. 66 (48), the Yoshimune of 01 is displayed. Returning to the first list at the beginning, the cursor display has moved to that Yoshimune item. Then, in FIG. 66 (49), the chance button 136 is operated. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 66 (50), an animation display indicating that a character is determined is performed in the area where the preview display was performed. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) may be displayed to confirm that the character settings are to be updated, but in this example, an animation display indicating that the character is determined is displayed. When finished, the settings of the selected character are automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 66 (51).

Even if the animation display indicating that the character is determined ends, the character selection screen remains, and the option menu screen can be returned by operating the back icon located on the character selection screen. Good.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 66 (52)), as shown in FIG. 66 (53), the character until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold frame selection icon, and the hold frame selection icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 66 (54), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the hold frame selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 66 (55), the hold frame is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The selection screen is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the hold frame selection screen, and the list shows the top five options in the hold frame selection shown in FIG. 63 (b) (“01 Hold frame A” to “05”. Hold frame E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In FIG. 66 (55), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the hold frame A, and in the window on the left side of the hold frame selection screen, the hold frame of the item in which the cursor display is displayed is a hold icon and a variable icon. It is previewed with. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting of the hold frame selection is the hold frame A, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated hold that cannot be selected here. A frame may be prepared. At the bottom right of the hold frame selection screen, there is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and the red color used for the decision operation. The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The holding frame set by the holding frame selection here is displayed as the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 66 (56), the down key 137d is operated once.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG.

In response to one operation of the down key 137d shown in FIG. 66 (56) following from FIG. 66 (55), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (57), the cursor display is 1 of the holding frame A. The next item is moved to the hold frame B, and the hold frame B is previewed in the left window.

In FIG. 67 (58), the decision operation is performed by the chance button 136. On the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (59), an effect display Ed1 that surrounds the window on the left side where the preview display is performed occurs, and when the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected hold frame is updated. Is automatically performed, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 67 (60). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) may be displayed to confirm that the hold frame setting is to be updated. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold frame selection screen remains, and the option menu screen may be returned by operating the return icon arranged on the hold frame selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 67 (61)), it is held until then as shown in FIG. 67 (62). The cursor icon cs displayed on the frame selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold display selection icon, and the hold display selection icon lights up in red. In this state, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 67 (63), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hold display selection screen. A five-line list is also displayed on the hold display selection screen, and the list shows the top five options (“01 icon A” to “05 icon”) in the hold display selection shown in FIG. 63 (b). E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In FIG. 67 (63), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the icon A, and the icon of the item in which the cursor display is displayed is preview-displayed together with the hold frame in the window on the left side of the hold display selection screen. There is. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for the hold display selection is the icon A, but the initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated icon that cannot be selected here may be used. You may prepare it. At the bottom right of the hold display selection screen, there is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and the red color used for the decision operation. The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The icon set by the hold display selection here is displayed as the hold icon h1 to h4 or as the variable icon h0 in the hold frame UI.

After that, the down key 137d is operated twice, the cursor display moves to the icon C, and the icon C is previewed in the left window. In this state, the decision operation is performed by the chance button 136, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (65), the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window in which the preview display is performed is generated again, and the effect display Ed1 is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected icon is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 67 (66). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which the cancel icon and the update icon are displayed) may be displayed to confirm that the icon settings are to be updated. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold display selection screen remains, and the option menu screen may be returned by operating the back icon arranged on the hold display selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 67 (67)), it is held until then as shown in FIG. 67 (68). The cursor icon cs displayed on the display selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the background display selection icon, and the background display selection icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 67 (69), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the background display selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 67 (70), the background display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The selection screen is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the background display selection screen, and all five options (“01 background A” to “05 background E”) in the background display selection shown in FIG. 63 (b) are displayed in the list. Has been done. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In FIG. 67 (70), the cursor display is displayed on the item of the background A, and the background of the item on which the cursor display is displayed is preview-displayed in the window on the left side of the background display selection screen. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting of the background display selection is the background A, but the initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated background that cannot be selected here may be used. You may prepare it. At the bottom right of the background display selection screen, there is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and the red color used for the decision operation. The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The background set by the background display selection here is displayed as the background display in the normal state in the decorative pattern display device 208. The background display in the normal state referred to here does not include the background display in the look-ahead mode, the background display as a notice of the jackpot of the fluctuation, and the background display in the electric support state. However, it may be included only in the background display in the electric support state.

After that, the down key 137d is operated four times, the cursor display moves to the background E, and the background E (empty background) is previewed in the left window. In this state, the decision operation is performed by the chance button 136, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (72), the effect display Ed1 surrounding the window on the left side where the preview display is performed is generated again, and the effect display Ed1 is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the selected background setting is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 67 (73). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which the cancel icon and the update icon are displayed) for confirming that the background setting is to be updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the background display selection screen remains, and the option menu screen may be returned by operating the back icon arranged on the background display selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated twice while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 67 (74a)), as shown in FIG. 67 (75), until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the hold display selection icon moves to the bottom, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the back icon for returning to the demo screen, and the back icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 67 (76), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the back icon, and as shown in FIG. 67 (77), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a demo screen. Will be done. The demo screen here reflects the customized results. That is, the background has been changed to an empty background, the hold frame UI is different from the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 65 (1), and the frame RW at the upper right of the screen is set to ON by the effect customization. The mode name (here, auto button mode) is displayed. When the two modes are set to ON, they are displayed alternately in ascending order of customization numbers. For example, if the auto button mode of 01 and the back button navigation of 05 are turned on, the auto button mode and the back button navigation are alternately displayed in the frame RW on the upper right of the screen. If it is the same as the default setting, it may not be displayed in the frame RW, but it may be displayed even if it is the same. Further, when no setting is made, OFF may be displayed in the frame RW, or nothing may be displayed. Further, the group notice of the reliability setting and the long-press auto-continuous hitting of the continuous hitting speed setting may not be displayed in the frame RW even if they are set. Further, the set mode may not be displayed in detail, but may be displayed only as, for example, "Production customization in progress".

In FIG. 67 (79), a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp are shown. 220 and a fourth symbol display device 284 are also shown. All of the normal symbol display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 shown in FIG. 67 (79) are in stop display. Further, both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (79) are being stopped and displayed, and the fourth decorative symbol shown in FIG. 67 (79) is being stopped and displayed. The symbol display device 284 also represents a stop display. Further, the normal symbol holding lamp 216, the first special symbol holding lamp 218, and the second special symbol holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 67 (79) are all turned off, and are located in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the displayed second hold number display, both the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. Therefore, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display has not been started since the final display of the stopped symbol has been performed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 67 (80), there is one ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 67 (80) has started the symbol variation display. However, both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub-control unit 400,500 side shown in FIG. 67 (80) are decorative symbols. The variation display has not been started, and the fourth symbol display device 284, which is also controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500, still displays the stop display. In the fourth symbol display device 284 shown in FIG. 67 (80), the black square represents the stop display of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the gray circle represents the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The white square represents the variable display of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the white circle represents the variable display of the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (81), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol starts variable display and the second reserved number displayed in the upper right corner. On the display, the number of pending special figures 1 is displayed as "1" for a moment.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (82), the number of reservations of the special figure 1 which is displayed as “1” for a moment in the second display of the number of reservations is “0”. In addition, since the first special figure start port 230 is won and immediately digested, the second hold number display may not be displayed as "1" even for a moment and may remain as "0".

In FIG. 67 (83), the increasing animation of the first hold icon h11 is started.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 67.

In FIG. 68 (84) following from FIG. 67 (83), the increase animation ends and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 68 (84) is an icon newly set in the hold display selection of the effect customization, and is displayed in the default display mode (diamond-shaped patternless and white display mode). There is.

In FIG. 68 (85), the variation display of the first decorative symbol has not yet started, but the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the volume adjustment icon VI are delayed from the start of the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212. Erasing of three icons such as the brightness adjustment icon BI has started, and the display is transparent. The erasure here may be an animation tailoring, but it does not necessarily have to be an erasure animation, and in FIG. 68 (86), the erasure of these three icons MI, VI, and BI is completed.

In FIG. 68 (87), the first hold icon h11 has started moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area, and in FIG. 68 (88), the movement of the first hold icon h11 is completed. On the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (diamond-shaped non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. Then, in FIG. 68 (89), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is finally started, and the first decorative symbol is undergoing low-speed fluctuation. Regarding the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, the left symbol starts the variable display first, then the middle symbol starts the variable display, and finally the right symbol starts the variable display. However, the order of starting the variable display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is not limited to this order, and these three left symbols, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may start the variable display at the same time. In addition, before the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, an animation by the decorative symbol (for example, an animation in which the decorative symbol is displayed once in a large size and then returns to the original size, or an image and characters in which the decorative symbol is a character or the like are displayed. When it is composed of an image (including a number), an image such as a character may be animated before the first decorative symbol starts to fluctuate) may be displayed.

In FIG. 68 (91), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation. Even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated (see FIG. 68 (92)), FIG. 68 (93). As shown in, a bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed on the hold frame UI. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), at least a part of the variable icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. .. When the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed, operating the left key 137l reduces the bar display by one level and reduces the sound, and operating the right key 137r increases the bar display by one level and increases the sound. , Volume is adjustable.

In the present embodiment, only the volume adjustment is always possible even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started. Even if the volume can be adjusted at all times, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume may not be displayed. Moreover, even during the big hit game, only the volume adjustment is always possible. However, it may be regulated for a certain period of time. For example, during the start production of the jackpot game, during the interval between rounds, during the end production of the jackpot game, during the execution of the super reach effect, during the final display of the symbols on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214, and the decorative symbols. The result screen (for example, the number of balls or / and) at the end of the confirmation display, the confirmation display of the lost symbol, the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol, or the end of the electric support (time reduction) state (for example, the end of ST). The period during which the left and right keys 137l and 137r are used in the production may be restricted while the screen for displaying the number of consecutive villas and the like is being displayed. If the super reach effect is a game effect, it is regulated until the result of the victory or defeat is notified, and then it may be adjustable, or it may be adjusted after the three decorative symbols are aligned and the shaking display is started. It may be possible, or the entire period from the super reach effect to the stop display may be regulated.

In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started may be possible only in the special figure low accuracy normal figure low accuracy state. Further, even if the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, the light amount adjustment is not possible, but the light amount adjustment bar. The display may be displayed in the same manner as the bar display VB for adjusting the volume, and the amount of light may be adjustable, or the amount of light may be adjustable without displaying the bar. Further, even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, the effect customization, character selection, and the like may be set.

Further, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated while the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is off, that is, while the symbol is changing, the bar display VB for volume adjustment is not displayed as in the present embodiment. The volume may be adjustable. The bar display VB for volume adjustment is configured to be erased if it is not operated for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), but when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated again before the certain period elapses. May be configured so that the count start for that fixed period can be updated (ie, the period before returning to the demo screen can be extended). If the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated during the execution of the animation in which the volume adjustment icon VI etc. is erased when the symbol change is started, the erasing animation is canceled in the middle and immediately The volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be erased, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed instead. Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be redisplayed without canceling the erasure animation, or the volume adjustment bar display VB may be displayed after the erasure animation is performed to the end.

Further, even after the symbol variation display on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214 is started, the presence or absence of the display of the three icons MI, VI, and BI is determined until the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started. Regardless, the amount of light may be adjustable, and the effect customization, character selection, and the like may be set.

Further, even if the volume adjustment and / or the brightness adjustment can be performed during the symbol variation, the adjustment bar display may not be displayed.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example described with reference to FIG. 66.

When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 69 (32b) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 66 (32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 69 (33b1). The return icon is highlighted in a frame and lit in red. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 69 (33b2)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to return to the option menu screen is displayed on the production customization screen from the front side (FIG. 69 (33b3)). ). On this confirmation screen, a back icon for approving the return to the option menu screen and a cancel icon for canceling the return to the option menu screen are displayed. In FIG. 69 (33b2), the cursor display is changed to the cancel icon. It is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (33b4-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the back icon (FIG. 69 (33b5-1)), or the cursor display is displayed on the cancel icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (33b4-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the effect customization screen (FIG. 69 (33b5-2)).

When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 69 (32c) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 66 (32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 69 (33c1). When the right key 137r is operated one more time (FIG. 69 (33c2)), the cursor display moves to the initialization icon as shown in FIG. 69 (33c3). When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 69 (33c4)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize the effect customization is displayed on the effect customization screen from the front side (FIG. 69 (33c5)). )). On this confirmation screen, a "yes icon" that approves the initialization and a "no icon" that cancels the initialization are displayed. In FIG. 69 (33c5), the cursor display is the "no icon". Is displayed in. Then, when the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 69 (33c6-1), the cursor display moves to the “yes icon” (FIG. 69 (33c7-1), and in this state, FIG. 69 (33c8-1). When the chance button 136 is operated as shown in, the initialization of the effect customization is executed. The initialization here returns to the initial value for all the settings made by the player in the effect customization. In particular, nothing in particular. It is possible to perform initialization even when it is not set, but it may not be possible. When the initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is superimposed on the production customization screen from the front side. (FIG. 69 (33c9-1)). Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 69 (33c6-2)), the effect customization screen reflecting the initialization is displayed. In this example, in particular. Nothing was set, but all the items are turned off by default.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing other modified examples.

When the lower key 137d is operated only once as shown in FIG. 70 (74b1) instead of the two operations of the lower key 137d shown in FIG. 67 (74a), as shown in FIG. 70 (74b2). The cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the initialization icon, and the initialization icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 70 (74b3), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the initialization icon, and as shown in FIG. 70 (74b4), all the settings are set in the decorative symbol display device 208. A confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize is displayed on the option menu screen from the front side. On this confirmation screen, a "yes icon" that approves the initialization and a "no icon" that cancels the initialization are displayed. In FIG. 70 (74b4), the cursor display is the "no icon". Is displayed in.

Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (74b5-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the “yes icon” (FIG. 70 (74b6-1)), or the cursor display is displayed in the “no icon”. In this state, the chance button 136 can be operated as shown in FIG. 70 (74b5-2) to return to the option menu screen (FIG. 70 (74b6-2)).

When the chance button 136 is operated while the cursor display is displayed on the “Yes icon” as shown in FIG. 70 (74b6-1) (FIG. 70 (74b7-1)), all the settings are initialized. To. In the initialization here, everything set by the player is returned to the initial value. It is possible to perform initialization even when nothing is set, but it may not be possible. When the initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is displayed on the option menu screen from the front side (FIG. 70 (74b8-1)). Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 70 (74b9-1)), the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 70 (74b10-1).

When the player does not return to the option menu screen after making various customizations and does not operate the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 or the ball firing handle 134 for a certain period of time (for example, 5 minutes). May initialize various settings. Further, instead of the confirmation screen of FIG. 70 (74b6-1), the confirmation screen of FIG. 69 (33c5) may be displayed. Alternatively, the "yes icon" may be removed from the confirmation screen so that the confirmation screen is initialized after a certain period of time has passed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Further, even if there is a "yes icon", if there is no operation, it may be configured to be initialized after a certain period of time has passed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Alternatively, it may be initialized only when "Initialize" is selected on the confirmation screen (here, when the chance button 136 is operated while the cursor display is displayed on the "Yes icon"). ..

Further, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment may be the same with respect to the initialization, and further, the initialization setting of various settings and the initialization of the volume and / or the brightness may be performed at the same timing. One may be initialized before the other. Also, when initializing the volume and brightness at the same timing as the initialization settings of various settings, do not display the initialization confirmation screen for volume initialization and brightness initialization. Alternatively, a confirmation screen may be displayed that initializes all the settings, volume, and brightness settings.

Further, a display for confirming whether to initialize the effect customization setting may be automatically displayed during the symbol change. For example, it is always displayed when it is displayed once in 100 fluctuations, when a fixed number of fluctuations have been made since it was last displayed, or when a fixed number of fluctuations have been made since the first fluctuation. Or may be displayed randomly (for example, when a display lottery is won).

70 (I) to 70 (V') are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during the jackpot round.

In this example, for example, the player can select music in the first round or the second round, reach a certain round after the second round, and customize from the next round. A certain round here is a round in which a V-attacker can win a prize, and specifically, there are five rounds. In FIG. 70 (I), the decorative symbol display device 208 in the fifth round is shown, and the letter V that encourages the winning of the V attacker is displayed. In addition, the title of the music selected by the music selection is displayed at the lower left of the screen.

FIG. 70 (II) shows the period corresponding to the interval between rounds when the V attacker is closed. Even if the interval is between 5 rounds and 6 rounds, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays 5 rounds. Also, although the attacker is closed, the right-handed notification continues.

In FIG. 70 (III), the attacker has started opening and the sixth round has started. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (III) displays a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a symbol of the chance button 136. That is, in this example, the production customization can be executed in the sixth round, which is the next round of the fifth round in which the V attacker can win a prize. It may be possible to execute only in the 6th round, or it may be possible to execute in a plurality of rounds after the 6th round.

In FIG. 70 (IV), the chance button 136 is pressed, and the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 or the like is reduced and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. There is.

Further, in FIG. 70 (V') shown as a modified example of FIG. 70 (V), a display relating to only one row (only one item) of the five-row list (here, a display relating to the auto button mode) is displayed. There is. In this modification, all the effect customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON / OFF of the items displayed with the left and right keys 137l and 137r. ..

In the example of FIG. 70 (V) and the example of FIG. 70 (V'), only a part of the effect customization may be changed.

In the example described above, customization can be performed from the next round of a certain round (for example, a round in which a V winning is performed with a so-called V-certain machine). In addition, it is not limited to the V confirmation machine, and customization may be performed from a certain round.

Further, during the period during which the music can be selected during the jackpot game, the music cannot be customized, and the music may be customized from the round in which the selected music is output. The music selection may be completed in the middle of the round, and the music selected from the middle of the round may be output. In this case, even if the music is selected in the round, if the selected music is output. , Customization can be done within the round.

In addition, the music may be determined at the end of the specific round, and in this case, customization can be performed after the end of the specific round. In detail, customization may be possible from the end of a particular round at the same time as the end of a particular round, or from the beginning of the next round of a particular round, between a particular round and the next round. Customization may be possible from the inter-round interval.

In addition, customization may be feasible at any time during the jackpot round. Further, the customization may be executed at any time during the jackpot game. The term "during the jackpot game" as used herein means a period from the start of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot, which is between the eaves and includes the round.

From the point of view of the main control unit 300, the period from the final display of the jackpot symbol to the start of the first round is the period from when the accessory continuous operation device is turned on to the special electric accessory ( This is the period from when the attacker) is turned off to when it is turned on, but it includes the period during which the jackpot game start effect is being executed. In addition, the display displayed in the jackpot game start effect (for example, the display of the special bonus) may continue to be displayed even after the first round is started, but it is one round until the attacker starts the first opening. It is the period until the eyes start. Further, the final display of the jackpot symbol is not based on the final display of the decorative symbol, but based on the final display of the symbol on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214. In addition, if the game table provides a right-handed notification before the attacker is released (for example, in the case of the first hit in Special Figure 1 or every time a big hit is made), the timing at which this right-handed notification is started is also the big hit symbol. Is included in the period from the confirmation display to the start of the first round.

During the period from the final display of the jackpot symbol to the start of the first round, customization may not be possible, or vice versa.

In addition, customization may not be possible in the period from the end of the final round to the start of symbol variation at the earliest. For example, customization may not be possible during the jackpot end effect.

Further, while the prepaid card forgotten warning is displayed, customization may not be possible, or vice versa.

Further, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed during a specific production (for example, V winning production, music selection, probability change suggestion production, etc.). Further, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed during the period during which the effect selection (for example, music selection, effect mode selection, etc.) can be performed. Further, the customization may not be performed even during the execution period of the effect using the operation means used in the customization, or the customization may be restricted even before the effect is started. By doing so, the regulation of customization functions as a notice of the production.

Further, contrary to the examples shown in FIGS. 70 (I) to 70 (V'), customization may not be possible once a certain round is reached. For example, customization can be performed from 1R to 14R, but it may not be possible when it reaches 15R. Alternatively, customization can be performed from 5R to 12R, but it may not be possible after 13R.

Further, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed while the two-dimensional code is displayed. For example, when the two-dimensional code is displayed for a certain period during the jackpot game, or when the two-dimensional code is displayed by the operation of the player (for example, "press the button to display the two-dimensional code" is displayed. When a two-dimensional code is issued by operating a button while it is being executed), it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed. Alternatively, conversely, it may be configured so that it can be customized even while the two-dimensional code is being displayed. All or part of the display related to the two-dimensional code and customization may be displayed at a position where they overlap, or may be displayed at a position where they do not overlap. That is, a part or all of the two-dimensional code may be displayed so as to overlap a part or all of the display related to customization from the front side, and conversely, a part or all of the display related to customization may be displayed in two dimensions. It may be displayed so as to overlap a part or all of the code from the front side.

In FIGS. 70 (I) to 70 (V'), the jackpot effect of a pachinko machine having a variable winning opening having a probability variation region has been described, but a jackpot of a pachinko machine having a variable winning slot without a probability variation region has been described. It can also be applied to the big hits of so-called 1 type and 2 types of models in which the big hit starts by winning V.

FIGS. 70 (VI) to 70 (VIII) are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during the symbol variation display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (VI), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and all three decorative symbols are changing at high speed. is there. Further, in the frame RW at the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (VI), it is displayed that the ode button mode is currently customized, and the effect customization is executed below it. A character display notifying that it is possible and a design of the chance button 136 are displayed.

In FIG. 70 (VII), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (VII), the frame RW at the upper right of the screen disappears, and instead, one line shown in FIG. 70 (V') is displayed. The display related to only (only one item) (here, the display related to the auto button mode) is displayed. In this example as well, all the effect customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON / OFF of the items displayed with the left and right keys 137l and 137r.

FIGS. 70 (IX) to 70 (XI) are diagrams showing another example that can be customized during the symbol variation display.

Even in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (IX), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and all three decorative symbols are changing at high speed. is there. Further, in FIG. 70 (IX), the second display device 208P is arranged on the decorative symbol display device 208 (corresponding to the first display device). The display screen of the second display device 208P is smaller than that of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second display device 208P is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 70 (IX) is in the initial position and can be moved up and down. A part of the second display device 208P overlaps a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 even at the initial position, and when descending from the initial position, the degree of overlap with the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes large.

The model title is displayed on the second display device 208P, and a display RW'indicating that the ode button mode is currently customized is displayed so as to overlap the model title from the front side. .. Further, under the display RW', a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed.

In FIG. 70 (X), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 70 (XI), the entire screen is switched to the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 and the like. A part of the content of the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 or the like (for example, the customized display being executed) may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the remaining content may be displayed on the second display device 208P. Further, the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 or the like may be displayed straddling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the second display device 208P. Further, the display using the second display device 208P can also be applied to the display related to customization during the jackpot game.

Note that the customization may be executed at any time during the symbol variation display. For example, it may be configured so that it can be customized even while the super reach effect is being displayed. Alternatively, conversely, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed while the super reach effect is being displayed. The super reach production referred to here includes the production of the fanned part and the precursory production from the time when the reach state is reached until the judgment production such as the duel production starts. For example, the left and right symbols of the decorative symbols assumed to enter the reach state change the display position, and the effect before the character display suggesting the development to super reach is also included. In addition, when switching from a judge effect such as a duel effect to a display screen of a decorative pattern, it is included in the super reach effect until the screen is switched to the display screen of the decorative pattern.

In addition, it may be possible to customize the production of the fanned part or the precursory production, or it may not be possible to do the opposite. Further, after switching to the result display screen of the judge effect or the display screen of the decorative pattern from the judge effect, customization may be possible, or vice versa.

Further, even during the simultaneous production performed on a plurality of game consoles, customization may be possible, and conversely, it may not be possible during the simultaneous production. Further, customization may be possible during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, or vice versa. Furthermore, during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, customization may be possible only when it finally becomes a big hit, or vice versa, and eventually it will be lost. Only in some cases, customization may be possible, or vice versa. Further, in a state where there is a hold, customization may be possible or may not be possible until the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts. Further, during the execution of a specific effect during the symbol variation display (for example, during the look-ahead mode), customization may be possible, or vice versa.

Further, if customization is performed during the symbol variation display, the setting change may be applied from the symbol variation display, or the setting change may be applied from the next symbol variation display. Good.

In addition, the mission list and game history (number of rotations, number of balls, number of missions cleared, etc.) achieved by the player operation (for example, display with the chance button, switching with the arrow keys, etc.) while setting the user mode (Daitomo) , The number of big hits in this play, the maximum number of consecutive villas in this play, etc.) can be displayed, and the character, background, hold frame, hold display, etc. set by the user can be changed. It may have been. Furthermore, while the user mode (Daitomo) is being set, the mission list and game history achieved by the player operation (for example, display with the chance button, switching with the arrow keys, etc.) while setting the user mode (Daitomo) It is configured to be able to display (number of rotations, number of balls, number of missions cleared, number of big hits in this play, maximum number of consecutive villas in this play, etc.), characters set by the user, background, hold frame, etc. , Hold display, etc. may be changed.

Further, when the mission is completed during the setting of the user mode, an icon for notifying that the mission has been completed may be displayed.

Next, an example of the pachinko machine 100 having specifications compatible with the membership service of "Daitomo" will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of this specification, the opening condition shown in FIG. 63 (b) is adopted. Further, the pachinko machine 100 having this specification has a top menu. This top menu can be called by operating the chance button 136 while the demo screen is displayed. The top menu may be called by simply operating the chance button 136 without going through the demo screen. Alternatively, the demo screen may be automatically switched and displayed without operating the chance button 136. Furthermore, the demo screen may be replaced with this top menu.

The top menu has a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a back icon.

FIG. 71 (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen.

Also on the top menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the cursor moves up and down by operating the up key 137u or the down key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Of the items "Daitomo", "Model customization", "Initialize", and "Return to demo screen", you can operate the up key or down key of the operation key unit 137 between the items connected by the arrows. The cursor moves, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, the screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor is displayed is displayed. That is, if the cursor is moved to the item of "Daitomo" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the Daitomo screen. If the cursor is placed on the item "Return to demo screen" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the demo screen.

On the other hand, the "Back" icon is displayed on each of the "Daitomo screen", "Model customization screen", and "Initialization confirmation screen". Move the cursor to the "Back" icon and press the chance button 136. Then you can return to the top menu screen. Further, it may be possible to return to the top menu screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "back" icon.

Although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure start ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is the top menu screen, the "Daitomo screen" and "Daitomo screen" Even if it is the "model customization screen" or "initialization confirmation screen", the screen shifts to the variable display screen of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 71 (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen.

The transition diagram of the model customization screen shown in FIG. 71 (2) is the same except for the transition diagram of the option menu screen shown in FIG. 64, "return to top menu" at the bottom, and "top menu screen" on the right side thereof. Therefore, the duplicate description will be omitted. If the cursor is placed on the item "Return to top menu" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the model customization screen to the top menu screen.

FIG. 72 is a transition diagram of the Daitomo screen.

On the Daitomo screen, the cursor moves up and down by operating the up key 137u or the down key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Of the items "Trial play", "Password input", "Data save", "Data clear", "Quick start", and "Return to top menu screen", the operation key units are connected to each other by arrows. The cursor moves by operating the up key or the down key of 137, and the screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor is displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, if the cursor is moved to the "trial play" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the trial play screen. From the trial play screen, you can move to the new registration screen or start the trial play by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, r and deciding the chance button 136, or the top menu screen. You can go back to. Furthermore, from the new registration screen, it is possible to move to the password input screen or return to the Daitomo screen by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r and by deciding the chance button 136. ..

If the cursor is moved to the "password input" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the password input screen. On the password entry screen, the display is repeated until the correct password is entered, and if the entered password is correct, the demo screen is switched to the demo screen set to Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

If the cursor is placed on the "data save" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data save confirmation screen. On the data storage confirmation screen, if "Yes" is determined by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, r and determining the chance button 136, the screen shifts to the two-dimensional code issuance screen. However, if "Yes" is determined in the same way, a two-dimensional code is issued and it is possible to move to the demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set. On the other hand, "No" was determined by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r and determining the chance button 136 on both the data storage confirmation screen and the two-dimensional code issuance screen. If so, each display is repeated.

If the cursor is moved to the "data clear" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data clear confirmation screen.

If the cursor is moved to the "quick start" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the quick start start screen. The quick start start screen switches to the demo screen set to Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

On the other hand, the "return" icon is displayed on each of the "trial play screen", "password input screen", "data save confirmation screen", "data clear confirmation screen", and "quick start start screen". If you move the cursor to the "Back" icon and press the chance button 136, you can return to the Daitomo screen. Further, the user may be able to return to the Daitomo screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "back" icon.

Although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure start ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is the Daitomo screen, the "trial pre-screen" Even if it is, the screen shifts to the variable display screen of the decorative pattern.

Further, the parenthesized reference numerals shown in FIG. 72 are associated with the parenthesized figure numbers in FIG. 73.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen.

The top menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (a). On this top menu screen, the background display, the holding frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) all disappear, and under the character display of "menu", Four types of icons are displayed in a vertical row from top to bottom: the Daitomo icon, the model customization icon, the initialization icon, and the back icon for returning to the demo screen. Further, in FIG. 72A, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the back icon at the bottom, and the back icon is lit in red while the other icons are displayed in white. The initial position of the cursor icon cs when the display of the top menu screen is started becomes the back icon. Also on the top menu screen, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red) and the design of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right.

The screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (b1) is the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a), in which the cursor icon cs is displayed on the Daitomo icon, and the chance button 136 is pressed. This is the Daitomo screen displayed when pressed. To return to the trial play icon, password input icon, data save icon, data clear icon, quick start icon, and top menu screen in a vertical row from top to bottom under the character display of "Daitomo" on this Daitomo screen. Six types of icons such as the back icon of are displayed. Further, in FIG. 72 (b1), the cursor display is displayed on the top trial play icon, and the trial play icon is highlighted in a frame and further lit in red. In addition, a character of Yoshimune appears on the right side of the six types of icons arranged in a vertical row, and an explanation about the trial play is displayed. Further, below the display of the explanation, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red) and a picture of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the trial play screen shown in FIG. 73 (b1-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

On the trial play screen shown in FIG. 73 (b1-1), options that can be selected by various customizations are displayed as a privilege of the membership experience of Daitomo. Below that display is a confirmation icon to save the setting changes, a back icon to return to the Daitomo screen, a "start icon" to start trial play, and a new registration to register as a new member. The icons are arranged in a horizontal row from the left. The cursor display is displayed on the "start icon", and this position is the initial position. In this state, if the right key 137r is operated once, the cursor display moves to the "new registration icon", and when the decision operation is performed by pressing the sodeko chance button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The new registration screen shown in FIG. 73 (b1-2) is displayed.

On the new registration screen shown in FIG. 73 (b1-2), a large two-dimensional code QR1 is displayed on the left side, and on the right side, the two-dimensional code is read by a communication terminal with a shooting function and displayed on the two-dimensional code QR1. A sentence recommending that you access the embedded URL website (Daitomo site) and obtain a password from it is displayed. Below the text display, a password input icon and a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen are displayed. In this example, the new registration screen is displayed via the trial play screen, but it may be possible to display the new registration screen without going through the trial play screen. For example, on the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73 (b1), a new registration icon is provided in addition to the trial play icon and the like, and when this new registration icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, FIG. 73 (b1-b1-) The new registration screen shown in 2) may be displayed.

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73 (b2), the cursor display is displayed on the password input icon, and the explanation about the password input is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the password input screen shown in FIG. 73 (b2-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

On the password input screen shown in FIG. 73 (b2-1), an 8-digit password input area pw and a dial kw of alphabets, symbols, and numbers are displayed below the password input area pw. The person who inputs the password moves the cursor (displayed in gray and T is specified in FIG. 73 (b2-1-1)) using the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r, and the character specified by the cursor. Is entered in the password input area pw by the determination operation using the chance button 136, one character at a time according to the password obtained from the Daitomo site (see FIG. 73 (b2-1-1)). Below the dial kW, a back icon for returning to the Daitomo screen, an erase icon for erasing the input characters in the password input area pw, and a completion icon indicating the completion of password input are arranged in a horizontal row from the left. Has been done.

When the password input operation is completed, the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor display displayed on the completion icon. If the password is entered incorrectly, the typo window shown in FIG. 73 (b2-1-2) is displayed, and when this window disappears, the password can be entered again. The password entered last time may be cleared from the password entry area pw, or may remain as it is. If the password is entered correctly, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the input completion window shown in FIG. 73 (b2-1-3) for a certain period of time, and then switches to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode. ..

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73 (b3), the cursor display is displayed on the data save icon, and the explanation about data save is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73 (b3-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when trial play or quick start is performed, or when the password is not entered, the data save icon can not be selected or this data save confirmation screen is not displayed. On the contrary, it may be selectable or displayable.

On the data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73 (b3-1), a "Yes" icon for accepting the data to be saved and a "No" icon for not saving the data are displayed. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the two-dimensional code QR2 is generated and issued by the pachinko machine 100 (FIG. 73 (b3-2)). In addition to the URL of the Daitomo site, this two-dimensional code QR2 includes the player's ID, the current game history information (for example, the number of games, the number of balls, the number of big hits, the number of consecutive villas, the level of the Daitomo mode, and experience. Values, mission achievement information, etc. are embedded), and this 2D code QR2 is read by a communication terminal with a shooting function, and the URL website (Daitomo site) embedded in the 2D code QR2 is embedded. ), The data is saved on the Daitomo site server. An end icon is displayed at the lower right of this data storage confirmation screen. When the reading of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, select the end icon and operate the chance button 136 to confirm the end. Is displayed.

In FIG. 73 (b3-2-1), the end confirmation screen is displayed, and a “yes” icon that acknowledges the end and a “no” icon that does not end are displayed. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set.

The data embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2 may be deleted from the pachinko machine when the generation of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, and the data such as the game history information this time may be deleted from the pachinko machine. FIG. 73 (b3-2-1). It may be deleted from the pachinko machine 100 when the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, or it may not be deleted until the data is cleared, which will be described later.

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73 (b4), the cursor display is displayed on the data clear icon, and the explanation about data clear is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73 (b4-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when trial play or quick start is performed, or when the password is not entered, the data clear icon cannot be selected or this data clear confirmation screen is not displayed. On the contrary, it may be selectable or displayable.

On the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73 (b4-1), a "yes" icon for approving the deletion of the data such as the game history information this time and a "no" icon for not deleting the data are displayed. There is. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the data is erased from the pachinko machine and the erase completion screen is displayed.

The erasure completion screen is displayed in FIG. 73 (b4-1-1), and the erasure completion screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time and returns to the Daitomo screen.

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73 (b5), the cursor display is displayed on the quick start icon, and the explanation about the quick start is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the quick start start screen shown in FIG. 73 (b5-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This quick start start screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time, and the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode.

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73 (b6), the cursor display is displayed on the back icon, and the return to the top menu screen is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the top menu screen.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a model customization screen.

When the second model customization icon from the top of the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74 (c) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. On this model customization screen, under the character display of "Model customization", in order from the top in a vertical row, the production customization icon, character selection icon, hold frame selection icon, hold display selection icon, background display selection icon, initialization Seven types of icons are displayed, such as an icon and a back icon for returning to the top menu screen. A cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 74 (c), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the effect customization icon is lit in red while the other icons are displayed in white. Further, on the model customization screen, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right. Further, among the chance button 136 and the cross keys, the designs of the cursor icon cs and the up / down keys 137u and d used for moving the cursor display are displayed in red. For the decision operation, the decision key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the decision key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

Although the effect customization screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (c1), the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (17) is that the input sound notice option and the back button navigation option are not released. It's different. If the password of Daitomo is not entered or the level that satisfies the opening condition is not reached, the screen as shown in FIG. 74 (c1) is displayed.

Although the character selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (c2), the character selection screen shown in FIG. 66 (40) is different from the character selection screen shown in FIG. The difference is that the choices do not even show what kind of character they are. In addition, even if it is an unreleased option, a part or all of the character image may be displayed, a silhouette image in the shape of a character may be displayed, and a display mode in which the selectable character can be recognized (a display mode in which the selectable character can be recognized. For example, a display including "Princess opens at Daitomo Lv.20" etc.) may be displayed. Here, regarding the display related to the unreleased options, other customized displays (in this example, the hold frame, the hold display, and the background display) can also be applied. If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen as shown in FIG. 74 (c2) is displayed. Only Yoshimune can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, on the character selection screen shown in FIG. 74 (c2'), since the password is input or the trial play is selected, the grandfather's character can also be selected. However, after 03, it cannot be selected because it has not reached a level that satisfies the opening conditions.

Although the hold frame selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (c3), the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 66 (55) is such that all the other options are unreleased except for the option of the hold frame A. Yes, the difference is that the other options don't even show what the name of the hold slot is. If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen as shown in FIG. 74 (c3) is displayed. On this screen, only the hold frame A can be selected.

On the other hand, on the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 74 (c3'), since the password is input, the hold frame B can also be selected. However, after 03, it cannot be selected because it has not reached a level that satisfies the opening conditions.

Although the hold display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (c4), in the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (63), all the other options are unreleased except for the option of the icon A. The difference is that the other options do not even show what the name of the hold display is. If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen as shown in FIG. 74 (c4) is displayed. Only icon A can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 74 (c4'), since the password is input, the icon B can also be selected. However, even here, after 03, since the level that satisfies the opening condition has not been reached, it cannot be selected.

Although the background display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (c5), in the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (70), all the other options are unreleased except for the option of background A. The difference is that the other options don't even show what the background name is. If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen as shown in FIG. 74 (c5) is displayed. Only background A can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, on the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 74 (c5'), since the password is input, the background B can also be selected. However, even here, after 03, since the level that satisfies the opening condition has not been reached, it cannot be selected.

Although a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize all the settings is displayed in FIG. 74 (d1), the description thereof will be omitted because it is the same as the confirmation screen shown in FIG. 70 (74b6-1). Further, although the initialization completion screen is displayed in FIG. 74 (d2), the description thereof will be omitted because it is the same as the initialization completion screen shown in FIG. 70 (74b8-1).

FIG. 74 (e1) is a diagram showing an example of a demo screen set to the Daitomo mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (e1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, both the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display has not started since the final display of the stop symbol of the special symbol has been performed. Further, below the second hold number display, the current Daitomo mode level (here, level 1) and the experience value (EXP) (here, 0) are displayed. That is, the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 74 (e1) corresponds to, for example, a screen immediately after newly registering and shifting to the demo screen.

Further, the corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 74 (e1). For example, if the quick start is set and this demo screen is displayed, the voice "Start Daitomo" is output, and if the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, "Trial" is displayed. When the voice "Start playing" is output and the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed, the voice "Start Daitomo. Let's do our best today" is output. In addition, different sound effects are output depending on whether the corresponding sound effect is started by trial play, when Daitomo is started by quick start, or when Daitomo is started by password input. , The same sound effect may be output in all cases, or the same sound effect may be output in two cases. In addition, the sound effect may change depending on the level of Daitomo, the previous game situation, and the like. Further, when returning to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 74 (e1) after model customization, the sound effect may not be output, and a dedicated sound effect may be output. Also, an animation may be displayed with or in place of the corresponding sound effect. If the symbol variation start is started while the sound effect or animation is being performed, the corresponding sound effect or animation may be interrupted (cancelled) in the middle, or may be output as it is to the end.

Also, when the quick start is set and this demo screen is displayed, when the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, or when the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed. In the case of at least one of them, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74 (c) may not be called for a certain period of time, or a certain period of time may be set. It may be configured so that the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74 (c) can be called without waiting. Alternatively, in all of the above cases, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74 (c) may not be called for a certain period of time.

FIG. 74 (e1-1) shows how the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are additionally displayed after a certain period of time has passed since the demo screen shown in FIG. 74 (e1) was displayed. It is a figure which shows.

After displaying the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73A, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are restricted from being additionally displayed for a certain period (for example, 1 minute). May be good. If the chance button 136 or the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r are operated during this fixed period, the operation is invalid. However, it may be valid.

Further, even when the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are hidden (for example, immediately after the symbol variation display is stopped or shortly after the symbol variation display is stopped without holding), the figure is shown. The volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in 65 can be called. Further, when the volume adjustment window VW or the brightness adjustment window BW is called and no operation is performed for a certain period of time, the screen may return to the screen shown in FIG. 74 (e1-1).

If the stop symbol is displayed without hold, the menu icon MI, volume adjustment icon VI, and brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed for a certain period of time, and FIG. 74 (c) is used for a certain period of time. ) May not be able to call the model customization screen.

Further, even during the period when the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74 (c) cannot be called, the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65 can be called. May be possible.

Further, when switching between the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65 and the screen shown in FIG. 74 (e1-1), these windows VW and BW are also the screens shown in FIG. 74 (e1-1). In some cases, neither of them is displayed, and even in this state, the volume and brightness adjustment operations may be feasible or may be restricted so that they cannot be performed.

FIG. 74 (e2) is a diagram showing an example of a demo screen displayed via FIG. 73 (b3-2-1) after issuing the two-dimensional code in FIG. 73 (b3-2). As the output sound from the speaker 120 here, the voice "Thank you for your hard work" is output. In addition, the output sound effect may change depending on the state before this demo screen is displayed.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a variable icon.

Here, the variable icon h0 will be summarized again. The variation icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variation game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes the change icon h0 at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. Strictly speaking, when the first hold icon h11 with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area HIS to the variable icon display area CIS, the moving icon is called a variable icon or expressed as a variable icon moving. You may. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area CIS is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. The variable icon h0 is displayed in a display size different from that of the hold icon h11 (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11, but they may have the same size. Further, the variable icon h0 may consist of a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon h11. The change icon h0 can give a notice of whether or not the change is correct (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon h0 can be seen as an icon related to hold, and can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of winning or failing the special figure variable game is held. The erasing timing may be a timing earlier than the timing at which the result of the change is notified, the same timing, or a later timing. Further, in addition to the default display mode (for example, a round non-patterned and white display mode), a plurality of types of display modes of the variable icon h0 are prepared as normal notice display modes, and depending on the display mode, The reliability (expectation) of the jackpot is different. The higher the reliability of the jackpot, the easier it is for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed. In the following description, the color indicates the high or low degree of expectation of a big hit. The default white is when "no change" is selected in the effect lottery for the display mode of the variable icon h0. The default white variable icon does not foretell the expectation of a jackpot, but you may foretell the expectation of a jackpot (in that case, the color of the icon with the lowest expectation of a jackpot). Blinking white has the lowest expectation of a big hit (0% or 0% or more and less than 1%). The color of the display mode of the normal notice is the so-called rainbow color (rainbow color) that changes to white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and seven colors in ascending order of expectation of big hit. The gold color is a big hit, and the rainbow color has a higher expectation of a big hit. For example, it may be said that the big hit is confirmed. Note that this color relationship is the same for the color of the look-ahead notice display mode by the hold icon. Hereinafter, when the term is red or higher, it means red, gold, or rainbow.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (A1). This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the character of the lord is displayed on the right base icon bIr in FIG. 75 (A1). In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75 (A1) is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays. For example, the display may be started at the same time as the start of a certain symbol variation display, and may be continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. Further, the symbol variation display may be completed and may be continuously displayed even while the stop display is being displayed, or may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. Then, during the display of the next symbol variation display that is started continuously, it may be continuously displayed, or it may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. Alternatively, the display may end during the display of the next symbol variation display. In addition, it may be displayed only in a part or all of the whole period during the display of the symbol variation display once, and may not be displayed during the display of the next symbol variation display. This navigation character YM can be said to be a so-called constantly displayed character, but it does not have to be continuously displayed in any case. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. This point will be described in detail later.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (A1), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

In FIG. 75 (A2-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display corresponds to a notice indicating that other icons and the like may change when the display is made. Other icons such as the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, and the decorative design. That is, the icon or the like displayed before the display of the change notice display is started becomes the target to be changed. However, even if the display is started at the same time as the display of the change notice display is started, or the display is started later, it may be the target to be changed. At the time when the change notice display is started, the player may or may not know what will be changed. There may also be suggestions of what to change. Further, even if the change notice display is displayed, nothing may change depending on the change notice display, which may be a false notice. In addition, the change notice display may be determined to change only one object, or may be determined to be changed without fail.

The treasure chest icon I1 shown in FIG. 75 (A2-1) appears on the carpet icon I2. The carpet icon I2 is displayed only when it appears, and when the treasure box icon I1 reaches the display position of the effect icon display area DIS, it disappears on the spot or flies off the screen. The appearance timing of the icon of this change notice display is when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, and when a prize is awarded to the special figure start port (when the hold increases). , At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning, at the time of success of a certain production, at the time of the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo-continuous production (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state, at the time of super reach At the start, Super Reach Middle etc. can be listed. That is, the appearance timing of the change notice display icon may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. Further, there may be a plurality of display modes of the treasure box icon I1. For example, the ease of change of the navigation character YM or the like changes depending on the display mode (difference in size, color, animation) of the treasure box or carpet. May be good. In addition, if the display mode is different from the normal display mode, such as the carpet icon I2, which is displayed only at the time of appearance or exit, the probability of changing the display mode is high, which is advantageous for the player. Or the display mode may be changed to a higher probability. For example, the probability of changing to a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high may be high. Further, the change notice display may be a display that changes only the navigation character, but may change an effect display other than the navigation character (hold icon, change icon, notice display of the change, look-ahead notice display, etc.). There may be. In addition, among the effect displays other than the navigation character (hold icon, change icon, notice display of the change (timer notice, conversation notice, chance up meter, etc.), look-ahead notice display (timer notice, background display for look-ahead mode, etc.), etc. It may be configured so that the navigation character is not changed by the notice display that changes one effect display, a plurality of effect displays, or all the effect displays), but even if the navigation character is changed. Good. Further, the change notice display may be configured so that the navigation character is changed more frequently than the effect display other than the navigation character is changed, but conversely, the frequency of changing the navigation character is the effect other than the navigation character. The frequency may be less than the frequency with which the display is changed, and the two frequencies may be performed at the same frequency. Here, the effect display (effect display other than the navigation character and the navigation character) is changed by "notice for changing the effect display (change notice display, notice display for changing the effect display other than the navigation character. Hereinafter referred to as notice A)". When the effect display that is less frequently changed by the notice A is changed by the notice A, the effect display that is frequently changed by the notice A is changed by the notice A than when the effect display is changed by the notice A. May be configured to be easy to hit, or may not be configured.

In FIG. 75 (A3-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 remains. The treasure box icon I1 is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM. In FIG. 75 (A4-1), the display mode of the treasure chest icon I1 changes. That is, the change animation is displayed, the treasure chest opens, the smoke image of the effect appears from inside, and the smoke image hides part or all of the navigation character YM, making it clearer than before the smoke image appeared. It becomes difficult to see. When an icon or the like other than the navigation character YM is displayed, the smoke image may cover a part or all of the display of the icon or the like other than the navigation character YM from the front side. In addition, the treasure chest may not be opened. Furthermore, even if the treasure chest is opened, other notices may be given. In FIG. 75 (A5-1), the smoke image disappears and the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed. That is, the dark blue (default color) kimono worn by the lord of the navigation character YM has changed to a red kimono. The change of the kimono of the lord of the navigator character YM to a red kimono may indicate that the change icon h0 is likely to change to red due to the change. It may be confirmed that the display mode of the navigation character YM changes when the treasure box icon I1 is displayed. In addition to the red kimono, it may be changed to a golden kimono or a rainbow-colored kimono. It may also blink white, change to blue, or change to green. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed according to the colors of the hold icon and / or the variable icon (for example, when the green hold is displayed on the hold 2, the navigation character YM is green. It changes to a kimono, etc.). Here, if the color of the navigator character corresponds to the color of the variable icon and / or the hold icon, and the display mode of the hold icon and / or the variable icon changes a plurality, it is digested first. The color of the hold icon or variable icon may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigator character, or the color of the hold icon to be digested later may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigator character. The color with high jackpot expectation may be displayed preferentially, and conversely, the color with low jackpot expectation may be preferentially displayed, regardless of the color of the hold icon or the variable icon itself. The color of the hold icon or variable icon with high is may be displayed, or the color of the hold icon or variable icon with low expectation of big hit may be displayed regardless of the color of the hold icon or variable icon itself, and it changes. The colors of the pending and / or variable icons may all be reflected in the color of the navigator, and the colors of the navigator are randomly displayed from the changing colors of the pending and / or variable icons. May be done. Further, next to the navigation character YM whose display mode has changed, the treasure box icon I1 with the lid open is still displayed. The treasure chest icon I1 may disappear at the same time as the smoke image appears, or may disappear together with the smoke image. The treasure box icon I1 disappears at the timing of FIG. 75 (A6-1), and only the navigation character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Up to this point, the first decorative symbol continues to display high-speed fluctuations.

In FIG. 75 (A7), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and "decoration 7" is swayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In the second decorative symbol, the temporary stop is not performed, and the three decorative symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In FIG. 75 (A8), the background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the background screen of the wilderness, and the temporarily stopped left symbol is the decorative symbol display device. The right symbol, which is also temporarily stopped, moves to the upper left of the 208, and moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the background screen h of the wilderness, a duel scene in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Further, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl of the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 have disappeared, and the first hold icon h11 has also disappeared. Further, although the height of the pedestal of the variable icon display area CIS is lowered, the lowered pedestal hs0'is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on the pedestal hs0'. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr. During the super reach effect, the entire hold frame UI may be hidden. That is, the pedestal hs0'of the variable icon display area CIS and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden during the super reach effect. Further, during the super reach effect, any one or two of the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the variable icon h0 may be hidden. Furthermore, during the super reach production, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the variable icon h0 are all hidden, and the hold frame UI (left base icon bIl, four stages hs1 to hs4, pedestal hs0 (hs0')). , Right base icon bIr) may be displayed, or vice versa, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the variable icon h0 may all be displayed to hide the hold frame UI.

In FIG. 75 (A9), the navigation character YM of the lord who had been standing facing the front changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and held facing the variable icon h0. In FIG. 75 (A10), waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM of the lord, and in FIG. 75 (A11), the variable icon h0, which was previously white, has changed to red. As described above, the variation icon of the red display mode has a considerably high expectation of a big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display. In FIG. 75 (A12), the navigation character YM of the lord has returned to the posture of standing facing the front. The navigation character YM of the lord shown in FIG. 75 (A12) remains in the display mode of the red kimono, but may return to the default display mode (display mode of the dark blue kimono).

Although not shown in FIG. 75 (A13), the button effect is started. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image and the remaining time display meter, and when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136. In the remaining time display meter, the above operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. After that, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in image of the lord, and a warning effect is performed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. The cut-in image of the lord overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where the cut-in image of the lord is not displayed. The cut-in image of the lord may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or is displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be what is done.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the cut-in image of the lord is erased, the animation display of the duel scene continues, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and the second button production after developing into super reach. Is started. After that, when the operation validity period of the chance button 136 starts, the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136.

In the remaining time display meter, the above operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. The operation validity period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period in the first button effect after developing into super reach. In this case, it develops into super reach. Then, the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the first button effect after developing into super reach. Further, the operation validity period in the first button effect after the development of the super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the second button production after the development of the super reach, or after the development of the super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development of super reach may be the same length.

When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and at the same time, the first large board behavior accessory shown in FIG. 14 (a). 224Ga to 224Gd of the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory operate, and they overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left and right symbols of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character. It is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. The effect of operating the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may be displayed even when the operation validity period has passed without any notice. Further, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is performed. In addition, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are performed, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th is performed after the effect image is displayed. The operation of the large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is started, or the effect image. And the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, even if the effect of operating the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd is not performed and the effect display is lost. Often, the revival effect may be displayed after the effect display that causes a loss is performed so that the effect display that becomes a big hit is performed. When the effect of operating the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd is started, the displayed variable icon h0 is hidden, but it may be continuously displayed.

After that, the Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14A operates and moves downward, and overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. .. Further, after that, the light guide plate IL emits light. The display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the order in which the light guide plate IL starts emitting light are limited to those described above. However, it can be set as appropriate. In addition, the display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may all be performed. The part may not be performed.

After the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, the Senryobako accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, the effect image fades out, and subsequently, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd start moving toward the initial position, respectively. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed.

After that, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 75 (A 14-1). In FIG. 75 (A 14-1), the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other is displayed.

The animation of the navigation character YM in FIGS. 75 (A9) to 75 (A12) corresponds to an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon h0 (hereinafter, referred to as “change effect”). This change effect can be seen as a part of the super reach effect, but it can also be seen as a different effect from the super reach effect, which was started with the start of the super reach effect. As for the start timing of the change effect, in addition to the super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, and when a prize is awarded to the special symbol start port (hold). (Increase), at the start of pre-reading notice at the time of winning, at the time of success of a certain production, at the time of the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo-continuous production (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state , At the start of super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable.

In addition, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes is also during the super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol changes start, when the movement of the variable icon h0 is completed, and a prize is given to the special symbol start port. At the time (when the hold increases), at the start of the look-ahead notice at the time of winning, at the time of success of a certain production, at the time of the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo-continuous production (at the start of re-variation), reach It is possible to enumerate the start of the state, the start of super reach, and the like. That is, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. Further, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes may overlap with the button valid period in the button effect described above. It should be noted that the display mode of the variable icon may not be changed after a certain period during the super reach effect. The super reach production explained here is also a game production, including a button production, and is a kind of so-called final judge production in which either the main character or the enemy wins. After the result of the final judge effect is displayed, the display mode of the variable icon may not be changed. Further, when the navigation character YM performs an animation to change the display mode of the variable icon, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed without fail, or there may be a failure. You may. That is, the change effect may be an effect that always changes the display mode of the variable icon h0, and there are cases where the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed (success) and cases where the display mode is not changed (failure). There may be.

In addition, there may be cases where the change animation of the variable icon by the navigation character YM is not performed. In that case, at the end of the super reach effect, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed after the end screen of the super reach effect and the screen on which the decorative symbol is displayed are switched by the wipe. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be returned to the default display mode (display mode of the dark blue kimono) after being switched by the wipe, and the navigation character YM may be used as a pre-reading notice of the next symbol variation display. , The display mode as it is (the display mode of the red kimono) may be maintained.

In FIG. 75 (A 15-1), the scene in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role collapses and the hero's lord wins is displayed, and the lord's navigation character YM also poses for victory. However, the middle design is not displayed yet, and the middle design of "Decoration 7" is displayed in the same figure (A16-1), but the red variable icon h0 is still displayed, and the second decoration. The design is also being displayed in a variable manner. Moreover, at the stage of the figure (A16-1), each of the first decorative symbols (left middle right symbol) is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation). In addition, in FIG. 75 (A 15-1), the animation for the big hit by the hero's lord may be executed.

Here, up to Fig. 75 (A 15-1) before the middle symbol is displayed can be seen as a super reach effect, but it seems that the victory has been confirmed once the middle symbol is displayed (A 16-1). ) Can be seen as a super reach effect, or further, it can be seen as a super reach effect until just before the stop display is performed. Further, as described above, the super reach effect here corresponds to an example of the final judge effect, and the super reach effect is being executed until the result of the final judge effect is confirmed (for example, until just before the stop display is performed). May be good. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and the first decorative symbol starts shaking with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) is displayed in the display mode of the special figure A. Although the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed, the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state where it has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is determined that the symbol is confirmed and stopped. Therefore, the first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively, and the second decorative symbol is displayed. 4 In the symbol display device, the symbol is displayed in a mode that the symbol has stopped.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the big hit start effect display.

During super reach, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Here, when the button effect, which is the final judge effect, is started, a part or all of the hold frame UI may be hidden or disappear. For example, the right base icon bIr may have been displayed until then, but the right base icon bIr may be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Further, when the final judge effect is started, the variable icon h0 may be hidden or disappeared, or the navigation character YM may be hidden or disappeared, and the variable icon h0 and the navigation may be configured. Both characters YM may be configured to be hidden or disappear. Further, when the hold icon has been displayed so far, the hold icon may also be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Further, other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may also be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started, if they have been displayed up to that point.

As shown in the figure (A2-2) instead of FIG. 75 (A2-1), a balloon display such as "Change !?" may be added to the navigation character YM of the lord, or the figure (A2-2). As shown in A 2-3), a balloon display such as "Preparing for change" may be added. After that, the process returns to FIG. 75 (A3-1), and the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed. The balloon display of the navigation character YM corresponds to a notice effect (precursor effect) of the start of the change notice display. That is, it is a notice that the navigation character itself may change, such as "change !?", or the navigation character is about to change ("preparing for change" is displayed, such as "preparing for change". It may be a notice suggesting that it will always change within the fluctuation or after the next fluctuation of the fluctuation where "Preparing for change" is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (A 3-2-1) instead of FIG. 75 (A 3-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and then again. The carpet icon I2 may appear, and the treasure chest icon I1 may fly away on the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (A4-2) instead of FIG. 75 (A4-1), the smoke image may be red. Depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the change mode and easiness of change of the navigation character YM may be announced. In the case of FIG. 75 (A4-2), it is foretold that the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a kimono of the same color as smoke. Further, depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the expected degree of the jackpot in the change or hold may be announced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (A5-2) instead of FIG. 75 (A5-1), the color of the kimono of the navigation character YM may not change, but the navigation character YM itself may become larger. .. As described above, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM may be a change in size or a change in shape (for example, pose) in addition to the change in color. The color of the kimono of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75 (A5-2) may be dark blue (default color), but may be changed to red. A part of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75 (A5-2) overlaps a part of the treasure box icon I1 from the front side. A part of the navigation character YM may overlap all the icons I1 of the treasure box from the front side. Alternatively, at least a part of the treasure box icon I1 may overlap at least a part of the enlarged navigation character YM from the front side.

In addition, the probability of changing the variable icon h0, and thus the expectation of a big hit, is higher in the display mode in which the default color is large than in the display mode in which the default color is small, and is higher than in the display mode in which the red color is small. The red and large display mode may be higher. Further, in terms of size and color, color may be prioritized, and for example, a display mode in which a red color is small may be higher than a display mode in which a default color is large. Alternatively, on the contrary, the size may be prioritized, and for example, the display mode in which the default color is large may be higher than the display mode in which the display mode is small in red. Further, regarding the size (display size) of the navigation character YM, there may be a plurality of sizes such as a large case and a small case, and an intermediate size thereof.

When the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the variable icon h0 changes to red, and when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a golden kimono, the variable icon h0 changes to gold and a rainbow. When the display mode is wearing a colored kimono, the variable icon h0 may change to rainbow colors. Further, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the variable icon h0 may easily change to a color (red, gold, rainbow) whose jackpot expectation is red or higher. That is, if the change of the variable icon h0 is successful, it may be confirmed that the color changes to red or more, or it may be confirmed that the color changes to red or more. However, even if the navigation character YM is displayed in a red kimono, the expectation of the jackpot may change to a color lower than red (green, blue, blinking white, white). Further, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, which is the premier color, the color of the variable icon h0 may always change to rainbow-colored. That is, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, it means that the display mode of the navigation character YM directly notifies that a big hit is made, and the navigation character YM is in another color. In the case of a display mode wearing a kimono (for example, red), if the display mode of the variable icon changes, it will be easier to make a big hit as a result, and the ease of big hit will be determined by the display mode of the navigation character YM. It can be notified indirectly.

Further, the navigation character YM may change the variable icon h0 even when the display mode has not changed. Alternatively, the variable icon h0 may be changed only when the display mode is changed. Further, the character of the main character, the lord, is a so-called constantly displayed character, but the navigation character YM that changes the variable icon h0 may be a character that is displayed only when the variable icon h0 is changed. Further, it may be a character that is displayed only when giving a notice. Further, the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above may be used as the character that changes the variable icon h0, and only the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization has the variable icon. It may be possible to use it as a character that changes h0.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 75.

A change notice display so as to return to FIG. 75 (A7) via FIG. 76 (A6-2-1) to FIG. (A6-2-3) following FIG. 75 (A6-1). The navigator character YM may change a plurality of times until the treasure chest icon I1 is hidden. The navigator character YM shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-2-1) is a red kimono, while the navigator character YM shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-2-2) is a golden kimono. The treasure box icon I1 may disappear once and be newly displayed. Further, the change notice display may be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations. In this case, the treasure chest icon I1 repeatedly opens and closes.

Further, following FIG. 75 (A6-1), a change animation as shown in FIGS. 76 (A6-3-1) to FIG. 76 (A6-3-1) may be displayed. That is, the navigation character YM may be further promoted by a notice different from the change notice display (here, the UFO icon UFI). In the figure (A 6-3-3a) following FIG. 76 (A 6-3-2), a golden beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI toward the navigator character YM wearing a red kimono. As shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-3-4a), the navigation character YM has changed to a display mode wearing a golden kimono. Alternatively, in the figure (A 6-3-3b) following FIG. 76 (A 6-3-2), a gray beam from the flying UFO icon UFI is directed toward the navigator character YM wearing a red kimono. After being irradiated, the navigator character YM is enlarged while wearing a red kimono as shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-3-4b).

Although promotion has been described here, there may be cases where the navigation character YM does not change even when the beam is irradiated (so-called failure pattern), or when the beam is irradiated, the default display mode and the default display mode are used. There may be a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn, or a case where the display becomes smaller (when demoted).

In addition, FIG. 76 (A 14-2-1) may be displayed following FIG. 75 (A 14-1), which is a scene after the lord and the swordsman slash each other in the super reach production. That is, as the middle symbol, "decoration 6" different from the left and right symbols ("decoration 7") is displayed in a large size (shaking display), and in the following figure (A 14-2-2), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed. Decorative symbols All symbols are temporarily displayed lighter than normal darkness. In addition, the figure shows the scene where the lord collapsed. In FIG. 76 (A 14-2-3), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed again in normal darkness, and in the same figure (A 14-2-4), the wipe effect is displayed. This is performed, and switching between the super reach effect scene (effect display) and the normal background (background before the start of the super reach effect shown in FIG. 75 (A1) and the like) is performed. In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 76 (A14-2-5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is once displayed as a wipe with no pattern and the same color. In this wipe display, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. The variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may also be displayed. In FIG. 76 (A14-2-6), the wipe-out is performed, the background returns to the normal background, and the display mode of the navigation character YM also returns to the default display mode. The display mode of the navigation character YM may return to the default display mode at the start of the wipe effect (timing of FIG. 76 (A 14-2-4)). In FIG. 76 (A 14-2-7), the wipe effect is completed, and the decorative pattern display device 208 sways and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loss. There is. In addition, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and both the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are displayed. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 76 (A14-2-7) remains in the red display mode, but may return to the default display mode, or the variable icon h0 itself may be erased. Good. On the other hand, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the display that returns to the default state from the state in which the display mode of the navigator has changed is not visible because the navigator is hidden, but the display that returns to the default state from the state in which the display mode of the navigator has changed is displayed. May be visible. (For example, a display that switches from a state in which the display mode of the navigator character has changed to the default state, an animation display that returns from the state in which the display mode of the navigator character has changed to the default state, and the like can be mentioned.)
At the time of wipe-out (Fig. 76 (A 14-2-6) to Fig. (A 14-2-7)), the variable icon h0 and / or the navigation character YM is displayed, but it is not displayed. In some cases, when it is displayed, the revival effect may be more easily performed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, when it is displayed, the revival effect may be performed without fail, and when it is not displayed, the revival effect may or may not be performed.

Further, in FIGS. 76 (A14-2-1) to FIG. 76 (A14-2-3), a part of the hold frame UI (pedestal hs0'and right base icon bIr) is displayed, but the hold frame is displayed. The entire UI may be hidden, or only part of it may be hidden. Further, the variable icon h0 may be hidden, or the navigation character YM may be hidden. Alternatively, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden. Also, if the hold icon has been displayed so far, the hold icon may also be hidden. Further, other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden if they have been displayed so far.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 75.

Following FIG. 75 (A16-1), the display as shown in FIGS. 77 (A16-2-1) to FIG. 77 (A16-2-2) may be performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (A 16-2-2), the entire screen is beginning to become thin. After that, it may disappear once by the re-lottery effect, and the screen (screen of victory of the lord) shown in FIG. 77 (A 16-2-1) may be displayed again, or FIG. 75 (A 14-2-3) may be displayed. ) May be displayed, or a combination of decorative symbols (in the case of a big hit combination or a loss) in a normal background as shown in the same figure (A16-2-3). A screen may be displayed in which (may be a combination) is swayed.

Further, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are also displayed on the redisplayed screen, and if the display mode of the navigation character YM and / and the variable icon h0 is a red display mode, an advantageous jackpot confirmation (for example, probability change) is made. A big hit or a big hit with a long number of rounds) may be fixed. Alternatively, if the display mode has not changed, the advantageous jackpot is not fixed, but if the display mode is promoted, the advantageous jackpot may be fixed, and the display mode is a gold or rainbow-colored premium. If so, an advantageous jackpot may be fixed.

Further, FIGS. 77 (I 1) to 77 (I 12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations and also functions as a look-ahead notice.

In FIG. 77 (I1), a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes.

In FIG. 77 (i2), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 77 (I3), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono remains displayed.

In FIG. 77 (I-4-1), the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started. That is, the navigation character YM of the lord, who had been standing facing the front (initial posture) until then, turns to the variable icon h0 and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and held. In FIG. 77 (15), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM of the lord, but in the figure (i 6), the display mode of the variable icon h0 remains the default, and the change effect ends in failure. There is. In FIG. 77 (I7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed again in the initial posture.

In FIG. 77 (I8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even when the third symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 77 (i9), the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started again. In FIG. 77 (I11), the variable icon h0, which had been white until then, has changed to red, and the normal notice has started. In the figure (i12), the navigator character YM returns to the initial posture in the display mode wearing the red kimono. After that, although not shown, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display currently being performed.

Further, instead of FIG. 77 (I 4-1), in the same figure (I 4-2-1), the navigation character YM moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the hold icon display area HIS during the symbol variation display. , In the figure (I4-2-2), the change animation for the hold icon is started. The movement of the navigation character YM may be an animation, or the display position may be switched instantaneously. Further, when the navigation character YM goes out of the effect icon display area DIS, another display (for example, "business trip" on the signboard is displayed at the position (initial position) where the navigation character YM was displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The icon display) described as "Medium" may be displayed.

It should be noted that the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, even if it always succeeds (the display mode of the hold icon changes). Good. Further, the change effect may be performed only on the hold icon to be read ahead. For example, only in the state where the number of holds is 1, the first hold icon h11 may be targeted, or a plurality of hold icons (which may include variable icons) may be targeted. Further, the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may be performed as many times as necessary until the display mode changes (successfully) with respect to the look-ahead target hold, and if it fails once, it may not be performed again. ..

Further, the change effect may be performed again on the hold icon whose display mode has changed once due to the change effect. This applies not only to the hold icon but also to the variable icon h0.

Further, the navigation character YM may be moved from the effect icon display area DIS even in the change effect for the variable icon h0. Further, the navigation character YM may move within the effect icon display area DIS even if it does not exit the effect icon display area DIS. Further, the navigation character YM may be movable only within the hold frame UI, or may be movable outside from the hold frame UI.

In this example, the change animation of the variation icon h0 using the navigation character YM is performed every time from the next variation of the variation in which the color of the navigation character YM turns red to the variation of the hold of the look-ahead target. There may be a change in which the change animation is not performed between the change after the change in which the color of the navigation character YM turns red and the change in the look-ahead target. In addition, a change animation may be performed for the fluctuation in which the navigation character YM turns red.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a change effect of the hold icon and a change effect of the variable icon by the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 78 (c1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes.

In FIG. 78 (U2), the effect icon (here, the UFO icon UFI) appears outside the hold frame UI and approaches the hold frame UI. The effect icon may appear in the hold frame UI. As shown in FIG. 78 (U3), a white beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI toward the second hold icon h12, and as shown in FIG. 78 (U4), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is , The display mode changes from the default display mode to the display mode of blinking white. That is, it has succeeded in promotion production. There are a plurality of types of effect icons, and the success probability of the promotion effect may change depending on the effect icon that appears. For example, if the first effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be successful, and if the second effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be 80% or more successful. If a third effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be less than 50% successful. In FIG. 78 (U4), the UFO icon UFI disappears. In FIG. 78 (U5), the three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. In FIG. 78 (U6), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 78 (U7), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started, and in FIG. 78 (U8), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 78 (9), the navigation character YM in the default display mode changes to a bow-drawing pose, and the promotion effect of the hold icon by the navigation character YM is started. The promotion effect here is also an animation display. In FIG. 78 (U10), an arrow is fired, and the arrow flies over the variable icon h0, and in FIG. 78 (U11), it hits the first hold icon h11, which is a display mode of blinking white. In FIG. 12 (U12), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from blinking white to a blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. The promotion effect here may also fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, it may always succeed (change the display mode of the hold icon). Further, as long as the number of holds is 1, the first hold icon h11 may be targeted, or a plurality of hold icons (which may include variable icons) may be targeted. Further, the promotion effect may be performed as many times as necessary until the display mode changes (successfully) with respect to the look-ahead target hold, and if it fails once, it may not be performed again. Further, the promotion effect may be performed again on the hold icon whose display mode has changed once due to the promotion effect. Note that the promotion effect by the navigation character may be an effect performed only on one of the hold icons, even if a plurality of hold icons are displayed (that is, the position of the hold icon A moves as the hold decreases). However, the promotion effect by the navigation character is performed only for the hold icon A), and the effect may be performed for a plurality of hold icons and / or variable icons displayed in the hold icon display area. .. In FIG. 78 (U13), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture, in FIG. (U14), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed. Has been done. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 78 (U 15), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started, and in FIG. 78 (U 16), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. The variable icon h0 is an icon changed from the first hold icon h11 that changed to the blue display mode in the previous promotion effect, and is also displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the blue display mode.

In FIG. 78 (U17), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in the same figure (U18), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box appears. Icon I1 remains. In FIG. 78 (U19), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, a smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and a part or all of the navigator character YM is hidden by the smoke image, and the navigator character YM is hidden. Is clearly less visible than it was before the smoke image appeared. In FIG. 78 (U 20-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. At the timing of FIG. 78 (U21), the treasure box icon I1 disappears, and only the navigation character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The color of the display mode of the navigator character YM represents the reliability (expected degree) of the jackpot of the symbol variation display currently being performed. Alternatively, it may represent the ease (promotion) of change in the display mode of the variable icon. Further, although the hold icon is not displayed here, when the hold icon is displayed, it may represent the ease (promotion) of change in the display mode of the hold icon.

In FIG. 78 (U23), the reach state is entered, and in FIG. 78 (U24), the super reach effect is developed. When the super reach effect is developed, the left base icon bIl of the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold frame UI disappear, and if the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 78 (U24), the right base icon bIr disappears, and the foot portion of the navigation character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono disappears. Further, although the pedestal in the variable icon display area CIS has sunk, the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. In FIG. 78 (U25) during the super reach, the navigation character YM disappears completely, and the blue display mode variation icon h0 is displayed on the lowered pedestal hs0'. Although the navigation character YM has disappeared here, it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 75. Further, both the pedestal hs0'and the variable icon h0 may disappear, or only one of them may disappear.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (U27-1), a duel scene in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy are confronting each other is displayed on the background screen h of the wilderness as a continuation of the super reach effect. .. Again, both the pedestal hs0'and the variable icon h0 are displayed.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 78, a modified example, and the like.

In FIG. 79 (U29), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed lighter than the normal darkness, and the scene in which the lord collapsed is displayed. Again, both the pedestal hs0'and the variable icon h0 are displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (U30), the super reach effect is completed, the background is returned to the normal background, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display, the pedestal hs0'and the variable icon h0 are displayed. There is. In FIG. 79 (U31), the display of the left symbol and the right symbol has been restored, and the pedestal that had been sunk until now has begun to rise with the variable icon h0 on it. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (U32), the combination of decorative symbols is swayed and displayed, and the hold frame UI is also redisplayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

Further, instead of FIG. 78 (U 20-1), in FIG. 79 (U 20-2), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode wearing a premier rainbow-colored kimono. In this case, the jackpot is confirmed because the display mode of the navigation character YM is rainbow color regardless of the display mode (color) of the variable icon h0. The display mode of the variable icon may also be changed to a display mode of red or higher, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color. Further, when the navigation character YM functions as a look-ahead notice, the display mode of the hold icon to be read ahead may be changed to a display mode of red or higher, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color.

Further, instead of FIG. 78 (U27-1), in FIG. 79 (U27-2), the right base icon bIr is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and further, the navigation of the display mode wearing a red kimono. The character YM is displayed. The navigation character YM displayed here is only displayed and does not have to do anything. Alternatively, the navigation character YM itself may independently promote its own display mode or change the display mode of the variable icon. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may be changed by another notice display.

Here, the notice by the effect icon (here, UFO icon UFI) and / or the change notice display (here, treasure box icon I1) is performed before one decorative symbol (for example, the left symbol) becomes a temporary stop display. It is configured so that after one decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, no notice is given by the effect icon and / or change notice display, but one decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. After that, the effect icon and / or the change notice display may be performed. Although described as one decorative symbol, it may be a plurality of decorative symbols or all decorative symbols. Further, when the symbol (variable display by the special symbol display device) is completely stopped, the effect icon and / or the change notice display is configured so as not to give a notice, but it may be done.

FIGS. 79 (E1) to 79 (E4-1) are examples in which the navigation character YM itself changes its own display mode.

In FIG. 79 (E1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 79 (E2), the pose of the navigation character YM is changed, and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 79 (E3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a gray smoke image, making it difficult to see, and in FIG. 79 (E4-1), the display mode changes to a red kimono. ing.

Further, in the figure (E 3-2) instead of FIG. 79 (E 3-1), the navigator character YM itself is wrapped in a red smoke image, and after that, the navigator character YM is a red kimono. It changes to the display mode wearing. In this way, the change animation itself may foretell the display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes. Further, the red smoke image may be a notice display for notifying that the display mode will be changed to red or higher if the navigation character is successfully changed, and it is confirmed that the display mode will be changed to red or higher. It may be a notice display.

Further, instead of FIG. 79 (E3-1), in the same figure (E3-3), the navigator character YM itself is wrapped in a rainbow-colored smoke image, and the pattern variation display currently being performed, or The big hit is confirmed (the big hit may be rich) in the symbol variation display started after this. In this way, the change animation itself may give a normal notice or a look-ahead notice. The rainbow-colored smoke image may be a display for notifying that the display mode will be changed to the rainbow-colored if the navigation character is successfully changed. In this case, even if the rainbow-colored smoke image is displayed, the rainbow It is not necessary that the pattern variation and / or the holding area where the color smoke image is displayed is confirmed as a big hit (the big hit may be rich).

Further, in the figure (E4-2) instead of FIG. 79 (E4-1), the navigation character is changed to another navigation character. Here, it has changed to a princess navigation character. The changing character type may be a character set by the player in the character selection in the above-mentioned customization, or may be only a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization.

Further, instead of FIG. 79 (E4-2), in the same figure (E4-3), the navigator character is changed to a navigator character (for example, the character of the bancho) that the player cannot select. In addition, the navigator character of the bancho may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon can be performed more easily than the navigator character YM, or the symbol change and / or hold in which the navigator character has changed. It may be configured so that the expectation of the big hit is high.

In addition, the navigator character of the princess (bancho) may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon can be performed more easily than the navigator character YM. / Or it may be configured so that the expectation of the jackpot in the hold is high, or it is configured so that the notice of the appearance of the princess (bancho) and / or the super reach effect is likely to occur (or will always occur). You may be.

When the navigator character YM changes to another navigator character, it may be configured to change only to the navigator characters that can be selected by the player, and the navigator character may be changed to a non-selectable navigator character. It may be configured, and may be both a case where the player is changed to a selectable navigator character and a case where the player is changed to a non-selectable navigator character. In both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigator character and the player is changed to a non-selectable navigator character, the player selects the navigator character rather than the navigator character that can be selected by the player. The disabled navigation character may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon is more likely to be performed, and the expectation of the jackpot in the hold and / or the changed symbol of the navigation character is high. It may be configured as follows. Conversely, in both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigator character and the player is changed to a non-selectable navigator character, the player is more likely to play than the non-selectable navigator character. The navigator character that can be selected by the person may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the fluctuate icon is more likely to be performed, or the symbol change in which the navigator character is changed and / or the expectation of the jackpot in the hold. It may be configured to have a high degree.

Further, instead of FIG. 79 (E4-1), in the same figure (E4-4), the character does not change, and the change production of itself fails.

In this example, the navigation character YM itself changes its display mode by itself, and the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display is not entangled, but the color of the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display is used. , The display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes may be announced. For example, when the red treasure chest icon I1 appears, it may be certain that the navigation character YM changes to red or a display mode equal to or higher than red.

Further, the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box may be used to foretell the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display currently being performed or the symbol variation display to be started later. That is, a normal notice or a look-ahead notice may be given depending on the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the holding frame is temporarily invisible.

The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (1). Further, the navigation character YM in the initial posture shown in FIG. 80 (1) is the default display mode. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes.

In FIG. 80 (2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 80 (4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. Further, the background of the sea is still displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (4).

In FIG. 80 (5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started, and the background of the sea is still displayed.

In FIG. 80 (6), the background change notice, which is a kind of pre-reading notice, is started. The target of the background change notice (holding for pre-reading target) here is the holding increased at the timing of FIG. 80 (2) (second holding at this timing). In the background change notice, images of sliding doors appear from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes an image of sliding doors due to the animation of closing the sliding doors (see FIG. 80 (7)). Therefore, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding door and become invisible. Instead of the fusuma image, an image that overlaps from the front side may appear in a part of the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11, h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM. Alternatively, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11, h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM may be produced so that no images overlap.

The background change notice may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing of FIG. 80 (2)). In this example, it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, but it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started by the end of the fluctuation of the look-ahead target hold. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the look-ahead target hold.

In addition, in the background change notice, the appearance image (here, the image of the sliding door) may indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit of the look-ahead target hold, or if the navigation character YM having the same color as the color of the sliding door appears. , The navigation character YM functions as a change notice and corresponds to a change notice display. Also, if the color of the sliding door is green, it may function as a notice of the background itself, such as changing to the background of the mountain. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

In FIG. 80 (8), the sliding door opens, and the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11, h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to appear. It's gone. Due to the background change notice, the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 has changed to the night background. Further, the navigation character YM after the background change has changed to a character that depends on the changed background. Here, the character of the lord has changed to the character of the robot. In this example, one type of character corresponds to one type of background, but a plurality of types of characters may correspond to one type of background.

In FIG. 80 (11), the reach state is entered. Further, between FIGS. 80 (9-1) and FIG. 80 (11), the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. The display mode of the variable icon h0 may change from the default display mode to the red display mode when the reach state is entered. Although the hold frame UI is displayed, the hold icons h11 and h12 have all disappeared. After that, it develops into a super reach production and changes to the background of the super reach production (here, the background of the wilderness). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (13) shows a scene in which the lord was defeated in the background of the wilderness. The robot navigation character YM overlaps with the fallen lord, making it difficult to see.

In FIG. 80 (14), the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the wipe display by the wipe-in. As shown in FIG. 80 (15), in the wipe display here, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display disappear, and the model title is in the left corner. Is only displayed. In FIG. 80 (16), the wipe-out is performed, the background returns to the night background, and the navigation character YM is also beginning to be seen.

In FIG. 80 (17), the wipe effect is completed, and the decorative pattern display device 208 sways and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loss. In addition, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and the display of the variable icon h0 in the red display mode and the hold icons h11 and h12 are resumed.

In FIG. 80 (18), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of loss, "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7".

After that, after the first hold is digested and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the next symbol variation display is started as shown in FIG. 80 (20-1). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the first decorative symbol has started, and the symbol variation of the look-ahead target pending has ended, but the background remains the night background.

In FIG. 80 (21), the background change notice is started again, the images of the sliding doors appear from the left and right, and the animation that the sliding doors are closed makes the entire display screen an image of the sliding doors (FIG. 80 (22)). reference). In FIG. 80 (23), the sliding doors open, and the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11, h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to appear. It's gone. As shown in FIG. 80 (24), the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 has returned to the background of the sea, and the navigator character YM has also returned to the character of the lord.

Further, instead of FIG. 80 (9-1), in the same figure (9-2), the display mode of the robot navigation character YM is changed to a display mode different from the default display mode. The display mode of the background-dependent character (for example, color, shape, size, etc.) may also change depending on the reliability of the jackpot. Alternatively, it may have changed originally.

The navigation character YM may change depending on the production background regardless of the background of the pre-reading notice. For example, when the coastal background, the castle town background, and the castle background appear in order, the navigation character YM may change depending on each background. The appearance order of the plurality of types of backgrounds may be random. Further, when the effect mode is changed by the player, the navigation character YM may be changed depending on the background change. In addition, a navigation character different from the navigation character depending on the effect background may be displayed. For example, when the navigation character A is displayed in the effect background A and the navigation character B is displayed in the effect background B, the navigation character B may be displayed in the effect background A. Here, when a navigation character that does not match the production background is displayed, the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon is more likely to be performed than when the navigation character that matches the production background is displayed. It may be configured so that the navigation character has a changed symbol variation and / or the expectation of the jackpot in the hold is high (or the jackpot is confirmed (the jackpot may be rich)), or the effect. It may be configured so that the notice that a navigation character that does not match the background appears and / or the super reach effect occurs frequently (or always occurs).

Alternatively, conversely, the type of the navigation character YM may not change even if the background is changed, or it may never change.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 81 (or 1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 81 (or 2-1), a balloon of a line calling a friend is additionally displayed on the navigation character YM. The display of this balloon corresponds to a notice that another character (old man or princess) is displayed, which is performed by the currently displayed navigation character YM. In addition to the navigation character YM of the lord, the display of the navigation character YM1 of the princess is added to the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-1), and the princess is successfully called. The appearance of the princess character may be an animation display or a mode in which it appears instantaneously. In the case of the animation display, the animation may be an animation in which the character cannot be seen at the beginning by a smoke image, or an animation in which the character appears by walking from the right edge of the screen. This princess navigation character YM1 is also the default display mode.

In FIG. 81 (or 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM of the lord and the navigation character YM1 of the princess, both of which are the default display modes, are displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 81 (or 5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even if the next symbol variation display is started, the two navigation characters YM and YM1 are still displayed. In this way, the display of the plurality of navigation characters may span a plurality of fluctuations. However, the appearing navigation character YM1 may disappear in the symbol variation display in which the navigation character YM1 appears. Even in this case, the previously displayed navigation character (here, the navigation character YM of the lord) is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In FIG. 81 (or 5), a balloon of a line calling an old man is additionally displayed on the two navigator characters YM and YM1, and the effect icon display area DIS shown in the same figure (or 6-1) is displayed. In addition to the two navigator characters YM and YM1, the display of the grandfather's navigator character YM2 has been added, and the grandfather has been successfully called. In other words, all three are now ready. In this production, the more navigator characters gather, the higher the probability that the variable icon h0 will change, the higher the probability that the color will change to the premiere or a color close to the premiere, and the higher the expectation that the fluctuation will make a big hit. Or the expectation of a big hit after the next fluctuation may be high. In addition, when all three people are present, the rainbow color of the premiere may be confirmed or the jackpot may be confirmed. In FIG. 81 (or 7-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state with all three people aligned, and "decoration 7" is swayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol.

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 2-1), in the same figure (or 2-2-1), a notice other than the navigation character YM itself is given. That is, in FIG. 81 (or 2-1), the dialogue of the navigation character YM was a notice, but in this example, the roulette display icon RI is additionally displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the roulette notice is started. .. The roulette notice here may be dedicated to the appearance notice of other navigation characters, or may also give other notices (holding change notice, etc.). In FIG. 81 (or 2-2), the characters of the princess are displayed on the roulette display icon RI. After this, the princess navigation character YM1 may appear, but there may be cases where no navigation character appears (so-called failure), or a different navigation character (for example, the grandfather's navigation character YM2) may appear. It may appear. The roulette display icon RI is configured so that the characters of the characters that have already appeared are not displayed, but the characters of the characters that have already appeared may be configured to appear. In that case, the same character may be displayed more than once according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, if the princess character is stopped and displayed three times on the roulette display icon RI, the princess navigation character is displayed. Depending on the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, 3 people are displayed), promotion effects of characters that have already appeared may be performed (for example, 3 princess characters are displayed on the roulette display icon RI). When the stop is displayed, the princess appears the first time, the princess's kimono turns red the second time, the princess's kimono turns golden the third time, etc.).

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-2), there is a case where no navigator character appears and it fails.

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), in the same figure (or 3-3), the grandfather's navigation character YM2 appears instead of the princess's navigation character YM1. In this way, the order of appearance is not fixed, and different animations may be performed depending on the navigator characters displayed next to each other. For example, in FIG. 81 (or 3-1), the lord's navigation character YM thought that the princess's navigation character YM1 would come, but the grandfather's navigation character YM2 came and a surprised animation was displayed. It may be a premiere production that the old man comes before the princess. Also, depending on the order in which the characters appear, the probability that the variable icon h0 will change will change, the probability of changing to a premier or a color close to the premier will change, the expectation of a big hit will change due to the change, and the big hit will occur after the next change. Expectations do not have to change or affect them at all.

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-4-1), the display position may be predetermined depending on the character. That is, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-4-1), the navigation character YM of the lord is displayed at the left end, and the navigation character YM1 of the princess is displayed one person apart. Then, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-4-3), the grandfather's navigation character YM2 is displayed at a position separated by one person. In this way, even if the order of display positions (lord, grandfather, princess) is fixed, there may be cases where the order is broken (lord, princess, grandfather). In this case, the premiere production (Big hit confirmation effect) or big hit rich.

In addition, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), as shown in the figure (or 3-5-1), when the number of navigation characters increases, the increase is notified by character display (here, "princess stock"). ”), It may be notified by voice from the speaker, or it may be notified by blinking of a lamp or the like. Further, in FIG. 81 (or 3-5-3), it is notified by character display that all the members have gathered. In addition, when all the members were successfully set, a different character display (for example, "Gekiatsu" or "All members reach") was displayed instead of the usual character display of "All members". In that case, it may be a premier effect (big hit confirmed effect), a big hit rich, or a specific reach mode may be always started. Further, here as well, the notification may be performed by voice from the speaker, or by blinking of a lamp or the like, together with the notification of the character display or instead of the notification of the character display.

Also, instead of Fig. 81 (or 6-1), as shown in Fig. 81 (or 6-2), characters other than the lord, princess, and grandfather (here, the haniwa character YM3 that imitates a cactus) have increased. In that case, it may be a premier production (big hit confirmed production) or a big hit rich.

If "Grandfather" is displayed even though "Princess" is specified and called, it may be a premier production (big hit confirmed production) or a big hit rich, and "Princess" is called. If the "old man" is displayed more frequently even though it is displayed, if the character ("princess") as called appears, the jackpot may be rich (or the jackpot is confirmed). Further, depending on the display mode of the navigation character (in this example, the lord) that calls another navigation character, the other navigation character may be easy to appear (stock) or difficult to appear (stock). Further, depending on the type of the navigation character that calls the other navigation character, the other navigation character may easily appear (stock) or may not appear (stock) easily. For example, it may be easier for other navigator characters to appear (stock) when the princess navigator character calls it than the lord's navigator character. Further, the characters that appear (stock) are not limited to different types of characters, and may be the same type of navigation character. For example, a plurality of navigation characters YM of the lord may be displayed, or may be described as lord × 3. Further, even if the navigation characters are of the same type, the display mode (color, shape, pose, size) may be different. Further, the effect performed after being displayed may differ depending on the character. For example, when a character is released from the effect icon display area DIS, a pseudo-continuous effect may be started when the lord is released, a hold may be promoted when the princess is released, and a timer notice may be started when the old man is released. .. Also, a plurality of characters may be emitted. Further, when a plurality of characters are emitted at the same time, an effect different from that of a single character may be emitted. For example, if the lord and the princess are released at the same time, a pseudo-continuous production that is hotter than the lord alone may be started.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a modification and the like shown in FIG. 81.

In FIG. 82 (ki 1), the lord's navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, and to the right of the navigation character YM in the default display mode, the princess navigation character YM1 in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. ing. Further, on the right side of the princess navigation character YM1, a treasure chest icon I1 for displaying a change notice is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 82 (Ki 2-1), the treasure box icon I1 opens, and a smoke image appears from the inside. Of the lord's navigation character YM and the princess's navigation character YM1, only the princess's navigation character YM1 smokes. Wrapped in the image. That is, the smoke image does not reach the navigation character YM of the lord. In FIG. 82 (Ki 4), the smoke image has disappeared, and the princess navigation character YM1 has changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono. In FIG. 82 (ki 5), the treasure chest icon I1 disappears.

Instead of FIG. 82 (Ki 2-1), in the same figure (Ki 2-2-1), the pose of the navigator character YM of the lord is changed, and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 82 (Ki 2-2-2), the lord's navigation character YM makes a smoke image appear, and only the princess's navigation character YM1 is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 82 (Ki 2-2-3), the smoke image has disappeared, and the princess navigation character YM1 has changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono. In addition, the navigation character YM of the lord has returned to the initial posture.

In the figure (ki 3-2-1) instead of the figure 82 (ki 3-1), the smoke image appearing from the treasure box icon I1 is the navigator character YM of the lord and the navigator character YM1 of the princess. It wraps the navigation character. Then, in FIG. 82 (Ki 3-2-2), the smoke image disappears, and both the lord's navigation character YM and the princess's navigation character YM1 are changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono. That is, the display mode of both of them has changed. Here, both of them have changed to the same color, but they may change to different colors. For example, one may turn red and the other may turn gold. Alternatively, both may be wrapped in a smoke image, but only one may change and the other may remain the default.

When a plurality of navigation characters are displayed, one navigation character (for example, a princess) may be promoted, and the other navigation character (for example, Yoshimune) may not be promoted. Also, both navigator characters may be promoteable. In that case, the change of one character (for example, a princess) may be hotter than the change of the other character (for example, Yoshimune), and the expectation of the jackpot may be the same. Also, it may be hotter when both characters change than when one character changes. Further, it may be hotter when one character changes depending on the change mode than when both characters change. For example, a combination of the default display mode of the lord's navigator YM and the display mode of the princess's navigator YM1 wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, and the display mode of the lord's navigator YM wearing a red kimono and the same red With the combination of the princess navigation character YM1 in the display mode wearing a kimono, the former combination may be easier to hit than the latter combination. Also, both characters may be made to change without fail. In that case, it may be configured to change to the same color, or it may be configured to change to a different color. Further, the meaning of the changed character may change depending on the changing character. For example, if the navigation character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hot, the fluctuation is hot, and if the navigation character YM1 of the princess in the display mode wearing a red kimono is easy to develop into super reach. May be good. In addition, if the navigation character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the jackpot is confirmed, and if it is the navigator character YM of the princess in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the jackpot with probability variation is confirmed ( It may be an advantageous jackpot confirmation).

In this example, when one navigator character is always displayed and another navigator character is newly called by the navigator character, or when a plurality of navigator characters are always displayed, the navigator character YM is displayed. This embodiment is also applicable when there is a period during which the navigation character is not displayed and one or more navigation characters are displayed at a specific timing.

FIGS. 82 (1-1) to 82 (7) show an example of the effect in which the navigation character YM is entwined with the button effect.

In FIG. 82 (ku 1-1), the navigation character YM of the lord of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

The button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 82 (ku 2-1). The button display icon 136D is a balloon display mode, and corresponds to a notice given by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In FIG. 82 (ku 3), the operation validity period is started, and in FIG. 82 (ku 4), the remaining period meter is slightly decreased. In FIG. 82 (ku 5), the chance button 136 is operated, and in the figure (ku 6), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and the character of the lord is visually recognized by the effect image. It's getting harder. In FIG. 82 (ku 7), it is changed to a navigator character of a lord in a display mode wearing a red kimono.

Also in FIG. 82 (ku 1-2-1), the navigation character YM of the lord of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, but the button display icon 136D is not displayed here. That is, the back button effect is performed, and when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 82 (ku 1-2-2), the chance button 136 is operated in the figure (ku 1-2-3). In response, the change animation of the navigation character YM has started. In this way, the display mode of the navigation character may be changed by the back button effect.

When the back button effect and another button effect (with button display) overlap, both may be changed, the back button effect may be prioritized, or another button effect may be prioritized. The same may be applied when the back buttons are duplicated.

Further, when the look-ahead button notice and the change button notice (normal notice) overlap, the look-ahead button notice may be prioritized, or the change button notice may be given priority.

Further, instead of FIG. 82 (K 2-1), in the same figure (K 2-2), the button display icon 136D is not added to the navigation character YM, but is located at a position away from the navigation character YM. , The button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT are displayed at a position outside the effect icon display area DIS and outside the hold frame UI. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT here is a notice different from the notice given by the navigation character YM itself, and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed by this different notice. The button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT may be displayed at all times, or may be displayed before the valid period starts.

FIG. 83 shows an effect example in which the effect of the button hold icon is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 83 (ku-3-1), the navigation character YM of the lord in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 83 (ku-3-1) is a button hold icon, and the button image 136a is displayed on the white circle display. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The operation validity period of the chance button 136 here is within the period of the fluctuation. When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-2a), a smoke image of the effect appears as shown in the figure (ku 1-3-3a), and the smoke image causes navigation. Part or all of the character YM is hidden, making it clearly more difficult to see than before the smoke image appeared. Here, the button image 136a displayed on the first hold icon h11 is erased, and no change (for example, change in display mode) occurs in the first hold icon h11. That is, when the chance button 136 is displayed while the button hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the navigation character YM is changed. is there. When the chance button 136 is operated outside the operation valid period, the navigation character and / or the button hold icon itself is configured not to change. However, there may be a case where the state shifts to the same figure (ku 1-3-4) described later via the state shown in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-3a).

Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-2a), as shown in the figure (ku 1-3-3b1), the button image 136a disappears and the button image 136a disappears with respect to the button hold icon. An effect image may be applied to the first hold icon h11, and a change animation may be started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-3b2), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from a white circle display to a blue circle display mode. In addition, there may be a case where the display mode of the white circle display remains (after all, a failed pattern). Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-2a), it is shown in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-3b2) without going through the figure (ku 1-3-3b1). As shown, the icon that was the button hold icon may change to a blue circle display mode without a change animation.

Alternatively, from FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-3b1), as shown in the figure (ku 1-3-4), although the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains unchanged as a white circle display, the navigation character The YM may change to a display mode wearing a red kimono. Here, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM is not a change animation when passing through FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-3b1), but the display mode is momentarily switched, and the same figure (ku 1-3-3b1) is shown. When passing through 3a), it is displayed after the change animation by the effect of the smoke image is executed. However, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed when passing through FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-3b1). The chance button 136 may change immediately after being operated, or may change with a slight delay. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-2a), it is shown in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-4) without going through the figure (ku 1-3-3b1). As described above, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change.

Also, even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated (Fig. 83 (ku 1-3-2b1)) and the next fluctuation is started (the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is still started). In the case where the change of the second decorative symbol is started although it is not done), the change icon h0 may become the button hold icon as shown in the figure (ku 1-3-2b2). In this case, the button effect is carried over to the next fluctuation, and when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the button image 136a disappears and as shown in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-2b3'). , The white circle display on which the button image 136a is displayed may change to the display mode of the blue circle display (success pattern). At the time of change, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed. Further, although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, it may change. On the other hand, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the button image 136a disappears with respect to the variable icon h0, but there is no change (for example, a change in the display mode) in the white circle display in which the button image 136a is displayed. It may not occur. That is, it is a pattern in which the change effect from the button hold icon fails. Although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change. Even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated and the next fluctuation is started, the button hold icon may be configured so that it does not change, and the button hold icon is a chance. It may be configured to change automatically after the next fluctuation is started without operating a button.

In addition, even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated (Fig. 83 (K 1-3-2b1)) and the next fluctuation is started, the same figure (K 1-3-2b1) is displayed. As shown in -2b2'), an effect image may be applied to the variable icon h0, and a change animation may be started. In this case, it may shift to FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-2b3') or to FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-2b3).

The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 83 (ku-3-1) had the default display mode, but the same applies to the navigation character YM in the promoted display mode. That is, in FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-4), the promotion is performed for the second time. When there are a plurality of hold icons, icons other than the button hold icon may be changed. Further, the hold icon that has already changed may be changed by operating the button by displaying the button hold icon.

When eight hold icons are displayed, for example, when N are accumulated, some or all of the hold icons change to button hold icons, and the hold icon, variable icon, and navigation character YM change according to the button operation. It may be configured to change. This is also applicable when only four hold icons are displayed.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example in which there is a period during which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (Ke 1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (Ke 1).

In FIG. 84 (Ke 2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 84 (Ke 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 84 (Ke 4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started. In addition, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 changes to a blue display mode in response to the start of the symbol variation display. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 84 (ke 5-1), and in the same figure (ke 6-1), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character of the lord is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. YM is displayed. The navigation character YM of the lord shown in FIG. 84 (Ke 6-1) is the default display mode. Here, the navigation character YM is a notice corresponding to the look-ahead target hold (pre-reading notice and / or notice of the change).

The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing of FIG. 84 (ke 2)). In this example, it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, but it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started by the end of the fluctuation of the look-ahead target hold. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed whenever there is a look-ahead target hold, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won.

In FIG. 84 (Ke 7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode, which is started to be displayed during the symbol variation display stopped and displayed here, is still displayed in the initial posture.

Next, the next symbol variation display is started, and in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 84 (Ke 9-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is placed next to the navigation character YM in the default display mode. It is displayed. The display mode of the navigator character YM is changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono by the same change animation as the change animation shown in FIG. 75 (A 4-1) (FIG. 84 (Ke 11)). Even if the change animation is executed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the default display mode. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed without the treasure box icon I1 appearing. That is, the change notice display may not be performed.

In FIG. 84 (Ke 13), the change of the look-ahead target hold has started, and the change icon h0 of the blue display mode is displayed. In addition, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed even during this fluctuation. Therefore, the navigation character YM was not displayed at first, but after it is displayed, it is always displayed over a plurality of fluctuations.

The navigation character YM may disappear when the change of the look-ahead target hold that is currently being performed is completed. In this case, the navigator character YM may disappear between the three symbols or the temporary stop (shaking display) and the symbol stop in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on hold for pre-reading, or one or two decorative symbols. May disappear when is temporarily stopped (first stop or second stop).

Further, the navigation character YM disappears at the timing of the stop display in FIG. 84 (Ke 7), and may not be displayed across fluctuations.

Further, instead of FIG. 84 (Ke 5-1), as shown in FIG. 84 (Ke 5-2), the place where the navigation character YM is displayed is not limited to the effect icon display area DIS, but the hold icon. It may be displayed in the display area HIS. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed in a plurality of places, and may be displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Further, the navigation character YM may perform different effects depending on the displayed position. For example, the hold icon may be changed when it is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon may be changed when it is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Further, the probability of changing the variable icon may differ depending on the display position, and the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the display position. The location where the navigation character YM is displayed may always be only one display area (for example, effect icon display area DIS, hold icon display area HIS, variable icon display area CIS, etc.).

Further, instead of FIG. 84 (ke 5-1), as shown in the figure (ke 5-3), the navigation character YM can be moved within the hold icon display area HIS (in the left base icon bIl). If the hold icon is displayed, the front side of the hold icon may be moved. That is, it is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon from the front side.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 84 (Ke 5-1), as shown in FIG. 84 (Ke 5-4), the navigation character YM may move behind the hold icon. That is, this time, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap the navigation character YM from the front side.

The navigation character may perform an animation for moving a plurality of display areas (for example, effect icon display area DIS, hold icon display area HIS, variable icon display area CIS, etc.).

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example in which there is another period during which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-1) displays the navigation character YM in the default display mode. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes.

After that, the pending digestion continues, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-3a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is swayed and displayed in the state where there is no hold. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-4), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed without holding. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed.

In FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-6), there is a prize in the first special figure start port 230, the symbol variation display is started, and the first decorative symbol has not started to change yet, without holding. , The second decorative pattern has begun to change. At this point, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-7), an increasing animation of the hold icon indicating the hold that has already been digested (the hold of the started symbol change display) is displayed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-7) is displayed lightly, and the erasing animation of the navigation character YM has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (ke 6-2-8), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, and the hold icon h11 increased by the hold increase animation is displayed on the first stage hs1. There is. At this stage, the navigation character YM has completely disappeared. Actually, FIGS. 85 (Ke 6-2-6) to FIG. (Ke 6-2-8) are events for a moment, but the erasing animation of the navigation character YM may be performed.

Although there is a time lag in the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM disappears when the symbol variation display is started from the state where there is no hold. The timing of disappearing here may be before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, at the same time as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol. It may be after the start of. Further, when the hold increase animation is performed, it may be before the start of the hold increase animation, at the same time as the start of the hold increase animation, or after the start of the hold increase animation. Good.

Further, instead of FIG. 85 (ke 6-2-3a), as shown in the figure (ke 6-2-3b1), the reach state may be entered, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is the reach state. Some may be configured to remain unchanged, or conversely, may change during reach. Further, the display mode of the variable icon may also be configured so as not to change during the reach state depending on the navigation character YM, or conversely, it may change during the reach state.

In FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-3b2), it has developed into a super reach production, and in the same figure (Ke 6-2-3b3), a duel scene in which the lord and the swordsman who plays the villain are confronting each other is displayed. Also in FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-3b3), the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

The display mode of the navigation character YM may be promoted when it develops into super reach, and conversely, it does not develop into super reach, and in the case of normal reach, the display mode is not promoted. You may. Alternatively, on the contrary, even in the normal reach, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be promoted. For example, it may be promoted as a look-ahead notice after the next change. In addition, if the "Navi character promotion" symbol stops at the middle symbol during normal reach, the display mode is promoted. Further, the display mode may be promoted as a notice of the change (normal notice).

After that, in FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-3b4), the wipe effect and the like described with reference to FIGS. 76 (A 14-2-4) to FIG. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5-2-3b5), the combination of loss, "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is swayed and displayed. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM remains the default display mode. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-3b6), the combination of loss, "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the navigation character YM is also the default. Is displayed as it is.

When FIGS. 85 (ke 6-2-1) to (ke 6-2-8) and (ke 6-2-3b1) to (ke 6-2-3b6) are summarized, the symbol change of the look-ahead target pending is completed. , Even when the hold becomes 0, the navigation character displayed as the notice corresponding to the look-ahead target hold (pre-reading notice and / or notice of the change) is not hidden, and the next change is started. It has been erased at the time. Note that the navigation character is used before the end of the symbol change of the look-ahead target hold (for example, before the decorative symbol is displayed as one or more temporary stops, at the same time as the temporary stop, or after the temporary stop, or after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. Before all (in this example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are temporarily stopped, the symbols (special symbols) are displayed as stopped at the same time as the temporary stop. It may be deleted before (such as before), or it may be deleted after the symbol change of the look-ahead target hold is completed (at the same time when the symbol (special symbol) is displayed as a stop or after the display is stopped).

FIG. 86 shows an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed.

In the holding frame UI of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86, the variable icon display area CIS is provided at the left end, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged. Further, the effect icon display area DIS is provided at the right end. The hold icon display area HIS is located between the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS, and the base icon bIm extends. Eight stages are arranged on this base icon bIm, and a hold icon is displayed on each stage. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (a1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, in the second hold number display, it is displayed that the hold number of the special figure 1 is "3" and the hold number of the special figure 2 is "2", and five hold icons are displayed in total. There is. All of these five hold icons are the default display modes.

In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 86, when there are five holds, the stage corresponding to the sixth hold is displayed in the same display mode (for example, white) as the first to fifth stages, and the seventh stage is displayed. , The eighth stages hs7 and hs8 are displayed in different display modes (for example, gray). Also, until 3 holds are accumulated, the 4th stage is white, the 5th and subsequent stages are gray, and when 4 holds are accumulated, the 5th stage is white, and the 6th and subsequent stages are accumulated. Stage turns gray. In this way, the display mode of the stage changes according to the number of holds, but the stage may always have the same display mode regardless of the number of holds.

Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (a1).

In FIG. 86 (ko a2), the hold of special figure 2 is increased by one, the hold increase animation is performed in the figure (ko a3), and the hold icon is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (ko a4). Is displayed. The added sixth hold icon h6 is also the default display mode. Further, the seventh stage hs7 changes to white, and the gray stage becomes only the eighth stage hs8.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (a5), the navigation character YM in the default display mode appears, and a balloon saying "two more are full" is added. The navigator character YM appears when the number of holds is N or more (6 or more in this example).

In FIG. 86 (this a6), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (this a7), seven hold icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. A balloon saying "One more tank is full" is added to. The added seventh hold icon h7 is also the default display mode. In addition, the final eighth stage hs8 has also changed to white, and the gray stage has disappeared.

In FIG. 86 (ko a8), the hold of special figure 2 is increased by one, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 8 (ko a9), eight hold icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. A balloon called "Full tank" is added to. The added eighth hold icon h8 is also the default display mode. In this example, the navigator character YM uses a balloon to notify the number of holds, but it does not have to be.

In this example, the navigation character YM may change when eight holds are accumulated (when the tank is full). In FIG. 86 (this a10), the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in the smoke image, it does not always change, and it may not change. Further, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may change whenever the hold is full. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to change whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image.

In FIG. 86 (a11), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and a balloon saying "The holding is hot" is added to the navigation character YM, and a look-ahead notice is executed. .. The notice displayed in the balloon may be a notice of the change. In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in the hold may be announced by the advance notice displayed in the balloon. Further, in this example, the navigation character changes due to the symbol change when the hold is full, but the navigation character may be changed according to the next change of the symbol change when the hold is full. In addition, the navigation character may change each time the symbol changes, and the change in the navigation character may give a notice of the symbol change.

The change of the navigation character YM is not limited to the color, and may be a display size, a pose, or a shape. In addition, there are a plurality of types of characters that appear, and the heat may differ depending on the character. For example, even if the navigator character of the princess in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hotter than the navigator character of the lord in the display mode wearing a red kimono, or the navigator character of the bancho is hotter than the navigator character of the lord wearing a red kimono. Good.

FIG. 87 shows an example of an effect in which the navigation character YM is entwined with a decorative pattern of a normal drawing.

In FIG. 87 (this b1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, a circled special figure 1 first hold icon h11 indicating the hold of special figure 1 is displayed. The special figure 1 first hold icon h11 is a default display mode. Further, in FIG. 87 (this b1), the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the roulette display icon RI is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The roulette display icon RI here displays a variable display of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure, and the outcomes are "○" and "×", as well as "Geki" as a big hit notice of the special figure of the change. "Atsu" is also included. In FIG. 87 (kob2), “◯” is displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and it is notified that the roulette drawing lottery has been won.

In FIG. 87 (this b3), the navigation character YM appears in the effect icon display area DIS. This navigator character YM is the default display mode, and appears when the general drawing lottery is won. In the following FIG. 87 (kob4), since the general drawing lottery was won, the electric chew is released, and the navigator character YM notifies that the electric chew is being opened. In FIG. 87 (this b5-1), since the electric chew is open, there is a prize in succession to the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 increases to four which are full. In FIG. 87 (this b6-1), the second hold number display shows that the hold number of the special figure 1 is “1” and the hold number of the special figure 2 is “4”. Four diamond-shaped hold icons representing the hold of 2 are displayed (special figure 2 first hold icon h21 to special figure 2 fourth hold icon h24). The four special figure 2 hold icons h21 to h24 are all default display modes. This pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, and as for the hold icon, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed with priority over the hold icon of special figure 1, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is the special figure 1. It is displayed so that it overlaps from the front side with a part of the hold icon of.

In FIG. 87 (ko b7), the notification during the opening of the electric chew by the navigation character YM is completed, and in the following figure (ko b8), the roulette display icon RI itself disappears downward because the opening time of the electric chew is finished. I'm talking. The roulette display icon RI may be displayed until all the pending symbol variation displays of the special figure 2 are completed. In FIG. 87 (this b9), the roulette display icon RI has completely disappeared.

After that, in FIG. 87 (this b11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 87 (ko b12), the hold of the special figure 2 first hold icon h21 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (ko b13), the variation icon of special figure 2 is started. A diamond-shaped variable icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0.

In FIG. 87 (this b14), the navigator character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in the smoke image, it does not always change, and it may not change. Further, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may change whenever the hold is full. In addition, the navigation character Y
When M is wrapped in a smoke image, it may be configured to change without fail, or it may not change even if it is wrapped in a smoke image.

In FIG. 87 (this b15-1), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and a balloon saying "this fluctuation is hot" is added to the navigation character YM, and a normal notice is executed. There is. Further, the notice is usually executed depending on the display mode of the navigation character YM.

Further, instead of FIG. 87 (ko b15-1), in FIG. 87 (ko b15-2-1), the navigation character YM remains in the default display mode, and the change effect fails. In addition, a balloon "This fluctuation is" is added to the navigation character YM.

After that, the pending digestion of the special figure 2 progresses, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (this b15-2-3) performs the final symbol variation display of the special figure 2. Here, too, a balloon "This fluctuation is" is added to the navigator character YM, and the navigator character YM continues to produce the effect from FIG. 87 (this b15-2-1). In FIG. 87 (this b15-2-4), a balloon "Farewell" is added to the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the production by the navigation character YM is completed. The navigation character YM disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (this b15-2-5). When it is hot, the navigation character YM does not disappear, and the production by the navigation character YM may continue, but on the contrary, the navigation character YM may always disappear. Further, even if the super reach effect is started between FIGS. 87 (ko b15-2-1) and FIG. 87 (ko b15-2-4), the effect by the navigator character YM continues and the navigator character YM is displayed. It may continue to be performed, or conversely, the effect by the navigator character YM may end and the navigator character YM may disappear.

The navigation character YM described in FIGS. 87 (b1) to (b15-1) and (b15-2-1) to (b15-2-4) shows the variation. Only the advance notice is given and the look-ahead notice is not given, but the look-ahead notice may be given.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example in which the change notice display is displayed on standby.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (1).

In FIG. 88 (Sa 2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are also default display modes. Here, in this example, the hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 is the look-ahead target hold.

In FIG. 88 (3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 88 (4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.
Is not displayed.

In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (5), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. The treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a notice display that changes the display mode of the navigation character YM, but in this example, the navigation character YM itself is not displayed. However, with the appearance of the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display, it is notified (notice) that the navigation character YM may eventually appear. The treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display becomes a standby display until the navigation character YM appears. The standby display of the treasure box icon I1 is displayed while riding on the carpet icon I2.

In FIG. 88 (7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigator character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

In FIG. 88 (8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

In FIG. 88 (Sa 9-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigator character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

In FIG. 88 (Sa 10-1), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby. As described above, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 may be performed over a plurality of fluctuations.

A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (Sa 11-1), and in the same figure (Sa 12), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM of the lord appears in the effect icon display area DIS. It is displayed. The navigation character YM of the lord shown in FIG. 88 (12) is the default display mode. The smoke image here corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM will appear. However, even if the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM does not always appear, and may not appear. Further, the smoke image itself may not be displayed, or the smoke image may always be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to always appear when the smoke image is displayed.

The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing of FIG. 88 (Sa 2)). In this example, it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, but it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started by the end of the fluctuation of the look-ahead target hold. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed whenever there is a look-ahead target hold, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won. In this example, the treasure box icon and the navigation character YM of the change notice display are the same look-ahead notices for the same look-ahead target hold (hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 shown in FIG. 88 (2) in this example). However, the treasure chest icon of the change notice display and the look-ahead target hold of the navigation character YM may be different.

In FIG. 88 (12), when the lord's navigation character YM appears, only the carpet icon I2 disappears after that, and the treasure box icon I1 remains in the effect icon display area DIS. That is, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display ends.

In FIG. 88 (14), the change of the look-ahead target hold has started. The change animation using the treasure box icon I1 is performed during the change of the look-ahead target hold. In FIG. 88 (15-1), the treasure box is opened, and a smoke image comes out from the inside, wrapping the navigator character YM of the lord. In FIG. 88 (16), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the navigator character YM of the lord has changed from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. The navigation character YM that has changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono functions as a notice (normal notice) of the change.

The change effect of the navigation character YM using the treasure box icon I1 may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing of FIG. 88 (Sa 2)). Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed whenever there is a look-ahead target hold, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won.

Also, instead of Fig. 88 (Sa 10-1), in the same figure (Sa 10-2-1), the navigation character YM of the lord has not appeared, but the carpet icon I2 has disappeared, and the treasure box of the change notice display is displayed. The standby display of the icon I1 of is finished. A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (Sa 10-2-2), and the smoke image here extends beyond the display position of the navigation character YM to the variable icon h0 and is a navigation character. The display position of YM and the variable icon h0 are covered from the front side by the smoke image. In FIG. 88 (10-2-3), the smoke image has disappeared and the navigator character YM has not appeared, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed to the red display mode. Here, the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change, or the navigation character YM may also appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. However, or conversely, the navigation character YM may not appear, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change.

Further, instead of FIG. 88 (Sa 11-1), in the same figure (Sa 11-2), the carpet icon I2 disappears while the smoke image is displayed but the navigation character YM is not visible. , The standby display of the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display has ended. As described above, the timing at which the standby display ends may be before the appearance of the navigation character YM. Further, the timing at which the standby display ends may be the same as the appearance of the navigation character YM. Further, it may be the timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the timing of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the timing of the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. After the standby display of the change notice display ends, the navigation character is not displayed for the same look-ahead target hold, but even after the wait display of the change notice display ends, the navigation character is displayed for the same look-ahead target hold. (For example, the fluctuation after the fluctuation after the fluctuation in which the standby display ends, or the fluctuation in the fluctuation in which the standby display ends). Further, even after the standby display of the change notice display ends, the change notice display is not displayed for the same look-ahead target hold, but the change notice display may be displayed again for the same look-ahead target hold (for example, the standby display). Changes after the next change of the change that ended, and within the change that the standby display ended).

Further, instead of FIG. 88 (Sa 13), in the same figure (Sa 13-2-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM are displayed. In 13-2-2), both the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM do not open, the navigation character YM does not change, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change. Has disappeared. In this way, although the navigation character YM has appeared, nothing happens and both icons may disappear. In this case, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display is a false notice. Of the treasure chest icon I1 and the navigation character YM icon, only the treasure chest icon I1 may disappear, or only the navigation character YM may disappear. If both icons disappear, both icons may disappear at the same time, the treasure box icon I1 may disappear first, or the navigation character YM may disappear first.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a holding frame different from the holding frame described so far.

The hold frame UI shown in FIG. 89 (1) is a closed type that extends over the entire effect display area 208d. That is, the holding frame UI and the components (pedestal hs0, etc.) described so far are the same, but in the state of FIG. 89 (1), the area of the holding frame UI in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 , The other areas are firmly distinguished by the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, and the right frame UIf3, the sea background is displayed in the other areas, and the sea background is displayed in the hold frame UI. Is not displayed. In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 89 (1), the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, and the left base icon bIl and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in white, and the hold frame UI. Is promoted by changing these colors.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Here, the holding frame UI is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol, and the lowermost end portion of the decorative symbol that fluctuates at high speed is overlapped from the front side by the upper frame UIf2 of the holding frame UI. However, on the contrary, the decorative design may overlap the holding frame UI from the front side. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 89 (2-1), the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2, and in the same figure (3), only the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure chest icon I1 appears. , Remains in the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 89 (4), the treasure box icon I1 opens, and an icon displaying the characters "frame promotion" appears from the inside to notify (notice) the promotion of the hold frame UI. In FIG. 89 (5), the hold frame UI is promoted, and the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, the left base icon bIl, and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in red. Even if the "frame promotion" icon appears, the hold frame UI may not be promoted. Also, when the "frame promotion" icon appears, the hold frame UI may be promoted without fail.

Further, instead of FIG. 89 (2-1), in the same figure (2-2-1), the lower body of a huge panda is displayed in the area where the background of the sea is displayed. The lower body of this giant panda overlaps the variable display of the first decorative pattern from the front side. However, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed on the front side of the lower body of the panda. This giant panda is passing from top to bottom and eventually enters the area of the hold frame UI, with some or all of the hold frame UI overlapping from the front by the giant panda, FIG. 89. In the state shown in (-2-2), only a part of the upper left and upper right of the hold frame UI has not yet overlapped with the panda image, but the state shown in the same figure (-2-3). Now, the entire hold frame UI overlaps the panda's image. The appearance of a giant panda that covers almost the entire screen is a kind of change notice. The entire hold frame UI is overlapped by a huge panda, but the huge panda may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the entire hold frame UI.

FIG. 89 (2-2-4) shows one aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the huge panda has passed, and the first hold icon h11 changes to the blue display mode (1st hold icon h11). (Promotion), the navigation character YM has also changed (promoted) to the display mode wearing a red kimono, and the hold frame UI has also been promoted to red display. The display mode of the variable icon may be changed (promoted). Further, all of the hold icon, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM such as the left frame UIf1 may be changed, or only a part of them may be changed. For example, only the left frame UIf1 and the like may change to red and the hold frame UI may only be promoted. Alternatively, as will be described later, changes may occur outside the hold frame UI.

FIG. 89 (2-2-4') shows another aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the giant panda has finished passing, in addition to the changes within the hold frame UI. Changes are occurring outside the hold frame UI. That is, the level of the level display Lv attached to each of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is increasing. When this level rises, it becomes easier to start the reach effect, it becomes easier to start the pseudo-continuous effect, and the mode of the symbol is switched to the symbol of the mode that appears at the time of a big hit with a probability change. Also, if the reach production is started with this level high, the expectation of a big hit will be high. The background may change.

In the case of a big hit notice, the appearance of a huge panda may be displayed in front of the image of the panda so that the first decorative pattern overlaps the image of the passing panda from the front side, or the big hit. Even if it is a notice, the first decorative symbol may be overlapped with the image of the passing panda.

Further, instead of FIG. 89 (2-1), in the figure (2-3-1), a fusuma image for wipe effect is added to the holding frame UI, and the figure (2-3-1). The state shown in 1) is a state in which the fusuma image is fully closed (wipe-in state). On the other hand, the state shown in the figure (2-3-2) is a state in which the fusuma image is fully opened (wipe-out state).

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example in which the treasure box icon I1, which has been used as the change notice notification icon, appears as a hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (Su 1-1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, a treasure chest icon is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 90 (Su 2-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. The hold of the first hold icon h11 of the above is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. The first hold icon h11 of the treasure box icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0 as the variable icon h0, but the treasure box icon is also displayed as the variable icon h0 here.

In FIG. 90 (S4), the treasure box of the treasure box icon, which is the variable icon h0, opens, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and the smoke image displays the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS from the front side. Covering and changing animations are being performed. In FIG. 90 (Su 5), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM changes to the display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the navigation character YM is changed by the variable icon h0. The smoke image corresponds to a change notice, but the smoke image does not have to overlap the change icon h0, which is a change candidate, or the smoke image does not have to appear.

Further, instead of FIG. 90 (Su 1-1), in the same figure (Su 1-2-1), the second hold icon h12 of the default display mode is also displayed. The second hold icon h12 is overlapped by the first hold icon h11 of the treasure chest icon. That is, at least a part of the hold icon with a relatively high expectation of a big hit overlaps with at least a part of a hold icon with a relatively low expectation from the front side. It should be noted that at least a part of the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode may overlap with at least a part of the hold icon in the default display mode from the front side. Alternatively, regardless of the expectation of the jackpot, at least a part of the hold icon that is digested first may overlap at least a part of the hold icon that is digested later from the front side. In FIG. 90 (1-2-2), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon, which is the first hold icon h11, is opened and the change animation is executed. That is, a smoke image appears, and the smoke image overlaps with the second hold icon h12. In FIG. 90 (Su 1-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 in which the smoke image overlaps is changed.

Further, instead of FIG. 90 (Su 2-1), in the same figure (Su 2-2-1), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon, which is the first hold icon h11, is opened and the change animation is executed. In the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps with the variable icon h0 and the navigator character YM, and in the figure (2-2-2), the smoke image disappears and both the fluctuating icon h0 and the navigator character YM are displayed. The aspect has changed. Here, both change to the same red color, but may change to different colors. For example, one may turn red and the other may turn gold. Alternatively, both may be wrapped in a smoke image, but only one may change and the other may remain the default.

Further, instead of FIG. 90 (Su 2-1), in the same figure (Su 2-3-1), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon, which is the first hold icon h11, is opened, and the change animation is also executed here. However, in the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps only the variable icon h0 among the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM. In FIG. 90 (Su 2-3-2), the smoke image disappears, and only the display mode of the variable icon h0 in which the smoke image overlaps is changed.

The icons (hold icon, variable icon) and / or navigation characters that are not overlapped by the smoke image are also the icons (hold icon, variable icon) and / or navigation that are overlapped by the smoke image after the smoke image disappears. The display mode may change with the change in the display mode of the character (may be at the same time as the change in the display mode or after the change in the display mode).

FIG. 91 shows an example of an effect in which a meter effect is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (Se 1-1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two holds of special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and a white meter display MW having a white meter frame mf is displayed next to the navigation character YM. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 91 (Se 1-1) is in an empty state. This meter display promotes the navigation character YM when the tank is full. By changing the display mode of the meter frame mf (for example, the color, the shape of the frame, etc.), it is possible to give a notice of the ease of accumulation of the meter, a look-ahead notice, and / or a notice of the change.

In FIG. 91 (se 2), the left symbol in the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (first stop), and "decoration 4" is shaken and displayed. A white meter rising item UpI is added to the design of this "decoration 4", and in FIG. 91 (se 3), the meter rising item UpI moves to the white meter display MW and becomes the white meter display MW. It is displayed overlapping. As shown in FIG. 91 (set 4), the meter rise item UpI moved to the white meter display MW is incorporated (stocked) into the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by one level. In addition, the degree of rise of the meter differs depending on the color of the meter rise item. The white meter rise item UpI raises the white meter display MW by one level.

In FIG. 91 (se 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (se 5-1), the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started.

In FIG. 91 (Se 7-1), the roulette display icon RI appears on the white meter display MW, and the roulette effect is started. In the roulette production here, there are cases where something always happens (when there is no loss) and cases where something does not happen (when there is a loss). Examples of such things include a change in the hold icon and a normal notice (notice of the change). Also, for example, if there is a character-based super reach including Tono Super Reach, Princess Super Reach, and Grandpa Super Reach as one type of Super Reach, as an example of something above, the type of super reach that develops (for example, Notice of character super reach), notice of specific super reach (for example, Tono Super Reach), etc. can also be given.

In FIG. 91 (set 8), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and in FIG. 91 (set 9), the blue meter rising item UpIb moves to the white meter display MW and is white. It is displayed overlapping with the meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 91, the blue meter rising item UpIb moved to the white meter display MW is incorporated (stocked) into the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by two levels. The blue meter rise item UpIb raises the white meter display MW by 2 levels. As a result, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 91 (Set 10) has three levels.

In FIG. 91 (se 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (se 12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started.

In FIG. 91 (se 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (se 12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started.

The button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 91 (se 13). The button display icon 136D is a balloon display mode, and corresponds to a notice given by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A part of the button display icon 136D overlaps with a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf). The button display icon 136D may overlap the entire meter display, or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

In FIG. 91 (Set 14), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 91 (Set 15), the remaining period meter is decreasing. In FIG. 91 (se 16), the chance button 136 is operated, and in the figure (se 17), the meter rise icon MUI as a response display is added to the navigator character YM in response to the operation of the chance button 136. The meter rise icon MUI is a display mode of a balloon, and the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 91 (se 17) displays a green meter rise item UpIm. This meter rise icon MUI also overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf) like the button display icon 136D. The meter rise icon MUI may overlap the entire meter display, or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display may or may not be displayed. In addition, the response display includes a display other than the meter rise icon MUI, and if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display is not displayed, but a specific effect (for example, the display of the meter rise icon MUI) is displayed. ) May be displayed as a response display. Further, even if the response display is not displayed, the meter may be configured to increase, or the meter increases only when the response display is displayed and does not increase when the response display is not displayed. It may be configured as follows.

In FIG. 91 (Set 18), the green meter rise item UpIm in the meter rise icon MUI is moved to the white meter display MW and displayed so as to overlap the white meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 91, the green meter rise item UpIm moved to the white meter display MW is incorporated (stocked) into the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by 3 levels, and FIG. 91 The white meter display MW shown in (Set 19) is full. In FIG. 91 (se 20-1), the white meter display MW changes to the character display of "promotion", and a change animation (not shown) is started. In the figure (se 21), the display mode of the navigation character YM is red. It has changed (promoted) to the display mode wearing the kimono. The color of the kimono of the navigator character YM changed here matches the background color of the character display "promotion" shown in FIG. 91 (se 20-1), and at the stage of FIG. 91 (se 20-1). The display mode in which the navigation character YM changes is foretold. The change animation may be omitted. Further, although the white meter display shown in FIG. 21 has returned to an empty state, it may remain in a full tank state. Further, when the meter display is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed (promoted) without fail, or may not be changed (promoted) (in the case of failure).

Instead of FIG. 91 (Se 1-1), as shown in FIG. 91 (1-2-1), the meter display may not always be displayed. As shown in FIG. 91 (Se 1-2-2), the meter rise item UpI may appear even when the meter display is not displayed. Also in this case, the meter rising item UpI moves to a fixed position in the effect icon display area DIS as shown in FIG. 91 (Se 1-2-3). Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (Se 1-2-4), the meter display (here, the white meter display MW) appears after the movement of the meter rising item UpI is completed. In this case, the appearance of the meter rising item UpI is a notice that the meter display is displayed. Further, the meter display may be displayed according to the appearance of the meter rising item UpI. For example, it may be displayed at the same time as the appearance of the meter rising item UpI, or may be displayed at a timing between FIG. 91 (se 1-2-2) and FIG. 91 (se 1-2-3).

In FIG. 91 (Se 1-2-5), the white meter display MW is raised by one level due to the meter rise item UpI. In the example shown in FIG. 91, when the meter display is displayed, the meter always rises after that, but even if the meter display is displayed, the meter does not rise (corresponding to false). Alternatively, the meter rise item may not appear. Furthermore, the meter may not rise even if the meter rise item appears.

Further, the meter display may be displayed from the symbol fluctuation display before the symbol fluctuation display in which the meter rising item appears. In this case, the meter display is a look-ahead notice that the meter may be accumulated. become. Alternatively, the meter display may be displayed at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display in which the meter rising item appears, or during the symbol variation, in this case.
The meter display is a warning that the meter may accumulate within the fluctuation.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example described with reference to FIG. 91.

Instead of FIG. 91 (Set 1-1), in FIG. 92 (Set 1-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in a state where there is no hold, and the white meter display MW in an empty state is displayed. It is displayed. The white meter display MW displayed in FIG. 91 (Se 1-1) was full at 6 levels, whereas the white meter display displayed in FIG. 92 (Se 1-3-1) was full. MW is full at 5th level.

In FIG. 92 (se 1-3-3a), the meter rise icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM. The golden meter rise item UpIg is displayed on the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 92 (Se 1-3-3a). The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 92 (Se 1-3-4a) is filled up at once by the golden meter rising item UpIg. After that, the animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be empty or may remain stored. In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge mg) that increases in the meter frame mf is blue, but if it is still stored, even if it is full with the blue gauge. Alternatively, the golden gauge may be full because the golden meter rising item UpIg fills the tank at once.

On the other hand, also in FIG. 92 (se 1-3-3b), the meter rise icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM, and here, the rainbow-colored meter rise item UpIn is displayed. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 92 (Se 1-3-4b) is also filled up at once by the rainbow-colored meter rising item UpIn. After that, the animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be empty or may remain stored. If the item is still stored, the blue gauge may be full, or the rainbow-colored gauge may be full because the rainbow-colored meter rise item UpIn fills the tank at once. It may be in a tongue state.

White, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow-colored items are available as meter-raising items. Of these items, only the rainbow-colored meter-raising item UpIn and the golden meter-raising item UpIg are items that raise the meter by 5 levels at once. The white meter rise item UpI is raised by 1 level, the blue meter rise item UpIb is raised by 2 levels, the green meter rise item UpIm is raised by 3 levels, and the red meter rise item UpIr is raised by 4 levels.

In addition, the rainbow-colored meter rise item UpIn also functions as a notice of jackpot confirmation. On the other hand, the golden meter rising item UpIg does not have such a function. Therefore, when the meter is full with one rainbow-colored meter rise item UpIn, when the meter is full with one gold meter rise item UpIn, or in other colors (white, blue, green, red). The meaning is different from the case where the meter is filled with a combination of meter rise items.

In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge) that increases in the meter frame mf is white, blue, green, and red meter rising items, and when the meter rises or becomes full, It may be a blue gauge.

In addition, the color of the meter rising item may also have a function as a normal notice or a look-ahead notice. In addition, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be expressed by the color.

Further, the color of the meter rising item and the color of the display mode of the navigation character YM may be linked, or may be always linked. For example, when the golden meter rising item UpIg appears, the navigation character YM also easily changes to the display mode wearing a golden kimono, or always changes, and conversely, the display that the navigation character YM wears a golden kimono. In the aspect, the golden meter rising item UpIg may easily appear or may always appear.

Further, the order of appearance and the color combination of the meter rising items may function as a look-ahead notice or a normal notice. In addition, the order of appearance of the meter rising items and the combination of colors may represent the degree of expectation of a big hit. Or conversely, the order of appearance and color combinations of meter-raising items may be completely independent of the jackpot expectation.

Further, in this example, the meter is accumulated until the meter reaches 15 (the meter is full three times). In the meter display that fills up at 6 levels in FIG. 91, the meters are stored until the meter reaches 18 (also the meter is full 3 times). Here, if the meter overflows due to the display of the meter rise item (for example, if the red Up icon is displayed when three meters are accumulated), the meter is set to 0 while promoting the navigation character. You may try to save what you haven't saved. For example, if the red meter rise item UpIt is displayed when three meters are accumulated, the meter is filled once and the meter is further accumulated by two levels.

If the meter overflows when the meter is full twice, the meter may be filled and the amount that has not been accumulated may be displayed on the meter. For example, the meter may be returned to 0 when the look-ahead target change or the change ends, or the meter may remain displayed regardless of the look-ahead target change or the change. In addition, the portion that has not been accumulated may be rounded down. For example, when the meter is stored, the meter at that time may be in the 0 state, may be in the full tank state, may have a special display, or may be in the meter non-display state. Good. Furthermore, it may be configured so as not to overflow. For example, when three items have already been accumulated, only two white meter rise items UpI or one blue meter rise item UpIb are displayed.

In the example starting from FIG. 92 (Set 1-4-1) instead of FIG. 91 (Set 1-1), in the figure (Set 1-4-2), a red beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI. , Is irradiated toward the navigation character YM in the default display mode, and as shown in Fig. (1-4-3), the navigation character YM changes to the display mode wearing a red kimono, and "Up high accuracy is in progress." "Is attached. By this "Up high accuracy middle", it is notified that the meter rising item is in a state where it is easy to accumulate.

Depending on the display mode of the notice that changes the navigation character YM, the notification of "Up high accuracy" may occur or may always occur. Further, when the navigation character YM changes, the notification of "Up high accuracy" may be performed without fail, or a plurality of types of effect display (notice display) including the notification of "Up high accuracy" may be performed. , The effect display including the notification of "Up high accuracy" may not be performed.

Further, the effect performed by the navigation character YM may differ depending on the display mode (color) of the navigation character YM. For example, if the red navigation character YM is used, "Up high accuracy is in progress" is notified, if the gold navigation character YM is used, the intense heat display is displayed, and if the rainbow-colored navigation character YM is used, the iron plate display is displayed. May be done. In addition, the navigation character YM having a different display mode may give the same notice (notice of the same type).

Instead of FIG. 91 (se 5-1), in FIG. 92 (se 5-2-1), the gauge of the white meter display MW is blinking white and is at the 1st level, and the kimono of the navigator character YM is also blinking white. There is. After that, once the meter was full and returned to the empty state, in FIG. 92 (Se 5-2-3), the display mode of the navigator character YM changed to the display mode wearing a green kimono. The gauge of the white meter display MW has also changed to green and has risen to 3 levels. After that, after the meter became full again and returned to the empty state, in FIG. 92 (Se 5-2-5), the display mode of the navigator character YM changed to the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , The white meter display MW gauge also changes to rainbow color and is full. In this way, the state of accumulation of the meter and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be configured to match. Further, the color of the gauge and the color of the navigation character YM may also correspond to each other.

It should be noted that when all the meters are accumulated, a pattern in which the jackpot is confirmed or the expectation of the jackpot is high and a pattern in which the meters are accumulated and released to produce an effect may be separately prepared. As an example of the latter, for example, when the meter is discharged up to the 2nd level, an effect equivalent to blue is performed, and when the meter is released when the meter is accumulated up to the 4th level, an effect equivalent to red is performed. Is done.

FIG. 93 is a diagram showing still another modified example of the example described with reference to FIG. 91.

Instead of FIG. 91 (Set 6-1), in FIG. 93 (Set 6-2), the roulette display icon RI and the meter rising icon MUI are placed on the white blinking meter display MW'in which the meter frame mf blinks in white. Is displayed, but a part of the meter rise icon MUI overlaps with a part of the roulette display icon RI from the front side, and the roulette display icon RI shown in FIG. 93 (Se 6-2) is shown in FIG. It is more difficult to see than the roulette display icon RI shown in 7-1). On the other hand, the green meter rise item UpIm is displayed on the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 91 (Set 7-1). The meter rising icon MUI may overlap all of the roulette display icon RI from the front side, and conversely, at least a part of the roulette display icon RI may overlap from the front side at least a part of the meter rising icon MUI. You may wrap it. As for the priority to be displayed on the front side, the icon added to the navigation character YM may be higher than the other icons. In this example, when a notice is given that the meter rise icon may be displayed, such as when the roulette display icon is being displayed, the meter rise icon is displayed by displaying the white flashing meter that blinks the meter frame in white. Although it is informed that it may be displayed, it may not be notified by the meter frame even if a notice is given that the meter rise icon may be displayed, and it may not be notified by the meter frame. It may be configured so that it is not notified that the meter rise icon may be displayed. Further, the notice that the meter rise icon may be displayed may be given not only by the meter frame but also by other display or effect means.

Instead of FIG. 91 (set 7-1), in FIG. 93 (set 7-2), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI. However, it is difficult to see because the meter rise icon MUI still overlaps. In this way, the meter rise icons may overlap. When the meter rise icons overlap, the priority displayed on the front side may be the display order of the meter rise icons, the one with the higher meter rise may be prioritized, or the meter rise may be prioritized. The lower one may be prioritized. Further, the meter rise icon does not overlap from the front side on the navigation character YM, but may overlap.

Further, instead of FIG. 91 (se 7-1), in FIG. 93 (se 7-3-1), the image up that notifies (notices) that the meter rise icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI. 'Is displayed. However, at this stage, it is unclear how many colors of the meter rise icon will be displayed, and after that, some color of the meter rise icon will be displayed in the roulette display icon RI. In this way, when it is notified that the meter rise icon is displayed in the roulette effect, although it is unknown what color it is, as shown in FIG. 93 (se 7-3-2), the roulette display icon RI The effect display Ed1 with an aura is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the following FIG. 93 (se 7-3-3), the effect display Ed1 changes, and the blue meter rise icon is enlarged. At this stage, it is unknown how many colors of the meter rise icon are displayed in the roulette display icon RI. At this stage, a blue meter rising icon may be displayed in the roulette display icon RI.

In FIG. 93 (7-3-4), the display that overlaps the roulette display icon RI and looks like an enlarged blue meter rise icon becomes the blue meter rise icon UpIb, and the white blinking meter display MW. It moves to'and is displayed overlapping with the white flashing meter display MW'. In addition, the roulette display icon RI fades out, the display becomes faint, and it gradually disappears. It should be noted that the color of the meter rising item displayed in the roulette display icon RI may remain unknown. After that, the blue meter rising item UpIb is taken in (stocked) in the white blinking meter display MW', and the white blinking meter display MW' is leveled up.

A blue meter rising item UpIb may appear in the roulette display icon RI, and it may be incorporated into the white blinking meter display MW'. In this case, the blue meter rise item UpIb may be displayed in the roulette display icon RI before the effect display Ed1 is displayed, or may be displayed at the same time as the effect display Ed1 is displayed. It may be displayed after it is displayed. Alternatively, in the roulette display icon RI, a display in which the blue meter rise item UpIb is displayed as if the blue meter rise icon is enlarged may be displayed before it is displayed, or it may be displayed at the same time as it is displayed. It may be displayed, or it may be displayed after it is displayed.

Instead of FIG. 91 (se 20-1), in FIG. 93 (se-20-2-1), the white meter display MW in the full tank state is once changed to the character display of "stock", and is in an empty state. Returning to the white meter display MW, the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. In this example, although the meter is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change until the treasure box is opened, and the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM is delayed. By opening the treasure box icon I1, only the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed, and icons other than the navigation character (holding icon, variable icon) and other effect displays may be changed.

FIG. 94 shows an example of an effect in which a telop effect is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (No. 1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two holds of special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 94 (No. 2-1), the telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, it is displayed in characters that the navigation character YM may change, which corresponds to an example of a change notice display. For example, a display such as "Navi character change high accuracy in progress" or a character display such as "Navi character change high accuracy in preparation" is played from the right to the left of the screen. In addition to this, the telop display trp is plain and no characters are displayed, and depending on the telop display, "○○ high accuracy", "XX & ○○ high accuracy", "○○ high accuracy" It may be notified in advance that "preparing", "XX or XX high-accuracy preparation", "high-accuracy preparation", etc. may be displayed. Even if the plain telop display trp is displayed here, "○○ high accuracy in progress", "XX & ○○ high accuracy in progress", "○○ high accuracy in preparation", "XX or ○○ high accuracy in preparation" , "Highly accurate preparation", etc. may not be displayed. In addition, "○○ high probability preparation", "XX or ○○ high probability preparation", "high probability preparation", etc. are displayed, and a high probability state may occur for the telop display from now on. You may notify that in advance. "XX" and "○○" described here are various effects (for example, hold (hold icon and / or variable icon) change, pseudo-ream, notice in high expectation color, high expectation for big hit The name of the notice (so-called super hot notice) is shown.

It should be noted that the high-probability state for the effect described here is an effect in which the notice notified as the high-probability state by the telop display is notified by the telop as compared with the case where the high-probability state is not notified by the telop display. It shows a state in which it is performed more frequently. That is, "Navi character change high accuracy" in FIGS. 94 (1) to 14 (14), 2-2 (2-2), 2-3 (2-3), and 8-2 (8-2). "" Indicates a state in which the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to change than when the telop display does not notify "Navi character change is highly accurate". In addition, "high probability preparing" included in the above-mentioned "○○ high probability preparation", "XX or XX high probability preparation", "high probability preparation", etc. is notified by telop display. The effect being performed is in a high-probability state. The change after the next change of the change in which the display of the telop including "Highly accurate preparation" is started or the change in which the display of the telop including "High probability is being prepared" is started. (Inside) (or there is a possibility of becoming a high-probability state).

In FIG. 94 (No. 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The telop display trp is displayed in front of the second decorative symbol, and the lower end portion of the second decorative symbol is overlapped from the front side by the telop display trp. However, on the contrary, the second decorative symbol may overlap the telop display trp from the front side.

In FIG. 94 (No. 4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started. After that, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol variation display is also started in FIG. 94 (No. 6). The telop display trp is ongoing.

In FIG. 94 (No. 7), the change animation of the navigator character YM is started, and the navigator character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. In FIG. 94 (No. 8-1), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigator character YM has changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono. Even if the change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is still ongoing. After that, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol variation display is started in FIG. 94 (No. 10), and the telop display trp is still continuing in FIG. 94 (No. 11).

The treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display may appear, the change animation may be started, the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon I1 may be opened, and the navigation character YM may be changed. In this case, it can be said that the display such as "Navi character change high accuracy" of the telop display trp foretells the appearance of the treasure box icon I1 or the start of the change animation.

In FIG. 94 (No. 12), the change animation of the navigator character YM is started again, and the navigator character YM is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 94 (No. 13), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigator character YM has changed to a display mode wearing a golden kimono. Even if the second change effect of the navigator character YM is successful, the telop display trp is still ongoing.

While the telop display trp is being displayed, the navigation character YM may be changed many times. However, if the navigation character YM is changed once while the telop display trp is being displayed, the navigation character YM is changed thereafter. It may be configured not to.

In FIG. 94 (14), the reach state has been entered, but the telop display trp is still ongoing. The timing at which the telop display trp display disappears is when the super reach starts (for example, in FIG. 78 (U24)) and when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (for example, when the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop]. , Symbol stop character, when the next fluctuation starts, etc.

In this example, the change effect is performed by the navigation character itself, but the navigation character may be changed by the change notice display, and the navigation character is changed only by the change notice display. It may be configured so that only the change effect by the navigator character itself is performed.

Further, instead of FIG. 94 (No. 2-1), as shown in FIG. 94 (No. 2-2), the telop display trp may be performed in two stages, upper and lower. Then, different contents may be displayed between the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp.

In the telop display, the high-accuracy middle display may be displayed for other notices. As long as they are for the same look-ahead target hold, they may be displayed at the same timing, and one may be later than the other. Further, when one telop display of "○○ high accuracy medium" is displayed, the telop display may not be displayed or may be displayed for another look-ahead target hold. In that case, the telop display related to the same notice (for example, "Navi character high accuracy") may be displayed separately, or the display period of the same telop display may be extended. Further, the display position of the telop display may be determined in the order of starting the display, or the display position for each telop may be fixed.

Further, instead of FIG. 94 (No. 2-1), as shown in FIG. 94 (No. 2-3), the same content may be displayed on the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp. That is, the same telop display may be displayed more than once. It may be possible to appeal that the expectation of a big hit is higher when a plurality of displays are displayed than when only one is displayed. However, even if a plurality of them are displayed, the expectation of the jackpot may be the same as when only one is displayed. Moreover, you may repeat displaying the same telop display a plurality of times. That is, each time the display of the telop display is started, a plurality of telop displays having the same content may be displayed.

Further, instead of FIG. 94 (No. 8-1), as shown in FIG. 94 (No. 8-2), when the navigation character YM is changed (one or more times), it should not be changed any more. May be notified by a telop display trp. In this example, the character display "completed" is displayed. However, even if this notification is performed, the navigation character YM may be further changed.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b).

FIG. 95 (1a-1) shows a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a third decorative symbol display device 208N. The second decorative symbol and the second reserved number are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 95 (1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, four hold icons of the special figure 1 are stored, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are the default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 95 (ta 2a-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and "decoration 7" is swayed (temporarily stopped) in both the left symbol and the right symbol. The shift to reach production has shifted, and all the displays have disappeared from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the first decorative symbol, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 to h14, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM have disappeared.

In FIG. 95 (4a), the pattern of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed on the entire screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. On the other hand, the reduced first decorative symbol, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be displayed on different decorative symbol display devices.

In FIG. 95 (5a), the background of the wilderness, which is the background display of the super reach effect, is displayed over the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. In addition, the first decorative pattern display device 208L displays a duel scene in which the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy are confronting each other.

Here, instead of FIG. 95 (Ta 1a-1), in FIG. 95 (Ta 1a-2), a part of the holding frame UI is enlarged and displayed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display are displayed. It is displayed across the device 208L. That is, the hold icon display area HIS is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon display area CIS is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the fourth hold icon h14 is enlarged and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third hold icon is displayed. h13 is enlarged and displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Since the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a frame surrounding the display screen, this frame interferes with the image displayed across the display screen.

Further, although the right base icon bIr is not displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N in which the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed, the right base icon bIr may also be enlarged and displayed together with the navigation character YM.

In addition, even if it is not enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 95 (1a-2), it may straddle a plurality of display devices. For example, a pattern that straddles from the beginning of display, a pattern that moves from the original position and is displayed straddling, a pattern that changes the image and is displayed straddling, or an image that is enlarged and displayed straddling. On the contrary, there are patterns in which the image is reduced and displayed across the image. Further, when the enlarged display is performed as shown in FIG. 95 (1a-2), the expectation of the big hit is high, the hold icon is easy to change, the variable icon is easy to change, or the navigation character YM. May change easily. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed across a plurality of display devices. Here, when the effect display is displayed across a plurality of display devices and a part of the display area of the display device B is overlapped by the display device A in the foreground, the display device B A part of the image displayed in the display area of the display device B may be displayed in the display area overlapped by the display device A in the above.

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 95 (1a-2) can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Further, instead of FIG. 95 (Ta 1a-1), in FIG. 95 (Ta 1a-3), a part of the hold frame UI is moved and displayed. That is, the effect icon display area DIS has moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the right base icon bIr is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The navigation character YM is also displayed above the right base icon bIr.

In this way, when the navigation character YM moves to another display device, the navigation character YM may change easily, the expectation of a big hit may increase, or a change in other effects (for example, hold) may occur. Changes in icons and variable icons, etc.) may be facilitated. In addition, depending on the destination of the navigation character YM, the ease of change of the navigation character YM, the high degree of expectation of a big hit, and the ease of change of other effects (for example, the change of the hold icon and the variable icon) are easy. They may be different or they may be the same with no effect. For example, the probability that the navigation character YM may change may be higher when the navigation character YM is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N than when the navigation character YM is moved to the second decorative symbol display device 208L. The movement of the navigation character YM has been described above, but the same applies when the hold icon moves to another display device or the variable icon moves to another display device.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 95 (1a-3), it can be seen that the holding frame UI is divided (broken). That is, although the effect icon display area DIS is broken and moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be moved to another place of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 95 (1a-3) can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Further, instead of FIG. 95 (1a-1), in FIG. 95 (1a-4), the navigator character YM is split when it moves. That is, when moving from the first decorative symbol display device 208L to another display device, it is divided into two and displayed on both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This can also be seen as an increase in the navigation character YM.

In this way, when the navigation character YM is divided (increased), the navigation character YM may be easily changed, the expectation of the jackpot may be high, or other changes in the production (for example, the hold icon or the like). (Change of variable icon, etc.) may be facilitated.

Further, since the right base icon bIr is also displayed at the place where the navigation character YM is displayed, it can be said that the effect icon display area DIS is also divided (increased).

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 95 (1a-4) can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later. That is, in other production examples, the navigation character YM may be divided (increased), and may be always divided (increased).

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b).

In FIG. 96 (1b), the background of the sea is displayed over the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. Further, in the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 95 (1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, four hold icons of the special figure 1 are stored, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are the default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 96 (2b), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image. Further, in the left and right second decorative symbol display devices 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 96 (2b), the background display of the sea has disappeared.

In FIG. 96 (3b), the smoke image disappears, the navigation character YM disappears from the effect icon display area DIS, and the icon of the signboard "Searching" is displayed instead. In addition, the same character (Den-sama) YM'as the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side where the background display of the sea has disappeared, and is running. In addition, a character display indicating that the search is in progress is displayed above it. Similarly, on the second decorative pattern display device 208M on the left side where the background display of the sea has disappeared, a silhouette display slt is displayed together with an image of a question mark.

The icon of the signboard "Searching" may be a notification indicating that there is a high possibility that the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM will be successful. In addition, the probability of success is higher when the color of the signboard is blue than when it is white, and the probability of success is higher when the signboard is red than blue. If it is red, promotion may be confirmed. Further, the color, display characters, and the like of this signboard may change, but may not change. Further, it may suggest a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change depending on the display mode of the signboard. For example, if the signboard is blue, the navigator character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono.

In FIG. 96 (4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been in the fully open state (initial state), are in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to approach each other. Will move. It should be noted that this period corresponds to the period of the fanning production.

In FIG. 96 (5b-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position and stop. Here, it moves to a fully closed position (maximum moving position) in contact with each other and stops, but it may be a position before contacting each other.

FIG. 96 (6b-1) is a diagram showing an example of a promotion success pattern. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the running character (lord) YM'takes a pose with his thumb raised, and above that. The character display indicating the level up is displayed in. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to the actual display, and the Senryobako is displayed. In addition, it may suggest a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change depending on the display mode of the Senryo box. For example, if the Senryobako is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono. Further, the color, open / closed state, and the like of this thousand-box box may change, but may not change. In FIG. 96 (7b), the character (lord) YM'displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono.

Then, in FIG. 96 (8b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each move in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to be separated from each other, and return to the initial state. .. When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each return to the initial state, the wipe effect is performed by the respective decorative symbol display devices 208M and N, respectively. Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 96 (9b) are in the middle of the wipe-in. In the same figure (10b), the wipe-in is completed and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is completed. Also, the third decorative symbol display device 208N also displays a wipe display in which only the model title is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 96 (10b), a smoke image is displayed at a position where the signboard icon has been displayed until then.

In the effect icon display area DIS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 96 (11b), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, the wipe-out is started in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, respectively. In this example, the wipe-in animation (the animation that closes from the left and right) and the wipe-out animation (the animation that opens from the inside to the outside) are different, but they may be the same animation. In FIG. 96 (12b), the wipeout is completed and the sea background is displayed over the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. In addition, in one decorative symbol display device, the effect display displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices of this example may be performed. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be replaced with one or more effect movable bodies that do not include the liquid crystal display device (for example, the effect movable body performs the effect operation). And, there is a production that promotes the navigation character.)

The change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 96 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect example described later.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect in which the navigation character YM is entwined by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b).

In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, four hold icons of the special figure 1 are stored, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are the default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 97 (Ta 1a-3-2), a movement animation is displayed in which the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In FIG. 97 (Ta 1a-3-2), the navigation character YM is located exactly between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Also here, since there is a frame surrounding the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, this frame interferes and divides the navigator character YM displayed straddling the display. The third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-3) displays a navigation character YM having the same display size as that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

On the other hand, in FIG. 97 (1a-3-2'), the navigator character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In 208N, an example of enlarged display is shown. The third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-2') displays only the toes of the right hand and the right foot of the navigation character YM, but the toes of the right hand and the right foot are enlarged and displayed. The navigation character YM is immediately enlarged and displayed from the portion that has entered the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-3') displays a navigation character YM having a display size larger than that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. When the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed in this way, the navigation character YM may be more likely to change, the expectation of a big hit may be higher, and others may be higher than when the navigation character YM is not enlarged. Changes in the effect of the above (for example, changes in the hold icon and the variable icon) may be facilitated, or they may be the same without any influence. Further, when the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may or may not be enlarged.

The movement animation of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 97 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Further, instead of FIG. 96 (8b), FIG. 97 (5b-2) shows a pattern in which the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM has failed. In FIG. 96 (4b), when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving so as to approach each other, and both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position. Is a failure. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are stopped on the way, also return to the initial state, but the notification of the failure of the change effect (promotion effect) is performed after returning to the initial state. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (5b-2), the character (lord) YM'is in a depressed pose facing backward. Note that the failure notification may be started in the middle of returning to the initial state. Alternatively, the failure notification may be started when the vehicle has stopped before reaching a certain position.

Further, if both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position, it may always fail, but the navigation character YM may be promoted. Further, even if this change effect (promotion effect) fails, the navigation character YM may be promoted by another effect. This also applies to the production that is divided into success and failure as explained above.

In addition, if the change effect (promotion effect) here fails, the navigation character YM may change for the time being (for example, until the background display changes, or from the promotion failure until the end of N times of fluctuations). Changes may be restricted until the end of the look-ahead hold fluctuations associated with the promotion failure, etc.).

Further, instead of FIG. 96 (6b-1), in FIG. 97 (6b-2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol are shown up to a certain position (for example, the position in the fully closed state). A pattern in which the change effect (promotion effect) fails even though the display device 208N has moved is shown. Similarly to the previous case, the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (6b-2) also displays the character (lord) YM'in a pose that faces backward and is depressed. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to the actual display, and the mandarin orange box is displayed there.

In this way, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the promotion effect may fail. Alternatively, conversely, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the navigation character YM may be promoted without fail. Further, the navigation character YM may be promoted even in the state shown in FIG. 97 (6b-2), and conversely, in this state, the failure may be confirmed.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigator character YM by the effect device 206 provided with the second display device below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device).

The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (1c). On the other hand, the background of the sea is not displayed on the second display device 208S provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device), and the hold frame UI is displayed on the second display device 208S. ing. That is, the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. In the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The second display device 208S may be a fixed device or a device capable of ascending / descending operation.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (1c), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the second display device 208S. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is also displayed on the second display device 208S.

A fusuma image for wiping effect is displayed on the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (2c), and the state shown in FIG. 98 (3c) is a state in which the fusuma image is fully closed (wipe-in state). Is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (4), the wipe-out is started, and in the second display device 208S shown in the figure (5c), the sliding door image is fully opened (wipe-out state). The second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (5c) at which the wipe effect is completed does not display the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, or the navigation character YM. The animation of the mini game by is displayed. That is, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are hidden by the wipe effect, and the golf mini bet (promotion) on the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM. The game has started. Even if it is the same mini-game, there may be a mini-game in which a successful super reach production is started. At the stage of FIG. 98 (4c), it can be seen that the mini-game is started on the second display device 208S, but it is not known what the bet (fortune-telling) mini-game is, and the mini-game of FIG. 98 (5c) is shown. I don't know until the stage. For this reason, it may be possible to pay attention to at least the second display device 208S until the explanation about the mini-game (here, "promotion of Yoshimune if it enters the cup") is given.

The second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (6c-1) succeeds in cup-in brilliantly. When the cup-in is successful, the wipe effect is started again, the fusuma image starts to close again in FIG. 98 (7c), and the state shown in the figure (8c) is the state in which the fusuma image is fully closed (wipe-in state). is there. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (9c), the wipe-out is started, and in the second display device 208S shown in the figure (10c), the sliding door image is fully opened (wipe-out state). In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (10c) wiped out again, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed. After the wipe-out is completed in this way, the change animation of the navigation character YM is displayed on the second display device 208S (FIG. 98 (11c)). In the change animation here, the navigator character YM is overlapped by the smoke image, and in FIG. 98 (12c), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM is changed to the display mode of the red kimono.

Further, instead of FIG. 98 (6c-1), in the same figure (6c-2), the cup-in fails. In this way, if the mini-game betting on the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM fails, the navigation character YM may never be promoted, but may be promoted. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (6c-1), when the mini game is successful, the navigation character YM may be absolutely promoted, but may not be promoted.

It should be noted that when wiping out from FIG. 98 (8c), the wipe effect may be able to suggest to the player the possibility that the navigation character YM may be promoted, or the display mode in which the navigation character YM changes may be displayed. It may be a wipe effect that can be suggested.

Further, the navigation character YM may have already changed (promoted) at the time of wiping out in FIG. 98 (10c).

Further, the second display device 208S may perform an effect operation during the execution of the mini game. In addition, when it succeeds (Fig. 98 (6c-1) in this example) and when it fails (Fig. 98 (6c-2) in this example) and incitement (Fig. 98 (5c) in this example). A different production operation may be performed in. In addition, instead of the second display device 208S, the effect operation by the effect movable body may be performed.

The mini-game described with reference to FIG. 98 can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of a case where another effect is executed during the execution of the effect selected by the player.

In the pachinko machine 100 in this description, the above-mentioned customization settings are performed. That is, 07 "Copanda" is set in "Character selection" shown in FIG. 63 (b), 02 "Hold frame B" is set in "Hold frame selection", and 02 "Hold frame B" is set in "Hold display selection". The "icon C" of 03 is set, and the "background E" of 05 is set in the background display selection.

The hold frame UI of the hold frame B is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a1), and the copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, one hold of the special figure 1 is stored, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a1), the background (empty background) of the background E is displayed.

In FIG. 99 (a2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. The Copanda navigation character YM is also displayed.

In FIG. 99 (Aa3-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in the figure (Aa4-1), the carpet icon I2 appears. Disappears, and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. In FIG. 99 (a5), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, a smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and a part or all of the navigator character YM is hidden by the smoke image, and the navigator character YM is hidden. Is clearly less visible than it was before the smoke image appeared. The change animation may be started by operating the chance button 136. In this case, the back button may be used, or the operation promotion notification may be performed. In FIG. 99 (a6), the smoke image disappears, and the navigator character YM changes from copanda to bancho. As shown in FIG. 63 (b), the Bancho character in the navigation character YM is a character that cannot be selected by the player. The character may be changed to a character that can be selected by the player (for example, an old man or a princess), or the character may be changed to a character that cannot be selected by the player.

In FIG. 99 (a7), the treasure box icon I1 disappears, and in FIG. 99 (a8), the reach state is entered. A balloon icon of "NEXT" suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect is added to the navigator character YM of the number length shown in FIG. 99 (a8).

In FIG. 99 (a9), the pseudo-continuous symbol (the symbol of the character of the lord) is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol, and in the same figure (a10), the character of the lord and the character "continue" are displayed. A cut-in display consisting of is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. Here, the pseudo-ream is a variation display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times in one variation display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, the more likely it is to become a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (a11), the decorative symbol display device 208 restarts the variable display of the first decorative symbol. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap with the first decorative symbol. Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a12), the display of "x2" is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

The balloon icon of "NEXT" suggesting the pseudo-ream effect is added again to the navigator character YM of the Bancho shown in FIG. 99 (a13), and the continuation of the pseudo-ream can still be expected. After that, after the temporary stop display is performed 0 times, 1 time or a plurality of times, the player enters the reach state and further develops into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). The background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a15) changes to the background of the wilderness, which is the background display of the swordsman reach effect, and the decorative symbol display device 208 contains the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. The duel scene facing each other is displayed. Further, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl of the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 have disappeared. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on the pedestal hs0. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the chief navigation character YM is displayed on the right base icon bIr.

A balloon icon of "chance" that incites a big hit is added to the navigator character YM of the bancho shown in FIG. 99 (a16), and the navigator character YM of the bancho is executing the incitement effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a18) displays a scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other in the super reach effect. The "decoration 6", which is different from the design ("decoration 7"), is displayed in a large size (shaking display). Although the height of the pedestal of the variable icon display area CIS is low, the lowered pedestal hs0'is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on the pedestal hs0'. Further, the navigation character YM of the chief is also displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. After that, the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a 19) is in the middle of the wipe-in, and in the same figure (a 20), the wipe-in is completed, and then the wipe-out is started. In the figure (a21), the background of the background E (the background of the sky) is returned, and the navigation character YM of Copanda is also beginning to be seen. In FIG. 99 (a22), the wipe effect is completed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 sways and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loss. In addition, the hold frame UI of the hold frame B is also displayed, and the display of the variable icon h0, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is resumed. Further, a blue hold icon (look-ahead hold icon) is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

As shown in FIGS. 79 (E2) to 79 (E4-1), the navigation character YM itself may change its own display mode by itself. In this example, the change animation using the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is executed but lost, but when the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed by the effect using the treasure box icon I1. It may be easier to finally shift to a state that is advantageous to the player than the case where the treasure box icon I1 is not used and the change (for example, the change is made by oneself). The advantageous state referred to here includes a transition to a jackpot gaming state, a transition to a jackpot gaming state with a large number of balls, and a transition to a probability change state or an electric support state.

In this example, even if the hold is increased while the hold icon is hidden, when the hold icon is displayed from hidden, the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is hidden is displayed. Pre-reading notice may be given. If the hold increases while the hold icon is hidden, it may be until the hold is exhausted (it may be displayed in the variable icon display area, or it may be deleted from the variable icon display area). It may be configured to regulate look-ahead notice and / or notice of the change by the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is hidden, or subject to changes with increased hold. The look-ahead notice by the hold icon may be regulated so that the look-ahead notice and / or the notice of the change may be given after the next change of the change in which the hold is increased.

In this example, while the look-ahead notice by one hold icon is being executed, the look-ahead notice by another hold icon may be given, but while the look-ahead notice by one hold icon is being executed, the look-ahead notice by another hold icon is given. , It is regulated until the hold corresponding to the one hold icon is exhausted (it may be displayed in the variable icon display area or deleted from the variable icon display area). May be good.

In this example, the navigation character selected by the player may give a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice, but the navigation character selected by the player gives a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice. You may not let it break. In addition, the tutorial display may be performed by the navigator character selected by the player (for example, the tutorial display is performed by the balloon icon), but the tutorial display is performed by the navigator character selected by the player. You may not let it break. Further, in this example, the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player may give a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice, but the notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice may not be given. Further, the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon is more easily performed than the navigation character that can be selected by the player, or the navigation character is changed. It may be configured so that the expected degree of big hit in the symbol fluctuation and / or hold is high (or the big hit is confirmed (the big hit may be rich)), and the notice and / or the appearance of the navigator character. It may be configured so that the super reach effect occurs frequently (or always occurs).

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 99.

Instead of FIG. 99 (a3-1), in FIG. 100 (a3-2), the change notice is displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate IL instead of the icon I1 of the treasure box. That is, the change of the navigation character YM may be announced by an effect means different from the effect means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) on which the navigation character YM is displayed.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (a3-1), in FIG. 100 (a3-3), instead of the treasure box icon I1, a change notice display is displayed by the effect operation of the movable means (here, the family crest accessory 224E). It is carried out. That is, the family crest accessory 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position and overlaps with the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM. There is no hold icon here, but if there is a hold icon, it also overlaps with the hold icon. After that, the family crest accessory 224E rotates clockwise (see the arrow in the figure). The family crest accessory 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may vibrate with or in place of rotation. Further, it may be performed only ascending and not rotating or vibrating. Further, the navigation character YM may be changed during the overlap, or may be changed after the effect operation of the family crest accessory 224E is completed, that is, after the family crest accessory 224E returns to the initial position. In addition, the easiness of change to the navigator character YM and the color of the display mode after the change may be notified by the light emitting effect by the LED provided on the family crest accessory 224E.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (a3-1), in FIG. 100 (a3-4), the change notice is displayed by the sound output from the speaker 120 instead of the treasure box icon I1. The change notice may be displayed by the game board lamp 442 or the game underframe lamp 452.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (a4-1), as shown in FIG. 100 (a4-2), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS while the treasure box is displayed. In some cases, the icon I1 rides on the carpet icon I2 and flies away. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (Aa6-1), in FIG. 100 (Aa6-2), the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change even though the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is opened. Also corresponds to the so-called failure pattern.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (aa6-1), in FIG. 100 (aa6-3), the copanda's navigation character YM is the same copanda, but the clothes are different in color (here, red clothes). It has changed to Copanda) and succeeded in the change production (promotion production) of the navigation character YM.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (a3-1), in FIG. 100 (ab1), as in the example shown in FIG. 98, the second display device 208S is below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device). Is arranged, the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided in the second display device 208S, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. .. Further, in the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. In addition, the Copanda navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (Ab1), a conversation notice is given by a notice of the character display of the grandfather character and the character display "Navi character changes", and the change notice display is performed by this conversation notice. It has been. That is, the change of the navigation character YM is announced by an effect means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) different from the effect means (here, the second display device 208S) on which the navigation character YM is displayed. There is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 100 (Ab2), the navigation character YM is changed from a copanda to a bancho, which is a character that cannot be selected by the player.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (a2), the speaker 120 is shown in FIG. 100 (ac1). Further, the volume level set by the player in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. 65 (9) and the brightness (light amount) level set in the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65 (3) are set as "user set values". It is written on the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208. In this example, both are 3 levels. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 in this example, the volume and brightness set by the player are forcibly changed at the time of execution to be output from the speaker 120, or are used for the game board lamp 442 and / and the game table frame. Since an LED such as the lamp 452 may emit light, it is described as an "actual set value" at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. This also applies to the following examples. In FIG. 100 (ac2), the speaker 120, which is a production means different from the production means in which the “super heat” notice may be given, notifies that the “super heat” notice may be given. ing. The volume (actual set value) of the speaker 120 at this time matches the user set value. After that, in FIG. 100 (ac3), the "extreme heat" notice is executed, the word "extreme heat" is displayed in large size on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sound is output from the speaker 120, and the sound is output from the speaker 120. The lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are emitting light. The volume (actual set value) at the time of executing the "super heat" notice exceeds the user set value and is level 5, and the brightness (actual set value) also exceeds the user set value and is level 5. That is, it is output at a volume higher than the volume level set by the player, and emits light at a brightness higher than the brightness level set by the player. In addition, when the effect is executed, the volume and brightness may exceed the user-set value or forcibly fall below the user-set value (hereinafter, the same applies). Further, the timing at which the volume and brightness are forcibly changed is not limited to this example, and for example, the brightness may be changed at the timing when the sound during intense heat approaching is output, or the sound during intense heat approaching. The volume and brightness may change while is output. Further, at the time of executing a specific effect, only the volume of the volume and the brightness may be output exceeding the user set value, or only the brightness may exceed the user set value and emit light, in this example. In some cases, both are exceeded.

It should be noted that the user setting of the volume and the brightness may be possible even in a game table that does not have the convenient volume adjustment window VW or the brightness adjustment window BW as described with reference to FIG. 65, and the player can set the volume and the brightness. Any game console that can set the volume and brightness will do. Further, the technical idea here can be applied even when the player can set (adjust) the resolution of the image, the color tone of the image, and the like referred to here (hereinafter, the same applies).

As described above, the various technical ideas described with reference to FIG. 100 can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

FIG. 101 is a table summarizing the music that can be output from the speaker 120.

In the game console in the example here, the user may be able to select the music output from the speaker 120. The serial numbers 1 to 11 in the table of FIG. 101 are songs that can be selected by the user according to the number of consecutive villas in the jackpot. For example, if you don't hit the jackpot 15 times in a row, you can't select the song "Large board behavior". Further, a plurality of songs may be selectable. For example, if the jackpot is 15 consecutive villas, all the songs with serial numbers 1 to 11 can be selected.

In addition, the 12 songs with serial numbers are songs that can be selected by operating the chance button 136 five times during the big hit start interval (during the big hit start effect), and when the back button navigation mode is set, the big hit The guidance for operating the chance button 136 is notified during the start interval, but is not notified when the back button navigation mode is not set. The guidance may not be notified even when the back button navigation mode is set, and conversely, the guidance may be notified even when the back button navigation mode is not set.

In addition, the songs with serial numbers 13 and 14 are songs that can be selected on condition that a big hit is made with a specific reach. The "collaboration SP" here is a super reach production in which multiple characters co-star (for example, a super reach production in which Yoshimune and Panda co-star in the swordsman reach). "Big hit" means that the premier character "Kaede" appeared in the cut-in image during Super Reach and made a big hit.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example in which the music selection described with reference to FIG. 101 is performed.

In FIG. 102 (a 1), it is a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), and the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. The second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (a 1), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is also. It is 3. Further, the pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, and in FIG. 102, only the hold icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 are shown. All of these three hold icons h21 to h23 are default display modes. In addition, it is the third big hit. Further, the song title display section MN on the upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (a1) shows the song title of the currently output song (here, the default “may be there”). Is displayed, and the music of the song title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music output here is the music output in the probabilistic state. Further, the icons of the up and down keys 137u and d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed on the left side of the music name display unit MN, and it is notified that the music can be selected by operating the up and down keys 137u and d. Further, the background screen of the universe is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the background screen of the universe is a background screen for a probabilistic state.

In FIG. 102 (a 2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in FIG. 102 (a 3), the song name of the song name display unit MN is changed to “mega giga summer”. Since the music is output from the speaker 120 with a slight delay from the music selection operation (for example, 500 msec), there is a period in which the music name of the music name display unit MN and the music actually output from the speaker 120 are different. It should be noted that the music title of the music title display unit MN may be configured to match the music actually output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 102 (a4), the music of "Mega Giga Summer" is also output from the speaker 120. When a song is changed, the song is output from the beginning. For example, when the timing and time of the song is determined by turning on the power or producing an RTC (Real Time Clock), or when the song is output from the continuation of the previous output. If so, it may be output from the middle.

In FIG. 102 (a 5), the number of holds in special figure 2 increases, and special 2 becomes full (the number of holds displayed in the lower right of the decorative symbol event device 208 is updated to 4). , The display start of the 4th hold icon is slightly delayed from the update of the hold number display to 4, and in the figure (a 6), the 4th hold icon 24 of the look-ahead notice display mode (blinking white) is displayed. Has been done. After that, three reservations of the special figure 2 are exhausted, in FIG. 102 (a 8), the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. There is. The number of remaining holds in FIG. 2 is 1, and the first hold icon h21 is changed to a red display mode.

In FIG. 102 (a 9), the last hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable display of the decorative symbol. Even in the state of FIG. 102 (a 10), the selected music is still "mega giga summer", and in the same figure (a 11), the chief character C11 appears and the music change notice is given. The music change notice is a big hit notice including an effect of forcibly changing the song selected by the player to another song, and may be a normal notice or a pre-reading notice. .. In this example, since the music change notice is displayed, the big hit confirmation (or big hit rich) is announced for the symbol change in which the music change notice is displayed, but the symbol change in which the music change notice is displayed is missed. May be the case. For example, if "Todoroki DREAM", which is the theme song of the character's chief who appeared, is output, it is successful (high expectation of big hit, or big hit confirmed (may be big hit rich)), but "Todoroki DREAM" If "" is not output, it may be a failure, and the symbol variation in which the music change notice is displayed may be missed. Even if "Todoroki DREAM" is not output and the music change notice fails, it may be notified that the big hit has been confirmed by another effect (for example, a resurrection effect). In addition, by displaying the music change notice, the jackpot is confirmed (or the jackpot is rich) after the next change of the symbol change in which the music change notice is displayed, or the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when a notice other than the music change notice is given. A look-ahead notice may be given to announce that the degree is high. Further, even if the music change notice fails, another effect (for example, a resurrection effect) may be configured to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. However, the music change notice may be annoying to the player in some cases that the music selected by the player is forcibly replaced. Therefore, as a compensation, if the music change notice is started, it will be a big hit. It may be confirmed.

The song change effect sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 102 (a 12). Further, although the music of "Mega Giga Summer" output by the speaker 120 is not output, the music of "Mega Giga Summer" may be output. The Bancho character C11, who appeared in the song change notice, raised one hand, and that hand overlapped with a part of the song title display unit MN.

In FIG. 102 (a 13), the song name of the song name display unit MN is changed to “Disstance”, but no music is output from the speaker 120. Even if the output of the music of "Mega Giga Summer" is continuously output as it is in FIG. 102 (a 12) to the figure (a 15-1) during all or a part of the period. Alternatively, the output of the "Disstance" changed by the music change notice may be started from the speaker 120. Here, as shown in FIG. 101, "Disstance" is not a song released after "Mega Giga Summer", but a song different from "Todoroki DREAM". However, "Disstance" is the song immediately before "Todoroki DREAM" in the order of opening. In the music change notice here, the music of "Distance" is sandwiched between them, and finally "Todoroki DREAM" is output. At the stage of FIG. 102 (a 13), "Todoroki DREAM" may be displayed on the song title display unit MN.

In FIG. 102 (a 14), the song change effect sound effect is output from the speaker 120 again, and the bancho character C11 raises one hand. Although the music of "Distance" is not output from the speaker 120 even after a certain period of time has passed since the music name of the music name display unit MN is changed to "Distance", the music of "Distance" may be output.

In FIG. 102 (a 15), the song name of the song name display unit MN is changed to “Todoroki DREAM”, and the song change effect sound effect is output from the speaker 120 again. At the stage when "Todoroki DREAM" is displayed on the song title display unit MN, the music change notice may be successful, and in FIG. 102 (a 16), the music of "Todoroki DREAM" is output from the speaker 120. That is, when "Todoroki DREAM" is displayed on the song title display unit MN, the song "Todoroki DREAM" is always output from the speaker 120. Even if "Todoroki DREAM" is displayed, there may be a case where the music of "Todoroki DREAM" is not output from the speaker 120 and fails.

Further, in this example, when the music change notice is displayed, "Todoroki DREAM" is always output, but in FIG. 102 (a15), the original "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed on the music title display unit MN. If this is the case, it is a failure (missing), and then the speaker 120 may also output "mega giga summer". Alternatively, if "Distance" is still displayed on the song title display unit MN at the timing of FIG. 102 (a 15), it is also a failure (missing), and then the speaker 120 may also output "Distance". , The original "Mega Giga Summer" may be displayed on the song title display unit MN selected by the player, and the output of the "Mega Giga Summer" song may be started.

It should be noted that, depending on whether "Distance" is displayed on the song title display unit MN at the timing of FIG. 102 (a 13) or "Kimi no Kakera" to be released next to "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed. It may represent the expectation of a jackpot for fluctuations and / or symbol fluctuations in hold. That is, the expectation of a big hit may be higher when "Disstance" is displayed than when "Kimi no Kakera" is displayed.

In addition, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be expressed for the fluctuation and / or the symbol fluctuation in the hold depending on the number of times the music is changed due to the music change notice. For example, it may be configured so that it is easier to make a big hit about the fluctuation and / or the symbol fluctuation in the hold when the music is changed twice than when the music is changed once due to the music change notice. .. Further, when the music is changed a specific number of times (for example, 7 times) due to the music change notice, the change and / or the symbol change in the hold may be a big hit confirmed (or a big hit rich). On the contrary, when the music is changed a specific number of times (for example, once) due to the music change notice, the loss may be confirmed.

Further, the animation of "Todoroki DREAM" is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (a 16). Then, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (a 19), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of jackpots with probability variation, is swayed and displayed. In 20), the combination is confirmed and displayed. In this example, when the music change notice is displayed, the music is always changed to "Roaring DREAM", and then the music of "Roaring DREAM" is output from the speaker 120, and "Roaring DREAM" is output to the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation (including lyrics display) is displayed and it becomes a big hit. Even if the music change notice is displayed and the music becomes "Roaring DREAM", the music of "Roaring DREAM" is output from the speaker 120 and / or, "Roaring DREAM" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be configured so that the animation may not be displayed. That is, even if the music change notice is displayed and the music is changed to a specific music, it may be lost if the production display corresponding to the music is not performed next.

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 102.

The start screen of the big hit game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (a 21), and the big hit start BGM is output from the speaker 120 during the big hit start interval (the big hit start effect is being executed). Is.

The timing of FIG. 103 (a 22) is the timing immediately after the start of the first round. In the jackpot game production in this example, the first round and the second round are the music selection periods. When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 automatically displays the music selection screen. The music selection may be started at the player's will, and in this case, the music selection screen may be called by operating the chance button 136 or the like. Even during the music selection period, when the music selection is completed, the music selection screen disappears and the round production is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 is also displayed (“1R”) indicating that it is the first round and the number of balls (the number of prize balls) is displayed (0pt).

The music release list GR is displayed on the music select screen. Since we achieved 4 consecutive villas in this big hit, "Kiseki no Universe" has been newly added to the music release list GR and can be selected. The "Kiseki Universe" display is marked with "New". In this example, since the newly added music is configured to be displayed in the second stage of the music release list GR, it is already released "may be there" and "mega giga summer". Is hidden. Here, the newly opened "Kiseki Universe" is selected, and the rust portion of the "Kiseki Universe" is output from the speaker 120. The previous "Todoroki DREAM" is not displayed in this music release list GR, and "Todoroki DREAM" cannot be selected. However, when the production of "Todoroki DREAM" is executed, "Todoroki DREAM" may be released. In this case, the display position of "Todoroki DREAM" in the song release list GR may be the position directly under the song ("Kimi no Kakera") released up to the previous time, or the position of "Kiseki no Kakera" released this time. It may be located directly below the "universe". Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 103, since the opening order is the sixth song, it may be the position of the sixth song counting from the first song, but in this case, three question marks are displayed side by side. You will be caught. In addition, when the production of "Todoroki DREAM" is executed, the music released according to the number of consecutive villas this time ("Kiseki no Uchu") and the music of "Todoroki DREAM", "Todoroki DREAM" Only may be released, or both songs may be released.

In FIG. 103 (a 24), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor csd is set to the display in which three question marks under the display of "Kiseki's universe" are lined up in the music release list GR. The display with three question marks lined up is an unreleased display, and the song title is unknown. That is, it is unclear what songs are scheduled to be released in the music release list GR in the future. At the timing of FIG. 103 (a 24), the game ball has begun to win the attacker.

When the cursor csd is placed on the display in which three question marks are lined up, scrolling downward is automatically started (Fig. 103 (a 25)), and the cursor csd goes to the end and is "there" at the beginning. Maybe "return to. In addition, instead of automatically scrolling downward, scrolling may be performed by the player's own operation. In addition, instead of displaying three question marks side by side, the title of a song scheduled to be released in the future may be displayed lightly. Or conversely, it is not necessary to notify that there is a song that is not open. That is, the music release list GR may not display the display itself in which three question marks are lined up, but may display only the released music title.

Also in FIG. 103 (a 27), the automatic scrolling is not completed, and the rust portion of the “Kiseki universe” is repeatedly output from the speaker 120. During song selection, a part of each song (the chorus part in this example) is output so as to loop, but it is not necessary to loop. For example, when the output for a certain period is completed, the next song is output. The music may not be output until the next is selected. In addition, all of the music may be output from the beginning, or the entire music may be output from the middle of the music (for example, the chorus part).

Also in FIG. 103 (a 28), the automatic scrolling has not ended, and the cursor csd has not returned to the head "may be there", but from the speaker 120, instead of "Kiseki's universe", " The output of the chorus part of "May be there" has started. It should be noted that the music of "may be there" may not be output until the cursor csd is set to "may be there". FIG. 103 (a 30) shows how the cursor csd has reached the end of the music release list GR by automatic scrolling, and in the same figure (a 31), the cursor csd may be at the beginning "may be there". unknown"
It has returned to and the automatic scrolling has ended. It corresponds to the display of the music from the speaker 120 after the cursor is set to the display of the music to which the cursor csd is originally targeted (it may be at the same time as the setting or before the setting). The output of the music is started, but since "may be there" is output in the middle of automatic scrolling, the music that was output at the time of FIG. 103 (a 31) is shown in FIG. 103 (a 31). The continuation of is output as it is. After the cursor csd is set to "may be there" (it may be at the same time as it is set or before it is set), a new "may be there" is added. The song may be newly started from the beginning of the chorus part of "may be there" (that is, the beginning of the song output by the song select).

After that, the down key 137d is operated once, and the cursor csd is set to the display of "mega giga summer" as shown in FIG. 103 (a 33). In this state, as shown in FIG. 103 (a 34), the chance button 136 is operated to determine "mega giga summer". In the music release list GR shown in FIG. 103 (a 35), the determined "mega giga summer" display is displayed in red, and the music determination sound is output from the speaker 120.

When the music is decided in this way, the music selection screen is switched to the round production screen. The second round effect screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (a 36), and the title of the selected song “Mega Giga Summer” is displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. Has been done. Further, the music of "Mega Giga Summer" is output from the speaker 120. The selected music is output from the beginning at the start of the round production. When selecting a song, if not only the chorus part but all the songs are output from the beginning of the song, it may be output from the continuation at the start of the round production.

Further, instead of FIG. 102 (a 15-1), in FIG. 103 (a 15-2-1), the song title of "CREA" is displayed on the song title display unit MN of the decorative symbol display device 208. The music with this song title is a music not included in the table shown in FIG. 101. That is, it is a song that the player cannot select. The music of "CREA" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 102 (a 15-2-2), and the animation of the character of "CREA" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "CREA" is displayed. The lyrics of the song "CREA" are also displayed. In this way, when the music that the player cannot select is output, the expectation of the big hit may be high, or the big hit may be confirmed. However, it may include a case of loss. Further, in the subsequent music selection by the player, since the music of "CREA" has been output once, it may be added as one of the music that can be selected in the music release list GR, or vice versa. , Addition may be prohibited. In addition, it may be possible to select a song during a jackpot game and not select it when selecting a song during a symbol change, or conversely, it may not be selectable when selecting a song during a jackpot game and select a song during a symbol change. It may be possible.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of the effect produced by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (wa1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, one hold of the special figure 1 is accumulated, and the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

Further, in FIG. 104, similarly to FIG. 100 (ac1), the “user setting value” of “volume” and “luminance” is written in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 of each figure, and “volume” is shown in the lower right. And the "actual setting value" of "brightness" is described. In addition, the types of "BGM", "SE (effect sound)", and "light emission" among the actually executed effects are also described.

In FIG. 104 (wa1), the symbol variation BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are output according to the symbol variation lamp pattern. It emits light with the same 3 levels of brightness as the user-set value.

In order to forcibly set the volume and brightness to the actual set values, the effect control data itself may be instructed to ignore the user set values and execute at the values specified in the effect data, or the user settings may be performed. The sub-control units 400 and 500 may be self-managed by the table in which the effects of ignoring the values are summarized, or may be managed based on the command from the main control unit 300.

In FIG. 104 (wa3), it has evolved into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and the left symbol temporarily stopped by the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is also temporarily stopped. The right symbol moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 104 (wa3), the super reach development BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 follow the super reach development lamp pattern. However, it emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value.

In FIG. 104 (wa4), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and each advances from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to reach the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps from the front side. In this state, the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In FIG. 104 (wa4), the BGM disappears, and the sound effect during the movement of the accessory during super reach development is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp during movement of the accessory during super reach development. According to the pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value. As described above, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light guide plate IL perform the directing operation, but the volume and the brightness remain the user-set values.

The 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd temporarily return to the initial positions at appropriate timings.

On the background screen of the wilderness, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (wa6) displays a scene after the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy battle, and the lord and the swordsman slash each other. In FIG. 104 (wa6), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are output according to the super reach lamp pattern. It emits light with the same 3 levels of brightness as the user set value.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (wa7-1), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. In FIG. 104 (wa8), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, in FIG. (Wa9), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, and then as shown in FIG. , The chance button 136 is operated at the timing within the operation valid period. During this period (from FIG. 104 (wa7-1) to FIG. 104 (wa11-1), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the super reach result fanning sound effect. Is also output from the speaker 120 at the same 3 levels as the user-set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light at the same 3 levels of brightness as the user-set value according to the symbol variation lamp pattern. It should be noted that the button effect may correspond to a suggestion that an effect in which the volume and brightness settings are changed may start.

In response to the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 104 (wa10), the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (wa11-1) displays an effect image from the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slash each other. The display is switched to Ed2. In FIG. 104 (wa11-1) corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136, the BGM disappears, and the jackpot confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at 5 levels exceeding the user set value, and is for jackpot confirmation. According to the lamp pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 also emit light with five levels of brightness exceeding the user-set value. That is, both the volume and the brightness are forcibly increased.

Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the effect described in FIG. 104 (wa11-1) is executed. However, if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the lost symbol may be temporarily stopped to perform the revival effect.

In FIG. 104 (wa12), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate again, and each advances from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device. It overlaps with 208 from the front side. Then, in FIG. 104 (wa13), the Senryobako accessory 224H operates and moves downward from the initial position, and the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. In the figure (a14), the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is performed again, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is shown on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. During this period (FIGS. 104 (wa12) to 104 (wa14)), as in FIG. 104 (a11-1), the jackpot confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at 5 levels exceeding the user set value. The game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 also emit light with a brightness of 5 levels exceeding the user set value according to the jackpot confirmation lamp pattern.

Even when the accessory does not perform the effect operation due to a failure or the like, the volume / brightness may be changed from the user-set value, or in this case, the user-set value may be left unchanged.

Further, the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the button image 136 as shown in FIG. 104 (wa7-1) is displayed. That is, the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed before the effect of operating the accessory is performed. The change here becomes a notice of the result of the button effect (by extension, a notice of the big hit), and such a previous change may be treated as one of the big hit confirmed effects.

Further, here, although the volume and brightness were forcibly changed according to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button production, the operation of the accessory such as the Senryobako accessory 224H was started and the movement to the effect position of the accessory was completed. The volume and brightness may be forcibly changed according to the above, and the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed at a timing other than the operation timing of the accessory. Further, the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed a plurality of times with one symbol change, or the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed only once with one symbol change. Further, here, the volume and the brightness are changed in the same manner, but only the volume may be changed, or only the brightness may be changed (the same applies thereafter).

Eventually, in FIG. 104 (wa15), the light emitting of the light guide plate IL ends, and the sub-control unit 400,500 receives a command to return the Senryobako accessory 224H to the initial position, so that the Senryobako accessory 224H moves upward. It starts moving toward and returns to the initial position. Here, the jackpot confirmation sound effect from the speaker 120 is reduced to the user-set value, and the brightness of the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 that emit light according to the jackpot confirmation lamp pattern also reaches the user-set value. It has been lowered. This is returned to the user set value when the sub-control unit 400,500 side receives the command to return the Senryobako accessory 224H to the initial position.

Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (wa16), the effect image Ed2 fades out, becomes thinner, and gradually disappears. The display of the scene after the swordsmen slash each other fades in. Further, at this timing, the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd have begun to return to the initial positions. During this period (FIGS. 104 (wa16) to 104 (wa17)), as in FIG. 104 (wa15), the jackpot confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at the volume set by the user, and the jackpot is output. The game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452, which emit light according to the confirmation lamp pattern, also emit light with the brightness set by the user.

Note that the volume and / or brightness changes from the user-set value during the period of the same sound data and / or light emission data as shown in FIGS. 104 (a11-1) to (a17), and different sound data. And / or the volume and / or the brightness may be configured to return to the user-set value when switching to the light emission data. On the contrary, the volume and / or the brightness may change from the user set value over a period in which the sound data and / or the light emission data is switched once or a plurality of times.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 104.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (wa18), the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other is completely restored. Further, at this timing, the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd are stopped at the initial positions. In FIG. 105 (wa18), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are output according to the super reach win use lamp pattern. However, it emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value. The timing at which the volume and brightness return to their original values is not limited to the timing shown in FIG. 104 (wa15) (the timing at which the accessory (Senryobako accessory 224H) starts returning from the production position to the initial position), and this timing (background). It may be the timing of switching the display), the timing of confirming the victory of the duel scene (the timing of FIG. 105 (wa19-1)), or the timing of stopping and displaying the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot. May be.

In FIG. 105 (wa19-1), a scene in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role collapses and the hero's lord wins is displayed, and the lord's navigation character YM also poses for victory. In FIG. 105 (wa19-1), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the main character's “Yatte” voice is also the same as the user set value 3. The level is output from the speaker 120, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value according to the super reach win use lamp pattern.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is stopped and displayed, and the final display is performed.

Further, instead of FIG. 104 (wa11-1), in FIG. 105 (wa11-2), after the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 104 (wa10), the lord and the swordsman slash each other. The display of the scene is switched to a display in which a symbol (“decoration 6”) different from the left and right symbols (“decoration 7”) is greatly displayed (shaking display) as the middle symbol. This is a display suggesting a button effect failure. At this time, the BGM for super reach defeat is output from the speaker 120 at the same 3 levels as the user set value, and the lamp 442 for the game board is output according to the lamp pattern for super reach defeat. And the game table frame lamp 452 emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value. In this way, when the production fails, or when the loss is rich or the loss is confirmed, the volume and / or the brightness does not have to be changed from the user set value, but the volume and / or the brightness is changed from the user set value. May be good.

Further, instead of FIG. 104 (wa11-1), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (wa11-2') is the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (wa11-2). This is the same as the display screen of, but in this example, the volume is at a level lower than the user-set value, and the brightness is also at a level lower than the user-set value. In this way, the volume and / or the brightness may be lowered when the production fails, or when the loss is rich or the loss is confirmed. Further, the volume and / or the brightness may be lowered when the production is successful, or when the big hit is rich or the big hit is confirmed.

Instead of FIG. 104 (wa7-1), in FIG. 105 (wa7-2-1), the button effect is not started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The character of the main character, the lord, is displayed in an enlarged display, notifying that he has won. In this way, even when the effect using the operating means such as the chance button 136 or the accessory (movable means) such as the Senryobako accessory 224H is not involved, when a specific effect display is displayed, the effect is displayed. The volume and / or brightness may be forcibly changed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (wa7-2-3), the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other is returned, and the volume and brightness are also returned to the same level as the user set values. ing.

It should be noted that the volume and / or the brightness may be forcibly changed according to the production by other production means, not limited to the accessory and the display. Examples of the other effect means referred to here include a light guide plate IL, a versa writer (POV display), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps), a second display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device), and the like, and are specific. The volume or / and brightness may be forcibly changed according to the winning of a winning opening (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, an attacker) or the passage of a specific gate. Further, the volume and / or the brightness may be forcibly changed in the effect performed when the game ball enters the effect sensor.

Further, instead of FIG. 105 (wa19-1), in the example following the figure (wa19-2-1), it is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the figure (wa19-2-1). The display of the scene where the main character's lord won is faded out as shown in the figure (wa19-2-3), and then the first decorative pattern is displayed as shown in the figure (wa19-2-4). The combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is displayed in a swaying manner. In this example, after forcibly changing the volume and brightness in FIG. 104 (wa11-1), the state is continued until FIG. 105 (wa19-2-3), and then the value is returned to the user set value. That is, the state in which the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed is continued until the super reach effect is completed or until three of the same decorative symbols are lined up and the shaking display is started. Further, it may be continued until the shaking display is completed. Further, the state in which the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed may be continued until the final judge effect is completed.

Although the volume or / and the brightness are forcibly increased during the operation of the accessory, it may be decreased. Further, when the user set value is the maximum value or the minimum value, the volume and / and the brightness do not have to change. Alternatively, the player prepares a volume or brightness that cannot be set, and in this case, the value may be changed to a value larger than the maximum value set by the user or a value smaller than the minimum value set by the user. Good.

Further, the brightness may be increased and the volume may be decreased, and conversely, the volume may be increased and the brightness may be decreased. Further, the brightness may change and the volume may not change, and conversely, the volume may change and the brightness may not change. In addition, when the volume or brightness adjustment (setting) screen is displayed when the volume or brightness changes, the value set by the player may remain as it is, or the value that is forcibly changed is displayed. You may. Further, the volume or brightness may be adjusted by the player when the volume or brightness changes, or may not be adjusted when the volume or brightness changes.

FIG. 104 (c) is an example in which the volume and / and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed. It may be when the display mode of the variable icon changes. In addition, there may be a change in the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon in which the volume and / and the brightness are not forcibly changed. For example, when the expectation of the jackpot changes to a display mode that is not so high, the volume and / and the brightness do not have to be forcibly changed. For example, if the expectation of a big hit goes up in the order of blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow color, the volume or / and brightness must be forcibly changed unless the change is more than red. May be good. Alternatively, conversely, when the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes, the volume and / and the brightness may be forcibly changed without fail.

FIG. 104 (c) is an example in which the volume or / and the brightness may be forcibly changed when an effect (hot effect) with a high expectation of a big hit appears. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (c), a conversation notice surrounded by a red frame appears. As the hot effect, red, gold, and rainbow colors are used, and in this case, the volume or / and the brightness may be forcibly changed. Further, the amount of change may be different depending on whether it is red (for example, 1 level up), gold (for example, 2 levels up), or rainbow color (for example, up to the maximum level), and is the same. There may be.

FIG. 104 (ud) is an example in which the volume or / and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the revival effect is started after the lost decorative symbol is temporarily stopped once. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (Ud-2), a revival effect accompanied by a wipe effect is subsequently executed. In this case, the volume and / and the brightness may be changed before the result display. That is, the volume or / and the brightness may be forcibly changed at the same time as the start of the revival effect.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example in which the holding frame selected by the player is changed.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the above-mentioned customization settings are performed. That is, in the "character selection" shown in FIG. 63 (b), the "copanda" of 07 is set, and in the "hold frame selection", the "hold frame D" of 04 to which the fusuma image for the wipe effect is added is set. It is set, and 03 "icon C" is set in "hold display selection", and 05 "background E" is set in background display selection.

In the explanation here, the colors used in the production represent the high degree of expectation of the big hit, and the degree of expectation of the big hit increases in the order of blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow color. For example, a color or the like as a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon can be mentioned. Hereinafter, the change in color in the direction of increasing the expectation of a big hit may be referred to as promotion. This also applies to the following description. This also applies to the above description.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (d1) displays the hold frame UI of the hold frame D, and the copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, one hold of the special figure 1 is stored, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (d1), the background (empty background) of the background E is displayed.

After that, the number of holds in Special FIG. 1 is increased by two, and three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during stop display shown in FIG. 106 (d3). Here, the hold of the look-ahead notice target is the hold of the second hold icon h12.

In FIG. 106 (d4), one hold is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (d4), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, but the second decorative symbol has started to change. Further, the movement of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement of the hold icons h12 and h13 have not yet started.

In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 106 (d5), the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 have been started. Images appear from the left and right. During the appearance of the fusuma image for the wipe effect, the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 may not be performed. In FIG. 106 (d6), the fusuma image is in a fully closed state (wipe-in state), and the holding frame UI is not visible. In FIG. 106 (d7), the first decorative symbol also starts to fluctuate, and in FIG. 106 (d8), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed. Also in FIG. 106 (d8), the holding frame UI is in the wipe-in state).

In FIG. 106 (d9-1), the wipe-out is started and the fusuma image for the wipe effect is starting to open, and in the figure (d10), the fusuma image is fully opened (wipe-out state). In the wipe effect here, the hold frame has changed. That is, the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 106 (d10) is a "hold frame R" different from the "hold frame D" selected by the player in the customization setting, and the hold frame UI is surrounded by a red frame. It becomes a frame. The "holding frame R" is a holding frame that cannot be selected in the customized settings, but it may be made selectable. The red frame makes the legs of the navigation character YM invisible. The "hold frame R" is a hold frame having a function of notifying that the display mode of the hold icon is in a state where it is easy to change, and next to the copanda of the navigation character YM, "hold change !? Time" is called. The character display is displayed. The hold for the look-ahead notice is the hold of the first hold icon h11 because one hold has been exhausted in FIG. 106 (d4). Here, the "pending change !? Time" corresponds to the above-mentioned "high probability state of production".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (d12), the bomber icon I3 appears from the right end and passes over the hold frame UI. The bomber icon I3 launches a missile at the hold icon, which hits the hold first hold icon h11, which is subject to pre-reading notice. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 hit by the missile has changed, and the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 106 (d13) has changed to a blue display mode, and the promotion effect has been successful. In addition, even if the bomber icon I3 appears, the missile is not launched, the missile does not hit any of the hold icons or the variable icon, or the display mode does not change even if the missile hits. There may be. All of these correspond to the failure of promotion production.

In FIG. 106 (D15), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. 106 (D16), the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The hold change symbol has a red symbol and a blue symbol. When the red hold change symbol is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the hold icon is promoted by two stages, and when the blue hold change symbol is temporarily stopped, the hold icon is displayed. The display mode is promoted by one level. In FIG. 106 (D16), the red pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 106 (D17), the pending change animation is started. That is, the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 106 (d17) is overlapped from the front side by the effect image Ed3, and in the figure (d18), the effect image Ed3 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 is The display mode has changed to red. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (d19), the medium symbol, which has been a red pending change symbol, is changed to "decoration 2", and "decoration 1"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 1". The combination of is displayed in a variable manner (temporary stop). In FIG. 106 (d20), the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed.

In FIG. 106 (D22), the red hold icon, which has been the first hold icon 11, has moved to the pedestal hs0 and is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the red display mode. Even if the hold for the look-ahead notice is exhausted, the character display "Hold change !? Time" continues to be displayed on the hold frame UI. In FIG. 106 (D23), a golden ray is emitted from the navigation character YM toward the variable icon h0, and in FIG. 106 (D24), the variable icon that was previously red is changed to gold.

In FIG. 106 (D26), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. 106 (D28), the super reach effect is developed. In the super reach production, the background of the sky is switched to the background of the wilderness, and the duel scene is displayed. In the super reach state, the hold frame UI has disappeared except for the pedestal hs0, and the hold icon has also disappeared. However, the variable icon h0 has not disappeared, and the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0. The pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 106 (d28) is the pedestal of the “holding frame D” before it is changed by the wipe effect. That is, it is the original pedestal. However, it may be the pedestal of the "holding frame R" after the change due to the wipe effect. Further, the pedestal hs0 and the variable icon h0 may not be displayed during the super reach or from the normal reach state (FIG. 106 (d26)). In addition, the entire hold frame UI and the hold icon may not be displayed. Further, when the super reach effect is completed, hidden items such as the hold frame UI and the hold icon may be displayed, and after the super reach effect is completed, the hold frame R is displayed and the next symbol change. The holding frame D may be displayed from the start of the display.

In this example, the color of the frame of the hold frame UI remained red even in the reach state, but if the color of the frame of the hold frame UI also changes, the expectation of the jackpot will increase. May be good.

It should be noted that the hold frame not selected by the player (for example, "hold frame R") is larger than the case where the look-ahead hold icon is displayed in the hold frame selected by the player (for example, "hold frame D"). When the look-ahead hold icon is displayed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed in the symbol variation corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon, or the hold frame selected by the player. When the look-ahead hold icon is displayed in the hold frame (for example, "hold frame R") which is not selected by the player, rather than when the look-ahead hold icon is displayed in (for example, "hold frame D"). However, even if the display mode of the look-ahead hold icon is the same, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed in the final symbol variation corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 106.

Instead of FIG. 106 (d 9-1), in FIG. 107 (d 9-2-1), both the hold icon and the variable icon are once changed to a special mode (character). In addition, the navigation character YM has also changed to a panda. In this example, after that, the display mode of each color changes to reflect the expectation of the jackpot. Here, the ease of changing to a color with a high expectation of a big hit is determined by the mode of the character once displayed.

In FIG. 107 (D-9-2-2), a mini game with the panda of the navigation character YM is played. The character who wins the mini-game changes to a color icon (hold icon or variable icon) with high expectation of a big hit. The grandfather's character has a 50% chance of winning, the princess's character has a 75% chance of winning, and the lord's character has a 100% chance of winning. In addition to the character of the lord, a premier character may be provided. The premier character changes to an icon with a color that confirms the jackpot (here, rainbow color).

In FIG. 107 (D-9-2-3), a rock-paper-scissors game was played as a mini-game, and everyone played rock-paper-scissors all at once. As a result, both of the grandfather's characters lost, and the lord's character won. In addition, a plurality of characters may win.

In FIG. 107 (d-9-2-4), the wipe effect is started again, and the fusuma image in the figure (d9-2-5) is completely closed (wipe-in state) and then wiped out (the figure). (D 9-2-6)) In the hold frame UI shown in the figure (D 9-2-7), the second hold icon h12 is changed to a blue hold icon. The hold frame UI remains as "hold frame D".

FIGS. 107 (e1) to 107 (e12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display are displayed across a plurality of fluctuations.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (e1) displays the hold frame UI of the hold frame D, and the copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. In addition, two holds of special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which are the default display modes of the icon C, are displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (e1), the background (sky background) of the background E is displayed.

In FIG. 107 (e2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, and the third hold icon h13 is increased. Here, the hold of the look-ahead notice target is the hold of the third hold icon h13. In FIG. 107 (e3), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, in the same figure (e4), one hold is exhausted, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (e4). , The variable display of decorative patterns has started. In FIG. 107 (e5), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS. In this example, the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed on standby. After that, one hold is exhausted, and the hold subject to the look-ahead notice becomes the hold of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 107 (e7), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, and the treasure box icon I1 continues to be displayed on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 107 (e9), the hold of the first hold icon h11, which is the hold for the look-ahead notice, is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (e9) starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. ing. In the effect icon display area DIS, the treasure box icon I1 is still displayed while riding on the carpet icon I2, and the treasure box icon I1 is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. In FIG. 107 (e10), the carpet icon I2 disappears, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 ends, and the change animation starts. That is, in FIG. 107 (e11), the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is wide, a smoke image appears from the inside, and the navigator character YM is covered with the smoke image from the front side. In FIG. 107 (e12), the smoke image disappears, and the Copanda navigation character YM selected by the player in the above-mentioned customization setting is changed to the Bancho navigation character YM. The Bancho navigation character YM is a character that cannot be selected in the customized settings, but it may be made selectable.

In this example, in addition to the navigation character YM, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display is also displayed across the true symbol variation display such as the symbol variation display of the special figure. The navigation character YM and the change notice display may be displayed across the re-variation. For example, the change notice display (treasure box icon I1, carpet icon I2) is displayed due to the change, and the navigator character YM that is always displayed changes due to the change notice display at the third pseudo-ream, or before the change. The change notice display (treasure box icon I1, carpet icon I2) is displayed due to fluctuations, the change notice display continues to be displayed until the second pseudo-ream, and at the third pseudo-ream, the navigation character YM that is always displayed by the change notice display is displayed. It may change.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of production in a pachinko machine set to the auto button mode.

The pachinko machine 100 in this example is set to the auto button mode, and it is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 that the pachinko machine 100 is set to the auto button mode.

In FIG. 108 (A1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed on the background of the sea. Further, one hold of the special figure 1 is stored, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode, is displayed. The navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS of the hold frame UI. Further, a chance button 136 is shown at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button shown in FIG. 108 (A1) is normally lit in white. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 is always lit even outside the valid period of the chance button operation, but the chance button lamp is always off outside the valid period of the chance button operation. It may be.

In FIG. 108 (A2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, the symbol variation display is started, and then the conversation notice is started. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1), the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed, and is displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the button effect image is displayed is displayed. The button effect image is an image that urges the chance button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period, and is composed of a button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is configured. At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1), at least a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more than the case where they are not overlapped. The display mode of the conversation image CI1 is difficult to see. In this example, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord may not be reduced and displayed, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be deleted. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (larger or smaller) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. The size (larger or smaller) may be different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

After that, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A6). By operating the chance button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A6), the player may be able to see the effect according to the operation. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108 (A6) is white and has started blinking.

At the timing of FIG. 108 (A7), the hold of special figure 1 increases. However, the hold icon has not yet begun to appear at this time. In addition, the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced because the time has passed since the operation valid period was started. In FIG. 108 (A8-1), the first hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon shown in FIG. 108 (A8-1) is a button hold icon, and the red button image 136a is displayed on the white circle display. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108 (A8-1) turns blue and starts vibrating in response to the appearance of the button hold icon.

In FIG. 108 (A10), a certain period of time elapses from the start of the operation valid period of the button effect in the conversation notice. Then, the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, and as shown in FIG. 108 (A11), the old man's conversation image CI2 is updated, and the response display for the auto button is "Summer vacation still?" The character display is displayed. As for the button hold icon, the auto button mode is not functioning, and the response display is not displayed unless the player actually operates the chance button 136. As shown in FIGS. 108 (A12) to 108 (A13), the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being lit in blue as an operation promoting mode for the button hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A15), the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108 (A15) has finished vibrating and has returned from the blue lighting to the normal white lighting. More specifically, at a certain timing in FIG. 108 (A14), the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting. This is because the operation validity period of the button hold icon has expired. The operation validity period of the button hold icon may be terminated, for example, when a predetermined validity period has elapsed, may be terminated when the decorative symbol is first stopped, or the decorative symbol may be terminated. It may end when the confirmation display is performed. However, the first hold icon h11 is still a display mode of the button hold icon. Then, in FIG. 108 (A16), the hold of the first hold icon h11, which is the button hold icon, is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A16), the second decorative symbol has started the variable display, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started the variable display, and the button hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon h11 is still displayed.

In FIG. 108 (A17), the hold reduction animation is started, and the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the button hold icon starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. , The button hold icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0, and the change animation is started on the pedestal hs0 in the figure (A19). In the figure (A20), the change icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. It's changing.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 108.

After that, in FIG. 109 (A22), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 109 (A23), the first decorative symbol is performing high-speed fluctuation.

In this example, the auto button mode is set all the time, but the chance button 136 was not operated until the symbol change display changed to the button hold icon was confirmed regardless of whether the auto button mode was set or not. In that case, the display mode changes automatically after the hold reduction animation. That is, while the hold icon is in the display mode of the button hold icon, the hold icon changes to the blue display mode in response to the operation of the chance button 136, but when the hold reduction animation is started (variable icon h0). (When the variable icon h0 is reached), the display mode does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136.

Further, the auto button mode may be terminated by operating the chance button 136 during the auto button mode. In that case, the auto button mode may not be terminated even if the chance button 136 is operated while the remaining period meter MT is being displayed, or the chance button may be configured even while the remaining period meter MT is being displayed. When 136 is operated, the auto button mode may be terminated.

Further, when the chance button 136 is not operated, the variable icon h0 may be displayed in the same manner as the button hold icon, or the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode may not be changed, or the default. It may change to the variation icon h0 of the display mode of. Further, even if the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting, the operation valid period may not have ended. Further, the fact that the change icon h0 in the blue display mode does not change when the chance button 136 is not operated is the same regardless of whether it is in the auto button mode or the non-auto button mode. However, it may be changed, and further, it may change during the auto button mode but not during the non-auto button mode, or vice versa.

Further, when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period in the state where the auto button mode is not set, as shown in FIG. 108 (A11), the characters "Summer vacation is not yet?" Are displayed. The old man's conversation image CI2 is not updated. However, it may be updated.

Further, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-1), a button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-1), the meter display MW'is also displayed. The button display icon 136D is a notice that does not change unless the chance button 136 is operated, and may be a notice of the change. In FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-2), the button display icon 136D is displayed together with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the button effect image is displayed. As described above, since the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, the button display icon 136D shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-2) overlaps with the notice that changes without operating the button. There is.

Further, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-3), a plurality of button effect images (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In this case, it is necessary to operate the chance button 136 a plurality of times, and the auto button function does not have to work even when the chance button 136 needs to be operated a plurality of times. After the operation is performed a specific number of times (for example, once), the auto button function may be activated for the remaining button effect images.

Further, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-4), a button effect image (button) is displayed on the second display device 208S arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device). Image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) is displayed. FIG. 109 (Aa5-4)
), The button effect image displayed on the second display device 208S is one, but the auto button function does not work on one or more button effect images displayed on the second display device 208S. It may be.

Further, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified to urge the chance button 136 to be repeatedly pressed. In FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-2), the button continuous striking effect is started, and the button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) and the continuous striking meter RHM are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. .. The auto button function does not work for the button repeated pressing effect, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-2) starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt the operation. Eventually, in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-5), the continuous striking of the chance button 136 is started, the continuous striking meter RHM shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-6) is raised, and the response is displayed. The chance button 136 is repeatedly hit in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-5), and a response display such as an increase in the continuous hit meter RHM is also performed. However, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-6) is shown. The vibration continues and the blue lighting continues. In the examples so far, it was sufficient to operate the chance button 136 once, but in this example, since it is necessary to repeatedly hit the chance button 136, the vibration of the chance button 136 and the blue lighting are continued. In the case of long press, the operation of the chance button 136 becomes long as in the case of repeated hits, so that the technical idea here can be applied. The timing of FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-7) is the moment when the operation valid period has elapsed and the remaining time display meter MT becomes 0. The vibration of the chance button 136 and the blue lighting continue until the remaining time display meter MT becomes 0. After this, the chance button 136 immediately stops vibrating and returns to white lighting. It should be noted that the auto button function may be configured to operate when the operation is performed once or more. Also, in this example, the auto button function does not work, but the long press auto continuous hit function is configured to work, and by performing the long press for a certain period of time, the same response display as when performing the continuous hit operation is displayed. However, if the auto button function does not work, the long press auto continuous hit function may not work either.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 108.

In the example following FIG. 110 (A8-2-1) instead of FIG. 108 (A8-1), after the operation valid period of the button hold icon has started, for the button effect in the conversation notice. This is an example in which the chance button 136 is operated once before the auto button function of is activated. In this case, both the response effect of the button hold icon and the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice are displayed. That is, the button hold icon is changed as the response effect of the button hold icon, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is updated as the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice. The change of the button hold icon corresponds to the look-ahead notice, and the update of the old man's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice also corresponds to the look-ahead notice. The conversation notice may be a normal notice. Further, the change of the button fluctuation icon in FIG. 108 (A20) corresponds to a normal notice.

It should be noted that only the response effect of the person whose auto button function does not work may be displayed. That is, only the change animation of the button hold icon may be displayed, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may not be updated. Alternatively, conversely, only the response effect of the person whose auto button function works may be displayed.

Further, one operation of the chance button 136 may display only the response effect of the person whose auto button function does not work, and the second operation may display the response effect of the person whose auto button function works. However, on the contrary, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person who works the auto button function is displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person who does not work the auto button function is displayed. It may be.

Further, the above description using FIGS. 110 (A8-2-1) to (A8-2-4) was given while the auto button mode was set, but the auto button mode was not set. The same applies to.

Further, instead of FIG. 108 (A8-1), in FIG. 110 (Aa8-3), the chance button 136 vibrates and emits light in a special color (blue in this case) even when the auto button mode is not set. Is shown. Note that different notifications may be given when the auto button is not set and when the auto button is set.

Further, instead of FIG. 108 (A8-1), in FIG. 110 (Aa8-3'), when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and emits light in a normal color (here, blinking white). Here is an example of how to do it.

Further, as another example, in FIG. 110 (Ab1), a notification is given to prompt the decorative symbol display device 208 to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 during the big hit game. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (Ab2) displays a button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) together with the display of the third round, but during the big hit game, the auto button function is displayed. May not work, or conversely, the auto button function may work.

FIGS. 110 (Ba1-1) to 110 (Ba5) are diagrams showing an example of the effect of the back button. When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 110 (Ba1-1), the effect by the navigation character YM is started. However, the chance button 136 is normally lit in white, does not vibrate, and the back button is not notified. In FIG. 110 (Ba2), when the button hold icon (first hold icon h11) in which the auto button function does not work appears, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt the operation. In FIG. 110 (Ba3), the chance button 136 is operated, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11, which is the button hold icon, is changed (see FIG. 110 (Ba1-5)).

FIG. 110 (Ba1-2) is the same state as shown in FIG. 110 (Ba1-1), but the only difference is that in FIG. 110 (Ba1-2), the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. It turns blue and is a point that notifies the back button.

The remaining period meter MT representing the remaining period of the operation valid period described so far will be described in more detail. The description here is applicable to any of the effect examples in which the remaining period meter MT described above is displayed. The display mode of the remaining period meter MT changes according to the passage of time (in this example, a decrease display is performed), and the remaining time display area MT1 and the display mode located behind the remaining time display area according to the passage of time. It is composed of two elapsed time display areas MT2 in which is changed (in this example, an increase display is performed). Here, the display mode (for example, color, shape, etc.) of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 may be displayed in a special display mode different from the default display mode. For example, when the display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in red instead of the default color (blue in this example), or the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is red instead of the default color (white in this example). For example, when it is displayed in. When the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a special display mode and the remaining time display area MT1 is reduced and displayed with the passage of time, it is displayed in a special display mode with the passage of time. Since the area to be displayed is reduced, it may be possible to draw attention to the display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example). On the contrary, when the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed in a special display mode, the elapsed time display area MT2 with the passage of time
When the display area of is increased, the area displayed in the special display mode increases with the passage of time, so that the player who wants to see the special display mode by the elapsed time display area MT2 can immediately operate the operation means ( In this example, it may be possible to increase the variation of how to enjoy the production and improve the player's willingness to participate in the game, such as not operating the chance button 136, etc.). The display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 is such that the remaining time meter is displayed first when the remaining time meter is first displayed (in the case of the remaining time display area MT1). In the case of the elapsed time display area MT2, it may be the time when the elapsed time display area MT2 becomes visible only after the remaining period display area MT1 decreases.) The display mode may be displayed, or may be configured to change from the default display mode to a special display mode when a certain period of time has elapsed after the operation valid period has elapsed.

In addition, the navigation character YM described so far will be further supplemented. The description here can be applied to any of the effect examples in which the navigation character YM described above is displayed. First, it may be configured so that various notices are not given by the navigation character. Further, while the navigation character (hereinafter, "navi character A") is being displayed, another navigation character (hereinafter, "navi character B") may be displayed. In that case, the navigation character B displayed later may be configured to overlap with the navigation character A displayed earlier, and conversely, the navigation character B displayed later may overlap first. The displayed navigation character A may be overlapped, or the navigation character A and the navigation character B may be displayed at positions where they do not overlap with each other. For example, there may be a case where the constantly displayed navigation character YM is overlapped by a navigation character that gives a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice during one or more fluctuations. Further, the change notice display may be performed by performing the effect display suggesting that the change notice display may be displayed by the navigation character.

FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating an overlap relationship between the display of the ball removal notification notified by the occurrence of the dish full tank error and the other display of each of the brightness adjustment windows BW.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, both the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display has not started since the final display of the stop symbol of the special symbol is performed, and the menu icon MI, so as to overlap the lower part of the first decorative symbol from the front side. The volume adjustment icon VI and the brightness adjustment icon BI are displayed. In addition, a ball removal notification such as "Please remove the ball" is displayed at the bottom of the first decorative pattern so as to overlap from the front side. The display of the ball removal notification is a little transparent, and when the display of the ball removal notification is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, the display on the back side becomes a little visible. Hereinafter, the fact that they are displayed so as to overlap from the front side or that they are displayed on the front side layer may be simply expressed as "overlapping". The display of the ball removal notification may be such that the display on the rear side is completely invisible. Further, a voice such as "Please pull out the ball" is output from the speaker 120.

The display of the ball removal notification is different from the second decorative symbol on the upper left and the second hold number display on the upper right, and does not overlap with these displays. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the second decorative symbol and / and the second hold number display, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is not overlapped with the frame RW at the upper right of the screen for notifying the current setting state, and does not overlap with this frame RW. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the frame RW, or may overlap with each other. In addition, the display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the hold frame UI, and does not overlap with this hold UI. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the holding frame UI, or may overlap with each other.

In FIG. 111 (α2), the lower key of the operation key unit is operated and the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed. The brightness adjustment window BW is displayed after the display of the ball removal notification, but the display of the ball removal notification has priority, and the brightness adjustment window BW is placed on the layer behind the display of the ball removal notification. It is displayed. That is, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the brightness adjustment window BW.

Eventually, the symbol variation display is started, the brightness adjustment window BW, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are hidden. 1 The decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. However, the ball removal operation has not yet been performed, and the display of the ball removal notification is continued. The same applies when the dish full tank error is once resolved by performing the ball removal operation, but the dish full tank error occurs again, and the display of the ball removal notification is newly displayed. The display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 111 (α3), the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated, and a bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed on the hold frame UI. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol, at least a part of the variable icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. In the following description, when the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed, it is assumed that the left and right keys are operated and displayed each time. In addition, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit, the bar display for brightness adjustment can be displayed, and this bar display for brightness adjustment is displayed at the same position as the bar display VB for volume adjustment. , The following description of the bar display VB for volume adjustment can be applied to the bar display for brightness adjustment. However, the bar display for brightness adjustment and the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed at the same time. Further, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume or the bar display for adjusting the brightness may be displayed at all times, or may be displayed only for a certain period of time. Further, it may be possible to display only while operating the left / right key or the up / down key.

Further, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume and the display of the ball removal notification are displayed at positions where they do not overlap. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the bar display VB for adjusting the volume, or may overlap.

Further, the display position of the ball removal notification is shifted between the hold icon and the variable icon, and does not overlap with these icons. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the hold icon and / and the variable icon, or may overlap with each other. Further, the display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the navigation character YM, and does not overlap with the display of the navigation character YM. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the navigation character YM, or may overlap.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α4), a super reach effect is performed, and a duel scene in the background of the wilderness is displayed. Here, too, the display of the ball removal notification is displayed, and the left design of "Decoration 7" moved to the upper left, the right design of "Decoration 7" moved to the upper right, and the display of the ball removal notification overlap. ing. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness. The volume can be adjusted even during the super reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α4) displays a bar display VB for adjusting the volume. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume also overlaps with the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α5) displays the start screen of the big hit game, but the display of the ball removal notification also overlaps with the big hit start effect display here. Further, the volume can be adjusted even during the big hit game, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α5) displays a bar display VB for adjusting the volume. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume also overlaps with the jackpot start effect display. On the other hand, the display of the ball removal notification is different from the right-handed suggestion display (display different from the right-handed warning. Corresponding to the mini right-handed display in FIG. 18 (52) described above) at the upper left of the screen. It does not overlap with the right-handed suggestion display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the right-handed suggestion display, or may overlap. The right-handed suggestion display may not be displayed on the start screen of the jackpot game.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α6) displays a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to right-handed. In this example, the right-handed instruction screen is the first big hit (normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) to the first big hit (first consecutive villa), but the latent probability change state. The first (1st consecutive villa) jackpot from (special figure high accuracy Fuzu low accuracy) and the 1st (1st consecutive villa) jackpot from the sudden change state (special figure high accuracy Fuzu high accuracy) In addition, the latent probability change state and / or the sudden probability change state described above indicates only the state shifted from the normal state, and excludes the state generated in the probability change state and the time saving state). However, a right-handed instruction screen may be displayed for each big hit. On the right-handed instruction screen here, the display of the ball removal notification is overlapped, while the right-handed suggestion display is not overlapped by the display of the ball removal notification. In this example, the right-handed warning display (corresponding to the right-handed notification in FIG. 17 (60) described above and the liquid crystal display of the right-handed warning in FIG. 116 described later) is displayed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed. Although it is not performed, a right-handed warning display may be performed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed. Further, the left-handed warning display (corresponding to the liquid crystal display at the time of left-handed hitting warning in FIG. 116, which will be described later) is not displayed during the display of the right-handed instruction screen, but it may be displayed. Further, although the right-handed suggestion display is performed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed, the right-handed suggestion display may not be performed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed.

In FIG. 111 (α7), the first round is started and the round effect is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of the round effect. The display position of the ball removal notification is different from the round number display on the upper right of the screen, and does not overlap with this round number display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the number of rounds display, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is not overlapped with the ball ejection number display (0pt) at the lower right of the screen because the display position is deviated from the ball ejection number display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the number of balls released, or may overlap.

In Fig. 111 (α8) of the 4th round, a promotion effect is performed to suggest whether or not there will be a big chance that the 2nd variable winning opening will be open for a long time and it will be easy to pass V in the 5th round. As a result, a success production indicating that the promotion production was successful is being executed. That is, it is notified that the game is a big hit game in which the probability variation transition condition is easily satisfied. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of this success effect. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α8), the display of the star “V chance GET” has also started to be displayed. The display of the ball removal notification is "V chance GE" of this star mark.
The display position is different from the display of "T" and does not overlap with this display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the star "V chance GET", or may overlap.

In FIG. 111 (α9), the fifth round is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the fifth round of the jackpot game, and prompts the player to pass V in this round. The display "Aim for V" is displayed. As a result, it may be possible to ensure that the player passes through the V. The display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the display of "Aim for V".

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (α10), there is a passage (V passage) of the game ball to the probability variation operation region in the second variable winning opening, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the probability variation acquisition is confirmed. The display of "V" is displayed large. That is, the display of "V", which is a notification that the acquisition of the probability change has been confirmed, is displayed based on the fact that the V has passed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of "V". At the timing shown in FIG. 111 (α10), the display of the star “V chance GET” may be hidden.

When the fifth round is completed, the end effect of the big hit game is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 111 (α11). In the above-mentioned big hit game, since the probability change transition condition is satisfied by passing V in the fifth round, the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure) while the symbol variation display is performed a certain number of times after the end of the big hit game. High probability state). Therefore, in the end effect of the big hit game, the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating the transition to the probabilistic state is performed (probability change effect). The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush". Even in the end effect of the big hit game, the right-handed suggestion display is displayed, but it does not have to be displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α12) displays a prepaid card forget-to-remove warning display (corresponding to the above-mentioned warning display in FIG. 18 (57)). The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with this prepaid card forget-to-remove warning display. Even in the end effect of the prepaid card forgetting warning display, the right-handed suggestion display is displayed, but it does not have to be displayed.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α13), a display (BONUS × 3) of the number of jackpot consecutive villas is displayed immediately below the right-handed suggestion notification on the upper left of the screen. Further, the song title display unit MN is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and the icons of the up and down keys of the operation key unit are displayed on the left side thereof. Further, the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

The display position of the ball removal notification is different from the display of the number of jackpot consecutive villas, and does not overlap with this display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the number of jackpot consecutive villas, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is not overlapped with the song title display unit MN because the display position is deviated from that of the song title display unit MN. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed on the song title display unit MN so as not to overlap, or may overlap. In addition, the display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the up / down key icons, and does not overlap with the up / down key icons. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the icons of the up and down keys, or may overlap. Further, the display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the second hold number display at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap with the second hold number display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the second hold number display, or may overlap.

Further, the bar display VB for volume adjustment shown in FIG. 111 (α13) overlaps a part of the hold icon, but may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap.

Further, in FIG. 111 (α14), the start screen of the big hit game is displayed, and the music selection screen shown in FIG. 103 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the music release list GR.

Further, in FIG. 111 (α16), the music selection is completed and the round effect is started. The title of the currently selected song is displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α16). The display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the song title display, and does not overlap with this song title display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the song title display, or may overlap.

Further, in FIG. 111 (α17) of the fourth round, the display “Aim for V at the next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen, and in FIG. 111 (α18) of the fifth round, “Aim for V at the next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen. The display "Aim for V" is displayed, and the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with these displays displayed on the right side of the screen. Here, FIG. 111 (α17) may correspond to the end of the remaining sphere detection period of the main control unit 300 at the end of the four rounds. Further, FIG. 111 (α18) shows the start of 5 rounds, and may correspond to the time when the special electric service operating signal of the main control unit 300 changes from off to on. In this case, the period between FIG. 111 (α17) and FIG. 111 (α18) corresponds to the period of the inter-round interval from the end of 4 rounds to the start of 5 rounds, and the special electric function operating signal of the main control unit 300 is output. It will be the period from on to off.

Further, in FIG. 111 (α19), the display of “V” based on the passage of V is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the display of “V”. ing. However, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume does not overlap with the display of "V".

Note that FIG. 111 (α20) may be a state in which a certain period of time has elapsed since the passage of V during the execution of 5R, or at the end of 5 rounds (for example, the remaining ball detection period of the main control unit). It may be in the state of (the period corresponding to the end).

After that, the jackpot game progresses to the 15th round (FIGS. 111 (α21) to (23)), and in FIG. 111 (α24), the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush” is displayed (directed during probabilistic change) as in FIG. ) Is displayed, and the display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush". In FIG. 111 (α24), the jackpot end display period is started and displayed after the end of the inter-round interval.

Since a command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 receives the command, and various controls are performed, there is a time lag between the timing of the main control unit 300 and the actual timing.

Further, in FIG. 111, the previous round display is displayed as it is during the inter-round interval. For example, "5R" is displayed during the inter-round interval between the 5th and 6th rounds, but all or part of the round display may be hidden during the inter-round interval. For example, only R may be displayed and the number portion may be hidden.

The same applies to the end of 15 rounds, and the rounds may be displayed or hidden during the inter-round interval period.

In this example, a right-handed warning display may be displayed during a big hit, but on the other hand, a left-handed warning display may not be displayed, but a left-handed warning display may be displayed. It may be configured so that the warning is not notified.

Although the display of the ball removal notification has been described above as an example, the description here is not limited to the display of the ball removal notification, and other errors (for example, various errors listed in the list of FIGS. 114 and 115). It can be applied to the display of notifications about.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a display example of the ball removal notification.

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (β) is such that the display behind the display of the ball removal notification is completely invisible.

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) overlaps with the volume adjustment icon VI in addition to the brightness adjustment window BW. That is, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) overlaps a part of the brightness adjustment window BW and a part of the volume adjustment icon VI. The display of the ball removal notification may overlap all of the brightness adjustment window BW, or may overlap all of the volume adjustment icon VI. Further, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) is a slightly transparent display similar to the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 111, and the display on the rear side is slightly visible. However, the display on the rear side may be completely invisible, as in the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (β).

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ2) overlaps with the volume adjustment bar display VB displayed during the symbol variation display. The display of the ball removal notification does not overlap with the navigation character YM, but the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps with the navigation character YM. Further, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) may be such that the display on the rear side is completely invisible, as in the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. ,the same.). Not limited to the volume adjustment bar, the functions that can be set by the player during the symbol change and the display related to the above-mentioned Daitomo, etc. (the effect customization screen shown in the above-mentioned FIGS. 65 (V) and (V'), etc., List of missions achieved by the player's operation regardless of the fluctuation status of the symbol while the song title display unit MN, the brightness adjustment bar, and the user mode (Daitomo) shown in FIG. 102 (a1) and the like are being set. And game history (number of rotations, number of balls, number of missions cleared, number of big hits in this play, maximum number of consecutive villas in this play, etc.), characters set by the user, background, hold frame, hold display, etc. It can also be applied to displays that can be set and changed).

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ3-1) overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM, respectively. Then, when the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated in the state shown in FIG. 112 (γ3-1), the bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed. As shown in the figure (γ3-2), the bar display VB is displayed. In the display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume, the display of the ball removal notification has priority and is displayed on the front side. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume may be displayed on the front side with priority. Further, in any case, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume also overlaps with the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM, respectively, and may also overlap with the hold icon h11.

In FIG. 112 (γ4), contrary to FIG. 112 (γ3-2), the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the bar display VB for adjusting the volume.

In FIG. 112 (δ3-1), the navigation character YM is displayed on the effect icon display area DIS, and in FIG. 112 (δ3-2), the navigation character YM jumps by animation to notify the ball removal. It overlaps with the display of. Here, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the navigation character YM, but the navigation character YM may overlap a part of the display of the ball removal notification. Further, the navigation character YM may not perform an animation that overlaps all or a part of the display of the ball removal notification. This technical idea can also be applied to other error indications described below.

In FIG. 112 (ε), the display of the ball removal notification is displayed only in characters without a frame display.

FIG. 112 (ζ1) shows an example in which the display of the ball removal notification is composed of a character display and a peripheral image display 132G around the ball discharge lever 132. A part of each of the first decorative symbol, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is overlapped by the peripheral image display 132G.

In FIG. 112 (ζ 2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps with the same character display as the character display of “Aim for V” shown in FIG. 111 (α9) to hide the character display.

In FIG. 112 (ζ3), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the same display as the display of “Aim for V at the next R” on the right side shown in FIG. 111 (α17).

In FIG. 112 (η1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps with the character display of “Aim for V” and the display of the star mark “V chance GET”.

In FIG. 112 (η2), the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap with the display of “Aim for V at the next R” displayed on the right side.

In FIG. 112 (θ1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the bar display VB for volume adjustment and hides a part of the bar display VB for volume adjustment. That is, in this example, only the entire gauge portion is hidden. However, the peripheral image display 132G may overlap with all of the bar display VB for adjusting the volume. In this example, the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap with the character display of "Aim for V" and the display of the star "V chance GET".

In FIG. 112 (θ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the entire gauge portion of the bar display VB for volume adjustment and a part of “Aim for V at the next R” on the right side.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of types of error displays are displayed.

An example of errors A to E shown in FIG. 113 will be described later. The ball removal notification may or may not be included in these errors A to E.

In FIG. 113 (ι1), the transparency display of the error A notification is displayed, and the warning sound of the error A notification is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 113 (ι1'), the opaque display of the error A notification is displayed.

In FIG. 113 (ι2), the transparency display of the error A notification overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM, respectively, as in FIG. 112 (γ3-1). Is the same as the description in FIG. 112 (γ3-1).

In FIG. 113 (ι3-1), a plurality of types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. That is, the newly generated error is displayed below, and in this example, the first error that occurs becomes error A. The latest error E warning sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that warning sounds may be output in the order in which all the displayed errors occur.

In FIG. 113 (ι3-2), since the error E has been resolved, the transparency display of the error E notification disappears, and the warning sound of the error D is output from the speaker 120. That is, when the last error that occurred is cleared, the warning sound of the error that occurred before that is output.

In FIG. 113 (ι3-2'), the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlaps a part of a plurality of types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification). Here, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlaps with the transparency display of the error E notification at the bottom, and the character display of the error E is hidden. Note that a plurality of types of error displays may overlap with the bar display VB for volume adjustment.

In FIG. 113 (ι4-1), when an error occurs in the order of error ABCDE, the error having the highest priority to be notified is displayed at the top, and the warning sound of the error having the highest priority is output from the speaker 120. Will be done. The high-priority error is a high-priority error (for example, a serious error for a game store), and specifically, it may be in the order of the list shown in FIG. 114. In FIG. 113 (ι4-1), error B has the highest priority.

In FIG. 113 (ι4-2), since the error B has been resolved, the transparency display of the error B notification disappears, and the warning sound of the error E, which has been the second so far, is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 113 (ι5-1), error A occurs, the transparency display of error A notification is displayed, and the warning sound of error A notification is output from the speaker 120. In this state, error Z occurs. The error Z is an error for stopping the game, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (ι5-2) has a blue screen, and all the displays are not displayed except for the display related to the error Z. ing. The error of stopping the game referred to here is an error in which the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery (for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error). That is, it is an error that the main control unit 300 cannot perform various lottery, or even if it can be performed, it is prevented from performing. An error displayed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 such as error Z is not limited to an error of stopping the game, but is, for example, an error of the effect movable means described later or an error of stopping the payout operation. May be good. Further, some or all of the various errors listed in FIG. 116, which will be described later, may be error Z, but conversely, some or all of the various errors listed in FIG. 116 may be errors. May not be displayed in the display mode of error Z. Further, when the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery, commands are not transmitted to the sub control units 400 and 500, and as a result, the sub control units 400 and 500 also do not perform various lottery.

In FIG. 113 (κ1), the position of the error display is changed. That is, a plurality of types of error displays (error A notification to error E notification opaque display) are displayed in the order of error occurrence at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The error display in FIG. 113 (κ1) is such that the display behind the error display is completely invisible, but it is a slightly transparent display.
When the display of the ball removal notification is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, the display on the back side may be slightly visible.

In FIG. 113 (κ2), the display of the ball removal notification is added in the state shown in FIG. 113 (κ1). Here, the ball removal notification error (dish full tank error) is not included in the plurality of types of errors (errors A to E), but is included in the plurality of types of errors (errors A to E). May be good. Instead of the error of the ball removal notification, an error having a high frequency of occurrence may be displayed separately from a plurality of types of errors (errors A to E).

A part of the error of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 113 (κ2) is overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end. It should be noted that all of the ball removal notification errors may be overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

On the other hand, the error of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 113 (κ2) overlaps with the plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

The error notification display related to the control on the sub control unit 400, 500 side may be overlapped by the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300, or vice versa. For example, the hitting method warning display may be overlapped by the ball removal notification display, or conversely, the ball removal notification display may be overlapped by the hitting method warning display. Further, both error notification displays are displayed at positions where the error notification display related to the control on the sub control units 400 and 500 side and the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300 do not overlap each other. You may.

FIG. 113 (λ1-1) shows the symbol variation display, and the simultaneous effect executed on the plurality of game consoles is started from the middle of the symbol variation display. FIG. 113 (λ1-2) shows an example of the display screen of the simultaneous effect in the normal state (no error occurs and before the first stop). As shown in FIG. 113 (λ1-2), in the normal state, the background display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is replaced with the background display of the simultaneous effect. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume may be displayed so as to overlap the background display of the simultaneous effect. However, the opposite may be true. Further, regarding the error display, there is an example shown in FIG. 113 (λ2') described later, but the error display may be displayed so as to overlap with the background display of the simultaneous effect. However, the opposite may be true.

FIG. 113 (λ2) shows an example of a case where a simultaneous effect occurs during the super reach effect. During the super reach effect, the display of the simultaneous effect is displayed on the separate frame display unit OFD in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can enjoy the super reach effect and also see the simultaneous effect. be able to. If the game table is equipped with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the simultaneous effect display is displayed on the display devices 208S, 208M, 208N. You may.

FIG. 113 (λ2') shows an example in which a simultaneous effect occurs during the error notification display. Here, the situation that the super reach effect is being produced also overlaps, but it may be the same even before the first stop of the decorative symbol or in the normal reach state. The display of the simultaneous effect is displayed on the separate frame display unit OFD, and multiple types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in the same manner as before the simultaneous effect occurred, and the separate frame display unit The display of the simultaneous effect in OFD overlaps with a plurality of types of error displays.

The bar display VB for adjusting the volume may overlap with the display of the simultaneous effect on the separate frame display unit OFD. Or conversely, the bar display VB for volume adjustment has a separate frame display unit O.
The display of the simultaneous effect in the FD may overlap.

Further, in a game table provided with a second display device 208S, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, or a third decorative symbol display device 208N, those display devices 208S, 208M, 208N (hereinafter, referred to as "second display means"). ) Overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208 or the first decorative symbol display device 208L (hereinafter, referred to as “first display means”), the first display is made according to the movement of the second display means. A part of the display in the means may be displayed in the second display means. In this case, the error display may be displayed on the second display means, or only the error display may not be displayed.

As described above, the words "error" and "warning" are used in the explanations using FIGS. 111 to 113, but it is not necessary to distinguish between the two, and the notification that an error has occurred is used. It may be a notification that there is an error or that it is instructed to resolve the error that has occurred. Moreover, what is described as an error may be set with a higher priority than what is described as a warning.

<Error notification / Error that can be detected by the main control unit>
Next, an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100.

The errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 in this example include a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) disconnection error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch (sensor) level abnormality error, and a prize. Rate (general winning opening, starting opening 2 (electric chew), big winning opening (attacker)) abnormal error, big winning opening excess discharge error, big winning opening winning excess error, impact abnormality error, solenoid abnormality error, etc. can be mentioned.

A magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs when the magnetic detection signal changes from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and that state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms), and the power is turned on again. This is an error that returns when A switch (sensor) disconnection error is when the power is turned on (PW_WATCH signal is on) and one of the special figure 1 and 2 start port, normal figure start port (gate), and attacker is not connected (harness is broken or connector is disconnected). This occurs when the above state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms), and the unconnected devices (special figure 1 and 2 start port, normal figure start port, attacker) are connected in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on). This is an error that returns when it is detected. The magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error that occurs when the magnetic field (radio wave) is detected by the magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor.

The switch (sensor) level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a big ball is suspected. Among the winning rate abnormal errors, the general winning opening error is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the general winning opening (for example, general winning opening 226) is an abnormal value, and the error of the starting opening 2 is normal. It is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected when the electric accessory (for example, the second special figure starting port 232) is not operating, and the error of the big winning opening is the big winning opening (for example,). This is an error that occurs when the number of winnings in the variable winning opening 234) is an abnormal value.

The large winning opening excess discharge error occurs when the number of discharges> the number of balls entered during the probability variation area valid period and outside the probability variation area valid period, and the next main control unit timer in which the large winning slot discharge excess error occurs This error returns when interrupt processing occurs.

The large winning opening winning excess error occurs when the number of balls entered> the number of ejected balls after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special electric function operation interval timer is 0), and the number of balls entered = the number of ejected balls. This is an error that returns when the power is turned on again or when the power is turned on again. In the recovery process of the large winning opening winning excess error, the number of passages related to the probability variation area is set to 0.

An impact abnormality error is defined as a state in which the level of the impact sensor changes from OFF to ON while the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF (= power is ON) and during the valid period of the probability variation area (specific area). It is an error that occurs when the time (for example, 12 ms) continues, and returns when the level of the impact sensor changes from ON to OFF, or when it changes from the probabilistic region valid period to the outside of the probabilistic region valid period.

The solenoid abnormality error occurs when the photosensor does not perform the operation of changing from OFF to ON or the operation of changing from ON to OFF even once during the valid period of the probability variation region, and the following solenoid abnormality error occurs. This error returns when timer interrupt processing occurs.

In this example, the uppermost stage (magnetic (magnet) detection error) in FIG. 114 is the highest priority error because the operation of the main control unit 300 is prohibited (gaming is not possible). Although the degree is low, the other error may be the highest priority error, and the high priority does not have to be in the order of the list shown in FIG. 114. The details of the error occurrence condition, the return condition, the detection operation in the main control unit 300, and the return operation in the main control unit 300 are as shown in the figure. In addition, "when the end display period of the big hit or small hit ends" of the recovery condition of the winning rate abnormality error of the big prize opening (attacker) is when the end display period of the big hit or the small hit ends.

<Error notification / error that can be detected by the payout control unit>
Next, an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100.

The errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 in this example include a lower tray full tank error (lower plate full tank error, a plate full tank error), a payout number shortage error, a payout quantity switch error, an illegal payout error, and a payout excess. Error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (error when communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 cannot be received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example)), CR unit unconnected error, glass frame open error , Inner frame opening error, door opening error, magnetic error, external clock error, magnetic field error, switch level error, switch disconnection error, impact sensor error, etc., which are not shown.

Further, the conditions for generating each error, the return conditions, the payout operation in the payout device 152, and the launch operation in the launch device 110 are as shown in FIG. 115 (a). In addition, "stop" described in the item "stop launch" shown in the figure is synonymous with turning off the launch permission signal.

FIG. 115B is a diagram showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error, which are conditions for generating a door opening error. The door open error is in the generated state when at least one of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error is in the generated state, and is in the released state when both the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error are in the released state. It is an error.

<Error notification / other examples>
The above-mentioned magnetic (magnet) detection errors include other errors (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, switch disconnection error (error related to connector disconnection or disconnection of the device controlled by the main control unit), impact abnormality error, etc. The error may have a higher priority than the payout control communication error, the switch level error, the winning rate error, the door opening error, and the upper plate full tank error), but the priorities may be the same.

Further, for example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error and a low priority error (for example, a magnetic field detection error) occur at the same time, if the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error satisfies the output condition first, the magnetic field (radio wave) ) After executing the operation for the detection error, the operation for the magnetic (magnet) detection error may be executed. In that case, all the devices (decorative symbol display device) in which the notification by the decorative symbol display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 are notified from the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error to the magnetic (magnet) detection error. 208, lamps 418, 532, 542, speakers 120, etc.) may be configured to switch (overwrite data), with only one or more devices (eg, speaker 120) being overwritten and others. One or more devices may continue to notify for magnetic field (radio) detection errors.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode>
Next, a specific example of the notification mode of the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100.

The liquid crystal display shown in FIG. 116 indicates an error display by a display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example), and displays the character display described in "". Here, the error display by the display means is displayed until the error is cleared, and is hidden when the error is cleared. However, even after the error is cleared, it is displayed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds). ) It may be configured to be displayed, or it may be configured to be hidden after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the error even if the error has not been cleared. The display by the display means is not limited to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208, and may be an error display by lighting a segment or various lamps, a light emission display by a light guide plate, or a display by a POV display.

The sound effect shown in FIG. 116 may be a notification by a sound output means (speaker 120 in this example), and the sound in "" is repeatedly output by voice. Here, the voice notification is configured to be repeatedly output until the error is cleared, but a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the error occurred even if the error was not cleared. Then, it may be configured so that the sound is not output, or it may be configured so that the sound is output for a certain period (for example, 15 seconds) after the error is cleared.

The error lighting LED shown in FIG. 116 is an LED provided on the front side (position visible to the player) of the front frame door 106, and is configured to light only when an error related to payout occurs. However, it may be configured to light up part or all of various errors related to power supply, main control, and sub-control (sub-control), or it may be configured not to light up partly or all. Good. Further, in the warning related to the sub control (in this example, the impact warning and the striking method warning), the error lighting LED is configured not to be turned on, but it may be turned on. The error lighting LED may be in a constantly lit state, or may be turned off when an error occurs to notify that an error has occurred. The payout lighting LED shown in FIG. 116 is an LED provided on the front side (position visible to the player) of the front frame door 106, and is lit during the payout period by the payout device 152. , The light is turned off during the period when the payout device 152 is not paying out. Further, the payout lighting LED is turned on even when a part of the payout error (in this example, the payout number shortage error) occurs, but it may be turned on only during the payout period by the payout device 152. It may be configured to light up when an error related to payout occurs. The decorative LED shown in FIG. 116 is a game board 200 or a frame (in this example, a frame lamp 122 of the front frame door 106.
It is a lamp provided in the main body 104 (inner frame) and / or the outer frame 102 may or may not be provided with a decorative LED), and can be adapted to various effects. To produce light emission. Further, the decorative LED shown in FIG. 116 may stop the light emitting effect and light up in a light emitting pattern for the error even if the light emitting effect is performed when an error occurs. (As an example at the time of recovery, the light emission effect may be advanced in another layer even during an error, and the light emission effect at the time of recovery from the error may be restored when the error is recovered. It may be configured not to perform the light emitting effect until the timing when it is easy to recover (for example, at the start of a new light emitting effect), or it may be configured to recover from the effect data at the time when the error occurs. (Good) Here, the error notification by turning on various LEDs is configured to turn on or blink until the error is cleared, and then turn off when the error is cleared, but even after the error is cleared. It may be configured to light or blink for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), or it may be configured to turn off after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the error occurred even if the error was not cleared. You may be.

The errors that can be detected by the pachinko machine 100 in this example are (1) an error related to payout (payout control unit 600), (2) an error related to a power supply (power supply control unit 660), and (3) a main control (main control unit 300). It can be roughly classified into four types: an error related to the above, and (4) a warning related to the sub control (first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500). Each will be described below.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / error related to payout>
First, the error related to the payout will be described. The "errors related to payout (payout control unit 600)" in this example include a lower tray full tank error (hereinafter, also referred to as a dish full tank error), a glass frame opening error, a payout number shortage error, a payout excess error, and an illegal payout error. Number of payouts Switch error, main control communication error, CR unit non-connection error, CR unit communication error, door open error. Here, the payout error display 7-segment LED is provided on the payout control board (payout board 170) and is visible (transparent or highly transparent) only when the main body 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102. (Visible via the payout substrate case 172 made of resin).

In this example, when a bottom pan full tank error occurs, the number "2" is added to the light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). By displaying, notification is performed by the light emitting means, notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, the display of characters indicating that the lower saucer full tank error has occurred), and the sound output means. (In this example, the speaker 120) notifies (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a lower saucer full tank error has occurred) is performed. In this example, in the pachinko machine 100 having the upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128, when the lower plate 128 is full, a case where a lower plate full tank error occurs is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having only the upper plate 126 (one storage plate), this error (dish full tank error) may occur when the upper plate 126 is full. ..

When a glass frame opening error occurs, the number "1" is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed to notify the user by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp in this example)) (in this example, the decorative LED (decorative LED). Blinking of the frame lamp and board lamp), notification by the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (in this example, a display indicating that a glass frame opening error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example). Then, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the glass frame opening error has occurred) is performed.

When a door opening error occurs, the number "1" is added to the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). By displaying, notification is performed by the first light emitting means, and notification by the second light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) in this example) (in this example, decorative LED (frame)). Blinking of lamps and panel lamps), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (in this example, a display indicating that a door opening error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example, a display indicating that a door opening error has occurred). Notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a door opening error has occurred) is performed.

Further, the notification of the door opening error may be the notification of the glass frame opening error, and the notification mode of a part of the glass frame opening error and the inner frame opening error (for example, notification by the display means) is different. , Other notifications may be the same, or all notification modes may be different. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the payout of the game ball may be interrupted, and when the inner frame is opened, the payout of the game ball may be continued.

When an error of insufficient number of payouts occurs, the number "3" is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed to notify the user by the first light emitting means and the third light emitting means (in this example, the LED for payout lighting) (in this example, the LED for payout lighting is lit). The mode of notification of other error notifications related to payout, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) during the error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 116.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / error related to power supply>
Next, an error related to the power supply will be described. Examples of the "error related to the power supply (power supply control unit 660)" include a blown fuse 1, a blown fuse 2, and a blown fuse 3. In this example, when an error related to the power supply occurs, the error notification is not performed. The cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) during the error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 116. Although the error related to the power supply is not notified in this example, it may be notified by a display means, a sound output means, or various LEDs. Further, the power supply status confirmation LED may be provided on the power supply board. Here, the power status confirmation LED is always lit from the power on and may be configured to be turned off when an error occurs, or conversely when the power is turned off and an error occurs. It may be configured to be lit.

<Error notification / Specific example of notification mode / Error related to main control, etc.>
Next, errors related to main control and the like will be described. The "errors related to the main control (main control unit 300)" in this example include magnetic (magnet) detection error, external clock error, magnetic field (radio) detection error, switch level error, switch disconnection error, and impact error. Examples include an error, a winning rate abnormal error, a large winning opening winning excess error, a large winning opening excessive discharge error, and a solenoid abnormal error (large winning opening abnormal error).

In this example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs, it is notified by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp in this example)) (decorative LED (frame lamp in this example). Blinking of the panel lamp), notification by the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (in this example). In this example, the speaker 120) notifies (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred) is performed.

When a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs, a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) is used to notify (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel)). Blinking of the lamp), notification by the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (in this example). Then, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound effect sound indicating that the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred) is performed. If the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically cleared after 30 seconds have passed.

In addition, when an impact abnormality error occurs, a notification is provided by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) in this example) (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) in this example). Blinking), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that an impact abnormality error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (speaker 120 in this example). Notify (in this example, a sound effect is output to the effect that an impact abnormality error has occurred). If the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically cleared after 30 seconds have passed.

In addition, when a large winning opening winning excess error occurs, a notification is provided by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board). Blinking of the lamp), notification by the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a large winning opening winning excess error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (in this example). Then, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound of the sound effect indicating that the large winning opening winning excess error has occurred) is performed.

In addition, when a large winning opening excess discharge error occurs, the error notification is not performed. Note that the error notification (light emitting means (in this example, the decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) is used for notification (in this example, the decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp) blinks) and the display means (in this example). In this example, the notification by the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, the display of the character indicating that the large winning opening emission excess error has occurred) and the notification by the sound output means (speaker 120 in this example) (this example). Then, a sound effect to the effect that an excess emission error of the large winning opening has occurred)) may be performed.

In addition, when a solenoid abnormality error (large winning opening abnormality error) occurs, notification by light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp in this example)) (decorative LED (in this example) Blinking of frame lamps and board lamps), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (book). In the example, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the solenoid abnormality error has occurred) is performed. If the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically cleared after 30 seconds have passed.

In addition, the winning rate abnormal error includes the general winning opening (general winning opening 226 in this example), the starting opening 2 (in this example, the second special drawing starting opening 232), and the large winning opening (variable winning opening in this example). Although it is configured to perform the same error notification for 234), different error notification may be performed depending on the winning opening in which the error occurs. In addition, as another error corresponding to the winning rate error, there is an abnormal winning error. An abnormal winning error is a target winning opening (for example, general winning opening 226, second special figure starting opening 232, variable winning opening 234, etc.) under certain specific conditions (for example, when N balls are launched, during a big hit). Other than this, it is an error that occurs when a specific number or more of prizes are detected in the electric support (other than during the high accuracy state of the normal figure). When an abnormal winning error occurs, the state, notification, and measures of the gaming machine may be the same as those for the winning rate abnormal error.

The error related to the main control or the like may include a door opening error. In that case, when a door opening error occurs, a notification is provided by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp in this example)) (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) in this example). (Blinking), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (indication that a door opening error has occurred in this example), and notification by sound output means (speaker 120 in this example). (In this example, a sound effect is output to the effect that a door opening error has occurred). In addition, the notification mode of other error notifications related to the main control and the like, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) during the error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 116.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / Warning / error related to sub-control>
Next, warnings and errors related to sub-control will be described. Examples of the "warning / error related to the sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500)" include an impact warning, a striking method warning, and an effect movable means error. In this example, when an impact warning occurs, a display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) notifies (in this example, a character indicating that an impact warning has occurred) is performed, but the light emitting means. Will not be notified by.

In addition, when a hitting warning occurs, a notification by a display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (in this example, a character indicating that a hitting warning has occurred) and a sound output means (in this example) In this example, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound effect of the hitting warning has occurred) is performed, but the notification by the light emitting means is not performed.

The effect movable means error means that when the power is turned on, various effect movable means (in this example, the effect movable body 224, the shielding means 246, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the Senryobako). The effect movable means provided on the game board such as the accessory 224H (in this example, the front frame door 106. It may be provided on the main body 104 or the outer frame 102). The effect movable means is provided on the frame. If so, it is determined that there was an abnormality when the initial operation of the frame is included, but it is not necessary to include the effect movable means, and the frame is not provided with the effect movable means). This is an error that occurs in some cases. The abnormality referred to here indicates a case where the initial operation is not performed normally. For example, the sensor at the initial position of each effect movable means (ON when it is at the initial position) is in the OFF state. It may indicate the case where it does not turn ON even if the retry operation is performed one or more times, or the case where it is determined that the sensor continues to be ON. Further, the initial operation may be composed of all or any one or two operations of the home position return operation, the sensor check operation, and the full stroke operation. Here, the origin return operation is an operation of confirming the state of the sensor at the initial position and returning only the effect movable means in which the sensor at the initial position is OFF (not at the initial position) to the initial position. Further, the sensor check operation is an operation for confirming a failure of the sensor, and is an operation for performing the minimum operation for switching the sensor from ON to OFF. Further, the full stroke operation is an operation of moving to the maximum position where the effect movable means can operate and returning to the initial position. The origin return operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. (For example, the effect movable means that is not at the origin position is returned to the initial position, and the full stroke operation is performed as it is.) Further, the sensor check operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. Further, after the origin return operation is performed for all the effect movable means, the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation may be performed in a predetermined order. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C, and the effect movable body B is not in the initial position, the origin of the effect movable bodies A to C is After the return operation is performed (appearingly, the effect movable body B is operated), the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C. Further, it may be configured to perform the initial operation for the other effect movable means after the effect movable means that is not at the origin position is performed in the initial operation. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C, and the sensor at the initial position of the effect movable body B is OFF, the initial operation of the effect movable body B is started. The operation is performed, and then the initial operation of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body C is performed.) When it is determined that the plurality of effect movable means are not in the initial positions, the effect movable means having the highest priority is initially performed. It may be configured so that an operation (initial operation including origin return operation or origin return operation) is performed.

In addition, the effect movable means error is caused by the case where the connector of the effect movable means is not connected correctly, the harness of the effect movable means is broken or the connector is damaged, and the effect movable means has various circuits (for example, drive circuit 422). This is an error that occurs even when the connector is not connected normally. In addition, "errors related to poor connection (wiring failure) of the effect movable means" and "errors that occur when it is determined that there is an abnormality when the initial operation of various effect movable means is performed when the power is turned on" are separate errors. It may be notified separately.

Further, the effect movable means error is an error that may be displayed during the display of the returning display, which will be described later, but may be configured so as not to be displayed during the display of the returning display.

Note that the error related to the sub control may be displayed in the same display mode (display area, font size, color, image shape, display position, etc.) as the error related to the main control or payout, and may be displayed in a different display mode. An error message may be displayed with. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the sub control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the main control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the payout control, but may be displayed in the same display mode.

Further, due to an error related to sub-control (in this example, an error of the effect movable means), in addition to the error display by the display means, even if the decorative LED provided on the frame or the game board 200 is configured to light or blink. Alternatively, the sound output means may be configured to notify the error, or both may be performed.

Further, even if the error notification related to the sub liquid crystal is configured so that a part or all of the error notification is terminated by the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) (chance button)) by the player. Good. (When a part of the error notification is finished, for example, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated while the effect movable means error is occurring, the error display is displayed as it is, but the error notification by the sound output means is performed. Is finished, the blinking display by the decorative LED of the game board is finished, a part of the decorative LED of the frame is turned off, the blinking by the other part continues as it is, etc. By operating the operation means in this way, It is conceivable that the error notification of the effect means A continues, the error notification of the effect means B ends, a part of the effect means C ends, and the other part continues as it is. The effect means A to C output sound. Means, display means, decorative LEDs, etc.)
When the liquid crystal loading display is displayed when the power is turned on, the error display may not be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, or may be displayed. Here, the liquid crystal loading display is a display indicating a state in which the data stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is being read. When the reading of the data stored in the RON506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is completed, the symbol stop display (symbol stop display displayed between the demo screen or the symbol fluctuation display) or the returning display (preparing display) is displayed. To. The returning display is a display displayed when the game control is restored during a symbol change or a big hit, and if the symbol is changing, until the symbol stops (until the special symbol display confirmation timer reaches 0). If it is a big hit, it is displayed until the big hit ends (until the hit end display timer becomes 0). It should be noted that the display may be configured to return from the resetting display to the symbol variation display at a specific timing during the symbol variation (for example, the start of the super reach effect or the temporary stop display of the three decorative symbols). Further, various jackpot displays may be displayed from the returning display at a specific timing during the jackpot (for example, the start or end of a specific round, the start or end of the jackpot start effect, the start or end of the jackpot end display). Here, during the display of the returning display, all or part of the above-mentioned error display may be displayed, but all or part of the other error display is not displayed. You may. Further, although all the above-mentioned error displays are not displayed during the display of the liquid crystal loading display, some or all of the error displays may be displayed during the display of the liquid crystal loading display. ..

The change effect display may be a change notice display.

When the display mode of the hold icon is selected as the icon A by the player, the icon A is forcibly changed to the icons B to G that can be selected by the player when the hold look-ahead notice is started. Or, when the hold look-ahead notice is started, the icon A may change to the form of an icon that the player cannot select.

In addition, a plurality of operation means related to the effect may be provided. Here, when the operating means A (for example, the chance button 136) and the operating means B (lever) are provided, an image prompting the operation of the operating means A (or an image showing the appearance of the operating means A or an “operating means” is provided. Character display such as "press A". Hereinafter, when "operation means image A") is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the operation means B (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means B or "" Character display such as "press operation means B". Hereinafter, "operation means image B") may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than when it is displayed. The image relating to the operating means in which the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed may be reversed, and the ease with which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed may not change. Here, the auto button function works for the operation means A, but the auto button function does not need to work for the operation means B, and the operation means for which the auto button function works may be reversed. The function may work, and the auto button function may not work for both operating means. Further, the display of the operation means image B may be configured so that the change of the display mode of the navigation character is more successful than the case where the operation means image A is displayed, but the opposite may be true. , The success level of the change in the display mode of the navigation character may not differ depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, they may be the same.) Further, when the operation means image B is displayed, the display mode of the navigation character changes to a display mode in which the jackpot expectation is higher than when the operation means image A is displayed. It may be configured to be easy, but it may be reversed, and it may be configured so that the display mode in which the navigation character is easily changed does not differ depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, they may be the same.) Further, the frequency at which the operation means image A is displayed is higher than the frequency at which the operation means image B is displayed, but it may be reversed or the same. .. In addition, an effect (promotion effect or demotion effect) in which the operation means image A is changed to the operation means image B may be performed. Here, the period during which the operation means image A is promoted to the operation means image B may be outside the valid period of the operation valid period of the operation means A and before the operation valid period of the operation means B is started. It may be outside the period of the operation valid period of A and during the period of the operation valid period of the operation means B, during the period of the operation valid period of the operation means A and outside the valid period of the operation valid period of the operation means B. It may be during the operation valid period of the operation means A and during the operation valid period of the operation means B. The same applies to the case where the operation means image B is changed to the operation means image A. In the above description, two operating means, the operating means A and the operating means B, have been described as an example, but the same applies to three or more operating means.

In addition, the effects that can be selected by the player are the special figure start port, the normal figure start port, the general prize opening and / or the effect gate (even if the player enters the gate and the sensor detects it, the prize ball is not performed and only the effect is produced. It may increase depending on the points obtained by passing through the gate). Here, the number of points obtained by passing and the effect obtained may be in a one-to-one relationship, and when the points obtained by passing become specific points, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 208. The "display (gacha effect) for performing an effect of drawing the effect to be acquired from now on" may be performed, and the effect won by the effect lottery by the first sub-control unit 400 may be acquired.

When the player operates the operating means (for example, the chance button 136),
The display and non-display of the navigation character may be switchable. It may be possible to switch the display / non-display of the navigation character at all times, or it may be possible only while the navigation character is being displayed, until a certain period of time elapses from the start of the fluctuation of the symbol (for example, one or more, or It may be possible (for example, all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped), and it may be configured so that the display / non-display of the navigation character cannot be switched during the execution of the super reach effect, and the super reach effect is being executed. It may be configured so that the display / non-display of the navigation character can be switched, and the display / non-display may be switched only when the symbol is stopped (when the special figure is stopped).

The example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (pachinko machine) has been described in detail above, but the game console of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) can be used. It can also be applied to the spinning machine (slot machine) used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko machine (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used, and a slot or the like (1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot, Jankyu) is fine. More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is internally determined by an internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, a winning combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, and when a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a specified number of medals are paid out. It may be a reeling game machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are fired into the game area to play a game, and the player is given a predetermined game value based on the fact that the enclosed balls win a prize in the predetermined approach area. It may be an enclosed ball type game table that can be circulated by firing the enclosed ball that has won the prize in the predetermined approach region or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game consoles, and will be described in more detail below with reference to the drawings.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. It is a game table equipped with [208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first icon [for example, the variable icon h0].
The first icon is an icon related to the running symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display] (hereinafter, referred to as “variation icon”).
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default (white) display mode].
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.].
When the variable icon of the second display mode is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the variable icon of the first display mode is displayed [for example, , High expectations for big hits],
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM].
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [for example, FIGS. 77 (1) to 12 (12), etc.].
The second icon is an effect of changing the variable icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 77 (i-9) to (11)]. It is an icon that may be used for
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a lord, a display mode of a copanda].
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow-colored kimono, a display mode of a princess, a display mode of a bancho, a robot. It is an icon that may be displayed in [Display mode].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Here, the variable icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area of the display means, and the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area. .. Further, the variable icon and the second icon may be icons that may be displayed at the same time in the icon display area. That is, the second icon may be an icon that is displayed at the same time as the variable icon in the icon display area during the first period. Further, the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed outside the icon display area. Alternatively, the icon display area may be a movable display area, or may be a display area that may be divided and moved to different positions from each other.

Further, "straddling" means sandwiching a period of stop display of the symbol (fluctuation stop period) in between. Further, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon that temporarily disappears in the middle. Further, the icon may be continuously displayed even while the stop display of the symbol is being displayed, may be an icon that disappears temporarily in the middle, or an icon that continues to disappear while the stop display is being displayed. It may be.

Further, the "icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays" is an "icon that is always displayed and may be erased and then redisplayed". ..

Further, the second icon may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of displays.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only once for the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second icon may be an icon displayed when a certain condition is satisfied. As an example of a certain condition referred to here, there are n or more holds, there is a hold for which a look-ahead notice is being made, customization is being made by the player, and a certain notice (for example, a timer notice, etc.) (Conversation notice, etc.) is displayed, the second icon is a look-ahead notice notice display, the second icon is in stock, and the expectation of a big hit in the running symbol variation display is It is possible to list things such as high prices and winning the advance notice lottery. That is, the above-mentioned certain conditions may be all of the above-listed ones. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of displays is a change effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, grandfather character. Conversation notice including the character display "Navi character changes", fusuma image, fusuma image for wipe production, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIGS. 75 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6), FIG. 76. (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), FIG. 83 (K 1-3-1) to the same figure (K 1-3-4), the meter effect shown in FIG. 91. 89 (2-2-1) to (2-2-3), 100 (ab1) to (b2), 80 (6) to (8), 107 (8). D 9-2-1), etc.], which is an indication that may be used.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the change effect display may be displayed in a state where the second icon is displayed in the third display mode, and the change effect display is a display of the second icon. It is a notice display about the change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

Further, the change effect display may be an icon that may be used for an effect that changes the display mode of the variable icon. Alternatively, conversely, the change effect display may be an icon that is not used for the effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon. In this case, the change effect display is the display of the second icon. It may be an icon used only for the effect of changing the mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon that always changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode when the change effect display is displayed.

Further, the change effect display may be a display that may be displayed even when the second icon is hidden.

Also,
"When the display mode of the second icon does not change even if the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 75 (3-2-1) to (3-2-2), FIG. 83 ( 1-3-1) to the same figure (1-3-3b2), 100 (A4-2), 100 (A6-2)] are also icons.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"Finally, the jackpot symbol mode is displayed when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, as compared with the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. Is easy to confirm [for example, high expectation of big hit],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means "the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, and the second icon is the second icon." It may be "when the display mode does not change to the fourth display mode".

Further, the state in which the second icon is displayed in the third display mode has a final jackpot symbol mode as compared with the state in which the second icon is displayed in the fourth display mode. It may be difficult to confirm the display.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display [for example, FIG. 78 (U 20-1), FIG. 87 (ko b15-1)] about a big hit in the running symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the second icon may be a notice display for a jackpot in the running symbol variation display," means "the notice of the jackpot in the running symbol variation display is the second icon. It may be "done by".

Here, the third display mode may be the default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a notice display mode for a jackpot in the running symbol variation display.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a look-ahead notice [for example, FIG. 83 (ke 5-1) to the same figure (ke 13), FIG. 86 (koa 11)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the second icon may be a notice display of the look-ahead notice" may mean "a look-ahead notice is given by the second icon".

Here, the third display mode may be the default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be the look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon that also functions as the variable icon. That is, in this case, two types of variable icons are displayed by the first icon and the second icon.

Further, when both the variable icon of the second display mode and the icon of the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, the case where both icons are not displayed is more than the case where both icons are not displayed. Finally, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed.

Further, when both the variable icon of the second display mode and the icon of the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, one of the two icons is displayed. It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than when only the icon is displayed.

Further, when one of the variable icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, none of the icons is displayed. It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than in the case.

Further, when both the variable icon of the second display mode and the icon of the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, the case where both icons are not displayed is more than the case where both icons are not displayed. Finally, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed.

Further, the variable icon in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon in the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) are displayed. The state in which the icon is displayed is the variable icon in the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the second display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the fourth display mode). It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than the state in which both of the icons are displayed.

Or conversely, the variable icon in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon in the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) The displayed state is the variation icon of the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the fourth display mode). It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than in the state where both of the second icons are displayed.

Further, the variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and when the variable icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is always confirmed and displayed in the end. You may. Further, the second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the sixth display mode, and when the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed. It may always be confirmed and displayed. Even if the variable icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the second icon may be displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. Good. Further, even if the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the variable icon may be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. Good.

Further, the variable icon may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and the second icon may be displayed in the sixth display mode. In this case, for example, an advantageous jackpot is confirmed (for example, a jackpot with probability variation, a jackpot with a long round is confirmed), a rare reach (for example, a full rotation reach) is likely to appear, or another premier production appears. It may be easy to make a big hit, or it may be easy to make a big hit. Or conversely, it may be difficult to make a big hit. Further, the mode of the operating means may be changed (for example, the button may pop out, rotate, or be recessed, or the built-in lamp may emit light in a rare light emitting mode (for example, a rainbow light emitting mode that changes to seven colors)). .. You can also get the benefits of customizing the production, increase the number of productions you can select during the jackpot game, start a special super reach, and open a special jackpot round (for example, a second attacker opens). Round) may be started.

In addition, the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon may suggest the type of effect (for example, the type of super reach). For example, when the display mode of the variable icon is the lord and the display mode of the second icon is the swordsman, it may be suggested that the swordsman reach where the lord and the swordsman duel. Alternatively, when the display mode of the variable icon is a helmet and the display mode of the second icon is a lord, only when the two icons are displayed, it functions as a notice of the change (normal notice). It may be configured in.

Further, the reliability (expected degree) of the jackpot may differ depending on the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon. For example, the combination of the variable icon in the first display mode, the second icon in the fourth display mode, the variable icon in the second display mode, and the variable icon in the third display mode. The reliability (expectation) of the jackpot may be different from that of the second icon combination.

Also,
"When the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variable icon is the second icon than when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. It is easy to change from one display mode to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the probability that the variable icon of the first display mode changes to the second display mode is such that the variable icon of the first display mode is determined by the second icon of the fourth display mode. The case of changing to the second display mode is more likely than the case where the variable icon of the first display mode is changed to the second display mode by the second icon of the third display mode. It may be expensive.

Here, "than the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means "the variable icon is changed from the first display mode by the second icon of the third display mode". It may be "more than when the effect of changing to the second display mode is performed".

Further, when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variable icon may be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail. Further, when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, the variable icon does not necessarily have to change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It may change.

Further, when the second icon of the sixth display mode is displayed, the variable icon is the fifth, as compared with the case where the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed. It may be easy to change to the display mode of.

As described above, when the display mode of the second icon is changed, the display mode of the variable icon may be easily changed, and the display mode of the variable icon is always changed. May be good.

Further, the variable icon in the easily changeable display mode may differ depending on the display mode of the second icon. Further, the notices that are likely to appear (pseudo continuous notice, timer notice, look-ahead notice) may change depending on the display mode of the second icon.

Also,
"There are cases where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, an example shown in FIG. 81, an example shown in FIGS. 82 (ki 1) to (ki 5), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, by displaying a plurality of the second icons, it may be easy to make a big hit, or the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon may be easily changed.

Further, depending on the combination of the plurality of the second icons (the combination of the second icons in the same display mode or the combination of the second icons in different display modes), it is easy to make a big hit, or the hold icon or the variable icon. The display mode may change easily, or the notices that are likely to appear (pseudo-continuous notices, timer notices, look-ahead notices) may change.

Also,
"The operation means [for example, chance button 136, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate is provided.
The second icon is an icon in which the display mode changes when the operating means is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 82 (1-1) to 82 (7)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, for example, the display mode may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode according to the operation of the operating means.

Further, the second icon is a display mode relating to the operation means, and the display mode may be changed according to the operation of the operation means. The display mode relating to the operation means may be a display mode that imitates the operation means, or a display mode that encourages the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display mode). It may be a display mode relating to the operation validity period of the operation means (more specifically, a display mode of the remaining period of the operation validity period (remaining period display mode)), or a display mode reminiscent of the operation means. It may be a combination of these display modes, or it may be a display mode including at least one of these display modes.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying the meter display, and when the operation of the operation means is accepted according to the state of the meter display and the operation of the operation means is accepted, the second icon The display mode of is may change.

Further, when the operating means is operated in the so-called back button state in which the notification prompting the operation of the operating means is not made even during the operation valid period of the operating means, the display mode of the second icon is displayed. May change.

In addition, the display mode of the second icon may change according to the change in the effect mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon whose display mode can be changed by a customized operation by the player.

Also,
"The third display mode is a display mode selected by the player [for example, character selection of 73 (b)].
The fourth display mode is a display mode that the player has not selected [for example, the display mode of the Bancho shown in FIG. 79 (E4-3)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the third display mode is a display mode that can be selected by the player, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode that the player cannot select, or the game. It may be a display mode that can be selected by a person.

Also,
"When the display mode of the second icon changes without being accompanied by other display effects [for example, FIG. 79 (E1) to FIG. (E3-1), FIG. 82 (K2-1). ) ~ Figure (ku 7)] is an icon,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the second icon may change without being accompanied by an effect of another display" means that "the display mode of the second icon may be changed by the effect of the second icon". May change. "

Also,
"The variable icon is an icon having [for example, FIG. 90 (Su 3) to Fig. (Su 4)] when the display mode changes without being accompanied by an effect by another display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the variable icon may change without being accompanied by an effect of another display" means that "the display mode of the variable icon may change due to the effect of the variable icon". It may be that.

Also,
"The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a third icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, etc.].
The third icon is an icon according to the number of reserved balls (hereinafter, referred to as “holding icon”).
The hold icon has a plurality of types of display modes [for example, icons A to G of the hold display selection in FIG. 63 (b), FIG. 78 (U2), FIG. It is an icon that may be displayed in the default display mode, blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc.
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode, and the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode. You may.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. It is a game table equipped with [208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first icon.
The first icon is an icon related to the hold display [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24, variable icons h0, etc.].
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default (white) display mode].
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.].
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM].
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [for example, FIGS. 77 (1) to 12 (12), etc.].
The second icon is an effect of changing the first icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 77 (I-9) to (11)). Etc.], which is an icon that may be used for
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a lord, a display mode of a copanda].
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow-colored kimono, a display mode of a princess, a display mode of a bancho, a robot. It is an icon that may be displayed in [Display mode].
The second icon is an icon that may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"When the display mode of the second icon changes without being accompanied by other display effects [for example, FIG. 79 (E1) to FIG. (E3-1), FIG. 82 (K2-1). ) ~ Figure (ku 7)] is an icon,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained. Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only once for the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of displays is a change effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, grandfather character. Conversation notice including the character display "Navi character changes", fusuma image, fusuma image for wipe production, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIGS. 75 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6), FIG. 76. (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), FIG. 83 (K 1-3-1) to the same figure (K 1-3-4), the meter effect shown in FIG. 91. 89 (2-2-1) to (2-2-3), 100 (ab1) to (b2), 80 (6) to (8), 107 (8). D 9-2-1), etc.], which is an indication that may be used.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"When the display mode of the second icon does not change even if the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 75 (3-2-1) to (3-2-2), FIG. 83 ( There are also icons from 1-3-1) to the same figure (1-3-3b2, FIG. 100 (A4-2), FIG. 100 (A6-2))].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display [for example, FIG. 78 (U 20-1), FIG. 87 (ko b15-1)] about a big hit in the running symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a look-ahead notice [for example, FIG. 86 (koa11)] in FIGS. 83 (5-1) to 13 (13).
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"There are cases where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, an example shown in FIG. 81, an example shown in FIGS. 82 (ki 1) to (ki 5), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The operation means [for example, chance button 136, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate is provided.
The second icon is an icon in which the display mode changes when the operating means is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 82 (1-1) to 82 (7)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first icon is an icon having [for example, FIGS. 90 (3) to 4] when the display mode changes without being accompanied by an effect by another display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the first icon may change without being accompanied by an effect of another display" means "the display mode of the first icon is given by the notice of the first icon". May change. "

Also,
"The" icon related to the hold display "described above is the" icon of the concept including both the hold icon and the variable icon ".
The hold icon is an icon representing an undigested hold [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24].
The variable icon is an icon [for example, the variable icon h0] representing a held hold that has been digested.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The" icon related to hold display "described above is the" hold icon ".
The hold icon is an icon representing an undigested hold [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The "icon related to the hold display" described above is a "variable icon", and the variable icon may be an icon representing a digested hold [for example, the variable icon h0]. Good.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Effecting means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, second display device. 208S, speaker 120, game board lamp 442, game underframe lamp 452, Senryobako accessory 224H, etc.]
Operation means [for example, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operation means, etc.]
With
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect.
When the operation of the operating means is performed during the first period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect [for example, “Summer vacation is not yet done?” In FIG. 108 (A11). ~ "Response display] may be executed,
In the auto button mode, when the first time [for example, the auto button function activation time (time from FIG. 108 (A6) to immediately before FIG. (A11))] elapses from the start of the first period, the said The first production may be performed,
When the operation means is operated during the second period [for example, the operation valid period (the period from FIG. 108 (A8-1) to FIG. (A14)]] in the non-auto button mode, the second operation means is performed. [For example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode, FIG. 109 (Aa5-).
5-6) to the response display in which the continuous hit meter RHM in the figure (Aa5-5-7) rises] may be executed.
In the auto button mode, even if the second time [for example, the auto button function activation time] elapses from the start of the second period, the second effect is not executed [for example, FIG. 108. Example, the state of the continuous striking meter RHM in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-2) and FIG.
In the auto button mode, if the operation of the operation means is performed from the start of the second period to the elapse of the second time, the second effect is executed. And
The state of the operating means can be changed from one of the first state and the second state [for example, white lighting] to the other state [for example, special color (blue) lighting].
When the state of the operating means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the auto button mode [for example, FIGS. 108 (A8-1) to FIG. In the case of A14), etc.]
A game table characterized by that. "
Was explained.

According to the invention described in this description, it is possible to realize a game table having a characteristic operating means. More specifically, since the state of the operating means may change during the period of the second period in the auto button mode, the operating means is guided to the line of sight to encourage the operation of the operating means. May be possible.

Here, the auto button mode is a mode in which an effect may be performed according to the operation of the operating means even if the operating means is not operated. The non-auto button mode is a state in which the auto button mode is not set.

Even during the auto button mode, the operation of the operation means may be accepted (not invalidated), may or may not be accepted, or may not be accepted at all. The case of accepting and the case of not accepting may be accepted in the production of A and not accepted in the production of B, or may be accepted in the period of A and not accepted in the period of B. Furthermore, the operation of the operation means of A (for example, the chance button 136) is accepted, and the operation of the operation means of B (for example, the operation key unit 137, the second chance button, the lever type operation means, etc.) is not accepted. It is also good.

Further, during the period of the second period, the effect means other than the operation means (for example, display by display means, movable means, light emitting means, etc.) may be configured to change.

Also,
"When the state of the operating means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, in the case of FIG. 110 (Aa8-3)). ] There is
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

By doing so, the state of the operating means may change during the period of the second period in the non-auto button mode, so that the operating means can be guided to the line of sight to encourage the operation of the operating means. You may be able to do it. In addition, regardless of whether or not the auto button mode is set, it is necessary to notice that the second effect is not executed unless the operation means is operated during the second period, and to improve the motivation to operate the operation means. May be possible.

Also,
"At least a part of the first period may overlap with at least a part of the second period [for example, just before FIGS. 108 (A8-1) to (A11), FIG. 109. (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-1)],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Also,
"A period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period in the auto button mode overlap [for example, FIGS. 108 (A8-1) to (A11). In the period up to immediately before, in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-1)], when the operation means is operated, the first effect and the second effect At least one of these effects is executed [for example, FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-3) to FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-4)],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Here, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. May be good.

If the operating means is operated from the start of the first period to the elapse of the first time, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. However, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed.

For example, when two button displays are displayed in the auto button mode, the function of the auto button mode works for one button display, the response display is displayed according to the button operation, and the other button display is auto. The button mode function does not work, and there is a sense of incongruity that you have to operate the buttons yourself, which may improve the interest of the game.

Also,
"When the operation means is operated in a period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period in the non-auto button mode overlap, the first And at least one of the second effects are executed.
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Here, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. May be good.

Also,
"If the operation means is not operated during the period of the first period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect is not executed.
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

The first effect may be executed even if there is no operation until the end of the first period.

Also,
"If the operation means is not operated during the second period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the second effect is not executed.
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

In addition, the second effect may be executed even if there is no operation until the end of the second period.
"The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N (all of them). (Including), 2nd display device 208S, etc.]
The plurality of types of effects are a plurality of types of displays.
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is a response display.
The response display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated.
The first effect is the first response display of the response effects [for example, the response display of "Is summer vacation still?" In FIG. 108 (A11)].
The second effect is a second response display of the response effects [for example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Also,
"A display of one of the plurality of types of displays is an operation display, and is an operation display.
The operation display is a display related to the operation of the operation means.
When the first operation display [for example, the button effect image (button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT) shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1) and the like] is displayed as the operation display. When the operation of the operating means is performed, the first response display may be displayed.
When the operation of the operation means is performed when the second operation display [for example, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 108 (A8-1) or the like] is displayed as the operation display, the first operation display is performed. A second response display may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

The operation display may include an image [for example, button image 136a] showing the appearance of the operation means, or a display prompting the operation of the operation means [for example, remaining time display meters MT, PUSH]. Character display, character display of "press", display of an arrow indicating the operation direction, etc.] may be included.

Also,
"At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect on the running symbol variation display [for example, a notice effect on a jackpot in the symbol variation display (normal notice)].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

It should be noted that both the first effect and the second effect may be the case, only the first effect may be the case, and only the second effect may be the case. You may.

Also,
"At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect on the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is being executed ends [for example, the symbol variation that is started next]. It is a display, a symbol variation display that starts next, or a notice effect (pre-reading notice) about a big hit in the symbol variation display that starts next next.
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

It should be noted that both the first effect and the second effect may be the case, only the first effect may be the case, and only the second effect may be the case. You may.

Also,
"The first period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as" first operation valid period ").
The second period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as "second operation valid period").
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

A meter display showing at least one of the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period [for example, the display of the remaining period meter MT shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1)]. ] May be displayed even during the auto button mode. In addition, the display of the remaining period meter MT may be added to the button hold icon shown in FIG. 108 (A8-1).

Further, the meter display may be a gauge display (bar display that increases or decreases), or a display in which the shade of the display color changes with the passage of time and is grayed out when the remaining period is exhausted, for example. Good.

Alternatively, conversely, the meter indicating the operation validity period may be displayed only in the non-auto button mode and may not be displayed in the auto button mode. For example, in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1) in the auto button mode, the remaining period meter MT is omitted, and conversely, the button shown in FIG. 110 (Aa8-3) in the non-auto button mode. The remaining period meter MT may be added to the hold icon.

Further, regardless of whether or not the auto button mode is set, when the meter indicating the operation validity period is displayed [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 108 to 110] is not set [for example, FIGS. 108 to 108]. There may be a button variable icon or a button hold icon shown in 110].

Also,
"A game table characterized in that the operating means is a means that may perform an effect operation [for example, light emission, vibration, etc.]."
Was also explained.

Further, the first state is a state in which the effect operation is not performed [for example, a light-off state, a white lighting state, and a vibration stop state], and the second state is a state in which the effect operation is performed [for example. , Lighting state, blue lighting state, vibration state].

Further, the first state may be a state in which the operating means is stopped.

Further, even if the effect means is provided with an effect movable means [for example, a vibrator] inside, and the effect operation is an operation [for example, vibration] in which the effect movable means operates. Good.

Further, the second state is a state in which the effect movable means is operating [for example, an advancing state, a retreating state, a vibrating state, a rotating state, and a curing state]. Etc.].

The operating means may be a means provided with a light emitting means.

The light emitting means is a means capable of executing a driving operation such as turning on, blinking, or turning off.
The first state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the driving operation in the first aspect.
The second state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the driving operation in the second mode.
The first aspect and the second aspect may be different aspects.

The first aspect may be a mode in which the light is off, and the second aspect may be a mode in which the light is on.

The first aspect may be a mode in which the light is lit in the first color, and the second aspect may be a mode in which the light is lit in the second color.

The second aspect may be a blinking aspect.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Also,
"The game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Direction means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. 208S, speaker 120, game board lamp 442, game table frame lamp 452, Senryobako accessory 224H, etc.]
The effect means is a means capable of performing at least a plurality of types of effects.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect.
The first effect is an effect selected by the player [for example, (b) effect by each option of character selection in FIG. 63 (b), (c) effect by each option of reservation frame selection, ( e) Production by each option of hold display selection, (f) Production by each option of background display selection, music output production of the song title shown in FIG. 101].
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect by the navigation character YM, a music output effect, a hold frame UI effect, a hold effect, a background effect,].
When the third effect [for example, change notice by the icon I1 of the treasure box, music change notice, wipe effect, background change notice, etc.] is executed during the execution of the first effect, the first effect is described. When changing to the second effect [For example, FIGS. 99 (a3-1) to the same figure (a6-1), FIGS. 102 (a11) to the same figure (a15-1), and FIG. 106. For example, when the background A is selected by the player in FIG. 80 (1), the background change notice (wipe-in and wipe-out of the 襖 image for wipe production) in the figures (6) to (7). ), The background of the look-ahead notice displayed in the figure (8) to the figure (21) changes].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Here, the third effect is one type of effect among the plurality of types of effect, and may be an effect executed by the effect means. Alternatively, the third effect may be an effect that is not executed by the effect means (for example, display means) but is executed by another effect means (for example, sound output means) different from the effect means. ..

Further, the first effect may be a customized effect that can be selected in the demonstration mode in which the symbol variation display is not started for a certain period of time, or an effect that can be selected even during execution of the symbol variation display. May be good. Further, the first effect may be a super reach effect or a round effect during a big hit game, which can be selected by the player.

Further, the third effect may be, for example, an effect of notifying the remaining time until the simultaneous effect such as the island simultaneous effect is started.

As an example of the effect means, display means (for example, liquid crystal display device, dot matrix display device, 7-segment display device, organic EL display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, projector, etc.) , Light emitting means, sound output means, movable means and the like can be listed. Further, as an example, a light guide plate in which light is incident from the side and emits light toward the front, and a POV display capable of displaying a pattern by an afterimage effect can be listed. As the effect means, all of those listed above may be used. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable.

Further, the effect means may be a device that performs a light emission effect, and in this case, a light emission mode (color, lighting pattern, light emission display displayed depending on the light emission color, etc.) may be different depending on the mode. ..

Also,
"The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). ), Second display device 208S, etc.]
The first effect is the first effect display [for example, the effect display by each option of (b) character selection in FIG. 63 (b) or the effect display by each option of (c) holding frame selection, (e). The effect display by each option of the hold display selection, (f) the effect display by each option of the background display selection, the song name shown in FIG. 101 displayed on the song name display unit MN of FIG. 102].
The second effect is the second effect display [for example, the effect display by the navigation character YM, the effect display by the hold frame UI, the song title display unit MN "Disstance" in FIGS. 102 (a 13) to (a 14). , The song title display unit MN "Todoroki DREAM" in FIG. 102 (a 15-1)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the effect means may be a plurality of image display means.

Also,
"The third effect is the third effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, grandfather character" Navi character Conversation notice including the character display "change", image of 襖, image of 襖 for wipe production, character C11 of the chief of Fig. 102 (I11) to Fig. (I15-1)].
The third effect display may be performed by the image display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, at least a part of the third effect display and at least a part of the first effect display may overlap. That is, there may be a case where only a part of the third effect display and a part of the first effect display overlap, or only a part of the third effect display and the first effect display. May overlap with all of the third effect display, or only a part of the first effect display may overlap with all of the third effect display, or may overlap with all of the third effect display. In some cases, all of the first effect displays may overlap. Further, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap with at least a part of the first effect display from the front side (player side), and conversely, the first effect display may overlap. At least a part of the above may overlap with at least a part of the third effect display from the front side (player side).

In addition, the image display device displays a variable display of the decorative symbol, a stop display of the decorative symbol, an icon (hold icon) according to the number of reserved balls, and an icon (variable icon) related to the running symbol variable display. May occur. The third effect display may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variable display of the decorative symbol, or closer to the first effect display than the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the hold icon, or it may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variable icon. It may be done.

Also,
"Even if the third effect is not executed, the first effect may be changed to the second effect [for example, FIGS. 79 (1) to 3-1). FIG. 82 (ku 2-1) to FIG. 82 (ku 7)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operation means provided at a position where the player can operate may be provided, and the first effect may be changed to the second effect when the operation means is operated. ..

Further, the change from the first effect to the second effect may be a change of the effect mode, the first effect corresponds to the effect mode set by the player, and the change of the effect mode is Even if there is a case where the change is made according to the operation of the operation means and a case where the change is made according to the start of execution of the look-ahead notice (entering the look-ahead mode (corresponding to the second effect display)). Good.

Also,
"When the first effect is changed to the second effect due to the execution of the third effect [for example, in the case of FIGS. 99 (a4-1) to (a6-1)". ] Is changed from the first effect to the second effect without executing the third effect [for example, in FIGS. 79 (e2) to (e4-1)). In the end, it is easier to shift to a state that is advantageous to the player [for example, a big hit game state, a big hit game state with a large number of balls, a probability change state, an electric support state].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the configuration may be such that when the third effect is executed, the state always shifts to a state advantageous for the player. Alternatively, conversely, even if the third effect is executed, it may not shift to a state advantageous to the player.
Further, as the advantageous state, if the symbol variation display is being displayed, a big hit game state can be mentioned. Further, it may be in a super reach state or a pseudo continuous production state. On the other hand, as the advantageous state, if the big hit game is being executed, a probabilistic state or an electric support state after the end of the big hit game can be mentioned. Further, the round promotion state may be in which the number of rounds is apparently increased.

Also,
"The operation means [for example, chance button 136, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate is provided.
There is a case where the first effect is selected when the operation means is operated [for example, in the case of FIGS. 66 (37) to (50)].
When the operation means is operated, the third effect may be executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"During the execution of the first effect, even if the third effect is executed, the first effect is not changed to the second effect [for example, FIGS. 75 (3-2-1) to FIG. 3-2-2, FIG. 83 (K 1-3-1) to FIG. (K 1-3-3b2), FIG. 100 (A 4-2), FIG. 100 (A a6-2). If] there is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, when the effect means is a display means, even if the third effect is executed, the first effect display may not be changed to the second effect display, and the effect may not be changed. When the means is a light emitting means, even if the third effect is executed, the first light emitting effect may not be changed to the second light emitting effect, and the effect means may output sound. In the case of means, even if the third effect is executed, the first sound output effect may not be changed to the second sound output effect, and the effect means is a movable means. In some cases, even if the third effect is executed, the first operation effect may not be changed to the second operation effect.

Alternatively, conversely, if the third effect is executed during the execution of the first effect, the first effect may be changed to the second effect without fail.

Also,
"The second effect is one of the effects that can be selected by the player.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Alternatively, on the contrary, the second effect may be an effect that cannot be selected by the player.

Also,
"A sound output means [for example, a speaker 120] capable of outputting music is provided.
The effect means is a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying the music display [for example, the music name display unit MN of FIG. 102 (a 15-1), the same figure (a 16) to the same figure (a 18), etc.].
The music display is a display related to a music output by the sound output means [for example, display of a music title or lyrics].
The first production is the first music display [for example, "Mega Giga Summer"].
The second production is a game table characterized in that it is a second music display [for example, "Todoroki DREAM"]. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first effect is an effect in which the second icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM] is displayed in the third display mode [for example, the default display mode].
The second effect is an effect in which the second icon is displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a white flashing, blue, green, red, golden, or rainbow-colored kimono]. That is
The second icon is an icon that has a case where it is displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [for example, in the case of FIG. 99 (a1) to FIG. 99 (a2)].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "straddling" means sandwiching a period of stop display (fluctuation stop period) of the symbol. Further, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon that temporarily disappears in the middle. Further, the icon may be continuously displayed even while the stop display of the symbol is being displayed, may be an icon that disappears temporarily in the middle, or an icon that continues to disappear while the stop display is being displayed. It may be.

Also,
"The effect means is a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). , Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons.
One type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is the first icon.
One type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is a second icon.
One type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is a third type icon.
The first icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed (hereinafter, referred to as “variation icon”) [for example, variation icon h0].
The second icon is an icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM] that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays.
The third icon is an icon corresponding to the number of reserved balls (hereinafter, referred to as “holding icon”) [for example, holding icon h11].
The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon, and is different from the hold icon.
The variable icon is displayed in the icon display area [for example, the variable icon display area CIS of the hold frame UI having the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS] in the display means. Is an icon that may
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the effect icon display area DIS in the hold frame UI].
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the hold icon display area HIS in the hold frame UI].
The first effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in the first mode [for example, "holding frame D"].
The second effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in the second mode [for example, "holding frame R"].
The first aspect and the second aspect are different.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the icon display area may be an area in which the area icon is displayed, an area in which the hold frame is displayed, or an area in which the user interface (UI) is displayed. It may be. The area icon may be a base icon, a stage icon, a frame icon, or the like. Further, the area icon may be composed of a plurality of icons. Further, the icon display area may be an area including a hold icon display area, a variable icon display area, and a second icon (for example, a navigator icon) display area.

Further, the third effect may be an effect of switching the mode of the icon display area. Further, the third effect may be an effect in which a display overlapping from the front side is displayed in the icon display area.

Also,
"One of the multiple types of production is the fourth production,
The fourth effect is a notice effect [for example, the telop display trp shown in FIG. 94] that the third effect is executed before the third effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The third effect is a notice effect for a big hit in the running symbol variation display [for example, a normal notice effect by the color of the treasure box icon, a big hit confirmation (or a big hit rich) notice by the character C11 of the bancho]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The third effect is the effect of the look-ahead notice [for example, the effect of the look-ahead notice by the color of the treasure box icon].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the above description of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be the variable display of the symbol (more specifically, the special symbol), and the description of the stop display of the decorative symbol is the symbol (more specifically). Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

Subsequently, an example of the effect applicable to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described so far will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 193. As a technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 117 to 193 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 48 and 49 to 116, and vice versa. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 to 116 to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 117 to 193. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

In the example of the effect described below, the notice icon is attached to the display means (for example, any one or two or all of the decorative symbol display devices 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208M). A notice display, an icon for mini game A, an icon for mini game B, a hold icon, a variable icon, and an icon change notice display are displayed. First, these will be explained in order.

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing various notice icons and various notice displays.

In FIG. 117 (a), five types of notice icons are shown. Of these five types of notice icons, four are box-shaped icons, and the remaining one is an operation means type (button type) icon.

There are four types of box-shaped icons, a box icon, a red box icon, a gold box icon, and a rainbow box icon, which are different in color, and two types of modes (aspect a and aspect d) are prepared for each. Aspect a is a display mode in which the box is closed, and aspect d is a display mode in which the box is open.

In the above description and the following description, the type and display mode may differ depending on the difference in color and the display method. For example, the color of the first type and the first display mode is white, and the color of the second type and the second display mode is also white, but the display method of the second type and the second display mode blinks (white). Alternate display with other colors (for example, background color or black). The first type and the first display mode correspond to the default type and the display mode. The color of the third type or the third display mode is blue, the color of the fourth type or the fourth display mode is green, the color of the fifth type or the fifth display mode is red, and the color of the sixth type or the fifth display mode is red. The color of the 6 display modes is gold, and the colors of the 7th type and the 7th display mode are rainbow colors. The various icons and various displays may be provided with the first to seventh types and display modes, and the light emitting means such as various LEDs can emit light in the first display mode to the seventh display mode. There is. Of the first to seventh types and display modes, the larger the number and the display mode (the seventh is the largest), the more advantageous the display mode may be for the player. For example, the larger the number and the display mode, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit, or the easier it is to start a certain effect. In the following description, changing from the nth display mode to the n + 1 display mode may be referred to as one step up or one step promotion. Further, changing from the nth display mode to the n + m display mode may be referred to as raising or promoting the display mode by m steps. Further, a display mode in which the number of n is relatively large may be referred to as an upper display mode, and a display mode in which the number of n is relatively small may be referred to as a lower display mode. Both n and m are natural numbers of 1 or more (the same applies to the following description).

There is only one type of button type icon (button icon), but four types of modes (aspect a, mode b, mode c, mode d) are prepared. Aspect a is a display mode consisting of only a button image imitating the chance button 136. Aspects b and c are display modes in which a remaining time display meter indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is added below the button image. Aspect a is a mode indicating that even if the chance button 136 is operated, it is invalid because there is no remaining time display meter in the aspects b and c. Further, in aspect b, the remaining time display meter is full (display in which the operation valid period remains for the entire period), and in aspect c, the remaining time display meter is displayed as 0 (display in which the operation valid period does not remain at all). ). That is, the aspect b is an aspect before the start of the timekeeping (countdown) of the operation valid period or immediately after the start of the timekeeping. Further, the aspect c is an aspect at the time when the operation valid period elapses without operating the chance button 136, or after the elapse. When the timekeeping of the operation valid period is started, the meter of the third display mode starts to decrease with the passage of time. Aspect d is a display mode of an effect image (here, a smoke image) that hides the button image and the operation validity period display. The button icon may have a plurality of types of different types as in the box-shaped icon. For example, there may be default button icons, red button icons, gold button icons, and rainbow button icons in different colors.

In addition, the types of notice icons and button icons are not limited to colors, and there may be icons with different icon sizes and shapes, and any two or more of a plurality of elements such as icon size, shape, and color may be used. May be combined. For example, No. In addition to the box icon of 1, there may be different types of icons such as a treasure box icon and a Senryobako icon imitating the Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. Also, the higher the reliability, the larger the size of the icon (for example, the gold box icon is larger than the red box icon). Further, the shape of the box may be different between the red box icon and the gold box icon box.

The notice icon may be displayed in a different display position from the display position where the display was first started. That is, it may move from the first position to the second position and be continuously displayed (stocked) in the second position. The second position is the stock display position. In addition, it may be continuously displayed (stocked) without changing the display position. Aspect a is a mode at the start of stock, but is also a mode at the start of display. Aspect d is a mode when the notice icon is used. That is, when the notice icon shown in FIG. 117A is used in the production, the display mode changes to the mode d. The box-shaped icon is used at a predetermined timing and changes to the mode d. The button icon is used when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, and changes to the mode d. However, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button icon always changes from the mode c to the mode d after the operation valid period elapses, but it may or may not change. May be good. Further, when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button icon does not have to change to the mode d. In that case, the button icon may be erased or may continue to be displayed in the mode a, and only the remaining time display meter of the mode b or the mode c is hidden (the peripheral edge portion is the mode a). It may be configured so that the notice display described later is not displayed although the display changes to the mode d. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the aspect c may be displayed once and then the aspect d may be displayed.

The appearance rate and reliability are different for each type of notice icon. The appearance rate is likely to be displayed in the order of description of A, B, C, and D. That is, it means that A is most easily displayed (displayed frequently). Although not shown in FIG. 117 (a), it indicates that E is the most difficult to display (the frequency of display is low). The reliability represents the reliability of the jackpot, and is the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display in which the icon is used (the reliability of the normal notice), or the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display to be read ahead (the reliability of the look-ahead notice). (Reliability). This reliability is likely to be a big hit in the order of description of A, B, C, D, E, and F. That is, it means that the hit is the easiest to hit the jackpot (always hit the jackpot = 100% reliability), and F is the most difficult to hit the jackpot. The reliability represented by the first type and the first display mode described above is F, the reliability represented by the second type and the second display mode is E, and the reliability represented by the third type and the third display mode is D. The reliability represented by the 4th type and the 4th display mode is C, the reliability represented by the 5th type and the 5th display mode is B, and the reliability represented by the 6th type and the 6th display mode is. It becomes A, and the reliability represented by the 7th type and the 7th display mode becomes accurate. The reliability F may be 0% or higher than 0%. If the reliability F is 0%, it cannot be said that a big hit is announced, but in this specification, the announcement may be referred to including the one having a reliability of 0%.

In FIG. 117 (b), 31 types of notice icons are shown. The explanation of these 31 types of notice icons is as described in the outline of the production contents in the figure, but in this description, "must be done" means "may not be done" in the modified example. It may be there. " In addition, the description such as "may be" or "may be" can be read as "must be" in the modified example.

Further, the "VS swordsman reach" described in the "outline of the production content" is the swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 17 and 75, and the "all-group reach" is shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-5-3). It is an unillustrated super reach that develops from. In addition, it may be configured so that the symbol variation display in which the super reach is performed is more likely to be a big hit when the "all-group reach" is performed than in the case where the "VS swordsman reach" is performed. The "Senryobako (role)" becomes the Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 and the like, and the "family crest (role)" becomes the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 14 and the like.

Further, the 31 types of notice icons shown in FIG. 117 (b) may also function as a notice display. The notice display is a display that starts to be displayed when the notice icon is used. For example, the box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 117 (a) may change to the mode d, and a notice display may appear from the inside. In this case, it is not known what kind of notice display will appear until the box-shaped icon changes to the mode d. That is, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display is not defined in advance as a one-to-one relationship or a many-to-one relationship, but is a one-to-many or many-to-many relationship. However, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display may be defined in advance as a one-to-one relationship or a many-to-one relationship. For example, the notice icon of the red box and the notice display of the red change (No. 7) are defined in advance in a one-to-one relationship, and when the notice icon of the red box is displayed, the notice of the red box is always announced thereafter. It may be decided that the icon changes to the mode d and the notice display of the red change appears from the inside, or the notice icon of the red box changes to the mode d and the mode a without changing. It may disappear as it is, and when the mode d is changed, the notice display of the red change may always appear. Also, as a box-shaped icon that is a notice icon, a transparent box-shaped icon that allows you to see the contents is prepared, and you can see that this transparent box-shaped icon contains one or more types of notice displays. You may. If only one type of notice display is included, the player can know in advance the type of notice display that appears when the mode d is changed, but if there are multiple types of notice display, it is necessary to know. I can't. When a plurality of types of notice displays are included, they may be displayed in roulette in a transparent box. Further, there is a possibility that the "notice icon is displayed when the notice icon is used" by the "notice icon in a mode in which it is not known what kind of notice display will appear" such as the box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 117 (a). You may give a notice of "notice display". For example, if the notice icon of the box displays (notices) "super hot" in a balloon or the like, the notice display of "super hot" may always be displayed when the notice icon of the box is used. It may or may not be displayed. In addition, if "super hot" and "?" Are displayed (notice) in a balloon or roulette display by the box notice icon, when the box notice icon is used, "super hot" and "?" One of the notice displays may always be displayed, both may not be displayed, and a notice display different from the one displayed may be displayed. In this way, a plurality of options may be notified in advance by a notice icon (and / or a notice different from the notice icon), and one or more notice displays may be displayed from the notice icons.

When the icon shown in FIG. 117 (b) is a notice icon, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display is defined in advance as a one-to-one relationship, and if the notice icon changes to the mode d, The notice icon functions as a notice display. The difference between the notice icon and the notice display is that the notice icon corresponds to a notice of a certain notice, and the notice display corresponds to a certain notice. That is, the notice icon corresponds to the notice of the notice display.

In the description of the outline of the effect content in FIG. 117 (b), "in the displayed fluctuation" is a description when the icon functions as a notice display, and the icon functions as a notice icon. If so, read as "In the fluctuation in which the notice icon was used". That is, while the notice display is used in the displayed symbol change display, the notice icon may be carried over to the symbol change display started after the displayed symbol change display.

In FIG. 117B, aspects A and B are shown, but only aspect A is present when functioning as a notice display, and aspect A is stocked when functioning as a notice icon. Aspect B is a mode in which the notice icon is used, and a circle mark is added to the mode A. Even if the notice icon is used once, it may not disappear and can be used again. In this case, after changing from the mode A to the mode B, the mode A is returned again, but the notice icon cannot be used during the period displayed in the mode B, and can be used after returning to the mode A. Become. Further, there are notice icons (No. 1, 27 to 31) for which aspect B is not prepared, but these notice icons are icons that disappear when used.

The 31 types of notice icons or notice displays shown in FIG. 117 (b) have different color icons and different color displays, and the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the displayed color, as described in the above display mode. That is, the reliability of the jackpot is higher for the red (fifth display mode) "red change" (No. 8) than for the default color "change" (No. 7) represented by "de". ..

The appearance rate is also shown in FIG. 117 (b), which is the same as the appearance rate described in FIG. 117 (a). In addition, No. Regarding 16 "Notice of high accuracy in XX", the appearance rate differs depending on the contents of XX. For example, the appearance rate of "holding icon change high-accuracy notice" and "notice icon stock high-accuracy notice" is B. In addition, the "notice icon stock high accuracy middle notice" may be displayed only during the execution of the notice icon stock effect, or may be displayed before the notice icon stock effect is started. In addition, the appearance rate of "super hot production high accuracy notice", "timer notice high accuracy notice", and "character movement high accuracy notice" is C. However, the appearance rate may be the same even if the contents of XX are different. This "○○ high accuracy middle notice" is easier to execute when it is displayed than when it is not displayed, but if it is displayed, ○○ may be executed without fail.

In addition, No. 2 "chance" icon and No. If the "red chance" icon of 3 is functioning as a notice display, the reach effect may not occur even if another notice effect gives a notice of "chance", but the "chance" icon or "red chance" When the "chance" is foretold by the icon, the normal reach effect may be configured to always occur. In addition, other notice effects (for example, notice effects that appear frequently such as conversation notices), notice effects that appear more frequently than notices by notice display, and notice effects that are displayed when the symbol variation display is shortened. "Chance" by the "Chance" or "Red Chance" icon, rather than by "Chance" (including indeterminate notices such as "Chance?" Or "Chance !?") It may be configured so that the reach effect (which may be the normal reach effect or the super reach effect) is more likely to occur when the notice is given, or in both cases. There may be no difference and the probability of occurrence may be the same.

The notice icon described with reference to FIG. 117 is an icon that may be displayed as a result of the production of the mini game. A mini game is a kind of production display, and two types of mini games are prepared. As two types of mini-games, a mini-game of Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice (mini-game A) and a mini-game of rock-paper-scissors confrontation notice (mini-game B) are prepared. Each mini-game uses a dedicated icon. The mini-game is automatically started when the start conditions are met, and the result of the mini-game is determined according to the result of the hit / fail judgment and the result of pre-reading.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an icon for a mini game.

FIG. 118 (a) shows four types of mini-game A icons. Each of these four types of mini-game A icons includes an image (box image) of the box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 117 (a). The "box" icon includes a white box image of the first display mode, that is, a white box notice icon. The "red box" icon includes a red box image of the fifth display mode, that is, a notice icon of the red box. The "gold box" icon includes a golden box image of the sixth display mode, that is, a notice icon of the gold box. The "rainbow box" icon includes a rainbow-colored box image of the seventh display mode, that is, a rainbow box notice icon. Of these four types of icons, four modes (aspects a to d) are prepared for each of the remaining three types of icons excluding the "rainbow box" icon, and these four modes are provided for the "rainbow box" icon. Only two of the two aspects (aspect c, aspect d) are provided. Aspects a to c are aspects in which each notice icon is placed on the carpet, and the meter display of the hit point (HP) is shown on the notice icon. In the mini-game A, when the character of Yoshimune attacks the carpet and the attack is effective, this hit point (HP) decreases, and when the HP becomes 0, a treasure (notice icon) can be obtained. In the meter display of the aspect a, the gauge of the third display aspect (blue) is in a full state, and the HP is 100 points. In the meter display of the fourth display mode (green), the gauge of the fourth display mode (green) is in a half state, and the HP is 50 points. In the meter display of the fifth display mode (red), the gauge of the fifth display mode (red) is slightly displayed, and the HP is 10 points. The mode d is a mode displayed after the HP becomes 0, and the meter display disappears as the carpet disappears, each notice icon is displayed, and the notice icon is acquired below the notice icon. This is a mode in which the characters "Get !!" are displayed.

In the mini-game A, four types of mini-game A icons are started to be displayed in any mode. That is, when the display is started in the mode a, the remaining HP at the start of the display (at the time of appearance) is 100/100, and when the display is started in the mode b, the remaining HP at the start of the display is 50. When the display is started in the mode c, the remaining HP at the start of the display is 10/100. Although the appearance rate for each aspect is shown in FIG. 118 (a), the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117 (a). The icon for mini game A of the rainbow box has a small amount of remaining HP from the start of display, and you can always get a treasure (notice icon), but for other icons, you need to get a treasure (notice icon). In some cases, it can be done, and in other cases it cannot be done. In some cases, the icon for the mini-game A of the rainbow box can be acquired as a notice icon during the symbol variation display that is started, or during the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display. In some cases, you can get a notice icon. However, the notice icon may be acquired without fail during the symbol variation display that is started, or may be acquired only during the symbol variation display that is started next.

FIG. 118 (b) shows the relationship between the number of remaining HP points at the start of the symbol variation display and the acquisition probability of the notice icon. The mini-game A icon may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays. That is, there is a case where the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is started is carried over to the symbol variation display that is started. The meter display in the mode when the display of the mini-game A icon is started decreases by 10 points each time an effective attack on the carpet is determined. Therefore, the icon for the mini-game A of the rainbow box can acquire the notice icon once a valid attack is determined.

If the number of remaining HP points is 60 points or more at the time of disclosure of the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is started to display the icon for mini game A, the meter display is in the third display mode (blue). ) Is displayed, and the probability that the notice icon can be acquired during the started symbol change display is 10%. If the number of remaining HP points is 30 points or more and 50 points or less at the start of the symbol variation display, the meter display is displayed in the fourth display mode (green), and a notice icon is acquired during the started symbol variation display. The probability of being able to do this is 50%. If the number of remaining HP points is 10 points or 20 points at the start of the symbol variation display, the meter display is displayed in the fifth display mode (red), and the notice icon is acquired during the started symbol variation display. The probability of being able to do this is 100%.

FIG. 118 (c) shows two types of opponent icons for the mini-game B. One of the two types of opponent icons for the mini-game B is a swordsman's character icon, and the other type is a panda's character icon. The appearance rate of the swordsman character icon is A, and the appearance rate of the panda character icon is B. The alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described with reference to FIG. 117 (a). Therefore, the swordsman character icon is more likely to appear than the panda character icon. In the rock-paper-scissors confrontation notice mini-game B, the icon of a certain character and the icon of these opponents perform a rock-paper-scissors confrontation, and when a certain character wins (when the opponent loses), the notice icon is displayed. It can be acquired, and conversely, if a character is defeated (if the opponent wins), the notice icon cannot be acquired.

In addition, aspects a to f are prepared for each of the opponent's character icons. Aspect a is a mode before the start of the mini-game, or a mode of waiting after the mini-game is started. Aspect b is a mode when a goo is put out in a rock-paper-scissors confrontation, a mode c is a mode when a choki is put out, and a mode d is a mode when a par is put out. Aspect e is a mode when the opponent's character is defeated in a rock-paper-scissors confrontation (when a certain character wins), and a mode f is a mode when the opponent's character wins in a rock-paper-scissors confrontation. (When a character is defeated).

FIG. 118 (d) shows the degree of expectation of acquiring the notice icon in the mini game B. In the above, a certain character is used, but in the mini-game B, the character of the villager, the character of the grandfather, and the character of Yoshimune are used as the character to confront the opponent's character and the character to confront the rock-paper-scissors (character corresponding to the above-mentioned certain character). Characters are prepared. Therefore, there are six types of battle cards shown in FIG. 118 (d), and the degree of expectation for acquisition is determined for each. A means that the acquisition expectation is 100%, B means that it is 80%, C means that it is 60%, D means that it is 40%, and E means that it is 20%. This means that F is 10%, and G is greater than 0% and less than 1%. The panda character icon is less likely to appear as an opponent's character than the swordsman character icon, but the expectation of acquiring the notice icon is higher than the swordsman character icon. In addition, if it becomes a confrontation between Yoshimune and Panda, the notice icon can be acquired with a 100% probability regardless of the type of the notice icon. The notice icon of the rainbow box is selected only when it is a big hit. The “-” display in FIG. 118 (d) indicates that the notice icon of the rainbow box does not appear (acquisition expectation degree 0%).

FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a hold icon and a variable icon.

The hold icon is an icon related to the undigested symbol variation display, the variation icon is an icon related to the digested symbol variation display, and all the icons are icons related to the symbol variation display. Here, "change in XX hold" means "display of change in symbol corresponding to XX hold".

FIG. 119 (a) shows each mode of the hold icon and the variable icon for each type. The explanation of each type of icon is as described in the remarks in the figure. No. 1 is a default mode, and No. 1 is used. 2-No. 7 is a notice mode. That is, if it is a hold icon, it is in the mode of pre-reading notice, and if it is a variable icon, it is in the mode of normal notice. The hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode may be displayed from the start of display (at the time of starting prize), may be displayed by changing at the start of symbol change, or may be displayed by changing depending on the effect during the symbol change display. It may be displayed. The change icon in the normal notice mode may be displayed from the start of display (timing according to the start of symbol change), or may be displayed by changing depending on the effect during the symbol change display.

The hold icon and the variable icon are configured so that they can be changed (ranked up) step by step in the order of default mode> blinking white> blue> green> red> gold> rainbow. For example, if you want to rank up when you are on blue hold, it will change to green hold. The hold icon and the variable icon do not necessarily have to change step by step. For example, in the icon change notice display described later, when the icon mode is successfully changed, the mode to be changed is predetermined regardless of the mode of the icon to be changed (for example, FIG. 119 (b). ) No. 2 to No. 3, No. 5 to No. 6, No. 8 to No. 10). When the change notice by the icon of the default mode itself is given, it is usually ranked up to blinking white, but when the icon of the default mode is changed by the icon change notice, it does not change to blinking white and is put on hold in blue. Rank up. In addition, the icon of the default mode is No. 2-No. 7, No. 14-No. It may change to the icon of 19, the VS display mode of FIG. 129, which will be described later, or the icon display mode to which the character “SP” of FIG. 180, which will be described later, is attached. 2-No. The icon of 7 is NO. 14-No. It does not change to the icon of 19, the VS display mode shown in FIG. 129, or the icon display mode to which the character “SP” shown in FIG. 180, which will be described later, is attached, but it may change. In addition, No. 8 to No. The display mode of 13 is assumed to be displayed in that mode from the time of winning, but icons of other display modes (for example, No. 1 to No. 7 and / or No. 14 to No. 19). It may change from the icon). Also, only the default mode may be variable.

The display mode of the variable icon is determined according to the pass / fail judgment result, but even if the result of the pass / fail judgment is a loss, the display mode is set to a display mode other than the default display mode. The production may be performed. In addition, among the multiple display hold icons, which display mode of the hold icon should be set is determined according to the pre-reading result, but in the case where the pre-reading result is lost. Even if there is, an effect of making the display mode other than the default display mode may be executed. In addition, the display mode may change for a plurality of hold icons.

No. 8 and No. Reference numeral 9 denotes an icon that may be displayed at the start or before the start of the button effect (for example, the button notice effect), or during the button effect. Here, No. The function of (1) and the function of (2) described in the remarks of "Button A" of 8 are supplemented. When the button A icon has the function (1), the display mode of the button A icon is displayed even if the chance button 136 is operated until the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon is started. Is configured so that it does not change from blue to rainbow, and the operation validity period starts after (or immediately after or at the same time) the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon starts, and the operation validity period ends. When the chance button 136 is operated or the operation valid period ends, the display mode of the button A icon is configured to change from blue to rainbow. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, the display mode of the button A icon may not be changed. When the button A icon has the function (2), it is before the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon is started after the button A icon is displayed (that is, before the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon). When the chance button 136 is operated by (design variation display), the display mode of the button A icon is configured to change from blue to rainbow. Here, when the button A icon has the function of (2), the display mode of the button A icon does not change even if the chance button 136 is operated while the symbol is stopped. It may not change, or it may be configured to change without fail. Further, when the button A icon has the function of (2), the operation validity period may be set even during the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon. That is, it may include the same function as the function of (1). , No. Regarding the function of (1) and the function of (2) described in the remarks of "Button B" of No. 9, No. It is the same as the function of (1) and the function of (2) described in the remarks of "Button A" of 8.

No. Reference numeral 10 denotes an icon that may be displayed at the start or before the start of the timer effect (for example, the timer advance notice effect), or during the timer advance notice effect.

No. Reference numeral 11 denotes a start or before the start of the promotion effect of the target hold in FIGS. 156 (Ec1) to (Ec8) and 156 (Ec5-2-1) to (Ec5-2-5), which will be described later. This is an icon that may be displayed during the promotion effect.

No. 12 is displayed at the start or before the start of the roulette hold (N selection hold) effect in FIGS. 151 (A1-2-1) to (A1-2-12) described later, or during the effect. Is an icon. The roulette icon in this example is configured so that the roulette icon itself changes in the mode of stopping at the roulette, but the icon different from the roulette icon always changes in the mode of stopping at the roulette, and the roulette icon itself May change and an icon different from the roulette icon may change.

No. Reference numeral 13 denotes an icon that may be displayed at the start or before the start of the meter effect, or during the meter effect, and the meter decreases until it is consumed if it is a hold icon or disappears if it is a variable icon. If the effect is performed and the meter display becomes 0, it is a success, and some change or something happens. That is, the meter display is a decreasing type. If the meter display does not finally reach 0, both the Echigoya image and the HP meter image are displayed as they are, and the HP meter image shows the final remaining HP. ing. Further, in the case of the hold icon, the meter display may be reduced in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon, and the meter display may become 0. Further, in the case of the hold icon, the effect of reducing the meter may be performed in one or a plurality of symbol fluctuation displays, and there may be a fluctuation in which the effect of reducing the meter is performed and a fluctuation in which the meter is not reduced. Further, even when the icon is displayed as a hold icon, the effect of actually reducing the meter may be performed only in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon. Further, in the above description, the meter display is a type that decreases, but it may be a type that increases. If it is an increasing type, it will be successful if the meter display is full within the valid period.

No. 14-No. Reference numeral 16 denotes an icon displayed in the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice of the mini-game A described with reference to FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b). That is, it is an icon that may be displayed at the start or before the start of the mini-game A, or during the mini-game A. Use this icon to attack the carpet with the notice icon. Aspect a is a standby pose, aspect b is a stance pose, and aspect c is a pose in which an arrow is fired. No. 17-No. Reference numeral 19 denotes a certain icon displayed in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation notice of the mini-game B described with reference to FIGS. 118 (c) and 118 (d) (a character confronting the opponent's character icon shown in FIG. 118 (c). Icon). That is, it is an icon that may be displayed at the start or before the start of the mini-game B, or during the mini-game B. Aspect a is a mode before the start of the mini-game, or a mode of waiting after the mini-game is started. Aspect b is a mode when a goo is put out in a rock-paper-scissors confrontation, a mode c is a mode when a choki is put out, and a mode d is a mode when a par is put out. Aspect e is a mode when the player is defeated in a rock-paper-scissors showdown (when the opponent character wins), and a mode f is a mode when the opponent character wins the rock-paper-scissors showdown (when the opponent character is defeated). Is the embodiment of. In addition, No. 14-No. The 19 icons correspond to blinking white icons.

No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). 14 to No16 are icons dedicated to mini-game A, and No. Since 17 to No19 are icons dedicated to mini-game B, if these dedicated icons appear, the player knows that the mini-game will be started, and these dedicated icons are notices of the mini-game. Also works as.

Further, although the appearance rate and the reliability are also shown in FIG. 119 (a), the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117 (a). The symbol representing the reliability here is also the same as the symbol representing the reliability described with reference to FIG. 117 (a).

In addition to the types shown in FIG. 119 (a), there are other types of hold icons and variable icons.

FIG. 119 (b) shows an icon change notice display. The icon change notice display is a display used for an effect of changing the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. That is, it is a display that appears in a change animation that changes the mode of the icon. It is also a display used for an effect of failing to change the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. That is, it is a display that also appears in an invariant animation in which the mode of the icon fails to change and the mode of the icon does not change. The explanation of each type of icon change notice display is as described in the remarks in the figure.

No. 1-No. Aspect a in each of the 16 displays is a mode at the start of the change animation (a mode at the start of the display of the icon change notice display, which is the default mode), and a mode b is a mode when the icon is changed. In addition, No. 11-No. The mode c in each of the 15 displays is a mode when the mode of the icon is successfully changed, and is a mode that may be displayed by a change animation. On the other hand, No. 11-No. The mode d in each of the 15 displays is a mode when the mode change of the icon fails, and is a mode in which the icon may be displayed in an invariant animation. No. The display of No. 17 is a display of a huge panda displayed in FIGS. 89 (2-2-1) to (2-2-3), and there is no change in mode from the time of appearance to the time of change.

Although the appearance rate of each type of display is shown in FIG. 119 (b), the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117 (a). Further, FIG. 119 (b) also describes the types of icons that change the mode. That is, No. 1-No. Each display of 10 may change the mode of the variable icon or may change the mode of the hold icon. On the other hand, No. 11-No. Each display of 16 changes only the mode of the variable icon, and No. The display of the 17 pandas changes only the mode of the hold icon. In addition, No. 11-No. Each display of 16 may be changed so as to change only the mode of the hold icon, the mode of the variable icon may be changed, or the mode of the hold icon may be changed. May be good. In addition, No. The display of the panda of 17 may be changed so as to change only the mode of the variable icon, the mode of the hold icon may be changed, or the mode of the variable icon may be changed. You may.

In addition, No. 1-No. Each display of the balloon system of No. 3 and No. 4 to No. Each display of the bomber system of 6 and No. 7 to No. Each display of 10 flying boats and No. 12 to No. Each of the 15 Yoshimune-type displays has a different color display. The color difference here is the same if the success probability of the icon mode change, that is, the probability when there is no icon mode change and the probability when there is (icon change rate) differs depending on the displayed color. In some cases. Further, even when the aspect of the icon is changed, the number of icons whose aspect is changed may differ depending on the displayed color. In FIG. 119 (b), the “icon change rate” is shown as the success probability of the icon mode change, and the “probability of the number of changing icons” is also shown as the probability of the number of icons whose mode is changed. For example, No. 4 to No. In each display of the bomber system of 6, the default color display (No. 4) represented by "de" has a higher probability of success in changing the mode of the icon than the other color displays (No. 5 and 6). Is expensive. However, the default color bomber display (No. 4) can raise the display mode of the icon by only one step. That is, the nth display mode is changed to the n + 1th display mode. For example, when changing the mode of the hold icon in the white blinking mode (second display mode), the hold icon in the blue mode (third display mode) is changed to the blue mode (third display mode). When changing the mode, it is changed to the green mode (fourth display mode). However, only when the mode of the hold icon in the default mode (first display mode) is changed, the mode is changed to the blue mode (third display mode). On the other hand, the red (fifth display mode) bomber display (No. 5 "red bomber") is used when the mode is changed regardless of the mode of the hold icon when the bomber display is started. , Uniformly, be sure to change to the same display mode (fifth display mode) as itself. That is, the nth display mode is always changed to the fifth display mode. For example, whether it is the hold icon of the default mode (first display mode) or the hold icon of the blue mode (third display mode), when the mode is changed, the red mode (fifth display) is used. Be sure to change to the mode). In addition, the gold (sixth display mode) bomber display (No. 6 "gold bomber") may also change its mode regardless of the mode of the hold icon when the bomber display is started. , Uniformly, be sure to change to the same display mode (sixth display mode) as itself. That is, the nth display mode is always changed to the sixth display mode. For example, whether it is the hold icon in the default mode (first display mode) or the hold icon in the green mode (fourth display mode), when the mode is changed, the gold mode (sixth display mode) is used. Be sure to change to the mode). In addition, the "red bomber" display (No. 5) has a higher probability of success in changing the aspect of the icon than the "gold bomber" display (No. 6). That is, No. 4 to No.
In the display of the bomber system of No. 6, the higher the display mode, the lower the success probability of the icon mode change, but the symbol variation display corresponding to the changed icon makes it easier to make a big hit. In addition, No. 1-No. The same applies to the display of the balloon system of 3. However, in the bomber system display, in the default color display (No. 4), the success probability of the icon mode change is 100%, and if the default color bomber is displayed, the icon mode will definitely change. To do. Moreover, the default color bomber changes the mode of the two icons with a probability of 5% if two or more icons are displayed at the start of the symbol variation display in which the default color bomber is displayed. For example, the mode of the variable icon and the mode of one hold icon may change, or the mode of the two hold icons may change. In addition, if the number of icons becomes two after the symbol variation display in which the default color bomber is displayed is started, the default color bomber does not change the two icons, but the default color bomber. If the second icon is displayed between the start of the symbol variation display and the display of the bomber in the default color, the two displayed icons may change. There may be. Regarding this note, please refer to No. 7 to No. Display of 10 flying boat systems and / or No. It is also applicable to the display of 17 "pandas". On the other hand, in the balloon system display, in the default color display (No. 1), the success probability of the icon mode change is 30%, and when the icon mode changes, the mode is limited to one icon. Change.

In addition, No. 7 to No. In each display of the 10 flying boats, the success probability of the icon mode change is 100% regardless of the display mode (display color), and if the flying boat is displayed regardless of the color, the icon mode is It will definitely change. Moreover, the default color flying boat (No. 7) has a 50% probability of two if two or more icons are displayed at the start of the symbol variation display in which the default color flying boat is displayed. Change the aspect of the icon. However, even here, the flying boat of the default color can raise the display mode of the icon by only one step. On the other hand, the flying boats (No. 8 to No. 10) other than the default color always change the display mode of one icon to the same display mode as itself. Therefore, No. 7 to No. In the display of the 10 flying boats, the higher the display mode, the easier it is to make a big hit with the symbol variation display corresponding to the changed icon. The timing at which two or more icons are displayed is not limited to the start time of the symbol variation display in which the default color flying boat is displayed, but may be the time when the default color flying boat is displayed. (The same applies below.)

Furthermore, No. 12 to No. In the display of 15 Yoshimune, the success probability of the mode change of the variable icon is 50 in both the default color display (No. 12) represented by "de" and the red display ("Aka Yoshimune" in No. 13). %. It should be noted that the display change target of Yoshimune is limited to the variable icon, and since only one variable icon is displayed, the mode of two or more icons may not be changed. Further, in the gold display (No. 14 "Kaneyoshimune"), the success probability of the mode change of the variable icon is 25%, which is lower than the success probability of the "Akayoshimune" display. However, in the rainbow-colored display (No. 15 "Nijiyoshimune"), the success probability of the mode change of the variable icon is 100%, which is higher than that of the "Kaneyoshimune" display. Also, in the display of Yoshimune, Yoshimune (No. 13 to No. 15) other than the default color changes the display mode of the variable icon to the same display mode as itself.

In the display of the Bancho (No. 16), the success probability of the mode change of the variable icon is 100%, and when the display of the Bancho is displayed, the mode of the variable icon is always raised by one step.

In the display of the panda (No. 17), the success probability of the mode change of the hold icon is 100%, and when the display of the panda is displayed, the mode of the hold icon is always raised by one step. Moreover, if two or more hold icons are displayed at the start of the symbol variation display in which the panda is displayed, there is a 50% probability that the modes of the two hold icons will be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 119 (b), only two icons are changed at the maximum, but three or more icons may be changed, and all displayed items may be changed regardless of the number. The hold icon of, or all the displayed icons may be changed.

Subsequently, the effects in which the various icons and displays described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119 are used will be described with reference to specific examples.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which a notice icon is stocked by winning in the mini game B, a notice display is displayed by using the stock notice icon, and the display mode of the variable icon changes. Is.

In FIG. 120, it is a normal state (non-probability change state and non-electric support state (non-time saving state)), and the subsequent production examples are also production examples in the normal state unless otherwise specified. Further, FIG. 120 shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L out of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, but the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be the decorative symbol display device 208. (The same applies to the following figures.)

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A1), the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on each of the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A1) is all white, but this all white color indicates that the background screen is not shown. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but in the case of a solid white color, it means that the background screen is not shown, as in FIG. 120 (A1).

In FIG. 120 (A2), there is a ball entering the starting port 230 of the special figure 1, and the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, resulting in a total of three. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3".

In FIG. 120 (A3-1), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. The third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by the increase animation in the default display mode, but the third hold represented by the third hold icon h13 is the hold subject to the look-ahead notice. In FIG. 120 (A3-1), both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which have been the default display modes, are shown in FIG. 119 (a). It has changed to the icon of aspect a of the villager type described in 17. Here, the icon of the default display mode has changed to the icon of the villager type mode a, but the display mode of the look-ahead notice (for example, the blue display mode described in No. 3 of FIG. 119 (a)) The icon of the green display mode described in No. 4) may be changed to the icon of the villager type. In this case, the upper display mode (for example, the green display mode of the fourth display mode) is better than the lower display mode (for example, the blue display mode of the third display mode) than the icon of the villager type. It is more likely to be an icon of the grandfather type, and the display mode above (for example, the red display mode of the fifth display mode) is more likely to be an icon of the Yoshimune type. Further, although the third hold icon h13 representing the target hold of the look-ahead notice is the default display mode, the third hold icon h13 may also be changed to an icon of the villager type. Further, only the first hold icon h11 may be changed to the villager type icon, or only the second hold icon h12 may be changed to the villager type icon. That is, the number of icons that change to the villager type icon may be one or a plurality. By changing the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 to the villager type icon, a mini game (specific mini) is displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively. You may foretell that a game (in this example, mini-game B) or an unspecified mini-game (in this example, mini-game A, mini-game B, or other mini-game, etc.) will be played. In addition, the mini-game is played at the same time as or after the start of the symbol variation display (in this example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11) that starts the mini-game B (may be immediately after). The icon to be performed may be configured to change.

In FIG. 120 (A4), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-. "Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left also stops and displays the combination of lost decorative patterns ("Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1"-"Decoration 7").

In FIG. 120 (A5), the hold that was previously the first hold has been digested, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A5), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop display, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started and the first decorative symbol on the upper right is displayed. In the two-hold number display, the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to "2". Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, which has not been displayed so far, the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started, and the effect image EF1 is displayed. Further, in FIG. 120 (A5), the movement animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager's character, which has been displayed in the first stage hs1, starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and has been displayed in the second stage hs2 so far. The second hold icon h12 of the villager's character starts moving toward the first stage hs1, and is the third display mode of the pre-reading notice target hold, which has been displayed in the third stage hs3 so far. The hold icon h13 has started moving toward the second stage hs2. The appearance animation of the opponent icon and the movement animation of the hold icon may be started at the same time, the appearance animation of the opponent icon may be started earlier, or conversely, the movement of the hold icon may be started. The animation may start earlier.

Also in FIG. 120 (A6), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as stopped, but the movement animation of the hold icon is finished, and the variable icon h0 is set as the villager type mode a (standby mode). Icon is displayed. The villager character of the variable icon h0 is executing a standby animation (default animation). In addition, the appearance animation of the opponent icon is finished, the effect image EF1 disappears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and the opponent icon TI is the mode a of the pantograph type shown in FIG. 118 (c). The standby mode) icon is displayed, and the panda character of this opponent icon TI is also executing the standby animation (default animation). Further, on the right side of the opponent icon TI, the appearance area AS, which is the first area, is displayed surrounded by a frame. In this appearance area AS, the character display of "premium" is displayed, and the notice icon YI that can be obtained by winning the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is displayed. That is, the display start position of the notice icon YI is a position in the appearance area AS. From a different point of view, it can be said that the first area is a notice area for notifying the icons that can be acquired in the mini game B. The appearance region AS shown in FIG. 120 (A6) includes the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed. Further, a stock region SS, which is a second region, is provided above the appearance region AS, and is a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 120 (A6). In this example, the appearance region AS and the stock region SS overlap. The appearance region AS and the stock region SS may be configured so as not to overlap. Further, the appearance animation of the opponent icon TI and the movement animation of the hold icon may end at the same time, the appearance animation of the opponent icon TI may end earlier, or conversely, the hold icon may end. The movement animation of may end earlier. Further, the appearance of the opponent icon TI and the appearance of the notice icon YI may be simultaneous, the opponent icon TI may appear first, or conversely, the notice icon YI may appear first. It may appear first.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A7), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is started after that. In mini-game B, the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 and the character of the panda with the opponent icon TI perform a rock-paper-scissors confrontation, and if the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 wins, the notice icon displayed in the appearance area AS. You can get YI. The rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini-game B may be started at the same time as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or may be started when the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. Since the rock-paper-scissors showdown here is a villager vs. a panda and the prize is the notice icon YI of the "box", according to the acquisition expectation shown in Fig. 118 (d), there is a probability of C (60%). Can be acquired. That is, there is a 60% chance that the villagers will win.

In FIG. 120 (A 8-1), a rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is performed by the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 and the character of the panda with the opponent icon TI, and the variable icon h0 is the mode b (goo) of the type of the villager. It has changed to the icon of (mode when it is put out). On the other hand, the opponent icon TI has changed to the icon of the panda type mode c (the mode when the choki is put out). As a result, the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 wins. The first hold icon h11 is an icon of the villager type mode a (standby mode), and the wait animation is executed.

In FIG. 120 (A 9-1), the variable icon h0 changes to the icon of the villager type mode f (the mode when winning), and the opponent icon TI is the panda type mode e (when defeated). The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A9-1) is executing an animation celebrating the victory of the villager character of the variable icon h0. In the first hold icon h11, the standby animation is continued, but when the result of the mini game is obtained, the animation corresponding to the result may be executed. That is, even if the hold icon is changed to the icon of the same character as the variable icon h0, it is executed only for the animation celebrating the victory of the mini game, the animation mourning the defeat, or the animation celebrating the victory of the mini game. You may. Further, even if the hold icon is changed to an icon of a different character instead of the same character as the variable icon h0, the animation according to the result of the mini game may be executed in the same manner.

In FIG. 120 (A10), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started by the victory of the villager character of the variable icon h0. That is, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a) displayed in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI of the "box" of 1 comes out of the appearance area AS, is once displayed large, moves to a certain position (stock position) in the stock area SS, and is displayed at that certain position (stock display). (See FIG. 120 (A11)). In FIG. 120 (A12), the animation celebrating the victory of the villager character with the variable icon h0 is continued, but the defeated opponent icon TI is the icon of the panda type mode a (standby mode). The panda character is performing a standby animation (default animation).

In FIG. 120 (A13), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 6”-“decoration 4”-. "Decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

FIG. 120 (A14) shows the stop display (confirmed display), and the variable icon h0 starts the erase animation while continuing the animation celebrating the victory of the villager's character, and the variable icon h0. The villager's character gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0. FIG. 120 (A15) is also in the stop display (confirmation display), and the variable icon h0 has completely disappeared.

The mini-game B may end at the same time as the end of the variable display of the symbol, may end at the same time as the end of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or end at the same time as the final display of the first decorative symbol. You may.

In FIG. 120 (A16), the hold that was previously the first hold has been digested, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A16), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop display, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started and the first decorative symbol on the upper right is displayed. In the 2 hold number display, the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 to "1". Further, in FIG. 120 (A16), the movement animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager's character, which has been displayed in the first stage hs1, starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and has been displayed in the second stage hs2 so far. In addition, although it is the default display mode, the second hold icon h12 of the look-ahead notice target hold has started moving toward the first stage hs1.

Also in FIG. 120 (A17), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as stopped, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and the variable icon h0 is set as the villager type mode a (standby mode). Icon is displayed. Further, in this example, the opponent who has played first is displayed as it is, and the opponent icon TI becomes the icon of the panda character. Therefore, it becomes a villager vs. a panda. However, the character of the opponent may change for each confrontation (for each symbol variation display). Further, in this example, the battle is performed with the character whose hold icon changes first (the character of the villager), but the character may change each time the hold is exhausted (every time the shift is moved). For example, it may change from a villager to an old man, from an old man to a Yoshimune, from a villager to a Yoshimune, or from an old man to a villager. As explained with reference to FIG. 118 (d), in the confrontation between Yoshimune and the panda, the notice icon can be acquired with a 100% probability regardless of the type of the notice icon. Further, in the appearance region AS shown in FIG. 120 (a 17), the No. The notice icon YI of 2 "red box" has appeared.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A18), the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started in the central region, and the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B has also started. The second rock-paper-scissors showdown is a villager vs. a panda, and the prize is the notice icon YI of the "red box". Therefore, according to the acquisition expectation shown in Fig. 118 (d), the probability of D (40%). Can be obtained at. That is, the probability is lower than the first time, and the villagers have a 40% chance of winning.

In FIG. 120 (A 19-1), a rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is performed by the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 and the character of the panda with the opponent icon TI, and the variable icon h0 is the mode b (goo) of the type of the villager. It has changed to the icon of (mode when it is put out). On the other hand, the opponent icon TI has changed to the icon of the panda type mode d (the mode when the par is put out). As a result, the panda character of the opponent icon TI wins.

In FIG. 120 (A20), the variable icon h0 changes to the icon of the villager type mode e (mode when defeated), and the opponent icon TI is the panda type mode f (mode when winning). ), And on the pedestal hs0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A21), the display mode of the villager's character and the replacement animation of the default display mode are started. .. That is, at the same time that the villager's character, which has been the display mode of the variable icon h0, gradually disappears, the icon of the default display mode gradually appears. In other words, the replacement animation is a change animation of the display mode of the variable icon h0. Further, the opponent icon TI gradually disappears from the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, because he lost the rock-paper-scissors showdown, he could not obtain the notice icon YI of the "red box" displayed in the appearance area AS, and in FIG. 120 (A21), he appeared with a frame surrounding the appearance area AS. The area AS itself gradually fades out to the right edge of the screen, and the notice icon YI of the "red box" gradually disappears from the screen. In FIG. 120 (A22), the variable icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. Absent.

In FIG. 120 (A23), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-. "Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

In FIG. 120 (A24), the look-ahead notice target hold, which has been the first hold so far, has been exhausted, and the symbol change display that becomes the look-ahead target change has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A24), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started variable display, and the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS has a default display mode. Fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. It should be noted that there is no hold icon, and "0" is displayed in both the second hold number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

In FIG. 120 (A25), the conversation notice as a normal notice is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, while the mini-game B was being performed, no other production was performed, but even during the period when the mini-game B was being performed, other productions such as conversation notices were also performed. Good. The conversation notice here is the same as the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 16 (10) to (12). That is, when the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord, in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord, is displayed in the central area. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. On the other hand, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not overlap with the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the notice icon YI is displayed in front. That is, the notice icon YI that was continuously displayed in the stock area overlaps a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side even though it was displayed before the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

Even in the display of the advance notice effect (for example, the effect display of super reach) performed using the full screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the advance notice icon YI is stocked without overlapping with the advance notice display. It may continue to be displayed. Alternatively, conversely, the display of the advance notice effect performed using the full screen may have a period in which it is overlapped and temporarily hidden. For example, if the notice icon YI is used to display the notice effect, the notice icon YI will continue to be displayed in stock without overlapping. Further, even on the user customization screen during the symbol change shown in FIG. 68 (93) or the like, the notice icon YI may be overlapped by the bar display VB for volume adjustment, or conversely, the volume adjustment. It may overlap with the bar display VB for. Further, the notice icon YI may be overlapped by the display related to various errors and the display related to the warning described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116, or conversely, the display related to the error or the display related to the warning may be overlaid. You may wrap it. For example, if an error or warning is of low importance or has a low relationship with fraudulent activity, the notice icon YI will be displayed with priority, and the notice icon YI will continue to be displayed in stock without overlapping. Good.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A26), the conversation notice is updated. In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that encourages the operation of the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of. At the timing shown in FIG. 120 (A26), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative pattern is hidden by the old man's conversation image CI2, but the stock-displayed notice icon YI is displayed in front of the old man's conversation image CI2 and is hidden by the old man's conversation image CI2. It has not been.

Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 120 (A27) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period.

The timing of FIG. 120 (A28) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a stepwise continuation of the effect example shown in FIG. 120, and a diagram showing a modified example of the effect example.

In FIG. 121 (A29) following from FIG. 120 (A28), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, the grandfather's conversation image CI2 has a reach effect from the operation promotion notification image. The text display has changed to "Reach!" To announce that it will start. The notice character display such as "Reach!" May be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation validity period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed even when it is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 121 (A30-1), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol becomes easy to see. There is.

In FIG. 121 (A31-1), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI that was displayed in stock in the reach state is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 121 (A32), when the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is changed to the mode d in which the box is opened, the box is displayed. An animation in which the notice display YH pops out is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). 7 is a red "red change" notice display, and the "red change" notice display is a display for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, or the like is changed in two steps. Before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box opens, an effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattlingly) may be performed. Further, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not actually be opened.

In FIG. 121 (A33), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the red "red change" notice display YH is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 121 (A34), the variation icon change animation using the notice display YH is started. In FIG. 121 (A34), the notice display YH of "red change" is changed to a light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 121 (A35), the ball of light YHb flies toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. In FIG. 121 (A36), the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode until the end of the variable icon change animation and the start of the animation, is the No. It has changed to the blue display mode described in 3. That is, the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed to the display mode of the normal notice.

On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 121 (A37), the display of the normal reach effect is displayed. The variable icon h0 that has changed to the blue display mode continues to be displayed. In FIG. 121 (A38), the normal reach effect is completed, and the “decoration 5”, which is not the “decoration 6”, fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols fluctuates.

In FIG. 121 (A39), the combination of “Decoration 6”-“Decoration 5”-“Decoration 6” is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The variable icon h0, which has changed to the blue display mode, continues to be displayed until the confirmation display is started, and disappears when the confirmation display is started. The timing at which the variable icon h0 disappears may be before the confirmation display.

Subsequently, a modified example of the production example of FIGS. 120 (A1) to 121 (A40) described so far will be described. Hereinafter, the differences from the production examples described so far will be mainly described, and the description may be omitted for the overlapping points.

The first modification is the same up to FIG. 120 (A7), and as shown in FIG. 121 (A8-2-1) instead of FIG. 120 (A8-1), in this first modification , The character of the villager of the variable icon h0 is the mode b when the goo is put out, while the character of the panda of the opponent icon TI is the mode d when the par is put out, and the villager of the variable icon h0. The character loses. In FIG. 121 (A 8-2-2), the variable icon h0 changes to the icon of the villager type mode e (mode at the time of defeat), and the opponent icon TI changes to the panda type mode f (victory). It changes to the icon of (the mode when it is done), and the losing effect (animation that makes you sad that you lost) is performed.

In FIG. 121 (A 8-2-3), in which the first decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is changed to the appearance area due to the loss of the character of the villager of the variable icon h0. Both the villager character with the variable icon h0 and the panda character with the opponent icon TI, which disappeared from the AS, are executing the standby animation (default animation). As a result, the notice icon YI is not displayed in the stock area SS.

In FIG. 121 (A 8-2-4), the symbol variation display ends, the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 120 (A 8-2-5), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped. The character of the villager who is being displayed (confirmed display) and has the variable icon h0 gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0 by the erasing animation. FIG. 121 (A 8-2-6) is also in the stop display (confirmation display), and the variable icon h0 has completely disappeared.

After that, as in FIGS. 119 (A16) to 120 (A19-1), the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation is held, and even in the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation, the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 loses. In FIG. 121 (A 8-2-7), as in FIG. 121 (A 8-2-2), the defeat effect of the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 is performed. In FIG. 121 (A 8-2-8), as in FIG. 120 (A 21), the replacement animation of the display mode of the villager's character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. I will go. In addition, the notice icon YI of the "red box" is gradually disappearing from the screen together with the appearance area AS. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 121 (A 8-2-9), after the symbol variation display is completed and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, in FIG. 121 (A 8-2-10), the look-ahead is read. The symbol variation display, which is the target variation, has started.

The first modification described above is an example in which the mini-game B is a so-called ghost.

Subsequently, a second modification will be described. In FIG. 121 (A22), if the stocked notice icon YI is used, the notice icon YI changes to the mode d (the box is opened), but in this second modification, the chance button 136 is operated. Is involved.

The second modification is the same up to FIG. 121 (A31-1), and FIG. 121 (A31-2-1) shows a state in which the reach effect is started as in FIG. 121 (A31-1). Is. When the reach effect is started, in this second modification, as shown in FIG. 121 (A31-2-2), the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the left side of the stock notice icon YI. The operation promotion notification image here is also an image that encourages the operation of the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and is a button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136 and a remaining time display that represents the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of a meter MT. The timing of FIG. 121 (A31-2-2) is before the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining time display meter MT does not have to be displayed before the start of the operation valid period, and the operation valid period. It may be displayed at the same time as the start of.

The operation validity period is started at the timing of FIG. 121 (A31-2-3), and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 121 (A31-2-4) starts the operation validity period to some extent. It is shown in the display mode when time has passed.

The timing of FIG. 121 (A31-2-5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the fact that the chance button 136 was operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 121 (A31-2-6), the notice icon YI, which was the mode a in which the box is closed, is displayed as a box. It changes to the open display mode d, and an animation (box opening animation) in which the notice display YH pops out from the box is displayed. The following examples are the same as the examples after FIG. 121 (A33).

Here, the operation promotion notification image composed of the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT may be hidden after the remaining time display meter MT becomes 0, or may not be displayed at the time of operating the chance button 136. It may be displayed. Further, the erasing animation of the operation promotion notification image may be started or executed at the same time as the box opening animation, the erasing animation may be started or executed first, or the box opening animation may be started first. It may be executed.

The change of the notice icon YI to the mode d in which the box is opened may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed when the validity period has expired. Further, in the configuration that is executed even when the operation valid period elapses without operating the chance button 136, the box opening animation may be different depending on whether or not the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Good. Alternatively, the box opening animation may be the same animation regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Further, the change of the advance notice icon YI to the aspect d may be executed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a third modification to a sixth modification of the production example of FIGS. 120 (A1) to 121 (A40).

In the third modification, the notice icon YI is not the “box” icon, but the No. 117 (a) shown in FIG. 117 (a). It is the icon of the "button" of 5. The icon of this "button" may be displayed from the beginning in the appearance area AS, may be an icon changed from another icon in the appearance area AS, or may be an icon changed from another icon in the appearance area AS from another icon. It may be a changed icon.

The notice icon YI of the “button” shown in FIG. 122 (A31-3-1) is an icon of aspect a indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid because there is no remaining time display meter. .. That is, it is an aspect of only the button 136a.

In FIG. 122 (A31-3-2), the mode of the notice icon YI of the “button” is changed to the mode b in which the remaining time display meter MT is added. However, the remaining time display meter MT is a full tank display and is before the start of the operation valid period. The remaining time display meter MT may be in a non-display mode.

In FIG. 122 (A 31-3-3), the operation valid period is started, and in FIG. 122 (A 31-3-4), the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced.

The timing of FIG. 122 (A31-3-5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 122 (A31-3-6), the mode of the notice icon YI of the "button" is the display mode of the effect image (smoke image) in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period. In the figure (A31-3-7), the effect image (smoke image) disappears, and a red "red change" notice display appears. The mode change of the notice icon YI after the chance button 136 is operated is the display of animation (animation after operation). The following examples are the same as the examples after FIG. 121 (A33).

The change of the notice icon YI of the "button" to the display mode of the effect image (smoke image) may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may be executed even when the operation validity period has passed without any reason. Further, in the configuration that is executed even when the operation valid period elapses without operating the chance button 136, the animation after the operation may be different depending on whether or not the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Good. Alternatively, the post-operation animation may be the same animation regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Further, the change of the advance notice icon YI to the aspect d may be executed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period.

In the fourth modification, the notice display changes the display mode of the hold icon instead of the variable icon in parallel with the progress of the mini game.

The fourth modified example is the same up to FIG. 120 (A18), and FIG. 122 (A19-2-1) is the same as FIG. 120 (A19-1) in the mini-game B rock-paper-scissors confrontation. The panda character of the opponent icon TI has won. In FIG. 122 (A 19-2-2), the notice icon YI that has been stock-displayed is used while the mini-game B is still continuing. That is, the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is changed to the mode d in which the box is open, and an animation in which the notice display YH pops out from the box is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is a notice display of "change" of the default color of No. 6, is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the hold icon change animation using the notice display YH is started.

In FIG. 122 (A 19-2-3), as in FIG. 120 (A 20), the defeat effect of the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 is performed. Further, in FIG. 122 (A 19-2-3), the notice icon YI used in the middle of the mini game B disappears in the middle of the mini game B, and the default color "change" is caused by the hold icon change animation. As shown in FIG. 121 (A34), the notice display YH of is changed to a light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c, and the light ball YHb is the first hold icon h11 representing the hold of the look-ahead notice target. It flies toward and hits the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 122 (A 19-2-4), while the defeat effect of the villager's character continues in the mini game B, the hold icon change animation ends, and the first hold icon, which was the default display mode until the start of the animation, is displayed. The display mode of h11 is No. 119 (a) in FIG. It has changed to the display mode of blinking white described in 2. That is, the display mode of the hold icon h11 indicating the hold of the look-ahead notice target has changed to the display mode of the look-ahead notice. After that, as in FIG. 120 (A21), the replacement animation of the display mode of the villager's character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. In addition, the notice icon YI of the "red box" is gradually disappearing from the screen together with the appearance area AS. Eventually, the symbol variation display ends, the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and then the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation is started.

In the fifth modification, the notice display changes the combination mode of the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol.

The fifth modification is the same up to FIG. 120 (A18), and FIG. 122 (A19-3-1) is the same as FIG. 120 (A19-1) in the mini-game B rock-paper-scissors confrontation. The panda character of the opponent icon TI has won. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-2), the notice icon YI that has been stock-displayed is used while the mini-game B is still continuing. That is, the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is changed to the mode d in which the box is open, and an animation in which the notice display YH pops out from the box is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is a look-ahead notice display of the "chance eye" of 12, and is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The pre-reading notice display of the "chance eye" here is a display for notifying the occurrence of the pre-reading notice in which the combination of the chance eyes is confirmed and displayed when the first decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed after that.

In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-3), the notice icon YI used disappears, and the notice display YH of the “chance eye” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. As shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-3-4), the notice display YH of the "chance eye" has the right symbol display area 208c for a while after the box of the notice icon YI opens (appears). Is displayed in. On the other hand, since he lost the rock-paper-scissors showdown, the animation of switching between the display mode of the villager's character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. In addition, the notice icon YI of the "red box" is gradually disappearing from the screen together with the appearance area AS. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-5), the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In this example, the chance eye digestion effect is started after the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol becomes low speed fluctuation, but the chance eye digestion effect starts immediately after the notice display YH of "chance eye" appears. May be done. As shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-3-6), after the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol becomes low-speed fluctuation, the notice display YH of the "chance eye" becomes a light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c. Has changed to. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-7), the ball of light YHb flies toward the first decorative symbol that fluctuates at a low speed and hits the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-8), the effect image EF2 is displayed on all three decorative symbols that fluctuate at low speed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-3-9), the effect image EF2 is displayed. , The first decorative pattern, "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5", which is the chance eye, fluctuates. The chances of "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" are "decoration 2"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 6" and "decoration 3"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7". Similar to the chance eye of, the look-ahead target fluctuation (next symbol fluctuation display) is the weak chance eye that is relatively difficult to hit the jackpot, and the strong chance eye that is relatively easy to hit is "decoration 7"-"decoration 1". -"Decoration 1", "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 5"-"Decoration 8", "Decoration 4"-"Decoration 2"-"Decoration 8". In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-10), the effect image EF3 notifying that the chance eyes of "Decoration 1"-"Decoration 3"-"Decoration 5" are stopped and displayed is displayed, and the same figure (A 19-). In 3-11), the chance eyes of "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" are stopped and displayed.

In the sixth modification, No. 117 (b) is shown in FIG. This is an example in which the notice display YH of the “chance” of 2 is combined with the pre-reading notice in which the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol described with reference to FIG. 106.

FIG. 122 (A 19-4-1) shows a state in which the panda character of the opponent icon TI has won in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B. In FIG. 122 (A 19-4-2), the reach effect is started in the first decorative symbol, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Since the player lost the rock-paper-scissors showdown, the display mode of the villager's character changed to the default display mode, and the opponent icon TI disappeared. In addition, the notice icon YI of the "red box" has disappeared along with the appearance area AS. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-3), the notice icon YI is used in the reach state, and the notice display YH of "chance" appears. That is, the notice display YH of "chance" appears after the start of reach, and the notice display YH of "chance" here is a normal notice that increases the reliability of the jackpot in the currently performed symbol variation display. Corresponds to a kind of. The symbol variation display currently being performed is the symbol variation display one time before the symbol variation display of the look-ahead notice target change, and the "chance" notice display YH is different from the symbol change display of the look-ahead notice target change. Corresponds to the normal notice of the symbol variation display. After the "chance" notice display YH is displayed, the used notice icon YI disappears, as shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-4). The notice icon YI may disappear by the erasing animation, or may disappear in an instant without using the erasing animation. Further, in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-5), the notice display YH of "chance" disappears while remaining in the reach state.

Then, in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-6), the pending change symbol HHZ is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The hold change symbol HHZ has a red symbol and a blue symbol, and when the red hold change symbol is temporarily stopped, one of the displayed hold icons (here, the first hold icon h11) is displayed. When the blue hold change symbol is temporarily stopped after being promoted by two steps, the display mode of the hold icon is promoted by one step. In FIG. 122 (A 19-4-6), the blue pending change symbol HHZ is temporarily stopped, and then the pending change animation as shown in FIG. 106 (D17) is started, and the default display mode is used. A certain first hold icon h11 changes to a second display mode (display mode of blinking white). The hold change symbol HHZ is a look-ahead notice regarding the first hold icon h11.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a seventh modification to a tenth modification of the production example of FIGS. 120 (A1) to 121 (A40).

The seventh modification is the same up to FIG. 121 (A30-1), and FIG. 123 (A31-4-1) is a change subject to pre-reading notice as in FIG. 121 (A31-1). Reach production has started with the symbol variation display. In FIG. 123 (A31-4-2), the notice icon YI is used after the start of reach, and the No. in FIG. 117 (b). 2 "Chance" notice display YH appears. The notice display YH of the "chance" that appears here is a normal notice that increases the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol change display that was the change subject to the look-ahead notice. After the notice display YH of "chance" is displayed, the notice icon YI used disappears as shown in FIG. 123 (A31-4-3).

The eighth modification is an example in which one of the hold icons is changed to the opponent icon TI. That is, as shown in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-1), when the hold (third hold) subject to the look-ahead notice is won, the hold icon representing the hold prior to the hold prior to the look-ahead notice target hold is the opponent. It changes to the icon TI. In addition, the hold icon representing the hold before the look-ahead notice target hold also changes for the character fighting with the character of the opponent icon TI (here, the character of the villager). In this eighth modification, the first hold icon h11 is changed to the opponent icon TI. That is, it has changed to an icon of the panda character type. Further, the second hold icon h12 is changed to an icon of the character type of the villager. In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-2), the symbol variation display ends, and in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-3), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the right base of the effect icon display area DIS. The effect image EF1 is displayed on the icon bIr. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-4), the variable icon h0 becomes the opponent icon TI, and the first hold icon h11 becomes the character fighting the character of the opponent icon TI (here, the villager). Character) icon. In addition, an appearance area AS surrounded by a frame appears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and a notice icon YI that can be obtained by winning the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is displayed in the appearance area AS. Has been done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol has started, and the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B has also started. In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-6), a rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is performed by the panda character of the opponent icon TI, which is the variable icon h0, and the villager character of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Villager character wins. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-7), an animation celebrating the victory of the villager character of the first hold icon h11 has been started, and the following figure (A3-) 2
In -8), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS has started. In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-9), the notice icon YI is displayed at the stock position.

In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-10), the mini-game B ends, and in the first stage hs1 of the hold icon display area HIS, the display mode of the villager's character and the replacement animation of the default display mode are started. There is. Further, in the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the replacement animation of the panda character icon and the variable icon of the default display mode is started. Here, each replacement animation may be an animation that returns to the display mode before the change to the villager character or the panda character, or may be an animation that returns to the display mode before the change, or may be different from the display mode before the change. It may be a replacement animation. For example, even if the display mode before the change is the default display mode, it may be replaced with the display mode of the look-ahead notice or the normal notice. In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-11), both the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode. In addition, the notice icon YI remains displayed in stock. This notice icon YI is a notice icon for which the hold that becomes the second hold is the target of the look-ahead notice in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-11), and is used during the execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold. .. However, it may be used in the currently performed symbol variation display, or may be used during execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold, which was the icon of the villager's character.

The ninth modification is the same as the eighth modification halfway. That is, it is the same up to FIG. 123 (A 3-2-7), and FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8b1) is also the same as FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8). In this ninth modification, the notice icon YI that has come out of the appearance area AS is once displayed large, and then moves to the hold icon display area HIS without moving into the stock area SS, and the default display mode until then. Instead of the second hold icon h12 indicating the hold subject to the look-ahead notice, the stock is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS (Fig. 123 (A 3-2-8b2) to the same figure (A 3). See -2-8b3)). It can also be seen that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 has changed to the display mode of the notice icon YI. Further, the notice icon YI that has come out of the appearance area AS may be once moved into the stock area SS and then moved to the hold icon display area HIS. Further, the hold icon display area HIS may also serve as the stock area SS.

In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8b4), the hold is exhausted, and the notice icon YI replaced with the second hold icon h12 becomes the variable icon h0 and is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. ing. In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8b5), the notice icon YI, which is the variable icon h0, is used in the pedestal hs0 and changes to the mode d in which the box is opened. 2 "Chance" notice display YH appears. Since FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8b5) is before the start of reach, the notice display YH of "chance" here indicates that the reach effect of the normal reach or higher is performed in the symbol variation display currently being performed. It will be displayed as a notice.

The notice icon YI is displayed in the appearance area AS or once displayed in the stock area SS, and then moves to the pedestal hs0 and is replaced with the change icon h0 during the symbol change display of the look-ahead notice target pending. Alternatively, the icon may be moved to the hold icon display area HIS to replace the hold icon of the look-ahead notice target hold during the symbol change display or the stop display before the look-ahead notice target hold.

Further, the notice icon YI is used in the state of the hold icon, and the notice display YH of the look-ahead notice may appear. In this case as well, the notice icon YI remains displayed in the appearance area AS, or once displayed in the stock area SS, and then the symbol change display before the look-ahead notice target pending symbol change display is being displayed or stopped. You may move to the hold icon display area HIS and replace the hold icon on hold for the look-ahead notice.

The tenth modification is the same as the eighth modification halfway. That is, it is the same up to FIG. 123 (A 3-2-7), and FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c1) is also the same as FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8). Also in this tenth modification, the notice icon YI that has come out of the appearance area AS is once displayed large, and then moves to the hold icon display area HIS without moving into the stock area SS. Then, in the tenth modification, the notice icon YI is replaced with the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon that played the mini game B. That is, it is replaced with a hold icon different from the hold icon representing the look-ahead notice target hold. In some cases, a plurality of advance notice icons may be acquired, in which case the hold icons may be replaced with the number of acquired icons. That is, one notice icon YI may be replaced with one hold icon. Alternatively, a plurality of notice icons Yi are replaced together with one hold icon, and the plurality of notice icons replaced with the hold icons are indicated by numbers indicating the plurality of numbers, or the hold icon. A plurality of notice icons replaced with may be displayed in a color indicating the plurality of notice icons. Further, the notice icon YI may be replaced with the variable icon h0.

In Fig. 123 (A 3-2-8c3), the characters "I did it" in the animation celebrating the victory of the mini game remain, but the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon has been replaced with the notice icon YI. ing. The panda character of the opponent icon TI, which is the variable icon h0, remains in the aspect e, and the character "done" disappears at the timing of changing to the aspect a. The characters "I did it" may disappear at the same time that the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI, or before the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI. It may have disappeared. For example, it may disappear at the timing of FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c2).

In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c4), the notice icon YI replaced with the first hold icon h11 becomes the variable icon h0 and is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The symbol variation display performed in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c4) is a symbol variation display prior to the target variation of the look-ahead notice. During the execution of this symbol variation display, the animation of stocking the notice icon is started. The variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c4) is the advance notice icon YI, but is not the advance notice icon used in the target variation of the look-ahead advance notice. The animation started here is an animation that stocks the notice icon used in the target change of the look-ahead notice. The variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c4) functions as a stock confirmation icon of the advance notice icon used in the target variation of the look-ahead advance notice.

In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c5), the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed, and the effect image EF4 is displayed to notify that the advance notice icon used in the target variation of the look-ahead advance notice is stocked. In addition, some kind of icon is beginning to be seen faintly behind this effect image EF4. In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c6), the effect image EF4 jumps out from the variable icon h0 and moves to the stock area SS. On the other hand, the variable icon h0 has changed to the default display mode. This default display mode is the display mode when the variable icon h0 is started to be displayed as the hold icon (third hold icon h13). That is, although the display mode has changed in various ways after the start of the display, the display mode has returned to the display mode before the change. In addition, it may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode before the change.

In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c5), the effect image EF4 is displayed as a notice icon YI used in the target variation of the look-ahead notice in the stock area SS.

The notice icon YI displayed as the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c3) may be used before becoming a variable icon. Further, an animation of moving the notice icon YI displayed as the first hold icon h11 to the second hold icon h12 representing the look-ahead notice target hold is performed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the symbol variation in which the notice icon YI is used is performed. The display may be announced. After FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c7), it continues to FIG. 120 (A 22).

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing other modifications of the production example of FIGS. 120 (A1) to 121 (A40).

In the eleventh modification, the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are dedicated to the mini game. This eleventh modification is the same up to FIG. 120 (A2), and in FIG. 124 (A3-3-1), the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS disappears, and the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon The display area DIS is connected. Hereinafter, the area in which the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are connected is collectively referred to as a mini game dedicated area MGS. In the mini-game dedicated area MGS shown in FIG. 124 (A 3-3-1), the appearance area AS, which is the first area, is displayed surrounded by a frame. Further, in the variable icon display area CIS of the mini-game dedicated area MGS, the panda character of the opponent icon TI is displayed in the mode a. Here, the variable icon h0 corresponding to the symbol variation display currently being performed is changed to the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In the back of the appearance area AS, an entrance / exit for characters to enter / exit is provided.

In FIG. 124 (A3-3-2), the symbol variation display is finished, but the panda character of the opponent icon TI continues to be displayed by the standby animation. That is, in this example, when the variable icon h0 changes to the opponent icon TI, it will continue to be displayed as the opponent icon TI even after the corresponding symbol variation display ends. In other words, the panda character icon plays the role of both the variable icon h0 and the opponent icon TI during the symbol variation display, but when the symbol variation display ends, it plays the role of only the opponent icon TI. It will be. The panda character icon plays only the role of the opponent icon TI, and the variable icon h0 may be deleted.

In FIG. 124 (A 3-3-3), the symbol variation display is started, and the first hold icon h11, which is the character icon of the villager displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, is directed toward the mini game dedicated area MGS. Start moving. In FIG. 124 (A 3-3-4), the character icon of the villager, which has been the first hold icon h11 until now, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area CIS in the mini game dedicated area MGS. .. On the other hand, the icon of the panda character, which was a variable icon in the previous symbol variation display, continues to be displayed as the opponent icon TI, and the villager vs. panda rock-paper-scissors confrontation is started (Fig. 124 (A 3-3-5). )). When the rock-paper-scissors showdown starts, the notice icon YI appears in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI may appear at the same time as the start of the rock-paper-scissors showdown, or the notice icon YI may appear before the start of the rock-paper-scissors showdown.

In FIG. 124 (A 3-3-6), the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 wins, and in FIG. 124 (A 3-3-7), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is displayed. It has been started. An animation has also begun to celebrate the victory of the rock-paper-scissors showdown. In FIG. 124 (A 3-3-8), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, and in FIG. 124 (A 3-3-9), the animation celebrating the victory of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation ends. When this animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 124 (A 3-3-10), the icon of the villager's character, which is the variable icon h0, exits from the doorway provided at the back of the appearance area AS, and then the symbol is displayed. The variation display ends (Fig. 124 (A3-3-11)). The villager character icon, which is the variable icon h0, may be exited from the doorway provided at the back of the appearance area AS after the symbol variable display is completed. On the other hand, the icon of the panda character, which is the opponent icon TI, continues to be displayed until all the rock-paper-scissors confrontations are completed. However, it may be replaced with the icon of the swordsman character on the way. The exit timing of the villager's character icon may be the same as the symbol variation display. In addition, if the rock-paper-scissors confrontation continues after this, the icon of the villager's character may not leave and may be stock-displayed in the mini-game dedicated area MGS until all the rock-paper-scissors confrontations are completed. The opponent icon TI and / or the icon of the character whose exit is the variable icon h0 may enter from the doorway. In addition, an animation may be performed in which the opponent icon TI leaves when the mini-game ends.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 124 (A 9-2-1) and FIG. 124 (A 9-2-2), the variable icon h0 is the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). It is the icon of the character of Yoshimune shown in 19, and the opponent icon TI is the icon of the character of the panda. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), the rock-paper-scissors confrontation is won with a 100% probability, and in this example, the notice icon of the “rainbow box” for which the jackpot is confirmed is displayed in the appearance area AS. In FIG. 124 (A 9-2-2), the symbol variation display is completed while the notice icon of the "rainbow box" is displayed in stock. The notice icon of the "rainbow box" has a certain degree of reliability of the jackpot and functions as a look-ahead notice. The notice icon of the "rainbow box" may function as a notice of the change.

In addition, in the box-shaped notice icon, the notice display (item) contained in the box is more advantageous for the player than the "box" in the "red box" (for example, a notice that easily develops into super reach). It is a display or a notice display with high reliability of big hits), and the "gold box" is more advantageous for the player than the "red box". Therefore, only the box-shaped notice icon is displayed, and regardless of whether or not the notice display actually appears depending on the color of the box-shaped notice icon, if the notice display appears, how advantageous the notice is. It is possible to guess in advance whether it is a display. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 117 (a), the reliability of the jackpot is also determined by the color of the box-shaped notice icon, so that the color of the box-shaped notice icon is easy to hit and the game. It shows both the ease of obtaining a notice display that is advantageous to the person. Depending on the display mode of the notice icon, only the ease of obtaining an advantageous notice display may be shown, or only the ease of big hit may be shown.

The modification shown in FIG. 124 (A3-4) is an example in which the hold icon of the look-ahead notice target hold may also be used in the mini game. That is, in FIG. 124 (A3-4), the third hold icon h13 representing the look-ahead notice target hold is also changed to the icon of the villager's character, and participates in the rock-paper-scissors showdown. As a result, if the rock-paper-scissors confrontation is won, the notice display used during the execution of the symbol change display of the pre-reading notice target pending may be acquired. Further, the hold icon representing the hold after the look-ahead notice target hold may be changed to an icon that can participate in the mini game. In this case, if the hold icon of the look-ahead notice target hold changes to a variable animation and a mini-game is played, the mini-game is mini-gamed until the end of the mini-game or until the symbol change display of the look-ahead notice target hold ends. It may be in the form of an icon that can participate in the game, and then may return to the original display mode. Further, after the mini-game (for example, mini-game B) is completed, the icon does not change to a dedicated icon that allows participation in the mini-game (for example, mini-game B), but a new mini-game (of the same type). Even if it may change to a dedicated icon that allows you to participate in a mini-game (eg, mini-game B) or a different type of mini-game (eg, mini-game A). Good.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 124 (A3-5), the hold icon displayed as an icon capable of participating in the mini game is not limited to one type of icon. That is, in FIG. 124 (A3-4), the first hold icon h11 is displayed as an icon of the type of the grandfather's character, and the second hold icon h12 is the No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). It is displayed with icons of 18 villager character types.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 124 (A3-6), the hold icon that is digested first, which is displayed as an icon that can participate in the mini game, is displayed as an icon that can also participate in the mini game. In addition, there is a case where at least a part of the hold icon that is digested later overlaps. That is, in FIG. 124 (A3-6), the first hold icon h11 is the No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). It is displayed with 19 Yoshimune character type icons, the second hold icon h12 is also displayed with the same Yoshimune character type icon, and the hind legs of the Yoshimune character icon, which is the first hold icon h11, are the first. 21 It overlaps with the forefoot of the icon of the Yoshimune character, which is the hold icon h12.

Further, the relationship of this overlap may be reversed, or the hold icon with high reliability of the jackpot may be displayed in the foreground. Further, the displayed hold icon may indicate the degree of expectation of the look-ahead target variation. For example, it may be easier to make a big hit due to the change in the look-ahead target when two holding icons of the Yoshimune character are displayed than when only one is displayed.

In the modified examples shown in FIGS. 124 (A31-5-1) to FIG. 124 (A31-5-3), the cursor CS is used for the notice icon YI displayed in stock. FIG. 124 (A31-5-1) is in the same state as FIG. 121 (A31-1), and FIG. 124 (A31-5-2) is a notice of aspect a in which the box is closed. The display of the cursor CS points to the icon YI. The display of the cursor CS is a display for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used from now on. After FIG. 124 (A 31-5-3), it continues to FIG. 121 (A 33). When the display of the cursor CS points, the notice icon YI may or may not be used. Further, an effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattlingly) may be used in combination with the display of the cursor CS, and further, a second modification example is shown. As shown in FIG. 121 (A31-2-2), the display of the operation promotion notification image may be used in combination.

In FIG. 124 (A31-5-3), the display of the cursor CS disappears, the box opening animation is displayed instead, the display mode changes to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is displayed from inside the box. It's popping out.

In the modified examples shown in FIGS. 124 (A30-2-1) to FIG. 124 (A30-2-4), an effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance is executed. FIG. 124 (A 30-2-1) is in the same state as FIG. 121 (A 30-1), and in FIG. 124 (A 30-2-2), the box icon displayed as the notice icon YI is An animation effect that vibrates rattlingly is being executed. This animation rendition fuels the possibility that the notice icon YI will be used. It should be noted that this animation effect is started before the first temporary stop is performed in the variable display of the first decorative symbol. It may be started at the same time as the first temporary stop, or may be started after the first temporary stop. Further, this animation effect may be started before the reach effect is started, may be started at the same time as the reach effect, or may be started after the reach effect is started. Further, this animation effect may be an animation that is always executed or may not be executed when the box-shaped notice icon is used. In addition, this animation effect may be executed across continuous symbol variation displays. That is, it may be executed even while the symbol variation is stopped, or it may be temporarily stopped while the symbol variation is stopped, and this animation effect may be started when the symbol variation display is restarted. Alternatively, this animation effect does not have to be started and ended within the period of one symbol variation display and not executed across the continuous symbol variation display.

Although it is in the reach state in FIG. 124 (A 30-2-3), the animation production in which the box icon vibrates rattlingly is continued, and during the reach state, this animation production is switched to the box opening animation production. , The notice icon YI shown in FIG. 124 (A30-2-4) has changed to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is popping out from the box. After that, it continues to FIG. 121 (A33).

The effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance may be executed across the reach effect as in this example, or may not be performed across the reach effect. Further, if the effect of notifying in advance that the box will be opened is executed, the box of the notice icon YI may or may not be opened.

In the modified examples shown in FIGS. 124 (A30-3-1) to FIG. 124 (A30-3-4), a modified example of the effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance is executed. In this example, the animation effect in which the box icon vibrates rattlingly indicates whether the timing at which the notice icon YI is used is near or far, depending on the magnitude of the vibration. That is, if the vibration is weak as shown in FIG. 124 (A30-3-2), the timing at which the notice icon YI is used is far, and when the timing at which the notice icon YI is used is near, FIG. It changes to strong vibration as shown in -3-3). In other words, the closer the timing of use, the greater the vibration. In FIG. 124 (A30-3-4), when the vibration is maximized, the box of the notice icon YI opens, and the notice display YH pops out from the inside. After that, it continues to FIG. 121 (A33).

The strength of the vibration may indicate the reliability with which the notice icon YI is used or the advantage of the notice display contained therein. That is, the higher the reliability and the advantage, the larger the vibration may be.

FIG. 124 (A 30-3-4') shows an example in which the box of the notice icon YI did not open even though the vibration was maximized. In this way, in the animation production in which the box icon vibrates rattlingly, a ghost effect may be performed. When the lost decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the notice icon YI disappears.

Next, an example in which a plurality of notice icons are stocked will be described.

FIG. 125 shows an example in which a plurality of notice icons are stocked by winning in the mini game B, and a notice display is displayed and the display mode of the variable icon changes by using the stocked plurality of notice icons. It is a figure shown as a target.

The description here will focus on the differences from the production examples of FIGS. 120 (A1) to 121 (A40) in which only one notice icon is stocked.

In FIG. 125 (I 1-1), as in FIG. 120 (A4), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of the lost decorative symbols in the central region. ("Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1"-"Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols. Both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 125 (I 1-1) are No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). It has changed to the icon of aspect a of the villager type described in 17. Further, the third hold icon h13 representing the hold target of the look-ahead notice is the default display mode.

In FIG. 125 (i2) after the symbol variation display is started, as in FIG. 120 (a7), in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, the mode of the type of pantograph as the opponent icon TI a. Icon is displayed, and further, the notice icon YI of "box" is displayed in the appearance area AS which is the first area. Further, a stock region SS, which is a second region, is provided above the appearance region AS, and is a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 125 (I 1-2). The stock area SS in this example is provided with a first stock position SS1, a second stock position SS2, and a third stock position SS3, and a part of the third stock position SS3 overlaps with a part of the appearance area AS. ing.

In FIG. 125 (I3), as in FIG. 120 (A8-1), the rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation of the mini-game B is performed, and the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 wins. In FIG. 125 (I4), an animation celebrating the victory of the villager character with the variable icon h0 is executed, and in FIG. 125 (I5), it is displayed in the appearance area AS, FIG. 117 (a). No. shown in The notice icon YI of the "box" of 1 is displayed at the first stock position SS1 (see FIG. 125 (i2)) in the stock area SS.

In FIG. 125 (I6), as in FIG. 120 (A15), the symbol variation display has ended, the combination of the lost decorative symbols is being stopped and displayed (confirmed display is in progress), and the variation icon h0 has also disappeared.

In FIG. 125 (I7) after the symbol variation display is started, the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini-game B is started. Further, in the appearance region AS shown in FIG. 125 (i 7), the No. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed. In FIG. 125 (I8), a rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation of mini-game B is performed, and the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 has won the second victory. In FIG. 125 (I 9), an animation celebrating the victory of the villager character with the variable icon h0 is executed, and in FIG. 125 (I 10), it is displayed in the appearance area AS, FIG. 117 (a). No. shown in The notice icon YI of the "box" of 1 comes out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed large. In the following FIG. 125 (I11), the second "box" notice icon YI is displayed at the second stock position SS2 (see FIG. 125 (I2)) in the stock area SS. That is, the newly stocked notice icon YI is displayed below the previously stocked notice icon YI. The distance between the first stock position SS1 and the second stock position SS2 is less than the height of one notice icon. It should be noted that the first stock position SS1 and the second stock position SS2 may not be provided and may be randomly stocked in an empty area. Further, when the first notice icon YI (notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1) is used before the third notice icon YI is stocked (released from the stock area SS). In the case of), the third notice icon YI may be stocked at the first stock position SS1.

In FIG. 125 (I12), as in FIG. 120 (A23), the symbol variation display is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 125 (I13), as in FIG. 120 (A24), the symbol variation display which is the look-ahead target variation is started, and in FIG. 125 (I14-1), as in FIG. 120 (A25), the normal notice is given. Conversation notice as is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 125 (i 14-1), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in the central region. The two notice icons YI in the stock area SS overlap a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side. After the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed, as shown in FIG. 125 (I15), the first notice icon YI stocked earlier (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1) is displayed. The first notice icon YI used is changed to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of "reach" is popping out from the box. The notice display YH of this "reach" also overlaps a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side. The notice display YH of "reach" at this timing is a display for notifying that a reach effect higher than the normal reach will be performed in the symbol variation display currently being performed.

In FIG. 125 (I 16), the conversation notice is updated as in FIG. 120 (A 26). In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 120 (A26), the operation validity period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first notice icon YI, which is a display mode in which the box is opened, has not been erased yet in FIG. 125 (I16), but has been erased in FIG. 125 (I17). The notice display YH of "reach" is still displayed. Even in the figure (i17), the operation validity period has not started. In this way, the first notice icon YI may be deleted before the start of the operation valid period, may be deleted at the same time as the start of the operation valid period, and may be deleted after the operation valid period is started. You may.

Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 125 (I18) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period.

The timing of FIG. 125 (i 19) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing.

In FIG. 125 (I 20), as in FIG. 120 (I 20), in response to the chance button 136 being pressed within the operation valid period, the old man's conversation image CI2 is displayed on the current line from the operation promotion notification image. It has changed to the character display of "Reach!", Which announces that the reach production will start with the symbol variation display. Therefore, the same thing (the reach production will be started with the currently performed symbol variation display) is also announced by a notice different from the notice display YH of "reach" (here, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather). Will be there. Further, when two types of notices are given in this way, one notice may be a notice with higher reliability than the other notice. Alternatively, the occurrence of normal reach may be announced by the notice display YH of "reach" displayed earlier, and the occurrence of super reach may be announced by the conversation notice displayed later. By giving notice in such a time series, it may appear that the production (reach type) is promoted. Alternatively, conversely, the occurrence of super reach may be announced by the notice display YH of "reach" displayed earlier, and the occurrence of normal reach may be announced by the conversation notice displayed later. ) May appear to be demoted. However, since it is a notice about the reach production within the same fluctuation, either one may be better. Further, for example, when the notice display YH gives a notice of "reach" and the conversation notice displays "continuation" for notifying the pseudo-ream effect, the pseudo-ream notice (for example, the pseudo-ream symbol stops) after the reach occurs. ) Occurs, and it is possible to give notice until the pseudo-continuous production is started.

In addition, even if the pseudo-ream notice is given twice by the notice display YH and other notices in one section during the symbol change display (the period from the start of the symbol change to the temporary stop for the pseudo-ream), the pseudo-ream is 1 It may be configured so that the temporary stop is performed only once (that is, the temporary stop is performed once), or the pseudo-ream may be generated (temporary stop occurs) as many times as the number of times the notice is given.

In this way, by combining the notice display YH and the notice by another effect, it is possible to perform a promotion effect or a demotion effect within one symbol variation display. For example, in the pseudo-ream effect, the promotion effect can be performed as the number of pseudo-reams increases. For example, the third display mode may be announced in the first variation of the pseudo-ream number, and the fifth display mode may be announced in the second variation of the pseudo-ream number. In addition, the third display mode may be announced in the second variation of the pseudo-ream number, and further, as a demotion effect, the second display mode may be announced in the second variation of the pseudo-ream number. Good. Further, if it is not a pseudo continuous effect, the third display mode may be first announced and then the fifth display mode may be announced in one symbol variation display, or vice versa. The fifth display mode may be announced first, and then the third display mode may be announced.

In addition, the character display of the notice such as "Reach!" In the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is displayed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. However, it may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136.

In FIG. 125 (I 22), as in FIG. 121 (A 30-1), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are deleted, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol becomes easy to see. There is. The conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the old man may disappear at the same time, the conversation image CI1 of the lord displayed on the back side may disappear first, or the old man displayed on the front side. Conversation image CI2 may disappear first.

In FIG. 125 (i23), as previously announced, the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, in reach, the second stocked notice icon YI is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 125 (i24), the box of the notice icon YI opens, and the notice display YH of "change" pops out from inside. In this example, the notice icon YI is used in the order in which the notice icon YI is stocked, but the notice icon YI may be used regardless of the stock order. For example, the notice icon YI in which the notice display YH with a high advantage appears may be used earlier or later. Further, the one with higher reliability according to the type of the notice icon YI may be used earlier or may be used later. Further, the notice display YH of the "change" that appears here overlaps the temporarily stopped right symbol (here, "decoration 6", and is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap. The notice display YH of "change" overlaps the right pattern from the front side. This is not the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1, but at the second stock position SS2. It is related to the notice display YH released from the stock notice icon Y2.

In FIG. 125 (i25), the notice icon YI used has disappeared, and the notice display YH of "change" is still displayed. In the following FIG. 125 (i26), the variable icon change animation using the notice display YH is started. In FIG. 125 (i26), the notice display YH of "change" changes to a ball of light YHb while overlapping with the temporarily stopped right symbol. In FIG. 125 (i27), the ball of light YHb flies toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. Here, too, the position of the notice icon YI at which the notice display YH is emitted affects the change to a light ball YHb at a position different from the example shown in FIGS. 121 (A34) to (A35), which is different. It is flying toward the fluctuating icon h0 on the trajectory. However, even if the position of the notice icon YI at which the notice display YH is emitted is different, the notice display YH is emitted at the same position (for example, the position of the notice display YH of "change" shown in FIG. 121 (A32)). At that position, it may change to a ball of light YHb and fly toward the variable icon h0 on the same trajectory.

In FIG. 125 (i28), the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode before the start of the animation after the variable icon change animation was completed, was changed to No. 119 (a). It has changed to the display mode of blinking white described in 2. That is, the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed to the display mode of the normal notice. Then, it continues to FIG. 125 (I 16).

In the example shown in FIG. 125, the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed to give a notice that the reach effect will be performed, and the reach effect is actually started, but the reach effect is not started. However, in the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is started, it is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode, and as a result, the symbol variation display in which the notice display YH of "reach" is not displayed is more likely to be displayed. In the symbol variation display in which the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed, it is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a modified example of the production example shown in FIG. 125 and a production example of the mini-game A of the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice.

In the modified example shown in FIGS. 126 (Icon 14-2-1) to FIG. 126 (Icon 14-2-3), the state shown in FIG. 126 (Icon 14-2-1) is shown in FIG. 125 (Icon 14-1). It is the same state as shown in FIG. 126, and in FIG. 126 (I 14-2-2), the display of the cursor CS points to the notice icon YI to be used. Here, the display of the cursor CS points to the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 (see FIG. 125 (i2)). The display of the cursor CS also overlaps with the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side.

In FIG. 126 (I 14-2-3), the display of the cursor CS disappears, and the box of the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 which was pointed to by the display of the cursor CS until then opens, and the box of the box is opened. The notice display YH of "reach" is popping out from inside.

The box of the notice icon YI may be opened by operating the chance button 136. In this case, the operation promotion notification image prompting the operation of the chance button 136 may be displayed, or may not be displayed and may be a back button. Further, the display position of the cursor CS is operated by the up and down keys of the cross key 181a so that the player can select the notice icon YI, and the notice icon YI selected by the cursor CS is opened by the operation of the chance button 136. You may do it. Alternatively, the display of the cursor CS may point to the not-used notice icon YI. In addition, the cursor CS may or may not be displayed. In this case, it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when the cursor CS is displayed than when it is not displayed, or conversely, it is difficult for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed. It may be used, or there may be no difference between the two. Then, it continues to FIG. 125 (I 16).

In the modified example shown in FIGS. 126 (Icon 14-3-1) to FIG. 126 (Icon 14-3-3), the state shown in FIG. 126 (Icon 14-3-1) is shown in FIG. 125 (Icon 14-1). It is the same state as shown in FIG. 126, and in FIG. 126 (I 14-3-2), two cursor CS displays are displayed, and both notice icons YI are pointed to. As a result, it is not clear which notice icon YI will be used first.

In FIG. 126 (I 14-3-3), both of the two cursor CS displays disappear, the box of the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 opens, and the notice of "reach" is given from the box. Display YH is popping out.

In the modified example shown in FIGS. 126 (14-4-1) to 126 (14-4-3), FIG. 126 (I)
The state shown in FIG. 125 (I 14-4-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 125 (I 14-1), and two cursor CS displays are also displayed in FIG. 126 (I 14-4-2). , Pointing to both notice icons YI respectively. In this example, as shown in FIG. 126 (14-4-3), after both the displays of the two cursor CSs have disappeared, the notice icons YI of both notice icons YI previously pointed to by the displays of the two cursor CSs. The box opens, and the notice display YH of "reach" pops out from the box of the notice icon YI that was stocked at the first stock position SS1, and is stocked at the second stock position SS2 (see FIG. 125 (i2)). From the box of the notice icon YI that was there, the notice display YH of "change" is popping out. The boxes of both notice icons YI may be opened at the same time, may be opened in the order of stock, or may be opened earlier or later when the notice display YH having a higher advantage appears. Further, the one with higher reliability according to the type of the notice icon YI may be opened earlier or may be opened later. After that, the notice display YH of "reach" is erased as shown in FIG. 125 (i20), while the notice display YH of "change" is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 125 (i26) on the right symbol. It changes to a ball of light YHb while still overlapping. After that, the variable icon change animation ends, and the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode before the start of the animation, is No. 119 (a). It has changed to the display mode of blinking white described in 2. The end of the variable icon change animation may be before the deletion of the notice display YH of "reach", may be deleted at the same time, or may be deleted afterwards.

In the modified examples shown in FIGS. 126 (I 1-2-1) to FIG. 126 (I 1-2-4), the maximum number of stocks of the notice icon YI is explained.

In FIG. 126 (I 1-2-1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is four, which is the upper limit, and four holding icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Among these hold icons, for example, the third hold is the hold subject to the look-ahead notice, and the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are all icons that can participate in the mini game (character icon of the villager). Has changed to. The maximum number of stocks of the notice icon YI is "3" (maximum number of reservations-1), which is less than the maximum number of reservations of 4 in Special Figure 1 or 2. However, the number may be the same as the maximum number of holdings of Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2, or may be the same as the total number of the maximum number of holdings of Special Figure 1 and the maximum number of holdings of Special Figure 2. It may be (for example, 8), or it may be one less than the total number. Moreover, it may be more than the maximum number of reservations and may be more than the above total number.

In FIG. 126 (I 1-2-2), the mini-game B has already been won with two notice icons YI already acquired. As a result, as shown in FIG. 126 (I1-2-3), the third notice icon YI comes out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed large. In this state, the third enlarged notice icon YI overlaps the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 from the front side. As a result, the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 becomes difficult to see for a moment. However, by setting the position of the notice icon YI coming out of the appearance area AS to a position away from the second stock position SS2, the notice icon YI stocked in the second stock position SS2 is not overlapped. You can also do it.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (I1-2-4), the first stock position SS1, the second stock position SS2, and the third stock position SS3 (FIG. 125) provided in the stock area SS. (Refer to (i2)) A notice icon YI is displayed for each. A part of the notice icon YI displayed at the third stock position SS3 shown in FIG. 126 (I1-2-4) overlaps a part of the appearance area AS from the front side.

On the other hand, a part of the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 126 (I 1-2-4') overlaps a part of the notice icon YI displayed at the third stock position SS3 from the front side, and the third stock The lower half of the notice icon YI displayed at position SS3 is difficult to see.

The stock area SS may be provided at a position that does not overlap with the appearance area AS so that the appearance area AS does not overlap or the appearance area AS does not overlap. For example, the stock area SS may be provided in the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 126 (c1) and thereafter are diagrams showing stepwise production examples of the mini-game A of the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice.

In FIG. 126 (U1), as in FIG. 120 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) fluctuates at high speed. Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1.

In FIG. 126 (U2), as in FIG. 120 (A2), there is a ball entering the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the hold of special drawing 1 is increased by one, resulting in a total of three. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (c2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3".

In FIG. 126 (U3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. The third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by the increase animation in the default display mode, but the third hold represented by the third hold icon h13 is the hold subject to the look-ahead notice. In FIG. 121 (3), both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which have been the default display modes, are shown in the No. 119 (a). It has changed to the icon of the aspect a of the type of Yoshimune (bow) described in 14. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may be changed before the third hold icon h13 of the hold subject to the look-ahead notice is increased or displayed at the same time as the increased display. It may be performed after the increase display. More specifically, the change in the display mode (change of the hold icon) of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may be completed before the increase animation of the third hold icon h13 is started. , The change of the hold icon may be completed at the same time as the increase animation is started, or the change of the hold icon may be completed after the increase animation is started. Further, when the change of the hold icon is performed by the change animation, the change animation may be started before the increase animation is started, or the change animation may be started at the same time as the increase animation. Then, the change animation may be started after the increase animation is started. By changing the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 to the icon of the aspect a of the Yoshimune (bow) type, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively. Mini-games (specific mini-games (in this example, mini-game A) or unspecified mini-games (in this example, mini-game A, mini-game B, or other mini-games, etc.)) You may give a notice. In addition, the mini-game is played at the same time as or after the start of the symbol variation display (in this example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11) that starts the mini-game A (may be immediately after). The icon to be performed may be configured to change.

In FIG. 126 (U4), the symbol variation display is completed, and the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 126 (c5), the hold that was previously the first hold has been digested, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (c5), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop display, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started and the first decorative symbol on the upper right is displayed. In the two-hold number display, the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to "2". In addition, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, which has not been displayed so far, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon shown in FIG. 118 (a) is started, and the icon AI is slightly displayed on the right edge of the screen. 'Is starting to appear. Further, in FIG. 126 (U5), the movement animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow), which has been displayed in the first stage hs1, starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and has been moved to the second stage hs2 so far. The displayed second hold icon h12 of the Yoshimune (bow) character starts moving toward the first stage hs1, and is the default display mode that has been displayed in the third stage hs3, but looks ahead. The third hold icon h13 of the notice target hold has started moving toward the second stage hs2. Here, when the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow) starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the pedestal hs0 is slightly lowered. The appearance animation of the icon for mini game A and the movement animation of the hold icon may be started at the same time, the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A may be started earlier, or vice versa. The hold icon movement animation may start earlier.

In FIG. 126 (U6), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as stopped, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and the variable icon h0 is set as the mode a (standby) of the type of Yoshimune (bow). The icon of (aspect) is displayed. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 is executing the standby animation (default animation). On the other hand, the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continuing, and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS is displayed on the carpet as a white box image of the first display mode (in FIG. 117 (a)). The icon AI'in which the notice icon YI) of the aspect a of the "box" of No. 1 shown is displayed is displayed. This icon AI'is different from the icon AI for mini game A shown in FIG. 118 (a).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (c7), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Further, in FIG. 126 (7), the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A is continued, and in this appearance animation, the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is additionally displayed on the icon AI'. To. However, the meter display MTh additionally displayed here is in an empty state (0 state).

In FIG. 126 (U8), the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A is continued, and here, the hit point (HP) is added as a part of the appearance animation to the empty meter display MTh added earlier. The displayed animation is executed. In FIG. 126 (U8), a slight blue gauge gag is beginning to be seen. As described with reference to FIG. 118 (b), the color of the gauge changes according to the number of HP points. Since the animation here is a blue gauge from the beginning, it can be seen at the stage of looking at the color of the gauge that the number of HP points is 60 or more. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the icon AI for the mini game A includes a mode a in which the gauge is full, a mode b in which the gauge is half full, and a mode c in which the gauge is only a little. Since there is only mode d, it can be expected that the gauge will increase to the full state when the blue gauge gag is visible. Here, after the HP display is completed (after the gauge stops increasing), the color of the gauge may be changed to a color according to the number of points of the HP, or as the gauge increases, The color of the gauge may be represented by a color corresponding to the number of points at that time. In FIG. 126 (U 9), the blue gauge gag has increased by half, and in FIG. 126 (U 10), the blue gauge gag has increased to full. That is, the number of points of the remaining HP is 100, and this completes the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A. After all, in this example, the "box" icon of aspect a has appeared as the icon AI for mini-game A.

In FIG. 126 (U11), the aspect of the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 is changed to the aspect b of holding the bow, and the aspect of the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 is also changed. It has changed to the mode b in which the bow is held, which is slightly different from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0. In FIG. 126 (U12), both the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 shoot an arrow and change to the mode c.

In FIG. 126 (U13), an arrow shot by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0, which was close to the icon AI for mini game A, is stuck in the carpet, and Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11. The arrow fired by the character is flying toward the carpet. In FIG. 126 (U 14-1), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the 1 hold icon h11 is also stuck in the carpet, and both arrows hit the carpet brilliantly.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing the continuation of the production example of the mini-game A of the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice step by step.

In FIG. 127 (U 15-1) following FIG. 126 (U 14-1), the damage is calculated, and the damage is 60 points due to the two arrows being stabbed. In FIG. 127 (U 15-1), the damage point notification (the number “60”) is displayed, and in FIG. 127 (U 16), the blue gauge gag that was in the full tank state (100 points) is reduced. I'm starting. When the gauge gag begins to decrease, the damage point notification display begins to fade and gradually disappears. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 127 (U17), the gauge gag is reduced to the remaining 40 points. The color of the gauge gag changes from blue to green from the time when it becomes 50 points or less. The damage calculation may be started when the arrow is stuck in the carpet. That is, the damage calculation may be started at the timing of FIG. 126 (U13) when the first arrow hits the carpet, and the gauge gag may be reduced.

Both the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 that fired the arrow and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 continue to be displayed in the mode c, but changed to the standby mode a. You may.

In FIG. 127 (U18), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 6”-“decoration 4”-. "Decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

FIG. 127 (U19) shows the stop display (confirmed display), the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 has started, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 gradually moves into the pedestal hs0. It disappears. FIG. 127 (U20) is also in the stop display (confirmation display), and the variable icon h0 has completely disappeared.

In FIG. 127 (U21), the hold that was previously the first hold is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (U21), the first decorative symbol remains stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol on the upper left starts variable display. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 that fired the arrow changes from the mode c to the standby (default) mode a when the symbol variation display is started. Then, in FIG. 127 (U22), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow) previously displayed in the first stage hs1 is changed to the variable icon display area. The movement to the pedestal hs0 of the CIS is started, and the second hold icon h12 of the pre-reading notice target hold, which has been displayed in the second stage hs2 so far, although it is the default display mode, is moved toward the first stage hs1. The move has started. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (U22), the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by one to "1".

In FIG. 127 (U23), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the movement animation of the hold icon is finished, and the icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow) is displayed as the variable icon h0. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (U24), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 127 (U25), the aspect of the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0. Has changed to the mode b in which the bow is held. In FIG. 127 (U26), the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 shoots an arrow and changes to the mode c. In FIG. 127 (U27), an arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) with the variable icon h0 is stuck in the carpet, and damage calculation is performed. In FIG. 127 (U28), the damage point notification (“40”). ”) Is displayed, and in the figure (U29), the green gauge gag, which was the remaining 40 points, began to decrease, and from the point when it became 20 points or less, it changed from green to red. ing. Also, when the gauge gag begins to decrease, the damage point notification begins to fade and gradually disappears. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 127 (U30), the gauge is reduced to 0 point and the gauge gag disappears. In this way, the hit points (HP), which was 100 points at the beginning of the mini-game A, have been successfully reduced to 0 points, and a treasure (notice icon) can be obtained. The number of damages given may exceed the number of points of the remaining HP.

In FIG. 127 (U31), the icon AI for mini-game A in which the meter display MTh is 0 is covered by the effect image EF5, and in FIG. 127 (U32), the effect image EF5 disappears and the mini-game A in aspect d disappears. Icon AI is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (U 33), when the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see the figure (U 32)), the mini game A of the aspect d is used. The icon AI is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). Instead of the notice icon YI of the aspect a of the "box" of 1, as shown in FIG. 127 (U34), the notice icon YI of the aspect a in which the box is closed is displayed in the stock area SS.

Eventually, in FIG. 127 (U35), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”. "-" Decoration 7 ") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

FIGS. 127 (36) to 127 (37) show that the stop display is being displayed (confirmed display is being performed), the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 has been started, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 is It gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0. Also, here, the pedestal hs0, which had been slightly lowered until then, is rising toward the original height. FIG. 127 (U38) is also in the stop display (confirmation display), the variable icon h0 has completely disappeared, and the pedestal hs0 has returned to its original height. The notice icon YI stocked in the stock area SS is displayed without being used. After that, it continues to FIG. 120 (A24). In this example, the hit points are not recovered (for example, in FIG. 127 (U 17), the remaining hit points are 40, and in FIGS. (U 21) to (U 24), the remaining hit points are 40). , Hit points may be recovered. For example, the hit points may be recovered when the next symbol variation display is started.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a part of the first modification to the third modification of the production example of FIGS. 126 (1) to 127 (38).

The first modification is an example of one-shot acquisition of the notice icon, and is the same up to FIG. 126 (U 14-1). In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-1), the damage point notification is normally displayed, but it is not displayed here. In the same figure (U 15-2-2), the meter display MTh is full. The mini-game A icon AI of aspect a of the state is covered with the effect image EF5, and in the figure (U15-2-3), the effect image EF5 disappears and the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d is displayed. There is. That is, the display of the damage point notification and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases are omitted, and the icon AI for the mini game A of the mode d is displayed at once. Of the display of the damage point notification and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases, only the display of the damage point notification may be omitted, or only the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases may be omitted. ..

As shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-4), when the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see FIG. The icon AI for the mini game A of d is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). Instead of the notice icon YI of the mode a of the "box" of 1, as shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-5), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is displayed in the stock area SS.

Eventually, in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-6), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 6”). -"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

In FIG. 128 (15-2-7), the hold that was previously the first hold has been digested, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-7), the first decorative symbol is still displayed in a stopped state, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 that fired the arrow changes from the mode c to the standby (default) mode a when the symbol variation display is started. Then, in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-8), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow), which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far, is displayed. The second hold icon h12, which is the default display mode but is reserved for pre-reading notice, which has started to move toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS and has been displayed in the second stage hs2, is the first stage. It has started moving toward hs1. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is started again, and the icon AI'is slightly started to be displayed at the right end of the screen.

In FIG. 128 (15-2-9), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop, but the movement animation of the hold icon is finished, and the variable icon h0 is set to the type of Yoshimune (bow). The icon of the mode a (standby mode) is displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-9), the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by one to "1". Furthermore, the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A is continuing, and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS is displayed on the carpet as a white box image of the first display mode (in FIG. 117 (a)). The icon AI'in which the notice icon YI) of the aspect a of the "box" of No. 1 shown is displayed is displayed. In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-10), the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A is continued, and in this appearance animation, the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is additionally displayed to the icon AI'. Will be done. However, the meter display MTh additionally displayed here is in an empty state (0 state). In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-11), the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A is continued, and here, the hit point is added to the empty meter display MTh added earlier as a part of the appearance animation. An animation displaying (HP) is executed, and the blue gauge gag is increased to full. That is, the number of points of the remaining HP is 100, and this completes the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A. After all, here as well, the "box" icon of aspect a has appeared as the icon AI for mini-game A.

In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-12), the character aspect of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the aspect b of holding the bow, and then Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 (U 15-2-12). A bow is fired from the character of (bow). In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-13), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 is stuck in the rug, and here, too, the display of the damage point notification and the gauge gag are reduced. In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-14), the icon AI for the mini game A in the mode a in which the meter display MTh is full is covered with the effect image EF5, and the same figure (U 15-2-14) is shown. In 15-2-15), the effect image EF5 disappears, and the mini game A icon AI of aspect d is displayed at once.

As shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-16), when the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see FIG. The icon AI for the mini game A of d is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). Instead of the notice icon YI of the aspect a of the "box" of 1, as shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-17), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is changed to the same figure (U 15-2-17). It is displayed under the notice icon YI stocked earlier in 5). In this way, one shot of the notice icon is successfully acquired in succession, and two notice icons YI are stocked.

In the second modification shown in FIGS. 128 (15-2-2b1) to 15-2-2b5, the same applies to 126 (14-1). The modified example here is also an example of one-shot acquisition of the notice icon, but in this example, the display of the damage point notification and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases are not omitted. In FIG. 128 (15-2-2b1), the damage point notification (red number "100") is displayed. Further, in FIG. 128 (15-2-2b2), the blue gauge gag that was in the full tank state (100 points) began to decrease, the gauge gag decreased to the remaining 50 points, and the color of the gauge gag until then. The color changes from blue to green, and the green gauge gag continues to decrease. When the gauge gag begins to decrease, the damage point notification display begins to fade and gradually disappears.

It should be noted that the notice may be given by the display of the damage point notification or the color of the carpet. For example, if the display color of the damage point notification is rainbow, even if the notice icon on the rug is not the "rainbow box" notice icon, the "rainbow box" notice icon can be obtained. From the characteristics of the notice icon of "Rainbow Box", the jackpot of the look-ahead target change is confirmed. Alternatively, the symbol variation display when the display color of the damage point notification is rainbow color may be a big hit confirmation. Alternatively, when the display color of the damage point is a specific color (for example, red), the probability of acquiring the notice icon may be higher than when it is the default color. Alternatively, the symbol variation display when the display color of the damage point is a specific color (for example, red) may be more likely to be a big hit than the symbol variation display when the display color is the default color. The same may be applied to the color of the carpet.

In FIG. 128 (15-2-2b3), the green gauge gag continues to decrease, the gauge gag decreases to the remaining 20 points, the color of the gauge gag changes from green to red, and the red gauge. Gag continues to decline. Also, the display of the damage point notification is almost disappearing.

In FIG. 128 (15-2-2b3), the green gauge gag continues to decrease, the gauge gag decreases to the remaining 20 points, the color of the gauge gag changes from green to red, and the red gauge. Gag continues to decline. Also, the display of the damage point notification is almost disappearing. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-2b4), the gauge is reduced to 0 point and the gauge gag disappears.

When the meter display MTh becomes 0, the icon AI for the mini game A is covered with the effect image EF5 as shown in FIG. 128 (U15-2-2b5), and thereafter, FIG. 128 (U15-2-3) and the like. It becomes the same as, and the notice icon YI can be acquired.

FIGS. 128 (15-3-1) to 15-3-3 in the third modification are shown in 128 (15-2-1) to 15-3 in the first modification. It is the same as -2-3). In this third modification, the appearance of the next mini-game A icon AI is earlier than that of the first modification, and the appearance animation of the mini-game A icon is started again without waiting for the start of the next variation. That is, as shown in FIG. 128 (15-3-4), when the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS, the mini-game A icon performed in the next variation is The appearance animation has started again, and the icon AI'is starting to appear slightly on the right edge of the screen. Then, in FIG. 128 (15-3-5), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS is displayed on the carpet in the white color of the first display mode. The icon AI'in which the box image (the notice icon YI of the aspect a of the "box" of No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a)) is displayed is displayed. The stock display of the notice icon YI and the overall display of the icon AI'may be the same, the stock display may be faster, or conversely, the overall display may be faster. The meter display MTh is added to the icon AI'after the next fluctuation is started.

Eventually, in FIG. 128 (U 15-3-6), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 6”). -"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a continuation of the third modified example of the effect example of FIGS. 126 (U 1) to 127 (U 38) and a part of the fourth modified example to the middle of the fifth modified example.

In FIG. 129 (U 15-3-7), which is a continuation of the third modification, the variable icon h0, which was the icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow), was completely disappeared while the stop display was being displayed (confirmed display). There is.

In FIG. 129 (U 15-3-8) where the next symbol variation display is started, the meter display MTh of the HP in the empty state is additionally displayed on the icon AI', followed by FIG. 129 (U 15-3-9). In), the animation that HP is displayed on the empty meter display MTh is executed, and the blue gauge gag is increased to full. After that, the flow is the same as that shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-12).

FIGS. 129 (15-4-1) to 15-4-5 in the fourth modification are shown in 128 (15-3-1) to 15-4 in the third modification. It is the same as -3-5). In this fourth modification, the appearance animation of the mini-game A icon is executed a plurality of times in one symbol variation display, and a plurality of mini-game A icon AIs appear. The number of appearances of the mini-game A icon AI may be up to the maximum number of stocks of the notice icon YI, may be less than the maximum number of stocks, or may exceed the maximum number of stocks. However, if the above maximum number of stocks is exceeded, the stocked notice icon YI will be used or the Gase mini-game A will be played before the new notice icon YI is acquired, and the new notice icon YI Cannot be acquired.

In FIG. 128 (15-4-6), in the symbol variation display that has already acquired one notice icon YI, the meter display MTh of the empty HP is additionally displayed on the new icon AI', followed by In FIG. 128 (15-4-7), an animation in which HP is displayed on an empty meter display MTh is executed, and the blue gauge gag is increased to full. The symbol variation display is still continuing, and in FIG. 128 (U 15-4-8), the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0, which has been the mode c so far, is also Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11. ) Characters also change to the mode b with a bow, aiming for a new mini-game A icon AI carpet. In this fourth modification, it is possible to perform a plurality of attacks in one symbol variation display. For example, the same mini-game A icon AI can be attacked multiple times. However, even if the attack can be performed a plurality of times, the same mini-game A icon AI may be attacked only once.

Eventually, arrows were fired from each of the two characters, and in FIG. 128 (U 15-4-9), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 is also Yoshimune of the first hold icon h11 (U 15-4-9). The arrow fired from the character of the bow) was also stuck in the rug, the damage was calculated, the damage point notification (the number "40") was displayed, and the tank was full (100 points). The blue gauge gag has begun to decrease in the figure (15-4-10). In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 128 (15-4-11), the color of the gauge gag remains blue and decreases to the remaining 60 points. Here, before the meter display MTh decreases to 0 points, as shown in FIG. 128 (15-4-12), the symbol variation display ends, but the meter display MTh becomes 0 points, and the meter display MTh becomes 0 points. It is also possible to acquire the second notice icon YI. Further, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 following FIG. 128 (U 15-4-12), the mini game A continues, and it is also possible to acquire the second notice icon. .. As described for the number of appearances of the mini-game A icon AI, the number of acquired notice icon YI can be set in various ways based on the maximum number of stocks. That is, the number of acquired notice icon YI may be limited to the maximum number of stocks, may be less than the maximum number of stocks, or may exceed the maximum number of stocks.

The fifth modification is an example in which a dedicated area for the mini game A is prepared.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (U1-2-1), a background screen, which has not been shown so far, is displayed. This background screen is the background screen of the sea. In FIG. 129 (U1-2-1), as in FIG. 126 (U1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) fluctuates at high speed. Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1.

In FIG. 129 (U 1-2-1), as in FIG. 126 (U 2), there is a ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the hold of special figure 1 is increased by one, resulting in a total of three. .. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (U1-2-1), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3".

In FIG. 129 (U1-2-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. The third hold icon h13 is a hold icon in a display mode not shown in FIG. 119 (a). That is, it is a display mode in which characters are displayed as VS (VS display mode), and a display mode for notifying that the mini game A will be performed in a symbol variation display corresponding to the hold before the hold icon of this display mode is held. Is. That is, if the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the VS display mode, the mini game A is executed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold and / or the second hold. When the hold icon in the VS display mode is displayed, the mini-game A may or may not be executed without fail. The hold icon of the VS display mode is the target hold of the look-ahead notice, and the VS display mode is also a kind of the look-ahead notice display mode.

In FIG. 129 (U1-2-4), the symbol variation display is completed, and the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 129 (U1-2-5), the hold that was previously the first hold has been digested, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (U1-2-5), the first decorative symbol in the central region remains stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol on the upper left starts variable display. , In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to "2".

In FIG. 129 (U1-2-6), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop, but in FIG. 129 (U1-2-6), the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A is displayed. Has been started. That is, when the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A is started, the flame effect image EF6 is displayed in the effect display area 208d where the hold frame UI is displayed, and the hold icon is also covered by this effect image EF6. Has been done. In FIG. 129 (U1-2-7), the effect image EF6 of the flame is thinned, and the icons and the like in the back of the effect image EF6 are beginning to be faintly visible.

In FIG. 129 (U1-2-8), the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A ends, the flame effect image EF6 disappears completely, and the effect display area 208d replaces the hold frame UI with the mini game. The dedicated area MSS of A has appeared. Two Yoshimune (bow) icons YMI1 and YMI2 are displayed in the dedicated area MSS of the mini-game A shown in FIG. 129 (U1-2-8). Both of these two icons YMI1 and YMI2 are displayed in mode a (standby mode). Further, at the right end of the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A, an icon AI'with a notice icon on the carpet is displayed, and a dedicated area for the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is provided, and the dedicated area is provided. The meter display MTh is displayed in the area. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 129 (U1-2-8), the blue gauge gag is full. That is, the number of points of the remaining HP is 100.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (U1-2-9), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the mini game A is started in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. The mini-game A may be started at the same time as the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the mini-game A may be started after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, or the first decoration is started. The mini-game A may be started before the variable display of the symbol is started. When the mini-game A is started, the dedicated area MSS of the mini-game A is once covered with the mini-game opening image. The mini-game opening image is a translucent image, and the battle card of the mini-game is displayed in characters (here, "Yoshimune" VS "carpet").

In FIG. 129 (U1-2-10), the mini-game opening image disappears, and in FIG. 129 (U1-2-11), Yoshimune (bow) of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2, which has been the aspect a so far. Both characters change to the mode b in which they hold a bow, and aim at the rug of the icon AI for the mini game A. Here, the greater the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons, the higher the possibility that mini-game A will be played even in the next fluctuation. In this example, since two Yoshimune (bow) icons are displayed, there is a higher possibility that mini-game A will be played even in the next fluctuation than when only one Yoshimune (bow) icon is displayed. .. In addition, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons may represent the degree of expectation that the notice icon Yi can be acquired. That is, the greater the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons, the higher the expectation that the notice icon Yi can be acquired.

Alternatively, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons may correspond to the number of hold icons before the hold icon in the VS display mode. That is, if the number of hold icons before the hold icon in the VS display mode is three, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons is also three, which is before the hold icon in the VS display mode as in this example. If the number of pending icons is two, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons is also two. In addition, the number of times that one icon of Yoshimune (bow) can be confronted is determined according to the number of hold icons before the hold icon in the VS display mode, such as one carpet or one attack. The number of times may be displayed in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A.

Eventually, arrows are fired from each of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2, and in Fig. 129 (U1-2-12), two arrows are stuck in the carpet, damage calculation is performed, and damage point notification ("" The number 40) is displayed, and the blue gauge gag, which was in a full tank state (100 points), has begun to decrease in the figure (U1-2-13).

FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a continuation of the fifth modification of the production example of FIGS. 126 (U 1) to 127 (U 38) and a production example in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted step by step.

In FIG. 130 (U1-2-14), which is a continuation of the fifth modification, a semi-transparent preview image such as "following the next fluctuation" is obtained because one attack is completed during one symbol fluctuation display. Is displayed. The dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is once covered with this preview image. In addition, this notice image may not be displayed.

In FIG. 130 (U1-2-15), the preview image disappears, and in the same figure (U1-2-16), the symbol variation display ends, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("Decoration 6"-"Decoration" 4 ”-“ Decoration 1 ”) is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 130 (U1-2-17) is in the stop display (confirmed display), the pierced arrow disappears from the carpet, and in the same figure (U1-2-18), the first decoration in the central region is displayed. The symbol is still displayed as a stop, but the hold that was the first hold so far has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 130 (U1-2-18), the variable display is started in the second decorative symbol on the upper left.

After that, arrows were fired from each of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2, and in Fig. 130 (U1-2-19), two arrows were stuck in the carpet, and in the following Fig. 130 (U1-2-20). In the meter display MTh shown, it decreased to 0 point and the gauge gag disappeared. When the meter display MTh becomes 0, the icon AI for the mini game A is covered with the effect image EF5 as shown in FIG. 130 (U1-221). In FIG. 130 (U1-2-22), the effect image EF5 disappears and the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (U1-223), when the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see the same figure (U1-2-22)). , The icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). Instead of the notice icon YI of the aspect a of the "box" of 1, as shown in FIG. 130 (U1-224), the notice icon YI of the aspect a in which the box is closed is displayed in the stock area SS. Further, when the stock of the notice icon YI is completed, the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A is started. That is, when the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A is started, the flame effect image EF6 gradually appears in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. In FIG. 130 (U 1-2-24), the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is covered with the translucent flame effect image EF6, and in the figure (U 1-2-25), the flame effect. It is obscured by image EF6. The dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A may be started before the stock of the notice icon YI is completed. For example, the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A may be started immediately after the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS. Further, the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A may be started at the same time when the stock of the notice icon YI is completed.

In FIG. 130 (U1-226), the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A ends, the flame effect image EF6 disappears completely, and the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A appears in the effect display area 208d. It is back to the previous configuration. That is, the hold frame UI is displayed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The variable icon h0 of this default display mode corresponds to the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 129 (U1-2-3) to FIG. 129 (U1-2-5). Further, in the first stage hs1 of the variable icon display area CIS, the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode is displayed. The first hold icon h11 in this default display mode is the third hold icon h13 displayed in the VS display mode shown in FIGS. 129 (U1-2-3) to FIG. (U1-2-5). Corresponds to. The first hold icon h11 corresponding to the third hold icon h13 displayed in the VS display mode may be displayed in the VS display mode as it is, or an icon of any of blue to rainbow colors. It may be displayed in an aspect.

The hold (fourth hold) after the third hold icon h13 displayed in the VS display mode becomes the hold subject to the look-ahead notice, and is stocked as shown in FIG. 130 (U1-226). The notice icon YI may be used during the display of the symbol variation on the fourth hold. Further, the second hold icon h12 may be displayed in the VS display mode, and the mini game may be played until the symbol variation display of the second hold is in progress.

Eventually, in FIG. 130 (U1-227), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”). -"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

Next, an example of the production in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted will be described.

In FIG. 130 (E1-1), the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is an icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow), while the first hold icon h11 is an icon of the default display mode. Also in this modification, the hold of the first hold icon h11 becomes the hold for the look-ahead notice target. Further, the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS.

In FIG. 130 (E2), the notice icon YI changed from the mini-game A icon AI of the aspect d is stocked in the stock area SS. The notice icon YI stocked here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). It is a notice icon of the aspect a of the "box" of 1. In addition, the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 7”) in the central region. The stop display is displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of the lost decorative symbols. Furthermore, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 has disappeared.

In FIG. 130 (E3), the hold that was previously the first hold has been digested, and the symbol variation display has started. The symbol variation display started here is a symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI stock-displayed in the stock area SS is used. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 130 (E3), the first decorative symbol remains stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol on the upper left starts variable display. Then, the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and in FIG. 130 (E4), the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow), which has been displayed in the first stage hs1, is displayed as the variable icon h0. ing. The character of Yoshimune (bow) who has changed to the variable icon h0 has changed from the mode c to the standby (default) mode a.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 130 (E5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, a mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is started. The mini-game here is a little different from the mini-game A described so far, and the notice icon promotion-only icon YSI with the target icon hanging on the parachute appears. In Fig. 130 (E6), the notice icon promotion-only icon YSI with the target icon hanging on the falling umbrella is descending from the upper right of the screen, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 shown in Fig. 130 (E7) is , It changes to the mode b of holding a bow and aims at the target icon, and eventually an arrow is fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow). In FIG. 130 (E8), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) hits the target icon, and the promotion of the notice icon YI displayed in stock is confirmed. In FIG. 130 (E9), the characters “Lv.UP” for notifying the promotion confirmation are displayed next to the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI. The arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 may or may not hit the target icon of the notice icon promotion-only icon YSI. ..

In FIG. 130 (E10), when the stock-displayed notice icon YI is covered with the effect image EF7 and the effect image EF7 disappears, the notice icon YI is changed to No. 117 (a) shown in FIG. 117 (a). From the "box" of No. 1, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). It has been promoted to the notice icon of the "red box" in 2 (Fig. 130 (E11)).

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 130 (E12), the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI disappears, and in the following figure (E13), the promoted notice icon YI is used. That is, when the notice icon YI of the "red box" of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, the notice icon YI changes to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is displayed from inside the box. An animation that pops out is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is a notice display of the red "red change" of No. 7, and is a display for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, or the like is changed in two steps.

In FIG. 130 (E13), the used notice icon YI disappears, and a variable icon change animation using the red “red change” notice display YH is started. In FIG. 130 (E14), the red "red change" notice display YH is changed to a light ball YHb.

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a continuation of an effect example in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted, and a modified example of the effect example.

In FIG. 130 (E15) following FIG. 130 (E14), the ball of light YHb in which the red "red change" notice display YH has changed is the variable icon h, which is the icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow).
Flying toward 0, hitting the variable icon h0, the variable icon h0 is covered with the effect image EF8, and when the effect image EF8 disappears, the variable icon h0 becomes the No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). It has changed to the "green" variable icon in 4 (Fig. 130 (E16)).

In this example, a mini-game for promoting the stock-displayed notice icon YI was played, but a mini-game for further acquiring the notice icon may also be played. Alternatively, in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI is used, a mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may not be played, and only a mini game for promoting the stock display notice icon YI may be played.

Further, in this example, a dedicated icon such as the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI appears, but the hold icon may change to the notice icon promotion icon, or the variable icon may change to the notice icon promotion icon. There may be. Further, the icon for acquiring the notice icon such as the icon for mini-game AI may be changed to the icon for promoting the notice icon. In addition, the appearance of the notice icon promotion-only icon YSI will be a notification that the notice icon may be promoted, and the mini-game itself that promotes the notice icon YI also announces that the notice icon may be promoted. It corresponds to the production to be done. Then, here, the effect of notifying that the notice icon may be promoted is executed by using the variable icon h0, but even if the notice is given by using other than the variable icon h0 and the hold icon. You may make sure to give a notice.

Next, a modified example of the production example in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted will be described.

In FIG. 131 (E1-2-1), the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d is displayed. Both the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are icons of Yoshimune (bow) characters. The hold of the first hold icon h11 becomes the hold subject to the look-ahead notice. Further, the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS.

In FIG. 131 (E1-2-2), the symbol variation display continues, and the notice icon YI of the "box" aspect a, which is different from the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d, is stocked in the stock area SS. Has been done.

In FIG. 131 (E1-2-3), there is a ball entering the starting port 230 of the special figure 1, and the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, resulting in a total of two. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (E1-2-3), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as “2”.

In FIG. 131 (E1-2-4), the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the second stage hs2. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 representing the increased second hold is the display mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow). If a mini-game to acquire a notice icon is played on the currently performed symbol variation display, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the second hold icon h12 may not be used, or the opposite. May be made available for. That is, during the symbol variation display in which the hold has increased, it may or may not be prohibited to use the increased hold icon in the mini-game for acquiring the notice icon.

In FIG. 131 (E1-2-5), the symbol variation display ends without using the stock-displayed notice icon YI, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is lost in the central region. The combination of decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols. Furthermore, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 has disappeared.

In FIG. 131 (E1-2-6), the hold that was previously the first hold has been digested, and the symbol variation display has started. The symbol variation display started here is a symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI stock-displayed in the stock area SS is used. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (E1-2-6), the first decorative symbol is still displayed as a stop display, but the second decorative symbol on the upper left is started to be variablely displayed. Then, the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and in FIG. 131 (E1-2-7), the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode previously displayed in the first stage hs1 is the default display mode. It is displayed as the variable icon h0 as it is.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (E1-2-8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, a mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is also started in this modified example. In FIG. 131 (E 1-2-9), the notice icon promotion-only icon YSI with the target icon hanging on the parachute is descending from the upper right of the screen, and this variant shown in the same figure (E 1-2-10). In the example, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 changes to the mode b in which the bow is held, and aims at the target icon. In FIG. 131 (E 1-2-11), an arrow is fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the hold icon, and in the same figure (E 1-2-12), the shot arrow is directed toward the target icon. It's flying. In FIG. 131 (E1-2-13), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) hits the target icon, and the promotion of the notice icon YI displayed in stock is confirmed. In FIG. 131 (E 1-2-14), the characters “Lv.UP” notifying the promotion confirmation are displayed next to the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI, and FIG. 131 (E 1-2-15). Then, when the notice icon YI that was displayed in stock is covered with the effect image EF7 and the effect image EF7 disappears, the notice icon YI is promoted from the previous "box" to the "red box" notice icon. (Fig. 131 (E1-2-16)).

In FIG. 131 (E1-2-17), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI promoted to "red box" is used in the reach state. That is, as shown in FIG. 131 (E1-2-18), the box of the notice icon YI opens, and from the inside, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b) is opened. The notice display YH of 19 "VS Swordsman Reach" pops out. The notice display YH of "VS swordsman reach" is a face icon of the swordsman character, and is a display for notifying that the super reach effect of VS swordsman reach will be performed by the displayed fluctuation. In FIG. 131 (E1-2-19), the notice icon YI used disappears, but the notice display YH of "VS Swordsman Reach" is still displayed.

In FIG. 131 (E1-2-20), the notice display YH of "VS swordsman reach" has disappeared, but at the same time as the notice display YH disappears, the super reach production of VS swordsman reach is started as previously announced. .. When the notice display YH of "VS Swordsman Reach" is displayed, the super reach production of VS Swordsman Reach may or may not be started. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (E 1-2-21) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the first decoration shown in the following figure (E 1-2-22) is displayed. An animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed on the design display device 208L. When the super reach effect is started, the hold frame UI is completely hidden (disappears) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variable icon h0 does not disappear and continues to be displayed on the remaining top board. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display continue to be displayed. The entire hold frame UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire hold frame UI may continue to be displayed. Also, the variable icon h0
May be erased, or the hold icon may continue to be displayed.

After that, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (E1-223), the scene in which Yoshimune was defeated and the "decoration 5" as the middle symbol are displayed in large size. In the following FIG. 131 (E 1-2-24), the same effect as the wipe effect described with reference to FIGS. 76 (A 14-2-4) to 76 (A 14-2-5) is performed, and FIG. 131 As shown in (E1-2-24), the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is once displayed as a wipe with no pattern and the same color. By this wipe display, the variable icon h0 disappears, but the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. The variable icon h0 may be displayed.

In 143 (E1-2-25), the background is wiped out and the background returns to the normal background, and the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow), also returns to the default display mode. .. However, the first hold icon h11 may be in the display mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow) until it is digested, or the display mode may be changed at another timing.

In 143 (E1-226), the stop display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6".

In this modified example as well, a mini-game for further acquiring a notice icon may be played together. Alternatively, in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI is used, a mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may not be played, and only a mini game for promoting the stock display notice icon YI may be played.

Further, also in this modification, the hold icon may change to the notice icon promotion icon, or the variable icon may change to the notice icon promotion icon. Further, the icon for acquiring the notice icon such as the icon for mini-game AI may be changed to the icon for promoting the notice icon. In addition, the appearance of the notice icon promotion-only icon YSI will be a notification that the notice icon may be promoted, and the mini-game itself that promotes the notice icon YI also announces that the notice icon may be promoted. It corresponds to the production to be done. Then, in this modified example, the effect of notifying that the notice icon may be promoted is executed by using the hold icon, but there is a case where the notice is given by using a variable icon h0 or other than the hold icon. It may be good, or you may make sure to give a notice.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect in which the notice display YH of the button appears from the notice icon YI.

In FIG. 132 (a1), the symbol variation display, which is the look-ahead target variation, has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a1), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started variable display, and the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS has a default display mode. Fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. It should be noted that there is no hold icon, and "0" is displayed in both the second hold number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In addition, two notice icons YI are displayed in stock.

In FIG. 132 (a2), the first notice icon YI stocked earlier (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position) is used, and the box of the first notice icon YI is opened. The display mode is changed to the mode d, and from the inside of the box, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b) is displayed. The notice display YH of 21 "buttons" is popping out. The notice display YH of this "button" is a button image imitating the chance button 136, and is a display for notifying that the button effect will be performed by the displayed symbol variation display. Even if it is done, the button effect may not actually be performed.

In FIG. 132 (a3), the first notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, is erased, but the notice display YH of the “button” is still displayed. In the following FIG. 132 (a4), the notice display YH of the “button” changes to a light ball YHb, and as shown in the same figure (a5), the light ball YHb is the effect icon display area DIS. Fly to the right end of the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 132 (a6), the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed at the right end portion thereof. Further, above the button image icon 136aI, the characters "preparing" indicating that the button operation is not yet accepted are displayed. Therefore, the display of the button image icon 136aI and the characters "preparing" is also a display indicating that the button effect is in stock, and the button effect is performed in the currently performed symbol variation display. It is also a display that announces.

In FIG. 132 (a7), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 132 (a8), “decoration 6”, which had been swaying and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, moved below the second decorative symbol and shook in the right symbol display area 208c before shifting to the super reach effect. The fluctuating "decoration 6" moves below the second hold number display. Next, the button image icon 136aI and the characters "in preparation", which have been displayed in the lower right corner until now, are moved to the lower left corner before shifting to the super reach effect. In FIG. 132 (a9), the button image icon 136aI and the variable icon h0 overlap during the movement. That is, the button image icon 136aI passes behind the variable icon h0. As a result, the variable icon h0 overlaps a part of the button image icon 136aI from the front side. The button image icon 136aI may pass through the labor side of the variable icon h0 so that a part of the button image icon 136aI overlaps the variable icon h0 from the front side. Alternatively, the button image icon 136aI and the characters "preparing" may be moved so as not to overlap with the variable icon h0. Alternatively, the button image icon 136aI and the character "preparing" may not be moved, and may be moved to the moving position instantaneously. That is, the display position may be switched instantaneously. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 132 (a9) disappears. In FIG. 132 (a10), the movement of the button image icon 136aI in the default display mode and the characters “preparing” to the lower left corner is completed.

Eventually, the super reach production has started, and here the VS swordsman reach has started. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a11) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a12) follows the main character. An animation of the duel scene between Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed.

In the middle of the duel scene animation, as shown in Fig. 132 (a13), the second notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position) that was stocked later and remained until now was displayed. No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b) was used. 20 "UP" notice display YH is popping out. This "UP" notice display YH is a display that announces that the effect will be promoted in the displayed symbol variation display, and when the "UP" notice display YH is displayed, the effect is always promoted. It may or may not be promoted. As soon as the notice display YH of "UP" is displayed, the notice display YH is used, and as shown in FIG. 132 (a14), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI is started. That is, when this promotion animation is started, the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) displayed in the lower left corner is displayed with the characters "preparing" and the flame effect image EF6'. It is covered with and is difficult to see. In FIG. 132 (a15), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI ends, the flame effect image EF6'disappears, and the button image icon 136aI is promoted to the button image icon 136aI in the fifth display mode (red). There is.

The animation of the duel scene continues while the cut-in image CI3 and the like are displayed (Fig. 132 (a16)). In FIG. 132 (a17), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI is started again. In this second promotion of the button image icon 136aI, the button image icon 136aI is promoted without any prior notice. However, promotion may be announced by other notices, it may be always announced, or it may never be announced. In FIG. 132 (a17), the button image icon 136aI in the fifth display mode (red) is again covered with the flame effect image EF6'along with the characters "preparing", making it difficult to see. In FIG. 132 (a18), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI is completed, the flame effect image EF6'disappears, and the button image icon 136aI is promoted to the lever image icon 139aI. Although the operation lever is not shown in the pachinko machine 100, the operation lever is provided at a position where the player can operate the pachinko machine 100. Further, instead of the operating lever, a transmissive portion 191 that can rotate in the front-rear direction or a second chance button 137 may be used.

In FIG. 132 (a19), the cut-in image CI3 has disappeared, the animation of the duel scene is approaching the final stage, and the time to start the button production is approaching. In FIG. 132 (a20), an animation in which the lever image icon 139aI is gradually enlarged is started. The lever image icon 139aI becomes the lever image 139a by this animation. When this animation is started, the characters "preparing" disappear, and the lever image 139a is once enlarged to the maximum in the figure (a22) through the figure (a21). After that, in FIG. 132 (a23), the lever image 139a becomes a little smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a23), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the lever is operated, the display corresponding to this is not performed. Eventually, the button effect starts, and the operation validity period starts (FIG. 132 (a24)). The button production here is a kind of final judge production. The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 132 (a25) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period.

The timing of FIG. 132 (a26) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the operation lever 139 at this timing. Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 17, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a27) switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and at the same time, the display of the effect image is shown. The 1 large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect image and the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character. It is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where the object is not overlapped by 224 Gd. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. Further, the Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 operates and moves downward, and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. In addition, the light guide plate IL also emits light. The accessory effect by the Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 is a big hit confirmation effect.

It should be noted that the effect using various accessories in FIG. 132 (a27) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be executed even when it has passed.

After that, the various accessories return to the initial positions, the light emitting of the light guide plate IL ends, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L switches from the display of the effect image to the display of the final judge result. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a28), "decoration 6" as a middle symbol is largely displayed together with the scene in which Yoshimune won. After this, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing step by step an effect example in which the number of times the button effect is executed is stocked.

In FIG. 133 (ob1), the super reach effect of the VS swordsman reach is started, and the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in large size on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (ob1). In addition, two notice icons YI are displayed in stock. An animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (ob2). Further, the first notice icon YI stocked earlier (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position) is used, and the first notice icon YI is a display mode in which the box is opened. It changes to d, and the notice display YH of the "button" pops out from the box. The notice display YH of the "button" in this production example is a display for notifying that the notice display YH of the "button" itself will be stocked.

In FIG. 133 (b3), the first notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, is erased, but the notice display YH of the "button" is still displayed. In the following FIG. 133 (ob4), the notice display YH of the "button" changes to a light ball YHb, and as shown in the same figure (a5), the light ball YHb is the effect icon display area DIS. Fly to the right end of the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 132 (a6), the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed at the right end portion thereof. Further, above the button image icon 136aI, the character "x1" indicating the number of stocks is displayed. One button effect is executed for one stock. Here, the button image icon 136aI is stocked, but in short, the number of times the button effect is executed is stocked.

In FIG. 133 (b7), the second notice icon YI stocked later (the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position) is used, and the notice display of the "button" is displayed again from the box. YH is popping out. In FIG. 133 (ob8), the second notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, is erased, and the notice display YH of the "button" is changed to a light ball YHb, and the light ball YHb is changed. YHb flies toward the button image icon 136aI displayed in the lower right corner and hits the button image icon 136aI. In FIG. 133 (b9), the number of stocks on the button image icon 136aI is “x3”. This means that when the ball of light YHb hits the button image icon 136aI in FIG. 133 (Ob8), two button image icons 136aI are stocked. As described above, the notice display YH of the "button" is a display for notifying that the notice display YH of the "button" itself is stocked, and by displaying the notice display YH of the "button", how many pieces are displayed. It is not foretold whether the button image icon 136aI of the above will be stocked, and in this way, a plurality of button image icons 136aI may be stocked for one notice display YH of the "button". For example, a maximum of 10 button image icons 136aI may be stocked for one "button" notice display YH. However, it may be configured so that only one button image icon 136aI is stocked for one "button" notice display YH. Further, the number of stocks of the button image icon 136aI may be determined according to the display mode of the notice display YH of the "button". For example, in the notice display YH of the "button" in the first display mode, the stock number of the button image icon 136aI is 1, but in the notice display YH of the "button" in the fifth display mode, the stock number of the button image icon 136aI is 1. May be 5. The maximum number of stocks of the button image icon 136aI is, for example, 10. In other words, the maximum number of times the button effect is executed is 10 times.

In FIG. 133 (b10), the effect image EF9 is added to the button image icon 136aI, and it is announced that the button effect will be started. In FIG. 133 (b11), a large button image 136a is displayed. The number of stocks on the button image icon 136aI has decreased from "x3" to "x2" at this stage. After that, in FIG. 133 (Ob12), the button image 136a is slightly reduced, and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (b12), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the display corresponding to the button operation is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started, and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 133 (b13)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 133 (b14) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation valid period started.

The timing of FIG. 133 (b15) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 16, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (b16), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the non-display screen, and the screen shown in FIG. 14 is displayed. The 1 large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the light guide plate IL also emits light.

It should be noted that the effect using various accessories in FIG. 133 (b16) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be executed even when it has passed.

In FIG. 133 (b17), each of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd returns to the initial position, the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a super reach. The production has been promoted. That is, it is foretold that a panda will participate in the VS swordsman reach to help the main character, Yoshimune. Thus, in FIG. 133 (ob18), the animation of the duel scene continues with the panda participating, and in FIG. 133 (ob19), the effect image EF9 is added again to the button image icon 136aI, and the second button is displayed. It is announced that the production will start. In FIG. 133 (b20), the second button effect is started, the button image 136a is displayed, the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed, and a little time has passed since the operation valid period started. ing. Further, the number of stocks on the button image icon 136aI has decreased from "x2" to "x1".

The timing of FIG. 133 (b21) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (b22), the gold cut-in image GCT marked "Go !! Go !!" in the sixth display mode (gold) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is foretold that the expectation of the big hit is quite high.

The display of the gold cut-in image GCT in FIG. 133 (b22) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be executed even if it is done.

In FIG. 133 (ob23), the gold cut-in image GCT disappears and the animation of the duel scene is returned. In the following FIG. 133 (ob24), the animation of the duel scene is about to reach the end. In FIG. 133 (Ob25), the final judge effect is started, and as a part of the final judge effect, a large default button image 136a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, in FIG. 133 (b26), it is foretold that the effect image EF9 is added to the button image icon 136aI three times, and the third button effect is started. In FIG. 133 (ob27), the promotion effect of the button image 136a is performed, the effect image EF10 is added to the larger default button image 136a, and in the figure (b28), the button in the fifth display mode (red). It has been promoted to image 136. By promoting to the button image 136 of the fifth display mode (red), the expectation of the big hit is further increased. At the stage of FIG. 133 (b27), the button image icon 136aI and the display of the number of stocks have disappeared.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a continuation of an effect example in which the number of times the button effect is executed is stocked, and other effect examples.

In FIG. 134 (b29) following from FIG. 133 (b28), the button image 136a of the fifth display mode (red) is slightly smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. There is. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (b29), the operation validity period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the display corresponding to the button operation is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started, and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 134 (b30)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 134 (b31)) is shown in a display mode when a short time has passed since the operation effective period started.

The timing of FIG. 134 (b32) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 17, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a27) switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and at the same time, the display of the effect image is shown. The 1 large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect image and the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character. It is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where the object is not overlapped by 224 Gd. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. Further, the Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 operates and moves downward, and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. In addition, the light guide plate IL also emits light. The accessory effect by the Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 is a big hit confirmation effect.

It should be noted that the effect using various accessories in FIG. 134 (b33) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be executed even when it has passed.

After that, the various accessories return to the initial positions, the light emitting of the light guide plate IL ends, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L switches from the display of the effect image to the display of the final judge result. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 134 (b34), "decoration 6" as a middle symbol is largely displayed together with the scene in which Yoshimune won. After this, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed.

In this example, when one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is digested (used), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are shown as shown in FIG. 133 (b12) and the like. An operation promotion notification image including is displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 134 (b30), the button of the button image 136a displayed as the operation promotion notification image may be promoted, but one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is exhausted. It may be configured so that the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is always displayed when (used), or the button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is one. The button of the button image 136a displayed as the operation promotion notification image when it is digested (used) may be configured to be promoted without fail. Further, in this example, when one button image icon 136aI is digested (used), one operation promotion notification image is displayed, but when one button image icon 136aI is digested (used), the operation promotion notification is displayed. Two or more images may be displayed or one may be displayed, or two or more images may be displayed. Here, the emission color of the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light may be promoted in accordance with the promotion of the button image 136a of the operation promotion notification image. Alternatively, the button image 136 of the operation promotion notification image may not be promoted, and only the emission color of the chance button lamp 138 may be promoted. The emission color of the chance button lamp 138 may change from the default color to red when one of the stock button image icons 136aI is digested, and from red to gold when two are digested. In the case of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 is used, but in the case of an operation means different from the chance button 136 (for example, an operation lever 139 or the like), the emission color of the light emitting means that causes the operation means to emit light. Will be promoted.

In this example, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed as the operation promotion notification image, but only the button image 136a may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image, and the remaining time as the operation promotion notification image. Only the display meter MT may be displayed, and as an operation promotion notification image, character notation such as "press a button", "PUSH", "continuous hit", "long press" (even if it is a character notation indicating an operation method). The button image 136a may be displayed, only the character notation may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image, and the character notation and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image. The character notation, the button image 136a, and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image. Further, as the operation promotion notification display, an image imitating the shape of the operation means (for example, button display 136a), an image showing the passage of time of the operation valid period of the operation means and / or the remaining time of the operation valid period (for example, the remaining time). Time display meter MT), character display related to operation (for example, "press button", "PUSH", "continuous hit", "long press") and image display other than the above (for example, shape of one or more "operation means" Character image display different from the image imitating (By displaying the character image as the operation promotion notification display, the displayed symbol variation display may be more likely to be a big hit in the end than when it is not displayed.) " ) May be displayed.

FIGS. 134 (c1) to 134 (c7) are diagrams stepwise showing a first example in which a mini game is started in response to a button operation.

In FIG. 134 (c1), the first decorative symbol in the central region is stopped and displayed, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and the variable icon h0 is set as the icon of the villager type mode a (standby mode). Is displayed. Further, as the first hold icon h11, the icon of the villager type mode a (standby mode) is displayed. Further, the second hold icon h12 is also displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, the icon of the pantograph type mode a (standby mode) shown in FIG. 118 (c) is displayed as the opponent icon for the mini game B. The panda character of the opponent icon TI also executes the standby animation (default animation). Further, in the appearance region AS, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a). The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 134 (c2), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is started after that. In this example, the rock-paper-scissors showdown in mini-game B is performed by operating the chance button 136. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 134 (c3), between the icon of the villager's character, which is the variable icon h0, and the icon of the character of Panta, which is the opponent's icon, in which the rock-paper-scissors confrontation is scheduled to be performed. An operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (c3), the operation validity period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the display corresponding to the button operation is not performed. Eventually, the button effect starts, and the operation validity period starts (Fig. 134 (c4)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 134 (c5)) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation effective period started.

The timing of FIG. 134 (c6) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the rock-paper-scissors confrontation is started, and the rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is performed. In FIG. 134 (c7), the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 wins. After that, it continues to FIG. 120 (A 9-1).

The start of the rock-paper-scissors showdown may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. That is, the mini-game may be started only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the mini-game is started even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, but the chance button 136 is started. It may be configured so that it is easier to win the mini-game, that is, to acquire the notice icon YI when the operation is performed within the operation valid period than when the operation is not performed.

FIGS. 134 (d1) to 134 (d7) are diagrams stepwise showing a second example in which a mini game is started in response to a button operation.

FIGS. 134 (d1) to 134 (d2) are in the same state as FIGS. 134 (c1) to (c2) except that the notice icon YI is stocked.

In FIG. 134 (d3), the stock notice icon YI is used, and the notice display YH of the “button” appears from the inside. In FIG. 134 (d4), the notice icon YI used disappears, but the notice display YH of the "button" is still displayed, and in FIG. 134 (d5), the notice display YH of the "button" is displayed. It moves toward the icon of the villager's character, which is the variable icon h0, and the icon of the Panta character, which is the opponent's icon, where the rock-paper-scissors showdown is scheduled. In FIG. 134 (d6), the notice display YH of the “button” is located between the icon of the villager character, which is the variable icon h0, and the icon of the Panta character, which is the opponent icon.

In FIG. 134 (d7), the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed on the notice display YH of the “button”. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (d7), the operation validity period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the display corresponding to the button operation is not performed. Eventually, the operation validity period is started, and thereafter, it is the same as in FIG. 134 (c6) and the like.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon YI can be seen before the release.

In FIG. 135 (or a1), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-. "Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 135 (or a1) is the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). It has changed to the icon of aspect a of the villager type described in 17. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 representing the hold target of the look-ahead notice is the default display mode.

In FIG. 135 (or a2), the hold that was previously the first hold has been digested, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a2), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop display, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started and the first decorative symbol on the upper right is displayed. In the 2 hold number display, the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 to "1". Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, which has not been displayed so far, the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started, and the effect image EF1 is displayed. Further, in FIG. 135 (or a2), the movement animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager's character, which has been displayed in the first stage hs1, starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and has been displayed in the second stage hs2 so far. The second hold icon h12 in the default display mode has started moving toward the first stage hs1.

Also in FIG. 135 (or a3-1), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as stopped, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and the variable icon h0 is set as the villager's type mode a (standby). Aspect) icon is displayed. The villager character of the variable icon h0 is executing a standby animation (default animation). In addition, the appearance animation of the opponent icon is also completed, the effect image EF1 disappears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and the opponent icon TI is the aspect a of the pantograph type shown in FIG. 118 (c). The standby mode) icon is displayed, and the panda character of this opponent icon TI is also executing the standby animation (default animation). Further, in the appearance region AS, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). The notice icon YI of 6 "change" is displayed. No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). In the example shown in FIG. 121 and the like, the “change” of 6 is the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon YI, but here, it is treated as the notice icon YI. Strictly speaking, in the case of the notice display YH, there is no frame display surrounding the characters of change, but in the case of the notice icon YI, there is a frame display. Since the character display of the default color "change" is performed on the "change" notice icon YI, the player can use the notice icon obtained by winning the rock-paper-scissors confrontation when the appearance area AS is displayed. You can see the notice display YH to be released.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a4), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is started after that. In FIG. 135 (or a5), a rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is performed by the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 and the character of the panda with the opponent icon TI, and the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 wins.

In FIG. 135 (or a7), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started by the victory of the villager character of the variable icon h0. That is, the "change" notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS exits the appearance area AS, is once displayed large, and moves to the stock area SS as shown in FIG. 135 (or a8). , Stock is displayed. The notice icon YI that is stock-displayed in this way is also displayed with the characters "change" in the default color.

In the pedestal hs0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a9), the display mode of the villager's character and the replacement animation of the default display mode are started. Further, the opponent icon TI gradually disappears from the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. Further, the empty appearance area AS gradually fades out to the right edge of the screen. In FIG. 135 (or a10), the variable icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. Absent.

In FIG. 135 (or a11), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-. "Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

In FIG. 135 (or a12), the look-ahead notice target hold, which has been the first hold so far, has been exhausted, and the symbol change display that becomes the look-ahead target change has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a12), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started variable display, and the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS has a default display mode. Fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. Also, until now, the "change" notice icon YI has been displayed in stock.

In FIG. 135 (or a14), a variable icon change animation using the “change” notice icon YI that has been stock-displayed up to that point is started. In this variable icon change animation, as shown in FIG. 135 (or a14), an effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used is added to the notice icon YI of "change". The "change" notice icon YI corresponds to the "change" notice display YH when the effect image EF11 is added. In FIG. 135 (or a15), the “change” notice icon YI (“change” notice display YH) to which the effect image EF11 is added flies toward the change icon h0 and hits the change icon h0. .. In FIG. 135 (or a16), the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode until the end of the variable icon change animation and the start of the animation, is No. 119 (a). It has changed to the display mode of blinking white described in 2.

In this example, it may be considered that the "change" notice icon YI itself collides with the variable icon h0.

The example shown in FIG. 135 (or a3-2) is an example in which the same type of notice icon YI is displayed in the appearance area AS. Here, three "change" notice icons YI are displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 135 (or a3-3) is an example in which different types of notice icons YI are displayed in the appearance area AS. Here, the notice icon YI of "red change", the notice icon YI of "super hot", and the notice icon YI of "SP" are displayed. It should be noted that the types are not limited to all different types, and some types may be different. For example, the "change" notice icon YI, the "change" notice icon YI, and the "SP" notice icon YI may be displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 135 (or b) is an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI of the same type (here, “change” notice icon YI) are stocked in the stock area SS.

The example shown in FIG. 135 (or b) is an example in which a plurality of different types of notice icons YI (are stocked in the stock area SS. Here, the notice icon YI of "red change" and "super hot" The notice icon YI of "SP" and the notice icon YI of "SP" are displayed. Not all of them are different types, but some of them may be different types. For example, the same as the notice icon YI of "change". The "change" notice icon YI and the "SP" notice icon YI may be displayed. The "box" notice icon YI and the "red box" notice icon YI shown in FIG. 117 (a) may be displayed. And, the notice icon YI of the "button" may be stocked, and the notice icon YI of the "box", the notice icon YI of the "box", and the notice icon YI of the "gold box" , May be stocked.

In each of the examples shown in FIGS. 135 (or d), the same figure (or e), and the same figure (or f), the box-shaped notice icon YI shown in FIG. Is an example in which multiple items are displayed. The example shown in FIG. 135 (or d) is an example in which three notice icons YI of the “box” shown in FIG. 117 (a) are displayed in the appearance area AS. That is, the same type of box-shaped icon is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 135 (or e), the notice icon YI of the "box", the notice icon YI of the "box", and the notice icon YI of the "red box" are displayed in the appearance area AS. Is. That is, the same type of box-shaped icon and a different type of box-shaped icon are displayed in combination. In the example shown in FIG. 135 (or f), the notice icon YI of the "box", the notice icon YI of the "red box", and the notice icon YI of the "gold box" are displayed in the appearance area AS. Is. That is, all different types of box-shaped icons are displayed.

Here, the examples shown in FIGS. 135 (or a3-2), (or a3-3), (or d), the same figure (or e), and the same figure (or f) will appear if the mini game is successful. This is an example in which all the notice icons YI displayed in the area AS can be acquired. If the mini-game is successful, any one or two of the notice icons YI displayed in the appearance area AS may be configured to be acquired. In addition, a roulette notice is performed to display the notice icons YI that can be obtained in the appearance area AS in order, and the roulette is displayed either before the mini game is started, during the mini game, or after the mini game is successful. It may be configured to stop and determine the available (or acquire) notice icon.

Next, an example of an effect in which one stocked notice icon is used multiple times will be described.

FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect in which one stocked notice icon is used a plurality of times.

In FIG. 136 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. The first hold represented by the first hold icon h11 is the hold subject to the look-ahead notice. Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 136 (A2), the appearance animation of the icon change notice display shown in FIG. 119 (b) is started in the right base icon bIr, and the smoke-like effect image EF12 is displayed. In FIG. 136 (A3), the appearance animation of the icon change notice display is completed, and FIG. 119 (Fig. 119) is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.
No. shown in b). 16 "Bancho" icon change notice display IYH is displayed. The icon change notice display gives a notice that the notice icon YI will be acquired, or a notice that the display mode of the icon will change. The icon change notice display IYH of the "bancho" here is a display for notifying the acquisition of the notice icon YI, and in FIG. 136 (A4), the character of the chief of the icon change notice display IYH is a "box". In the figure (A5), the notice icon YI of the "box" is displayed in the stock area SS. That is, in this example, the notice icon YI is acquired without playing the mini game. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 136 (A6), after the symbol variation display is completed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, in the same figure (A7), the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation is displayed. It has been started.

When the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation is started, as shown in FIG. 136 (A8-1), the notice icon YI stocked in the previous symbol variation display is used, and the box is closed. The notice icon YI of a certain mode a changes to the mode d which is a display mode in which the box is opened, and an animation in which the notice display YH pops out from the box is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is a notice display of "change" of the default color of No. 6, and is a display for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the change icon, or the like is changed by one step.

In the previous production examples, when the notice icon YI was used once and changed to the mode d in which the box was opened, it was erased as it was, but in this production example, it is shown in FIG. 136 (A9). As shown, the notice icon YI changes from the mode d in which the box is open to the mode a in which the box is closed and is not erased. The return of the box of the notice icon YI to the closed mode may mean that the box may be reopened in the symbol variation display in which the box is opened, that is, in the symbol variation display that is the pre-reading target variation currently being performed. It means that it has been foretold. Even when the box of the notice icon YI returns to the closed mode, the box may not be opened again, or it may be opened again without fail. In addition, even if it is not opened continuously (even if it is not opened immediately), it may be opened while the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation continues. Alternatively, it may be reopened during a specific period (for example, a specific period straddling continuous symbol variation displays) regardless of the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation. Furthermore, although it has been described here that it is reopened, when it is reopened, it may be closed again and opened more than twice.

In FIG. 136 (A10), the notice display YH of the “change” emitted from the notice icon YI is used, and the display mode of the variable icon, which has been the default display mode (first display mode), flashes white. Has changed to the display mode (second display mode).

Further, in FIG. 136 (A11), the notice icon YI that once returned to the closed display mode a changes to the open display mode d again, and is the second from the box. Notice display YH is released. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). The notice display of the "reach" of 17, and the notice display of the "reach" is a display indicating that the displayed symbol variation display is equal to or higher than the normal reach, or that the reach fanning effect is performed. In this way, a type of notice display different from the type of the first (previous) notice display YH may appear. However, the same type of notice display YH may appear consecutively. Further, it may be configured so that only a type of notice display different from the type that appeared last time or once appears, or only the same type of notice display as the type of the first notice display YH appears. You may. In addition, the notice display of "reach" may be used to notify that the normal reach will be performed. In that case, when the notice display of "reach" is performed, the normal reach occurs in the symbol variation display on which the notice display is displayed. It will be confirmed that it will be done.

In FIG. 136 (A12), the notice icon YI again changes to the mode a in which the box is closed and is not erased. Further, the notice display YH disappears after a certain display period elapses after the appearance (FIG. 136 (A13)), but if the notice display YH of "reach" is used, when the reach effect is performed, the notice display YH disappears. It may continue to be displayed until the reach effect is started.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 136 (A14), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, when the notice display YH of "reach" appears, the reach effect is always performed, but the appearance of the notice display YH of "reach" does not mean that the reach effect is always performed. Instead, even if the notice display YH of "reach" appears, the reach effect may not be performed and the symbol variation display may end. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 136 (A15), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the notice icon YI changes to the open display mode d again, and the third notice display YH is released from the box (FIG. 136 (A16)). The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is a notice display of "chance" of the default color of 2. When the default color "chance" notice display is displayed during reach, it becomes a display that announces an increase in reliability that will be a big hit due to the fluctuation. Here, too, a type of notice display different from the type of the second (previous) notice display YH has appeared. This is because the reach effect has already started, so the "reach" notice display YH cannot be made to appear again. Without such circumstances, even if the same type of notice display YH appears. Good. In addition, the notice display YH of "reach" may be displayed again during the execution of the reach effect. For example, when the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed again during normal reach, it may be announced that the notice display YH of "reach" will develop into super reach, and in that case, the super It may or may not develop into reach, and may or may not develop into super reach. In addition, when the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed during the execution of Super Reach A, which has a lower reliability to the jackpot than Super Reach B, it is announced that Super Reach A will develop into Super Reach B. In that case, it may or may not develop into Super Reach B without fail. In addition, the reach effect may be limited to the notice display that appears. In this example, there is an upper limit on the number of notice display YHs that appear from the same notice icon YI (for example, up to 5), and the notice display YH appears within the range up to the upper limit. .. As described above, although the upper limit is set, the larger the number of the notice display YHs appearing from the same notice icon YI, or the type of the notice display YHs appearing from the same notice icon YI. The higher the number, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, or conversely, the lower the reliability of the jackpot, or the reliability of the jackpot may be irrespective of the number or type. In this example, the maximum number of notice display YHs appearing from the same notice icon YI is configured to be larger than the maximum number of stocks of the notice icon YI, but the same number may be used. On the contrary, the maximum number of stocks of the notice icon YI may be configured to be larger than the upper limit number of the notice display YHs appearing from the same notice icon YI.

As shown in FIG. 136 (A17), in this example, the notice icon YI that emitted the third notice display YH disappears without returning to the closed display mode a. The notice icon YI may be configured to disappear whenever it is opened once during reach. Alternatively, it may be configured to disappear whenever the notice display YH is emitted up to the upper limit number. Furthermore, even if the notice display YH is emitted up to the upper limit number, it may continue to be displayed without disappearing. This is the same even if the notice display YH is not emitted up to the upper limit number. Further, it may return to the closed display mode a and continue to be displayed without opening again, or may continue to be displayed in the open display mode b.

In FIG. 136 (A18), the normal reach effect is completed, and the “decoration 5”, which is not the “decoration 6”, fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols fluctuates.

In FIG. 136 (A19), the combination of “Decoration 6”-“Decoration 5”-“Decoration 6” is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The variable icon h0, which has changed to the blue display mode, continues to be displayed until the confirmation display is started, and disappears when the confirmation display is started. The timing at which the variable icon h0 disappears may be before the confirmation display.

In the example described here, the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed to announce that the reach effect will be performed, and the reach effect is actually started, but the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is not started is more than The symbol variation display in which the reach effect is started is more likely to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode, and as a result, the "reach" notice display YH is not displayed in the symbol variation display. In the symbol variation display in which the notice display YH is displayed, it is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode. At first, the notice display of "change" was released in FIG. 136 (A8-1), and the notice display of "reach" was released the second time in the same figure (A11). , The notice display of "change" may be released, or the notice display of "red change" of the same type as the notice display of "change" (the notice display of No. 7 shown in FIG. 117 (b)) is released. You may.

Subsequently, an example in which a plurality of notice display YHs of the same type are emitted from the same notice icon YI in stock will be described.

It is the same up to FIG. 136 (A7), and when the symbol variation display which is the look-ahead target variation is started, the stock notice icon YI is used as shown in FIG. 136 (A8-2-1). Then, the display mode is changed to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is released from the inside of the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is a notice display of 27 "Oval", and if a predetermined number (3 pieces in this case) can be collected, the notice display of "Oval" is a super reach effect or the Senryobako accessory explained in FIG. 132 (a27). There is a display that warns that the production will be performed, but there are cases where the specified number of sheets cannot be collected. In addition, even if a predetermined number of sheets are collected, neither the super reach effect nor the Senryobako character may be produced. However, if one appears, a predetermined number of sheets may be collected without fail, and if a predetermined number of sheets are collected, at least one of the super reach effect and the effect of the Senryobako character may be performed. When the "Oval" notice display YH appears, it is stock-displayed in the area next to the second decorative symbol display (Oval stock area KS) (FIG. 136 (A8-2-2)). This oval stock area KS is a different area from the stock area SS (see FIG. 136 (A5)) that stocks the notice icon YI, and these two areas do not partially overlap. However, at least a part of these two regions may overlap, or they may be exactly the same region. Further, the stocked notice icon YI and the stocked "oval" notice display YH do not overlap, but at least a part of the notice icon YI may overlap, and the whole may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 136 (A8-2-2), the notice icon YI that has released the notice display YH of the “oval” returns to the closed display mode b, and the same figure (A8-2-3). ), The symbol variation display is continued. It should be noted that the notice display YH of the "oval" may be configured so that only one sheet can be stocked in one symbol variation display.

In FIG. 136 (A8-2-4), the notice icon YI once returned to the closed display mode a is changed to the open display mode d again, and two of the boxes are displayed. An eye-catching notice display YH has been released. The notice display YH released here is not the "oval" notice display YH, but the No. 117 (b) shown in FIG. 117 (b). 7 is a notice display of "red change", and this "red change" notice display is a display for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, etc. is changed in two steps. In FIG. 136 (A8-2-5), the notice icon YI again changes to the mode a in which the box is closed and is not erased. Further, the notice display YH of "red change" is used, and the display mode of the variable icon, which has been the default display mode (first display mode), is changed to the blue display mode (third display mode). There is.

In FIG. 136 (A8-2-6), the notice icon YI is changed to the open display mode d again, and the third notice display YH is emitted from the box. Here, two "oval" notice display YHs are released at once. As described above, a plurality of notice display YHs may be released in one release. However, it is possible that only one is released at one time. In FIG. 136 (A8-2-7), the notice display of these two "ovals" is displayed in stock in the oval stock area KS, and the oval stock area shown in FIG. 136 (A8-2-7). The KS stocks three "oval" notice signs YH, which is a predetermined number. In this example, one notice icon YI released the "Oval" notice display YH multiple times (twice in this example), but one notice icon YI released the "Oval" notice display YH only once. It may be configured so that it is not released. Further, it may be configured so that only the "oval" notice display YH is not emitted from one notice icon YI.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which a plurality of advance notice display YHs of the same type are emitted from the same advance notice icon YI in stock, and other production examples.

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-8), which continues from FIG. 136 (A8-2-7), the notice display YH of three "Oval" sheets, which is a predetermined number, is stocked in the oval stock area KS. , These three "oval" notice signs YH are used. That is, it is used immediately when three "oval" notice display YHs, which is a predetermined number of sheets, are accumulated. Here, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is redisplayed relatively large in the center of the screen in the mode of the notice display YH of 28 "three oval sheets". No. The notice display YH of 28 "three oval cards" is a display for notifying that a super reach A, a super reach B, a VS swordsman reach, or a super reach equal to or higher than the all-group reach will be performed. However, even if the notice display YH of "3 oval sheets" is displayed, the super reach effect may not be performed, or when the notice display YH of "3 oval sheets" is displayed, the super reach effect is always performed. It may be done.

It should be noted that the notice display YH of the three "oval" sheets, which is the predetermined number of sheets, is not used immediately when the notice display YH is accumulated, but after the state in which the notice display YH of the three "oval" sheets is kept in stock continues. And may be used. In addition, the notice display YH of "Oval" can be stocked across the symbol variation display, and can be stocked up to the symbol variation display to be read ahead, but three sheets can be stored by the symbol variation display to be read ahead. If not, the notice display YH of "Oval", which has been stocked up to that point, is deleted from the oval stock area KS at the end of the pre-reading target symbol variation display. Alternatively, it may be used separately even if three sheets are not stored. The stock of the "Oval" notice display YH may be configured so as not to straddle the symbol variation display. In that case, when the "Oval" notice display YH is stocked, the "Oval" notice display YH is stocked. The notice display YH of "Oval" is configured to be erased.

No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). Each notice display (“Den”, “Grandfather”, “Princess”) of the 30 “Character Stock” is the same as the notice display of the “Oval” described here. The area for stocking the notice display of the character may be provided as an area different from the oval stock area KS, or may be provided in common with the oval stock area KS.

No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). 27 "Oval" and No. Each of the 30 "character stock" icons ("den", "old man", "princess") is displayed as a notice display YH and then stocked in each stock area (oval stock area KS or character stock area not shown). By being done, it functions as a notice icon. The notice icon YI may be released from the notice icon YI, and the notice icon YI may be stocked. That is, there may be a case where the notice icon YI is stocked without going through the notice display YH.

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-9), the notice display YH of "three oval sheets" disappears, and the reach effect is started. That is, the "decoration 7" fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Then, in FIG. 137 (A 8-2-10a), as previously announced, the super reach production of VS swordsman reach is started, and the first decorative pattern display device 208L shows the duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. The animation is displayed. Even if the super reach effect is started, the stock display of the notice icon YI continues in the stock area SS, but it may disappear when the super reach effect is started.

Also in FIG. 137 (A8-2-11) during the super reach effect, the notice icon YI is changed to the open display mode d again, and the notice display YH is emitted from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is a notice display of 4 "super hot". The notice display of "Gekiatsu" displayed after the reach production is started corresponds to a kind of normal notice that considerably increases the reliability of the jackpot in the currently performed symbol variation display.

In FIG. 137 (A 8-2-12), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed display mode a, but the notice display YH of "super hot" is displayed. However, in this example, after passing through FIG. 137 (A8-2-13), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. "Decoration 6" is displayed in large size, and then the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 6"-"Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed.

FIGS. 137 (A8-2-10b1) to FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b11) are diagrams showing an example in which the notice icon YI is used across the wipe effect during the super reach effect.

It is the same up to FIG. 137 (A8-2-9), and FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b1) is also in the same state as FIG. 137 (A8-2-10a). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b2), the scene in which Yoshimune was defeated and "decoration 6" as a medium symbol are displayed in large size, but in the stock area SS. The notice icon YI in the closed mode is still displayed in stock.

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b3), the wipe effect is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b4), the display screen is once wiped with no pattern and the same color. It becomes a display. In this wipe display, the variable icon h0 disappears and the notice icon YI that was displayed in stock also disappears, but the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. In FIG. 137 (A 8-2-10b5), the wipe-out is started, and the display in the back is gradually starting to be seen. Here, the fluctuating first decorative pattern ("decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7") is beginning to be seen. In the following FIG. 137 (A 8-2-10b6), the lower half of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS is beginning to be visible. Since the notice icon YI began to be seen here, the player released a further notice display YH from the notice icon YI after the wipe-out was completed (after the wipe production was completed), or was shown in FIG. 130 (E10). We expect the promotion of such notice icon YI itself. At the wipe-out stage, the notice icon YI may remain disappeared and may not be displayed again. The notice icon YI, which is displayed in stock, may be displayed even during the execution of the wipe effect. Further, the notice icon YI that is displayed in stock during the execution of the wipe effect may be used, and the notice display YH may be released. However, depending on whether or not the notice icon YI is displayed in stock during the execution of the wipe effect. Regardless, the notice icon may be configured not to be used. Further, the notice icon YI described here is the notice icon YI that has been used more than once, but the same applies to the unused notice icon YI (for example, the notice icon YI in FIG. 120 (A11) and the like). Yes (same below).

In FIG. 137 (A 8-2-10b7), the wipe-out is performed and the background is returned to the normal background, but the variable icon h0 remains in the third display mode (blue). Further, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" fluctuates. Further, in the stock area SS, a notice icon YI in a closed mode is displayed. Although the notice icon YI itself has not been promoted, for example, it may be promoted from the type of "box" to the type of "red box".

In FIG. 137 (A 8-2-10b8), the notice icon YI is changed to the open display mode d again, and the notice display YH is emitted from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is a notice display of 5 "iron plate". The notice display of this "iron plate" is a symbol variation display to be read ahead, that is, a symbol variation display currently being performed, and is a display for notifying that a big hit has been confirmed. At this point, a notice display of "change" may be released, and the variable icon YI may be promoted by one step, leading to a revival effect described later. Alternatively, even if the icon is a variable icon in the default display mode, a notice display of "red change" may be emitted, leading to a revival effect described later. Furthermore, the release of the notice display at the same time as the shaking change may be confirmed as a big hit.

In FIG. 137 (A 8-2-10b9), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed display mode a, but the notice display YH of the “iron plate” is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b10), the revival effect is started, and in the same figure (A8-2-10b11), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-" The combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "Decoration 7" is swayed and displayed. After that, this combination is confirmed and displayed.

The notice icon YI may be carried over to the next fluctuation. Further, even if the notice icon is displayed across the wipe effect as in this example, the notice icon may not be used and may be hidden at the end of the symbol variation display. Further, the notice icon YI may be carried over to the big hit effect or the game state after the big hit is completed, or such carryover may be prohibited. As described above, the same applies to the unused notice icon YI (for example, the notice icon YI in FIG. 120 (A11) and the like).

FIGS. 137 (A1-2-1) to FIG. 137 (A1-2-6) are diagrams showing another example in which the notice icon YI is used across the wipe effect during the super reach effect.

In FIG. 137 (A1-2-1), as in FIG. 136 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. It is displayed. The first hold represented by the first hold icon h11 is the hold subject to the look-ahead notice. Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

After that, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 136 (A2) to (A7) and 136 (A8-2-1) to (A8-2-11) are performed, and FIG. 137 is performed. In (A1-2-2), it is the same state as shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b1). After that, FIG. 137 (A 8-2-)
The wipe effect is started after the same state as shown in 10b2) (FIG. 137 (A1-2-3)). The wipe effect here is the same as the wipe effect shown in FIGS. 137 (A8-2-10b3) to 137 (A8-2-10b6).

In FIG. 137 (A1-2-4), the wipe effect is completed and the background is returned to the normal background, but the variable icon h0 remains in the third display mode (blue). Further, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" fluctuates. Further, in the stock area SS, a notice icon YI in a closed mode is displayed. The notice icon YI may remain disappeared at the wipe-out stage and may be redisplayed when the next fluctuation is started, or may be redisplayed during the jackpot game. The notice icon YI displayed during the jackpot game may be prohibited from being used, or may be used in the same manner as during the symbol variation display. Further, in the first place, during the big hit game, the display of the notice icon YI may be restricted (prohibited) so that it is not displayed.

In FIG. 137 (A1-2-5), the notice icon YI is changed to the open display mode d, and the notice display YH is emitted from the box. The notice display YH released here is a notice display of "red change". The notice display of "red change" here is the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). Unlike the notice display of "red change" in 7, it is a display for notifying that the display mode is changed to the same as the display mode of itself.

In FIG. 137 (1-2-6), there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 is the same as the display mode of the notice display of “red change” (in the fifth display mode). It has changed to a certain red display mode). That is, here, it is promoted by four stages. In this example, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed without performing the revival effect.

According to this example, the advance notice icon YI is used as a further look-ahead notice instead of the current symbol change display which was the symbol change display of the look-ahead target. When the expectation of a big hit is higher as a result of pre-reading in the symbol fluctuation display behind the current symbol fluctuation display (for example, a fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is sufficient, and even a jackpot fluctuation is a loss fluctuation. May be), as in this example. In this example, the display mode (here, the fifth display mode) is higher than the variable icon (see FIG. 137 (1-2-6)) of the lost third display mode (display mode of "blue"). The display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed. However, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed to a display mode (third display mode) equivalent to the display mode of the variable icon that is lost, or the display mode of the variable icon that is lost may be changed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed to the lower display mode (for example, the second display mode). Further, when the fluctuation icon of the loss fluctuation is the third display mode or more, it may be like this example, or when it is the third display mode or less, it may be like this example. Further, the example may be obtained regardless of the display mode of the variation icon of the loss variation. Further, the look-ahead notice is not limited to the change in the display mode of the hold icon, and other look-ahead notices may be announced (for example, chance eyes, look-ahead background change (red stage change), etc.).

Although the notice display of "red change" is emitted here, the notice display of "change" may be released. In addition, a notice display for notifying the change to a display mode above the display mode of the variable icon h0 (for example, one step or a plurality of steps) (for example, green one step above blue in this example) is released. May be good.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

In FIG. 138 (A 1-3-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both of these hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. In addition, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode is also displayed. Nothing is displayed in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

After that, in FIG. 138 (A 1-3-2), which shows the state of the symbol variation display in the state where the hold is exhausted and the special figure is no longer held, two notice icons YI are stocked in the stock area SS. There is. In FIG. 138 (A 1-3-3), the first notice icon YI stocked earlier is used, and the first notice icon YI changes to the mode d in which the box is opened. , The notice display YH of "red change" is released from the box. In FIG. 138 (A 1-3-4), the notice icon YI returns to the mode a in which the box is closed, and the notice display YH of "red change" is used, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed. It has changed to the third display mode (display mode of "blue").

Subsequently, in FIG. 138 (A 1-3-5), the second notice icon YI stocked later is used, and the second notice icon YI is set to the mode d in which the box is opened. It has changed, and the notice display YH of "reach" is released from the box. In FIG. 138 (A 1-3-6), the second notice icon YI disappears and the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed. In the same figure (A 1-3-7), "reach" is displayed. The notice display YH disappears, the reach effect is started, and the "decoration 6" fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 138 (A1-3-8), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the remaining notice icon YI changes to the open display mode again, and the second notice display YH is released from the box (FIG. 138 (A1-3-9)). ). The notice display YH released here is a notice display of the default color "chance". In FIG. 138 (A 1-3-10), the first notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of "chance" is displayed.

In FIG. 138 (A 1-3-11), the normal reach effect is completed, and the “decoration 5”, which is not the “decoration 6”, fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols fluctuates, and then the display is confirmed.

In the example described above, the notice icon YI is used in the stock order, but the notice icon YI may be used regardless of the stock order. Further, the number of times the notice icon YI was used was twice for the notice icon YI stocked earlier, whereas it was only once for the notice icon YI stocked later. In this way, the number of times of use may differ depending on the notice icon YI, but it may be the same. When the number of times the notice icon YI is used is the same, the number of times of use may be the same during the period from when one notice icon is stocked until all of the plurality of notice icons are used. For example, if the previously stocked notice icon is used twice, the later stocked notice icon is also used twice, and if the earlier stocked notice icon is used three times, it is stocked later. The notice icon is also used three times. In this way, it may be adjusted to the number of times the other icons are used. Moreover, the number of times of use may be predetermined. In this case, no matter how many pieces are stocked, each notice icon is always used a predetermined number of times. Further, the notice icon YI stocked earlier may be configured to use the notice icon YI more frequently than the notice icon YI stocked later, and conversely, the notice icon YI may be configured to be used less frequently. ..

Further, the maximum number of times of use may be predetermined or may be changed. When the maximum number of uses changes, it may change depending on the game state (normal state, electric support state (time saving state), probability change state), and the maximum number of uses increases in a certain look-ahead zone state. May be good. Further, in a certain gaming state (for example, a normal state, which may be an electric support state (time saving state) or a probability change state), the notice icon may not be stocked.

FIGS. 138 (A 1-4-1) to FIG. 138 (A 1-4-11) are diagrams showing stepwise another example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

FIGS. 138 (A 1-4-1) to (A 1-4-4) are in the same state as those of FIGS. (A 1-3-1) to (A 1-3-4). In FIG. 138 (A1-4-5), the first notice icon YI stocked earlier is continuously used. As a result, the notice display YH of "reach" is released. In FIG. 138 (A1-4-6), the first notice icon YI used continuously disappears, and the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed. ), The notice display YH of "reach" disappears, and the reach production is started. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 138 (A1-4-8), the display of the normal reach effect is started, and during this normal reach effect, it has not been used until now. The second notice icon YI stocked from is used, and the default color "chance" notice display YH is released (Fig. 138 (A1-4-9)). In FIG. 138 (A1-4-10), the remaining notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of "chance" is displayed.

In FIG. 138 (A1-4-11), the normal reach effect is completed, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols is fluctuating, and then the final display is confirmed.

As in this example, the notice icon YI may disappear in the order of stock. That is, when the previously stocked notice icon YI is used up, the next stocked notice icon YI may be used.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example in which the notice icon YI is used a plurality of times while the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon YI is known before the release.

139 (a1) to 139 (a3) are in the same state as FIGS. 136 (a1-1) to 136 (a3), and in FIG. 139 (a4), the effect icon display area DIS On the right base icon bIr, the icon change notice display IYH of "Bancho" is displayed. The icon change notice display IYH of the “bancho” here is also a display for notifying the acquisition of the notice icon YI, but like the production example described with reference to FIG. 135, the No. 117 (b) shown in FIG. 117 (b). The notice icon YI of 6 "change" is displayed. That is, the icon change notice display IYH of "Bancho" is No. 117 (b) shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is displayed that the notice icon YI of 6 "change" has been acquired, and the player can see the display (just read the characters) and the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon is "change". Recognize that it is a notice display of.

In FIG. 139 (a5), the “change” notice icon YI moves to the stock area SS, and in the same figure (a6), it is displayed in the stock area SS. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 139 (a7), after the symbol variation display is completed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, in the same figure (ia8), the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation is displayed. It has been started.

When the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation is started, the conversation notice as the normal notice as described with reference to FIG. 120 is started. The detailed explanation is left to the explanation so far, and briefly explained here. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a9), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in the central region. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not overlap with the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the notice icon Y
I is displayed in the foreground. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a10), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather displaying the operation promotion notification image composed of the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT. Is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 139 (a10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. Further, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is displayed at a position deviated from the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the two do not overlap.

Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 139 (a11) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period.

The timing of FIG. 139 (a12) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 139 (a13), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, the grandfather's conversation image CI2 announces that the reach effect will be started from the operation promotion notification image. The text display has changed to "Reach!". The notice character display such as "Reach!" May be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation validity period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed even when it is displayed.

In addition, the variable icon change animation is started while the old man's conversation image CI2 changed to the character display of "Reach!" Is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 139 (a14), an effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used is added to the notice icon YI of "change". In FIG. 139 (a15), a ball of light flies from the stock area SS toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 that the ball of light collides with has changed to the second display mode (display mode of blinking white).

The display of "change" displayed in the stock area SS of FIG. 139 (a15) corresponds to the notice display YH, and in the figure (a16), the notice display YH of "change" is shown in FIG. 117 (b). It has changed to the aspect b shown in. That is, it has changed to a mode indicating that it has been used. Since the notice display YH is displayed during the mode b, it cannot be used as the notice icon YI.

In FIG. 139 (a17), the notice display YH of aspect b is changed to the notice icon YI, and the notice icon YI can be used again. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a18), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol becomes easy to see.

In FIG. 139 (a19), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a20), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach production, the variable icon change animation is started, the effect image EF11 is added again to the notice icon YI (FIG. 139 (ia21)), and in FIG. 139 (ia22), the light from the stock area SS The ball flies toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 that the ball of light collides with is changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) this time.

The display of "change" displayed in the stock area SS of FIG. 139 (a22) corresponds to the notice display YH, and in the figure (a23), the notice display YH of "change" is shown in FIG. 117 (b). Although it has changed to the aspect b shown in the above figure again, in the figure (a24), it has returned to the notice icon YI, and it can be used again. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a24) displays the super reach development effect, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the following figure (a25) shows the VS swordsman reach. The super reach production has started, and the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in large size. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a26) displays an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. Even when the super reach effect is started, the variable icon h0 is displayed, and the notice icon YI is stock-displayed in the stock area SS. As shown in FIG. 139 (a27), the variable icon change animation is started in the middle of the animation of the duel scene, the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI again, and in FIG. 139 (ia28), the stock area. A ball of light flies from the SS toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0.

FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of production and the like following from FIG. 139.

In FIG. 140 (a29) following from FIG. 139 (a28), the variable icon h0 on which the ball of light collides is changed to the fourth display mode (green display mode) in the variable icon change animation. .. Further, the notice display YH of "change" has changed to the mode b again, but in FIG. 140 (a30), the notice icon YI is restored and the notice icon YI can be used.

On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (a31), along with the scene where Yoshimune was defeated, "decoration 5" as a medium symbol is displayed in large size, but the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. Is still in stock.

Then, the wipe effect is also started here (FIG. 140 (a32)), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (ia33), the display screen is once displayed as a wipe with no pattern and the same color. In this wipe display, the variable icon h0 disappears, and the notice display YH that was displayed in stock also disappears. In FIG. 140 (a34), the wipe-out is started, and the display in the back is gradually starting to be seen. Here, the fluctuating first decorative pattern ("decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6") is beginning to be seen. In the following FIG. 140 (a35), the lower half of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS is beginning to be visible.

In FIG. 140 (a36), the wipe-out is performed and the background is returned to the normal background, but the variable icon h0 remains in the fourth display mode (green). Further, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" fluctuates. Further, a notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS.

In FIG. 140 (a37), the notice icon YI disappears. The notice icon YI may disappear before the wipe effect, may remain disappeared at the wipeout stage and may not be redisplayed as it is, or may disappear at the end of the wipe effect. It may be present, it may not disappear until the super reach effect is completed, or it may not disappear until it is confirmed and displayed. The notice icon YI, which is displayed in stock, may be displayed even during the execution of the wipe effect. Further, the notice icon YI that is stock-displayed during the execution of the wipe effect may be used, and the notice display YH may be emitted. However, depending on whether or not the notice icon YI is stock-displayed during the wipe effect. Regardless, the notice icon may be configured not to be used.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (a38), the first decorative symbol is definitely displayed by the combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6".

Next, an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked will be described.

It is the same up to FIG. 139 (a6), and thereafter, before the end of the symbol variation display, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). 21 "button" notice icon YI and No. After the notice icon YI of 17 "reach" is continuously stocked, as shown in FIG. 139 (ab1), the symbol variation display ends, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (ab2), the symbol variation display, which is the look-ahead target variation, is started. In this example, a plurality of notice icons that can recognize what the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon is by just looking at the display or reading the characters are changed to the next variation (the symbol that becomes the look-ahead target variation). It has been carried over to the variable display).

In the symbol variation display, which is a look-ahead target variation, the same conversation notice as the conversation notice explained many times up to now, such as FIGS. 139 (a9) to (a17), is started (FIG. 140 (ab3)). ). Here, the explanation of the conversation notice will be minimized, and the stock notice icon YI will be explained. In FIG. 140 (ab4), of the three notice icons YI of the "change" notice icon YI, the "button" notice icon YI, and the "reach" notice icon YI, the "button" notice icon YI , An effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used is added to each of the notice icons YI of "reach". In FIG. 140 (ab5), the effect image EF11 disappears from each of them, and the notice display YH of the “button” of the aspect b is displayed, and the notice display YH of the “reach” of the aspect b is also displayed. Here, in the stock area SS, the circles of the mutual aspects b partially overlap each other, but they may be displayed so as not to overlap each other. Further, the earlier stocked order may be overlapped with the later one, and conversely, the later one may be overlapped with the earlier one. In FIG. 140 (ab5), since the notice display of the "button" is used, the button effect is executed in the conversation notice. That is, the operation promotion notification image composed of the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. In FIG. 140 (ab6), both the notice display YH of the “button” and the notice display YH of the “reach” have returned to the notice icon YI, and can be used again.

Then, the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period (FIG. 140 (a b7). Then, since the notice display of "reach" is used from the operation promotion notification image, the reach effect is started. The text display has changed to "Reach!" To announce that.

When the conversation notice is completed, in FIG. 140 (ab10), the first stop of the left symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol. When the first stop is performed, the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of "reach". The effect image EF11 may be added to the "reach" notice icon YI before the first stop is performed, may be added at the same time as the first stop is performed, or the first stop may be performed. May be added after the second stop is performed (that is, before the reach state occurs). In FIG. 140 (a b11), the effect image EF11 disappears, and the notice display YH of the "reach" of the aspect b is displayed. In FIG. 140 (ab12), the second stop of the right symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol, and the reach state is reached. ing.

In the reach state, the variable icon change animation is started this time, and as shown in FIG. 140 (ab13), the effect image EF11 is added to the "change" notice icon YI. Then, in FIG. 140 (a b14), the ball of light flies toward the fluctuating icon h0 and hits the fluctuating icon h0, and in the same figure (b15), the fluctuating icon h0 hit by the ball of light is the second. It has changed to the display mode (display mode of blinking white). Further, the notice display YH of "change" is changed to the mode b again, but in FIG. 140 (a16), the notice icon YI is restored and the notice icon YI can be used.

On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (ab17), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the variable icon change animation is started again, and the effect image EF11 is added again to the "change" notice icon YI (FIG. 139 (i b18)).

FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

In FIG. 141 (b19) following from FIG. 140 (b18), the ball of light flies toward the fluctuation icon h0 and hits the fluctuation icon h0. In the same figure (b20), the ball of light collides with the fluctuation. The icon h0 has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). Further, the notice display YH of "change" has changed to the mode b again, but in FIG. 141 (a b21), it has returned to the notice icon YI and can be used. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (a b21) displays the super reach development effect, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the following figure (a b22) shows the VS swordsman reach. The super reach production has started, and the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in large size. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (ab23) displays an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. Even when the super reach effect is started, the variable icon h0 is displayed, and three notice icons YI are still displayed in stock in the stock area SS. As shown in FIG. 141 (b24), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the "button" in the middle of the animation of the duel scene, and in the following FIG. 141 (b25), the first decorative symbol is displayed. The device 208L displays an operation promotion notification image composed of a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 141 (ab25), the operation validity period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the display corresponding to the button operation is not performed. Further, the notice display YH of the "button" is changed to the mode b again, but after that, it returns to the notice icon YI and can be used. Eventually, the button effect is started, and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 141 (ab26)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 141 (a b27) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation effective period started.

The timing of FIG. 141 (a b28) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. The button operation here is an operation for predicting whether or not the cut-in image CI3 of the lord shown in FIG. 17 (32) appears. In this example, the cut-in image CI3 of the lord does not appear and the duel scene. The animation only progresses (FIGS. 141 (i b29) to (i b31). The variable icon change animation is started according to the button operation, and the effect image EF11 is added to the "change" notice icon YI. The display mode of the variable icon may change.

In FIG. 141 (a b32), the effect image EF11 is added again to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and in the following FIG. 141 (a b33), the chance button 136 is imitated on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An operation promotion notification image composed of the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. Eventually, the button effect is started, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 141 (a b34) has a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation valid period started. It is shown. Further, the notice display YH of the "button" is changed to the mode b again (FIG. 141 (a b33)), but after that, it returns to the notice icon YI and can be used.

The timing of FIG. 141 (a b35) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. The button effect here is the final judge effect, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (ib36) displays a large "decoration 5" as a middle symbol along with the scene in which Yoshimune was defeated. ing. After that, the first decorative symbol display device 208L is subjected to the wipe effect performed after FIG. 140 (ia32), and after the notice icon YI is erased as shown in the figure (ia37), "decoration 6" is performed. "-" Decoration 5 "-" Decoration 6 "is a definite combination of lost decorative symbols.

The display of the final judge screen shown in FIG. 141 (ab36) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be executed in some cases.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a roulette effect for the notice icon stock.

The state shown in FIG. 142 (c) is a state in which the special figure is not held, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not perform variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (c1), a roulette RLT for advance notice icon stock is provided in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. This roulette RLT is divided into left and right areas, and the name (icon name) of any one of the various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b) stops in the left area. .. On the other hand, in the area on the right side, one of the cross mark, question mark, and exclamation mark stops. In addition, the colors of multiple areas (for example, white, blue, green, red, and gold) are prepared for both the left area and the right area, and the icon name and mark (symbol) are used in combination. Will be done. In the roulette display RLT shown in FIG. 142 (c), the icon name of "change" is displayed on the green background in the left area, and the cross mark is displayed on the white background in the right area. You cannot get the icon YI. That is, when the cross mark is displayed, the notice icon cannot be acquired.

After that, there is a ball entering the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (c2), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop, but the first decorative symbol on the upper left is displayed. 2 In the decorative pattern, the variable display has started. Further, in the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the increasing animation of the variable icon is started, and in the pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 142 (c3), the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the default is displayed.

When the symbol variation display is started, the roulette display (variation display) is also started in the roulette RLT for the notice icon stock (FIG. 142 (c4)). Here, the roulette display is started before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, but the start of the roulette display may be the same as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the first decoration. It may be after the start of the variable display of the symbol.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (c), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. After the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the variable display of the left region of the roulette RLT is stopped, and the icon name of "reach" is displayed on the green background (FIG. 142 (c)). On the other hand, the fluctuation display in the right area continues. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 142 (c-7-1), the variable display in the right region also stopped, and the question mark was displayed on the green background. With this combination, the notice icon "reach?" Can be acquired, and the notice icon YI of "reach?" Is stocked in the stock area SS shown in FIG. 142 (c. 8). The "reach?" Notice icon YI is a weak notice icon to the extent that a reach effect may be performed, and the reach effect is often not performed as compared with the case where the "reach" notice icon YI is used. ..

When the notice icon YI of "reach?" Is acquired, the display of the roulette RLT may be turned off, but in this example, the display is continued. In this example, the display of the roulette RLT straddles the symbol fluctuation display with the fluctuation display of the left region and the right region stopped, but the display of the roulette RLT is the fluctuation display of the left region and / or the right region. You may straddle the symbol variation display in the state where it is performed. Further, during the stop display of the symbol, the RLT display (the state in which the fluctuation display of the left area and / or the right area is performed or the state in which the fluctuation display of the left area and / or the right area is stopped) is not displayed. It may be configured as follows.

In FIG. 142 (c-9-1), the first stop of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped on the left symbol. In this symbol variation display, the notice icon YI of "reach?" Is not used, and the reach effect is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (c10), "decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-" The combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" fluctuates, and in the figure (c11), the combination is confirmed and displayed. Here, since there is no subsequent hold, the notice icon YI of "reach?" Disappears when the confirmation display is performed. However, if there is a subsequent hold, it may be carried over to the next fluctuation, or it may be carried over without fail. Alternatively, even if there is a subsequent hold, it does not have to be carried over.

The number of fluctuations of the roulette is once for each symbol variation display, but it may be changed a plurality of times. Further, there may be a difference in the number of roulette fluctuations in one symbol variation display between the symbol variation display of the look-ahead target variation and the symbol variation display before that. For example, the symbol variation display of the look-ahead target variation However, the number of fluctuations of the roulette may be increased or conversely decreased as compared with the symbol variation display before that. For example, in the symbol variation display prior to the symbol variation display of the look-ahead target change, the roulette display may be performed once as a look-ahead notice, and in the symbol variation display of the look-ahead target change, the roulette display may be performed three times as a normal notice. However, these times may not be fixed, and may be 0 times.

In addition, the notice icon YI may be stocked by an effect different from the roulette display described here (for example, a mini game such as a rock-paper-scissors showdown), and while the roulette display is being performed, the notice icon YI may be stocked. It is not necessary to produce a mini-game or the like that can acquire the game. Further, in the symbol variation display in which the roulette display is performed or is performed, it is not necessary to produce a mini game or the like capable of acquiring the notice icon YI.

Next, the reach fanning effect will be described.

It is the same up to FIG. 142 (c), and in FIG. 142 (c-9-2-1), the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used is attached to the notice icon YI of "reach?". It has been added. In the following FIG. 142 (c-9-2-2), the reach fanning effect is started, and the fanning variation is performed in the first decorative symbol. That is, here, the left symbol and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol are switched to low-speed fluctuation, the left symbol rotates upward, the right symbol rotates downward, and the effect of temporarily stopping at the center position in the vertical direction is executed. (Fig. 142 (U 9-2-3). However, as shown in Fig. 142 (U 9-2-4), the temporary stop is not performed, and the reach fanning effect ends in failure. Note that the effect image EF11 is It disappears when the reach fanning effect is started, but it may be continuously displayed on the notice icon YI of "reach?" During the reach fanning effect. Figure 142 (U 9-2-5a). The notice icon YI of "reach?" Is indicated by a circle indicating that it has been used, but this circle disappears immediately and the notice icon YI can be reused. In addition, FIG. 142 (c). In the first decorative symbol in 9-2-5a), all three decorative symbols fluctuate at a low speed, and in the same figure (c 9-2-6a), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 8". The combination of the decorative symbols of the loss fluctuates, and the combination is confirmed and displayed (Fig. 142 (9-2-6a)), but the notice icon YI of "Reach?" Is before the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. Hides in.

In this example, the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used is added to the notice icon YI, but the mode of the notice icon YI itself changes before the start of use or at the time of disclosure of use. You may. For example, the notice icon YI itself may become larger, or the color of the notice icon YI itself may change. Further, during use, the original mode may be restored, or the mode may remain changed.

Next, another example of the reach fanning effect will be described.

FIG. 142 (c 9-2-4b) is the same state as that of FIG. 142 (c 9-2-4a), and is a state after the reach fanning effect has failed. In this example, all three decorative symbols do not change at low speed as they are, but instead switch to high speed fluctuation (Fig. 142 (U9-2-5b)), which is shown by the notice icon YI of "Reach?". In FIG. 142 (U9-2-6b) in which the circle mark disappeared, the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of "Reach?" Again. In FIG. 142 (U9-2-7b) following, the effect image EF11 is added. In the first decorative symbol, the fanning fluctuation is started again, and here, the left symbol and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol start moving toward the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed, without passing through the middle symbols. , The left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged and displayed in front of the middle symbol (Fig. 142 (c-9-2-9b)), and then a temporary stop is performed and the reach state is established (Fig. 142 (c9-)). 2-10b))) Finally, the reach fanning effect was successful. It should be noted that FIGS. 142 (9-2-2) to the same figure (c 9-2-4a) or the same figure (c 9-). Reach fanning effect performed in 2-4b) and the reach fanning effect of the same figure (c 9-2-5b) to the same figure (c 9-2-9b) or the same figure (c 9-2-9b') described later. May be a series of reach fanning effects.

Next, an example will be described in which the reach fanning effect fails even though the fanning fluctuation is restarted.

As shown in FIG. 142 (c-9-2-8b) above, each of the left symbol and the right symbol begins to move toward the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and is shown in FIG. 142 (c 9-2-9b'). In 1), both the left symbol and the right symbol have passed each other through the middle symbol, and the enlarged display in front of the middle symbol as shown in (Fig. 143 (U9-2-9b)) is not performed, and in the end, No temporary stop was performed, and all three decorative symbols fluctuated at low speed (Fig. 142 (U9-2-9b'2)). The combination of the lost decorative patterns of "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 8" fluctuates, and the combination is confirmed and displayed.

The effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of "reach?" Every time a new fanning fluctuation is started, but the reach fanning effect is a matter as a series of effects, and the effect image EF11 is the first. It may be added to the notice icon YI of "reach?" Only once.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing another effect using the roulette RLT for the notice icon stock and an example of the effect accompanied by button operation.

FIG. 143 (U9-2-4c) is an example continuing from FIG. 142 (U9-2-3), and shows a successful example of the reach fanning effect. Here, the left and right symbols are aligned in the center of the vertical direction, and before the temporary stop, each of the left and right symbols is enlarged and displayed (Fig. 143 (c-9-2-4c)), and then the temporary stop is performed. , The reach state is established (Fig. 143 (c-9-2-5c)).

Further, FIG. 143 (c 7-2-1) is an example continuing from FIG. 142 (c 6), which is FIG. 14
In 3 (U-7-2-1), an exclamation mark is displayed on a red background in the right region of the roulette RLT. The result is a combination of the "reach" icon name on a green background and the exclamation mark on a red background. With this combination, it is possible to acquire the "reach" notice icon YI, which is more reliable than the "reach?" Notice icon YI. In addition, by combining the icon name of "reach" on the red background and the question mark on the green background, only the notice icon YI of "reach?" May be obtained, or the notice icon YI of "reach" may be obtained. May be able to be acquired. In addition, if the icon name of "Reach" is displayed on the red background and the surprise mark is displayed on the red background and the notice icon YI of "Reach" is acquired, the icon name of "Reach" on the green background and the surprise mark on the red background are surprised. The symbol variation display using the "reach" notice icon may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired. Also, if the "reach" icon name is displayed on the red background and the question mark is displayed on the green background and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired, the "reach" icon name on the green background and the question on the red background The symbol variation display using the "reach" notice icon may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired. That is, the background color in which the icon name is displayed is more related to the reliability of the jackpot than the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed. Therefore, if the icon name of "Reach" is displayed on the red background and the surprise mark is displayed on the green background and the notice icon YI of "Reach" is acquired, the icon name of "Reach" on the green background and the surprise mark on the green background are surprised. The symbol variation display using the "reach" notice icon is more likely to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired. Furthermore, when the "reach" icon name and the surprise mark are displayed on the red background and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired, the "reach" icon name and the surprise mark are displayed on the green background. When it is displayed and the notice icon YI of "reach" is acquired, the possibility that the symbol variation display using the notice icon of "reach" becomes a big hit is the same. However, the background color in which the icon name is displayed and the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed may have the same relationship with the reliability of the jackpot. Alternatively, the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed may be more related to the reliability of the jackpot than the background color in which the icon name is displayed.

The color names in the above description can be expressed in a display mode. That is, "red" is the fifth display mode, and "green" is the fourth display mode (the same applies to the following description).

Further, FIG. 143 (c 7-3-1) is also an example continuing from FIG. 142 (c 5). In FIG. 143 (c 7-3-1), the left region of the roulette RLT has a red background. The "reach" icon name is displayed, and an exclamation mark is displayed on a red background in the right area. With this combination, the "reach" notice icon YI may be acquired for the first time. That is, if the background color is not a red background in both the left area and the right area, the notice icon YI of "reach" cannot be obtained, and if one is a green background, the reliability of "reach?" It becomes a notice icon YI. Further, in this case, the case where the red background stops first may be configured so that the red background stops on the other side more easily than when the green background stops first, or the probability is the same. It may be.

Further, FIG. 143 (c 7-4-1) is another example continuing from FIG. 142 (c 5). In FIG. 143 (c 7-4-1), the left region of the roulette RLT is shown in FIG. The box icon shown in 117 (a) is displayed, and the number of stocks is displayed in the right area. In this example, one "box" icon shown in FIG. 117 (a) can be acquired. The number of stocks is 0 to 3. Further, either a "box" or a cross mark may be displayed in the left area, and a color (white, red, gold, rainbow) may be displayed in the right area. In this case, for example, if it is a cross mark and a rainbow, the box-shaped notice icon YI cannot be obtained, and if it is "box" and red, the "red box" notice icon YI can be obtained. it can.

Further, FIG. 143 (c 7-5-1) is another example following from FIG. 142 (c 5). In FIG. 143 (c 7-5-1), the left region of the roulette RLT is gold. (6th display mode) The icon name of "reach" is displayed on the background, and an exclamation mark is displayed on the gold background in the right area. With this combination, as shown in FIG. 143 (c-7-5-2), it is possible to acquire the golden "reach" notice icon YI. The golden "reach" notice icon is more reliable than the normal "reach" notice icon. Alternatively, the reliability of the jackpot may be high.

Even if both the left area and the right area have a gold background in this way, only the same notice icon that can be obtained when both the left area and the right area have a red background can be obtained. The gold background may be easier to hit than the red background in terms of pre-reading target fluctuations, while making it impossible.

Further, the display of the roulette RLT and the stocked notice icon YI may cause a contradiction. For example, the roulette RLT display is "reach" and "?", But the notice icon YI is the "reach" notice icon, and the roulette RLT display is "reach" and "!". The notice icon YI may be a notice icon of "SP" representing super reach, or the notice icon YI may be a green display icon even though the background is a gold background in the display of roulette RLT. In such a contradiction, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than the contradiction does not occur, or conversely, the lost symbol may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. Further, when the background of the roulette RLT display is a gold background but the notice icon YI is a green display icon, the jackpot may be confirmed.

In addition, the roulette may be changed again. For example, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at "reach" and "x", the right region may be re-variated to finally become a combination of "reach" and "!". Further, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at "reach" and "?", The combination of "SP" and "?" May be finally obtained by re-variating the left region. Further, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at the "box" icon and "x1" shown in FIG. 117 (a), the "red box" icon and the "red box" icon and "red box" are finally displayed by re-variating both areas. It may be a combination of "x2". Further, even if only one of the left region and the right region is fluctuating and the other is stopped, the stopped other may be re-variated.

Although the roulette effect has been described above, in the example here, the icon names are all "reach", but the same applies to the names of the various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b). However, depending on the icon name, only the question mark or only the question mark or cross mark is displayed on the green background color, or only the exclamation mark or only the exclamation mark or cross mark is displayed on the red and gold background colors. May be good. Furthermore, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). 5 and No. 23 and No. The icon name of the notice icon that leads to the confirmation of the big hit such as 24 may not be combined with the question mark. That is, only the combination of "Patrol lamp" and "X-mark" or the combination of "Patrol lamp" and "Exclamation mark" may be displayed. In addition, the icon name of the notice icon that leads to a relatively high reliability of the jackpot (for example, the icon of No. 3 "red chance", No. 4 "super hot", and No. 5 "iron plate" In the case of (name), it may be combined with only the "exclamation mark". Further, the icon name of the notice icon that leads to the confirmation of the big hit may be rainbow color (seventh display mode) in both the background color of the icon name and the background color of the mark (symbol).

In addition, the icon name of the notice icon that leads to the confirmation of the big hit (for example, No. 5 "iron plate""
The mark (symbol) may be announced by the background color of the icon name). For example, if the background color of the "iron plate" that stopped earlier is green, it is a warning that the cross mark may stop, and if it is rainbow, the stop of the exclamation mark is confirmed. May be good.

Further, the icon name (left area in this example) may always stop first, or conversely, the mark (right area in this example) may always stop first. Further, if the mark stops first when it is not known which one stops first, the cross mark may not stop.

In addition, when the notice icon is stocked in the roulette effect, the notice icon may be used without fail.

Next, an example of an effect involving button operation will be described.

In FIG. 143 (d a1), the symbol variation display to be read ahead is performed without holding the special figure, and only one notice icon YI of the "box" is stocked in the stock area SS. .. In FIG. 143 (d a2), the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the left side of the stocked advance notice icon YI. The operation promotion notification image here is also an image that encourages the operation of the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and is a button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136 and a remaining time display that represents the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of a meter MT. The timing of FIG. 121 (A31-2-2) is before the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining time display meter MT does not have to be displayed before the start of the operation valid period, and the operation valid period. It may be displayed at the same time as the start of.

The operation valid period is started at the timing of FIG. 143 (d a3), and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 143 (d a4) is a display mode when a little time has passed since the start of the operation valid period. It is indicated by.

The timing of FIG. 143 (d a5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the operation of the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, in FIG. 143 (d a6), after the notice icon YI is covered with the effect image EF13, as shown in the same figure (d a7), The effect image EF13 disappears, and the notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is closed, is changed to the mode d, which is the display mode in which the box is open. An animation (box opening animation) that pops out is displayed.

The change of the notice icon YI to the mode d in which the box is opened may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed when the validity period has expired.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 143 (d a8), the notice icon YI changes from the mode d in which the box is open to the mode a in which the box is closed and is not erased. In FIG. 143 (d a9), the notice display YH of the “red change” emitted from the notice icon YI is used, and the display mode of the variable icon, which has been the default display mode (first display mode), is blue. Has changed to the display mode (third display mode).

In FIG. 143 (a10), the operation promotion notification image is displayed again on the left side of the stock notice icon YI, and then the operation validity period is started, and the remaining time display meter shown in FIG. The MT is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation validity period started.

The timing of FIG. 143 (d a12) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 143 (a13), the notice icon YI changes to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed from the inside in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period. It has been released. Then, in FIG. 143 (d a14), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed mode a.

In this example, the operation promotion notification image is displayed each time, but the operation promotion notification image may not be displayed and a so-called back button effect may be performed.

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example in which the display mode of the notice icon YI of the “button” changes according to the button operation, and another example.

In FIG. 144 (Eb1), the super reach effect of the VS swordsman reach is executed, and the animation of the duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in FIG. 144 (d1), the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). 21 "button" notice icons YI are in stock. In FIG. 144 (Eb2), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and in FIG. 144 (Eb3), a large size is formed in the central region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The button image 136a is displayed, after which the button image 136a becomes slightly smaller and the remaining time display meter MT is added (FIG. 144 (Eb4)). Further, in this example, the characters "continuous hit" that require continuous operation of the chance button 136 and the confrontation meter MTV that indicates the superiority or inferiority of Yoshimune and the swordsman are also displayed. The confrontation meter MTV has a blue meter on the Yoshimune side (left side) and a red meter on the swordsman side (right side). At the start of the display of the confrontation meter MTV, the blue meter is halved and the red meter is halved. At the timing shown in FIG. 144 (d4), the operation validity period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the display corresponding to the button operation is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started, and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 144 (d5)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 144 (d6) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation effective period started. Although the confrontation meter MTV is overlapped by a part of the fluctuation icon h0, the confrontation meter MTV may be displayed so as to overlap the fluctuation icon h0, and the confrontation is confronted at a position where the fluctuation icon h0 does not overlap. The meter MTV may be displayed.

The timing of FIG. 144 (d7) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (Eb8), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. However, the effect image EF11 here does not notify that the notice icon YI will be used from now on.

Since the repeated hitting operation is required, the player operates the chance button 136 even at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (d9). Then, also in FIG. 144 (Eb10), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. This effect image EF11 disappears immediately (FIG. 144 (Eb11)), and the player operates the chance button 136 even at the timing of FIG. 144 (Eb12). Then, also in FIG. 144 (Eb13), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. If the interval between the button operations of the player is shortened, the effect image EF11 is added to and disappears from the notice icon YI at high speed, and the effect image EF11 appears to be lit all the time.

The blue meter of the confrontation meter MTV increases according to the number of operations of the chance button 136. However, in this confrontation meter MTV, when the operation validity period is started, the red meter of the swordsman automatically increases with the passage of time. If the chance button 136 is repeatedly pressed so as not to lose the increasing speed of the red meter, the increase of the blue meter wins over the increase of the red meter, and the number of blue meters increases. When everything becomes a blue meter as shown in FIG. 144 (Eb13), Yoshimune's cut-in image CI3 appears as shown in FIG. 144 (Eb13). On the other hand, when everything becomes a red meter, a cut-in image of a swordsman (not shown) appears here.

The timing at which the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the "button" may be not each time the chance button 136 is operated once, but every time the blue meter is incremented by one scale on the confrontation meter MTV.

Next, an example in which the stock number of the notice icon YI is displayed will be described.

FIG. 144 (o a1) is the same state as shown in FIG. 120 (a 9-1), and the icon of the villager character of the variable icon h0 wins over the icon of the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 144 (Oa2), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started by the victory of the villager character of the variable icon h0. That is, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a) displayed in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI of the "box" of 1 comes out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed large. At this stage, the display of the number of stocks (here, “stock × 1”) is started between the second decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second reserved number display. That is, when the display of the number of stocks is started before the notice icon YI reaches the stock area SS, and it is unknown how many notice icons could be acquired just by looking at the appearance area AS. Can know the number of acquisitions by displaying the number of stocks before the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. In FIG. 144 (o a3), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. In FIG. 144 (o a3), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS.

After that, in FIG. 144 (oa4), which shows the state in which the symbol variation is displayed in the state where the hold is exhausted and the special figure is no longer held, one notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS, and the number of stocks. The display of is also "stock x 1".

In FIG. 144 (Oa5), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI that was displayed in stock in the reach state is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 144 (Oa6), the notice icon YI changes to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of "change" is emitted from the box. Due to the use of the notice icon YI in this way, the display of the number of stocks has once changed to "stock x 0" (FIG. 144 (oa6)), and the display of the number of stocks itself has disappeared (FIG. 144). (Oa7)). After that, it continues to FIG. 121 (A33). If the same notice icon YI is used repeatedly, the display of the number of stocks does not change, and in this case, "stock x 1" continues to be displayed. Even if the same notice icon YI is used repeatedly, if it is used once, the display of the number of stocks may be once set to "stock x 0" and immediately returned to "stock x 1". .. When the stock number of the notice icon becomes 0, the “stock × 0” may not be displayed and the display of the stock number itself may be deleted as shown in FIG. 144 (oa7).

Further, a plurality of stock areas SS may be provided. In the example shown below, two stock areas SS are provided, a first stock area SSR on the right side and a second stock area SSL on the left side.

FIG. 144 (Ob1) is also in the same state as shown in FIG. 120 (A9-1), and the icon of the villager character of the variable icon h0 wins over the icon of the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 144 (Oa2), the stock animation of the notice icon YI is started, and the notice icon YI of the “box” comes out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. After that, one notice icon YI of the "box" is stocked in each of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side (FIG. 144 (oa3). An animation in which the notice icon YI of the "box" is split may be displayed, but it may be displayed instantaneously in each of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side. The number of notice icons YI acquired is only one.

After that, in FIG. 144 (ob4) showing the state of the symbol variation display in the state where the hold is exhausted and the special figure is no longer held, the first stock area SSL on the left side and the second stock area SSR on the right side are displayed. Also, the notice icon YI of the "box" is stocked one by one.

In FIG. 144 (Ob5), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI that was displayed in stock in the reach state is used. At this time, only one of the two notice icons YI may be used. In addition, an effect of fortune-telling which notice icon YI will be used (which box will open) or an effect of giving a notice may be performed. Here, both notice icons YI are used at the same time. That is, as shown in FIG. 144 (Ob6), both notice icons YI change to the mode d in which the box is opened at the same time, and the notice display YH of "change" is emitted from each box. Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (Oa7), the two notice icons YI disappear at the same time.

FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of an effect continuing from FIG. 144 and an example of displaying the same notice icon in a plurality of modes.

In FIG. 145 (Ob8) following from FIG. 144 (Ob7), the notice display YH of "change" emitted to each of the left and right is changed to a ball of light YHb, respectively. Therefore, one light ball YHb is displayed on the left and one on the right. In FIG. 145 (Ob9), both the light ball YHb on the left side and the light ball YHb on the right side fly toward the variable icon h0, become one with the variable icon h0, and display the variable icon h0. An animation that changes is displayed. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 145 (Ob10) has changed from the first display mode to the third display mode. This is based on the two notice icons YI, so it has changed by two steps. It should be noted that the change may be made by only one step. After that, it continues to FIG. 121 (A37).

The reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on how the notice icon YI is stocked. That is, normally, stock is carried out in order from a fixed position of the stock area SS. For example, the stock is stocked in the order of the first stock position, the second stock position, and the third stock position. However, contrary to this order, the stock may be stocked in the order of the third stock position, the second stock position, and the first stock position, and in such an irregular case, in a normal case. In comparison, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher, or conversely, lower. Further, while normally stocked in both the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side, irregularly, only one stock area (for example, the second stock area SSL on the left side) is stocked. ) May be stocked only. Even in such anomalous cases, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than in the normal case, or conversely, it may be lower. Furthermore, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on whether the stock is stored in the first stock area SSR on the right side or the second stock area SSL on the left side. For example, if the first stock area SSR on the right side is normal and has priority, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher if it is stocked in the second stock area SSL on the left side. Or, conversely, it may be lower.

Further, even if the acquired notice icon YI is a "white" notice icon, when the white notice icon YI is displayed in the respective areas SL and SSR, the white notice icon YI is displayed in both cases. , The white notice icon YI and the red notice icon YI may be displayed. In the latter case, the notice display YH emitted from the acquired notice icon YI may be expected. For example, when the white notice icon YI is displayed in both cases, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b) is displayed. The notice display of "change" of the default color of No. 6 is released, but when the white notice icon YI and the red notice icon YI are displayed, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b) is displayed. The red "red change" notice display of 7 may be emitted.

FIGS. 145 (oc1) to 145 (od) are diagrams showing an example in which the same notice icon is displayed in a plurality of modes.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 145 (oc1) displays a background screen which has not been shown so far, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (U1-2-1) is displayed. Similarly, the background screen of the sea is displayed. In FIG. 145 (oc1), the icon change notice display IYH of “bancho” is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and the icon change notice display IYH of “bancho” is shown in FIG. 139 (a). Similar to the icon change notice display IYH of the "bancho" shown in a4), the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). It is displayed that the notice icon YI of 6 "change" has been acquired.

In FIG. 145 (Oc2), the “change” notice icon YI has moved to the stock area SS, and in FIG. 145 (Oc3), it is displayed in the stock area SS. Further, in this example, the band icon OBI is displayed on the left side of the background screen, and the name of the acquired notice icon YI (here, “change”) is also displayed on the band icon OBI. Therefore, in this example, the acquired notice icon YI is displayed in two places. Since the band icon OBI is an icon displayed on the background screen, any display (for example, the display of the first decorative symbol, the display of the second decorative symbol, or the second hold icon h12 to the second not shown here). 4 It is displayed on the back side of the hold icon h14 (display, etc.).

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 145 (oc4), after the symbol variation display is completed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, in the same diagram (oc5), the symbol variation display that is the look-ahead target variation is displayed. It has been started. When the symbol variation display, which is the look-ahead target variation, is started, the notice icon YI is used. In FIG. 145 (oc6-1), the variable icon change animation using the notice icon YI is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 145 (Oc6-1), the effect image EF11 is added to the "change" notice icon YI, and in the same figure (Oc7), the stocked "change" notice icon YI is Disappear. Subsequently, in FIG. 145 (oc8), a ball of light flies from the stock area SS toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. As shown in FIG. 145 (oc9), the variable icon h0 on which the ball of light collides has changed to the second display mode (display mode of blinking white). On the other hand, no effect is performed on the band icon OBI, and no change has occurred in the display of the name of the acquired notice icon YI displayed on the band icon OBI. However, some animation such as a variable icon change animation is also executed in the band icon OBI, and some change (for example, blinking display, display color change, etc.) may occur in the display of the acquired notice icon YI name.

The notice icon YI in the stock area SS disappears early with use, but the band icon OBI is displayed at least until the variable icon h0 actually changes, as shown in FIG. 145 (oc10). In addition, it disappears after the change icon h0 changes.

The examples shown after FIG. 145 (oc6-2-1) are examples in which the "change" notice icon YI is reused. In FIG. 145 (Oc6-1), which continues from FIG. 145 (Oc6-1), what was previously the notice icon YI is a notice display of the "change" of the aspect b shown in FIG. 117 (b). Although it has changed to YH, in the figure (Oc6-2-2), it has returned to the notice icon YI and can be used. In FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-3), the reach effect is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-3), the display of the normal reach effect is displayed. When the normal reach effect is started, the background screen of the sea is switched to the background screen of the normal reach effect, and along with this, the band icon OBI displaying the name of the acquired notice icon YI disappears. On the other hand, the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS continues to be displayed even during the normal reach production.

In FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-5), the normal reach effect is completed, the background screen of the sea is displayed again on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the band icon displaying the name of the notice icon YI. The OBI display has also been restored. In this way, the display of the band icon OBI on which the name of the notice icon YI is displayed is displayed across the reach effect. After that, the band icon OBI disappears during the shaking fluctuation of the decorative pattern, in other words, before the definite display shown in FIGS. 145 (oc6-2-7) to (oc6-2-8) is performed. .. In addition, the display of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS also disappears. In this example, it can be seen that there is no subsequent hold and the display related to the notice icon YI (display of the band icon OBI, display of the notice icon YI of the stock area SS) has disappeared, but there is a subsequent hold. However, before the confirmation display, the display related to the notice icon YI (display of the band icon OBI, display of the notice icon YI of the stock area SS) may disappear, or conversely, if there is a subsequent hold, the notice is given. The display related to the icon YI may be continuously displayed until the final display.

FIG. 145 (od) is a diagram showing a case where a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked. In this example, in addition to the display of the notice icon YI of the stock area SS, the display using the band icon OBI is also performed. That is, one band icon OBI is displayed for each notice icon YI.

In the examples so far, the band icon OBI was displayed as a background display, but in the example shown in FIG. 146 (e), the band icon OBI narrows the display area of the first decorative symbol. The display of the second decorative pattern is performed at the upper part of the band icon OBI.

In the example shown in FIG. 146 (of), the display area of the first decorative symbol is 1 because the three notice icons YI, which is the maximum number of stocks, are stocked and the three band icons OBI are displayed. It is narrowed to about / 4, and the first decorative design is overlapped by the notice icon YI displayed in stock. However, the first decorative symbol may be prioritized so that the first decorative symbol overlaps the notice icon YI. The second hold number display does not overlap with the band icon OBI. Further, both the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are visible. In this example, the first decorative symbol, the background display, the hold frame UI display, the variable icon h0, and the hold icon are narrowed, but the second decorative symbol display, the second hold number display, and the stock are stored. The display of the notice icon YI is not narrowed. As an example of the display narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI, the first decorative symbol, the background display, the display of the hold frame UI, the variable icon h0, the hold icon, and various notice displays (for example,
List the above-mentioned conversation notices (Den-sama's conversation image CI1, grandfather's conversation image CI2, mini-game, icon change notice, timer notice effect, meter display (white meter MW mentioned above, meter display MD described later, etc.)), etc. Can be done. That is, all of the above-listed displays may be used as the display narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. In addition, as an example of the display that cannot be narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI, the display of the second decorative symbol, the display of the second number of holds, the stock notice icon YI, the bar display VB for volume adjustment, and the effect customization are turned on. Display of the set mode name (for example, the frame RW at the upper right of the screen and the mode name displayed in the frame RW), various error displays (displays and warnings related to various errors described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116). Display), menu icon MI, volume adjustment icon VI, and brightness adjustment icon BI, "Current Daitomo mode level (here level 1) and experience value (EXP) (here 0)" in FIG. 74 (e1). ) ”Display, simultaneous production display, etc. can be listed. That is, all of the above-listed displays may be used as the display that cannot be narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable.

FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of an effect having a configuration in which a display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

So far, the description centered on the first decorative symbol display device 208L has been given, but the content displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed (the same applies to the following description). Further, the arrangement of the display means is not limited to the horizontal arrangement, and is the same in the vertical arrangement. That is, it does not mean that the technology described in this specification cannot be applied simply because the hardware configuration is different. From a technical point of view, even if the display means are arranged side by side, they are arranged vertically. Even if there is, it is applicable. Hereinafter, as an example of the vertical arrangement of the display means, an example in which the display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L will be described. Here, the display means arranged below is referred to as a fourth display means 208M'and will be described.

FIG. 146 (ka1) shows a fourth display means 208M'arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (ka1) is in the initial position. The fourth display means 208M'is surrounded by a frame fm around the display screen, and the upper edge of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M'at the initial position is the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps from the front side. The fourth display means 208M'is arranged on the front side (player side) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is an operation position that overlaps the central portion of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side ( It is possible to move from the initial position toward the position of the fourth display means 208M'in FIG. 146 (ka2'). That is, the fourth display means 208M'is also a movable means capable of raising and lowering. Further, in addition to the elevating operation, it may be movable in the left-right direction as in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a modification of the fourth display means 208M', it may be fixedly arranged at the initial position.

The fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (ka1) displays a hold frame UI'having a configuration similar to the hold frame UI previously displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. This hold frame UI'also has a hold icon display area HIS &', a variable icon display area CIS', and an effect icon display area DIS'. A pedestal hs0'is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS'. The hold icon display area HIS'is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS', and four stages (first stage hs1' to fourth stage hs4') are arranged on the left base icon bIl'. The effect icon display area DIS'is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS', and the right base icon bIr'is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS'.

Further, in the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (ka1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in each of the first stage hs1'and the second stage hs2'. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS'. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1.

Further, a background screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (ka1). This background screen is the background screen of the sea. On the other hand, the background screen of the fourth display means 208M'is a solid white color, and this solid white color indicates that the background screen is not shown. Then, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed. The state of FIG. 146 (ka1) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a1).

In FIG. 146 (ka2), there is a ball entering the starting port 230 of the special figure 1, and the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, resulting in a total of three. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (ka2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3". In accordance with the increase in the hold of the special figure, or regardless of the increase in the hold of the special figure, the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (ka2) has the first hold, which has been the default display mode so far. Both the icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). It has changed to the icon of aspect a of the villager type described in 17. Further, the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3'. The third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by the increase animation in the default display mode, but the third hold represented by the third hold icon h13 is the hold subject to the look-ahead notice. The state of FIG. 146 (ka2) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a3-1).

The right base icon bIr'of the effect icon display area DIS'in the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (ka3) has the aspect a of the type of pantograph shown in FIG. 118 (c) as the opponent icon TI. The standby mode) icon is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner, the appearance area AS is displayed surrounded by a frame, and the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (a) is contained therein. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed. The state of FIG. 146 (ka3) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a6).

In the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (ka4), a rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is performed, and the villager character of the variable icon h0 wins the panda character of the opponent icon TI and appears. The stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the area AS has started. That is, the notice icon YI of the "box" that was displayed in the appearance area AS has come out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed large. The state of FIG. 146 (ka4) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a10).

The fourth display means 208M'also has a stock area SS in which the notice icon YI is stocked, and the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (f) has a notice in the stock area SS. The icon YI is displayed. The state of FIG. 146 (f) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a11).

FIG. 146 (ka6) shows a state in which the symbol variation is being displayed in a state where the hold is digested and the special figure is no longer held. The symbol variation display performed here is a symbol variation display that is a look-ahead target variation. The panda character of the opponent icon TI and the appearance area AS have disappeared. Further, the variable icon h0 is the default display mode. The state of FIG. 146 (ka6) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a24).

In FIG. 146 (ka7), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, the mode changes to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of "reach" is emitted from the box. In the figure (ka8), the notice icon YI used has disappeared, and the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed. The notice display YH disappears after a certain display period elapses after the appearance, and in FIG. 146 (ka9), the notice display YH of "reach" disappears. After this, the reach effect may or may not be performed. When the reach effect is performed, the notice display YH of "reach" may continue to be displayed until the reach effect is started.

Subsequently, a modified example will be described. It is the same up to FIG. 146 (ka4), and in FIG. 146 (kaa5'), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the stock animation of the notice icon YI here, the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS of the fourth display means 208M'moves from the fourth display means 208M' to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The animation is played. At this time, the notice icon YI has a period of being displayed across the fourth display means 208M'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the animation is such that the fourth display means 208M'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L do not straddle, and the fourth display means 208M' jumps (instantaneously moves) to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. May be good.

The fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (ka2') has moved from the initial position shown by the dotted line to the operating position, and covers the central area of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. There is. The fourth display means 208M'may move from the initial position before the start of the mini game, may move at the same time as the start of the mini game, may move during the mini game, or may be mini. You may move after the mini-game ends only if you win the game. In addition, before the result of the mini-game is obtained, it may be moved as a notice of the result of the mini-game. In this case, moving may be easier to win the mini-game than not moving, or conversely, it may be harder to win. The fourth display means M'may be configured to be in a stationary state at the operating position across one or a plurality of symbol variation displays during the execution of the mini game. Here, when a mini-game is played across a plurality of symbol variation displays, the operation position to the initial position (or the initial position) (or) between the result of the mini-game in the symbol variation display and the end of each symbol variation display. The fourth display means M'may be configured to move to a position different from the operating position and the initial position). Further, the fourth display means M'is configured so as not to move from the operating position (that is, to be in a stationary state at the operating position) during the symbol stop display. However, the fourth display means M'may move from the operating position during the symbol stop display. Further, even if the fourth display means M'is moving between the initial position and the maximum movement position, at least a part of the period during which the symbol variation display is definitively displayed, or the entire period. Is configured to maintain a stationary state. In addition, in the state of temporary stop in the pseudo continuous effect or the state of shaking fluctuation before the confirmation display, the movement may be continued or stopped. Further, only when the fourth display means M'is performing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the stop operation may be performed as described above. Further, the fourth display means M'may be configured to stop at an initial position, a maximum moving position, or a predetermined stop position in accordance with the timing at which the symbol variation display is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 146 (f1) shows an example in which the initial position of the fourth display means 208M'is above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, the hold frame UI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the mini game is also played on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Figure 146
In the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (f1), the icon change notice display IYH of "bancho" is displayed. Further, the background image is displayed on the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (F1) without being omitted. In the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (kab2), the name of the stock notice icon YM (here, "change") is displayed as the band icon OBI'. That is, when the notice icon YM is stocked, the name is also displayed on the fourth display means 208M'. The display method is not limited to the band icon OBI', and may be a full screen.

In the example shown in FIG. 146 (f3'), the band icon OBI'' is displayed from the fourth display means 208M'to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the band icon OBI'' is a stock notice. The name of the icon YM (here, "change") is shown. The name of the notice icon YM in the band icon OBI ″ is displayed straddling the fourth display means 208M ′ and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In addition, also in the example shown in FIG. 146 (f3'), the band icon OBI is displayed while narrowing the display area of the first decorative symbol described with reference to FIG. 145 (e) and FIG. 145 (of). The method is applicable. That is, the portion of the band icon OBI ″ displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L narrows the display area of the first decorative symbol. Even when the fourth display means 208M'moves and the area overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208L expands, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L The display area may be similarly narrowed in accordance with the movement of the fourth display means 208M'.

The fourth display means 208M'described above can be replaced with the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or another display means (for example, the light guide plate IL, It can also be replaced with a POV display 224I, etc., which will be described later.

Subsequently, an example of production using other production means will be described.

The state shown in FIG. 146 (ka c1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a7), and in the following FIG. 139 (ka c2), the mini-game dedicated accessory is on the left and right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 225 has appeared. The rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini-game B is performed not only by the display of the villager character of the variable icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, but also by the mini-game exclusive character 225. In the mini-game exclusive character 225, the left side is the character of the villager with the variable icon h0, and the right side is the character of the panda with the opponent icon TI. The production operation of the mini-game exclusive character 225 may be started after the rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is started, may be started at the same time as the rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is started, or may be started before the rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is started. You may be. In addition, when the mini-game is won, the effect of enlivening the victory may be performed by the mini-game dedicated accessory 225, or other movable effect means (for example, the fourth display means 208M'and FIG. 14). It may be performed by a movable effect by a Senryobako accessory 224H or the like), or by a light emission effect by a light emitting means.

Further, other display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display means 208M, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I described later, etc.) are also related to the mini game. The production may be performed.

146 (K d1) to 146 (K d5) are diagrams showing an example of an effect using the POV display 224I.

In this example, the POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body described with reference to FIG. 15 is provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The POV display 224I, also referred to as a versa writer, is movable in the vertical direction and is configured to be overlappable on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

The states shown in FIGS. 146 (ka d1) to FIG. 146 (ka d3) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 120 (a 7) to 120 (a 9-1), and in FIG. 146 (ka d4), FIG. The same state as shown in 120 (A 9-1), that is, the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini-game B is performed, and the villager character of the variable icon h0 wins the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 146 (Kad4), a POV display 224I appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the POV display 224I has a picture of the notice icon YI acquired by winning the mini game and "GET". Character is displayed. Here, even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and the display area is visible. You may display the effect with. Further, in the state in which the POV display 224I is accelerating from the stationary state to the constant speed state and the state in which the POV display 224I is decelerating from the constant speed state to the stationary state, the display area can be seen more than in the constant speed state. It is easy, and even in the state of acceleration or deceleration, the effect display may be performed in the above display area. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the above display area only in the accelerating state or the decelerating state. Further, in the accelerating state or the decelerating state, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is darkened so that the display of the POV display 224I is conspicuous. May be good. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area during the acceleration state, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached.

In FIG. 146 (ka d5), the POV display 224I has returned to the initial position from the position on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, so that the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is easy to see. ..

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an effect example using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (kae1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a1). However, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208N. Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 147 (kae1) are in the initial positions of each other and are in an open state (separated state), and the first decorative symbol display device. The display screen of 208L is visible.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (kae2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a3-1), and the state shown in FIG. 147 (kae3) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a4). is there.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (kae4) is a state in which the hold that has been the first hold is digested and the symbol variation display is started. The first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 147 (kae4) remains stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed. , The variable display is started, and in the second hold number display which is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by one to become “2”.

In FIG. 147 (Ka e5), the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B has started, and the effect image EF1'is separately displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 147 (kae6), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which had been in the initial positions until then, have begun to approach each other and are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap at both ends of the first decorative symbol.

In FIG. 147 (kae7), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in contact with each other and are completely closed, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not visible. .. When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N come into contact with each other, the effect images EF1'that have been separated so far are displayed as one.

In FIG. 147 (ka e8), the effect image EF1'disappears, the villager character of the variable icon h0 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the panda of the opponent icon TI is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Character is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the appearance area AS is displayed surrounded by a frame, and among them, No. 117 (a) shown in FIG. 117 (a). The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the number of times of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B (here, "first time") is displayed on the panda character of the opponent icon TI. The number display here indicates the current number of confrontations, but it may be a number display (for example, "three more times") that announces how many times the rock-paper-scissors confrontation will be held after that. According to this example, the hold icon is hidden.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (ka e9) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a 3-7), and the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is started.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (ka e10) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a 9-1), and the villager character with the variable icon h0 has won the panda character with the opponent icon TI. ..

The state shown in FIG. 147 (kae11) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 120 (a10), the stock animation of the notice icon YI is started, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The notice icon YI is once displayed large so as to straddle the device 208N. A part of the villager character of the variable icon h0 and a part of the panda character of the opponent icon TI are overlapped by a part of the notice icon YI displayed in large size.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (kae12) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a11), and the notice icon YI is the first stock in the stock area SS provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is displayed at the position (stock display). In this example, the appearance area AS and the stock area SS are displayed on different symbol display devices, but they may be displayed on the same symbol display means.

In the state shown in FIG. 147 (kae13), the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 disappears and the character of the panda with the opponent icon TI disappears due to the end of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B in the symbol variation display currently being performed. Is waiting for a rock-paper-scissors showdown in the next fluctuation and is running a wait animation. Although the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L cannot be seen here, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are opened, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L When the display screen becomes visible, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS'.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (ka e14) is a state in which the symbol variation display is completed, and the panda character of the opponent icon TI is still continuing the standby animation. Eventually, when the next variation is started, the character of the villager with the variation icon h0 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The character of the variable icon h0 is No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). It is the character of 18 grandfathers, or No. It may be a character of 19 Yoshimune. And the second rock-paper-scissors showdown will be held.

Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured so as not to move from the operating position (that is, to be in a stationary state at the operating position) during the symbol stop display. However, both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may move from the operating position during the symbol stop display. Further, even if both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving between the initial position and the maximum moving position, at least during the period during which the symbol variation display is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to remain stationary for some or all periods. In addition, in the state of temporary stop in the pseudo continuous effect or the state of shaking fluctuation before the confirmation display, the movement may be continued or stopped. Further, only when the second decorative symbol display device 208M is performing the variable display of the decorative symbol, or only when the third decorative symbol display device 208N is performing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the above The stop operation may be performed as in. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the initial position, the maximum moving position, or a predetermined stop position at the timing when the symbol variation display is confirmed and displayed. It may be configured as follows.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (kae15) is in the appearance region AS, and the state shown in FIG. 117 (a) is No. The notice icon YI of the "red box" of 2 is displayed, but in the second rock-paper-scissors showdown, the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 is in a state of being defeated by the character of the panda with the opponent icon TI. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 147 (kae15), "the second time" is shown as the number of times of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B on the panda character of the opponent icon TI. ..

In FIG. 147 (kae16), it is notified that the rock-paper-scissors confrontation has ended by straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In FIG. 147 (kae17), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been closed so far, start to open, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is visible. In FIG. 147 (kae18), both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 147 (kae18), "decoration". The combination of the lost decorative patterns of "4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed.

The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above can be replaced with the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146, or other display means (for example, the light guide plate IL, which will be described later). It can also be replaced with a POV display 224I, etc.

Further, in the description so far, the notice display of the default color "change" shown in FIG. 117 (b) is a notice display that raises the level of the display mode by one step, and is the first display mode (default display mode). If it is displayed with, it is foretold that it will change to the second display mode (display mode of blinking white), and it has actually changed to the second display mode (display mode of blinking white), but the first display Only when the display mode is displayed in the mode (default display mode), the notice display may be increased by two steps and changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). In addition, when the display mode is the second display mode (display mode of blinking white) or higher, it is a display of a notice that is raised by one step, and actually only one step is changed.

In addition, during the execution of a certain mini-game, the notice icon may be stocked by a notice different from the mini-game, but during the execution of the mini-game, the notice icon different from the mini-game may be stocked. It may be configured so that the notice icon is not stocked.

It should be noted that other notices (for example, a mini-game in preparation display or a telop display stating "mini-game high accuracy") may be notified in advance that a mini-game may occur.

In addition, before the mini-game is started or during the execution of the mini-game, another notice (for example, a telop display stating "Notice icon acquisition is high"" indicates that the notice icon is likely to be acquired. ) May be notified. Here, the situation in which the notice icon is likely to be acquired means that the notice icon is more likely to be obtained than in the case where it is not notified that the notice icon is likely to be obtained by another notice.

When the notice icons are stocked in a certain combination (for example, when a maximum of three notice icons can be stocked, a combination in which "box", "red box", and "gold box" are stocked or "gold box" The combination of three stocks) may be configured so that the jackpot is confirmed in the symbol variation display in which all the notice icons are digested. In this case, the notice icon may be used as an icon related to the look-ahead notice, or may be used as an icon related to the normal notice.

In addition, in the mini-game that acquires the notice icon, the notice of the change may be given. For example, the carpet shown in FIG. 126 (U13) and the like is in a stationary state, but when an animation is displayed in which the carpet escapes from the arrow, the animation is displayed at that time. Corresponds to a notice (normal notice) regarding a big hit in a variable display. Further, if the display of this animation has a low appearance rate, it may be a notice of confirmation of a big hit.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 126 (U13), when an animation is displayed in which the carpet escapes from the arrow, and the fluctuation causes a super reach effect, but the fluctuation causes a loss. , The mini game A may end. In this case, the icon of Yoshimune (bow), which was the first hold icon h11, may be changed to the hold icon of the default display mode, or the icon of Yoshimune (bow) may remain. If the icon of Yoshimune (bow) remains, it becomes a hold icon that supports blinking white (second display mode level). Further, the timing of changing to the default display mode may be during the super reach (for example, during the wipe effect). Further, at the start of the next fluctuation, it may be displayed as the default fluctuation icon h0. Furthermore, the icon of Yoshimune (bow), which was the variable icon h0 when the animation that the carpet escapes from the arrow is displayed, may disappear during the above super reach (for example, during the wipe production), or the above super It may disappear during reach (for example, during wipe effect) and redisplay in the default display mode.

In addition, when b (a <b) notice icons are stocked, it is a big hit in the symbol variation display where all the notice icons are digested than when a (a is an integer of 0 or more) are stocked. It may be configured for ease of use.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect using the display of the icon change notice shown in FIG. 119 (b).

In FIG. 148 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 148 (A2-1), No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). The icon IHI of 5 "Red Bomber" appears on the right edge of the screen, and the icon change animation starts. That is, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. In the icon change animation, a bullet is fired at the hold icon while the "red bomber" icon IHI flies from right to left. The "red bomber" icon IHI may pause before the target hold icon. In addition, this pause may be a pause of a ghost that disguises the target icon. The icon IHI of the "red bomber" is performing an animation of passing through the stock area SS described above. Here, when the notice icon is stocked, the stock notice icon may overlap the icon IHI of the "red bomber", and conversely, the notice stocked by the icon IHI of the "red bomber". The icons may overlap.

In FIG. 148 (A3-1), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. That is, the "red bomber" icon IHI is composed of a red bomber icon RBI and a red bullet icon BTI. The goal here is the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 148 (A4-1), the bullet icon BTI overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. In FIG. 148 (A5), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 148 (A6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode (fifth display mode) which is the same display mode as the “red bomber”. It is in the process of changing, and the change is completed in the figure (A7). In this example, the icon change animation is the animation from FIG. 148 (A2-1) to immediately before FIG. (A7). In this example, after the "red bomber" icon IHI disappears from the screen, the icon display mode change is completed, but before the "red bomber" icon IHI disappears from the screen, the icon The display mode change may be completed, or the icon display mode change may be completed at the same time that the icon IHI of the "red bomber" disappears from the screen.

The red bomber icon RBI may always fire the red bullet icon BTI, or the bullet icon BTI of another color may be fired. In this case, the color of the bomber may determine the mode of change of the icon, or the color of the bullet may determine the mode of change of the icon. Alternatively, when the golden bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, the change mode of the icon may be determined by the color of the upper one (here, gold), or the lower one (here). Then, the change mode of the icon may be determined by the color of red).

In FIG. 148 (A1'), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Of these two hold icons h11 and h12, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the green display mode (fourth display mode), and the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). It is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 148 (A2'), No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). The icon IHI of 4 "bomber" appears (displays) on the right edge of the screen, and the icon change animation starts. In the icon change animation here, as in the previous example, the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14 (FIG. 148 (A5')). In this example, since the icon IHI of the "bomber" is used as the display of the icon change notice, the display mode is raised by one step with respect to the green display mode (fourth display mode). In FIG. 148 (A7), the first hold icon h11, which was the green display mode (fourth display mode), is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode). In addition, in the icon change animation by the icon IHI of the "bomber", if it is a hold icon of the default display mode (first display mode), the white blinking is skipped and the color is promoted to blue only for the first attack. However, since the second and subsequent attacks can only be raised one step at a time, a total of three attacks (default color → blue →) can be promoted to the hold icon in the red display mode (fifth display mode). Green → red) is required. It should be noted that the first attack may be configured to raise only one step (that is, default color → blinking white).

FIG. 148 (A3-2-1) is a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), and an icon change animation using the icon IHI of the “red bomber” has been started. In this icon change animation, the target is the variable icon h0 displayed in the default display mode. In FIG. 148 (A3-2-3), the bullet icon BTI hits the variable icon h0, the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image EF14, and in the figure (A3-2-4), the variable icon h0 is red. Has changed to the display mode (fifth display mode).

In addition, although the example here was an example using the icon IHI of the "red bomber", the variable icon h0 is also used in the icon change animation using the icon IHI of the "bomber" shown in FIG. 148 (A2'). May be targeted. In this case, if the target is the variable icon h0 displayed in the default display mode, the variable icon h0 changes to the blue display mode, but the target is the variable icon h0 displayed in the green display mode. If so, the variable icon h0 changes to a red display mode.

FIG. 148 (A4-2-1) is a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), and an icon change animation using the icon IHI of the “red bomber” has been started. In this icon change animation, as shown in FIGS. 148 (A4-2-1) to (A4-2-3), the red bomber icon RBI fires the red bullet icon BTI and then the icon. (Here, the first hold icon h11) is paused before the target hold icon until the change of the display mode is completed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 148 (A4-2-4) to (A4-2-6), the red bomber icon RBI is directed toward the left edge of the screen when the change of the icon display mode is completed. I will fly away.

FIG. 148 (A2-2-1) is a modification following FIG. 148 (A1-1). However, in this modification, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of blinking white (second display mode). The display mode of blinking white may be a display mode suggesting that the display mode may change after the start of display. That is, in the second display mode (display mode in which white blinks), the display mode is more likely to change after the start of display than in the first display mode, and the display mode is more likely to change after the start of display than in the third display mode. It may be. When the icon of the second display mode (display mode of blinking white) is displayed and the icon change notice display shown in FIG. 119 (b) is displayed (for example, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" is displayed. (When it appears), attention will be focused on the icon of the second display mode (display mode of blinking white).

In FIG. 148 (A2-2-2), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11, and the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11. The first hold icon h11 has changed to a red display mode (fifth display mode).

The icon of the second display mode (display mode of blinking white) does not change, but another icon (in this case, the second hold icon h12, which is an icon next to the first hold icon h11, or The variable icon h0) may change, or other icons may change along with the icon in the second display mode (display mode blinking white). Further, even if the icon of the second display mode is displayed, there may be a case where the display mode of the icon does not change (in the case of a ghost effect). Alternatively, conversely, when the icon of the second display mode is displayed, the display mode of the icon may be changed so as to always occur. When the icon of the second display mode is displayed, the icon next to the icon of the second display mode (for example, if the icon of the second display mode is the first hold icon, the second hold icon changes. It may be an icon.) May be foretold that it is in a state of being easily changed. Here, based on the first hold icon h11 in the second display mode (display mode blinking white), only the icon next to it (second hold icon h12 or variable icon h0) may change, or the first Although it has been explained that the icon next to the hold icon h11 may be changed, the display mode may be another mode (for example, a tank mode) instead of the general-purpose display mode such as the second display mode. In the form of a tank, you may foretell that the icon that the tank's main gun points to may change. Further, instead of the mode of the tank, No. 119 (a) shown in FIG. It may be the display mode of the type of "timer" of No. 10. 8 "Button A" type display mode and No. It may be the display mode of the type of "button B" of 9.

FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 148.

FIG. 149 (A3-3-1) is a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), and is an example in which the icon change animation is not started even if the icon IHI of the “red bomber” appears. That is, in this example, the icon unchanged animation using the icon IHI of the "red bomber" is started. In the icon invariant animation here, the bullet icon BTI is not fired, and the red bomber icon RBI only flies over the hold frame UI (Fig. 149 (A3-3-1) to the same figure. (A3-3-3)). Therefore, the mode of all displayed hold icons has not changed. Also, the mode of the variable icon h0 has not changed. In the icon unchanged animation, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" may be hidden in the middle.

As in this example, even if the red bomber icon RBI passes through, all hold icons (hold default display mode) compared to the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear. (Including the icon) may be a look-ahead notice with high reliability of the jackpot. Similarly, the variable icon h0 may be a normal notice with high reliability of the jackpot. Alternatively, if there are hold icons in the look-ahead notice display mode such as the blinking white display mode among the displayed icons, those hold icons are compared to the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear. Therefore, it may be a look-ahead notice with high reliability of the jackpot, and if the display mode of the variable icon is the display mode of the normal notice, the variable icon is compared with the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear. , It may be a normal notice with high reliability of the big hit.

FIG. 149 (A3-4-1) is also a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), and the icon invariant animation is executed here as well. In this icon invariant animation, the red bomber icon RBI fires a red bullet icon BTI, but the bullet icon BTI does not hit any of the icons h0, h11, h12. That is, the red bullet icon BTI fired from the red bomber icon RBI flies over the hold icon, as shown in FIGS. 149 (A3-4-2) to (A3-4-4). However, it may disappear off the screen, or it may overlap with the hold icon or the variable icon, but it may come out diagonally downward. Further, although the fired bullet icon BTI overlaps with an icon different from the target icon, it may fly off the screen without generating the effect image EF14. Furthermore, the fired bullet icon BTI is a trajectory that overlaps the hold icon if the hold icon is displayed, but the hold icon is not displayed (dotted line in FIG. 149 (A3-4-3)). (See), it may fly off the screen through a trajectory that does not overlap (do not hit) the hold icon. .. In FIG. 149 (A3-4-4), the modes of all the displayed hold icons have not changed.

In FIG. 149 (A3-4-3), the red bomber icon RBI flies off the screen earlier than the bullet icon BTI, but the reverse is also possible. It may be.

Further, the examples shown in FIGS. 149 (A3-3-1) to (A3-3-3) and the examples shown in FIGS. 149 (A3-4-1) to (A3-4-4) are shown. Although this was an example using the "red bomber" icon IHI, an icon invariant animation using the "bomber" icon IHI shown in FIG. 148 (A2') may be executed. Furthermore, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). An icon change animation or an icon non-change animation using the icon of the "gold bomber" of 6 may be executed.

Further, although the bullet icon BTI is fired at the variable icon h0, the icon unchanged animation that does not hit the variable icon h0 and does not hit any of the hold icons h11 and h12 may be executed.

Further, even if the icon change notice display such as the "bomber" icon IHI is displayed, the animation using the icon change notice display is not performed, and the displayed icon change notice is displayed in a stationary state. After that, it may disappear. Furthermore, even if the icon IHI of the "red bomber" does not perform the icon change animation, or the icon IHI of the "red bomber" does not perform the icon change animation, the "red bomber" The icon displayed at the start of the symbol variation display in which the "red bomber" icon IHI is displayed is more likely to change to the "red" display mode in the end than when the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed. It may be configured, or the ease of changing the "red" display mode may be the same as the case where the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed.

Further, even if the hold change due to the display of the icon change notice fails, the hold of the target for which the hold change is attempted (in this example, the hold of the first hold icon h11) is not the target of the hold change (this hold). In the example, the hold may be easier to hit than the hold of the second hold icon h12). Further, even if the hold icon of the same display mode (for example, the hold icon of the display mode of blinking white (second display mode)), the hold icon that fails to change from blinking white to blue and remains blinking white remains. The icon may be a look-ahead notice with higher reliability of the jackpot than the white flashing hold icon that was not the target of the hold change. Similarly, the variable icon h0 may be a normal notice with high reliability of the jackpot.

FIG. 149 (A3-5-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, it looks like an icon unchanged animation, and finally the icon change hit by the bullet icon BTI. This is an example of animation. That is, the same scene (FIG. 149 (A3-5-2)) as the previous icon invariant animation scene (FIG. 149 (A3-4-2)) is displayed, but the bullet icon BTI is returned and the first Hit the hold icon h11 (in FIG. 149 (A3-5-3), the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. After that, it is the same as in FIG. 148 (A7). This icon. In the change animation, the same scene as the icon invariant animation is played halfway, and the trajectory of the bullet icon BTI also coincides with the trajectory of the bullet icon BTI in the icon invariant animation halfway, but a completely different trajectory. Alternatively, the bullet icon BTI may disappear from the screen and then return to hit the target icon. FIG. 149 (A3-5-4). After that, it continues to FIG. 148 (A7).

FIG. 149 (A3-6-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, a button image is added to the display of the icon change notice, and it becomes a composite effect with the button effect.

First, the red bomber icon RBI appears, and the icon change animation or icon non-change animation is started. After that, the red bomber icon RBI pauses before the target hold icon (FIG. 149 (A3-6-1)). Then, the button image 136a is added to the red bomber icon RBI (FIG. 149 (A3-6-2)). Here, the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is not added, but may be added. Further, the operation valid period may start from the time when the button image 136a is added, or may start after a while.

The timing of FIG. 149 (A3-6-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 149 (A3-6-4), a red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period. The bullet icon BTI may be fired on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. .. Further, the bullet icon BTI may be fired only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Furthermore, the bullet icon BTI is fired with or without the chance button 136, but if the chance button 136 is not operated, compared to the case where the chance button 136 is operated, the bullet icon BTI is fired. It may be difficult to hit the target icon, and if the chance button 136 is not operated, it is not necessary to hit the target icon. If the bullet icon BTI does not hit the target icon, another icon change animation or icon non-change animation may be performed.

FIG. 149 (A3-7-1) is also a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, the first hold icon h11 is a mode of the button image. That is, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). It is the icon of 8 "button A". The icon of this "button A" is an icon for notifying that the icon change notice is performed by the button operation. Subsequently, in FIG. 149 (A3-7-2), as in FIG. 149 (A3-6-2), the button image 136a is added to the icon RBI of the red bomber. Although the remaining time display meter MT is not added here either, it may be added.

The timing of FIG. 149 (A3-7-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 149 (A3-7-4), a red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period. The bullet icon BTI flies toward the first hold icon h11, which is the icon of "button A" (Fig. 149 (A3-7-5)). Subsequently, in FIG. 149 (A3-7-6), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. In FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), the first hold icon h11, which was the icon of "button A", is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

FIG. 149 (A3'-2-1) is a modification following FIG. 148 (A2'). That is, the first hold icon h11 is a green display mode (fourth display mode), and the second hold icon h12 is a default display mode (first display mode). In this variant, as shown in FIG. 149 (A3'-2-1), the white bomber icon WBI fires a plurality of white bullet icon BTIs. The plurality of bullet icon BTIs may be fired at the same time, or may be fired one by one in sequence. Here, two white bullet icon BTIs are fired at the same time. The two bullet icon BTIs partially overlap each other. The target icon here may be one icon or a plurality of icons. That is, one bullet icon BTI may attack one hold icon, or multiple bullet icon BTIs may attack one hold icon. In this example, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are the target icons. The bullet icon BTI aiming at the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the foreground, and the bullet icon BTI aiming at the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the back side. Note that this relationship may be reversed. Further, the plurality of bullet icon BTIs may not overlap.

In FIG. 149 (A3'-2-3), the bullet icons BTI and BTI hit the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 one by one, and the first hold icon h11 also hits the second hold icon h12. Are each covered by the effect image EF14. In FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), the first hold icon h11, which was the green display mode (fourth display mode), is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode), and the default display mode (5th display mode). The second hold icon h12, which was the first display mode), has changed to the blue display mode (third display mode).

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a modified example such as the effect example shown in FIG. 148.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 150 (A3-2-1) to FIG. 150 (A3-2-4) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 149 (A3'-2-1) to 149 (A3'-2-4). This is a modified example of. Here, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" has appeared. The first hold icon is a white blinking display mode (second display mode). In FIG. 150 (A3-2-1), the red bomber icon RBI fires two red bullet icon BTIs. One of the two fired bullet icon BTIs hits the first hold icon h11, and the other does not hit any of the icons (Fig. 150 (A3-2-3)). That is, the hold icon on which the look-ahead notice is given is hit, and the hold icon (second hold icon h12) on which the look-ahead notice is not given is not hit. In FIG. 150 (A3-2-3), only the first hold icon h11 of the hit person is covered by the effect image EF14, and in the following FIG. 150 (A3-2-4), the effect image EF14 disappears and the second Only the 1 hold icon h11 is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

The bullet icon BTI may also hit the hold icon for which the look-ahead notice has not been given. In addition, the bullet icon BTI may hit only the hold icon for which the look-ahead notice has not been given. Alternatively, the bullet icon BTI may always hit the hold icon for which the look-ahead notice has not been given. Or conversely, the bullet icon BTI may always hit the hold icon for which the look-ahead notice has been made.

Here, the red bullet icon BTI hits the hold icon (hold icon in the first display mode) for which the look-ahead notice has not been performed, and the look-ahead notice in the white blinking display mode (second display mode) is performed. If the bullet icon BTI does not hit the hold icon, the hold icon for which the look-ahead notice has not been given has a higher expectation of a big hit than the hold icon for which the look-ahead notice has been given so far. It has changed to a hold icon. In this way, for icons with different display modes, which icon changes to the red display mode, all the icons change to the red display mode, or a plurality of red bullet icons BTI Various patterns are conceivable, such as whether one icon does not change while being fired, and it may function effectively as a fanning effect.

It should be noted that the hold icon on which the look-ahead notice is given may be configured so that the bullet icon BTI is more likely to hit, that is, the hold icon is easier to change than the hold icon on which the look-ahead notice is not given. Further, the variable icon may be configured so that the bullet icon BTI is more likely to hit, that is, the hold icon is more likely to be changed than the hold icon.

Further, the firing of the plurality of bullet icons BTI is also applicable to the "gold bomber" icon shown in FIG. 119 (b).

FIG. 150 (A3-8-1) is also a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, the red bomber icon RBI pauses directly above the variable icon h0. Then, while paused, the red bomber icon RBI does not fire the bullet icon BTI, and the symbol variation display ends (Fig. 150 (A3-8-2). Then, the next symbol variation display is displayed. When started, the red bomber icon RBI remains paused just above the fluctuating icon h0, that is, the red bomber icon RBI here straddles a continuous symbol fluctuating display. The red bomber icon RBI fires a red bullet icon BTI towards the first hold icon h0, as shown in Figure 150 (A3-8-4), when the next fluctuation begins. In this way, when straddling the symbol variation display, the icon change may always succeed, and even when straddling the symbol variation display, it may fail. , When straddling the symbol change display, the hold icon may change and the change icon may not change, or vice versa, the change icon may change and the hold icon may not change. You may.

150 (A3-9-1) to FIG. 150 (A3-9-5) are modified examples of FIGS. 149 (A3-8-1) to 149 (A3-8-4). This example is an example in which the icon IHI of the "red bomber" flies away without the effect of firing the bullet icon BTI even in the symbol variation display after straddling the continuous symbol variation display.

In addition, in the symbol variation display after straddling the continuous symbol variation display, regardless of whether it hits or not (whether the icon changes or not), the effect of firing the bullet icon BTI is always performed. You may.

FIG. 150 (A3-10-1) is also a modification following FIG. 148 (A2-1). In this example, the hold of the look-ahead target change is the second hold represented by the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 150 (A3-10-1). The red bomber icon RBI, which is paused just above the variable icon h0 in front of the hold icon, fires a red bullet icon BTI at the second hold icon h12, but does not hit (Figure). 150 (A3-10-2)), the symbol variation display ends (Fig. 150 (A3-10-3)). Then, even when the next symbol variation display is started, the red bomber icon RBI is paused directly above the variation icon h0 ().
Fig. 150 (A3-10-4),) A red bullet icon BTI is fired at the first hold icon h11, which is the hold of the look-ahead target change, but it does not hit here either (Fig. 150 (A3-10-). 5)), and the symbol variation display ends (Fig. 150 (A3-10-6)). This time, the hold that was the look-ahead target change is exhausted, and the symbol change display is started. That is, the symbol variation display started here is the look-ahead target variation, and the red bomber icon RBI makes somersaults in order to make the variation icon h0 the target icon, and is in front of the variation icon h0. Return to the position of, aiming at the variable icon h0, fire a red bullet icon BTI (Fig. 150 (A3-10-8)), and fly away toward the left edge of the screen. The bullet icon BTI fired here hits the variable icon h0, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14 (FIG. 150 (A3-10-10)). Although not shown, the variable icon h0 changes to a red display mode (fifth display mode) when the effect image EF14 disappears.

Note that FIG. 150 (A3-10-9') is a modified example following that of FIG. 150 (A3-10-8), but even the final variation may not hit. As a result, all three failed. In this example, the icon invariant animation by the red bomber icon is performed multiple times for the same icon, but the icon invariant animation by the red bomber icon is performed multiple times for different icons. You may. Further, the icon change animation may be performed a plurality of times for the same icon, or may be performed a plurality of times for different icons.

FIG. 150 (A2-3-1) is an example following the symbol variation display 160 (A1-1), but a plurality of icon change notice displays may appear. That is, in FIG. 150 (A2-3-1), three types of bomber icon IHI appear, which are all types such as "bomber", "red bomber", and "gold bomber". The types of display of the icon change notices that appear may be all different as in this example, or may be all the same. In addition, systems such as bombers may or may not be aligned (for example, "red balloon", "gold bomber", "red flying boat").

In this way, when the icon IHI of a plurality of bombers appears, the icon change effect may be performed on all the bombers, but as shown in FIG. 150 (A2-3-2), one bomber Icon (here, the icon of "red bomber") IHI may perform the icon change effect, or the icon IHI of a plurality of bombers as a part may perform the icon change effect. Good.

In FIG. 150 (A2-3-3), the variable icon, which was the default display mode, is changed to the red display mode, which means that the icon change effect is successful. However, it may fail. Further, when the icon change effect is performed by the icon IHI of a plurality of bombers, the plurality of icons may be changed, or only one icon may be changed.

In addition, it may be the icon of "bomber" or the No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). In the case of the icon of "flying boat" of 7, it is possible to change two icons with one aircraft.

FIG. 151 is a diagram showing a modified example such as the effect example shown in FIG. 148.

In FIG. 151 (A1-2-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon h11 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 151 (A1-2-2), there is a ball entering the starting port 230 of the special figure 1, and the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, resulting in a total of two. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "2".

In FIG. 151 (A1-2-3), the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the second stage hs2. The second hold icon h12 is the No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). It is an icon of 12 "roulette" display modes. The icon of this "roulette" display mode is displayed by switching the display mode of N choices selected from 2 to 5 choices (blue, green, red, gold, rainbow) in order, and stopped at the roulette. The hold icon itself changes to the display mode. In this example, there are three choices of blue, green, and red, and the display is switched in the order of "blue-> green-> red-> blue->". That is, in the second hold icon h12 of the display mode of "roulette" shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-3), the icon of the display mode of "blue" is displayed, and it is shown in FIG. In the second hold icon h12 of the display mode of "roulette" shown, the icon of the display mode of "green" is displayed, and the second hold of the display mode of "roulette" shown in the figure (A1-2-5). The icon h12 displays an icon in a “red” display mode. In the following drawings, it is represented by an arrow mark indicating that it is changing. In FIG. 151 (A1-2-7), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-“decoration”. 1 ”-“ Decoration 7 ”) is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left also stops and displays the combination of lost decorative patterns (“Decoration 4”-“Decoration 1”-“Decoration 7”).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. The first hold icon h11 is an icon of the display mode of "roulette". Further, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is started. That is, the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI with the target of the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 151 (A1-2-10), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 148 (A1-2-11), the effect image EF14 disappears, and in the first hold icon h11, an icon in a “red” display mode is visible. In the figure (A1-2-12) following FIG. 148 (A1-2-11), the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of “red”. Also, the "red bomber" icon IHI is about to disappear in the left corner of the screen. If the icon IHI of the "red bomber" does not perform the icon change animation, or if the icon IHI of the "red bomber" does not perform the icon change animation, that is, the "red bomber" Even if the animation used is not performed, the first hold icon h11 is configured to be more likely to change to the "red" display mode than when the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed. Alternatively, the ease of changing the "red" display mode may be the same as the case where the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed.

The examples shown in FIGS. 151 (A1-3-1) to (A1-3-7) are examples in which the telop effect described with reference to FIG. 94 is executed.

In FIG. 151 (A1-3-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-2), in the central region, the first decorative symbol is displayed. The variable display has started. In the following FIG. 151 (A1-3-3), the telop effect is started. That is, the telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, it is displayed in characters that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, which corresponds to an example of the display of the icon change notice. In the telop display trp here, a character display such as "pending change high accuracy" continues to flow from the right to the left of the screen.

After the telop effect is started, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-4), the icon IHI of the "red bomber" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is displayed. It has been started. That is, as the telop effect continues, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI with the target of the first hold icon h11. When the icon (here, the icon IHI of "red bomber") as the icon change notice display is displayed while the telop display trp such as "pending change high accuracy" is displayed, "holding change high accuracy" is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed more easily than in the state where the telop display trp such as "medium" is not displayed.

In FIG. 151 (A1-3-7), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. Eventually, when the effect image EF14 disappears, the first hold icon h11 changes to a "red" display mode.

Next, an example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is executed will be described.

In FIG. 151 (A1-4-1), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-“decoration”. 1 ”-“ Decoration 7 ”) is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left also stops and displays the combination of lost decorative patterns (“Decoration 4”-“Decoration 1”-“Decoration 7”).

In FIG. 151 (A1-4-2), the hold that was previously the first hold has been digested, and the symbol variation display has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-3), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop display, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to "2". Further, the effect image EF15 is generated so as to cover the hold icon display area HIS and the change icon display area CIS, and neither the hold icon nor the change icon can be seen.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-3), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the effect image EF15 disappears, and the silhouette notice is started in the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS. That is, the hut sill appears over the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS. The inside of this hut sill is displayed by silhouette display. In FIG. 151 (A1-4-3), the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are displayed by silhouette display. In the silhouette display, the color of the icon or the like is displayed in a color representing a shadow instead of the usual color. The silhouette notice started here is a notice indicating that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, or there is a hold icon that may change to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. It may be a notice suggesting that you are there.

After the silhouette notice was started, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-4), the icon IHI of the "red bomber" appeared on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation was started. To. That is, with the silhouette notice being performed, FIG. 151 (A).
As shown in 1-4-4), the red bomber icon RBI approaches the hut sil. Eventually, the red bomber icon RBI passes through the hut sill, grabbing and firing a red bullet icon BTI while passing. The fired bullet icon BTI enters the hut and is displayed in silhouette.

In FIG. 151 (A1-4-7), the first hold icon h11 shows a silhouette display in which the bullet icon BTI is likely to hit. Further, in FIG. 151 (A1-4-8), a silhouette display shows that the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 151 (A1-4-9), the first hold icon h11 is displayed by silhouette display so that it can be seen that the display mode has changed to "red". It should be noted that the silhouette display may be displayed so that it is not known which display mode has been changed until the silhouette notice is completed.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is executed and other production examples.

In FIG. 152 (A1-4-10), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 6”-“decoration”. 4 ”-“ Decoration 1 ”) is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol on the upper left also stops and displays the same combination of lost decorative symbols.

FIG. 152 (A1-4-11) is in the stop display (confirmed display), the variable icon h0 disappears, and FIG. 152 (A1-4-12) is also in the stop display (confirmed display). In the figure (A1-4-13), the hold that was previously the first hold, that is, the hold of the first hold icon that has changed to the "red" display mode, is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. .. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (A1-4-13), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still displayed as a stop display, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to "1". Further, in the hut sill, the movement animation of the hold icon is displayed in silhouette display, and it can be seen that the first hold icon changed to the "red" display mode is displayed at the position of the variable icon h0.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (A1-4-14), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region, and after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the variable display is started. The silhouette notice has ended, and the variable icon h0 changed to the red display mode is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (A1-4-15).

In addition, the effect of the silhouette notice itself may be promoted by the effect of the icon change animation using the icon IHI of the "red bomber". For example, the hut sill may be promoted to become a house, and the hold icon may be easily changed, or the color of the hut sill may be changed to red, and the display mode of the hold icon may be easily changed to red. .. Then, after the silhouette notice is finished (after the hut sill is hidden) or at the same time as the end, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

FIGS. 152 (B1-1) to 152 (B8) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted after the icon change notice display is displayed.

In FIG. 152 (B1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 152 (B2), the icon IHI of the default color "bomber", which is the display of the icon change notice, appears (displays) at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In the icon change animation here, the icon IHI of the "bomber" pauses on the variable icon h0 as shown in FIG. 152 (B3-1), and as shown in the figure (B4), " After a flash of light was displayed on the "Bomber" icon IHI, it was promoted to the "Red Bomber" icon IHI. In addition to this, when promoted within the same bomber system (the "bomber" icon IHI is promoted to the "gold bomber" icon IHI, or the "red bomber" icon IHI is "gold". When there is a case where it is promoted to the "bomber" icon IHI) or when it changes to a different system (when the "bomber" icon IHI is promoted to the "flying boat" icon IHI, or when it is promoted to the "bomber" icon IHI may be promoted to the "Red Flying Boat" icon IHI).

In FIG. 152 (B6), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In FIG. 152 (B7), the fired bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 152 (B8), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes to a “red” display mode.

FIGS. 152 (B3-2-1) to 152 (B3-2-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted by the button effect.

FIG. 152 (B3-2-1) is an example continuing from FIG. 152 (B2), and the state shown in FIG. 152 (B3-2-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 152 (B3-1). is there. In FIG. 152 (B3-2-2), the button image 136a is added on the icon IHI of the "bomber" which is the display of the icon change notice. Here, the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is not added, but may be added. Further, the operation valid period may start from the time when the button image 136a is added, or may start after a while.

The timing of FIG. 152 (B3-2-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the fact that the chance button 136 was operated within the above operation valid period, in FIG. 149 (B3-2-4), the icon IHI of the "bomber" is displayed with a flash of light to incite a change, and then "red". It has been promoted to the icon IHI of "Bomber" (Fig. 149 (B3-2-5)). .. After that, although it continues to FIG. 152 (B6), the display mode of the hold icon may not change. The promotion of the "bomber" icon IHI is executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated. It may be executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. Further, although the button image 136a is added on the icon IHI of the "bomber", the button image 136a is not added and may be executed as a so-called back button effect.

FIGS. 152 (B3-3-1) to FIGS. (B3-3-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted by the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon YI.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (B3-3-1), the notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS. In FIG. 152 (B3-3-2), the notice icon YI is used, the box changes to the open mode d, and the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b) is displayed from the inside of the box. Twenty "UP" notice display YH has been released, and in the figure (B3-3-3), the used notice icon YI disappears and the "UP" notice display YH is displayed. The notice display YH of "UP" changes to a light ball YHb, and as shown in FIG. 152 (B3-3-4), the light ball YHb is paused on the variable icon h0. Fly toward the "Bomber" icon IHI and hit the "Bomber" icon IHI. Then, in FIG. 152 (B3-3-5), the icon IHI of the "bomber" is promoted to the icon IHI of the "red bomber". After FIG. 149 (B3-3-6), it continues to FIG. 152 (B6), but the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted while failing to be promoted in the middle over a plurality of fluctuations.

FIG. 153 (B3-4-1) is an example continuing from FIG. 152 (B2). In this example, the hold of the look-ahead target change is indicated by the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 153 (B3-4-1). It becomes the second hold to represent.

The state shown in FIG. 153 (B3-4-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 152 (B3-1), and the default color "bomber" icon IHI, which is the display of the icon change notice, is a variable icon. It is paused just above h0. Further, the state shown in FIG. 152 (B3-4-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 152 (B4), and the icon IHI of the "bomber" is displayed with a flash to incite a change. In this example, in FIG. 153 (B3-4-3), where promotion failed and the flash display disappeared, the icon IHI of the "bomber" remains. Eventually, in FIG. 151 (B3-4-3), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-". "Decoration 1"-"Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the combination of lost decorative patterns ("Decoration 4-"-"Decoration 1"-"Decoration 7") is also stopped and displayed for the second decorative pattern on the upper left. There is.

Then, even when the next symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of the "bomber" remains paused directly above the variation icon h0 (FIG. 153 (B3-4-5)). In the following FIG. 153 (B3-4-6), the flash display that fuels the change was made again on the icon IHI of the "bomber", and this time the promotion was successful and the flash display disappeared in FIG. 153 (B3-4-7). ), It has been promoted to the icon IHI of "Red Bomber". The successfully promoted red bomber icon RBI fires a red bullet icon BTI towards the first hold icon h0, but does not hit here as shown in FIG. 153 (B3-4-8). In FIG. 153 (B3-4-9), the symbol variation display is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”) is stopped and displayed.

This time, the hold that was the look-ahead target change is exhausted, and the symbol change display is started (FIG. 153 (B3-4-10)). That is, the symbol variation display started here is the look-ahead target variation, and the red bomber icon RBI makes somersaults in order to make the variation icon h0 the target icon, and is in front of the variation icon h0. Return to the position of, and fire a red bullet icon BTI aiming at the variable icon h0 (Fig. 153 (B3-4-11)). After that, following FIG. 148 (A3-2-2), the display mode of the variable icon may not change.

In this example, the promotion was successful for the second time, but the production may end without succeeding in the promotion. Further, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" may be further changed to the icon IHI of the "gold bomber". Further, in this example, the bullet icon BTI is fired after promotion, but the bullet icon BTI may be fired even before promotion. For example, the bullet icon BTI may be fired at the timing shown in FIG. 153 (B3-4-3).

FIGS. 153 (B1-2-1) to 153 (B1-2-10) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted via the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 153 (B1-2-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. There is. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 153 (B1-2-2), the timer notice effect is started, and the timer notice display TYH is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timer notice display TYH shown in FIG. 153 (B1-2-2) displays the remaining time (here, 5 seconds) until the time that is the reference for starting the promotion effect, and is displayed in FIG. 153 (1-2-2). In 3), the countdown has started. The timer notice effect started here corresponds to the advance notice of the promotion effect. After the timer notice effect is started, as shown in FIG. 153 (B1-2-4), the default color "bomber" icon IHI, which is the display of the icon change notice, is displayed, and is directly above the variable icon h0. It flies to, pauses (Fig. 153 (B1-2-5)), and enters a standby state. The timer notice display TYH shown in FIG. 153 (B1-2-6) has no remaining time (0 seconds), and in the following figure (B1-2-7), the timer notice display TYH is the character "attention". It has been switched to. At the same time as the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH runs out (becomes 0 seconds), the promotion effect is started. In addition, there may be a case where the promotion effect is started (when there is a time lag) after the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH is exhausted.

In FIG. 153 (B1-2-8), in a state where the character "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TYH, a flash display that incites a change on the icon IHI of the "bomber" that has been in the standby state until now. Is displayed. Eventually, the flash display disappeared, and in FIG. 153 (B1-2-9) where the flash display disappeared, it was promoted to the icon IHI of the "red bomber". It is easier to promote the icon change notice display itself when the timer notice effect is used than when the timer notice effect is not used. In addition, when the timer notice effect is passed, the icon change notice display itself may be promoted without fail. In FIG. 153 (B1-2-10), the timer notice effect is completed and the timer notice display TYH is hidden. The timer notice display TYH may be used to give notice of the type of icon change notice display to be promoted. For example, the character display of "red" may be performed instead of the character display of "attention".

When the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH runs out (becomes 0 seconds), the icon change notice display (for example, the icon IHI of the "bomber") may appear. That is, the timer notice display TYH corresponds to a notice that the icon change notice may be displayed. Further, the background color of the timer notice display TYH or the like may be used to give a notice of the color of the display of the icon change notice that appears. For example, if it is a white background, the appearance of the "bomber" icon IHI is announced, if it is a red background, the appearance of the "red bomber" icon IHI is announced, and if it is a gold background, "gold" is announced. The appearance of the "Bomber" icon IHI may be announced. However, such a notice does not have to be given.

In addition, this example was an example in which the timer advance notice effect and the promotion effect were combined, but both are independent, and after the timer advance notice effect started, the "bomber" icon IHI appeared, and the timer advance notice display TYH. Even if the remaining time of is exhausted, the promotion effect may not be started, and another notice or effect corresponding to the timer notice display TYH may be started. In this case, the promotion effect of the "bomber" icon IHI is irrelevant to the timer notice effect. Further, the timing at which the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH disappears and the timing at which the icon IHI of the "bomber" is changed on hold may coincide with each other by chance.

Next, an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted via the meter effect will be described.

In FIG. 153 (B1-3-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. There is. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, a meter display MD similar to the meter display shown in FIG. 91 or the like is displayed. The meter display MD shown in FIG. 153 (B1-3-1) is in a state where the 6th scale is full and the 5th scale is already stored. When the meter display MD is full, the icon IHI of the "bomber", which is a display of the icon change notice, is promoted. The meter display MD may be a display that is always displayed except for a specific state such as when a super reach effect is being executed, or a display that starts when the display start condition is satisfied. It may be.

Eventually, in FIG. 153 (B1-3-2), the symbol variation display is completed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decoration 4”-". "Decoration 1"-"Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the combination of lost decorative patterns ("Decoration 4-"-"Decoration 1"-"Decoration 7") is also stopped and displayed for the second decorative pattern on the upper left. There is.

Then, even when the next symbol variation display is started, the meter display MD accumulated up to 5 scales is displayed on the right base icon bIr (FIG. 153 (B1-3-3)). When the next symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" appears at the right end of the screen as shown in FIG. 153 (B1-3-4). That is, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" displayed here is No. 117 (b) shown in FIG. 117 (b). 20 "up" notice display YH is installed, and in the figure (B1-3-5), when passing over the meter display MD, the "up" notice display YH is dropped to " The notice display YH of "up" is incorporated in the meter display MD. As a result, as shown in FIG. 153 (B1-3-6), the meter display MD is full, and in the following figure (B1-3-7), the meter display MD is changed to the character display of "promotion". It's changing.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted via the meter effect, and other effect examples.

In FIG. 154 (B1-3-8) following from FIG. 153 (B1-3-7), the default color "bomber" icon IHI changes according to the meter display MD becoming full. In FIG. 154 (B1-3-9), in which the flash display was displayed and the flash display disappeared, the icon was promoted to the "red bomber" icon IHI. The color of the icon change notice display changed here matches the background color of the character display "promotion" in the meter display MD, and the icon change notice display is displayed at the stage of FIG. 153 (B1-3-7). The changing display mode is foretold. Subsequently, the meter display MD shown in FIG. 154 (B1-3-10) has returned to an empty state. When the meter display MD is full, the display mode of the icon change notice display may be changed (promoted) without fail, or may not be changed (promoted) (in the case of failure).

FIGS. 153 (B1-4-1) to FIG. 153 (B1--4-4) describe an example in which an icon change notice display appears when the meter display in the meter effect is full.

The meter display MD is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 153 (B1-4-1). This meter display MD is in a state where the 6th scale is full and the 5th scale is already stored. Further, in FIG. 153 (B1-4-1) during the symbol variation display, the notice display YH of "UP" is displayed. In the following FIG. 153 (B1-4-2), the notice display YH of "up" is taken into the meter display MD, the meter display MD is full, and in the following figure (B1-4-3), the meter is displayed. The display MD has changed to the display "Bombing" on a red background. Here, it is foretold that the background color bomber icon will appear as an icon change notice display. If the display changes to "Bombing" on a gold background, the "Gold bomber" icon may be displayed, and if the display changes to "Bombing" on a white background, the "Bomber" icon will change. May be displayed. In addition, it is not necessary to give notice of the display of the icon change notice that appears, and even in this case, when the meter display MD is full, the "bomber" icon, the "red bomber" icon, etc. Alternatively, the "gold bomber" icon may be displayed.

Then, in FIG. 154 (B1-4-4), the icon IHI of the "red bomber" appears at the right end of the screen.

When the appearance notice of the icon change notice display is given by the meter display MD, the icon change notice display may or may not always appear.

FIGS. 154 (C1) to 154 (C13) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice display is displayed across a plurality of symbol change displays.

In FIG. 154 (C1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. During this stop display, nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 154 (C2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, nothing is displayed in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, but when the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started, FIG. 154 (C3) shows. As shown, a smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and in the figure (C4), the smoke image disappears, and the effect icon display area DIS shows No. 119 (b). Thirteen red "Akayoshimune" icons IHI are displayed. This "Akayoshimune" icon corresponds to the display of the icon change notice, and will be described below with the same code as the code used for the "red bomber" icon and the like. The icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is an icon that changes the display mode of the icon to the same display mode as itself, that is, the red display mode (fifth display mode) when the icon is successfully changed. Therefore, if the display mode of the hold icon is changed, it corresponds to the notice of the look-ahead notice, and if the display mode of the variable icon is changed, it corresponds to the notice of the normal notice.

In FIG. 154 (C5), the change effect of the variable icon h0 using the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is started. That is, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune", which was the default mode (a) shown in FIG. 119 (b), has been changed to the mode (b). That is, the icon IHI of "Akayoshi Mune", who was standing facing the front, faces the variable icon h0, pulls out the sword, and the wave motion is oscillated from the sword. In FIG. 154 (C6), waves are oscillated from the sword of "Akayoshimune", but the display mode of the variable icon h0 remains the default. In FIG. 154 (C7), the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is Returning to aspect a, the change animation is finished. That is, the change production here has ended in failure. In FIG. 154 (C8), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is displayed on the right base icon bIr as in mode a.

In FIG. 154 (C9), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the mode a, and is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. In FIG. 154 (C10), a change animation is started as a change effect of the change icon h0 using the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune”. In FIG. 154 (C11), the variable icon h0, which has been the default display mode until then, has changed to the red display mode, and the normal notice has started. In FIG. 154 (C12-1), the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" has changed from aspect b to aspect c, and it is appealing that the change effect has been successful. When the change effect is successful, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune", which was the display of the icon change notice, disappears from the right base icon bIr.

The icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" described above is the same as the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono shown in FIGS. 77 and 84, and is an production example shown in FIGS. 77 and 84. And are mutually applicable.

When the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is displayed, the display mode of the icon may always change to the red display mode without failure, and although it may fail as in this example, it is final. The display mode may always change to red, or it may eventually fail.

FIG. 154 (C12-2) shows a state after the display mode of the variable icon h0 cannot be changed to the red display mode and the change effect finally fails, and the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is shown. However, the aspect b has changed to the aspect d, and it is notified that the change effect has failed.

Subsequently, an example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119 (b) will be described.

In FIG. 154 (D1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 154 (D2), the “red thundercloud” icon begins to appear small above the hold icons h11 and h12. This "red thundercloud" icon corresponds to the display of the icon change notice, and will be described below with the same reference numerals as those used for the "red bomber" icon and the like. Like the "Red Bombing Machine" icon and the "Akayoshi Sect" icon, the "Red Thundercloud" icon will display the same display mode as itself, that is, the red display mode (that is, the red display mode) when the icon is successfully changed. It is an icon to be changed to the fifth display mode).

After the display starts, the "red thundercloud" icon grows into a large thundercloud by the growth animation. In addition, it may not grow into a large thundercloud, and in this case, it may be displayed as a ghost, or it may always grow into a large thundercloud.

The "red thundercloud" icon IHI shown in FIG. 154 (D3) has grown to cover the area from the variable icon display area CIS to the hold icon display area HIS from above, and the "red thundercloud" icon IHI has grown. Below, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are also displayed.

In FIG. 154 (D4), lightning is falling from the “red thundercloud” icon IHI toward the first hold icon h11, and in the following figure (D5), the first hold icon h11 in which the lightning has fallen is an effect image. In the figure (D6), which is covered by the EF16 and the effect image EF16 disappears, there is no change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11, the default display mode remains, and the change effect fails. The "red thundercloud" icon IHI throws lightning toward one or more icons of the hold icon or variable icon at the same time or sequentially, and if the change effect is successful, the display mode of the icon in which the lightning has fallen is , The display mode changes to red. In addition, in FIG. 154 (D6), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" is displayed. Has been done.

In FIG. 154 (D7), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of the "red thundercloud" is displayed, and the icon IHI of the "red thundercloud" is also displayed across the continuous symbol variation display.

FIG. 155 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example using the icon change notice display not shown in FIG. 119 (b) and other production examples.

In FIG. 155 (D8) following FIG. 154 (D7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the special figure is no longer held, and the next change is waiting for a prize. However, the "red thundercloud" icon IHI is still displayed.

The symbol demo is started when the first time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the state where the symbol variation display has not been started since the confirmation display of the stop symbol of the special symbol is performed in the state where the hold is 0. (Fig. 155 (D9)). In this symbol demo, the combination of decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed continues to be displayed. Further, although the background screen is not shown, the background screen continues to be displayed without being changed from the symbol variation display of FIG. 154 (D7). However, you may switch to the background screen of the design demo. Further, when the symbol demo is started, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are started to be displayed. The display start timing of these icons MI, VI, and BI may be before the start of the symbol demo, at the same time as the start of the symbol demo, or after the start of the symbol demo. Since detailed explanations of these icons MI, VI, and BI are given with reference to FIG. 65 and the like, they are omitted here.

Further, as shown in FIG. 155 (D9), the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" is still displayed even during the symbol demonstration.

The menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are started to be displayed in a state where the symbol variation display is not started after the confirmation display of the stop symbol of the special symbol is performed in the state where the hold is 0. When the second time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses in that state, the symbol demo is switched to the animation demo. When the animation demo starts, the background screen changes and switches to the animation demo screen (Fig. 155 (D10)). When switching to the demo screen of this animation, the "red thundercloud" icon IHI disappears. On the other hand, in this example, even if the screen is switched to the animation demo screen, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are still displayed at the same positions as before the switching. However, when the screen is switched to the animation demo screen, the display positions of these icons MI, VI, and BI may be changed or may be hidden.

The animation demo screen may be switched to when the first time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. In this case, the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" may be hidden at the same time as switching to the animation demo screen, or the second time may be displayed after switching.

Eventually, there is a ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, the hold of special figure 1 is increased by one, and the symbol variation display is started. The first decorative symbol display device 208L switches from the animation demo screen to the display screen shown in FIG. 155 (D11). As a result, the icon IHI of the greatly grown "red thundercloud" is redisplayed. However, when the above-mentioned symbol demo or the above-mentioned animation demo is sandwiched, the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" may not be displayed.

In FIG. 155 (D8), the symbol variation display started in FIG. 155 (D11) is stopped and displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. During the execution of the symbol variation display started in (D11), there is another ball entering the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 becomes 1, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed. ing. Therefore, the next variation is immediately started, and after the symbol variation display here, the hold of the special figure 1 begins to accumulate, and the symbol variation display is continuously executed. During this period, as shown in FIG. 155 (D13), the "red thundercloud" icon IHI continues to be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 155 (D14), the first stop is performed in the first decorative symbol, and the left symbol sways and fluctuates. The erasing animation of the "red thundercloud" icon IHI is started when the symbol variation display is performed a predetermined number of times. The count of the number of times here does not change even if the above-mentioned symbol demo or the above-mentioned animation demo is sandwiched. However, the number of times may be reset by inserting the symbol demo or the animation demo. The start timing of the erasing animation may be the same as the start of the next symbol variation display in which the symbol variation display is performed a predetermined number of times, may be after the start, or the first stop is performed. It may be the timing. In the erasing animation, the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" gradually becomes smaller and finally disappears (Fig. 155 (D16)). In this example, after all, the change production by the icon IHI of "Red Thundercloud" has been completed without any success.

In this example, although not shown, lightning is dropped on one of the icons for each fluctuation. However, lightning may be dropped only when the icon changes. In addition, as the types of thundercloud icons, the default color thundercloud icon and the golden thundercloud icon are also available. However, the colors of the clouds may be the same, and the types may be classified according to the color of lightning. That is, the icon in which the red thunder has fallen may change to red if the change effect is successful. In this case, it may be possible to draw attention to the thundercloud icon without knowing the type of icon change notice display until the thunder strikes. Further, it may be configured so that it is not known which display mode is changed only when the default color lightning strikes. For example, even if the default color icon is struck by lightning of the default color, it may turn red. On the other hand, in other colors (display mode), the color changes to the same color (display mode) as the color of lightning (display mode), so that it also functions as a notice of the changing display mode.

FIGS. 155 (Ea1) to 155 (Ea9) are diagrams showing an example of an effect in which the icon of the display mode of the “timer” and the display of the icon change notice are combined.

In FIG. 155 (Ea1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). 10 is an icon of the display mode of the "timer". The icon of the display mode of this "timer" is an icon in which the icon changes to the display mode of the fourth display mode or higher when the timer becomes 0. However, it may not change even if the timer becomes 0, or it may change without fail when the timer becomes 0. The mode of the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the “timer” shown in 167 (Ea1) is the mode a before the start of the countdown. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 155 (Ea2-1), No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). In addition to the default color "bomber" icon of 4, a special-purpose icon with the characters "Timer" appears on the right edge of the screen. Hereinafter, this icon will be referred to as the icon IHI of the "timer operation dedicated bomber". The icon IHI of the "timer operation dedicated bomber" corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. The "timer operation dedicated bomber" icon IHI may appear when the hold icon or variable icon is displayed with the "timer" display mode icon, and is displayed with the "timer" display mode icon. Even if it is done, it may not appear. However, it may be made to appear whenever the icon of the display mode of "timer" is displayed. In FIG. 155 (Ea2-1), an icon change animation using the icon IHI of the "timer operation dedicated bomber" that has appeared has been started. Even if the icon change animation is started, the timer of the first hold icon h11 does not start the countdown and is displayed as the mode a.

In FIG. 155 (Ea3), the default color bullet icon BTI is fired from the bomber icon TBI with the letters Timer. The target here is the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the "timer". The bomber icon TBI with the letters Timer does not target anything other than the icon of the "timer" display mode, but it may be targeted. In this case, when the bullet icon BTI hits, the display mode may change to "timer".

In FIG. 155 (Ea5), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 of the “timer”, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 155 (Ea6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the mode a before the start of the countdown to the mode b during the countdown. That is, the countdown starts only when the bullet icon BTI hits. In this example, the icon change animation is the animation from FIG. 155 (Ea2-1) to immediately before FIG. 155 (Ea6). In addition, the bullet icon BTI can be regarded as equivalent to the display of the icon change notice, and in that case, the display is started by firing from the bomber icon TBI with the characters of Timer. After that, the animation until just before the hit and the change to the aspect b are completed corresponds to the icon change animation.

In FIG. 155 (Ea7), the mode of the first hold icon h11 of the “timer” becomes the mode in which the timer becomes 0, and at the same time when the timer becomes 0, as shown in FIG. The icon h11 is covered with a smoke image. In FIG. 155 (Ea8), the smoke image disappears, and the first hold icon, which was the display mode of the “timer”, is changed to the green display mode (fourth display mode). The hold icon of the "timer" may start the operation of the timer even if it is not attacked by the icon IHI of the "timer operation dedicated bomber". In this case, the pre-reading notice with higher reliability of the jackpot may be used than when the operation is started by the icon IHI of the "timer operation dedicated bomber", or conversely, the pre-reading notice with lower reliability of the jackpot may be used. There may be, and the reliability of the jackpot may be the same. In addition, the hold icon of "timer" may always start the operation of the timer even if it is not attacked by the icon IHI of the "timer operation dedicated bomber", and conversely, the "timer operation dedicated bomber" icon. The timer does not have to start unless attacked by IHI.

In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-1), in a state where the icon of the display mode of the "timer" is displayed, the icon of the general-purpose "red bomber" is not the icon of the "timer operation dedicated bomber" IHI. IHI has appeared. In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-2), the bullet icon BTI is fired from the "red bomber" icon IHI, and the fired bullet icon BTI is set to the first hold icon h11 in the "timer" display mode. Hit. Then, the countdown is started at the first hold icon h11 of the "timer". In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-3), the mode of the first hold icon h11 of the “timer” becomes the mode in which the timer becomes 0, and at the same time when the timer becomes 0, FIG. As shown in, the first hold icon h11 is covered with a smoke image. In this example, when the timer becomes 0, it is determined that the display mode of the first hold icon changes to the same red display mode (fifth display mode) as the display mode of the icon IHI of the "red bomber". .. In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-5), the smoke image disappears, and the first hold icon, which was the display mode of the "timer", is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an effect example in which a certain type of hold icon and an icon change notice display are combined.

FIGS. 156 (Eb1) to 156 (Eb8) are diagrams showing an example in which a hold icon of a type of "bomb" type not shown in FIG. 119 (a) and an icon change notice display are combined.

In FIG. 156 (Ea1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 becomes an icon of the type of "bomb" not shown in FIG. 119 (a). This "bomb" type icon is an icon that changes the display mode of the icon when the bomb explodes, and in this respect it is similar to the "timer" icon, but the "timer" icon is counted down. When it becomes 0, the display mode of the icon changes, so it is easy to understand the timing of the change in the display mode, whereas in the "bomb", it is difficult to know when it will explode, and as a result, the timing of the change in the display mode. The two are different in that they are difficult to understand. The "bomb" type icon has a fuse, and you need to ignite this fuse to fire the "bomb".

In FIG. 156 (Eb2), the icon IHI of the "red bomber", which is a display of the icon change notice, appears at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In FIG. 156 (Eb3), the red bomber icon RBI equipped with the ignition icon CYI is gradually approaching the first hold icon h11 of the “bomb”, and in FIG. 156 (Eb4), the first hold icon h11. The ignition icon CYI is dropped toward the fuse of the bomb icon, which is the icon h11. The "red bomber" icon IHI may be an icon in which a flamethrower is fixedly deployed. In this case, an icon that is separated from the aircraft, such as a bullet icon BTI or an ignition icon CYI, may be used. It disappears. The first hold icon h11 of the "bomb" may or may not ignite the fuse well even if the ignition icon CYI is dropped. The squib of the bomb icon, which is the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 156 (Eb5), is ignited, and in the figure (Eb6), the squib is burning and shortening. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 156 (Eb7-1), the first hold icon h11 of the "bomb" explodes, and as shown in FIG. 156 (Eb8), the first hold icon h11 of the "red bomber". The display mode has changed to red, which is the same as the display mode of the icon IHI.

FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-1) is a modified example following the figure (Eb6). In the figure (Eb6), although the squib is burning and shortening, FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-1). Then, the fire of the fuse has been extinguished on the way. Therefore, the first hold icon h11 of the "bomb" does not explode, and the display mode does not change. The "bomb" icon, whose fuse has been extinguished in the middle, continues to be displayed in that mode. The mode of the "bomb" in which the fire of the fuse is extinguished in the middle corresponds to the second display mode (display mode of "blinking white"). In FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-2), the symbol variation display is completed, and in FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-3), the icon of the "bomb" in which the fuse disappears in the middle is displayed as the variation icon h0. Has been done. Even if the fuse is extinguished in the middle, the fuse that has disappeared in the middle may be ignited again due to the fluctuation after the next fluctuation. In the same figure (Eb7-2-4) following FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-3), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed.

Even if the "bomb" icon (holding icon or variable icon) is not attacked by the icon change notice display such as the "red bomber" icon IHI, the fuse may be ignited naturally. Good. In this case, the pre-reading notice with higher reliability of the jackpot may be used than when ignited by the display of the icon change notice, or conversely, the pre-reading notice with lower reliability of the jackpot may be used. The reliability may be the same. In addition, the "bomb" icon may be ignited naturally even if it is not attacked by the icon change notice display, and conversely, the fuse is ignited unless it is attacked by the icon change notice display. You don't have to.

In addition, according to the icon change notice, the icon (hold icon and / or variable icon) is No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). 2-No. It may be foretold that the icon will change to 19 icons, the above-mentioned "bomb" icon, the hold icon of the VS display mode, and the "patrol lamp" icon described later.

FIGS. 156 (Ec1) to 156 (Ec8) show No. 119 (a). It is a figure which shows the example which combined the display of the "target" icon of 11 and the display of the type of icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119 (b).

In FIG. 156 (Ec1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). It is an icon of 11 "target" display modes. In the icon of the display mode of "target", when the arrow does not stick to the target icon, the mode a shown in FIG. 119 (a) remains, and the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the target icon. The degree is about the level of the second display mode (display mode of blinking white), but when an arrow sticks to the target icon, it changes to mode b shown in FIG. 119 (a), and the symbol variation display corresponding to the target icon. The reliability of the jackpot in is increased to the level of the sixth display mode (golden display mode). On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 156 (Ec2), the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute appears in the upper right corner of the display screen. The icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying this parachute is a kind of icon change notice display, but it is a type of icon change notice display not shown in FIG. 119 (b). In FIG. 119 (b), the icon change animation is started, and Yoshimune in the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a falling umbrella is holding a bow and arrow and aiming at the target icon which is the first hold icon h11. In Ec3), the arrow icon YYI is fired. The fired arrow icon YYI hits the target icon which is the first hold icon h11, and in FIG. 156 (Ec5-1), the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. In the following FIG. 156 (Ec6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the mode b shown in FIG. 119 (a). In this example, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 has increased to the level of the sixth display mode (golden display mode). In FIG. 156 (Ec7-1), the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute passes over the first hold icon h11, and eventually the icon TMP disappears from the display screen (FIG. 156 (Ec8)). ..

FIG. 156 (Ec5-2-1) is a modification following the figure (Ec4). In the figure (Ec5-2-1), the fired arrow icon YYI is the first hold icon h11. In the following figure (Ec5-2-2), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is displayed as it is in the previous mode without hitting the target icon. After that, the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute passes over the first hold icon h11 (Fig. 156 (Ec5-2-3)), just like when it hits, and then that icon. The TMP disappears from the display screen (Fig. 156 (Ec5-2-4)). In this way, if one fails in one symbol variation display, it cannot be re-challenged and ends as it is. However, in the next fluctuation, Yoshimune's icon YMP carrying a parachute may appear again, and a change effect aiming at the target icon may be executed, or a change effect may be executed by another effect. In addition, even if one failure in the symbol change table temple, it may be possible to re-challenge up to a predetermined number of times (for example, two or three times including re-challenge ...), even if one fails. It may be configured so that it can always be re-challenged up to a predetermined number of times.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing another production example using a bomber-type icon as an icon change notice display.

FIGS. 157 (Ed1) to 157 (Ed5) show an example in which an icon of a type not shown in FIG. 119 (a) and an icon change notice of a type not shown in FIG. 119 (b) are combined. It is a figure which shows.

In FIG. 157 (Ed1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 becomes an icon of the type of "patrol lamp" not shown in FIG. 119 (a). When the patrol lamp icon is activated, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the patrol lamp icon is the level of the seventh display mode (rainbow-colored display mode), that is, the jackpot is confirmed. Ascend to the level of. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

Further, in FIG. 157 (Ed1), No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). In addition to the default color "bomber" icon of 4, a special-purpose icon with a patrol lamp attached and the letters "pat" appears on the right edge of the screen. Hereinafter, this icon will be referred to as the icon IHI of the "Bomber dedicated to patrol lamp operation". The icon IHI of the "Bomber dedicated to patrol lamp operation" corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. "Pat lamp operation dedicated bomber" icon IHI may appear when the hold icon or variable icon is displayed with the "Pat lamp" display mode icon, and is displayed with the "Pat lamp" display mode icon. Even if it is done, it may not appear. However, it may be made to appear whenever the icon of the display mode of "Patrol lamp" is displayed. In FIG. 157 (Ed1), an icon change animation using the icon IHI of the "Bomber dedicated to patrol lamp operation" that has appeared has been started.

In FIG. 157 (Ed2), the bullet icon BTI in the default color from the bomber icon PBI to which the patrol lamp is attached and the letters pat is attached is targeted at the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the “pat lamp”. It has been fired. In FIG. 157 (Ed3), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 of the "patrol lamp", and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 157 (Ea4), the effect image EF14 disappears, the patrol lamp icon of the first hold icon h11 is operating, and it is notified that the first hold is a hold for confirming the jackpot. The icon IHI of the "Bomber dedicated to patrol lamp operation" flies away to the left side of the screen and is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 157 (Ea5).

FIGS. 157 (Fa1) to 157 (Fa5) are diagrams showing an example in which the appearance notice of the icon change notice display is given by using a movable accessory or the like.

In FIG. 157 (Fa1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS.

In FIG. 157 (Fa2-1), among the large board behaviors arranged at the four corners of the first decorative symbol display device 208L described with reference to FIG. 14 and the like, the fourth large board behavior arranged at the lower right. The accessory 224Gd begins to advance from the initial position toward the position where it overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is aligned with the advance of the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. A red effect image EF17 is displayed around the portion overlapped with the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd. The operation of the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd is an operation of notifying that the icon change notice display will appear from the vicinity of the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the effect image EF17 in the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L The display is a notice of how many colors of the icon change notice display will appear. That is, the appearance of the icon change notice display itself is announced by the accessory and the effect image EF17, the appearance position is announced by the accessory, and the display mode of the displayed display is announced by the effect image EF17.

It should be noted that the icon display mode may be configured to be more likely to change when the accessory is operated than when the accessory is not operated, but the ease of occurrence may not be changed. Further, it may be configured so that the display mode of the icon is likely to change according to the number of moving accessories, but the ease of occurrence may not change.

In FIG. 157 (Fa3), the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd moves to the maximum advance position, and in FIG. 157 (Fa4), the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd moved to the maximum advance position returns to the initial position. I'm starting. As shown in FIGS. 157 (Fa2) to 157 (Fa4), the display position of the effect image EF17 is also changed according to the moving operation of the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. When the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd that has moved to the maximum advance position starts to retreat toward the initial position, the display of the "red bomber" icon IHI as a display of the icon change notice begins to appear behind it. In this way, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" appears, and after FIG. 157 (Fa5), the same effect as that after FIG. 148 (A3-1) is executed, but the display mode of the variable icon does not change. There may be.

FIGS. 157 (Fa2-2-1) to FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the appearance notice of the icon change notice display is given by using the POV display 224I.

In FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-1) during the symbol variation display, the POV display 224I, which has been hidden at the initial position, appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and before the rotation operation. It is in the state of.

In FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-2), the POV display 224I starts rotating on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and when the constant speed rotation is reached, the POV display 224I has a “red bomber” icon. IHI is displayed, and the appearance of the "red bomber" icon IHI is foretold.

In FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-3), the POV display 224I continues to rotate at a constant speed, and the icon IHI of the "red bomber" is still displayed, but behind it, the "red bomber" is displayed. Icon IHI has appeared. When the "red bomber" icon IHI appears, the POV display 224I stops rotating (Fig. 157 (Fa2-2-4)) and returns to its initial position (Fig. 157 (Fa2-2-5)). In this way, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" appears, and after FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-5), the same effect as that after FIG. 148 (A3-1) is executed, but the display mode of the variable icon. May not change.

Even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and the display area is visible. The effect display may be performed. Further, in the state in which the POV display 224I is accelerating from the stationary state to the constant speed state and the state in which the POV display 224I is decelerating from the constant speed state to the stationary state, the display area can be seen more than in the constant speed state. It is easy, and even in the state of acceleration or deceleration, the effect display may be performed in the above display area. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the above display area only in the accelerating state or the decelerating state. Further, in the accelerating state or the decelerating state, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is darkened so that the display of the POV display 224I is conspicuous. May be good. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area during the acceleration state, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached. The notes described here are also applicable to the following examples of POV display 224I.

Further, the end timing of the constant speed rotation of the POV display 224I and the appearance timing of the icon IHI of the "red bomber" may be earlier than the end timing of the constant speed rotation, or the appearance timing of the icon is earlier. Both may be at the same timing.

Further, although the appearance notice using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, and fourth display shown in FIG. 146) have been described. The above-mentioned appearance notice may be executed by means (means 208M'etc.), Or another notice may be executed.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing examples of various notices related to the display of the icon change notice.

FIGS. 158 (Fb1) to 158 (Fb9) are diagrams showing an example in which the success rate of the change in the display mode of the icon is announced by using the accessory effect.

The state shown in FIG. 158 (Fb1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 148 (A1-1), and the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The state shown in FIG. 158 (Fb2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 148 (A1-2), the icon IHI of the "red bomber" has appeared, and the effect of changing the display mode of the icon has been started.

In FIG. 158 (Fb3), the character production is started before the red bomber icon RBI fires the bullet icon BTI. The accessory effect here is the third large board behavior accessory arranged at the lower left of the large board behavior accessories arranged at the four corners of the first decorative symbol display device 208L described with reference to FIG. 14 and the like. The 224Gc and the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd arranged at the lower right start to advance from their respective initial positions toward the position where they overlap the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. This character production is continued until just before the display mode of the icon changes, but as a notice, the function is until before the bullet icon BTI is fired. In this character production, the success rate of the change in the display mode of the icon is foretold depending on how many of the four large-scale behavioral characters 224Ga to 224Gd operate. That is, if all four work, there is a 100% chance of success, if three work, there is a 75% chance of success, and if only two work, there is a 50% chance of success, and only one works. Without it, there is only a 25% chance of success.

Of the four large board behavioral characters 224Ga to 224Gd, if the first large board behavioral character 224Ga operates, the success probability is the highest, and if the second large board behavioral character 224Gb operates, the success probability is the next highest. If the third large board behavior accessory 224Gd operates, the success probability may be the third highest, and if the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Ge operates, the success probability may be the lowest. Alternatively, the probability of success can be predicted depending on the position from the initial position to which the player advances. For example, the probability of success may increase as the position approaches the maximum advance position.

Further, it may be configured so that the display mode of the icon is more likely to change when the accessory is operated than when it is not operated, but the ease of occurrence may not be changed. Further, it may be configured so that the display mode of the icon is likely to change according to the number of moving accessories, but the ease of occurrence may not change.

As shown in FIG. 158 (Fb8), the accessory effect ends when the change in the display mode of the icon is completed.

FIGS. 158 (Fc1) to 158 (Fc6) are diagrams showing an example of notifying the promotion of the icon change notice display itself.

In FIG. 158 (Fc1), the default color “bomber” icon IHI appears, and the effect of changing the display mode of the icon has started. Here, the advance notice production is started before the icon IHI of the "bomber" is paused. Here, similarly to the effects shown in FIGS. 157 (Fa2-1) to FIG. 157 (Fa4), the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd arranged at the lower right is the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the initial position. It started to advance toward the overlapping position from the front side, and in accordance with the advance of the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the part of the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L that overlapped with the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd. The effect image EF17 is displayed in the surroundings. Here, the display mode of the effect image EF17 foretells the display mode in which the default color "bomber" icon IHI is promoted. Here, the red effect image EF17 is displayed, and in FIG. 158 (Fc5), it is promoted to the icon IHI of the "red bomber". After FIG. 158 (Fc6), it continues to FIG. 152 (B6), but the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

In this example, the operation of the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd is a kind of fanning effect regardless of the notice, but it is configured so that promotion is more likely to occur when the accessory operates than when it does not. It may have been. However, the likelihood does not have to change. In addition, it may be configured so that promotion is likely to occur according to the number of moving characters. That is, it may be configured so that promotion is more likely to occur as the number of moving characters increases. However, the susceptibility does not have to change here either.

FIGS. 158 (Fd1) to 158 (Fd6) are diagrams showing an example of effect of changing the display mode of the icon using the POV display 224I.

In FIG. 158 (Fa1) during the symbol variation display, the POV display 224I, which has been hidden at the initial position, appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a state before the rotation operation. .. The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode).

In FIG. 158 (Fd2), the POV display 224I starts rotating on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and when the constant speed rotation is reached, the POV display 224I is displayed with "red bomber icon RBI and default. The first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the above is displayed. The rotation range of the POV display 224I completely overlaps the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is located at the display position of the second hold icon h12. Partially overlap.

The POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd3) shows a state in which a red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI with the target of the first hold icon h11. The POV display 224I shown in Fd4) shows that the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14.

Then, on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd5-1), along with the red bomber icon RBI, the first hold icon h11 changed to the red display mode is displayed.

In this example, while the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is behind the POV display 224I, may or may not be visible. It may be. While the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the "red bomber" icon IHI and / or the effect image EF14 is displayed on the display screen behind the POV display 224I that rotates at a constant speed. It may or may not be displayed.

In FIG. 158 (Fd6), the POV display 224I has stopped rotating, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L has the first hold icon h11 in the red display mode and the second in the default display mode. The hold icon h12 is displayed, and the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed. However, the "red bomber" icon IHI may be displayed.

The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change while the POV display 224I is performing the constant speed rotation operation, or may change at the same time when the POV display 224I stops the constant speed rotation operation. Alternatively, the POV display 224I may change after the constant speed rotation operation is stopped.

Further, although an example using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means 208M shown in FIG. 146) have been described. The above display may be executed by'etc.). That is, the first
A part of the scene displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208L can be enlarged and displayed on the POV display 224I. For example, the display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd2) is as shown in FIG. 148 (A2-1). The display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd3) may correspond to the enlarged display of the scene in FIG. 148 (A3-1). .. In this case, the enlarged display is not limited to the POV display 224I, but the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146, the light guide plate IL, and the like. It may be used in combination with the POV display 224I. Further, such an enlarged display can also be performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the notice regarding the display of the icon change notice is given, but it can also be applied to the notice of the appearance of the notice icon. For example, the probability that the notice icon may appear may be expressed depending on how many large-scale behavioral characters 224Ga to 224Gd are operating among the four large-scale behavioral characters (the more operating characters, the higher the probability of appearance). Will be higher).

FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and other display means.

The examples shown in FIGS. 159 (Fd5-2-1) to (Fd5-2-2) are modifications of FIGS. 158 (Fd5-1) to 158 (Fd6). The display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 159 (Fd5-2-1) is a display of an icon change notice (icon IHI of "red bomber") and a display showing a display mode of the changed icon. It does not show whether the icon has changed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fd5-2-1), it is slightly visible that the second hold icon h12 is covered with the effect image EF14.

In FIG. 159 (Fd5-2-2), the POV display 224I has stopped rotating, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode and the red display. The second hold icon h12 of the aspect is displayed. In this example, the POV display 224I displays a display indicating whether or not the change effect of the display mode of the icon has been successful, although the target icon is unknown. Then, when the POV display 224I indicates the success of the effect of changing the display mode of the icon, the display mode of the target icon actually changes in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

The change in the display mode of the hold icon on the POV display 224I and the change in the display mode of the hold icon on the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be displayed at the same time, and conversely, the first decorative symbol may be displayed. The POV display 224I may be performed after the display device 208L is performed first.

Further, in this example, although the target icon is unknown by the POV display 224I, it can also be used as a notice of whether or not the effect of changing the display mode of the icon is successful.

Hereinafter, in FIG. 159, an effect example in a device configuration in which the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 are combined will be described, but as also described in FIG. 146, simply hardware. It is not that the technique described in this specification cannot be applied only by the difference in the configuration of the display means, and from the technical point of view, it can be applied regardless of whether the display means are arranged side by side or vertically. Is.

In FIGS. 159 (Fe1) to 159 (Fe6), the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is completed only in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display on the fourth display means 208M'is the fourth display means. It is a figure which shows the example which is completed only in 208M'.

The state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe1) is different from the state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (ka1) depending on whether the background screen is displayed or not. It is the same. Further, the state of the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe1) is the same as the state of the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (ka1).

In the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-1), the tip portion of the icon IHI of the "red bomber" as a display of the icon change notice appears at the right end of the screen, and is shown in the figure (Fe3). In the fourth display means 208M'shown, an icon change animation using the icon IHI of the "red bomber" has been started. In the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe4), a red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, and in the fourth display means 208M' shown in the figure (Fe5), a bullet is fired. The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe6), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the red display mode. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 159 (Fe1) to 159 (Fe6), the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed.

FIGS. 159 (Fe2-2-1) to FIGS. 159 (Fe2-2-6) are diagrams showing an example in which a part of the display in the first decorative symbol display device 208L enters the fourth display means 208M'.

FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-1) is a continuation of FIG. 159 (Fe2-1), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-1), as an icon change notice display. The "red bomber" icon IHI appears on the right edge of the screen, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (Fe2-2-2), the icon using the "red bomber" icon IHI is used. The change animation has started, and the red bullet icon BTI is being fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-3), the lower end region where the bullet icon BTI overlaps the upper edge portion of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M'at the initial position. Because it is displayed in, it is difficult to see for a moment. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-4), the bullet icon BTI has moved into the display screen of the fourth display means 208M'at the initial position, and the fourth display means 208M. The tip of the bullet icon BTI is displayed in'. Although it is not visible because it overlaps the upper edge portion of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M'at the initial position, the rear end portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. However, it does not have to be displayed. In the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-5), the tip portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed in the pedestal hs0'of the variable icon display area CIS', which is the default display mode (first display). Aspect) overlaps with a part of the variable icon h0. In this situation, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the fourth display means 208M'. In the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-6), the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the red display mode. On the other hand, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-6).

The variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is enlarged beyond the size of the display screen of the fourth display means 208M', and is displayed across both the fourth display means 208M' and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. May be done. Further, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" may be displayed across both the fourth display means 208M'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an effect example using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

The state shown in FIG. 160 (Ff1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 148 (A1-1). However, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208N. Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 160 (Ff1) are in the initial positions of each other and are in an open state (separated state), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display screen of is visible.

The state shown in FIG. 160 (Ff2) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 148 (A2-1). Here, the icon of the "red bomber" as the display of the icon change notice is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. IHI has begun to appear, and the entire icon IHI of the "red bomber" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in the figure (Ff3).

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 160 (Ff4), the red bomber icon RBI is moving to the left, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in the following figure (Ff4) is red. Instead of the bomber icon RBI moving to the left, the third decorative symbol display device 208N itself has started to move to the left (FIGS. (Ff5) to Ff6). That is, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moving according to the original movement display of the red bomber icon RBI. Eventually, the third decorative symbol display device 208N reaches the maximum moving position and cannot move any further to the left. Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (Ff7), the red bomber icon RBI has moved into the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a display screen. The tip portion of the red bomber icon RBI is displayed, and the portion behind the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The entire red bomber icon RBI may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the back side.

In FIG. 160 (Ff8), the third decorative symbol display device 208N that has reached the maximum moving position has started moving toward the initial position, and about two-thirds of the red bomber icon RBI is the first decoration. Since it is displayed on the symbol display device 208L and has reached a position in front of the target first hold icon h11, a red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In FIG. 160 (Ff9), the bullet icon BTI overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. Further, the entire red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 160 (Ff10), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. The red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In FIG. 160 (Ff11), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the red display mode. Further, the red bomber icon RBI is about to fly further to the left from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 160 (Ff12), the red bomber icon RBI is the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has disappeared from.

In the example described above, one image may be displayed across a plurality of display means, but the same image may not be displayed on the plurality of display means. For example, a part of the same image may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but may be displayed.

Even when the icon invariant animation is performed, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M via the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Animation may be performed, but when icon invariant animation is performed, the icon RBI of the red bomber may be configured to be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In FIG. 160 (Fg), the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays a plurality of icon change notices such as "bomber" icon IHI, "red bomber" icon IHI, and "gold bomber" icon IHI. Is displayed. These bombers may start the movement animation all at once as shown in the example shown in FIG. 150 (A2-3-1), but they are only displayed in stock, and the movement animation is displayed one by one. It may be executed.

In addition, the hold icon or the change icon itself may also serve as the display of the icon change notice. In this case, the hold icon or the change icon itself may give a notice of change, or another icon (hold icon or change) different from itself may be displayed. The icon) will be announced to change.

In addition, a notice display (icon) for notifying that the display of the icon change notice is performed in one of the reserved symbol change displays or the currently performed symbol change display (icon). Change notice in preparation display) may be performed. As an icon change notice preparation display, for example, only the tip of the "bomber" icon IHI can be seen on the right edge of the screen, or the "bomber" icon IHI appears and stands by in a dedicated stock area (standby area). The display that is displayed can be given. Further, the telop display trp shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-3) may be used for advance notice. In addition, a plurality of icons change notice preparation display may be displayed. Further, when there are a plurality of types of icon change notice display, the icon change notice preparation display may be displayed for each display mode of the icon change notice display. In addition, there may be a dedicated area for displaying the stock of the icon change notice preparation display. Further, at least a part (including all) of the area in which the icon change notice preparation display is displayed may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the icon change notice display, or may be displayed in an area that does not overlap. ..

In addition, before the icon change notice (icon change notice by other notice display such as "bomber" icon or icon change notice by the changing icon itself) is displayed, as a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice. , The "icon whose display mode changes after the icon change notice (holding icon and / or variable icon)" changes to a display mode different from the display mode changed by the icon change notice (for example, an enlarged display mode, etc.). By doing so, it may be announced that the icon changes due to the icon change notice, or the display mode of the icon changes due to another display such as a cursor display on the "icon whose display mode changes after the icon change notice". By displaying a display suggesting that the icon should be changed, it may be announced that the icon changes due to the icon change notice.

In addition, after the icon change notice (icon change notice by other notice display such as "bomber" icon or icon change notice by the changing icon itself) is displayed, the change is notified that the change is a big hit. Execution of notice (notice display by various display devices such as liquid crystal display device, light emission (color and light emission pattern) by various lamps (frame lamp 122, panel lamp), notice sound by speaker, notice operation of operation means and various devices, etc.) In some cases, various notices described in the present specification may be given. For example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may change while the jackpot confirmation sound of the fluctuation is output from the speaker 120. Alternatively, the icon change animation may be displayed while the jackpot confirmation sound is being output. However, the various notices may not be given during the execution of the notice notifying that the fluctuation is a big hit. In addition, there may be various notices that are given only during the execution of the notice that the change is a big hit.

It may be configured so that various notices are not given during the execution of the island simultaneous production, but it may be given. In addition, there may be various notices that are given only during the execution of the island simultaneous production.

Further, depending on the effect background or the effect mode, there may be various notices that are performed and various notices that are not performed, and conversely, there may be various effects that are always performed regardless of the effect background. For example, on the background screen of the sea, the icon change notice (icon change notice by other notice display such as "bomber" icon or icon change notice by the changing icon itself) is displayed, but the background screen of the castle town. Then, the display of the icon change notice may not be displayed. Further, the effect background may be selectable by the player, and in this case, it is also possible to select whether or not to display the icon change notice display.

The various icons and displays described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119, or the production examples using icons and displays other than those icons and displays have been described above. Finally, seven production examples will be described. To do.

FIG. 161 is a diagram that roughly shows seven production examples in which various icons and displays are used. FIG. 161 shows how the production progresses step by step from the left to the right of the figure. Further, FIG. 161 also shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIGS. 161 (1) and 161 (2) roughly show an example of the production of the mini game B described with reference to FIG. 118.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161 (1), the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1.

Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161 (1), a mini game window MGW dedicated to the mini game is displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, and the mini game is displayed. Mini-game B (rock-paper-scissors showdown) is being held in the window MGW. On the left side of the mini-game Windu MGW, the icon of the character of Yoshimune is displayed. The icon of this Yoshimune character is No. 1 which is a kind of hold icon or variable icon shown in FIG. 119 (a). It is the same as the icon of "rock-paper-scissors" in 19, and the icon of the character of Yoshimune of aspect a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (1). On the other hand, on the right side of the mini-game Windu MGW, the icon of the swordsman character as an opponent is displayed as shown in FIG. 118 (c). The icon of the swordsman character of aspect a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (1). The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161 (1) has the No. 1 shown in FIG. 161 (a). The icon of the character of Yoshimune, which is the same as the icon of aspect c of 19, and the icon of the character of the swordsman of aspect d shown in FIG. 118 (c) are displayed. In other words, in this rock-paper-scissors showdown, Yoshimune put out a choki and the swordsman put out a par, and the word "Yoshimune victory" is also displayed in the mini-game Windu MGW. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161 (1) has the No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). The icon of the character of Yoshimune, which is the same as the icon of aspect f of 19, is displayed together with the characters of "Yoshimune victory", and the icon of the character of Yoshimune also displays a balloon with "pending change", which is the default until then. The display mode of the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of FIG. 119 (a), is No. 119 (a). It has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) described in 3.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161 (2), the mini game window MGW is not displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, and the mini game B (Janken confrontation). Is performed on the left base icon bIl arranged in the hold icon display area HIS. That is, the mini game B is played using the hold icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side and the center of FIG. 161 (2), the first hold icon h11 is the icon of the swordsman character as an opponent shown in FIG. 118 (c), and the second The hold icon h12 is the No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (c). It is an icon of 19 "rock-paper-scissors".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (2), the first hold icon h11 is displayed with the icon of the swordsman character of aspect a, and the second hold icon h12 is the character of Yoshimune of aspect a. It is displayed with the icon of. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161 (2), the first hold icon h11 is displayed with the icon of the swordsman character of aspect d, and the second hold icon h12 is the character of Yoshimune of aspect c. It is displayed with the icon of. In other words, in this rock-paper-scissors showdown, the swordsman put out a par, Yoshimune put out a choki, and Yoshimune won. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161 (2), the second hold icon h12 is displayed as the icon of the Yoshimune character in aspect f, and the icon of the Yoshimune character is displayed as "hold change". The written balloon is also displayed. The first hold icon h11 next to it has been the icon of the swordsman character until now, but the No. 1 in FIG. 119 (a). It has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) described in 3. In the example shown in FIG. 161 (2), the mini-game B using the hold icon is performed, and the display mode of the hold icon used in the mini-game B is changed. That is, the hold icon displayed as the opponent's icon becomes the look-ahead target hold icon.

As described above, there may be a case where the mini game is played with the hold icon as shown in FIG. 161 (2) and a case where the mini game is played in another area as shown in FIG. 161 (1). Further, the example here is an example of a mini-game of whether or not the display mode of the hold icon changes, but even in the mini-game of whether or not various notice icons shown in FIG. 117 can be acquired. Good.

In FIGS. 161 (3) and 161 (4), No. 119 (b) is shown. The change notice display BCH of 16 "bancho" roughly shows an example of an effect of notifying that the display mode of the hold icon will change.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 161 (3) and 161 (4), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1, and the change icon h0 is the change icon. It is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the display area CIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIGS. 161 (3) and FIG. 161 (4), both the first hold icon h11 and the variable icon h0 are No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). It is displayed in the default display mode described in 1. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIGS. 161 (3) and 161 (4), No. 16 of FIG. 119 (b) is placed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display BCH of the "bancho" of the aspect a described in the above is displayed. A balloon marked "hold change" is added to the change notice display BCH of "bancho" here, and it is foretold that the display mode of the hold icon will change.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161 (3), the change notice display BCH of the “bancho” disappears from above the right base icon bIr, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the third display mode. (Display mode in blue) has changed. The timing at which the change notice display BCH of the "bancho" disappears may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, and the timing at which the change notice display BCH of the "bancho" disappears is better. It may be earlier, or conversely, the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be earlier.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161 (4), the change notice display BCH of "bancho" does not disappear from above the right base icon bIr, and the balloon added to the change notice display BCH of "bancho". However, it has changed to a balloon marked "one more time", and it is foretold that the display mode of the hold icon will change once more. Further, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). The timing at which the balloon added to the change notice display BCH of the "bancho" changes (the start timing of the re-notice) may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, or again. The start timing of the advance notice may be earlier, or conversely, the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be earlier. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161 (4), the change notice display BCH of the “bancho” disappears from above the right base icon bIr, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the fourth display mode. It has changed to (green display mode). In this example, the display mode of the hold icon is changed twice in one symbol change display, but in the next symbol change display of the symbol change display in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed once. The display mode of the hold icon may change again. In addition, the display mode of the hold icon may change three or more times in one symbol variation display. Further, the "Bancho" icon used as the change notice display BCH in FIG. 161 (4) is used again without disappearing for re-notice, but until the icon or display to be notified disappears (non-). The change notice display may be used many times (until the display is displayed). For example, if the icon to be notified is a hold icon, until the hold icon becomes a variable icon, and further until the variable icon disappears, in other words, the symbol variation display of the look-ahead target variation is started or the symbol The change notice display is used and the display mode may be repeatedly changed until the variation display is completed. Further, the icon or display to be notified may be a notice icon or a notice display, and the display mode of the notice icon or the notice display may be repeatedly changed until the notice icon or the notice display disappears. Further, even if the change notice display BCH is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon may not change at all. Further, even if the change notice display BCH of the "bancho" shown in the center of the symbol variation display 173 (4) is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon or variation icon may not change again. That is, the change notice display BCH of "Bancho" does not have to be used again to change the icon to be notified.

In FIGS. 161 (5) and 161 (6), No. 119 (b) is shown. An example of the effect of notifying that the display mode of the hold icon will change is roughly shown by the change notice display of the bomber system of 4 and 5.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 161 (5) and 161 (6), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1, and the default display mode changes. The icon h0 is displayed above the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (5), the first hold icon h11 is the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). It is displayed in the fourth display mode (green display mode) described in 4. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (5) has the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (b). The icon IHI of the default color "bomber" described in 4 has appeared, and the icon change animation using the icon IHI of the "bomber" has been started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161 (5), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11 in the fourth display mode (green display mode), and the fired bullets. The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161 (5), the first hold icon h11 changes to the fifth display mode (red display mode). There is. Since the change of the icon display mode by the default color "bomber" icon IHI raises only one step, it cannot be changed to the icon of the fifth display mode unless it is the icon of the fourth display mode.

On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161 (6), the first hold icon h11 is the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). It is displayed in the first display mode (default display mode) described in 1. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L has the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (b). The red "red bomber" icon IHI described in 5 has appeared, and the icon change animation using the "red bomber" icon IHI has started. Further, the tutorial display is displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. This tutorial display is a tutorial display on the change effect of the icon display mode using the change notice display, and may be displayed until the change effect is started and then hidden, or the bullet icon BTI may be displayed. It may be displayed until it is fired and then hidden, or it may continue to be displayed until the change in the display mode of the icon is completed or the change failure is confirmed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161 (6), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11 in the first display mode (default display mode), and the fired bullets. The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161 (6), the first hold icon h11 changes to the fifth display mode (red display mode). There is. Red (fifth display mode) icon of "red bomber" In the change of the icon display mode by IHI, the icon display mode before the change is changed to the icon of the fifth display mode regardless of the level. Can be done.

In FIG. 161 (7), a dish full tank error occurs in the state shown in FIG. 120 (A12), and an error message (warning message) such as "Please pull out the ball" is sent to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. (Hereinafter, referred to as "error display EWM") is displayed. This error display EWM overlaps at least a part of the notice icon YI from the front side, and hides at least a part of the notice icon YI. The error display EWM may overlap all of the notice icons YI from the front side. Further, the error display EWM may overlap at least a part from the front side only after the notice icon YI is used (for example, the display of aspect d shown in FIG. 117 (a)), or the notice icon may be overlapped. Only before YI is used (for example, the display of aspect a shown in FIG. 117 (a)), at least a part thereof may be overlapped from the front side. Further, the error display EWM may overlap at least a part of the notice icon YI from the front side over the entire display period of the error display EWM, and may overlap with a part of the period (for example, the error display EWM). It may overlap only for a certain period after the start.

Or conversely, the warning icon YI may overlap at least a part of the error display EWM from the front side (for example, when the error display EWM is less important or has a low relationship with fraud). This may be done only after the notice icon YI has been used, or before the notice icon YI has been used. Further, the example shown in FIG. 161 (7) has a relationship with the notice icon, but the relationship with the notice display is the same as described here.

In FIG. 161 (8), a dish full tank error occurs in the state shown in FIG. 148 (A2-1), and an error display EWM such as "Please pull out the ball" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. This error display EWM does not overlap with the effect of changing the display mode of the icon. That is, the error display EWM is displayed at a position deviated from the display position of the icon (red bomber icon RBI, bullet icon BTI, etc.) used for changing the display mode of the icon. More specifically, the error display EWM is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the change notice display. Further, the error display EWM does not overlap with the mini game (for example, the icon or display of the character appearing in the mini game).

However, the error display EWM includes at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the icon (for example, at least a part of the change notice display) and at least a part of the mini game (for example, the icon or display of the character appearing in the mini game). It may overlap from the front side (at least a part of), and it may overlap over the entire period of the display period of the error display EWM (for example, the start of the error display EWM). There may be cases where they overlap only for a certain period of time.

Further, FIGS. 161 (7) and 161 (8) are examples of error display EWM such as "please pull out the ball", but displays and warnings related to various errors described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. The same applies to the display regarding.

In the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 161, only one notice icon is displayed in the case of loss (in the case of Gase), and in the case of a big hit, the game is lively. It is configured to display multiple notice icons.

As described above, the description using FIGS. 117 to 161 can be combined with the simultaneous effect and the volume adjustment display (for example, the above-mentioned bar display VB for volume adjustment) described with reference to FIG. 113 and the like. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 155, it can be combined with the scene of customization by the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI.

Further, in the description using FIGS. 117 to 161, the example is applied to a pachinko machine (ball game machine), but the game console of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a medal or a game. It can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) that uses a ball (pachinko ball). That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko machine (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used, and a slot or the like (1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot, Jankyu) is fine. More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is internally determined by an internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, a winning combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, and when a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a specified number of medals are paid out. It may be a reeling game machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are fired into the game area to play a game, and the player is given a predetermined game value based on the fact that the enclosed balls win a prize in the predetermined approach area. It may be an enclosed ball type game table that can be circulated by firing the enclosed ball that has won the prize in the predetermined approach region or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention is applicable to various types of game consoles, and is also applicable to, for example, the enclosed pachinko machine described with reference to FIG. Z101. It is also applicable to the slot machine described with reference to FIG. Z102.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. One or two, a game table equipped with a fourth display means 208M', a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, etc.]
The display means is a means in which the first icon may be displayed.
The first icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display [for example, hold icon h11 to h14, variation icon h0].
The display means is a means in which a second icon may be displayed.
The display means is a means in which a notice icon [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (a) and various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b)] may be displayed.
The second icon is an icon of a type different from the notice icon [for example, the icon for mini game A shown in FIG. 118 (a) and the icon for mini game B shown in FIG. 118 (c)]. The icon is not an icon that represents the number of pending numbers by the number displayed
The display means is a means in which an effect display may be displayed.
The effect display is a display of an effect using one of the displayed first icons [for example, one or more (all or part) icons] and the second icon. [For example, display of mini-game A or B]
When the notice icon is displayed after the effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 120 (A11), FIG. 123 (A3-2-9), FIG. FIG. (A 3-2-8c7), FIG. 125 (I 11), FIG. 127 (U 34), FIG. 128 (U 15-2-17), FIG. 130 (U 1-2-24), FIG. 135 (? a8) etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to entertain the player by paying attention to the process of whether or not the notice icon is acquired, triggered by the display of the effect display using the two icons.

The first icon may be an icon that may be displayed according to the number of holds. For example, it may be a variable icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 0, or it may be displayed corresponding to the first hold icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 1 and the number of holds = 2. The second second hold icon is displayed, the third hold icon is displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 3, and the fourth hold icon is displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 4. There may be. Further, the notice icon may be a different type of icon from the variable icon and the hold icon.

Here, the number of holds is the number of times that the start of the symbol variation display is held, and the first icon may include a change icon as an example in addition to the hold icon. The variable icon is an icon related to a symbol variable display being executed, and is an icon representing a held hold that has been digested. That is, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold represented by the hold icon representing the undigested hold is started, the hold icon is displayed as the variation icon corresponding to the started symbol variation display.

The number of holds may be displayed depending on the number of the first icons displayed, and the number of holds may not be displayed depending on the number of the notice icons displayed.

The effect display may be an effect display using any of the displayed first icons and the second icon.

When the effect display is performed, the notice icon may be displayed.

Any of the above icons may be one first icon or may be a plurality of first icons (for example, all or part of the first icons displayed).

The second icon may be an effect icon (for example, a character icon), a hold icon, or a variable icon. More specifically, the icon for the above-mentioned effect may be an icon that announces the start of the advance notice effect, an icon dedicated to the mini game, or an icon that also serves as a hold icon. However, it may be an icon that also serves as a variable icon.

Examples of the effect display include a mini-game effect using any of the displayed first icons and the second icon. That is, the notice icon may be displayed as a result of the production of the mini game using any of the above icons and the second icon.

"The notice icon may be displayed" means that the notice icon may not be displayed. Further, "the notice icon may not be displayed" may include that the notice icon may not be displayed and another display other than the notice icon may be displayed. It does not have to be included. This idea also applies in the following description.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed (stocked) by changing the display position after the display is started, or may be continuously displayed (stocked) without changing the display position. There may be. For example, the display means is provided with an appearance area where the notice icon is started to be displayed and a stock area in which the notice icon is stocked, and the appearance area and the stock area are different areas (partially overlapped). It's okay, but not all overlap). The stock area is a display area in which the notice icon is continuously displayed. The notice icon moves from the appearance area to the stock area, is used in the stock area, may disappear in the stock area, or the display mode may change. Alternatively, it may come out of the stock area and disappear, or the display mode may change.

The effect display may be an effect (for example, a mini game) in which any of the icons and the second icon are used at the same time, or any of the icon and the second icon. It may be an effect (for example, a mini game) in which one icon is used first and the other icon is used later for the one.

In addition, the notice icon may or may not be displayed by displaying an effect in which only one of the displayed first icons is used. .. Further, the notice icon may or may not always be displayed depending on the display of the effect in which only the second icon is used.

Further, "a plurality of types of notice icons are prepared as the notice icons [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (a) and various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b)].
The display means is a means in which a notice display may be displayed.
As the notice display, a plurality of types of notice displays are prepared [for example, various notice displays YH shown in FIG. 117 (b)].
The notice display of one of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, No. 6. "Notice display of change"]
One type of notice display among the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, No. 17 "Reach" notice display],
A certain notice icon among the plurality of types of notice icons [for example, No. 1 When the "box" notice icon YI] is used, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (A33), FIG. 126 (I14-4-3)]. ,
When the certain notice icon is used, the second notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 125 (i 15), FIG. 126 (i 14-2-3)],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, which notice display is displayed until the certain notice icon is used (whether the first notice display is displayed or the second notice display is displayed). Since we do not know, we may be able to draw attention until the certain notice icon is used. That is, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display is not determined in advance on a one-to-one basis, and the player cannot recognize which notice display is displayed just by looking at the type of the notice icon. You may continue to look at the notice icon with interest until the display is displayed.

Here, in the first place, it may be unknown that the notice display itself is displayed until the certain notice display is displayed. That is, the notice display may be displayed or the notice display may not be displayed, and it may be unclear in which case. The fact that the notice display itself is unknown means that, as a result, it is also unclear which type of notice display is displayed among the plurality of types of notice displays.

Further, as the notice icon, only one type of notice icon may be prepared. In this case, when the notice icon is used, a certain notice display among a plurality of types of notice displays may be displayed, and the notice display is displayed until the notice display is displayed. The thing itself may be unknown.

The display means may be a means capable of displaying the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon used when the certain notice icon is used. That is, at the time when the notice icon is displayed, it may be possible to know which of the plurality of types of notice displays the notice display displayed after the notice icon is used. In short, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display may be one-to-one and predetermined.

Further, "when a certain notice icon is used" is, for example, a case where the certain notice icon is used in the production, and more specifically, the display mode of the certain notice icon is It may be a case of change, or a case where the certain notice icon disappears (when it is hidden) (the same applies to the following).

Further, the notice display may be displayed (stocked) by changing the display position after the display is started, or may be continuously displayed (stocked) without changing the display position. You may.

When a certain notice icon among a plurality of types of notice icons is used, one type of notice display among the plurality of types of notice displays (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain notice display") is displayed. In some cases, it may be unclear which type of notice display among the plurality of types of notice display is displayed until the certain notice display is displayed.

Further, it may not be announced that the first notice display will be displayed only by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display may be displayed. It may not be announced. Alternatively, conversely, there may be a case where it is foretold that the first notice display will be displayed only by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display will be displayed. It may be foretold.

Further, "When the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of any of the displayed first icons may change [for example, in the case of FIG. 121 (A36)]. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first notice display may be a display that changes the display mode of any of the displayed first icons. For example, the display mode of any of the first icons changes to the display mode of the notice. In this case, the first notice display functions as a notice of the notice by the first icon.

According to this game table, it may be possible to draw attention to the first icon even after the effect display is finished.

Here, the "displayed icon of any of the first icons" may be the first icon used for the effect display, or may be used for the effect display. It may be the first icon that is not. Further, any of the icons may be a plurality of icons or one icon (for example, all or a part of the first icons displayed).

Further, the first icon used for the effect display may be a display mode in which the effect display is performed as it is, or may be a display mode changed from the display mode in which the effect display is performed. .. For example, when the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display is different between the display mode before being used for the effect display and the display mode in which the effect display is performed, the effect display is performed. After that, the display mode may return to the previous display mode, the display mode may be the same as it is without returning to the previous display mode, and the display mode is further different from the display mode in which the effect display is performed. It may change to the display mode of. Further, when the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display is the same as the display mode before being used for the effect display and the display mode in which the effect display is performed, the effect display is performed. Later, the display mode may change, or the display mode may remain the same without change. In any of the cases described above, when the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display may change.

When the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of any of the displayed first icons may be changed without fail, and the displayed first notice display may be changed. The display mode of any of the icons may not change. Further, when the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of any of the displayed first icons is higher than when the first notice display is not displayed. It may be variable.

Further, there are a plurality of types of effect displays in the effect display, and one of the icons is more than the type of effect display that changes the display mode of any of the displayed first icons. The type of effect display that does not change the display mode of the above may have a higher filing frequency, conversely a lower filing frequency, or the appearance frequency of both may be the same. Further, one type of effect display among the plurality of types of effect displays is the first effect display, and the case where the first effect display is displayed rather than the case where the first effect display is not displayed. May be more likely to change the display mode of any of the displayed first icons.

Further, "The second notice display is a display for giving a notice [for example, a notice that reach will be performed] regarding the symbol variation display on which the second notice display is displayed.
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed than in the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, just because the second notice display is displayed does not necessarily mean that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed, and even the symbol variation display on which the second notice display is displayed is final. In some cases, the pattern mode of the loss may be definitively displayed. Or conversely, if the second notice display (for example, premier notice, etc.) is displayed, the symbol mode in which the second notice display is displayed is displayed, and finally the big hit symbol mode is always confirmed and displayed. You may.

The display means is a means in which a third notice display may be displayed, and the third notice display is a display for giving a look-ahead notice (for example, a chance look-ahead notice, etc.). It may be easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode when the third notice display is displayed than when the third notice display is not displayed. That is, just because the third notice display is displayed does not necessarily mean that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed, and even the symbol variation display on which the third notice display is displayed is final. In some cases, the pattern mode of the loss may be definitively displayed. Alternatively, conversely, if the third notice display is displayed, the symbol mode of the big hit may be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display on which the third notice display is displayed.

In addition, "The first icon has a plurality of types of display modes [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a). 1-No. 19 display modes], which is an icon that is started to be displayed in one type of display mode.
One of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the “default” display mode].
One of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode [for example, a display mode of "villager" (rock-paper-scissors), a display mode of Yoshimune (bow)].
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first display mode may be the default display mode. In addition, the second display mode may be the display mode used for the effect display. For example, it may be a display mode that may be used for the effect display, or may be a dedicated display mode used for the effect display.

Further, "The effect display is the display mode of the first icon of the second display mode displayed [for example, a hold icon or a variable icon of the display mode of" rock-paper-scissors ", or a display mode of Yoshimune (bow). Hold icon or variable icon] and the display of the effect using the second icon [for example, panda's opponent icon TI, mini game A icon AI] [for example, start from FIG. 125 (A8-1)]. The rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation that has been done, the display of Yoshimune treasure acquisition shown in Fig. 126-Fig. 127],
The effect display is an effect display in which the first icon of the first display mode is not used.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "By displaying the first icon of the second display mode, it is foretold that the effect display will be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that just because the effect display is foretold to be displayed does not mean that the notice icon is displayed during and / or after the effect display is displayed. That is, simply displaying the first icon of the second display mode does not mean that the notice icon is displayed during and / or after the display of the effect display.

Further, when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the effect display is displayed, and when the first icon is displayed in the first display mode, the effect display is displayed. However, the configuration may be such that the notice icon is not foretold only by displaying the first icon in the first display mode.

Here, when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the effect display may always be displayed, or conversely, the effect display may not be displayed.

It may be unclear whether the notice icon will be displayed after that, depending only on the fact that the first icon is displayed in the second display mode.

Further, the second icon may be displayed only when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode.

Here, the first icon and the second icon displayed in the second display mode may be started to be displayed at the same time, or the first icon displayed in the second display mode may be started. May start displaying first, or the second icon may start displaying first.

Even if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed,
The second icon may be displayed. Further, if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed, the second icon may not be displayed either. Alternatively, the first icon displayed in the second display mode may not be displayed, or the second icon may be displayed.

Further, the second icon may be always displayed only when the first icon displayed in the second display mode is displayed. Further, when the first icon displayed in the second display mode is displayed, the second icon may be displayed without fail.

Further, the second icon may not be displayed when the first icon is not displayed, or may be displayed in the opposite direction. That is, the second icon may not appear by itself, or may appear by itself.

In addition, "the display of the second icon may be started after the first icon is displayed in the second display mode [for example, the opponent started from FIG. 120 (A5)]. Icon appearance animation, Mini-game A icon appearance animation starting from Fig. 126 (U5)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The "second icon" referred to here is neither the hold icon, the icon that also serves as the hold icon, the variable icon, or the icon that also serves as the variable icon. That is, the "second icon" may be a display mode used for the effect display (hereinafter, referred to as "display mode for effect display").

After the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the display of the second icon may not be started. Even in the case of "when the display of the second icon is not started", the display of the second icon is started before the first icon is displayed in the second display mode. Or it may start at the same time that the first icon is displayed in the second display mode.

When the display mode of the first icon changes (for example, when the display mode changes to the second display mode), the second icon may be displayed without fail. Alternatively, after the second icon is displayed, the first icon of the second display mode may be displayed.

When the second icon is the variable icon or the hold icon (including the case where the variable icon or the hold icon is also used), the first icon of the second display mode is displayed and then the first icon is displayed. The second icon may or may not change from the third display mode (for example, the default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, the display mode for effect display). Good. Further, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon changes from the third display mode (for example, the default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, effect display). The display mode may change, or may change without fail. Alternatively, at the same time that the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon is displayed from the third display mode (for example, the default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, effect display). The display mode may change, or may change without fail.

The timing at which the second icon is displayed is one pattern (for example, the first icon of the second display mode is displayed only after the first icon of the second display mode is displayed. There may be only the front or only at the same time when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, or a plurality of patterns (for example, the first icon of the second display mode is displayed). After, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, and at the same time when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, a certain fixed combination of 2 or 3). There may be.

The second icon may be displayed before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, or the first icon of the second display mode is displayed. After that, the second icon may be displayed, or the second icon may be displayed at the same time as the first icon of the second display mode is displayed.

In addition, "the first icon of the second display mode may be displayed more than once [for example, FIG. 120 (A3-1), FIG. 126 (U3)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, there may be a case where only one of the first icon of the second display aspect is displayed. Further, a plurality of the first icons of the first display mode may be displayed, or only one icon may be displayed. Further, only one of the second icons may be displayed, or a plurality of the second icons may be displayed.

In addition, "The first effect display may be displayed as the effect display.
As the effect display, a second effect display may be displayed.
After the first effect display is displayed, the notice icon is displayed [for example, FIG. 120 (A11)].
After the second effect display is displayed, the notice icon is not displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (A 8-2-3)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the second effect display is a so-called fake effect display.

In addition, "a plurality of notice icons may be displayed [for example, FIG. 125 (i 11), FIG. 128 (u 15-2-17)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, after the effect display is displayed once or a plurality of times, a plurality of notice icons may be displayed. That is, a plurality of notice icons may be stocked. For example, a plurality of notice icons may be displayed only once the effect display is performed, or 0 or 1 notice icon is displayed each time the effect display is performed once. , A plurality of notice icons may be displayed by performing the effect display a plurality of times. Further, the notice icon may be displayed (stocked) by an effect other than the effect display.

In addition, "It may be easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode when the second number of notice icons are displayed than when the first number of notice icons are displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even when the second number of notice icons are displayed, the lost symbol mode may be finally displayed. Alternatively, when the second number of notice icons are displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally confirmed and displayed.

Even if the big hit symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second notice mode rather than the notice icon is displayed in the first notice mode. Good.

Further, it is provided with "operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transmission unit 191 and second chance button 137].
If the operating means is operated while the effect display is being displayed, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, the flow from FIG. 134 (c7) to FIG. 120 (a 9-1)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The notice icon may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated, or conversely, the notice icon may be displayed only when the operation means is operated.

While the effect display is being displayed, the operation means may or may not be able to be operated, and the notice icon may be displayed more easily when it is possible than when it is not possible, or vice versa. In addition, the notice icon may not be displayed easily. Further, the probability that the notice icon is displayed may be the same depending on whether the notice icon is displayed or not.

During the display of the effect display, a display related to the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "operation display") may or may not be displayed. The operation display referred to here may be a display including an image imitating the operation means, a display of only the image, or a display prompting the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display). It may be a display including the operation promotion display, a display including an operation validity period of the operation means (operation validity period display), or the operation. It may be only the validity period display. Further, as the display mode of the operation display, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared, and in the plurality of types of display modes, the mode of the operation means itself may be changed (for example, a color may be changed, a protrusion amount may be changed, or the like. , Shape change, position change, posture change, etc.) may be included.

In addition, it is equipped with "directing movable means [for example, FIG. 146 (ka c1)].
The effect movable means may perform the effect operation after the display of the effect display is started [for example, the mini-game dedicated accessory 225 shown in FIG. 146 (ka c2)].
When the effect operation is performed, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, FIG. 146 (c2)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The effect movable means may be configured to perform an effect operation after the effect display is displayed. That is, the effect movable means may be configured to perform the effect operation after the display of the effect display is completed. Alternatively, the effect movable means may be configured to perform an effect operation during the display of the effect display.

When the effect operation is performed, the notice icon may be displayed more easily than when the effect operation is not performed, but the notice icon may not be displayed even if the effect operation is performed. May be good. Alternatively, when the effect operation is performed, the notice icon may always be displayed.

When the effect operation is performed, the look-ahead notice may be started, or the normal notice (notice regarding the symbol variation display executed when the effect operation is performed) may be started. There may be. Further, when the effect operation is performed, the pre-reading notice may be started more easily than when the effect operation is not performed, but the pre-reading notice is not started even if the effect operation is performed. There may be. Alternatively, when the effect operation is performed, the look-ahead notice may always be displayed. Further, when the effect operation is performed, the normal advance notice may be started more easily than when the effect operation is not performed, but when the effect operation is performed, the normal notice is not started. There may be. Alternatively, when the effect operation is performed, the normal notice may be displayed without fail.

However, during the display of the effect display, the effect movable means may be configured so that the effect operation is never performed, and the effect movable means performs the effect operation regardless of the display of the effect display. It may be done.

Further, "the notice icon is one type of notice mode among a plurality of types of notice modes [for example," box "," red box "," gold box ", and" rainbow box "shown in FIG. 117 (a)]. It is an icon that starts to be displayed with
It is said that the notice icon is displayed in the second notice mode [for example, "red box"] rather than the notice icon is displayed in the first notice mode [for example, "box"]. In the symbol variation display executed when the notice icon is used, it may be easy to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 117 (a)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When the notice icon is used before the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as "notice target change") subject to the notice by the notice icon is started, the notice by the notice icon is a look-ahead notice. In some cases, it may be a normal notice, but it may be unclear whether the notice was a look-ahead notice or a normal notice just by looking at the notice by the notice icon.

The notice icon may be used in the production by the end of the change in the notice target. In this case as well, the notice by the notice icon may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a normal notice.

The notice icon may be displayed more easily when the notice icon is displayed in the first notice mode than when the notice icon is displayed in the second notice mode. , A certain display (display different from the notice display) may be easily displayed.

Further, "The display means is a means in which a variable icon [for example, variable icon h0] may be displayed.
The variable icon is an icon related to the symbol variable display being executed.
The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also, "The first icon is the variable icon.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first icon may be an icon dedicated to the variable icon, or may be an icon that also serves as the variable icon.

Further, "the display means is a means in which a hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 of the special figure 1] may be displayed.
The hold icon is an icon that represents the number of holds by the number displayed.
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also, "The first icon is the hold icon.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. One or two, a game table equipped with a fourth display means 208M', a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a hold icon may be displayed.
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 in FIG. 1].
The display means is a means in which a notice icon may be displayed.
The notice icon is an icon of a type different from the hold icon [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (a) and various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b)], and the display means is , Notice display [for example, notice display YH] is a means that may be displayed.
As the notice display, a plurality of types of notice displays are prepared [for example, various notice displays YH shown in FIG. 117 (b)].
When the notice icon is used, one type of notice display among the plurality of types of notice displays may be displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (A32), FIG. 130 (E13), FIG. 131 (E 1-2-18), FIG. 136 (A8-1), FIG. 136 (A8-2-1), FIG. 138 (A1-3-3), FIG. 139 (Ia15), FIG. (Ia28) etc.],
When the notice icon is used, the notice icon may be hidden [for example, FIG. 121 (A35), FIG. 131 (E15), FIG. 131 (E1-2-20), etc.],
Even if the notice icon is used, the notice icon may not be hidden and the notice icon may be used again in the production, and a certain notice display among the plurality of types of notice displays may be displayed [for example, , Fig. 136 (A11), Fig. (A16), Fig. 136 (A8-2-4), Fig. (A8-2-6), Fig. 138 (A1-3-9), Fig. 139. (Ia28) etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to this game table, even after the notice icon is used, the display status of the notice icon can be noticed, and the player may be entertained.

"When the notice icon is used" is, for example, a case where the notice icon is used in the production, and more specifically, a case where the display mode of the notice icon is changed. , The case where the notice icon disappears (when it disappears) may be the case (the same applies to the following).

If the notice icon is used once, the notice icon may be hidden, and even if the notice icon is used once, the notice icon is not hidden and the notice icon is re-produced. It may be used and some notice display may be displayed.

Further, "a plurality of types of notice icons are prepared as the notice icons [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (a) and various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b)].
The notice display of one of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, No. 6. "Notice display of change"]
One type of notice display among the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, No. 17 "Reach" notice display],
A certain notice icon among the plurality of types of notice icons [for example, No. 1 When the "box" notice icon YI] is used, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 136 (A8-1), FIG. 138 (A1-3-3). ), Fig. 139 (Ia15), Fig. (Ia28), etc.],
When the certain notice icon is used, the second notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 136 (A11)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it is not necessary to give a notice that the notice display itself is displayed before the notice icon is used.

Further, before the notice icon is used, it may be configured that no notice is given as to which type of notice display among the plurality of types of notice displays is displayed.

Further, it may not be announced that the first notice display will be displayed only by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display may be displayed. It may not be announced. Alternatively, conversely, there may be a case where it is foretold that the first notice display will be displayed only by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display will be displayed. It may be foretold.

Further, "when a certain type of notice icon among the plurality of types of notice icons is used, a type of notice display associated with the certain type of notice icon is displayed [". For example, the various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117 (b) are associated with the various notice icons shown in FIG. 117 (b) in a one-to-one relationship].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The plurality of types of notice displays and the plurality of types of notice icons may be associated with each other for each type.

The plurality of types of notice displays and the plurality of types of notice icons may be associated with each other on a one-to-one basis, on a many-to-one basis, or on a one-to-many basis for each type. It may be associated with many-to-many.

Further, "The notice icon of the certain type is not hidden even if it is used once, and the notice icon of the certain type is used a plurality of times until the notice icon of the certain type is hidden. The type of notice display associated with the type of notice icon is displayed multiple times [for example, FIGS. 139 (a15) and (a28)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The second notice display is a display for giving a notice [for example, a notice that reach will be performed] regarding the symbol variation display on which the second notice display is displayed.
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed than in the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "Type of notice display displayed when the notice icon is used for the first time [For example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). 27 "Oval" notice display YH] and the type of notice display displayed when the notice icon is used for the Nth time (N is a natural number of 2 or more) [for example, the 3rd time] may be the same. [For example, FIG. 136 (A8-2-2) and FIG. (A8-2-6)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

However, they may be different, and different types of notice signs may always be displayed. Or conversely, they may always be the same.

Further, "an operating means [for example, a chance button 136, an operation lever 139, a transmission unit 191 and a second chance button 137] provided at a position where the player can operate the player are provided.
The display means is a means on which an operation display may be displayed.
The operation display is a display including at least an image imitating the operation means [for example, an operation promotion notification image composed of a button image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT].
When the notice icon is used [for example, FIG. 140 (i b4)], the operation display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 140 (i b5)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "an operating means [for example, a chance button 136, an operation lever 139, a transmission unit 191 and a second chance button 137] provided at a position where the player can operate the player are provided.
The display means is a means on which an operation display may be displayed.
The operation display is a display including at least an image [for example, a button image 136a] that imitates the operation means [for example, a display of an operation promotion notification image].
After the operation display is displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (A31-2-2), FIG. 143 (A2)], the notice icon may be used [for example, FIG. 121 (A31-2)]. -6), Fig. 143 (d a7)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The operation display may be a display of only an image imitating the operation means, or may be a display including a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "operation promotion display"). , The display may include a display showing the operation validity period of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "operation validity period display"), or may be only the image and the operation promotion display, or the image. And the operation validity period may be displayed only. Further, as the display mode of the operation display, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared, and in the plurality of types of display modes, the mode of the operation means itself may be changed (for example, a color may be changed, a protrusion amount may be changed, or the like. , Shape change, position change, posture change, etc.) may be included.

Further, "an operating means [for example, a chance button 136, an operation lever 139, a transmission unit 191 and a second chance button 137] provided at a position where the player can operate the player are provided.
When the operating means is operated [for example, FIG. 121 (A31-2-5), FIG. 143 (A5)], the notice icon may be used [For example, FIG. 121 (A31-2-6). ), Fig. 143 (d a7)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "an operating means [for example, a chance button 136, an operation lever 139, a transmission unit 191 and a second chance button 137] provided at a position where the player can operate the player are provided.
When the operating means is operated, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, the flow from FIG. 134 (c7) to FIG. 120 (a 9-1)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, it is equipped with "directing movable means [for example, family crest accessory 224E, Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 and the like].
When the notice icon is used, as the notice display, a display for notifying that the effect movable means performs the effect operation [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117 (b). 24 "Senryobako accessory operation", No. 25 "Family crest movements"] may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display for notifying that the effect movable means performs the effect operation is referred to as an effect operation notice display.

In addition, "a plurality of notice icons may be displayed [for example, FIG. 125 (i 11), FIG. 128 (u 15-2-17)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "It may be easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode when the second number of notice icons are displayed than when the first number of notice icons are displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the notice icon is one type of notice mode among a plurality of types of notice modes [for example," box "," red box "," gold box ", and" rainbow box "shown in FIG. 117 (a)]. It is an icon that starts to be displayed with
It is said that the notice icon is displayed in the second notice mode [for example, "red box"] rather than the notice icon is displayed in the first notice mode [for example, "box"]. In the symbol variation display executed when the notice icon is used, it may be easy to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 117 (a)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. One or two, a game table equipped with a fourth display means 208M', a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a hold icon may be displayed.
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 in FIG. 1].
The hold icon is the first icon display mode [for example, No. 119 (a) shown in FIG. 119 (a). Display mode of the "default" icon of No. 1 or No. 2. The display mode of the "blinking white" icon, the display mode of "roulette" shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-3) and the like, or the display mode of No. 119 (a). 10 "Timer" display mode] is an icon that may be displayed.
The hold icon is the second icon display mode [for example, No. 119 (a) shown in FIG. 119 (a). 5 "Red" icon display mode] is an icon that may be displayed.
The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally better than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. The jackpot symbol mode is easily displayed [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 119 (a)],
The display means is a means in which a change notice display [for example, display of various icon change notices shown in FIG. 119 (b)] may be displayed.
The first change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The first change animation is an animation [for example, an icon change animation] that changes the mode of any of the displayed hold icons.
The change notice display is the first change notice mode [for example, No. 119 (b) shown in FIG. 119 (b). It is a display that may be displayed in [Aspects of the "Bomber" icon in 4].
The change notice display is the second change notice mode [for example, No. 119 (b) shown in FIG. 119 (b). It is a display that may be displayed in [Aspects of the "Red Bomber" icon in 5].
The change notice display of the first change notice mode (hereinafter, referred to as "first change notice display") [For example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). The first change animation may be performed after the "Bomber" icon IHI] of 4 is displayed.
When the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is changed to the second icon display mode. In some cases [for example, the display mode may be changed to blue instead of the red display mode as in the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 149 (A3'-2-4), but FIG. 148 (A6'). ), It may be changed to a red display mode],
The change notice display of the second change notice mode (hereinafter, referred to as "second change notice display") [For example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). The first change animation may be performed after the "Red Bomber" icon IHI] of 5 is displayed.
When the first change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is changed to the second icon display mode. [For example, FIG. 148 (A6), FIG. 148 (A4-2-3), FIG. 148 (A2-2-4), FIG. 149 (A3-5-4), FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), FIG. 150. (A3-2-4), FIG. 152 (B8), FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-5), FIG. 158 (Fd6), FIG. 159 (Fe6), FIG. Always change],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

A fourth change animation using the change notice display may be performed, and the fourth change animation may be an animation that changes the type and / or mode of the notice icon. In addition, a fifth change animation using the change notice display may be performed, and the fifth change animation may be an animation that changes the type and / or mode of the notice display.

When the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is an icon other than the second icon display mode. It may be changed to a display mode (for example, an icon display mode of one of the third to fifth icon display modes described later, or a sixth icon display mode).

The mth change animation in which the nth change notice display is used is the mth change animation by the nth change notice display, and the nth change notice display appears. It is a change animation of m (n and m are both natural numbers of 1 or more, and the same applies to the following).

As the change notice display, a plurality of types of change notice displays are prepared, and one type of change notice display among the plurality of types of change notice displays is the first change notice display, and the plurality of types of change notice displays. One type of change notice display is the second change notice display. The first change notice display may be displayed in the first change notice mode, or may be displayed in the second change notice mode. Alternatively, the second change notice display may be displayed in the first change notice mode, or may be displayed in the second change notice mode. Further, the first change animation may be more easily executed when the first change notice display is displayed than when the second change notice display is displayed.

Here, the first change animation changes the mode of one of the displayed hold icons, but the change notice display is the mode of the hold icon. Can also be interpreted as changing.

The hold icon of any of the hold icons may be a plurality of hold icons or one hold icon, for example, all or a part of the hold icons displayed. It may be (the same applies below).

The mode before the change of any of the hold icons may be the first icon display mode, the third icon display mode, or the like. That is, the mode when the display of the change notice display is started in any of the hold icons is not necessarily the default mode.

Also,
"It ’s a game console with display means,
The display means is a means in which a hold icon may be displayed.
The hold icon is an icon displayed according to the number of holds.
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first icon display mode.
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second icon display mode.
The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally better than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. The jackpot symbol mode is easy to confirm and display,
The display means is a means in which a change notice display may be displayed.
The first change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The first change animation is an animation that changes the mode of any of the displayed hold icons.
The change notice display is a display that may be displayed in the first change notice mode.
The change notice display is a display that may be displayed in the second change notice mode.
The change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode is used rather than the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode is used. The first change animation is more likely to change the mode of any of the displayed hold icons to the second icon display mode.
A game table characterized by that. "
It may be.

According to this game table, it is possible to infer what kind of mode (here, the second icon display mode) may change the mode of the hold icon depending on the mode of the change notice display. It may be possible to entertain the player. For example, the mode of the change notice display is related to the mode after the change of the hold icon, and if the mode of the change notice display is a red mode (here, the second change notice mode), the hold It can be inferred that the mode after the change of the icon may also be the red mode (here, the second icon display mode).

In the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the second change notice display is used, the mode of any of the hold icons displayed is described as described above. It may be changed to a mode other than the first icon display mode and the second icon display mode (for example, the sixth icon display mode, etc.), or it may be changed to the sixth icon display mode. May be easily changed to the second icon display mode.

In the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the second change notice display is used, the mode of any of the hold icons displayed is the first. The icon display mode and the mode other than the second icon display mode (for example, the seventh icon display mode, etc.) may be changed. This seventh icon display mode may be a jackpot confirmation mode (premier mode). That is, in the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode is used, the mode of any of the hold icons is the mode of the look-ahead notice, but the jackpot is confirmed. It is easy to change to a mode that does not go up to (for example, a second icon display mode), but in the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode, a big hit is confirmed. (Premier aspect) may be changed. It should be noted that the mode of determining the jackpot (premier mode) may be changed without fail. Further, although the seventh icon display mode is not originally a big hit confirmation mode, it may be treated as a big hit confirmation mode. In this case, the pre-reading notice is inconsistent with the normal time, and this contradiction becomes the premiere and becomes a big hit.

The second icon display mode may be different from the first icon display mode. The first icon display mode may be the default mode. The default mode is the mode that is most frequently displayed. The second icon display mode may be a look-ahead notice mode. Further, the first change animation is more likely to be executed when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode than when it is displayed in the first change notice mode. May be good.

In addition, "The hold icon is the third icon display mode [for example, No. 119 (a) shown in FIG. 119 (a). It is an icon that may be displayed in [Display mode of the "blue" icon in 3].
The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally better than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode. The jackpot symbol mode is easily displayed [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 119 (a)],
If the first change notice display is displayed and the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of any of the hold icons among the hold icons can be changed. It may be changed to the third icon display mode [for example, it is changed to a blue display mode (third display mode) like the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 149 (A3'-2-4). May be],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The third icon display mode may also be a look-ahead notice mode.

The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode is finally better than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. The jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed.

In the first change animation in which the first change notice display is used, one of the displayed hold icons is displayed as the third icon rather than the second icon display mode. It may be easy to change the display mode. The probability of changing to the second icon display mode may be 0%.

Further, "Even if the first change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of all the displayed hold icons is not changed to the third icon display mode [for example, FIG. 148 (A6), FIG. 148 (A4-2-3), FIG. 148 (A2-2-4), FIG. 149 (A3-5-4), FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), FIG. 150 (A3-2). -4), FIG. 152 (B8), FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-5), FIG. 156 (Eb8), FIG. 158 (Fd6), FIG. 159 (Fe6), FIG. No hold icon changed to mode],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first invariant animation [for example, icon invariant animation] using the change notice display may be performed.
Even if the first change notice display is displayed, if the first non-change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of all the displayed hold icons does not change. [For example],
Even if the second change notice display is displayed, if the first non-change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of all the displayed hold icons does not change [. For example, as shown in FIGS. 149 (A3-3-3) and 149 (A3-4-4), the display mode of all hold icons does not change],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first invariant animation is a scene in which the mode of any of the displayed hold icons fails to be changed by the second change notice display [for example, FIG. 149 (Fig. 149). A3-3-2) to the scene of the figure (A3-3-3), FIG. 149 (A3-4-2) to the scene of the figure (A3-4-4)] are included in the animation.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "A third change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The third change animation is the same animation as the first non-change animation [for example, FIG. 149 (A3-4-1) to FIG. (A3-4-2)] up to the middle [
For example, FIGS. 149 (A3-5-1) to FIG. 149 (A3-5-2)],
The third change animation is a scene that finally succeeds in changing the mode of any of the displayed hold icons by the second change notice display [for example, FIG. 149. (A3-5-3) -Scene of the figure (A3-5-4)] is included in the animation.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first change animation is a scene in which the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is successfully changed by the second change notice display [for example, FIG. 148 (A4). -1) ~ The scene in the figure (A5), etc.] is included in the animation.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

here,
"The first invariant animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The change notice display is a display composed of a plurality of change notice icons.
One of the plurality of change notice icons is the first change notice icon.
One of the plurality of change notice icons is a second change notice icon.
The first invariant animation includes a scene (hereinafter, referred to as "first scene") in which the mode of any of the displayed hold icons has failed to be changed. Is an animation
The first scene is a scene that fails using the second change notice icon.
The first change animation includes a scene (hereinafter, referred to as "second scene") that succeeds in changing the mode of any of the displayed hold icons. It's an animation
The second scene is a successful scene using the second change notice icon.
A game table characterized by that. "
It may be.

In the first change animation, one of the first scene in which the first change notice icon is used and the second scene in which the first change notice icon is used is used. It is an animation that may be displayed, and the first invariant animation is also an animation in which one of the first scene and the second scene may be displayed. The successful scene may be displayed more easily when the second scene is displayed than when the first scene is displayed. Alternatively, there may be no difference in the displayability of the successful scene between the two cases.

Further, the first change animation is an animation in which a second scene using the first change notice icon may be displayed, and the first change animation is the first change notice. The first scene in which the icon is used is an animation in which the first scene is not displayed, and the first invariant animation is an animation in which the first scene may be displayed, and the first immutable animation. The change animation is an animation in which the second scene is not displayed, and when the second scene is displayed, the successful scene is always displayed, and when the first scene is displayed, the first scene is displayed. , The failed scene may always be displayed.

Further, the first change animation is one of a first scene in which the first change notice icon is used and a second scene in which the first change notice icon is used. The first invariant animation is an animation in which the first scene may be displayed, and the first invariant animation is the second invariant animation. Is an animation in which the scene of is never displayed, and when the second scene is displayed, the successful scene is always displayed, and even if the first scene is displayed, the failed scene is always displayed. It may be in a mode that is not always displayed.

There may be only one scene using the first change notice icon with respect to the hold icon displayed at a certain position.

Also,
"A third change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The third change animation is the same animation as the first change animation until the middle.
In the third change animation, a scene (hereinafter, referred to as "third scene") that finally succeeds in changing the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is Included animation,
The third scene is a scene that is finally successful using the second change notice icon.
A game table characterized by that. "
It may be.

The third change animation is an animation in which the mode change of the hold icon seems to be a failure and succeeds. This third change animation appears less frequently than the first change animation. However, on the contrary, it may be higher or the same.

It corresponds to the hold icon changed to the second icon display mode by the first change animation, rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon changed to the second icon display mode by the third change animation. In the symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be finally confirmed (the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot is higher), or conversely, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed. It may be difficult to display (the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot is low), or the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot may be the same for both.

In addition, "the first change notice display is used rather than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode is changed by the first change animation using the first change notice display. In some cases, the design variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode has changed due to the change animation is more likely to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode [For example, if the hold icon has the same default display mode before the change. , The first change animation in which the first change notice display is used changes to the third display mode (second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 149 (A3'2-4)), but the second change notice display In the first change animation in which is used, the fifth display mode is changed (the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 149 (A7)), and therefore the reliability shown in FIG. 119 (a)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first change notice display may change to the second change notice display [for example, FIGS. 152 (B4) to (B5), 152 (B3-2-1) to the same". FIG. (B3-2-5), FIG. 152 (B3-3-3) to FIG. (B3-3-5), FIG. 153 (B1-2-5) to FIG. 153 (B1-3-6) to FIG. 154 (B1-3-9)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The mode of the change notice display started to be displayed in the first change notice mode may change to the second change notice mode, or the change changed to the first change notice mode. The mode of the notice display may be further changed to the second change notice mode. Further, in the first change animation, the second change notice mode may be changed, and the second change notice mode may be changed before the first change animation is started. It may change to the second change notice mode after the first change animation is completed.

It should be noted that the mode of the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode does not change as it is displayed in the first change notice mode, rather than the frequency when the mode of the change notice display changes to the second change notice mode. The frequency of the cases may be configured to be higher, but the relationship between the frequencies may be reversed, or the frequencies of the two may be the same.

The mode of the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode may be configured so as not to change to another mode.

The mode of the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode may be configured not to change to the first change notice mode, or conversely, may change. Good.

Even if the mode of the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode (for example, the red mode) changes to the third change notice mode (for example, the golden mode or the rainbow color mode). Good. In addition, the change notice display mode displayed in the second change notice mode does not change as it is displayed in the second change notice mode, rather than the frequency when the change notice display mode changes to the third change notice mode. The frequency of the cases may be configured to be higher, but the relationship between the frequencies may be reversed, or the frequencies of the two may be the same.

It is better when the change notice display is changed from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode than when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode from the beginning. , The first change animation that changes any of the displayed hold icons to the second icon display mode may be easily executed. Alternatively, conversely, the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode from the beginning, as compared with the case where the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode. In this case, it may be easier to execute the first change animation that changes any of the displayed hold icons to the second icon display mode. Furthermore, in both cases, there is no difference in the execution probabilities of the first change animation that changes any of the hold icons to the second icon display mode, and the execution probabilities may be the same.

The first change notice is more than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode is changed by the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode from the beginning. The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose aspect is changed by the first change animation using the change notice display changed from the aspect to the second change notice mode is finally the jackpot symbol aspect. It may be easy to confirm the display (the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot is high), or conversely, it is difficult to finally display the big hit symbol mode (the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot is low). ) In some cases, the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot may be the same for both.

In addition, "The display means is a means in which a variable icon may be displayed.
The variable icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed [for example, the variable icon h0].
A second change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The second change animation is an animation [for example, an icon change animation] that changes the mode of the change icon.
If the first change notice display is displayed and the second change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of the displayed variable icon is the second icon. It may be changed to the display mode,
If the second change notice display is displayed and the second change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of the displayed variable icon is the second icon. The display mode is changed [for example, FIG. 148 (A3-2-4)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the variable icon may be an icon representing a digested hold.

The variable icon can be regarded as an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 0, and can be said to be a kind of hold icon in a broad sense, but here, it is limited to be distinguished from the hold icon. However, the mode of the variable icon is the same as that of the hold icon, and is referred to as the nth icon display mode.

In addition, the "hold icon" described so far can be replaced with a "variable icon", the "first change animation" can be replaced with a "second change animation", and the "hold" described later can be replaced. The "icon" can be replaced with the "variable icon", and the "first change animation" can be replaced with the "second change animation". These things will be the same thereafter.

Further, the second change animation is more likely to be executed when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode than when it is displayed in the first change notice mode. It may be. According to this configuration, if the second change animation is executed, a big hit can be expected in the currently performed symbol variation display, and if the first change animation is executed, after that, The symbol variation display to be started can have a big hit expectation, and the player is interested in which of the first change animation and the second change animation is executed. The interest of the game may be improved.

In addition, "a second invariant animation [for example, an icon invariant animation] using the change notice display may be performed.
Even if the first change notice display is displayed, if the second non-change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of the displayed change icon does not change.
Even if the second change notice display is displayed, the mode of the displayed change icon does not change if the second non-change animation using the second change notice display is performed [for example, FIG. 149 (A3-3-3)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second non-change animation referred to here is an animation in which the mode of the variable icon does not change, and if it is considered successful that the mode of the variable icon changes, the second change animation is displayed. It corresponds to success, and when the second invariant animation is displayed, it corresponds to failure.

Further, "an operating means [for example, a chance button 136, an operation lever 139, a transmission unit 191 and a second chance button 137] provided at a position where the player can operate the player are provided.
The first change notice mode is a mode including a display related to the operating means [for example, a display of a button image 136a] [for example, a mode shown in FIG. 152 (B3-2-2)].
When the mode of the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode when the operation means is operated during the display of the first change notice display. [For example, FIG. 152 (B3-2-5)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The hold icon may or may not change to the eighth icon display mode by the first change animation. Further, the variable icon may or may not be changed to the eighth icon display mode by the second change animation. The eighth icon display mode referred to here is a mode including a display relating to the operating means.

The operation means is a means for which an operation validity period is set, and a display relating to the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "operation display") is displayed at least during the operation validity period, and is within the operation validity period. When the operation means is operated, the mode of the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode according to the operation, and within the operation valid period. If the operation is not performed, the first change notice mode may be changed to the second change notice mode after the operation validity period has elapsed. Further, when the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes from the eighth icon display mode to the second icon display mode according to the operation, and the operation is not performed within the operation valid period. The eighth icon display mode may be changed to the second icon display mode after the operation valid period has elapsed.

However, if the operation is not performed within the operation valid period, the mode of the change notice display, the hold icon or the variable icon changes to the second change notice mode or the second icon display mode. You don't have to. Alternatively, the change may be changed to the second change notice mode or the second icon display mode at a timing different from the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, and the change notice display is the first change notice mode. The display may be started again in the change notice mode, or the hold icon or the variable icon may be displayed again in the eighth icon display mode. Further, the change notice display may continue to be displayed in the first change notice mode until the operation is performed, and the hold icon or the change icon may be the eighth icon until the operation is performed. It may continue to be displayed in the display mode.

The operation display may be a display including an image imitating the operation means, a display of only the image, or a display prompting the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display). It may be a display including, only the operation promotion display, a display including an operation valid period of the operating means (operation valid period display), or the operation valid. It may be only the period display. Further, as the display mode of the operation display, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared, and in the plurality of types of display modes, the mode of the operation means itself is changed (for example, a color is changed, a protrusion amount is changed, or the like. , Shape change, position change, posture change, etc.) may be included.

Further, when the operation means is operated during the display of the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode, the change notice display mode is changed from the first change notice mode. You may always change to the second change notice mode. Alternatively, there may be a case where the first change notice mode changes to the second change notice mode and a case where the change does not occur (for example, the first change notice mode remains the same).

Further, "The change notice display is a display that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [for example, FIGS. 150 (A3-8-1) to (A3-8-3), FIG. 150". (A3-9-1) -Fig. (A3-9-3)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The term "straddling" as used herein means interposing a period of stop display (fluctuation stop period) of the symbol. Further, the change notice display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be a display that temporarily disappears in the middle. Further, the display may be continuously displayed even during the display of the stop display of the symbol, may be a display that temporarily disappears in the middle, or a display that continues to disappear while the stop display is being displayed. It may be.

"Display that may be displayed across continuous symbol fluctuation displays" means "display that is always displayed", but "display that may be erased and then redisplayed" is also available. included. For example, it may be erased once during the super reach effect and redisplayed when the super reach effect is completed.

Further, "the change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of" red thundercloud "] is a display that is at least displayed in a state where the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed is displayed [for example. FIG. 155 (D9)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The change notice display may be a display displayed only in a state where the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbol which is stopped and displayed is displayed, or a display which is also displayed in another state. You may.

Further, "the change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of" red thundercloud "] is a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of symbol fluctuation displays.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The change notice display disappears when the predetermined number of symbol fluctuation displays are completed (
It may be a display that is hidden).

Further, when the "change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of" red thundercloud "] temporarily disappears even during the predetermined number of symbol change displays [for example, in FIG. 155 (D10)]. If the demo screen of the animation shown is displayed] is displayed,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, the change notice display may or may not disappear temporarily during a part or the whole period of the super reach effect.

The change notice display may be, for example, a display of a navigation character (a character that displays an explanation or the like).

Further, the change notice display may be a display that is always displayed for a certain period of time. The certain period may be a period until the hold subject to the look-ahead notice is exhausted, or a period until the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold subject to the look-ahead notice ends, or a specified number of times. It may be the period until the symbol variation display of is finished (hereinafter, the same applies).

The change notice display may be hidden while the symbol is stopped or the demo is displayed when there is no hold. That is, a certain period does not include a period during which the symbol is stopped without a hold or a demo display period. However, the change notice display may be displayed even when the symbol is stopped without holding.

The change notice display may be a display that may disappear once in a certain period of time.

In addition, "when the first change animation is not displayed even if the change notice display is displayed [for example, when the first change animation, the second change animation, or the second change animation is displayed, or , When the change notice display remains stationary and disappears],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even if the change notice display is displayed, the second change animation may not be displayed.

The change notice display may be displayed and the first invariant animation may be performed, and the first invariant animation may be the same animation as the first change animation halfway. Further, the change notice display may be displayed and the second invariant animation may be performed, and the second invariant animation may be the same animation as the second change animation halfway. As described above, when the first invariant animation is displayed, it corresponds to a failure, but halfway (for example, at least the first part or the first half part, or a scene in which the mode of the hold icon changes or not. Since the animation is the same, the player can first distinguish whether the display of the first change animation is started or the display of the first invariant animation is started. It may not be possible and the interest of the game may be improved.

Further, even if the change notice display is displayed, neither the first change animation nor the first non-change animation may be displayed.

In addition, "Before the display of the first change animation is started, it may be notified that the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is in a state in which the mode of the hold icon is likely to change [for example, Notification by telop display trp shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-3)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The notification that the mode of any of the hold icons is likely to change (hereinafter, referred to as "change advance notification") is when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode. It may be notified. For example, the second change notice mode may include the display of the change advance notification. That is, the change notice display may be a display that also serves as the change advance notification. Alternatively, the change advance notification may be performed separately from the change notice display. It may be easier for the first change animation to be executed when the change notice display is performed than when the change advance notification is not performed. That is, the mode of any of the displayed hold icons may be easily changed. Or conversely, it may be difficult to execute, or the ease of execution may be the same.

Further, the change advance notification may be started or may be notified between the time when the change notice display is displayed and the time when the display of the first change animation is started. Alternatively, the change advance notification may be started or notified before the change notice display is displayed.

Further, "The first change animation is an animation that may change the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons [for example, FIG. 149 (A3'-2-1) to Figure (A3'-2-4)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first change animation is an animation including a scene that succeeds in changing the mode of any one or more of the hold icons displayed, and is the first invariant animation. May be an animation that includes a scene that fails to change the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons.

The first change animation and the first non-change animation may be executed at the same time, and the mode of one or more of the hold icons displayed may change. In this case, a scene that changes the mode of one or more hold icons and a scene that fails to change the mode of one or more hold icons may be displayed.

Further, the first change animation may be an animation that always changes the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons. The first invariant animation may be an animation that does not necessarily change the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons.

Further, "When the second change notice display is displayed, the first change animation is always executed [For example, No. 1 having an icon change rate of 100% shown in FIG. 119 (b). 8 "Red Flying Boat"],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first invariant animation using the change notice display may be performed. The first invariant animation referred to here is an animation that does not change the mode of any of the displayed hold icons, and if it is considered successful that the mode of the hold icon changes, the above When the first change animation is displayed, it corresponds to success, and when the first change animation is displayed, it corresponds to failure.

Further, the first change animation is an animation including a scene in which the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is successfully changed, and the first change animation is included. The animation may be an animation that includes a scene that fails to change the mode of any of the displayed hold icons.

In addition, "The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fourth icon display mode.
The fourth icon display mode suggests that the mode of the hold icon in the fourth icon display mode may change [for example, the display mode of the "bomb" shown in FIG. 156 (Eb1) or the like. ], And
When the mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode changes to the second icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second change notice display is used. [For example, FIG. 156 (Eb8)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fifth icon display mode.
The fifth icon display mode is a display mode indicating that the mode change in the hold icon of the fourth icon display mode has failed [for example, the fire of the fuse shown in FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-1) is in the middle. The display mode of the "bomb" that has disappeared]
When the mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode changes to the fifth icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second change notice display is used. [For example, the figure (Eb7-2-1) following FIG. 156 (Eb6)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode is described in the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the second change notice display is used. It may change to the first icon display mode.

Further, the fourth icon display mode has a shape according to the passage of time such as a display representing the length of time remaining until the mode of the hold icon changes (for example, a digital clock display, an analog clock display, a bar display, etc.). The mode may include (display in which the size, length, color, etc. change). ← Dynamite is a display in which the length of the fuse is changed. Further, in the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode, the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode is used. When the first change animation is started, a display showing how the remaining time elapses (for example, a countdown display or a change in shape, size, length, color, etc. according to the passage of time). Display) may be performed.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the above description of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be the variable display of the symbol (more specifically, the special symbol), and the description of the stop display of the decorative symbol is the symbol (more specifically). Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

In addition, "may be" in the above may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", and "○○ is possible" in the above. It may be replaced with "must be XX".

Subsequently, an example of the effect applicable to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described so far will be described.

In the example of the effect described below, the notice icon is attached to the display means (for example, any one or two or all of the decorative symbol display devices 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208M). A notice display, an icon for mini game A, an icon for mini game B, a hold icon, a variable icon, an icon change notice display, a chance up meter, a timer notice, etc. are displayed. First, these will be explained in order.

First, the effects in which the various icons and displays described with reference to FIG. 162 are used will be described with reference to specific examples.

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 162 shows a normal state (non-probability change state and non-electric support state (non-time saving state)), and the subsequent production examples are also production examples in the normal state unless otherwise specified. Further, FIG. 162 shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, but the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It may be present (the same applies to the following figures).

In the production example shown in FIGS. 162 (A1) to 162 (A15), the chance-up meter preparation display is displayed before the chance-up meter is displayed, and an effect for notifying that the chance-up meter is displayed is performed. It is shown that it is being broken.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. Variable icon display area C
The IS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A1) is all white, but this all white color indicates that the background screen is not shown. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but in the case of a solid white color, it means that the background screen is not shown, as in FIG. 162 (A1).

In FIG. 162 (A2), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. As a result, it is foretold that the chance-up meter (hereinafter, may be referred to as "CUM") preparation display may be displayed. In some cases, the CUM preparation display may be displayed without displaying the flame effect EF101. Further, when the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the CPU preparation display may be displayed. Further, in this effect example, the flame effect EF101 covers the entire hold icon display area HIS, but it may cover only a part of the hold icon display area HIS, or the entire variable icon display area CIS. Alternatively, a part of the effect icon display area DIS may be covered, or the entire or part of the effect icon display area DIS may be covered. Further, although the flame effect EF101 is displayed by the invisible opacity on the back side, it may be displayed by translucency so that the image displayed on the back side can be seen.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A3), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. In the CUM preparation display MTY, the start point SP is displayed at one end of the meter, and the final point GP is displayed at the other end of the meter. In addition, the starting point SP shows that the Sabohani character SBH is waiting, and a balloon with the characters "STANDBY" is also displayed. That is, it is foretold that the chance up meter will be displayed. This CUM preparing display MTY is displayed at the same position as the display position of the chance up meter. In this production example, it is shown that the chance-up point displayed in the chance-up meter production using the chance-up meter is not notified. Further, at this time, the hold icon display area HIS is completely covered and hidden by the CUM preparation display MTY, while the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are visually recognized without changing the display mode. It is possible. The display mode of at least one of the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS may be changed. Further, in this effect example, the CUM preparing display MTY is started to be displayed during the symbol variation display before reaching the reach, but the CUM preparing display MTY is started to be displayed during the display of the reach effect display after reaching the reach. May be done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A4), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a state in which the shaking fluctuation display is performed is shown. ing. Here, the decorative symbol on which the shaking variation display is performed may overlap a part of the CUM preparing display, or may be displayed at a position where the decorative symbol does not overlap the CUM preparing display.

In FIG. 162 (A5), the “decoration 7” that had fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a before shifting to the super reach effect moves below the second decorative symbol and fluctuates in the right symbol display area 208c. The "decoration 7" that was being used moves below the second hold number display. Further, in this production example, the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed during the transition to the super reach production. When the effect of shifting to the super reach effect is started, the CUM preparation display MTY may be hidden. Further, when the effect of shifting to the super reach effect is started, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, FIG. 162 (A5) shows that the holding frame UI has started to move downward, and the frame is out to the lower part of the display screen while leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. .. FIG. 162 (A6) shows a state in which the hold frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS left.

FIG. 162 (A7) shows how the VS swordsman reach super reach production has started. At this time as well, the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed. If the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed here, the chance up meter effect is not performed. Even if the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, the chance up meter effect may be performed. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (A7) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (A8) shows the main character. An animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the hold frame UI is completely hidden (disappears) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variable icon h0 does not disappear and continues to be displayed on the remaining top board. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display continue to be displayed. The entire hold frame UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire hold frame UI may continue to be displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be deleted, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

FIG. 162 (A9) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. That is, the chance up meter CMT is a display displayed at the beginning (at the time of introduction) of the super reach. The chance-up meter CMT is, for example, a meter that shows the progress of the reach effect, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current progress of the reach effect is outlined according to the position. Is informed. The chance up meter CMT may be referred to as a super reach timeline. Further, the chance-up meter CMT may refer to an effect using the chance-up meter CMT as an explanatory effect. Here, the progress speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the production, but it may be constant. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a specific notice may occur. In other words, the 1st checkpoint CP1 to the 3rd checkpoint CP3 can be said to be the display of the chance-up point indicating the place where the chance-up occurs, and the chance-up meter CMT is the chance-up during reach (during super reach). It can also be said that it is a meter display that suggests the location of occurrence. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but the display of how the super reach has been developed as shown in FIG. 162 (A7) is started. The display may be started at the same timing, the display may be started when the reach state is reached, the display may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative symbol may be changed. The display may be started when the display is started. Further, the timing at which each checkpoint CP1 to CP3 is displayed may be before the chance up meter CMT is displayed, at the same time as the chance up meter CMT is displayed, or at the same time as the chance. It may be after the upmeter CMT is displayed. Further, the timing at which the placard is started to be displayed may be before the chance up meter CMT is displayed, at the same time as the chance up meter CMT is displayed, or at the same time as the chance up meter CMT is displayed. May be after is displayed.

FIG. 162 (A10) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. The balloon "START !!" may be displayed only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed after the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, and whether or not the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Regardless of this, when the chance up meter CMT is displayed, it may or may not be displayed. Further, by displaying the balloon "START !!", it may be announced that the chance-up notice is likely to occur at the checkpoints CP1 to CP3.

FIG. 162 (A11) is the same production example as the production example shown in FIG. 29 (2). After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to 29 (25) are performed, and then the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A12) are performed.

In FIGS. 162 (A12) to 162 (A13), the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 29 (26) to (27) are performed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A14), it is shown that the shaking fluctuation is performed in a state where three "decorations 7" are aligned. At this time, the background dedicated to the big hit, which is displayed when the background becomes a big hit, is displayed. The default (normal) background, the background in the look-ahead mode, the background suggesting the development of super reach, etc. may be displayed, and the background displayed when the reach is reached is displayed. May be good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (A15), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" (big hit symbol mode) is confirmed and displayed. Here, after the end of super reach, the chance up meter CMT is always hidden, but it may be displayed. In this case, if the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the stop display is displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot (big hit symbol mode), it may be confirmed that the player is promoted to the probability variation jackpot. ..

In this production example, the CUM preparation display is switched to the chance up meter CMT at the timing shown in FIG. 162 (A9), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, FIGS. 162 (A3) to FIG. It may be switched at the timing of FIG. (A4), or it may be switched at the timing of FIGS. 162 (A5) to (A6), which is the period of transition from normal reach to super reach, after the start of super reach. It may be switched in FIGS. 162 (A7) to 162 (A13) in which the super reach is being executed, or it may be switched after the super reach is completed. In this case, the occurrence of the chance-up notice that occurred during the super reach will be notified after the fact.

In this production example, since the production by the chance up meter CMT is performed during the super reach production, the reach effect display is displayed by displaying the CUM preparation display that announces that the production by the chance up meter CMT will be started. Can be said to be foretold to be displayed.

In this production example, chance-up notices occur at all checkpoints and it is a big hit, but if chance-up notices do not occur at any one or more checkpoints (chance at all checkpoints) Even if there is no up notice or chance up notice occurs at some checkpoints), it may be a big hit. For example, in FIG. 30 (18b), even when the lever image 136Va is not displayed and the chance-up notice does not occur, an example of a big hit is shown. In addition, even if a lot of chance-up notices occur at checkpoints, it is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than when chance-up notices do not occur at all and / or some checkpoints. Good. In addition, the number of chance-up notices and the likelihood of a big hit may not be related.

In the present embodiment, the case where the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed and the chance up meter CMT is displayed is more final than the case where the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. The production example shown in FIGS. 162 (B1) to 162 (B8) is another production example following FIG. 29 (22), and the jackpot symbol mode is easily displayed. In the lever effect shown in FIG. (22), the player operates the effect lever 136V, but the effect fails. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the placard is shown with the letter "x" indicating that it will be lost, and the character SBH of Sabohani looks disappointed. ing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (B2), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are temporarily displayed lighter than the normal darkness. In addition, the figure shows the scene where the lord collapsed. In FIG. 162 (B3), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed again in normal darkness, and in the same diagram (B4), a wipe effect is performed and a super reach effect scene (effect) is performed. The display) and the normal background (the background before the start of the super reach effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1) and the like) are switched. In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 162 (B5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is once displayed as a wipe with no pattern and the same color. In this wipe display, the variable icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the lower left corner. The fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT may also be displayed. FIG. 162 (B6) shows a state in which the background is wiped out and the background returns to the normal background. In FIG. 162 (B7), the wipe effect is completed, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shakes and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loss, and then FIG. 162 (B7). As shown in B8), it is confirmed and displayed in the form of the lost pattern. In addition, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and both the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are displayed. Also, the chance up meter CMT has been erased. At the time of wipe-out (FIGS. 162 (B6) to (B7)), the chance up meter CMT and / or the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed, and when it is displayed, it may be displayed. The configuration may be such that the revival effect is more easily performed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, when it is displayed, the revival effect may be performed without fail, and when it is not displayed, the revival effect may or may not be performed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, it may be suggested that there is a possibility of shifting to super reach after the next fluctuation.

In this production example, chance-up notices occur at all checkpoints and are lost, but if chance-up notices do not occur at any one or more checkpoints (chance at all checkpoints). Even if there is no up notice or chance up notice occurs at some checkpoints), it may be lost. In addition, even if a lot of chance-up notices occur at checkpoints, it is more difficult to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than when chance-up notices do not occur at all and / or some checkpoints. Good.

In this production example, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is always displayed, but the chance up meter CMT may or may not be displayed. Good.

Further, for example, if a power failure / recovery occurs while the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed as a look-ahead notice, it may be erased at the next fluctuation or may be displayed again at the start of the next fluctuation. Further, the display of the CUM preparation display MTY at the start of the next fluctuation may be displayed at the time when the display screen is restored after the power is cut off or restored, or is redisplayed after the display screen is restored (for example,). Redisplay by animation / no animation) may be set.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect using the chance up meter.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to 163 (A8) show that the background change notice is being performed. Further, the background of the sea is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 163 (A1). Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (A1), the state immediately after the symbol variation display is started during the stop display by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is shown. At this time, the second decorative symbol has started to change.

FIG. 163 (A2) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol has started.

In FIG. 163 (A3), the background change notice, which is a kind of notice (the change notice), is started. The target of the background change notice here is the pattern change display being executed. In the background change notice, images of sliding doors appear from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes an image of sliding doors by the animation of closing the sliding doors (see FIG. 163 (A4)). Therefore, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, and the variable icon h0 are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding door and become invisible. Instead of the fusuma image, an image that overlaps from the front side may appear in a part of the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, and the variable icon h0. Alternatively, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, and the variable icon h0 may be produced so that no images overlap. In addition to the change notice, the background change notice may be executed when a stage change effect, a look-ahead notice, or a change to a super reach suggestion background is performed.

In the background change notice, the jackpot expectation may be expressed by the display mode (for example, color, shape, pattern, etc.) of the appearance image (here, the image of the sliding door). Also, if the color of the sliding door is green, it may function as a notice of the background itself, such as changing to the background of the mountain. Further, depending on the display mode of the sliding doors, it may be announced that a look-ahead zone will occur. Here, the look-ahead zone refers to an effect mode in which a dedicated look-ahead background is displayed when there is a hold for read-ahead in the hold. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

In FIG. 163 (A5), the sliding doors are opened and the holding frame UI and the variable icon h0 are beginning to be seen, but the CUM preparing display MTY appears instead of the holding icon display area HIS. At this time, the background is changed from the sea background to the super reach background. In other words, by changing the background of Super Reach, it is foretold that the change will shift to Super Reach. As a look-ahead notice, it may be announced that the shift to super reach will occur due to changes in the look-ahead target. When multiple types of super reach are prepared, it may be suggested that the super reach always develops corresponding to the displayed background. In addition, it may not develop into super reach, or it may be suggested that it always develops into super reach corresponding to the background displayed on condition that it has reached reach. In addition, there may be a case of shifting to another type of super reach.

In FIG. 163 (A6), the sliding doors are completely opened and the sliding door images disappear. Due to the background change notice, the background of the first decorative pattern display device 208L has changed to the background of the super reach. The CUM preparation display MTY is completely displayed, and the display of the chance up meter CMT is foretold. The CUM preparing display MTY may start to be displayed after the fusuma image is completely opened. Further, even if the background of the super reach is displayed, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed, or may be always displayed.

In FIG. 163 (A7), the “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, and the state of reaching is shown.

In FIG. 163 (A8), the “decoration 7” swaying in the left symbol display area 208a moves below the second decorative symbol, and the “decoration 7” swaying in the right symbol display area 208c is the second. 2 It is shown that it is moving below the hold number display. In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed during the transition to the super reach effect. Further, FIG. 163 (A8) shows a state in which the hold frame UI is completely framed out downward while leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. This production example shows an example in which the reach transition production is special. In addition, the transition to super reach may be performed after the same process as when the normal background is displayed. At this time, an animation is performed in which the display area CIS of the variable icon moves. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A8) to 162 (A15) are performed.

In FIGS. 163 (B1) to 163 (B3), as a result of directing FIGS. 162 (A8) to (A11) via FIGS. 163 (A1) to (A8), the lord was defeated by the swordsman. An example of an effect in which "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle pattern and is lost is shown.

FIG. 163 (B1) shows that the lord is defeated by the swordsman and "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle pattern. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, but the placard is shown with the letter "x" indicating that it will be lost, and the Sabohani character SBH looks disappointed. ing. After that, after the effects of FIGS. 162 (B2) to 162 (B5) are performed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 163 (B2) wipes out and the background is the background at the start of symbol fluctuation. It is shown returning to the background of a certain sea. In FIG. 163 (B3), the wipe effect is completed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shakes and displays the combination of loss, "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", and then the missing pattern. It is confirmed and displayed in the mode. Also, after wiping out, the chance up meter CMT has been erased. If the background is a special background (for example, a background of super reach) at the time of wiping out, the jackpot may be confirmed.

FIGS. 163 (C1) to 163 (C7) show that the CUM preparation display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 163 (C1) to (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A1) to 162 (A3), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 163 (C4), as a result of the decorative symbols being stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" are stopped and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols, and the shaking fluctuation is observed. It shows how it is being done. At this time, the CUM preparing display MTY is deleted, but it may remain displayed.

After that, in FIG. 163 (C5), it is shown that the final display is performed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon is deleted. At this time as well, the CUM preparing display MTY is hidden, but the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed while the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed.

After that, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the flame effect EF101 is redisplayed as shown in FIG. 163 (C6), and is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. .. Here, when the flame effect EF101 is redisplayed, the flame effect EF101 may be displayed in the same mode as that displayed in the previous symbol variation display, or in a different display mode (animation). It may be redisplayed, or the flame effect EF101 may be displayed without animation. After that, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed again as shown in FIG. 163 (C7).

That is, in this effect example, the display of the flame effect EF101 and the display of the CUM preparation display MTY in FIGS. 163 (C1) to 163 (C3) function as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the next fluctuation. It can be said that the display of the flame effect EF101 and the display of the CUM preparation display MTY in 163 (C6) to (C7) of the same figure (C7) function as a notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the symbol variation display being executed.

In this production example, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed every time the symbol variation display starts, and the pre-reading notice (continuous notice) of the production by the chance up meter is performed. For example, the production by the chance up meter is performed. The number of times the symbol fluctuation is displayed until it is performed is counted down (for example, "2 more fluctuations", "1 more fluctuation", etc.), and when the symbol fluctuation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice is displayed, the chance up meter is set. It may be displayed. That is, such a countdown display may provide the same function as the CUM preparation display MTY. Further, the look-ahead notice may be given by setting the display mode of the hold icon to a display mode suggesting that the effect by the chance up meter is performed. This may also provide the same function as the CUM preparation display MTY. Then, when the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice is displayed and the variation icon is displayed in a display mode suggesting that the effect by the chance up meter is performed, when the effect by the chance up meter is started. You may delete the variable icon. In addition, when the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice is displayed and the variation icon is displayed in a display mode suggesting that the effect by the chance up meter is performed, when the effect by the chance up meter is started. You don't have to erase the fluctuating icon. In addition, after the chance up meter is displayed or at the timing when the chance up meter is displayed, the display mode of a part or all of the variable icon is changed (for example, a display mode suggesting that the effect by the chance up meter is performed). To the default display mode).

In addition, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed every time the symbol variation display starts and the pre-reading notice (continuous notice) of the effect by the chance up meter is performed, the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice is used. When the effect by the chance up meter is started in the previous symbol variation display, the CUM preparing display MTY may not be displayed or the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed while the chance up meter is being displayed. It may or may not display the CUM preparation display MTY. Further, when the CUM preparing display MTY is hidden during the display of the chance up meter, the display of the CUM preparing display MTY may be hidden before the chance up meter is displayed. The CUM preparing display MTY may be hidden at the timing when the chance up meter is displayed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed even during the display of the chance up meter, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed at a position where it overlaps with the chance up meter, or may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap. .. In addition, in the type of super reach performed in the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice, and in the symbol variation display that is the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice and the chance up meter is displayed. The type of superreach performed may be the same, different, the same or different.

FIGS. 163 (D1) to 163 (D7) show that the CUM preparation display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 163 (C1) to (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A1) to 162 (A3), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIGS. 163 (D4) to 163 (D5), unlike FIGS. 163 (C4) to (C5), the CUM preparation display MTY is continuously displayed even during the shaking fluctuation of the decorative symbol and the final display. It is shown that it is. An animation may be displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY. In this case, the animation may be continuously performed even when the symbol is stopped, or a different animation may be performed while the symbol is stopped. .. Further, the animation may not be performed and the display may be stationary.

After that, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the CUM preparing display MTY is continuously displayed as shown in FIGS. 163 (D6) to (D7).

FIG. 164 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the display start mode of the chance up meter preparing display MTY.

FIGS. 164 (A1) to 164 (A7) show another example in which the CUM preparation display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, since the effect shown in FIG. 164 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 164 (A2) shows a state in which a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port 230, one start of the symbol variation display is held, and the number of holds is 2. After that, as shown in FIG. 164 (A3), the second hold icon h12 is displayed, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a blue display mode, that is, a look-ahead notice is given by the hold display. It is shown that it is. In this production example, the hold icon is displayed by holding blue, but the hold icon is displayed by another display mode (for example, the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 119 (a)). Alternatively, the hold icon in the default display mode may be displayed.

After that, when the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 164 (A4), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. It is shown.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (A5), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. After that, as shown in FIG. 164 (A6), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. As a result, it is foretold that the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. After that, in FIG. 164 (A7), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed in the symbol variation display that is being executed when the hold that is the target of the look-ahead notice occurs, and the CUM is displayed in the symbol variation display that is started next. The preparation display MTY is displayed. In this production example, the CUM preparation display MTY functions as a look-ahead notice, but when the hold that is the target of the look-ahead notice is the first hold, the CUM preparation display is displayed in the symbol variation display that is started next. The MTY serves as a precursor to the chance-up meter CMT in the fluctuation. It should be noted that the CUM preparation display MTY functions as a look-ahead notice and does not have to function as the notice. Further, the CUM preparation display MTY functions as the notice, and does not have to function as the look-ahead notice. In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY may function as a look-ahead notice or may function as the notice.
In some cases.

FIGS. 164 (B1) to 164 (B11) show another example in which the CUM preparation display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164 (B1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164 (B1), the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164 (B1), the hold is 0, so that no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. The second reserved number display (here, "0" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1.

FIG. 164 (B2) shows a state in which a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port 230, one start of the symbol variation display is held, and the number of holds is one. After that, as shown in FIG. 164 (B3), the first hold icon h11 is displayed, but the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a blue display mode, that is, a look-ahead notice is given by the hold display. It is shown that it is. The flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 164 (B4) may be displayed without displaying the hold icon. Further, the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 164 (B4) may be displayed during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon. Further, when the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 164 (B4) is displayed without displaying the hold icon, after the hold icon is displayed, and / or during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, FIG. 164 (B4). The flame effect EF101 shown in may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 164 (B4), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. As a result, it is foretold that the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. After that, in FIG. 164 (B5), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed.

In FIG. 164 (B6), as a result of the decorative symbols being stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" are stopped and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols, and the shaking fluctuation is observed. It shows how it is being done. At this time, the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is maintained.

After that, in FIG. 164 (B7), it is shown that the final display is performed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon is erased, but the CUM preparation display MTY remains displayed.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started, the hold digestion animation is started and hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY as shown in FIGS. 164 (B8) to (B11). It is shown that the variable icon movement animation in which the first hold icon h11 that has been moving moves toward the center of the upper surface of the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is being performed. In this production example, the same variable icon movement animation is performed regardless of whether or not the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed, but when the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed, the same variable icon movement animation is performed. , Different variable icon moving animations may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 164 (B9'), an animation in which the variable icon h0 boiled out from the center of the pedestal hs0 may be performed. Good. Regardless of whether or not the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, one of the plurality of variable icon moving animations may be selected and executed.

In this way, when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended, the CUM preparation display may be displayed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the symbol variation display being executed.

FIGS. 164 (C1) to 164 (C4) are diagrams showing a state in which the display start animation of the CUM preparation display MTY is being performed. Here, since the effect shown in FIG. 164 (C1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 164 (C2) shows that the display start animation of the CUM preparing display MTY is started, and the CUM preparing display MTY rises from the lower part of the display screen. At this time, the hold icon display area HIS is raised in such a manner that it is lifted by the CUM preparing display MTY. After that, as shown in FIG. 164 (C3), the hold icon display area HIS is arranged above the CUM preparing display MTY so as not to affect the visibility of the CUM preparing display MTY. At the timing shown in FIG. 164 (C3), there is only one hold of the special figure 1, and only the first hold icon h11 is displayed. However, for ease of explanation, the second hold icons h12 to the second hold icon h12. 4 Hold icon h14 is shown by a broken line.

After that, when the display start animation of the CUM preparation display MTY is completed, a balloon with the characters "STANDBY" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH as shown in FIG. 164 (C4), and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. Is foretold to display. At this time, the balloon is displayed so as to partially overlap the hold icon (in the example shown in FIG. 164 (C4), the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13). Note that at least one of the four hold icons may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon, or the entire four hold icons may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon. Good. Further, in this effect example, although the balloon is designed to overlap a part of the hold icon display area HIS, it may be overlapped with the whole hold icon display area HIS.

In addition, instead of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 164 (C3), FIG. 164 (C3')
The CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed in the manner shown in. Specifically, the frame of the CUM preparation display MTY may be extended upward, and the hold icon display area HIS may be displayed on the upper surface of the frame so as to indicate it. This CUM preparing display MTY may have a display mode different from that of the CUM preparing display MTY displayed during super reach.

FIGS. 164 (D1) to 164 (D2) are, for example, an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A1), and show another display example of the flame effect foretelling the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. There is.

FIG. 164 (D1) shows that a large flame effect EF102 different from the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 162 (A2) is displayed. The large flame effect EF102 is an effect display that is displayed so as to cover the entire holding frame UI so as to be difficult to see. It is foretold that the CUM preparation display will be displayed by the effect EF102 of this large flame. When the big flame effect EF102 is displayed, the big hit symbol mode may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 162 (A2) is displayed, or at a checkpoint. You may make it easier for chance-up notices to occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 164 (D2), when the large flame effect EF102 is erased, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. At this time, the hold frame UI is framed out downward, leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. Further, at this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change and is the default display mode, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change before and after the display of the large flame effect EF102. Further, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed without fail before and after the display of the large flame effect EF102. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A4) to 162 (A11) are performed, then the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (25) are performed, and then the effects shown in FIGS. -The effects shown in FIG. (A15) or FIGS. 162 (b1) to (B8) are performed.

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a display start mode of the chance-up meter preparing display MTY.

FIGS. 165 (A1) to 165 (A3) are, for example, an example of an effect following FIG. 162 (A1), and show an example of an effect in which the CUM preparation display is silhouette-displayed while the flame effect EF101 is being displayed. ..

The production example shown in FIG. 165 (A1) is the same as the production example shown in FIG. 162 (A2). After that, in FIG. 165 (A2), while the flame effect EF101 is being displayed, the CUM preparing silhouette display MTYa imitating the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed on the back side of the flame effect EF101. .. At this time, the CUM preparing silhouette display MTYa is displayed in black as a whole, indicating that the silhouette is displayed as if it were displayed. The display of the silhouette display MTYa in preparation for CUM also functions as a notice that the chance up meter CMT will produce the effect. In addition, it is suggested that the occurrence rate of chance-up notice increases in the production by the chance-up meter CMT by preparing multiple types of display modes of this CUM-preparing silhouette display MTYa and changing (promoting) the display mode. It may be done, or it may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is increased.

After that, a reach state was formed, and FIG. 165 (A3) shows a state of transition to super reach. During this period, the CUM preparing silhouette display MTYa is continuously displayed. In addition, while the flame effect EF101 is being displayed, CUM is being prepared. Silhouette display MTYa
May be erased. In this case, for example, the erase animation may be performed when the silhouette display MTYa in preparation for CUM is hidden, or the erase animation may be hidden without being performed. May be done. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A11) are performed, then the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (25) are performed, and then the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A12) to 162 (A15) are performed. ) Or the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (B1) to 162 (B8).

FIGS. 165 (B1) to 165 (B6) are, for example, an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A1), and show another example of the display start mode of the CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 165 (B1) shows how the wipe effect has started. This wipe effect is a display in which the display screen is gradually switched from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the display screen in a display mode as if the calendar is turned. In FIG. 165 (B1), the wipe effect is started in the state where the background of the sea is displayed, but the background does not change before and after the wipe effect. However, in FIG. 165 (B1), the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed at the position where the hold icon display area HIS was displayed, and it is foretold that the effect by the chance up meter will be started. At the timing shown in FIG. 165 (B1), a part of the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a visible manner. The background may be changed before and after the wipe effect.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (B2), the display area after switching (rolled back side) is expanded, and most of the CUM preparation display MTY is visible. In the display area after switching, a notice regarding the chance-up meter CMT may be given, or a look-ahead notice or a change notice which is not related to the chance-up meter CMT may be given.

FIG. 165 (B3) shows how the display area after switching is further expanded. In addition, when the background is turned in the wipe effect, a notice about the chance up meter CMT other than the CUM preparation display MTY and a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT may be partially visible, and when the background is turned, the CUM may be visible. The in-preparation display MTY and other notices may be visible. After that, as shown in FIGS. 165 (B4) to 165 (B6), the display area after switching is expanded so that the background is turned over, and the display area after switching is expanded at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (B6). Are all visible. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A4) to 162 (A11) are performed, then the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (25) are performed, and then the effects shown in FIGS. ) To FIG. (A15) or FIGS. 162 (B1) to FIG. (B8). In the state of FIG. 165 (B1), the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed before the start of the wipe effect, and in that case, the CUM preparing display MTY is still displayed in the same display mode after the wipe effect. You may. Further, after the wipe effect, the upgraded CUM preparation display MTY, which will be described later, may be displayed. Further, the CUM preparing display MTY may be continuously displayed in the same display mode after the wipe effect, or the upgraded CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed.

FIGS. 165 (C1) to 165 (C4) are examples of the effects following FIG. 162 (A1), and show another example of the display start mode of the CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 165 (C1) shows how the background screen switching effect is started. In this background image switching effect, as shown in FIG. 165 (C1), the background image before switching is reduced and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 165 (C2), the right side of the background image before switching is in the depth direction. It moves and is displayed with the right side facing the depth direction, and the background image after switching appears on the right side of the display screen. The background image after this switching is displayed in such a manner that the left side faces the depth direction. In the background image after switching, the hold icon display area HI in the background image before switching
It is shown that the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed at the display position of S. In a state where the background image before switching and the background image after switching are displayed side by side, the background image after switching may not be displayed and the background image before switching may be displayed again. That is, the CUM preparing display MTY may not be displayed. In this effect example, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in the background screen switching effect, but after the display other than the CUM preparing display MTY (for example, the display mode of the hold icon changes) is switched. It may be displayed in the background image of. Further, the background image after switching may be the background image of the notice, and for example, the background image on which the intense heat notice is displayed may be displayed.

After that, FIG. 165 (C3) shows that the background image before switching is erased and the background image after switching including the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a front-facing manner. At this time, the background image after switching is displayed in a reduced size. After that, the background image after switching is enlarged and displayed and displayed on the entire display screen as shown in FIG. 165 (C4). After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A4) to 162 (A11) are performed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (25) are performed, and then the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A12) to (A15) or 162 (B1) to (B8) are performed. Is done.

FIG. 165 (D1) is an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A2), in which the flame effect EF101 is displayed, but the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, and after the notice display of Gase is performed. The situation is shown. When the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed without fail. In addition, the symbol variation display on which the notice display of Gase is performed may be confirmed as a loss. In addition, there may be a big hit in the symbol variation display in which the notice display of Gase is performed. In addition, even if the flame effect EF101 is displayed after the next change in which the notice of Gase is displayed, when there is one or more holds at the time when the symbol change display in which the notice of Gase is displayed is started. Good. In this case, a pattern in which the notice of Gase is displayed until the symbol change display subject to the look-ahead notice is started (a pattern in which the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed until the end) and the symbol change display subject to the look-ahead notice In, there may be a pattern in which the CUM preparation display MTY is finally displayed.

FIGS. 165 (E1) to 165 (E9) are, for example, an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A1), and show how the timer advance notice effect is being performed.

In FIGS. 165 (E1) to 165 (E2), the timer notice display TMY rises from below the hold icon display area HIS, and the timer notice display TMY lifts the hold icon display area HIS. At this time, the characters "STANDBY" are displayed on the timer notice display TMY, indicating that the start of the timer notice is suspended. When the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TMY in this effect example is performed, it is announced that the hold icon or the variable icon will change. Compared with the production example shown in FIG. 164 (C2), it may be possible to grasp whether or not the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed depending on whether or not the Sabohani character SBH appears. It may be difficult to specify whether the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed or the timer notice display TMY is displayed. If, for example, the flame effect EF101 is displayed and the flame effect EF101 is erased before the CUM preparation display MTY and the timer notice display TMY are displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY and the timer notice display TMY are displayed. Either may be displayed. The timer notice in this production example is for notifying the change of the hold icon (variable icon), but the timer notice as shown in FIGS. 20 to 27, 38, and 40 to 48 was performed. It goes without saying that any advance notice effect that is executed as a result can be performed. Further, the display mode of the timer notice display is not limited to that shown in FIG. 165, and can be applied to any of the above-mentioned display modes of the timer notice display. Further, in this effect example, both the timer notice display TMY and the CUM preparing display MTY may be performed below the hold icon display area HIS. In this case, the area where the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. And the area where the timer notice display TMY is displayed may be displayed in an overlapping manner, or may be displayed so that they do not overlap.

In FIG. 165 (E3), the display on the timer notice display TMY is changed to "10:00", and then the countdown is started. That is, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold icon (variable icon) may change when 10 seconds have passed since the countdown in the timer notice display was started. The timing of the start of the countdown in the timer notice display is not limited to that described above. For example, after changing the display of "STANDBY" to the number of seconds notation, the start of the countdown may be waited for a while. Further, the number of seconds may be displayed from the stage when the timer notice display TMY is started to be displayed. In this case, the countdown may be started after the timer notice display TMY display animation is completed, or the timer notice display may be displayed. The countdown may be started from the stage when the display of TMY is started.

FIG. 165 (E4) shows that 0.01 seconds have passed since the countdown started. After that, when 10 seconds have passed since the countdown started, the timer display becomes "00:00" as shown in FIG. 165 (E5).

Then, as shown in FIG. 165 (E6), the timer notice display TMY switches from the display of "00:00" to the character display of "change !!" and overlaps with at least a part of the first hold icon h11. The effect EF103 is displayed and the change animation of the hold icon is started. This suggests that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Here, the change animation of the hold icon may be started after switching to the character display of "change !!", or the display of "change !!" is performed after the change animation of the hold icon is started. Alternatively, the change animation of the hold icon may be started at the timing of switching to the character display of "change !!".

After that, when the change animation of the hold icon ends and the effect EF103 is erased, as shown in FIG. 165 (E7), the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode changes to the blue hold display mode. .. That is, it is shown that the rank of the hold icon has been increased by two levels. The rank of the hold icon may be increased by one level or three or more levels before and after the change animation of the hold icon. In addition, the rank may be lowered.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 165 (E8) to (E9), the timer notice display TMY is framed out at the lower part of the display screen. This frame-out animation also lowers the hold icon display area HIS and returns it to the default display position.

In this production example, both the timer notice display TMY and the CUM preparation display may be displayed. For example, the timer notice display TMY is moved further upward and displayed below the timer notice display TMY. The CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. Further, the hold icon display area HIS may be moved and displayed again within the same symbol variation after the end of the timer advance notice effect, and the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. Further, the hold icon display area HIS may be moved and displayed after the symbol change that is started next after the end of the timer advance notice effect, and the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed.

FIGS. 165 (F1) to 165 (F2) are, for example, an example of an effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and show another display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY.

The production example shown in FIG. 165 (F1) corresponds to the production example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). That is, in this production example, the chance-up meter CMT displays the position of the checkpoint (in this production example, the second checkpoint CP2) in which the chance-up notice may occur in the meter portion of the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that the notification is made before it is done. In this case, the chance-up notice may be always given at the checkpoint previously notified by the CUM preparation display MTY. Further, when the checkpoint is notified in advance by the CUM preparation display MTY, the chance-up notice may be more likely to occur than when the checkpoint is not notified. Further, in the CUM preparation display MTY, a part or all of the checkpoints displayed on the chance up meter CMT may be always displayed. In this case, the checkpoint may be displayed depending on the probability of occurrence of the chance-up notice, or the checkpoint may be displayed regardless of the probability of occurrence. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A4) to 162 (A7) are performed, and then the effects shown in FIG. 165 (F2) are performed. The effect shown in FIG. 165 (F2) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A8) except that a checkpoint is displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. In addition to displaying a checkpoint at the start of displaying the CUM preparing display MTY, it is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, when a reach occurs or when shifting to super reach) after the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. Checkpoints may be increased.

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display mode of the chance-up meter preparing display MTY.

FIGS. 166 (A1) to 166 (A3) are, for example, an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A3), in which at least a part of the checkpoint is displayed while the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, and the check is performed. It is shown that the chance-up notice is always executed at the point.

The production example shown in FIG. 166 (A1) is a production example corresponding to FIG. 165 (F1). In FIG. 166 (A1), the second checkpoint CP2 displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY is marked in red, and the character “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Is displayed in the information, which is a display mode for notifying that a chance-up notice has occurred, as shown in FIG. 29 (6) and described above. That is, in this production example, by performing this display, it is notified that the chance-up notice is always performed. It should be noted that the chance-up notice does not have to be actually given, and in this case, the game may proceed assuming that the chance-up notice has been given.

The production example shown in FIG. 166 (A2) corresponds to the production example shown in FIG. 165 (F2). As shown in FIG. 22 (A2), the second checkpoint CP2 remains marked and displayed in red even after the transition to super reach.

After that, as shown in FIG. 166 (A3), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, other checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1, third checkpoint CP3) that were not displayed are displayed. Then, the production by the chance up meter is started. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 166 (A3'), the display of the second checkpoint CP2 may be cleared to the default display mode. After FIG. 166 (A3) and FIG. (A3'), for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (25) are performed, and then FIGS. 162 (A12) to (A15) or the same. The effects shown in FIGS. (B1) to (B8) are performed. When a part or all of the checkpoints are displayed by the CUM preparation display MTY, the chance-up notice does not have to be given by the displayed checkpoints. In this case, the chances at the displayed checkpoints do not have to be given. The up notice may always be given, and the chance up notice may or may not be given. Further, when a part or all of the checkpoints are displayed by the CUM preparation display MTY, the game may proceed assuming that the chance-up notice is not actually given but the chance-up notice is given. In this case, the checkpoint deemed to have been given a chance-up may or may not be notified that a chance-up notice has occurred, and may or may not be notified. May be good.

FIG. 166 (B1) is a modified example of the production example shown in FIG. 166 (A1). In FIG. 166 (B1), the second checkpoint CP2 is displayed in a red-marked manner in the CUM preparation display MTY, but "UP" indicating that a notice has appeared is not displayed. It is shown. In this case, for example, "UP" may be displayed after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 and a chance-up notice is generated.

FIG. 166 (C1) is a modified example of the production example shown in FIG. 166 (A1). In FIG. 166 (C1), the second checkpoint CP2 is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, but it is not marked in red, and the characters “UP” are not displayed, so that “UP” is displayed. It is shown that a "question mark" is displayed instead of the characters. This suggests that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur at some checkpoints in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. For example, the appearance rate of the chance-up notice may be changed in the order of "question mark" <"!" <"UP".

FIG. 166 (D1) is a modified example of the production example shown in FIG. 166 (A1). In FIG. 166 (D1), all the checkpoints displayed on the chance up meter CMT are displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, and characters such as "question mark", "!", And "UP" are displayed for each checkpoint. It may be added to suggest the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a chance-up notice for each checkpoint.

FIG. 166 (E1) is a modified example of the production example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). FIG. 166 (E1) shows that the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY is changing from "STANDBY" to "chance up high probability". When this display is performed, it is suggested that a chance-up notice is likely to occur at each checkpoint in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. In the balloon, "STANDBY" may be displayed once and then changed to "Chance-up high probability", or "STANDBY" and "Chance-up high probability" may be displayed alternately. You may. In addition, the display of "chance up high probability" may be displayed without displaying "STANDBY".

FIG. 166 (F1) is a modified example of the production example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). FIG. 166 (F1) shows that the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY is changing from "STANDBY" to "chance up once confirmed". When this display is performed, it is suggested that the chance-up notice always occurs once in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. As described above, in this production example, it is difficult to specify at which checkpoint the chance-up notice occurs, but the chance-up notice always occurs n times (once in this production example). Is foretold. The number of chance-up notices that must be generated may be once or twice or more. Also, in the balloon, after displaying "STANDBY" once, "chance up once confirmed"
It may be changed to, or the display of "STANDBY" and the display of "chance up once confirmed" may be alternately switched and displayed. Further, the display of "chance up once confirmed" may be displayed without displaying "STANDBY".

FIG. 166 (G1) is a modified example of the production example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). In FIG. 166 (G1), a placard displaying "V" is placed at the final point GP in the CUM preparation display MTY, and it is notified that the jackpot is confirmed. In addition to the "V", for example, a placard displaying "development" may be placed, and in this case, it may be notified that the super reach is confirmed to be developed. .. Also, by arranging a placard with a "question mark" displayed, when the Sabohani character reaches the final point, some kind of production (for example, the development of super reach, the development of super reach will be fueled and will not develop). It may be suggested that the production of the pattern, etc.) is performed. Further, even when it is notified by the placard that some kind of effect is to be performed, there may or may not be any effect.

FIG. 166 (H1) is a modified example of the production example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). In FIG. 166 (H1), a placard displaying "extreme heat" is placed at the final point GP in the CUM preparation display MTY, and (a) a notice regarding the symbol variation display in which the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed is notified. If this is done, or (b) a look-ahead notice and / or a notice notice regarding the symbol variation display on which the chance up meter CMT is displayed may be given. It may be performed only in the case of (a) described above, or may be performed only in the case of (b) described above.

FIG. 166 (I1) is a modified example of the production example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). In FIG. 166 (I1), a placard displaying "V" is placed at the final point GP in the CUM preparation display MTY, and the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed to have reached the final point GP. So, it is informed that the big hit is confirmed. In this case, when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed at the start point SP to display the movement, or it may be displayed at the final point GP. It may be left as it is. Further, even when "V" is displayed on the placard, it may or may not be a big hit. In addition, (a) a advance notice regarding the symbol change display on which the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed is performed, or (b) a pre-reading notice and / or a notice notification regarding the symbol change display on which the chance up meter CMT is displayed is sent. It may be done. It may be performed only in the case of (a) described above, or may be performed only in the case of (b) described above.

FIG. 166 (J1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 166 (I1), and shows how the Sabohani character SBH is also displayed at the starting point SP. That is, it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is arranged at both the start point SP and the end point GP, thereby notifying that the jackpot is confirmed. In this case, when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH at the starting point SP may be moved or not moved. The Sabohani character SBH at the start point SP may be erased, and only the Sabohani character SBH displayed at the final point GP may be left displayed.

FIGS. 166 (K1) to 166 (K2) are, for example, an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and it is shown that another notice display is being performed even while the CUM preparation display MTY is being displayed. ing. FIG. 166 (K1) corresponds to the production example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). After that, as shown in FIG. 166 (K2), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the CUM preparation display MTY is being displayed. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. Needless to say, a notice other than the conversation notice may be given while the CUM preparation display TMY is being displayed. In this production example, the CUM preparation display TMY is started before other notices, but other notices (for example, hold icon and variable icon) that are always started before the CUM preparation display TMY are started. There may be a notice that the display mode of the icon such as, etc. changes, a notice that starts at the start of the change, etc.), and there may be another notice display that always starts at the same time as the CUM preparation display TMY. Further, even if it is another notice of the same type, the display may be started at the same timing as the display is started before the CUM preparation display TMY, or may be started after the CUM preparation display TMY. It should be noted that while the CUM preparation display TMY is being displayed, other notices may not be given, or only a specific notice among a plurality of types of notices can be executed, and notices other than the specific notices can be executed. It may not be executed. For example, while the CUM preparation display TMY is being displayed, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon, which is hidden, may or may not be performed. Specifically, during the display of the CUM preparation display TMY, the notice display of "change" appears from the notice icon YI of the "box" shown in FIGS. 121 and 122, and then the hold icon and the change icon are displayed. The advance notice effect that changes the mode may or may not be performed. Further, while the CUM preparation display TMY is being displayed, the icon change notice by the "bomber" icon IHI shown in FIGS. 148 to 161 may be executed. In this case, for example, the "bomber" icon IHI or The effects displayed on the bullet icon BTI, the bombed hold icon, and the variable icon may be displayed so as to overlap the CUM preparation display TMY, or may be displayed so as to overlap.

FIGS. 166 (L1) to 166 (L2) are, for example, an example of an effect following FIG. 162 (A3), and is an example of displaying only a part of the CUM preparing display MTY as the CUM preparing display. Shown. In FIG. 166 (L1), only the Sabohani character SBH and the balloon of “STANDBY” among the CUM preparation display MTYs are displayed, and the other configurations are hidden. As a result, the display of the chance up meter CMT may be announced. The configuration to be displayed is not limited to the above, and any display may be used as long as it is a part of the elements constituting the CUM preparing display MTY. FIG. 166 (L2) shows the transition to super reach after that. As shown in FIG. 166 (L2), after a part of the display is performed as the CUM preparation display, the display mode may be maintained until the chance up meter CMT is displayed, for example, time. The display mode may be changed in such a manner that the component of the CUM preparation display is added according to the progress of the above.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 166 (M1) to (M7) correspond to the production examples shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (8). That is, in FIG. 29 (3), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani advances on the meter after the production by the chance up meter CMT is started, but in FIG. 166 (M1), the chance is increased internally. Although the effect is performed by the meter CMT, the chance-up meter CMT is not displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed. After that, in FIG. 166 (M2) corresponding to FIG. 29 (4), it is shown that the Boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that the chance-up notice is being given due to the appearance of Boy's character BOY. However, since the chance-up meter CMT is not displayed and the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed, it is difficult to recognize the progress of the production in the chance-up meta CMT. Further, in FIG. 29 (5), a balloon with the characters “passing the chance-up BOY” is displayed to notify the occurrence of the chance-up notice, whereas in FIG. 166 (M3), CUM is being prepared. Since the display MTY remains displayed, such notification is not performed either. After that, in FIG. 166 (M4) corresponding to FIG. 29 (6), the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 29 (6), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is the character. It is displayed above and shows the history of the occurrence of the notice. After that, in FIG. 166 (M5), the CUM preparing display MTY is still displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 29 (7) corresponding to FIG. 166 (M5), the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. After that, as shown in FIG. 166 (M6), it is suggested that the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. FIG. 166 (M7) corresponds to the production example shown in FIG. 29 (8). In this production example, as described above, the chance-up meter CMT is used internally, and the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red as the history of the chance-up notice occurring at the first checkpoint CP1. At the same time, the characters "UP" are also displayed. It should be noted that the position of the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the vicinity of the second checkpoint CP2, and it is informed that a chance-up notice corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 may occur.

As described above, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 166 (M1) to FIG. 166 (M7), the production by the chance up meter CMT is progressing with the start of the super reach internally, but the super reach is performed as a display. It is shown that the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT on the way. At this time, regarding the chance-up notice (appearance of the boy) corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1 that occurred during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY, after the chance-up meter CMT is displayed as the chance-up notice has occurred. It is displayed as a history. It may not be displayed as a history. Further, the timing of switching from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT may be the timing at which the super reach starts, or may be the timing during the super reach. The jackpot symbol mode may be more easily displayed in the case of the start timing of the super reach than in the case of the timing in the middle of the super reach, and vice versa. Further, the timing of switching from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT may be the timing at which the super reach starts, or may be the timing during the super reach.

FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display mode of the chance up meter preparing display.

FIGS. 167 (A1) to 167 (A9) show modified examples of the display mode of the CUM preparation display. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to 167 (A2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 162 (A1) to 162 (A2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 167 (A3) shows that the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparing display MTYb in a mode different from the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3) is displayed. The CUM preparing display MTYb shown in FIG. 167 (A3) is displayed at a position where the display position overlaps with the display position of the chance up meter CMT. It may be displayed at the same position as the display position of the chance up meter CMT. The CUM preparing display MTYb is displayed in a form in which the characters "meter preparing" are added in a rectangular frame. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A4) to 167 (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A4) to 167 (A8) are shown in FIG. 162 (A4), except that the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTYb is different from the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162. -Since the effects shown in the figure (A8) are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 167 (A9) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYb to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, for example, the chance-up meter switching animation may be used to erase the CUM preparation display MTYb and display the chance-up meter CMT. The chance-up meter switching animation may be, for example, a mode in which the chance-up meter CMT appears when the effect is erased after displaying the effect and hiding the CUM preparation display MTYb. It should be noted that the chance up meter switching animation may not be performed, and the switching display may be performed from the CUM preparation display MTYb to the chance up meter CMT. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A10) to 162 (A15) or the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (B1) to (B8) are performed. In this production example, when the production by the chance up meter CMT is started, a balloon with the characters "START !!" may or may not be displayed.

FIGS. 167 (B1) to 167 (B5) show another aspect in which the CUM preparing display MTYb shown in FIG. 167 (A3) appears. FIG. 167 (B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 168 (A1).

In FIGS. 167 (B1) to 167 (B2), the CUM preparing display MTYb rises from below the hold icon display area HIS, and the hold icon display area HIS is lifted by the CUM preparation display MTYb. There is.

FIG. 167 (B3) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols and is in a reach state.

In FIG. 167 (B4), the “decoration 7” that had fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a before shifting to the super reach effect moves below the second decorative symbol and fluctuates in the right symbol display area 208c. The "decoration 7" that was being used moves below the second hold number display. Further, in this production example, the CUM preparation display MTYb is still displayed during the transition to the super reach production. Further, in FIG. 167 (B4), the erase animation is started, and the hold frame UI moves downward. At this time, the hold icon display area HIS moves downward so as to be hidden behind the CUM preparation display MTYb, and then becomes difficult to see as shown in FIG. 167 (B5). Further, the variable icon display area CIS is framed out to the lower part of the display screen, leaving the pedestal hs0. That is, FIG. 167 (B5) shows a state in which the hold frame UI is completely framed out downward while leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. In this production example, the erase animation is performed at the timing of hiding the hold icon, but the hold icon may be displayed without performing the erase animation.

FIG. 168 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

FIGS. 168 (A1) to 168 (A11) show a modified example of the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY. Since the effect shown in FIG. 168 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 168 (A2), the explosion effect EF104 is displayed in the center portion on the left side of the display screen, and it is shown that the CUM preparation display appearance animation has started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the CUM preparing display MTY is not started to be displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, but is started to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. The explosion effect EF104 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative pattern. Further, the CUM preparing display MTY may appear without the CUM preparing display appearance animation being performed. That is, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed without displaying the explosion effect EF104.

Then, as shown in FIG. 168 (A3), when the explosion effect EF104 is erased, the CUM preparation display MTY appears. The display position of the CUM preparing display MTY is substantially the center of the left end portion of the display screen, unlike FIG. 162 (A3). In this production example, it is shown that the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the display position of the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 168 (A4) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols and is in a reach state. At this time, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the state in which the decorative symbol is not overlapped by the CUM preparing display MTY. ing. The CUM preparation display MTY may be arranged behind the decorative symbol and displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 168 (A5), the “decoration 7” that had fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a before shifting to the super reach effect moves below the second decorative symbol and fluctuates in the right symbol display area 208c. The "decoration 7" that was being used moves below the second hold number display. Further, in this production example, the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed during the transition to the super reach production. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol. Even if the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed overlapping the decorative symbol at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (A4), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (A5). May be displayed overlapping behind the decorative pattern. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. Further, FIG. 168 (A5) shows that the holding frame UI has started to move downward, and scrolls out to the lower part of the display screen while leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 168 (A6) to 168 (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 168 (A6) to (A8) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 162 (A6) to 162 (A8), except that the display positions of the CUM preparation display MTYs are different. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 168 (A9) shows that a moving animation in which the CUM preparation display MTY moves downward is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 168 (A10), when the CUM preparing display MTY moves to the lower left corner of the display screen, the moving animation is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 168 (A11), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the CUM preparing display MTY switches to the chance up meter CMT after the moving animation is completed, and then the Sabohani character SBH starts moving (the former), but the CUM preparing display MTY. The character SBH of Sabohani may start moving at the same time as switching from to the chance up meter CMT (the latter). Further, the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving may be the former case or the latter case, and may be performed only in the former case or only in the latter case. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A10) to (A15) or 162 (B1) to (B8) are performed.

In this production example, the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT after the moving animation (sometimes called a descending animation) in which the CUM preparation display MTY moves downward is completed, and then the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT. The movement of the Sabohani character SBH was started, but the display was switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, and after the Sabohani character SBH started moving, the movement animation of the chance up meter CMT was performed. You may be asked.

FIGS. 168 (B1) to 168 (B5) show, for example, another production example following FIG. 168 (A2).

In FIG. 168 (B1), unlike FIG. 168 (A3), the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in a size smaller than the size of the chance up meter CMT. In addition, it may be displayed in a size larger than that of the chance up meter CMT. Further, the display size of the CUM preparation display MTY may be the same as or different from the display size of the chance up meter CMT. Further, the display size of the CUM preparation display MTY and the display size of the chance up meter CMT may always be the same or may be different.

FIG. 168 (B2) shows the transition to super reach with the reduced size CUM preparing display MTY displayed. After that, a moving animation in which the CUM preparing display MTY moves is started at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (B3). At this time, the balloon with "STANDBY" is deleted. The balloon may be deleted before the moving animation starts, may be deleted after the moving animation starts, or may be deleted at the timing when the moving animation starts. Further, as will be described later, the balloon may be deleted after the CUM preparation display MTY is enlarged and displayed, or the balloon may be deleted before the CUM preparation display MTY is enlarged and displayed.

FIG. 168 (B4) shows how the moving animation is completed and the CUM preparing display MTY moves to the display position of the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the CUM preparing display MTY is enlarged and the display size becomes the same as the display size of the chance up meter CMT. The display position may be switched without performing the moving animation. In this case, the display size of the CUM preparing display MTY is reduced before and after the display position is switched to the same display size as the chance up meter CMT. You may do so. Further, the CUM preparing display MTY may be enlarged and displayed after the moving animation is completed, the moving animation may be started after the enlarged display, or the CUM preparing display MTY is moved by the moving animation. While doing so, the display may be gradually enlarged. When the moving animation is completed and the CUM preparing display MTY moves to the display position of the chance up meter CMT, as shown in FIG. 168 (B5), the CUM preparing display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, and then the chance is increased. The production by the meter CMT is started.

FIGS. 168 (C1) to 168 (C4) show, for example, another production example following FIG. 168 (A2).

FIG. 168 (C1) shows an example in which, unlike FIG. 168 (A3), only a part of the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed as the CUM preparation display. In FIG. 168 (C1), only the Sabohani character SBH and the balloon of “STANDBY” among the CUM preparation display MTYs are displayed, and the other configurations are hidden. As a result, the display of the chance up meter CMT may be announced. The configuration to be displayed is not limited to the above, and any display may be used as long as it is a part of the elements constituting the CUM preparing display MTY.

FIG. 168 (C2) shows the transition to super reach after that. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (C3), a switching animation, which is an animation for switching from the CUM preparation display to the chance up meter CMT, is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF105 is displayed so as to overlap the CUM preparation display, and the CUM preparation display disappears.

After that, when the explosion effect EF105 is erased, the CUM preparation display is also erased, and as shown in FIG. 168 (C4), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The CUM preparation display may be switched to the chance up meter CMT without the switching animation being performed, or the switching animation may be performed and the CUM preparation display may be switched to the chance up meter CMT. In some cases, the CUM preparation display may be switched to the chance up meter CMT without the switching animation being performed.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

FIGS. 169 (A1) to 169 (A11) show modified examples of the display mode and display position of the CUM preparation display. Since the effect shown in FIG. 169 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 169 (A2), the explosion effect EF106 is displayed in the center portion on the left side of the display screen, and it is shown that the CUM preparation display appearance animation has started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the CUM preparing display MTY is not started to be displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, but is started to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Further, in this production example, as will be described later, the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYc is different. The explosion effect EF106 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative pattern. Further, the CUM preparing display MTYc may appear without the CUM preparing display appearance animation being performed. That is, the CUM preparing display MTYc may be displayed without displaying the explosion effect EF106.

FIG. 169 (A3) shows how the CUM preparation display MTYc is displayed. The display mode of the CUM preparing display MTYc is different from that shown in FIG. 168 (A3), and the characters being prepared for the meter are displayed in the rectangular frame.

FIG. 169 (A4) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols and is in a reach state. At this time, the CUM preparing display MTYc is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the state in which the decorative symbol is not overlapped by the CUM preparing display MTYc. ing. The CUM preparation display MTYc may be arranged behind the decorative symbol and displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A5) to (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A5) to (A8) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 168 (A5) to (A8), except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYc is different. Since they are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (A9), a switching animation, which is an animation of switching from the CUM preparation display MTYc to the chance up meter CMT, is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF106 is displayed so as to overlap the CUM preparation display MTYc, and the CUM preparation display MTYc disappears. The display mode of this switching animation is the same as that of the CUM preparing display appearance animation shown in FIG. 169 (A2), but may be a different display mode. Further, the display mode of the switching animation and the display mode appearing in the CUM preparation display may be the same display mode or different from the display mode. In addition, the switching animation may not be performed.

Subsequently, when the switching animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 169 (A10), the appearance animation in which the flame effect EF101 is displayed and the chance up meter CMT appears is started. The chance up meter CMT may be displayed without performing the appearance animation. In addition, the appearance animation may or may not be performed.

After that, when the appearance animation is completed and the flame effect EF101 is erased, the chance up meter CMT is displayed as shown in FIG. 169 (A11), and then the production by the chance up meter CMT is started.

FIGS. 169 (B1) to 169 (B8) show an example in which the timer notice display functions as a CUM preparation display.

FIG. 169 (B1) shows how the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that it is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Further, in FIG. 169 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started. For example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the left end of the display screen and displayed on the left side of the center of the display screen. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "60:00". In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown is started thereafter.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 169 (B2), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a state in which the shaking fluctuation display is performed is shown. ing. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the state in which the decorative symbol is not overlapped by the timer notice display TM1. .. The timer notice display TM1 may be arranged behind the decorative symbol and displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. Further, while the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, another type of timer notice display disclosed in the present specification may be displayed. In this case, the display mode of the timer notice display may be the same as or different from the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 169 (B2). Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may always be displayed at the same position, or the display position may be different. Further, the type of notice given as a result of the timer display countdown becoming "00:00" may differ depending on the display position of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the left side of the display screen). In this case, if this timer notice display TM1 functions as a CUM preparation display and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, the timer display countdown is performed, and as a result, the pseudo-ream is executed. Good). At the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B2), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "15:00".

In FIG. 169 (B3), the “decoration 7” that had fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a before shifting to the super reach effect moves below the second decorative symbol and fluctuates in the right symbol display area 208c. The "decoration 7" that was being used moves below the second hold number display. Further, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is continuously displayed even during the transition to the super reach effect. When the effect of shifting to the super reach effect is started, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden, or may be displayed or hidden. At the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B3), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "10:57". Further, in FIG. 169 (B3), the movement of the holding frame UI downward is started, and it is shown that the frame is out to the lower part of the display screen while leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. .. FIG. 169 (B4) shows how the hold frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS left. At the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B4), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:21".

FIG. 169 (B5) shows how the VS swordsman reach super reach production has started. At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1 is still displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B5), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "05:53". The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (B5) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (B6) shows the main character. An animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the hold frame UI is completely hidden (disappears) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variable icon h0 does not disappear and continues to be displayed on the remaining top board. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display continue to be displayed. The entire hold frame UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire hold frame UI may continue to be displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be deleted, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

FIG. 169 (B7) shows a state in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is set to “00:00” during the execution of the super reach effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (B8), a switching animation, which is an animation of switching from the timer advance notice display TM1 to the chance up meter CMT, is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF106 is displayed so as to overlap the timer notice display TM1, and the CUM preparation display disappears. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A10) to (A11) are performed. In this production example, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", the chance up meter CMT is always displayed, but the chance up meter CMT is There may be a case where it is displayed and a case where it is not displayed (a notice display of a ghost by a timer notice display). Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the timer notice display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the chance up meter CMT may be displayed or another notice may be given. May be good.

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing how the chance up meter effect is being performed during the super reach effect. Here, the effect performed during the period shown in FIGS. 170 (A1) to 170 (A5) is the same as the effect performed in FIGS. 162 (A1) to (A8), and is the same as that performed in FIGS. 170 (A6) to 170 (A6). Since the effect performed during the period shown in FIG. (A14) is the same as the effect performed in FIGS. 29 (2) to (11), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (A15), as shown in FIG. 170 (A16), the cut-in image of the lord (weak cut-in image CI3b). ) Is displayed. Here, the cut-in image CI3b in this production example is a weak cut-in image, a red cut-in image (not shown) (a cut-in image having a display mode different from the weak cut-in image and the gold cut-in image), and a gold cut-in image CI3. There are three types, the weak cut-in image, the red cut-in image, and the gold cut-in image, and the reliability of the jackpot increases in that order. A cut-in image suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed may be displayed. This weak cut-in image CI3b is a cut-in image having a display mode different from that of the cut-in image (gold cut-in image CI3) of the lord shown in FIG. 29 (13), and is longer in the vertical direction than the gold cut-in image CI3. It is a weak cut-in image that is short, surrounded by a green frame, and shows how the sword is swung with a shout of "Ikuze!". This weak cut-in image CI3b has a lower reliability than the gold cut-in image CI3, but suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is higher, but it may suggest that there is no change in the reliability. .. That is, in this production example, the gold cut-in image CI3 that may occur at the second checkpoint CP2 is not displayed, and it is shown that the chance-up notice has not occurred. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 170 (A17), the second checkpoint CP2 is not marked in red, and the chance-up notice does not occur above the second checkpoint CP2. The display of "x" is displayed, and the history that the chance-up notice has not occurred is shown. If the chance-up notice does not occur, it is not necessary to leave a history that the chance-up notice did not occur (for example, as shown in FIG. 30 (7a), the character SBH of Sabohani is the first checkpoint. Passing through CP1 as it is, it is not necessary to mark at the first checkpoint CP1 or display the character "UP", and as shown in FIG. 30 (7a'), the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is erased. In addition, when the chance-up notice does not occur, the history may or may not be left. This may be done in any of the embodiments described in the present specification. It is applicable. The weak cut-in image CI3b shown in FIG. 170 (A16) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation valid period. Alternatively, it may be displayed whenever the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation valid period. Further, the weak cut-in image CI3b shown in FIG. 170 (A16) is produced. It may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the button 136 (chance button 136), or the operation valid period without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136). May be displayed without fail when the operation valid period has elapsed, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button 136 (chance button 136) being operated. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and when the operation valid period elapses, the weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed.

After that, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (A18), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 170 (A19) has a lever image 136Va as a chance-up notice. Instead, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (A20), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). After that, as shown in FIG. 170 (A21), in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH has started to move and is located in front of the final point GP. Further, the remaining time display meter MT shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. The character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third checkpoint CP3 until the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation valid period elapses. In this production example, the lever image 136Va as a chance-up notice was not displayed, so that the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance-up meter CMT is not marked in red, and is above the third checkpoint CP3. , An "x" display indicating that the chance-up notice has not occurred is displayed, and the history that the chance-up notice has not occurred is shown.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (A22), the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated by the player, but the various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) are not operated, and FIG. As shown in 170 (A23), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol, and the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. Is notified. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, but the placard is shown with the letter "x" indicating that it will be lost, and the Sabohani character SBH looks disappointed. ing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 170 (A24), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are temporarily displayed lighter than the normal darkness. In addition, the figure shows the scene where the lord collapsed. In FIG. 170 (A25), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed again in normal darkness. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (B4) to 162 (B8) are performed. In this production example, the chance-up notice does not occur at the third checkpoint CP3, the button image 136a is displayed, and the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, but the result of the loss is derived. However, in this effect example, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated to operate various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23), and the result of the big hit is derived. There may be cases. In addition, if the chance-up notice does not occur at the third checkpoint CP3, it may indicate that the loss has been confirmed. In addition, when the production in this production example is performed, there may be a case where a loss is finally achieved or a big hit, and in that case, the case where the loss display mode is finally displayed is better. It may be configured so that the effect of this effect example is more likely to occur than when the jackpot display mode is finally displayed.

In this production example, it is shown that only one of the three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 is given a chance-up notice, and then the loss is derived. However, in any of the three checkpoints CP1 to CP3. A chance-up notice may be given and then a loss may be derived, or a loss may be derived without a chance-up notice at any checkpoint. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the chance-up notice may be given at least once, or even if the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the chance-up notice may be given even once. May not occur, chance-up notice may occur more than once, or chance-up notice may always occur at all checkpoints. It goes without saying that this is applicable to any of the examples of the chance-up notice effect disclosed in the present specification.

FIG. 171 is a diagram showing how another pattern of the chance up meter effect performed during the super reach effect is performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A1) to 171 (A2) are the same as the effects performed in FIGS. 170 (A1) to 170 (A2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171 (A3), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. In this production example, unlike the production example shown in FIG. 170 (A3), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, and the background color of the balloon is displayed in white. It is easier for chance-up notices to occur, and it is easier for the jackpot symbol mode to be confirmed and displayed. When the background color of the balloon is red, chance-up notices may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 in this production example), or three A chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the checkpoints. Further, even if the background color of the balloon is red, the chance-up notice may never occur. Further, when the background color of the balloon is red, the chance-up notice may always be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Further, the background color of the balloon may be displayed in a color other than red or white. For example, when it is displayed in rainbow color, the jackpot may be fixed. Further, in this production example, an example of changing the background color of the balloon is shown, but the shape of the balloon may be changed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A4) to 171 (A14) are performed. In addition, FIG. 171 (
The effects shown in FIGS. A4) to 170 (A14) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 170 (A4) to 170 (A14) except that the background color of the balloon is different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A15), as shown in FIG. 171 (A16), the gold shown in FIG. 29 (13) is described above. The cut-in image CI3 is displayed. At this timing, either the weak cut-in image CI3b, the red cut-in image (not shown), or the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed only when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, and the gold is displayed. When the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed only when the cut-in image CI3 is displayed, or when it is determined that the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed even if the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed. A notification indicating that a chance-up notice has occurred (for example, a balloon with the characters “chance-up gold cut-in” in FIG. 171) is displayed, and a weak cut-in image CI3b and a red cut-in image are displayed. When it is decided or displayed, the notification indicating that the chance up has occurred is not displayed, but the red cut-in image may be notified in the same manner as the gold cut-in image CI3. In this case, the notification indicating that the red cut-in image is displayed and the notification indicating that the gold cut-in image is displayed differ only in the character notation, and other display modes (for example, a balloon) may be different. .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A16) to 171 (A26) are performed. The effect performed during the period from FIG. 171 (A16) to FIG. 171 (A26) is the same as the effect shown in FIGS. 29 (13) to (26), and thus the description thereof will be omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A13) to 162 (A15) are performed. In this production example, even if the production lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A23), the various production movable bodies shown in FIG. 171 (A24) may not operate and the loss may be derived. In that case, even if the effect of this effect example is more likely to occur when the jackpot display mode is finally displayed than when the loss display mode is finally displayed. Good.

FIG. 172 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

172 (A1) to 172 (A3) are modifications of FIG. 171 (A3), and the CUM preparing display MTYb shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to 167 (A9) is displayed in another display mode. It shows how it is doing.

FIG. 172 (A1) is an effect following FIG. 167 (A2). FIG. 172 (A1) shows that the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTYb is displayed. The CUM preparing display MTYb shown in FIG. 172 (A1) is the same as the CUM preparing display MTYb shown in FIG. 167 (A3), but the background color is red and the background color of the CUM preparing display MTYb is The chance-up notice is more likely to occur than in the case of white, and the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. When the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is red, a chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 in this production example). However, chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. Further, even if the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is red, the chance-up notice may never occur. Further, when the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is red, the chance-up notice may always be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Further, the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb may be displayed in a color other than red or white. For example, when the background color is displayed in rainbow color, the jackpot may be confirmed. Further, in this effect example, the background color of the CUM preparing display MTYb is changed, but the shape of the CUM preparing display MTYb may be changed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (A2) to 172 (A3) are performed. The effects performed during the period from FIGS. 172 (A1) to (A3) are shown in FIGS. 167 (A3) to (A9), except that the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is different. Since it is the same as the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 172 (B1) to 172 (B4) are modified examples of FIG. 171 (A3), and show how the background color of the balloon changes during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. Since the effect shown in FIG. 172 (B1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 162 (A3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 172 (B2), after the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed, the effect EF107 in which the Sabohani character SBH is wrapped in a red flame is displayed, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. Has been done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the CUM preparation display MTY rank-up effect is performed by the character SBH of Sabohani, which is a component of the CUM preparation display MTY.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (B3), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY has been upgraded. In this production example, the color of the flame effect EF107 is displayed in red in accordance with the background color of the balloon after the rank is increased, but it may be displayed in a color other than red. Further, the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY after the rank up may be announced by the display color of the flame effect EF107. For example, when the display color of the flame effect EF107 is rainbow color, the rank may be announced. The background color of the balloon of the CUM preparation display MTY after the up may also change to rainbow color to notify that the big hit is confirmed. That is, when the flame effect EF107 is displayed in rainbow colors, it may be notified that the jackpot will be confirmed at that time. Further, even if the effect EF107 gives a notice of rank-up of the CUM preparation display MTY, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 172 (B4), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, which is a modification of FIG. 171 (A4), and a reach state is formed. , It is shown that the shaking fluctuation display is being performed. The color of the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed in red.

FIGS. 172 (C1) to 172 (C6) show another effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 172 (C1) is an effect following FIG. 162 (A3), and shows how the notice icon YI is stocked. The notice icon YI appears, for example, by any of the production examples shown in FIGS. 120 to 147.

After that, as shown in FIG. 172 (C2), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, the display changes to the mode d in which the box is open, and the rank is raised from the inside of the box. An animation is displayed in which the notice display of "UP" is displayed. The display of "UP" that appears here is a display that announces the rank-up of the CUM preparation display MTY. Before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box opens, an effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattlingly) may be performed. Further, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not actually be opened.

In FIG. 172 (C3), the notice icon YI used disappears, and the notice display of “UP” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 172 (C4), the promotion animation using the notice display of "UP" is started. In FIG. 172 (C4), after the notice display of "UP" is changed to the light ball EF108 in the right symbol display area 208c, the balloon is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH of the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that it flies and hits a balloon. In this production example, the CUM preparing display MTY may be ranked up without the promotion animation being performed, the promotion animation is performed and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up, and the promotion animation is performed. There may be a case where the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up without being asked. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the advance notice display is performed by the elements other than the components of the CUM preparation display MTY, and the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (C5), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY has been upgraded. After the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded, the background color of the balloon may change not only from white to red but also to another color. In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up even though the promotion animation has been performed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 172 (C6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, a reach state is formed, and the shaking fluctuation display is performed. It is shown. The color of the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed in red.

FIGS. 172 (D1) to 172 (D3) show another effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. Since the effect shown in FIG. 172 (D1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 162 (A3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 172 (D2), after the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed, the effect EF109 in which the entire CUM preparation display MTY is wrapped in a large flame is displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. Has been notified. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the advance notice display is performed by the elements other than the components of the CUM preparation display MTY, and the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (D3), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY has been upgraded. After the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded, the background color of the balloon may change not only from white to red but also to another color. Further, even if the effect EF109 gives a notice of rank-up of the CUM preparation display MTY, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up. Further, as shown in FIG. 172 (D2'), the color of the flame effect EF109 may be the same color as the background color of the balloon of the CUM preparation display MTY after the change (red in this production example). Therefore, the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY after the rank up may be announced. Further, as shown in FIG. 172 (D3'), the color of the balloon of the CUM preparation display MTY after the rank up may change to rainbow color, and in this case, it is notified that the jackpot is confirmed. To. As shown in FIG. 171 (A3), the color of the balloon of the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed in rainbow color from the beginning.

FIGS. 172 (E1) to 172 (E6) show an effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes as a result of the timer advance notice being performed while the CUM preparation display MTY is being displayed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 172 (E1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 162 (A3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 172 (E2), the timer notice effect is started. For example, the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen and displayed on the center right side of the display screen. The timer display on this timer notice display TM1 is "03:00", and a certain notice is given 3 seconds after the timer display countdown is started (in this production example, the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is increased). Is suggested to be done. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown is started thereafter. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the advance notice display is performed by the elements other than the components of the CUM preparation display MTY, and the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 172 (E3) to 172 (E4), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "0:00:00".

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 172 (E5), the timer notice display TM1 "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (E6), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY has been upgraded. After the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded, the background color of the balloon may change not only from white to red but also to another color.

FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating another pattern of the change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

In FIGS. 173 (A1) to 173 (A7), the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations. It shows an effect pattern that ranks up in some cases. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 173 (A1) to (A6) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 163 (C1) to (C6), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed again as shown in FIG. 173 (A7), but in this production example, as a result of being redisplayed, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed again. The background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani has changed from white to red, indicating that the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. After the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded, the background color of the balloon may change not only from white to red but also to another color. For example, there are three types of background colors for the balloon in this production example: white (default color), red (high expectation), and rainbow color (big hit confirmed), both before and after redisplay. A pattern that does not change in white, a pattern that does not change in red before and after redisplay, a pattern that does not change in rainbow color before and after redisplay, and a pattern that does not change in white before redisplay A pattern that changes to red afterwards, a pattern that changes to white before redisplay and changes to rainbow color after redisplay, a pattern that changes to red before redisplay and changes to rainbow color after redisplay, and white in the first stage Is displayed, it is configured to be displayed in one of the display patterns of the pattern that changes to red after the first redisplay and changes to rainbow color after the second redisplay. In addition, a display mode balloon that is the expected degree between the white background color balloon and the red background color balloon, and a display that is the expected degree between the red background color balloon and the rainbow background color balloon. A speech bubble of an aspect may be prepared. In addition, there may be a balloon display mode (for example, a balloon with a white blinking display mode) that suggests that the background color of the balloon may change. This is applicable in any of the embodiments described herein.

In FIGS. 173 (B1) to 173 (B8), the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations. It shows another production pattern that ranks up in some cases. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 173 (B1) to (B6) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 163 (D1) to (D6), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 173 (B7), after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the effect EF107 in which the Sabohani character SBH is wrapped in a red flame is displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. Is shown to be informed. The timing at which the effect EF107 in which the character SBH of Sabohani is wrapped in flames is started and the rank-up effect of the CUM preparation display MTY is started is not limited to the above, and may be started at an appropriate timing. For example, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol may be confirmed, or another reach may be produced. Further, the timing at which the CUM preparation display MTY ranks up may be any of the above-mentioned timings.

When the rank-up effect of the CUM preparation display MTY is completed as described above, the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH changes from white to red as shown in FIG. 173 (B8). , CUM preparing display MTY is notified that the rank has been upgraded. In this production example, the color of the flame effect EF107 is displayed in red in accordance with the background color of the balloon after the rank is increased, but it may be displayed in a color other than red. Further, the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY after the rank up may be announced by the display color of the flame effect EF107. For example, when the display color of the flame effect EF107 is rainbow color, the rank may be announced. The background color of the balloon of the CUM preparation display MTY after the up may also change to rainbow color to notify that the big hit is confirmed. That is, when the flame effect EF107 is displayed in rainbow colors, it may be notified that the jackpot will be confirmed at that time. Further, even if the effect EF107 is used to increase the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up.

FIGS. 173 (C1) to 173 (C4) show another display mode of the upgraded CUM preparing display MTY.

FIG. 173 (C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and shows how the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed. In this production example, the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 171 (A3), and the color of the meter portion constituting the CUM preparing display MTY is red. As a result, the chance-up notice is more likely to occur than when the color of the meter portion is white, and the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. When the color of the meter portion is red, chance-up notices may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 in this production example), or three A chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the checkpoints. Further, even if the color of the meter portion turns red, the chance-up notice may never occur. Further, when the color of the meter portion is red, the chance-up notice may always be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Further, the color of the meter portion may be displayed in a color other than red or white. For example, when it is displayed in rainbow color, the jackpot may be fixed. Further, in this production example, an example in which the color of the meter portion is changed is shown, but the shape of the meter portion may be changed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 173 (C2) to 173 (C4) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 173 (C2) to 173 (C4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 171 (A4) to (A6), except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different in that described above. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 173 (C4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the meter portion becomes white and the default display mode is used. Even after the chance-up meter CMT is switched and displayed, the color of the meter portion may be red.

FIGS. 173 (D1) to 173 (D4) show another display mode of the upgraded CUM preparing display MTY.

FIG. 173 (D1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and shows how the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed. In this production example, the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 171 (A3), and the color of the Sabohani character SBH itself constituting the CUM preparing display MTY is different. Is red, and the chance-up notice is more likely to occur than when the color of the Sabohani character SBH is the default color, and the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. When the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, a chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 in this production example). The chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. Further, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani becomes red, the chance-up notice may never occur. Further, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance-up notice may always be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Further, the color of the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color. For example, when it is displayed in rainbow color, the jackpot may be confirmed. Further, in this production example, the color of the Sabohani character SBH is changed, but the shape of the Sabohani character SBH may be changed. In addition, a character different from the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 173 (D2) to (D4) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 173 (D2) to 173 (D4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 171 (A4) to (A6), except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different in that described above. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 173 (D4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the color of the Sabohani character SBH becomes the default color and becomes the default display mode. Even after the chance up meter CMT is switched and displayed, the color of the Sabohani character SBH may be red.

FIG. 174 is a diagram for explaining another pattern of the change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

174 (A1) to 174 (A4) show another display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY.

FIG. 174 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and shows how the CUM preparation display MTY has started to be displayed. In this production example, the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3), and the Sabohani character SBH constituting the CUM preparing display MTY is a princess. It has been changed to the character HME, and when the jackpot symbol display mode is confirmed and displayed, the princess character HME is more than when the Sabohani character SBH is displayed than when the lost symbol display mode is confirmed. It is easier to display. When the princess character HME is displayed, a chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 in this production example), or 3 The chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the checkpoints. Further, even if the princess character HME is displayed, the chance-up notice may never occur. Further, when the character HME of the princess is displayed, the chance-up notice may always be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Further, when the princess character HME is displayed, the jackpot may be confirmed. Further, in this production example, an example in which the princess character HME is displayed instead of the Sabohani character SBH is shown, but a character different from the princess character HME may be displayed. Further, the player may be able to select the character displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY in advance. For example, when the player sets in advance that the princess character HME appears, CUM preparation is in progress. The princess character HME may be displayed in the display MTY, or the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed as the default character when the character to appear is not selected. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 174 (A2) to 174 (A4) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 174 (A2) to 174 (A4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 171 (A4) to (A6), except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different in that described above. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 174 (A4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the princess character HME is switched to the Sabohani character SBH. Even after the chance up meter CMT is switched and displayed, the princess character HME may continue to be displayed.

FIGS. 174 (B1) to 174 (B7) show another pattern of the rank-up effect of the CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 174 (B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and shows how the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed.

After that, in FIG. 174 (B2), a small size button image 136as and a small size remaining time display meter MTs start to be displayed in the vicinity of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH constituting the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is being operated. At the timing shown in FIG. 174 (B2), the operation validity period has not yet started.

After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (B3), and in FIG. 174 (B4), the remaining time according to the elapsed time from the start of the operation valid period. It is shown that the gauge of the display meter MTs is decreasing. In addition, there may be a case where a plurality of button images are displayed including the button image 136as of this small size. In this case, the displayed buttons are displayed by one operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). Operations corresponding to all of the images may be accepted, or only operations corresponding to any one button image may be accepted. In addition, when the button effect related to the execution of the look-ahead notice and the button effect related to the execution of the notice of the symbol change display being executed (hereinafter, may be referred to as "the change notice") are performed at the same time, the effect is produced. By operating the button 136 (chance button 136), the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effect related to the fluctuation notice may be prioritized, or the effect corresponding to the button effect related to the look-ahead notice may be prioritized. The operation of the button 136 (chance button 136) may be prioritized, or the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effect related to the change notice can be performed by one operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). Both the operation of 136) and the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effect related to the look-ahead notice may be enabled. Further, when a plurality of button effects related to the look-ahead notice are performed at the same time, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the effect button 136 (chance) corresponding to the button effect related to any one of the look-ahead notices is performed. Only the operation of the button 136) may be enabled, or all the operations of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effect related to the plurality of pre-reading notices being executed may be enabled. Further, when a plurality of button effects related to the change notice are simultaneously performed, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the effect button 136 corresponding to any one of the button effects related to the change notice is performed. Only the operation of (chance button 136) may be enabled, or all the operations of the effect buttons 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effects related to the plurality of execution notices of the fluctuation may be enabled.

After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (B5), the effect EF110 in which the balloon explodes is displayed as shown in FIG. 174 (B6). It has been announced that an animation will be performed and the CUM preparation display MTY will be ranked up. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the CUM preparation display MTY rank-up effect is performed by a button effect different from the component of the CUM preparation display MTY. The switching animation does not have to be performed.

After that, when the explosion effect EF110 is erased, as shown in FIG. 174 (B7), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH of the CUM preparation display MTY changes from white to red. It is shown that the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. After the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded, the background color of the balloon may change not only from white to red but also to another color. In this effect example, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period to raise the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY, but the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. The CUM preparation display MTY may be ranked up even if the operation valid period has passed without any operation, or if the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 (chance button 136) being operated, the CUM preparation may be performed. The medium display MTY does not have to be ranked up. Further, when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136), the CUM preparation display MTY may or may not be ranked up. Further, when the button effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 174 (B2), the CUM preparation display MTY may be ranked up without fail.

FIGS. 174 (C1) to 174 (C6) show another pattern of production by the chance-up meter CMT.

FIG. 174 (C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 171 (A5), and shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. This production example differs from the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 171 (A5) in that four checkpoints are arranged in the chance-up meter CMT, and the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 The fourth checkpoint CP4 is arranged between the two. That is, it is notified that when the character SBH of Sabohani, which is the cursor, reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4, a chance-up notice may occur. When the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the number of checkpoints is increased compared to the chance-up meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171 (A5). The meter CMT may be easily displayed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the number of checkpoints is reduced compared to the chance-up meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171 (A5). The meter CMT may be easily displayed. Further, the number of checkpoints in the chance up meter CMT is the same when the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in the upgraded display mode and when the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in the default display mode. It may be. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the number of checkpoints is increased compared to the chance-up meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171 (A5). The meter CMT may always be displayed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the number of checkpoints is reduced compared to the chance-up meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171 (A5). The meter CMT may always be displayed.

FIG. 174 (C2) shows that the chance-up notice is generated at the first checkpoint CP1 and the Sabohani character SBH is moving on the meter.

After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (C3), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4, an animation in which the cutting edge of the sword held by the lord is shining is started. That is, this effect is a chance-up notice at the 4th checkpoint CP4, and this chance-up notice is more likely to occur when the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed than when the lost symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It has become.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (C4), a balloon with the characters "chance up sharp sword" was displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and a chance up notice was given. I am informing you that. The timing when the animation with the shining sword tip starts and the timing when the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani starts to be displayed may be the same, or the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed after the animation with the shining sword tip starts. Alternatively, the animation in which the tip of the sword shines may be started after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. The Sabohani character SBH stops at the 4th checkpoint CP4 during the execution of the animation in which the tip of the sword shines, but it may not stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (C5), the fourth checkpoint CP4 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (C6), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible.

In this production example, the display mode of the Sabohani character SBH and the chance-up meter CMT is the default display mode in which neither of them is ranked up, but the meter portion of the Sabohani character SBH and the chance-up meter CMT is used. At least one of them may be displayed in a rank-up display mode. In this case, the character SBH of Sabohani or the meter part may be ranked up when the chance-up meter CMT starts to be displayed, and only the character SBH of Sabohani is ranked up when the chance-up meter CMT starts to be displayed. Therefore, the meter portion may be ranked up during the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Further, at the stage when the chance-up meter CMT starts to be displayed, only the meter portion is ranked up, and the character SBH of Sabohani may be ranked up while the effect by the chance-up meter CMT is being performed. In addition, the rank-up display mode may be displayed only when the chance-up meter CMT starts to be displayed, and the rank-up is not performed while the chance-up meter CMT is performing the production. May be good.

FIG. 175 is a diagram showing how the chance-up meter ranks up during the production by the chance-up meter. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (A1) to 175 (A5) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 170 (A1) to 170 (A5), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 175 (A6) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the meter portion of the chance-up meter CMT is displayed in red, which is a rank-up color from the default color white, at the timing when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance-up meter CMT. That is, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. This suggests that chance-up notices are likely to occur at each checkpoint, and that the final display is likely to be confirmed in the jackpot symbol mode. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (A7) to 175 (A26) are performed. The display of the meter portion of the chance-up meter CMT in FIGS. 175 (A6) and 175 (A7) has the same display mode. Further, the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (A7) to 175 (A26) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 171 (A7) to (A26) except that the color of the meter portion in the chance-up meter CMT is different. , The description is omitted. In addition, when the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed, the display mode of a part or all of the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode (for example, the default color, Sabohani) than when the lost symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It may be configured so that it can be easily displayed in a display mode (for example, red, princess character HME, etc.) that is ranked higher than the character SBH of the above.

FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the rank-up chance-up meter.

FIG. 176 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 175 (A5), and shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, when the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed, the color of the Sabohani character SBH itself is red, and a chance up notice is generated compared to the case where the color of the Sabohani character SBH is the default color. It is easy to do, and it is easy to confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode. That is, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. When the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, a chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 in this production example). The chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. Further, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani becomes red, the chance-up notice may never occur. Further, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance-up notice may always be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Further, the color of the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color. For example, when it is displayed in rainbow color, the jackpot may be confirmed. Further, in this production example, the color of the Sabohani character SBH is changed, but the shape of the Sabohani character SBH may be changed. In addition, a character different from the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed.

FIG. 176 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 175 (A5), and shows another display mode of the rank-up chance-up meter CMT. In FIG. 176 (B1), the background color of the placard placed at the final point GP has changed from the default color (for example, white) to red, which also ranks up the chance-up meter CMT. Can be notified. At this time, for example, only the background color of a specific surface of the placard (for example, the surface on which "V" or "development" is displayed) is changed to red, and the surface on which "x" is displayed is the default color. It may be displayed, or the background color may be changed to red for the surface on which "x" is displayed. In this production example, the display mode of the final point GP is changed, but the display mode of the start point SP may be changed to notify that the chance up meter CMT has been upgraded.

FIG. 176 (C1) is an effect following FIG. 175 (A5), and shows another display mode of the rank-up chance-up meter CMT. FIG. 176 (C1) shows that the second checkpoint CP2 is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (square and white display mode). That is, it is shown that the display mode of a part or all of the chance-up meter CMT is different to indicate that the chance-up meter CMT is ranked up. In this production example, the display mode of the second checkpoint CP2 is a round and red display mode, and for example, it is notified that a chance-up notice corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 will always occur. In addition, the display mode of other checkpoints may be changed to a rank-up mode. Further, in this production example, the shape and color of the checkpoint are changed, but only the shape may be changed or only the color may be changed.

FIGS. 176 (D1) to (D2) show the effects corresponding to the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A10) to (A11), and the effect by the chance up meter CMT has started. , It is shown that the background color of the balloon of "START !!" that notifies that the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani is started is red, which ranks up the chance up meter CMT. The situation is suggested. This “START !!” balloon is subsequently erased, as shown in FIG. 176 (D2). In this production example, since the balloon of "START !!" is displayed for a short time, it may be easier for the player to pay attention to the display of "START !!". In this production example, after the balloon of "START !!" is displayed, it is deleted when a predetermined time elapses. However, if the balloon has a higher rank display mode, it is not deleted. The display may be maintained as it is. Further, in this production example, the background color of the balloon is changed, but the color of the characters in the balloon may be changed. In addition, the content of the characters displayed in the balloon may change, or the characters may be written as they are.

FIGS. 176 (E1) to 176 (E6) show, for example, another production example following FIG. 175 (A5), and correspond to the production shown in FIGS. 170 (A6) to (A11). ..

FIG. 176 (E1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the character SBH of Sabohani constituting the chance-up meter CMT is changed to the character HME of the princess, thereby notifying that the chance-up meter CMT is ranked up. In the vicinity of the princess character HME, a balloon with the characters "START !!" is displayed in the default display mode. Here, the character displayed in the CUM preparing display MTY displayed before the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (E1) is displayed may be the Sabohani character SBH or the princess character. It may be an HME or another character. In this production example, the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, and the chance up meter C
It is shown that when it was switched to MT, it was changed to the princess character HME. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 176 (E2) to 176 (E6) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 176 (E2) to 176 (E6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 170 (A7) to 170 (A11), except that the characters displayed on the chance-up meter CMT are different. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIGS. 176 (F1) to 176 (F7) show, for example, another production example following FIG. 175 (A5), in which the chance-up meter CMT ranks up during the execution of the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Is shown.

FIG. 176 (F1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, it is shown that the notice icon YI is stocked. The notice icon YI appears, for example, by any of the production examples shown in FIGS. 120 to 147.

FIG. 176 (F2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 175 (A10). That is, in the period of FIGS. 176 (F1) to (F2), for example, except that the notice icon YI is displayed, the above-mentioned effects shown in FIGS. 175 (A6) to (A10) are obtained. It is done. After that, FIG. 176 (F3) shows that after the chance-up notice is generated at the first checkpoint CP1, the production progresses and the Sabohani character SBH is heading toward the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 176 (F4), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, the display changes to the mode d in which the box is open, and the rank is raised from the inside of the box. An animation is displayed in which the notice display of "UP" is displayed. The display of "UP" that appears here is a display that announces the rank up of the chance up meter CMT. Before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box opens, an effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattlingly) may be performed. Further, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not actually be opened.

In FIG. 176 (F5), the notice icon YI used disappears, and the notice display of “UP” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 176 (F5), the promotion animation using the notice display of "UP" is started. In FIG. 176 (F6), after the notice display of "UP" changes to a ball of light in the right symbol display area 208c, it flies toward the chance up meter CMT and hits the chance up meter CMT. It is shown. At this time, the explosion effect EF111 is displayed so as to cover at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT may be ranked up without the promotion animation being performed, the case where the promotion animation is performed and the chance up meter is ranked up, and the case where the promotion animation is not performed. The chance up meter CMT may be upgraded in some cases. As described above, in this production example, the advance notice is displayed by the elements other than the components of the chance-up meter CMT, and the rank-up of the chance-up meter CMT is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (F7), the color of the meter portion of the chance-up meter CMT changes from white to red, and it is notified that the chance-up meter CMT has been upgraded. After the rank of the chance-up meter CMT is upgraded, the meter portion may change not only from white to red but also to another color. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may not be ranked up even though the promotion animation has been performed.

FIGS. 176 (G1) to 176 (G7) show, for example, another production example following FIG. 175 (A5), and show how the chance-up meter CMT is ranked up by the timer notice.

FIG. 176 (G1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT is the default display mode.

FIG. 176 (G2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 175 (A10). That is, in the period of FIGS. 176 (G1) to (G2), for example, the above-mentioned effects shown in FIGS. 175 (A6) to (A10) are performed. After that, FIG. 176 (G3) shows that after the chance-up notice is generated at the first checkpoint CP1, the production progresses and the Sabohani character SBH is heading toward the second checkpoint CP2. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice effect is started. For example, the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen and displayed on the center right side of the display screen. The timer display on this timer notice display TM1 is "03:00", and a certain notice (in this production example, the rank up of the chance up meter CMT) is given 3 seconds after the timer display countdown is started. It is suggested that it will be done. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown is started thereafter. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the advance notice is displayed by the elements other than the components of the chance up meter CMT, and the rank of the chance up meter CMT is increased. The timer display countdown may be started after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, or may be started during the execution of the animation in which the timer notice display TM1 appears.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 176 (G4) to 176 (G5), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "0:00:00".

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 176 (G6), the timer notice display TM1 "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character is displayed. In this production, after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the characters "attention" are displayed, and then the rank of the chance up meter CMT is increased. When the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" without displaying characters, the chance up meter CMT may be upgraded. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may be upgraded after the word "attention" is displayed, or the chance up meter CMT may be upgraded without displaying the word "attention". Good.

Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (G7), the color of the meter portion of the chance-up meter CMT changes from the default color white to red, and it is notified that the chance-up meter CMT has been upgraded. After the rank of the chance-up meter CMT is upgraded, the color of the meter portion may change not only from white to red but also to another color.

FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating another pattern of rank-up of the chance-up meter.

FIGS. 177 (A1) to 177 (A7) show, for example, another production example following FIG. 175 (A5), and the chance-up meter CM during the execution of the production by the chance-up meter CMT.
It shows how T ranks up.

FIG. 177 (A1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is set to the default display mode.

FIG. 177 (A2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 175 (A10). That is, in the period of FIGS. 177 (A1) to (A2), for example, the above-mentioned effects shown in FIGS. 175 (A6) to (A10) are performed. After that, FIG. 177 (A3) shows that after the chance-up notice is generated at the first checkpoint CP1, the production progresses and the Sabohani character SBH is heading toward the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, FIG. 177 (A4) shows how the Sabohani character SBH stops on the meter and the rank-up animation is started. When the rank-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 177 (A5), the smoke effect EF112 is displayed so as to cover the entire Sabohani character SBH.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (A6), the color of the Sabohani character SBH itself constituting the chance-up meter CMT changes from the default color to red, and the chance-up notice is likely to occur, and the jackpot symbol is also generated. It is suggested that the aspect is easily displayed in a definite manner. When the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, a chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed checkpoints (for example, three checkpoints CP1 to CP3 in this production example). The chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. Further, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani becomes red, the chance-up notice may never occur. Further, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance-up notice may always be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Further, the color of the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color. For example, when it is displayed in rainbow color, the jackpot may be confirmed. Further, in this production example, the color of the Sabohani character SBH is changed, but the shape of the Sabohani character SBH may be changed. In addition, a character different from the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 177 (A7), the Sabohani character SBH resumes progress on the meter and heads for the second checkpoint CP2. In this production example, the display mode of the Sabohani character SBH may not change even though the rank-up animation has been performed.

FIGS. 177 (B1) to 177 (B8) show, for example, another production example following FIG. 171 (A5), in which the chance-up meter CMT ranks up during the execution of the production by the chance-up meter CMT. Is shown. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 177 (B1) to (B2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 177 (A1) to (A2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 177 (B3) shows a balloon with the characters “next point chance-up effect high probability” displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani traveling on the meter of the chance-up meter CMT. There is. By displaying this balloon, it is notified that the chance-up notice is likely to occur at the second checkpoint CP2 where the Sabohani character SBH arrives next. For example, instead of the balloon shown in FIG. 177 (B3), as shown in FIG. 177 (B3'), a balloon with the characters "Next point chance up effect occurs !!" is displayed. It may be possible to notify that a chance-up notice will always occur at the second checkpoint CP2. Further, as shown in FIG. 177 (B3 ″), a balloon with the characters “Is the next point chance-up effect generated?” May be displayed. In this case, the second checkpoint may be displayed. In CP2, it can be suggested that the chance-up notice may occur, but it may not occur. When the balloon shown in FIG. 177 (B3 ″) is displayed, for example, the chance-up notice is less likely to occur at the second checkpoint CP2 than when the balloon shown in FIG. 177 (B3) is displayed. May be good. In addition, by displaying only "high probability" in the balloon, it may be suggested that a chance-up notice is likely to occur at any checkpoint regardless of a specific checkpoint. In addition, only the balloon with the characters "Next point chance-up effect high probability" in FIG. 177 (B3) may be displayed, and "Next point chance-up effect occurs!" In Fig. 177 (B3')! Only balloons with the characters "" may be displayed. In addition, a balloon with the characters "Next point chance-up effect high probability" in Fig. 177 (B3) and / or "Next point chance-up effect occurred !!" in Fig. 177 (B3') are attached. The balloon may be displayed, or the balloon with the characters of FIG. 177 (B3 ″) may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (B4), the display mode of the second checkpoint CP2 changes from the default display mode to the chance-up display mode (round and red display mode). That is, it is shown that the display mode of a part or all of the chance-up meter CMT is different to indicate that the chance-up meter CMT is ranked up. It should be noted that the chance-up notice may always occur at the checkpoint where the display mode changes and the rank is increased. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 177 (B5) to 177 (B8) are performed. It should be noted that the effects performed during the period from FIG. 177 (B5) to FIG. 177 (B8) are shown in FIGS. 171 (A12) to 171 (A12), except that the display mode of the second checkpoint CP2 of the chance up meter CMT is different. Since it is the same as the above-mentioned effect shown in (A17), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 177 (C1) to 177 (C6) show, for example, another example of the effect following FIG. 170 (A24), and show how the revival effect is being performed.

FIG. 177 (C1) shows that as a result of the super reach, the lord was defeated by the swordsman, and all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right were displayed again in normal darkness. There is.

After that, FIG. 177 (C2) shows how the Sabohani character SBH at the final point GP notices something. That is, it is foretold that the revival effect will be generated by the character SBH of Sabohani.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (C3), the resurrection cut-in PCI with the characters "Do your best !!" is displayed together with the princess character, and then, as shown in FIG. 177 (C4), it is displayed in a large size. The character YMN of the lord appears with a sword. At this time, the character YMN of the lord is displayed so as to overlap the front side of a part of the chance up meter CMT, and a part of the character YMN is difficult to see. It should be noted that a part of the character YMN of the lord may be overlapped by the chance up meter CMT, and a part of the character YMN of the lord may be difficult to see. Further, the character YMN of the lord may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the chance up meter CMT, or the character YMN of the lord and the chance up meter CMT may or may not overlap. Further, when the character YMN of the lord appears, the character YMN of the lord and the chance up meter CMN may always overlap. In this production example, the resurrection cut-in PCI is displayed after the resurrection production is announced by the Sabohani character SBH.
The resurrection cut-in PCI may be displayed without notifying that the resurrection effect will occur due to the Sabohani character SBH, or when the resurrection effect occurs after notifying that the resurrection effect will occur due to the Sabohani character SBH. In some cases, the resurrection effect may occur without notifying that the resurrection effect by the Sabohani character SBH will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 177 (C5), the character YMN of the lord cuts a sword from the upper left corner to the lower right corner of the display screen, and cuts the "decoration 6" as the middle pattern that is stopped and displayed. Is done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (C6), the middle symbol is changed from "decoration 6" to "decoration 7", and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is derived, and the jackpot is derived. It is notified that it has become. At this time, the placard at the final point GP of the chance up meter CMT was changed from the display of "x" to the display of "V", and it was notified that the display was also a big hit.

In this production example, for example, when a combination of lost decorative symbols is derived, if the chance up meter CMT is not erased and the display is maintained, a revival effect is shown. In this case, the revival effect may not be performed.

FIG. 178 is a diagram showing how the rank-up chance-up meter preparation display MTY is continuously displayed in the rank-up display mode even when the chance-up meter CMT is switched.

FIGS. 178 (A1) to 178 (A5) are effects following FIG. 175 (A3), and are switched to the chance-up meter CMT in a state where the color of the meter portion constituting the CUM preparation display MTY is red. In this case, the meter portion of the chance-up meter CMT continues to be red. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 178 (A1) to (A3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 173 (C1) to (C3), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 178 (A4) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is still red. That is, when the CUM preparation display MTY has a chance up, it is shown that the chance up state is inherited even if the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 178 (A5) is performed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 178 (A5) is the same as that shown in FIG. 175 (A7), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 178 (B1) to 178 (B5) are the effects following FIG. 175 (A3), and the chance up meter CMT is in a state where the color of the Sabohani character SBH constituting the CUM preparation display MTY is red. It shows that the character SBH of Sabohani of the chance up meter CMT continues to be red when it is switched to. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 178 (B1) to (B3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 173 (D1) to (D3), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 178 (B4) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani of the chance up meter CMT is still red. After that, as shown in FIG. 178 (B5), the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the starting point SP in the state of the red display mode.

FIGS. 178 (C1) to 178 (C5) are the effects following FIG. 175 (A3), in which the princess character HME is displayed in place of the Sabohani character SBH constituting the CUM preparation display MTY. It shows that when the chance up meter CMT is switched to, the characters constituting the chance up meter CMT are also the princess character HME. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 178 (C1) to (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 174 (A1) to (A3), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 178 (C4) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the character displayed even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT is still the princess character HME. After that, as shown in FIG. 178 (C5), the characters constituting the chance up meter CMT start moving from the starting point SP while keeping the princess character HME.

Needless to say, the effect example shown in FIG. 178 can be applied to both the CUM preparation display MTY and the chance up meter CMT effect example shown in the present specification.

Further, in the present embodiment, the chance-up meter CMT is configured to be more easily ranked up when the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up than when it is not ranked up. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY does not rank up, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be displayed more easily in the default display mode than when the rank is raised. In addition, when the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY and / or the chance up meter CMT is more likely to be ranked up than when the lost symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured in. For example, (1) CUM preparing display MTY is the default display mode and the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode, and (2) CUM preparing display MTY is the default display mode and the chance up meter. A pattern in which the CMT is a rank-up display mode, (3) a pattern in which the CUM preparation display MTY is a rank-up display mode, and the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode, and (4) a CUM preparation display MTY is When a pattern that is a rank-up display mode and is a display mode in which the chance-up meter CMT is ranked up is prepared, it is displayed in the pattern (2) rather than in the case of the pattern (1). The case may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol mode, and the case displayed in the pattern (4) may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol mode than the case displayed in the pattern (3). Further, the case where the pattern is displayed in the pattern (3) may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol mode than the case where the pattern is displayed in the pattern (2), or the case where the pattern is displayed in the pattern (3). When the pattern (2) is displayed, it may be easier to confirm the display in the jackpot symbol mode than when it is displayed. Further, the case where the pattern is displayed in the pattern (1) is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the lost pattern mode than the case where the pattern is displayed in the pattern (2), and the case where the pattern is displayed in the pattern (4) is (3). ) May be easier to confirm and display in the lost pattern mode. Further, the case where the pattern is displayed in the pattern (3) may be easier to confirm in the lost pattern mode than the case where the pattern is displayed in the pattern (2), or the case where the pattern is displayed in the pattern (3). It may be easier to confirm the display in the lost pattern mode than in the case of displaying in the pattern (2).

FIG. 179 is a diagram showing an example of an effect for notifying that the chance up meter preparation display is displayed.

FIGS. 179 (A1) to 179 (A8) show a state in which the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is announced by the conversation notice. Since FIG. 179 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 179 (A2) shows that the conversation notice has started. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol.

After that, in FIG. 179 (A3), the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that urges the effect button 136 (chance button 136) to be pressed within the operation valid period, and is a button image 136a that imitates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation valid period. It is composed of a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time. At the timing shown in FIG. 179 (A3), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 179 (A3), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In this production example, the CUM preparation display MTY is more likely to be displayed when the conversation notice is given than when the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be reduced and displayed (for example, the display having the same size as that of FIG. 179 (A2) is still displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (larger or smaller) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. The size (larger or smaller) may be different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A. The operation validity period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started thereafter.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 179 (A4) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 179 (A5), the game is played. When a person presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136), as shown in FIG. 179 (A6), in the old man's conversation image CI2, the characters "standby !!" are displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image. May be done. As a result, it is announced that the CUM preparing display MTY will be displayed. The notice character display such as "standby !!" may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) may be displayed. If the operation validity period elapses without being operated, the characters "Standby !!" by the old man's conversation image CI2 may not be displayed. In this case, the CUM preparing display MTY is also not displayed. Alternatively, the CUM preparing display MTY may also be displayed. Further, even if the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136), the characters "Standby !!" are displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is also displayed. Good. Further, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, characters other than "standby !!" may be displayed or a notice may be given. Only when the characters "Standby !!" are displayed by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, the effect button 136 (chance button 13)
If 6) is not operated and the characters "Standby !!" are displayed even after the operation validity period has elapsed, and characters other than "Standby !!" are displayed or a notice is given by the old man's conversation image CI2, the operation is performed. It may be displayed only when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the valid period. In addition, the character display and notice of the old man's conversation image CI2 are displayed only when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, regardless of the character display or notice on the old man's conversation image CI2. Even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated and the operation validity period elapses, the character display and the notice of the grandfather's conversation image CI2 may be displayed. Good. This is applicable to any conversation notice described herein.

After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (A7), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, the first decorative symbol is easily visible, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed. Hold icon Display area Displayed so as to cover the entire HIS. After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (A8), the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 179 (A7) to 179 (A8) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 162 (A2) to 162 (A3), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 179 (B1) to 179 (B5) show that the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is announced by the effect display by the advance notice icon YI.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (B1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (B1), the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (B1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this production example, for example, the notice icon YI appears in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 120 to 147 and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (B2), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, and the display changes to the mode d in which the box is open. Notice display An animation in which the SH pops out is displayed. The notice display SH of Sabohani that appears here is a display that gives a notice that the CUM preparation display MTY will be displayed. Before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box opens, an effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattlingly) may be performed. Further, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not actually be opened.

In FIG. 179 (B3), the notice icon YI used disappears, and the notice display SH of Sabohani disappears.
Is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (B4), the notice display SH of Sabohani is used, the notice display SH of Sabohani is erased, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. To. After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (B5), the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 179 (B4) to 179 (B5) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 162 (A2) to 162 (A3), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 179 (C1) to 179 (C4) show a state in which the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is announced by the advance notice effect by the navigation character.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (C1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (C1), the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (C1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, the navigation character YM by the character of the lord is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. This navigator character YM performs various effects and notices according to the progress of the game.

FIG. 179 (C2) shows a state in which the navigation character notice is being performed by the navigation character YM. Specifically, when the navigation character notice starts, a balloon with the characters "Standby !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (C3), the navigation character YM is erased, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. The navigation character YM does not have to be erased. After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (C4), the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 179 (C3) to 179 (C4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 162 (A2) to 162 (A3), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 179 (D1) to 179 (D7) show a state in which the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is foretold by displaying the result of success in the mini game.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (D1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Also,
In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (D1), the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (D1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the mini game is started in the effect icon display area DIS. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179 (D1), a square mini-game display area MGD is formed in the effect icon display area DIS, and in this mini-game display area MGD, the title of the mini-game is "rock-paper-scissors". The characters "Confrontation" and the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are confronting each other. That is, it is shown that the mini-game of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation is started in the mini-game display area MGD.

After that, in FIG. 179 (D2), the characters "Ja-nken" are displayed, and it is notified that the result of the mini-game is derived.

In FIG. 179 (D3), the characters "pon" are displayed, and the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are each posing as rock-paper-scissors. Specifically, the character of the lord is issuing "choki", and the character of the swordsman is issuing "par". Therefore, the result of the lord's character defeating the swordsman's character is derived. Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (D4), in the mini-game display area MGD, the characters "Yoshimune victory" indicating that the character of the lord has won are displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 179 (D5), the characters are displayed. Along with the swordsman's character being erased, a balloon with the characters "Standby!" Is displayed near the character of the lord, foretelling that the CUM preparation display MTY will be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (D6), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. At this time, although the mini game display area MGD is in the displayed state, it may be erased before the flame effect EF101 is displayed, or at the timing when the flame effect EF101 is started to be displayed. It may be erased, or it may be erased after the flame effect EF101 is displayed. Further, the mini-game display area MGD may be displayed until the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (D7), the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 179 (D7) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A3), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 179 (E1) to 179 (E3) show how the result of failure of the mini game is displayed. Here, FIG. 179 (E1) is an effect following FIG. 179 (D2).

In FIG. 179 (E1), the character "pon" is displayed, and the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are each posing as rock-paper-scissors. In this production example, the character of the lord is "choki" and the character of the swordsman is "goo". Therefore, the result of the defeat of the lord's character to the swordsman's character is derived. Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (E2), in the mini-game display area MGD, the characters "Yoshimune defeat" indicating that the character of the lord was defeated are displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 179 (E3), the characters are displayed. The mini-game display area MGD is erased, and the CUM preparing display MTY is not displayed. Here, the flame effect EF101 is displayed, but the animation in which the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed may be performed. Further, even though the character of the lord is defeated, the flame effect EF101 may be displayed, and then the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed.

In the present embodiment, by performing these advance notice effects for notifying the appearance of the CUM preparing display MTY, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the appearance of the CUM preparing display MTY is not announced. It suggests that it is easy to be done.

FIG. 180 is a diagram showing another effect example for notifying that the chance-up meter preparing display is displayed.

FIGS. 180 (A1) to 180 (A6) show an example of a pending change animation. Here, since FIG. 180 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 180 (A2), No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). The icon IHI of 4 "Bomber" appears on the right edge of the screen, and the pending change animation starts. That is, the "bomber" icon IHI displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the hold change animation, while the "bomber" icon IHI flies from right to left, a bullet is fired (bombed) at the hold icon. The "bomber" icon IHI may pause before the target hold icon. In addition, this pause may be a pause of a ghost that disguises the target icon. Further, in this production example, the character "SP" is attached to the icon IHI of the "bomber", and when the display mode of the hold icon changes, the display mode of the hold icon after the change is a pre-reading notice of super reach. It is suggested that the display mode shows. In addition, when the hold change animation by the icon IHI of the "bomber" is performed, the bombing of the hold icon may be successful and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed without fail, or the bombing of the hold icon fails. The display mode of the hold icon may not change.

In FIG. 180 (A3), a white bullet icon is fired from the white bomber icon. That is, the "bomber" icon IHI is composed of a white bomber icon and a white bullet icon. The goal here is the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 180 (A4), the bullet icon overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. In FIG. 180 (A5), the bullet icon hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF112. Then, in FIG. 180 (A6), the effect image EF112 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of “SP” that pre-reads that the super reach will be performed. As a result, by pre-reading the advance notice that the super reach will be performed, the pre-reading notice is also indirectly given that the chance up meter CMT and / or the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Even when the super reach is performed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 displayed in the display mode of "SP", the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed. In this production example, by changing the display mode of the hold icon, the occurrence of super reach is announced in advance, and as a result, the display of the chance up meter CMT and the CUM preparation display MTY is also indirectly announced in advance. However, you may give a look-ahead notice of Super Reach by a hold icon or another kind of look-ahead notice, and give an indirect look-ahead notice about the display of the chance up meter CMT or CUM preparation display MTY. The change icon and other types of change notices are used to give notice of super reach in the running symbol change display, and to give indirect notice of the display of the chance up meter CMT and CUM preparation display MTY. May be good.

FIG. 180 (B1) shows a state of notifying that the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in the conversation notice. FIG. 180 (B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 179 (A2).

FIG. 180 (B1) shows how the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative pattern. In this production example, the characters "STANDBY" are displayed together with the character of Sabohani instead of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather. The conversation image Cish of Sabohani in which is displayed is displayed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image Cish of Sabohani, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CIsh of Sabohani or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 180 (B1), at least a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped by the conversation image CIsh of Sabohani, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In this production example, it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed by displaying the conversation image CI1 of the Sabohani including the Sabohani character constituting the CUM preparation display MTY. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be reduced and displayed (for example, the display having the same size as that of FIG. 179 (A2) is still displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (larger or smaller) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. The size (larger or smaller) may be different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A. Further, in this production example, when the conversation image Cish of Sabohani is displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed without fail, or the CUM preparation display MTY may not be displayed. May be good.

FIGS. 180 (C1) to 180 (C3) show a state in which the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is announced in the conversation notice, but the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed. Note that FIG. 180 (C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 179 (A2).

FIG. 180 (C1) shows how the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is displayed. In this production example, the old man's conversation image CI2 is displayed with a question mark attached to the character "standby" instead of the display of the production button 136 (chance button 136) a and the remaining time meter. It suggests that the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 180 (C2), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, the first decorative symbol is easily visible, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed. Hold icon Display area Displayed so as to cover the entire HIS. However, in this production example, after that, as shown in FIG. 180 (C3), the flame effect EF101 is erased, but the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed. That is, it is shown that the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed and the conversation notice of Gase is being performed. In addition, CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. In addition, this effect example can also be applied to the look-ahead notice, and the hold of the look-ahead notice target of Gase (as a result, the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, or the chance up meter CMT is not displayed) or the CUM preparation is in progress. Display MTY may be executed for each change up to the change of the look-ahead notice target hold.

FIGS. 180 (D1) to 180 (D2) show, for example, that, following FIG. 179 (A6), the timer advance notice display TM1 indicates that the timer advance notice is being prepared. Shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (D1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (D1), the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (D1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this production example, it is shown that an animation (frame-in animation) in which the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen is being performed.

After that, when the frame-in animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 180 (D2), the timer display is not displayed on the timer notice display TM1, the characters "STANDBY" are displayed, and the timer notice is started. The display is being performed. It should be noted that there may be a case where a notice is displayed that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed instead of the notice display of the start of the timer notice. After that, the timer notice display TM1 switches from the "STANDBY" display to the time display, and the timer notice is started. When a notice is given that "standby" is displayed by another notice display such as a conversation notice display, the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed without fail, or the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed. In some cases, a preparation display indicating that another effect is being prepared, such as a timer advance notice effect preparation display, may be displayed. This also applies to the production examples shown in FIGS. 180 (E1) to (E3) and 180 (F1) to (F3).

FIGS. 180 (E1) to 180 (E3) show that after the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed and the timer advance notice is started.

FIG. 180 (E1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A2), and shows how the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS.

After that, when the flame effect 101 is erased, as shown in FIGS. 180 (E2) to 180 (E3), the timer notice display TMY rises from below the hold icon display area HIS, and the timer notice display TMY rises from below. Shows how the hold icon display area HIS is lifted. At this time, the characters "STANDBY" are displayed on the timer notice display TMY, indicating that the start of the timer notice is suspended. The production examples shown in FIGS. 180 (E2) to 180 (E3) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 165 (E1) to (E2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 165 (E3) and later are performed. In this production example, the flame effect EF101 that announces the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is shown to announce the start of the timer advance notice.

FIGS. 180 (F1) to 180 (F3) show a state in which the chance button preparation display for notifying that the chance button effect is to be performed is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (F1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (F1), the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (F1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the light effect EF113 is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS and the button image display animation is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 180 (F2), the button image 136a appears on the back side of the light effect EF113, and then, as shown in FIG. 180 (F3), the light effect EF113 is erased and the effect is produced. The word "preparing" is displayed above the button 136 (chance button 136) a to give a notice that the chance button effect will be started (chance button effect notice). Since the operation validity period has not started, nothing happens even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. After the chance button effect notice is displayed, the chance button effect is started, and as a result of operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) in this chance button effect, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. May be good. Further, after the light effect EF113 is displayed, a display for notifying that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed may be performed.

FIG. 181 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a chance-up notice is given at a checkpoint not shown by the chance-up meter.

FIG. 181 (A1) to FIG. (A7) show, for example, following FIG. 162 (A11), in the production by the chance-up meter CMT, the chance-up notice (the sharp sword) is shown at the checkpoint not shown on the meter. It shows how the notice display) is performed. The production performed during the period from FIG. 181 (A1) to FIG. (A2) is shown in FIG. 170 (A6).
-Since it is the same as the effect shown in the figure (A10), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 181 (A3) shows that the Sabohani character SBH is heading from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2 and is approximately halfway between the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2. There is. At this time, the cutting edge of the sword held by the character of the lord is shining brilliantly, showing a sharp appearance. That is, it is shown that the chance-up notice (the chance-up notice of the sharp sword) is being performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 181 (A4), the effect EF114 is displayed at the place where the Sabohani character SBH is located in the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT, and the animation in which the fourth checkpoint CP4 is generated starts. It is shown that it is. The fourth checkpoint CP4 may be displayed without displaying the effect EF114. For example, the fourth checkpoint CP4 may be displayed by the fade-in animation in which the fourth checkpoint CP4 fades in. You may do it. Further, the entire chance-up meter CMT may be switched and displayed without displaying the increase of some checkpoints, and the fourth checkpoint CP4 may be displayed on the chance-up meter CMT after the switching. Further, the advance notification (notice) may be performed by displaying the fourth checkpoint CP4 or the like before the advance notice of the chance up of the sharp sword starts.

In FIG. 181 (A5), a balloon with the characters “Chance-up sharp sword” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, notifying that the chance-up notice has been given. It should be noted that the timing at which the display of the sword blade edge shining starts and the timing at which the balloon display of the Sabohani character SBH starts may be the same, or the timing of the Sabohani character SBH after the sword blade edge shining display starts. A balloon may be displayed, or a display in which the cutting edge of the sword shines may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is started. The Sabohani character SBH stops at the 4th checkpoint CP4 while the sword's cutting edge is shining, but it may not stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 181 (A6), the fourth checkpoint CP4 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. After that, as shown in FIG. 181 (A7), the Sabohani character SBH starts moving and heads toward the second checkpoint CP2. In this production example, the chance-up notice is given at the checkpoint not shown in the chance-up meter CMT, but the chance-up notice is given only at the checkpoint shown in the chance-up meter CMT. It may have been.

FIGS. 181 (B1) to 181 (B7) show another effect pattern in which a chance-up notice (a notice display of a sharp sword) is given at a checkpoint not shown on the meter in the effect by the chance-up meter CMT. Is shown. In addition, FIG. 181 (B1)
)-The effects shown in FIG. 181 (B3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 181 (A1) to (A3), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 181 (B4) shows that a balloon with the characters “Chance-up sharp sword” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify that the chance-up notice has been given. ing. In this production example, the notification that the chance-up notice has been given is given, but the checkpoint corresponding to the chance-up notice is not displayed. In the chance-up meter CMT, when the chance-up notice is given at a point other than the point where the checkpoint is indicated in advance, the balloon notifying the occurrence of the chance-up may not be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 181 (B5), after the balloon is erased, the Sabohani character SBH begins to progress toward the second checkpoint CP2, as shown in FIG. 181 (B6). In this production example, the checkpoint is not displayed, but the character "UP" is displayed at the position of the meter corresponding to the timing when the chance-up notice is given, and the reliability of the jackpot is improved. It suggests that. Here, the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The characters "UP" may not be displayed either. For example, in the chance-up meter CMT, only when a chance-up notice is generated at a timing corresponding to the checkpoint displayed on the meter part in advance. The character "UP" may be displayed at the position.

FIG. 181 (B7) shows how the Sabohani character SBH has reached the second checkpoint CP2. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (9) and later are performed.

FIG. 182 is a diagram showing stepwise another production example using the chance up meter.

FIG. 182 (A1) is another production example following FIG. 162 (A8). In the production example shown in FIG. 182 (A1), the display mode of the chance up meter is different from the production example shown in FIG. 162 (A9). Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMTa is configured in the shape of a green bar, and instead of the Sabohani character SBH, the current progress of the reach effect is roughly notified by the position of the marker MRKa. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRKa in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the traveling speed of the marker MRKa is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the effect, but it may be constant. Further, in this production example, unlike the chance up meter shown in FIG. 31 (2f), the marks of the display mode of plain white circles are displayed at the first checkpoint CP1a to the third checkpoint CP3a, respectively. As shown in FIG. 31 (2f), characters or symbols such as a question mark may be added to the mark and displayed. In this case, for example, by displaying the characters / symbols of "question mark", "!", "UP", the notice related to the chance up notice, and the characters such as the high probability state, the chance up notice is generated. It may suggest ease of use. In addition, notices such as "!", "Question mark", and "heat" are displayed in the mark to suggest that chance-up notices are likely to occur, or that chance-up notices are likely to occur. Along with the suggestion, the ease of a big hit may be announced. Further, the start point and the end point are indicated by the start end and the end point of the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa.

FIG. 182 (A2) shows how the marker MRKa has started moving from the starting point.

After that, FIG. 182 (A3) shows how the marker MRKa has reached the first checkpoint CP1a. At this time, the marker MRKa is stopped and displayed at the first checkpoint CP1a. Then, as shown in FIG. 182 (A4), the boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. In addition, the mark of the first checkpoint CP1a is erased. The mark of the first checkpoint CP1a may be erased at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the first checkpoint CP1a, or the mark may be erased before the marker MRKa reaches the first checkpoint CP1a. Then, the mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the first checkpoint CP1a. Further, the mark may be erased before the boy character BOY appears, the mark may be erased at the timing when the boy character BOY appears, or the mark may be erased after the boy character BOY appears. May be done.

When the boy character BOY appears, as shown in FIG. 182 (A5), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passed !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRKa, and a chance up notice has been given. Is being notified. As shown in FIGS. 182 (A5) to 182 (A6), the marker MRKa stands by at the first checkpoint CP1a at least while the boy character BOY appears and the balloon is displayed.

After that, FIGS. 182 (A7) to 182 (A8) show that the marker MRKa has started to move. At this time, instead of displaying the mark at the first checkpoint CP1a, the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. The Boy character BOY is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A8).

After that, when the marker MRKa reaches the second checkpoint CP2a at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A9), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed in FIG. 182 (A10), and the button effect is started. .. At this time, the marker MRKa is stopped and displayed at the second checkpoint CP2a. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A10), the operation validity period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, any effect is performed. I can't. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started, and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 182 (A11) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A12), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed. Then, as shown in FIG. 182 (A13), the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed. That is, in this production example, the gold cut-in image CI3 that may occur at the second checkpoint CP2a is not displayed, and the chance-up notice does not occur.

Then, as shown in FIG. 182 (A13), the mark of the second checkpoint CP2a is erased, but the character "UP" is not displayed in the gauge portion. Here, a display notifying that the chance-up notice has not occurred may or may not be displayed. The mark of the second checkpoint CP2a may be erased at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the second checkpoint CP2a, or the mark may be erased before the marker MRKa reaches the second checkpoint CP2a. Then, the mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the second checkpoint CP2a. Further, the mark may be erased before the button image 136a is displayed, the mark may be erased at the timing when the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark is erased after the button image 136a is displayed. You may. Further, the mark may be erased at the timing when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the mark may be erased after the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. Further, the mark may be erased before the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, the mark may be erased at the timing when the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, or the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed. After that, the mark may be erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (A14), the marker MRKa starts moving from the second checkpoint CP2a, and as shown in FIG. 182 (A15), when the marker MRKa reaches the third checkpoint CP3a, FIG. In 182 (A16), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136V as a chance-up notice, and it is notified that the notice by the button effect has started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts, the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (A17), in the chance up meter CMTa, the marker MRKa has started to move and is located in front of the final point. Further, the remaining time display meter MT shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. The marker MRKa may be stopped at the third checkpoint CP3a until the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation valid period elapses. In this production example, since the lever image 136Va as a chance-up notice was not displayed, the mark is erased at the third checkpoint CP3a in the chance-up meter CMTa, and the character "UP" is not displayed in the gauge part. ..

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A18), the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated by the player, but the various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) are not operated, and FIG. As shown in 182 (A19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol, and the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. Is notified. Further, the chance up meter CMTa shows that the marker MRKa has reached the final point GP. The mark of the third checkpoint CP3a may be erased at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the third checkpoint CP3a, or the mark may be erased before the marker MRKa reaches the third checkpoint CP3a. Then, the mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the third checkpoint CP3a. Further, the mark may be erased before the button image 136a is displayed, the mark may be erased at the timing when the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark is erased after the button image 136a is displayed. You may. Further, the mark may be erased at the timing when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the mark may be erased after the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. Further, the mark may be erased before the middle symbol is displayed, the mark may be erased at the timing when the middle symbol is displayed, or the mark may be erased after the middle symbol is displayed. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (A20), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are temporarily displayed lighter than the normal darkness. In addition, the figure shows the scene where the lord collapsed. In FIG. 182 (A21), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed again in normal darkness. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (B4) to 162 (B8) are performed. In this production example, the chance-up notice does not occur at the third checkpoint CP3a, the button image 136a is displayed, and the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, but the result of the loss is derived. However, in this effect example, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated to operate various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23), and the result of the big hit is derived. There may be cases. Further, if the chance-up notice does not occur at the third checkpoint CP3a, it may indicate that the loss has been confirmed.

FIGS. 182 (B1) to 182 (B6) show another effect pattern that continues from FIG. 182 (A1). The effect shown in FIG. 182 (B1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 182 (A2), and the effect shown in FIG. 182 (B2) is performed after the effect shown in FIG. 182 (B1) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 182 (A2) to 182 (A9) are performed before the production.

FIG. 182 (B2) shows that the marker MRKa has reached the second checkpoint CP2a and the button effect has been started. Further, in this production example, the part corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2a of the gauge part of the chance up meter CMTa shows the "super" part of the display of the characters "super hot !!!". It is shown. That is, in this production example, in the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMTa, in addition to the display of "UP" indicating that the chance-up notice has been performed, the display of the fluctuation notice (the character "super hot !!!"). ) May be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 182 (A9) to 182 (A13) are performed. During this time, the characters "Gekiatsu !!!" are continuously displayed on the gauge part of the chance up meter CMTa, and as the gauge changes from green to white as the marker MRKa progresses, "Gekiatsu !!" The characters "!" Appear gradually. After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (B3), the characters "super hot !!!" come to appear completely. By seeing this, the player may be able to further improve the expectation of becoming a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A19) to 171 (A23) are performed. Needless to say, at this time, the chance-up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 182 (B3) is displayed instead of the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 171 (A19). In addition, when the chance-up notice occurs in FIG. 171 (B2), a part or all of the characters of "super hot !!!" are overlapped by the display of "UP" indicating that the chance-up notice has been given. It may have been done.

Then, when the effect lever 136V is operated by the player in the lever effect, as shown in FIG. 182 (B4), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are activated. , The light guide plate IL emits light, and the effect image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is notified that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMTa is hidden, but may be displayed.

After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H each return to their initial positions, and the effect image fades out on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. To do. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. The chance up meter CMT also fades in with the duel scene animation display fade-in, but the chance up meter CMT may be redisplayed after the duel scene animation display fade-in is completed. .. It should be noted that this operation is performed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 17 (38) to 17 (44) and as described above.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 182 (B5), it is shown that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and restarted. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the swordsman who plays the enemy role shows an expression of faint in agony, and it seems that he is about to lose. Further, in the chance up meter CMTa, the marker MRKa has reached the final point. Further, in this production example, since the chance-up notice that the lever image 136Va is displayed at the third checkpoint CP3a has occurred, the characters "UP" are displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. In this production example, it is shown that the entire image displayed on the gauge portion of the marker MRKa can be visually recognized for the first time at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (B5). As shown in FIG. 182 (B5), the display in the gauge portion of the marker MRKa may be erased at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene is restarted, or the chance up meter CMTa itself may be erased. This also applies when the result of loss is derived.

After that, in FIG. 182 (B6), the main character, the lord, defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "Decoration 7" is displayed in the middle pattern, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A13) to 162 (A15) are performed.

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing another pattern of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIGS. 183 (A1) to (A6) show another effect pattern of the effects shown in FIGS. 182 (B1) to (B6).

FIG. 183 (A1) shows that the marker MRKa has started moving from the starting point. In this production example, unlike the production example shown in FIG. 182 (B1), it is shown that the advanced portion of the marker MRKa in the gauge portion changes from green to white instead of rainbow color. This rainbow-colored display is a notice display for confirming the jackpot, and when the gauge portion changes to rainbow-color, it is notified that the jackpot is confirmed. In this production example, the advanced part of the marker MRKa in the gauge has changed from green to rainbow color, but it may change to another color, and the reliability of the jackpot changes depending on the changing color. You may try to do it. For example, the advanced portion of the marker MRKa may be prevented from changing from green to green so that the jackpot symbol mode can be more easily displayed than when it changes to white, or it changes from green to red or gold. You may. Further, the pattern may appear in the advanced portion of the marker MRKa. Further, in this production example, the jackpot notice is given in the display mode of the advanced portion of the marker MRKa, but for example, the notice regarding the chance-up notice is given, such as suggesting the ease of occurrence of the chance-up notice and the number of occurrences. May be done. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 183 (A2) to (A6) are performed. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 183 (A2) to 183 (A6), the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRKa is different, and the characters "super hot !!!" are displayed at the second checkpoint CP2a. Since it is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 182 (B2) to 182 (B6) except that it is not shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 183 (B1) to 183 (B16) show another example of the effect shown in FIGS. 162 (A1) to 162 (A15), and the timing at which the chance-up notice occurs in the chance-up meter CMTc. Although it is not specified, it shows that the number of occurrences is notified.

The effect example shown in FIG. 183 (B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A3). In this production example, the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTYa is different from the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3), and the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 183 (B1) is shown in FIG. 162 (A3). The CUM in preparation display MTY shown in the above is extended above, and the gauge is also arranged above, and an information display area capable of displaying character information is formed below. In this information display area, the number of times the chance-up notice occurs or the big hit notice may be given. After that, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 162 (A3) to 162 (A7) are performed.

FIG. 183 (B2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 162 (A8). The effect shown in FIG. 183 (B2) is the same as that of FIG. 162 (A8) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYa is different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 183 (B3) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc. In this production example, the checkpoint is not displayed on the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMTc, and it is difficult to recognize the timing at which the chance-up notice occurs and the number of times it may occur. Further, the chance up meter CMTc also extends upward like the CUM preparation display MTYa, and the gauge is also arranged above, and an information display area is formed below the gauge.

After that, as shown in FIG. 183 (B4), the characters "three more places" are displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, and the timing of the chance up notice is not clear, but the chance up is three times. It has been announced that a notice may be given. Further, FIG. 183 (B4) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. This balloon is then erased, as shown in FIG. 183 (B5).

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (B6), the boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that the chance-up notice is being given due to the appearance of Boy's character BOY.

Then, in FIG. 183 (B7), a balloon with the characters “Chance up BOY passed !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, notifying that the chance up notice has been given. That is, the player may understand that this timing is the first checkpoint. Further, in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc, the display is changed to the characters "two more places", and it is notified that the chance-up notice may occur twice more. The display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed before the appearance of the boy character BOY, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area at the timing when the boy character BOY appears. The display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed after the appearance of the Boy character BOY. Further, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed before the balloon display of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed, or the information is displayed at the timing when the balloon display of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed. The display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the area may be changed, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed after the balloon display of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed.

After that, in FIG. 183 (B8), the first checkpoint CP1 marked in red is displayed at the position corresponding to the timing when the chance-up notice occurs, and the reliability of the jackpot is improved by the appearance of the notice. The word "UP" indicating that is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the chance-up notice is shown. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is partially overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed.

FIG. 183 (B9) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 171 (A19). In this production example, although not particularly shown, the gold cut-in image CI3, which is the second chance-up notice, is displayed as described above, and the position corresponding to the timing at which the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. The characters of the second checkpoint CP2 and "UP" marked in red are displayed, and the display of the number of chance-up notices in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc has also been changed to "one more place". ing.

After that, in FIG. 183 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the characters "chance up lever" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and the chance up notice by the lever effect is started. I am informing you that. At this time, in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice is changed to "0 more places", and it is notified that there is no possibility of further chance-up notices occurring. There is. In addition, a chance-up notice may occur after "0 more places" is displayed. Further, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed before the lever image 136Va is displayed, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area at the timing when the lever image 136Va is displayed. The display may be changed, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed after the lever image 136Va is displayed.

After that, in FIG. 183 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and the lever effect is started. At this time, the third checkpoint CP3 marked in red is displayed at the position corresponding to the timing when the chance-up notice occurs, and "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Is displayed above it, showing the history of the chance-up notice. At this time, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice of "0 more places" displayed in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc is erased. It should be noted that the display may be continued without erasing the display of "0 more places". Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 183 (B11), the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V has not yet started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V starts, and the player can accept the operation of the effect lever 136V.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 183 (B12) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 183 (B13), the player can see the player. When the effect lever 136V is operated, as shown in FIG. 183 (B14), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are activated, and the light guide plate IL is emitted. An effect image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is notified that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMTc is hidden, but may be displayed.

After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H each return to their initial positions, and the effect image fades out on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. To do. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. This operation is performed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 17 (38) to 17 (44) and as described above.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (B15), it is shown that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and restarted. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the swordsman who plays the enemy role shows an expression of faint in agony, and it seems that he is about to lose. Further, in the chance up meter CMTc, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, and the placard shows the letter "V" indicating that it is a big hit. Also, in the information display area, "Congratulations !!" is displayed, congratulating the derivation of the jackpot. It is not necessary to display "Congratulations !!". In addition, when the result of the loss is derived, for example, a character such as "sorry" may be displayed to comfort the player, or no display may be made in the information display area. You may. Further, for example, in the case of performing the revival effect as shown in FIGS. 177 (C1) to 177 (C6), there is a possibility that the revival effect is performed by displaying "!!!!!" in the information display area. It may be suggested that there is.

After that, in FIG. 183 (B16), the main character, the lord, defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "Decoration 7" is displayed in the middle pattern, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A13) to 162 (A15) are performed.

FIG. 184 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 183.

FIGS. 184 (A1) to 184 (A3) show an effect of notifying the number of occurrences of a chance-up notice in the information display area in the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIGS. 183 (B1) to (B2). An example is shown. Specifically, in the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 184 (A1), the characters "three more places" are displayed in the information display area provided below the gauge portion, and the chance up meter CMTc is used. It has been informed that there is a possibility that the chance-up notice may occur three times in the production. It should be noted that the number of times the information is notified in the information display area and the number of times the chance-up notice occurs may always match, or may or may not match. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 184 (A2) to (A3) are performed. The effect performed during the period shown in FIGS. 184 (A1) to 184 (A3) is the same as that shown in FIGS. 162 (A3) to 162 (A8), except that the display mode of the chance up meter CMTc is different. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

According to this production example, for example, when the timing at which the chance-up notice occurs is fixed for each super reach, it may be possible to infer the type of super reach to be developed. Further, for example, when the number of times the chance-up notice is generated is configured to be displayed in a different number depending on the reliability of the jackpot, it is possible to estimate the reliability of the jackpot against the symbol variation in which super reach occurs. You may be able to do it.

The effect shown in FIG. 184 (B1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 183 (B4). In FIG. 184 (B1), in addition to displaying the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc, checkpoints CP1 to CP3 are displayed to notify the occurrence timing of the chance-up notice. There is. In this way, part or all of the timing at which the chance-up notice occurs may be notified by the chance-up meter CMTc, and the number of times the chance-up notice occurs may be notified. Instead of the display shown in FIG. 183 (B4), the display as shown in FIG. 184 (B1) may be performed.

FIGS. 184 (C1) to 184 (C4) do not display the number of times the chance-up notice has occurred in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc, and foretell that the chance-up notice may occur. It shows the situation. In this case, the number of times the chance-up notice has occurred may be displayed.

FIG. 184 (C1) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started moving. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. This balloon is then erased, as shown in FIG. 184 (C2). Note that this effect example is different from the effects shown in FIGS. 183 (B4) to (B5), and the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice is not displayed in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc.

In FIG. 184 (C3), in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc, a question mark is displayed together with "BOY is about to appear", and the boy character COY is displayed at the timing corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1. We are informing you that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice will occur due to the appearance of. That is, in this production example, although the timing is not clear, it is shown that a chance-up notice may occur. It should be noted that the content of the chance-up notice that occurs in particular may not be notified, and only the possibility that the chance-up notice may occur may be notified.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 184 (C4), the boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that the chance-up notice is being given due to the appearance of Boy's character BOY. Even if "BOY is about to appear" is displayed in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc, the boy character BOY may not be displayed and the chance-up notice may not occur. May be good. In addition, at the timing when the Boy's character BOY is displayed, it may be notified that a chance-up notice of a different type from the chance-up notice due to the appearance of the Boy's character BOY may occur. In that case, for example, the jackpot may be confirmed, or the chance-up notice may not occur and the notice may be given.

In FIG. 184 (C5), a balloon with the characters “Chance up BOY passed !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to notify that the chance up notice has been given. At this time, the characters "BOY is about to appear" in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc are erased. The display in the information display area may be erased before the boy character BOY is displayed, may be erased at the timing when the boy character BOY is displayed, or the boy character BOY is displayed. It may be erased afterwards. Further, the display in the information display area may be deleted before the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed, may be deleted at the timing when the balloon is displayed, or may be deleted after the balloon is displayed. May be done. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 183 (B8), the first checkpoint CP1 may be displayed or “UP” may be displayed, and the history of the occurrence of the chance-up notice may be displayed. In addition, a part or all of the timing at which the chance-up notice occurs is notified by the chance-up meter CMTc, and before the chance-up notice corresponding to the timing notified by the chance-up meter CMTc is performed, this production example As described above, in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc, a display for notifying that a chance-up notice such as "BOY is about to appear" may be performed. That is, when the checkpoint is displayed, "BOY is about to appear" may be displayed before the timing when the character BOY of Boy is displayed.

FIGS. 184 (D1) to FIG. 184 (D5) are different production patterns of the production following FIG. 183 (B8), and notify that the number of times the chance-up notice is generated in the production by the chance-up meter CMTc increases. It shows how the production is being performed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 184 (D1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 183 (B8), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, FIG. 184 (D2) shows that an effect of generating smoke (smoke effect EF115) is displayed in front of the character SBH of Sabohani traveling toward the final point GP.

After that, when the smoke effect EF115 is erased, the character CHM of Princess Chibi appears as shown in FIG. 184 (D3), and as shown in FIG. 184 (D4), the character CHM of Princess Chibi appears in the vicinity of the character CHM of Princess Chibi. A balloon with the characters "1UP!" Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of times the chance-up notice is generated may increase by one. While the effect of increasing the number of chance-up notices generated by the character CHM of Princess Chibi is being performed, the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed as stopped, but the number of times the notice of chance-up is generated by the character CHM of Princess Chibi. It may be progressing while the effect of increasing the number is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (D5), when the character CHM of Princess Chibi is erased, the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice displayed in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc is displayed in "two more places". "Is changed to" 3 more places ", and it is notified that there is a possibility that the chance-up notice will occur three more times. In addition, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated before the balloon of "1UP!" Of the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated at the timing when the balloon is displayed. The display may be updated, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated after the balloon is displayed. In addition, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated before the character CHM of Princess Chibi is deleted, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated at the timing when the character CHM of Princess Chibi is deleted. Alternatively, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated after the character CHM of Princess Chibi is deleted. In addition, Sabohani's character SBH was stopped and displayed while the effect of increasing the number of chance-up notices generated by Chibihime's character CHM was being performed. Since the position of is in front and is delayed, after that, the character SBH of Sabohani accelerates and shows how it is in a hurry, and the character SBH of Sabohani is warped to respond to the actual progress of super reach. The display position of the Sabohani character SBH may be adjusted to match the display position of the Sabohani character SBH, or the display position of the Sabohani character SBH may not be aligned.

In this production example, the character CHM of Princess Chibi, who only performs the production related to the chance-up meter CMTc, is introduced to increase the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice, but other effects that make up the chance-up meter CMTc are performed. An element (for example, Sabohani's character SBH) may be used to increase the number of chance-up notices in the same manner as the rank-up effect described above. Further, the effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be performed by other elements that do not constitute the chance-up meter CMTc. Alternatively, the number of chance-up notices may be increased by the effect of the notice icon YI, or the number of chance-up notices may be increased depending on the result of the mini-game. The number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be increased by the effect using the navigation character YM shown in C1). In addition, the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice that increases may be not limited to one, but may be two or more. For example, "0UP!" Is displayed, and the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice does not increase. It may be done. This is also applicable when chance points are displayed.

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing another effect pattern of the effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 183.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (A1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (A1), the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. In addition, in FIG. 185 (A1), the CUM preparing display MTYa shown in FIG. 183 (B1) is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the hold icon display area HIS, and it is considered difficult to see. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (A1), there is one hold of the special figure 1, and “1” and “0” are displayed in the second hold number display. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is No. 119 (a) in FIG. It is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this production example, for example, the notice icon YI appears in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 120 to 147 and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. Further, in this effect example, the characters "meter x 1" are displayed in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa, and it is foretold that the effect using the chance-up meter CMTc will be performed once. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that the display in which the number of stocks of the meter is displayed in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa functions as the preparation display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (A2), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, the display changes to the mode d in which the box is open, and the rank is raised from the inside of the box. An animation is displayed in which the notice display of "UP" is displayed. The notice display of "UP" that appears here is a display that announces an increase in the number of developments of the production using the chance up meter CMTc. Before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box opens, an effect of notifying the opening of the box in advance (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattlingly) may be performed. Further, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not actually be opened.

In FIG. 185 (A3), the notice icon YI used disappears, and the notice display of “UP” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 185 (A4), the promotion animation using the notice display of "UP" is started. In FIG. 185 (A4), after the notice display of "UP" is changed to the light ball EF116 in the right symbol display area 208c, it flies toward the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa, and is displayed in the information display area. The state of hitting the part of "1" indicating the number of times in "meter x 1" is shown. At this time, the entire CUM preparation display MTYa may be in a mode that is difficult to see. At this time, the portion "1" in the "meter x 1" is considered to be difficult to see. In this production example, the number of developments of the production using the chance up meter CMTc may be increased without the promotion animation being performed, or the number of developments of the production using the chance up meter CMTc after the promotion animation is performed. May increase, or the number of developments of the production using the chance up meter CMTc may increase without the promotion animation being performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 185 (A5), the display of "meter x 1" in the information display area becomes "meter x 2", and the effect using the chance-up meter CMTc is developed once and can be performed twice. It is notified that there is sex. After that, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 162 (A3) to 162 (A7) are performed.

The effect shown in FIG. 185 (A6) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 183 (B2), and the contents of the effect are the same except that the display in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is different. Omit.

FIG. 185 (A7) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc. In this production example, CUM preparation display MTY
Even if a is switched to the chance up meter CMTc, the number of developments of the effect using the chance up meter CMTc is still displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc. Further, in FIG. 185 (A7), at the timing when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc, the display of "meter x 2" in the information display area becomes "meter x 1", and the chance up meter CMTc is displayed. It is shown that the first effect used has started to be executed. The display of "meter x 2" in the information display area may be switched to "meter x 1" before the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc, or the chance is increased from the CUM preparation display MTYa. After the display is switched to the meter CMTc, the display of "meter x 2" in the information display area may be switched to "meter x 1". Further, in this effect example, the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are displayed as in the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A9), and the number of times the chance-up notice is displayed and the timing at which they are displayed are shown. ing.

FIG. 185 (A8) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. The balloon "START !!" may not be displayed. In addition, "START !!" may or may not be displayed.

After that, in FIG. 185 (A9), the display of the placard at the final point GP is displayed as a "question mark", and when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the effect using the chance up meter CMTc can be developed. It suggests that there is sex. After that, for example, an effect similar to the effect shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (16) is performed.

After that, in FIG. 185 (A10), the same effect as in FIG. 29 (17) is performed. The display of the placard at the final point GP on the chance up meter CMTc is still the display of the "question mark".

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (A11), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT were displayed instead of the lever image 136V, and the lever effect as a notice of chance up was not started. The situation is shown. Therefore, the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 185 (A10) to (A12), the Sabohani character SBH passes through the third checkpoint CP3 as it is, and the third checkpoint. No marking or "UP" characters are displayed in CP3. At the timing shown in FIG. 185 (A11), the operation validity period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) has not yet started. The operation validity period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started after that, and the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) by the player can be accepted.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 185 (A12) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMTc, the character SBH of Sabohani is located in front of the final point GP.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (A13) within the operation valid period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Along with the words "Did you remove it ..." from the character of the lord and the swordsman who played the role of the enemy, the appearance that the victory or defeat is not decided is displayed. Further, in the chance up meter CMTc, the character "development" is displayed on the placard at the final point GP, and it is notified that the reach effect will be developed. Along with this, the chance up meter CM
It is suggested that the production by Tc will be developed and the second production will be started.

After that, after the cut-in image CI4 is displayed by the character of the lord shown in FIG. 185 (A15), as shown in FIG. 185 (A16), the production that the panda character appears as a helper in the swordsman reach. Is started. In addition, the chance-up meter CMTc shows that the Sabohani character SBH rides on a flying carpet and heads toward the starting point SP. At this time, the effect of the chance-up meter CMTc has been developed, and the display of "meter x 1" in the information display area has changed to "meter x 0", assuming that the second effect has been performed. The display in the information display area may change before the cut-in image CI4 is displayed, or the display in the information display area may change at the timing when the cut-in image CI4 is displayed, or the cut-in may be changed. The display in the information display area may change after the image CI4 is displayed. In addition, the display in the information display area may change before the effect that the panda character appears as a helper starts, or the information display area may change at the timing when the effect that the panda character appears as a helper starts. The display in the information display area may change after the effect that the panda character appears as a helper is started. Further, the display of "meter x 1" may be erased without changing the display to "meter x 0".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 185 (A16) to (A18), on the way to the starting point SP, the Sabohani character SBH is displayed to change the chance up meter CMTc while being overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH. Do. Therefore, due to the movement of the Sabohani character SBH, for example, as shown in FIG. 185 (A17), a part of the changed chance up meter CMT appears and the sixth checkpoint CP6 appears, and FIG. 185 (A18). As shown in, the fifth checkpoint CP5 appears.

FIG. 185 (A18) shows that the Sabohani character SBH is located again at the starting point SP. At this time, in the chance up meter CMTc, the display state before the change of the 5th checkpoint CP5 and the 6th checkpoint CP6 (the state where the red marking is not attached and the character "UP" is not displayed). It has become. Then, in the chance up meter CMTc, the movement of the Sabohani character SBH is started.

After that, FIG. 185 (A19) shows how it has developed into an SP swordsman reach. The SP swordsman reach is a reach in which the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 185 (A19), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach in that the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other, but he follows the panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in FIG. 185 (A19), a chance-up notice showing that the Copanda cheering party KPD48 composed of three Copanda characters is cheering at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the fifth checkpoint CP5. Is being carried out, and it is informed that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach jackpot has increased dramatically. The Copanda cheering party KPD48 may or may not appear in the SP swordsman reach. After that, for example, the effect is performed in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 30 (31b) to (34b), and thereafter, when the effect lever 136V is operated, for example, FIGS. The effect is performed as shown in FIG. (28) as described above, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. In addition, it may be notified that it will be lost.

In this production example, a production that increases the number of developments of the production using the chance-up meter CMTc is performed by an element different from the components of the CUM preparation display MTYa and the chance-up meter CMTc, but the CUM is being prepared. Display MTYa and chance up meter CMTc
(For example, the character SBH of Sabohani) may be used to perform an effect of increasing the number of developments of the effect using the chance-up meter CMTc. Alternatively, the number of times the chance-up meter is displayed may be stocked and displayed. Further, in this production example, the number of times the chance up meter CMTc is displayed corresponds to the number of times the super reach develops, but the chance up meter CMTc is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, or the super reach is displayed. It can also be applied when there are a plurality of scenes in which the chance up meter CMTc is started to be displayed, such as being displayed when shifting to. In addition, when a plurality of executions of the effect by the chance up meter are stocked, there may be cases where all of them are used or only a part of them is used, or when a plurality of executions of the effects by the chance up meter are stocked. In addition, it may be configured to be used in its entirety.

FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a look-ahead notice using the chance-up meter preparing display.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (A1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (A1), the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 186 (A2) to 186 (A5) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 186 (A2) to (A5) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 163 (C2) to (C5), except that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is different. The explanation is omitted. As shown in FIGS. 163 (D4) to 163 (D5), the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed during the temporary stop display and stop display of the symbol, and the temporary stop display and stop of the symbol may be displayed. There may be cases where the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed and cases where it is not displayed during the display. This also applies to the cases shown in FIGS. 186 (A10) to (A11). This is also applicable to any of the embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 186 (A6), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) arranged in the first stage hs1 is changed to the change icon display area CIS. The second hold icon h12 arranged on the second stage hs2 moves to the first stage hs1 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 186 (A7) to 186 (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 186 (A7) to (A8) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 163 (C6) to (C7), except that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is different. The explanation is omitted.

After that, in FIG. 186 (A9), the light effect EF117 is displayed at a position corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2, and a state in which the checkpoint appearance animation is performed is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 186 (A10), the light effect EF117 disappears and the second checkpoint CP2 appears. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that a checkpoint for notifying the timing when the chance-up notice occurs is displayed during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. In this production example, only some of the checkpoints (second checkpoint CP2) displayed on the chance-up meter CMT are displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY, but the chance-up meter is displayed. All checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3) among the checkpoints displayed on the CMT may be displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY. Further, in this effect example, a checkpoint appears using a component (gauge portion) of the CUM preparing display MTY, but an element other than the component of the CUM preparing display MTY (for example, described above). Checkpoints may appear by directing using the notice item YI, mini-game, timer notice, etc.

After that, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 186 (A11), it is confirmed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 4-Decoration 1". Is displayed. At this time, the variable icon is deleted. Further, in this effect example, the CUM preparing display MTY is hidden while the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, but the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed while the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. You may.

After that, the hold of the special figure 1 (the first hold) is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and the procedure shown in FIG. After the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed again as shown in FIG. 186 (A12). At this time, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in the display mode in the previous symbol variation display, that is, in the mode in which the second checkpoint CP2 is displayed. After that, for example, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 162 (A4) to 162 (A7) is performed, and then the effect shown in FIG. 186 (A13) is performed. The effect shown in FIG. 186 (A13) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A8) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 186 (A14) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the first checkpoint CP1 and the third checkpoint CP3, which were hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY, appear. It should be noted that the checkpoint (second checkpoint CP2) that has already appeared in the CUM preparation display MTY may also be produced to newly appear at this timing. Before the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the checkpoint hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY may appear, or the chance is increased from the CUM preparation display MTY. The checkpoint that was hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY may appear at the timing when the display is switched to the meter CMT, or the CUM after the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. Checkpoints that were hidden in the preparation display MTY may appear. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 186 (A15) to 186 (A16) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 186 (A15) to 186 (A16) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 162 (A10) to (A11), the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this effect example, the continuous notice that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed is performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, and the CUM preparation display MTY is performed during the execution of the continuous notice by the CUM preparation display MTY. However, the CUM preparation display MTY is not continuously announced by the CUM preparation display MTY, and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed only in the running symbol variation display. May be good. In this case, during the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, an effect in which a checkpoint appears in the CUM preparation display MTY may be performed as described above. Further, in addition to the effect of appearing the checkpoint in the CUM preparation display MTY, the effect of erasing the appearing checkpoint may be performed. In addition, in the production where the checkpoint appears, the chance-up notice corresponding to the appearing checkpoint may always be given, or when the chance-up notice corresponding to the appearing checkpoint is not given, the production is performed. There may be. Also, all checkpoints may appear. This applies to the production examples shown in FIG. 165 (F1) and the production examples shown in FIGS. 166 (A1) to (A3), (B1), (C1), and (D1), respectively. Is also applicable.

FIG. 187 is a diagram illustrating another display pattern of the chance up meter.

FIGS. 187 (A1) to 187 (A15) are another production examples following FIG. 162 (A7), in which the marker MRKb is displayed as a cursor in addition to the Sabohani character SBH on the chance-up meter CMT. Is shown.

FIG. 187 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A7), and shows a transition to a super reach effect. In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen.

After that, FIG. 187 (A2) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, in addition to the Sabohani character SBH as a cursor, a marker MRKb composed of an inverted triangle is also displayed at the foot of the Sabohani character SBH. That is, it is shown that the progress of super reach is displayed by two cursors. Although a part of the Sabohani character SBH overlaps with the marker MRKb, it may be displayed at a position where the marker MRKb does not overlap with the Sabohani character SBH (for example, below the gauge). In this production example, the marker MRKb is moving in synchronization with the Sabohani character SBH. After that, in the period shown in FIGS. 187 (A2) to (A15), for example, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (26) is performed. It should be noted that the effects performed during the period shown in FIGS. 187 (A2) to 187 (A15) are shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (26) except that the marker MRKb is displayed on the chance up meter CMT. Since it is the same as, the description is omitted.

In this production example, the marker MRKb and the Sabohani character SBH are moving in synchronization. For example, an animation in which the Sabohani character SBH waits at a checkpoint during the execution of the button effect or the lever effect (for example, While an animation showing a state of not progressing, such as stepping on the foot, is being performed, the marker MRKb may be made to progress, and there may be a period in which the marker MRKb and the Sabohani character SBH do not move in synchronization. Alternatively, one of the marker MRKb and the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed at a position corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect, and the other may be displayed at a position not corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect. Further, the marker MRKb may be displayed at a position corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani may warp to the checkpoint and notify the occurrence of the chance-up notice corresponding to the warped checkpoint. .. In addition, when a chance-up notice does not occur at a certain checkpoint, the Sabohani character SBH then warps to the checkpoint at the position corresponding to the chance-up notice that did not occur, and corresponds to the checkpoint. It may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot has increased by assuming that the chance-up notice has occurred. Further, in this production example, an example in which a big hit occurs has been described, but the marker MRKb can be displayed in the same manner in the case of a loss. In this case, for example, the revival effect may start without reaching the marker MRKb and / or the character SBH final point GP of Sabohani. In this production example, the Sabohani character SBH is displayed as the CUM preparation display MTY and the marker MRK is not displayed, but the marker MRK is displayed while the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed and the Sabohani character. The SBH may not be displayed, and the Sabohani character SBH and the marker MRK may be displayed during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. Further, (1) a pattern in which only the Sabohani character SBH is displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY, (2) a pattern in which only the marker MRK is displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY, and (3) a pattern in which only the marker MRK is displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY. In the case where there is a pattern in which both the character SBH and the marker MRK are displayed, there may be a case of (1), a case of (2), or a case of (3). May be good. Further, there may be a case of (1) or a case of (3). Further, there may be a case of (1) or a case of (2).

FIGS. 187 (B1) to 187 (B11) show another effect pattern following FIG. 167 (A7).

FIGS. 187 (B1) to 187 (B2) show, for example, the production following FIG. 162 (A7), and show the transition to the super reach production. In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen.

After that, FIG. 187 (B3) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the gauge configuration in the chance-up meter CMT is different from that shown in FIG. 162 (A9). Specifically, the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 187 (B3) displays only one checkpoint (second checkpoint CP2), and the display mode of the final point GPa is also different. That is, in this production example, the final point GPa does not correspond to the timing at which the result of the symbol variation display is derived, and the production by the chance up meter CMT starts and ends in the middle of the super reach production. There is. In other words, in this production example, it can be said that an example in which the production by the chance-up meter CMT that notifies the timing at which the chance-up notice is performed only for a certain period during the super reach production is shown.

FIG. 187 (B4) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started moving. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has started. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the production by the chance up meter CMT is performed during the period from the start to the end of the button production. In this production example, the period from the start point SP to the second checkpoint CP2 corresponds to the operation valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 136 (chance button 136). Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (B4), the operation valid period has not yet started, and the operation valid period starts after that.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 187 (B5) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, the chance-up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH is moving to a position corresponding to the time from the start of the operation validity period.

After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (B6), as shown in FIG. 187 (B7), the gold shown in FIG. 29 (13) is described above. The cut-in image CI3 is displayed. At this time, the Sabohani character SBH accelerates and moves to the second checkpoint CP2 regardless of the display position. You may warp to the second checkpoint CP2. The gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed, but it may not be displayed. Further, in this effect example, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period. For example, the character SBH of Sabohani advances on the gauge. Then, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated at the timing when the checkpoint (for example, the second checkpoint CP2) is reached, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed and the timing when the checkpoint is reached is deviated. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated at the same timing, the gold cut-in image CI3 may not be displayed, or the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3. It may be done.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (B8), a balloon with the characters “Chance up gold cut-in” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and the cut-in is surrounded by a golden frame. Notifies that a notice has been given by displaying an image. The character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second checkpoint CP2 while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, but it may not stop. Further, in this effect example, the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 and the timing at which the button effect is started may be the same, and the Sabohani character SBH becomes the second checkpoint CP2. The button effect may be started after the button effect is reached, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the second checkpoint CP2 after the button effect is started. Further, in this production example, the point at which the chance-up notice is generated is shown by the second checkpoint CP2, but the final point GPa may be shown as the point at which the chance-up notice is generated. In that case, it may not reach the final point GPa, and when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the final point GPa, a chance-up notice occurs, and if the Sabohani character SBH does not reach the final point GPa, , The chance-up notice may not occur. Further, the final point GPa may be always reached. In this case, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GPa, a chance-up notice may be generated, or even if the final point GPa is reached. There may be cases where the chance-up notice does not occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 187 (B9), the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, the character SBH of Sabohani started to move, and FIG. 187 (B10) shows how the final point GPa was reached. Then, as shown in FIG. 187 (B11), the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the super reach effect is continued.

In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is used for the production during a part of the super reach, but the period other than the super reach (for example, a part of the normal reach or the reach state is not reached). It may be performed in a part of the period in the symbol variation display.

FIG. 188 is a diagram illustrating an production example of a chance up meter executed in another super reach.

FIGS. 188 (A1) to 188 (A16) are, for example, another production example following FIG. 16 (24), in which a princess reach production different from the swordsman reach as an example of the above-mentioned super reach is performed. It shows how it is.

FIG. 188 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 16 (24), and shows a transition to super reach.

FIG. 188 (A2) shows how the production of Princess Reach, which is an example of Super Reach, has started. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the title of the song "may be there ..." sung by the princess character is displayed, and the first decorative symbol is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. It is shown that it is moving to the club.

After that, in FIG. 188 (A3), a princess character appears and is shown dancing, and a band-shaped lyrics display area is slightly below the center of the display screen so as to overlap the front side of the princess character. The LYCs are arranged so as to extend to the left and right. Then, in the lyrics display area LYC, the lyrics of the song sung by the princess character are displayed horizontally, and a triangular marker MRKc is displayed below the lyrics, and the marker MRKc is displayed according to the progress of the song. It is configured to move to the right and notifies the timing of singing. In the lyrics display area LYC shown in FIG. 188 (A3), "But true kindness" is displayed, and the character "Yu" is displayed in bold and larger size than other characters. There is. That is, this production example suggests that a chance-up notice may occur at the timing when the princess character sings the "Yu" part. In other words, it can be said that the character "Yu" has the function of a checkpoint in the above-mentioned chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the lyrics suggest the timing of the chance-up notice. For example, in the dialogue in the conversation preview, the display mode of a specific character is different from that of other characters, and the voice that matches the dialogue is output. However, it may be suggested that a chance-up notice may occur at the timing when the voice corresponding to a specific character in the dialogue is output.

FIG. 188 (A4) shows how the marker MRKc is moving according to the song of the princess character. After that, in FIG. 188 (A5), at the timing when the princess character sings the "Yu" part, the upper and lower frames of the lyrics display area LYC change from the default display mode of white to red, and a chance-up notice is given. It is shown that it is.

Then, in FIG. 188 (A6), a balloon with the characters “Chance-up lyrics frame is red” is displayed in the vicinity of the characters “Yu” to notify that the chance-up notice has been given. The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the lyrics display area LYC changes, the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the lyrics display area LYC changes, or the lyrics display area LYC may be displayed. The balloon may be displayed before the aspect changes. The lyrics frame may be ranked up in the order of white>red>gold> rainbow, or may be ranked up by skipping one or two or more ranks such as white to gold. In this case, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the order of rainbow color>gold>red> white, and in the case of rainbow color, the big hit may be confirmed. In addition, the changing mode may be notified (for example, "Yu" is made red, etc.) by a character that notifies the timing such as "Yu". Further, in this production example, the one in which the chance-up notice is generated is one point, but there may be a plurality of points in which the chance-up notice is generated. Also, depending on the color of the lyrics frame, the point at which the chance-up notice occurs may change even with the same reach. Further, regardless of the color of the lyrics frame, the point at which the chance-up notice occurs may be the same.

After that, in FIG. 188 (A7), the marker MRKc is continuously moved according to the song of the princess character, and shows the timing when the phrase "but true kindness" is finished singing. In this production example, the history of the occurrence of the chance-up notice is displayed only while the phrase displayed when the chance-up notice occurs is displayed, but when the chance-up notice occurs. Even after switching from the phrase displayed in to another phrase, the history of the occurrence of the chance-up notice may be displayed. For example, the phrase in which the chance-up notice has occurred may be displayed in the lyrics display area LYC. It may be displayed in another display area to indicate the type of chance-up notice that has occurred, the number of times that the chance-up notice has occurred may be displayed, or the type of chance-up notice that has occurred may be displayed. It may be displayed explicitly or implicitly.

Subsequently, in FIG. 188 (A8), the display of the lyrics in the lyrics display area LYC is switched, and the phrase "may be there" is displayed, and all of these characters have the same display mode.

In FIG. 188 (A9), the marker MRKc is moving according to the song of the princess character, and shows the timing when the phrase "may be there" is finished.

Then, in FIG. 188 (A10), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the final judge effect by the button effect is started. Further, when the button effect is started, the lyrics display area LYC is once erased. At the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A10), the operation valid period has not yet started, and the operation valid period starts after that. The lyrics display area LYC may be displayed as it is.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 188 (A11) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing.

After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A12), the lyrics display area LYC is displayed again in FIG. 188 (A13), and the lyrics are displayed. In the area LYC, the phrase "unknown" is displayed, indicating that the final judge production was successful. After that, the marker MRKc moves according to the song of the princess character, and when the phrase "unknown" finishes singing at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A14), the marker MRKc is also located to the right of the phrase "unknown". Will be. In the case of loss, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed, for example, the screen goes dark, the song cannot be sung to the end, and the effect display in which the final judge effect fails is performed. It will be.

In FIG. 188 (A15), the lyrics display area LYC is erased and the song is completely sung. After that, as shown in FIG. 188 (A16), "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that a big hit will occur.

FIGS. 188 (B1) to 188 (B11) show, for example, another production example following FIG. 162 (A8), and preliminarily indicate that a chance-up notice will occur during the execution of the production by the chance-up meter CMT. It shows how to notify to.

FIG. 188 (B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A8), and shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 188 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a chance-up notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a specific notice may occur. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. Further, in this production example, the treasure chest TRG is displayed above the second checkpoint CP2 in the gauge portion. This treasure chest TRG opens when the Sabohani character SBH approaches, indicating that there is a possibility of foretelling the occurrence of a chance-up notice. In the period from FIG. 188 (B1) to FIG. (B2), for example, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (7) is performed.

FIG. 188 (B3) shows that the Sabohani character SBH approaches the treasure chest TRG after starting to move. Then, as shown in FIG. 188 (B4), the treasure chest TRG is opened, and the characters "UP" appear in the treasure chest TRG. As a result, at the second checkpoint CP2, it is announced that a chance-up notice will be generated by displaying the gold cut-in image CI3. In this production example, the treasure chest is opened to notify the occurrence of the chance-up notice before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2, but when the second checkpoint CP2 is reached, The treasure chest TRG may be configured to open. That is, the appearance of the treasure chest TRG at the second checkpoint CP2 itself may notify that a chance-up notice is likely to occur.

After that, FIG. 188 (B5) shows that the treasure chest TRG is erased together with the characters “UP”, and the Sabohani character SBH continues toward the second checkpoint CP2. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 188 (B6) to 188 (B11) are performed. The effect performed during the period from FIG. 188 (B6) to FIG. (B11) is the same as the effect shown in FIGS. 29 (9) to (16), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, when the treasure chest TRG is opened and the character "UP" appears, it is announced in advance that a chance-up notice will occur at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the corresponding checkpoint. However, for example, with the occurrence of the chance-up notice, it may be announced that the mode will be more reliable. In addition, an icon suggesting the content of the chance-up notice that may occur at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH arrives at the checkpoint where the treasure chest TRG is placed may appear from the treasure chest TRG, for example, the first. 1 Checkpoint CP1 has a treasure chest TRG, and when the treasure chest TRG is opened, the icon of the face of Boy's character BOY will appear, and a chance-up notice will be given that Boy's character BOY will appear. You may give a notice.

FIG. 189 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the effect of the chance up meter.

FIGS. 189 (A1) to 189 (A6) show how a plurality of chance-up notices occur at one checkpoint.

FIG. 189 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 29 (1). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 189 (A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 189 (A3), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that the chance-up notice is being given due to the appearance of Boy's character BOY. Further, in this production example, a Copanda character KPD appears from the right end of the display screen, and a chance-up notice is given by the appearance of the Copanda character KPD. Here, the character KPD of Copanda overlaps with the character of the swordsman in the super reach production. The Copanda character KPD may overlap with the swordsman character. Here, the Copanda character KPD may appear after the Boy character BOY appears, the Boy character BOY may appear after the Copanda character KPD appears, or the Boy character BOY may appear. The Copanda character KPD may appear at the same time.

Then, in FIG. 189 (A4), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up BOY Passed !!" is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani, and the characters "Chance Up Copanda Appears !!" are displayed above it. The attached balloon is also displayed, and it is notified that two chance-up notices have occurred at the first checkpoint CP1. In addition, the balloon "Chance up BOY passed !!" and the balloon "Chance up Copanda appeared !!" may be displayed at the same time, or after the balloon "Chance up BOY passed !!" is displayed, "Chance up BOY passed !!" The balloon "Chance Up Copanda Appears !!" may be displayed, or the balloon "Chance Up BOY Passed !!" may be displayed after the balloon "Chance Up Copanda Appears !!" is displayed. The balloon of the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed after the appearance of the Boy character BOY and the Copanda character KPD, or during the appearance of the Boy character BOY and the Copanda character KPD (for example, during the appearance animation). It may be displayed, or it may be displayed before the appearance of the Boy character BOY and the Copanda character KPD. Further, the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the notice is given by displaying the character BOY of Boy and the character KPD of Copanda, but it may not stop. Further, for example, it may be notified that a plurality of chance-up notices have been generated by one balloon, such as "Passing the chance-up BOY! And Copanda has appeared !!".

FIG. 189 (A5) shows that the Boy character BOY and the Copanda character KPD are erased by the frame-out animation, and the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is also erased. The balloon may be deleted after the Boy character BOY and the Copanda character KPD are deleted, or the Boy character BOY and the Copanda character KPD may be deleted after the balloon is deleted. The balloon may be erased while the Boy character BOY and the Copanda character KPD are being erased (while the frame-out animation is being displayed). Also, the Sabohani character has begun to move on the gauge of the chance-up meter CMT. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 189 (A6) is performed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 189 (A6) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 29 (8), the description thereof will be omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (9) and later are performed. In this production example, even if a plurality of chance-up notices occur, only one character "UP" indicating that the chance-up notice has occurred is displayed, but the number corresponding to the number of chance-up notices that have occurred. "UP" (in this production example, two "UP" displays) may be displayed.

In FIGS. 189 (B1) to 189 (B7), if there is a checkpoint in which the chance-up notice did not occur in the production by the chance-up meter during super reach, the chance-up notice is subsequently given at the checkpoint. It shows an example of the production to be done. In the period from FIG. 189 (B1) to FIG. (B2), for example, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 170 (A6) to (A17) is performed.

After that, when the operation of the Sabohani character SBH stops at the timing shown in FIG. 189 (B3), the pause icon PSE overlaps a part of the chance up meter CMT on the front side as shown in FIG. 189 (B4). Is displayed in. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect by the chance up meter CMT is temporarily stopped by overlapping the pause icon PSE with the chance up meter CMT. It should be noted that some or all of the components of the chance up meter CMT may indicate that the suspension is suspended.

Then, as shown in FIG. 189 (B5), a cut-in showing that the super reach production is interrupted and the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach" is displayed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, a notice for improving the reliability of the jackpot by assuming that the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display is produced with other contents. The display of this cut-in is a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance-up that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT. Further, in this production example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed together with the pause icon PSE even during the period when the princess cut-in display is displayed, but the pause icon PSE and the chance up meter CMT are displayed. It may be hidden. Alternatively, the pause icon PSE may be displayed to display the princess cut-in before the effect by the chance up meter CMT is paused. In this case, for example, the princess cut-in is displayed. During the period, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, and when the princess cut-in display ends and the super reach production is resumed, the chance up meter CMT displays the pause icon PSE and the chance up meter The effect of CMT may be paused. Further, during the period when the pause icon PSE is displayed, the super reach effect is suspended, while the effect is not stopped by the chance up meter CMT, and the Sabohani character SBH may proceed. , The super reach effect is not paused, and the effect on the chance up meter CMT may be paused. Further, when the cut-in is displayed by the princess character, the pause icon PSE may be displayed and the production may be paused or not paused. For example, the pause may be performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be fixedly stopped than when it is not paused. In addition, the progress of the super reach effect is more advanced than the position of the Sabohani character SBH shown on the chance up meter CMT, and the super reach effect is paused by displaying the pause icon PSE to suspend the super reach effect. An effect may be performed so as to match the progress with the position of the character SBH of Sabohani.

In FIG. 189 (B6), the display of the cut-in by the princess character is finished, and the interrupted super reach production is resumed. However, the pause icon PSE is displayed, and the effect by the chance up meter CMT remains paused.

After that, as shown in FIG. 189 (B7), the pause icon PSE is erased, and the effect by the chance up meter CMT is resumed. At this time, the reach effect was rewritten, and the display of the second checkpoint CP2, which was displayed to the effect that the chance-up notice did not occur, is displayed in the form marked in red, and the chance-up notice is displayed. The character "UP" indicating that has occurred is also displayed. That is, in reality, the chance-up notice corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 was not given, but it is expressed as if it was done, and it is shown that the reliability of the jackpot is improving. In this production example, it is shown that the pause icon PSE overlaps with the chance up meter CMT. For example, when the chance up meter is provided with the above-mentioned information display area. May display the characters "pause" in the information display area, or only the characters "pause" are displayed on the chance up meter CMT, and the bar display and the chance up meter such as Sabohani's character SBH are displayed. The images that make up the CMT may be hidden.

FIGS. 189 (C1) to 189 (C6) show another display mode of the chance up meter.

FIG. 189 (C1) shows, for example, another effect pattern following FIG. 29 (1). Specifically, when shifting to the super reach (swordsman reach), the chance-up meter CMTx formed in a band shape is displayed extending to the left and right at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display of this chance-up meter CMTx changes in such a manner that the gauge displayed in blue decreases from left to right from the start point SPx to the final point GPx according to the progress of the super reach effect. The character "start" is displayed in the area on the left side of the start point SPx, and the character "end" is displayed in the area on the right side of the final point GPx. The point GPx is specified. Further, a checkpoint CPx is arranged at a predetermined position of the chance-up meter CMTx, indicating that a chance-up notice may be given at the timing when the marker MRKx, which will be described later, reaches the checkpoint CPx. In addition, the checkpoint CPx is a display mode in which a question mark is attached in a white circle, suggesting that there is a possibility that some kind of chance-up notice may be given, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. You may be able to do it. The question mark may not be attached in the white circle, and the question mark may or may not be attached. In addition, a mark, character, or symbol different from the question mark may be attached to the white circle.

In FIG. 189 (C2), the effect by the chance up meter CMTx is started, the marker MRKx moves from the start point SPx toward the final point GPx according to the progress of the super reach effect, and the gauge decreases correspondingly. It shows how it is doing.

After that, when the marker MRKx reaches the checkpoint CPx at the timing shown in FIG. 189 (C3), as shown in FIG. Face display It is displayed together with YSMN, and a highly reliable chance-up notice (heat heat notice) of the big hit is given. Even if the marker MRKx reaches the checkpoint CPx, the chance-up notice may not be given, or another type of chance-up notice may be given. Further, while the chance-up notice is being given, the marker MRKx may stand by at the position of the checkpoint CPx, or may proceed toward the final point GPx without waiting.

FIG. 189 (C5) shows that the display YSMN of the face of the lord is erased, the chance-up notice is completed, and the chance-up meter CMTx is progressing according to the progress of the super reach effect.

After that, as shown in Fig. 189 (C6), when the marker MRKx reaches the final point GPx, the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "Decoration 7" is displayed in the middle pattern, notifying that it will be a big hit. Will be done. When the marker MRKx reaches the final point GPx, it may be displayed that the hero's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role.

FIGS. 189 (D1) to (D6) show another effect pattern of the effects shown in FIGS. 189 (C1) to (C6). In this production example, as shown in FIG. 189 (D1), the display at the checkpoint CPx is a display mode in which the characters “heat” are added in white circles, and the timing at which the marker MRKx reaches the checkpoint CPx. Therefore, it is foretold that the intense heat notice shown in FIG. 189 (D4) will be performed. It should be noted that other types of chance-up notices may be announced. Further, in the case of the display mode in which the characters "heat" are added in the white circle, the chance-up notice may or may not be generated. Further, as shown in FIG. 189 (D1'), a balloon may be displayed in the vicinity of the checkpoint CPx with the characters "a notice of" intense heat "occurs at this timing". The effects shown in FIGS. 189 (D1) to (D6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 189 (C1) to (C6), except that the display mode of the checkpoint CPx is different. The explanation is omitted. Before the marker MRKx reaches the checkpoint CPx, the characters may change from "question mark" to "heat".

FIG. 190 is a diagram illustrating another effect pattern of the effect by the chance up meter.

FIGS. 190 (A1) to 190 (A4) show how the chance-up meter CMT is used to give a notice different from the chance-up notice using the components of the chance-up meter CMT.

FIG. 190 (A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 29 (2). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 190 (A1) to 190 (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 190 (A3), since the Boy character BOY appeared at the first checkpoint CP1, a balloon with the characters “Chance up BOY passing” was displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and a chance up notice was given. Notifies that it has been done. At this time, the background color of the balloon is red, which suggests that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the running symbol variation display than when the background color of the balloon is the default color (white). ing. That is, the background color of the balloon is red, indicating that the notice is being given. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 190 (A4) is performed. It should be noted that the background color of the balloon is more likely to be displayed in red than the default color (white) when the jackpot symbol display mode is confirmed and displayed than when the lost symbol display mode is confirmed. May be good.

After that, when the chance-up notice is completed, as shown in FIG. 190 (A4), the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red, and the occurrence of the chance-up notice indicates that the reliability of the jackpot has increased. The characters "UP" are displayed, and the Sabohani character SBH starts moving.

FIGS. 190 (B1) to 190 (B18) show an example of an effect in which the chance up meter CMT is used during a symbol change other than super reach. FIG. 190 (B1) is, for example, an effect example following FIG. 162 (A2), and the effect shown in FIG. 190 (B1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (3), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 190 (B2) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. The chance-up meter CMT in this production example shows, for example, the progress of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current decoration depends on the position. The progress of the variable display of the symbol is roughly notified. At the final point GP in this production example, the placard is rotated and displayed including the display of "x" and the display of the question mark, giving the player a sense of expectation as to whether the production will be lost or the production will develop. ing. Here, the progress speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the production, but it may be constant. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 190 (B2), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a specific notice may occur.

FIGS. 190 (B3) to 190 (B4) show that the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH.

FIG. 190 (B5) shows that the conversation notice has started. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol.

After that, in FIG. 190 (B6), the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that urges the effect button 136 (chance button 136) to be pressed within the operation valid period, and is a button image 136a that imitates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation valid period. It is composed of a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time. At the timing shown in FIG. 190 (B6), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 190 (B6), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord may not be reduced and displayed, or the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be deleted. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (larger or smaller) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. The size (larger or smaller) may be different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A. The operation validity period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started thereafter.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 190 (B7) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses, and then the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is displayed by the player. When is pressed, as shown in FIG. 190 (B8), in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, instead of the operation promotion notification image, the frame on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is bordered in gold and " A notice will be given that the words "It's super hot!" Will be displayed. Then, a balloon with the characters "Chance-up gold frame notice has occurred !!" is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohani's character SBH, and it is notified that the chance-up notice has been made by the old man's conversation image CI2. The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the grandfather's conversation image CI2 changes, or the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the grandfather's conversation image CI2 changes. Further, in FIG. 190 (B8), No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). 6 "Gold bomber" icon IHI appears on the right edge of the screen, and the pending change animation starts. That is, the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the pending change animation in this production example, while the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" flies from right to left, a bullet is fired (bombed) at the variable icon h0. The icon IHI of the "gold bomber" may be temporarily stopped before the target variable icon h0. In addition, this pause may be a pause of a ghost that disguises the target icon. Further, in this production example, when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes due to the hold change animation by the icon IHI of the "gold bomber", the display mode of the hold icon after the change is the gold display mode. It is suggested that In addition, when the hold change animation by the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" is performed, the bombing on the variable icon h0 may be successful and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed without fail, or the bombing on the variable icon h0. There may be a case where the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change due to failure. In this production example, the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" may appear after the display mode of the old man's conversation image CI2 has changed, and the hold change animation may be started, or after the hold change animation is started. The display mode of the grandfather's conversation image CI2 may be changed. That is, the period in which the chance-up notice related to the first checkpoint CP1 is given may overlap with the period in which the chance-up notice related to the second checkpoint CP2 is given. Further, the hold change animation may be started after the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed, or the balloon may be displayed after the hold change animation is started.

After that, in FIG. 190 (B9), the character SBH of Sabohani started to move, and the first checkpoint CP1 was marked in red, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot was improved by the appearance of the notice. Is displayed above it, showing the history of the chance-up notice. Further, in FIG. 190 (B9), it is shown that a golden bullet icon is fired from the golden bomber icon. That is, the "gold bomber" icon IHI is composed of a golden bomber icon and a golden bullet icon. The goal here is the variable icon h0. After that, as shown in FIG. 190 (B10), the bullet icon hits the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the golden display mode. Further, at this time, the character SBH of Sabohani is traveling on the gauge of the chance up meter CMT, and the second checkpoint CP2 arrives at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. The Sabohani character SBH may reach the second checkpoint CP2 before the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the second checkpoint after the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. You may reach CP2. The Sabohani character SBH is stopped at the second checkpoint CP2 and is on standby.

Then, in FIG. 190 (B11), a balloon with the characters "chance up money hold" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and a chance up notice has occurred in which the variable icon h0 is displayed in gold. Has been notified. The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, or the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes.

After that, in FIG. 190 (B12), the character SBH of Sabohani started to move, and the second checkpoint CP2 was marked in red, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot was improved by the appearance of the notice. Is displayed above it, showing the history of the chance-up notice.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 190 (B13), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a state in which the shaking fluctuation display is performed is shown. ing. Here, the decorative symbol on which the shaking fluctuation display is performed may be displayed on a part of the chance-up meter CMT, or may be displayed at a position where the decorative symbol does not overlap the chance-up meter CMT.

In FIG. 190 (B14), the “decoration 7” that had fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a before shifting to the super reach effect moves below the second decorative symbol and fluctuates in the right symbol display area 208c. It is shown that the "decoration 7" that had been used has moved below the second hold number display. At this time, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3, and at this timing, a background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed. A background image including the spirit character CLA may be displayed at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3, or after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3, the spiritual character may be displayed. The background image including the character CLA may be displayed, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the third checkpoint CP3 after the background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed.

Then, in FIG. 190 (B15), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Claire Background" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and a chance up notice is generated in which a background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed. It has been notified that it has been done. The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed, or the balloon may be displayed after the background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed.

After that, in FIG. 190 (B16), the character SBH of Sabohani started to move, and the third checkpoint CP3 was marked in red, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot was improved by the appearance of the notice. Is displayed above it, showing the history of the chance-up notice. Further, in FIG. 190 (B16), the background image including the spirit character CLA is switched to the default background image. The background image including the spirit character CLA may be continuously displayed until the background image of the super reach is displayed. Further, in FIG. 190 (B16), the movement of the holding frame UI downward is started, and it is shown that the frame is out to the lower part of the display screen while leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. ..

FIG. 190 (B17) shows how the hold frame UI is completely framed out downward while leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. Further, FIG. 190 (B17) shows how the Sabohani character SBH has reached the final point GP. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in the manner displayed by "SP", and it is notified that the placard will shift to the super reach.

FIG. 190 (B18) shows how the VS swordsman reach super reach production has started. Then, the chance up meter CMT is erased as if the purpose has been achieved. Even after shifting to Super Reach, the production by a new chance up meter may be started. Further, the chance up meter CMT may be erased before the super reach effect is started, may be erased after the super reach effect is started, or may be erased at the timing when the super reach effect is started. You may. After that, for example, FIG.
The effects shown in 9 (2) and after are performed. In this case, the CUM preparing display MTY does not necessarily have to be displayed.

FIG. 191 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect by the chance up meter performed in the probability change state.

FIGS. 191 (A1) to 191 (A19) show a state in which an effect using a chance-up meter is performed as a look-ahead notice in a probabilistic state.

FIG. 191 (A1) shows how the symbol variation display of the first special figure 2 is performed after the jackpot game is completed. The control states shown in FIGS. 191 (A1) to 191 (A19) are high-probability special-figure high-probability states (probability-changing states with electric support). Therefore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the probabilistic state with electric support, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. In FIG. 191 (A1), since the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 4, the four holding icons of the special drawing 2 (the first holding icon h21 to the fourth holding icon h24) are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. , The hold icon on the left side has the older hold icon. The hold icon of Special Figure 1 may also be displayed. Further, in this production example, a background image of the universe in which the rocket is directed toward the planet is displayed as a background image in the probabilistic state with electric support. In this production example, it is applied to a so-called ST machine in which a probability variation state with electric support of 50 rotations is given after all jackpot games are completed. For example, when a jackpot is hit with a probability variation symbol, the next jackpot occurs. It may be a spec that will be in a probable change state with electric support until it is done. Further, it may be a so-called V-ST machine that is given a probability variation state with electric support of a predetermined rotation (for example, 50 rotations) when passing through a specific area provided in the variable winning opening in a big hit game. Further, the gaming state in this production example may be a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (electric support state), or a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, instead of the probability variation state with electric support. May be good. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 4. .. A second decorative symbol is displayed in the lower left corner, and the second decorative symbol is also variablely displayed according to the first decorative symbol. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen, a right-handed display instructing the player to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area 124 is performed, and below that, the low probability of the normal figure and the low probability of the special figure are displayed. The number of consecutive villas, which is the number of big hits that occurred from the occurrence of the big hit in the state to the low probability state of the normal figure again, is displayed. "BONUS x 3" indicating the mausoleum is displayed. Further, below the display of the number of consecutive villas, the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in which the probability variation state with electric support is maintained is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 191 (A1), "50 more times" indicating the remaining 50 times. Is displayed.

Further, in this production example, a music title display unit MN is provided in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the music title of the currently output music (here, the default "may be there". ") Is displayed, and the music of the song title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music output here is the music output in the probabilistic state. Further, the icons of the up and down keys 137u and d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed on the left side of the music name display unit MN, and it is notified that the music can be selected by operating the up and down keys 137u and d.

In FIG. 191 (A2), the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. The number of remaining reservations in Special Figure 2 is 4, which is the default display mode.

FIG. 191 (A3) shows that the hold of the special figure 2 has been exhausted and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has started the variable display of the decorative symbol. Even in the state of FIG. 191 (A3), the selected song is still "may be there". It should be noted that a pre-reading notice or a change notice may be given by a song change notice, and the song change notice may be used to forcibly change the song selected by the player to another song.

In FIG. 191 (A4), a background change notice, which is a kind of look-ahead notice, is started. The background change notice in this production example is a notice that the continuous notice will be started. The target of the background change notice (holding the read-ahead target) here is the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon hs24 shown in FIG. 191 (A2). In the background change notice, images of sliding doors (FSML, FSMR) appear from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes an image of sliding doors by the animation of closing the sliding doors (see FIG. 191 (A5)). Therefore, the hold icons h21, h22, h23, the first decorative symbol, and the song title display unit MN are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding door, and become invisible. At this time, the music output from the speaker 120 fades out, and then the sound is muted. Note that the output of only the music may be stopped and the sound effect may be output.

The background change notice may be started at the timing when the look-ahead target is held. In this example, it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, but it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started by the end of the fluctuation of the look-ahead target hold. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the look-ahead target hold.

Further, in the background change notice, the appearance image (here, the image of the sliding door) color may indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit of the look-ahead target hold. For example, if the color of the sliding door is green, the background itself changes to a mountain background. It may also function as a notice. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

FIG. 191 (A6) shows an animation in which the sliding doors open. After that, in FIG. 191 (A7), the sliding doors are completely opened, and the images of the sliding doors (FSML, FSMR) disappear. In this production example, the continuous notice is started by the background change notice. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the title of "Dekirukana" indicating the content of the continuous notice effect is displayed, and the chance up meter CMMy is displayed above this title. In the chance up meter CMTy in this production example, the first checkpoint CP1y and the second checkpoint CP2y are arranged between the start point SPy and the final point GPy, and the display mode is a white circle, and a band shape is formed between the points. It is tied with a gauge of. Further, at the final point GPy, a symbol consisting of "!" And a question mark is attached in the white circle, and a pre-reading notice about the symbol change corresponding to the final point GPy is given. That is, it is foretold that the final judge effect, which is the final effect of notifying whether or not it is a big hit, will be performed after the symbol variation display four times, including the symbol variation display being executed. The starting point SPy corresponds to the symbol variation display being executed, the first checkpoint CP1y corresponds to the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold, and the second checkpoint CP2y corresponds to the symbol variation display. It corresponds to the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold, and the final point GPy corresponds to the symbol variation display corresponding to the third hold which is the target of the look-ahead notice. It should be noted that another pre-reading notice may be given to each point where no display is made. Further, the display mode of each point does not change until the end of the continuous advance notice effect, but for example, the display mode may be changed for each symbol variation display. Further, at the first checkpoint CP1y and the second checkpoint CP2y, it may be announced that a chance-up notice will be given when the checkpoint is reached. Further, the display in the white circle of the final point GPy is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and the display mode may be changed according to the reliability of the jackpot, for example, when "heat" is displayed. Is more likely to be a big hit than the symbol consisting of "!" And a question mark is displayed, and when "hit" is displayed, the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display subject to the pre-reading notice. It may be. Further, depending on the display mode in the white circle at each point, the ease of development to super reach and the change may be announced, or the type of super reach may be announced. Further, not only the final point GPy but also other points may display the notice in the white circle. For example, even if some notice is displayed at the final point GPy, the checkpoint (white circle or the white circle or the previous point) before that may be displayed. You may make a big hit with the symbol variation corresponding to the checkpoint that displays some kind of notice.

Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (A8), the character YMy of the lord who functions as a cursor is displayed at the starting point SPy.

After that, in FIG. 191 (A9), the character of the lord is carrying the Senryobako, and the production display is just giving alms to the begging peasant. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 191 (A10), the display is stopped and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7".

In FIG. 191 (A11), it is shown that the hold of the special figure 2 is digested and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the second hold display, the hold of special figure 1 shows 3 and the hold of special figure 2 shows 2. In addition, the display of the number of remaining symbol changes has been updated to "48 more times". At this time, the character YMy of the lord in the chance up meter CMTy is moving from the starting point SPy to the first checkpoint CP1y. In addition, the character of the lord who carried the Senryobako is shown to be blushing and struggling to throw the Senryobako at the peasant, fueling expectations for the big hit. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 191 (A12), the display is stopped and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 4-Decoration 1".

In FIG. 191 (A13), it is shown that the hold of the special figure 2 is digested and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the second hold display, the hold of special figure 1 shows 3 and the hold of special figure 2 shows 1. In addition, the display of the number of remaining symbol changes has been updated to "47 more times". At this time, the character YMy of the lord in the chance up meter CMTy is moving from the first checkpoint CP1y to the second checkpoint CP2y. In addition, the character of the lord who carried the Senryobako is shown to have thrown the Senryobako toward the peasant, further fueling expectations for the big hit. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 191 (A14), the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 7".

In FIG. 191 (A15), it is shown that the hold of the special figure 2 is digested and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the second hold display, the hold of special figure 1 shows 3 and the hold of special figure 2 shows 0. In addition, the display of the number of remaining symbol changes has been updated to "46 more times". At this time, it is notified that the character YMy of the lord in the chance up meter CMTy is moving from the second checkpoint CP2y to the final point GPy, and that the final judge effect is performed.

In FIG. 191 (A16), as a result of the final judge's production, the Senryobako thrown by the lord has reached the peasant family, and oval coins are scattered from the Senryobako. That is, it is notified that the result of the big hit is derived as if the alms to the peasant were successful. In addition, the effect display of the Senryobako thrown by the lord reaching the peasant and the oval being scattered from the Senryobako may be displayed overlapping with the chance up meter CMTy. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (A17), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is derived, and it is shown that the shaking fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (A18), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" (big hit symbol mode) is confirmed and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (A19), the jackpot start effect is performed. In this jackpot start effect, a "super Yoshimune bonus" is displayed, which indicates that the jackpot game by the probability variation jackpot is started by aligning the symbols of the probability variation jackpot (special jackpot).

In this effect example, for example, this effect may always be performed from the 50th rotation to the 53rd rotation during ST according to the variation pattern table.

In this production example, the continuous notice is performed by the production by the chance up meter, but such the production by the chance up meter can also be applied to the slot machine. For example, AT (assist time), which is a controllable slot machine capable of obtaining a high payout by stopping reels in the correct push order (push order), and is an advantageous gaming state for notifying the correct push order. In the state, the character is advanced in the chance up meter according to the number of AT remaining games on the display, the final point is made to correspond to the number of AT remaining games being 0, and the AT state is continued by the display at the final point. Alternatively, it may be notified that the final judge effect may be performed to see if the number of remaining games in the AT state is added. In this case, depending on the display mode at the final point, it is suggested that the AT state is easy to continue, the number of remaining games in the AT state is easy to be added, the number of games to be added is large, and the like. You may. In addition, at the start point, the final point, and one or more checkpoints arranged between them, the winning combination is displayed at the corresponding white circle at the timing of lever ON or the first stop or the second stop, and the winning combination is displayed. It may be displayed in a white circle as a history.

As described above, in this production example, the display mode of the chance up meter CMTy changes for each symbol change after the display is started, and changes according to the time after the chance up meter CMTy is displayed. It can be said that there is.

FIGS. 191 (B1) to 191 (B8) are productions following FIGS. 191 (A15), and show how the result of loss is derived as a result of continuous advance notice.

FIG. 191 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 191 (A15). In this production example, a game ball wins a prize in the second special drawing start port 232 between the production shown in FIG. 191 (A15) and the production shown in FIG. 191 (B1). , The hold of special figure 2 has increased by one. In Fig. 191 (B1), as a result of the judge's production, the lord failed to throw the Senryobako and did not reach the peasant, the Senryobako turned over at his feet, the lord was depressed, and the peasant was disappointed. It is done. That is, it is notified that the result of the loss is derived as if the alms to the peasant failed. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (B2), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is derived, and it is shown that the shaking fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (B3), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. In addition, after the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is derived, the revival effect may be performed and the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be derived.

After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (B4), after the hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, in FIG. The background change effect is started. When the background change effect is started, images of sliding doors (FSML, FSMR) appear from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes an image of sliding doors by the animation of closing the sliding doors (see FIG. 191 (B6)). Therefore, the first decorative pattern and the chance up meter CMMy are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding door, and become invisible. At this time, the music for continuous advance notice effect output from the speaker 120 fades out, and then the sound is muted. Note that the output of only the music may be stopped and the sound effect may be output.

In FIG. 191 (B7), the sliding doors are opened and the variable display of the first decorative pattern is beginning to be seen, and in FIG. 191 (B8), the sliding doors are completely opened and the sliding door image disappears. At this time, since the hold of the special figure 2 is "0", the hold icon is not displayed, but if there is a hold of the special figure 2, the hold icon can be seen during the execution of the animation in which the sliding door opens. start. The hold icon may be displayed after the sliding doors are completely opened. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (B8), the background image after the opening of the sliding door is the background image of the castle town. It may be a background image of the universe.

FIG. 192 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a notice of the effect by the chance up meter is given by a display device other than the decorative symbol display device.

FIGS. 192 (A1) to 192 (A5) are diagrams showing an example in which the appearance of the CUM preparation display MTY is announced using the POV display 224I.

In FIG. 192 (A1) during the symbol variation display, the POV display 224I, which has been hidden at the initial position, appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is in a state before the rotation operation (stationary). State) is taken.

In FIG. 192 (A2), the POV display 224I starts rotating on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and when the constant speed rotation is reached, the “Sabohani” icon SH is displayed on the POV display 224I to prepare for CUM. The appearance of medium display MTY has been announced. While the POV display 224I is accelerating, none of the light emitting elements of the POV display 224I emits light, so that the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the holding frame UI displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be visually recognized. It is possible.

In FIG. 192 (A3), the POV display 224I continues to rotate at a constant speed, and the icon SH of "Sabohani" is still displayed, but the flame effect EF101 is on the back side of the holding icon display area HIS. It is displayed so as to cover the whole.

When the flame icon EF101 is displayed, the POV display 224I starts a deceleration operation of rotation, and then, as shown in FIG. 192 (A4), the POV display 224I is in a stationary state, and then in FIG. 192 (A5). As shown, it returns to the initial position. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. In this way, the appearance of the CUM preparing display MTY is announced, but the CUM preparing display MTY may not appear in some cases. After the deceleration operation of the POV display 224I is started, the display may be switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparing display MTY, or after the display is switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparing display MTY. The deceleration operation of the POV display 224I may be started, or the display may be switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparing display MTY at the timing when the deceleration operation of the POV display 224I is started.

Even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and the display area is visible. The effect display may be performed. Further, in the acceleration state from the stationary state to the constant speed state of the POV display 224I and the deceleration state from the constant speed state to the stationary state, the display area is more visible and the acceleration state is easier to see than in the constant speed state. Even in the deceleration state, the effect display may be performed in the above display area. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the above display area only in the acceleration state or the deceleration state. Further, in the acceleration state or the deceleration state, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) may be darkened to make the display of the POV display 224I stand out. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area in the acceleration state, and at least the display area may be darkened in the constant speed state. The notes described here are also applicable to the production example using the POV display 224I disclosed in the present specification.

Further, as for the end timing of the constant speed rotation of the POV display 224I and the appearance timing of the icon SH of "Sabohani", the end timing of the constant speed rotation may be earlier, or the appearance timing of the icon may be earlier. Alternatively, both may be at the same timing.

Further, although the appearance notice using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means shown in FIG. 146) have been described. The above-mentioned appearance notice may be executed by (208M'etc.), or another notice may be executed.

FIGS. 192 (B1) to 192 (B2) show an example of an effect in which an effect is performed by a chance up meter by a configuration in which a display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

So far, the description centered on the first decorative symbol display device 208L has been given, but the content displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed (the same applies to the description in other embodiments herein). Further, the arrangement of the display means is not limited to horizontal arrangement, and can be applied to vertical arrangement. That is, it does not mean that the technology described in this specification cannot be applied simply because the hardware configuration is different. From a technical point of view, even if the display means are arranged side by side, they are arranged vertically. Needless to say, it can be applied even if the number of display means is different. Hereinafter, as an example of the vertical arrangement of the display means, an example in which the display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L will be described. Here, the display means arranged below is referred to as a fourth display means 208M'and will be described.

FIG. 192 (B1) shows a fourth display means 208M'arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 192 (B1) is in the initial position. The fourth display means 208M'is surrounded by a frame around the display screen, and the upper edge of the frame in the fourth display means 208M' at the initial position is on the front side at the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps from. The fourth display means 208M'is arranged on the front side (player side) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is an operation position that overlaps the central portion of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side ( For example, it is possible to move from the initial position toward the position of the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 146 (car 2'). That is, the fourth display means 208M'is also a movable means capable of raising and lowering. Further, in addition to the elevating operation, it may be movable in the left-right direction as in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a modification of the fourth display means 208M', it may be fixedly arranged at the initial position.

The fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 192 (B1) displays a hold frame having a configuration similar to the hold frame UI previously displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This hold frame also has a hold icon display area, a variable icon display area, and an effect icon display area. In the variable icon display area, a pedestal on which the variable icon is placed is arranged. The hold icon display area is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area, and four stages (first stage to fourth stage) are arranged on the left base icon. The effect icon display area is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area, and the right base icon is arranged in the effect icon display area. The second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This basic configuration is the same in FIGS. 192 (C1) to 192 (C2), which will be described later.

Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (B1), it is shown that after reaching the reach with “decoration 7”, the process shifts to the super reach effect (swordsman reach). On the other hand, in the fourth display means 208M', the above-mentioned CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, and the start of the production by the chance up meter CMT is announced. At this time, although the holding frame including the variable icon is hidden, the variable icon may be displayed. In addition, the holding frame may be displayed. Further, during the period when the CUM preparation display MTY or the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the fourth display device 208M', the variable icon may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Alternatively, the holding frame may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In the fourth display means 208M'shown in FIG. 192 (B2), it is shown that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. After that, the effect by the chance up meter CMT is performed in the fourth display means 208M'.

FIGS. 192 (C1) to 192 (C2) show an example in which the effects shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A11) are realized by using the fourth display means 208M'.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (C1), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed substantially in the center of the left end portion of the display screen. In this production example, it is shown that the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the display position of the chance up meter CMT. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that after reaching the reach with "decoration 7", the process shifts to the super reach effect (swordsman reach). On the other hand, in the fourth display means 208M', "VS swordsman reach" that notifies the type of super reach effect is displayed.

After that, a moving animation in which the CUM preparing display MTY moves downward toward the fourth display means 208M'is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and then the CUM preparing display MTY is changed to the fourth display means 208M'. When displayed, the moving animation is completed. In this case, the CUM preparing display MTY may be moved between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth display means 208M'. Specifically, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed so as to straddle these display means, or may be displayed so as to warp between the display means without straddling these display means. It may be configured so that there are cases where the display means are straddled and cases where the display means are not straddled.

After that, as shown in FIG. 192 (C2), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the CUM preparing display MTY switches to the chance up meter CMT after the moving animation is completed, and then the Sabohani character SBH starts moving (the former), but the CUM preparing display MTY. The character SBH of Sabohani may start moving at the same time as switching from to the chance up meter CMT (the latter). Further, the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving may be the former case or the latter case, and may be performed only in the former case or only in the latter case.

FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an effect example using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

FIGS. 193 (A1) to 193 (A7) show that the chance-up notice is given by the appearance of the Boy character BOY that occurs at the first checkpoint CP1.

In FIG. 193 (A1), it is shown that the animation of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, which has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). At this time, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of the duel scene is displayed, and a chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT, the production has started, and the Sabohani character SBH has started moving. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS constituting the hold frame UI is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and the variable icon of the default display mode is placed on the pedestal hs0. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed at the upper part, and the second reserved number is displayed below it (here, special figure 1 is "1" and special figure 2 is displayed. "Indicating 0") is displayed.

In FIG. 193 (A2), Boy's character BOY as a chance-up notice character appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and proceeds toward the right end of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The situation is shown.

Then, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 193 (A3) starts moving to the right as the character BOY of the boy moves to the right on the display screen. There is. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moving according to the original movement display of the Boy character BOY. At this time, of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 280L, for the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the overlapping portion is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, of the character of the lord and the chance up meter CMT displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 193 (A4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to a position where the right end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is substantially the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moved. When the maximum movement position of the decorative symbol display device 208M is reached, "Chance up BOY pass !!" is added in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH that constitutes the chance up meter CMT displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. A balloon is displayed. The balloon may be displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum moving position, or the balloon may be displayed after the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum moving position. Then, the balloon may be displayed at the timing when the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum moving position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 193 (A5), the Boy character moves to the right so as to straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second decorative symbol display device. The 208M begins to move towards the initial position. With the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, among the displays on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the portion that does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first from the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The display position is shifted to the decorative pattern display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position after the Boy character BOY has completely moved from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. , The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position before the Boy character BOY completely moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position at the timing when the character BOY of the boy completely moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 193 (A6) shows how the second decorative symbol display device 208M has returned to the initial position. At this time, the character of the lord and the chance up meter CMT displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are completely displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the Boy character BOY continues to move to the right of the display screen, and is displayed from the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After that, the frame is out from the right end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In FIG. 193 (A7), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance-up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is above it. It is displayed and shows the history of the occurrence of the notice.

FIGS. 193 (B1) to 193 (B4) are production examples corresponding to FIGS. 193 (A3) to (A6), and an example in which the display of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is shown. Note that FIG. 193 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 193 (A2).

The second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 193 (B1) shows that the boy character BOY starts moving to the right as it moves to the right on the display screen. At this time, of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 280L, for the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the overlapping portion is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but the chance up meter CMT The second decorative symbol display device 208M is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps on the front side. Therefore, the chance up meter CMT displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the second. It will be hidden by the decorative pattern display device 208L. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 193 (B2) to (B4) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 193 (B2) to (B4) are shown in FIGS. 193 (A4) to (A6), except that the chance up meter CMT is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above description, when, for example, the error shown in FIGS. 111 to 116, the simultaneous effect is generated, or the volume / brightness is adjusted during the effect display, it is shown in FIGS. 111 to 116. It is displayed as described above.

In the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means 208M' Etc.], and it is a game console
One of the plurality of types of displays is a period display [for example, a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display [for example, the gold cut-in CI3 shown in FIG. 29 (13)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first notice display [for example, the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (3)].
The period display is a display that may be started during the display of the reach effect display [for example, as shown in FIG. 162 (A9), the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed during the super reach effect. etc],
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2] during the display of the reach effect display.
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started during the display of the reach effect display.
The first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 162 (3) to 162 (A9), the CUM preparing display MTY has a higher chance. It is displayed before the meter CMT is displayed, etc.],
The first notice display is a display for notifying that the period display will be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game console, the period display is displayed by displaying the notice display before the period display notifies that a certain period is started, so that a certain period is started in advance. In some cases, it is possible to understand that the period display starts and not to miss the start of the period display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the period display may be started only during the display of the reach effect display, or may be started other than during the display of the reach effect display. Further, the period display may be always started during the display of the reach effect display, or may not be started during the display of the reach effect display.

Further, the period display may notify only the first timing during the display of the reach effect display, or may notify other than the first timing during the display of the reach effect display. May be good. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing during the display of the reach effect display, or may not notify the first timing during the display of the reach effect display.

In addition, only the first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed, or a display other than the first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed. There may be. Further, the first notice display may always be displayed before the period display is displayed, or the first notice display may not be displayed before the period display is displayed.

In addition, the first notice display may be displayed only before the period display is displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed other than before the period display is displayed. You may.

Further, the first notice display may be a notice only that the period display is displayed, or may be a notice other than the display of the period display. Further, the first notice display may be one that always gives notice that the period display is displayed, or may not give notice that the period display is displayed.

In addition, instead of the notice display, it is also possible to give a notice by the operation of the effect movable body, the voice output by the speaker, or the light emission by the light emitting means.

Further, the notice display may be started to be displayed during the big hit game.

Further, the notice display may be displayed during the display of the period display, and may function as a notice display for notifying that the first effect display is displayed, for example.

Further, the notice display may be displayed after the period display is displayed. For example, the period display is performed after the notice display is performed, and then the notice display is displayed. You may.

Further, the notice display may be displayed after the period display is hidden, and may be displayed as a function of notifying that the period display has been displayed, for example.

In addition, "It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the first notice indication.
The period display is a display that notifies the first timing in a certain period.
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started.
The first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed.
The first notice display is a display for notifying that the period display will be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. May be.

In addition, "the period display is a display that notifies the first timing during the display of the reach effect display" is "the period display is a timing at which a chance-up notice (or a chance-up effect) is performed. It is a display of a meter (chance-up timing meter) that notifies the above. ”

Further, when it is possible to specify that the timing at which a certain chance-up effect is performed is notified by the chance-up meter preparation display (that is, the chance-up meter preparation display is displayed regardless of the display mode of the chance-up meter preparation display. When some chance-up point is notified by the chance-up meter just by being displayed (for example, when the chance-up preparation is displayed, the chance-up meter is always displayed, or the chance-up meter always displays it at least once. (When notifying chance-up points, etc.)),
(1) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that the first timing is notified by the period display.
(2) The first notice display may be a notice display in which the first timing is notified.
(3) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that one or more of the timings in which a plurality of certain effects including the first timing are performed are notified by the period display. .. In addition, there may be a timing that cannot be specified among the timings notified in the period display.
(4) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that "the timing at which all certain effects are performed" is notified in the period display.
(5) The first notice display may be a notice display in which one or more of the timings in which a plurality of certain effects including the first timing are performed is notified. Further, in the period display. There may be a timing that is not notified among the timings that are notified.
(6) The first notice display may be a notice display in which the "timing at which all certain effects are performed" notified in the period display is notified.

In addition, when it is not possible to specify that the timing of performing a certain chance-up effect is notified by the chance-up meter preparation display (for example, even if the chance-up preparation display has a gap or the chance-up meter is displayed once (When not notifying the chance up point, etc.)
(1) The first notice display may be a notice display in which it cannot be specified that the first timing is notified by the period display.
(2) The first notice display may be a notice display in which the first timing is not notified.
(3) The first notice display may be a notice display in which it is not possible to specify in the period display that "the timing at which all certain effects are performed" is notified.
(4) The first notice display may be a notice display that does not notify the "timing at which all certain effects are performed" notified in the period display.

In addition, the period display may always notify the timing at which one or more certain effects are performed.

In addition, the period display may notify the timing at which one or more certain effects are performed, or may not notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed even once.

Further, when the period display is displayed, the cursor display may already be moving.

The cursor display may move after the period display is displayed.

Further, "the period display is a display including a cursor display [for example, the character SBH of Sabohani constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9)].
The period display is a certain period during the display of the reach effect display [for example, the period from the first timing in the super reach to the derivation of the middle symbol shown in FIGS. 162 (A9) to 162 (A12). Etc.] is a display that notifies
The cursor display is from the second position [for example, the start point SP in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9)] to the first position [for example, the first position in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9)]. By moving to the third position [for example, the final point GP in the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9)] via [2 checkpoint CP2, etc.], the start to end of the certain period is notified. Is configured to
When the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that the first timing is reached.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to understand the timing of the first position.

Here, the period display may include only the cursor display, or may include a display other than the cursor display. Further, the period display may always include the cursor display, or may not include the cursor display.

Further, the period display may notify only a certain period during the display of the reach effect display, or may notify a period other than a certain period during the display of the reach effect display. .. Further, the period display may always notify a certain period during the display of the reach effect display, or may not notify a certain period during the display of the reach effect display. ..

Further, the cursor display may be configured to be notified only from the start to the end of a certain period by moving from the second position to the third position via the first position, or the cursor. The display may be configured to notify other than the start to end of a period by moving from the second position through the first position to the third position. Further, the cursor display may be configured to be notified from the start to the end of a certain period by moving from the second position to the third position via the first position, or the cursor. The display may be configured such that the movement from the second position through the first position to the third position may not be signaled from the start to the end of a period of time.

Further, the cursor display may be configured to be notified from the start to the end of a certain period only by moving from the second position to the third position via the first position, or the cursor. The display may be configured to be notified from the start to the end of a period by something other than moving from the second position through the first position to the third position.

Further, when the cursor display reaches the first position, it may be notified only that it is the first timing, and when the cursor display reaches the first position, it is the first timing. Other than that, it may be notified. Further, when the cursor display reaches the first position, it may be notified that it is the first timing, and when the cursor display reaches the first position, it is the first timing. It may not be notified.

Further, the first timing may be notified only when the cursor display reaches the first position, and the first other than the cursor display reaching the first position is also the first. It may be notified that it is the timing.

The positional relationship between the first position, the second position, and the third position may be the first position> the second position> the third position, or any other positional relationship. Also, the cursor display may be configured to move in the order of second position> first position> third position. To be more precise, "the position where the cursor display reaches first when moving" is the front, and "the position where the cursor display reaches later" is the back.

In addition, "The period display is a chance-up display [for example, the display of the second checkpoint CP2 marked in red shown in FIG. 29 (15) and the appearance of the chance-up notice have increased the reliability of the jackpot. Display of "UP" characters, etc.] may be displayed.
The chance-up display is a display that notifies that the display of the first effect display has started at the first timing [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (15), a second check. By marking the point CP2 in red or displaying the characters "UP", a chance-up notice is displayed by displaying the gold cut-in CI3 at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2. Notifying that it has started, etc.],
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position [for example, shown in FIG. 29 (15). As shown above, when the chance-up notice by displaying the gold cut-in CI3 is started to be displayed, the second checkpoint CP2 is marked in red and the characters "UP" are displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to understand that the first effect display is displayed.

Here, the period display may be a display in which only the chance-up display is displayed, or a display other than the chance-up display may be displayed. Further, the period display may be one in which the chance-up display is always displayed, or may be one in which the chance-up display may not be displayed.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, only the chance-up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first at the first timing. When the display of the effect display of is started, a display other than the chance-up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position. Further, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display may always be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first at the first timing. When the display of the effect display of is started, the chance-up display may not be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display may be displayed only at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first at the first timing. When the display of the effect display of is started, the chance-up display may be displayed at a display position other than the display position corresponding to the first position.

Further, the chance-up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position only when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, or the first at the first timing. The chance-up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position even when the display of the effect display of is not started.

When the chance-up display is displayed, the chance-up display may be continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the third position, or the chance-up display may be displayed. If so, the chance-up display may be configured before the cursor display reaches the third position.

In addition, "The first notice display is a display that may be moved [For example, as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10), the CUM preparation display MTY is moved and displayed. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the first notice display may perform the movement display, it may be possible to guide the line of sight to the first notice display and pay attention to the first notice display.

Here, the first notice display may be one that may display only the movement display, or may be a display other than the movement display. Further, the first notice display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may be one in which the movement display is not performed.

Further, "The display of the period display is started after the first notice display starts the movement display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A11), the CUM preparation display is displayed. CUM preparation display MTY is switched to chance up meter CMT after MTY moves and displays],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to grasp the timing at which the display of the period display is started.

Here, only the period display may be started after the first notice display starts the moving display, or the display other than the period display may be started after the first notice display starts the moving display. It may be started. Further, the display of the period display may always be started after the first notice display starts the moving display, or the display of the period display may not be started after the first notice display starts the moving display. There may be.

The period display may be moved.

Further, it may be notified that a certain period has started after the movement display of the first notice display is completed.

Further, the timing at which the movement display of the first notice display is started can be appropriately set.

Further, "The display position of the first notice display is changed by the movement display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10), the movement display of the CUM preparation display MTY changes the CUM. Preparing display MTY display position has been changed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display of the first notice display may be changed by changing the display position of the first notice display.

Here, only the display position of the first notice display may be changed by the movement display, or there may be a change other than the display position of the first notice display by the movement display. Further, the display position of the first notice display may be always changed by the movement display, or the display position of the first notice display may not be changed by the movement display.

Further, the display position of the first notice display may be changed only by the movement display, or the display position of the first notice display may be changed by a display other than the movement display.

In addition, "the first notice display may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3)].
The first notice display includes a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which the background color of the balloon constituting the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 171 (A3) is red, and the CUM shown in FIG. 178 (A1). The display mode in which the meter portion constituting the preparing display MTY is red, the display mode in which the character SBH of the balloon constituting the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 178 (B1) is red, and FIG. 178 (C1). The cursor that constitutes the CUM preparation display MTY to be shown may be displayed in the display mode, etc., which is the character HME of the princess.
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.
When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed as compared with the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Easy to confirm
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have expectations for the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed by looking at the display mode of the first notice display.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. You may. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. May be good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, the first display mode and the second display mode may be partially different display modes or all may be different display modes.

In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, only the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed as compared with the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easier to display, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is finally more than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. A symbol mode other than the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed in a definite manner. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally determined more than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easier to display, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is finally more than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be difficult to confirm the jackpot symbol mode.

When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally fixedly displayed, or the jackpot symbol mode may not be finally fixedly displayed. May be good. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may not always be confirmed and displayed in the end, or the jackpot symbol mode may be finally confirmed and displayed. There may be.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in one display mode.

Further, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and finally displayed in the order of the third display mode <second display mode <first display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be configured to be displayable in three or more display modes.

In addition, the ease with which the jackpot symbol mode is fixedly displayed does not have to change depending on the display mode of the first notice display.

In addition, "the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is more than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It is easy to start displaying the first effect display at the timing,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, depending on the display mode of the first notice display, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation as to whether or not the first effect display is displayed.

Here, the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is the first at the first timing than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Only the display of the effect display may be easily started, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Rather, it may be easier to start a display other than the display of the first effect display at the first timing. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first effect is performed at the first timing than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. The display of the display may always be easy to start, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is better than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. However, it may be difficult to start the display of the first effect display at the first timing.

When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the display of the first effect display may always be started at the first timing, or the first effect may be started at the first timing. The display of the display may not start.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the display of the first effect display does not necessarily have to be started at the first timing, and the first at the first timing. The display of the effect display may be started.

Further, "The first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. 172 (B1) to (B3). In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY displayed in the default display mode is ranked up by changing the background color of the balloon to red, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, it may be possible to give an expectation that the first notice display will change to the second display mode.

Here, the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change only to the second display mode, or the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may be changed. However, it may change to a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may be changed to the second display mode without fail, and the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may be changed to the second display mode. There may be cases where the display mode of is not changed.

Further, only the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode, or the first display mode displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode may be changed. The notice display of the above may also be changed to the second display mode.

The display mode of the first notice display may be changed by the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, the display mode may be changed by displaying and operating the operation promotion display including the button image. It may be changed, or the display mode may be changed by operating in the back button operation acceptance state in which the operation promotion display is not displayed.

Further, as a result of the other notice display being performed, the display mode of the first notice display may be changed, and the display mode of the first notice display may be suddenly changed without any particular effect such as the notice display being performed. May change.

In addition, it may be announced that the display mode of the first notice display will change depending on the period display.

In addition, the display mode of the first notice display after the change may be announced.

In addition, "the period display may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, the default display mode of the chance up meter shown in FIG. 162 (A11)].
The period display constitutes a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode in which the meter portion constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 175 (A6) is red, or a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (A1). The display mode in which the character SBH of the Sabohani is red, the display mode in which the background color of the placard at the final point GP constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (B1) is red, and the display mode in FIG. 176 (C1). The display mode in which the second checkpoint CP2 constituting the chance-up meter CMT shown is round and red, the display mode in which the background color of the “START !!” balloon shown in FIG. 176 (D1) is red, and the figure. It is a display that may be displayed in the display mode in which the princess character HME as the cursor constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in 176 (E1) is displayed].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes.
When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is the fourth display than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 178 (A1) to (A4), the higher the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY, the easier it is for the chance up meter CMT to be ranked, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the display mode of the first notice display.

Here, the period display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. .. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

Further, the third display mode and the fourth display mode may be partially different display modes or all may be different display modes.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is in the fourth display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easy to display only, and when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is larger than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. However, display modes other than the fourth display mode may be easily displayed. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is in the fourth display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may always be displayed, and when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is displayed more than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be difficult to display in the fourth display mode.

When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display may always be displayed in the fourth display mode, or the period display may not be displayed in the fourth display mode. There may be.

Further, when the subrogation notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display does not necessarily have to be displayed in the fourth display mode, and the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode. There may be.

In addition, "when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is displayed more than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. Easy to display in the third display mode,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is the third display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It may be easier to display only in, and when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period is larger than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. The display may be easily displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is in the third display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It may always be displayed, and when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is displayed more than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It may be difficult to display in the third display mode.

When the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display may always be displayed in the third display mode, or the period display may not be displayed in the third display mode. There may be.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display does not necessarily have to be displayed in the third display mode, and the period display is displayed in the third display mode. There may be cases.

Further, depending on the display mode of the first notice display, it may not be known whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. For example, the first display mode may be used. When there is only one display mode of the notice, it is unknown whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode.

In addition, "when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Cheap,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display variety of the period display may be different, so that the player who does not see the period display may be able to pay attention to the period display as a notice.

Here, even if only the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. It is good, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the symbol modes other than the jackpot symbol mode are finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. It may be easy. Further, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. However, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be more difficult to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. May be good.

When the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally fixedly displayed, or the big hit symbol may not be finally fixedly displayed.

Further, when the period display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may not always be fixedly displayed in the end, or the big hit symbol may be finally fixedly displayed.

In addition, "the period display may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, the default display mode of the chance up meter shown in FIG. 162 (A11)].
The period display constitutes a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode in which the meter portion constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 175 (A6) is red, or a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (A1). The display mode in which the character SBH of the Sabohani is red, the display mode in which the background color of the placard at the final point GP constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (B1) is red, and the display mode in FIG. 176 (C1). The display mode in which the second checkpoint CP2 constituting the chance-up meter CMT shown is round and red, the display mode in which the background color of the “START !!” balloon shown in FIG. 176 (D1) is red, and the figure. It is a display that may be displayed in the display mode in which the princess character HME as the cursor constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in 176 (E1) is displayed].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes.
When the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the period display may be different, so that the player who does not see the period display may be able to pay attention to the period display as a notice.

Here, the period display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. .. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

Further, the third display mode and the fourth display mode may be partially different display modes or all may be different display modes.

Further, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be easier to finally confirm and display only the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. However, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it is easier to finally confirm and display the symbol modes other than the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. You may. Further, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. However, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be more difficult to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. May be good.

When the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally fixedly displayed, or the big hit symbol may not be finally fixedly displayed.

Further, when the period display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may not always be fixedly displayed in the end, or the big hit symbol may be finally fixedly displayed.

Further, "One of the plurality of types of displays is a second notice display [for example, the display of the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 162 (A2) and the display of FIGS. 163 (A3) to (A5). The 襖 effect shown, the display of the explosion effect EF104 shown in FIG. 168 (A2), the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 179 (A2) to (A6), and the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 179 (B1) to (B3). Notice by the notice icon YI, notice by the navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 179 (C1) to (C2), notice by the mini game shown in FIGS. 179 (D1) to (D5), etc.]
The second notice display may be displayed before the first notice display is displayed.
The game table is characterized in that the second notice display is a display for notifying that the first notice display will be displayed. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the line of sight can be gradually focused on the period display, and the expectation may be gradually increased.

Here, only the second notice display may be displayed before the first notice display is displayed, or other than the second notice display before the first notice display is displayed. The display may also be displayed. Further, the second notice display may always be displayed before the first notice display is displayed, or the second notice display may not be displayed before the first notice display is displayed. May be good.

Further, the second notice display may be a notice only that the first notice display is displayed, or a notice other than the display of the first notice display. You may. Further, the second notice display may always give a notice that the first notice display will be displayed, or may not give a notice that the first notice display will be displayed. ..

When the second notice display is displayed, the first notice display may be displayed, or even if the second notice display is displayed, the first notice display may not be displayed. ..

In addition, "when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the first notice display is displayed without displaying the second notice display. It is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the second notice display will be displayed.

Here, the case where the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed is more final than the case where the first notice display is displayed without displaying the second notice display. It may be easy to confirm and display only the jackpot symbol mode, or when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display is not displayed. It may be easier to finally confirm and display a symbol mode other than the jackpot symbol mode than when one notice display is displayed. In addition, the case where the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed is more final than the case where the first notice display is displayed without the second notice display being displayed. It may be easy for the jackpot symbol mode to be displayed in a definite manner, and when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display is not displayed and the first notice display is displayed. It may be more difficult to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than when the notice display of is displayed.

If the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally confirmed and the jackpot symbol mode may not be finally confirmed. There may be cases.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed without displaying the second notice display, the jackpot symbol mode does not necessarily have to be confirmed and finally the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. May be the case.

Further, the ease with which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed may or may not be changed with or without the second notice display.

In addition, "the case where the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed is finally more than the case where the period display is displayed without the first notice display being displayed. It is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol mode,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the first notice display will be displayed.

Here, when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, only the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed than when the period display is displayed without the first notice display being displayed. May be easier to confirm, and when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, it is better than when the period display is displayed without the first notice display. Finally, it may be easy to confirm and display a symbol mode other than the jackpot symbol mode. In addition, when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is always finalized than when the period display is displayed without the first notice display. It may be easier to confirm, and when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, it is final than when the period display is displayed without the first notice display. In some cases, the jackpot symbol mode may not be fixedly displayed.

If the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally finalized, or the jackpot symbol mode may not be finalized. You may.

Further, when the period display is displayed without displaying the first notice display, the jackpot symbol mode may not always be confirmed and finally the jackpot symbol mode may be finally confirmed. There may be.

Further, "The display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display are at least partially the same display mode [for example, the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3) and FIG. 162 (A9). ), The display mode is at least the same as that of the chance-up meter CMT in that the Sabohani character SBH is arranged.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to remind the player of the relationship between the first notice display and the period display.

Here, the display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display may be partially the same display mode or all may be the same display mode.

Further, "The display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display are different display modes [for example, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9) has a checkpoint (first) on the gauge. The display mode is different from the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3) at least in that the checkpoints CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are displayed],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easier to distinguish between the first notice display and the period display.

Here, the display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display may be partially different display modes or all may be different display modes.

In addition, "By displaying the first notice display, it is announced that the period display will be displayed, so that the reach effect display will be displayed [for example, FIG. 162 (A3). ) ~ As shown in the figure (A9), it is announced that the reach effect display will be displayed by notifying that the effect by the chance up meter CMT will be performed by displaying the CUM preparation display MTY. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation for a big hit by displaying the first notice display.

Here, by notifying that the period display will be displayed by displaying the first notice display, it may be announced that only the reach effect display is displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed. By notifying that the period display will be displayed by displaying, it may be announced that the reach effect display is not displayed. In addition, by notifying that the period display will be displayed by displaying the first notice display, it may always be announced that the reach effect display will be displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed. By notifying that the period display will be displayed by being displayed, it may not be announced that the reach effect display will be displayed.

Further, by notifying that the period display will be displayed by displaying the first notice display, it may be announced that only the reach effect display will be displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed. By notifying that the period display will be displayed by being displayed, it may be foretold that a display other than the reach effect display will also be displayed.

Further, it may be announced that the reach effect display will be displayed only by notifying that the period display will be displayed by displaying the first notice display, or the first notice display may be displayed. In addition to notifying that the period display will be displayed by being displayed, it may be foretold that the reach effect display will be displayed.

Further, by notifying that only the period display is displayed by displaying the first notice display, it may be announced that the reach effect display will be displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed. It may be announced that the reach effect display will be displayed by notifying that the display other than the period display will be displayed by being displayed.

In addition, it may be announced that the reach effect display will be displayed by notifying that the period display will be displayed by displaying only the first notice display, or other than the first notice display. It may be announced that the period display will be displayed by displaying the notice display of, or that the reach effect display will be displayed.

In addition, "when it is announced that the period display will be displayed" may be "when it is purely foretold that the period display will be displayed", or "when the period display is foretold". It may be a case where it is an effect accompanying the reach effect display, and the reach effect display is directly announced and the period display is indirectly announced to be displayed. " It may be a case where the period display is directly foretold to be displayed in the future and the reach effect display is indirectly foretold. "

Further, "The first notice display and the period display may be started to be displayed in the same symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 162 (A3) to 162 (A9), a CUM preparation display is in progress. MTY and chance up meter CMT are started to be displayed while the same symbol variation display is being executed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easier to recognize when the period display is displayed.

Here, the first notice display and the period display may be started to be displayed only in the same symbol variation display, and the first notice display and the period display may be started to be displayed in different symbol variation displays. There may be cases. In addition, the first notice display and the period display may always start to be displayed in the same symbol variation display, and the first notice display and the period display may not start to be displayed in the same symbol variation display. There may be.

The first notice display may be displayed before one or more decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, may be displayed before the decorative symbol is in the intelligent state, or the reach effect display is started. It may be displayed before the period display is displayed, or it may be displayed before the period display is displayed.

Further, the first notice display may always be displayed in the same symbol variation display as the period display.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed in a symbol variation display different from the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed. For example, the first notice display is displayed in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed. Alternatively, it may be displayed in the symbol variation display after the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed.

Further, "The first notice display is a display that may be started in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the display of the period display is started [for example, FIG. 186 (Fig. 186). As shown in A3) to the same figure (A14), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed before the symbol variation display performed by the chance up meter CMT],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the first notice display functions as a look-ahead notice, and there is a case where a feeling of expectation for the symbol variation display to be executed later can be given.

Here, the first notice display may be started only in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the period display is started, or the period display may be started. The display may be started in a symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the display of is started. Further, the first notice display may be the one that is always started to be displayed in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the period display is started, or the period display is started to be displayed. The display may not be started in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display to be performed.

The first notice display may always be displayed in the symbol variation display prior to the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed in the same symbol variation display as the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed during the symbol stop display, or may be always displayed during the symbol stop display.

Further, "The first notice display is a display that is displayed even during the period of the symbol stop display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 163 (D3) to D6), the CUM preparation display MTY is a symbol. It is displayed even during stop display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation even during the period of the symbol stop display.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only during the period of the symbol stop display, or may be displayed during a period other than the period of the symbol stop display. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed during the period of the symbol stop display, or may not be displayed during the period of the symbol stop display.

In addition, "The first notice display is a display that is hidden during the period of the symbol stop display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 163 (C3) to (D7), the CUM preparation display MTY is It is hidden while the symbol is stopped, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the first notice display is hidden during the period of the symbol stop display, so that the game may be sharpened.

Here, the first notice display may be hidden only during the period of the symbol stop display, or may be hidden during a period other than the period of the symbol stop display. .. Further, the first notice display may be always hidden during the period of the symbol stop display, or may not be hidden even during the period of the symbol stop display.

When the symbol variation display is started, the first notice display may be displayed again.

In addition, "The first notice display is a continuous notice [for example, as shown in FIGS. 186 (A1) to (A16), before the symbol variation display in which the effect by the chance up meter CMT is performed. CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in each of the multiple symbol fluctuation displays performed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to raise the sense of expectation by continuously performing the first notice display.

In addition, "The first notice display is a display that may be started during the display of the reach effect display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation for the reach effect display.

Here, the first notice display may be started only during the display of the reach effect display, or may be started even during the display of a display other than the reach effect display. It may be one. Further, the first notice display may be one that is always started to be displayed during the display of the reach effect display, or may not be started to be displayed during the display of the reach effect display.

The first notice display may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display until a certain period is started, or may be displayed before the reach effect display is started. May be done.

Further, "The first notice display is a display that may be started before the display of the reach effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 162 (A3) to 162 (A4). In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed before reaching reach, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the first notice display is displayed before the display of the reach effect display starts, so that there is a sense of expectation that the reach effect display in which the period display is displayed will be displayed. Can be done.

Here, the first notice display may be started only before the display of the reach effect display is started, or may be started before the display of the reach effect display is started. The display may be started. Further, the first notice display may be always started before the display of the reach effect display is started, or may not be started before the display of the reach effect display is started. It may be a thing.

The first notice display may be started during the display of the reach effect display, or may be started before the reach effect display is started, and may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display. You may do so.

Further, the reach effect display is composed of a combination of the normal reach and the super reach, and the first notice display may be started during the execution of the normal reach performed before the start of the super reach, or the reach may be started. The display may be started during the symbol variation display before the effect display is started, and may be displayed until the period during which the normal reach in the reach effect display is executed.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "Whether the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed or the lost symbol mode is finally confirmed is determined by the jackpot determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol [for example, FIG. 53 (b) shows. It is configured to be determined by the special figure hit lottery process], the result of the jackpot determination does not change depending on the display mode of the variable icon, and the jackpot random number determination is provided on the game board. Obtained when a game ball enters the starting port [for example, the first special drawing starting port 230, the second special drawing starting port 232] [For example, in the winning opening receiving process in the winning opening winning process (step S508) shown in FIG. It is configured to be determined according to the result of the big hit lottery using the random numbers to be acquired [for example, special figure 1 winning random number value, special figure 1 random number value, special figure 2 winning random number value, special figure 2 random number value]. The probability of being judged as a big hit in the big hit lottery (hereinafter, referred to as "big hit probability") is predetermined [for example, the high probability table for winning / failing shown in FIG. 10A and the same figure. It is defined in the low probability table for hit / fail determination shown in (b)], and the jackpot probability does not change depending on the display mode of the variable icon. 』\
Was also explained.

Subsequently, an example of the effect applicable to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described so far will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 206. Here, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 194 to 206 to the above-mentioned technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 193, and vice versa. It is also possible to apply the above-mentioned technical idea shown in FIGS. 193 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 194 to 206. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

FIG. 194 shows the correspondence between the display mode (color) of the effect display on the effect device 206 and the notation used in the present specification and the drawings, and FIG. 194 shows the display color on the decorative symbol display device 208. The figure (b) shows the correspondence with the emission color in the light emitting means such as a full-color LED.

As shown in FIG. 194 (a), regarding the display color on the decorative symbol display device 208, the case where it is displayed as "blinking white" on the decorative symbol display device 208 is described as a "small dot" pattern in the present specification. In the drawing, it is indicated by hatching of few (coarse) dots (dots). Similarly, the case where the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed in "blue" is described as a "diagonal line" pattern in the present specification, is indicated by hatching of diagonal lines on the drawing, and is indicated by "green" in the decorative pattern display device 208. The case where it is displayed is described as a "diamond" pattern in this specification, it is indicated by a diamond-shaped hatching on the drawing, and the case where it is displayed in "red" on the decorative pattern display device 208 is described as "lattice" in this specification.
In the present specification, the pattern is described as a "vertical line" pattern, and the case where it is indicated by hatching of a lattice on the drawing and displayed in "gold" on the decorative pattern display device 208 is described as a vertical line pattern on the drawing. The case where it is indicated by hatching and displayed in "rainbow color" on the decorative pattern display device 208 is described as a "multi-point" pattern in the present specification, and is indicated by hatching of many (fine) dots in the drawing. Or, it is described as a "horizontal line" pattern, and is indicated by horizontal line hatching on the drawing.

Further, the case where the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed by "default (color)" is indicated by a notation other than these (for example, no pattern and white).

Further, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), the case where the light emitting color of the light emitting means such as the full-color LED built in the family crest accessory 224E or the like is displayed as "white lighting" in the light emitting means is described in the present specification. It is described as a "small point" pattern, and is indicated by hatching of small (coarse) dots (dots) on the drawing. Similarly, the case where the light emitting means is displayed in "blue lighting" is described as a "diagonal line" pattern in the present specification, the case is indicated by hatching of the diagonal line in the drawing, and the case where the light emitting means is displayed in "green lighting". Is described as a "diamond" pattern in the present specification, is indicated by a diamond-shaped hatching on the drawing, and is displayed as "lit in red" in the light emitting means, which is described as a "lattice" pattern in the present specification. The upper part is indicated by hatching of a lattice, and the case where it is displayed as "gold lit" in the light emitting means is described as a "vertical line" pattern in the present specification, and is indicated by the hatching of vertical lines in the drawing, and the "rainbow" is indicated in the light emitting means. In this specification, the case of being displayed as "lit (rainbow flash)" is described as a "multi-point" pattern, and is indicated by hatching of many (fine) dots on the drawing, or is described as a "horizontal line" pattern. On the drawing, it is indicated by horizontal line hatching. Further, the case where the light emitting means is "turned off" is described as a "white-painted" pattern in the specification, and is indicated by a notation other than these (for example, no pattern and white) on the drawing.

In the example of the effect described below, unless otherwise specified, the display means is configured by, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 14 or the like, and any one of them. Notice icon, notice display, mini game A icon, mini game B icon, hold icon, variable icon, icon change notice display, chance up meter, timer notice, etc. can be displayed by one or two or all decorative symbol display devices. Here is an example that is displayed. First, these will be explained in order.

FIG. 195 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect using the chance up meter.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 195 (A1) to 195 (A7) are production examples following FIG. 29 (9).

FIG. 195 (A1) shows a state in which the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and after the button effect is started, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started. Here, the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the second checkpoint CP2, and stops at the second checkpoint CP2 until the player operates the button or the operation validity period elapses, but does not stop. You may do it.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 195 (A2), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (A3), the player causes the player to use the remaining time display meter MT. When the effect button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 195 (A4), the cut-in image (gold cut-in image) CI3 of the lord is displayed, and a notice effect is performed to notify that the jackpot reliability is high. .. In this production example, the gold cut-in image CI3 has an outer frame represented by a “vertical line” pattern. The cut-in image CI3 displayed in this production example is different from the cut-in image CI3 of the lord shown in FIG. 29, and is displayed on the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. Therefore, the animation display of the duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman in the swordsman reach and the chance up meter CMT are hidden because they are overlapped by this cut-in image CI3. That is, since the cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the front side of the chance up meter CMT and the animation display of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the villain's swordsman in the swordsman reach, the hero's lord and the enemy's role in the swordsman reach It can be said that it is difficult to see the animation display of the duel scene with the swordsman and the chance up meter CMT. In this way, in this production example, it was shown that the chance-up meter CMT is overlapped by the display of the chance-up notice that appeared by the production of this chance-up meter CMT, but the display of the chance-up notice is the chance-up meter CMT. May be overlapped by. This is also applicable in the above description and in the following description. Instead of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 195 (A4), a weak cut-in image CI3b (see FIG. 182 (A13)) having a lower reliability than the gold cut-in image CI3 may be displayed. .. The gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 195 (A4) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the effect button 136 may be displayed during the operation valid period. It may be displayed whenever it is operated in. Further, the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 195 (A4) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated, or the effect button 136 may be displayed. May be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without being operated, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated. If the operation valid period elapses without the button 136 being operated, the weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3. Further, in this production example, when the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed, the chance up meter CMT is not hidden by the gold cut-in image CI3 and is displayed visibly. In this production example, while the gold cut-in image CI3 is being displayed, the chance-up meter CMT is displayed on the layer on the back side of the gold cut-in image CI3, and in that state, the Sabohani as the cursor of the chance-up meter CMT is displayed. Although the display control is performed so that the character SBH is advanced, the character SBH of Sabohani may not be advanced, or the display control in which the chance up meter CMT is not arranged in the layer on the back side of the gold cut-in image CI3 is performed. You may do it.

The effect shown in FIG. 195 (A5) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 29 (14), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L originally has a “chance-up gold cut-in” in the vicinity of the character SBH of the balloon. A balloon with the characters "" is displayed, but in this production example, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that it is hidden. In addition, in the case where the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, even if the effect button 136 is not operated, the effect button 136 is not operated. It may be possible to notify that a notice of chance up has occurred in the same manner as when is operated. In this case, since the chance-up meter CMT is not overlapped by the gold cut-in image CI3, the chance-up meter CMT is displayed as shown in FIG. 29 (14). In addition, it is not necessary to notify that a chance-up notice has occurred, and only a part of the chance-up notice has occurred (for example, the balloon is not displayed and only the characters "UP" are displayed. ) May.

The effect shown in FIG. 195 (A6) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 29 (15). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance-up meter CMT is originally marked in red. At the same time, the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the notice is shown, but in this production example, Since the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the entire display screen, it is also hidden.

The gold cut-in image CI3 is erased in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The state of being done is shown. In addition, Sabohani's character SBH has started moving. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (17) and later are performed.

FIGS. 195 (B1) to 195 (B3) show different production patterns of the effects shown in FIGS. (A4) to (A6), and the gold cut-in image CI3 is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that the display is not the entire display screen, but the upper and lower edge portions are left.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (B1), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and a notice effect is performed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. In this production example, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed leaving the upper and lower edges of the display screen, and in the area where the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed, the main character in the swordsman reach and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. It is said that the animation display of the duel scene and a part of the chance up meter CMT can be visually recognized. In other words, it can be said that a part of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by the gold cut-in image CI3. Therefore, it may be possible to grasp the status of the checkpoint (whether or not the checkpoint is filled, etc.), which is the point at which the chance-up notice occurs. In this production example, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed in a manner in which it is difficult to visually recognize the state of the Sabohani character SBH as a cursor, but a part or all of the Sabohani character SBH can be visually recognized, and there is a chance. It may be possible to grasp the progress of the production of the upmeter CMT. In addition, a part or all of the characters "UP" displayed at the checkpoint may be visible, and in this case, it may be possible to grasp whether or not the chance-up notice has occurred. Further, a part or all of the final point GP may be visible. In addition, when the progress of the chance-up notice effect is grasped by the decrease of the gauge, a part or all of the meters displaying the gauge can be visually recognized to grasp the progress. You may be able to do it. In addition, part or all of the balloons of the Sabohani character SBH may be visible, and the type of chance-up notice that has occurred may or may not be grasped. You may do it. While the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the chance up meter CMT may be erased to hide it.

The effect shown in FIG. 195 (B2) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 195 (A5), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L originally has a “chance-up gold cut-in” in the vicinity of the character SBH of the balloon. A balloon with the characters "" is displayed, but in this production example, it is hidden because it is overlapped by the gold cut-in image CI3.

The effect shown in FIG. 195 (B3) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. (A6). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a part of the lower part of the chance up meter CMT is displayed, and the chance up meter is displayed. It is displayed that the second checkpoint CP2 in the CMT is marked in red. However, in this production example, since the upper part of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by the gold cut-in image CI3, the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice is hidden. It is said that. After that, for example, the effects shown in the figure (A7) and after are performed.

FIGS. 195 (C1) to 195 (C6) are production examples following FIG. 29 (16).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (C1), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the third checkpoint CP3.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (C2), in this production example, unlike the production shown in FIG. 29 (18), a big button image 136aL is displayed instead of the lever image 136V, and the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed. A balloon with the words "Chance Up Big Button" is displayed on the screen, notifying that the notice has started with a highly reliable button effect. However, in this production example, the deca button image 136aL is displayed occupying most of the display screen, and a part of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by the deca button image 136aL. Therefore, the balloon of Sabohani's character SBH is hidden, and the appearance of the characters "Chance Up Big Button" is not visible. In addition, a part of Sabohani's character SBH is also hidden by the big button image 136aL. In this case, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed overlapping (overlapping) on the front side of the deca button image 136aL, and in this case, the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH may be visible. .. Further, only a part of the displays constituting the chance-up meter CMT may be displayed overlapping with the chance-up meter CMT. For example, the character SBH of Sabohani constituting the chance-up meter CMT may be displayed. Or, only the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed overlapping with the deca button image 136aL.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (C3), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the deca button image 136aL, and the button effect is started. At this time, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed superimposed on the lower end portion of the deca button image 136aL, but the display position is not limited to this, and can be arranged at an appropriate position. Further, although the remaining time display meter MT in this effect example has the same size as that in the figure (A1), it may be displayed in a large size corresponding to the size of the deca button image 136aL. When displaying the deca button image 136aL, the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed, or a plurality of remaining time display meters MT can be displayed, and the plurality of remaining time display meters MT are displayed at the same time. There may be a state of being. For example, when the effect button 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed integrally, when the deca button 136aL is displayed, the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed in a large size in proportion to the size. In addition, in the configuration in which the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed separately, when the deca button 136aL is displayed, the remaining time display meter MT is adjusted according to the size. May also be increased.

In FIG. 195 (C4), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the operation of the effect button 136 by the player can be accepted. At this time, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it. A part of the characters "UP" is hidden in the big button image 136aL, which makes it difficult to see. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. The character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third checkpoint CP3 until the player operates the effect button 136 or the operation valid period elapses.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 195 (C5) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani is located in front of the final point GP, but it is overlapped by the big button image 136aL, and it is considered difficult to see. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (C6) within the operation valid period, for example, the effects after FIG. 29 (23) are performed.

FIGS. 195 (D1) to 195 (D5) show another effect pattern following the figure (C1).

When the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3, as shown in FIG. 195 (D1), in this production example, the combined animation of the lever image 136V is started, and it is translucent from the lower left and upper right of the display screen, respectively. The lever image 136Vq appears. At the timing shown in FIG. 195 (D1), the semi-transparent lever image 136Vq displayed at the lower left overlaps the chance-up meter CMT, and since the lever image is translucent, the chance-up meter CMT is visually recognized thinly. It is in a state where it can be done. Here, the combined animation may be referred to as an introduction animation of lever production or a fade-in animation (IN animation). The semi-transparent lever image 136Vq notifies that the lever image 136Va is materialized and the lever effect is started by being united. The pair of translucent lever images 136Vq are moving toward the center while being close to each other. In this production example, an example in which two translucent lever images 136Vq are united has been described. However, for example, an effect in which four translucent lever images 136Vq are united may be performed. In this case, two halves may be performed. It is easier for the lever image 136Va to be materialized and the lever effect to be started when the effect of combining the four translucent lever images 136Vq is performed than when the effect of combining the transparent lever images 136Vq is performed. It may be. While the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect lever 136V is not yet accepted. Here, the lever image displayed in the IN animation does not have to have transparency.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (D2), it is shown that the pair of translucent lever images 136Vq are even closer to each other.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (D3), when the pair of translucent lever images 136Vq overlap each other, the effect EF301 is displayed so as to cover most of the display screen as shown in FIG. 195 (D4). The effect EF301 covers at least a part of the chance-up meter CMT, as if it covers the entire pair of translucent lever images 136Vq. The chance up meter CMT may be displayed overlapping with the effect EF301.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (D5), the effect EF301 is erased and the lever image 136V appears, and a balloon with the characters “chance up lever” is added near the character SBH of Sabohani. It is displayed to inform that the notice by lever production has started. In this production example, unlike the production shown in FIG. 29 (18), the lever image 136V is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH, and the lever image 136V overlaps. Although it is said that the balloon is more difficult to see than in the non-displayed state, the lever image 136V is displayed overlapping with the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH, as in the effect shown in FIG. 29 (18). Good. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (19) and later are performed.

In this production example, when the display related to the chance-up notice is displayed, a part or all of the chance-up meter CMT is hidden by this display, or the chance-up meter CMT is hidden. , The chance-up meter CMT may be configured not to be hidden (or hidden) by the display related to the chance-up notice. The same can be applied to the timer notice described above or described later.

FIG. 196 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of the effect performed in the present embodiment.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 196 (A1) to 196 (A9), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is located below the decorative pattern display device 208 instead of the family crest accessory 224E. It is said that it is arranged in. The sub display device 208S is arranged so that the upper end thereof is lower than the lower end of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps the sub display device 208S. There is no such thing. Further, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 196 (A1) has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 on the chance-up meter CMT, and then the button effect is started. , It is shown that the operation validity period has started. That is, the effect shown in FIG. 196 (A1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 29 (10). Further, on the sub-display device 208S, the characters "vs swordsman" are displayed to notify the type of super reach. At this time, since the decorative symbol display device 208 does not overlap with the sub display device 208S, the chance up meter CMT, the button image 136a constituting the button effect, and the remaining time display meter MT are easily visible.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 196 (A2) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 196 (A3), the player directs the effect. When the button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 196 (A4), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the entire display screen of the sub-display device 208S. Further, in FIG. 196 (A4), the sub display device 208S moves upward with the gold cut-in image CI3 displayed, and the upper half overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. Therefore, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped by the sub-display device 208S, and it is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 196 (A4). In this case, the sub-display device 208S may or may not rise. Further, the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 196 (A4) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the effect button 136 may be operated. It may be displayed whenever it is operated within the valid period. Further, the sub display device 208S may be raised when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the sub display device may be displayed even if the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated. The device 208S may be made to rise without fail. Further, the sub-display device 208S may be raised only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Further, the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 196 (A4) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated, or the effect button 136 may be displayed. May be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without being operated, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated.

After that, the sub-display device 208S continues the ascending operation, and as shown in FIG. 196 (A5), the sub-display device 208S stops in a manner of overlapping at substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the support member supporting the sub-display device 208S is the chance up meter C.
Although a part of MT is overlapped, the main body of the sub display device 208S does not overlap with the meter part of the chance up meter CMT, and the chance up meter CMT is higher than that during the ascending operation of the sub display device 208S. It is said to be easy to see. That is, it can be said that the chance-up meter CMT is more difficult to see during the ascending operation of the sub-display device 208S because there are more areas hidden by the sub-display device 208S than after the ascending operation is completed. The sub-display device 208S that has completed the ascending operation and moved to the maximum operating position may be configured so that at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped. Further, the display area of the sub display device 208S may be configured to be overlapped by the decorative symbol display device 208, another effect movable body, or the like. Further, the area of the chance up meter CMT hidden by the sub-display device 208S may be larger after the completion of the ascending operation of the sub-display device 208S than during the ascending operation. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a balloon with the characters "Chance up gold cut-in" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to notify that a notice has been given by displaying the gold cut-in image CI3. However, at least a part of the display position of the balloon overlaps with the sub display device 208S, which makes it difficult to see. The display position of the balloon may be a position that does not overlap with the sub display device 208S. Also, the balloon may be hidden.

After that, as shown in FIG. 196 (A6), the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance-up meter CMT is marked in red, and the appearance of the chance-up notice has increased the reliability of the jackpot. Is displayed above it, indicating the history of the chance-up notice. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, at this time, the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani was erased, but the area where the balloon was displayed overlapped with the sub-display device 208S, so that mode was difficult to recognize. In some cases.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 196 (A7), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, in the sub display device 208S, after switching the display from the gold cut-in image CI3 to the character display of "vs swordsman", the descending operation is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 196 (A7), the sub display device 208S The main body is positioned so as to overlap at least a part of the front side of the meter portion of the chance-up meter CMT, and the chance-up meter CMT is difficult to see. The gold cut-in image CI3 may be switched to the character display of "vs swordsman" after the lowering operation of the sub display device 208S is started, or the gold cut-in may be switched after the lowering operation of the sub display device 208S is completed. You may switch from the image CI3 to the character display of "vs swordsman".

FIG. 196 (A8) shows that the sub-display device 208S is continuously lowered. At this time, the movement display of the Sabohani character SBH on the chance up meter CMT is also performed.

FIG. 196 (A9) shows a state in which the lowering operation of the sub-display device 208S is completed and the initial position is reached. At this time, since the decorative symbol display device 208 does not overlap with the sub display device 208S, it may be easy to see. After that, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (17) and later are performed.

As described above, in this production example, an example of displaying the gold cut-in image CI3 as a chance-up notice is shown on the sub-display device 208S, but the display device for displaying the gold cut-in image CI3 is the above-mentioned decorative symbol display. The display may be performed not only on the device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N) and the sub display device 208S, but also on other types of display devices, for example, FIG. 15 (C4). The POV display 224I shown in the above may be used, or the light emitting of the light guide plate IL may be used for light emission. Further, as shown in FIG. 14B, the display device is composed of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The third decorative symbol display device 208N may be moved to a position close to the display device to display a chance-up notice such as a gold cut-in image CI3 over these display devices. Here, the adjacent positions may be the positions where the two display devices are in contact with each other, or the two display devices may be close to each other but have a gap.

FIGS. 196 (B1) to 196 (B4) are production examples following FIG. 20 (8).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (B1), after the character "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side on the middle symbol. Is shown. The low-speed movement of the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously performed until the same figure (B3), but in this production example, as shown in FIG. 196 (B2), unlike the production example shown in FIG. The display TM1 is not erased, and the timer notice display TM1 shows the character of the lord and "continue" as shown in FIG. 194 (B4) after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 196 (B3). It is displayed until it switches to the cut-in display consisting of the character display. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the pseudo-continuous symbol as the notice effect display executed as a result of the timer notice being performed. The pseudo-continuous symbols may be overlapped by the timer notice display TM1. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (13) and later are performed. In addition, the pseudo-ream symbol may be framed out downward without being stopped and displayed. If the pseudo-ream symbol is framed out downward, the pseudo-ream is not started and the decorative symbol is lost as it is. The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach state may be reached and the reach effect may be started. As described above, in this production example, the timer is announced to announce that the pseudo-ream will be started after the countdown is completed.

FIGS. 196 (C1) to 196 (C4) are production examples following FIG. 20 (6).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (C1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196 (C2), in this production example, unlike the production example shown in FIG. 20 (8), the characters "Ikuze !!" are added together with the display YMF of the face of the lord. A balloon is displayed. At this time, "00:00" is still displayed on the timer notice display TM1, but at least a part of it is hidden by the balloon, which makes it difficult to see. The timer notice display TM1 may overlap the balloons so that the timer notice display TM1 can be visually recognized. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be deleted at the timing when the up display YMF of the lord's face and the balloon are displayed, or the up display YMF and the balloon of the lord's face may be deleted after the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. May be displayed. Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 196 (C2), a part of the timer notice display TM1 is covered with a balloon, but the entire timer notice display TM1 may be covered with a balloon. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden by the up display YMF of the lord's face.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (C3), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is erased.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (C4), the display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is started. When the pseudo-continuous symbol overlaps with the balloon, at least a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden by the balloon. That is, the close-up display YMF and the balloon of the lord's face are displayed on the front side rather than the pseudo-continuous pattern. It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous pattern may be displayed on the front side rather than the close-up display YMF and the balloon of the lord's face. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (10) and later are performed. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is deleted while the balloon with the characters "Ikuze !!" is displayed together with the up display YMF of the lord's face. In this way, the timer is displayed. The fact that the timer notice display is deleted from the display displayed after the countdown by the notice display becomes 0 means that the embodiment of the timer notice effect described so far and the embodiment of the timer notice effect described later will be described. Needless to say, it can also be applied to.

FIGS. 196 (D1) to (D3) show another example of the effect shown in FIGS. (C2) to (C4).

FIG. 196 (D1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (C2), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the cut-in image CI7 is used instead of the close-up display YMF and the balloon display of the lord's face. Is displayed. This cut-in image CI7 has a square shape surrounded by an outer frame with a grid pattern, and a close-up of the face of the lord is displayed in the lower left corner, and the characters "Ikuze !!" are displayed in the vicinity. It is notified that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous production will be started. Here, the cut-in image CI7 hides the entire timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is hidden by the cut-in image CI7. There are a plurality of types of display modes of the cut-in image CI7, and depending on the display mode, a part or all of the timer notice display TM1 may be visible. Further, the cut-in image CI7 is displayed so as to overlap with the UI unit UI, and the cut-in image CI7 suppresses the deterioration of the visibility of the UI unit UI. Further, the UI portion UI may be overlapped by the cut-in image CI7, and at least a part thereof may be hidden.

FIG. 196 (D2) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (C3), and the timer notice display TM1 is erased, but the state is difficult to recognize because it is hidden by the cut-in image CI7.

FIG. 196 (D3) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (C4), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the pseudo-continuous symbol is moving at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side in the middle symbol. It is shown. At this time, the cut-in image CI7 overlaps the pseudo-continuous symbols, that is, hides at least a part of the pseudo-continuous symbols. After that, for example, the cut-in image CI7 is erased, and the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (10) and later are performed. It should be noted that at least a part of the UI unit UI may be overlapped at a certain timing of the cut-in image CI7.

FIG. 197 is a diagram showing an example of the timer advance notice effect step by step.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 197 (A1) to 197 (A12) are production examples following FIG. 20 (3).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A1), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is counted down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (A1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "05". It is ": 00", which indicates that 5 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A2), it is shown that the cut-in image CI8 in which the characters “button STOCK !!” are displayed is displayed. That is, it is notified that the notice item that triggers the start of the button effect is stocked. The cut-in image CI8 is displayed so as to occupy most of the display area, leaving a part of the upper and lower edge edges of the display area. Therefore, the first decorative symbol and the timer notice display TM1 are hidden and hidden by the cut-in image CI8. At this time, although the timer notice display TM1 is hidden, the countdown is continuously performed. Further, the UI unit UI is displayed on the front side of the cut-in image CI8, and the deterioration of visibility due to the cut-in image CI8 is suppressed. In addition, instead of displaying the cut-in image CI8, or together with the display of the cut-in image CI, the effect display by the effect movable body 224 such as the family crest accessory 224E or the effect display by the light guide plate IL may be performed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by another effect display that is not related to the timer notice effect. The timer notice display TM1 may be arranged on the front side of the cut-in image CI8.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A3), the cut-in image CI8 is erased and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. At this time, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "03:91". In addition, the stock button image 136aST as a notice item is displayed below the timer notice display TM1, and the character "x1" is displayed above it, indicating that the button effect will be performed at least once. It has been notified. That is, it is shown that one execution of the button effect is stocked.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A4), after "decoration 7" is stopped on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is reached, the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00". It is shown that the countdown is completed and the word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice.

Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (A5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF302 is displayed so as to surround the stock button image 136aST, and a state in which the button digestion animation is performed is shown. There is. This button digestion animation notifies that the button effect is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the stock button image 136aST as a notice item is digested as a result of the timer notice effect being performed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A6), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 197 (A7), the stock button image displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. An animation is displayed in which 136aST moves to the center while expanding.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A8), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, indicating that the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (A9), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 197 (A10) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (A11), the player directs the effect. When the button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 197 (A12), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continue" is performed. In this production example, it is notified that the pseudo continuous production is executed by succeeding in the button production in this way. In some cases, the button effect may fail. In this case, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be started, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed, or the reach state may be reached and the reach effect may be produced. May start. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the button effect is started by performing the timer advance notice effect, and the pseudo continuous effect is started by succeeding in this button effect. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (13) and later are performed.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 197 (B1) to 197 (B10) are production examples following FIG. 20 (4).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (B1), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is counted down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (B1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00". : 01 ”is shown. In the first decorative symbol, all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are being displayed in a variable manner.

After that, in this production example, after the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 stops at "00:01", as shown in FIG. 197 (B2), the timer notice display TM1 displays "00:01". Instead, a "pause display" with the characters "pause" is displayed along with a so-called "pause button" mark, indicating that the timer display countdown has been interrupted. A "pause display" may be displayed separately from the timer notice display TM1 in which the remaining time ("00:01") is displayed. In this case, the "pause display" may be arranged above the timer notice display TM1 or may be displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the timer notice display TM1. In this production example, after that, the first pseudo-continuous production is performed, and the second variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. During that time, the "pause display" is continuously displayed. While the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted, the remaining time display and the "pause display" may be displayed alternately.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (B3), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed, and the start of the second pseudo-continuous production is notified. Even at this time, the "pause display" is continuously displayed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (B4), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "x3" indicating that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started is displayed below the second decorative symbol.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (B5), the left symbol and the right symbol show that the “decoration 7” is stopped and is in the reach state, respectively. At this time as well, the "pause display" is continuously displayed.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 197 (B6), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and in the UI section UI, the display area is left with the variable icon h0. Frame out below. The movement display of the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol may start at the same timing as the start of the frame-out display of the UI unit UI, or the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol may start. After the movement display starts, the frame-out display of the UI part UI may start, or after the frame-out display of the UI part UI starts, the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed. You may start.

After that, the timer notice display TM1 switches from the "pause display" to the timer display indicating the remaining time, and the countdown of the timer display is restarted. Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (B7), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 197 (B8), the timer notice display TM1 gives a notice instead of the timer display. The word "Attention !!" is displayed to encourage attention to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (B9), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to see. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. Further, in this production example, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 displayed as "Attention !!" is overlapped by the 2nd large board behavior character 224Gb and the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, which makes it difficult to see. There is. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. In addition, there may be cases where the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate. After that, as shown in FIG. 197 (B10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 16 (23) and later are performed.

In this production example, an example in which the "pause display" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is shown. For example, as shown in FIGS. 197 (C1) to (C2), the timer display countdown is increased. When interrupted, the pause display PAUSE may be displayed separately from the timer notice display TM1. The effects shown in FIGS. 197 (C1) to (C2) are examples of other effects performed following FIG. (B1), and are the same as the effects performed in FIGS. (B2) to (B6). It corresponds. The pause display PAUSE shown in FIG. 197 (C1) is a horizontal rectangular display with chamfered four corners, and has a mode in which a "pause button" mark and "pause" characters are displayed in the frame. It is displayed large in the center of the display screen. At this time, the pause display PAUSE overlaps the timer notice display TM1 so as to hide at least a part of the timer notice display TM1, making the timer notice display TM1 difficult to see. When the pause display PAUSE is displayed, the timer notice notice display TM1 may be moved and displayed, and may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the pause display PAUSE. After that, for example, the effects shown in the figure (B7) and after are performed.

Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 197 (D1) to (D2), when the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, the pause display PAUSE is displayed, and then the pause display PAUSE is reduced to give a timer notice. An animation display that moves to the position where the display TM1 is displayed may be performed, and then a "pause display" may be performed on the timer notice display TM1. The effects shown in FIGS. 197 (D1) to (D2) are another example of the effects performed following the same figure (B1). After the effect shown in FIG. 197 (D2) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 197 (B3) and thereafter is performed. When it is time to restart the countdown of the timer display, the pause display PAUSE may be enlarged and displayed again, and then the countdown may be restarted.

FIG. 198 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of the effect performed in the present embodiment.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 198 (A1) to 198 (A10), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is located below the decorative pattern display device 208 instead of the family crest accessory 224E. It is said that it is arranged in. The sub display device 208S is arranged so that the upper end thereof is lower than the lower end of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps the sub display device 208S. There is no such thing. Further, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 198 (A1) to 198 (A10) show an example of a timer advance notice effect using the sub-display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the sub-display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. At the timing shown in FIG. 198 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. In this production example, these may be referred to as UI parts. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (A2), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer advance notice effect is started. "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect will be started when 10 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. In this production example, the countdown is started when the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is started, but after the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. 198 (A3)). You may want to start the countdown (after that).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 198 (A3) to 198 (A4), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". As shown in FIG. 198 (A4), before the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", "decoration 7" is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed. ing.

Then, in FIG. 198 (A5), in the sub-display device 208S, the face image YMF of the character of the lord with the balloon line "Ikuze !!" is displayed instead of the display of the UI unit. Further, in FIG. 198 (A5), the sub-display device 208S moves upward from the initial position while displaying the face image YMF and the balloon of the character of the lord, and at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (A5), the upper half is decorated. It is in a state of overlapping with the front side of the symbol display device 208. In some cases, the sub-display device 208S may not perform the ascending operation.

After that, the sub-display device 208S continues the ascending operation, and as shown in FIG. 198 (A6), the sub-display device 208S stops in a manner of overlapping at substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the main body of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to see. At this time, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed to a position that does not overlap with the sub display device 208S. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is more difficult to see after the completion of the ascending operation of the sub-display device 208S because there are more areas hidden by the sub-display device 208S than during the ascending operation. It should be noted that the area of the timer notice display TM1 hidden by the sub display device 208S may be larger during the ascending operation of the sub display device 208S than after the ascending operation of the sub display device 208S is completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 198 (A7), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. The timer notice display TM1 may be erased when the sub display device 208S is in the maximum moving position, or the timer notice display TM1 may be erased during the ascending operation or the lowering operation of the sub display device 208S. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may not be erased during the ascending operation or the descending operation of the sub display device 208S.

Then, as shown in FIG. 198 (A8), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying the pseudo-continuous symbol moving at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side on the middle symbol. However, as shown in FIG. 198 (A8), since the main body of the sub-display device 208S is arranged on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device, in the region where the pseudo-continuous symbol overlaps with the sub-display device 208S, It is hidden by the sub-display device 208S and is difficult to see. After that, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub-display device 208S starts the descending operation, and at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (A9), the area where the pseudo-continuous symbol and the sub-display device 208S overlap is reduced, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is reduced. May be easier to see. Further, when the sub-display device 208S starts the descending operation, the display can be switched from the face image YMF and the balloon of the character of the lord to the display of the UI part, but the sub-display is performed after the sub-display device 208S starts the descending operation. The display on the device 208S may be switched from the face image YMF and the balloon of the character of the lord to the UI unit. Further, after the lowering operation of the sub-display device 208S is completed, the face image YMF and the balloon of the character of the lord may be switched to the UI unit.

FIG. 198 (A10) shows a state in which the lowering operation of the sub-display device 208S is completed and the initial position is reached. At this time, since the decorative symbol display device 208 does not overlap with the sub display device 208S, it may be easy to see. After that, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (12) and later are performed.

As described above, in this production example, an production display (display of the face image YMF of the character of the lord and a balloon) for notifying that the pseudo continuous production is performed is shown in the sub display device 208S. The display device for displaying is not limited to the above-mentioned decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L to third decorative symbol display device 208N) and sub-display device 208S, and may be displayed on other types of display devices. For example, the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 15 (C4) may be used, or the light emitting of the light guide plate IL may be used for light emission. Further, as shown in FIG. 14B, the display device is composed of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The third decorative symbol display device 208N may be moved to a position close to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the above-mentioned effect display may be performed over these display devices.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 198 (B1) to 198 (B13) are production examples following FIG. 162 (A2). In this production example, it is shown that the pre-reading notice is being performed by the chance up meter CMT.

As shown in FIG. 198 (B1), in this production example, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, unlike FIG. 162 (A3), the chance up meter CMT is displayed instead of the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that it is. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed not during the reach effect but during the variable display of the normal decorative pattern. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 198 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a specific notice may occur. In other words, the 1st checkpoint CP1 to the 3rd checkpoint CP3 can be said to indicate the chance-up point indicating the chance-up occurrence location, and the chance-up meter CMT indicates the chance-up occurrence location during the symbol variation display. It can also be said that it is a meter display that suggests. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, either the result of a big hit or a loss is derived, or some kind of hot production. It suggests that it will be done. It should be noted that the balloon of "STANDBY" by the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed before the production by the chance up meter CMT is started.

FIG. 198 (B2) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started moving. Here, the progress speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the production, but it may be constant. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. The balloon "START !!" may not be displayed. Further, by displaying the balloon "START !!", it may be announced that the chance-up notice is likely to occur at the checkpoints CP1 to CP3.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (B3), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the starting point SP.

After that, as shown in FIG. 198 (B4), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are simultaneously stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 198 (B5). Temporarily stop with the combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 7-Decoration 1-Decoration 1". That is, the chance eye as a look-ahead notice is displayed. In this production example, a plurality of types of chance eyes are prepared, and in particular, the combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 7-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is a highly reliable strong chance eye. That is, in this production example, it is shown that a notice of chance up (pre-reading notice) due to the appearance of a chance eye is performed. In addition, not only the strong chance eye but also the weak chance eye may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the chance may be increased or not.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (B5), a balloon with the characters "Chance up strong chance eyes !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and a strong chance of chance up is displayed. It informs that a visual notice has been given. The balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani may be started to be displayed at the timing when the chance eye is stopped, or the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed after the chance eye is stopped and displayed. The chance eye may be stopped and displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of the above is started. The Sabohani character SBH is animated to wait at the first checkpoint CP1 while the chance eye is displayed, but it may be animated to proceed without stopping. The decorative symbol is maintained in a temporarily stopped state by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1".

After that, as shown in FIG. 198 (B6), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the appearance of the notice has increased the reliability of the jackpot. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The decorative symbol is maintained in a temporarily stopped state by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (B7), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is erased, and the temporary stop state is maintained by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 1-Decoration 1". .. The standby animation of Sabohani's character SBH continues.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B8), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 1-Decoration 1". Correspondingly, the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of decorative symbols. In this production example, the animation in the chance up meter CMT is interrupted during the final display of the symbol, and it may be easily recognized that the symbol is stopped and displayed. When the standby animation for producing the character SBH of Sabohani is in the standby state is performed, the standby animation may be continuously performed or may be interrupted. At this time, the placard is stopped and displayed with a question mark attached, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, some kind of hot production will be performed. The animation of the rotation of the placard at the final point GP may be continuously performed or interrupted. After that, as shown in FIG. 198 (B9), the variable icon h0 is erased. In this production example, the animation in the chance up meter CMT may be continuously performed without interruption even during the final display of the symbol.

In FIG. 198 (B10), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) arranged in the first stage hs1 is changed. It moves on hs0 and is displayed as a variable icon h0. In this production example, since the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the hold icon display area, a part of the movement animation of the hold icon h11 cannot be visually recognized. When the movement animation of the hold icon h11 is performed, the hold icon h11 may be displayed on the front side of the chance up meter CMT so that the movement animation can be visually recognized. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol has also started. Further, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the animation in the chance up meter CMT is restarted, and the Sabohani character SBH also resumes the progress.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (B11), the No. 1 shown in FIG. 119 (b). 6 "Gold bomber" icon IHI appears on the right edge of the screen, showing that the pending change animation has started. That is, the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the pending change animation in this production example, while the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" flies from right to left, a bullet is fired (bombed) at the variable icon h0. The icon IHI of the "gold bomber" may be temporarily stopped before the target variable icon h0. In addition, this pause may be a pause of a ghost that disguises the target icon. Further, in this production example, when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes due to the hold change animation by the icon IHI of the "gold bomber", the display mode of the hold icon after the change is "vertical line". It is suggested that the pattern is displayed. In addition, when the hold change animation by the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" is performed, the bombing on the variable icon h0 may be successful and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed without fail, or the bombing on the variable icon h0. There may be a case where the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change due to failure. In addition, the display mode of the hold icon after the change may be a display mode other than the "vertical line" pattern.

After that, FIG. 198 (B12) shows that the "gold bomber" icon IHI fires a bullet icon with a "vertical line" pattern. That is, the "gold bomber" icon IHI is composed of a bomber icon with a "vertical line" pattern and a bullet icon with a "vertical line" pattern. The goal here is the variable icon h0. After that, as shown in FIG. 198 (B13), the bullet icon hits the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the "vertical line" pattern. Further, at this time, the character SBH of Sabohani is traveling on the gauge of the chance up meter CMT, and the second checkpoint CP2 arrives at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. The Sabohani character SBH may reach the second checkpoint CP2 before the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the second checkpoint after the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. You may reach CP2. The Sabohani character SBH is stopped at the second checkpoint CP2 and is on standby. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 190 (B11) and later are performed.

FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of the effect performed in the present embodiment.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 199 (A1) to 199 (A4) show another effect pattern following FIG. 162 (A2). In this production example, it is shown that the pre-reading notice is being performed by the chance up meter CMT.

As shown in FIG. 199 (A1), in this production example, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, unlike FIG. 162 (A3), the chance up meter CMT is displayed instead of the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that it is. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed not during the reach effect but during the variable display of the normal decorative pattern. Here, the progress speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the production, but it may be constant. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 199 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, a placard with a question mark is stopped and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, some kind of hot production will be performed. As described above, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display performed by the chance up meter CMT, and the chance up meter CMT gives a chance up notice. It is shown that the points (checkpoints CP1 to CP3) indicating the timing to be performed are also displayed. It should be noted that the balloon of "STANDBY" by the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed before the production by the chance up meter CMT is started.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (A2), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The stop display is made by combining the symbols, and it is shown that the shaking is changing. At this time, the effect by the chance up meter CMT has not been started, and it is in a standby state.

After that, in FIG. 199 (A3), it is shown that the final display is performed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is deleted. In this production example, the animation by the chance up meter CMT is interrupted while the symbol is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 starts, the animation in the chance up meter CMT is restarted as shown in FIG. 199 (A4). Specifically, it is shown that the animation of rotating the placard at the final point GP is restarted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 190 (B3) and later are performed.

FIGS. 199 (B1) to (B2) show another example of the effect shown in FIGS. 198 (B8) to (B9).

FIG. 199 (B1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 198 (B8), and shows how the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is confirmed and displayed. Correspondingly, the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of decorative symbols. In this production example, unlike the production shown in FIG. 198 (B8), it is shown that the animation in the chance up meter CMT is continuously performed without interruption during the final display of the symbol. There is. After that, as shown in FIG. 199 (B2), the variable icon h0 is erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 198 (B11) and later are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 199 (C1) to 199 (C5) show another effect pattern following FIG. 20 (2). In this production example, it is shown that the pre-reading notice is performed by displaying the timer notice display TM1.

FIG. 199 (C1) shows that the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed and is arranged at the right end of the center of the display screen. However, in this production example, unlike FIG. 20 (3), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is in the state of "10:00" and the countdown is not started. That is, in this effect example, the timer notice related to the timer notice effect is given during the execution of the symbol change display next to the symbol change display on which the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. That is, the timer notice display TM1 displays the timer notice. It can be said that the pre-reading notice of the production is being made.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (C2), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The stop display is made by combining the symbols, and it is shown that the shaking is changing. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 still reserves the start of the countdown, and the timer display remains at "10:00".

After that, in FIG. 199 (C3), it is shown that the final display is performed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is deleted. Further, in this effect example, the layer of the timer notice display TM1 and the layer of the decorative symbol are changed during the symbol stop display, and the decorative symbol is displayed in preference to the timer notice display TM1. That is, during the symbol stop display, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the decorative symbol, and at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 is hidden by the decorative symbol. The timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped as it is even when the decorative symbol is stopped. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the decorative symbol during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, but the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the decorative symbol even during the temporary stop display. You may do so.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 starts, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 199 (C4). At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (C4), the timer display countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (C5), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds later. It is suggested. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (3) and later are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 199 (D1) to 199 (D7) show another effect pattern following FIG. 20 (1). In this production example, it is shown that the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect is performed by displaying the timer notice display TM1.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (D1) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer advance notice effect is started. "30:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect will be started when 30 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. In this production example, unlike FIG. 20 (2), the countdown is not started when the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is started, and the timer display is maintained at "30:00". ..

After that, when the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (D2), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "29:99". It has become.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (D3), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The stop display is made by combining the symbols, and it is shown that the shaking is changing. At this time, the timer display TM1 continues to count down the timer display, and at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (D3), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "18:57".

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (D4), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is shown that the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". Correspondingly, the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of decorative symbols. Further, in this effect example, the layer of the timer notice display TM1 and the layer of the decorative symbol are changed during the symbol stop display, and the decorative symbol is displayed in preference to the timer notice display TM1. That is, during the symbol stop display, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the decorative symbol, and at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 is hidden by the decorative symbol. Further, in this effect example, when the symbol is stopped and displayed, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted, and this is continued until the next symbol variation is started. That is, during the symbol stop display, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is stopped and displayed in the state of "18:00". The timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 may be continued even during the symbol stop display. After that, as shown in FIG. 199 (D5), the variable icon h0 is erased.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 starts, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is also restarted. Then, as shown in FIG. 199 (D6), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol. At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (D6), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "17:53".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 199 (D6) to (D7), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". As shown in FIG. 199 (D7), before the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", "decoration 7" is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed. ing. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (8) and later are performed.

FIGS. 199 (E1) to (E3) show another example of the effect shown in FIGS. (D4) to (D6).

FIGS. 199 (E1) to 199 (E2) correspond to the effects shown in FIGS. (D4) to (D5), respectively. It is shown that the final display is made by combining the decorative patterns of the loss. Correspondingly, the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of decorative symbols. Further, in this effect example, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 199 (D4), the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed even during the symbol stop display. At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (E1), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "17:52". After that, as shown in FIG. 199 (E2), the variable icon h0 is erased. At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (E2), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "16:92". As described above, in this production example, an example is shown in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down even during the symbol stop display, but the symbol change display and the pre-reading notice are the targets. If the symbol variation display executed before that changes the fluctuation time according to the number of holds, it may not be executed, or the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice and the symbol variation display executed before that may not be executed. May be executed even when the fluctuation time changes depending on the number of holds. Further, the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice and the symbol variation display that is executed before that may be executed only when the fluctuation time is determined according to the number of reservations regardless of the number of reservations.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 starts, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 199 (E3). At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (E3), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (E3), the timer display shows "15:33". After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 199 (D7) and later are performed.

FIG. 200 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of the effect performed in the present embodiment.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 200 (A1) to 200 (A5) show another effect pattern following FIG. 162 (A2). In this production example, it is shown that the pre-reading notice of the production by the chance up meter is performed by the display of the chance up meter CMT.

As shown in FIG. 200 (A1), in this production example, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, unlike FIG. 162 (A3), the chance up meter CMT is displayed instead of the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that it is. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed not during the reach effect but during the variable display of the normal decorative pattern. The CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed instead of the chance up meter CMT. Further, it may not be switched to the chance up meter CMT from the display of the CUM preparation display MTY to the start of the movement display of the Sabohani character SBH. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 200 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP in this production example, the placard shows a question mark and is stopped and displayed, suggesting that some kind of hot production will be performed when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. There is. It should be noted that the balloon of "STANDBY" by the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed before the production by the chance up meter CMT is started.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (A2), it is shown that a balloon with the characters "Start from the next fluctuation !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani. There is. That is, it is foretold that the effect by the chance up meter CMT will be started in the symbol variation display to be started next.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (A3), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The stop display is made by combining the symbols, and it is shown that the shaking is changing. At this time, the effect by the chance up meter CMT has not been started, and it is in a standby state.

After that, FIG. 200 (A4) shows that the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is deleted. In this production example, the animation by the chance up meter CMT is interrupted while the symbol is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 starts, the animation in the chance up meter CMT is restarted as shown in FIG. 200 (A5). Specifically, it is shown that the animation of rotating the placard at the final point GP is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 190 (B3) and later are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 200 (B1) to 200 (B3) show another effect pattern following FIG. 200 (A1).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (B1), a balloon including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, indicating that the button effect is started. ing. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (B2), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the player is in a state of accepting the operation of the effect button 136. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (B3), for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 200 (A2) and thereafter is performed. In addition, when the effect button 136 is operated, the chance up meter CMT may be erased because the button effect fails. Further, even when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, the effect shown in FIG. 200 (A2) or later may be performed, or the effect shown in FIG. 200 (A2) or later is not performed. For example, the chance up meter CMT may be erased. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is pressed after the chance up meter CMT is displayed, a balloon is displayed, but when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the effect button is displayed. When 136 is operated, it may be changed to the chance up meter CMT.

In addition, during the movement display of the Sabohani character SBH, the above-mentioned button effect is performed by the Sabohani character SBH to give notice that a chance-up notice may occur, or to notify that a chance-up notice has occurred. Alternatively, a notice (for example, a change notice, a look-ahead notice, etc.) or an effect (for example, a conversation effect, a tutorial display, etc.) different from the chance-up notice may be given.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 200 (C1) to 200 (C9), a state in which the execution of the production by the chance up meter is announced by the conversation notice is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C1), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C1), the UI unit UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This UI unit UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C1) is all white, but this all white color indicates that the background screen is not shown.

FIG. 200 (C2) shows how the conversation notice has started. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display "SP reach!" Is displayed together with the character of the lord, and the transition to the super reach is announced. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol.

After that, in FIG. 200 (C3), the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that urges the effect button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a that imitates the effect button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of. At the timing shown in FIG. 200 (C3), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 200 (C3), at least a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In this production example, it is easier to start the production by the chance up meter CMT when the conversation notice is given than when the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be reduced and displayed (for example, the display having the same size as that of FIG. 200 (C2) is still displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (larger or smaller) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. The size (larger or smaller) may be different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A. The operation validity period of the effect button 136 is then started.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 200 (C4) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses, and then the player presses the effect button 136. As shown in FIG. 200 (C5), in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, the characters "Attention to the meter during SP reach!" May be displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image. This foretells that the chance up meter CMT will be displayed during Super Reach. In addition, the character display of the notice such as "Attention to the meter during SP reach!" May be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated, or the effect button 136 is operated. If the operation validity period has passed, the characters "Attention to the meter during SP reach!" By the old man's conversation image CI2 may not be displayed. In this case, the chance up meter CMT is also not displayed. You may do it. On the contrary, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed. In addition, even if the operation validity period elapses without operating the effect button 136, the characters "Attention to the meter during SP reach!" Are displayed, and the chance up meter CMT is also displayed. Good. In addition, when the effect button 136 is operated, characters other than "Attention to the meter during SP reach!" Or a notice may be displayed. In addition, only when the character "Attention to the meter during SP reach!" Is displayed by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, even if the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, "during SP reach" If the characters "Attention to the meter!" Are displayed and the characters other than "Attention to the meter during SP reach!" Are displayed or a notice is given by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. It may be displayed only when there is. Further, regardless of the character display or notice of the old man's conversation image CI2, the character display or notice of the old man's conversation image CI2 may be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated. , The character display and the notice of the grandfather's conversation image CI2 may be displayed even if the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated. In this way, in this production example, it is announced that the conversation will shift to SP reach by a conversation notice such as "SP reach!", And further, if the chance up meter CMT is always displayed during SP reach, it is indirect. It is shown that the chance up meter CMT is foretold to be displayed. It should be noted that even if "SP reach!" Is displayed, it is not always necessary to foretell that the effect by the chance up meter CMT will be performed (for example, SP reach that always displays the chance up meter CMT and chance up). There may be SP reach that does not display the meter CMT).

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C6), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible. The situation is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C7), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a state in which the shaking fluctuation display is performed is shown. ing. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 16 (20) to 16 (21) are performed.

FIG. 200 (C8) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (C8), the swordsman of the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C9), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 200 (C9), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is stopped and displayed with an "x" display, indicating that the effect by the chance up meter CMT is in a standby state. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A10) and later are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 200 (D1) to 200 (D8) show another effect pattern following FIG. 20 (2). In this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is being performed.

FIG. 200 (D1) shows that the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and is arranged at the center left end portion of the display screen. However, in this production example, unlike FIG. 20 (3), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is in the state of "10:00" and the countdown is not started. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (D1), the start of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is reserved (that is, it is in a standby state). Further, in this production example, when the timer notice display TM1 is set at the predetermined position described above, as shown in FIGS. 200 (D1) to 200 (D2), the display of "10:00" and the "STANDBY" are displayed. Is displayed alternately with the display of. This alternate display is performed during the period in which the start of the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is in the standby state. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (D3), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (D4), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is being counted down. At the timing shown in FIG. 200 (D4), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "09:99", indicating that 0.01 seconds have passed since the timer display countdown started. There is. The countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00" is reached. After that, for example, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, and the reach state is reached. Frame out at the bottom of the display screen, leaving the icon h0.

After that, as shown in FIG. 200 (D5), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 200 (D6), the timer notice display TM1 gives a notice instead of the timer display. The word "Attention !!" is displayed to encourage attention to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 200 (D7), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to see. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. Further, in this production example, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 displayed as "Attention !!" is overlapped by the second large board behavior character 224Gb and the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, which makes it difficult to see. There is. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. In addition, there may be cases where the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate. After that, as shown in FIG. 200 (D8), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 16 (23) and later are performed.

In this production example, the time from the start of the timer notice display TM1 until the countdown of the timer display is started, and the time from the start of the countdown to the start of a certain notice effect is displayed, but the timer notice is displayed. When the display TM1 is displayed, the countdown of the timer display is started, and the time from the start of the countdown to the time when a certain advance notice effect is performed may not be displayed before the countdown starts.

FIG. 201 is a diagram showing stepwise other effect patterns of the timer advance notice effect. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 201 (A1) to 201 (A28) show, for example, another effect pattern following FIG. 20 (1).

FIG. 201 (A1) shows that the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed and is arranged substantially in the center of the display screen. Further, in this production example, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is in the state of "00:00". That is, in this effect example, it is foretold that the timer advance notice effect will be performed by displaying the timer advance notice display TM1, but when the timer advance notice display TM1 is started to be displayed, the remaining time when the countdown starts. It is not possible to identify.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A2), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed on the right side of the timer notice display TM1 together with the button image 136a, indicating that the button effect is started. ing. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 201 (A3) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (A4), the player directs the effect. When the button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 201 (A5), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts high-speed scrolling of the timer display. Then, as shown in FIG. 201 (A6), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "10:00", and when at least 10 seconds or more have passed since the timer display countdown started, a certain notice effect was produced. It is suggested that it will be started. At this time, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has not been started, but it may be started. Further, in FIG. 201 (A4), the effect button 136 may be pressed, but the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 may not change. In this case, the timer is assumed to be a false advance notice. The notice production ends.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A7), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed again together with the button image 136a on the right side of the timer notice display TM1, and the second button effect is started. The situation is shown. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 201 (A8) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (A9), the player directs the effect. When the button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 201 (A10), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts high-speed scrolling of the timer display. Then, as shown in FIG. 201 (A11), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is increased from "10:00" to "20:00", and at least 20 seconds or more have passed since the timer display countdown started. After that, it is suggested that a certain advance notice effect is started. That is, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is ranked up. At this time, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has not been started, but it may be started. Further, in FIG. 201 (A9), although the effect button 136 is pressed, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 may not change. In this case, the rank of the timer advance effect is not upgraded and the timer advance notice is given. The timer display on the display TM1 may start counting down from "10:00".

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A12), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed again together with the button image 136a on the right side of the timer notice display TM1, and the third button effect is started. The situation is shown. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 201 (A13) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (A14), the player directs the effect. When the button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 201 (A15), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts high-speed scrolling of the timer display. Then, as shown in FIG. 201 (A16), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is increased from "20:00" to "30:00", and at least 30 seconds or more have passed since the timer display countdown started. After that, it is suggested that a certain advance notice effect is started. That is, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is further upgraded. In addition, although the effect button 136 is pressed in FIG. 201 (A14), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 may not change. In this case, the rank of the timer advance notice effect is not upgraded and the timer advance notice is given. The timer display on the display TM1 may start counting down from "20:00".

In this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is upgraded in three stages, and when the rank is increased in three stages as described above, as shown in FIG. 201 (A17), the third stage is increased. 1 In the decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF303 is displayed so as to surround the timer advance notice display TM1 to notify that the rank-up effect of the timer advance notice is completed. After that, the effect EF303 is erased, and the animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves to the right end of the center of the display screen is started. After that, FIG. 201 (A18) shows a state in which the movement animation of the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the movement to the center right end portion of the display screen is completed.

After that, after "decoration 7" is stopped for each of the left and right symbols and reaches the reach state, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the right end of the center of the display screen moves to the substantially center of the display screen again. Animation is done. FIG. 201 (A19) shows a state in which the movement animation of the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the movement to the substantially center of the display screen is completed. It should be noted that the timer advance notice display TM1 does not have to move even during the execution of the timer display countdown as shown in other production examples. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may or may not move. For example, the timer notice display TM1 may move and display to function as a chance-up notice. When the movement animation of the timer notice display TM1 is completed, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and it is suggested that a certain notice effect is started after 30 seconds.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A20), it is shown that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (A20), the timer notice display is displayed. The timer display in TM1 is "29:99".

When "Decoration 7" is stopped on the left and right symbols and the reach state is started, the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, in the UI part UI. , Leave the variable icon h0 and frame out at the bottom of the display screen. After that, when it develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A21) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 201 (A22). , The animation display of the duel scene between the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy role begins. During this period, the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (A22), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "17:63".

Then, as shown in FIG. 201 (A23), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 201 (A24), the timer notice display TM1 gives a notice instead of the timer display. The word "Attention !!" is displayed to encourage attention to. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A25), the cut-in image of the panda character is displayed on the entire display screen, and the effect that the panda character appears as a helper in the swordsman reach is started. To. After that, for example, an effect that develops into SP swordsman reach is performed as shown in FIGS. 30 (30b) to (32b). That is, in this production example, as a result of the timer notice production, it is shown that a production that develops into SP swordsman reach is performed as a certain notice production.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A26), the lever image 136V is displayed together with the display of "blow", and it is notified that the advance notice by the lever effect has started. At this time, the button image 136a or the big button image 136aL may be displayed to notify the start of the advance notice by the button effect. After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A27), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V has started. At this time, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is also started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A28), it is shown that the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (22) and later are performed.

FIG. 202 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of the effect performed in the present embodiment.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 202 (A1) to (A4) show another effect pattern following FIG. 162 (A7). In this production example, it is shown that the production by the chance up meter CMT is foretold in advance. That is, it can be said that it is shown that the effect of changing the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is foretold. It should be noted that the start of the production by the chance up meter CM may be notified every time, and may or may not be announced.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (A1) shows an animation of a duel scene between the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. When the super reach effect is started, all the UI part UI is hidden (disappears) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variable icon h0 does not disappear and continues to be displayed on the remaining top board. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display continue to be displayed. The entire UI part UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire UI part UI may be continuously displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be deleted, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed. In addition, a CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and a balloon with the characters "STANDBY" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH.

FIG. 202 (A2) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 202 (A2), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. Alternatively, it may suggest that an intense heat effect may be performed. In this production example, unlike the production shown in FIG. 162 (A9), a question mark is added in the vicinity of the character SBH of the balloon when the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT, together with the characters "START". The displayed balloon is displayed, informing the player that the Sabohani character SBH in the chance-up meter CMT is about to start moving. That is, the start of the change in the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is announced. As a result, the player may have a feeling of expectation that the production by the chance up meter CMT will be started. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the balloon of "Soon START" is displayed, the balloon is deleted as shown in FIG. 202 (A3). The state in which the balloon is displayed may be maintained until the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started.

FIG. 202 (A4) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started moving. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. It should be noted that the balloon "START !!" may be configured not to be displayed, or may be configured to be displayed or not to be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (A11) and later are performed.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 202 (B1) to 202 (B9) show another production pattern following FIG. 20 (2). In this production example, the frame-in animation of the timer notice display TM1 is performed. During that time, the countdown has not started. In this effect example, in the timer notice effect, it is shown that the timer display TM1 gives advance notice that the countdown of the timer display will be started. That is, it can be said that it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is foretelling that the effect of changing the display mode of the timer display is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (B1), it is shown that the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed and is arranged at the center right end portion of the display screen. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is in the state of "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, FIG. 202 (B2) shows how it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 202 (B2), the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and then, as shown in FIG. 202 (B3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the main character is displayed. The animation display of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role starts. On the other hand, the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 has not yet started.

Then, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 202 (B4) to (B6), a swing animation in which the timer notice display TM1 swings up and down is performed, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is performed to the player. Foretells that the countdown will start soon. That is, the timer advance notice display TM1 is announcing the start of a change in the display mode of the timer display.
As a result, the player may have a feeling of expectation that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice effect will be started. It should be noted that a fake timer advance notice effect in which the timer display is not counted down even if the swing animation is performed may be performed, and when the rocking animation is performed, the timer display is always counted down. You may do so.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (B7), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is being counted down. At the timing shown in FIG. 202 (B7), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 indicates "09:99", indicating that 0.01 seconds have passed since the timer display countdown started. There is. As shown in FIGS. 202 (B7) to (B8), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". The countdown may be interrupted in the middle.

After that, as shown in FIG. 202 (B8), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 202 (B9), the timer notice display TM1 gives a notice instead of the timer display. The word "Attention !!" is displayed to encourage attention to. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 201 (A25) and later are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 202 (C1) to (C6) show another effect pattern following FIG. 48 (A2). In this effect example, by enlarging the timer notice display TM1 while displaying "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared, the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is started. It shows how it is doing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (C1), it is shown that the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 to notify the fact. In this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 48 (A3), the display of "STANDBY" (in preparation display) is not a pre-reading notice, but a notice regarding the running symbol change display (the change notice) is performed. It is shown that it is. It should be noted that the notice of change may be given as a look-ahead notice instead of the notice of change.

After that, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols to form a reach state, and then, as shown in FIG. 202 (C2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a super reach (super reach). It is shown that it has evolved into a swordsman reach). In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (C3), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. During this period, the timer advance notice display TM1 continues to display "STANDBY".

After that, in this production example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed while moving to the substantially center of the display screen, and then the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 202 (C4). As shown in FIG. 202 (C5), in the timer notice display TM1, the display of "STANDBY" is switched to the display of "10:00" as the timer display.

Then, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced to the center right end of the display screen while being reduced, and then the timer notice display TM1 is reduced to the center right end of the display screen as shown in FIG. 202 (C6). Is displayed. After that, for example, an effect similar to the effect shown in FIGS. 202 (B7) and after is performed.

In this production example, the timer notice display TM1 in which "STANDBY" is displayed is enlarged and displayed, and the display is switched to "10:00" as the timer display, and then the display is reduced. As shown in 202 (C4), after the timer notice display TM1 in which "STANDBY" is displayed is enlarged and displayed, as shown in FIG. 202 (C5'), the display of "STANDBY" is displayed without switching to the timer display. The display may be reduced as it is, and then switched to the timer display. In this case, after the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged / reduced only once, the timer notice display TM1 may be switched from "STANDBY" to the timer display to start the timer display countdown, or "STANDBY" may be displayed. After the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged / reduced a plurality of times in the displayed state, the timer notice display TM1 may be switched from "STANDBY" to the timer display and the timer display countdown may be started. Further, although the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged / reduced, the switching display from "STANDBY" to the timer display is not performed, and a fake timer notice effect in which the timer notice display TM1 is deleted as it is may be performed. May be good. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged / reduced, the symbol variation display is stopped, and the display of "STANDBY" is maintained until the next symbol variation display is started. After that, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed. May be switched from "STANDBY" to the timer display to start the timer display countdown. Further, even if the timer notice display TM1 displaying "STANDBY" is enlarged, the timer display countdown may not be started as it is, or when the timer notice display TM1 displaying "STANDBY" is enlarged, the timer is always used. The display countdown may be initiated. Further, the timer display countdown may be started after the timer notice display TM1 on which "STANDBY" is displayed is always enlarged. Further, the timer notice display TM1 on which "STANDBY" is displayed may or may not be enlarged. For example, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed to function as a chance-up notice. Here, in the case where the chance-up notice occurs, the symbol variation display in which the chance-up notice has occurred is configured so that the jackpot symbol display mode is finally stopped and displayed more easily than when the chance-up notice does not occur. It may have been. This can also be applied to the production examples described so far and the production examples described below.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect using the chance up meter. The effect shown in FIGS. 203 (A1) to 203 (A27) shows another effect pattern following FIG. 162 (A3).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A1), the flame effect EF101 is displayed in the center portion on the left side of the display screen, and it is shown that the CUM preparation display appearance animation is started. As a result, in addition to the first CUM preparing display MTY1 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "first CUM preparing display MTY1") displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, the second CUM is being prepared. It is foretold that the display MTY2 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "second CUM preparing display MTY2") may be displayed. In this case, the second CUM preparing display MTY2 may be displayed without displaying the flame effect EF101. Further, whenever the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the second CUM preparing display MTY2 may be displayed. Further, the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 203 (A2), when the flame effect EF101 is erased, the second CUM preparation display MTY2 appears at the position where the flame effect EF101 is displayed. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that a plurality of CUM preparation display is displayed. In this production example, an example is shown in which the second CUM preparing display MTY2 is displayed after the first CUM preparing display MTY1 is displayed, but the first CUM preparing display MTY1 and the second CUM preparing display MTY2 are displayed at the same time. It may be displayed.

FIG. 203 (A3) shows that the “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols to form a reach state, and the shaking fluctuation display is performed. After that, for example, the production is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 162 (A5) to 162 (A6). At this time, the two CUM preparing displays MTY1 and MTY2 are displayed so as to overlap with each other on the front side of the decorative symbols, and the decorative symbols are not overlapped by these CUM preparing displays MTY1 and MTY2. It is said that the decorative design is difficult to see. The CUM preparation display MTY1 and MTY2 may be arranged behind the decorative symbol and displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern.

FIG. 203 (A4) shows how the VS swordsman reach super reach production has started. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY1 and MTY2 are also continuously displayed. Here, if both of the two CUM preparation displays MTY1 and MTY2 are not displayed, the chance up meter effect may not be performed, or if at least one of them is displayed, the chance is An upmeter effect may be performed. In this case, it may be easier to finally confirm the display in the jackpot symbol mode when two CUM preparation displays are displayed than when only one is displayed. Further, even if neither of the two CUM preparation display MTY1 and MTY2 is displayed, the chance up meter effect may be performed. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (A4) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (A5) shows the main character. An animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, all the UI part UI is hidden (disappears) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variable icon h0 does not disappear and continues to be displayed on the remaining top board. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display continue to be displayed. The entire UI part UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire UI part UI may be continuously displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be deleted, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

In FIG. 203 (A6), the display of the first CUM preparing display MTY1 and the second CUM preparing display MTY2 is switched to the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2, respectively. In this case, the second CUM preparing display MTY2 may be switched to the second chance up meter CMT2 after the first CUM preparing display MTY1 is switched to the first chance up meter CMT1, or the second CUM preparing display MTY2 may be switched to the second chance up meter CMT2. The first CUM preparing display MTY1 may be switched to the first chance up meter CMT1 after switching to the second chance up meter CMT2, or the timing at which the first CUM preparing display MTY1 is switched to the first chance up meter CMT1. And the timing at which the second CUM preparation display MTY2 is switched to the second chance up meter CMT2 may be the same. In this production example, unlike FIG. 162 (A9), the first checkpoint CP1 and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged on the first chance up meter CMT1, and the second checkpoint CP2 is arranged on the second chance up meter CMT2. Is arranged. That is, the positions for notifying the timing at which the chance-up notice occurs are different between the first chance-up meter CMT1 and the second chance-up meter CMT2. It should be noted that which checkpoint is placed on which chance-up meter can be appropriately set. Further, there may be a case where a checkpoint is arranged only on one of the chance-up meters and a checkpoint is not arranged on the other. Further, the same checkpoint may be arranged in both chance-up meters, for example, the third checkpoint CP3 is arranged in both the first chance-up meter CMT1 and the second chance-up meter CMT2. In this production example, when either the Sabohani character SBH in the first chance up meter CMT1 or the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMT2 reaches one of the checkpoints, a specific notice may occur. It is supposed to be. In addition, the placard is rotating and displayed at both the final point GP of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the final point GP of the second chance up meter CMT2, and the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP. It is suggested that the result of either jackpot or loss is derived. Alternatively, it may be suggested that it will develop into a super hot production.

FIG. 203 (A7) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started moving. In this production example, both the Sabohani character SBH in the first chance up meter CMT1 and the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMT2 start moving at the same time. Further, when the Sabohani character SBH starts moving, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH. As a result, the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH is notified. The balloon "START !!" may be displayed only when the chance up meter is displayed after the CUM preparation display is displayed, and it does not matter whether the CUM preparation display is displayed or not. When the chance up meter is displayed, it may or may not be displayed. Further, by displaying the balloon "START !!", it may be announced that the chance-up notice is likely to occur at the checkpoints CP1 to CP3. Further, in this production example, a balloon of "START !!" is displayed for both the Sabohani character SBH in the first chance up meter CMT1 and the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMT2. However, only one of them may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A8), both the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 are moved from the starting point SP. It is shown that it is starting.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A9), the boy character BOY is displayed on the left side of the display screen at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 reaches the first checkpoint CP1. It appears from and moves to the right. That is, it is shown that the chance-up notice is being given due to the appearance of Boy's character BOY. On the other hand, the character SBH of Sabohani of the second chance-up meter CMT2 is moving while the chance-up notice is being given, but while the chance-up notice is being given, the character SBH of Sabohani of the second chance-up meter CMT2 is moving. The character SBH may also be stopped.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A10), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1, and the chance is displayed. It notifies that the notice has been given by displaying the character of the up. In addition to the character SBH of the Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1, the character SBH of the Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 may also display a balloon, or the character SBH of the Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1. The balloon may be displayed only for the character SBH of Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 instead of the character SBH. Further, the balloon may not be displayed for either the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2. In this case, the higher the number of balloons displayed, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. The Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the announcement is made by displaying the Boy character BOY, but it may not stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 203 (A11), the first checkpoint CP1 in the first chance up meter CMT1 is marked in red, and the appearance of the notice has increased the reliability of the jackpot. "Is displayed above it, indicating the history of the notice. In addition, it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 is resuming movement. At this time, the moving speed of the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 is aligned with the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 in the vertical direction. It is faster than the moving speed of the character SBH. That is, the moving speed is adjusted. Here, the movement speed may not be adjusted and the movement may be performed at a constant movement speed. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed.

After that, when the character SBH of the Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 reaches the second checkpoint CP2 at the timing shown in FIG. 203 (A12), the button is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A13). The image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. At this time, although the second chance up meter CMT2 overlaps the button image 136a, the second chance up meter CMT2 may be displayed so as to overlap the button image 136a. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the operation of the effect button 136 by the player can be accepted. Here, the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 stops at the second checkpoint CP2 until the player operates the button or the operation valid period elapses, but it may not stop. .. On the other hand, the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance-up meter CMT1 continues to move while the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance-up meter CMT2 is stopped, but the Sabohani of the second chance-up meter CMT2 It may be stopped in accordance with the movement stop of the character SBH.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 203 (A14) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 203 (A15), the player directs the effect. When the button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 203 (A16), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and a notice effect is performed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. The weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 203 (A16). The gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 203 (A16) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the effect button 136 may be displayed within the operation valid period. It may be displayed whenever it is operated in. Further, the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 203 (A16) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated, or the effect button 136 may be displayed. It may be always displayed when the operation valid period elapses without being operated, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without being operated.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A17), a balloon with the characters "chance up gold cut-in" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2. It is informed that the chance-up notice has been given by displaying the gold cut-in image CI3. In addition to the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2, a balloon may be displayed for the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1, or the Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2. The balloon may be displayed only for the character SBH of the Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1 instead of the character SBH. Further, the balloon may not be displayed for either the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2. In this case, the higher the number of balloons displayed, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. The Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 stops at the second checkpoint CP2 while the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, but it may not stop. Further, in the case where the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, the effect button 136 is also not operated. It is possible to notify that a chance-up notice has occurred in the same way as when is operated, or it is not necessary to notify that a chance-up notice has occurred, and a chance-up notice has occurred. Only a part of what has been done may be notified (for example, only the characters "UP" are displayed without displaying the balloon).

After that, as shown in FIG. 203 (A18), after the second checkpoint CP2 in the second chance-up meter CMT2 was marked in red, the gold cut-in image CI3 was erased, and the chance-up notice appeared. The word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved is displayed above the character, and the history of the occurrence of the chance-up notice is shown. In addition, it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 is resuming movement. At this time, the moving speed of the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 is aligned with the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 in the vertical direction. It is faster than the moving speed of the character SBH. That is, the moving speed is adjusted. Here, the movement speed may not be adjusted and the movement may be performed at a constant movement speed. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT1, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed.

After that, when the character SBH of the balloon of the first chance up meter CMT1 reaches the third checkpoint CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 203 (A19), the lever is displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A20). An image 136V is displayed, and a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Lever" is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani on the 1st chance up meter CMT1 to notify that the notice by lever production has started. ing. At this time, the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 has stopped moving, but the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 continues to move without stopping. While the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 is stopped moving, the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 may also stop moving. Further, in this production example, at least a part of the balloon is overlapped with the lever image 136V, and it is said that the display mode of the balloon is more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped by the lever image 136V. The balloon may be displayed so as to overlap the lever image 136V.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A21), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 in the first chance up meter CMT1 is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it. A history of the occurrence of the notice is shown. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. After that, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the operation of the effect lever 136V by the player can be accepted. Here, the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 resumes movement when the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, but the lever operation by the player is performed or the operation valid period elapses. It may be stopped at the third checkpoint CP3 until.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 203 (A22) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. On the other hand, in both the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2, the Sabohani character SBH is located in front of the final point GP.

After that, when the effect lever 136V is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 203 (A23) within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 203 (A24), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to No. The four large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are activated, the light guide plate IL is emitted, and the effect image may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is notified that it will be a big hit. At this time, both the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 are hidden, but may be displayed. In addition, only one of the chance up meters may be hidden. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is terminated, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H return to their initial positions, respectively. , The effect image fades out in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. The chance up meters CMT1 and CMT2 also fade in along with the duel scene animation display fade-in, but the chance up meters CMT1 and CMT2 are displayed again after the duel scene animation display fade-in is completed. You may do it.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A25), it is shown that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and restarted. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the swordsman who plays the enemy role shows an expression of faint in agony, and it seems that he is about to lose. In addition, both the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 indicate the letter "V" indicating that the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP and the placard becomes a big hit. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the display of "V" is performed at a plurality of places.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 203 (A26), the main character, the lord, defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that it is a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 17 (48) and later are performed.

In this production example, the checkpoints placed on the two chance-up meters are different, but the checks placed on the two chance-up meters (first chance-up meter CMT1 and second chance-up meter CMT2). The points may be the same, and the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 may be produced in the same display mode.

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of the effect performed in the present embodiment.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 204 (A1) to 204 (A16) show another effect pattern following FIG. 203 (A5).

In FIG. 204 (A1), unlike FIG. 203 (A5), the display of the first CUM preparing display MTY1 is switched to the first chance up meter CMT1, but the display of the second CUM preparing display MTY2 is switched. The display is still in preparation, and the balloon of "STANDBY" by the Sabohani character SBH continues to be displayed. The second CUM preparing display MTY2 is continuously displayed until the timing shown in FIG. 204 (A12) is reached. In this production example, as in FIG. 162 (A9), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged on the first chance up meter CMT1. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the first chance-up meter CMT1 first notifies the timing at which the chance-up notice is generated. In this case, the second CUM preparing display MTY2 may be switched to the second chance up meter CMT2, and the first CUM preparing display MTY1 may be left as the preparing display without switching the display. In addition, at the final point GP of the first chance up meter CMT1, the placard is rotating and displaying, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, it will develop into a super hot production. .. Alternatively, it may be suggested that a jackpot or loss is derived.

FIG. 204 (A2) shows how the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move in the first chance up meter CMT. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. On the other hand, in the second CUM preparation display MTY2, the character SBH of Sabohani has not moved from the starting point SP and is still waiting, and the balloon of "STANDBY" is still displayed. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the chance-up meter that has been switched to the earlier of the two CUM preparation display MTY1 and MTY2 has started to notify the timing at which a certain warning effect is performed. ing. After that, for example, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (16) is performed.

After that, when the character SBH of the Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1 reaches the third checkpoint CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 204 (A3), the lever is displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (A4). Instead of the image 136V, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, indicating that the lever effect as a notice of chance up has not been started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 204 (A4), the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed on the first chance up meter CMT1, and as shown in FIGS. 204 (A4) to (A5), the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed. The character SBH passes through the third checkpoint CP3 as it is, and the marking at the third checkpoint CP3 and the display of the character "UP" are not performed. Note that FIG. 204 (A4) shows that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (A4), the button image 136a is displayed overlapping with the second CUM preparing display MTY2, but the button image 136a is displayed on the second CUM preparing display MTY2. It may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 204 (A5) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the first chance up meter CMT1, the character SBH of Sabohani is located in front of the final point GP.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 204 (A6) within the operation valid period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Along with the words "Did you remove it ..." from the character and the swordsman who played the role of the enemy, the display shows that the victory or defeat is not decided. It should be noted that this display overlaps with the second CUM preparing display MTY2, and is considered to be more difficult to see than when the second CUM preparing display MTY2 is not displayed. Further, in the first chance up meter CMT1, the character "development" is displayed on the placard at the final point GP, and it is notified that the reach effect will be developed.

After that, the cut-in image CI4 by the character of the lord shown in FIG. 204 (A8) is displayed to notify that the reach effect is developed, and then, as shown in FIG. 204 (A9), the panda's reach is reached. The production that the character appears as a helper is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 204 (A10), the first chance up meter CMT1 is erased by the erasing animation (erasing animation), and then the animation (descending animation) in which the second CUM preparing display MTY2 moves downward is started. To. The descending animation of the second CUM preparation display MTY2 is started, and the erasing animation of the first chance up meter CMT1 may be started while the descending animation is being displayed, or the erasing animation of the first chance up meter CMT1 is started. Then, the descending animation of the second CUM preparing display MTY2 may be started during the display of the erased animation. Further, the erasing animation of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the descending animation of the second CUM preparing display MTY2 may start at the same time.

As shown in FIGS. 204 (A10) to 204 (A12), the second CUM preparing display MTY2 moves to the lower left corner of the display screen (that is, the position where the first chance up meter CMT1 is displayed) by the descending animation. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (A13), the display of the second CUM preparation display MTY2 is switched to the second chance up meter CMT2. In the second chance up meter CMT2, the fourth checkpoint CP4 and the fifth checkpoint CP5 are arranged in the same manner as the effect shown in FIG. 30 (29b), and the placard indicates "V" at the final point GP. It is notified that the character SBH of Sabohani will be a big hit when it reaches the final point GP. After the display is switched from the second CUM preparation display TMY2 to the second chance up meter CMT2, the display position may be changed by the descending animation. This can also be applied when only one chance up meter is displayed. Further, the descending animation may not be performed and the display position may not be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 204 (A14), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH, which functions as a cursor, has started to move in the second chance up meter CMT2. At this time, a balloon with the words "START !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. As described above, in this production example, one of the two CUM preparation display MTY1 and MTY2 (first CUM preparation display MTY1) is switched to the chance up meter (first chance up meter CMT1) first. After the production of the chance up meter by the switched chance up meter (1st chance up meter CMT1) is completed, the other preparing display (2nd CUM preparing display MTY2) becomes the chance up meter (2nd chance up meter CMT2). ), And it is shown that the production of the chance-up meter by the chance-up meter (second chance-up meter CMT2) has started. In the second chance up meter CMT2, the fourth checkpoint CP4 and the fifth checkpoint CP5 are arranged to notify the timing when a certain advance notice effect is performed at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches each checkpoint. There is. After that, as shown in FIG. 204 (A15), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is erased.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (A16), it is shown in FIG. 30 that the SP swordsman reach has been developed as described above. Since the effect shown in FIG. 204 (A16) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 185 (A19), the description thereof will be omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 30 (31b) and later are performed.

In this production example, after the first chance up meter CMT1 is erased, the second CUM preparation display MTY2 is switched to the second chance up meter CMT2. The second CUM preparing display MTY2 may be switched to the second chance up meter CMT2 during the movement display of the character SBH. In this case, while the movement display of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed on the first chance up meter CMT1, the movement of the Sabohani character SBH may be started on the second chance up meter CMT2.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 204 (B1) to 204 (B11) show another effect pattern following FIG. 48 (A2). In this effect example, 2 is displayed in a state where "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 (referred to as "first timer notice display TM1" in this effect example). The second timer notice display (second timer notice display TM2) is displayed, and the second timer notice display TM2 also displays "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared, so that the second timer notice display is displayed twice. It shows that it is suggesting that the timer notice effect will be started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (B1), it is shown that the frame-in of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame-in of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM1 to notify the fact. In this production example, as in the production example shown in FIG. 48 (A3), it is shown that the display (in preparation display) of "STANDBY" is performed as a look-ahead notice. In addition, it may be performed as the change notice.

In FIG. 204 (B2), as a result of the decorative symbols being stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the shaking fluctuation is observed. It shows how it is being done. At this time, at least a part of the first decorative symbol is overlapped by the first timer notice display TM1, and it is more difficult to see than the state where the first timer notice display TM1 does not overlap.

After that, in FIG. 204 (B3), it is shown that the final display is performed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon is deleted. While the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, at least a part of the first timer advance notice display TM1 overlaps with the decorative symbol. The decorative symbol may be overlapped with the first timer advance notice display TM1 even while the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 starts, the first timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the front side of the first decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 204 (B4). At the timing shown in FIG. 204 (B4), the display on the first timer advance notice display TM1 remains "STANDBY".

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (B5), a movement animation in which the first timer notice display TM1 moves downward is started, and at the position where the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The animation in which the second timer notice display TM2 is framed in is started. At this time, at least a part of the second timer advance notice display TM2 is overlapped by the first timer advance notice display TM1 and framed in. That is, the timer notice display in preparation display (“STANDBY” is displayed first timer notice display TM1) displayed later is displayed earlier, and the timer notice display in preparation display (“STANDBY” is displayed). It is shown that the second timer notice display is displayed behind the TM2). It should be noted that the timer notice display in preparation display displayed earlier may be displayed after the timer notice display in preparation display displayed later. Further, the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be displayed so as not to overlap each other. Further, in this production example, the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 and the frame-in animation of the second timer notice display TM2 are started at the same time, but the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 is started. After that, the frame-in animation of the second timer notice display TM2 may start, or after the frame-in animation of the second timer notice display TM2 starts, the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 starts. May be good. Further, after the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 is completed, the frame-in animation of the second timer notice display TM2 may be started, or after the frame-in animation of the second timer notice display TM2 is completed. The movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 may be started at.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (B6), it is shown that the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 and the frame-in animation of the second timer notice display TM2 are completed. That is, the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed below the second timer notice display TM2. In this production example, the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are displayed so as not to overlap with each other, but the second timer notice is displayed so as to overlap the rear side of the first timer notice display TM1. Display TM2 may be displayed. In this case, the display position of the second timer advance notice display TM2 may coincide with the display position of the first timer advance notice display TM1, or the display may be shifted in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (B7), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM1 is started, and a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds later. Is suggested. On the other hand, in the second timer notice display TM2, the preparation display continues, and the display of "STANDBY" continues. After that, for example, the production is performed as shown in FIGS. 20 (3) to 20 (8). During that time, the preparation display continues on the second timer advance notice display TM2. The timer display countdown on the first timer notice display TM1 may be started after the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 is completed, or may be started during the movement of the first timer notice display TM1 by the movement animation. May be done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (B8), the display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is started. In the second timer notice display TM2, the display of "STANDBY" continues. After that, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased, the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 204 (B9), and then the character of the lord and the character "continue" are displayed as shown in FIG. 204 (B10). A cut-in display consisting of a display is performed. At this time, the second timer notice display TM2 displays "STANDBY" without changing the display position. The display position of the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be changed after the first timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. In this case, for example, the display position of the second timer notice display TM2 may be moved to the position where the first timer notice display TM1 was displayed. In this production example, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed in this way to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. In addition, the pseudo-ream symbol may be framed out downward without being stopped and displayed. If the pseudo-ream symbol is framed out downward, the pseudo-ream is not started and the decorative symbol is lost as it is. The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach state may be reached and the reach effect may be started. As described above, in this production example, the timer is announced to announce that the pseudo-ream will be started after the countdown is completed. After that, for example, the production is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 20 (13) to (14). After that, one or a plurality of pseudo-continuous productions may be further performed.

After that, "decoration 7" was stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, and reached a reach state. As shown in FIG. 204 (B11), the first decorative symbol display device 208L developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The situation is shown. At this time as well, the display of "STANDBY" continues on the second timer notice display TM2. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 202 (C3) and later are performed.

In this production example, the second timer notice display TM2 is displayed after the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed, but the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are displayed at the same time. It may be done. Further, in this production example, after the countdown of the timer display on the first timer notice display TM1 displayed earlier is completed, the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM2 displayed later is started. However, the countdown may be started at the same time by the timer display on the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the second timer notice display TM2. In this case, the time indicated by the timer display is the same (for example, "10:00"), and the countdown may be completed at the same time. Further, the time indicated by the timer display at the start of the countdown differs between the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2, and the countdown starts at the same time, but the timing at which the countdown is completed may be different. Further, the second timer notice display TM2 displayed after the first timer notice display TM1 displayed earlier may start the timer display countdown earlier. Further, the countdown of the timer display on the first timer notice display TM1 displayed earlier starts first, the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM2 displayed later during the execution of the countdown starts, and then the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM2 is started. The countdowns of both timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 may be completed at the same time. Specifically, the timer display at the start of the countdown on the first timer notice display TM1 is "30:00", and the timer display at the start of the countdown on the second timer notice display TM2 is "10:00". , When the timer display on the first timer notice display TM1 counts down to "10:00", the timer display countdown on the second timer notice display TM2 may be started.

FIG. 205 is a diagram showing an example of the timer advance notice effect step by step.

The effects shown in FIGS. 205 (A1) to 205 (A14) show another effect pattern following FIG. 20 (1). In this effect example, 2 is displayed in a state where "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 (referred to as "first timer notice display TM1" in this effect example). The second timer notice display (second timer notice display TM2) is displayed, and the second timer notice display TM2 also displays "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared, so that the second timer notice display is displayed twice. It shows that it is suggesting that the timer notice effect will be started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A1), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, when the first timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 204 (B1), the display position when the frame-in of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is started is different. That is, it is shown that the frame-in is performed at a position lower than the position of the first timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 204 (B1). In this effect example, the display position of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is different from the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 in the timer advance notice effect described so far, but the effect shown in this effect example is another effect. Needless to say, it is also applicable in the example.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A2), it is shown that the frame-in of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame-in of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM1 to notify the fact. In this production example, as in the production example shown in FIG. 48 (A3), it is shown that the display (in preparation display) of "STANDBY" is performed as a look-ahead notice. In addition, it may be performed as the change notice.

In FIG. 205 (A3), as a result of the decorative symbols being stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the shaking fluctuation is observed. It shows how it is being done.

After that, FIG. 205 (A4) shows that the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is deleted.

After that, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A5), the second timer notice display TM2 is framed in above the first timer notice display TM1. Animation is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A6), it is shown that the frame-in animation of the second timer advance notice display TM2 is completed. That is, the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed below the second timer notice display TM2. In this production example, the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are displayed so as not to overlap with each other, but the second timer notice is displayed so as to overlap the rear side of the first timer notice display TM1. Display TM2 may be displayed. In this case, the display position of the second timer advance notice display TM2 may coincide with the display position of the first timer advance notice display TM1, or the display may be shifted in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 205 (A7), it is shown that the first timer notice display TM1 switches from the display of "STANDBY" to the display of "10:00" as the timer display. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect has been started. After that, the timer display countdown starts. On the other hand, in the second timer notice display TM2, the preparation display continues, and the display of "STANDBY" continues. After that, for example, the production is performed as shown in FIGS. 20 (3) to 20 (8). During that time, the preparation display continues on the second timer advance notice display TM2.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A8), the display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is started. In the second timer notice display TM2, the display of "STANDBY" continues. After that, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 205 (A9), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A10), the movement animation in which the second timer notice display TM2 moves downward is started, and the first timer notice display TM1
Move to the display position of. After that, as shown in FIG. 205 (A11), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed. At this time, the movement animation of the second timer advance notice display TM2 continues. The cut-in display may be performed after the movement animation of the second timer advance notice display TM2 is completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 205 (A12), when the second timer notice display TM2 moves to the position where the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed, the movement animation is completed. In the second timer notice display TM2, "STANDBY" is continuously displayed. After that, for example, the production is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 20 (13) to (14). After that, one or a plurality of pseudo-continuous productions may be further performed. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the second timer notice display TM2 moves after the first timer notice display TM1 is erased, but both the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are displayed. You may not move after being done. Further, the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be displayed so as not to overlap each other.

After that, "decoration 7" was stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, and reached a reach state. As shown in FIG. 205 (A13), the first decorative symbol display device 208L developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The situation is shown. At this time as well, the display of "STANDBY" continues on the second timer notice display TM2. In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A14), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. During this period, the display of "STANDBY" is continued on the second timer advance notice display TM2. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 202 (C4) and later are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 205 (B1) to 205 (B8) show that another effect pattern of the timer advance notice effect is being performed, and the squib in the display of the bomb is not the countdown of the timer display. It is shown that the display mode notifies the timing at which a certain advance notice effect is performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 205 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (B2), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this production example, the bomb timer display BOMB is displayed with a fuse added, and the character BYM of the lord appears, and an animation (extension animation) is performed to extend the fuse. After that, as shown in FIG. 205 (B3), the extension animation extends the squib of the bomb timer display BOMB, and then the extension animation is completed. As shown in FIG. 205 (B4), the tip of the squib is ignited. Then, the timer notice production is started. In the timer advance notice effect in this production example, the countdown effect is performed in such a manner that the igniter wire becomes shorter with the passage of time, so that the start timing of a certain advance notice effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is performed. I am trying to notify by the length of. As shown in FIGS. 205 (B4) to 205 (B6), the countdown effect is performed until the fuse runs out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 205 (B6), when the squib disappears and the spark at the tip of the squib reaches the main body of the bomb timer display BOMB, as shown in FIG. 205 (B7), the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, after the explosion effect EF304 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern at the substantially center of the display screen, as shown in FIG. 205 (B8), "super hot !!" is displayed at the substantially center of the display screen. The characters are displayed large. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the notice display with the characters "Gekiatsu !!" is performed as a result of the timer notice effect. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 16 (16) and later are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 205 (C1) to 205 (C3) show another effect pattern following FIG. 205 (B5), and the timer advance effect by the bomb timer display BOMB is a false effect. The situation is shown.

As shown in FIG. 205 (B5), when the effect of the countdown by the bomb timer display BOMB is started and the fuse is shortened to a certain length, the spark at the tip of the fuse is digested as shown in FIG. 205 (C1). It is shown that the tip of the fuse is smoldering. That is, a fake timer that the timer display BOMB of the bomb has started the timer advance effect, but the countdown effect is completed and the timer display BOMB of the bomb explodes and the effect ends before a certain advance effect starts. It is suggested that it was a preview production. After that, as shown in FIG. 205 (C2), the bomb timer display BOMB is erased.

After that, as a result of the decorative symbols being stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" are stopped and displayed, and after the shaking fluctuation is performed. , As shown in FIG. 205 (C3), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is deleted.

In this production example, it was shown that the countdown effect ends while the bomb timer display BOMB is performing the countdown. For example, a fake timer notice is given in the manner shown in FIG. 205 (D). The production may be performed. Here, the effect example shown in FIG. 205 (D) shows another effect pattern following FIG. 205 (B6). In this production example, as shown in FIG. 205 (D), when the squib disappears and the spark at the tip of the squib reaches the main body of the bomb timer display BOMB, the spark displayed at the tip of the squib is digested and the timer. It is shown that the notice production ended unexploded. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 205 (C2) to 205 (C3) are performed.

FIG. 206 is a diagram showing an example of the timer advance notice effect step by step.

The effects shown in FIGS. 206 (A1) to 206 (A3) show another effect pattern following FIG. 205 (B5), and the timer advance effect is interrupted in the middle, but is restarted by the revival effect. It is shown how to do it.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (A1), it is shown that the spark at the tip of the fuse is digested and the tip of the fuse is smoldering. Since the effect example shown in FIG. 206 (A1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 205 (C1), the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (A2), a torch character TC appears from the right end of the display screen, and it is shown that the bomb timer display BOMB is flying toward the tip of the fuse. Has been done. After that, when the character TC of the torch overlaps the tip of the fuse of the bomb timer display BOMB, the fuse reignites as shown in FIG. 206 (A3). After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 205 (B6) and later are performed. In this way, in this production example, the fuse of the bomb timer display BOMB was digested, and I thought that it was a fake timer notice production, but Matsuaki's character TC appeared and the fuse ignited again and the timer notice production was done. It is shown that it will be resurrected. In other words, it can be said that even if the production of the countdown by the bomb timer display BOMB is stopped in the middle, it may be revived again. In addition, when a certain advance notice effect is performed after the countdown is interrupted and a resurrection effect is performed, the jackpot symbol mode is determined more than when a certain advance notice effect is performed without interrupting the countdown. It may be easier to display, or if a certain advance notice effect is performed without interrupting the countdown, after the countdown is interrupted, a revival effect is performed and a certain advance notice effect is performed. It may be easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode than in the case, and there are cases where a revival effect is performed after the countdown is interrupted and a certain notice effect is performed, and there are cases where the countdown is not interrupted. The ease with which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed may be the same as when the notice effect is performed. Further, even if the torch character TC appears, the fuse may not be ignited and the timer advance notice effect may not be restarted. A fake timer advance effect of the effect pattern may be performed, or when the torch character TC appears. The fire wire may be ignited so that the timer advance notice effect is restarted.

The effects shown in FIGS. 206 (B1) to 206 (B3) show another effect pattern following FIG. 205 (B5), and show how the countdown period in the timer advance notice effect is added and extended. ing.

As shown in FIG. 205 (B5), when the fuse of the bomb timer display BOMB reaches a certain length, as shown in FIG. 206 (B1), the character BYM of the lord appears again in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, it is shown that the fuse is further lengthened to extend the timing when a certain notice effect is started. That is, in this production example, the timing until the start of a certain notice effect is added by extending the timing of starting a certain notice effect by extending the fuse while the timer notice effect is being counted down. It is shown how to do it. This may suggest that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. It should be noted that the fuse may be extended before the effect of extending (adding) the fuse is performed. In addition, this notice may be a false notice.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (B2), it is shown that the fuse becomes longer as the character BYM of the lord runs from the left side to the right side of the display screen, and the fuse extends to a certain length. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 206 (B3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tip of the squib is ignited again and the countdown is restarted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 205 (B5) and later are performed.

The effects shown in FIGS. 206 (C1) to 206 (C5) show another effect pattern of the timer advance effect by the timer display BOMB of the bomb following FIG. 205 (B1).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (C1), the timer display BOMB of the bomb is displayed, but the fuse is not ignited, and a preparation display is made to warn that the timer notice effect will be started. The situation is shown. In this production example, it is shown that the timer display BOMB of the bomb is functioning as a look-ahead notice. In addition, it may function as the change notice, may function only as a look-ahead notice, or may be configured to function only as the change notice.

In FIG. 206 (C2), as a result of the decorative symbols being stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" are stopped and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols, and the shaking fluctuation is observed. It shows how it is being done.

After that, FIG. 206 (C3) shows that the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is erased, but the bomb timer display BOMB is continuously displayed. The bomb timer display BOMB may be temporarily erased while the decorative symbol is stopped.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (C4), it is shown that the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 has started. At this time, the bomb timer display BOMB is still displayed.

After that, the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C5) is performed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C5) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 205 (B2), the description thereof will be omitted. After that, for example, a success pattern of the timer advance notice effect as shown in FIGS. 205 (B3) to (B8) and a failure pattern of the timer advance notice effect as shown in FIGS. 205 (C1) to (C3). A fake timer notice production) is performed.

In this production example, SP reach is performed in the symbol variation display in which the bomb timer display BOMB is displaying the preparation, and if the SP reach is a big hit, the bomb timer display BOMB is redisplayed. It may not be displayed, or it may be redisplayed when the SP reach ends and the background returns to the normal background. In addition, SP reach is performed in the symbol variation display that is displayed as being prepared by the bomb timer display BOMB, and if the SP reach is lost, the bomb timer display BOMB is displayed again. It may or may not be done. Needless to say, this can be applied to the preparatory display of the timer advance notice effect and the preparatory display of the chance up meter described so far.

Further, in this production example, it is shown that the countdown effect is started by the appearance of the character BYM of the lord while the bomb timer display BOMB is displaying the preparation display. For example, FIG. 206 (C4) shows. After the production is performed, before the production shown in FIG. 206 (C5) is started, the production as shown in FIG. 206 (D) may be performed, the fuse may be ignited, and the countdown production may be started. Something may be done by the bomb timer display BOMB itself. Specifically, after the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C4) is performed, the countdown effect may start due to the vibration of the bomb timer display BOMB as shown in FIG. 206 (D). I have foretold that. In addition, the timer display BOMB of the bomb vibrates, but the countdown effect does not start, and a fake timer advance effect that ends the timer advance effect may be performed, or when the timer display BOMB of the bomb vibrates. You may make sure that the countdown effect starts. Further, when the countdown effect is started after the preparation display by the bomb timer display BOMB is displayed, the bomb timer display BOMB may be vibrated without fail.

Further, for example, after the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C4) is performed and before the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C5) is started, the effect shown in FIG. 206 (E) is performed and the squib is ignited. Then, it may be announced that the countdown effect may start. Specifically, after the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C4) is performed, a balloon with the characters "Bomb ignition !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM as shown in FIG. 206 (E). Foretells that the countdown production may start. In addition, although the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, the countdown effect may not start and the timer advance notice effect may end, or a fake timer advance effect may be performed, or the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed. In that case, the countdown effect may always start. Further, when the countdown effect is started after the preparation display by the bomb timer display BOMB is displayed, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed without fail.

The effects shown in FIGS. 206 (F1) to 206 (F12) show another effect pattern of the timer advance effect by the timer display BOMB of the bomb following FIG. 206 (C4). In this production example, the timer display of the second bomb (second) is displayed in a state where the preparation display by the bomb timer display BOMB (in this production example, it is referred to as "first bomb timer display BOMB") is displayed. The bomb timer display BOMB2) is displayed, and the second bomb timer display BOMB2 also indicates that the preparation is in progress, suggesting that the timer advance notice effect is started twice.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F1), a balloon including a bomb display is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is foretold that the second bomb timer display BOMB2 will be displayed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that other types of notices are foretelling that the preparation display will increase. The second bomb timer display BOMB2 may not be displayed even if the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and the second bomb timer display BOMB2 is always displayed when the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed. It may be done.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F2), it is shown that the second bomb timer display BOMB2 appears above the first bomb timer display BOMB.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect related to the first bomb timer display BOMB displayed earlier has started. In this production example, the character BYM of the lord appears, and an extension animation is performed to extend the fuse of the first bomb timer display BOMB. That is, it is shown that the previously displayed bomb timer display (first bomb timer display BOMB) is digested first. The bomb timer display (second bomb timer display BOMB2) displayed later may be digested first, or the bomb timer display displayed earlier may be digested first or later. The timer display of the bomb may be digested first.

After that, the extension animation is performed as shown in FIGS. 205 (B3) to 205 (B4), and when the extension animation is completed, the first bomb timer is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F4). The tip of the BOMB's fuse ignites, and the timer notice effect related to the first bomb timer display BOMB is started.

FIG. 206 (F5) shows how the countdown effect of the timer notice effect related to the first bomb timer display BOMB is continuing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 206 (F6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the character BYM of the lord is again in a state where the countdown of the timer notice effect related to the first bomb timer display BOMB is being produced. It has appeared, and it is shown that an extension animation is being performed to extend the fuse of the second bomb timer display BOMB2. That is, it is shown that the timer display of the bomb displayed later is digested during the digestion of the timer display of the bomb displayed earlier.

After that, the extension animation is performed as shown in FIGS. 205 (B3) to 205 (B4), and when the extension animation is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F7) displays the second bomb timer. The tip of the fuse of BOMB2 is ignited, and the timer advance notice effect related to the second bomb timer display BOMB2 is started. In the first bomb timer display BOMB, the countdown effect is continuously performed, and the display is performed in such a manner that the fuse is shortened with the passage of time.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F8), it is shown that the squib of the first bomb timer display BOMB disappears and the spark at the tip of the squib reaches the main body of the first bomb timer display BOMB. There is. On the other hand, in the second bomb timer display BOMB2, the countdown effect is continuously performed in such a manner that the fuse is shortened with the passage of time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 206 (F9), the first bomb timer display BOMB is erased, and the explosion effect EF304 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol at substantially the center of the display screen. The second bomb timer display BOMB2 is displayed overlapping with the explosion effect EF304 related to the first bomb timer display BOMB, and the countdown effect continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 206 (F10), the characters "Gekiatsu !!" are displayed in large size in the substantially center of the display screen, indicating that the notice display is being performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that as a result of the timer notice production related to the first bomb timer display BOMB digested earlier, the notice display with the characters "Gekiatsu !!" is performed. There is. The characters "Gekiatsu !!" are then erased. The second bomb timer display BOMB2 displayed later does not change the display position even after the previously digested first bomb timer display BOMB is erased, but is displayed after the first bomb timer display BOMB is erased. The position may be changed. In this case, for example, the first bomb timer display BOMB may be moved to the displayed position.

After that, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols to form a reach state, and the shaking fluctuation is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 206 (F11), the fuse of the second bomb timer display BOMB2 disappears. It is shown that the spark at the tip of the fuse reaches the main body of the second bomb timer display BOMB2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 206 (F9), the second bomb timer display BOMB is erased, and the explosion effect EF304 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol at substantially the center of the display screen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 206 (F12), the characters "Oni Atsu!" Are displayed in large size in the substantially center of the display screen, indicating that the notice display is being performed. That is, it is shown that as a result of the timer advance notice effect related to the second bomb timer display BOMB2 that was digested later, the notice display with the characters "Oni Atsu!" Is performed. The characters "Oni Atsu!" Are then erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 16 (18) and later are performed. The characters "Gekiatsu !!" shown in FIG. 206 (F10) are continuously displayed until the second bomb timer display BOMB2 explodes, and the explosion effect EF304 displayed when the second bomb timer display BOMB2 is displayed. May be overlapped by.

In this production example, the first bomb timer display BOMB whose countdown effect was started first exploded, but the second bomb timer display BOMB whose countdown effect was started later exploded first. You may.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc." ] Is a game table equipped with
The display means may display the first display [for example, chance up meter, timer notice display, etc.].
The first display is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started.
The display means displays a second display [for example, the display of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIGS. 29 (13) and 195 (A4), and the display of the lever image 136V shown in FIG. 29 (18). , The pseudo-continuous production shown in FIGS. 20 (9) to (12) and 196 (B1) to (B4)] may be displayed.
The second display is displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display [for example, as shown in FIG. 195 (A4), the gold cut-in image CI3 overlaps the chance up meter CMT. As shown in FIG. 196 (B2), the pseudo-ream symbol displayed in the pseudo-ream effect overlaps the timer notice display TM1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game table, the line of sight of the player who was looking at the first display can be guided to the second display as it is, and it is possible not to overlook that the second display is displayed. There is.

Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the first display, or may not display the first display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, the display means may display only the second display as a certain effect, or may display a display other than the second display as a certain effect. Moyo. Further, the display means may always display the second display as a certain effect, or may not display the second display as a certain effect.

In addition, a certain effect may be a second display, for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display becomes a display indicating "0", a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) is always performed. It may be performed, or when a specific timing (for example, the timing when the character of Sabohani as a cursor reaches the second checkpoint) is reached in the production of the chance up meter, a specific production (for example, gold) is always performed. The cut-in image may be displayed).

Further, as a certain effect, a display other than the second display may be displayed. For example, when the timer display in the timer notice display becomes a display indicating "0", a specific effect (for example,). There may be multiple patterns of certain effects, such as an effect other than (pseudo-continuous effect) (for example, an effect in which a large-scale behavioral object operates), or a specific timing in the effect of the chance-up meter. (For example, when the character of Sabohani as a cursor reaches the second checkpoint), an effect other than a specific effect (for example, display of a gold cut-in image) (for example, display of a big button image) is performed. There may be a plurality of patterns of a certain effect, such as the case where it is displayed.

Further, "The first display is a period display [for example, a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 195 (A1)].
With regard to the period display, the display of the second display is started in a certain period [for example, a period during which the effect by the chance up meter CMT shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (27) is being performed]. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 195 (A1) to (A4), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. Is notifying the timing when may be displayed],
At least a part of the first display [for example, the display position of the Sabohani character SBH in the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 195 (A1)] is changed (hereinafter, referred to as “change display”). Is configured to
The change display is a display that changes according to the time from the start of the certain period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (27), the character SBH of Sabohani is the starting point. The display position of the Sabohani character SBH changes according to the time since the movement from the SP started],
The change display is performed and the first display becomes a display mode [for example, a display mode in which the character SBH of the Sabohani shown in FIG. 195 (A1) reaches the second checkpoint CP2]. It is notified that it is time to start displaying the second display,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display start timing of the second display is notified by the display change of the first display, which is the period display, so that there is a sense of expectation that the display start timing of the second display will be reached. You may be able to.

Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include a display other than the period display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the display of the second display is started in a certain period, or the display of the display other than the second display starts in a certain period. The timing to be performed may also be notified. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the display of the second display is started in a certain period, or the timing when the display of the second display is started in a certain period. May not be notified.

Further, the first display may notify the timing at which the display of the second display is started only in a certain period, and the display of the second display may be displayed even in a period other than a certain period. It may notify the timing to be started.

Further, it may be notified only that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started by performing the change display and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed. It may be notified that the first display is in a certain display mode and the timing other than the timing at which the display of the second display is started is also notified. Further, it may be notified that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started when the change display is performed and the first display is changed to a certain display mode, or the change display is performed. It may not be notified that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started because the first display is in a certain display mode.

Further, it may be notified that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed. It may be notified that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started by other than the fact that the first display is in a certain display mode.

Further, "the first display may include a third display [for example, a display of" UP "above the second checkpoint CP2 shown in FIG. 195 (A7)"]. Is a display
When the second display is displayed, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 195 (A1) to 195 (A7), when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the third display is displayed. 2 "UP" is displayed above the checkpoint CP2],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize that the second display is displayed by looking at the third display.

Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including a display other than the third display. It may be. Further, the first display may be displayed with the third display always included, or may be displayed without the third display included.

Further, when the second display is displayed, only the third display may be displayed, or when the second display is displayed, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when the second display is displayed, the third display may always be displayed, or when the second display is displayed, the third display may not be displayed.

Further, "the first display is a timer display [for example, the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 20 (2) and 196 (B1), the bomb timer display BOMB shown in FIG. 205 (B2), etc.].
The timer display is a display that notifies the timing at which the display of the second display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (9), in the timer notice display TM1. When the timer display reaches "00:00", it is informed that the pseudo-continuous production will start, etc.],
A display (hereinafter, referred to as "change display") in which at least a part of the first display [for example, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2)] changes according to the passage of time is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (7), the timer display countdown is increased according to the time from the start of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1. It is done, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (7) is "00:00"]. The display of the second display is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the display start timing of the second display is notified by the display change of the first display, which is the timer display, so that there is a sense of expectation that the display start timing of the second display will be reached. You may be able to.

Here, the first display may include only the timer display, or may include a display other than the timer display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the display of the second display is started, or may also notify the timing when the display of the display other than the second display is started. There may be. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the display of the second display is started, or may not notify the timing when the display of the second display is started. There may be.

Further, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, only the display of the second display may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is displayed. The display of the display other than the second display may be started when the display mode is changed. Further, when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, the display of the second display may always be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is displayed. The display of the second display may not be started when the display mode is changed.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is displayed. The display of the second display may be started even in cases other than the case where the display mode is changed.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, when the timer notice display TM1 performs a movement display as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9)". As shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may move and display. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9), it is displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is moved. The position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is moved and displayed. And the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the change display by the first display is started with the line of sight focused on the first display in the movement display of the first display, and the timing when the change display is started should not be overlooked. It may be possible to prevent the effect from being reduced because the timing of the second display is unknowingly reached. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for the second production and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the second display.

Here, the first display may be a display in which only the movement display is performed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the display other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, there may be a case where only the movement display is performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, a display other than the movement display may be performed before the change display is started. Further, the movement display may always be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. , The movement display may or may not be performed before the change display is started.

Further, the movement display may be performed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the movement display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, when the timer notice display TM1 performs a movement display as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9)". As shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may move and display. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9), it is displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is moved. The position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is moved and displayed. And the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, during the execution of the change display by the first display, the line of sight is focused on the first display by the movement display of the first display, so that the second display is unknowingly performed. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for the second production and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the second display.

Here, the first display may be a display in which only the movement display is performed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the display other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, only the movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display, or a display other than the movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display. Further, the movement display may always be performed during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may not be performed during the execution of the change display.

Further, the movement display may be performed only during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may be performed even during the execution of the display other than the change display.

In addition, "when it is time to start the display of the second display, the display of the second display may be started [for example, in FIGS. 20 (7) to (12). As shown, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the pseudo-continuous effect may be started, and as shown in FIGS. 29 (8) to (13), the character SBH of Sabohani. When the second checkpoint CP2 is reached, the gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed, etc.],
Even when the display of the second display is started, the display of the second display may not be started [for example, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00". However, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be started. As shown in FIGS. 170 (A11) to 170 (A16), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2, the gold cut-in CI3 is not displayed. There are etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the display of the second display is started, the second display is not always started, so whether or not the display of the second display is started is started. In some cases, it is possible to have a sense of expectation.

Here, when it is the timing when the display of the second display is started, only the display of the second display may be started, or the timing when the display of the second display is started. In that case, the display of the display other than the second display may be started. Further, when it is the timing to start the display of the second display, the display of the second display may always be started, and when it is the timing to start the display of the second display, the second display is started. The display of the second display may not start.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the display of the second display is started, or the timing when the display of the second display is started. The display of the second display may be started in cases other than the case where the situation is not met.

Further, even when the display of the second display is started, the display of the second display may not be started, or the display of the second display is started. Even in such a case, the display other than the second display may not be started. Further, even when the display of the second display is started, the display of the second display does not necessarily have to be started, or when the display of the second display is started. However, the display of the second display may be started.

Further, the display of the second display may not be started only when the display of the second display is started, or the display of the second display is started at the timing. In cases other than the case, the display of the second display may not be started.

In addition, "when it is time to start the display of the second display, the display of the second display is always started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the first display, it may be possible to further improve the expectation that the second display will be displayed.

Here, the display of the second display may always be started only when the display of the second display is started, or the display of the second display is started at the timing. In addition to the case, the display of the second display may always be started.

Further, "The display means includes a fourth display [for example, the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 202 (A1), the timer notice display TM1 in which" STANDBY "shown in FIG. 202 (C1) is displayed, and FIG. 48 (Fig. 48). The timer notice stock display area TMst indicating that the timer notice shown in B3) is in stock, and the display showing the number of meters in stock in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 185 (A1). Etc.] is a means that may be displayed,
The fourth display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the fourth display may give a feeling of expectation that the first display will be displayed.

Here, the display means may display only the fourth display, or may display a display other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may be foretelling only that the first display is displayed, or may be foretelling that a display other than the first display is displayed. .. Further, the fourth display may always give a notice that the first display will be displayed, or may not give a notice that the first display will be displayed. ..

Further, "When the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the second display [for example, shown in FIG. 195 (A4) and FIG. (B1). As shown in FIGS. 196 (C2) and D1, the chance-up meter CMT is partially or wholly overlapped by the gold cut-in image CI3 when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. , Part or all of the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the balloon and cut-in image CI7 attached to the display YMF of the face of the lord in the pseudo-continuous production],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, a player who pays attention to the first display may be able to continue to pay attention to the second display.

Here, when the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the second display, and when the second display is displayed, the second display may be overlapped. May be overlapped by other than at least part of the first display. Also, when the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the second display, and when the second display is displayed, the second display may cause the second display to overlap. At least part of the first display may not overlap.

Further, when the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped only by the second display, and when the second display is displayed, other than the second display. At least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the display of.

Further, when only the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the second display, and even if a display other than the second display is displayed, the second display may be displayed. At least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the display of.

When the second display is displayed, only a part of the first display may be overlapped by the second display, and when the second display is displayed, the second display causes the second display. All of one display may overlap.

Further, "When the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed in the area overlapping the area where the first display is displayed, so that the first display is hidden. [For example, as shown in FIG. 195 (A4), the chance up meter CMT is hidden by displaying the gold cut-in image CI3 at the display position of the chance up meter CMT, FIG. 196 (D1). ), The cut-in image CI7 is displayed at the display position of the timer notice display TM1, so that the timer notice display TM1 is hidden, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to draw more attention to the second display.

Here, when the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed in the area that overlaps with the area where the first display was displayed, so that even if only the first display is hidden. Well, when the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed in the area that overlaps with the area where the first display was displayed, so that the displays other than the first display are also hidden. You may. Further, when the second display is displayed, the first display may be hidden by displaying the second display in the area overlapping the area where the first display was displayed. However, when the second display is displayed, the first display may not be hidden because the second display is displayed in the area that overlaps with the area where the first display was displayed. May be good.

Further, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
One of the plurality of image display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
One of the plurality of image display means is an image display means [for example, a sub display device 208S or the like].
The second image display means is a means provided in front of the first image display means.
The first display is displayed by the first image display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 196 (A1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, FIG. 198 (A2)). As shown in, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
The second display is displayed by the second image display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 196 (A4), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the sub display device 208S, FIG. 198 (A5). ), The pseudo-continuous effect is displayed on the sub-display device 208S, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to produce a three-dimensional effect by using a plurality of image display devices.

Here, the display means may be composed of only a plurality of image display means, or may be configured to include means other than the plurality of image display means. Further, the display means may be configured to include a plurality of image display means, or may be configured not to include a plurality of image display means.

Further, the display means may be composed of only the first image display means and the second image display means, or the image display means other than the first image display means and the second image display means. It may be configured to include. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first image display means and the second image display means, or may not include the first image display means and the second image display means. It may be composed of.

Further, the second image display means may be provided only on the front side of the first image display means, or may be provided on a side other than the front side of the first image display means. You may. Further, the second image display means may be provided on the front side of the first image display means, or may not be provided on the front side of the first image display means. There may be.

Further, only the first display may be displayed by the first image display means, or displays other than the first display may be displayed by the first image display means. Further, the first display may always be displayed by the first image display means, or the first display may not be displayed by the first image display means.

Further, only the second display may be displayed by the second image display means, or a display other than the second display may be displayed by the second image display means. Further, the second display may always be displayed by the second image display means, or the second display may not be displayed by the second image display means.

Further, "The second image display means is a means capable of changing the position by moving [for example, as shown in FIGS. 196 (A2) to (A5), the sub display device 208S. Can be repositioned by moving it up and down, etc.],
When the display of the second display is started while the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second image display means moves and the second display means. The display of is overlapped with at least a part of the first display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 196 (A2) to (A5), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed with the chance up meter CMT displayed. When it is time to start displaying, the sub-display device 208S moves upward, and the gold cut-in image CI3 overlaps a part of the chance-up meter CMT, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to enhance the effect of the effect by dynamically performing the second effect.

Here, the second image display means may be capable of changing the position only by moving, or may be capable of changing the position by something other than moving. There may be. Further, the second image display means may always change the position by moving, or may not change the position by moving.

Further, when the display of the second display is started while the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second image display means moves and the second display is displayed. It may overlap with at least a part of the first display, or when it is time to start the display of the second display while the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second display is used. The image display means of the above may be moved so that the second display overlaps with other than at least a part of the first display. Further, when the display of the second display is started while the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second image display means moves and the second display is displayed. It may always overlap with at least a part of the first display, and when the display of the second display is started while the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second display is used. The image display means of the above may be moved so that the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display.

Further, only when the display of the second display is started in the state where the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second image display means moves and the second image display means is moved. The second display may overlap with at least a part of the first display, and other than the timing when the display of the second display is started while the first display is displayed in the first image display means. When the timing comes, the second image display means may move and the second display may overlap with at least a part of the first display.

When the display of the second display is started while the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second image display means moves and the second display is displayed. It may overlap with only a part of the first display, or when the display of the second display is started while the first display is displayed in the first image display means, the second display is used. The image display means may move so that the second display overlaps all of the first display.

In addition, "operation means [for example, effect button 136, effect lever 136V, etc.] is provided.
The second display is a display relating to the operating means [for example, the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 195 (C2), the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 195 (D5), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation due to the possibility of being able to perform a physical operation by an operating means.

Here, the second display may relate only to the operating means, or may relate to something other than the operating means. Further, the second display may be related to the operating means or may not be related to the operating means.

The second display may be a display of the operating means or a display prompting the operation of the operating means.

Further, "the display means displays a fifth display [for example, a boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4), a cut-in image of a panda character shown in FIG. 201 (A25), etc.] as the certain effect. It is a means that may be done
The fifth display is a display different from the second display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give variation to the production in the first display.

Here, the display means may display only the fifth display as a certain effect, or may display a display other than the fifth display as a certain effect. You may. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display as a certain effect, or may not display the fifth display as a certain effect.

Further, the fifth display may be different from only the second display, or may be different from the display other than the second display. Further, the fifth display may be different from the second display without fail, or may not be different from the second display.

The fifth display may be partially different from the second display, or may be entirely different.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc." ] Is a game table equipped with
The display means may display the first display [for example, chance up meter, timer notice display, etc.].
The first display includes certain effects [for example, the display of the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4), the display of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 29 (13), and the lever shown in FIG. 29 (18). It is a display for notifying the timing at which the display of the image 136V, the effect of the pseudo-ream shown in FIGS. 20 (9) to (11), etc.] is started.
The first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, as shown in FIGS. 199 (A1) to (A4), the chance up meter CMT has a plurality of symbol variation. As shown in FIGS. 199 (C1) to (C4), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, which are displayed over the display],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to draw attention to the first display over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the first display, or may not display the first display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, the first display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed other than over a plurality of symbol variation displays. .. Further, the first display may be always displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

Further, "The first display is a period display [for example, a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 199 (A1)].
The period display means the certain effect [for example, the period during which the effect by the chance up meter CMT shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to 29 (27) is performed] [for example, FIG. 29 (. 4) Display of Boy character BOY, display of gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 29 (13), display of lever image 136V shown in FIG. 29 (18), etc.] It is a display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (8) to (13), when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second checkpoint CP2, the gold cut-in image CI3 can be displayed. Notifying the timing when there is a possibility],
At least a part of the first display [for example, the display position of the Sabohani character SBH in the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 199 (A1)] is changed (hereinafter, referred to as “change display”). Is configured to
The change display is a display that changes according to the time from the start of the certain period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to (27), the character SBH of Sabohani is the starting point. The display position of the Sabohani character SBH changes according to the time since the movement from the SP started],
The change display is performed and the first display becomes a display mode [for example, a display mode in which the character SBH of the Sabohani shown in FIG. 29 (8) reaches the second checkpoint CP2]. It is notified that it is time to start the execution of the production.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the execution start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the period display, so that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the execution start timing of a certain effect will be reached. You may be able to do it.

Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include a display other than the period display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or the execution of an effect other than the certain effect is started in a certain period. The timing may also be notified. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the first display may notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started only in a certain period, or the execution of a certain effect is started in a period other than the certain period. It may be the one that notifies the timing.

Further, it may be notified only that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display being in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may be notified that one display is in a certain display mode and is not the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. Further, it may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started when the change display is performed and the first display is changed to a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may not be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started when one display becomes a certain display mode.

Further, it may be notified that the execution of a certain effect is started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by other than the fact that one display becomes a certain display mode.

In addition, "the first display may include a third display [for example, a display of" UP "above the second checkpoint CP2 shown in FIG. 29 (16)". Is a display
When the certain effect is executed, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (13) to (16), when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the second display is displayed. "UP" is displayed above checkpoint CP2],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize that a certain effect has been performed by looking at the third display.

Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including a display other than the third display. It may be. Further, the first display may be displayed with the third display always included, or may be displayed without the third display included.

Further, when a certain effect is executed, only the third display may be displayed, or when a certain effect is executed, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when a certain effect is executed, the third display may always be displayed, or when a certain effect is executed, the third display may not be displayed.

Further, "the first display is a timer display [for example, the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 20 (2) and 196 (B1), the bomb timer display BOMB shown in FIG. 205 (B2), etc.].
The timer display is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (9), the timer in the timer notice display TM1. When the display reaches "00:00", it is notified that the pseudo-continuous production will start, etc.],
A display (hereinafter, referred to as "change display") in which at least a part of the first display [for example, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2)] changes according to the passage of time is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (7), the timer display countdown is increased according to the time from the start of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1. It is done, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (7) is "00:00"]. At that time, the execution of the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the execution start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the timer display, so that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the execution start timing of a certain effect will be reached. You may be able to do it.

Here, the first display may include only the timer display, or may include a display other than the timer display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may also notify the timing when the execution of the effect other than the certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When the display mode is adopted, the execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, the execution of a certain effect may be always started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When the display mode is adopted, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. Execution of a certain effect may be started even in cases other than the case where the display mode is adopted.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, when the timer notice display TM1 performs a movement display as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9)". As shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may move and display. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9), it is displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is moved. The position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is moved and displayed. And the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the change display by the first display is started with the line of sight focused on the first display in the movement display of the first display, and the timing when the change display is started should not be overlooked. It may be possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced because it is time to perform a certain effect. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for a certain effect to be performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the certain effect.

Here, the first display may be a display in which only the movement display is performed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the display other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, there may be a case where only the movement display is performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, a display other than the movement display may be performed before the change display is started. Further, the movement display may always be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. , The movement display may or may not be performed before the change display is started.

Further, the movement display may be performed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the movement display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, when the timer notice display TM1 performs a movement display as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9)". As shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may move and display. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9), it is displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is moved. The position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is moved and displayed. And the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, while the change display by the first display is being executed, the line of sight is focused on the first display by the movement display of the first display, so that a certain effect is performed before you know it. Therefore, it may be possible to prevent the effect from being reduced. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for a certain effect to be performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the certain effect.

Here, the first display may be a display in which only the movement display is performed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the display other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, only the movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display, or a display other than the movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display. Further, the movement display may always be performed during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may not be performed during the execution of the change display.

Further, the movement display may be performed only during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may be performed even during the execution of the display other than the change display.

In addition, "the first symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 199 (A1) to (A2), FIGS. 199 (C1) to (C2). In the displayed symbol variation display, etc.], the display of the first display is started, and the display is started.
In the second symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 199 (A4), the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 199 (C4) to C5], the above. The timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started is notified [for example, as shown in FIGS. 190 (B3) to (B14), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance-up meter CMT. As shown in FIGS. 20 (3) to 20 (12), it has been notified that the spirit character CLA may be displayed as a notice of chance up, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is "00". At ": 00", it has been notified that a pseudo-continuous production may be performed as a certain warning production],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the expectation for the second symbol variation display.

Here, in the first symbol variation display, only the display of the first display may be started, or in the first symbol variation display, the display other than the first display may also be started. In addition, the display of the first display may always be started in the first symbol variation display, or the display of the first display may not be started in the first symbol variation display.

Further, the display of the first display may be started only in the first symbol variation display, and the display of the first display may be started in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. Good.

Further, in the second symbol variation display, only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, and in the second symbol variation display, the timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified. May also be notified. Further, in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified without fail, and in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started is not notified. There may be cases.

Further, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified only in the second symbol variation display, and the execution of a certain effect is started in the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display. The timing may be notified.

Further, the first symbol variation display may be performed only before the second symbol variation display, or may be performed other than before the second symbol variation display. Good. Further, the first symbol variation display may always be performed before the second symbol variation display, or may not be performed before the second symbol variation display. You may.

In addition, "the first symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 199 (A1) to (A2), FIGS. 199 (C1) to (C2). In the displayed symbol variation display, etc.], the display of the first display is started, and the display is started.
In the second symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 199 (A4), the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 199 (C4) to (C5), etc.] The timing when the execution of a certain effect is started is notified, and
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display.
Execution of the change display is started in the second symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 199 (A1) to 190 (B4), in the next symbol variation display on which the chance up meter CMT is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 199 (C1) to (C5), the Sabohani character SBH has started moving, and the timer display countdown is started in the next symbol variation display in which the timer advance notice effect TM1 is displayed. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the expectation that the change display is executed in the second symbol variation display.

Here, in the first symbol variation display, only the display of the first display may be started, or in the first symbol variation display, the display other than the first display may also be started. In addition, the display of the first display may always be started in the first symbol variation display, or the display of the first display may not be started in the first symbol variation display.

Further, the display of the first display may be started only in the first symbol variation display, and the display of the first display may be started in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. Good.

Further, in the second symbol variation display, only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, and in the second symbol variation display, the timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified. May also be notified. Further, in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified without fail, and in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started is not notified. There may be cases.

Further, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified only in the second symbol variation display, and the execution of a certain effect is started in the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display. The timing may be notified.

Further, the first symbol variation display may be performed only before the second symbol variation display, or may be performed other than before the second symbol variation display. Good. Further, the first symbol variation display may always be performed before the second symbol variation display, or may not be performed before the second symbol variation display. You may.

Further, only the execution of the change display may be started in the second symbol variation display, or the execution of the display or the effect other than the change display may be started in the second symbol variation display. Further, the execution of the change display may always be started in the second symbol variation display, or the execution of the change display may not be started in the second symbol variation display.

Further, the execution of the change display may be started only in the second symbol variation display, or the execution of the change display may be started in the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display.

In addition, "the first symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 198 (B1) to (B7), FIGS. 199 (D1) to (D3). In the displayed symbol variation display, etc.], the display of the first display is started, and
In the second symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 198 (B10) and later, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 199 (D6) and later, etc.] The timing to start execution is notified,
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display.
Execution of the change display is started in the first symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIG. 198 (B2), the Sabohani character SBH starts moving in the symbol variation display on which the chance up meter CMT is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 199 (D1) to 199 (D2), the timer display countdown is started in the symbol variation display on which the timer advance notice effect TM1 is displayed],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain the production not only in the second symbol variation display but also in the first symbol variation display.

Here, in the first symbol variation display, only the display of the first display may be started, or in the first symbol variation display, the display other than the first display may also be started. In addition, the display of the first display may always be started in the first symbol variation display, or the display of the first display may not be started in the first symbol variation display.

Further, the display of the first display may be started only in the first symbol variation display, and the display of the first display may be started in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. Good.

Further, in the second symbol variation display, only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, and in the second symbol variation display, the timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified. May also be notified. Further, in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified without fail, and in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started is not notified. There may be cases.

Further, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified only in the second symbol variation display, and the execution of a certain effect is started in the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display. The timing may be notified.

Further, the first symbol variation display may be performed only before the second symbol variation display, or may be performed other than before the second symbol variation display. Good. Further, the first symbol variation display may always be performed before the second symbol variation display, or may not be performed before the second symbol variation display. You may.

Further, only the execution of the change display may be started in the first symbol variation display, or the execution of the display or the effect other than the change display may be started in the first symbol variation display. Further, the execution of the change display may always be started in the first symbol variation display, or the execution of the change display may not be started in the first symbol variation display.

Further, the execution of the change display may be started only in the first symbol variation display, or the execution of the change display may be started in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display.

Further, "The change display is interrupted between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 198 ( As shown in FIGS. 199 (D4) to (D5), the movement of the Sabohani character SBH in the chance-up meter CMT is interrupted while the symbol fluctuation is stopped, as shown in FIGS. The countdown of the timer display of the timer notice effect TM1 is interrupted while the symbol fluctuation is stopped],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to understand that the symbol variation display is stopped.

Here, only the change display may be interrupted between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display, or the first symbol. Display other than the change display may be interrupted between the end of the variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display. Further, the change display may be interrupted from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation may be interrupted. The change display may not be interrupted between the end of the display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display.

Further, the change display may be interrupted only between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation may be interrupted. The change display may be interrupted other than from the end of the display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display.

Further, "The change display is continuously performed even from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display [for example, As shown in FIGS. 199 (E1) to 199 (E2), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down even when the symbol fluctuation is stopped],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a sense of continuity between the symbol variation displays.

Here, even from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display, only the change display may be continuously performed. A display or effect other than the change display may be continuously performed from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display. Further, the change display may always be continuously performed from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display. The change display may not be continuously performed even from the end of one symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display.

Further, the change display may be continuously performed only from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display. The change display may be continuously performed other than the period from the end of the symbol variation display of the above to the start of the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display.

In addition, "when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (7) to (12). In addition, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the pseudo-continuous effect may be started, and as shown in FIGS. 29 (8) to (13), the Sabohani character SBH is the first. 2 When the checkpoint CP2 is reached, the gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed],
Even when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may not be started [for example, even if the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", it is simulated. As shown in FIGS. 170 (A11) to 170 (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 may not be displayed even if the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the certain effect is not always started, so there is a sense of expectation as to whether or not the execution of the certain effect is started. May be able to have.

Here, when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or when it is the timing to start the execution of a certain effect. , Execution of an effect other than a certain effect may also be started. Further, when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may be started without fail, and when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect is started. Execution may not start.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or when the execution of a certain effect is started. In other cases, the execution of a certain effect may be started.

Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may not be started, or the execution of a certain effect may be started. , Execution of an effect other than a certain effect may not be started. Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, or even when the execution of a certain effect is started, or The execution of the effect may be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and the execution of a certain effect may not be started except when the execution of a certain effect is started. Even in this case, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

In addition, "when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect is always started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the first display, it may be possible to further improve the expectation that a certain effect is executed.

Here, the execution of a certain effect may always be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and the execution of a certain effect may be started except when the execution of the certain effect is started. However, the execution of a certain effect may always be started.

Further, "The display means includes a fourth display [for example, the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 202 (A1), the timer notice display TM1 in which" STANDBY "shown in FIG. 202 (C1) is displayed, and FIG. 48 (Fig. 48). The timer notice stock display area TMst indicating that the timer notice shown in B3) is in stock, and the display showing the number of meters in stock in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 185 (A1). Etc.] is a means that may be displayed,
The fourth display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the fourth display may give a feeling of expectation that the first display will be displayed.

Here, the display means may display only the fourth display, or may display a display other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may be foretelling only that the first display is displayed, or may be foretelling that a display other than the first display is displayed. .. Further, the fourth display may always give a notice that the first display will be displayed, or may not give a notice that the first display will be displayed. ..

Further, "The fourth display is a display that may be displayed in the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 163 (D3), a symbol produced by the chance up meter CMT". The symbol before the fluctuation display The CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the fluctuation display. As shown in FIG. 204 (B1), the timer display countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started. The symbol before the fluctuation display. In variable display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation that the first display is displayed.

Here, the fourth display may be displayed only in the first symbol variation display, or may be displayed in a symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. It may be a thing. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the first symbol variation display, or may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

The fourth display may be displayed in the second symbol variation display, or may be always displayed in the first symbol variation display.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc." ] Is a game table equipped with
The display means may display the first display [for example, chance up meter, timer notice display, etc.].
The first display is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started.
At least a part of the first display [for example, the display position of the Sabohani character SBH on the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 195 (A1), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2), etc.] changes. It is configured so that the display (hereinafter referred to as "change display") may be performed.
The change display is a display that changes according to the time until the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to 27 (27), the character SBH of Sabohani As shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (7), the display position of the Sabohani character SBH changes according to the time from the start of the movement from the start point SP. The timer display countdown is performed according to the time since the timer display countdown started],
After the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the period from the start of the change display to the start of the execution of the certain effect is announced. A display (hereinafter referred to as "notice display") may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 200 (A2), from the display of the chance up meter CMT to the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH. The first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are shown between the two, and the period from the start of the movement of the Sabohani character SBH to the time when the chance-up notice is given is announced, FIG. 201 (A17). As shown in the above, between the time when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the time when the timer display countdown starts, the period from the start of the timer display countdown to the start of a certain notice effect is announced. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, it is possible to entertain at least a part of the display mode of the first display until the change of the display mode is started, and the player who is watching the notice display can enter the first display. In some cases, it may be possible not to overlook the initiation of the change in display mode.

Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the first display, or may not display the first display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, it may be configured so that only the change display may be performed, or may be configured so that a display other than the change display may be performed. Further, it may be configured so that the change display is always performed, or it may be configured so that the change display may not be performed.

Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, only the notice display may be displayed, or the display of the first display is started. After that, before the change display is started, a display other than the notice display may be displayed. Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the notice display may always be displayed, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the notice display may not be displayed before the change display is started.

Further, the notice display may be displayed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or the display of the first display is started. After that, the notice display may be displayed other than before the change display is started.

Further, "The first display is a period display [for example, a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 195 (A1)].
The period display means that the execution of the certain effect is started in a certain period [for example, the period during which the effect by the chance up meter CMT shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to 27) is performed. It is a display that notifies the timing [For example, as shown in FIGS. 195 (A1) to (A4), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. Notifying the timing that may be displayed, etc.],
When the certain period is started, the change display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (3), when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, the character SBH of Sabohani starts from the start point SP. Start moving, etc.],
The change display is performed and the first display becomes a display mode [for example, a display mode in which the character SBH of the Sabohani shown in FIG. 195 (A1) reaches the second checkpoint CP2]. It is notified that it is time to start the execution of the production.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the execution start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the period display, so that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the execution start timing of a certain effect will be reached. You may be able to do it.

Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include a display other than the period display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or the execution of an effect other than the certain effect is started in a certain period. The timing may also be notified. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the first display may notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started only in a certain period, or the execution of a certain effect is started in a period other than the certain period. It may be the one that notifies the timing.

Further, when a certain period is started, only the change display may be started, or when a certain period is started, a display other than the change display may be started. Further, the change display may always be started when a certain period is started, or the change display may not be started when a certain period is started.

Further, it may be notified only that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display being in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may be notified that one display is in a certain display mode and is not the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. Further, it may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started when the change display is performed and the first display is changed to a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may not be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started when one display becomes a certain display mode.

Further, it may be notified that the execution of a certain effect is started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by other than the fact that one display becomes a certain display mode.

Further, "the first display may include a third display [for example, a display of" UP "above the second checkpoint CP2 shown in FIG. 195 (A7)"]. Is a display
When the certain effect is executed, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 195 (A1) to 195 (A7), when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the second display is displayed. "UP" is displayed above checkpoint CP2],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize that a certain effect has been performed by looking at the third display.

Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including a display other than the third display. It may be. Further, the first display may be displayed with the third display always included, or may be displayed without the third display included.

Further, when a certain effect is executed, only the third display may be displayed, or when a certain effect is executed, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when a certain effect is executed, the third display may always be displayed, or when a certain effect is executed, the third display may not be displayed.

Further, "the first display is a timer display [for example, the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 20 (2) and 196 (B1), the bomb timer display BOMB shown in FIG. 205 (B2), etc.].
The timer display is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (9), the timer in the timer notice display TM1. When the display reaches "00:00", it is notified that the pseudo-continuous production will start, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (7) is "00:00"]. At that time, the execution of the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the execution start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the timer display, so that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the execution start timing of a certain effect will be reached. You may be able to do it.

Here, the first display may include only the timer display, or may include a display other than the timer display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may also notify the timing when the execution of the effect other than the certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When the display mode is adopted, the execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, the execution of a certain effect may be always started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When the display mode is adopted, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. Execution of a certain effect may be started even in cases other than the case where the display mode is adopted.

In addition, "when the display of the first display is started, a display that notifies the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes the certain display mode is used as the notice display. Displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 199 (C1), when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, the period from the start of the timer display countdown to the time when a certain notice effect is performed (“10:” 00 ") is announced, etc.],
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, when the display of the first display is started, the time until the first display becomes a certain display mode can be recognized, and it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation.

Here, even if only the display that notifies the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode is displayed as the notice display when the display of the first display is started. Alternatively, when the display of the first display is started, a display other than the display that notifies the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode is also displayed as a notice display. You may. Further, when the display of the first display is started, a display notifying the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode may always be displayed as a notice display. However, when the display of the first display is started, the display notifying the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode may not be displayed as the notice display. May be good.

Further, when the display of the first display is started, a display that notifies only the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode may be displayed as a notice display. Then, when the display of the first display is started, a display that notifies the time other than the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode is displayed as a notice display. May be good.

Further, only when the display of the first display is started, a display notifying the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode may be displayed as a notice display. However, even when the display of the first display is not started, a display for notifying the time from the start of the change display to the first display in a certain display mode is displayed as a notice display. You may.

Further, "after the display of the first display is started, before the change display is started, after the change display is started, the first display becomes the certain display mode. A display notifying the time until is displayed as the notice display [For example, as shown in FIG. 201 (A17), a timer is displayed between the time when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the time when the timer display countdown starts. The period from the start of the display countdown to the time when a certain notice effect is performed ("30:00") is announced],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, when the display of the first display is started, there is a sense of expectation about what the time will be from the start of the change display to the performance of a certain effect. It may be possible to make it.

Here, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the time from the start of the change display to the first display in a certain display mode is notified. Only the display to be displayed may be displayed as a notice display, or after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the first display is displayed after the change display is started. A display other than the display that notifies the time until a certain display mode is reached may also be displayed as a notice display. Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode is notified. The display may always be displayed as a notice display, or the first display may be displayed after the change display is started, after the display of the first display is started, and before the change display is started. In some cases, the display notifying the time until the display mode is reached may not be displayed as the notice display.

Further, only the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode is notified after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started. The display to be displayed may be displayed as a notice display, or the first display may be displayed after the change display is started, after the display of the first display is started, and before the change display is started. A display that notifies a time other than the time until the display mode is reached may be displayed as a notice display. A display that always notifies the time from the start of the change display to the time when the first display becomes a certain display mode after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started. May be displayed as a notice display, or after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the first display is a display after the change display is started. A display that may not notify the time until the mode is reached may be displayed as a notice display.

Further, only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the time from the start of the change display to the first display in a certain display mode is notified. The display to be displayed may be displayed as a notice display, or after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the first display is displayed after the change display is started. A display notifying the time until a certain display mode is reached may be displayed as a notice display.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, when the timer notice display TM1 performs a movement display as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9)". As shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may move and display. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9), it is displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is moved. The position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is moved and displayed. And the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the change display by the first display is started with the line of sight focused on the first display in the movement display of the first display, and the timing when the change display is started should not be overlooked. It may be possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced because it is time to perform a certain effect. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for a certain effect to be performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the certain effect.

Here, the first display may be a display in which only the movement display is performed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the display other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, there may be a case where only the movement display is performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, a display other than the movement display may be performed before the change display is started. Further, the movement display may always be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. , The movement display may or may not be performed before the change display is started.

Further, the movement display may be performed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the movement display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, when the timer notice display TM1 performs a movement display as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9)". As shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may move and display. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9), it is displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is moved. The position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is moved and displayed. And the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, while the change display by the first display is being executed, the line of sight is focused on the first display by the movement display of the first display, so that a certain effect is performed before you know it. Therefore, it may be possible to prevent the effect from being reduced. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for a certain effect to be performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the certain effect.

Here, the first display may be a display in which only the movement display is performed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the display other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, only the movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display, or a display other than the movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display. Further, the movement display may always be performed during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may not be performed during the execution of the change display.

Further, the movement display may be performed only during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may be performed even during the execution of the display other than the change display.

In addition, "when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (7) to (12). In addition, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the pseudo-continuous effect may be started, and as shown in FIGS. 29 (8) to (13), the Sabohani character SBH is the first. 2 When the checkpoint CP2 is reached, the gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed],
Even when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may not be started [for example, even if the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", it is simulated. As shown in FIGS. 170 (A11) to 170 (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 may not be displayed even if the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2. etc],
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game console, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the certain effect is not always started, so there is a sense of expectation as to whether or not the execution of the certain effect is started. May be able to have.

Here, when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or when it is the timing to start the execution of a certain effect. , Execution of an effect other than a certain effect may also be started. Further, when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may be started without fail, and when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect is started. Execution may not start.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or when the execution of a certain effect is started. In other cases, the execution of a certain effect may be started.

Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may not be started, or the execution of a certain effect may be started. , Execution of an effect other than a certain effect may not be started. Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, or even when the execution of a certain effect is started, or The execution of the effect may be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and the execution of a certain effect may not be started except when the execution of a certain effect is started. Even in this case, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

In addition, "when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect is always started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the first display, it may be possible to further improve the expectation that a certain effect will be executed.

Here, the execution of a certain effect may always be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and the execution of a certain effect may be started except when the execution of the certain effect is started. However, the execution of a certain effect may always be started.

In addition, "operation means [for example, effect button 136, effect lever 136V, etc.] is provided.
The notice display may be displayed when the operation means is operated [For example, as shown in FIG. 201 (A14), when the effect button 136 is operated, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It will be "30:00", etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the notice display can be recognized by the operation by the operating means, and the operation of the operating means may be promoted.

Here, only the notice display may be displayed when the operation means is operated, or a display other than the notice display may be displayed when the operation means is operated. Good. Further, the notice display may always be displayed when the operation means is operated, or the notice display may not be displayed when the operation means is operated.

Further, the notice display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated, or the notice display may be displayed even when the operation means is not operated. Good.

In addition, "after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the notice display is always displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by starting the display of the first display, it may be possible to further improve the expectation that the notice display is displayed.

Here, the notice display may always be displayed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the notice display may always be displayed other than before the change display is started.

In addition, "the notice display may not be displayed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a surprise to the display of the first display.

Here, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, only the notice display may not be displayed, or the display of the first display is started. After that, before the change display is started, a display other than the notice display may not be displayed. Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the notice display does not necessarily have to be displayed, and after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the notice display may be displayed before the change display is started.

Further, the notice display may not be displayed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or the display of the first display is started. The notice display may not be displayed after that, except before the change display is started.

Further, "The notice display is performed by the first display [For example, as shown in FIG. 200 (A2), between the time when the chance up meter CMT is displayed and the time when the Sabohani character SBH starts moving. , 1st checkpoint CP1 to 3rd checkpoint CP3 are shown, and the period from the start of movement of the Sabohani character SBH to the time when the chance-up notice is given is announced, as shown in FIG. 201 (A17). In addition, between the time when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the time when the timer display countdown starts, the period from the start of the timer display countdown to the start of a certain notice effect is announced, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the period from the start of the change display to the start of the execution of a certain effect may be recognized in advance by looking at the first display.

Here, the notice display may be performed only by the first display, or the notice display may be performed by a display other than the first display. Further, the notice display may always be performed by the first display, or the notice display may not be performed by the first display.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc." ] Is a game table equipped with
The display means may display the first display [for example, chance up meter, timer notice display, etc.].
The first display is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started.
The display means is a first timer displaying a fourth display [for example, the first CUM preparing display MTY1 shown in FIG. 203 (A2), the second CUM preparing display MTY2, and “STANDUP” shown in FIG. 204 (B6). Notice display TM1 or second timer notice display TM2, etc.] may be displayed.
The fourth display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed [for example, the first CUM preparing display MTY1 and the second CUM preparing display MTY2 shown in FIG. 203 (A2) are first. The first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 displaying "STANDUP" shown in FIG. 204 (B6), which foretell the display of the chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2, are the first. It is foretold that the timer display will be displayed on the timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2],
A plurality of the fourth displays may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 203 (A2), a plurality of chance-up preparation display (1st CUM preparation display MTY1, 2nd CUM preparation display MTY2) are displayed. There are a plurality of timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM1 and second timer notice display TM2) on which "STANDUP" shown in FIG. 204 (B6) is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game console, by displaying a plurality of fourth displays, it is possible to emphasize that the first display may be displayed, and attention should be paid to the first display. May be possible.

Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the first display, or may not display the first display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, the display means may display only the fourth display, or may display a display other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may be foretelling only that the first display is displayed, or may be foretelling other than the display of the first display. .. Further, the fourth display may always give a notice that the first display will be displayed, or may not give a notice that the first display will be displayed. ..

It should be noted that a plurality of fourth displays may always be displayed, or a plurality of fourth displays may not be displayed.

Further, "The first display is a period display [for example, the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 shown in FIG. 203 (A6)].
The period display is the above-mentioned in a certain period [for example, a period during which the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 shown in FIGS. 203 (A7) to (A26) are produced]. It is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 203 (A12) to (A16), the character SBH of the Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 is the first. 2 By reaching the checkpoint CP2, the timing at which the gold cut-in image CI3 may be displayed is notified, etc.],
At least a part of the first display [for example, the display position of the Sabohani character SBH on the first chance up meter CMT1 shown in FIG. 203 (A6), the display position of the Sabohani character SBH on the second chance up meter CMT2, etc. ] Is configured to change (hereinafter referred to as "change display").
The change display is a display that changes according to the time from the start of the certain period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 203 (A7) to 203 (A25), in the first chance up meter CMT1. The display position of each Sabohani character SBH changes according to the time since the Sabohani character SBH and the Sabohani character SBH on the second chance up meter CMT2 start moving from the starting point SP, etc.],
A display mode in which the change display is performed and the first display is a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMT2 shown in FIG. 203 (A12) reaches the second checkpoint CP2, etc. ], It is notified that it is the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the execution start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the period display, so that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the execution start timing of a certain effect will be reached. You may be able to do it.

Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include a display other than the period display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or the execution of an effect other than the certain effect is started in a certain period. The timing may also be notified. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the first display may notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started only in a certain period, or the execution of a certain effect is started in a period other than the certain period. It may be the one that notifies the timing.

Further, it may be notified only that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display being in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may be notified that one display is in a certain display mode and is not the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. Further, it may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started when the change display is performed and the first display is changed to a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may not be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started when one display becomes a certain display mode.

Further, it may be notified that the execution of a certain effect is started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by other than the fact that one display becomes a certain display mode.

Further, "the first display may include a third display [for example, a display of" UP "above the second checkpoint CP2 shown in FIG. 203 (A18)"]. Is a display
When the certain effect is executed, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 203 (A16) to (A18), when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the second display is displayed. "UP" is displayed above checkpoint CP2],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize that the second display is displayed by looking at the third display.

Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including a display other than the third display. It may be. Further, the first display may be displayed with the third display always included, or may be displayed without the third display included.

Further, when a certain effect is executed, only the third display may be displayed, or when a certain effect is executed, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when a certain effect is executed, the third display may always be displayed, or when a certain effect is executed, the third display may not be displayed.

Further, "The first display is a timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 204 (B6)].
The timer display is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (9), the timer in the timer notice display TM1. When the display reaches "00:00", it is notified that the pseudo-continuous production will start, etc.],
A display in which at least a part of the first display [for example, the timer display in the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 204 (B7)] changes according to the passage of time (hereinafter referred to as “change display”). [For example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (7), the timer display is displayed according to the time from the start of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1. Countdown is taking place, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (7) is "00:00"]. At that time, the execution of the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the execution start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the timer display, so that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the execution start timing of a certain effect will be reached. You may be able to do it.

Here, the first display may include only the timer display, or may include a display other than the timer display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may also notify the timing when the execution of the effect other than the certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When the display mode is adopted, the execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, the execution of a certain effect may be always started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When the display mode is adopted, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. Execution of a certain effect may be started even in cases other than the case where the display mode is adopted.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 204 (B4) to (B6), the first timer notice display TM1 displays the movement display. As shown in FIGS. 204 (A10) to 204 (A12), the second CUM preparation display MTY2 (second chance up meter CMT2) may move and display, etc.],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, FIG. 204 (
As shown in B4) to FIG. (B6), the display position changes when the movement display of the first timer notice display TM1 is performed, and as shown in FIGS. 204 (A10) to (A12), the second CUM Preparing display When the movement display of MTY2 (second chance up meter CMT2) is performed, the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the change display by the first display is started with the line of sight focused on the first display in the movement display of the first display, and the timing when the change display is started should not be overlooked. It may be possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced because it is time to perform a certain effect. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for a certain effect to be performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the certain effect.

Here, the first display may be a display in which only the movement display is performed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the display other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, there may be a case where only the movement display is performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, a display other than the movement display may be performed before the change display is started. Further, the movement display may always be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. , The movement display may or may not be performed before the change display is started.

Further, the movement display may be performed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the movement display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 204 (B4) to (B6), the first timer notice display TM1 displays the movement display. As shown in FIGS. 204 (A10) to 204 (A12), the second CUM preparation display MTY2 (second chance up meter CMT2) may move and display, etc.],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 204 (B4) to (B6), the movement display of the first timer notice display TM1 is performed. As shown in FIGS. 204 (A10) to 204 (A12), the display position changes when the second CUM preparation display MTY2 (second chance up meter CMT2) is moved and displayed. ],
The movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, while the change display by the first display is being executed, the line of sight is focused on the first display by the movement display of the first display, so that a certain effect is unknowingly performed. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for a certain effect to be performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the certain effect.

Here, the first display may be a display in which only the movement display is performed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the display other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, only the movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display, or a display other than the movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display. Further, the movement display may always be performed during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may not be performed during the execution of the change display.

Further, the movement display may be performed only during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may be performed even during the execution of the display other than the change display.

Further, "When it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 204 (B8), the first timer notice When the timer display of the display TM1 becomes "00:00", the pseudo-continuous effect may be started, and as shown in FIGS. 203 (A12) to (A16), the character of the Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2. Gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed when SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2],
Even when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may not be started [for example, even if the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", it is simulated. As shown in FIGS. 170 (A11) to 170 (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 may not be displayed even if the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the certain effect is not always started, so there is a sense of expectation as to whether or not the execution of the certain effect is started. May be able to have.

Here, when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or when it is the timing to start the execution of a certain effect. , Execution of an effect other than a certain effect may also be started. Further, when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may be started without fail, and when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect is started. Execution may not start.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or when the execution of a certain effect is started. In other cases, the execution of a certain effect may be started.

Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may not be started, or the execution of a certain effect may be started. , Execution of an effect other than a certain effect may not be started. Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, or even when the execution of a certain effect is started, or The execution of the effect may be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and the execution of a certain effect may not be started except when the execution of a certain effect is started. Even in this case, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

In addition, "when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect is always started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the first display, it may be possible to further improve the expectation that a certain effect is executed.

Here, the execution of a certain effect may always be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and the execution of a certain effect may be started except when the execution of the certain effect is started. However, the execution of a certain effect may always be started.

In addition, "When the fourth display is displayed, the first display is always displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the fourth display may give a feeling of expectation that the first display will be displayed.

Here, when the fourth display is displayed, only the first display may be displayed, and when the fourth display is displayed, displays other than the first display are always displayed. Good. Further, when only the fourth display is displayed, the first display may always be displayed, and when a display other than the fourth display is displayed, the first display is always displayed. May be good.

Further, "a game table characterized in that when the fourth display is displayed, the first display may be displayed. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the fourth display may give a feeling of expectation as to whether or not the first display is displayed.

Here, when the fourth display is displayed, only the first display may be displayed, and when the fourth display is displayed, displays other than the first display are also displayed. May be the case. Further, when the fourth display is displayed, the first display may always be displayed, or when the fourth display is displayed, the first display may not be displayed.

Further, when only the fourth display is displayed, the first display may be displayed, and when a display other than the fourth display is displayed, the first display may be displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, "As the fourth display, the first preparatory display [for example, the first CUM preparatory display MTY1 shown in FIG. 203 (A2) and" STANDUP "shown in FIG. 204 (B6) are displayed. Display TM1 etc.] may be displayed,
As the fourth display, the second preparation display [for example, the second CUM preparation display MTY2 shown in FIG. 203 (A2), the second timer notice display TM2 displaying "STANDUP" shown in FIG. 204 (B6), etc. ] May be displayed,
The display of the second preparing display may be started during the display of the first preparing display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 203 (A1) to 203 (A2), the first CUM is being prepared. As shown in FIGS. 204 (B4) to 204 (B5), the display of the second CUM in preparation display MTY2 is started while the display MTY1 is being displayed. The display of the second timer notice display TM2 in which "STANDUP" is displayed during the display has started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display of the first preparation display may give a feeling of expectation for the display of the second preparation display.

Here, as the fourth display, only the first preparing display may be displayed, or as the fourth display, a display other than the first preparing display may be displayed. Good. Further, the first preparing display may always be displayed as the fourth display, or the first preparing display may not be displayed as the fourth display.

Further, as the fourth display, only the second preparing display may be displayed, or as the fourth display, a display other than the second preparing display may be displayed. .. Further, the second preparing display may always be displayed as the fourth display, or the second preparing display may not be displayed as the fourth display.

In addition, only the display of the second preparing display may be started during the display of the first preparing display, or the display of the second preparing display may be started during the display of the first preparing display. A display other than the display may be started. Further, the display of the second preparing display may always be started during the display of the first preparing display, and the display of the second preparing display is not started during the display of the first preparing display. There may be cases.

In addition, the display of the second preparing display may be started only while the first preparing display is being displayed, and the second preparing display may be started in addition to the display of the first preparing display. The display of the display may be started.

In addition, "after the first preparation display is displayed, the first display corresponding to the first preparation display (hereinafter," the first correspondence display [for example, the first display shown in FIG. 204 (A1)). 1 Chance up meter CMT1, 1st timer notice display TM1 etc. on which the timer display shown in FIG. 204 (B7) is displayed] ”is displayed.
After the second preparing display is displayed, the first display corresponding to the second preparing display (hereinafter, "second corresponding display [for example, the second chance up shown in FIG. 204 (A13))" Meter CMT2, 2nd timer notice display TM2 with timer display, etc.] ”is displayed.
The first correspondence display is displayed before the second correspondence display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 204 (A1) to 204 (A13), the first chance up meter CMT1 increases the second chance. As shown in FIG. 204 (B7), which is displayed before the meter CMT2, the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the second timer notice display TM2, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, there are cases where the display of the first correspondence display can give expectations to the display of the second correspondence display.

Here, after the first preparation display is displayed, only the first correspondence display may be displayed, or after the first preparation display is displayed, a display other than the first correspondence display may be displayed. It may be displayed. In addition, the first correspondence display may always be displayed after the first preparation display is displayed, or the first correspondence display may not be displayed after the first preparation display is displayed. There may be.

Further, the first correspondence display may be displayed only after the first preparation display is displayed, and the first correspondence display may be displayed other than after the first preparation display is displayed. May be done. Further, the first correspondence display may be displayed after only the first preparation display is displayed, or the first correspondence display may be displayed even after the display other than the first preparation display is displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, after the second preparation display is displayed, only the second correspondence display may be displayed, or after the second preparation display is displayed, a display other than the second correspondence display is also displayed. May be done. In addition, the second correspondence display may always be displayed after the second preparation display is displayed, or the second correspondence display may not be displayed after the second preparation display is displayed. There may be.

Further, the second correspondence display may be displayed only after the second preparation display is displayed, and the second correspondence display may be displayed other than after the second preparation display is displayed. May be done. Further, the second correspondence display may be displayed after only the second preparation display is displayed, and the second correspondence display may be displayed even after the display other than the second preparation display is displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, only the first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display, or the display other than the first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display. Further, the first correspondence display may always be displayed before the second correspondence display, or the first correspondence display may not be displayed before the second correspondence display.

In addition, one corresponding display (chance up meter, timer notice display, etc.) may be displayed for a plurality of preparation displays. According to this, when a lot of preparation displays are displayed, it may be possible to display a hot response display.

In addition, "after the first preparation display is displayed, the first display corresponding to the first preparation display (hereinafter," the first correspondence display [for example, the first display shown in FIG. 204 (A1)). 1 Chance up meter CMT1, 1st timer notice display TM1 etc. on which the timer display shown in FIG. 204 (B7) is displayed] ”is displayed.
After the second preparing display is displayed, the first display corresponding to the second preparing display (hereinafter, "second corresponding display [for example, the second chance up shown in FIG. 204 (A13))" Meter CMT2, 2nd timer notice display TM2 with timer display, etc.] ”is displayed.
The first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 204 (A1) to 204 (A13), the first chance up meter CMT1 is the first. 2 As shown in FIG. 204 (B7), which is displayed before the chance up meter CMT2, the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the second timer notice display TM2, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the display of the first correspondence display can make the display of the second correspondence display more promising, and the display of the correspondence display can be made unexpected.

Here, after the first preparation display is displayed, only the first correspondence display may be displayed, or after the first preparation display is displayed, a display other than the first correspondence display may be displayed. It may be displayed. In addition, the first correspondence display may always be displayed after the first preparation display is displayed, or the first correspondence display may not be displayed after the first preparation display is displayed. There may be.

Further, the first correspondence display may be displayed only after the first preparation display is displayed, and the first correspondence display may be displayed other than after the first preparation display is displayed. May be done. Further, the first correspondence display may be displayed after only the first preparation display is displayed, or the first correspondence display may be displayed even after the display other than the first preparation display is displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, after the second preparation display is displayed, only the second correspondence display may be displayed, or after the second preparation display is displayed, a display other than the second correspondence display is also displayed. May be done. In addition, the second correspondence display may always be displayed after the second preparation display is displayed, or the second correspondence display may not be displayed after the second preparation display is displayed. There may be.

Further, the second correspondence display may be displayed only after the second preparation display is displayed, and the second correspondence display may be displayed other than after the second preparation display is displayed. May be done. Further, the second correspondence display may be displayed after only the second preparation display is displayed, and the second correspondence display may be displayed even after the display other than the second preparation display is displayed. It may be displayed.

In addition, only the first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display, and displays other than the first correspondence display are also displayed before the second correspondence display. There may be cases. Further, the first correspondence display may always be displayed before the second correspondence display, or the first correspondence display may not be displayed before the second correspondence display.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
In addition, in the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc." ] Is a game table equipped with
The display means may display the first display [for example, chance up meter, timer notice display, etc.].
The first display is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started.
At least a part of the first display [for example, the display position of the Sabohani character SBH in the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 202 (A4), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 202 (B6), etc.] changes. Display (hereinafter referred to as "change display") may be performed.
The change display is a display that changes according to the time until the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to 27 (27), the character SBH of Sabohani As shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (7), the display position of the Sabohani character SBH changes according to the time from the start of the movement from the start point SP. The timer display countdown is performed according to the time since the timer display countdown started],
A notice that the change display is started after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started (hereinafter, "change notice [for example, FIG. 202 (A2))". The balloon of "It's about time to start" displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH in the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. (C4) to the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. (C5) is enlarged, etc.] ”) may be performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 202 (A1) to (A4). After the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed and before the Sabohani character SBH in the chance up meter CMT starts moving, a balloon of "It's about time to start" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, FIG. As shown in B1) to the figure (B6), the timer notice display TM1 is swinging after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and before the timer display countdown starts],.
A game table characterized by that.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to prevent the start of a change in the display mode of at least a part of the first display from being overlooked.

Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the first display, or may not display the first display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify the timing other than the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, only the change display may be performed, or a display other than the change display may be performed. In addition, the change display may always be performed, or the change display may not be performed.

Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, only the change notice may be given, or the display of the first display is started. Later, before the change display is started, an effect (notice) other than the change notice may be performed. Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the change notice may always be given, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the change notice may not be given before the change display is started.

Further, the change notice may be given only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or the display of the first display is started. A change notice may be given later than before the change display is started.

Further, "The first display is a period display [for example, a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 202 (A2)].
The period display means that the execution of the certain effect is started in a certain period [for example, the period during which the effect by the chance up meter CMT shown in FIGS. 29 (2) to 27) is performed. It is a display that notifies the timing [For example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (8) to (13), when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. Notifying the timing that may be displayed, etc.],
The change display is performed and the first display becomes a display mode [for example, a display mode in which the character SBH of the Sabohani shown in FIG. 29 (8) reaches the second checkpoint CP2]. It is notified that it is time to start the execution of the production.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the execution start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the period display, so that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the execution start timing of a certain effect will be reached. You may be able to do it.

Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include a display other than the period display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or the execution of an effect other than the certain effect is started in a certain period. The timing may also be notified. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the first display may notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started only in a certain period, or the execution of a certain effect is started in a period other than the certain period. It may be the one that notifies the timing.

Further, it may be notified only that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by the change display being performed and the first display being in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may be notified that one display is in a certain display mode and is not the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. Further, it may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started when the change display is performed and the first display is changed to a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may not be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started when one display becomes a certain display mode.

Further, it may be notified that the execution of a certain effect is started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. It may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started by other than the fact that one display becomes a certain display mode.

In addition, "the first display may include a third display [for example, a display of" UP "above the second checkpoint CP2 shown in FIG. 29 (16)". Is a display
When the certain effect is executed, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (13) to (16), when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the second display is displayed. "UP" is displayed above checkpoint CP2],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize that the second display is displayed by looking at the third display.

Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including a display other than the third display. It may be. Further, the first display may be displayed with the third display always included, or may be displayed without the third display included.

Further, when a certain effect is executed, only the third display may be displayed, or when a certain effect is executed, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when a certain effect is executed, the third display may always be displayed, or when a certain effect is executed, the third display may not be displayed.

Further, "the first display is a timer display [for example, the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 20 (2) and 202 (B1), the bomb timer display BOMB shown in FIG. 205 (B2), etc.].
The timer display is a display that notifies the timing at which the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (9), the timer in the timer notice display TM1. When the display reaches "00:00", it is notified that the pseudo-continuous production will start, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 202 (B8) is "00:00"]. At that time, the execution of the above-mentioned effect is started.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game console, the execution start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the timer display, so that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the execution start timing of a certain effect will be reached. You may be able to do it.

Here, the first display may include only the timer display, or may include a display other than the timer display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may also notify the timing when the execution of the effect other than the certain effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. May be good.

Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When the display mode is adopted, the execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, the execution of a certain effect may be always started, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. When the display mode is adopted, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is present. Execution of a certain effect may be started even in cases other than the case where the display mode is adopted.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, when the timer notice display TM1 performs a movement display as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9)". As shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may move and display. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9), it is displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is moved. The position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is moved and displayed. And the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the change display by the first display is started with the line of sight focused on the first display in the movement display of the first display, and the timing when the change display is started should not be overlooked. It may be possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced because it is time to perform a certain effect. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for a certain effect to be performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the certain effect.

Here, the first display may be a display in which only the movement display is performed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the display other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, there may be a case where only the movement display is performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, a display other than the movement display may be performed before the change display is started. Further, the movement display may always be performed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. , The movement display may or may not be performed before the change display is started.

Further, the movement display may be performed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the movement display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

Further, "The first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed [for example, when the timer notice display TM1 performs a movement display as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9)". As shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may move and display. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A8) to (A9), it is displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is moved. The position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (A8) to (A10) and 204 (A10) to (A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is moved and displayed. And the display position changes, etc.],
The movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, while the change display by the first display is being executed, the line of sight is focused on the first display by the movement display of the first display, so that a certain effect is unknowingly performed. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced. That is, it may be possible to prepare the mind for a certain effect to be performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to overlook the certain effect.

Here, the first display may be a display in which only the movement display is performed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, when the movement display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the display other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may always change, or when the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes when a display other than the movement display is performed. You may.

Further, only the movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display, or a display other than the movement display may be performed during the execution of the change display. Further, the movement display may always be performed during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may not be performed during the execution of the change display.

Further, the movement display may be performed only during the execution of the change display, or the movement display may be performed even during the execution of the display other than the change display.

In addition, "when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (7) to (12). In addition, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the pseudo-continuous effect may be started, and as shown in FIGS. 29 (8) to (13), the Sabohani character SBH is the first. 2 When the checkpoint CP2 is reached, the gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed],
Even when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may not be started [for example, even if the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", it is simulated. As shown in FIGS. 170 (A11) to 170 (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 may not be displayed even if the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the certain effect is not always started, so there is a sense of expectation as to whether or not the execution of a certain effect is started. It may be possible to have it.

Here, when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or when it is the timing to start the execution of a certain effect. , Execution of an effect other than a certain effect may also be started. Further, when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may be started without fail, and when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect is started. Execution may not start.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or when the execution of a certain effect is started. In other cases, the execution of a certain effect may be started.

Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may not be started, or the execution of a certain effect may be started. , Execution of an effect other than a certain effect may not be started. Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, or even when the execution of a certain effect is started, or The execution of the effect may be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and the execution of a certain effect may not be started except when the execution of a certain effect is started. Even in this case, the execution of a certain effect may not be started.

In addition, "when it is time to start the execution of the certain effect, the execution of the certain effect is always started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the first display, it may be possible to further improve the expectation that a certain effect is executed.

Here, the execution of a certain effect may always be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, and the execution of a certain effect may be started except when the execution of the certain effect is started. However, the execution of a certain effect may always be started.

Further, "The display means includes a fourth display [for example, the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 202 (A1), the timer notice display TM1 in which" STANDBY "shown in FIG. 202 (C1) is displayed, and FIG. 48 (Fig. 48). The timer notice stock display area TMst indicating that the timer notice shown in B3) is in stock, and the display showing the number of meters in stock in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 185 (A1). Etc.] is a means that may be displayed,
The fourth display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the fourth display may give a feeling of expectation that the first display will be displayed.

Here, the display means may display only the fourth display, or may display a display other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may be foretelling only that the first display is displayed, or may be foretelling that a display other than the first display is displayed. .. Further, the fourth display may always give a notice that the first display will be displayed, or may not give a notice that the first display will be displayed. ..

In addition, "A notice display can be displayed as the change notice.
The notice display is performed by the first display [For example, the notice display is performed by a balloon of "It's about time to start" displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 202 (A2). The timer notice display TM1 itself shown in FIGS. 202 (B4) to (B5) swings to display the notice, and the timer shown in FIGS. 202 (C4) to (C5) is displayed. Notice display TM1 itself is enlarged to display a notice, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easily recognized that the change display is performed by the first display.

Here, only the notice display may be displayed as a change notice, or a display other than the notice display may be displayed as a change notice. Further, the notice display may always be displayed as a change notice, or the notice display may not be displayed as a change notice.

Further, the notice display may be displayed only as a change notice, or the notice display may be displayed as an effect (notice) other than the change notice.

Further, the notice display may be performed only by the first display, or the notice display may be performed by a display other than the first display. Further, the notice display may always be performed by the first display, or the notice display may not be performed by the first display.

In addition, "Fake change notice may be executed,
If the false change notice is executed after the display of the first display is started, the change display is not started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the change display may be started when the change notice is given.

Here, only a fake change notice may be executed, or an effect (notice) other than the fake change notice may be executed. Further, the fake change notice may always be executed, or the fake change notice may not be executed.

Further, when a fake change notice is executed after the display of the first display is started, only the change display does not have to be started, and the fake change display is started after the display of the first display is started. When the change notice of is executed, the display other than the change display may not be started. Further, when a fake change notice is executed after the display of the first display is started, the change display does not necessarily have to be started, and the fake change display is started after the display of the first display is started. The change display may be started when the change notice of is executed.

Further, the change display does not have to be started only when the fake change notice is executed after the display of the first display is started, and the fake change display is started after the display of the first display is started. The change display may not be started even in cases other than the case where the change notice of is executed.

Further, "The change notice is given after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started [for example, in FIGS. 202 (A1) to (A4). As shown, after the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is displayed and before the Sabohani character SBH starts moving, a balloon of "It's about time to start" is displayed, FIGS. 202 (B1) to As shown in FIG. 6B6, after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and before the timer display countdown is started, the timer notice display TM1 swings, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easily recognized that the change display is started.

Here, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, only the change notice may be given, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, before the change display is started, an effect (notice) other than the change notice may be performed. Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the change notice may always be given, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the change notice may not be given before the change display is started.

Further, the change notice may be given only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, a change notice may be given other than before the change display is started.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Subsequently, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 215.

FIGS. 207 to 215 are diagrams stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 207 to 215, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 207 to 215 show a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 207 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 208 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific production example shown in FIG. 207. Is. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (a), "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a combination of lost decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode, but the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani. That is, it is displayed in the display mode of the look-ahead notice. In this production example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not performed, but these displays may be performed. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (b), the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is used as the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 after the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted. It is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative icon has started. At this time, after the hold is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started, one variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the variable icon may be the same as or different from the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, for example.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (c), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (d), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (e), a third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then "decoration 2" is performed. -Decoration 5-Decoration 7 "is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns.

Subsequently, in FIG. 207 (f), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the hold display disappears, the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown) starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol. The variable display has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (g) has started the step-up notice. The step-up notice is a notice in which a plurality of types of display modes are sequentially switched and displayed in a predetermined display order. In the step-up notice in the present embodiment, each display mode has a number indicating the number of steps in the display mode. It is displayed. The magnitude of the number of steps is a display indicating the degree of reliability of the jackpot. For example, when the display up to step 5, the development to super reach is confirmed, and the possibility of a big hit increases. However, even if it is displayed up to step 5, it may be off, and the reliability is not 100%. When the display up to step 5, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed. As the number of steps increases, so does the size of the display. At the timing shown in FIG. 207B (g), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative symbols are more difficult to see when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 207 (h), the step-up notice is updated on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 207 (i), the step-up notice is further updated in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol.

After that, as shown in FIG. 207 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 is first stopped, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207 (k), the second stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 207 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 forms a mini game display area MN1 in which the mini game is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area. This mini-game display area MN1 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the super-reach effect display, and the super-reach effect display is more difficult to see than when the mini-game display area MN1 is not displayed. There is. In the mini-game in this production example, the mission is to repeatedly hit the production button 136 during the operation validity period to finally derive "Daikichi". That is, the mini-game in this production example requires a plurality of operation of the production button 136 in order to derive the result. FIG. 207 (m) shows how the mini-game is started, and displays a description of the game in the mini-game. Specifically, the characters "continuous hitting" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. In addition, below that, the characters "Maybe it's a super hot notice in Daikichi" are displayed, and it is announced that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice will occur due to the derivation of "Daikichi". The contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained. The mini-game display area MN1 may not be divided by a frame.

After that, as shown in FIG. 207 (n), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207 (o), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Nakayoshi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Nakayoshi" display overlaps with a part of the "Daikichi" display.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207 (p), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Kokichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Kokichi" display overlaps with a part of the "Nakayoshi" display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 207 (q), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi", and the effect button 136 is displayed. It has been notified that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by is started.

FIG. 207 (r) shows how the player is repeatedly hitting the effect button 136.

In FIG. 208 (a) following FIG. 207 (r), it is shown that the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, an effect image of a star is displayed in the mini-game display area MN1, and the number increases as the number of operations increases due to repeated hits. In this production example, when the player interrupts the continuous striking of the effect button 136, the number of star effect images gradually decreases, but it may not decrease. At the timing shown in FIG. 208 (a), four star effect images are displayed in the mini-game display area MN1.

FIG. 208 (b) shows how the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 208 (b), five star effect images are displayed in the mini-game display area MN1, and the display of "Kokichi" is erased by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times. It has been reported that there is a high possibility that "Nakayoshi" or "Daikichi" will be derived as a result of the mini-game. In this production example, when the player interrupts the continuous striking of the production button 136, the once erased "Kokichi" display may be displayed again, but once it is erased, it is not displayed again. May be good.

FIG. 208 (c) shows how the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 208 (c), the number of star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 has not changed, and "Daikichi" and "Nakayoshi" are still displayed. , Instead of displaying the button image 136 and the character "continuous hit", the character "2 seconds left" is displayed, and it is notified that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining.

FIG. 208 (d) shows how the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 208 (d), the number of star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 has not changed, and "Daikichi" and "Nakayoshi" are still displayed. , The display for notifying the operation valid period is set to "1 second left", and it is notified that the operation valid period is 1 second remaining.

FIG. 208 (e) shows how the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 208 (e), the number of star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 has not changed, and the display for notifying the operation validity period has not changed, but the effect buttons for a predetermined number of times. It is reported that the display of "Nakayoshi" is erased by the operation of 136, and the possibility that "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game has increased. In this production example, when the player interrupts the continuous striking of the production button 136, the once erased "Nakayoshi" display may be displayed again, but once it is erased, it is not displayed again. May be good.

FIG. 208 (f) shows a state in which "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini-game in the mini-game display area MN1 after the player continuously hits the effect button 136. That is, it is notified that the mission of the mini game has been completed. As a result, the player is informed that a super hot notice may appear. In addition, by deriving the display of "Daikichi", it is possible to give notice that the intense hot notice will always be executed.

Subsequently, when the mini-game display area MN1 is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 208 (g), the super reach effect is resumed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 208 (g), the button notice effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, and the button image 136a and the "Push" are displayed. Characters are displayed, indicating that the effect button 136 is being promoted once. At this time, the effect button 136, for example, vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates. The button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which it is only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode in which it is only rotating, or is displayed in a mode in which it is neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases. In this production example, when the button image 136a is displayed in a mode of vibration and rotation, it is more final than when the button image 136a is displayed in a mode in which at least one of vibration and rotation is not performed. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol can be easily fixed and stopped. The button image 136a may be displayed only in a mode in which it does not vibrate or rotate. As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the number of operations of the effect button 136 is different between the mini-game and the main effect (effect related to the variable display of the decorative pattern). Further, in this production example, in the mini game, the production is performed by repeatedly hitting the production button 136, and in the main production, the production is performed by operating the production button 136 once. The effect may be performed by the continuous hitting operation of 136.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 208 (h), the super reach effect is continuously performed, and it is shown that the display for promoting the operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed. Here, when the operation valid period is started, the button reception time meter MT is displayed instead of the character display of "Push", and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases as the operation valid period elapses.

Then, as shown in FIG. 208 (h), when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 208 (i), the character "game" is displayed in the balloon together with the close-up image of the character of the lord. A cut-in image including a balloon image in which is arranged is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number (for example, 9) of the faces of the bancho are arranged around the characters "game" in the balloon, and this is the mini-game described above. In the game, the display of "Daikichi" is derived and displayed according to the result of accomplishing the mission.

On the other hand, in the mini game, when the display of "Daikichi" is not derived and the mission is not achieved, the weak cut-in image CI1b as shown in FIG. 208 (i') is displayed. The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image smaller in size than the strong cut-in image CI1a, and is an image in which the face of the chief is not arranged around the characters of "game" in the balloon. The strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed even if the mission is not achieved in the mini game. Both the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b overlap with the super reach effect, and when these cut-in images are displayed, the super reach is higher than when these cut-in images are not displayed. The production is difficult to see. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b overlap with the decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 208 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 208 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game is completed.

In this production example, the mini-game requires a continuous operation of the production button 136 in order to accomplish the mission, while the main production requires a single operation of the production button 136 in order to make a notice appear. In the mini-game, one operation of the effect button 136 may be required, and in the main effect, a continuous operation of the effect button 136 may be required.

Further, when the result of the mini game is related to the notice related to the symbol variation display as in this production example, the execution time of the mini game is shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display. ..

FIG. 209 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 209 (a) is an effect following FIG. 207 (j), in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a state in which a reach state is formed is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 209 (b), it is shown that the decorative symbol display device 208 is developing into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 209 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. The mini-game in this production example is also performed as described above as shown in FIGS. 207 to 208. FIG. 209 (c) shows how the mini-game is started, and displays a description of the game in the mini-game. Specifically, the characters "continuous hitting" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. In addition, below that, the characters "Maybe it's a super hot notice in Daikichi" are displayed, and it is announced that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice will occur due to the derivation of "Daikichi". The contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained. On the other hand, the button operation effect that requires the operation of the effect button has also been started in the main effect. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 209 (c), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibrating and rotating, and the characters "Push" are displayed together with the button image 136a, and the effect button 136 is displayed once. It is shown that the operation is being promoted. At this time, the effect button 136, for example, vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates. The button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which it is only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode in which it is only rotating, or is displayed in a mode in which it is neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases.

After that, as shown in FIG. 209 (d), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation validity period in the main effect has not started, and the button reception time meter is displayed, but the gauge does not decrease. This suggests that there is some relationship between the mini-game and the main production in the mini-game display area MN1.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 209 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Nakayoshi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Nakayoshi" display overlaps with a part of the "Daikichi" display. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 209 (f), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Kokichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Kokichi" display overlaps with a part of the "Nakayoshi" display. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not started as usual, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 209 (g), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi", and the characters "continuously hit" are displayed in the mini-game. It has been notified that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 has started. Then, the player sees this notification and starts repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed. As described above, in this effect example, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, in this effect example, the button operation for the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 that overlaps with the main effect is preferentially accepted. Note that the button operation for the main effect overlapping the mini-game display area MN1 may be preferentially accepted.

FIG. 209 (h) shows how the player is repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. In the mini-game display area MN1, it is shown that the number of star effect images increases according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 209 (h), four star effect images are displayed in the mini-game display area MN1. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

FIG. 209 (i) shows how the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 209 (i), the display of "Kokichi" is erased by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times, and "Nakayoshi" or "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game. It has been reported that the possibility has increased. The number of star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 remains four. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

FIG. 209 (j) shows how the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 209 (j), five star effect images are displayed in the mini-game display area MN1. Further, instead of displaying the button image 136 and the character of "continuous hitting", the character of "2 seconds left" is displayed, and it is notified that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not started as usual, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

FIG. 209 (k) shows how the player's continuous operation of the effect button 136 is interrupted. Then, the star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 are gradually erased, and at the timing shown in FIG. 209 (k), the number of star effect images in the mini-game display area MN1 is 0. It is shown that it has become. In addition, although the display of "Daikichi" and "Nakayoshi" is still being performed, the display notifying the operation validity period is "1 second left", and the operation validity period is 1 second remaining. It has been notified.

FIG. 209 (l) shows how the operation valid period in the mini game has passed and "Nakayoshi" is derived as a result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1. That is, it is notified that the mission of the mini game has not been completed. Originally, "Daikichi" was supposed to be derived if the repeated hitting operation was continuously performed, but the mission was not achieved due to the insufficient number of operations of the effect button 136. It is due to that.

After that, as shown in FIG. 209 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game ends, the mini game display area MN1 is erased, the super reach effect resumes, and the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is used. The reduction display starts. As a result, it is notified that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect has started. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 209 (n), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 209 (o). This is displayed based on the fact that the derivation result of the mini game was not "Daikichi". At this time, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. When it is decided in advance whether to display the strong cut-in image CI1a or the weak cut-in image CI1b, and when it is decided in advance to display the strong cut-in image CI1a, FIG. As shown in o'), the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as determined regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Further, when it is decided in advance to display the weak cut-in image CI1b, the display of "Daikichi" may not be derived regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 209 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 209 (q), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game is completed. In this way, the result of winning or failing is determined in advance, and the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the result of winning or failing is derived. Therefore, the effect in the middle may be changed as appropriate, and therefore, the operating means ( The notice that appears can be changed according to the operation status of the effect button 136).

FIG. 210 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 210 (a) is an effect following FIG. 207 (k), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol display device 208 is developing into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 210 (b), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and a state in which the mini game is started in the mini game display area MN1 is shown. .. Specifically, the characters "push" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting one operation of the effect button 136. In addition, below that, the characters "Get out Daikichi and appear super hot in Daikichi" are displayed, and it is said that a highly reliable notice will be generated by deriving "Daikichi". The contents of the mission and the results of mission achievement are explained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 210 (c), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 210 (d), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Nakayoshi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Nakayoshi" display overlaps with a part of the "Daikichi" display.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 210 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Kokichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Kokichi" display overlaps with a part of the "Nakayoshi" display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 210 (f), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of "Daikichi", "Nakayoshi", and "Kokichi" is started. Then, the characters "push" are displayed together with the button image 136a below the effect of this high-speed loop rotation, and it is notified that the acceptance of one operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. On the other hand, in the main effect, a button operation effect that requires a continuous operation of the effect button has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 210 (f), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibrating and rotating, and the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, and the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit. It is shown that it is promoting. At this time, the effect button 136, for example, vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates. The button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which it is only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode in which it is only rotating, or is displayed in a mode in which it is neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases. As described above, in this effect example, the effect of requesting the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the main effect, and the effect of requesting the single operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the mini game. That is, it can be said that an example is shown in which the number of times the operation of the effect button 136 is requested in the mini game is smaller than the number of times the operation of the effect button 136 is requested in the main effect. Further, in this effect example, the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 210 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge reduction display by the button reception time meter MT is started, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 is started. In this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect and the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game are accepted at the same time. It should be noted that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game may be started after the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started, or the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. After that, the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect may be started. Then, the player sees this and starts repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. In this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the button effect in the main effect corresponds to the state of the effect button 136, but the button image displayed in the mini game display area MN1. The display mode of 136a and the state of the effect button 136 are different. As described above, in this effect example, the same operation means (effect button 136) can be used for both the main effect and the mini-game effect. Therefore, for example, when the effect in which the acceptance of the operation is prioritized is the effect in which the reception of the operation is prioritized and the effect in which the acceptance of the operation is non-priority is the effect in which the operation is required once, The result may be derived for the non-priority effect, and the effect in which the acceptance of the operation is prioritized is the effect that requires one operation, and the effect in which the acceptance of the operation is non-priority is the continuous hit operation. In the case of the required effect, since the continuous striking operation is performed from the beginning, it may be possible to surely derive the result even for the priority effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 210 (h), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini-game in response to the first operation by the effect button 136. It is shown that it is. Then, the word "achievement" indicating that the mission of the mini game has been completed is also displayed, and the fact is notified. That is, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini-game effect is received in preference to the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. On the other hand, the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 210 (i), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the repeated hitting operation of the effect button in the main effect. In this effect example, it is shown that the cut-in image is displayed during the operation valid period in the continuous striking operation effect in the main effect. The button reception time meter MT is overlapped by this cut-in image, which makes it more difficult to see than when the cut-in image is not displayed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "Mission in progress" notifying that the mission in the mini game has been completed scrolls from the right end to the left end. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on condition that the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is continued. The continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continuing.

After that, as a result of the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player, as shown in FIG. 210 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the strong cut-in image CI1a is replaced with the weak cut-in image CI1b. Is displayed. This is displayed as a result of mission achievement in the mini-game as described above. In this effect example, a continuous striking gauge whose display mode changes according to the number of operations of the effect button 136 may be displayed. For example, when the continuous striking gauge reaches the first amount, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. When it is displayed and the tank is full, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. At this time, if it is determined in advance that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed, the continuous striking gauge may not be full no matter how many continuous striking operations are performed.

When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as described above, then, as shown in FIG. 210 (k), in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is changed to "Mission is being completed". "Appearance of super hot notice" is displayed, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a, which is a super hot notice, is displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 210 (h), the mission of the mini game is achieved, and then, as shown in FIG. 210 (i'), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. However, after that, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient due to the player stopping the continuous striking operation or the like, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 210 (j'). May remain as it is. That is, as in this production example, even though the mission has been achieved, depending on the operation status of the production button 136, there may be a case where the rule breaking that the intense hot notice does not appear may occur. In addition, in order to match the achievement of the mission of the mini game, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed regardless of the operation status of the effect button 136, or another strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed instead of the strong cut-in image CI1a. You may want to display a super hot notice. Further, when the continuous striking operation is not performed in the main effect, neither the strong cut-in image CI1a nor the weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 210 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 210 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game is completed.

As described above, in this effect example, the achievement of the mission is one of the display conditions of the strong cut-in image CI1a, and when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than the predetermined number of times, the strong cut-in is performed. When the image CI1a is not displayed and the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed and the number of operations of the effect button 136 exceeds a predetermined number of times, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In this production example, it is determined in advance whether the strong cut-in image CI1a or the weak cut-in image CI1b can be displayed, and when it is determined that the strong cut-in image CI1a can be displayed, the mini is used. It is configured so that the display of "Daikichi" can be derived in the game. Further, when it is determined that only the weak cut-in CI1b can be displayed, the display of "Daikichi" is not derived in the mini game. Further, in this effect example, in the button continuous operation effect in the main effect, the cut-in image is not displayed when the effect button 136 has not been operated at least as many times as necessary to display the weak cut-in CI1b. It may be. Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the mini game, the cut-in image may not be displayed even if the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed in the button continuous operation effect in the main effect, or the weak cut-in image may be displayed. The CI1b can be displayed, but the strong cut-in image CI1a may not be displayed.

FIG. 211 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 211 (a) is an effect following FIG. 207 (j), in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a state in which a reach state is formed is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 211 (b), it is shown that the decorative symbol display device 208 is developing into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 211 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. FIG. 211 (c) shows how the mini-game is started, and displays a description of the game in the mini-game. Specifically, the characters "Get Daikichi by hitting repeatedly" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. The button image 136a displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 211 (c) has a size larger than the button image 136a displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 207 (m). However, they may be the same size. Further, the small-sized button image 136a and the large-sized button image 136a may be selectively displayed, and the reliability of mission achievement may be different depending on the size of the displayed button image 136a. .. That is, when the large-sized button image 136a is displayed, it may be easier to accomplish the mission than when the small-sized button image 136a is displayed. In addition, below that, the characters "A strong cut-in occurs in Daikichi" are displayed, and it is announced that a strong cut-in notice with high reliability of the big hit will occur by deriving "Daikichi". The contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained.

After that, the description of the mini-game game displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 211 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 may be derived as a result of the mini-game. Each display of "Daikichi", "Nakakichi", and "Kokichi" is displayed in this order, the display of "Daikichi" overlaps with the display of "Nakayoshi", and the display of "Nakayoshi" is "Kokichi". It is displayed so that it overlaps with the display of.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 211 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi", and the effect button 136 is displayed. It has been notified that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by is started. Further, on the left side of the mini-game display area MN1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases as the operation reception period of the effect button 136 elapses. In this production example, it is shown that the display related to the mini game is performed in an area other than the mini game display area MN1.

FIGS. 211 (f) to 211 (g) show how the effect button 136 continues to be repeatedly hit during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game. In the mini-game display area MN1, the number of star effect images increases according to the number of times the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 elapses, the result corresponding to the number of repeated hits of the effect button 136 is derived. In the example shown in FIG. 211 (h), "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini-game, and the characters "mission achieved" are displayed below the mini-game to notify that the mini-game mission has been completed. ing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 211 (i), a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a cut-in notice. As a result, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is high. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result of the above-mentioned mini-game, in which "Daikichi" is derived and the mission is achieved.

After that, as shown in FIG. 211 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 211 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game is completed.

On the other hand, after the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 211 (e), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is as shown in FIGS. 211 (f') to 211 (g'). However, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 elapses in a state where the number of times is less than the predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 211 (h'), in the mini game display area MN1, as a result of the mini game. "Kokichi" is derived, and the words "Mission failed" are displayed below it to notify that the mini-game mission has not been completed. The result of the mini-game may be determined in advance based on the result of the winning / failing determination.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 211 (i'), a weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as a cut-in notice. As a result, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is lower than that when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The display of this weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the result that "Kokichi" was derived as a result of the above-mentioned mini-game and the mission was not achieved.

After that, as shown in FIG. 211 (j'), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and at the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. To.

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 211 (k'), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). Then, one special figure variable game is completed.

FIG. 212 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 212 (a) is an effect following FIG. 207 (d), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7", which is a combination of lost decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani, that is, is displayed in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.

Subsequently, in FIG. 212 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the hold display disappears, the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown) starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol. The variable display has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 212 (c) shows that the mission as the main effect has been started. Specifically, the characters "mission activation" are displayed above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the mission has started. In addition, on the lower edge of the display area, "put out a cut-in" and "if it comes out, a big hit" is displayed along with an image of the face of the bancho, and the content of the mission is notified. That is, it is notified that if the image of the face of the Bancho appears during the mission, the mission will be completed and the big hit will be confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 212 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the lower left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Mission in progress" indicating that the mission is continuing is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 212 (e), the second stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, the display of "in mission" is being continued.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 212 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display that develops into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. Even after developing into Super Reach, the display of "Mission in progress" continues.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 212 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area and the mini game is started. In this production example, it is shown that the mission as the main production and the mission in the mini game are being performed at the same time. In other words, it shows that the mission as the main production is overlaid with the mission of the mini game. Here, in this production example, the mini-game is started after the mission is started, but the mission may be started after the mini-game is started. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (g) to 212 (l) are shown in FIGS. 211 (c) to 211 (l), except that "in mission" is displayed to indicate that the mission is in progress. Since it is the same as h), detailed description will be omitted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 212 (j) to 212 (k), a part of the "mission in progress" display overlaps with the button reception time meter MT, and the button reception time meter MT. It is said that the "Mission in progress" display is more difficult to see than when there is no overlap.

As shown in FIG. 212 (l), after the “Daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini game and the mission is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a cut-in notice at the timing shown in FIG. 212 (m). The strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result of the above-mentioned mini-game, in which "Daikichi" is derived and the mission is achieved. The mission continues even while the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the display of "Mission in progress" is continued, but it overlaps with the strong cut-in image CI1a, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. It is more difficult to see than when it does not overlap with CI1a.

As described above, the strong cut-in image CI1a is an image including a balloon in which a large number of Bancho's faces are arranged around the characters of "game". Therefore, due to the achievement of the appearance of the face of the bancho, which is the mission in the main production, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 212 (n), the character display of "mission achieved" exceeds the strong cut-in image CI1a. Wrapped and displayed. That is, it is informed that the jackpot will be confirmed when the mission in the main production is completed. In other words, in this production example, it can be said that the mission in the main production is achieved by the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 212 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the middle. The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 212 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game is completed.

FIG. 213 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Since FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (k) are the same as those in FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (k), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 213 (l), when "Kokichi" was derived as a result of the mini-game, the characters "Mission failed" were displayed below it, and the mission of the mini-game was not completed. Is notified. In this production example, the result of the hit / fail judgment is a loss, and therefore, when the mission of the mini game is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a must be displayed. Therefore, in this production example, the mini game is used. Regardless of the number of operations of the effect button 136, it is determined in advance that something other than "Daikichi" is always derived.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 213 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as a cut-in notice. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the fact that the mission was not achieved as a result of the mini-game described above. The mission continues even while the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the display of "Mission in progress" continues, but it overlaps with the weak cut-in image CI1b, and the weak cut-in image. Although it is said that it is more difficult to see than when it does not overlap with CI1b, the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a, so the display of "in mission" is the strong cut-in image. It is easier to see when it overlaps with the weak cut-in image CI1b than when it overlaps with CI1a.

The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the face of the chief, as described above. Therefore, due to the fact that the appearance of the face of the Bancho, which is the mission in the main production, was not achieved, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 213 (n), the character display of "mission failure" is changed to the weak cut-in image CI1b. It is displayed in an overlapping manner. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the mission in the main production was not achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

After that, as shown in FIG. 213 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the middle. The "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 213 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game is completed.

FIG. 214 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. It should be noted that FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (i) are the same as those of FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (i), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 214 (i), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is increased as shown in FIGS. 214 (j) to 214 (k). When the operation valid period of the effect button 136 elapses in a state where the number of times is less than the predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 214 (l), in the mini game display area MN1, as a result of the mini game, "Kokichi" Is derived, and the word "Mission Failed" is displayed below it to notify that the mini-game mission has not been completed. In this production example, the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, and based on this result, it is determined that "Daikichi" can be derived as a result of the mini game. However, since the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than the number of times determined in advance and the operation valid period has elapsed, "Daikichi" is not derived and "Kokichi" is derived. If the mini-game has started but the effect button 136 has never been operated, the result of the mini-game may not be derived even if it is determined that "Daikichi" can be derived. .. Further, when it is determined that "Daikichi" can be derived, "Daikichi" may be derived even if the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient or the effect button 136 is not operated. ..

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 214 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as a cut-in notice. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the fact that the mission was not achieved as a result of the mini-game described above. The mission continues even while the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the display of "Mission in progress" continues, but it overlaps with the weak cut-in image CI1b, and the weak cut-in image. Although it is said that it is more difficult to see than when it does not overlap with CI1b, the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a, so the display of "in mission" is the strong cut-in image. It is easier to see when it overlaps with the weak cut-in image CI1b than when it overlaps with CI1a. The weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed even when the result of the mission is not derived.

The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the face of the chief, as described above. Therefore, because the appearance of the face of the Bancho, which is the mission in the main production, was not achieved, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 214 (n), the character display of "mission failure" was changed to the weak cut-in image CI1b. It is displayed in an overlapping manner. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the mission in the main production was not achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

However, in this production example, the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, so as shown in FIG. 214 (o), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role and wins is displayed. At the same time, "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" are displayed. It is notified that the stop display is scheduled for the combination of.

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 214 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game is completed. That is, in this production example, the number of operations of the production button 136 is insufficient in the mini game, and the mission of the mini game fails. Therefore, even though the mission of the main production related to this cannot be achieved, it is correct or not. It is shown that the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed according to the result of the determination.

FIG. 215 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 215, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the state of the effect movable body 224 is also shown.

FIG. 215 (a) is an effect following FIG. 207 (k), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbol display device 208 is developing into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (b), a button operation effect requesting a continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is started as the main effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (b), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibrating and rotating, and the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, and the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit. It is shown that it is promoting. At this time, the effect button 136, for example, vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates.

After that, as shown in FIG. 215 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge reduction display by the button reception time meter MT is started, and it is shown that the operation reception of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started. Has been done. Then, the player sees this and starts repeatedly hitting the effect button 136.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (d), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and a state in which the mini game is started in this mini game display area MN1 is shown. ing. Specifically, the characters "push" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting one operation of the effect button 136. In addition, below that, the characters "Maybe it's a super hot notice in Daikichi" are displayed, and it is announced that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice will occur due to the derivation of "Daikichi". The contents of the mission in the mini game and the result of the mission achievement are explained. As described above, in this production example, the mission production in the main production is started before the mini game is started. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time from the start of the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the main effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 215 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. It should be noted that the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215 (f), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Nakayoshi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Nakayoshi" display overlaps with a part of the "Daikichi" display. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 215 (f), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 is movable and overlaps with the mini game display area MN1. In this production example, the effect movable body 224 operates as, for example, a big hit notice, but for example, by operating the effect movable body 224, it is announced that there is a high possibility that the mission will be achieved in the mini game. It may be done, or it may be foretold that the mission is likely to be achieved in the main production. It should be noted that the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215 (g), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Kokichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Kokichi" display overlaps with a part of the "Nakayoshi" display. Further, the display of "Kokichi" overlaps with the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224, and is considered to be difficult to see. On the other hand, the effect of the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is also continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (g), in response to the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. , Weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. In this effect example, it is shown that the cut-in image is displayed during the operation valid period in the continuous striking operation effect in the main effect. In this production example, the weak cut image CI1 is displayed in a small size on the left side of the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT so as not to overlap with each other. The continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continuing.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 215 (h), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of "Daikichi", "Nakayoshi", and "Kokichi" is started. Then, the characters "push" are displayed together with the button image 136a below the effect of this high-speed loop rotation, and it is notified that the acceptance of one operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. The display of this mini-game overlaps with the upper arm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224, which makes it difficult to see. On the other hand, in the main production, the button operation production that requires the continuous striking operation of the production buttons continues. Further, in this effect example, the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Here, too, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continuing, but when the acceptance of one operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is the effect button in the main effect. Since the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is accepted in preference to the operation of 136, for example, the result of the mini game is derived in response to the effect button 136 operated at the timing surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line. It is configured in. It should be noted that one operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect, and may also be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 215 (i), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini-game in response to one operation by the effect button 136. It is shown that it is. Then, the word "achievement" indicating that the mission of the mini game has been completed is also displayed, and the fact is notified. However, since the mini-game display area MN1 overlaps the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224, the word "achievement" is difficult to see. At the timing shown in FIG. 215 (i), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the main effect has passed, and the player has finished the continuous operation of the effect button 136.

After that, as shown in FIG. 215 (j), when the mission in the main effect is completed, the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area. That is, the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is derived as a result of the mission in the main production. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 215 (j), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 has moved to the initial position. Therefore, the overlap with the mini-game display area MN1 is eliminated, and the word "achievement" indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved is also easy to see. The timing at which the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area after the mission in the main effect is completed may be the same as the timing at which the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 moves to the initial position. Then, after the mission in the main effect is completed and the weak cut-in image CI1b is moved to the center of the display area, the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 may be moved to the initial position, or the effect movable body 224 may be moved. After the forearm portion 224b of the above has moved to the initial position, the mission in the main effect may be completed and the weak cut-in image CI1b may be moved to the center of the display area.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (k), it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed instead of the weak cut-in image CI1b. This is displayed as a result of mission achievement in the mini-game as described above. Here, the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a is larger than the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a overlaps a part of the mini game display area MN1. Even if the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the main effect is insufficient, even if the mission in the mini game is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a Although it is not displayed, when the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the mission in the mini game is achieved regardless of the number of operations of the effect button 136. You may do so.

After that, as shown in FIG. 215 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. .. After that, at the timing when the variation time elapses, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and one special figure variation game ends.

Subsequently, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 220.

FIGS. 216 to 220 are diagrams stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 216 to 220, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 216 to 220 show a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 216 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 216, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the state of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown.

FIG. 216 (a) shows how the mini-game is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In this production example, the mini-game is played without being divided by areas. When the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right treasure chest image BXL and the left treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side in the lower left and right of the display area. ing. In addition, in the center of the display area, "SP reach if Yoshimune appears" is displayed, and it is notified that when the main character's lord appears from the treasure box, it will shift to super reach (SP reach). Further, above the display area, "Select with the cross key" and "Enter with the button" are displayed. Select the treasure box with the operation key unit 137 and determine it as the treasure box to open the selected treasure box with the effect button 136. It is informed that it can be done. That is, in this production example, a state in which a mini game using a plurality of operating means is performed is shown. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the mini-game is performed using a wider area than the production related to the decorative symbol variation display.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (b), it is shown that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 has started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL, and it is shown that the treasure box surrounded by the cursor CSL is the selected treasure box. Further, the remaining time of the operation valid period is shown on the right side of the center of the display area, and at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (b), "3" indicating that the operation valid period is 3 seconds remaining is displayed. Has been done. Further, FIG. 216 (b) also shows how the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (c), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL is moved to the right treasure box image BXR, and a state of surrounding the right treasure box image BXR is shown. .. The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is "2", indicating that the operation valid period is the remaining 2 seconds.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (d), as shown in FIG. 216 (e), the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as the treasure box to be opened, and the right The treasure chest image BXL is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, while the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is reduced. In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 216 (d), the display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is "1", indicating that the operation valid period is the remaining 1 second. Further, after the player operates the effect button 136 to determine the treasure box to be opened, the display may be displayed so that the treasure box to be opened is confirmed when the operation valid period elapses. Further, when the operation valid period elapses without the operation by the effect button 136, the treasure box selected by the cursor CSL may be determined as the treasure box to be opened, or the operation by the effect button 136 is performed. If the operation validity period elapses without any action, none of the treasure chests is selected and the treasure chest may not be opened. According to this, it may be possible to improve the player's willingness to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (f), the character YSM of the main character, the lord, appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and it is shown that the mission of the mini game has been achieved. As a result, it is foretold to shift to SP reach. In addition, a look-ahead notice may be given by the appearance of the character YSM of the main character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 216 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols of "decoration 7" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. .. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 216 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how it develops into SP reach. As described above, in this production example, when the variation pattern of the decorative pattern determined based on the result of the hit / fail judgment shifts to the SP reach, in the mini game performed before the shift to the SP reach, It is configured so that the character YSM of the main character, who announces the transition to SP reach, can be displayed. As a result, it may be possible to announce the transition to SP reach by making the character YSM of the lord appear in the mini game.

In this production example, if the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, the character YSM of the lord appears regardless of whether the right treasure chest image BXR or the left treasure chest image BXL is selected, and the transition to SP reach does not occur. If it is determined in advance, the character YSM of the lord may not appear regardless of whether the right treasure box image BXL or the left treasure box image BXL is selected. In addition, on the condition that the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, it is randomly determined which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is to be hit, and the treasure chest image determined to be a hit is selected. In this case, the character YSM of the lord may appear. In addition, when the variable time in which SP reach can be executed is selected, it is randomly determined which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is to be a hit, and the treasure chest image determined to be a hit is selected. It is configured so that the character YSM of the lord appears, and if the character YSM of the lord appears, then it develops into SP reach, but if the character YSM of the lord does not appear, then the SP reach. It may be configured to perform a reach with a lower reliability than the SP reach such as a normal reach until the fluctuation time elapses. In addition, whether or not to make the character YSM of the lord appear at the timing when the treasure box image is selected may be randomly drawn. Further, even if the character YSM of the lord appears, it may not shift to SP reach. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed as a rule break.

FIG. 217 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 217, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the state of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown.

FIG. 217 (a) shows how the mini-game is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol. When the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right treasure chest image BXL and the left treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side in the lower left and right of the display area. ing. In addition, in the center of the display area, "SP reach if Yoshimune appears" is displayed, and it is notified that when the main character's lord appears from the treasure box, it will shift to super reach (SP reach). Further, above the display area, "Select with the cross key" and "Enter with the button" are displayed. Select the treasure box with the operation key unit 137 and determine it as the treasure box to open the selected treasure box with the effect button 136. It is informed that it can be done. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 217 (a), a cursor CSL is displayed between the right treasure chest image BXL and the left treasure chest image BXL, and none of the treasure chest images is displayed in a mode in which it is not selected. Has been done.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 217 (b), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, and the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area. To. At the timing shown in FIG. 217 (b), "3" indicating that the operation valid period is 3 seconds remaining is displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 217 (c), the remaining time of the operation valid period on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. The display is "2", indicating that the operation validity period is 2 seconds remaining. Therefore, the cursor CSL has not yet selected any treasure chest image, and is located between the right treasure chest image BXL and the left treasure chest image BXL.

At the timing shown in FIG. 217 (d), the remaining time of the operation valid period on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. The display is "1", indicating that the operation validity period is 1 second remaining. Therefore, the cursor CSL is still not selected for any treasure chest image and is located between the right treasure chest image BXL and the left treasure chest image BXL.

At the timing shown in FIG. 217 (e), the remaining time of the operation valid period on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. The display becomes "0", indicating that the operation validity period has elapsed. Therefore, the cursor CSL is still not selected for any treasure chest image and is located between the right treasure chest image BXL and the left treasure chest image BXL. As a result, neither the treasure chest is selected and none of the treasure chests can be opened, that is, the result of the mini game is not derived, and as shown in FIG. 217 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the reach state. Will be migrated to.

In this production example, if the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, SP reach is executed even if none of the treasure chests are selected, but the result of the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable time are Since it is determined in advance based on the result of the hit / fail judgment, if none of the treasure chests is selected, SP reach is not performed, and for example, a reach with a lower reliability of the jackpot than the SP reach such as normal reach is executed. You may do it. According to this, it may be possible to improve the player's willingness to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

FIG. 218 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 218, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the state of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown. Since FIGS. 218 (a) to 218 (d) are the same as those of FIGS. 216 (a) to 216 (d), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 218 (d), as shown in FIG. 218 (e), the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as a treasure box to be opened, and the right treasure box image is determined. The BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, while the unselected left treasure box image BXL is reduced. Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 218 (e), an error display (error) of "the game ball is clogged" and "please call the staff" is displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Notification) is being performed, and it is notified that a ball jam error has occurred, which is a state in which the game ball is jammed in the payout route. Specifically, for example, the payout condition of the prize ball or the rental ball is satisfied, and the payout device 152 (see FIG. 2 and the like) is driven, but the payout of the game ball is not detected, and the retry operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example,). If the payout of the game ball is not detected even though it is repeated 3 times, the ball jam error notification is performed. Since such an error can continue the game, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error is notified. When it is detected that the error that is the target of the error notification has been resolved (for example, when the game ball is normally paid out by the payout device 152), the error notification is deleted. Here, the timing at which the error display is started may be the same as the timing at which the right treasure box image BXR starts the enlarged display, or the timing after the timing at which the right treasure box image BXR starts the enlarged display. It may be the timing before the timing when the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlarged display.

FIGS. 218 (f) to 218 (h) are the same as FIGS. 216 (f) to (h) except that an error is displayed, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this production example, if the error is such that the game is not interrupted, the mini game is continued.

FIG. 219 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 219, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the state of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown. In this production example, a magnetic detection sensor that detects a magnetic force is provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko machine 100, and when the magnetic force detection sensor detects the magnetic force, a detection signal is output to the main control unit 300. When the main control unit 300 inputs the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor, it determines that a magnetic detection error has occurred, sends a magnetic detection command to the first sub control unit 400, and then stops the game and becomes incapacitated. Control to change. After being deactivated, it is configured so that it cannot be restored until the initialization process of step S113 of the main control unit main process (see FIG. 6) is executed. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the magnetic detection command outputs an error sound from the speaker 120, or causes a predetermined error mode by using various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, and a game underframe lamp 542, for example. The lamp can be blinked, or a predetermined error display can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, since FIGS. 218 (a) to 218 (c) are the same as those in FIGS. 216 (a) to 216 (c), the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 219 (c) shows that the right treasure box image BXR is surrounded. The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is "2", indicating that the operation valid period is the remaining 2 seconds.

After that, for example, when a player performs fraud using a magnet and a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) detects this, as shown in FIG. 219 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 uses a "magnet" on a plain background. The magnetic error display ERR including the characters "Sensor error" is displayed, for example, overlapping the display shown in FIG. 216 (d), and the game is stopped. Therefore, for example, after that, as shown in FIG. 219 (d), the display of the magnetic error display ERR is not erased even if the effect button 136 is operated, and it is shown in FIGS. 216 (d) to 216 (h). However, the magnetic error display ERR will continue to be displayed until the power is cut off without visually recognizing these effect displays (FIGS. 219 (d) to (h)). )). It can be said that the magnetic error display ERR shown in FIG. 219 has a different area overlapping with the effect of the mini game as compared with the error display shown in FIG. 218. In other words, it can be said that the area of the mini-game effect display that overlaps with the error display differs depending on the type of error that has occurred.

FIG. 220 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 220 (a) is an effect following FIG. 207 (j), in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a state in which a reach state is formed is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 220 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how it develops into a bowling reach, which is one of the super reach. Bowling reach is a reach production performed as the main production. When shifting to bowling reach, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and 10 bowlings arranged in a pyramid shape. An effect display is performed in which the ball rolls on the lane toward the pin, and the characters "Big hit with a strike" are displayed in the upper right part of the display area, and if the mission of strike is achieved, it will be a big hit. It has been notified.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220 (c), it is shown that the ball reaches a position close to the ten bowling pins and tries to knock down the bowling pins at any moment. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 220 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area, and overlaps at least a part of the bowling reach effect display. .. In the mini-game display area MN1, the explanation display of the mini-game is performed. In the explanation display of the mini-game shown in FIG. 220 (c), the dice "1" is shown and "put out" is displayed below the "mini-game" display. It is explained that a mission is performed in which the effect button 136 is operated after the start of the game to stop and display the roll of "1" on the dice.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220 (d), a state in which the nine bowling pins have fallen is shown. That is, it is shown that one bowling pin remains without falling. On the other hand, in the mini-game display area MN1, the button image 136a is displayed together with the display of "Push", and it is notified that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini-game has started. At this time, for example, the design of the dice may be changed and displayed.

FIG. 220 (e) shows how the effect button 136 is operated to derive the result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, since the strike did not occur in the bowling reach, the character "sorry" is displayed, and it is notified that the mission in the bowling reach is not achieved and the bowling reach is lost. On the other hand, in the mini-game display area MN1, the effect button 136 is operated, and as a result of the mini-game, the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and the mission is completed. "+1" is displayed to announce that the book will fall.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220 (f), the mini-game display area MN1 is erased, and the dice “1” derived as a result of the mini-game is rolled, and the reward for accomplishing the mission is “1”. After the display of "+1" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 220 (g), it is shown that one bowling pin that has not collapsed has collapsed and has become a strike. In other words, it is shown that a production that will be a big hit for the resurrection from the loss is being performed.

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 220 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game is completed.

As described above, in this production example, it can be said that the result of the mini game influences the result of the reach production as the main production.

Subsequently, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 228.

221 to 228 are diagrams stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 221 to 228, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure are also shown. The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 221 to 228 show a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 221 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (a), "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a combination of lost decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 and the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 and the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 are all in the default display mode. It is displayed. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 partitioned in a substantially rectangular shape is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The multifunctional display area MF1 can perform the above-mentioned tutorial display, notice display, mini-game effect display, and the like. In this production example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not performed, but these displays may be performed. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (b), the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is used as the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 after the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted. It is displayed, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed as the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, as described above, the variable icon may be displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (c), it is shown that the tutorial display is performed in the multifunction display area MF1. Specifically, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the display "The mini game will start at various timings" is displayed, and the timing when the mini game starts is suggested.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and after the temporary stop is performed due to the shaking fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 221 (d), "decoration 2". -Decoration 5-Decoration 7 "is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (e), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is the first special figure 1. Is displayed as the hold icon h11, and the variable display of the decorative symbol has started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (f), it is shown that the tutorial display is performed in the multifunction display area MF1. Specifically, in the multifunctional display area MF1, "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" is displayed, and information about the main character, the lord, is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (g), the tutorial display displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 is interrupted, and the mini game is started. When the mini-game is started, the "dice game" is displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the dice game as a mini-game is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 221 (h), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "hold 1UP" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the bancho along with a display indicating the outcome of "1" on the dice. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by one level. That is, as a result of the mini-game, it is announced that the hold icon of the default display mode will be changed to the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode by deriving the roll of "1" of the dice as the mission. It becomes.

After that, as shown in FIG. 221 (i), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (j), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (j), as shown in FIG. 221 (k), the dice symbol is the result of the mission achievement in the multifunction display area MF1. It is derived and displayed in a manner indicating a result of "1", and "1UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the chief is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 221 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini game. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of is derived and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (l), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, " It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the first stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and blue display mode. Also in this production example, the reliability of the jackpot is higher in the order of red> green> blue for the hold icon. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

In addition, the fortune-telling game may be started in place of the dice game as the mini-game described in FIGS. 221 (g) to 221 (k). Here, FIG. 221 (g') is another example of the effect following FIG. 221 (f). Specifically, the tutorial display displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 221 (f) is interrupted, and as shown in FIG. 221 (g'), the mini game is played in the multifunctional display area MF1. It will be started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 together with the image BCH of the face of the Bancho, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game is started. Will be done. In this production example, even when different types of mini-games are started, the image BCH of the face of the same chief is displayed. In other words, in this production example, the same character (image BCH of the face of the bancho) can be made to appear to execute a plurality of types of mini-games.

After that, as shown in FIG. 221 (h'), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "Nakayoshi" is displayed and "Depended 1UP" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the Bancho, and "Depended 1UP" is displayed in the mini game. It is explained that when "Nakayoshi" is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by one level. That is, as a result of the mini-game, by deriving the fortune-telling of "Nakayoshi" as a mission, it is announced that the hold icon of the default display mode will change to the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 221 (i'), in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. The mini-game in this production example is not operated by an operation means such as the production button 136.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (j'), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is changed to the open mode, and the fortune slip of "Nakayoshi" is derived and displayed, indicating that the mission has been achieved. The stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the left symbol, or the mini game. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 221 (k'), in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and "1UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. There is. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the chief is also continuously displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 221 (k'), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped for the second time, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of starting the display of the mission achievement reward may be the same, or the display of the mission achievement reward is started after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the mission achievement display is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (l'), a third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the first stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and blue display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

As described above, the production example shown in FIG. 221 shows an example configured so that different types of mini-games can be played when the start condition of the mini-game is satisfied. The mini-game of the dice game) requires the operation of the effect button 136, while the mini-game of the other (omikuji game) does not require any operation by the operation means. The target to be changed is the same (in each case, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is changed). That is, FIG. 221 shows an example of an effect in which the target of influence in the main effect is the same as a result in any of the mini games. In this production example, whether to execute the dice game or the fortune-telling game may be randomly determined or may be determined based on the result of the winning / failing determination. For example, the dice game is executed. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when the Omikuji game is executed than when the game is executed.

Further, as in this production example, in a mini game, a character smaller than a character (sometimes referred to as a "small character") that appears during execution of a variable display of a decorative symbol, or in a production such as a tutorial display, for example. Characters that appear (sometimes called "navi characters") may appear. If the mini-game is not played, these characters may be displayed in the tutorial display or other notices, or may be configured to appear only in the mini-game. Further, these characters may be displayed at all times. Further, it is preferable that there is a difference in appearance between the character appearing in the mini game and the character appearing during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern. For example, the size may be different, and the 3D character and the deformed character. There may be a difference in expression such as the character of.

In this production example, the fortune-telling game (second mini-game) may use a wider area than the dice game (first mini-game). That is, the second mini-game uses at least a certain display area (multifunctional display area MF1 in which the first mini-game is performed), and yet another display area (multifunctional display area MF1 is an enlarged display area). ) May also be used.

FIG. 222 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. It should be noted that FIGS. 222 (a) to 222 (e) are the same as those of FIGS. 221 (a) to 221 (e), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (f), it is shown that the start notice of the mini game is displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1. Specifically, in the multifunctional display area MF1, "attention" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is foretold that the mini game will start from now on.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (g), the mini game is started. When the mini-game is started, the "dice game" is displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the dice game as a mini-game is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (h), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "hold 3UP" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the bancho along with the display indicating the roll of "3" on the dice. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. That is, as a result of the mini-game, it is announced that the hold icon of the default display mode will be changed to the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode by deriving the roll of "3" of the dice as the mission. It becomes. Moreover, in this production example, the content of the mission and the reward for accomplishing the mission are more advantageous than the dice game shown in FIG. 221.

After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (i), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (j), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (j), as shown in FIG. 222 (k), the dice symbol is the result of the mission achievement in the multifunction display area MF1. It is derived and displayed in a manner indicating a result of "3", and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the chief is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 222 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini game. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of is derived and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (l), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, " It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

Further, when the Omikuji game is started instead of the dice game, as shown in FIG. 222 (g'), in the multi-function display area MF1, when the mini-game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 becomes the chief. The "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game will be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (h'), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "Daikichi" is displayed and "Depended 3UP" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the Bancho, and "Depended 3UP" is displayed in the mini game. It is explained that when "Daikichi" is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. That is, as a result of the mini-game, by deriving the Omikuji of "Daikichi" as a mission, it is announced that the hold icon of the default display mode will change to the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode. Moreover, in this production example, the content of the mission and the reward for accomplishing the mission are more advantageous than the fortune-telling game shown in FIG. 221.

After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (i'), in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (j'), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is changed to the open mode, and the fortune slip of "Daikichi" is derived and displayed, indicating that the mission has been achieved. The stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the left symbol, or the mini game. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (k'), in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. There is. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the chief is also continuously displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 222 (k'), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped for the second time, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of starting the display of the mission achievement reward may be the same, or the display of the mission achievement reward is started after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the mission achievement display is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (l'), a third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

As described above, in the production example shown in FIG. 222, an example configured so that the content of the mission and the reward for accomplishing the mission can be different even in the same type of mini-game is shown. The mission content may be the same and the mission achievement reward may be different, or the mission content may be different and the mission achievement reward may be the same.

FIG. 223 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 223 (A1) to (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the auntie mode, and FIGS. 223 (B1) to (B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. There is. It should be noted that the auntie mode and the princess mode are the names of the production modes, respectively, and each mode is configured to perform a mode-specific production. In addition, for example, at least one of the auntie mode and the princess mode may be the look-ahead mode. In addition, whether to shift to the auntie mode or the princess mode may be randomly determined, or may be determined based on the gaming state. For example, in the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), it is easy to shift to the auntie mode, and in the hidden probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), it shifts to the princess mode. It may be made easier so that the player can guess the current playing state.

FIG. 223 (A1) shows that the effect mode is the auntie mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 223 (A1), the "Auntie mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the character BA of the auntie is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the auntie mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 223 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started. In this production example, the dice game is configured to be easier to start than the fortune-telling game in the auntie mode. Here, when the mini-game is executed in the auntie mode, the dice game may be started and the fortune-telling game may not be started. It should be noted that FIGS. 223 (A2) to (A6) are the same as those in FIGS. 222 (h) to (l) except that the auntie mode and the auntie character BA are displayed. , The description is omitted.

FIG. 223 (B1) shows that the production mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 223 (B1), the "princess mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display area. It has been notified that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 223 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game is started. In this production example, in the princess mode, the fortune-telling game is configured to be easier to start than the dice game. Here, when the mini game is executed in the princess mode, the fortune-telling game may be started and the dice game may not be started. It should be noted that FIGS. 223 (B2) to (B6) are the same as those of FIGS. 222 (h') to (l') except that the princess mode is displayed and the princess character HM1 is displayed. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 224 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 224 (A1) to (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the auntie mode, and FIGS. 224 (B1) to (B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. There is.

FIG. 224 (A1) shows that the effect mode is the auntie mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (A1), the "Auntie mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the character BA of the auntie is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the auntie mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started. In this production example, the type of mini-game to be executed is determined based on the content of the notice executed in the main production. For example, when it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is more likely to be started as a mini game than the Omikuji game in the symbol variation display, and it is decided to execute the pseudo-ream. If so, the symbol variation display is configured so that the Omikuji game is easier to start than the dice game as a mini game. If it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is always started as a mini-game in the symbol variation display, and if it is decided to execute the pseudo-ream, the said In the symbol variation display, the Omikuji game may be configured to always start as a mini game. Further, in this production example, the type of mini-game to be executed is determined without depending on the current production mode, but the type of mini-game to be executed may be determined depending on the production mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (A2), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "hold 3UP" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the bancho along with the display indicating the roll of "3" on the dice. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a step-up notice has been started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 224 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative symbols are more difficult to see when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. Even if the timing at which the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunctional display area MF1 is started is the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the step-up notice SU1 may be started to be displayed after the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF1 are started, or the step-up notice SU1 may be started. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF1 may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (A3), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. The timing at which the button image 136a and "press" are started to be displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multifunctional display area MF1. The step-up notice SU2 may be started to be displayed after the display of the button image 136a and "press" is started, or the button image 136a in the multifunction display area MF1 is started after the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed. And "press" may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (A4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 224 (A4), as shown in FIG. 224 (A5), the dice symbol is the result of the mission achievement in the multifunction display area MF1. It is derived and displayed in a manner indicating a result of "3", and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the chief is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (A5), the step-up notice has been completed. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol has stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice may end. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after is completed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (A6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, " It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 224 (B1) shows that the production mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (B1), the "princess mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display area. It has been notified that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (B2), it is shown that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3". In this production example, for example, it is notified that a pseudo-ream may be performed by temporarily stopping with a combination of only "decoration 7" and "decoration 3". That is, a combination of decorative patterns of only "decoration 7" and "decoration 3" may be an opportunity. It should be noted that the pseudo-ream symbol may be displayed to notify the start of the pseudo-ream. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, "Daikichi" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the Bancho and "Hold 3UP" is displayed, and when "Daikichi" is derived and displayed in the mini game, the hold icon is displayed. It is explained that the display mode of is upgraded by three levels. The timing at which the display of "Daikichi" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 are started may be the same as the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, or the multi-function display area MF1 After the display of "Daikichi" and the display of "Hold 3UP" are started, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped, or after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, "Daikichi" in the multifunctional display area MF1. And the display of "Hold 3 UP" may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (B3), in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started, and it is shown that the first pseudo-ream variable display is performed. Here, the number of times the pseudo-ream has been performed may be displayed. The start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ream) and the start of the display of the treasure box BXS may be at the same timing, or after the variable display of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ream) starts, the treasure box BXS is displayed. May start, or after the display of the treasure chest BXS starts, the variable display (pseudo-ream) of the decorative symbol may start.

After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (B4), in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box changes to the open mode, and the fortune slip of "Daikichi" is derived and displayed, and the mission is achieved. It is shown. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily stops at the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3", and foretells that the pseudo-ream may be further performed. The temporary stop of the decorative symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, or the mini game. The decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped after the result is derived and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 224 (B5), in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the chief is also continuously displayed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started, and it is shown that the second pseudo-ream variable display is being performed. The timing of starting the variable display of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ream) and the start of the display of the reward for accomplishing the mission may be the same, or after the variable display of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ream) is started. The display of the mission achievement reward may be started, or the variable display of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ream) may be started after the mission achievement reward display is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (B6), the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is erased. Has been changed from the default display mode to a circular red display mode as the third stage display mode of the look-ahead notice. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols is lost. Here, after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-ream may be further performed. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

In this production example, it was explained that the result of the mini-game affects the display mode of the hold icon, but as a result of the mini-game, it may be announced that a pseudo-ream will be performed as a reward for completing the mission. Alternatively, the number of times the pseudo-ream is started may be announced, or the number of pseudo-reams may be foretold to increase.

In addition, as a result of the mini-game, as a reward for completing the mission, a step-up notice may be announced, or the number of steps displayed in the step-up notice may be announced, or the steps may be announced. You may want to foretell that the number will increase.

FIG. 225 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 225 (A1) to (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the auntie mode, and FIGS. 225 (B1) to (B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. There is.

FIG. 225 (A1) shows that the effect mode is the auntie mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 225 (A1), the "Auntie mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the character BA of the auntie is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the auntie mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 225 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, a mini game has been started. In this production example, the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed instead of the image BCH of the face of the chief, and the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani. It is shown that the dice game is being notified that it will start. The character image SBH of Sabohani is, for example, an image that may be displayed only in the dice game and is configured not to be displayed in the fortune-telling game, but may also be displayed in the fortune-telling game. In this production example, the reward for accomplishing the mission in the dice game is more likely to be more advantageous when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed than when the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is displayed. That is, in this production example, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for accomplishing the mission, as compared with the case where the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed. It is easy to give a notice that is the third stage display mode (red display mode) of the look-ahead notice, and when the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed, the mission is more than when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed. As a reward for achievement, it is easy to give a notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes from the default display mode to the first stage display mode (blue display mode) of the look-ahead notice. More specifically, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the result of "3" is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini-game than when the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is displayed. When the face image BCH is displayed, the result of "1" is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini game than when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed. Further, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the mission may be configured so as to be easier to accomplish than when the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is displayed. In addition, FIGS. 225 (A2) to 225 (A6) show FIG. 224 (A2), except that the image BCH of the face of the chief displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 is replaced with the character image SBH of Sabohani. -Since it is the same as the figure (A6), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 225 (B1) shows that the production mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 225 (B1), the "princess mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display area. It has been notified that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 225 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, a mini game has been started. In this production example, the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed instead of the image BCH of the face of the chief, and the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the character image HM2 of this princess. It is shown that the Omikuji game is being notified that it will start. The princess character image HM2 is, for example, an image that may be displayed only in the fortune-telling game and is configured not to be displayed in the dice game, but may also be displayed in the dice game. In this production example, the reward for accomplishing the mission in the fortune-telling game is more likely to be more advantageous when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed than when the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed. That is, in this production example, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for completing the mission, as compared with the case where the image BCH of the face of the chief is displayed. It is easy to give a notice that will be the third stage display mode (red display mode) of the look-ahead notice, and when the image BCH of the face of the chief is displayed, the mission is more than when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed. As a reward for achievement, it is easy to give a notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes from the default display mode to the first stage display mode (blue display mode) of the look-ahead notice. More specifically, when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed, "Daikichi" is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini-game than when the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed, and the image of the face of the bancho. When BCH is displayed, "Nakayoshi" is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini-game than when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed. As in this production example, the character displayed in the mini game may be the same as the character displayed corresponding to the production mode. That is, in this production example, the character displayed in the princess mode (princess character HM1) and the character displayed in the mini game (princess character image HM2) are the same. Further, when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed, the mission may be configured so as to be easier to accomplish than when the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed. In addition, FIGS. 225 (B2) to 225 (B6) show FIG. 224 (B2), except that the image BCH of the face of the chief displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 is replaced with the character image HM2 of the princess. -Since it is the same as the figure (B6), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 226 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 226 (A1) to 226 (A6) show an example of an effect performed in a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), and FIGS. 226 (B1) to 226 (B6) show. , An example of the effect performed in the probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) is shown. In this production example, it is shown that the types of mini-games to be started differ depending on the current gaming state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, the dice game is likely to be started as a mini game, and in the probabilistic state, the fortune-telling game is likely to be started as a mini game. In the normal game state, the dice game may always be started as a mini game, and in the probabilistic state, the fortune-telling game may be always started as a mini game. Further, the appearance frequency of the mini-game may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the probabilistic state, the player basically feels like waiting for a big hit, so that the player has free time until the big hit. Therefore, the probability of occurrence of the mini-game may be higher than that of the normal game state. Further, the probability of occurrence of the mini game may be higher in the normal game state than in the probability change state. Further, the mini-game may be executed only in the probabilistic state, or the mini-game may be executed only in the normal gaming state. Further, for a certain mini-game, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal game state than in the probability change state, the appearance rate may be higher in the probability change state than in the normal game state, and it appears only in the probability change state. It may appear only in the normal game state. Further, regarding a certain notice, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal game state than in the probability change state, the appearance rate may be higher in the probability change state than in the normal game state, and it appears only in the probability change state. In some cases, it may appear only in the normal gaming state.

FIG. 226 (A1) shows that the gaming state is a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226 (A1), the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been done. It should be noted that FIGS. 226 (A1) to 226 (A6) show FIG. 225 (A1) to FIG. Since it is the same as A1) to FIG. 6 (A6), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 226 (B1) shows that the gaming state is a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226 (B1), the "probability change mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the probability change state. ing. Further, in the upper right portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a "right-handed" display is performed, and a striking method suggestion display is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 226 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h21 of the first special figure 2 and the hold icon h22 of the second special figure 2 and the hold icon h23 of the third special figure 2 representing the hold of the special figure 2 are all in the default display mode. It is displayed and is displayed on the lower right side of the display area. Further, in this effect example, the multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the left half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this production example, the display position of the multifunctional display area MF1 is changed depending on the game state. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the character image HM2 of the princess, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game is started. In addition, in FIGS. 226 (B1) to 226 (B5), it is a probable change state that the game state is the production mode of the princess mode, and the hold display of the special figure 1 becomes the hold display of the special figure 2. It is the same as in FIGS. 225 (B1) to (B5) except that the number of hold displays is different, the position of the hold display and the display position of the multifunction display area MF1 are exchanged. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 226 (B5), after the display of "3UP confirmation" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is performed in the multifunction display area MF1, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 226 (B6) is displayed. In the device 208, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 has been erased, and in this production example, the display mode of the hold icon h22 of the second special figure 2 is a look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode as the display mode of the third stage of. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols is lost. In this way, the result of the mini-game may affect any hold icon.

FIG. 227 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

227 (A1) to 227 (A6) show an example in which the display area of the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded, and FIGS. 227 (B1) to 227 (B6) show an example in which the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded. An example is shown in which the hold display area for displaying the hold icon is also used. Although FIG. 227 has been described by taking a dice game as a mini game as an example, it can also be applied to the above-mentioned fortune-telling game.

FIG. 227 (A1) shows how the gaming state is the normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226 (A1), the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been done. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (A2), the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, showing that the area is enlarged. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed so that the visibility is improved. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, a display indicating a roll of "3" on the dice and a display of "hold 3UP" are performed, and an effect button is displayed after the mini game is started. It is explained that when the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed by operating 136, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. Here, the character image SBH of Sabohani and the display showing the roll of "3" on the dice are enlarged and displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a step-up notice has been started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 227 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. Since this step-up notice SU1 is not displayed overlapping with the multifunction display area MF1, it does not affect the visibility of both. The timing at which the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed, or after the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, the step-up is performed. The notice SU1 may be started to be displayed, or the multifunction display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed. Further, even if the timing at which the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF1 is started is the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the step-up notice SU1 may be started to be displayed after the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF1 are started, or the step-up notice SU1 may be started. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF1 may be started. Further, the timing at which the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed is the same as the timing at which the display of the dice "3" in the multifunctional display area MF1 and the display of "hold 3UP" are started. Alternatively, after the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started. The multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the function display area MF1 are started. Further, the multifunctional display area MF1 may or may not be expanded when the mini game is started. Further, the multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded according to the game state. For example, when the mini-game is started in the probabilistic state, the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and the mini-game is expanded in the normal game state. The multi-function display area MF1 may not be expanded when it is started, or the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded when the mini-game is started in the normal gaming state, and the mini-game is started in the probabilistic state. In this case, the multifunctional display area MF1 may not be expanded. Further, in this effect example, the expanded multifunctional display area MF1 is not overlapped with the decorative symbol, but the expanded multifunctional display area MF1 may be overlapped with the decorative symbol, or the decorative symbol may be expanded. It may overlap with the function display area MF1. Further, the non-extended multifunctional display area MF1 may be overlapped with the decorative symbol, or the decorative symbol may be overlapped with the non-extended multifunctional display area MF1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (A3), in the multifunctional display area MF1, together with the large button image 136aL, "press" is displayed on the button image 136aL, and the effect button 136 in the mini game is displayed. It is notified that the operation validity period of is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. This step-up notice SU2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the multifunctional display area MF1, and affects the visibility of the multifunctional display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU2 overlaps the multi-function display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU2 does not overlap the multi-function display area MF1. It should be noted that the multi-function display area MF1 may be overlapped with the step-up notice only when it is expanded and displayed, or may be overlapped with the step-up notice even when it is not expanded and displayed. Further, the timing at which the display of the button image 136aL and the "press" in the multifunctional display area MF1 is started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multifunctional display area MF1. The step-up notice SU2 may be started to be displayed after the display of the button image 136aL and "press" is started, or the button image 136aL in the multifunction display area MF1 is started after the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed. And "press" may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (A4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. This step-up notice SU3 is also displayed so as to overlap a part of the multifunctional display area MF1, and affects the visibility of the multifunctional display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU3 overlaps the multi-function display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU3 does not overlap the multi-function display area MF1. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136aL, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. Has been done. The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Therefore, the rate of decrease of the gauge is faster than that when the button reception time meter MT is not expanded. Here, the decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster than the decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main production. , The rate of decrease of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main production may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game. The decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the game and the decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect may be the same speed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 227 (A4), as shown in FIG. 227 (A5), in the multifunction display area MF1, the enlarged dice pattern is the result of the mission achievement. It is derived and displayed in a manner indicating the result of "3", and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the character image SBH of Sabohani is also enlarged and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (A5), the step-up notice has been completed. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol has stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice may end. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after is completed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (A6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, " It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". In addition, the expanded multifunction display area MF1 has been reduced and returned to the default size. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed. Further, the timing at which the multifunction display area MF1 returns to the default size and the timing at which the result of the mini game is erased may be the same, or after the multifunction display area MF1 returns to the default size, the mini game The result of the mini-game may be erased, or the multifunction display area MF1 may return to the default size after the result of the mini-game is erased.

FIG. 227 (B1) shows that the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (B1), the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been done. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, in this effect example, the multifunctional display area MF2 is formed over the left and right ends of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this multifunctional display area MF2, in addition to the above-mentioned tutorial display, notice display, mini-game effect display, and the like, a hold icon is also displayed. The hold icon of the special figure 1 can be displayed on the left side of the multifunction display area MF2, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 can be displayed on the right side of the multifunction display area MF2. As shown in FIG. 227 (B1), on the left side of the multifunction display area MF2, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the multifunctional display area MF2, a mini game is started using the display area of the hold icon in Special Figure 2, and a "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and the mini game is displayed. It is notified that the dice game will be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (B2), in the multifunctional display area MF2, "hold 3UP" is displayed on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani along with a display indicating the outcome of "3" of the dice. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a step-up notice has been started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 227 (B2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative symbols are more difficult to see when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. Even if the timing at which the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunctional display area MF2 is started is the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the step-up notice SU1 may be started after the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF2 are started, or the step-up notice SU1 may be started. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF2 may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (B3), in the multifunctional display area MF2, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. The timing at which the display of the button images 136a and "press" in the multifunctional display area MF2 is started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multifunctional display area MF2. The step-up notice SU2 may be started to be displayed after the display of the button image 136a and "press" is started, or the button image 136a in the multifunction display area MF2 is started after the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed. And the display of "press" may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (B4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 227 (B4), as shown in FIG. 227 (B5), the dice symbol is the result of the mission achievement in the multifunction display area MF2. It is derived and displayed in a manner indicating a result of "3", and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF2, the character image SBH of Sabohani is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (B5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (B5), the step-up notice has been completed. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol has stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice may end. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after is completed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (B6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, " It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF2 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 228 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 228 (a) shows how the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (a), the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been done. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode t. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (a), a step-up notice as a main effect has been started. At the timing shown in FIG. 228 (a), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative symbols are more difficult to see when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (b), the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, a mini game display area MN2 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the mini-game display area MN2, the mini-game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini-game is started. That is, in this production example, a state in which a dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) appears when the mini game is started is shown. Here, the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed and the timing at which the mini-game is started may be the same, or the mini-game may be started after the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed. Then, the step-up notice SU2 may be started to be displayed after the mini-game is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (c), the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area, the mini game display area MN2 is erased, and the mini game is produced. It is shown that the display is greatly enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, the display of "3" on the dice and the display of "Hold 3UP" are greatly enlarged and displayed after the mini-game is started. It is explained that when the button 136 is operated and the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) is erased during at least a part of the period during which the mini game is being performed. Further, the step-up notice was scheduled to be displayed up to the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 when the mini-game was not started. It is cut off at. Even if the mini-game is started, the step-up notice may be displayed continuously without being interrupted. In this case, for example, the display area may be moved so as not to overlap with the effect display of the mini game, or the step-up notice may be reduced and displayed. Further, the step-up notice may be displayed overlapping with the effect display of the mini-game, or the effect display of the mini-game may be displayed overlapping with the step-up notice.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (d), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the button reception time meter MT is displayed below the enlarged button image 136aL, and the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. It is displayed in the mode of The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Here, the timing at which the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed and the timing at which the left symbol is stopped and displayed may be the same, or after the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed. , The left symbol may be stopped and displayed, or the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT may be displayed after the left symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (e), the enlarged dice symbol is the result of accomplishing the mission. Is derived and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of. Further, at this time, the mini-game display area MN2 is displayed again on the right side of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this mini-game display area MN2, the dice symbol is derived with a roll of "3". In addition to notifying that it has been displayed, "3UP confirmed" is displayed to indicate that it is a reward for completing the mission. Further, in the mini-game display area MN2, the character image SBH of Sabohani is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 228 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. The timing of the derivation display of the result of the mini game and the timing of redisplaying the mini game display area MN2 may be the same, or after the result of the mini game is derived and displayed, the mini game display area MN2 is displayed. It may be redisplayed, or the result of the mini-game may be derived and displayed after the mini-game display area MN2 is redisplayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (f), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, " It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". At this time, the size of the decorative pattern returns from the reduced size to the default size, and the display position also returns to the default display position. At the end of the mini-game, the mini-game display area MN2 is also erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is circular and red as the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to the display mode of. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the mini-game display area MN2 and the timing of confirming the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the mini-game display area MN2 is erased. , The mini-game display area MN2 may be erased after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. Further, the timing at which the mini-game display area MN2 is erased and the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon changes may be the same, or the display mode of the hold icon changes after the mini-game display area MN2 is erased. Alternatively, the mini-game display area MN2 may be erased after the display mode of the hold icon is changed.

In the production example shown in FIG. 228, the dice game has been described as an example of the mini game, but the above-mentioned fortune-telling game can also be applied.

Further, as the above-mentioned mini-game, the dice game and the fortune-telling game are executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variable display is performed, but are configured to be executed on a display device different from the decorative symbol display device 208. May be done.

Subsequently, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 236.

FIGS. 229 to 236 are diagrams that stepwise show a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 229 to 236, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure are also shown. The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 229 to 236 show a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 229 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (a), a customer waiting demo display is displayed. This customer waiting demo display is a display that may be displayed in a standby state in which the variable display of the special figure is not performed, and is an effect display for promoting the motivation of the player to play the game. Further, below the display area, "display menu with push button" is displayed so as to overlap with the customer waiting demo display, and each button of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 in the standby state. Is operated to notify that the menu screen is displayed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (b), the menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 229 (c). On the menu screen, each item of member registration, two-dimensional code issuance, game history, mini game, and end is displayed side by side in a column, and below that, the character display of "select" is displayed along with the direction key operation promotion image 137p. In addition, the character display of "OK" is performed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q and the button image 136a, and the cursor CSL is moved by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137, and OK. It is shown that the item instructed by the cursor CSL is executed by operating the button 137e or the effect button 136.

Here, when the item of "member registration" is executed, the screen shifts to the member registration screen. On the member registration screen, for example, a two-dimensional code for acquiring a password is displayed. This two-dimensional code includes the URL of the registration page for the initial registration on the operation server side. In the present embodiment, by registering as a member, it is possible to set the original mode such as recording the game history and customizing the production. The player, for example, uses a mobile terminal having a camera function and a barcode reader function to read the two-dimensional code and acquire the URL of the initial registration page. The player accesses the registration page of the acquired URL from the mobile terminal. The operation server acquires personal identification information (ID) that can identify the person who has accessed the initial registration page, and issues a password. The personal identification information (ID) may be information based on an individual identification number unique to the mobile terminal, or information input by an accessor. The password issued here includes initial values of personal identification information (ID) and history information. The history information is stored in the operation server in association with the personal identification information acquired here. When the password is issued from the operation server, the password is displayed on the display screen of the mobile terminal.

Moreover, when the item of "two-dimensional code issuance" is executed, the two-dimensional code issuance screen is displayed. On the two-dimensional code issuance screen, the two-dimensional code generated by the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. Issuance of this two-dimensional code is prepared on the assumption that the player will be selected when ending the game in the state where the original mode is set.
The two-dimensional code referred to here has a maximum capacity of 2053 bytes (about 2KB), and the display size is changed in 4-cell increments in the range of 21 × 21 [cells] to 177 × 177 [cells]. Can be done. A QR code (registered trademark) is known as a typical two-dimensional code. In addition, instead of the two-dimensional code, a one-dimensional bar code or an encrypted character string may be used. However, the two-dimensional code has an advantage that the amount of information that can be included is overwhelmingly larger than that of a simple character string. In the case of a character string, as the amount of information to be included increases, the character string increases and cannot be remembered or written down by humans. Therefore, the burden can be reduced by notifying with a two-dimensional code.
In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code includes, for example, personal identification information (ID), information representing the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, the cumulative value of the original mode points, and the like. Further, the number of winnings, the number of big hits, the number of small hits, the store identification information, the information unique to the game console, the operating status, the number of errors, etc. may be included in the special drawing start port (230, 232). The information representing the result of the game, the mission achievement status, the cumulative value of the original mode points, the number of winnings, etc. correspond to the history information. Further, the two-dimensional code also includes the URL of the update reception page prepared on the operation server.
The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured so that when a two-dimensional code is issued, information such as the result of the current game included in the two-dimensional code is deleted from the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a warning screen is displayed when issuing the two-dimensional code, and the player is warned that the information such as the result of the current game will be deleted.
When the player takes a picture of the issued two-dimensional code using the camera function of the mobile terminal, the bar code reader function is activated. Then, on the display screen of the mobile terminal, the personal identification information (ID) and the personal identification information (ID) included in the two-dimensional code are displayed in "http: // www. ~ / Jp" indicating the address of the update reception page prepared on the operation server. A URL with an argument representing history information is displayed. When the player accesses the URL converted by the bar code reader function from the read two-dimensional code, the history information stored in the operation server so far in association with the personal identification information included in the argument part is displayed. It is updated to the history information included in the argument part. In this embodiment, since the player who has finished reading the two-dimensional code may leave the game table as it is, the history information stored in the game table at the time of issuing the two-dimensional code is deleted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history information may be deleted based on the player's operation after issuing the two-dimensional code. If the player does not delete the history information, the game can return to the game reflecting the history information. It may be configured as follows.

Further, when the item of "game history" is executed, for example, information indicating the result of the game this time, the mission achievement status, the cumulative value of the original mode points, and the like are displayed. Further, the number of winnings, the number of big hits, the number of small hits, the operating status, the number of errors, etc. to the special drawing start port (230, 232) may be displayed.

Also, when the "mini game" item is executed, the mini game is executed. The details of the mini game will be described later.

When the "Exit" item is executed, the display of the menu screen is terminated and the customer waiting demo display is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 229 (c), when the lower button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "member registration", the cursor CSL becomes "" as shown in FIG. 229 (d). When the "two-dimensional code issuance" is instructed and the lower button 137b is operated once more, the cursor CSL instructs the "game history" and the lower button 137b is operated once more, as shown in FIG. 229 (e). Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (f), the cursor CSL indicates a "mini game".

Then, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (f), as shown in FIG. 229 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a mini game. Specifically, the title "Today's fortune-telling" is displayed at the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, four treasure chests are arranged from the center to the left side of the display area, and the direction is on the right side of the display area. The character "select" is displayed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and the character "enter" is displayed together with the button image 136a below it. The direction key of the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL. It is informed that one of the four treasure chests (BX1, BX2, BX3, BX4) can be instructed and the treasure chest instructed by the cursor CSL can be opened by operating the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 229 (g), the cursor CSL indicates the treasure box BX1 on the upper left. In this mini-game, the player selects from four treasure chests and notifies the contents of the selected treasure chest. The contents of the treasure box are the result of fortune-telling fortune-telling that suggests fortune (for example, Daikichi, Nakakichi, Kokichi, Kyou, etc.), and multiple types are available. Furthermore, in this production example, a word of advice is added along with the result of fortune-telling. The results of these fortune-telling and one-word advice have nothing to do with the result of the judgment of success or failure. In other words, it does not at least suggest whether the judgment is correct or not. In addition, which result is associated with each treasure box is randomly determined. Therefore, for example, even if the same treasure chest is selected, the contents will change each time the mini game is executed. That is, it can be said that the contents of the treasure box (result of the mini game) change according to the operation status of the operation means such as the operation key unit 137 and the effect button 136.

After that, when the lower button 137b is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (h), the cursor CSL indicates the treasure box BX2 at the lower left as shown in FIG. 229 (i).

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (i), as shown in FIG. 229 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the treasure box BX2 at the lower left is surrounded by the cursor CSL. The treasure chest BX1 on the upper left, the treasure chest BX3 on the upper right, and the treasure chest BX4 on the lower right are reduced and displayed in the lower right portion. As a result, it is notified that the treasure chest BX2 at the lower left has been determined as a treasure chest to be opened.

After that, as shown in FIG. 229 (k), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the treasure chest BX2 at the lower left is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the auntie character BA appears from the treasure chest and the result of fortune-telling. "Kokichi" is displayed as "Kokichi", and "Moderately ..." is displayed as a word of advice, showing how to call attention not to be too absorbed in the game. That is, in this production example, "Kokichi" and the auntie's character BA are associated with each other, and it may be understood that the result of the fortune-telling is "Kokichi" by looking at the auntie's character BA.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (l), the character display "This is another result" is displayed, and it is foretold that the contents of the treasure box that has not been opened will be notified. The content of the character display shown in FIG. 229 (l) differs depending on the character that appears. For example, when the princess character HM3, which will be described later, appears, a character display such as "Other results are this" is displayed. Is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (m), the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure chest BX1 on the upper left, the image BCH of the face of the chief appears from the treasure chest BX3 on the upper right, and the treasure chest BX4 on the lower right. An image of a panda's face PND appears. The princess character HM3 is a character corresponding to Daikichi, the image BCH of the Bancho's face is a character corresponding to Nakayoshi, and the image PND of the panda's face is a character corresponding to evil. The combination of the fortune-telling result and the character can be appropriately set, and the combination of the fortune-telling result and the character may be changed each time the mini-game is played.

As another example of the contents of the treasure box displayed as a result of the mini game, for example, as shown in FIG. 229 (k1), the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure box, and as a result of the fortune-telling, "Daikichi" Is displayed, and as a word of advice, "Today's premonition of a big catch" is displayed to give a feeling of expectation that a large amount of balls may be obtained.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 229 (k2), the image BCH of the face of the Bancho appears from the treasure box, and "Nakayoshi" is displayed as a result of fortune-telling. Is displayed, and some of them give a feeling of expectation that there may be times when you should sit down and play for a while.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 229 (k3), an image PND of the panda's face appears from the treasure box, and as a result of fortune-telling fortune-telling, "bad" is displayed. Is displayed, and some of them show that they are alerted not to be too absorbed in the game.

Further, for example, a result of a mini game that can appear depending on the setting contents by the DIP switch connected to the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 may be prepared. If a setting is made to increase the appearance rate of the premier notice that is promised to be, as shown in Fig. 229 (k4), a word of advice "Today is a premonition of a big catch" is displayed and "Today is a feeling of big catch". You may change the display to "It's easy to get a premiere notice." That is, there may be a case where the explanation of the effect related to the result of the hit / miss judgment, such as the suggestion of the appearance rate of the notice, and the result not related to the result of the hit / miss judgment is displayed. According to this, it may be possible to make the player think that he / she is indirectly involved in the influence of the hit / miss judgment. Even if the appearance rate of the notice has not been changed, the result of the mini game shown in FIG. 229 (k4) may be displayed. In this way, even when the same character appears, the display added to the character, such as a word of advice, may be changed.

Further, in this production example, a tutorial display such as a game explanation and an explanation of the character of the model may be displayed instead of the one-word advice.

FIG. 230 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 230 (A1) to 230 (A6) are effects following FIG. 229 (f), and show an example of another mini-game effect. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (f), it is OK.
When the button 137e is operated, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 230 (A1) displays the title "Today's fortune-telling-draw Daikichi-" at the upper part of the display area, and the contents of "Daikichi" are displayed. A mini-game with the mission of selecting a treasure chest is started. It should be noted that FIGS. 230 (A1) to 230 (A4) are the same as those in FIGS. 229 (g) to (j) except that the titles are displayed differently, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 230 (A5) shows how the treasure chest BX2 at the lower left is opened. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 230 (A5), the treasure chest at the lower left is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure chest and as a result of fortune-telling. "Daikichi" is displayed. Since the mission of the mini game was completed by displaying "Daikichi", "Mission achieved" is displayed to that effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 230 (A6), instead of the display of "mission achievement", a message "premonition of a great condition today" is displayed as a word of advice, and the player gets a ball. I try to give a sense of expectation. It can be said that this one-word advice is also a display that is not related to the result of the pass / fail judgment.

FIGS. 230 (B1) to 230 (B6) are also the effects following FIG. 229 (f), and show how the mission could not be achieved. Note that FIG. 230 (B1) has the same display as that of FIG. 230 (A1).

Then, when the right button 137d is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 230 (B2), the cursor CSL indicates the treasure box BX3 on the upper right as shown in FIG. 230 (B3).

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 230 (B3), as shown in FIG. 230 (B4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the treasure box BX3 on the upper right is surrounded by the cursor CSL. The treasure chest BX1 on the upper left, the treasure chest BX2 on the lower left, and the treasure chest BX4 on the lower right are reduced and displayed in the lower right portion. As a result, it is notified that the treasure chest BX3 on the upper right has been determined as the treasure chest to be opened.

After that, as shown in FIG. 230 (B5), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the treasure chest BX3 on the upper right is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the auntie character BA appears from the treasure chest and the result of fortune-telling. "Kokichi" is displayed as. Since the mission of the mini-game was not completed because "Daikichi" was not displayed, "Not achieved ..." is displayed to that effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 230 (B6), instead of the display of "not achieved ...", a message of "moderately ..." is displayed as a word of advice, and the game is played. It is shown to call attention not to be too enthusiastic.

FIG. 231 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 231 (a), the above-mentioned customer waiting demo display is displayed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (b), the menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 231 (c). On the menu screen shown in FIG. 231 (c), each item of member registration, customization, mini game, personal data clear, and end is displayed side by side in a column, and below that, "selection" is performed together with the direction key operation promotion image 137p. The character display of "OK" is performed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q and the button image 136a, and the cursor is operated by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137. It is shown that the item instructed by the cursor CSL is executed by moving the CSL and operating the OK button 137e or the effect button 137.

Here, when the "customize" item is executed, various settings can be customized. Details of the customizable settings will be described later.

Further, when the item of "clear personal data" is executed, the pachinko machine 100 deletes the result of this game, the mission achievement status, the information indicating the cumulative value of the original mode points, and the like. At this time, in order to prevent the data from being cleared by mistake, the warning screen may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 231 (c), when the lower button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "member registration", the cursor CSL is shown in FIG. 231 (d). Instructs "customization". Then, when the OK button 137e is operated while the cursor CSL is instructing "customize", the screen shifts to the customize menu screen as shown in FIG. 231 (e).

On the customize menu screen, various settings such as auto button mode on / off, eco mode on / off, premier notice appearance rate setting, and tutorial display on / off are displayed in columns, and below that, the direction. The character display of "selection" is performed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and the character display of "decision" is performed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q. By operating the cursor CSL in the vertical direction and operating the left button 137c and the right button 137b, the setting instructed by the cursor CSL can be changed.

Here, the "auto button mode" is an effect mode in which each button of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set to on, the auto button mode flag is turned on, the timing of the button operation is automatically determined, and the operation is performed. For example, when the continuous striking operation effect requesting the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is executed, the button operation is controlled to be automatically performed at appropriate timings (for example, every 200 ms). In this production example, when the "auto button mode" is set to on, the buttons are set to full auto, which is automatically operated without operating the various buttons. It may be possible to set to long-press auto in which the button is automatically operated by long-pressing. Here, the long-press auto means that in an effect (including a mini game) that requires the operation of a plurality of operation means, when the long-press operation is performed by the operation means, the operation is continuously performed a plurality of times. It is a pseudo operation that is supposed to be done. In this case, when the operating means is operated for long pressing, it is treated as if the first manual operation has been performed. For example, when the above-mentioned continuous striking operation effect is executed, by pressing and holding the effect button 136, it is controlled to perform a pseudo continuous striking operation. Further, the fully automatic is an operation in which the operation means is operated in a certain effect that requires the operation of the operation means even when the operation means is not operated.

Further, the "eco mode" limits the driving of one or more driving devices, for example, turning off various lamps 418 for the purpose of suppressing power consumption when the standby state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). Alternatively, it is a mode to stop. In the present embodiment, when the eco-mode start condition is satisfied after the eco-mode is turned on, the various lamps 418 are turned off, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced, and the like. The device to be driven is restricted or stopped, and can be appropriately set.

In addition, the "premier notice appearance rate" indicates the appearance rate of the notice that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed by appearing, and when it is set to "normal", it is the first. A lottery for the appearance of the premier notice is performed using the normal probability table where the premier notice appears with a probability, and when it is set to "high", the premier notice appears with a second probability higher than the first probability. The high-probability table is used to control the lottery for the appearance of the premier notice.

Further, when "Tutorial" is set to off, the above-mentioned tutorial display is controlled so as not to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 231 (f), when the left button 137c is operated once while the cursor CSL indicates the “auto button mode”, it is “off” as shown in FIG. 231 (g). The setting of "auto button mode" that was instructing is changed to "on".

Then, as shown in FIG. 231 (g), when the OK button 137e is operated once while the "auto button mode" setting is "on", the "auto button mode" setting is "on". Is confirmed to. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once, the screen shifts to the menu screen as shown in FIG. 231 (h). If the OK button 137e is not operated and the effect button 136 is operated while the "auto button mode" setting is "on", the result of the "auto button mode" setting is not reflected. The screen may be shifted to the menu screen, or the screen may be transitioned to the menu screen after reflecting (confirming) the result of the "auto button mode" setting.

Then, as shown in FIG. 231 (h), when the lower button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "customize", the cursor CSL becomes "" as shown in FIG. 231 (i). Instruct "mini game".

Then, as shown in FIG. 231 (i), when the OK button 137e is operated while the cursor CSL is instructing the "mini game", the mini game is started as shown in FIG. 231 (j). To. Specifically, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the character of the bancho is displayed, and the name of the mini game "bancho awakening game" is displayed. Below that, the mission "break clothes by repeatedly hitting a button" is displayed. Is displayed. That is, in this mini-game, when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the mission is achieved on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, the clothes of the bancho are broken. Display to notify the achievement of the mission.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT together with the character of the chief, and the characters "START" are displayed above the button image 136a. , It is shown that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. In this production example, as described above, the "auto button mode" setting is set to "on" and set to full auto, but in the mini game, the full auto setting is not effective and the production button. It is configured so that 136 automatic operations are not performed. In addition, when the setting of "auto button mode" is set to "on" and is set to long press auto, even if the effect button 136 is long pressed, the long press auto setting is not effective and the first Only the amount of one manual operation is valid, and the effect button 136 is not automatically operated after that. In this production example, the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT is made different from the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display. Also, for example, as in this production example, it is performed during execution of the symbol variation display rather than the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demo display. The change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster or slower. In addition, the speed of change in the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demo display, and the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display. The rate of change of the display mode of the above may be the same. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display is more than the number of display modes of the button image 136a (for example, one type of the default display mode). The number of (for example, four types of default display mode, vibrating display mode, rotating display mode, vibrating and rotating display mode) may be larger or smaller. , The number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demo display, and the number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display. May be the same.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 231 (l) to 231 (n), when the operation valid period elapses without pressing the effect button 136 even once, as shown in FIG. 231 (o), the character of the chief character The display mode does not change, indicating that the mission to break the clothes of the Bancho character has not been accomplished. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 231 (o), the "bancho awakening game" and "end" are displayed, and it is notified that the mission has been completed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to the menu screen.

In this production example, the player may be able to select the execution of the mini-game. For example, it is set whether or not the mini-game can be executed on the customized menu screen that is transferred from the menu screen. It may be possible to select the type of mini-game that can be executed.

In addition, it may be configured so that a customized effect can be easily executed as a result of the mini game. For example, if the effect is such that an effect having an extremely low appearance rate is normally executed, the willingness to participate in the mini game May be improved.

232 and 233 are diagrams stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 232 (A1) to 232 (A6) are effects following FIG. 231 (i), and show that the mission has been achieved as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. Since FIGS. 232 (A1) to 232 (A2) are the same as those in FIGS. 231 (j) to 231 (k), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 232 (A2), the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit by the player.

Then, as shown in FIG. 232 (A3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect images of the number of stars corresponding to the number of operations of the effect button 136. As shown in FIGS. 232 (A3) to 232 (A5), the number of star effect images displayed increases as the number of operations increases, and when the number of operations to achieve the mission is approached. , As shown in FIG. 232 (A5), an effect image of a large star is displayed. After that, when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed and the number of operations for which the mission is achieved is reached by the time the operation acceptance period elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 232 (A6) is worn by the character of the chief. It is shown that the clothes are torn, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in great shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

FIGS. 232 (B1) to 232 (B6) are effects following FIG. 231 (i), and show an example in which long-press auto is enabled in a mini-game. It is shown that the mission was achieved as a result of the pseudo repeated hitting operation. Note that FIGS. 232 (B1) to (B2) are the same as those in FIGS. 231 (j) to (k), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 232 (B2), the player presses and holds the effect button 136.

Then, as shown in FIG. 232 (B3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one star effect image is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 136. However, the pseudo continuous striking operation has not yet started. In the present embodiment, when long-press auto is enabled, a single pressing operation is desired, but in order to prevent an erroneous operation due to the start of pseudo repeated hits, long-pressing the effect button 136 Is configured so that a pseudo continuous striking operation is started when a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) has elapsed from the start of. In this case, one operation at the time when the long press is started is accepted. Therefore, the number of operations of the effect button 136 is smaller than that of the operation state of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 232 (A3), and the effect image of the star is also shown in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 232 (A3). It is less than the display. That is, the way in which the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed may differ depending on whether the player performs a normal continuous striking operation or a pseudo continuous striking operation by long-press auto. ..

When a predetermined time elapses after the long press of the effect button 136 is started and the pseudo continuous striking operation is started, as shown in FIGS. 232 (B4) to (B5), the operation by the pseudo operation is performed. As the number of times increases, the number of star effect images displayed also increases, and as the number of operations to achieve the mission approaches, a large-sized star effect image is displayed as shown in FIG. 232 (B5). After that, a pseudo repeated hitting operation is further performed by the effect button 136, and when the number of operations for which the mission is achieved is reached by the time the operation acceptance period elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is shown that the clothes worn by the character are torn, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in great shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

FIGS. 233 (C1) to 233 (C7) are effects following FIG. 231 (i), and show an example in which long-press auto is disabled in a mini-game. It is shown that no operation was performed, and as a result, the mission was not completed. Note that FIGS. 232 (B1) to (B2) are the same as those in FIGS. 231 (j) to (k), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 233 (C2), the player presses and holds the effect button 136.

Then, as shown in FIG. 233 (C3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one star effect image is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 136.

However, in this effect example, since the long press auto is disabled, the pseudo continuous striking operation is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after the long press of the effect button 136 is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 233 (C4), since the number of operations of the effect button 136 does not increase, not only the effect image of the star does not increase, but also a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after the last operation of the effect button 136. ) Elapses, the number of displayed star effect images gradually decreases, and at the timing shown in FIG. 233 (C5), the star effect images are completely erased. After that, as shown in FIG. 233 (C6), when the operation acceptance period elapses, as shown in FIG. 233 (C7), the display mode of the Bancho character does not change, and the mission of breaking the clothes of the Bancho character is made. It is shown that it was not achieved. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 233 (C7), the "bancho awakening game" and "end" are displayed, and it is notified that the mission has been completed.

FIG. 234 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In FIG. 234, the full auto (or long press auto) function is effective for the effect (including the mini game) that requires one operation or multiple operations of one button, but the operation key unit 137. As for the effects (including mini-games) that require selection using, an example is shown in which the full-auto (or long-press auto) function is disabled.

FIGS. 234 (A1) to 234 (A6) show an example in which full auto is enabled in a mini-game in which the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed, which is an effect following FIG. 231 (i). It is shown that the mission has been achieved as a result of the pseudo repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136. Since FIGS. 234 (A1) to 234 (A2) are the same as those in FIGS. 231 (j) to 231 (k), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 234 (A2), the full auto function is activated and the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 234 (A3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect images of the number of stars corresponding to the number of pseudo operations of the effect button 136. As shown in FIGS. 234 (A3) to 234 (A5), the number of star effect images displayed increases as the number of operations by pseudo operations increases, and when the number of operations to achieve the mission approaches. , As shown in FIG. 234 (A5), an effect image of a large star is displayed. After that, the pseudo operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed, and when the number of operations for which the mission is achieved is reached by the time when the operation acceptance period elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. , The clothes worn by the Bancho character are shown torn, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in great shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

FIG. 234 (B1) is a production following FIG. 229 (f), and shows an production example of another mini game. That is, when the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (B1) displays the title "Today's fortune-telling-draw Daikichi-" at the upper part of the display area, and the title of "Daikichi" is displayed. A mini-game with the mission of selecting the treasure chest inside is started. In this mini-game, each button of the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL, and the effect button 136 is operated to determine the treasure box to be opened. The mini-game is performed by operating a plurality of buttons. Is performed, so the fully automatic function is disabled. Therefore, after the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (B1) is displayed, no change occurs in the display state unless any button is operated.

On the other hand, the full auto may be made to function even in such a mini game. For example, as shown in FIG. 234 (B1'), the full auto function immediately after the mini game starts, and the effect button 136. Is operated in a pseudo manner, and as shown in FIG. 234 (B2'), the treasure chest on the upper left is automatically selected. That is, in a mini-game in which a treasure box is selected with each button of the operation key unit 137 and then a treasure box to be opened is determined with the effect button 136, when the full auto function is activated, the treasure box first instructed by the cursor CSL. Is arbitrarily decided as a treasure box to be opened, and the player's operation intention may not be reflected at all.

In the present embodiment, a mini-game for deriving a result that is not related to the result of the hit / fail judgment is performed in the standby state. However, for example, in an effect that is started at a predetermined time by RTC (Real Time Clock) (standby state). And at least one of the symbol variation displays), it may be executed in the mini-game to be executed, or it may be executed at any time regardless of the game state for the purpose of killing the player's time. ..

235 and 236 are diagrams stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 235 and 236, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the state of the effect movable body 224 is also shown. Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 235 and 236, a state in which the mini game is started during the execution of the jackpot game is shown. The mini-game may or may not be started during the execution of the jackpot game.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (a), the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", and the appearance of a big hit is shown. Further, the hold icon h21 of the first special figure 2 representing the hold of the special figure 2, the hold icon h22 of the second special figure 2, the hold icon h23 of the third special figure 2, and the fourth special figure 2 The hold icon h24 is displayed in the default display mode. In this production example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not performed, but these displays may be performed. ..

FIG. 235 (b) shows how the jackpot game is started and the game shifts to the first round. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "Big hit start" to notify that the big hit game has started, and at the upper right of the display area, it is the first round of the big hit game. "1R" is also displayed, and "0GET" is also displayed, which indicates the current number of prize balls won in this big hit. In addition, the total number of prize balls won from the first big hit to the end of the consecutive villa may be displayed. In addition, as for the number of winning balls, the number of winning balls to the variable winning opening 234 in one round becomes a predetermined number (for example, 10), and a prize is won (over winning) just before the variable winning opening 234 is closed. The number of prize balls based on the game balls may or may not be included. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (b), a child panda character may appear to perform a comical operation to entertain the player. When the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a right-handed machine, a right-handed notification for instructing right-handed may be performed.

FIG. 235 (c) shows how the fifth round of the jackpot game is being performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "5R" indicating the fifth round of the jackpot game and "735GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls are displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. ing. This number of winning prize balls is due to the fact that 49 game balls have won a prize in the variable winning opening 234 since the big hit started. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (c) displays that "the mini game will start in the next round", and the mini game will start in the next round (sixth round). I have foretold that.

FIG. 235 (d) shows how the sixth round has started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "6R" indicating the sixth round of the jackpot game and "750 GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls in the upper right corner of the display area. ing. This number of winning prize balls is due to the fact that 50 game balls have won a prize in the variable winning opening 234 since the big hit started. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (d) displays that "the mini game is about to start", and foretells that the mini game will start from now on.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (e) shows that the mini game has started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the bancho appears, and at the same time, a display indicating the roll of "1" on the dice and a display of "If a roll is obtained, the character moves up" are displayed, and the mini game is played. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the start and the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, it is foretold that the effect movable body 224 is likely to operate. Further, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "765 GET", and the display is performed based on the winning of 51 game balls to the variable winning opening 234. There is. If the effect movable body 224 operates during the execution of the jackpot game, it is guaranteed that a reserved consecutive villa will occur. That is, the operation of the effect movable body 224 during the big hit game can be said to be an example of the look-ahead notice.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 235 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the dice symbol, and the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed, and "press" is displayed above the button image 136a. Is displayed, and it is shown that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "780 GET", and the display is performed based on the winning of 52 game balls to the variable winning opening 234. There is.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 235 (g), as shown in FIG. 235 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the dice symbol is "3". The stop display is shown in the manner shown, indicating that the mission was not completed. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (g) is "810 GET", and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 235 (h). The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of 208 indicates "825 GET".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (i), the display indicating the outcome of “3” derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and displayed, and the mission of the mini game is not achieved. "Sorry" is displayed to notify. Therefore, in this effect example, the effect movable body 224 does not operate, and the notification of whether or not the hold consecutive villa is performed is not performed. In this production example, if the result of pre-reading is a reserved consecutive villa, the mission may be achieved and the production movable body 224 may be operated in the mini-game, or the mission is not achieved and the production is performed. The movable body 224 may not operate. Further, when the mission is achieved, the effect movable body 224 may or may not operate without fail. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (i) is "840 GET", and 56 game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234. The display is based on.

After that, when the big hit game is completed, as shown in FIG. 235 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "big hit end" to notify the player that the big hit game is finished. Further, in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, "16R" indicating that it is the 16th round and "2400 GET" indicating that the number of winning prize balls is 2400 are displayed. There is.

In the mini-game of this production example, the production button 136 is operated once. For example, when the "bancho awakening game" shown in FIG. 231 is started and the mission is achieved, a privilege is given. (For example, the operation notice of the effect movable body 224 may be given).

Next, with reference to FIG. 236, a state in which a mission is achieved in the mini-game performed during the execution of the jackpot game will be described. It should be noted that FIGS. 236 (a) to 236 (d) are the same as those in FIGS. 235 (a) to 235 (d), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 236 (e) shows that the mini game has started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the bancho appears, and at the same time, a display indicating the roll of "1" on the dice and a display of "If a roll is obtained, the character moves up" are displayed, and the mini game is played. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the start and the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, it is foretold that the effect movable body 224 is likely to operate. Here, the character of the Bancho is displayed in a torn manner, suggesting that the mission is likely to be accomplished. Further, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "765 GET", and the display is performed based on the winning of 51 game balls to the variable winning opening 234. There is.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 236 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts variable display of the dice symbol, and the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed, and "press" is displayed above the button image 136a. Is displayed, and it is shown that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. In this effect example, the button image 136a is displayed in a rotating and vibrating manner, and the effect button 136 also vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates and vibrates, for example. This suggests that the mission is likely to be accomplished. Further, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "780 GET", and the display is performed based on the winning of 52 game balls to the variable winning opening 234. There is.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 236 (g), as shown in FIG. 236 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the dice symbol is "1". The stop display is shown in the manner shown, indicating that the mission has been completed. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 236 (g) is "810 GET", and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 236 (h). The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of 208 indicates "825 GET".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 236 (i), the display indicating the outcome of "1" derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and displayed, and the mission of the mini game is notified. "I did it" is displayed. In addition, "Attention to the arm" is displayed below the display, foretelling that the effect movable body 224 may operate. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 236 (i) is "840 GET", and 56 game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234. The display is based on.

FIG. 236 (j) shows how the seventh round has started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "7R" indicating the seventh round of the jackpot game and "900GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls in the upper right corner of the display area. After the big hit starts, the variable winning opening 234 is displayed based on the fact that 60 game balls have won a prize.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 236 (k), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 operates, and the forearm portion 224b overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect images of a large number of stars, and the display is performed as if the operation of the effect movable body 224 affects the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "915 GET", and the display is performed based on the winning of 61 game balls to the variable winning opening 234. There is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 236 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "holding consecutive villas confirmed", and notifies that the symbol variation display, which is a big hit, is suspended. That is, the pre-reading notice is given by the operation of the effect movable body 224 and the display of "holding consecutive villa confirmation" in FIG. 236 (l).

In addition, in this production example, it may be notified that the pending consecutive villa is confirmed by the achievement of the mission.

In the present embodiment, one or a plurality of the plurality of types of mini-games described above can be executed in combination.

In the embodiments described so far, the buttons (operating means) used in the mission in the main production and the buttons (operating means) used in the mission in the mini game may be different.

Further, the result of the main effect and the result of the mini game may be displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be displayed by using another display means (for example, a display device dedicated to the mission). , Other effect means (for example, movable means such as effect movable body 224 and shielding device 246, sound output means such as speaker 120, light emitting means such as various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542, etc. Other devices) may be used for notification.

Further, the above-mentioned mini-game may be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display from the start to the end, or may be executed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

Further, as in the mini-game described above, it is preferable that the result is always notified when the mini-game is started, but it may function as a false notice. For example, in the symbol fluctuation display in the state where the number of pending fluctuation display of the special figure is 4, the fluctuation time may generally be short, and in such a case, the result is pretended to be the start of the mini game. It may be interrupted without notifying. According to such a configuration, it may be possible to liven up the production of the game.

Further, the above-mentioned mini-game may be configured to be interrupted or canceled when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, a sudden jackpot (for example, a combination of jackpot decorative symbols is displayed without going through a reach effect). Mini-game when an error such as a door opening error or a magnetic detection error occurs, when an error such as a variable display pattern is generated, an RTC effect is started, the effect display being executed is switched to a display such as a wipe, May be interrupted. For example, if a jackpot suddenly occurs during the execution of a mini-game and the mini-game is interrupted, the jackpot suddenly becomes a jackpot while looking forward to the result of the mini-game, giving the player unexpectedness and joy. May be able to give. If the mini-game is interrupted when the RTC effect starts, it may be possible to enjoy the link on the effect with another game table by the RTC effect.

Further, the display area in which the mini game is executed may have a configuration in which the position and size change depending on the game state, the effect mode, and the stage.

Further, as the operation mode required in the above-mentioned mini game, an appropriate operation mode such as a single operation, a continuous hit operation, a long press operation, and a timing operation can be adopted. As a result, the result of the mini-game may be changed depending on the skill of the player and the willingness to participate in the game.

Further, when the mini-game is executed during the symbol variation display, the mini-game may be started before reaching the reach. When it comes to reach, there is a tendency to pay attention to the effect of the symbol variation display, so by starting the mini game before reach, it may be possible to enhance the effect of the effect before reach.

Further, the reward for accomplishing the mission in the above-mentioned mini-game is a notice that a notice will be given, but the reward for accomplishing the mission in the mini-game may be a notice or a look-ahead notice. For example, the change notice or the look-ahead notice may be given as a result of the mini-game played during the execution of the symbol change display, and the look-ahead notice may be given as a result of the mini-game played during the execution of the jackpot game.

In the above description,
"Operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first effect display.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display.
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display [for example, a button notice effect shown in FIGS. 208 (g) to 208 (i)].
The second effect display is a mini game effect display [for example, a button notice effect shown in FIGS. 207 (m) to 208 (f)].
The first effect display includes a first operation promotion display [for example, display of vibration and rotating button images 136a and “Push” shown in FIGS. 208 (g) to 208 (h)]. It is a production display,
The second effect display is an effect display including a second operation promotion display [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIGS. 207 (r) to 208 (b) and a “continuous hit” display, etc.].
The first operation promotion display is a display that prompts the operation of the operation means.
The second operation promotion display is a display that prompts the operation of the operation means.
The first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display are different operation promotion displays.
The first effect display is a jackpot notice (hereinafter, "the first notice [for example, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 208 (i) and the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 208 (i'). Notice by display, etc.] ”) is an effect display that may be executed.
The second production display is a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, a super hot notice appears by displaying "Daikichi" as shown in "Second notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 208 (f)". It is an effect display that may be derived.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, conventionally, a game table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature of a mini game.

Also, according to this game console, it may be possible to draw attention to the second notice, which affects the first notice.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to positively operate the operating means in order to reach the first notice.

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can operate it, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate it.

Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

Further, the plurality of types of effect displays may be only the first effect display and the second effect display, or may include effect displays other than the first effect display and the second effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be related only to the decorative symbol variation display, or may be related to other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the first effect display may be always related to the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the first effect display may include only the first operation promotion display, or may include a display other than the first operation promotion display. Further, the first effect display may always include the first operation promotion display, or may not include the first operation promotion display.

Further, the second effect display may include only the second operation promotion display, or may include a display other than the second operation promotion display. Further, the second effect display may always include the second operation promotion display, or may not include the second operation promotion display.

Further, the first effect display may be one in which only the first notice is executed, or may be executed in addition to the first notice. Further, the first effect display may be such that the first notice is always executed, or the first notice may not be executed.

In addition, the second effect display may be derived from only the notice related to the first notice, or may be derived from other than the notice related to the first notice. It may be one. In addition, the second effect display may be such that the notice related to the first notice is always derived, or the notice related to the first notice may not be derived.

Further, "a state in which both the first effect display and the second effect display are displayed (hereinafter, as shown in" the first state [for example, FIGS. 209 (c) to (o)). , The state where both the button notice effect and the mini game are displayed, etc.] ”.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make the player feel that the first notice and the second notice are related.

Here, it may be only in the first state, it may be in a state other than the first state, it may be in the first state without fail, or it may be in the first state. It may not be.

Further, "when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, the configuration is such that the second notice is executed. As shown in FIGS. 209 (g) to 209 (l), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed while both the button notice effect and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived, etc. ],
When the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice is executed in response to the second notice [for example, FIG. 209 (n). ), When the effect button 136 is operated after the result of the mini game is derived, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed according to the result of the mini game as shown in FIG. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to draw attention to the second notice, which affects the first notice. Therefore, it may be possible to positively operate the operation means for the mini game.

Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or the first notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the above state, a notice other than the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. Further, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail, or the first notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

Further, the configuration may be such that the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state, or the first state. The second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed even when the operation means is not operated in the above.

Further, if the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, only the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed, or the second notice may be executed. If the operation means is operated after the notice is started, a notice other than the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed. Further, if the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed without fail, or the second notice may be executed. If the operation means is operated after the notice is started, the first notice corresponding to the second notice may not be executed.

Further, the first notice according to the second notice may be executed only when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, or the second notice may be executed. Even in cases other than the case where the operation means is operated after the start of the operation, only the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed.

Further, "when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed.
After the second notice has been executed, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or the first notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the above state, only the first notice and the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or the first notice may be executed. If there is an operation of the operating means in the state of, the notice other than the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or in the first state. When there is an operation of the operating means, a notice other than the first notice and the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

Further, when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail, or the first notice may be executed. If the operating means is operated in the above state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

Further, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state, or the first notice may be executed. Even when the operation means is not operated in the state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

Also, after the second notice has been executed, only the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change, or after the second notice has been executed, Notices other than the first notice executed in response to the second notice may also change. Also, after the second notice has been executed, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may always change, and after the second notice has been executed, the second notice may change. The first notice executed in response to the notice may not change.

Also, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change only after the second notice has been executed, and even after the second notice has been executed. , The first notice executed in response to the second notice may change.

Further, "In the first state, the first effect display overlaps with the second effect display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the effect display on the mini-game side, which is the notice of the first notice, and to increase the expectation for the first notice.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to give priority to the mini-game side in chronological order.

Further, according to this game table, the notice that affects the notice that may occur in the future is displayed with priority, so that it may be easy to understand even if the operation means overlap.

Here, in the first state, the first effect display may overlap only with the second effect display, and in the first state, the first effect display is an effect other than the second effect display. It may also overlap the display. Further, in the first state, the first effect display may always overlap with the second effect display, and in the first state, the first effect display does not overlap with the second effect display. There may be cases.

Further, the first effect display may overlap with the second effect display only in the first state, and the first effect display may be the second effect display even in a state other than the first state. May overlap.

In addition, when the operation means is operated in the "second validity period [for example, the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game shown in FIGS. 211 (e) to 211 (g), etc.]" This is the configuration in which the second notice is started.
The second effect display is an effect display including a second validity period display [for example, a button reception time meter MT or the like shown in FIGS. 211 (e) to 211 (g) and the like].
The second validity period display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of the second validity period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 211 (e) to 211 (g), etc., the button reception The display mode of the time meter MT changes in a manner in which the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation reception time],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the second validity period, the player can be made to derive the result of the mini-game earlier, so that the first notice may be noticed. ..

Here, when the operating means is operated in the second valid period, only the second notice may be started, or when the operating means is operated in the second valid period, the operation means may be started. A notice other than the second notice may also be started. Further, the configuration may be such that the second notice is always started when the operating means is operated in the second valid period, or when the operating means is operated in the second valid period, the second notice is started. The second notice may not be started.

Further, the second notice may be started only when the operating means is operated in the second valid period, or when the operating means is not operated in the second valid period. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the second notice is started.

Further, the second effect display may include only the second validity period display, or may include a display other than the second validity period display. Further, the second effect display may always include the second validity period display, or may not include the second validity period display.

In addition, "The first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 209 (o)].
One of the plurality of embodiments is a second embodiment [for example, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 208 (i)].
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the first notice is executed in the second aspect than when the first notice is executed in the first aspect. It is configured and
When the second effect display is started, the first notice is more likely to be executed in the second aspect than when the second effect display is not started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to expect the first notice by starting the mini-game.

Here, the first notice may be feasible only in a plurality of modes, or may be feasible in a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, the first notice may be executed in a plurality of modes without fail, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

Further, the first notice may be feasible only in the first and second aspects, or may be feasible in aspects other than the first and second aspects. May be good. Further, the first notice may be always executed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be executed in the first aspect and the second aspect.

Further, when the first notice is executed in the first aspect, the jackpot symbol may be configured not to be confirmed and displayed in the end, or the first notice is executed in the second aspect. In that case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be fixedly displayed in the end.

Further, if the second effect display is not started, the first notice may not be executed in the second aspect, or if the second effect display is started, the second aspect may be executed. May be configured so that the first notice is always executed.

In addition, "The second notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of embodiments is a third embodiment [for example, display of "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 213 (l)].
One of the plurality of embodiments is a fourth embodiment [for example, display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 212 (l)].
When the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.
When the first notice is executed in the second aspect [for example, display of "mission achievement" shown in FIG. 212 (n)], the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect. Is configured to be
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the jackpot symbol will be finally confirmed and displayed by the second mode in the first notice, so that the expectation of the derivation result for the second notice is further improved. You may be able to.

Here, the second notice may be feasible only in a plurality of modes, or may be feasible in a mode other than the plurality of modes. In addition, the second notice may be executed in a plurality of modes without fail, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

Further, the second notice may be feasible only in the third and fourth aspects, or may be feasible in aspects other than the third and fourth aspects. May be good. In addition, the second notice may always be executed in the third and fourth aspects, or may not be executed in the third and fourth aspects.

In addition, "The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold icons for which the start of the symbol variation display is held can be displayed.
The first notice is a notice given by changing the display mode of the hold icon.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
A game table provided with a display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And
The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
It is configured to be able to run multiple types of mini games,
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is the first mini-game [for example, the dice game shown in FIGS. 221 (g) to 221 (l)].
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game [for example, a fortune-telling game shown in FIGS. 221 (g') to (l')].
The first mini-game is a mini-game displayed using a certain display area [for example, the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 221 (a)].
The second mini-game is a mini-game displayed using the certain display area.
The first mini-game and the second mini-game are different mini-games.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, conventionally, a game table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature of a mini game.

Further, according to this game table, since the display area of the mini game is fixed to "a certain display area", it may be easy for the player to understand.

Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always execute the decorative symbol variation display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the display means may be composed of one display means or may be composed of two or more display means. Further, in the case of those composed of two or more display means, the decorative symbol variation display may be performed only in a part of the display means, or the decorative symbol variation display may be performed in all the display means. It may be something that is said.

Further, it may be configured so that only a plurality of types of mini games can be executed, or games other than the plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of mini-games, or may be configured to not execute a plurality of types of mini-games.

Further, only the first mini-game and the second mini-game may be configured to be executable, or mini-games other than the first mini-game and the second mini-game may be configured to be executable. Further, the first mini-game and the second mini-game may be configured to always be executed, or the first mini-game and the second mini-game may not be executed. ..

Further, the first mini-game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than a certain display area. Further, the first mini-game may be displayed using a certain display area without fail, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

Further, the second mini-game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than a certain display area. Further, the second mini-game may be displayed using a certain display area without fail, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

Further, "a notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] is provided.
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice [for example, a look-ahead notice in the blue display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 221 (l) and (l')].
The first mini-game is referred to as a result suggesting that the first notice is to be performed (hereinafter, "first result [for example, display of" 1UP confirmation "shown in FIG. 221 (k)"]. ) Is a mini-game that can be derived,
The second mini-game is a mini-game capable of deriving the first result [for example, the display of "1UP confirmed" shown in FIG. 221 (k')].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make the relationship such as advance notice easy to understand while entertaining the variation of the mini game.

Here, the notice means may be one that can execute only a plurality of notices, or may be one that can execute other than a plurality of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of notices, or may not execute a plurality of notices.

Further, the notice means may be one that can execute only the first notice, or may be one that can execute the notice other than the first notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice, or may not execute the first notice.

Further, the first mini-game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. Further, the first mini-game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

Further, the second mini-game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. Further, the second mini-game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

Further, "one of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, a look-ahead notice in the red display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 222 (l) and (l')]. ,
It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily when the second notice is given than when the first notice is given.
The first mini-game is referred to as a result suggesting that the second notice is to be performed (hereinafter, "second result [for example, display of" 3UP confirmed "shown in FIG. 222 (k)"]. ) Is also a derivable mini-game,
The second mini-game is a mini-game from which the second result [for example, the display of "3UP confirmed" shown in FIG. 222 (k'), etc.] can also be derived.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation that the result suggesting that the mini game will give the second notice will be derived.

Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only the second notice, or may be capable of executing a notice other than the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the second notice, or may not execute the second notice.

Further, the first mini-game may be capable of deriving only the second result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the second result. Further, the first mini-game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

Further, the second mini-game may be capable of deriving only the second result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the second result. Further, the second mini-game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

Further, "The first mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, the image BCH of the face of the chief shown in FIG. 221 (g)] may be displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, the image BCH of the face of the chief shown in FIG. 221 (g')] may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the same notice may be given even if the type of mini-game is different, so that it may be possible to give various expectations to the player.

Here, in the first mini-game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. .. Further, in the first mini-game, the first character may always be displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

Further, in the second mini-game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. Further, in the second mini-game, the first character may always be displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

Further, "The first mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, the image BCH of the face of the chief shown in FIG. 221 (g)] may be displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, the image BCH of the face of the chief shown in FIG. 221 (g')] may be displayed.
The first mini-game is a mini-game in which a second character [for example, the Sabohani character SBH shown in FIG. 225 (A1)] may be displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which a third character [for example, the princess character HM2 shown in FIG. 225 (B1)] may be displayed.
The first character and the second character are different characters,
The first character and the third character are different characters,
The second character and the third character are different characters,
The first mini-game is a mini-game in which the second result is more likely to be derived when the second character is displayed than when the first character is displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the second result is more likely to be derived when the third character is displayed than when the first character is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to have expectations for a second result depending on the type of character that appears in each mini-game.

Here, in the first mini-game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. .. Further, in the first mini-game, the first character may always be displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

Further, in the second mini-game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. Further, in the second mini-game, the first character may always be displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

Further, in the first mini-game, only the second character may be displayed, or characters other than the second character may also be displayed. Further, in the first mini-game, the second character may always be displayed, or the second character may not be displayed.

Further, in the second mini-game, only the third character may be displayed, or characters other than the third character may also be displayed. Further, in the second mini-game, the third character may always be displayed, or the third character may not be displayed.

The third character and the fourth character may be the same character or different characters.

Further, in the first mini-game, when the first character is displayed, the second result may not be derived, and when the second character is displayed, the second result may not be derived. The result of may always be derived.

Further, in the second mini-game, when the first character is displayed, the second result may not be derived, and when the third character is displayed, the second result may not be derived. The result of may always be derived.

In addition, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is the first effect display [for example, the auntie mode shown in FIGS. 223 (A1) to (A6)].
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second effect display [for example, the princess mode shown in FIGS. 223 (B1) to (B6)].
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 223 (A1) to (A6), the aunt mode is a decoration. Displayed during execution of symbol variation display, etc.],
The second effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 223 (B1) to (B6), the princess mode is a decoration. It is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display, etc.],
The first effect display and the second effect display are different effect displays.
The first mini-game [for example, a dice game, etc.] is a mini-game that is easier to be executed while the first effect display is displayed than during the display of the second effect display.
The second mini-game [for example, a fortune-telling game] is a mini-game that is easier to be executed while the second effect display is displayed than when the first effect display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to associate the main production with the mini-game.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display and the second effect display, or may be capable of displaying an effect display other than the first effect display and the second effect display. It may be. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display and the second effect display, or may not display the first effect display and the second effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. There may be. Further, the first effect display may be displayed without fail during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the second effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. There may be. Further, the second effect display may be displayed without fail during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the first mini-game may not be executed while the second effect display is displayed, or may be always executed while the first effect display is displayed.

Further, the second mini-game may not be executed while the first effect display is displayed, or may be always executed while the second effect display is displayed.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to shift to multiple types of game states,
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), etc.].
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous.
The probability of executing the plurality of types of mini-games differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the execution probability of the mini-game differs depending on the game state, the expectation that the mini-game will be executed may be changed depending on the game state.

Here, it may be configured so that it can shift only to a plurality of types of gaming states, or it may be configured so that it can shift to a state other than a plurality of gaming states. In addition, it may be configured to always shift to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to a plurality of gaming states.

Further, it may be configured so that it can be shifted only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or it may be configured to be able to shift to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. .. Further, it may be configured so as to always shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

Further, in the first game state and the second game state, the probability that the first game state executes a plurality of types of mini games may be higher, and the second game state is higher. The probability of executing a plurality of types of mini-games may be high.

In addition, while the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is the first gaming state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (including latent probability variation, the same applies hereinafter), the special figure low probability normal figure low probability At least one of the state and the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state may be the second gaming state, while the special figure high probability state normal figure low probability state is the first gaming state. , Special figure high probability state The special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state, and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability normal The high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the normal figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, while the normal figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the normal figure, the special figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state.

Further, it may be configured not to execute a plurality of types of mini-games in the first gaming state, or may be configured not to execute a plurality of types of mini-games in the second gaming state.

Further, "The probability of executing the plurality of types of advance notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
May be.

In addition, "the probability of executing the first mini-game differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
May be.

In addition, "the probability of executing the second mini-game differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
May be.

In addition, "the probability of executing the second notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
May be.

In addition, "the probability of executing the second notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
May be.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to shift to multiple types of game states,
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), etc.].
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous.
The first mini-game [for example, a dice game or the like] is a mini-game that is easier to be executed in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state [for example, FIG. 226. (A1) -As shown in the figure (A6), the dice game is more likely to be executed in the normal gaming state than in the probabilistic state],
The second mini-game [for example, a fortune-telling game or the like] is a mini-game that is easier to be executed in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state [for example, FIG. 226. (B1) -As shown in the figure (B6), the fortune-telling game is more likely to be executed in the probabilistic state than in the normal game state],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to associate the game state with the type of mini-game.

Here, it may be configured so that it can shift only to a plurality of types of gaming states, or it may be configured so that it can shift to a state other than a plurality of gaming states. In addition, it may be configured to always shift to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to a plurality of gaming states.

Further, it may be configured so that it can be shifted only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or it may be configured to be able to shift to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. .. Further, it may be configured so as to always shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

In addition, while the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is the first gaming state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and the special figure high probability normal figure high At least one of the probability states may be the second gaming state, and the special figure high probability state normal figure low probability state is the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability state normal figure high. The probability state may be the second gaming state, and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is the second game. It may be in a state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the normal figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, while the normal figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the normal figure, the special figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state.

Further, the first mini-game may not be executed in the second gaming state, or may be executed without fail in the first gaming state. Good.

Further, the second mini-game may not be executed in the first gaming state, or may be executed without fail in the first gaming state. Good.

"The first game state [for example, the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state)] and the second game state [for example, the probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), etc. ], And the probabilities of executing the multiple types of mini-games are different.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the execution probability of the mini-game differs depending on the game state, the expectation that the mini-game will be executed may be changed depending on the game state.

Here, in the first game state and the second game state, the probability that the first game state executes a plurality of types of mini-games may be higher, or the probability of the second game state is higher. May have a high probability of playing multiple types of mini-games.

In addition, "the first gaming state is a non-electric support state [for example, a low probability state in a normal figure].
The second gaming state is an electric support state [for example, a high probability state in a normal figure].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the non-electric support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

Further, the electric support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

Further, when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in the "display area [for example, the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 221 (a)], a non-mini game effect is produced in the display area. Display [For example, the tutorial display "The mini game will start at various timings" shown in Fig. 221 (c), the tutorial display "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" shown in Fig. 221 (f), etc.] is displayed. May be done,
The non-mini-game effect display is an effect display different from the plurality of types of mini-games.
When any one of the plurality of types of mini-games is started to be displayed in the certain display area, the non-mini-game effect display being displayed is deleted [for example, in FIGS. 221 (f) to 221 (g)). As shown, if the mini-game is started while "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" is displayed, the display of "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" will be deleted, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to perform a non-mini-game effect display using a certain display area from the normal time, so that it may be easy for the player to pay attention to it.

Here, the non-mini-game effect display may be displayed only in a certain display area when none of the plurality of types of mini-games is displayed in a certain display area, or a plurality of types of mini-games may be displayed in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display may be displayed in an area other than the display area where none of the mini-games is displayed. Further, when none of the plurality of types of mini-games is displayed in a certain display area, the non-mini-game effect display may always be displayed in the certain display area, or any of the plurality of types of mini-games in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display may not be displayed in a display area when it is not displayed.

In addition, a non-mini-game effect display may be displayed in a certain display area only when none of the plurality of types of mini-games is displayed in a certain display area, or a plurality of types of mini-games may be displayed in a certain display area. A non-mini-game effect display may be displayed in a display area other than the case where none of the games is displayed.

Further, when any one of the plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, only the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be deleted, or any of the plurality of types of mini games may be deleted in a certain display area. When one of them is started to be displayed, the display other than the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be deleted. Further, when any one of the plurality of types of mini-games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, the non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be deleted without fail, or any of the plurality of types of mini-games in a certain display area. When one of them is started to be displayed, the non-mini game effect display being displayed may not be deleted.

Further, the non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be deleted only when any one of the plurality of types of mini-games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, or any of the plurality of types of mini-games in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be deleted even when one of them is not displayed.

In addition, as the display applicable to the non-mini game production display, an appropriate display such as a tutorial display, an original mode parameter display (LV display, etc.), and a display of the remaining time until the start of RTC is adopted. It is possible.

Further, "the above-mentioned display area is represented by a frame [for example, an outer frame of the mini-game display area MN1 shown in FIG. It is a partitioned area,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain display area may be partitioned only by a frame, or may be partitioned by something other than the frame.

Further, "The certain display area is an area formed at a predetermined position [for example, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), the multifunctional display area MF1 is a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is formed in the right half of the lower end, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain display area may be formed only at a predetermined position, or may be formed at a position other than the predetermined position.

Further, "The certain display area is an area that expands in relation to the start of the first mini-game. [For example, as shown in FIG. 227 (A2), the multifunctional display area MF1 is the start of the dice game. Expanded display related to],
The display area is an area that expands in connection with the start of the second mini-game.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, a player may be able to pay attention to a mini game by expanding and displaying a certain display area.

Here, a display area may be expanded only in relation to the start of the first mini-game, or may be expanded in relation to other than the start of the first mini-game. Good. Further, a certain display area may be always expanded in connection with the start of the first mini-game, or may not be expanded in connection with the start of the first mini-game.

Further, a certain display area may be expanded only in relation to the start of the second mini-game, or may be expanded in relation to other than the start of the second mini-game. .. Further, a certain display area may be always expanded in connection with the start of the second mini-game, or may not be expanded in connection with the start of the second mini-game.

Also, some display areas may be extended only in connection with the start of the first mini-game and may be configured not to be extended in connection with the start of the second mini-game. It may extend only in connection with the start of the mini-game and may be configured not to extend in connection with the start of the first mini-game.

Further, "The certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the display means [For example, the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 221 (a) is on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Formed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the mini-game is executed in the display means on which the decorative symbol variation display is executed, it may be possible to draw more attention to the mini-game.

Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the display means.

Further, "a display means different from the display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like]" (hereinafter, referred to as "second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the like]"). Prepare,
The certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the second display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the second display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the second display means.

In addition, in the above description,
"A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
Display means capable of displaying the display of the mini game [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice [for example, the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 211 (i')].
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 211 (i)].
It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily when the second notice is given than when the first notice is given.
The mini-game is a game in which a plurality of results can be derived.
One of the plurality of results is the first result [for example, the display of "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 211 (h')].
One of the plurality of results is the second result [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 211 (h)].
The second notice is more likely to be given when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the notice means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the notice means.

Further, conventionally, a game table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature of a mini game.

Further, according to this game table, a player may participate (attention) in a mini game in order to derive a second result.

Here, the notice means may be one that can execute only a plurality of notices, or may be one that can execute other than a plurality of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of notices, or may not execute a plurality of notices.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only the display of the mini game, or may be one that can display a display other than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice and the second notice. .. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

Further, when the first notice is given, the jackpot symbol may be configured so as not to be finally confirmed, and when the second notice is given, the jackpot symbol is always finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured to be.

Further, "At least it is suggested that the second notice is likely to be given because the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. [For example, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), when the mini-game is started, the mini-game display area MN1 is displayed as "a strong cut-in occurs in Daikichi"]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to draw attention to the trend of mini-games toward the generation of favorable notices.

In addition, by incorporating the so-called mission production into the mini-game, it may be possible to increase the number of scenes in which the player can obtain a sense of accomplishment.

Here, it is configured so that at least it is suggested that only the second notice is likely to be given because the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. It may be good, or at least it is suggested that the mini-game derivation result becomes the second result before the mini-game result is derived, so that the notice other than the second notice is likely to be given. It may be configured. Further, it may be configured so that at least it is suggested that the second notice is always given by the derivation result of the mini game being the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. However, before the result of the mini-game is derived, the result of the derivation of the mini-game becomes the second result, which may at least suggest that the second notice is not given. You may.

Further, it may be configured to notify in advance that the second notice is likely to be given because the derived result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. ..

The mode of suggestion is, for example, "if you succeed in ...", "put out ...", "if ... stops ...", etc., at least suggesting the effect of mission achievement. If so, any aspect can be applied.

In addition, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is the first effect display [for example, the effect of the mission shown in FIGS. 212 (c) to 212 (n)].
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the mission effect shown in FIGS. 212 (c) to 212 (n) is a decorative symbol. It is done during the variable display of],
The first effect display is an effect display capable of deriving a plurality of effect results.
One of the plurality of effect results is the first effect result [for example, the display of "mission failure" shown in FIG. 213 (n)].
One of the plurality of effect results is a second effect result [for example, display of "mission achievement" shown in FIG. 212 (n)].
Before the effect result of the first effect display is derived, it is configured so as to at least suggest that the effect result of the first effect display becomes the second effect result and is likely to be a big hit. [For example, as shown in Fig. 212 (c), when the production of the mission is started, the contents of the mission such as "put out a cut-in" and "if you get out, a big hit" are displayed],
The second effect result [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 211 (h)] is derived in the first effect display than when the second result [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 211 (h)] is derived in the mini game. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when the display of "mission achievement" shown in FIG. 212 (n) is derived.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the number of scenes in which the player can obtain a sense of accomplishment by incorporating so-called mission effects in addition to the mini-game.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation of the mission production by providing a difference in the result of the mission.

In addition, according to this game table, it may be possible to clarify the difference between the mission of the main production and the mission of the mini game.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of effect displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying an effect display other than the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display, or may not display the first effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. There may be. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the first effect display may be capable of deriving only a plurality of effect results, or may be capable of deriving results other than the plurality of effect results. Further, the first effect display may always derive a plurality of effect results, or may not derive a plurality of effect results.

Further, the first effect display may be capable of deriving only the first effect result and the second effect result, and may also derive the effect results other than the first effect result and the second effect result. It may be possible. Further, the first effect display may always derive the first effect result and the second effect result, or may not derive the first effect result and the second effect result. May be good.

In addition, before the effect result of the first effect display is derived, it is configured to notify in advance that the effect result of the first effect display becomes the second effect result and is likely to be a big hit. You may.

Further, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed in a definite manner, or when the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. Further, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed in a definite manner, or the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. If this is the case, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

In addition, "when the second effect result is derived, the jackpot symbol is finally fixedly displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to clarify the division of mission production.

Here, the jackpot symbol may be finally fixedly displayed only when the second effect result is derived, or in cases other than the case where the second effect result is derived. , It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, "a state in which both the mini-game and the first effect display are displayed (hereinafter," first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 212 (g) to 212 (l)), the mission The state where both the production and the mini game are displayed, etc.] ”.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make the player feel that the result of the mini-game is related to the result of the first effect display.

Here, it may be only in the first state, it may be in a state other than the first state, it may be in the first state without fail, or it may be in the first state. It may not be.

In addition, "The mini-game is started earlier than the first effect display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the mini-game and the first effect display are related to each other.

In addition, "an operation means [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position that can be operated by the player] is provided.
When the operating means is operated in the mini-game, the result of the mini-game is derived [for example, FIGS. 212 (g) to 212 (l) and 213 (g)). -As shown in the figure (l), "Daikichi" and "Kokichi" are derived when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed in the mini game],
If the operating means is not operated in the mini-game, the result of the mini-game is not derived.
If the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first notice [for example, FIG. 213 (m)) is more than the second notice [for example, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 212 (m)]. Weak cut-in image CI1b, etc. shown in] is easier to perform,
When the result of the mini-game is derived, the second notice is more likely to be given than the first notice.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the result of the mini-game may affect the notice, it may be possible to have the player actively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini-game. ..

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can operate it, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate it.

Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the result of the mini game may be derived only when the operation means is operated in the mini game, or the mini game may be configured except when the operation means is operated in the mini game. It may be configured so that the result of is derived. Further, the result of the mini game may be derived so that the result of the mini game is always derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game. It may not be done.

Further, the result of the mini game may not be derived only when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, or the mini game may be configured except when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. It may be configured so that the result of the game is not derived. Further, it may be configured so that the result of the mini game is not always derived when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is obtained when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. It may be configured to be derived.

Further, the first notice may be configured to be easier to be performed than the second notice only when the result of the mini game is not derived, or when the result of the mini game is not derived. In other cases, the first notice may be configured to be easier to perform than the second notice. Further, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice may be configured to be easier to be performed than the second notice, and the result of the mini game may not be derived. In some cases, the first notice may be less likely to be given than the second notice.

In addition, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the second notice may not be given, and if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is always given. It may be configured to be.

Further, the second notice may be configured to be easier to be performed than the first notice only when the result of the mini game is derived, and the result of the mini game may not be derived. In some cases, the second notice may be configured to be easier to perform than the first notice. Further, when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice may be configured so as to be easier to be performed than the first notice, or when the result of the mini game is derived, the result of the mini game may be derived. It may be configured so that the second notice is less likely to be given than the first notice.

Further, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first notice may not be given, and when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is always given. It may be configured in.

In addition, "even if the second notice is scheduled to be given (hereinafter referred to as" the first case "), if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is given. [For example, if it is determined that "Daikichi" can be derived as a result of the mini game, but the result of the mini game is not derived, a strong cut is performed as shown in FIG. 214 (m). Weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed instead of in-image CI1a],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the result of the mini-game may affect the notice, it may be possible to have the player actively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini-game. ..

In addition, according to this game console, the advance notice does not affect the success / failure judgment, so even if a notice different from the schedule occurs, the result of the success / failure judgment will not be affected, and the scheduled notice will be forcibly scheduled. No need to do. Therefore, it may be possible to participate in a mini-game in order to make a better notice appear.

Here, even in the first case, the first notice may be given only when the result of the mini-game is not derived, and even in the first case, the mini-game may be used. It may be configured so that the first notice is given even in cases other than the case where the result of the game is not derived. Further, even in the first case, the first notice may be given whenever the result of the mini game is not derived, and even in the first case, the mini game may be given. If the result of is not derived, the first notice may not be given.

Further, "a hold icon display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons is provided.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a blue display mode].
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a green display mode].
The first notice is a notice given by displaying the first hold icon [for example, a look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in a blue display mode].
The second notice is a notice given by displaying the second hold icon [for example, a look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in a green display mode].
The mini-game may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed.
In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon.
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to expect a change in the display mode of the hold icon while enjoying the mini game. For example, the display mode of the hold icon has changed, although it was monotonous only in the conventional effect in which the button hold icon is displayed and the display mode is changed by the operation of the operation means. Later, it may change further, so it may be possible to further increase the expectation in the change display of the hold icon.

Here, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the hold icon display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, and can also display hold icons other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It may be an icon. Further, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. Good.

Further, the first notice may be given only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the first hold icon. You may. Further, the first notice may be given by displaying the first hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the first hold icon. ..

Further, the second notice may be given only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the second hold icon. You may. Further, the second notice may be given by displaying the second hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the second hold icon. ..

Further, the mini-game may be configured so that it may be started only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In this state, it may be configured so that it may be started other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Further, the mini-game may be configured to be always started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state, it may be configured so that it may not be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display.

Further, the mini-game may be configured so that it may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured so that it may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display even in a state other than the state in which it is set.

Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured so as not to change only to the second hold icon, and in the first case, If the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured so that it does not change to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured so as not to change to the second hold icon, and in the first case, If the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured to change to a second hold icon.

Further, in the first case, the first hold icon may be configured so as not to change to the second hold icon only when the result of the mini game is not derived, and in the first case, It may be configured so that the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon except when the result of the mini game is not derived. Further, only in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured so as not to change to the second hold icon, or other than the first case. Even in this case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured so as not to change to the second hold icon.

Further, in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change only to the second hold icon, or the first case. In the mini-game, when the second result is derived, the first hold icon may be configured to change to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Further, in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to always change to the second hold icon, or the first case. In the mini-game, when the second result is derived, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon.

Further, in the first case, the first hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon only when the second result is derived in the mini game, or in the first case. In the mini-game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon even in cases other than the case where the second result is derived. Further, only in the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon, or in the first case. In other cases, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon when the second result is derived in the mini game.

Further, "a hold icon display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons is provided.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a blue display mode].
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a green display mode].
The first notice is a notice given by displaying the first hold icon [for example, a look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in a blue display mode].
The second notice is a notice given by displaying the second hold icon [for example, a look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in a green display mode].
The mini-game may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed.
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini-game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during the execution of the certain symbol variation display.
In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol The first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol change display that starts after the change display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon may be changed depending on the participation status of the mini game.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to maintain the relationship between the notice and the reliability even if the player does not finally participate in the mini game.

Here, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the hold icon display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, and can also display hold icons other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It may be an icon. Further, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. Good.

Further, the first notice may be given only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the first hold icon. You may. Further, the first notice may be given by displaying the first hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the first hold icon. ..

Further, the second notice may be given only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the second hold icon. You may. Further, the second notice may be given by displaying the second hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the second hold icon. ..

Further, the mini-game may be configured so that it may be started only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In this state, it may be configured so that it may be started other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Further, the mini-game may be configured to be always started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state, it may be configured so that it may not be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display.

Further, the mini-game may be configured so that it may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured so that it may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display even in a state other than the state in which it is set.

Further, in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is configured to change only to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Alternatively, in the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to a hold icon other than the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to do so. Further, in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is always changed to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Alternatively, in the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini-game, the first hold icon may not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured in.

Also, in the first case, the first hold icon is configured to change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the second result is derived in the mini game. Alternatively, in the first case, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, even when the second result is not derived in the mini game. It may be configured as follows. Also, only in the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is configured to change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Also, in cases other than the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, which is higher than that of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change only from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. If, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first hold is performed during the execution of the symbol variation display that starts after the certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from an icon to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, which is higher than that of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to always change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. If, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first hold is performed during the execution of the symbol variation display that starts after the certain symbol variation display. It may be configured so that the icon may not change to a second hold icon.

Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, which is higher than that of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon only during the execution of the symbol variation display that is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. If this is the case, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first other than the execution of the symbol variation display started after the certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the hold icon of to a second hold icon. Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, which is higher than that of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to always change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that is started later.

Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon only during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and the first hold icon does not change from a certain symbol change display. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that will be started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. If this is the case, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first is during the execution of the symbol variation display that is started after the certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the hold icon of to a second hold icon. Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not always change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and the first hold icon does not always change to the second hold icon. May also be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that will be started later.

Also, in the first case, only when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and from a certain symbol variation display. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that will be started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. Even in cases other than the above, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the symbol variation display started after the certain symbol variation display is being executed. It may be configured to change from a first hold icon to a second hold icon. Also, only in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and the first hold icon does not change from a certain symbol change display. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that will be started later, and even in cases other than the first case, the result of the mini game. If is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and during the execution of the symbol variation display that starts after the certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from a first hold icon to a second hold icon.

In addition, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate."
The derivation result of the mini-game may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means [For example, as shown in FIGS. 212 (i) to 212 (l), the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed to increase the number of operations. When the condition is satisfied, "Daikichi" is derived, but as shown in FIGS. 214 (i) to 214 (l), when the number of operations of the effect button 136 does not satisfy the condition, "Daikichi" is derived. "Kokichi" is derived, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain the operation of the operating means.

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can operate it, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate it.

Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, only the derivation result of the mini game may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means, or other than the derivation result of the mini game may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means. .. Further, the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation status of the operation means, or the derivation result of the mini game may not be different depending on the operation status of the operation means.

In addition, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate."
In the mini-game, the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not [for example, FIGS. 213 (i) to 213 (l) show. As described above, when it is determined in advance that "Nakayoshi" is derived, "Kokichi" is derived even if the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed or not.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can operate it, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate it.

Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, in the mini game, only the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not, or when the operating means is operated in the mini game. In some cases, results other than the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is not operated. In the mini game, the same result may always be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not, or in the mini game, the operating means is operated and the operating means is operated. In some cases, the same result may not be derived as in the case where it did not exist.

Further, only in the mini game, the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not, and the operating means is operated in other than the mini game. The same result may be derived depending on whether the operation means is not operated or not.

Further, "The display means includes a first display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] and a second display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] ] And is a means composed of
The first display means and the second display means are different display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means and the second display means, or may include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. It may be composed of. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured not to include the first display means and the second display means. It may be a thing.

In addition, in the above description,
"Operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate]
Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
The display means displays a display of a mini game [for example, a mini game shown in FIGS. 229 (g) to (m), a mini game shown in FIGS. 231 (j) to (o), and the like]. It ’s a possible means,
The mini-game is a game in which a plurality of types of results can be derived.
The result of the mini-game is derived by operating the operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 229 (g) to (k), the operation key unit 137 holds a treasure chest. When you select and decide the treasure box selected with the effect button 136, the character BA of the auntie appears from the treasure box, and "Kokichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, or Fig. 232 (A1) to the same figure. As shown in (A6), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed, it is shown that the clothes worn by the character of the Bancho are torn, and "Awakening of the Bancho" and "Today is in great shape" are displayed.] ,
It is configured so that any one of the plurality of types of results is derived according to the operation status of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 230 (A1) to 230 (A6), the operation is performed. When the treasure chest BX2 at the lower left is selected by the key unit 137 and determined by the production button 136, the princess character HM3 appears and "Daikichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling. -As shown in the figure (B6), when the treasure box BX3 on the upper right is selected by the operation key unit 137 and decided by the production button 136, the auntie character BA appears and as a result of the fortune-telling, "Kokichi" Is displayed, or as shown in FIGS. 232 (A1) to (A6), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed and the condition for the number of operations is satisfied, the clothes worn by the character of the bancho are worn. Is shown to be broken, "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in great shape" are displayed, and the production button 136 is repeatedly pressed, but if the condition for the number of operations is not satisfied, FIG. 233 (C7). ), The clothes worn by the Bancho character will not be torn and the "Bancho Awakening Game" will end, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of results is a third result [for example, the display of the auntie character BA and "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 229 (k), and the bachelor of arts shown in FIG. 233 (C7). The clothes worn by the character are not torn, etc.]
The third result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the hit / fail judgment [for example, the hit / fail judgment of at least one of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure and the hit / fail judgment of the normal figure].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, conventionally, a game table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature of a mini game.

In addition, according to this game table, there are cases where the player can be entertained in addition to pure games.

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can operate it, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate it.

Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only the display of the mini game, or may be one that can display a display other than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

Further, the mini-game may be capable of deriving only a plurality of types of results, or may be capable of deriving something other than a plurality of types of results. Further, the mini-game may always derive a plurality of types of results, or may not derive a plurality of types of results.

Further, it may be configured so that only the result of the mini-game is derived by operating the operating means, or it is configured so that other than the result of the mini-game is derived by operating the operating means. May be done. Further, it may be configured so that the result of the mini game is always derived by operating the operating means, or the result of the mini game may not be derived by operating the operating means. You may.

Further, only one of a plurality of types of results may be derived according to the operation status of the operating means, or among the plurality of types of results depending on the operating status of the operating means. It may be configured so that something other than any one is derived. Further, it may be configured so that any one of a plurality of types of results is always derived according to the operation status of the operating means, or any one of the plurality of types of results depending on the operating status of the operating means. It may be configured so that one of them may not be derived.

Further, the mini-game may be capable of deriving only the third result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the third result. Further, the mini-game may always derive the third result, or may not derive the third result.

In addition, the third result does not suggest the result of the pass / fail judgment, nor does it notify the result.

Further, "The mini-game is a game for deriving a certain result from the plurality of types of results [for example, the mini-game shown in FIGS. 230 (A1) to (A6) is" Daikichi ". The mission is to select the treasure chest inside],
The certain result can be derived depending on the operation status of the operation means [For example, in the case shown in FIGS. 230 (A1) to (A6), the operation key unit 137 selects the lower left treasure box BX2. If it is decided by the production button 136, the princess character HM3 will appear and "Daikichi" will be displayed as a result of the fortune-telling fortune-telling, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation means for the mini game.

Here, a certain result may be only one or two or more.

Further, only a certain result may be derived depending on the operating status of the operating means, or a result other than a certain result may be derived depending on the operating status of the operating means. Further, it may be configured so that a certain result is always derived depending on the operation status of the operating means, or may be configured so that a certain result may not be derived depending on the operating status of the operating means.

In addition, "decorative symbol display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] Prepare,
The mini-game is started when it is started in the first period [for example, a period in a standby state in which the variable display of the special figure is not displayed (including a state in which the customer waiting demo display is displayed)] (hereinafter, It is a game with "the first case"),
The first period is a period during which the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended [for example, a period during which both special figures 1 and 2 are held at 0].
The first period is a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not executed [for example, a period during which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to entertain with a mini-game during the first period.

Further, according to this game table, there is a case where the operation of the operation means can be positively performed even during the original game by encouraging the operation of the operation means in the mini game.

Here, the decorative symbol display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the decorative symbol display means may always execute the decorative symbol variable display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the mini-game may be started only in the first period, or may be started in a period other than the first period. Further, the mini-game may be always started in the first period, or may not be started in the first period.

Further, the first period may be a period in which only the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended, or a period in which the start is not suspended other than the start of the decorative symbol variation display. May be good.

Further, the first period may be a period in which only the decorative symbol variation display is not executed, or a period other than the decorative symbol variation display (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 212). 214 etc.) may also be a period during which some are not executed.

In addition, "automatic operation of the operating means [for example, long press auto, full auto, etc.] is configured to be executable.
In the first case, the mini-game is configured so that the automatic operation cannot be executed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 231 (g) and FIGS. (J) to (o)). , Even if the auto button mode is set to on, the production button 136 is not automatically operated in the Bancho awakening game, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, in the first case, since it is a mini-game that has nothing to do with the success / failure judgment, the automatic operation cannot be executed and the player can actively operate the operation means. There is.

Here, only the automatic operation of the operating means may be configured to be executable, or operations other than the automatic operation of the operating means may be configured to be executable. Further, the automatic operation of the operating means may be configured to be executed without fail, or the automatic operation of the operating means may not be executed.

Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured so that only the automatic operation cannot be executed, or the operation other than the automatic operation may be disabled. Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured so that the automatic operation is always infeasible, or may be configured so that the automatic operation may not be infeasible.

Further, the mini-game may be configured so that the automatic operation cannot be executed only in the first case, or the automatic operation cannot be executed even in cases other than the first case. May be good.

In addition, "the mini-game is a game that may be started in the second period (hereinafter, referred to as" second case ") [for example, shown in FIGS. 161 (d) to 161 (l). The mini-games shown in FIGS. 207 (m) to 208 (f) and the mini-games shown in FIGS. 221 (g) to 221 (k) are started during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The mini-games shown in FIGS. 236 (e) to 236 (i) are started during the execution of the jackpot game, etc.],
The second period is a period that does not overlap with the first period.
The second period is a period including at least one of the execution of the decorative symbol variation display and the execution of the jackpot game.
In the first case, the third result is more likely to be derived in the mini-game than in the second case.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain with a mini game even during the game.

Here, the mini-game may be started only in the second period, or may be started in a period other than the second period. Further, the mini-game may be always started in the second period, or may not be started in the second period.

Further, in the first case, the third result may be always derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the third result may not be derived in the mini game. May be good.

In addition, "the types of the mini-games started in the first case and the second case are configured to be different [for example, today's fortune shown in FIGS. 229 (g) to (m). Fortune-telling and the bancho awakening game shown in FIGS. 231 (j) to (o) are mini-games started in a standby state, and the dice game and figures shown in FIGS. 221 (g) to (l). The omikuji game shown in 221 (g') to the same figure (l') is a mini-game that is started during the variable display of the decorative pattern, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to distinguish between a notice and a mere game depending on the type of mini-game.

Here, only the type of the mini-game started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be different, or the mini-game started in the first case and the second case. It may be configured so that there are different things other than the type. Further, the types of mini-games started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be different from each other, and the types of mini-games started in the first case and the second case. May be configured so that may not be different.

In addition, "in the mini-game started in the first case, the first validity period display [for example, the button reception time meter MT displayed in the Bancho awakening game shown in FIG. 231 (k)] is displayed. Is configured to be
In the mini-game started in the second case, the second validity period display [for example, the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini-game shown in FIG. 212 (i)] is displayed. It is composed and
The first valid period display is a meter display whose display mode changes according to the passage of a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid [for example, shown in FIGS. 231 (k) to 231 (n)). As described above, the display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started],.
The second valid period display is a meter display whose display mode changes according to the passage of a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid [for example, shown in FIGS. 212 (i) to 212 (k). As described above, the display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started],.
The speed at which the display mode changes differs between the first validity period display and the second validity period display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to distinguish the types of mini-games by looking at the validity period display.

Here, in the mini-game started in the first case, only the first validity period display may be displayed, or in the mini-game started in the first case, the first The validity period display other than the validity period display may be displayed. Further, in the mini-game started in the first case, the first validity period display may be configured to be displayed without fail, or in the mini-game started in the first case, the first validity period is displayed. It may be configured so that the period display may not be displayed.

Further, the first validity period display may be displayed only in the mini-game started in the first case, and the mini-game other than the mini-game started in the first case may also be displayed. , The first validity period display may be displayed.

Further, in the mini-game started in the second case, only the second validity period display may be displayed, or in the mini-game started in the second case, the second validity period is displayed. The validity period display other than the period display may be displayed. Further, the mini-game started in the second case may be configured so that the second validity period display is always displayed, and in the mini-game started in the second case, the second validity period is displayed. It may be configured so that the period display may not be displayed.

Further, the display may be configured so that the second validity period display is displayed only in the mini-game started in the second case, and also in the mini-game other than the mini-game started in the second case. , The second validity period display may be displayed.

Further, the first valid period display may change the display mode only according to the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or other than the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The display mode may change according to the above. Further, the first valid period display may be such that the display mode always changes according to the elapse of the period in which the operation of the operating means is valid, or the period in which the operation of the operating means is valid elapses. The display mode may not change accordingly.

In addition, the display mode of the second valid period display may change only according to the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or other than the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The display mode may change according to the above. In addition, the display mode of the second valid period display may always change according to the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or when the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid elapses. The display mode may not change accordingly.

Further, either the first validity period display or the second validity period display may not be displayed.

Further, in the first validity period display and the second validity period display, the display mode may change faster in the first validity period display, and the display mode may change in the second validity period display. The rate of change may be high.

Further, the first validity period display and the second validity period display may have different display modes or the same display mode. Further, in the first validity period display and the second validity period display, the first validity period display may be larger, or the second validity period display may be larger. Alternatively, the size of the first validity period display and the second validity period display may be the same.

Further, "In the mini-game started in the first case, the first operation promotion display [for example, the display of the button image 136a and" repeated hits "displayed in the Bancho awakening game shown in FIG. 231 (l)". Etc.] is configured to be displayed,
In the mini-game started in the second case, the second operation promotion display [for example, the button image 136a displayed in the mini-game shown in FIG. 212 (i) and the display of "continuous hitting", etc.] is displayed. Is configured to be
The first operation promotion display is a display that prompts the operation of the operation means.
The second operation promotion display is a display that prompts the operation of the operation means.
The first operation promotion display is a display that can be displayed with a display pattern [for example, a default display mode, etc.] of the first number [for example, one, etc.].
The second operation promotion display is a display that can be displayed with a display pattern of a second number [for example, two or the like] [for example, a default display mode and a vibration and rotation display mode].
Of the first number and the second number, the second number is larger.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, in the mini-game started in the second case, there is a case where the expectation for the big hit can be increased by the variation of the display pattern of the operation promotion display.

Here, in the mini-game started in the first case, only the first operation promotion display may be displayed, or in the mini-game started in the first case, the first operation promotion display may be displayed. The operation promotion display other than the operation promotion display may also be displayed. Further, in the mini-game started in the first case, the first operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed without fail, or in the mini-game started in the first case, the first operation may be displayed. It may be configured so that the promotion display may not be displayed.

Further, the first operation promotion display may be displayed only in the mini-game started in the first case, or in a mini-game other than the mini-game started in the first case. , The first operation promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the mini-game started in the second case, only the second operation promotion display may be displayed, or in the mini-game started in the second case, the second operation may be displayed. The operation promotion display other than the promotion display may also be displayed. Further, in the mini-game started in the second case, the second operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed without fail, and in the mini-game started in the second case, the second operation may be displayed. It may be configured so that the promotion display may not be displayed.

Further, the second operation promotion display may be displayed only in the mini-game started in the second case, and also in the mini-game other than the mini-game started in the second case. , The second operation promotion display may be displayed.

Further, the first operation promotion display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operating means, or may be a display prompting other than the operation of the operating means. Further, the first operation promotion display may be a display that always prompts the operation of the operating means, or may be a display that may not prompt the operation of the operating means.

Further, the second operation promotion display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operating means, or may be a display prompting other than the operation of the operating means. Further, the second operation promotion display may be a display that always prompts the operation of the operation means, or may be a display that may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

Further, the first operation promotion display may be displayed only with the display pattern of the first number, or may be displayed with a display pattern other than the display pattern of the first number. Good. Further, the first operation promotion display may always be displayed in the display pattern of the first number, or may not be displayed in the display pattern of the first number.

Further, the second operation promotion display may be displayed only in the display pattern of the second number, or may be displayed in a display pattern other than the display pattern of the second number. Good. Further, the second operation promotion display may always be displayed in the display pattern of the second number, or may not be displayed in the display pattern of the second number.

Further, the first number may be 1, or may be 2 or more.

Further, between the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display, the first operation promotion display may be larger in size, and the second operation promotion display may be larger in size. Alternatively, the size of the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display may be the same.

Further, the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display may have different display modes, or at least a part of the display modes may be the same.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of results is the first result [for example, the display of" Kokichi "shown in FIG. 213 (l)".
The first result is a result that at least suggests the result of the pass / fail judgment [for example, the display of "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 213 (l) is the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 213 (m). At least suggests a display, etc.],
The first result is more likely to be derived in the mini-game in the second case than in the first case.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the mini-game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. Further, the mini-game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

Further, the first result may at least suggest only the result of the hit / fail judgment, or may at least suggest the result other than the result of the hit / miss judgment. In addition, the first result may at least suggest the result of the hit / fail judgment, or may not at least suggest the result of the hit / miss judgment.

Further, the first result may suggest the result of the hit / miss determination, or may notify the result of the hit / miss determination.

Further, in the first case, the first result may not be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the first result may be always derived in the mini game.

Further, "The first result derived when the mini-game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display is a notice or a look-ahead notice [for example, FIGS. 216 (a) to 216 (f). ), In the mini-game performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, a notice or pre-reading notice is given by the appearance of the main character's character YSM from the treasure chest, etc.],
The first result derived when the mini-game is started during the execution of the jackpot game is a look-ahead notice.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the mini-game may also function as a notice.

In addition, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first effect display.
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display [for example, a button operation effect shown in FIGS. 209 (c) to 209 (o)].
The first effect display may be a big hit notice (hereinafter, referred to as "first notice [for example, display of the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 209 (o]]"). And
As the first result derived when the mini-game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, a notice related to the first notice may be executed [for example, FIG. 209 (Fig. 209). c) As shown in the figure (l), the display of "Nakayoshi" derived in the mini-game started during the variable display of the decorative symbol foretells the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b, etc. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to draw attention to the first result that affects the first notice.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

Further, the first effect display may be related only to the decorative symbol variation display, or may be related to other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the first effect display may be always related to the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the first effect display may be one in which only the first notice is executed, or may be executed in addition to the first notice. Further, the first effect display may be such that the first notice is always executed, or the first notice may not be executed.

Further, as the first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, only the notice related to the first notice may be executed, or the decorative symbol may be executed. As the first result derived when the mini-game is started during the execution of the variable display, a notice other than the notice related to the first notice may be executed. Further, as the first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, the notice related to the first notice may always be executed, or the decoration symbol variation display may be executed. As a first result derived when the mini-game is started during, the notice related to the first notice may not be executed.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of results is the second result [for example, the display of" Daikichi "shown in FIG. 212 (l)".
The second result is a result that at least suggests the result of the pass / fail judgment [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 212 (l) is the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 212 (m). At least suggests a display, etc.],
In the second case, the second result is more likely to be derived in the mini-game than in the first case.
It is easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived as a result of the mini-game.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the plurality of types of results may be only the first result and the second result, or may include results other than the first result and the second result.

Further, the second result may be a result suggesting the result of the hit / miss judgment, or may be a result of notifying the result of the hit / miss judgment in advance.

Further, in the first case, the second result may be configured not to be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the second result may be configured not to be derived in the mini game. Good.

Further, when the first result is derived, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed, and when the second result is derived, the jackpot symbol is always finally confirmed. It may be configured to be displayed.

Further, "In the first case, the mini-game shows only the third result [for example, the result of the mini-game shown in FIG. 229 (k), FIGS. (K1) to (k4)]. It is a game to derive,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "One of the plurality of types of results is shown in the fourth result [for example, the display of the princess characters HM3 and" Daikichi "shown in FIG. 229 (k1) and the display in FIG. 232 (A6). , Display of the torn clothes worn by the Bancho character, etc.]
The fourth result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the hit / fail judgment [for example, the hit / fail judgment of at least one of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure and the hit / miss judgment of the normal figure].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give variation to the result of the mini game.

Further, the mini-game may be capable of deriving only the third result and the fourth result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the third result and the fourth result. .. Further, the mini-game may always derive the third result and the fourth result, or may not derive the third result and the fourth result.

Further, the fourth result does not suggest the result of the pass / fail determination, nor does it notify the result.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 237 to 290. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far.

FIGS. 237 to 290 are diagrams that stepwise show the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 237 to 290, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. In addition, in FIGS. 237 to 290, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 provided with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 237 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 238 shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 237 step by step. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 237 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 237 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons in special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 in special figure 1. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 237 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both default display modes. It is displayed in (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 237 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 237 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 Is displayed as. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (3), it is shown that the navigation character notice is being performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice starts, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "chance", suggesting that there is a high possibility of a big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (6), the third stop is performed, the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 237 (7), the navigation is performed. The character "continue" is displayed in the vicinity of the character YM, and it is notified that a pseudo-ream is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (8), after the characters “Ikuze” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, it is shown that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. ing. After that, as shown in FIG. 237 (9), in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (10), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (11), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 237 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 237 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the Sabohani character SBHN crosses a large number of Sabohani group notices. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with high expectation of big hit. That is, it can be said that when the Sabohani group notice is given, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the Sabohani group notice is not given. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of Sabohani group notices are provided according to the reliability of the jackpot, and the strong Sabohani group notice in which the Sabohani character SBHN is the second number and the Sabohani character SBHN are the first number. A weak Sabohani group notice (a number less than the second number) may be executed. The Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 237 (13) is a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (14), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 237 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (16), the button notice effect has been started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In this button notice effect, the button reception time meter may be displayed to notify the operation validity period.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 237 (17), as shown in FIG. 237 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a close-up image of the character of the lord and a “game” in the balloon. A cut-in image including a balloon image with the characters "Ja" is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the bancho is not decorated around the characters "game" in the balloon, and is a big hit than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. It suggests that the reliability of is low.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 238 (19) following FIG. 237 (18), the screen in which the main character, the lord, was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and at the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , "Decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 238 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 238 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 239 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 240 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 239 stepwise. is there. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 239 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 237 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Here, the timer advance notice display TM1 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to display the decimal point of less than 1 second.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (4), "04:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the characters "may be pseudo-ream" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that pseudo-ream may be performed as a result of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239 (5), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239 (6), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239 (7), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (7). After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (8), the character "continue" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (8).

After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (9), when the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", "Ikuze" is placed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Is displayed, and the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-ream is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream. 2 ”is displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 239 (11) to (18) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 239 (11) to (18) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 237 (10) to (17), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (18), as shown in FIG. 240 (19) following FIG. 239 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 is accompanied by a close-up image of the character of the lord. , A cut-in image including a balloon image with the characters "Game" is displayed in the balloon. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number (for example, 9) of the faces of the bancho are arranged around the characters of "game" in the balloon, and the weak cut-in image CI1b is It suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when it is displayed. When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be a big hit (so that the big hit symbol is finally confirmed and displayed).

After that, as shown in FIG. 240 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 240 (21), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 240 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is concerned) as compared with the case where the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. (Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed. In this production example, even if the timer advance notice production is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, it may be lost.

FIG. 241 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 241 (1) to (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 239 (1) to (4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 241 (5), the disappearance animation is started during the countdown display on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that the pseudo-ream will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased in the middle of the countdown before reaching "00:00", indicating that a certain effect (pseudo-ream) was not performed. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the true timer advance notice effect is performed than when the fake timer advance notice effect is performed. In this embodiment, even if a fake timer notice effect is performed, a big hit may occur.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 241 (6), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 241 (7), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the character "sorry" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM has been deleted.

After that, when the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 241 (8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. "Reach" is displayed in the vicinity, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In this production example, the notice of the pseudo-ream by the timer notice effect was a false notice, but it may be said that the notice of the reach is functioning as a result of the shift to the reach.

After that, as shown in FIG. 241 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice, in which the number of Sabohani SBHNs is smaller than that of the above-mentioned strong Sabohani group notice, is performed. This weak Sabohani group notice is more reliable than when the Sabohani group notice is not given, but is less reliable than when the strong Sabohani group notice is given.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 241 (10), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 241 (11) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 241 (11) to 238 (17) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 237 (15) to 238 (21), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 242 is a diagram stepwise showing another display example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 242 (1) to (6) are the same as those of FIGS. 239 (1) to (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 242 (6), after the "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:" as shown in FIG. 242 (7). The third stop is performed at the timing of "00", and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In this way, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 may be completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. The middle symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 may be stopped and displayed after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. , Or the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed at the same time as the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”.

After that, the timer notice display TM1 is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (8), and the character "continue" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the pseudo-ream is performed. The character "continue" may be displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is erased, the timer notice display TM1 may be erased after the character "continue" is displayed, or the timer notice may be displayed. The timing at which the display TM1 is erased and the timing at which the characters "continue" are displayed may be the same.

After that, as shown in FIG. 242 (9), the character "Ikuze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 242 (7a) to (9a), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00", the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream starts. Until this is done, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be maintained without being erased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 242 (9b), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the timer notice display is started at the timing when the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream starts. The character "done" may be displayed on TM1 to notify that the timer advance notice effect has been successful and the pseudo-ream as a certain effect has been started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 242 (9c), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the timer notice display is started at the timing when the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream starts. The character "pseudo-ream" may be displayed on TM1 to notify that the timer advance notice effect has been successful and the pseudo-ream as a certain effect has been started. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 242 (9c), by displaying the icon BCHO of the face of the chief on the timer notice display TM1, it is made to produce that the pseudo-ream as a certain effect has been started. May be good.

FIG. 243 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 243 (1) to (3) are the same as those in FIGS. 239 (1) to (3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243 (4), the timer notice display TM1 is counted down, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is set to “04:25”. Further, in this production example, the characters "may be reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that reach may occur.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243 (5), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243 (6), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (6).

After that, as shown in FIG. 243 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "00:52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 243 (8), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243 (9) shows the strong sabohani group. A notice will be given. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect. In other words, the strong Sabohani group notice can be said to be an example of a certain production. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 243 (10) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 243 (10) to 243 (17) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 239 (15) to 240 (22), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this production example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong Sabohani group notice is started, the symbol variation display is performed as compared with the case where the timer notice effect is performed and the strong Sabohani group notice is not started. (The symbol variation display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed. In this production example, even if the timer notice production is performed and the strong Sabohani group notice is started, it may be lost.

FIG. 244 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 244 (1) to (8) are the same as those in FIGS. 243 (1) to (8), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 244 (8), even if the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 244 (9), no matter what. An example is shown in which no notice is given. That is, in this production example, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM, it is shown that the notice that the strong Sabohani group notice will be performed is a false (gase) notice. .. In other words, it can be said that even if the timer notice display TM1 is set to "00:00", it is shown that a certain effect (strong Sabohani group notice) is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 244 (10), "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display develops into super reach.

Subsequently, the effects shown in FIGS. 244 (11) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 244 (11) to (17) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 243 (11) to (17), and thus the description thereof will be omitted. In this production example, a case is shown in which the timer notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is false and a big hit may occur even if a certain effect is not started, but it may be lost.

FIG. 245 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 245 (1) to (8) are the same as those in FIGS. 243 (1) to (8), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 245 (8), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 245 (9), the weak Sabohani group notice is given. Is done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that as a result of the timer notice production, a notice different from a certain effect (weak Sabohani group notice) is performed. In other words, when the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", it can be said that a certain effect (strong Sabohani group notice) and another effect (weak Sabohani group notice) are performed. This timer advance notice effect can also be said to be a fake timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (10), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 245 (11) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 245 (11) to (17) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 243 (11) to (17), and thus the description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that this effect example also shows an example in which the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is false and a big hit may occur even if an effect different from a certain effect is started, but it may be lost. is there.

FIG. 246 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 247 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 246. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 246 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 237 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display TM1A is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1A is a high-reliability display mode indicating that the possibility of a false timer notice is lower than that of the default display mode. When the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed, a certain effect performed as a result of the countdown may be executed without fail. Further, when the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode is displayed (the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed). (To make it easier to do). "03:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1A, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1A is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (4), "00:24" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "hold change", and as a result of counting down the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A, the display mode of the hold icon may change. It is suggested that. That is, it is shown that this timer notice effect may be a look-ahead notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (5), it is shown that the countdown on the timer notice display TM1A is completed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A is "00:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 246 (6), the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon is displayed. It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 246 (7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, resulting in a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1A is shown. In addition, the character "first hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified in advance that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the symbol variation display that is started next. In addition, the character display of "first hot" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed after the character display of "first hot" is performed. Alternatively, the character display of "first hot" may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (8), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (9), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (10), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 246 (11), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 246 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character "first hot" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (14), it is shown that the navigation character notice is being performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice starts, the characters "hot" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (15), the timer notice display TM1A is displayed to show that the timer notice effect has started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1A is a high reliability display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1A, which suggests that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this production example, the timer display time displayed when the countdown starts is as long as "20:00", and the reliability of the jackpot is much higher than when the short time is displayed. It is also suggested that it is increasing. The countdown in the timer notice display TM1A is then started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (16), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (16).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (17), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "16:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (17).

After that, as shown in FIG. 246 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "16:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (18).

After that, as shown in FIG. 247 (19) following FIG. 246 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "15:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (19). Further, in this production example, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1A is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBHN constituting the strong Sabohani group notice. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (19), in addition to the timer notice display TM1A, the second timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a plurality of timer notice displays are performed in the timer notice effect is shown. The display mode of the newly displayed timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode, and "5:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and 5 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Then, it is suggested that a certain production is started. Further, in this production example, the timer notice display TM1 displayed later has a shorter time than the timer notice display TM1A displayed earlier, and the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 displayed later However, it is completed before the countdown in the timer notice display TM1A started earlier. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 whose display is started later is digested first. The countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is then started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (20), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "14:95" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (20). Further, the timer notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later also continues to count down, and "4:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (20).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 247 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "10:95" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (21). Further, the timer notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later also continues to count down, and "1:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (20).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (22), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 which is started later becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed, the button notice effect is started and the button image is displayed. It is shown that 136a is displayed in the default mode. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later is digested before the timer notice display TM1A which is started to be displayed earlier. In this production example, a certain effect performed as a result of the countdown of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 that is started to be displayed later is not the start of the button advance effect itself, but the operation of the effect button 136 in the button advance effect. It is said that the advance notice effect is started as a result of the above, and in this effect example, the strong cut-in image CI1a is foretold to be displayed, but the occurrence of the button advance notice effect itself is foretold. You may.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (23), FIG. 2
As shown in 47 (24), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1 whose countdown has already been completed continues to display "0:00" until the effect button 136 is operated and the cut-in image is displayed. It may be deleted when the countdown is completed, "0:00" is displayed, and the button notice effect is started. In this production example, the notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 which is started later is a false notice. It can be said that a certain situation is shown. Alternatively, in this effect example, it is shown that as a result of the timer advance notice effect, an effect (display of the weak cut-in image CI1b) different from a certain effect (display of the strong cut-in image CI1a) is performed. In other words, when the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00", it is shown that a certain effect (display of the strong cut-in image CI1a) and another effect (display of the weak cut-in image CI1b) are performed. It can be said that this timer advance notice effect can be said to be a fake timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (25), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 whose display is started later is erased. In the timer notice display TM1A whose display was started earlier, the countdown continues, and "5:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (25).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (26), the screen in which the main character's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is notified that the scheduled display will be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "3:77" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (26).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (27), the display position of the timer notice display TM1A is shown to move from the center on the right side of the display screen to the upper left corner. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown is still continuing, and "2:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (27).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (28), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5". At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown is still continuing, and "1:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (28).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (29), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A is set to “0:00” and the countdown is completed while the fluctuation of the decorative symbol continues. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 247 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer notice display TM1A is erased, and the character BC3, the chief of the bancho whose clothes are torn, appears with the characters "Resurrection", and the navigation character YM. An exclamation mark is displayed in the vicinity, showing that he is surprised at the sudden appearance of the Bancho character. Then, three decorative symbols of "decoration 5" are displayed, and it is notified that all three "decoration 5" are big hits. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a revival effect for notifying that a big hit is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1A is performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (31), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 247 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 and the characters "I did it" is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance effect is performed and the revival effect is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is concerned) as compared with the case where the timer advance effect is performed and the revival effect is not started. (Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed.

In this production example, when the timer notice display is displayed in a highly reliable display mode, the time initially displayed on the timer display is set to "3:00" or "20:00". For example, the timer is displayed. When the notice display is displayed in the high-reliability display mode or in the special display mode, the time to be displayed first on the timer display is set first in the timer display when the timer notice display is displayed in the default display mode. It may be configured to have a longer time (second time) than the time displayed in (first time). As a result, depending on the display mode of the timer notice display, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation to a certain notice display to be executed.

FIG. 248 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 248 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 237 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (4), a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "hold change", and as a result of counting down the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the display is held. It is suggested that the display mode of the icon may change. That is, it is shown that this timer notice effect may be a look-ahead notice. On the other hand, in this production example, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has not been started, and the timer display remains "03:00".

After that, as shown in FIG. 248 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes is a false (gase) notice. In other words, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is erased before the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and a certain effect (change effect of the display mode of the hold icon) is not performed. It can be said that the situation is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (6), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (7), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the character "sorry" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM has been deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (8), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (9), the third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 248 (10), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 248 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 249 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 250 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 249. FIG. 251 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 250. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 249 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 237 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, respectively, and the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. It should be noted that three or more timer advance notice effects may be started at the same time. Both of these two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are the default display modes. On the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain notice effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. In addition, "45:00" is displayed as a timer display on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, suggesting that a certain notice effect will be started 45 seconds after the countdown is started. doing. In this production example, since the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R start the countdown at the same time, a certain notice production is performed both when 10 seconds have passed and when 45 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Is suggested to be initiated. Here, a certain advance notice effect that may be started when 10 seconds have passed and a certain advance notice effect that may be started when 45 seconds have passed may be the same. It may be different. In addition, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side has an icon BCHO of the face of the chief, suggesting that a strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain notice effect. .. By adding the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho, it may be notified that the reliability of the big hit is improved. In addition, a plurality of types of icons to be added to the timer notice display are prepared, and the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the added icon, or a certain type of notice effect that may be performed. May be different.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1L and TM1R is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (4), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side has "9: "25" is displayed, and "44:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (5) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (5), "9:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "44:00" is displayed. As described above, in this production example, the countdown of the timer display by the timer advance notice production is started before the start of the mini game.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (6), "8:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "43:75" is displayed.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (7) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been notified that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (7), "4:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "39:00" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (8), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Then, the characters "attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (8), "3:67" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. On the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "38:67" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (9), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "directing activation" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Has been done. As a result, in the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, it is notified that a certain effect is guaranteed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. In this production example, the appearance of the princess character HME foretells that a pseudo-ream will be performed as a certain production. That is, in this production example, the princess character HME can be said to be a pseudo-ren's notice item (sometimes referred to as a "notice icon"). Further, at this time, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side is added, "41:67" is displayed, and the countdown continues. On the other hand, on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, "1:67" is displayed, and the countdown continues here as well. It is not necessary to add the timer display of the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. In the present embodiment, in this way, the countdown is performed by the timer advance notice effect, and the effect may be excited by the mini game until the countdown is completed (until "0:00").

After that, the mini-game ends, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (10), the characters "preparing for production" are displayed above the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, and a pseudo-ream is performed. It has been announced in advance. In addition, the characters "pseudo-ream" are also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a notice is given that the pseudo-ream will be performed here as well. The two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (10), "1:33" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "41:33" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (11), it is shown that the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is continuing. In addition, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is displayed in a mode in which the princess character HME is added, that is, by displaying the notice item of the pseudo-ream, it is visually possible that the pseudo-ream is performed. It may be easier to understand. As described above, in this production example, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. The two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (11), "1:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "41:00" is displayed.

After that, the countdowns on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are continuously performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (12), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side becomes "0:00". When the countdown is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6". In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "40:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (12).

After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (13), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is erased, and the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Here, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream may be started after the timer notice display TM1L is erased, or the timer may be started after the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. The notice display TM1L may be erased, or the second variation display of the decorative symbol may be started by the pseudo-ream at the timing when the timer notice display TM1L is erased. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed, and it is notified by the display of the icon that the pseudo-ream has been performed. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "39:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (13).

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is concerned) as compared with the case where the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. (Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (14), a new timer notice display TM1N is started to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen, and a state in which a new timer notice effect is started is shown. The display mode of the newly displayed timer notice display TM1N is the default display mode, and for example, frame-in is performed from the left side of the display screen by frame-in animation. "10:00" is displayed as a timer display on the timer notice display TM1N, which suggests that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this production example, the newly displayed timer notice display TM1N starts the countdown after the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side where the countdown is started earlier, but the timer notice display displayed on the right side. The countdown will be completed earlier than TM1R. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "38:15" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (14).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (15), it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed in each of the timer notice display TM1N and TM1R. At the timing shown in FIG. 249 (15), "9:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, and "37:" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. 40 "is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (16) shows that the second mini-game is started. When the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as described above, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. The BXRs are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. In addition, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Further, the countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (16), "9:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "37:15" is displayed.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (17), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, the countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (17), "8:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. On the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "36:90" is displayed.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (18) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been notified that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (18), "4:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "32:15" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (19) following FIG. 249 (18), the result production of the mini game is started, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center and selected. The left treasure chest image BXL that did not exist is deleted. Then, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Further, the countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (19), "3:67" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "31:82" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (20), the auntie character BBA appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "Uhihi" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has failed. ing. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is a fake timer advance notice effect. The two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (20), "1:67" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. On the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "29:82" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (21), the disappearance animation is started on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, and the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1N is erased in the middle of the countdown before reaching "00:00", indicating that a certain effect was not performed. The timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side continues the countdown, and "29:49" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (21). In addition, "x2" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the number of times of variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is two times. When the princess character HME is displayed, "x2" may not be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (22), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is completely erased. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not performed. Further, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side continues the countdown, and "27:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (22).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (23), "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to form a reach state, and "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Then, it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 250 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner. Further, in this production example, the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is moved from the center on the right side of the display screen to the upper left corner. Then, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1R overlaps with the Sabohani character SBHN that constitutes the strong Sabohani group notice. The strong Sabohani group notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed, or the strong Sabohani group notice is started before the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed. Alternatively, the strong Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed. Further, the strong Sabohani group notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started, or the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started after the strong Sabohani group notice is started. Alternatively, the strong Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "25:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (24).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (25), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "24:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (25).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (26), it is shown that the display screen is darkened and a blackout effect is performed across the lightning bolt. Further, in the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "21:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (26).

When the blackout effect is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (27) shows that the mini game is started using the entire display screen. Specifically, the characters "Strong Cut-in Chance" are displayed along with the icon of the Bancho's face, indicating that the mini-game by Amidakuji has started. Then, the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho attached to the timer notice display TM1R is moved to the Amida field, and it is shown that it is located in the middle of the three options. That is, the display of the Bancho's face icon BCHO added to the timer notice display can be said to be a notice display that the mini game by Amidakuji will be started. In addition, the character "Choose" is displayed below the Amida field, prompting you to operate the operation key unit 137 and select one of the three options for the Bancho's face icon BCHO. .. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "21:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (27).

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (28), the bancho located in the middle of the three options in the Amida field. The face icon BCHO moves to the right of the three options. Further, in the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "18:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (28).

After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the left side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (29). The production starts. At this time, at the three end points of the Amida field, either "○" indicating success or "x" indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, "x" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "○" is displayed at the right end point. ing. The number of "○" displayed may be 2 or more, or "○" may be displayed at all end points. At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1R continues the countdown, and "18:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (29).

After that, as shown in FIG. 250 (30), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho is moving on the line according to the rules of the ghost leg. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "17:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (30).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (31), it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho has reached the end point on the right side of the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho reaches the end point on the right side where "○" is displayed, and the characters "strong cut-in confirmed" are displayed, the mission is successful, and the strong cut-in image. It has been notified that it has been confirmed that CI1a will be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (31).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 250 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is resumed, but the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are left hidden. Then, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. Further, it is shown that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1RA), and it is shown that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. There is. Further, in the timer notice display TM1RA, the countdown continues, and "9:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (32).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (33), the button notice effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. At this time, on the timer notice display TM1RA, the timer display is set to "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1RA is the timer advance notice effect related to this button effect, and is the timer advance notice effect for displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a as a result of the button effect. .. The timer advance notice display TM1RA that has become "0:00" is maintained until the effect button 136 is operated and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, but after the countdown is completed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. May be erased before is displayed.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (34), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 250 (35). After that, the timer notice display TM1RA is erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 250 (36), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (37) following FIG. 250 (36), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". It is shown. At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. The display of the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area is also resumed, and the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 can be visually recognized. After that, as shown in FIG. 251 (38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

In this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, the timer advance notice effect is performed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. However, it is configured so that it may be lost.

FIG. 252 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect following from FIG. 250 (24). In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. It should be noted that FIGS. 252 (25a) to (28a) are the same as those in FIGS. 250 (25) to (28), but in this production example, the countdown display is displayed in the blackout effect in FIG. 252 (26a). The difference is that the timer notice display TM1R inside is temporarily hidden.

When the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the left side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, the effect of the ghost leg is produced at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (29a). It will be started. In this production example, at this time, three icons are displayed at each of the three end points of the Amida field. Specifically, a panda icon indicating that the mini-game has failed is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, and a bancho icon indicating that the mini-game has succeeded is displayed at the center end point. Is displayed, and at the end point on the right side, a Sabohani icon indicating that the mini game was a great success is displayed. There may be no panda icon, two panda icons, or all panda icons. In addition, there may be no icon of the bancho, there may be two icons, or all of them may be the icons of the bancho. In addition, there may be no Sabohani icon, two Sabohani icons, or all Sabohani icons. At this time as well, the timer advance notice display TM1R continues the countdown, and "18:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (29a).

After that, as shown in FIG. 252 (30), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho is moving on the line according to the rules of the ghost leg. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "17:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (30a).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 252 (31a), it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho has reached the end point on the right side of the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, the Bancho's face icon BCHO reaches the end point on the right side where the Sabohani icon is displayed, and the characters "strongest cut-in confirmed" are displayed, making the mission a great success and the strongest described later. It has been notified that the cut-in image CI1v has been confirmed to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (31a).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 252 (32a), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is resumed, but the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are left hidden. Then, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. Further, it is shown that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1RA), and it is shown that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. There is. Further, in this production example, the characters "Preparing for the strongest cut-in" are displayed at the bottom of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 together with the character of Sabohani, and it is announced that the strongest cut-in image CI1v will be displayed. I am informing you. Further, in the timer notice display TM1RA, the countdown continues, and "9:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (32a).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 252 (33a), the button notice effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. At this time, on the timer notice display TM1RA, the timer display is set to "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (34a), the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 252 (35a). At this time, the display of the Sabohani character and the characters "Preparing for the strongest cut-in" is erased. The strongest cut-in image CI1v includes a balloon image in which the characters "game" are arranged in the balloon together with a close-up image of the character of the lord, and is surrounded by a large number of Sabohani characters. This is a cut-in image. When the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. When the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the jackpot may be confirmed. In this effect example, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1RA, the strongest cut-in image CI1v, which is a notice effect more advantageous than the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain notice effect, is displayed. The situation is shown. Here, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be displayed as a certain advance notice effect, or may be displayed as a notice effect different from a certain advance notice effect. After the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the timer notice display TM1RA is erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 252 (36a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 252 (37a), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. The display of the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area is also resumed, and the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 can be visually recognized. After that, as shown in FIG. 252 (38a), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 253 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 253 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 237 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (4), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has not been started, and the timer display remains at "10:00". The timer advance notice effect in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect indicating that a pseudo-ream may be performed as a certain advance notice effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (5) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (7) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been notified that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (8), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Then, the characters "attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (9), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "pseudo-ren stock" are displayed, the mini-game mission is achieved, and the pseudo-ren Has been announced in advance. As a result, in the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1, it is notified that when the countdown of the timer display is completed, it is guaranteed that a pseudo-ream as a certain advance notice effect will be performed. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started. In this production example, it is shown that the result of the mini game is derived and displayed before the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started.

After that, the mini game ends, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (10), the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1A). It is shown that the reliability of the jackpot has improved. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is stepping up by succeeding in the mini game. In addition, the princess character HME as a notice item is displayed at the lower left of the display screen, and a notice is given that a pseudo-ream will be performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the notice item is displayed when the mini game is successful. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1A is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 253 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 253 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1A is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol, and the princess character HME as a notice item is also displayed. That is, these displays will be displayed across the next symbol variation display. In other words, it can be said that the display of the timer notice display TM1A and the princess character HME is displayed as a look-ahead notice of the pseudo-continuous production. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1A is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1A is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1A is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 253 (14), "06:44" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1A. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 253 (15).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (16), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 253 (16).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (17), the third stop is performed at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A becomes "0:00", and the middle symbol is replayed as a pseudo continuous symbol. It is shown that the symbol RP is stopped and displayed. After that, the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-ream is started as described above.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is concerned) as compared with the case where the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. (Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 254 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 253. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 254 (1) to (8) are the same as those of FIGS. 253 (1) to (8), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (9), the character BBA of the auntie appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "Uhihi" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has failed. .. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1 is a fake timer advance notice effect. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (10), the disappearance animation is started on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, but it is erased before the countdown is started, indicating that a certain effect has not been performed.

After that, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol as described above, and as shown in FIG. 254 (11), the "decoration 5" is displayed. -Decoration 6-Decoration 6 ”is combined to perform a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuations. After that, as shown in FIG. 254 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. As described above, in this production example, since the mini-game failed, the pre-reading notice by the timer notice display TM1 was a fake notice, so that the game ended in the middle, and as a result, the pre-reading notice was not performed. It is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (14), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (15), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (16), the third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 254 (17), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. Is performed, and then the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed.

In this production example, even if the mini-game fails and the look-ahead notice by the timer notice effect is a false notice, it may be a big hit in the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice.

FIG. 255 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 256 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 255 step by step. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 255 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 237 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (3) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (4), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during the period when the mini game is started and the selection operation by the player is accepted. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has not started, and the timer display remains at "10:00".

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (6) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been notified that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest to be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (7), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Then, the characters "attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (8), the icon BCF of the face of the bancho appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "strong cut-in confirmed" are displayed, and the mission of the mini game is completed. , It has been announced that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. A stop is made. At this time, the icon BCF of the face of the Bancho is reduced and displayed (stocked) in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The stock of the icon BCF of the face of the bancho will give a pre-reading notice of the strong cut-in image CI1a. After that, as shown in FIG. 255 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol, and the icon BCF of the face of the bancho as a notice item is also displayed. .. That is, these displays will be displayed across the next symbol variation display. In other words, it can be said that the display of the timer notice display TM1 and the icon BCF of the face of the bancho is displayed as a look-ahead notice. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (11), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (12), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and becomes the notice display mode. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed by, for example, the hold change animation, but the display mode may be changed by the switching display without performing the hold change animation. After that, as shown in FIG. 255 (13), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (14), "9:95" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (15), the disappearance animation is started during the countdown display on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased in the middle of the countdown before reaching "00:00", indicating that a certain effect was not performed. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 which is a fake notice is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. The timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect relating to the pseudo-ream being performed as a certain advance notice effect, that is, the pseudo-ream is deleted by erasing the timer advance notice display TM1. It may be recognized that it will not be done. Before the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started, a ghost effect to that effect may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (16), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (17), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (18), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (19) following FIG. 255 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. To. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 256 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (21), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. Here, since the Bancho's face icon BCF is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the display of "SP development" overlaps with the Bancho's face icon BCF, and the Bancho's face icon BCF is displayed. It is said that it is more difficult to see than if it is not done.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 256 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (23), the button notice effect has been started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 256 (24), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as shown in FIG. 256 (25). The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a corresponds to the fact that it was foretold by the icon BCF of the face of the Bancho displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. That is, it can be said that the result of the mini-game is shown to be a pre-reading notice of the notice effect to be executed in the symbol variation display to be performed later. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is related to the result of the mini game and is not related to the timer advance notice production started at the same time. That is, it is shown that only the mini-game of the strong cut-in image CI1a is actually the true advance notice effect, while pretending that the mini-game and the timer advance notice effect are related.

After that, as shown in FIG. 256 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (27), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 256 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, when the icon BCF of the face of the Bancho appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the mini game, the icon BCF of the face of the Bancho appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when is not displayed, but even if the icon BCF of the Bancho's face appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be lost. May be good.

FIG. 257 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 257 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 237 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the icon BCHO of the face of the chief is added to the timer notice display TM1, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a certain notice effect will be displayed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 257 (4), "0:24" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the display of the characters "hold change", and as a result of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It has been suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is shown that this timer notice effect may be a look-ahead notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (5), it is shown that the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "0:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 257 (6), the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon is displayed. It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 257 (7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, resulting in a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is shown. In addition, the character "first hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified in advance that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the symbol variation display that is started next.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (8), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (9), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (10), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 257 (11), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 257 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character "first hot" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

FIG. 258 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 257. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 258 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 257 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, this effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 257 (3) in that the icon BCHO of the face of the chief is not added to the timer notice display TM1. This suggests that it is less likely that a certain notice effect will be displayed than when the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho is added.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 258 (4), "0:24" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the display of the characters "hold change", and as a result of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It has been suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is shown that this timer notice effect may be a look-ahead notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258 (5), it is shown that the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "0:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 258 (6), the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon is displayed. It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

However, as shown in FIG. 258 (7), in this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has not changed from the default display mode. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is not performed, which is a fake timer advance notice effect. ing. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the timer advance notice effect is a fake effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258 (8), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258 (9), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the character "sorry" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM has been deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258 (10), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 258 (11), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 258 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character "first hot" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

FIG. 259 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 259 (1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 241 (1) to (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

After the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased in FIG. 259 (6), the erased timer notice display TM1 is restored and redisplayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (7). It is shown. Further, at this time, the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho is added, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-ream as a certain advance notice effect is displayed. That is, it is shown that the disappeared timer notice display TM1 is not the timer notice display TM1 related to the fake timer notice effect, but the true timer notice display TM1. It is also shown that the timer notice display TM1 is stepped up when the timer notice display TM1 is redisplayed. From another point of view, it can be said that a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed for the same certain effect. Here, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is redisplayed, the execution of a certain advance notice effect (pseudo-ream) performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect may be confirmed. In addition, the characters "maybe pseudo-ream" are displayed again in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. At the timing shown in FIG. 259 (7), "03:00" is displayed as the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, and it is notified that a pseudo-ream may be performed after 3 seconds.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (8), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "02:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (8).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (9), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:23" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (9).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (10), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (10),
"00:35" is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 259 (11), the character "continue" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (11).

After that, as shown in FIG. 259 (12), when the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", "Ikuze" is placed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Is displayed, and the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-ream is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 259 (13), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream. 2 ”is displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is concerned) as compared with the case where the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. (Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 260 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 261 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 260 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 260 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 237 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "25:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect will be started 25 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, a timer advance effect in which the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain advance effect is shown. In addition, the characters "Chance in SP development" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a mission production has been started to show that the expectation of big hits will rise dramatically by developing into super reach. It is also shown that it is. In this effect example, when the mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. Therefore, by shifting to super reach, it may be possible to expect the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (4), "23:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. That is, it is shown that 2 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (5), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (6), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 260 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "18:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (7).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 260 (8) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the normal reach is performed and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (10).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (11), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. The strong Sabohani group notice is a notice with high reliability of the big hit, and there is a high probability that it will shift to super reach. Therefore, the occurrence of a strong Sabohani group notice may dramatically increase expectations for mission achievement. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 260 (11), the Sabohani character SBHN constituting the strong Sabohani group notice overlaps with the timer notice display TM1, but the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the Sabohani character SBHN. You may. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (11).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (12), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. This may be recognized as the mission being accomplished. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (12).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 260 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "timer attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to the countdown on the timer notice display TM1. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (14), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes is performed. As a result, it is notified that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes to a display mode in which the reliability of the jackpot and the execution probability of a certain notice effect are improved. In addition, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed (demoted) to a display mode in which the reliability of the jackpot and the execution probability of a certain notice effect are reduced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 260 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display). It has been changed to TM1B), and it is shown that it is stepping up, and it is shown that the reliability of the jackpot has improved dramatically. The timer notice display TM1B in this special display mode is a display mode in which the reliability of the jackpot is higher than that of the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode, that is, when the timer notice display in the special display mode is displayed, it is high. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the timer notice display in the reliability display mode is displayed. When the timer notice display in the special display mode is displayed, the jackpot may be confirmed. Further, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed is added with the icon BCHO of the face of the chief, foretelling that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "4:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (15).

Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1B becomes "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (16). That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the achievement of the mission. Further, the timing at which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer advance notice display. Therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect and the mission effect are performed in relation to each other.

After that, as shown in FIG. 260 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (18), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 261 (19) following FIG. 260 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

FIG. 262 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 260 to 261. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 262 (1) to (9) are the same as those of FIGS. 260 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (10), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during normal reach, and the display does not shift to super reach, and the decoration of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is lost. It is notified that the stop display is displayed by the combination of symbols. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system does not shift to super reach. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (10).

Since the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (11) does not shift to the super reach, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice, and the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts. Will be done. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is false. In other words, because the mission was not completed before the timer notice display TM1 became "00:00", it was erased in the middle of the countdown, indicating that a certain effect was not performed. it can. The timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect relating to the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect, that is, by erasing the timer advance notice display TM1. , It may be recognized that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 262 (12), after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, as shown in FIG. 262 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" After that, as shown in FIG. 262 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the shaking with the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5". It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, even if the timer advance production is completed without developing into super reach, it may be a big hit.

FIG. 263 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 260 to 261. FIG. 264 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 263 stepwise. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 263 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 260 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "5:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. This production example is different from the production shown in FIG. 260 (3) in this respect. In this effect example, a timer advance effect in which the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain advance effect is shown. In addition, the characters "Chance in SP development" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a mission production has been started to show that the expectation of big hits will rise dramatically by developing into super reach. It is also shown that it is. In this effect example, when the mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. Therefore, by shifting to super reach, it may be possible to expect the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (4) to (13) are performed. The production examples shown in FIGS. 263 (4) to 263 (14) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 260 (4) to 260 (4), except that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 remains unchanged at "5:00". Since it is the same as FIG. (14), the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B). It is shown that it has been changed and stepped up, and that the reliability of the jackpot has improved dramatically. Further, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed is added with the icon BCHO of the face of the chief, foretelling that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 has not yet started the countdown, and at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (15), it remains at "5:00".

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1B is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (16), "4:11" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1B. .. As described above, the timer advance notice effect in this effect example does not start the timer display countdown when it is started, but starts the timer display countdown when the mission is achieved.

Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1B becomes "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (17). That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the achievement of the mission. Further, the timing at which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer advance notice display. Therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect and the mission effect are performed in relation to each other.

After that, as shown in FIG. 263 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (19) following FIG. 263 (18), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". It is shown. At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 264 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

FIG. 265 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 263 to 264. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 265 (1) to (9) are the same as those of FIGS. 263 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (10), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during normal reach, and the display does not shift to super reach, and the decoration of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is lost. It is notified that the stop display is displayed by the combination of symbols. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system does not shift to super reach.

Since the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (11) does not shift to super reach, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice, and the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts. Will be done. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is false. In other words, the timer notice display TM1 was started to be displayed, but the mission was not completed before the countdown was started, so it was erased before the countdown was started, and a certain effect was not performed. It can be said that it is shown. The timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect relating to the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect, that is, by erasing the timer advance notice display TM1. , It may be recognized that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 265 (12), after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, as shown in FIG. 265 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" After that, as shown in FIG. 265 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the shaking with the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5". It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 266 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 260 to 261. FIG. 267 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 266 stepwise. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 266 (1) to (14) are the same as those in FIGS. 260 (1) to (14), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B). , It is shown that it is stepping up, and it is shown that the reliability of the jackpot has improved dramatically. Further, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed is added with the icon BCHO of the face of the chief, foretelling that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Further, this effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 260 (15) in that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1B is reset to "5:00". At this time, the countdown of the timer display has not started, and the display of "5:00" is maintained. As described above, in this production example, the time in the timer display is reset at the timing when the mission is achieved and the display mode of the timer notice display is changed, so that the change in the display mode of the timer notice display can be easily understood. ing. In addition, after the mission is completed, it is shown that the timer display in the timer notice display is reset to an appropriate time while the display mode of the timer notice display is stepped up to a highly reliable display mode. It can also be said that it is.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1B is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 266 (16), "4:32" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1B. .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 266 (17) to 267 (20) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 266 (17) to 267 (20) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 260 (16) to 261 (19), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 268 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 269 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 268 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 268 (1) to (9) are the same as those of FIGS. 239 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (10), in order to erase the timer notice display TM1 due to the completion of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1, for example, as shown in FIG. 241 (5) as described above. It is shown that the disappearance animation is being performed.

However, as shown in FIG. 268 (11), not only the timer notice display TM1 is not erased, but also the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is added, and "22:35" is added to the timer notice display TM1. It is displayed. That is, it is found that the animation performed in FIG. 268 (10) was not actually a disappearing animation, but a timer advance notice addition animation which is an animation similar to the disappearing animation. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that a new timer advance notice effect is started using the same timer advance notice display TM1. Further, in this production example, it can be said that a part of the animation for adding the timer display in the timer notice display and a part of the animation for erasing the timer notice display are the same. Note that the timer advance notice addition animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (12), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" is displayed to indicate that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the pseudo-ream. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (13), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 268 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "18:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (14).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 268 (15) to (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the normal reach is performed and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (17).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (18), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (18).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (19) following FIG. 268 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been reported that it will develop into super reach. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (19).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 269 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "timer attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to the countdown on the timer notice display TM1. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (20).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (21), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes is performed. The effect of this timer display step-up animation is the same as that of the disappearance animation described above. That is, it can be said that a part of the animation that changes the display mode of the timer notice display and a part of the animation that erases the timer notice display are the same. The timer display step-up animation and the disappearing animation may be completely different animations.

After the timer display step-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 269 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display. From mode to special display mode (timer notice display TM
It has been changed to 1B), and it is shown that it is stepping up, and it is shown that the reliability of the jackpot has improved dramatically. In addition, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed has an icon BCHO of the face of the chief, foretelling that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, a countdown is performed, and "4:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (22).

Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1B becomes "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (23). That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1B in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect for displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 269 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (25), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 269 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, the timer notice effect is performed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and finally the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Even if the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, and the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be lost.

FIG. 270 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 268 to 269, and FIG. 271 is a diagram showing a continuation of one example of the effect shown in FIG. 270 stepwise. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 270 (1) to (9) are the same as those of FIGS. 268 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (10), it is shown that the above-mentioned disappearance animation is performed in order to erase the timer notice display TM1 due to the completion of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1. There is. This disappearance animation has at least a part of the same display mode as the disappearance animation shown in FIG. 268 (10). As a result, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether the timer notice display is continuously displayed or erased.

As shown in FIG. 270 (11), in this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (12), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" is displayed to indicate that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the pseudo-ream.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (13), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 270 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 270 (15) to 270 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the normal reach is performed and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (18), it is shown that the weak Sabohani group notice is being performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (19) following FIG. 270 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been reported that it will develop into super reach.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 271 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the type of super reach is notified, which is different from the effect shown in FIG. 269 (20).

After that, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (21).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (22), the screen in which the main character's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is notified that the scheduled display will be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

After that, as shown in FIG. 271 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 271 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 272 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 241. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 272 (1) to (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 241 (1) to (4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (5), the timer advance notice addition animation, which is the same effect as the disappearance animation, is started during the countdown display on the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer advance notice display TM1 has the same effect as the disappearance animation. It shows how the effect is displayed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the possibility that the notice that the pseudo-ream will be performed is a false notice is notified. As a result, the player may be made to think that the timer notice display TM1 is erased and is a fake notice.

However, as shown in FIG. 272 (6), not only the timer notice display TM1 is not erased, but also the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is added, and "20:00" is added to the timer notice display TM1. It is displayed. That is, it is found that the animation performed in FIG. 272 (5) was not actually a disappearing animation, but a timer advance notice addition animation which is an animation similar to the disappearing animation. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to recognize that another effect is performed by adding the timer display while predicting that a pseudo-ream will be performed as a certain effect. is there. Further, in this production example, it can be said that a part of the animation for adding the timer display in the timer notice display and a part of the animation for erasing the timer notice display are the same. Note that the timer advance notice addition animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (7), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the characters "hot" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is high. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (8), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 272 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the lower center of the display screen, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "16:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (9).

After that, as shown in FIG. 272 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice is being performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "13:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (10).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (11), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "10:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (11).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 272 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "4:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (12).

Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (13). That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect for displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

In this production example, the timer display is added, the timer notice effect related to the timer display after the addition is performed, and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, resulting in a loss, but it may be a big hit. You may.

However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (14), the screen in which the main character's lord was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the middle symbol in the substantially center. The "decoration 6" to be displayed is displayed, and it is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". As described above, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, even if the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect, a loss display result may be obtained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 272 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 272 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 273 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 274 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 273 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 273 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 273 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. A hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the three special figures 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. All of the three hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. It is displayed as the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, respectively, and the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Of these two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is the default display mode, while the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is the special display mode. Both the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side display "03:00" as the timer display, and a certain notice is given when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. It suggests that the production will start. Further, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side has an icon BCHO of the face of the chief, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a certain notice effect will be performed. Further, in each of these timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer display countdown has not been started, and the timer display is maintained at "03:00".

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Then, in the approximate center of the display screen, the characters "strong timer is activated when the princess appears" are displayed, and when the princess character appears from the treasure box, the advantageous timer notice of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is displayed. It is notified that the timer advance notice effect is performed by the timer advance notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side of the display. The timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, the timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (6) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been notified that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. Further, the timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (7), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Then, the characters "attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (8), the character BBA of the auntie appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the characters "It was bad" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has failed. ing. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mini-game mission has failed. The timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (9), the character "kochija" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the right side, which is the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB. The timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1RB displayed in is erased is started, and the timer notice display TM1RB is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is not performed. .. In addition, both of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB may be erased so that the timer notice effect related to any of the timer notice displays is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (10), the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is completely erased, and only the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is displayed. ing. Further, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 273 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 273 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1L is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol. That is, the timer notice display TM1L will be displayed across the next symbol variation display. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1L is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1L is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (14), the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1L is started, and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this production example, it is shown that due to the failure in the mini-game, a false notice is not performed for either of the two timer notice displays.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (15), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (16), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (17), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (18), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 274 (19) following FIG. 273 (18). After that, as shown in FIG. 274 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Will be done. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, although the mini-game fails and any timer notice production ends in the middle and the lost symbol is finally displayed, it may be a big hit.

FIG. 275 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 273 to 274, and FIG. 276 is a diagram showing a continuation of one example of the effect shown in FIG. 275 stepwise. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 275 (1) to (7) are the same as those in FIGS. 273 (1) to (7), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "Expect" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. In that respect, it is different from the production shown in FIG. 273 (8). In addition, the characters "Chance" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mini-game mission has been successful. The timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (9), the character "kochija" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the timer notice that is not the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is displayed. It is shown that the timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side of the display is erased is started, and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is performed. Therefore, as compared with the effect shown in FIG. 273 (9), the timer advance effect having a high possibility that a certain effect is executed is executed, so that the expectation that a certain effect is executed is improved. May be possible. It should be noted that both the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB may not be erased, and the timer notice effect related to either timer notice display may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (10), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is completely erased and only the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is displayed. ing. Further, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 275 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol. That is, the timer notice display TM1RB will be displayed across the next symbol variation display. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (14), the timer notice display TM1RB is not erased, and the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 275 (14), "02:76" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. In addition, the characters "Attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the display mode of the hold icon may change. Therefore, attention should be paid to the hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (15), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown continues, and "01:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 275 (15).

Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (16), at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani. It changes and becomes a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1RB is shown. After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, or the first display mode. After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB may be "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB may be "00:00". At the timing of "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani. The hold icon in the display mode of the sabohani has a higher reliability of the jackpot than the hold icon of the panda described above. Further, when the hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon. That is, it may be a pre-reading notice for confirming the jackpot.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (17), the timer notice display TM1RB is erased when the countdown is completed, then the first stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. .. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (18), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 276 (19) following FIG. 275 (18), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 276 (20). After that, as shown in FIG. 276 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Will be done. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 277 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 275 to 276, and FIG. 278 is a diagram showing a continuation of one example of the effect shown in FIG. 277 stepwise. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 277 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 275 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, FIG. 275 (3) is different except that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is "18:00". ) Is the same as the production shown in). In this way, by making the time indicated by the timer display different between the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, it is difficult to understand which advance notice effect corresponds to a certain advance notice effect, and the game is monotonized. May be suppressed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 277 (4) to (7) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 277 (4) to (7) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 275 (4) to (7), and the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side. Since they are the same except that they are different, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "Please expect super" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. It is shown. Moreover, this production example is different from the production shown in FIG. 275 (8) in that it suggests that a special privilege is given by displaying the characters "Please expect super". In addition, the characters "Chance" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mini-game mission has been successful. Of the timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is left as "03:00", and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is It is left at "18:00", and the countdown has not started in either case.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (9), the characters "There are two" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is not the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB. It is shown that the timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side of the timer notice display is erased is started, and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is performed.

However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (10), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is not erased, and as a result of the timer display selection animation being performed, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is performed. The display mode of is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1LA), and it is shown that the display mode is stepping up, and the possibility that a certain effect is performed is improved. Has been done. In addition, the characters "Expect both" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character, suggesting that there are expectations for any of the two timer advance notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB. The timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB have not yet started the countdown.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 277 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 277 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 and the character display displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are also deleted. In this production example, the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB are continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol. That is, these timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB will be displayed across the next symbol variation display. Of the timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side is left as "03:00", and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is It is left at "18:00", and the countdown has not started in either case.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in this production example, the characters "Attention to the left" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB is displayed. It suggests that the countdown will start. Note that the timer display on the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB has not yet started the countdown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (14), the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is performed on the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB. To be started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 277 (14), "02:76" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown. In addition, the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the display mode of the hold icon may change. Therefore, attention should be paid to the hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (15), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side continues the countdown, and at the timing shown in FIG. 277 (15), "01:50" is displayed. There is. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 277 (16), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side becomes “00:00”. It changes to the display mode of Sabohani and becomes the pre-reading display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side. After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, or the first display mode. After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA may be "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA may be "00:00". At the timing of "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (17), the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side is erased because the countdown is completed. After that, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (18), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (19) following FIG. 277 (18), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 278 (20). After that, as shown in FIG. 278 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Will be done. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol. That is, the timer notice display TM1RB is displayed over three times of the symbol variation display. The timer notice display TM1RB remains at "18:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (22), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Here, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, which is the display mode of Sabohani. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The timer notice display TM1RB has not yet started the countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (23), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (24), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 278 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown has not yet started, and it is left as "18:00".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (26), a normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown has not yet started, and it is left as "18:00".

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1RB is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (27), "17:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. ..

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (28), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown continues, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (28).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (29), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (29).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 278 (30), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "timer attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1RB. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is still continuing, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (30).

Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB becomes "0:00", FIG. 2
In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 78 (31), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. That is, in this effect example, a certain advance notice effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1RB is the strong cut-in image CI1a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 278 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. The timer notice display TM1RB has been deleted because the countdown has been completed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (33), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 278 (34), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

In this production example, a plurality of timer advance notice productions are performed, and an example corresponding to a certain production different from each other is shown.

FIG. 279 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 280 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 279 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 279 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 273 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (6) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been notified that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest to be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (7), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "directing activation" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Has been done. In addition, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (9), the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started on the timer notice display TM1. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (9), "02:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (10), the hold change animation is started at the second hold icon h12, and it is notified that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change. In addition, the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to changes in the display mode of the hold icon. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (10).

Then, as shown in FIG. 279 (11), at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. It changes to, and it becomes a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is shown. After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the button hold display mode, or the second hold icon h12 may be displayed. After the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 may be "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 may be changed. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the button hold display mode at the timing when becomes "00:00". As described above, in this production example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is first started to be displayed, and then the mini game is started in a state where the countdown is not started. Then, when the result of the mini game is successful, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and then the countdown is completed (that is, "00:00"). It can be said that a pending change production is being performed as a production. Further, the start order of each effect is not limited to the above. For example, after the timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed after the mini game is started and the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is started. , The result of the mini-game may be derived, and if the result of the mini-game is successful, a certain effect may be performed at the timing when the countdown is completed.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed. Further, the character "button hold" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the second hold icon h12 has changed to the button hold display mode.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 279 (13), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 279 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. The display mode of the second hold icon h12, which is the button hold display mode, does not change, and the button hold display mode remains the same.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (15), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (16), it is shown that the mini game is started using the entire display screen. Specifically, the characters "Holding Change Chance" are displayed along with the icon of the Bancho's face, indicating that the mini-game by Amidakuji has started. Then, the Bancho's face icon BCHO appears in the Amida field, showing that it is located in the middle of the three options. In addition, the character "Choose" is displayed below the Amida field, prompting you to operate the operation key unit 137 and select one of the three options for the Bancho's face icon BCHO. .. In addition, the characters "Do your best" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that the player is being encouraged.

After that, after the mini-game by Amidakuji is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (17) shows that a new timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started when a new timer advance notice display TM1N is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1N is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1N, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

After that, the timer display (time display) countdown on the timer notice display TM1N (
The subtraction display) is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (18), “04:77” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (19) following FIG. 279 (18) is in the middle of the three options in the Amida field. The Bancho's face icon BCHO, which was located at, moves to the right of the three options. Further, in the timer notice display TM1N, the countdown continues, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 280 (19).

After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the right side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, the ghost leg is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 280 (20). The production starts. At this time, at the three end points of the Amida field, either a "press" for starting the operation effect of holding the button or an "x" indicating a failure is displayed. Specifically, "push" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "push" is displayed at the right end point. ing. The number of "push" displayed may be one, or "push" may be displayed at all end points. At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1N continues the countdown, and "03:88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 280 (20).

After that, the Bancho's face icon BCHO moves on the line according to the rules of the ghost leg, and as shown in FIG. 280 (21), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the Bancho's face icon BCHO is among the three end points. It is shown that the end point on the left side of is reached. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho has reached the end point on the right side where "push" is displayed, the mission is successful, and the operation production of button hold is started. It has been notified that this has been confirmed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1N, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 280 (21).

As shown in FIG. 280 (22), in response to the result of the mini game, at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes "00:00", the first hold icon h11 of the button hold display mode is set to ". The character "push" is added, and it is notified that the operation effect of holding the button is started. In addition, the characters "Yoshia" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to congratulate the player. After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes "00:00", the character "push" may be added to the first hold icon h11, or "push" may be added to the first hold icon h11. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1N may be set to "00:00" after the character "" is added, or the first hold is made when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes "00:00". The character "push" may be added to the icon h11. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance effect is performed a plurality of times, and a certain advance effect performed as a result is performed for the same hold icon.

In FIG. 280 (23), it is shown that the operation valid period related to the operation effect of the button hold is started because the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N is set to "00:00", and the decorative symbol display is displayed. In the device 208, the timer notice display TM1N is not erased, and the characters "hold change when the button is pressed" are displayed to explain the game.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 280 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the button hold display mode to the Sabohani display mode. Further, on the timer notice display TM1N, the characters "super hot hold" are displayed, and it is notified that the first hold icon h11 has become a highly reliable display mode. In addition, the characters "next hot ze" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that there is a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the next symbol variation display.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the button hold operation effect is started, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the button hold operation effect is not started. In the variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon of the button hold), the jackpot symbol is easily confirmed and displayed.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 280 (25), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. At this time, the timer notice display TM1N is erased. After that, as shown in FIG. 280 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 281 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect following from FIG. 279 (18). In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (19a) following FIG. 279 (18) shows that the Bancho's face icon BCHO is located on the right side of the three options in the Amida field. There is. Further, in the timer notice display TM1N, the countdown continues, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 281 (19a).

After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the right side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, the ghost leg is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 281 (20a). The production starts. At this time, "x" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "push" is displayed at the right end point. .. At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1N continues the countdown, and "03:88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 281 (20a).

After that, the Bancho's face icon BCHO moves on the line according to the rules of the ghost leg, and as shown in FIG. 281 (21a), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the Bancho's face icon BCHO is among the three end points. It is shown that the end point on the left side of is reached. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho has reached the end point on the right side where "x" is displayed, the mission has failed, and the operation production of button hold is not started. Is notified. Further, in the timer notice display TM1N, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 281 (21a).

As shown in FIG. 281 (22a), in response to the result of the mini game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the disappearance animation during the countdown display on the timer notice display TM1N, and the timer notice display TM1N is erased. It is shown. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the button hold operation effect is not performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N, it is notified that the notice that the button hold operation effect is performed is a false notice. In other words, timer notice display TM
It can be said that it is erased in the middle of the countdown before 1N becomes "00:00", and it can be said that a certain effect (button hold operation effect) is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (23a), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1N is completely erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (24a), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes.

Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (25a), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the button hold display mode to the default display mode. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the operation effect of holding the button was not performed because the mini game failed, and the game ended unexploded. If the button hold operation effect is not performed and the button is held unexploded, the symbol variation display based on the hold of the button hold target is likely to be lost, but it may be a big hit.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 281 (26a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 281 (27a), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 282 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 279 to 280. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 282 (1) to (7) are the same as those of FIGS. 279 (1) to (7), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (8), the character BBA of the auntie appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character "Uhihi" is displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has failed. .. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1 was a fake timer advance notice effect. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (9), the disappearance animation is started on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, but it is erased before the countdown is started, indicating that a certain effect has not been performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (10), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 282 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 282 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (14), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 282 (15), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, resulting in a look-ahead display mode. In this production example, the result of the mini game was a failure, and the display mode of the hold icon as a certain notice effect was not changed by the timer notice effect, but the display mode of the hold icon was not changed regardless of the timer notice effect. Even if the result of the mini-game is unsuccessful, the result of the production (the hold icon changes to the hold icon of Sabohani) may be the same. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 279 to 280 and described above, when the display mode of the hold icon changes as a result of the success of the mini game, the mini game is described as shown in FIG. 282 and described above. It is easier to get a big hit than when the display mode of the hold icon changes although it fails, but it goes without saying that it is not limited to this.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 282 (16), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. At this time, the characters "next hot ze" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur in the next symbol variation display. After that, as shown in FIG. 282 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 283 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 283 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 273 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character of the bancho appears and a display indicating the roll of "1" on the dice. "If appears, the hold change" is displayed, and it is foretold that the display mode of the hold icon will change when the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed after the mini-game is started. In this mini-game, the result is derived without the operation by the effect button 136.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (5), it is shown that the dice symbol has started the variable display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 283 (6), the decorative symbol display device 208 stopped and displayed the dice symbol in a manner indicating a "3" roll, indicating that the mission was not achieved. ing. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that the mini-game has failed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is erased before the countdown starts, indicating that a certain effect has not been performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 283 (7), in response to the result of the mini game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 and shows that the timer notice display TM1 is erased. ing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (8), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1N is completely erased.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 283 (9), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 283 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, the result is derived without operating the effect button 136 in the mini game, but the result may be derived by operating the effect button 136 in the mini game. In this case, , There is a possibility that a certain advance effect will be performed in the case where the result is derived by operating the effect button 136 in the mini game than in the case where the result is derived without operating the effect button 136 in the mini game. May be high, and the reliability of the jackpot may be high.

FIG. 284 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 284 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 284 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. A hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the three special figures 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. All of the three hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the default display mode. Further, in this production example, a 7-segment display device SEG composed of 4-digit 7-segments is shown. This 7-segment display device SEG is provided with a full-color LED for each segment, and is configured to be capable of emitting full-color light for each segment. Further, although the 7-segment display device SEG is provided on the front frame door 106, for example, it may be provided on the door 108 with the ball storage plate or the game board 200. At the timing shown in FIG. 284 (1), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. It is displayed as the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, the timer advance notice display is also started in the 7-segment display device SEG, and "0300" is displayed in the white light emitting mode.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (6) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been notified that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest to be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (7), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "directing activation" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Has been done. In addition, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the timer display countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (9), the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started on the timer notice display TM1. In addition, the countdown of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is also started at the same time. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 284 (9), "02:75" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and "0275" is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance effect is performed by each of the plurality of devices. Here, when the timer advance notice effect is performed by a plurality of devices at the same time, a certain effect may be started more easily than when the timer advance notice effect is performed by one timer advance notice display, and the reliability of the big hit. The degree may be high.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (10), the hold change animation is started at the second hold icon h12, and it is notified that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change. In addition, the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to changes in the display mode of the hold icon. The timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (10), "01:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. "0175" is displayed on the SEG display device SEG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 284 (11), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes “00:00”. The display mode changes from to button hold to a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG. .. After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00", the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. Alternatively, after the display mode of the second hold icon h12 has changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00". Alternatively, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00". It may change. In this production example, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG display two timer notices, but only one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG displays the timer notice. May be done. In this case, when the timer notice display is performed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain notice effect is always performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG are made sure to be performed. If the timer notice display is performed on only one of the two, a certain notice effect may not be performed. Further, the timer notice display may be displayed by three or more effect display devices, and the higher the number of displayed timer notice displays, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. For example, when there is one timer notice display, the weak cut-in image CI1b is likely to be displayed as a certain notice effect, and when there are two timer notice displays, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain notice effect. When it is easy to display and the timer notice display is three or more, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be easily displayed as a certain notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (12), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed, and is turned off when the countdown in the 7-segment display device SEG is also completed. Further, the character "button hold" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the second hold icon h12 has changed to the button hold display mode.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not performed.

FIG. 285 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 286 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 285 stepwise. FIG. 287 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 286. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 285 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 284 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (3), the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and the state after the timer advance notice effect is started is shown. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode, and at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (3), "09:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. In this production example, the time set in the timer notice display TM1 is, for example, "10:00". Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the timer advance notice display has not been started and is turned off.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, in the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "09:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (4).

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, in the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "06:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (5). At this time, the timer notice display is started on the 7-segment display device SEG, and "3000" is displayed in the red light emitting mode. Here, when the light emitting mode of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, a certain advance notice effect is more likely to be started as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed as compared with the case where the 7-segment display device SEG is white. In this production example, the timer notice display by the 7-segment display device SEG functions as a look-ahead notice, and the target of a certain notice effect is different from the timer notice display by the timer notice display TM1.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (6) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been notified that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest to be opened. Further, in the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "04:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (6). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (7), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Further, in the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "03:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (7). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "directing activation" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Has been done. In addition, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that a certain advance notice effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is started. .. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "03:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (8). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (9) shows that the decorative symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and “02:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (9). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (10), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the first hold icon h11 display mode may change. In addition, the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to changes in the display mode of the hold icon. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285 (10). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

Then, as shown in FIG. 285 (11), at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani. It changes and becomes a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is shown.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed. In addition, the characters "hot" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur in the next symbol variation display.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 286 (13) following FIG. 285 (12), the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" are displayed. Temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of. After that, as shown in FIG. 286 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the display of characters and the variable icon h0 displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are also deleted. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not yet started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (15), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not yet started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the 7-segment display device SEG is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (16), "2978" is displayed on the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG. ing.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (17) shows that the mini game is started. When the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, the characters "Strong Cut-in Chance" are displayed along with the icon of the Bancho's face, indicating that the mini-game by Amidakuji has started. Then, the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho appears in the Amida field, and it is shown that it is located on the right side of the three options. In addition, the character "Choose" is displayed below the Amida field, prompting you to operate the operation key unit 137 and select one of the three options for the Bancho's face icon BCHO. .. The timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and "2833" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (17).

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (18), the bancho located on the right side of the three options in the Amida field. The face icon BCHO moves to the left of the three options. The timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and "2580" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (18).

After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the left side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, the production of the Amida lottery is started. At this time, at the three end points of the Amida field, either "○" indicating success or "x" indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, "x" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "○" is displayed at the right end point. ing. The number of "○" displayed may be 2 or more, or "○" may be displayed at all end points. After that, as shown in FIG. 286 (19), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho is moving on the line according to the rules of the ghost leg. The timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is still counting down, and "2411" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (19).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (20), it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho has reached the end point on the right side of the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, the Bancho's face icon BCHO reaches the end point on the right side where "○" is displayed, and the characters "Yatte" are displayed near the navigation character YM, and the mission is successful. However, it has been notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been confirmed to be displayed. Further, in the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2236" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (20).

After that, the mini-game is finished, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (21) continues to display the decorative symbol in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "waiting for intense heat" are displayed, and it is notified that a strong cut-in image CI1a with high reliability of the big hit appears. Further, in the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2185" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (21).

After that, "decoration 5" is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, and when the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 286 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower center of the display screen is displayed. "Reach" is displayed on the screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. The timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and "2005" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (22).

After that, as shown in FIG. 286 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and "1927" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (23).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (24), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. Further, in this production example, the display mode of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is changed from the red display mode to the rainbow display mode in which the display mode changes to multiple colors. In the timer display of the rainbow display mode, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the timer display of the red display mode, and a certain effect is more likely to be started. Here, when the timer display is displayed in the rainbow display mode, the jackpot symbol may be surely displayed, or a certain effect may be always started. Further, in the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "1737" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (24).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 287 (25) following FIG. 286 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. Will be done. Further, in the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "1010" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 287 (25).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 287 (26), the button continuous striking effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and "0500" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 287 (26). After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 287 (27), the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed during the execution of the button continuous striking effect. This strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed in response to success as a result of a mini game by Amidakuji, but in this production example, the strongest cut-in image CI1v which is more advantageous than the strong cut-in image CI1a is It is displayed, and it is informed that the expectation of the big hit is dramatically increasing. At this time as well, the player continuously hits the effect button 136. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and "0200" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 287 (27).

After that, at the timing when the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "0000", in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 287 (28), the character of the bancho whose clothes are torn appears with the characters "Premier". However, it is shown that the premiere notice is being held. This informs the player that the jackpot has been confirmed. As described above, in this effect example, a certain advance notice effect to be targeted differs between the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer advance notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG. It is shown that it is. Further, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 was performed in one symbol variation display from the start to the end, but the timer advance notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG is performed twice in the symbol variation display. It is shown that it is done across the display. The target symbol variation display may be different between the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer advance notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG. Further, the timer advance notice effect may be performed across the jackpot game and the symbol variation display performed after the jackpot game is completed. Further, in this production example, as a result of the timer notice production by the 7-segment display device SEG, the premier notice as a certain notice production was performed, but the notice with low reliability of the jackpot, which is not a certain notice production, is given. A fake timer notice effect to be performed may be performed. Further, a fake timer advance notice effect in which a certain advance notice effect is not performed may be performed.

As described above, in this production example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the premier notice is performed, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation) is performed as compared with the case where the timer notice effect is performed and the premier notice is not performed. (Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 287 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. At this time,
In the 7-segment display device SEG, multicolor display (rainbow display) is performed using all segments in order to congratulate the big hit. In addition, the characters "premier appearance" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the premier notice has been given.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 287 (30), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 287 (31), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased, and the 7-segment display device SEG is also turned off.

FIG. 288 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in a jackpot game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

The effect example shown in FIG. 288 (1) is, for example, an effect example following FIG. 287 (31), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" continues. The state of the confirmed display is shown in.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (2), it is shown that the big hit game is started and the big hit start effect is being performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the jackpot symbol "decoration 5" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a fan-bearing Copanda character congratulates the jackpot in the center of the display screen. The situation is shown. Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, in order to improve the decorative effect in the big hit game, multicolor display (rainbow display) is performed using all the segments. At this time, a special effect display may be performed by the 7-segment display device SEG. For example, "7777" may be displayed or a number string of puns may be displayed. Such a display may be performed, for example, to give a notice of a hold consecutive villa where a big hit will occur in the hold, or to give a notice of a probable change state after the end of the big hit game.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (3) shows that the third round has started. Then, the characters "LED attention" are displayed on the right side of the character of Copanda, suggesting that a notice effect is performed.

Then, in FIG. 288 (4), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off in front, and then, as shown in FIG. 288 (5), the character of the bancho appears with the display of the characters "Tear the clothes by repeatedly hitting the button". , The mini game is started. In this mini-game, it is possible to display the result according to the game state after the big hit game, and when the game state after the big hit game becomes a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), it is produced. As a result of repeatedly hitting the button 136, the mini-game may be successful due to the tearing of the bancho's clothes. Further, when the mini game is started, a timer is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and the operation valid period for accepting the button repeated pressing effect is displayed. In this effect example, when the mini-game is started, "1000" is displayed, and it is notified that the effect button 136 can be repeatedly hit for 10 seconds after the countdown (operation valid period) is started. When the timer display shifts to the fourth round and the operation valid period starts, the countdown starts. The display mode of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is a mode in which light is emitted in white, but a mode in which light is emitted in another color may be used. It may be different. Further, for example, a timer display (for example, a combination of specific numbers such as "9999" and "7777") indicating another time is displayed instead of "1000" indicating 10 seconds corresponding to the operation valid period. Therefore, a premier notice that the mini game will surely succeed may be given.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (6) shows the transition to the fourth round. In the fourth round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "continuous hitting" together with the button image 136a, prompting the continuous hitting of the effect button 136. In addition, the operation valid period for accepting the repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136 is started, and the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 288 (6), "0800" is displayed, indicating that 2 seconds have passed since the operation valid period was started. As described above, in this effect example, this timer display may function as a timer advance notice effect, and it is shown that the timer advance notice effect and the mini game are started at the same time. The timer advance notice effect and the mini game do not have to be started at the same time.

FIG. 288 (7) shows that the player continuously hits the effect button 136. At this time, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is set to "0500", and it is notified that the remaining time of the operation valid period is 5 seconds.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (8), the characters "sorry" and "next time reduction" are displayed, indicating that the mini game has failed. As a result, it is notified that after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the time saving state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) without shifting to the probability change state.

FIGS. 288 (5a) to (8a) show another production example following FIG. 288 (4). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (5a) shows that the above-mentioned mini-game is started. In this production example, the princess character HME is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is informed that there is a high possibility that the mini game will be successful. Further, when the mini game is started, a timer (“1000”) is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and an operation valid period for accepting the button repeated pressing effect is displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 288 (6a) to (7a) are performed. Since FIGS. 288 (6a) to (7a) are the same as those of FIGS. 288 (6) to (7), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (8a), the clothes of the character of the Bancho are torn, and the characters "Awakening of the Bancho" and "Next probability change" are displayed, indicating that the mini game has been successful. As a result, it is notified that after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the probabilistic state.

FIG. 289 is a diagram stepwise showing a display example when an error display is displayed in the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 289 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 289 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reserved for special figure 1. A hold icon is displayed. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are displayed, and the hold icons h11 and h of these two special figures 1 are displayed.
All 12 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

Further, in this production example, an error display (lower plate full tank error display ERR1) of "please pull out the ball" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. It is informed that it is doing. Since such an error can continue the game, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error is notified. When the resolution of the error that is the target of the error notification is detected (for example, when the lower plate full tank detection switch is turned off and the lower plate full tank error is resolved), the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 Is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 Is displayed as. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (2), the lower plate full tank error has not been resolved, and the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is still displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (3), the lower plate full tank error has not yet been resolved, and the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is still displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the lower plate full tank error display ERR1, and the visibility of the timer notice display TM1 is deteriorated. Therefore, the player may hurry to remove the ball from the lower plate by looking at this display state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (4), "04:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. In addition, the characters "may be pseudo-ream" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that pseudo-ream may be performed as a result of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM. There is. Even at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (4), the lower plate full tank error has not yet been resolved, the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ERR1. Has been done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289 (5), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (5). Further, even at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (5), the lower plate full tank error has not yet been resolved, the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ERR1. Has been done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289 (6), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (6). At the timing shown in FIG. 289 (6), since the player pulled out the ball from the lower plate, the lower plate full tank error was resolved and the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 was erased. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 289 (7) to (12) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 289 (7) to (12) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 239 (7) to (12), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the timer advance notice effect described above, the time until a certain effect is performed is displayed by the countdown of the timer display. For example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is changed to ". Start from "0:00", for example, display "Maybe a pending change at" 03:00 "" or "A strong cut-in occurs at" 25:00 "" and count up the timer display. It may be configured so that a certain effect is performed when the designated time is reached.

Further, in the timer advance notice effect described above, as a certain effect, a hold change effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a cut-in image display, and a jackpot confirmation notification have been described as examples, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a look-ahead mode or the like. It may be an effect of rushing into a specific zone, a movie insertion, a next notice effect, or the like.

Further, in the timer notice effect described above, the expectation of the jackpot changes by changing the color of the timer notice display. In this case, for example, in the order of red> green> yellow> blue> white. When the degree of expectation is high and the color of the timer notice display is yellow or more, the start of a certain effect may be confirmed. Further, when it is executed by a device other than the decorative symbol display device 208 such as the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain advance notice effect may be always performed. In this case, for example, when the color of the timer notice display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is blue and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is white, there is an expectation of a big hit because of the relationship of blue <white. If the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is red and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is a big hit. You may increase the reliability of.

Further, for example, when the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is white and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow, the jackpot symbol is larger than when the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red. The reliability of the jackpot may be dramatically improved by combining the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG, such as easy confirmation display. Further, the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG may be ranked respectively, and the sum of the ranks may be compared to determine the jackpot reliability. When the white rank is 1, the yellow rank is 3, and the red rank is 5, the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is white, and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow. Compared to the case (the former), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the timer notice, and the 7-segment display device SEG only displays the timer, and when the emission color is red (the latter), the latter May have a higher reliability of the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 290, an example of the display mode of the timer notice display displayed when the timer notice effect is started will be described. Here, FIG. 290 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the timer notice display.

FIG. 290 (a) shows an example in which "7:77" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. This timer display is a timer display reminiscent of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" which is a combination of jackpot decorative symbols, and the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (a) has started the timer notice effect. When it is displayed occasionally, it can be used as a premier timer display and as a notice that a big hit is confirmed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (a) is displayed, it may be displayed as a notice from which the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is derived. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur.

FIG. 290 (b) shows an example in which "99:99" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. In the above-described embodiment, the time initially displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is shorter than the fluctuation time of the symbol, but the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (b) is at least. , It is said that the time is longer than the time from the start of the display to the stop display of the symbol, and it is the time when it is recognized that the countdown is not completed during the fluctuation. When the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (b) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started, it can be used as a premier timer display as a notice for confirming a big hit. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur.

Further, the timer display shown in FIG. 290 (b) is the maximum numerical value that can be expressed in decimal, but as shown in FIG. 290 (c), the maximum numerical value that can be expressed in hexadecimal is displayed. You may do so. This may also be expected to have the same effect as the timer display shown in FIG. 290 (b).

FIG. 290 (d) shows an example in which "7:58" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. This timer display is a timer display reminiscent of the wordplay of "Nagoya", which is the prefectural capital of Aichi Prefecture, and is displayed when the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (d) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started. Can be used as a premier timer display and as a notice that a big hit will be confirmed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur.

Further, FIG. 290 (e) is a timer display (“2:23”) reminiscent of the pun of “Mt. Fuji”, which is the highest mountain in Japan, and the timer shown in FIG. 290 (d) is also shown. In some cases, the same effect as the display can be expected. In the present embodiment, in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed when the timer notice effect is started, "0" is displayed for all the digits less than 1 second, but the above-mentioned premiere The timer display is characterized in that digits of less than 1 second are also displayed. The timer display displayed as the premier timer display is not limited to the above, and various timer displays can be appropriately adopted. For example, it may be a pun such as "31:50" (Saikou) or "8:08" (Greengrocer), or a combination of decorative symbols displayed when the power is turned on, such as "03:41". (So-called morning roll) may be used.

FIG. 290 (f) shows an example in which "hit" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. When this timer display is displayed, the player may easily recognize that the jackpot is confirmed. When the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (f) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started, it can be used as a premier timer display as a notice for confirming a big hit. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur.

FIG. 290 (g) shows the timer advance notice display TM1 in a display mode that may be changed when the timer advance notice effect is started or during the timer advance notice effect. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (g) is a rainbow display mode in which the timer notice display TM1 is displayed while changing to multiple colors. When the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in this rainbow display mode, the premier timer is displayed. As a display, it can be used as a notice that the big hit will be confirmed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur. The display mode that can be adopted as the premier timer display is not limited to this, and can be set to an appropriate color.

FIG. 290 (h) shows the timer advance notice display TM1 in a display mode that may be displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started or in the middle of the timer advance notice effect. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290 (h) is a display mode in which the Sabohani character SBHN is added to the four corners, and when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in this display mode, the premier timer As a display, it can be used as a notice that the big hit will be confirmed. The character to be added is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur.

In addition, the timer notice display TM1 described above is configured to display the timer display in a square frame, but as the premier timer display, the timer notice display TM1 having a display mode different in the frame shape may be displayed. For example, the timer notice display TM1 in which the timer display is displayed in a circular frame may be used as the premier timer display.

Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 of the premier timer display described above may be counted down after the display is started, but the timer advance notice effect may be ended without performing the countdown. The jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the middle of the countdown, and the timer advance notice effect may end. Further, when the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 of the premier timer display is started, a certain advance notice effect such as a pseudo continuous effect may not be performed even if the countdown of the timer display is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a mini-game for notifying whether the timer advance notice effect is true or false based on the derivation result has been described, but the mini-game is applied to any of the above-mentioned timer advance notice effects. Can be done.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 291 to 324. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far.

FIGS. 291 to 324 are diagrams stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 291 to 324, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. Further, FIGS. 291 to 324 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first of the three decorative symbol display devices is arranged in the center.
The decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed by. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is second. 1 It overlaps the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. Although various images are displayed on each of the plurality of decorative symbol display devices in the present embodiment, all of them may be displayed on one decorative symbol display device. .. Further, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, so that the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate. .. The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can be made to look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 291 to 324, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that irradiates the light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, FIGS. 291 to 324 show the state of the fourth symbol display device 284a1,284a2, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special figure 1 has a square shape and is special. It blinks during the fluctuation display of FIG. 1, and lights in the loss lighting mode or the jackpot lighting mode during the stop display of the special figure 1. Further, the special figure 2 fourth symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 has a circular shape, blinks during the variable display of the special figure 2, and is a lost lighting mode during the stop display of the special figure 2. Or it lights up in a jackpot lighting mode. Further, in FIGS. 291 to 324, the state of the speaker 120 and the effect buttons 136 and 136z is shown.

FIG. 291 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 291 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the user interface (UI) unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon in the center thereof. h0 is displayed in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 291 (a), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode (white circular display mode). Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanation display unit is arranged, various information related to the game and the production is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at appropriate timings. Will be done. In the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 291 (a), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the character of the panda and the character of the lord is explained. This tutorial display unit TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, but may be displayed as a preview or a demo effect display, or may be hidden. Here, as a tutorial display, an explanation about the characters appearing, an explanation about a notice (for example, a timer notice), and the like are displayed. In addition, the jackpot expectation degree may be configured to be able to be notified depending on the display mode of the tutorial display (for example, display in blue, display in red, etc.). In this case, this tutorial display may be used as a notice display of the position of the notice display. In this specification, for convenience, the description described will be described as a tutorial display. That is, the tutorial display unit TT1 in this production example can be said to be an area for displaying something. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The UI unit UI3 is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative symbol, but may overlap with the display area of the decorative symbol. As described above, the UI unit UI3 functions as a display frame constituting the hold icon display area, the variable icon display area, and the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue, and the display mode may change according to the progress of the game.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanatory display unit for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 291 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, a reception number display 850 indicating the number of receptions of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the example shown in FIG. 291 (a), the reception count display 850 of the character string image of "0 more times" is displayed, and the reception count of the operation of the effect button 136 is 0 times. Further, a stock button image 852 imitating the effect button 136 is displayed below the reception number display 850. Three lines are drawn in the stock button image 852 at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stock button image 852 is divided into four regions. The stock button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 291 (a), all four regions of the stock button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is 0.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. This lord's character may be called a navigation character. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. The character of the lord may or may not be displayed all the time. Further, the stage name display unit ST1 and the character of the lord may be displayed included in the Ui unit UI3, or at least a part thereof may be displayed so as to overlap the front side of the UI unit UI3.

Further, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged, and can move and rotate in the vertical direction according to the effect content. It is configured so that it can be done. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each of them moves in the vertical direction according to the effect content. Is configured to allow Further, both the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 291 (b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image. That is, instead of a certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1), a display (display of a shutter image) before another display (display of "preparing") is performed. It can be said. It should be noted that during the display of the shutter image, at least a part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image is displayed may be displayed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (c), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a preparatory image notice display that is displayed before the display of the preparatory image RDY, which will be described later, is started. Further, the shutter image may be displayed even when the notice is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, the shutter image may be configured to be displayable in a plurality of types of display modes so that the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the display mode of the shutter image, or the display mode of the shutter image is only one type. It may be configured so that the jackpot expectation is not shown only by itself.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (d), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is openly displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparing image RDY in which the characters "preparing" are displayed. In other words, it can be said that the prepared image RDY is displayed so as to overlap the display area of the tutorial display unit TT1 and overlaps with the UI unit UI3. At the timing shown in FIG. 291 (d), the background color of the preparing image RDY is green, that is, the display mode of the preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d) is the default display mode. .. The prepared image RDY can be changed to a plurality of types of display modes, and even if the prepared image RDY is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the background color is red) at the start of display. Alternatively, the display mode may be changed to another display mode after the display is started in the default display mode. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the above-mentioned shutter image can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, it may be related to the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. For example, when the shutter image is red, the red preparing image RDY may be displayed (easily displayed). In this effect example, a certain effect (for example, timer notice, mini game, etc.) may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by displaying the preparing image RDY.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (e), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is changing from a blue display mode to a gold display mode. In this production example, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 is set to the gold display mode, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change. That is, the UI unit UI3 in this golden display mode functions as a look-ahead notice. As described above, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in the gold display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when it is displayed in the blue display mode. In addition, the UI part UI3 of this gold display mode may function as a notice of the symbol variation display, and functions as a direct look-ahead notice display, not as a change notice of the display mode of the hold icon. May be done. In addition, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 may be configured to be the default mode before the hold icon (hold icon to be read ahead) whose display mode has changed is digested, or the result of whether or not the change in the look-ahead target changes. (For example, display of a decorative symbol indicating that it is a big hit or a loss) may be configured to be the default mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (f), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed in the upper right portion of the tutorial display unit TT1. This ninja character NJ4 is a character that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this production example, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed so as to overlap the tutorial display unit TT1 on which the preparing image RDY is displayed. Therefore, when the preparing image RDY and the ninja character NJ4 can be focused on. There is.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (g), the hold change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the first hold icon h11, and the first one. The state of hitting the hold icon h11 of is shown. At this time, the effect EF4 covers the entire first hold icon h11, making it difficult to see as compared with the state where the effect EF4 does not cover the entire hold icon h11. The effect EF4 also extends to the hold icon next to the target hold icon. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 291 (g), the effect EF4 is arranged next to the first hold icon h11. A part of the second hold icon h12 also overlaps with the effect EF4. In this production example, it can be said that the hold change animation performed before the hold icon changes functions as the hold change pre-effect display. The hold change pre-effect display may include the display of the ninja character NJ4, that is, a series of animations from the start of the display of the ninja character NJ4 to the change in the display mode of the hold icon. May be used as a pending change pre-effect display. Further, only the display of the ninja character NJ4 may be used as the pending change pre-effect display. Further, the display of the ninja character NJ4 displayed after the hold change may or may not be included in the hold change pre-effect display. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold icon may not change even if the hold change animation is performed. Further, the display of the preparing image RDY may be started after the effect display regarding the ninja character NJ4. On the contrary, the ninja character NJ4 may be configured not to display the preparing image RDY. Further, it may be configured so that the prepared image RDY is more likely to appear when there is a hold icon displayed in the look-ahead mode than when there is no hold icon. According to this configuration, if the hold icon is changed after the ninja character NJ4 appears, the appearance of the preparing image RDY can be expected, so the ninja character NJ4 has a different type of notice display (hold). Icon change and in preparation The target may be different, such as RDY, or the pre-reading notice and the target change may be different, such as the notice).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (h), the effect EF4 is erased and the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a state in which the display mode is changed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 291 (h) has been changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits red light according to the display mode of the first hold icon h11. The family crest accessory 224E may emit red light after the first hold icon h11 starts to be displayed in the red display mode, or the first hold icon h11 may emit red light after the family crest accessory 224E emits red light. The hold icon h11 may start displaying in a red display mode, or the family crest accessory 224E may emit red light at the timing when the first hold icon h11 starts displaying in a red display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 291 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the pending change animation ends, and the ninja character NJ4 is erased. Further, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and are stopped and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7". The combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is a combination of loss, but it is also a combination of chances. That is, the look-ahead notice is given by deriving and displaying the combination of the chance eyes. The chance eye is easily derived and displayed when the hold icon is displayed in the look-ahead display mode, but the chance eye is displayed with an appropriate probability regardless of the display mode of the hold icon. You may. Further, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily when the chance eye is displayed than when the chance eye is not displayed. After the ninja character NJ4 is erased, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in sequence, or the ninja character NJ4 may be erased after the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed. Further, the sequential stop display of the decorative symbols may be started at the timing when the ninja character NJ4 is erased. Although the variable icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 291 (i), the variable icon h0 may be deleted at the timing when the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, as shown in FIG. 291 (j), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , Move onto the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (j), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. It can be said that the tutorial display unit TT1 continues to display the preparing image RDY, that is, the preparing image RDY is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. On the other hand, the ninja character NJ4 displayed in the previous symbol variation display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, but may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. .. On the other hand, the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be said to be a character displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (k), it is shown that "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to form a reach state. The "decoration 4" displayed on the left and right is swaying and fluctuating, and the middle symbol is fluctuating and displayed at high speed. In addition, the display screen may be darkened as a notice effect before the reach state is reached, and the UI part UI3 may be temporarily hidden, but basically, the UI part UI3 remains until the super reach is started. It is not hidden.

After that, FIG. 291 (l) shows the transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. The number of receptions displayed 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the image RDY being prepared. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. The operation of the family crest accessory 224E may be started after the super reach transition display is started, the super reach transition display may be started after the operation of the family crest accessory 224E is started, or the super The operation of the family crest accessory 224E may be started at the timing when the reach transition display is started. Further, in this production example, when shifting to at least the swordsman reach of the super reach, the UI section UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display section TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden. The UI unit UI3 may be hidden before the super reach transition display is started. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is hidden and at least the hold icon is hidden when shifting to a specific super reach. Further, the reach name (title) of the SP reach may be displayed, or the UI unit UI3 may be hidden at least when the reach name of the SP reach is displayed. Further, in the configuration in which the frame is displayed around the image RDY being prepared, the display of the frame may be a part of the UI unit UI3. In this configuration, it can be said that not all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but a part of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. Further, when the preparing image RDY is not displayed, the surrounding frame is not displayed. In this case, it can be said that all of the UI part UI3 is hidden. That is, it can be said that the non-display range of the UI unit UI3 after the transition to the super reach differs depending on whether or not the preparing image RDY is displayed in the state before the transition to the super reach. The display of the image RDY being prepared is not configured so that a certain notice display or a certain mode of effect can be specified. It should be noted that the UI unit UI3 does not have to be hidden even after shifting to the swordsman reach.

FIG. 291 (m) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. When the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the display is maintained only for the preparation image RDY, and the tutorial display unit TT1 itself is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. That is, in the prepared image RDY, the display position in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed and the display position after being hidden are the same positions. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position. Here, the family crest character 224E may return to the initial position after the swordsman reach starts, the swordsman reach may start after the family crest character 224E returns to the initial position, or the family crest character 224E. The swordsman reach may be started when the player returns to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (n), the prepared image RDY overlaps with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the effect EF5. .. That is, it can be said that the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished, and it can be said that the display before the start of a certain notice display is started. Furthermore, it can be said that a certain notice display itself is started by the display of the effect EF5. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that the display of the preparing image RDY ends (becomes hidden) when the hold icon is in the non-display state (the UI unit UI3 is in the display state).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (o), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. This mini-game is an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished, but the mini-game may be started without going through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the preparing image RDY than in the case of not passing through the display of the preparing image RDY. In this production example, the display of the image RDY being prepared ends and the mini game is started, but the display of the image RDY being prepared may end and the timer advance notice effect may be started. Further, the result of the winning / failing determination may be suddenly displayed, for example, the characters "iron plate" may be displayed without performing the mini game or the timer advance notice effect. When the mini-game starts, the mini-character MC1 and the target TGT of the lord are displayed. The target TGT is composed of regions divided into four equal parts, and at least one of the four regions (the upper region in the production example shown in FIG. 291 (o)) is the hit region. By hitting the hit area with an arrow, a highly reliable notice of the big hit is given. The number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, all areas may be hits, or all areas may be non-hit areas. Further, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of mini-games and timer notices, the certain types of mini-games and timer notices may be configured to always pass through the display of the image RDY being prepared (configuration 1). On the contrary, another type of mini-game or timer notice may be configured (configuration 2) so as not to go through the display of the image RDY being prepared. Both configuration 1 and configuration 2 may be provided, or one of the configurations may be provided.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (p), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord stuck in the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini-game as a notice display was a great success. The display showing the result of the mini game may be configured to be displayed in a cut different from the cut shown in FIG. 291 (p). It should be noted that the display of another cut may be performed regardless of success or failure, or may be configured to be performed only in the case of a specific result. In this production example, when a certain notice display is a mini game, the result display portion of the mini game may be a certain production. When a certain notice display is a mini game, the display of the "iron plate" may be a second certain effect, or may be configured such that a second certain effect is performed after the certain effect.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (q), the characters "iron plate" are displayed on the square background, and the iron plate image TP tilted by about 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction is displayed. .. This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed. As described above, in this production example, it can be said that the notice display is performed according to the result of the mini game, that is, another notice display is performed according to the result of the notice display. Further, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed instead of the mini game, it can be said that the notice display is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0. Further, when the timer notice effect is performed, another notice may be displayed in the state after the countdown is completed and becomes 0 in one cushion (for example, the countdown is completed). Including the fact that another notice display is started just before the value becomes 0).

FIG. 292 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. It should be noted that at least one of the plurality of other examples may be provided, or conversely, at least one example may not be provided. This also applies to the following figures.

FIG. 292 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 291 (l). In the description of the present embodiment, the production is illustrated as a continuation of the production example of FIG. 291. However, the production may be performed in another scene, or may be performed only as a continuation of the production example of FIG. 291. May be good. This also applies to the following figures. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 292 (a1) to 292 (a3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (o), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 292 (a4), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord deviates from the target TGT and flies to a region different from the target TGT. That is, a state in which the mini game as a notice display has failed is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 292 (a5), the iron plate image TP is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is shown that the swordsman reach is continuously performed. In this production example, when only the difference between the failure and the success of the mini game is made, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mini game is successful. Note that the timer advance notice effect may be performed instead of the mini game. For example, it may be a fake timer advance notice effect that does not display anything even if the timer display countdown is completed and becomes 0, or the timer display. When the countdown of is completed and becomes 0, an effect with low reliability (for example, the word "chance" may be displayed small somewhere) may be performed.

FIG. 292 (b1) is also an effect following FIG. 291 (l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 292 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (o), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 292 (b4), the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord hits the target TGT, but it is shown that the arrow is stuck in the non-hit area. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the mini-game was successful but not a great success.

Then, as shown in FIG. 292 (b5), the first decorative pattern display device 208L displays the princess cut-in image HCI in which the characters "chance" and the princess character are displayed on the background of the horizontal stripes. ing. In this production example, when comparing whether the mini-game was successful or a great success, it is easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed in the case of a great success than in the case of a success. ..

FIG. 292 (c1) is also an effect following FIG. 291 (l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 292 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (n), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 292 (c3), a mini game different from the mini game shown in FIG. 291 (o) is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. It is shown. The mini-game shown in FIG. 292 (c3) is also an example of a notice display in which the display of the preparing image RDY ends and is started. When the mini-game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the lateral direction starts rotating with the lateral direction as the rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In this production example, it is configured so that it is easier to succeed when the mini-game shown in FIG. 292 (c3) is started than when the mini-game shown in FIG. 291 (o) is started. The mini-game shown in (o) may be configured to be more successful. Further, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mini-game shown in FIG. 292 (c3) is started than when the mini-game shown in FIG. 291 (o) is started. However, the mini-game shown in FIG. 291 (o) may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 292 (c4), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol displaying the characters "iron plate" is derived, indicating that the mini game has been very successful.

Then, as shown in FIG. 292 (c5), the iron plate image TP is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is shown that the notice effect of confirming the big hit is being performed.

In addition, as compared with the production example shown in FIG. 291, the mini game was played in the production shown in FIG. 291. However, in the production example shown in FIG. .. Further, both timer advance notice effects may be performed, and in this case, the background color and the countdown time may be different.

FIG. 293 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

FIG. 293 (a1) shows how the swordsman reach has started. In this production example, unlike FIG. 291 (m), the preparing image RDY is not displayed. In FIG. 293 (a1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in red, and the family crest accessory 224E is also displayed in red accordingly.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (a2) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, it is shown that the mini game is started without going through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the preparing image RDY than in the case of not passing through the display of the preparing image RDY.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (a3), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord stuck in the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini-game as a notice display was a great success.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (a4), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed.

As described above, in this production example, the mini game is started without displaying the preparing image RDY, but this may be executed only during the super reach. It may be executed not only during super reach, or may be configured to be executable during or without super reach. Further, after the third display ends in the first state, there may or may not be a pattern in which a certain notice display (a certain effect) is performed from the first state to the second state. May be good. Further, a certain notice display (a certain effect) performed after the third display ends in the first state may straddle the next variation. Then, after the third display ends in the second state, a certain notice display (particularly, a certain effect) may at least start and end in the second state.

FIG. 293 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 291 (l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 293 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (n), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (b3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started instead of the mini game in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. This timer notice effect is also an example of the notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared ends. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of performing the countdown, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 293 (b3), "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started. After the countdown is started, a fake timer notice effect may be started before the timer notice effect ends before "0:00". Here, as another example of the timer advance notice effect, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 237 to 290 can be appropriately combined. In addition, it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, and the mini game may be easier than when the timer advance notice effect is started. It may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when is started. The timer advance notice effect in the present embodiment is a certain effect display (for example,) in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed after the countdown reaches "0:00" indicating 0 seconds. , Iron plate image TP), but after "0:00" indicating 0 seconds, another effect display (for example, "iron plate") is displayed in the display area where the timer display was performed. In a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed after performing a certain effect display such as identifiable display or a display related to a certain effect display such as "chance"). It may be configured to perform an effect display (for example, an iron plate image TP). Further, the timer advance notice effect in the present embodiment is configured to display up to "0:00" indicating 0 seconds as a result of performing the countdown, but may display up to "1" indicating 1 second. , May be configured to display up to "00:01". Specifically, "10" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started. Then, after "1" is displayed, another effect display (for example, a display such as "iron plate" that can identify a certain effect display in the display area where the timer display was performed, or a "chance" After performing a certain effect display (display related to such a certain effect display), a certain effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed (for example, the iron plate image TP). Here, the countdown display may be up to the display of "1", just before another effect display is displayed, or up to the display of another effect display. ). The time from the display of "1" to the start of the display of another effect display is the same as the time from the display of "2" to the start of the display of "1" (approximately the same). It may be different (that is, it is displayed at the timing of "0" in "2"->"1"->"0"). When a pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed as a certain effect display, a display representing "NEXT" or "continuation" may be displayed as another effect display. Further, although the timer display (for example, "10:00") is configured to be displayed immediately after the display of the preparing image RDY is completed, another display is displayed after the display of the preparing image RDY is completed. (For example, a display showing how the timer display is counted up from 0, or a display related to the timer display such as "until the next chance up") is displayed, and then the timer display is displayed. It may be configured so that no other display is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (b4), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (b5), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot is confirmed. That is, the timer notice effect can be said to be a notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In addition, in each effect example shown in this embodiment, an effect other than the iron plate image TP may be performed as a certain effect.

FIGS. 293 (c1) to 293 (c3) are effects following FIG. 293 (b2). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293 (c1), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. In the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 293 (c1), in addition to the timer display, the remaining time display meter MT4 is displayed in an area different from the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT4 changes so as to be gradually shortened according to the remaining time of the timer display. Then, the remaining time display meter MT4 disappears at the timing when the timer display becomes "0:00". In this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed by the display by the number in the timer display and the display in the display mode other than the number. At first, only the reduction display of the meter by the remaining time display meter MT4 is performed, and for example, the countdown by the timer display may be started when the remaining time reaches 3 seconds. In this case, the decreasing speed of the remaining time display meter MT4 may change before and after the start of the countdown by the timer display. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having different remaining times may be provided and each may display a length according to the remaining time, or two or more remaining time display meters having the same remaining time but different lengths may be provided. It may be displayed. In this case, for example, the decreasing speed of the longer remaining time display meter may be faster than the decreasing speed of the shorter remaining time display meter. Further, when a plurality of remaining time display meters are displayed, different notice displays may be performed when the remaining time display meters disappear. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having the same length may be provided so that the reduction speeds of the meters are different from each other.

Further, in this effect example, an effect may be performed in which the execution time of the timer advance notice effect is extended. For example, in the case of extension, the number 0 may be erased and the meter may be restored again. Further, the length of the meter may be different depending on the time of the timer notice. Further, the decreasing speed of the meter does not have to be constant, and for example, it may not decrease at a constant speed at a certain timing. Further, a plurality of meters may be displayed, and the length of one meter is long, but for example, as a result of the decrease rate increasing in the middle, the length of one meter may be shorter than the length of the other meter. Further, the decreasing speed of the meter does not have to be constant, and for example, the decreasing speed may be faster or slower in the state where the numbers are also displayed.

FIG. 294 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

FIG. 294 (a1) shows how the swordsman reach has started. In this production example, unlike FIG. 291 (m), the preparing image RDY is not displayed. After that, after the reach effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 294 (a2) to 294 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 294 (a4) performs a united animation and displays it. A pair of translucent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the screen. Here, the combined animation may be referred to as an introduction animation of button production or a fade-in animation (IN animation). The semi-transparent button image 136q notifies that the button image 136a is materialized and the button advance notice effect is started by combining them. Here, the introduction animation may also be included in the button notice production. The pair of translucent button images 136q move toward the center while being close to each other. In this production example, an example in which two semi-transparent button images 136q are united has been described. However, for example, an effect in which four semi-transparent button images 136q are united may be performed. In this case, two semi-transparent buttons are combined. The button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is more likely to be started when the effect of combining the four translucent button images 136q is performed than when the effect of combining the images 136q is performed. It may be. While the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted. Further, when the deca button image 136aL described later is displayed and the button advance notice effect is started, the combined animation may be performed using the same semitransparent button image 136q, or the semitransparent button image corresponding to the deca button image 136aL may be used. A coalescing animation may be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 294 (a5), it is shown that the pair of translucent button images 136q are closer to each other.

Then, when the coalescence animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 294 (a6), the button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is started. When the button notice effect is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, the character "press" is displayed together with the animation showing how the button image 136a is pressed, and the character remains below the button image 136a. The time meter MT is displayed to notify the remaining time of the operation acceptance period. Further, the effect button lamp 138 provided on the effect button 136 also emits red light in response to the start of the operation valid period. The button advance notice effect may be started after the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 may be started after the button advance notice effect is started.

FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b6) show modified examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 293 (b1) to (b5). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 293 (b1) to (b3), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 294 (b4) shows how the above-mentioned coalescence animation is started when the timer display is being counted down in the timer advance notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, the timing at which the semi-transparent button image 136q is combined by the combination animation corresponds to the timing when the countdown of the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. That is, in this production example, the combination animation And the timer advance notice effect indicate that the start of the button advance notice effect is announced. Note that the countdown may not be started immediately after the timer advance notice effect is started and the timer display is displayed, but the timer display countdown may be started at the start of the combined animation. According to this, it may be possible to easily specify the advance notice effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. Further, the timer advance notice effect may be started by ending the display of the image RDY being prepared during the display of the combined animation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 294 (b5), a pair of translucent button images 136q are further close to each other, and a state immediately before the completion of the union is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. The timer display may be set to "0:00" after the coalescence animation is completed, or the timer display may be set to "0:00" when the coalescing animation is completed.

FIG. 294 (b6) shows how the combined animation was successful, the deca button image 136aL was materialized, the button notice effect was started, and the operation acceptance state was started. In this production example, the big button image 136aL is more likely to be displayed when both the timer advance notice effect and the combined animation are performed than when only one of the timer advance notice effect and the combined animation is performed. It has become. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL is displayed, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed.

FIG. 294 (c1) is a modified example of the effect shown in FIGS. 294 (b3) to FIG. 294 (b6). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 294 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 294 (b3) to (b4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 294 (c3), a state in which a pair of translucent button images 136q are in close proximity and immediately before the completion of coalescence is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 294 (c3), when the pair of translucent button images 136q are close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q, as compared with the non-overlapping state. The semi-transparent button image 136q is difficult to see. Therefore, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful.

Then, when the coalescence animation is successful, the button notice effect by the deca button image 136aL is started as shown in FIG. 294 (c4). Since the effect shown in FIG. 294 (c4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 294 (b6), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the effect example shown in FIG. 294 also shows an example in which the preparing image RDY ends during the execution of the super reach. It should be noted that there may or may not be a pattern in which the display of the image RDY being prepared ends and the timer notice starts during the display of the introduced animation.

FIG. 295 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 295 (a), a UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon h0 placed on a pedestal in the center thereof. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 295 (a), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, the variable notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 295 (a). The background color of the preparing image RDY is red, and the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the background color is green, which is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 295 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 295 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is set to emit red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 295 (b), the prepared image RDY overlaps with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the effect EF5. .. That is, the end effect of displaying the image RDY being prepared has been started. As described above, in this production example, it can be said that the display of the preparing image RDY is completed except for the super reach.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 295 (c), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the tutorial display unit TT1 (that is, the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed). ing. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and then the countdown starts. In the effect example shown in FIG. 295 (c), "90:00" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started. Further, the background color of the timer display is red following the background color of the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is started before the development into super reach. Then, the timer display displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started is a long time of "90:00", and it can be estimated that the symbol variation display time is long, and the expectation for the big hit may be improved. As described above, in this production example, when the displayed timer display time is displayed for a long time (long time) such as "90:00", it is relatively short time such as "10:00". It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when it is displayed in (short time). Further, in this effect example, since the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, the timer display tends to be started with a long time in the timer advance notice effect. Further, in this production example, the timer display has a long time and the background is red, so that the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically improved.

FIG. 295 (d) shows the transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. The number of receptions displayed 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are difficult to see because the family crest accessory 224E overlaps. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the timer notice display during the countdown display of the timer display. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. At the timing shown in FIG. 295 (d), the timer display is "30:00".

FIG. 295 (e) shows how the above-mentioned coalescence animation is started when the timer display is being counted down in the timer advance notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, too, the timing at which the semi-transparent button image 136q is merged by the coalescence animation corresponds to the timing when the countdown on the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. That is, in this production example, the coalescing animation And the timer advance notice effect indicate that the start of the button advance notice effect is announced.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 295 (f), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are brought closer to each other, and a state immediately before the union is completed is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. In this production example, the background color of the timer notice display is red, and the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the default background color is displayed, but the same may be applied. The reliability of the jackpot may be the same depending on whether the timer notice display has the default background color or the red background color.

FIG. 295 (g) shows that the union animation was successful, the deca button image 136aL was materialized, the button notice effect was started, the remaining time meter MT was displayed, and the operation acceptance state was started. There is. In this production example, the longer the time for counting down the timer in the timer display, the more likely it is that a big hit will occur.

FIG. 296 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 296 (a1), a UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon h0 placed on a pedestal in the center thereof. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 296 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, the variable notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest accessory 224E has a red light emitting mode according to the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 296 (a1). The background color of this preparing image RDY is green, which is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 296 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 296 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a2), the prepared image RDY overlaps with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the effect EF5. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. When the mini-game starts, the mini-character MC1 and the target TGT of the lord are displayed. The target TGT is composed of regions divided into four equal parts, and the upper region of the four regions is the hit region, and the hit area is hit by an arrow to determine the reliability of the jackpot. High notice is being given. In this production example, it is shown that a mini game is being played before the transition to super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a4), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord stuck in the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini-game as a notice display was a great success.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a5), since the mini game was very successful, the display mode of the variable icon h0 changed from the red display mode to the golden display mode, that is, the variable icon h0. It is shown that the notice by is increasing. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits gold in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. After the variable icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, the family crest accessory 224E may change from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode, or the family crest accessory 224E may emit red light. After changing to the mode or the golden light emitting mode, the variable icon h0 may change from the red display mode to the golden display mode, or the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode. Then, the family crest accessory 224E may be changed from a red light emitting mode to a golden light emitting mode. Then, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the closing operation by the shutter image is started, and the displayed mini-game display is shifted to the invisible state by the shutter image. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed after the closing operation by the shutter image is started. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. Further, in this production example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed as a result of the mini game, but the hold icon may be changed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a6), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. As a result, the display of the mini game is completely erased by the shutter image.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (a7), the tutorial display unit TT1 closed by the shutter image shows how the shutter image is released. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a hidden state in which no display is performed. The tutorial display may be started when the shutter image is released, or another notice display, timer notice display, or mini game may be started. Further, the display may be grayed out after the shutter image is released.

Subsequently, an example showing how the mini-game is started without displaying the preparing image RDY will be described with reference to FIGS. 296 (b1) to (b8).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (b1), since one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 is displayed in red, and a notice is displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 is in the default display mode. In the tutorial display unit TT1, "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 296 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (b2), it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image. As a result, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (b3), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a mini-game notice display that is displayed before the display of the mini-game, which will be described later, is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is openly displayed by a predetermined open animation. In this production example, when the shutter image is released, the mini game is started on the tutorial display unit TT1. That is, in this production example, a state in which the mini game is started is shown instead of the explanation display that has been performed so far. It can also be said that the mini-game is shown to start without displaying the preparing image RDY. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 296 (b4) to (b8) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 296 (b4) to (b8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 296 (a3) to (a7), the description thereof will be omitted. After the mini-game is finished, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display the explanation or gray out the display.

FIG. 297 is a diagram stepwise showing a display example in the tutorial display unit TT1 applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 297 (a1), a UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon h0 placed on a pedestal in the center thereof. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 297 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, the variable notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest accessory 224E has a red light emitting mode according to the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 297 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 297 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 297 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 297 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image. That is, it can be said that the display (display of the shutter image) before the other display (notice display) is performed instead of the certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1). .. It should be noted that during the display of the shutter image, at least a part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image is displayed may be displayed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (a3), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a display before the notice display, which is displayed before the notice display described later is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (a4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is openly displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display unit TT1, when the shutter image is released, a notice display consisting of the characters "super heat" is displayed instead of the preparing image RDY, the mini game, or the timer notice effect. This "super heat" notice display may be displayed as a result of performing a mini game or a timer notice effect. In this case, even if it is displayed as a result of the mini-game or the timer advance notice effect, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when it is displayed without going through the mini-game or the timer advance notice effect. Good. Further, the notice display of this "super heat" may not be displayed as a result of performing the mini game or the timer notice effect. Further, in this effect example, it is not necessary to perform the effect of closing the tutorial display unit TT1 by the shutter image before displaying the notice such as "extreme heat".

FIGS. 297 (b1) to 297 (b8) show an example of an effect showing how the notice icon appears in the tutorial display unit TT1. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 297 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 297 (a1) to (a3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is openly displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display unit TT1, when the shutter image is released, it is shown that the timer advance notice icon I81, which gives notice that the timer advance notice effect is performed, appears. As a result, it is announced that the timer advance notice effect will be performed. In addition, other notice icons may appear.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (b5), the timer advance notice icon I81 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 pops out from the tutorial display unit TT1 and moves upward while expanding. The situation is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (b6), the closing operation by the shutter image is started in the tutorial display unit TT1.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (b7), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. As a result, the display state on the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to see. In this production example, the timer advance notice icon I81 is maintained in the state of being displayed until the shutter image is completely closed, and the timer advance notice icon I81 is notified that it will be stocked. , It may be erased when the closing operation by the shutter image is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (b8), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is openly displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparing image RDY. At the timing shown in FIG. 297 (b8), the preparing image RDY is in the default display mode. This preparing image RDY is displayed because the timer advance notice icon I81 is stocked. That is, the start of the timer advance notice effect is announced by the display of the preparing image RDY. In this production example, the display mode of the preparing image RDY for notifying the start of the timer notice effect and the display mode of the preparing image RDY for notifying the start of the mini game are the same, but they are different. It may be. Further, the mini game or the timer advance notice effect may be started without displaying the preparing image RDY.

FIG. 298 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, even if the end timing of the third display, the start or end timing of a certain notice display, and the start or end timing of a certain effect are different states among the subdivided states of the second state. It may be in the same state.

FIG. 298 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 291 (l). Since the effect shown in FIG. 292 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 291 (m), the description thereof will be omitted. In the production shown in FIG. 298 (a1), the display may be started after the image RDY being prepared has developed into super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (a2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and then, as shown in FIG. 298 (a3), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and " The combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started. At this time, the preparing image RDY is still displayed. That is, it can be said that the preparing image RDY is displayed in a state where the display indicating that it is a big hit is made. In addition, to congratulate the big hit, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the shogun character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow display mode that emits light in multiple colors.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (a4), the prepared image RDY overlaps with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the effect EF5. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 298 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of performing the countdown, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 298 (a5), "3:00" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started. After the countdown is started, a fake timer notice effect may be started before the timer notice effect ends before "0:00".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (a6), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (a7), the character "Go" is displayed in the display area where the timer display was performed, and it is notified that a certain advance notice effect is started. There is. The display of the characters "Go" may or may not be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (a8), it is shown that the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol has been started. Then, as shown in FIG. 298 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started. The display of the big button image 136aL corresponds to a certain advance notice effect, that is, it corresponds to the advance notice effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed. Here, for example, when the timer advance notice effect is not performed, the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol does not have to be started, and when the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol is started, the default display instead of the big button image 136aL is displayed. The button image 136a of the aspect may be displayed. In addition, a mini game may be played instead of the timer advance notice effect. Further, the big button image 136aL may be displayed even when the timer advance notice effect or the mini game is not performed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 298 (a9), the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is changed from the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". It is changed to the combination of decorative symbols of, and it is notified that the probability variation jackpot has been confirmed. That is, it is notified that the jackpot symbol has been promoted.

FIGS. 298 (b1) to 298 (b4) show a state in which the countdown of the timer display by the timer advance notice effect is started during the continuation of the animation of the duel scene in the super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (b1), it is shown that the animation of the duel scene is continuing. At this time, the timer notice effect is started, and the timer notice display is displayed in the display area where the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 298 (b1), "10:00" is displayed as the timer display on the timer notice display, and then the countdown is started. The countdown may start before the development of the super reach, after the development of the super reach, or at the timing of the development of the super reach, or the reach. It may be before the transition to the state, after the transition to the reach state, and before the development to the super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (b2), the button notice effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT. .. That is, it is shown that the final judge production has started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 298 (b2), the timer display indicates "9:00". That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer display is counted down by the timer notice effect during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136. Here, the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 is longer than the length of the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the final judge effect and the length of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 298 (b3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (b4), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 4" -The combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, it is suggested that the countdown of the timer display is still continuing, that is, there is a possibility that the jackpot symbol may be promoted after that. In this production example, the timer display is configured so as not to be "0:00" even when the production button 136 is not operated in the final judge production. This is because, for example, a combination of lost decorative symbols is displayed in the final judge effect, and then the revival effect is performed at the timing when the timer display becomes "0:00". On the contrary, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect, the count may be 0.

FIG. 299 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a timer advance notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 299 (a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 297 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (b), it is shown that the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the preparing image RDY. Only one type of display mode is prepared for the image RDY being prepared in this production example, and change display to another display mode is not performed. As described above, in this production example, the reliability of the jackpot cannot be known in the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. Further, when there are a plurality of types of a certain notice display or a certain effect, it is not possible to know which certain notice display or a certain effect is to be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (c), the preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. .. In this production example, one of a plurality of colors is selected as the background color in the timer notice display, and the reliability of the jackpot is indicated by the background color. In the production example shown in FIG. 299 (c), the background color of the timer notice display is blue, which is a mode with low reliability. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display is "10:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Note that the background color of the timer notice display may change before or after the timer display countdown starts, so that the reliability may be improved on the way.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (d), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. Further, it is shown that the decorative symbols are in the reach state with "decoration 4" stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. The timer display may be in the reach state after the timer display is set to "0:00", the timer display may be set to "0:00" after the timer display is set to "0:00", and the timer display may be set to "0:00". The reach state may be reached at the timing of "0:00". In this production example, there is a correspondence relationship with the display indicating that when the countdown of the timer display becomes 0, it develops into super reach, and it always develops into super reach.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (e), the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a certain notice display is displayed. Notifying that it will be started.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (f), the button notice effect was started, the default button image 136a was displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 was started. The situation is shown. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and the display is hidden. In this effect example, the start of the button notice effect itself is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect being performed, but a notice that is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated in the button notice effect and succeeds. The display corresponds to the notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden after the button notice effect is started, or the button notice effect may be started after the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at the timing when the button notice effect is started. By not displaying the tutorial display after the display of "Go", the effect of concentrating on other effects (for example, button effects) may be achieved.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (g), it is shown that the button notice effect is started and the gauge of the remaining time meter is decreasing according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. ing.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 299 (h), it shifts to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 299 (i), assuming that the button advance notice effect is successful. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. The number of receptions displayed 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. Further, in this production example, when shifting to at least the swordsman reach of the super reach, the UI section UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display section TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden. That is, in this production example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development to super reach.

FIG. 299 (j) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, since the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden, no display is performed after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

The first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (k) shows how the cut-in image HCI of the princess is displayed. This princess's cut-in image HCI is suddenly displayed without going through the button notice effect, timer advance effect, or mini game, and its reliability is low, but the button advance effect, timer advance effect, or It may be displayed as a result of the mini-game being played. Further, for example, the iron plate image TP may be displayed instead of the cut-in image HCI of the princess.

FIG. 300 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 300 (a) to 300 (c) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 299 (a) to 299 (c), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 300 (d) shows an animation in which the character of the lord as a navigator is throwing a bomb. Specifically, the third decorative pattern display device 2
The character of the lord displayed on 08N throws a bomb while shouting "Not yet", and this bomb moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, the bomb goes to the tutorial display unit TT1 where the timer display countdown is performed, and bursts in the vicinity above the tutorial display unit TT1.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (e), the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, and the state in which the preparing image RDY is displayed again is shown. At the time when this timer advance notice effect was started, the timer display was "10:00", and the timing when the button advance notice effect was started was notified, but due to the interruption of the timer advance notice effect, It may be recognized that it did not correspond to the button notice effect. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the timer advance notice effect is interrupted by the navigator character than when the timer advance notice effect is not interrupted by the navigator character. If the effect of interrupting the countdown of the timer display is performed, the time of the timer display is increased instead of the display of the image RDY being prepared, and the time until the count is increased is extended. It may be good, or the countdown speed may be slowed down. Further, for example, the timer notice has an advantage that the timing of 0 can be easily predicted because the countdown speed does not change, which is why the end timing of the preparing image RDY (that is, the start timing of the timer notice) shows the future. In some cases.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (f), the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. It is shown. The tutorial display unit TT1 continues to display the image RDY being prepared.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (g), it is shown that the button notice effect is started and the gauge of the remaining time meter is decreasing according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. ing.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 300 (h), it shifts to the super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 300 (i), assuming that the button advance notice effect is successful. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. The number of receptions displayed 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. Further, in this production example, when shifting to at least the swordsman reach of the super reach, the UI section UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display section TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden.

FIG. 300 (j) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is still displayed. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (k), it is shown that the preparation image RDY is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is restarted. Specifically, the timer notice display after restarting has been changed to a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved. Further, in FIG. 300 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "10:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display is counted down by the timer notice production during the super reach (swordsman reach). It should be noted that the start time of the timer advance notice effect is set to an appropriate timing, for example, before the start of the super reach, after the start of the super reach, before the reach state, or after the reach state is reached, the super reach starts. May be started at a timing such as before. Further, the timer display when the timer advance notice effect is restarted can be appropriately set to a time, and may be started from "9:00" indicating the time at the time of interruption, for example.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (l), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (m), and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 299, the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is not a development to super reach, but a cut-in image displayed during super reach as a result of the timer advance effect being extended. As a result, the cut-in image is highly reliable. As described above, in this production example, the countdown is set to "0:00" at a good point in the super reach, and an example in which a good production is performed is shown. Further, the later the end timing of the image RDY being prepared (the start timing of a certain notice display) is, the higher the expectation of a big hit is.

FIG. 301 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 301 (a) is the same as that shown in FIG. 299 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (b), it is shown that the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the preparing image RDY. At this time, "TIMER x 2" is displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1 on which the preparing image RDY is displayed, indicating that the timer advance notice effect is performed twice. The display of "TIMER x 2" may be displayed at the same time as the display of the preparing image RDY, or may be displayed after the preparing image RDY is displayed. For example, the timer notice effect is initially displayed. You may make it think that it will be done once, but actually it will be done twice. Instead of displaying "TIMEr x 2", for example, two images RDY being prepared may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (c), the preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. .. The background color of the timer notice display is blue, which is a mode with low reliability. Here, the background color of the timer notice display may be the default display mode of green. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display is "10:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (d), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. Further, it is shown that the decorative symbols are in the reach state with "decoration 4" stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. In addition, when the timer display countdown is completed, the display of "TIMER x 2" displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased, and it is notified that the first timer notice effect has been digested and ended. ing. The display of "TIMER x 2" may be difficult to see by displaying the effect when the timer display becomes "0:00". Further, the display of "TIMEr x 2" may be left as it is without being erased. Further, when a plurality of preparation displays are displayed, a state may be provided in which the display related to the preparation display is once hidden after the first preparation display is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (e), the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a certain notice display is displayed. Notifying that it will be started.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (f), the button notice effect was started, the default button image 136a was displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 was started. The situation is shown. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time meter MT overlap with the decorative pattern. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and the display is hidden. Therefore, it may appear that there is no stock of the timer notice effect. In this effect example, the start of the button notice effect itself is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect being performed, but a notice that is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated in the button notice effect and succeeds. The display corresponds to the notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (g), it is shown that the button notice effect is started and the gauge of the remaining time meter is decreasing according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. ing. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparing image RDY again, and it is notified that the second timer advance notice effect is started. However, when the preparing image RDY is redisplayed, the first preparing image RDY is displayed. Is displayed in a larger size than when is displayed. Therefore, due to this preparing image RDY, the variable icon h0 and a part of the decorative symbol may overlap. In this way, the prepared image RDY may be hidden once and then overlapped with each other, which may have an effect of attracting more attention.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 301 (h), it is assumed that the button advance notice effect is successful, and as shown in FIG. 301 (i), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shifts to super reach. Displayed and developed into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). Further, the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and overlaps with the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E is an enlarged image RDY in preparation.
It also overlaps a part of the family crest, which is more difficult to see than the state where it does not overlap with the family crest accessory 224E. The prepared image RDY may be overlapped with the family crest accessory 224E only when it is enlarged and displayed, and may not be overlapped when it is not enlarged and displayed. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 to be hidden. That is, in this production example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development to super reach.

FIG. 301 (j) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is still displayed. Since the image RDY being prepared is enlarged and displayed, a part of the variable icon h0 is overlapped, and the character of the swordsman in the reach effect display is also overlapped. As described above, the enlarged prepared image RDY may be displayed even during the execution of the super reach. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (k), it is shown that the preparation image RDY is switched to the timer advance notice display and the second timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display after the start is changed to a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. Further, in FIG. 301 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "3:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 3 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display is counted down by the timer notice production during the super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in this production example, the size of the timer notice display is set to be the same as the size of the prepared image RDY that is enlarged and displayed, and when the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed, it is a big hit than when it is not enlarged and displayed. It is easier to confirm the design. Further, when the background color of the timer notice display is gold, it may be enlarged and displayed without fail. Further, even if the background color of the timer notice display is a color other than gold, it may be enlarged and displayed. Further, in this effect example, the background color of the second timer advance effect is more reliable than that of the first timer advance effect, but the timer display time is shorter. The timer display time may be longer in the second timer advance notice effect than in the first timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (l), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the character "Go" is displayed in place of the timer display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (m), and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the second timer advance notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, it may be possible to dramatically improve the expectation for a big hit by notifying in advance that the timer advance notice effect will be performed twice.

As described above, in this production example, when the preparation image RDY is displayed as the number of clothes, 1
When one preparing image RDY is digested, it is shown that all the preparing image RDYs are digested in the same symbol variation display.

FIG. 302 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 302 (a1) to 302 (a2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 298 (a1) to (a2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (a3), it is shown that the long-press effect by the long-press effect display is started to be displayed. In the long-press effect display, the area where the character of the lord is drawn is arranged at the top, and the area where the character of the swordsman is drawn is arranged at the bottom. , The sizes of both areas are displayed to fluctuate relatively. The preparing image RDY is displayed even when the long press effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 302 (a3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has not started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (a4), it is shown that the acceptance of the long press operation by the long press effect has started. That is, it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started. In this long press effect, the remaining time gauge MT is not displayed but may be displayed. In addition, the image RDY being prepared is switched to the timer advance notice display, and it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display has been changed to a green background color, indicating that the reliability is not so high. Further, in FIG. 302 (a4), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "5:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been done. That is, in this production example, the operation valid period and the countdown time of the timer display match. It does not have to be a perfect match. The timer advance notice effect may be started after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may be started after the timer advance notice effect is started. The timer advance notice effect may be started at the timing when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

FIG. 302 (a5) shows how the player is performing a long press operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 302 (a5), the timer display in the timer notice display is "4:00".

FIG. 302 (a6) shows how the player continues to press and hold the effect button 136. At this time, in the effect display for long press, the area where the character of the swordsman placed above is drawn is enlarged, and the area where the character of the swordsman placed below is drawn is reduced by that amount. Characters are shown to be dominant. This suggests that favorable results are likely to occur. At the timing shown in FIG. 302 (a6), the timer display in the timer notice display is "3:00".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (a7), the timer display is set to "0:00", the countdown is completed, and the characters "Go" are displayed. In addition, the long press effect is still being performed, and the operation validity period of the effect button 136 is still ongoing. That is, it can be said that the character display of "Go" is displayed during the operation valid period of the effect button 136. In addition, in the effect display for long press, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is further expanded, and the area where the character of the swordsman placed below is drawn is further reduced by that amount. It has been shown that the character of the lord is by far the dominant. The long-press effect may be terminated after the characters "Go" are displayed, the characters "Go" may be displayed after the long-press effect is completed, or "Go" may be displayed. The long press effect may end at the timing when the characters "" are displayed. Further, the operation valid period may end after the character "Go" is displayed, the character "Go" may be displayed after the operation valid period ends, or "Go" may be displayed. The operation validity period may end at the timing when the character "" is displayed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (a8), the characters "blow" are displayed, and the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to start the button notice effect, and the operation is valid. It is shown that the period has been set again. That is, this button advance notice effect can be said to be an example of a button operation effect that is performed following the long press effect. In other words, it can be said that it shows an example in which a plurality of (types) of button effects are continuously performed. Here, the operation valid period to be set may be set again after the operation valid period in the long press effect has ended, or may be continuously set to the operation valid period in the long press effect. You may.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 302 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (a10), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 4" -Decoration 4-A combination of decorative patterns in "Decoration 4" is derived, and the shaking fluctuation is started. At this time, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow light emitting mode so as to congratulate the big hit.

In this way, in this production example, the preparation display ends in the long press part and the timer display countdown starts, and the countdown is completed between the long press part and the next part or near the end of the long press part. Then, it becomes "0:00", and an example is shown in which the button effect performed in the next part becomes good.

FIGS. 302 (b1) to 302 (b5) show that the long press effect is performed in the swordsman reach, but the timer advance notice effect is not performed.

Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (b1), after the long-press effect by the long-press effect display is started, the acceptance of the long-press operation is started, and the effect button 136 is also started. It is shown that the long press operation of is being performed. In this production example, the timer advance notice production is not performed.

However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 302 (b2), the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, but in the long press effect display, the character of the lord arranged above is drawn. The area has been reduced, and the area where the swordsman character placed below is drawn has been expanded accordingly, indicating that the character of the lord is inferior (the character of the swordsman who is the enemy character is superior). .. This suggests that it is difficult to obtain favorable results.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (b3), the characters "blow" are displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to give a button notice effect. It is shown that it has been started and the operation validity period has been set again. As described above, when the long press effect is performed and the timer advance notice effect is not performed, it is difficult to display the deca button image 136aL, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is likely to be displayed. If the timer advance notice effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca button image 136aL may not be displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 302 (b4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302 (b5), the main character, the lord, loses to the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 4- The combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is derived, and the shaking fluctuation is started. It should be noted that the flow may be such that the game may be a big hit even if the mini-game or the timer notice effect is not used.

FIG. 303 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a button repeated striking effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 303A, one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 303 (a), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303 (a), the button repeated striking effect has been started, and the explanation of "set the meter to MAX in time by the button repeated striking" is given, and further. The button image 136a is displayed together with the characters "prepared", and the operation amount meter MT11 in which five memories are arranged in the vertical direction is displayed on the left side of the display screen. The timing shown in FIG. 303A is before the start of accepting the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, that is, before the start of the operation valid period, and the effect button lamp 138 is also lit in white. In this effect example, the display of "preparation" displayed above the button image 136a can be said to be a display corresponding to the preparing image RDY (preparation effect display of the button repeated hitting effect). When the button repeated pressing effect is started, the decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 303A has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 303 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303 (b), it is shown that acceptance of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 has started. Specifically, the character "prepared" displayed above the button image 136a is switched to the character "start", the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and the operation validity period is started. Along with notifying that, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this effect example, it can be said that the button repeated press effect (main effect) is started at the timing when the operation valid period is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303 (c), the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the gauge of the remaining time meter MT decreases with the passage of time from the operation valid period, and on the right side of the button image 136a, it is displayed. A countdown display is displayed by displaying numbers. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (c), "5" is displayed as a countdown display, and it is notified that the time until the operation valid period ends is 5 seconds. Since there is a possibility that a certain advance notice effect is performed when the countdown in this countdown display is completed, it can be said that the countdown effect by this countdown display corresponds to the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 303 (d) shows how the player has started the operation of repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (d), "4" is displayed as a countdown display, and it is notified that it is 4 seconds until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 303 (e), the player continuously hits the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is one in red according to the number of repeated hits. It is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (e), "3" is displayed as a countdown display, and it is notified that it is 3 seconds until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 303 (f), the player continuously presses the effect button 136, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that three memories of the operation amount meter MT11 are displayed in red. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (f), "1" is displayed as a countdown display, and it is notified that it is one second until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 303 (g), the countdown display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is set to “0”, the operation valid period has expired, and the player has completed the repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136. It should be noted that the memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is displayed in three red colors, that is, it is shown that the button repeated pressing effect has failed. Although the effect button lamp 138 is in a state of being lit in red, the lighting state may be switched from red to white at the timing when the operation valid period ends, or before the operation valid period ends. The lighting state of the effect button lamp 138 may be switched from red to white.

If the button repeated striking effect fails, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303 (h) displays "Sorry ..." and notifies that the button repeated striking effect has failed. In this production example, in a pachinko machine capable of executing a countdown display-like effect in addition to the timer notice, a certain notice display may not include this countdown display-like display.

FIG. 304 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 304A, a UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon h0 placed on a pedestal in the center thereof. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 304 (a), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 304A displays the first preparing image RDY1. The function of the first preparing image RDY is the same as that of the preparing image RDY described above. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 304A has a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in this production example, the second preparing image RDY is displayed above the first preparing image RDY1, and it is shown that a plurality of preparing images are displayed at the same time. The first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2 are each subjected to corresponding effects (timer notice effect, mini game, etc.). All of these preparing images (first preparing image RDY1 and second preparing image RDY2) function as a look-ahead notice. In addition, the background color of each of the images being prepared is green, which is the default display mode. Further, these preparing images may be started to be displayed at the same time, or one may be started to be displayed and then the other may be started to be displayed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 304 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

FIG. 304 (b) shows how the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 304 (a) has ended and the next symbol variation display has started. Specifically, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The variable icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and each moves to the corresponding pedestal. To do. In addition, variable display of decorative patterns has started. It can be said that the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2 are still displayed, that is, these preparing images are displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (c), the first preparing image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and it is shown that the timer notice effect is started. ing. The background color of the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparing image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display is "5:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown starts. In this production example, when one of the plurality of preparing images is activated (digested) and the production is started, all the other preparing images are also digested. Although all the images being prepared are digested in one symbol variation display, the notice icon may be carried over to the symbol variation display from the next time onward.

FIG. 304 (d) shows that the timer display in the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparing image RDY1 is "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 304 (e), the character "Go" is displayed in the area where the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed, and the timer notice effect related to this timer notice display is displayed. It is notified that a corresponding notice display is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (f), the characters "Go" are erased together with the display area, the second preparing image RDY2 slides downward, and moves to the position of the tutorial display unit TT1. Preparing to do Image movement animation is being performed. In addition, a notice effect (advance start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer advance effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 has started, and it is shown that the ninja character NJ4 is appearing. Has been done. The ninja character NJ4 displayed here is the same as the ninja character NJ4 that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon described above is changed as shown in FIG. 291 (f), but is different. It may be a character. In this production, the preparatory image movement animation may start after the pre-start notice production has started, or the pre-start notice production may start after the preparatory image movement animation has started. Preliminary start notice The image moving animation being prepared may start at the timing when the production starts. Further, although the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 304 (f) overlaps the second preparing image RDY2, it may overlap with the second preparing image RDY2.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (g), the pending change animation is started, and it is shown that the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. Has been done. At this time, the effect EF4 covers the entire variable icon h0, making it difficult to see as compared with the state where the effect EF4 does not cover the entire variable icon h0.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (h), as a result of the pending change animation, the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notice is started.

FIG. 304 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, to reach the reach state, and then to shift to the super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. The number of receptions displayed 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the second preparing image RDY2. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. Further, in this effect example, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 to be hidden.

FIG. 304 (j) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden together with the UI unit UI3, but the second preparing image R
The display of DY2 is still maintained. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (k), the timer advance notice display is switched from the second preparing image RDY2, and the timer advance notice effect is started. The timer notice display has a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. Further, in FIG. 304 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "10:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been done. The timer notice display is set to the default display mode at the start of display, and may be promoted such that the background color changes to gold after the display starts (for example, after the countdown starts). May be good.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (l), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the character "Go" is displayed in place of the timer display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (m), and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect corresponding to the second preparation image RDY2 corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this production example, the new preparing image is not displayed after one of the plurality of preparing images is digested, but the new preparation is performed after one of the plurality of preparing images is digested. The medium image may be displayed.

FIG. 305 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect of the explanatory display applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 305 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 291 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 305 (a2), it is shown that the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 has been changed from "Panda is the master of the lord" to "The lord is the eighth shogun". .. In this production example, when the explanatory display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched, the opening / closing display by the shutter image described above is not performed, but is performed by the switching display between the explanatory displays. In this effect example, it is shown that in one symbol variation display, when the explanatory display is switched, the open / close display by the shutter image is not performed, and the switching display is performed between the explanatory displays.

FIGS. 305 (b1) to 305 (b3) show how the opening / closing display is performed by the shutter image when the explanatory display is switched. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 305 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291 (a) to 291 (b), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 305 (b3), the shutter image is opened before the tutorial display unit TT1 by the shutter image is completely closed, and the explanation display of "The lord is General Yatsushiro" is displayed. It is shown that it is being done. That is, it is shown that the opening / closing display by the shutter image is not a precursor display in which the notice display is performed, but a false precursor display. Here, the shutter image may be opened after the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. I expected that the notice display would be started by performing such an effect, but the notice display was not started and the explanation display was performed, which disappointed the player, and the opening and closing display of the shutter image was displayed. It may be possible to have expectations.

FIG. 306 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIGS. 306 (a1) to 306 (a3) show another example of the effect following FIG. 291 (e). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 306 (a1) to 306 (a2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291 (f) to 291 (g), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 306 (a3), the effect EF4 is erased, but the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains unchanged from the default display mode. .. In this way, a failure effect in which the display mode does not change even if the above-mentioned pending change animation is performed with reference to FIG. 291 may be performed. It should be noted that a plurality of types of characters appearing in the hold change animation may be prepared so that the rate at which the display mode of the hold icon changes differs depending on the characters appearing in the hold change animation.

In the above-mentioned pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 was displayed overlapping with the UI section UI3. For example, as shown in FIG. 306 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed above the UI section UI3 to display the UI. It may not overlap with the part UI3. In this case, in the pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 may or may not overlap the UI part UI3.

FIG. 307 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 307 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 307 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. In this production example, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 307 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 307 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a2), it is shown that the roulette effect as a mini game is started. In this roulette effect, the circularly formed roulette board RR is divided into three equal parts. The area of the grandfather is arranged in the upper part of the three sections, the area of the princess is arranged in the lower left, and the area of the princess Chibi is arranged in the lower right. When the roulette effect is started, the variable display is performed by blinking each area in red, and finally the notice display corresponding to the area lit in red is prepared. The symbol variation display at which the roulette effect starts and the symbol variation display at which the preparation display and the like end may be the same or different. Further, in the configuration in which the display indicating that the roulette effect is started is performed, the symbol variation display in which the display is performed and the symbol variation display in which the preparation in progress display or the like ends may be the same, or separately. There may be. By the combination of the above description, the display can be called a look-ahead notice display.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a3), as a result of the variable display of the roulette effect, it is shown that all the areas are lit in red. That is, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the grandfather character, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the character of Princess Chibi are prepared respectively.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a4), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left portion of the display screen. Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the grandfather character GII, and the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. That is, when a character appears, each character appears at a position corresponding to the character, and when the image being prepared is displayed, it is displayed at the position corresponding to the character. It can also be said that the character itself that appears may correspond to the image being prepared. Further, the relationship between the appearing character and the effect to be executed may be 1: 1 or 1: N (N> 1). Further, a certain effect may be executed by digesting a plurality of characters (the relationship between the character and the effect may be N (N> 1): 1).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a5), it is shown that the character CHM of Princess Chibi moves upward and overlaps with the lower left corner portion of the third preparing image RDY3. That is, it can be said that one notice display overlaps with another notice display. As a result, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a6), it is shown that the character CHM of Princess Chibi is performing an animation of throwing an object toward the variable icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the variable icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is made difficult to see. That is, the notice display corresponding to the character CMH of Princess Chibi is a notice display due to a change in the display mode of the variable icon h0.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a7), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 becomes easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and it is shown that the change notice by the variable icon h0 is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a8), the display in a manner in which the grandfather character GII vibrates is started. As a result, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the grandfather's character GII starts.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a9), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third preparing image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the grandfather character GII was displayed. Has been done. When the mini-game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the lateral direction starts rotating with the lateral direction as the rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a10), it is suggested that the drum DRM is stopped and the symbol displaying the characters "extreme heat" is derived, and there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit. There is. That is, the change notice is given by deriving the character "super heat" to the drum DRM. It can be said that this effect is not an effect of changing the display mode of something, but an effect of giving a big hit notice.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a11), the display in a manner in which the princess character HME vibrates is started. As a result, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the princess character HME will start. Since the princess character HME is displayed so as to overlap the UI unit UI3, the display of the UI unit UI3 may be noticed by the vibration display of the princess character HME.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a12), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is a timer notice effect. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of performing the countdown, when "0:00" is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 307 (a12), "30:00" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a13), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. Then, the princess character HME rises and moves to a position different from the first preparing image RDY1, and notifies that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is started. That is, it can be said that the same effect as the above-mentioned display of "Go" shown in FIG. 304 (m) is performed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a14), the super reach transition display is performed, and it is shown that the super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME corresponds to the development to reach the swordsman. Further, although not shown, the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates and overlaps with the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in this production example, the background color of the super reach transition display is gold, and it is reported that the reliability of the jackpot is high. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the countdown by the timer display is completed, so that the display is hidden. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 to be hidden.

In this production example, all the images in preparation are digested before the development of the super reach, but at least one may be digested after the development of the super reach. For example, the iron plate image TP is displayed. A mini-game or a timer notice effect to be played may be performed.

FIG. 307 (b1) shows that in the roulette effect described above in FIG. 307 (a2), only the grandfather's region out of the three regions is lit in red. That is, of the notice display corresponding to the grandfather character, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the character of Princess Chibi, only the notice display corresponding to the grandfather character may be prepared. It has been notified.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the grandfather's character GII is adjacent to it. That is, the grandfather character GII appears at a position corresponding to the grandfather character GII, and the preparing image that appears with the grandfather character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the grandfather character GII. Therefore, in this production example, only a mini game using drum DRM is performed.

FIG. 308 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

The effect shown in FIG. 308 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 307 (a3), but "x2" is displayed in the area of Princess Chibi, and a notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed. It will be prepared twice.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right part thereof, and is displayed on the upper left part of the display screen. Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the grandfather character GII, and two Chibi princess characters CHM1 and CHM2 are displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. When a plurality of effects by the grandfather character GII and the princess character HME are prepared, for example, two identical characters can be displayed for one prepared image. Specifically, when a plurality of effects by the princess character HME are prepared, it can be realized by displaying one first preparing image RDY1 and displaying two princess character HMEs. On the contrary, one character may display a plurality of images in preparation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a3), one of the two Chibi princess characters, the Chibi princess character CHM1, moves upward to the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. It is shown that they are overlapping. As a result, it is notified that the first notice display of the two notice displays corresponding to the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a4), it is shown that the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi is performing an animation of throwing an object toward the variable icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the variable icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is made difficult to see. That is, it is notified that the notice display due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH1 of Princess Chibi is started.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a5), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 becomes easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and it is shown that the change notice by the variable icon h0 is started.

Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a6), the other Chibi princess character CHM2 of the two Chibi princess characters moves upward, and the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. It is shown that the parts overlap. As a result, it is notified that the second notice display corresponding to the character CHM2 of Princess Chibi will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a7), it is shown that the character CHM2 of Princess Chibi is performing an animation of throwing an object toward the variable icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the variable icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is made difficult to see. That is, it is notified that the notice display by the variable icon is ranked up due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH2 of Princess Chibi.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (a8), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 becomes easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the red notice to the display mode of the golden notice, and it is shown that the change notice by the variable icon h0 is ranked up.

FIGS. 308 (b1) to 308 (b4) show another production example following FIG. 308 (a3). Since the effect shown in FIG. 308 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 308 (a4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (b2), after the object thrown by the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi reaches the fluctuation icon h0 and the effect EF7 is displayed, the entire display screen is darkened. Is performed, the portion where the effect EF7 is displayed glows white, and the display is performed in which the light extends in the horizontal direction from the portion. At this time, the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY3 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are hidden. If another mini-game is started while the display mode of the variable icon h0 is being changed, the mini-game is also temporarily hidden due to the darkening of the display screen. You may do it. Further, when a plurality of images in preparation are displayed, all the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden, or only some of the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden. You may do so. In this way, the state in which the blackout display BL is displayed may be referred to as the fourth state. Then, in this production example, the relationship between the first state in which the hold icon is displayed together with the UI part UI3 and the second state in which the hold icon is hidden together with the UI part UI3 is the first. The state may change to the fourth state, then the first state may change to the second state, or the first state may change to the second state, or the state may change to the second state. There may be a case where the first state is changed to the fourth state and then the second state is changed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (b3), it is shown that the light of the portion where the effect EF7 is displayed is enlarged and displayed.

After that, when the darkening display is completed, as shown in FIG. 308 (b4), the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the effect is restarted. Since the effect shown in FIG. 308 (b4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 308 (a5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 308 (c1) to 308 (c3) show another production example following FIG. 307 (a6). Since the effect shown in FIG. 308 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 307 (a7), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (c2), display in a mode in which the grandfather character GII vibrates is started, and in the area where the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed, “Go” is displayed. Characters are displayed to inform that the mini game is about to start. The display of "Go" may start after the grandfather character GII starts vibrating, or the grandfather character GII may start vibrating after the display of "Go" starts. The display of "Go" may be started at the timing when the grandfather character GII starts to vibrate. As a result, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the grandfather's character GII starts.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (c3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third preparing image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the grandfather character GII was displayed. Has been done. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the area where the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed is enlarged and moved to substantially the center of the display screen, and the production by rotating the drum DRM is started. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the area where the mini game is performed is performed in an area different from the area where the preparing image is displayed. It should be noted that the case where the mini-game is started after the display of "Go" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini-game is started without the display of "Go". .. Further, the big hit may be more likely to occur when the mini-game is enlarged and displayed than when the mini-game is not enlarged and displayed. It should be noted that the display from the display of the image being prepared to the start of the mini-game, the timer advance notice effect, or the like may also be performed in another area. When the third display and a certain notice display (a certain effect) are performed in the same area, the display of the third display system is easier to understand because the place where the first display and the second display are performed is different. It may have the effect.

FIG. 309 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the display device (display device 1) on which the left side effect display is performed and the display device (display device 2) on which the right side effect display is performed may be separate display devices. In that case, a third display (a certain notice display) may be displayed on the display device 2.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 309 (a), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the fluctuation notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 309 (a) displays the preparing image RDY. In this production example, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 309 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 309 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (b), the multi-chance up notice has been started. When the multi-chance-up notice is started, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is divided into two left and right, and a left notice display area CUL and a right notice display area CUR are formed. In the left notice display area CUL, "Princess Chibi participates in SP reach due to annihilation" is displayed, and the princess Chibi Musou production with the mission of princess annihilating a large number of minions is performed, and the notice on the right side In the display area CUR, "Victory causes the lord to participate in the SP reach" is displayed, and the old man and the lord make a drinking comparison, and the drinking comparison production is performed with the mission that the lord wins the drinking comparison. In this production example, the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production will shift to Super Reach when at least one of the missions is achieved, and the reliability will increase when both missions are achieved. Has been done. The Chibihime Musou production may be started after the Chibihime Musou production is started, or the Chibihime Musou production may be started after the drinking comparison production is started, or both productions may be started at the same time. May be done. Further, in this production example, if at least one of the mission in the Chibihime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved, a big hit may be made.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (c), it is shown that the mini game is started in the tutorial display area TT1 during the execution of both the Chibihime Musou production and the drinking comparison production. There is. When the mini-game starts, the mini-character MC1 and the target TGT of the lord are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the hit area, and when the arrow hits the hit area, a chance-up notice is given. It has come to be called. The number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, all areas may be hits, or all areas may be non-hit areas.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (d), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord stuck in the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it shows that the mini-game as a notice display was successful.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI in which the characters "chance" are displayed is displayed in the left notice display area CUL where the Chibihime Musou production is performed. It has been reported that this makes it easier to accomplish the mission in the Chibihime Musou production corresponding to the area where the chance-up cut-in image WCI is displayed. As described above, in this production example, the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed and the area where the notice display is performed do not match, which may give the player a sense of discomfort and improve the interest. .. The chance-up cut-in image WCI may be displayed in the right side notice display area CUR where the drinking comparison effect is performed, or the chance up in both the left side notice display area CUL and the right side notice display area CUR. The cut-in image WUI may be displayed. In the tutorial display unit TT1, it is hidden because the mini game is finished.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (f), it is shown that the minions have been wiped out and the mission has been achieved in the Chibihime Musou production displayed in the left notice display area CUL.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (g), the character "annihilation" was displayed together with the up display of Princess Chibi in the left notice display area CUL, and the mission in the production of Princess Chibi Musou was achieved. Has been notified. In the right side notice display area CUR, the effect of drinking and comparing is continuing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (h), it is shown that the lord won the grandfather in the drinking comparison effect displayed in the right side notice display area CUR, and the mission was accomplished.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (i), the word "victory" is displayed together with the up display of the lord in the right notice display area CUR to notify that the mission in the drinking comparison production has been achieved. Has been done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (j), it is shown that the swordsman reach is started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In this production example, the swordsman reach was started because the mission in the drinking comparison production was completed, and the mission in the Chibihime Musou production was completed, so Chibihime appears as an ally of the lord. In addition, if the mission in the drinking comparison production is completed and the mission in the Chibihime Musou production fails, it will shift to the swordsman reach, but Chibihime will not appear, the mission in the Chibihime Musou production will be completed, and the drinking comparison production If the mission in is unsuccessful, it will move to Super Reach for Princess Chibi. That is, in this production, the content of the subsequent production differs depending on the success or failure of each of the two missions.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (k), a princess cut-in image HCI in which the characters “chance” and the princess character are displayed is displayed on the background of the horizontal stripes. As a result, the reliability of the jackpot is improved, but it is suggested that the reliability is not so high because it is not the notice display started via the mini game started from the preparing image RDY or the timer notice effect. ing.

FIG. 310 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the effect shown in FIG. 309. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 310 (a) to 310 (b) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 309 (a) to 309 (b), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (c), it is shown that both the Chibihime Musou production and the drinking comparison production are performed. In this production example, the display of the preparing image RDY is continued, and the mini game has not been started yet. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is not started before the transition to the super reach. This effect continues from FIG. 310 (c) to FIG. 310 (e). In FIG. 310 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI corresponding to the success of the mini game is not displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 310 (f) to 310 (j) are performed. In the effect shown in FIGS. 310 (f) to (j), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with respect to the effect shown in FIGS. 309 (f) to (j). Since it is the same except for this, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (k), the preparing image RDY overlaps with the effect EF5, the display of the preparing image RDY ends, and the notice display corresponding to the preparing image RDY is displayed. It has been notified that it will be started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (l), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. When the mini-game starts, the mini-character MC1 and the target TGT of the lord are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the hit area, and when the arrow hits the hit area, a chance-up notice is given. It has come to be called. The number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, all areas may be hits, or all areas may be non-hit areas.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (m), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord stuck in the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it shows that the mini-game as a notice display was successful.

Then, the iron plate image TP is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (n). This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed. In this way, in this production example, the mini-game is started after the transition to the super reach, and the reliability is higher than the case where the mini-game is started and the corresponding notice is displayed before the transition to the super reach. There is a high notice display.

FIG. 311 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 311 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 307 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (a2), the "reach if caught" display is performed, and it is shown that the chasing effect with the mission of catching the Echigoya is started. There is. When the chasing effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 311 (a1) (main display). Is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the state of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect is executed.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (a3), it is shown that the lord is closing the distance from the Echigoya. On the other hand, in the sub window WP3, the main display is continuously performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (a4), it is shown that the lord caught Echigoya and the mission was accomplished. As a result, it is notified that the reach will be reached. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display the preparing image RDY to indicate that the reach is being prepared. As a result, by displaying the notice display corresponding to the result of the mission (mini game) in stock, the player may be able to easily recognize that the reach as the notice display will occur.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (a5), the chasing effect is completed, the main display displayed in the sub window WP3 is displayed again on the entire display screen, and then the reach is reached in "decoration 4". The situation is shown. In this production example, it is shown that the reach was generated by the success of the mission in the chase production. When the main display is displayed in full screen, the sub window WP3 may be enlarged (wipe display) or switched. Further, when the main display becomes full screen display, the preparation image RDY may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

311 (b1) to 311 (b2) show another example of the effect relating to the display of the sub-window during the execution of the chase effect shown in FIGS. 311 (a1) to 311 (a5).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 311 (b1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 311 (b1) displays the first preparing image RDY1. Further, the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen. In this production example, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 311 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 309 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (b2), the above-mentioned chasing effect has been started. When the chasing effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 311 (b1) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two preparing images RDY1 and RDY3, only the first prepared image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the subwindow WP3, and the third prepared image RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. As described above, even in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the state of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect (chasing effect) is executed. In this production example, the sub-window WP3 and the image in preparation are displayed at positions where they do not overlap, but the image in preparation may overlap with the sub-window WP3 and the image in preparation may overlap with the sub-window WP3. It may be overlapped.

311 (c1) to 311 (c2) show another example of the effect shown in FIGS. 311 (b1) to (b2). Since the effect shown in FIG. 311 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 311 (b1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (c2), the above-mentioned chasing effect has been started. When the chasing effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 311 (c1) (main display). Is displayed. In this production example, of the first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3, the third preparing image RDY3 is continuously displayed without changing the display position, but the first preparing image. The RDY1 is displayed only in the sub-window WP3 as the main display is displayed in the sub-window WP3, and the first preparing image RDY1 displayed at the position displayed so far is erased.

311 (d1) to 311 (d2) show a display mode of the image being prepared when the background display is tilted. Since the effect example shown in FIG. 311 (d1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 309 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (d2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is tilted by about 10 degrees counterclockwise to produce a shake vision effect. It is shown that it is. In this case, the prepared image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, the image RDY being prepared shows that the display does not tilt together with the background display.

FIG. 312 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 312 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 307 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. There is. Specifically, the first step-up display unit SUA has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "A" indicating that it is the first stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side, and the right side thereof. A mini-game display area for playing a mini-game as a step-up notice is formed in.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini-game is started, "Strike" is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display showing how the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. That is, this mini-game is a bowling chance game whose mission is to take a strike in a bowling game.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a4), a character of the lord throws a bowling ball and heads toward 10 pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a5), the bowling ball collides with the pins, all 10 pins collapse and become a strike, and it is shown that the mission has been achieved. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a6), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini-game or timer advance notice effect is started. .. The background color of the image RDY being prepared is green, which is the default display mode.

When the bowling chance game is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

FIGS. 312 (b1) to 312 (b8) explain another example of the effect of the step-up notice. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 312 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 312 (a1) to (a2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b3), the second step-up display unit SUB rises from below the first step-up display unit SUA, and the UI unit UI3 and the first step-up display unit SUA are lifted. It is shown that it is displayed in this way. Specifically, the second step-up display unit SUB also has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "B" indicating that it is the second stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side, and the right side thereof. A mini-game display area for playing a mini-game as a step-up notice is formed in. In this production example, the mission is more likely to succeed when the mini-game is played on the second step-up display unit SUB than when the mini-game is played on the first step-up display unit SUB. Further, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mini-game is successful on the second step-up display unit SUB than when the mini-game is successful on the first step-up display unit SUB.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b4), it is shown that the mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini-game is started, in the mini-game display area, "Cup in" is displayed, and a display showing how the character of the lord is putting is displayed. That is, this mini-game is a golf game whose mission is to cup in with a putt.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b5), a state in which the character of the lord puts and the golf ball heads toward the cup is shown.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b6), it is shown that the golf ball is cupped in and the mission is achieved.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b7), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer advance notice effect is started. .. The background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, and it is reported that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

When the bowling chance game is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b8), the first step-up display unit SUA and the second step-up display unit SUB move downward to frame out, and the UI unit. UI3 returns to the default position.

In this production example, an example of success in the bowling chance game and the golf game was described. For example, in the bowling chance game, a display showing that all the pins did not fall is displayed to notify the mission failure. Alternatively, in the golf game, a display indicating that the cup has not been made may be displayed to notify the mission failure. Further, in this production example, the character of the lord appeared in the bowling chance game and the golf game, but other characters may appear. For example, when the character of the princess appears, the character of the lord appears. It may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the case.

FIG. 313 is a diagram illustrating another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 312. Since the effect shown in FIG. 313 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 312 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (a2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the variable icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. That is, in this production example, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, a state in which something in the UI unit UI3 is hidden is shown. The explanation display may be deleted after the first step-up display unit SUA has started to be displayed, or the first step-up display unit SUA may be started to be displayed after the explanation display has been deleted. The explanation display may be deleted at the timing when the one-step-up display unit SUA is started to be displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 313 (a3) to (a5) are performed. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 313 (a3) to (a5) are not shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 as well as the effects shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a5). Since it is the same except that the variable icon h0 is not displayed, the description thereof will be omitted.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (a6) continues to show how the mission has been accomplished.

When the bowling chance game is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position. The explanation display and the variable icon h0 remain hidden.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (a8), it is shown that the variable icon h0 is redisplayed in the red display mode. That is, it is shown that the change icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the change notice and redisplayed. It should be noted that the image RDY being prepared may be displayed before the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed and redisplayed, and may be passed through a mini game, a timer notice effect, or the like.

FIGS. 313 (b1) to 313 (b3) show another display mode of the step-up notice effect. The effect shown in FIG. 313 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 313 (a1), except that the four pedestals in the hold icon display area are not displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (b2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the variable icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. Further, in this production example, the display position of the hold icon h11 is not changed even though the hold icon h11 is moved upward of the UI unit UI3, and therefore, it overlaps with the mini game display area of the first step-up display unit SUA. It is shown that it is. That is, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, it can be said that even if the UI unit UI3 moves, a certain display (hold icon h11) does not move.

FIG. 313 (b3) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the bowling chance game is started in the mini game display area. As described above, since the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini-game display area, a part of the character display of "strike" is hidden. That is, it can be said that a part of the mini game is hidden by the hold icon h11.

FIG. 314 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 314 (a), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the fluctuation notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 314 (a). The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 314 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (a), a state of shifting to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 314 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, there is a Yatsushiro accessory 2 which is one of the effectable movable bodies.
24Fa and 224Fb, a general character, are arranged.

FIG. 314 (b) shows how the family crest accessory 224E has returned to its initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (c), it is shown that the animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out to the lower part of the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 314 (d) to 314 (f), the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the variable icon h0 does not frame out together with the UI unit UI3, and as shown in FIG. 314 (f), the display state is maintained in a state where the display position is lowered.

FIG. 314 (g) shows how the swordsman reach has started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (h), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is raised and displayed so as to lift the variable icon h0. That is, in this production example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the variable icon h0 is moving. Can be done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (i), it is shown that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, "Strike" is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display showing how the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (j), a character of the lord throws a bowling ball and heads toward 10 pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (k), the bowling ball collides with the pins, all 10 pins collapse and become a strike, and it is shown that the mission is accomplished. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (l), the preparation image RDY appears in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer advance notice effect is started. Will be done. The background color of the image RDY being prepared is green, which is the default display mode. Further, FIG. 314 (l) shows how the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out. At this time, the prepared image RDY overlaps with the first step-up display unit SUA, and as shown in FIG. 314 (m), at least one until the frame-out of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed. The part is difficult to see.

FIG. 315 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 315 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 315 (a1) displays the first preparing image RDY1. The background color of the first preparing image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 315 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a1), a state of shifting to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. In this production example, an example is shown in which the first preparing image RDY1 is already displayed when shifting to the super reach.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 315 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

FIG. 315 (a2) shows how the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a3), it is shown that the animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out to the lower part of the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 315 (a4) to 315 (a6), the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the variable icon h0 and the first prepared image RDY1 are not framed out together with the UI unit UI3, and as shown in FIG. 315 (a6), the variable icon h0 is displayed in a lowered display state. The display state of the first prepared image RDY1 is maintained without changing the display position.

FIG. 315 (a7) shows how the swordsman reach has started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a8), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is raised and displayed so as to lift the variable icon h0. That is, in this production example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the variable icon h0 is moving. Can be done. Further, the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed so as to overlap with the first step-up display SUA without changing the display position. The first preparing image RDY1 may overlap with the first step-up display SUA. The first step-up display unit SUA may be raised, and the first preparing image RDY1 may also be moved upward.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a9), it is shown that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, "Strike" is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display showing how the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. However, the mini-game display area of the first step-up display SUA overlaps with the first preparing image RDY1, and is considered to be more difficult to see than the non-overlapping state. The same applies to the following productions.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a10), a character of the lord throws a bowling ball and heads toward 10 pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a11), the bowling ball collides with the pins, all 10 pins collapse and become a strike, and it is shown that the mission has been achieved. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a12), the third preparing image RDY3 appears in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini-game or timer notice effect is started. Is notified. That is, when a certain number of preparing images are displayed in a certain area and a new preparing image is displayed, the new preparing image is displayed in another area. Can be done. The background color of the third preparing image RDY3 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, as shown in FIGS. 315 (a12) to 315 (a13), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out.

FIGS. 315 (b1) to 315 (b2) are views showing another display mode of the UI unit FO animation. Note that FIG. 315 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 315 (a3). Further, since the effect shown in FIG. 311 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 315 (a4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (b2), it is shown that the swordsman reach is started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. In this production example, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, but it is shown that the display is maintained in a mode in which the display position is lowered only on the pedestal on which the variable icon h0 is placed. That is, it is shown that a part of the UI unit UI3 is displayed even if the UI unit UI3 is framed out.

FIG. 316 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 316 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 316 (a1) displays the image RDY being prepared. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 316 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 309 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a2), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, and "decoration 6" is displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 7" is displayed on the right symbol. The state of being stopped is shown. The middle symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a3), the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol is slowed down, and it is shown that the pseudo-continuous symbol composed of the symbol of the lord is scrolling in from the upper part of the display screen. ing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a4), it is shown that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle symbol.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a5), the pseudo-ream symbol stop animation that directs whether or not to start the pseudo-ream is started. When the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, leaving the variable icon h0 and the preparing image RDY. Here, the UI part FO animation may be started after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation is started, or the pseudo-continuous symbol may be started. The UI unit FO animation may be started at the timing when the stop animation is started. Further, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. As described above, in this production example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in a certain state such as when a pseudo-ream effect is performed or when a pseudo-ream is established. When the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo-continuous symbol expands in the lateral direction as shown in FIGS. 316 (a5) to 316 (a7).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a6), the pseudo-continuous symbol is further expanded and overlaps the left symbol and the right symbol, so that the left symbol and the right symbol are difficult to see. ing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a7), the pseudo-continuous symbol is further expanded, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N It is displayed over. At this time, the pseudo-continuous symbols are also expanded in the vertical direction, and a part of them is overlapped by the preparing image RDY. Further, the pseudo-continuous symbol also overlaps with the stage name display unit ST1, the reception number display 850, and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device. It also overlaps with the character of the lord displayed on 208N and the second hold number display. At this time, the family crest accessory 224E started to rise and overlapped a part of the pseudo-ream pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 316 (a8), the family crest accessory 224E rotates, a voice "Don" is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that a pseudo-ream is performed.

FIG. 316 (a9) shows how the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation ends, the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the original display mode, and the UI unit UI3 is framed in by the frame-in animation (UI unit FI animation). Has been done. The UI part FI animation may be started after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is finished, the UI part FI animation may be started before the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is finished, or the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started. The UI unit FI animation may be started at the timing when the animation ends. The decorative symbol is in a temporary stop state due to shaking fluctuation due to the combination of the decorative symbol of "decoration 6-pseudo-ream pattern-decoration 7", and then the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ren is started. To.

FIGS. 316 (b1) to 316 (b3) show an example of the display before and after the Stechen effect performed at the time of mode transition or stage change. Since the effect shown in FIG. 316 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 316 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 316 (b2), the Stechen effect is started, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each darken and display, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L It is shown that the center shines and the light rays extend from there in the left-right direction. At this time, the light rays are displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this production example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is hidden during the blackout display by the Stechen effect. Further, in this production example, it is also shown that the preparing image RDY is hidden during the blackout display by the Stechen effect. Further, the preparing image RDY may be terminated during the blackout display, and a mini game or a timer advance notice effect may be started.

FIG. 316 (b3) shows how the Stechen production has been completed. In this production example, after the end of the Stechen effect, the same display as before the start of the Stechen effect is performed. In other words, it is shown that it was a fake Stechen production in which neither mode transition nor stage change was performed.

FIG. 317 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the button notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 317 (a), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the fluctuation notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 317 (a). Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 317 (a) has a notice display mode displayed in gold. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (a), it is shown that the swordsman reach is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. In this production example, the UI unit UI3 is displayed even during the execution of the swordsman reach.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, all of the stage name display unit ST1, the reception number display 850, and the stock button image 852 are erased, and the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (b), the united animation is started, and a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the display screen, and they move toward the center while being close to each other. Is moving. While the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (c), a state in which a pair of translucent button images 136q are in close proximity and immediately before the completion of coalescence is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 317 (c), when the pair of translucent button images 136q are close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q, as compared with the non-overlapping state. The semi-transparent button image 136q is difficult to see. Therefore, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful. Further, FIG. 317 (c) shows how the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. The effect EF6 may be displayed after the UI part UI3 is framed out, the effect EF6 may be displayed before the UI part UI3 is framed out, or the effect may be displayed at the timing when the UI part UI3 is framed out. EF6 may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (d), the union animation was successful, the deca button image 136aL was materialized, the button notice effect was started, and the remaining time meter MT was also displayed to indicate the operation acceptance status. It is shown that it has started. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden at least during the period when the button notice effect is performed by the button image 136a (deca button image 136aL).

FIG. 318 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 318 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 318 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 318 (a1), the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a loss of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 6". It is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns. Further, the special figure 1 fourth symbol 284a1 is also lit in a loss display mode. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 316 (a1) has a notice display mode displayed in red.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 309 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In FIG. 318 (a2), the state in which the symbol is still displayed is shown. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable icon h0 is erased.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 that covers the entire UI unit UI3 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (a3). , The character of the lord who got on the motorcycle framed in from the left side of the UI part wipe display part WP4, and as shown in FIGS. 318 (a3) to (a5), it is shown that the character runs toward the right end. .. That is, in this effect example, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is displayed in order to return the display mode of the UI unit UI3 from the notice display mode to the default display mode, and the effect display is performed by the UI unit wipe display unit WP4. , UI unit UI3 may be able to change the display mode naturally. For example, when the display is returned to the original display due to a loss in the super reach effect, the entire display screen may be covered with a wipe display unit and the effect display may be performed by the wipe display unit.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (a6), it is shown that the effect by the character of the lord in the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is completed and the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is erased. When the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is erased and the UI unit UI3 is displayed, the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and the change icon is displayed. It becomes h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 and moves to the corresponding pedestal. In the tutorial display section TT1, "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" is displayed, and the explanation display changes before and after the display of the UI section wipe display section WP4.

In this production example, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 may not be displayed or may be displayed in the state where the preparing image RDY is displayed. If the UI section wipe display section WP4 is displayed while the preparing image RDY is displayed, the preparing image RDY is hidden during that time, and as a result, the preparing image RDY is displayed unknowingly. It may be finished and a mini game or a timer notice effect may be started.

FIGS. 318 (b1) to 318 (b4) show an example of the display in the tutorial display unit TT1.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 318 (b1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 is displayed in gold, which is the display mode of the fluctuation notice, but the hold icon h11 is the default display mode. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits gold light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 318 (b1). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 318 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 318 (b1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 318 (b2) to 318 (b4), in the tutorial display unit TT1, the swordsman character scrolls in from below and continuously moves the line of sight from the crown to the feet. It is shown that the character of the swordsman is scrolled and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 318 (b4), after the feet of the swordsman character are displayed, the swordsman character is scrolled and displayed in a manner in which the line of sight is continuously moved from the feet to the crown. That is, the continuous scroll display between the top of the head and the feet of the swordsman character is displayed in a reciprocating manner. In this production example, an example in which the entire character is displayed by displaying a part of the character while continuously scrolling in the tutorial display unit TT1 is shown.

In this production example, for example, when the explanation display is not restarted or only the hold icon is hidden (the UI part UI3 is displayed), a certain part of the UI part UI3 is used to display a certain part. It can be said that an example of doing this is shown.

FIG. 319 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect applicable to the present embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 to which the effect example shown in FIG. 319 can be applied can be divided into, for example, a first special figure start port and a second special figure start port for one start port, and a symbol can be assigned in a normal gaming state. Examples thereof include so-called MAX 8 machines (sometimes referred to as 8 maintenance machines) capable of holding 8 variable displays. Here, a MAX8 machine will be described as an example.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which eight hold icons can be displayed and four pedestals are arranged in a staggered arrangement in front and behind. At the timing shown in FIG. 319 (a1), a total of seven variable displays of the special figures 1 and 2 are held, so that the seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h7 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 319 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed and an explanation is displayed. It has been. In this production example, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 319 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 319 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. According to the second hold number display, at the timing shown in FIG. 319 (a1), it is notified that four special figures 1 are held and three special figures 2 are held.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

FIG. 319 (a2) shows a state in which a game ball wins a prize at the start port of the second special figure, and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 becomes eight in total. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the variable icon h0 that are already displayed are displayed. It is shown that the display mode of is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the grandfather imitating the face of the grandfather. In addition, the UI unit UI3 has also changed from the default display mode to a special display mode displayed in gold. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "pon" to notify that the hold is full. In this effect example, when the hold is full, the UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 are changed all at once. In this production example, the number of times of symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon indicating the display mode of the grandfather may be notified.

FIG. 319 (b1) shows how the swordsman reach is being performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 319 (b1), the second hold number display is displayed, and according to the second hold number display, the special figure 1 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 319 (b1). It has been notified that four are on hold and three special figures 2 are on hold.

FIG. 319 (b2) shows a state in which a game ball wins a prize at the second special figure start port, and the number of reservations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 becomes eight in total. Specifically, in the second hold number display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is notified that four special figures 1 are held and four special figures 2 are held, and the speaker 120 Will output a "pon" voice to notify you that the hold is full.

FIG. 319 (b3) shows that the super reach was lost, the production of the swordsman reach was completed, and the display returned to the castle town stage. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is completed and the player returns to the castle town stage, a combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is displayed and shakes. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. In addition, since the hold was full during the production of the swordsman reach, the UI part UI3 was changed from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and all of the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8. Has changed from the default display mode to the grandfather's display mode. In this production example, if the UI section UI3 is hidden by Super Reach and the hold is full, when the UI section UI3 is redisplayed, the UI section UI3, the variable icon, and the hold icon are displayed. An example of an effect of changing the display mode is shown.

FIGS. 319 (c1) to 319 (c4) are diagrams illustrating another aspect of the production example shown in FIGS. 319 (b1) to (b3). The effects shown in FIGS. 319 (c1) to (c2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 319 (b1) to (b2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 319 (c3) shows that the super reach was lost, the production of the swordsman reach was completed, and the display returned to the castle town stage. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is completed and the player returns to the castle town stage, a combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is displayed and shakes. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. Further, in this production example, the hold was full during the execution of the swordsman reach production, but the display mode of the UI part UI3, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 was not changed, and the hold was full. The character "MAX" indicating that the message is displayed is displayed above the variable icon h0. After that, the symbol is confirmed and displayed in a state where the display modes of the UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 do not change.

After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 319 (c4), the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold and changes. All of the icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 change from the default display mode to the grandfather display mode. After that, the hold icons h1 to h8 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h1 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to become the change icon h0. The hold icons at the display positions of the second hold icon h2 to the eighth hold icon h8 become the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7, respectively, and move to the corresponding pedestals. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (c4), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the tutorial display unit TT1, "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed and an explanation is displayed.

FIG. 320 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 320 (a1) to 320 (a3) and 320 (b1) to (b2), the UI unit UI4 has a variable icon display area, a hold icon display area, a tutorial display unit TT4, and a stage name. The display unit ST2 is integrally displayed on the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this production example as well, in the case of super reach, the UI unit is framed out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but even if it becomes super reach, it is displayed without frame out. You may leave it as it is. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 is deleted. Further, in this production example, the image being prepared can be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2.

As shown in FIG. 320 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI4 surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI unit UI4 shown in FIG. 320 (a1) has a hold icon display area formed in the center thereof. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI unit UI 4, and the variable icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame configured by the UI unit UI 4. At the timing shown in FIG. 320 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT4 as an explanation display unit is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display unit ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, the description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 320 (a1), "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display unit ST2, "Castle town stage" is displayed. It has been reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224F and the general accessory. 224Fb and the like are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (a2), it is shown that the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 is switched to the first preparing image RDY1. The background color of the first preparing image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (a3), it is shown that the display of the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is switched to the fourth preparing image RDY4. The background color of the fourth preparing image RDY4 is green, which is the default display mode. As described above, in this production example, an example of displaying the preparing image in each of the plurality of explanatory display portions is shown.

FIGS. 320 (b1) to 320 (b2) are views showing another production example following FIG. 320 (a1). Since the effect shown in FIG. 320 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 320 (a2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (b2), the fourth preparing image RDY4 is displayed in the display frame of the stage name display unit ST2 while continuing to display the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. It is shown that the display is shifted upward from the position. That is, it is shown that the image being prepared overlaps a part of the area where the explanatory display is displayed. It is also possible to apply such a display mode to the tutorial display unit TT4.

FIGS. 320 (c1) to 320 (c7) are diagrams showing another aspect of the effect in which the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

As shown in FIG. 320 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the balloon unit TT3 as the third tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed together with the grandfather character GY1 on the right side of the display screen. .. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon unit TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 320 (c1), in response to the dialogue display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, the speech balloon TT3 is displayed with the dialogue "here", and the conversation notice is continuing. Here, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol. Further, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at positions that do not overlap with the first decorative symbol. Further, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed after the grandfather character GY1 is displayed, or the balloon portion TT3 is displayed. The grandfather character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation notice by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather may be given by operating the effect button 136. Further, it is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1. The timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden may be the timing after the grandfather character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the grandfather character GY1 is displayed. May be good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased and the timing at which the grandfather character GY1 is displayed may be the same timing. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, a plurality of arrows are displayed so as to be pierced on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (c2), it is shown that the family crest accessory 224E rises from the initial position and overlaps with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, the family crest accessory 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after moving, and also has a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one of the balloon parts TT2. Each part is covered.

After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (c3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extended animation (extended animation) of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 expands upward, and the family crest accessory 224E. It is shown that it appears above. That is, it can be said that the portion where the hold display frame FL1 does not overlap with the family crest accessory 224E appears. Further, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps with the blowing portion TT2 and overlaps with the blowing portion TT2, but does not overlap with the blowing portion TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this production example, the dialogue notice (speech balloon portion TT3) displayed later may not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. As described above, the display mode of the hold display frame FL1 after expansion may be referred to as an extended display mode. In this production example, the figure of the hold display frame FL1 before expansion and the hold display frame FL1 after expansion is shown, but the expansion animation includes the one in which the hold display frame FL1 is gradually expanded.

After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (c4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1 is shown. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 has a part overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is considered to be more difficult to see than the case where the family crest character 224E does not partially overlap.

FIG. 320 (c5) shows how the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, in the ninja character NJ1, the part that does not overlap with the family crest character 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the tutorial display unit TT1.

After that, FIG. 320 (c6) shows how the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1, and the effect EF2 in which a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 explodes is displayed. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to see a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display a notice and give the player a sense of expectation that the reliability of the jackpot may be increased.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (c7), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer advance notice effect is started. .. The background color of this preparing image RDY is green, which is the default display mode. In this effect, instead of the image RDY being prepared, a timer notice display may be displayed and the timer notice effect may be started, a mini game may be started, or a notice display may be performed. ..

FIG. 321 is a diagram for explaining an effect in which the hold display frame in which the hold icon is housed is expanded and displayed to change the display mode of the hold icon.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a1), the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the UI unit UI2 in this production example, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, each of which constitutes a hold display frame, and is configured such that one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a1), four hold icons are housed in each frame in the hold icon display area, and the second of the first hold icons h11 to the fourth hold icon h14. The hold icon h12 of the above is a display mode of the look-ahead notice (for example, a display mode of lighting in blue), and the other hold icons are the default display modes. Further, a variable icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is housed, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area during the symbol variation display. Here, the area in which the variable icon h0 is displayed may also be included in the UI unit UI2. Further, a tutorial display unit TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a1), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT7. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Neither the variable icon h0 nor the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 overlaps the decorative symbol.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen. In this production example, none of the stage name display unit ST1, the reception number display 850, and the stock button image 852 is displayed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a1), the family crest accessory 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a2), it is shown that the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed. The enlarged display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually expands. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a2), the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is housed is displayed in an expanded manner. Further, in this production example, the tutorial display unit TT7 is out of the display screen due to the enlarged display of the hold display frame, but the preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 does not change the display position. , It is separated from the tutorial display unit TT7 and displayed in the lower right part of the display screen. At this time, the image RDY being prepared may overlap with a part of the hold display frame or the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a3), the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E, which was emitting light in blue, changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is foretold to change from blue to green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 321 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase the expectation for the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the hold corresponding to the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 321 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced to return to the default display mode. The reduced display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces the display area. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed in the expanded hold display frame. Further, in this effect example, the prepared image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 that appears by the reduced display of the hold icon display area.

321 (b1) to 321 (b2) show another form of the production example shown in FIGS. 321 (a1) to 321 (a5). Since the effect shown in FIG. 321 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 321 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (b2), it is shown that the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 321 (a2) as described above. At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed at the lower part of the display screen, and is overlapped by the preparing image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 321 (b2), the sub window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 321 (b1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is hidden, but it may be displayed. Further, this sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the state of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect is executed.

Subsequently, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 322 to 324. Here, FIG. 322 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, FIG. 323 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, and FIG. 324 shows a display example of a ball removal error display. It is a figure. The display position of the ball removal error warning display (hereinafter referred to as "ball removal error display") is set to a fixed position, but which position should be set as the display position can be appropriately set. is there. In the following description, a display example including a variation of the display position of the ball removal error display is shown below. The ball removal error display is deleted when the ball removal button 130 is operated to eliminate the lower plate full tank state and the ball removal error is resolved. Further, in the production example shown below, a display example of a ball removal error display is shown, but it can also be applied to, for example, a door opening error that occurs when the front frame door 106 is opened. Further, when the ball removal error is displayed, the error sound may be output together or may not be output.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 322 (a1) to 322 (a2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 291 (c) to 291 (d). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (a1), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed by overlapping a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. ing. In the ball removal error display ERR1, "Please remove the ball" is displayed, and it is urged to produce the game balls stored in the lower plate to eliminate the lower plate full tank state.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (a2), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1 in which the shutter image is opened and the preparing image RDY is displayed. The state of being displayed is shown. As a result, it may be possible to notice the image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball-excluded display. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the image RDY being prepared. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the ball removal error display ERR1 and the preparing image RDY, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the preparing image RDY is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 322 (b1) to (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 293 (c1) to (c2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (b1), it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the remaining time display meter MT4. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the display of one of the timer notices composed of a plurality of displays is overlapped by the ball removal error display ERR1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 322 (b2), when the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes shorter as the remaining time of the timer display decreases, the overlapping state due to the ball removal error display ERR1 is eliminated, and the remaining time display meter MT4 is in a state where it is easy to see. As a result, the remaining time display meter MT4 may be noticed by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the remaining time display meter MT4. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the remaining time meter MT4 may be viewed at the same time, and when the display of the remaining time meter MT4 is completed, a trigger for removing the ball may be given.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 322 (c1) to (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b5). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (c1), the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, but overlaps with the translucent button image 136q related to the coalescence animation. It is shown that there is no such thing. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 may overlap with the semi-transparent button image 136q in the coalescence animation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 322 (c2), when the translucent button image 139q comes close to each other, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps. As a result, it may be possible to notice the coalescence animation by looking at the ball-excluded display. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by watching the coalescence animation. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to watch the ball removal error display ERR1 and the combined animation at the same time, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the combined animation is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 322 (d1) to 322 (d2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 301 (f) to (g). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (d1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol of the decorative symbol and the remaining time meter MT. It does not overlap with the UI part UI3 including TT1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 322 (d2), the preparation image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the second timer advance notice effect is started.
When the preparing image RDY is redisplayed, it is enlarged and displayed as compared with the case when the first preparing image RDY is displayed. Therefore, the preparing image RDY will be overlapped by a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 that has not overlapped with the tutorial display unit TT1 until now. As a result, it may be possible to notice the enlarged image RDY in preparation by looking at the ball-excluded display. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the image RDY being prepared. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the ball removal error display ERR1 and the enlarged image RDY being prepared, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the image RDY being prepared is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 322 (e1) to 322 (e2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 302 (a5) to (a6). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (e1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the area where the swordsman character is drawn, but the character of the lord is drawn. There is no overlap in the area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 322 (e2), as a result of the player pressing and holding the effect button 136, the area in which the character of the lord placed above is drawn expands, and then the lord's character A part of the ball removal error display ERR1 will overlap the area where the character is drawn. As a result, it may be possible to notice the superiority or inferiority between the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman who plays the enemy role by looking at the ball-out display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the superiority or inferiority between the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman who plays the enemy role. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. Also, see the superiority and inferiority of the ball removal error display ERR1 and the character of the lord and the swordsman of the enemy role at the same time, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the superiority or inferiority of the character of the lord and the swordsman of the enemy role is completed. May be possible.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 322 (f1) to (f2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 304 (e) to (f). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (f1), it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the second preparing image RDY2. On the other hand, it does not overlap with the display area where the characters "Go" are displayed (the display area where the first preparing image RDY is displayed).

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (f2), the characters "Go" are erased together with the display area, the second preparing image RDY2 slides downward, and the position of the tutorial display unit TT1 is obtained. Preparing to move to Image movement animation is being performed. In addition, a notice effect (advance start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer advance effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 has started, and it is shown that the ninja character NJ4 is appearing. Has been done. At this time, the overlapping state between the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 is eliminated. On the other hand, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the ninja character NJ4. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not have to overlap with the ninja character NJ4. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the second preparing image RDY2 or the ninja character NJ4. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display E
It may be possible to simultaneously view the RR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323 (a1) to (a2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 307 (a3) to (a4). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (a1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette board RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right part thereof, and is displayed on the upper left part of the display screen. Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the grandfather character GII, and the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character CHM of Princess Chibi. That is, in this production example, it can be said that at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with respect to a part of the plurality of preparing images. As a result, by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to notice the display of at least one of the plurality of preparing images (including characters). In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at a plurality of preparing images. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the ball removal error display ERR1 and a plurality of preparing images, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the preparing images is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323 (b1) to (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 307 (b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette board RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the grandfather's character GII is adjacent to it. That is, the grandfather character GII appears at a position corresponding to the grandfather character GII, and the preparing image that appears with the grandfather character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the grandfather character GII. In this case, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 323 (a2), the preparation image (character CHM of Princess Chibi) corresponding to a certain effect is not displayed, so that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in any display. Does not overlap with.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323 (c1) to (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 309 (b) to (e). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (c1), in the effect shown in FIG. 309 (b), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed substantially in the center of the left side notice display area CUL. There is. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (c2), in the effect shown in FIG. 309 (e), a mini game is executed based on the preparing image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result of success, it is shown that the chance-up cut-in image WCI is displayed in the left side notice display area CUL. At this time, it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with this chance-up cut-in image WCI. As a result, the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI may be noticed by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the error display ERR1 without a ball may be noticed by looking at the chance-up cut-in image WCI. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the ball removal error display ERR1 and the chance-up cut-in image WCI, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323 (d1) to (d2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 311 (b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (d1), in the production example shown in FIG. 311 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1. .. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (d2), the above-mentioned chasing effect is started. When the chasing effect is started, the sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 323 (d2) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two preparing images RDY1 and RDY3, only the first prepared image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the subwindow WP3, and the third prepared image RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and is continuously displayed without changing the display position. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 may overlap with the sub-window WP3.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323 (e1) to (e2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 311 (d1) to (d2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (e1), in the production example shown in FIG. 311 (d1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. .. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (e2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is tilted by about 10 degrees counterclockwise to produce a shake vision effect. It is shown that it is being damaged. In this case, the prepared image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, the image RDY being prepared shows that the display does not tilt together with the background display. At this time, the display position of the ball removal error display ERR1 is not changed even when the shake vision effect is being performed, and the display state is maintained without tilting. At this time, the background image is tilted so that the marginal portion is represented in black. Then, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with this margin portion. For example, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in black characters, it is assimilated with the color of the margin portion and a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed. It may be difficult to see.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323 (f1) to (f2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 312 (a1) to (a2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (f1), in the production example shown in FIG. 312 (a1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1. .. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (f2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. Has been done. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1 due to the rise of the UI unit UI3. That is, since the display area of the UI unit UI3 is expanded, the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the UI unit UI3. As a result, it may be possible to notice the occurrence of the effect in the first step-up display unit SUA by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the error display ERR1 without a ball may be noticed by watching the UI part UI3 rise. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the effects of the ball removal error display ERR1 and the first step-up display unit SUA, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 324 (a1) to (a2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 314 (d) to (e). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (a1), in the production example shown in FIG. 314 (d), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the upper part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is shown. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the UI unit UI3 before the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (a2), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. In this production example, it is shown that the overlap state of the ball removal error display ERR1 with the UI part UI3 is eliminated while the UI part UI3 is framed out downward by the UI part FO animation.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 324 (b1) to (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 318 (a3) to (a5). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (b1), in the production example shown in FIG. 318 (a3), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the UI unit wipe display unit WP4. It is shown. At this time, it does not overlap with the character of the lord who got on the motorcycle displayed on the UI section wipe display section WP4.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (b2), it is shown that the character of the lord on the motorcycle is moving to the right end of the UI unit wipe display unit WP4. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character of the lord who got on the motorcycle together with the UI part wipe display part WP3. As a result, it may be possible to notice the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to simultaneously view the effect display on the ball removal error display ERR1 and the UI unit wipe display unit WP3, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 324 (c1) to (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 321 (b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (c1), in the production example shown in FIG. 321 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a part of the decorative symbol is overlaid on the decorative symbol. It is shown that it is wrapping. It should be noted that there is no overlap with other displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (c2), it is shown that the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed at the lower part of the display screen, and is overlapped by the preparing image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 324 (c2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 324 (c1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is hidden. Further, this sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the sub window WP3, and the other part overlaps with the hold icon display area. The ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and the display position is maintained. As a result, by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to notice the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon in the enlarged hold icon display area. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by observing the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area are simultaneously viewed, and when the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area is completed, a trigger for removing the ball is given. May be possible.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 324 (d1) to 324 (d3) show variations in the display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1.

In the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324 (d1), the display mode of "please remove the ball" is surrounded by a rectangular frame, and the background is transparent. Therefore, even when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the display of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be made conspicuous, and the influence of the visibility of the display on the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be reduced. In some cases.

The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324 (d2) has the same mode as the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324 (d1), but the background is opaque. Therefore, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the visibility of the ball removal error display ERR1 is improved, but the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be difficult to see.

The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324 (d3) is another display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324 (d2), and the display of "please remove the ball" is shown in white on a black background. It is said to be the mode represented by.

In the embodiment described above, the three decorative symbol display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 280M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have been used, but the decorative symbol display device has been described. Needless to say, even a pachinko machine 100 equipped with only one of the above can be applied. Further, it can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with two decorative symbol display devices, and can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with four or more decorative symbol display devices.

FIGS. 325 to 371 are diagrams in which the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment is shown step by step. In addition, in FIGS. 325 to 371, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. In addition, in FIGS. 325 to 371, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 provided with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 325 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 326 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 325 stepwise. , FIG. 327 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 326 step by step. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 325 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 325 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons in special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 in special figure 1. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 325 (1), the hold icons h11, h of the three special figures 1 are shown in the hold icon display area.
12, h13 are displayed, and all of the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 325 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 325 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 The third hold icon h13 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Here, the first timer advance notice display TM11 in the present embodiment is configured to be capable of displaying the decimal point of less than 1 second.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (4), "09:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the characters "timer activation" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (5) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, suggesting that a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Here, the second timer advance notice display TM12 in the present embodiment is configured to be capable of displaying the decimal point of less than 1 second. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "09: 00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (5). In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (6), "01:25" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "07:25" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (7), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. , "Attention to hold" is displayed to call attention to the hold change, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 can be changed. It is notified that there is sex. The hold change animation may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", or the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 after the hold change animation starts. May be "00:00", or the hold change animation may be started at the timing when the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes "00:00". The timer display countdown on the first timer notice display TM11 continues, and "06:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (7).

Then, as shown in FIG. 325 (8), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, resulting in a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. In addition, the characters "pending change" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pre-reading notice has been given due to the pending change. The character display of "hold change" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed after the character display of "hold change" has been performed. Alternatively, the character display of "hold change" may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is still continuing, and "05:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (8). The second timer notice display TM12 has been erased. Here, the second timer notice display TM12 may be deleted after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed after the second timer notice display TM12 has been erased. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change at the timing when the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (9), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (9), “05: 11 ”is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "hold change completed" indicating that the hold change has been performed is displayed together with the panda icon PND. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect (notice effect) executed as a result of the timer advance effect is notified by the icon. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Still there" are displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility that the advance notice display by the timer advance notice effect may be further performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (10), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (10). In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "what", which raises expectations as to which notice display will be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (11), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (11).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (12), the third stop is stopped at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". This is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream!" Are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol is displayed after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 may be set to "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer notice effects overlap, and it is shown that one of the timer notice displays (second timer notice display TM12) functions as a look-ahead notice. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timing at which the timer notice display is started is different for each of the plurality of timer notice effects.

After that, as shown in FIG. 325 (13), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased. Here, after the first timer notice display TM11 is erased, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream may be started, or after the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. The first timer notice display TM11 may be erased, or the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream may be started at the timing when the first timer notice display TM11 is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (14), it is shown that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the pseudo-ream. Then, the replay icon RPL is displayed below the panda icon PND displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the pseudo-continuous effect has been performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (16), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 325 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 325 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the normal reach is performed and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Timer notice due to SP development" are displayed, and it seems that the mission effect indicating that the timer notice effect is started by developing into super reach is started. Is also shown. In this production example, when the mission is achieved, the timer notice production is started and the reliability of the jackpot is increased. Therefore, by shifting to super reach, it may be possible to expect that the timer advance notice effect will be started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (19) following FIG. 325 (18) shows that the normal reach is continuously performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (20), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during the normal reach, and the display does not shift to the super reach, and the decoration of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is displayed. It is notified that the stop display is displayed by the combination of symbols. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system does not shift to super reach.

Then, as shown in FIG. 326 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL are erased, and the "sorry" character displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also erased. The panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be erased after the decorative symbol shake fluctuation starts, or the decorative symbol shake fluctuation may occur after the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL are erased. It may be started, or the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted at the timing when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol starts. Further, the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted at the same time, or may be deleted one by one.

After that, as shown in FIG. 326 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (23), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (24), it is shown that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. In this production example, the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, respectively, and the two timer notice effects are started at the same time. The third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are both default display modes. "30:00" is displayed as a timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests. Further, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests that. In this production example, since the two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 start the countdown at the same time, there is a certain effect both when 10 seconds have passed and when 30 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Is suggested to be initiated. Here, some effects that may start after 10 seconds and some effects that may start after 30 seconds may be the same or different. May be good.

After that, the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 and the timer display on the fourth timer notice display start counting down (subtraction display), respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (25), the third timer notice display TM13 is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. "29:45" is displayed, and "09:45" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14. That is, it is shown that 0.55 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Attention to the timer" are displayed to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (26), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the countdown continues on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (26), "28:02" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "08:02" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (27), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. The countdown continues on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (27), "27:75" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "06:75" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

After that, as shown in FIG. 326 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. The countdown continues in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and FIG. 326 (28) shows.
At the timing shown in (1), "25:23" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, and "05:23" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (29), it is shown that the normal reach is started and the middle symbol is fluctuating at a low speed. In addition, the characters "coming soon" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 may count up and the notice effect may start soon. Has been done. The countdown continues on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (29), "23:16" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "03:16" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (30), it is shown that the normal reach is continuously performed. The countdown is still continuing in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (30), "21:80" is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. It is displayed, and "01:80" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

After that, as shown in FIG. 326 (31), when the countdown in the fourth timer notice display TM14 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 crosses a large number of Sabohani characters SBHN. Sabohani group notice will be given. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with high expectation of big hit. That is, it can be said that when the Sabohani group notice is given, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the Sabohani group notice is not given. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (31), a strong Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the fourth timer notice display TM14. In other words, the strong Sabohani group notice can be said to be an example of a certain production. The timer display on the 4th timer notice display TM14 may be started after the timer display is "00:00", or the timer on the 4th timer notice display TM14 may be started after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 is "00:00". On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (31).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (32), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified. At this time, the fourth timer notice display TM14 is erased. On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "18:31" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (32).

Subsequently, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (33) develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. The icon SBH of the Sabohani is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been executed. Further, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and “12:63” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (33).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (34) shows that the swordsman reach is continuing. Then, the characters "timer attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the third timer notice display TM13. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and "11:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (34).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (35), the timer advance notice shortening animation is started during the countdown display on the third timer advance notice display TM13, and the effect is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13. Has been done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 326 (36), the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 is reduced, and "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. As described above, in this effect example, it may be difficult to predict the type of effect executed by the timer advance notice effect by changing the timer display during the countdown display.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (37) following FIG. 326 (36). .. Further, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. That is, in this production example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain production.

As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer notice effects overlap, and both timer notice displays (third timer notice display TM13, fourth timer notice display TM14) change the symbol during execution. It is shown that it is functioning as a notice regarding the display (the change notice).

After that, as shown in FIG. 327 (38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. In this production example, an example in which the effect (notice effect) executed as a result of the timer advance effect may not be notified by the icon is shown. Here, the icon may be used to notify that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a has been executed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (39), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 327 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

FIG. 328 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 329 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 328 stepwise. is there. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 328 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 325 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and the two timer notice effects start at the same time. Will be done. It should be noted that three or more timer advance notice effects may be started at the same time. Both of these two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are the default display modes. On the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "16:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 16 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. Further, "03:00" is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Suggests. In this production example, since the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start the countdown at the same time, a certain effect is produced both when 3 seconds have passed and when 16 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. It is suggested that it will be started. Here, some effects that may start when 3 seconds have passed and some effects that may start when 16 seconds have passed may be the same or different. May be good.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM11 and TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (4), "14:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed, and "01:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 1.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 328 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed, and the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00". The characters "Enter look-ahead mode" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that the look-ahead mode is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the look-ahead mode is executed as a certain effect as a result of the timer advance effect applied to the second timer advance display TM12. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 328 (6), the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased, and the "look-ahead mode" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the look-ahead mode is displayed. It has been reported that it has rushed into. Further, at this time, the character "Enter read-ahead mode" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is erased. On the other hand, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "12:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (7), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "08:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (8), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "07: 00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (8).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (9), a third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 328 (10). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "05:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (10).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (11), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "03:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (11). The look-ahead mode continues even after the symbol variation display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (12), the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:80" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (12).

Then, as shown in FIG. 328 (13), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. It changes to a mode and becomes a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer notice display TM11 is shown. Further, the characters "hold change" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed. As described above, in this effect example, in addition to the look-ahead notice in the look-ahead mode performed as a result of a certain timer notice effect, the look-ahead notice is performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon as a result of another timer notice effect. An example is shown. Further, in this effect example, the target of the look-ahead notice in the look-ahead mode performed as a result of a certain timer notice effect and the target of the look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon performed as a result of another timer notice effect are the same symbol variation. An example is shown that is intended for display. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 became "00:00", but the timer on the first timer notice display TM11. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display becomes "00:00", or the first timer notice display TM11 may change after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The timer display in may be "00:00". After that, as shown in FIG. 328 (14), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased. In addition, the character "pending change" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (16), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (17), a third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 328 (18). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (19) following FIG. 328 (18), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure is started. The symbol variation display on the display device 212 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. The look-ahead mode continues even after the symbol variation display starts.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (20), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (21), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 329 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (23), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been made.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (24), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 329 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (26), a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters “game” are arranged in the balloon is displayed together with a close-up image of the character of the lord. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the bancho is not arranged around the characters of "game" in the balloon, and it is a big hit than when the cut-in image is not displayed. Although the reliability is high, it suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is lower than that when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with "chance", suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is increasing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 329 (27), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 329 (27), a game ball is won at the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the number of holdings of special drawing 1 increases by one, and the number of holdings of special drawing 1 in the second holding number display is increased. The display of the number is "1".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (28), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 329 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, the timer notice display of a plurality of timer notice effects is started at the same time, and both timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11, second timer notice display TM12) function as pre-reading notices. It is shown that it is doing. Further, it is also shown that both timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11, second timer notice display TM12) function as pre-reading notices for the same symbol variation display.

Further, in this production example, the start timing of the hold change animation does not start at the timing when the timer notice display becomes "0:00", but "00:00" when the display mode of the hold icon changes. Therefore, the change in the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect is consistent with the completion of the countdown of the timer notice display, and the change in the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect and the timer notice effect. It may be possible to clarify the relationship with.

In this effect example, the countdown in the timer notice display of the two timer notice effects was started at the same time, but the timing of the start of the countdown of the first timer notice display TM11 is a symbol variation display in which the display mode of the hold icon changes. May start after the start. That is, the timing of starting the display of the timer notice display of the plurality of timer notice effects is the same, but the timing of starting the countdown may be different. In this case, the countdown may be started in different symbol variation displays.

Further, in this effect example, the pre-reading notice (pre-reading mode, display of the hold icon according to the pre-reading display mode) as a certain effect is started for each of the different symbol variation displays, but each pre-reading is performed in the same symbol variation display. You may want to start the notice.

FIG. 330 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 331 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 330 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 330 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 325 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this production example, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM1)
The 1st and 2nd timer notice display TM12) are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and the two timer notice effects are started at the same time. It should be noted that three or more timer advance notice effects may be started at the same time. Both of these two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are the default display modes. On the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "06:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 6 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In addition, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display on the timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, suggesting that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In this production example, since the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start the countdown at the same time, a certain effect is produced both when 6 seconds have passed and when 10 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. It is suggested that it will be started. Here, some effects that may start after 6 seconds and some effects that may start after 10 seconds may be the same or different. May be good.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (4), the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed. , "05:75" is displayed, and "09:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (5) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display screen. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Also, in the center of the display screen, the characters "Item get when the princess appears" are displayed, and when the princess character appears from the treasure box, you can get a notice item (sometimes called a "notice icon"). It is suggested that it can be done. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (5), "05:60" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "09:60" is displayed. As described above, in this production example, the countdown of the timer display by the timer advance notice production is started before the start of the mini game.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM11, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (6), "04:37" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "08:37" is displayed.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (7) displays the characters "decide to the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the character is displayed on the right. It has been notified that the treasure chest image BXR has been determined as an open treasure chest. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (7), "03:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "07: 00" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (8), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Then, the characters "Open" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, calling attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (8), "02:50" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "06:50" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (9), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "Item get" are displayed, and "Ya" is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The word "Taze" is displayed, and it is notified that the mini-game was successful and the notice item was acquired. This suggests that in the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11, it is guaranteed that a certain effect will be performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. In this production example, the appearance of the princess character HME announces the acquisition of a notice item as a certain effect. At this time, the countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (9), "01:50" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. On the second timer notice display TM12, "05:50" is displayed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the countdown by the timer advance notice effect is performed, and the effect may be excited by the mini game until the countdown is completed (until "00:00").

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (10), at the timing when the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed as a super reach notice item. The swordsman character KNG is added to the first timer notice display TM11. By displaying the notice item of the super reach in this way, it may be visually easy to understand that the super reach is executed. Further, in this production example, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. Further, in this effect example, an example in which a notice item is displayed as a certain effect as a result of performing the timer notice effect is shown. The swordsman character KNG may be displayed after the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the swordsman character KNG may be displayed after the swordsman character KNG is displayed. The timer display may be "00:00". The countdown continues on the second timer advance notice display TM12, and "04:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (10).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (11), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 is changed from "00:00" to "SP waiting", and super reach is started for this display. Continue until the timer. In other words, does the super reach corresponding to the display of "SP waiting" in the first timer notice display TM11 and the display of the swordsman character KNG as a notice item occur in the symbol variation display at this point? It is difficult to determine whether it will occur in the symbol variation display from the next time onward. The countdown continues on the second timer advance notice display TM12, and "03:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (11).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (12), the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "01:80" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (12).

Then, as shown in FIG. 330 (13), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. It changes to a mode and becomes a look-ahead display mode. Further, the characters "hold change" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (14), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "hold change", a panda character PND is added, and the hold icon is displayed. It is shown that the display mode is notified that the display mode has changed. That is, in this effect example, the timer advance notice display shows that the content of a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is being notified.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the character "pending change" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (16), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (17), a third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 330 (18). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (19) following FIG. 330 (18), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure is started. The symbol variation display on the display device 212 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. The second timer notice display TM12 is erased when the symbol variation display is started, but the first timer notice display TM11 with the swordsman character KNG added and the characters "SP waiting" is displayed is displayed. Is being continued. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 was a pre-reading notice that the super reach will be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (20), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the characters "hot" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically increased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (21), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 331 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, at this time, the first timer notice display TM11 notifies that the digestion animation is started, the swordsman character KNG as a notice item is digested, and the game shifts to super reach. The digestion animation of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the reach state is formed, or the reach state may be formed after the digestion animation of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Then, the digestion animation of the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the reach state is formed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (23), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been made.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (24), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 331 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (26), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. Notifying that CI1a has been displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 331 (27), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (28), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 331 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, an example in which a plurality of timer advance notice effects are all executed as pre-reading notices is shown, and some timer advance notice effects are executed as a result of performing at least one timer advance notice effect. An example is shown in which it is difficult to determine whether the effect is a notice in the symbol variation display or a look-ahead notice. Moreover, in this effect example, it is found that all timer advance notice effects are pre-reading notices targeting the same symbol variation display when the pre-reading target symbol variation display is performed, so that the same symbol variation display is displayed. By combining the target look-ahead notices, it may be possible to dramatically increase the expectation of a big hit.

FIG. 332 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 333 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 332 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 332 (1) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 330 (1) to (15), the description thereof will be omitted.

After the first stop of the decorative symbol is performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (16) performs the second stop, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. To. Then, as shown in FIG. 332 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (18), the digestion animation is started on the first timer notice display TM11, and it is notified that the swordsman character KNG as a notice item is digested and shifts to super reach. Will be done. That is, it can be said that the swordsman character KNG in this production example functions as a notice that the super reach is executed in the symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, an example is shown in which at least one of the two timer advance notice functions functions as a look-ahead notice. Further, in this effect example, an example is shown in which it is difficult to determine whether a certain effect executed as a result of performing each of a plurality of timer advance notice effects is a pre-reading notice or a notice in the symbol variation display. ing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (19) following FIG. 332 (18), "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the development becomes super reach. There is. In this production example, the Sabohani group notice is not given.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 333 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. In addition, the second timer notice display TM12 is quietly erased as it shifts to super reach.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (21) displays the weak cut-in image CI1b, and a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with a "chance", so that the expectation of a big hit is high. It suggests that it is up.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (22), the screen in which the main character's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is notified that the scheduled display will be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

After that, as shown in FIG. 333 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 333 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, one of the plurality of timer advance notice effects is executed as a look-ahead notice, and the other is a notice in the symbol change display, and the symbol change display that is the target of the timer notice effect is different. Therefore, it may be possible to raise the expectation for a big hit for any of the symbol variation displays that are the targets of the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 334 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 334 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 325 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and the two timer notice effects start at the same time. Will be done. Both of these two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are the default display modes. On the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "06:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 6 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. Further, "02:00" is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Suggests. In this production example, since the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start the countdown at the same time, a certain effect is produced both when 2 seconds have passed and when 6 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. It is suggested that it will be started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM11 and TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (4), "05:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed, and "01:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (5), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 continue to count down, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 334 (5), the first timer notice display TM11 displays "05:20" and the second timer. In the notice display TM12, "01:20" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 334 (6), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. It changes to a mode and becomes a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 334 (7), in the second timer notice display TM12, "hold + 1 UP" is displayed instead of "00:00", and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed. It has been notified that the display mode of the look-ahead notice has changed. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "03:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (8), the hold change animation is further started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be further changed. To. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (8).

Then, as shown in FIG. 334 (9), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the panda to the display of the bancho. The mode changes to a look-ahead display mode that is a step up from the panda display mode. That is, in this effect example, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11, an example in which the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is further changed is shown. Has been done. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that a certain effect executed as a result of performing the two timer advance notice effects is performed for the same symbol variation display. In this effect example, as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, the display mode of the hold icon changed from the default display mode is further changed, but it may not change. There may be. Further, the hold icon that changes the display mode as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 and the display mode change as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12. The hold icon may be different. After that, as shown in FIG. 334 (10), in the first timer notice display TM11, "hold + 1UP" is displayed instead of "00:00", which is in phase with the notification in the second timer notice display TM12. In addition, it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed in two stages.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (11), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (12), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (13), a third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 334 (14). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon was performed for the same symbol variation display. For example, as shown in FIG. 334 (7), FIG. In addition to the first hold icon h11, the hold change animation is started for the second hold icon h12, and the display modes of both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may change. May be notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 334 (9'), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the panda to the chief. At the same time as changing to the display mode, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the panda display mode. That is, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer notice display TM11, an effect of further changing the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is performed, and further, another hold icon display mode is performed. An example is shown in which a production that changes the timer is performed.

In this effect example, as a result of each of the two timer advance notice effects in the same symbol variation display, the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed in two stages, but in each of the different symbol variation displays, the same hold icon is used. The display mode may be changed.

FIG. 335 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 336 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 335 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 335 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 325 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a pseudo continuous effect is started as a certain effect. As described above, this effect example suggests the content of a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by adding identification information such as an icon to the timer notice display.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (4), "09:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the characters "timer activation" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (5) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "04:00" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, suggesting that a certain effect is started when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the panda icon PND is added to the second timer advance notice display TM12, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold icon will change as a certain effect. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "09: 00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (5). In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (6), "03:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "08:75" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (7) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a display indicating a "1" roll on the dice and a display indicating "pending change" are displayed. Is performed, and after the mini-game is started, the effect button 136 is operated, and as a result, it is foretold that the display mode of the hold icon will change when the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "mini game start"
Character is displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified. The countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 335 (7), "08:60" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "03:60" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (8), the variable display of the dice symbol was started, the button image 136a was displayed together with the button reception time meter MT, and the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 was started. This is notified and the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes so that the gauge becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the mini game. The button reception time meter MT may not be displayed. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (8), "08:12" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "03:12" is displayed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (9), as shown in FIG. 335 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 335 (10), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a "1" roll, and the character "success" is displayed, which is the result of the mission achievement in the mini game. Has been notified. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "I did it" are displayed, informing that the mini game was successful. That is, it is determined that the result of this mini-game changes the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect on the second timer advance display TM12. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (10), "06:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "02:00" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (11), the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the above is changed. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (11), "05:88" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:88" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (12), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display of the number length. It changes to a mode and becomes a look-ahead display mode. In addition, the characters "hot" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the first hold icon h11 has changed to a highly reliable display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "05:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (13), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "super hot hold", and the display mode of the hold icon is the reliability of the jackpot. It is shown that the display mode has been changed to a higher display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "04:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (14), the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 continues, and “04:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (14). .. At this time, the characters "right timer attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a warning is given to the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side of the display screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (15) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the left and right of the center of the display screen, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. ing. In addition, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and a navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. In addition, the characters "Get out the princess" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that a notice may be displayed when the princess character appears from the treasure chest. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "04:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (15).

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (16), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "02:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (16).

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (17) displays the character "right selection" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the right treasure box. It is informed that the image BXR has been selected as an open treasure chest. Further, the selected right treasure chest image BXL is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is deleted. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is temporarily stopped and remains at "02:50", but the countdown may be continuously performed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (18), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the characters "pseudo-renyo" are displayed. The word "Success" is displayed to inform you that the mini-game was successful. That is, based on the result of this mini-game, it is determined that a pseudo continuous effect as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11 is performed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is restarted, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (18).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (19) following FIG. 335 (18), the characters "pseudo-ream" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, foretelling that the pseudo-ream will start. .. At this time, the decorative design is enlarged and moved to the center of the display screen. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "00:78" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 336 (19).

Then, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 336 (20) and "00:00" is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and "decoration 5" is displayed. -Replay symbol RP-Decoration 6 "decorative symbol combinations are displayed. The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is "00:00". As described above, in this production example, for example, when it is confirmed that the pseudo-ream is performed, the decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed one by one, but the three symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time, so that the game is smooth. It may be possible to proceed to. Even in this case, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed one by one in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

After that, as shown in FIG. 336 (21), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, instead of the display of "00:00", a display of "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started is performed. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (22), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (23), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 336 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 336 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the normal reach is performed and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (26), it is shown that the normal reach is continuously performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (27), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during the normal reach, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" causes fluctuations in shaking. A temporary stop is being performed. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the character will be lost.

After that, as shown in FIG. 336 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the first timer notice display TM11 that has notified that the pseudo-ream has been performed is also deleted. Since the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is still the display mode of the bancho, the display of "super hot hold" is maintained in the second timer notice display TM12.

As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the timer notice is performed according to the result (success) of the mini game.

FIG. 337 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 338 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 337 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 337 (1) to (9) are the same as those in FIGS. 335 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (9), as shown in FIG. 337 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 337 (10), the dice pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a "3" roll, and the character "regrettable" is displayed, which does not result in the achievement of the mission in the mini game. Has been notified. That is, it is notified that the mission has failed. In addition, the characters "regrettable" are displayed even in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. That is, depending on the result of this mini-game, the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the second timer advance notice display TM12 is changed, but the mini-game is successful. Will give different results. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (10), "06:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "02:00" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (11), the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the above is changed. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (11), "05:88" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:88" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 337 (12), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. It changes to a mode and becomes a look-ahead display mode. In addition, the characters "little heat" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the first hold icon h11 has changed to a display mode with a slightly higher reliability. That is, it can be said that it is suggested that the reliability is lower than the display mode of the Bancho, but higher than the default display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "05:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (13), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "chance hold", and the display mode of the hold icon is slightly higher in reliability. It is shown that the display mode of the look-ahead notice has been changed to notify the change. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "04:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (14), the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 continues, and “04:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (14). .. At this time, the characters "right timer attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a warning is given to the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side of the display screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (15) shows that the mini game is started. It should be noted that the effect example shown in FIGS. 337 (15) to (17) is different from the effect example shown in FIGS. 335 (15) to (17) in that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. , The same is true except that the display contents of the second timer notice display TM12 are different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (18), the auntie character BBA appears from the right treasure box image BXR, the character "Uhihi" is displayed, and the navigation character Y
The word "sorry" is also displayed in the vicinity of M, indicating that the mini-game has failed. That is, in this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 335, it is shown that the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 was a fake advance notice effect due to the failure of the mini game. It is suggested that the pseudo-continuous production as a production is not performed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is restarted, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (18). If the mini-game fails, the reach state may be set and the reach effect may be performed instead of performing the pseudo continuous effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 338 (19) following FIG. 337 (18), the decorative symbol is enlarged and moved to the center of the display screen. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "00:78" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 338 (19).

After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 338 (20) and "00:00" is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and "decoration 5" -A combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed, and a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 338 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "Decoration 5-Decoration 4". -It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4". The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is "00:00". In this way, in this production example, for example, when it is confirmed that a pseudo-ream is not performed and a loss occurs, the decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed one by one, and three symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time. , The game may be able to proceed smoothly. Even in this case, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed one by one in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

FIG. 339 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 340 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 339. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 339 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 325 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "08: 00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 8 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-ream will be started as a certain effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (4), "07:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the characters "timer activation" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (5) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "04:00" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, suggesting that a certain effect is started when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the panda icon PND is added to the second timer advance notice display TM12, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold icon will change as a certain effect. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "07: 00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (5). In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (6), "03:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "06:75" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (7) shows that the dice mini-game is started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a display indicating a "1" roll on the dice and a display indicating "pending change" are displayed. Is performed, and after the mini-game is started, the effect button 136 is operated, and as a result, it is foretold that the display mode of the hold icon will change when the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "mini game start" are displayed to notify the start of the mini game. The countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 339 (7), "06:60" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "03:60" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (8), the variable display of the dice symbol is started, the button image 136a is displayed, and the notification that the operation of the effect button 136 is started is notified, and the game is played. It encourages the person to operate the effect button 136. In this production example, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed, but it may be displayed. The countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (8), "06:12" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer notice is displayed. On the display TM12, "03:12" is displayed.

FIGS. 339 (9) to (10) show that the operation validity period of the effect button 136 in the dice mini-game continues. That is, it is shown that the mini-game of the dice has started, but the operation of the effect button 136 has not been performed yet. The countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (10), "04:35" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice is displayed. On the display TM12, "01:35" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (11), it is shown that the dice symbol and the button image 136a being displayed in a variable manner move to the lower left of the display screen. This suggests that other effects will be performed in duplicate with the running dice mini-game. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (11), "04:22" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:22" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (12), another mini-game (a treasure chest mini-game) starts while the dice mini-game is being executed. When the treasure chest mini-game is started, the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the left and right of the center of the display screen, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. In addition, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and a navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. In addition, the characters "Get out the princess" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that a notice may be displayed when the princess character appears from the treasure chest. The dice mini-game is being played continuously, and the operation of the effect button 136 is also effective. Further, the countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (12), "04:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:00" is displayed.

As described above, in this production example, during the period in which one mini-game related to one of the two timer notice effects is being performed, one mini-game related to the other timer advance effects is played. It is played, and as a result, it is shown that there is a period during which multiple mini-games are played at the same time. That is, at least the period during which one mini-game related to one of the plurality of timer advance notice effects is being performed and the period during which one mini-game related to the other timer advance notice effects is being performed. It is shown that some overlap.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (13), as shown in FIG. 339 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 339 (14), the design of the dice is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a roll of "1", and it is notified that the result of the mission in the mini-game of the dice has been reached. That is, it is determined that the result of this mini-game changes the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect on the second timer advance display TM12. In this production example, the result of mission achievement is notified only by the stop display of the dice symbol, but in FIG. 335, the character display of "success" and the navigation character YM "done" are performed as described above. Character display may be performed. On the other hand, the countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (14), "03:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "00:75" is displayed. At this time, the treasure chest mini-game is also being played continuously, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (15), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The countdown is interrupted in the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (15), the first timer notice display TM11 remains at "03:75" and the second timer. In the notice display TM12, it is left as "00:75". Further, even at this time, the treasure chest mini-game continues, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective.

After that, the countdown of the timer display on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 is restarted, and as shown in FIG. 339 (16), when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the first The display mode of the hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the number length, resulting in a highly reliable look-ahead display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is continuously performed, and the timing shown in FIG. 339 (16) is "03:00". Further, even at this time, the treasure chest mini-game continues, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (17), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "super hot hold", and the display mode of the hold icon is the reliability of the jackpot. It is shown that the display mode has been changed to a higher display mode. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "02:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (17). Further, at this time, it is shown that the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are moving to the left side as the dice mini-game ends. In addition, the treasure chest mini-game is continuing, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 339 (18) to 340 (26) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 339 (18) to 340 (26) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 335 (16) to 336 (24), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 340 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (27) gives a notice of the strong sabohani group. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been made.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (28), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 340 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (30). Further, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 340 (31), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (32), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 340 (33), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 341 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 342 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 341 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 341 (1) to (9) are the same as those of FIGS. 325 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (10), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “04:29” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (10). In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "pseudo-ream", which fuels the expectation that the pseudo-ream effect will be performed when the countdown on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (11), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "02:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (11). In addition, the character "No!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, denying that a pseudo-ream is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance display TM11. It is suggested that there is.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (12), the timer advance notice change animation (timer advance notice addition animation) is started during the countdown display on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and the effect is applied to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the characters "Is it a group notice?", And as a certain effect executed as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11. It has been suggested that there is a possibility that the Sabohani group will be announced instead of the pseudo-ream. As described above, in this effect example, the possibility that a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is not a pseudo-ream but another effect is notified. As a result, the player may be able to expect that the effect performed after the countdown of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed will be an effect with higher reliability of the jackpot than the pseudo-ream.

After that, as shown in FIG. 341 (13), the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is added, and "15:03" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. In addition, a question mark is added to both the characters of "group notice" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the Sabohani group notice may be given. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to recognize that another effect is performed by adding the timer display while predicting that a pseudo-ream will be performed as a certain effect. is there. Even if the timer notice change animation is performed, the time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display does not change, and in the end, a pseudo-ream may be performed as a certain effect. Further, in this effect example, the example in which the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is added has been described, but the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 may be added. In addition, the timer display may be subtracted as well as added.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (14), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In this production example, the pseudo-ream effect that the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and started is different from a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11. It is said that.
Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yes!" Are displayed in response to the display of the "group notice" in FIG. 341 (13), and the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11. It is announced that a certain effect to be executed as a result of the performance is a Sabohani group notice. In this production example, although the pseudo-continuous production is performed even though a certain production is not the pseudo-continuous production, the pseudo-continuous production may not be performed (it may be a ghost). ), And the pseudo-continuous production may be performed without fail. Further, a certain effect is a pseudo-continuous effect, and further, by adding a timer display, another effect (sabohani group notice) may be a certain effect, corresponding to one timer notice effect. There may be a plurality of certain effects to be performed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "14:60" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (14).

After that, as shown in FIG. 341 (15), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "14:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (15).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (16), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "06:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (16).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (17), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 341 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:13" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341 (18).

After that, as shown in FIG. 342 (19) following FIG. 341 (18), when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 is strong. Sabohani group notice will be given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this production example, as a result of the timer notice production by the first timer notice display TM11, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed instead of the pseudo-ream. The timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the timer display is "00:00", or the timer on the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". Further, as shown in FIG. 342 (19), when the Sabohani group notice is started, the display of the panda icon PND ends.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 342 (20), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 342 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. In addition, the icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has occurred.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 342 (22), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the strong cut-in image is displayed. Notifying that CI1a has been displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 342 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 342 (24), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 342 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 343 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 343 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 325 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and the two timer notice effects start at the same time. Will be done. Both of these two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are the default display modes. On the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "60:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 60 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In this effect example, by displaying "60:00" on the first timer notice display TM11, the occurrence of super reach is suggested. For example, a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect is a display of a cut-in image. It suggests that. That is, the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 is externally pretending to function as a notice regarding the running symbol variation display. Further, "02:00" is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Suggests. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 343 (4) to (7) are performed. The effect shown in FIGS. 343 (4) to (7) differs from the effect shown in FIGS. 334 (4) to (7) by 54 seconds in the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11. Since it is the same except for, the description is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (8), the characters “timer attention” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the first timer advance notice display TM11. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "56:85" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343 (8).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (9), the timer advance notice shortening animation is started during the countdown display on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and the effect is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. It is shown.

After that, as shown in FIG. 343 (10), the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is reduced, and "02:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. At this time, the panda icon PND is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold icon will change as a certain effect. In this way, in this effect example, by changing the timer display during the countdown display, it is pretended that the timer notice effect is being executed as a look-ahead notice, and in fact, the symbol variation display being executed is displayed. The production is done so that it turns out that it was executed as a notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (11), the hold change animation is further started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be further changed. To. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "01:20" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343 (11).

Then, as shown in FIG. 343 (12), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the panda to the display of the chief. The mode changes to a look-ahead display mode that is a step up from the panda display mode. That is, in this effect example, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11, an example in which the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is further changed is shown. Has been done. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that a certain effect executed as a result of performing the two timer advance notice effects is performed for the same symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, the timer advance effect for the first timer advance display TM11 and the timer advance effect for the second timer advance display TM12 are executed as advance notices for different symbol variation displays at the beginning of the effect. After that, a certain effect corresponding to the second timer notice display TM12 and a certain effect corresponding to the first timer notice display TM11 were targeted for the same symbol variation display. Since it turns out to be a thing, it may be possible to give the game a surprise. In other words, the time indicated by the timer display at the time when the first timer notice display TM11 is started suggests that the notice to be performed during the super reach is generated at the beginning of the display, but the timer display is shortened. Moreover, by changing the display mode of the hold icon, the pre-reading notice for the same symbol variation display as the second timer notice display TM12 is performed, so that the pre-reading notice for the same symbol variation display is combined. Therefore, it may be possible to dramatically improve the degree of expectation for a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 343 (13), in the first timer notice display TM11, "hold + 1UP" is displayed instead of "00:00", which is in phase with the notification in the second timer notice display TM12. In addition, it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed in two stages. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 343 (14) to (17) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 343 (14) to (17) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 334 (11) to (14), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 both function as pre-reading notices for the same symbol variation display. Each of them may function as a notice regarding the display of the symbol change during execution. In either case, since the combined notice is given for the same symbol variation display, the reliability of the jackpot may be further improved.

Further, the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer advance notice effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be executed for different symbol variation displays. For example, one timer advance notice effect may be executed. It may function as a look-ahead notice, and the other timer notice effect may function as a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed. In this case, the expectation for a big hit is higher than when the same symbol variation display is combined. May be able to be dispersed. Further, either one of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer advance notice effect on the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be a fake timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 344 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 344 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 325 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (3), it is shown that the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (4), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "60:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 60 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 344 (5), "58:12" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.88 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (6), the bomb image BOM is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) the front side of the first timer notice display TM11, indicating that the bomb effect has started. It has been done. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped by the bomb image BOM. When the bomb effect is started, the squib extending from the upper end of the bomb image BOM is displayed to ignite, and the squib is displayed to be shortened according to the elapsed time from the start of the bomb effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (7) shows that the bomb effect is continuing. At the timing shown in FIG. 344 (7), the state immediately before the fuse reaches the upper end of the bomb image BOM is shown. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the characters "what", suggesting that some kind of production will be started as a result of the bomb production.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (8), it is shown that the bomb image BOM explodes and the effect image is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the first timer notice display TM11. .. In this case as well, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is difficult to see because it is overlapped by the effect images.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (9), in addition to the first timer notice display TM11, the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed, indicating that the two timer notice effects are started. .. In addition, the characters "timer increase" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the two timer advance notice effects have been started. Here, the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is reset to "60:00", and the second timer notice display TM12 displays "02:00" as the timer display. Further, the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM12 are both default display modes. That is, in this effect example, the timer notice display is divided and displayed during the execution of the timer notice effect, and a new timer notice effect is started. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 344 (10) to (12) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 344 (10) to (12) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 343 (4) to (6), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, for example, as shown in FIGS. 325 (9) to 326 (36), the symbol variation display ends, the next symbol variation display starts, and then the super reach is performed, and then the figure. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 344 (13), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. Further, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain advance notice effect. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 344 (14) to (16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 344 (14) to (16) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 327 (38) to (40), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 345 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 346 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 345 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 345 (1) to (3) are the same as those in FIGS. 344 (1) to (3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (4), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this production example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 345 (5), "02:12" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.88 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (6), the bomb image BOM is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) the front side of the first timer notice display TM11, indicating that the bomb effect has started. It has been done. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped by the bomb image BOM. When the bomb effect is started, the squib extending from the upper end of the bomb image BOM is displayed to ignite, and the squib is displayed to be shortened according to the elapsed time from the start of the bomb effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (7) shows that the bomb effect is continuing. At the timing shown in FIG. 345 (7), the state immediately before the fuse reaches the upper end of the bomb image BOM is shown. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the characters "what", suggesting that some kind of production will be started as a result of the bomb production. In the first timer notice display TM11, although it is difficult to see due to the bomb image BOM, the timer display is "00:00".

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (8) shows how the bomb image BOM explodes.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (9), in addition to the first timer notice display TM11, the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed, indicating that the two timer notice effects are started. .. In addition, the characters "timer increase" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the two timer advance notice effects have been started. Here, the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is reset to "60:00", and the second timer notice display TM12 displays "02:00" as the timer display. Further, the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM12 are both default display modes. That is, in this effect example, as a result of performing the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11, it is shown that the bomb image BOM explodes as a certain effect and two timer advance effects are newly started. There is.

In this production example, after the bomb image BOM explodes, as shown in FIG. 345 (9'), the characters "SP waiting" are displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, and the super reach notice is given. An effect in which the swordsman character KNG as an item is added and an effect in which a new timer advance notice effect is started on the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be performed. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "item get" are displayed, and it is notified that the notice item has been acquired. That is, as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, two notice effects are performed as a certain effect, one is the effect of displaying the notice item, and the other is the new timer notice effect. May be started.

If a lower plate full tank error occurs after the bomb image BOM explodes and the two timer advance notice effects are started as described above, a new display is made as shown in FIG. 345 (9 ″). Even if the ball removal error display "Please pull out the ball" is displayed so that it overlaps (overlaps) the front side of the started first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12. Good. According to this, in order to make the timer notice display easy to see, it may be possible to eliminate the ball removal error in a hurry. The ball removal error display may overlap with the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12.

In addition to the ball removal error display, another error display such as a door opening display may be configured to overlap with the timer notice display. This is because the error display is an important notification content for the player, so it may be possible to pay attention to the fact that the error has occurred by deteriorating the visibility of the timer notice display.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (10) following FIG. 345 (9), the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. , "01:50" is displayed. On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display has not been started, and the display remains as "60:00". That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is started only for one of the two timer advance notice effects. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed to call attention to the second timer notice display TM12.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (11), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "01:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (11). On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 346 (12), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. It changes to a mode and becomes a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. In addition, the character "hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes to increase the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11. It suggests that it has improved. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changed at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 became "00:00", but the timer on the second timer notice display TM12 The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display becomes "00:00", or the second timer notice display TM12 may change after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The timer display in may be "00:00". After that, the second timer notice display TM12 is erased. On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (13), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped and displayed, respectively, and after being temporarily stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2". , The state of the confirmed display is shown. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (14), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (15), "59:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

FIG. 347 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 348 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 347 stepwise. Is. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 347 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 347 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 347 (1), one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and is displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device 208. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center and is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

FIG. 347 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode consisting of one bomb, and the characters "TIMER" are added above. In addition, the characters "timer is on hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. In this production example, the display of the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb indicates that the warning display of the timer notice production is being performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 347 (7). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the bomb, is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode of the timer notice effect related to the symbol change, is used. Become.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "07: 00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 7 seconds after the countdown is started. In addition, the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb indicates that the display of "TIMER" is erased and the head of the fuse is ignited, and in the vicinity of the navigator character YM, "something happens after 7 seconds". The characters "..." are displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed 7 seconds later. Here, the display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed after the display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (10), "06:36" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the length of the fuse of the variable icon h0 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (11), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (11). In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "what", which raises expectations as to which notice display will be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (12), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “01:66” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (12). In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the characters "pseudo-ream", suggesting that a pseudo-ream effect may be performed when the countdown on the first timer notice display TM11 is completed. doing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (13), the third stop is stopped at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". This is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In addition, the variable icon h0, which is the display mode of the bomb, explodes.
The effect is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream" are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol is displayed after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 may be set to "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 347 (14), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the default display mode, and further, the variable icon h0 indicates the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream. "Is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, when the pseudo-continuous effect as a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the variable icon h0 notifies that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. The situation is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (16), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 347 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (18), a strong Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (19) following FIG. 347 (18), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. , It is reported that it will develop into super reach.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 348 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (21), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. Notifying that CI1a has been displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 348 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (23), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 348 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, the timer notice effect is executed only once for each bomb display, but even if one bomb is displayed, the timer notice effect may be executed a plurality of times. May be good. Further, a plurality of types of bomb display modes (for example, color, shape, etc.) may be prepared, and the number of timer advance notice effects to be executed may be different depending on the display mode. In this case, the timer advance notice effect of the number of times corresponding to the display mode may not be performed. For example, the timer may be executed only once when it is executed up to three times.

FIG. 349 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 350 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 349. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 349 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 349 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 349 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and are displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 Is displayed as. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (3), a mini game has also started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, a small decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner, and a display indicating the roll of "1" on the dice and a display of "pending change" are performed, and the mini-game is played. It is foretold that the display mode of the hold icon will change when the effect button 136 is operated after the start and as a result, the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "mini game start" are displayed to notify the start of the mini game. The mini game may start after the timer advance notice effect starts, the timer advance notice effect may start after the mini game starts, and the timing when the timer advance notice effect starts and the mini game start. The timing may be the same.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (4), the variable display of the dice symbol was started, the big button image 136aL was displayed together with the button reception time meter MT, and the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 was started. In addition, the character "press" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to encourage the player to operate the effect button 136. Here, when the big button image 136aL is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than that when the button image 136a of a normal size is displayed, that is, the jackpot symbol is easily displayed in a definite manner. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (4), the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed with "04: 37 ”is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.63 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (5), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol as shown in FIG. 349 (6). In the example shown in FIG. 349 (6), the dice pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a "1" result, and the character "OK" is displayed, which is the result of the mission achievement in the mini game. Has been notified. That is, it is determined that the result of this mini-game is used to change the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11. The countdown is still continuing on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "02:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (7), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The countdown is still continuing on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (7).

Then, as shown in FIG. 349 (8), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display of the bomb. The mode is changed, the character "TIMER" is added above it, the character "Timer is on hold" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the first hold icon h11 is changed to the bomb display mode. It has been notified that it has changed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, the display of the hold icon that changes to the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb that announces the execution of the timer notice effect as a certain effect. It is shown that the mode change effect is being performed. Further, in this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 347, the hold icon of the bomb display mode is not displayed at the time of starting winning, but the display mode of the bomb is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display after winning. An example of changing the display mode is shown in the hold icon. A replay icon is displayed on the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the bomb, and the result of the timer advance notice effect executed in connection with the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the bomb. It has been suggested that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous production may be performed as a certain production. That is, it can be said that a notice of pseudo-continuous production (pre-reading notice) is being performed. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changed to correspond to the display of the bomb at the timing when the timer display became "00:00", but the timer display became "00:00". Later, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be changed to the display mode of the bomb, or the timer display may be changed to "00:00" after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of the bomb. May be.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (10), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the shaking fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 349 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 has "decoration 5". It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (12), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the bomb, is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode of the timer notice effect related to the symbol change, is used. Become. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 349 (13) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 349 (13) to (17) are the effects shown in FIGS. 347 (9) to (13), except that the replay icon is displayed on the variable icon h0. Since it is the same, the description thereof will be omitted. Here, the timer advance notice effect executed in FIGS. 349 (13) to 349 (17) is a timer advance notice effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (18), it is shown that the display mode is changed to the replay display mode after the variable icon h0, which is the bomb display mode, explodes. As described above, in this effect example, when a pseudo-continuous effect as a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer advance effect, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to a specific display mode (replay display mode). By doing so, it is shown that the pseudo-continuous production has been performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (19) following FIG. 349 (18), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (20), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (21), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 350 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (23), a strong Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area remains displayed together with the variable icon h0. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. Further, in this production example, one Sabohani character constituting the strong Sabohani group notice stumbles on the variable icon h0, and a change animation of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the variable icon h0 may be affected by the advance notice of the Sabohani group.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (24), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the replay to the display mode of the bomb displayed in large size. However, the characters "new timer!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. That is, the variable icon h0 indicates that the timer advance notice effect related to the third timer advance notice display TM13 is started. In addition, the characters "hot" are displayed above the variable icon h0 after this change, suggesting that there is a possibility that a highly reliable effect of a big hit may be executed as a certain effect. .. A cut-in icon is displayed on the variable icon h0, and as a result of performing a timer advance notice effect for which execution is announced, a cut-in image may be displayed as a certain effect. Is suggested. Then, in this production example, since the characters "hot" are displayed, it can be said that it is foretold that the strong cut-in image CI1a is likely to be displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 350 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon h0 is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (26), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the third timer advance notice display TM13 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, suggesting that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown was started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (27), "01:25" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “0:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (28). That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain advance notice effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 350 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (30), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. Further, in this effect example, when the variable icon h0 is redisplayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer notice effect related to the third timer notice display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 350 (31), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 351 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 351 (1) to 351 (12) are the same as those in FIGS. 347 (1) to (12), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 351 (13), the third stop is stopped at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". This is done, "decoration 6" is displayed as a stop instead of the replay symbol RP in the middle symbol, and the character "unexploded" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is shown that the notice production was a fake timer notice production. The timer display may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, or the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display is "00:00". The middle symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display becomes "00:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 351 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased. Further, the variable icon h0 has changed from the bomb display mode to the default display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 351 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the bomb, but an example in which a fake timer notice effect is performed is shown, but the fake timer notice effect may not be performed. That is, when the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the bomb, the timer advance notice effect may be performed without fail.

FIG. 352 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 353 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 352 stepwise. Is. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 352 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 347 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 352 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 has a display mode in which three bombs are represented as a lump, and the characters "TIMER x 3" are added above. In addition, the characters "timer is on hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. In this production example, it is shown that the notice display that the timer notice effect is executed three times is performed by displaying the hold icon in the display mode in which the three bombs are grouped together. .. The display mode of the bombs is not limited to one or three, and may be displayed in a display mode in which two bombs are in a single block, or in a display mode in which four or more bombs are in a single block. It may be displayed as.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 352 (7). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which the three bombs are agglomerated is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that three timer notice effects related to the symbol variation are executed. It becomes the variable icon h0 which is the notice display mode of the thing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "07: 00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 7 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-ream will be started as a certain effect. In addition, in the variable icon h0 of the display mode in which three bombs are grouped together, the display of "TIMER x 3" is erased and the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the right side of the three bombs is ignited. The situation is shown, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Something will happen after 7 seconds ..." are displayed, and a certain effect can be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed 7 seconds later. It has been suggested that there is sex. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed after the display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. Further, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, or the display position of the decorative symbol is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (10), "06:36" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the length of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (11), it is shown that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, suggesting that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the Sabohani icon SBH is added to the second timer notice display TM12, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the Sabohani group notice will be started as a certain effect. In addition, the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which the three bombs are grouped together shows that the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the left side of the three bombs is ignited. The length of the fuse of the bomb placed on the left side also becomes shorter according to the time after the countdown of the timer display starts. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (11). In addition, the character "attention" is continuously displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (12), "19:20" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "04:95" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (12) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the characters "When a group notice is confirmed" are displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with the character of Sabohani. It has been announced that when the Sabohani character SBHN appears from the treasure box, a Sabohani group notice will be given. In addition, the characters "Attention to mini-games" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to alert the mini-games along with the timer advance notice effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (13) shows how the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened, the Sabohani character SBHN appears from the inside, and the characters "Success!" Are displayed in the vicinity. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "I did it" are displayed, indicating that the mini game was successful. The countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 352 (13), "03:51" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "17:76" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 352 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the highly reliable display mode, and the second timer display mode is changed to the high reliability display mode.
The Sabohani icon SBH attached to the timer notice display TM12 is displayed in a manner of increasing to four, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is executed. In addition, when the display mode is changed to the high reliability display mode, the strong Sabohani group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak Sabohani group notice may be executed. , Strong Sabohani group notice is always executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the "pseudo-ream", and as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11, the pseudo-ream effect can be performed as a certain effect. It has been suggested that there is sex. The countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 352 (14), "01:37" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "15:62" is displayed.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (15) and "00:00" is displayed, the right side of the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which the three bombs are agglomerated. Bomb explodes and the effect is displayed. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Replay symbol RP-Decoration 6" is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream!" Are displayed to notify that the pseudo-ream effect is performed. The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is "00:00". On the other hand, in the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “14:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (15).

After that, as shown in FIG. 352 (16), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed to notify that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. The replay icon RPL may be started to be displayed after the second decoration symbol variation display by the pseudo-ream is started, or the second decoration by the pseudo-ream after the replay icon RPL is started to be displayed. The variation display of the symbol may be started, or the display of the replay icon RPL may be started at the timing when the variation display of the second decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, at this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the mode in which the bomb arranged on the right side is erased. As described above, in this effect example, the bombs are displayed in such a manner that the bombs are decremented by one each time the timer advance notice effect is performed once. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (16).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (17), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "05:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (17).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (18), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 353 (19) following FIG. 352 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. To. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "02:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 353 (19).

After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (20), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the variable icon h0 of the display mode in which the two bombs are agglomerated is used. The bomb on the left explodes, the effect is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a notice of the strong Sabohani group. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12. The timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 may be started after the timer display is "00:00", or the timer on the second timer notice display TM12 may be started after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 is "00:00".

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (21), it is shown that the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. At this time, the icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed below the icon of the replay icon RPL, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been performed. At this time, the second timer notice display TM12 is erased. Further, in this effect example, since the effect display is subsequently switched to the super reach display, the variable icon h0 displayed in the variable icon display area is deleted. The variable icon h0 may be deleted after the second timer advance notice display TM12 is deleted, the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be deleted after the variable icon h0 is deleted, or the second timer advance display TM12 may be deleted. The timing at which the timer notice display TM12 is deleted and the timing at which the variable icon h0 is deleted may be the same.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 353 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area is erased. Further, in this production example, corresponding to the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb, which is the remaining one of the three, "waiting" with the bomb icon in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed, and it is notified that the third timer advance notice effect is scheduled to start. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (23), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the third timer advance notice display TM13 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, suggesting that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. At this time, the bomb icon displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen has been erased. The replay icon RPL overlaps the front side of the third timer notice display TM13, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 353 (24), "01:25" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (25) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this production example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain production.

After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (27), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. Further, in this effect example, when the variable icon h0 is redisplayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer notice effect related to the third timer notice display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, the timer advance effect of the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon is executed, but it is not the same number of times as the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon. , The number of bombs displayed may be the minimum guaranteed number of times the timer advance notice effect is executed, or may be the maximum number of times that the timer can be executed.

In addition, as a mission, when the timer notice effect of the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon is executed (that is, when the mission is completed), the jackpot symbol is always displayed. It may be configured in.

FIG. 354 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 354 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 347 (1) to (10), the description thereof will be omitted.

First timer notice display At the timing when the timer display in TM11 becomes "06:36", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (11) shows that the second timer notice effect has started. Has been done. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. “02:00” is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, suggesting that a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 354 (12), "01:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, the second timer notice display TM
It is shown that one second has passed since the countdown of the timer display in No. 12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "05:36" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 354 (12), the effect of exploding the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb starts even though the timer display in any of the timer notice displays is not "00:00". Has been done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 354 (13), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the bomb display mode to the panda display mode at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”. Then, it becomes a look-ahead display mode. Further, the character "icon change" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed. After that, as shown in FIG. 354 (14), the second timer notice display TM12 is erased. In addition, the character "pending change" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 354 (14).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “03:29” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 354 (15). In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "what", which raises expectations as to which notice display will be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (16), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “01:66” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 354 (16). In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the characters "pseudo-ream", suggesting that a pseudo-ream effect may be performed when the countdown on the first timer notice display TM11 is completed. doing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (17), the third stop is stopped at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". This is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream!" Are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol is displayed after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 may be set to "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that a plurality of timer notice effects are performed by the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb suggesting one timer notice effect.

FIG. 355 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 356 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 355 stepwise. Is. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 355 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 347 (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 355 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is displayed. It becomes "1". Here, the first hold icon h11 is a display mode of a bomb, but is a display mode of a large bomb having a size larger than that shown in FIG. 347 (3). Further, the replay icon, the Sabohani icon, and the bancho icon are displayed on the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of this large bomb, and the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of this large bomb is displayed. As a result of the timer advance notice effect executed in connection with the above, it is suggested that there is a possibility that a pseudo continuous effect, a Sabohani group notice, and a cut-in image are displayed as a certain effect. That is, it can be said that the pseudo-continuous production, the Sabohani group notice, and the cut-in image notice (look-ahead notice) are performed. In addition, the characters "Large timer is on hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. In this effect example, three icons indicating an effect to be executed as a certain effect are displayed on the hold icon in the display mode of one bomb, so that a notice display indicating that the timer notice effect is executed three times. Is shown. The number of icons shown in the hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of the large bomb is not limited to one or three, and may be in a mode in which two icons are displayed, or four. The above icon may be displayed in some cases.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the characters "demon heat" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the large bomb, is extremely high. doing.

FIG. 355 (5) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special drawing 1 starting port 230 and the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (second hold icon) h12 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is displayed. It becomes "2". Here, the second hold icon h12 partially overlaps with the first hold icon h11, which is a display mode of the large bomb, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. There is. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Waiting for demon heat" are displayed, and the start of the symbol variation display related to the first hold icon h11, which suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high. Notifies that it is waiting.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (6), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (7), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 355 (8). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (9), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the large bomb is a notice display that the timer notice effect related to the symbol change is executed three times by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. The variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb, which is the mode, is set. In addition, in response to the start of the symbol variation display related to the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb, the characters "demon heat is changing" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a big hit notice is given. It has been done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (10), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "07: 00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 7 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a pseudo continuous effect is started as a certain effect. In addition, the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb indicates that the tip of the fuse is ignited, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "something after 7 seconds ..." are displayed. It is suggested that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed after 7 seconds. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, or the display position of the decorative symbol is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (11), "06:36" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the length of the fuse at the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb is shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11. At this time, for example, the display mode of the replay icon displayed on the variable icon h0 may be changed by blinking display or the like to notify that the timer advance notice effect corresponding to the replay icon has started. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (12), it is shown that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, suggesting that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the Sabohani icon SBH is added to the second timer notice display TM12, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the Sabohani group notice will be started as a certain effect. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (12). In addition, the character "attention" is continuously displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect. At this time, for example, the display mode of the Sabohani icon displayed on the variable icon h0 may be changed by blinking display or the like to notify that the timer advance notice corresponding to the Sabohani icon has started. ..

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (13), "19:20" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "04:95" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (13) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the characters "When a group notice is confirmed" are displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with the character of Sabohani. It has been announced that when a Sabohani character appears from the treasure box, a Sabohani group notice will be given. Here, the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb partially overlaps with the character display of "when a group notice is confirmed", but the character display may overlap with the variable icon h0. .. In addition, the characters "Attention to mini-games" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to alert the mini-games along with the timer advance notice effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (14) shows how the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened, a Sabohani character appears from the inside, and the characters "Success!" Are displayed in the vicinity. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "I did it" are displayed, indicating that the mini game was successful. The countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 355 (14), "03:51" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "17:76" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 355 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. The added Sabohani icon SBH is displayed in a manner of increasing to four, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is executed. When the display mode is changed to high reliability, the strong Sabohani group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak Sabohani group notice may be executed. However, in this production example, the weak Sabohani group notice may be executed. , Strong Sabohani group notice is always executed. Further, in the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb, since the mini-game was successful and the execution of the Sabohani group notice was confirmed, the mark of "Done" is displayed so as to overlap with the Sabohani icon. In addition, the "done" mark may be displayed after the Sabohani group notice is executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the "pseudo-ream", and as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11, the pseudo-ream effect can be performed as a certain effect. It has been suggested that there is sex. The countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 355 (15), "01:37" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "15:62" is displayed.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (16) and "00:00" is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and "decoration 5" -Replay symbol RP-Decoration 6 "decorative symbol combinations are displayed. Although a part of the variable icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb overlaps with the replay symbol RP, the replay symbol RP may overlap with the variable icon h0. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream!" Are displayed to notify that the pseudo-ream effect is performed. The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is "00:00". On the other hand, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “14:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (16).

After that, as shown in FIG. 355 (17), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed to notify that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. Further, in this effect example, since the pseudo-continuous effect was executed as a result of the timer advance effect, it is set to overlap with the replay icon displayed on the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb. Mark is displayed. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (17).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (18), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "05:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (18).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (19) following FIG. 355 (18), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "02:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 356 (20).

After that, as shown in FIG. 356 (21), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (22), it is shown that the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. At this time, the icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed below the icon of the replay icon RPL, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been performed. At this time, the second timer notice display TM12 is erased. Further, in this effect example, the effect display is subsequently switched to the super reach display, but when the variable icon h0 is the display mode of the large bomb, the variable icon h0 is not erased, and even if the transition to super reach is performed. The displayed state is maintained, but the variable icon may be erased.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 356 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (24), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the third timer advance notice display TM13 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, suggesting that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. The replay icon RPL overlaps the front side of the third timer notice display TM13, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 356 (25), "01:25" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (26) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a, and then FIG. 356 (27). As shown in the above, the third timer notice display TM13 is erased. Further, in this effect example, since the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the timer advance effect, the icon of the bancho displayed on the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb is overlapped. The "Done" mark is displayed. As described above, in this production example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain production.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (28), since the corresponding effects were performed for all the icons shown in the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb, the effect of exploding the variable icon h0 started. Has been done. Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (29), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the large bomb to the display mode of the panda, and the notice display by the variable icon h0 is performed. Here, the variable icon h0 may change to a display mode other than the panda display mode. For example, when the variable icon h0 changes to the display mode of the panda, the jackpot symbol is higher than when the display mode changes to the panda display mode. May be easily displayed. In addition, the display mode may change to the default display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 356 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is erased together with the variable icon display area, but it may not be erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (31), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. At this time, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also redisplayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 356 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 357 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a hold notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 357 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 347 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 357 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode of Yoshimune hold, and is a display mode of the look-ahead notice. When the hold icon is displayed in this Yoshimune hold display mode, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally fixed and stopped than when the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode. In addition, the characters "I-sama appeared!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the hold icon according to the display mode of Yoshimune hold is displayed. In addition, after the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune hold display mode is started to be displayed, the display of the characters "I appear!" May be started, or the characters "I appear!" May be displayed. After the start, the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune hold display mode may be started to be displayed, or at the timing when the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune hold display mode is started to be displayed, "I appear! The display of the characters "" may be started. In addition to the Yoshimune hold display mode that represents the character of the lord, for example, the hold icon is displayed in the grandfather hold display mode that represents the grandfather character and the grandfather hold display mode that represents the grandmother character. The reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the type of character.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "expected next fluctuation" are displayed, and the expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold, is high. It has been suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the characters displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM have been erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 357 (7). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold, becomes the change icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "SP confirmed!" Are displayed, and it is notified in advance that the system will shift to super reach. In this way, it can be said that the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold functions as a look-ahead notice of a big hit and also as a look-ahead notice of super reach. The display of the characters "SP confirmed!" May be started after the symbol variation display is started, or the characters "SP confirmed!" May be started at the timing when the symbol variation display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (10), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 357 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 357 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice, in which the number of Sabohani SBHNs is smaller than that of the above-mentioned strong Sabohani group notice, is performed. This weak Sabohani group notice is more reliable than when the Sabohani group notice is not given, but is less reliable than when the strong Sabohani group notice is given.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (13), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 357 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (15) shows that the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (16), the screen in which the main character's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is notified that the scheduled display will be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

After that, as shown in FIG. 357 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. In addition, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are redisplayed, and the variable icon h0 of the Yoshimune hold display mode is also redisplayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 357 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 358 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 359 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 358 stepwise. Is. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 358 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 347 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 358 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode common to the display mode of Yoshimune hold representing the character of the lord described above, but the character of the lord holding the bomb is displayed. It is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown, and it is the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect. In addition, the character "group" is displayed on the bomb held by the character of the lord, and there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice will be performed as a certain effect that will be executed as a result of the timer notice effect. It suggests. In addition, the characters "I-sama appeared!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the hold icon is displayed according to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold. In addition, after the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode is started to be displayed, the display of the characters "I appear!" May be started, or the characters "I appear!" May be displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode may be started to be displayed after the start of, or at the timing when the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode is started to be displayed, "I The display of the characters "Sama appeared!" May be started. In addition to the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode that represents the character of the lord, for example, the hold icon is displayed in the grandbomb hold display mode that represents the grandfather character and the grandmother bomb hold display mode that represents the grandmother character. May be displayed, and the possibility of a true timer advance notice effect may differ depending on the type of character.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "expected next fluctuation" are displayed, and the expectation of a big hit in the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, is high. Is suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "something" is displayed, indicating that the display of a certain message has started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then, as shown in FIG. 357 (7). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character display of "something" is switched to the character display of "I have something", that is, the message "I have something" is displayed from these character displays. It can be said that there is. This message corresponds to the display of the hold icon in the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode, and suggests that the timer notice effect may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. In addition, the characters "demon heat" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, is extremely high. ing. The display of the characters "demon heat" may be started after the symbol variation display is started, or the display of the characters "demon heat" may be started at the timing when the symbol variation display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "12:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 12 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (10), "11:86" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.14 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (11), the first timer notice display TM11 shows that the timer display is switched to the character display of "waiting for group generation". At this time, a Sabohani icon is added to the left side of the character display of "Waiting for group generation", and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice will be executed as a result of the timer notice effect. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the explanation display (tutorial display) is performed in the timer notice display during the execution (subtraction) of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display. After that, as shown in FIG. 358 (12), the character display of "waiting for group generation" is switched to the timer display again. In this production example, the timer display is a switching display in which the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 and the character display of "waiting for group generation" are alternately switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 0.5 seconds). It is performed from the start of the countdown to the reach state described later. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "10:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (13), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and the above-mentioned alternate display also continues, and "04:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (14), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 358 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (16), the alternate display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 ends, and the timer display is continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (16).

After that, as shown in FIG. 358 (17), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is still displayed, and the variable icon h0 is continuously displayed. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect being performed by the first timer advance notice display TM11, it is shown that the Sabohani group advance notice is performed as a certain effect.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (18), it is shown that the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. Then, the variable icon h0, which was the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, has been changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold in which the bomb has been erased. That is, in this production example, the timer notice effect is executed by the variable icon (hold icon) of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a combination of the notice of success / failure judgment (pre-reading notice) and the notice of the timer notice effect (pre-reading notice). An example is shown in which the display mode is changed to the Yoshimune hold display mode, which has only the function of notifying the judgment of success or failure (pre-reading notice) after the function is fulfilled. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (18), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is also erased. The first timer advance notice display TM11 may be erased after the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change after the first timer notice display TM11 is erased. Alternatively, the timing at which the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes and the timing at which the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased may be the same.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 359 (19) following FIG. 358 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. Will be done. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon h0 is erased together with the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 may be deleted after the transition to the super reach, the variable icon h0 may be deleted after the transition to the super reach, or the variable icon h0 may be deleted at the timing of the transition to the super reach. It may be erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (20), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. Notifying that CI1a has been displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 359 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (22), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. In addition, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also redisplayed, and the variable icon h0 is also redisplayed in the Yoshimune hold display mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 359 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 360 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 361 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 360 stepwise. Is. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 360 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 360 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 360 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and are displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 Is displayed as. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

FIG. 360 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display becomes “2”. .. Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 has a display mode in which three bombs are represented as a mass, and the characters "TIMER x 3" are added above. In addition, the characters "timer is on hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. In this effect example, as described above in FIG. 352, by displaying the hold icon in the display mode in which the three bombs are agglomerated, the notice display that the timer notice effect is executed three times is performed. It is shown that it is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 360 (7). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the icon SBH of Sabohani is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, and in this effect example, as will be described later, the result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11. , Suggests that the Sabohani character may appear from the treasure chest image BOX in the mini-game. In addition, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which the three bombs are grouped together shows that the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged in the center of the three bombs is ignited, and the navigator character YM In the vicinity of, the characters "something will happen after 5 seconds ..." are displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed after 5 seconds. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed, or the first hold icon may be started after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. The display mode of h11 may change, or the first timer advance notice display TM11 may start to be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Further, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, or the display position of the decorative symbol is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed. In this production example, the character display of "TIMER x 3" additionally displayed above the first hold icon h11 is continuously displayed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (10), "04:06" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.94 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, the length of the fuse of the bomb arranged at the center of the first hold icon h11 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (11) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the characters "Gekiatsu notice when appears" are displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with the character of Sabohani. It has been announced that when a Sabohani character appears from the treasure box, a notice with extremely high reliability of the jackpot will be executed. In addition, the characters "mini game" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the mini game.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (12) and "00:00" is displayed, the result of the mini game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened after moving to the center, and the Sabohani character SBHN appears in a large size from the inside, and " The characters "Group notice confirmed" are displayed, and the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that the mini-game has been successful and the Sabohani group notice will be executed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the result of the mini game is derived as a certain effect as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, it can be said that as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11, it can be said that the pre-reading advance notice notification that the Sabohani group notice is performed is performed as a certain effect.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (13), the characters "preparing" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the Sabohani icon SBH, and a notice is given that the Sabohani group notice will be performed. There is. Further, at this time, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to a mode in which the bomb arranged in the center is erased and the two bombs are represented as a lump. Here, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display of the Sabohani icon SBH and the character display of "preparing" is started, or the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. After that, the Sabohani icon SBH and the character display of "preparing" may be started to be displayed, or the first hold icon h11 is displayed at the timing when the Sabohani icon SBH and the character display of "preparing" are started to be displayed. The display mode may change. If the mini-game is successful, the strong Sabohani group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak Sabohani group notice may be executed. However, in this production example, the strong Sabohani group notice is executed. The group notice is always executed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (14), after the first stop to the third stop are sequentially performed, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 2-Decoration 5". It shows how it is being done. After that, as shown in FIG. 360 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 2-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (16), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11 after the display mode is changed as described above moves to the variable icon display area in the state of the changed display mode, so that the remaining two timer notices regarding the symbol change are announced. The variable icon h0 is a mode for displaying a notice that the effect is executed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (17), it is shown that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. In this production example, the second timer notice display TM12 and the third timer notice display TM13 are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, respectively, and the two timer notice effects are started at the same time. The second timer notice display TM12 and the third timer notice display TM13 are both default display modes. A replay icon RPL is added to the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a question mark icon is added to the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the left side of the display screen. QST is added. Then, "07:00" is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12, and it is suggested that a certain effect is started 7 seconds after the countdown is started. That is, it is suggested that the pseudo-continuous production may be started 7 seconds after the timer display countdown is started. Further, "08: 00" is displayed as a timer display on the third timer notice display TM13, and it is suggested that a certain effect is started 8 seconds after the countdown is started. It is not clear which effect is executed as a result of the timer advance effect on the third timer advance display TM13. In this production example, since the two timer notice displays TM12 and TM13 start the countdown at the same time, a certain production starts both when 7 seconds have passed and when 8 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. It is suggested that it will be done. In addition, the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which the two bombs are grouped together shows that the heads of both fuses of the two bombs are ignited in response to the start of the two timer advance notice effects.

After that, the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 and the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 start counting down (subtraction display), respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (18), the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. , "04:27" is displayed, and "05:27" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. That is, it is shown that 0.73 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 361 (19) following FIG. 360 (18) and "00:00" is displayed, the display that the two bombs are in one mass is displayed. Both bombs at the aspect variation icon h0 explode and the effect is displayed. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Replay symbol RP-Decoration 6" is displayed. On the other hand, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and "01:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 361 (19).

After that, as shown in FIG. 361 (20), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed to notify that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and "00:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 361 (20).

After that, at the timing when the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed and becomes "00:00", in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (21), the display mode of the variable icon h0 is a mass of two bombs. The display mode is changed from the above display mode to the display mode of the panda, and the display mode is a notice regarding the symbol variation display. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the third timer notice display TM13 is shown. Further, in this production example, the content of a certain production was not clear by the question mark icon QST, but the content of a certain production is clarified for the first time when the countdown is completed and a certain production is performed. The situation is shown. Further, in this production example, when the hold icon that has been started to be displayed in the display mode in which three bombs are displayed as a lump is displayed as the hold icon, the timer notice effect is performed as a look-ahead notice and is displayed as a variable icon. After that, it is shown that a timer notice effect is also performed as a notice regarding the symbol variation display. That is, when the hold icon of the display mode notifying that the timer advance notice effect is performed a plurality of times is displayed, the timer advance notice effect is executed in each of the plurality of symbol variation displays. Specifically, it is shown that the Sabohani group notice, which is performed as a result of executing the timer notice effect, the pseudo-continuous effect, and the change effect of the variation icon h0 are performed in different symbol variation displays. Further, in this effect example, the pre-reading advance notice performed as a result of a certain timer advance notice effect and the advance notice regarding the symbol change display performed as a result of another timer advance notice effect are performed for the same symbol variation display. An example is shown. Further, in this effect example, two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time, but it is shown that the contents of the effects performed as a result of executing each timer advance notice effect are different.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (22), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased, and the panda icon PND is displayed below the replay icon RPL, and the notice is given by the variable icon h0. It is informed that the notification has been made.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (23), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (24), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 361 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In addition, the Sabohani icon SBH and the "preparing" display displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM have been deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (26), a strong Sabohani group notice is given so as to correspond to the Sabohani icon SBH and the display of "Preparing" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. .. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. Further, in this production example, one Sabohani character SBHN constituting the strong Sabohani group notice stumbles on the variable icon h0, and a change animation of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the variable icon h0 may be affected by the advance notice of the Sabohani group.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (27), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the panda to the display mode of the large displayed Bancho. However, it is shown that the mode of the notice display by the variable icon h0 has been stepped up to a more reliable one.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 361 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area is erased.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (29) shows that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 361 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the inside is displayed. The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (31), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. It is also shown that the variable icon h0 is also redisplayed in the display mode of the large size Bancho. After that, as shown in FIG. 361 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 362 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 362 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 349 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 362 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special drawing 1 starting port 230 and the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display becomes “2”. .. Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is set as a button hold display mode, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by operating the effect button 136 has been started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (4), the characters “PUSH” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a notification for promoting the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is performed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (6), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the button hold display mode. It is shown that the timer display is displayed above the second hold icon h12, which has changed from the display mode to the bomb display mode. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer notice display is displayed on the hold icon. In the effect example shown in FIG. 362 (6), "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the hold icon is used to identifiable the time (initial value) at the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. In this production example, the start of the countdown is reserved until the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 starts, but the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is displayed. The countdown may be started in the held state, that is, in the state displayed as the hold icon. In this case, when a timing for starting a certain effect is specified, such as a timing after the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is started, the timer display is reset and the countdown is restarted. You may try to do it. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "pseudo-ream", and as a result of the timer advance notice effect, there is a possibility that the pseudo-ream effect is executed as a certain effect. Is suggested. At the timing shown in FIG. 362 (6), a lower plate full tank error has occurred, and the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps (overlaps) a part of the second hold icon h12 on the front side. ), The ball removal error display "Please remove the ball" is displayed. According to this, in order to make the timer notice display easy to see, it may be possible to eliminate the ball removal error in a hurry.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (7), the game progresses from the timing shown in FIG. (6), and the hold on the second hold icon h12 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is shown that is digested and the variable display of the symbol is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (7), the timer display countdown is started in the timer notice display displayed on the variable icon h0, and at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (7), "07". : 32 "is displayed. That is, it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed after 7.32 seconds. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the timer is displayed by the variable icon h0. It can also be said that the variable icon display area on which the variable icon h0 is displayed also functions as a display area for displaying the timer notice display. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the "attention" character is displayed to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, when the countdown in the timer notice display displayed on the variable icon h0 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (8) and "00:00" is displayed, "decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6" is displayed. The combination of the decorative symbols of is displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-continuous production is performed.

Further, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (5), as shown in FIG. 362 (6'), "30:00" may be displayed as a timer display. Has been done. That is, the effect example shown in FIG. 362 (6') suggests that a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the characters "group notice", and as a result of the timer notice effect, there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice will be executed as a certain effect. Is suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (7'), the game proceeds from the timing shown in FIG. (6'), and the second hold icon h12 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is shown that the hold on the item has been exhausted and the variable display of the symbol has started. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 362 (7'), "30:00", which is the timer display at the start of the countdown, is continuously displayed as the timer display in the timer notice display displayed on the variable icon h0. When the timer display countdown is started, the timer display countdown is performed on the first timer notice display TM11 after the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. It is said. That is, in this production example, the hold icon (variable icon) is used to display the time (initial value) at the start of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display so that it can be specified, and the timer notice display is displayed separately. In the timer notice display, it is shown that the timer display is being counted down. At the timing shown in FIG. 362 (7'), "27:32" is displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be performed after 27.32 seconds. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the "attention" character is displayed to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (8') and "00:00" is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a strong Sabohani group notice. It is shown that it is. In this effect example, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are not erased and are displayed. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed.

In this way, the hold icon may be first displayed in the button hold display mode, and may be changed to the bomb display mode by operating the effect button 136.

In the effects shown in FIGS. 14 to 48 and 65 to 362, a certain type of effect performed as a result of executing the timer advance notice effect, the effect content of the timer advance notice effect, and the content of the mini game Needless to say, various effects described with reference to the drawings prior to FIG. 325 and various effects described with reference to FIGS. 363 to 371 described later can be applied.

363 to 371 are diagrams for explaining an example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

FIGS. 363 (A1) to 363 (A18) show a state in which the hold notice effect is performed according to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 363 (A1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIGS. 363 (A1) to (A18) is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons in special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 in special figure 1. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 363 (A1), one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 has a default display mode (round, unpatterned and white). Display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round and white hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 363 (A1) is the non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew, and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won. This is because it is in a difficult state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, FIG. 36
As shown in 3 (A1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device 208. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center and is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

FIG. 363 (A3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special drawing 1 starting port 230 and the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode of Yoshimune hold, and is a display mode of the look-ahead notice. When the hold icon is displayed in this Yoshimune hold display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode. In addition, the characters "I-sama appeared!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the hold icon according to the display mode of Yoshimune hold is displayed. In addition, after the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune hold display mode is started to be displayed, the display of the characters "I appear!" May be started, or the characters "I appear!" May be displayed. After the start, the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune hold display mode may be started to be displayed, or at the timing when the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune hold display mode is started to be displayed, "I appear! The display of the characters "" may be started. In addition to the Yoshimune hold display mode that represents the character of the lord, for example, the hold icon is displayed in the grandfather hold display mode that represents the grandfather character and the grandfather hold display mode that represents the grandmother character. The reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the type of character.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "expected next fluctuation" are displayed, and the expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold, is high. It has been suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the characters displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM have been erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the shaking fluctuation. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "SP confirmed!" Are displayed, and it is notified in advance that the system will shift to super reach. In this way, it can be said that the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold functions as a look-ahead notice of a big hit and also as a look-ahead notice of super reach. The display of the characters "SP confirmed!" May be started after the symbol variation display is started, or the characters "SP confirmed!" May be started at the timing when the symbol variation display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A10), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 363 (A11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 363 (A12), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice, in which the number of Sabohani SBHNs is smaller than that of the above-mentioned strong Sabohani group notice, is performed. This weak Sabohani group notice is more reliable than when the Sabohani group notice is not given, but is less reliable than when the strong Sabohani group notice is given.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A13), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 363 (A14), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A15) shows that the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A16), the screen in which the main character's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is notified that the planned "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" will be stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative symbols.

After that, as shown in FIG. 363 (A17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5-
It is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 5". At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. In addition, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are redisplayed, and the variable icon h0 of the Yoshimune hold display mode is also redisplayed. The variable icon h0 may be redisplayed in the default display mode instead of the Yoshimune hold display mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 363 (A18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, an example of a loss display result is shown, but it may be a big hit.

FIGS. 363 (B1) to 363 (B12) show an example of an effect in which the hold display displayed in the Yoshimune hold display mode changes to the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 363 (B1) to (B3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 363 (A1) to (A3), the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B4) shows that the mini game is started. At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and on the right side of the treasure box image BOX, the characters "If appear, it is a timer notice stock" with the bomb icon BOMB. Is displayed, and when the bomb icon BOMB appears from the treasure box, it is notified that the execution of the timer notice effect will be stocked. The mini game may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, the display position of the decorative symbol may be changed after the mini game is started, or the display position of the decorative symbol may be changed. The mini-game may be started at the timing of the change.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B5) displays the result of the mini game. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened, and the bomb icon BOMB appears in a large size from the inside, and the characters "stock confirmed" appear in the vicinity. Is displayed, and it is notified that the execution of the timer notice effect is stocked.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B6), the bomb icon BOMB collides with the first hold icon h11 displayed in the Yoshimune hold display mode, and the hold change animation is displayed at the first hold icon h11. It is started and notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 363 (B7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of Yoshimune hold to the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect. .. That is, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is a display mode in which the bomb icon BD is integrally added to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold. In addition, the characters "timer hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the first hold icon h11 has changed to the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode, and the execution of the timer notice effect has been stocked. It has been notified. The display of the characters "timer hold" may be started after the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is changed, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed after the display of the characters "timer hold" is started. The display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold may be changed, or the display of the characters "timer hold" may be started at the timing when the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold. Further, when the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, the character of the lord may change to another character. It may be changed to the display mode of the aunt bomb hold shown. In addition, the display color of the Yoshimune hold display mode consisting of the characters of the lord or the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode is changed from the default color to another color (for example, red), and the reliability of the jackpot is increased (ranked up). You may do so.

In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 363 (B8), the decorative symbol is enlarged and moved to the center of the display screen. In addition, the character "timer hold" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM has also been deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "expected next fluctuation" are displayed, and the expectation of a big hit in the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, is high. Is suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B10), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the characters displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM have been erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B11), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 363 (B12). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Hereinafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 358 (8) to 359 (23) are performed. In this case, the result of the loss may be displayed.

As described above, in this production example, the hold icon of the pre-reading notice display mode changes to the pre-reading notice display mode of the timer notice effect as a result of the mini-game, and the timer notice effect is performed in addition to the pre-reading notice regarding the jackpot. It is shown that the look-ahead notice is being made.

In this production example, an example in which the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode in which the bomb icon BD is integrally added to the Yoshimune hold display mode is displayed. For example, FIG. 363 (B7') shows. As described above, the bomb icon BD'may be arranged and displayed above the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold, and may be displayed separately from the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold. In this case, since the bomb icon BD'is displayed at a position corresponding to the display position of the first hold icon h11, it is easy to recognize which hold icon the bomb icon BD' corresponds to. You may be able to do it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 363 (B7 ″), the bomb icon BD ′ may be arranged and displayed above the variable icon h0. In this case, it may be difficult to tell which hold icon or variable icon the bomb icon BD'corresponds to.

Further, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed as shown in FIG. 363 (B7 ″ ″). Specifically, the display BD ″ of the bomb is displayed and used as a look-ahead notice function of the timer notice effect, and as a look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot, a character icon (for example, a panda icon different from the character of the lord). The hold icon may be displayed in such a manner that the PD) is displayed along with the display of the bomb.

364 (B3a) and FIG. (B7a) show different effect patterns of FIGS. 363 (B3) and (B7), respectively. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (B3a), when a game ball is won at the special drawing 1 starting port 230 and the number of holdings in special drawing 1 increases by one, the display mode is not Yoshimune holding. , It is shown that the display mode is different from the hold icon in the default display mode. The display mode may be different in color from the default display mode. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 364 (B3a), the display mode is round and blue. As a result, a look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot is given. When pre-reading notice is given by changing the color of the hold icon, the reliability may be different depending on the color. For example, in this production example, the reliability is in the order of rainbow color> gold color> red color> green color> blue color. In this case, in the case of rainbow color, the jackpot confirmation may be notified. After that, a mini game is played as shown in FIGS. 363 (B4) to (B6), and when the bomb icon BOMB is displayed from the treasure box image BOX as a result of the mini game, FIG. 363 (B7a). ), A fuse may be added to the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 364 (B3a) to change the display mode of the timer notice, which is the display mode of the bomb. In this case, the form of the hold icon may also be changed, for example, the display mode may be changed from a round blue display mode to a round red display mode. That is, the reliability of the look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot may be increased (up by two steps). In this case, the reliability may be increased by one level, the reliability may be increased by two or more levels, the reliability may be increased by only one level, or the reliability may be increased twice. It may be up only in the above specific number of steps. In this way, the display mode of the look-ahead notice in the hold icon may be ranked up.

364 (B3b) and FIG. (B7b) show different effect patterns of FIGS. 363 (B3) and (B7), respectively. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (B3b), when a game ball is won at the special drawing 1 starting port 230 and the number of holdings in special drawing 1 increases by one, the display mode is not Yoshimune holding. , It is shown that the display mode is different from the hold icon in the default display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 364 (B3b), the display mode is red in a round shape, indicating that a pre-reading notice regarding the jackpot is being performed. After that, a mini game is played as shown in FIGS. 363 (B4) to (B6), and when the bomb icon BOMB is displayed from the treasure box image BOX as a result of the mini game, FIG. 363 (B7b). ), A fuse may be added to the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 364 (B3b) to change the display mode of the timer hold. In the production example shown in FIG. 364 (B3b), the form of the hold icon does not change, and the reliability of the look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot is maintained as it is. In this effect example, in addition to the pre-reading notice regarding the jackpot, the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect is added, and it can be said that the display mode of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon is upgraded.

364 (B3c), FIG. (B7c) and FIG. (B8c) show different production patterns of FIGS. 363 (B3), (B7) and (B8), respectively. Since the effect shown in FIG. 364 (B3c) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 364 (B3a), the description thereof will be omitted. After that, a mini game is played as shown in FIGS. 363 (B4) to (B6), and when the bomb icon BOMB is displayed from the treasure box image BOX as a result of the mini game, FIG. 364 (B7c). ), The display mode of the hold icon does not change, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the timer advance notice effect may be started. At this time, "30:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer notice display TM11, suggesting that a certain effect may be started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. In this production example, the timer display countdown on the first timer notice display TM11 has not started, the character "waiting" is displayed below the first timer notice display TM11, and the timer display countdown starts. Is reserved. In this way, the present invention can be realized by displaying the timer notice display in an area other than the hold icon display area in a manner in which the countdown is not performed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (B8c), the decorative symbol is enlarged and moved to the center of the display screen. At this time, the countdown of the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is still in the standby state. The timer display countdown on the first timer notice notice display TM11 is started in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the target of the look-ahead notice.

In this production example, as a result of the mini-game being performed, a display including a notice display of the timer notice effect from a display mode that does not include the notice display of the timer notice effect (display mode of Yoshimune hold, display mode of blue hold, etc.) It was shown that the mode (display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, display mode of red timer hold, etc.) changes, but the display mode of the hold icon may be changed by performing the above-mentioned hold change animation. ..

364 (C1) to 365 (C23) are diagrams stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Since FIGS. 364 (C1) to (C2) are the same as those of FIGS. 363 (A1) to (A2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 364 (C3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, and is a display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect. In addition, the characters "I-sama appeared!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the hold icon is displayed according to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "expected next fluctuation" are displayed, and the expectation of a big hit in the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, is high. Is suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "something" is displayed, indicating that the display of a certain message has started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 364 (C7). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character display of "something" is switched to the character display of "I have something", that is, the message "I have something" is displayed from these character displays. It can be said that there is. This message corresponds to the display of the hold icon in the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode, and suggests that the timer notice effect may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. In addition, the characters "demon heat" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, is extremely high. ing. The display of the characters "demon heat" may be started after the symbol variation display is started, or the display of the characters "demon heat" may be started at the timing when the symbol variation display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "12:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 12 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C10), "11:86" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.14 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C11), the first timer advance notice display TM11 shows that the timer display is switched to the character display of "waiting for group generation". At this time, a Sabohani icon is added to the left side of the character display of "Waiting for group generation", and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice will be executed as a result of the timer notice effect. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the explanation display (tutorial display) is performed in the timer notice display during the execution (subtraction) of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display. After that, as shown in FIG. 364 (C12), the character display of "waiting for group generation" is switched to the timer display again. In this production example, the timer display is a switching display in which the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 and the character display of "waiting for group generation" are alternately switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 0.5 seconds). It is performed from the start of the countdown to the reach state described later. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "10:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C13), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and the above-mentioned alternate display also continues, and "04:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C14), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 364 (C15), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C16), the alternate display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 ends, and the timer display is continuously displayed. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "01:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C16).

After that, as shown in FIG. 364 (C17), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes "0:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is still displayed, and the variable icon h0 is continuously displayed. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect being performed by the first timer advance notice display TM11, it is shown that the Sabohani group advance notice is performed as a certain effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C18), it is shown that the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. Then, the variable icon h0, which was the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, has been changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold in which the bomb has been erased. That is, in this production example, the timer notice effect is executed by the variable icon (hold icon) of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a combination of the notice of success / failure judgment (pre-reading notice) and the notice of the timer notice effect (pre-reading notice). An example is shown in which the display mode is changed to the Yoshimune hold display mode, which has only the function of notifying the judgment of success or failure (pre-reading notice) after the function is fulfilled. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C18), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is also erased. The first timer advance notice display TM11 may be erased after the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change after the first timer notice display TM11 is erased. Alternatively, the timing at which the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes and the timing at which the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased may be the same.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 365 (C19) following FIG. 364 (C18), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. Will be done. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon h0 is erased together with the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 may be deleted after the transition to the super reach, the variable icon h0 may be deleted after the transition to the super reach, or the variable icon h0 may be deleted at the timing of the transition to the super reach. It may be erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (C20), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. Notifying that CI1a has been displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 365 (C21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (C22), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. In addition, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also redisplayed, and the variable icon h0 is also redisplayed in the Yoshimune hold display mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 365 (C23), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, it was shown that the character of the lord displays the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a display mode in which the character holds the bomb, but the character of the lord is something other than the bomb (for example, the replay icon, the Sabohani icon, etc.). ) May be displayed in a display mode, and a pre-reading notice of the notice effect to be executed may be performed.

FIGS. 365 (D1) to (D18) are diagrams stepwise showing another example of the hold notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Since FIGS. 365 (D1) to (D7) are the same as those of FIGS. 363 (A1) to (A7), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (D8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. In addition, the characters "demon heat" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold, is extremely high. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (D9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (D10), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 365 (D11), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 365 (D12), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice is being performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (D13), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 365 (D14) to (D18) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 365 (D14) to (D18) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 363 (A14) to (A18), the description thereof will be omitted. In this case, it may be a big hit.

As described above, in this production example, when the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of Yoshimune hold, a display mode in which a bomb is added (a display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect). When it is displayed in, it is easier to perform the timer notice effect, and when the display mode of Yoshimune hold is displayed, it is displayed in the display mode with the bomb added (Yoshimune bomb hold display mode). An example is shown in which the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the bomb is displayed in the display mode (Yoshimune hold display mode).

FIGS. 365 (E1) to 366 (E19) are diagrams showing step by step an example of a pending change effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 365 (E1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 365 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 365 (E1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and are displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 Is displayed as. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

FIG. 365 (E3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display becomes “2”. .. Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is displayed in a round and blue display mode, that is, in a pre-reading notice display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 365 (E7). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E9), it is shown that the roulette effect is started and the start effect is being performed. In this production example, when the roulette effect is started and the start effect is started, three icons (for example, a timer notice icon, a replay icon, and a Sabohani icon) are formed in a triangle shape above the first hold icon h11. One of the three icons is displayed in a mode surrounded by an elliptical cursor. At the timing shown in FIG. 365 (E9), the cursor surrounds the timer notice icon, and in response to this, the character "timer" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a roulette effect is performed. As a result, it is suggested that the timer notice icon may stop and the timer notice effect may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E10), it is shown that the start effect is continuously performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 366 (E10), the cursor moves to surround the Sabohani icon, and correspondingly, the character "icon" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the roulette effect is performed. As a result, it is suggested that the Sabohani icon may be stopped and a notice effect corresponding to the stopped icon may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E11), it is shown that the start effect is continuously being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 366 (E11), the cursor moves to surround the replay icon, and correspondingly, the characters "pseudo-ream" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the roulette effect is produced. As a result of this, the replay icon will stop, suggesting that a pseudo-continuous production may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E12), it is shown that the start effect is finished and the cursor is starting high-speed movement (high-speed fluctuation). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "what will come out" are displayed to give a sense of expectation as to which of the three icons will stop.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E13), the characters "this is" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the cursor is stopped and displayed around the timer notice icon to produce a roulette effect. As a result, it is notified that the timer notice icon is derived and displayed. The result of the roulette effect may be derived and displayed after the characters "this is it" are displayed, or the character "this is" may be displayed after the result of the roulette effect is derived and displayed. However, the result of the roulette effect may be derived and displayed at the timing when the characters "this is it" are displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E14), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 366 (E15), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is round and blue (that is, the display mode of the look-ahead notice), and a fuse is added to the display mode of the look-ahead notice. It changes to the display mode of the bomb. That is, the display mode changes to the blue timer hold display mode, which is the display mode of the bomb in blue. In addition, the characters "timer hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect has been performed. The character display of "timer hold" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed after the character display of "timer hold" has been performed. Alternatively, the character display of "timer hold" may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E16), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E17), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E18), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 366 (E19). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. After that, for example, the effects shown after FIG. 347 (8), the effects shown after FIG. 349 (12), the effects shown after FIG. 351 (8), the effects shown after FIG. 354 (8), and the drawings. The effects shown after 355 (9) will be performed.

FIGS. 366 (E13a) to (E15a) show another pattern of the effects shown in FIGS. 366 (E13) to (E15). That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E13a), the characters "this is" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the cursor is stopped and displayed around the Sabohani icon to produce a roulette effect. As a result, it has been notified that the Sabohani icon has been derived and displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E14a), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 366 (E15a), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the round and blue display mode (pre-reading notice display mode) to the display mode of the Sabohani character. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice of the Sabohani group notice is being performed. After that, it is notified that there is a possibility that a strong Sabohani group notice may be performed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the Sabohani character. In the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the Sabohani character, the Sabohani group notice may be given as a result of the timer notice effect (for example, FIGS. 239 to 239). (Effect shown in 240, etc.), Sabohani group advance notice may be performed without timer advance notice effect (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 237 to 238). Further, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the Sabohani character, the weak Sabohani group notice may be given, or the Sabohani group notice itself may not be given. You may. Then, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the Sabohani character, there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice may be given, so that it is possible to give a sense of expectation for the transition to super reach. You may be able to do it.

FIGS. 366 (E13b) to (E15b) show another pattern of the effects shown in FIGS. 366 (E13) to (E15). That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E13b), the characters "this is" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the cursor is stopped and displayed around the replay icon to produce a roulette effect. As a result, it is notified that the replay icon is derived and displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E14b), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 366 (E15b), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains the same as the round and blue display mode, but the replay icon appears above the variable icon h0. That is, it is shown that the pseudo-ream advance notice is being performed, and there is a possibility that the pseudo-ream effect may be performed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the pseudo-ream notice. Be notified. In the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, a pseudo continuous effect may be performed as a result of the timer notice effect (for example, FIGS. 239 to 240). The pseudo-continuous effect may be performed without the timer advance effect (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 237 to 238). Further, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, the pseudo continuous effect may not be performed.

FIG. 366 (E8c) to FIG. (E12c) show another effect pattern following FIG. 365 (E7). Since the effect shown in FIG. 366 (E8c) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 365 (E8), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E9c), it is shown that the present hold effect is started. In the present hold effect, a small treasure chest TRG is displayed above the hold icon (or variable icon), and one of the results (contents or choices) is derived from multiple types of results (contents or choices), and the hold icon (variable) is displayed. This is an effect in which the display mode of the icon) may change.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E10c) shows how the result of the present hold effect is derived. Specifically, the petit treasure chest TRG is opened, a timer notice icon appears from inside, and it is notified that there is a possibility that a timer notice effect will be performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E11c), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. To.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E12c), a fuse is added to the display mode of the look-ahead notice shown in FIG. 366 (E8c) to change the display mode to the timer hold display mode, and the color is also changed from blue to red. It is shown that it is changing to. In addition, the characters "timer hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect has been performed. That is, it is shown that the addition of the pre-reading notice of the timer notice and the rank-up of the pre-reading notice are performed by the same effect. Further, in this production example, a timer display icon is added above the bomb as "10:00" as the initial display time, and 10 seconds have passed since the timer display countdown was started. Is suggested to be done. As shown in FIG. 366 (E12c'), a fuse is added to the display mode of the look-ahead notice to change the display mode of the timer notice, but the color of the hold icon may remain blue and may not change. .. Further, the countdown time of the timer display may be different. For example, in FIG. 366 (E12c ″), a timer notice icon displaying “60:00” is added as the initial display time. It is suggested that a certain effect is performed 60 seconds after the start of the timer display countdown. In this case, for example, the higher the rank of the hold icon, the easier it is to display the timer display icon indicating a long time. Specifically, the hold icon is held in red rather than in blue. When the icon is displayed, "60:00" may appear more easily than "10:00" as the initial display of the time indicated by the timer display. At this time, in the opening scene of the petite treasure chest TRG shown in FIG. 366 (E10c), the time may be different from the initial display time indicated by the timer notice icon that appears (for example, "10:00" from the petite treasure chest TRG. A timer notice icon indicating "60:00" appears, but after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, a timer display icon indicating "60:00" may be added) or the same (for example, a petite treasure box). A timer display icon indicating "60:00" may appear from the TRG).

In this production example, the appearance of the timer notice icon from the Petit Treasure Box TRG shows that the pre-reading notice function of the timer notice effect is added to the hold icon of the look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot. An icon other than the timer notice icon may appear from, for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E10c'), a replay icon may appear from the Petit Treasure Box TRG, and a pseudo-ream look-ahead notice may be given. You may.

As described above, in this production example, if one of the contents (one of the options) appearing from the Petit Treasure Box TRG includes a timer advance notice production, as shown in FIG. 366 (E9c), the hold icon is displayed. It can be said that the state in which the petit treasure chest TRG is displayed accompanying the timer is also an example of the timer hold that functions as a look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect.

367 (F1) to 367 (F22) are diagrams showing step by step an example of a pending change effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Since FIGS. 367 (F1) to (F8) are the same as those in FIGS. 365 (E1) to (E8), the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F9) shows that one of the mini games, the “Yoshimune Cancan Game”, has started. When the "Yoshimune Cancan Game" is started, the dice symbol DC is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM with the symbol "1", and the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen. In addition, in the upper center of the display screen, explanations such as "Attention to Yoshimune!" And "Tear by repeated hits" are displayed, and the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit within the operation valid period to make the dice roll (design) more advantageous. It has been shown that the mission is to make a good roll (large roll), and the display mode of the hold icon may change to a more advantageous mode depending on the degree of achievement of the mission. Specifically, in the production example shown in FIG. 367 (F9), if the dice roll remains "1" and there is no change, the display mode of the hold icon remains the pre-reading notice regarding the jackpot and the blue display mode. If there is no change (no change) and the dice roll is increased by one rank to "3", the display mode of the hold icon is the same as the display mode of the look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot, but the hold icon If the color ranks up from blue to red (changes from blue hold to red hold) and the dice roll goes up two ranks to "5", the hold icon display mode is a look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot. In addition, a pre-reading notice of the timer notice is added, and it is notified that the color of the hold icon also ranks up from blue to red (changes from blue hold to red timer hold).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F10), the display showing the dice roll and the corresponding result (that is, the display mode of the hold icon after the change) moves to the left side of the display screen. At the same time, the characters "READY" are displayed together with the button image 136a in the center of the display screen to notify that the continuous hit operation reception is started. In addition, the navigation character YM is also shown to be ready to pull out the sword.

FIG. 367 (F11) shows how the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started. When the operation valid period is started, the characters "READY" displayed along with the button image 136a are switched to "GO!", And the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a. , It is shown that it is promoting repeated hits.

FIG. 367 (F12) shows how the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit by the player during the operation valid period of the effect button 136. It is shown that the navigator character YM is slashing the dice pattern in response to the player's repeated hitting of the effect button 136. The remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period.

FIG. 367 (F13) shows how the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. At the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F13), the number of operations of the effect button 136 has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), so that the dice roll is ranked up from "1" to "3". That is, it is shown that it is confirmed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from blue hold to red hold.

FIG. 367 (F14) shows that the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigator character YM moves to the right side of the dice symbol, and the player directs the effect. It is shown that the dice pattern is slashed with a knife in response to the repeated hitting of the button 136.

FIG. 367 (F15) shows that the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigator character YM moves to the left side of the dice symbol, and is played by the player. It is shown that the pattern of the dice is pierced with a spear in response to the repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the characters "GO!" Displayed along with the button image 136a are switched to "continuous hitting!", Prompting for further repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136.

FIG. 367 (F16) shows how the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. At the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F16), the characters of "continuous hits!" Displayed accompanying the button image 136a are switched to "one more breath!", And the dice roll is the highest rank "5" in a little while. It is suggested that

After that, after the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F17), the dice roll is ranked up from "3" to "5" and displayed along with the button image 136a. The character "One more breath!" Is switched to "I did it!" And the animation of the button operation ends. That is, it is shown that the desired purpose was achieved by raising the dice roll to the highest rank of "5" by the repeated hitting operation in the "Yoshimune Cancan Game". At this time, although the navigation character YM has been deleted, it may remain displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F18), the dice showing the finally derived “5” are displayed in the center of the display screen in an enlarged manner, and on the right side thereof. The characters "GET!" Are displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F19), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 367 (F20), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the blue hold to the display mode of the red timer hold. That is, it is shown that the look-ahead notice regarding the big hit is ranked up and the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect is added.

After that, after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in this order, the third stop is performed as shown in FIG. 367 (F21), and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol and temporarily stopped due to shaking fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 367 (F22), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. After that, for example, the effects shown after FIG. 347 (8), the effects shown after FIG. 349 (12), the effects shown after FIG. 351 (8), the effects shown after FIG. 354 (8), and the drawings. The effects shown after 355 (9) will be performed.

In this production example, the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times to derive a predetermined result (dice roll). For example, within the operation valid period. Even if the effect button 136 is not operated a predetermined number of times and a predetermined result is not derived, the predetermined result (dice roll) is finally derived (rewritten). Alternatively, a result different from the predetermined result (result according to the number of operations of the effect button 136) may be derived. For example, as a result of the repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136, the dice roll is "1" without being ranked up, but the predetermined result is "5", which is two ranks up (do your best). When the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, the dice roll may be "5"), the timer is displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon in response to the red timer hold. The advance notice effect may be performed, or, for example, when the dice roll is "1", the timer advance effect is performed on the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon. You may not let it break.

In this production example, it is shown that the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by the "Yoshimune Kankan game", but any of the mini games shown so far in this specification. The display mode of the hold icon may be upgraded according to the above.

Further, in this production example, if the result is derived without changing the dice roll as "1", the display mode of the hold icon remains blue hold and the rank is not increased. For example, as shown in FIG. 367 (F9'), regardless of which result is derived, the display mode of the hold icon is always ranked up (that is, the hold icon is displayed when the "Yoshimune Kankan game" is executed. The promotion of the aspect may be confirmed). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 367 (F9'), when the dice roll remains "1" and there is no change, the default display mode is the pre-reading notice display mode regarding the jackpot (blue display mode). When the pre-reading notice of the timer notice is added (changes from the default to the blue timer hold) and the dice roll is increased by one rank to "3", the display mode of the hold icon is changed to "3". The default display mode changes to the display mode of the look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot, and the color of the hold icon also turns red, the look-ahead notice of the timer notice is added (changes from the default to red timer hold), and the dice roll When the rank is increased by 2 to "5", the default display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot, and the color of the hold icon also changes to red and the timer. A pre-reading notice of the notice is added, and it is notified that the size of the hold icon changes to a large size (changes from the default to the decatimer hold).

367 (F8a) to 367 (F20a) show another effect pattern following FIG. 367 (F7). However, in this production example, in FIG. 367 (F3), it is assumed that the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the display mode of the blue timer hold instead of the display mode of the blue timer hold when the hold increases. The effect shown in FIG. 367 (F8a) is the first hold icon h1.
Since the display mode is the same as that of FIG. 367 (F8) except that the display mode of 1 is the display mode of holding the blue timer, the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F9a) shows that the “Yoshimune Cancan Game” has started. In the production example shown in FIG. 367 (F9a), if the dice roll remains “1” and does not change, the display mode of the hold icon does not change with the blue timer hold display mode, and the dice roll remains unchanged. When is increased by 1 rank to "3", the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded from the display mode of blue timer hold to the display mode of red timer hold, and the dice roll is increased by 2 ranks. When it becomes "5", it is notified that the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the decatimer hold. The display mode of the deca timer hold is a display mode in which the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the display mode of the red timer hold. After that, the production is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 367 (F10) to (F15).

FIG. 367 (F16a) shows that the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. At the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F16a), the characters of "continuous hits!" Displayed accompanying the button image 136a are switched to "one more breath!", And the dice roll is the highest rank "5" in a little while. It is suggested that

However, after that, when the operation valid period elapses without the dice roll increasing from "3" to "5", it is displayed along with the button image 136a as shown in FIG. 367 (F17a). The word "One more breath!" Is switched to "Chance!" And the animation of the button operation ends. That is, it is shown that the dice rolls are increased by one rank from "1" to "3" by the repeated hitting operation in the "Yoshimune Cancan Game". At this time, although the navigation character YM is displayed, it may be deleted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F18a), the dice showing the finally derived “3” are displayed in the center of the display screen in an enlarged manner, and on the right side thereof. The characters "GET!" Are displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F19a), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 367 (F20a), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the red timer hold. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice regarding the jackpot is ranked up while the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect by the hold icon is being performed. In other words, it can be said that the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect by the hold icon is changed to the pre-reading notice of another timer notice effect. After that, for example, the production is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 367 (F21) to (F22).

In this production example, it is shown that the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by the "Yoshimune Kankan game", but any of the mini games shown so far in this specification. The display mode of the hold icon may be upgraded according to the above.

368 (F8b) to 368 (F20b) show another effect pattern following FIG. 367 (F7). However, in this production example, in FIG. 367 (F3), it is assumed that the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the display mode of the blue timer hold instead of the display mode of the blue timer hold when the hold increases. The effect shown in FIG. 367 (F8b) is the same as that of FIG. 367 (F8) except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the blue timer hold. To do.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F9b) shows that the “Yoshimune Cancan Game” has started. In the production example shown in FIG. 367 (F9b), if the roll of the dice remains “1” and does not change, the display mode of the hold icon does not change with the display mode of the blue timer hold, and the roll of the dice remains unchanged. When is increased by 1 rank to "3", the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded from the display mode of blue timer hold to the display mode of red timer hold, and the roll of the dice is raised by 2 ranks. When it becomes "5", the display mode of the hold icon is a display mode in which two bombs are represented as a lump from the display mode of the blue timer hold, and the bomb arranged on the left side is blue. It is informed that the bomb placed on the right side is ranked up to the display mode of double timer hold, which is the display mode of red. When the hold icon is displayed in the double timer hold display mode, it is suggested that the timer notice effect may be performed at least twice. After that, the production is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 367 (F10) to (F15).

FIG. 367 (F16b) shows that the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. At the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F16b), the characters of "continuous hits!" Displayed accompanying the button image 136a are switched to "one more breath!", And the dice roll is the highest rank "5" in a little while. It is suggested that

After that, after the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F17b), the dice roll is ranked up from "3" to "5" and displayed along with the button image 136a. The character "One more breath!" Is switched to "I did it!" And the animation of the button operation ends. That is, it is shown that the desired purpose was achieved by raising the dice roll to the highest rank of "5" by the repeated hitting operation in the "Yoshimune Cancan Game". At this time, although the navigation character YM has been deleted, it may remain displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F18b), the dice showing the finally derived “5” are displayed in the center of the display screen in an enlarged manner, and on the right side thereof. The characters "GET!" Are displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F19b), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 367 (F20b), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the double timer hold. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit is ranked up and the pre-reading notice about the timer notice effect being performed at least twice is performed. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect is also ranked up. After that, for example, the production is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 367 (F21) to (F22). After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started, for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 325 to 327, the effect shown in FIGS. 328 to 329, and the like, 2 in one symbol variation display. A timer notice effect is performed more than once. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately set which effect is executed as a certain effect executed by the timer effect, that is, any of the embodiments disclosed in the present specification can be applied. Needless to say. Even when the hold icon (or variable icon) is displayed in the double timer hold display mode, the timer advance notice effect may be executed only once.

In this production example, for example, as a result of the repeated hitting operation of the production button 136, the dice roll is "1" without being ranked up, but the predetermined result is "5" which is two ranks up. If the result is a roll (when the roll of the dice may be "5" if the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit), the hold icon is displayed in response to the double timer hold. The timer notice effect may be performed at least twice in the corresponding symbol variation display, and corresponding to the derivation result, for example, when the dice roll is "1", the hold icon is supported. The timer notice effect may be performed only once in the symbol variation display.

In this production example, it is shown that the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by the "Yoshimune Kankan game", but any of the mini games shown so far in this specification. The display mode of the hold icon may be upgraded according to the above.

368 (F8c) to 368 (F20c) show another effect pattern following FIG. 367 (F7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (F8c), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is shown to be starting. At this time, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Then, it is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (F8c), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this production example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "30:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 30 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. The timer display countdown on the first timer notice display TM11 is started thereafter.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F9c) shows that the "Yoshimune Cancan Game" has started. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is moved and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 may be moved and displayed before the "Yoshimune Cancan Game" starts, may be moved and displayed after the "Yoshimune Cancan Game" starts, or may be moved and displayed. May be moved and displayed at the timing when "" starts. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F9c), "27:60" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. That is, it is shown that 2.4 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Since the other effects are the same as those shown in FIG. 367 (F9b), the description thereof will be omitted. The first timer notice display TM11 moves and displays the display position from the upper left corner to the upper right corner again when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, but the movement display does not have to be performed. After that, the production is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 367 (F10) to (F15), and then the production shown in FIGS. 368 (F16c) to (F19c) is performed. In the effects shown in FIGS. 368 (F16c) to 368 (F19c), the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed, and the timer display is counted down in the first timer notice display TM11, except that the timer display is counted down. Since it is the same as FIGS. 368 (F16b) to FIG. 368 (F19b), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F20c), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the blue timer hold at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. It is shown that the display mode is changed to the double timer hold display mode and the hold icon is upgraded. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit is ranked up, the pre-reading notice that the timer notice effect is performed at least twice is performed, and the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect is also ranked up. .. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the timer display on the timer notice display TM11 has changed to "00:00", or after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed. The timer display on the timer notice display TM11 may be set to "00:00", or the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM11 is set to "00:00". You may. After that, for example, the production is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 367 (F21) to (F22). After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started, for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 325 to 327, the effect shown in FIGS. 328 to 329, and the like, 2 in one symbol variation display. A timer notice effect is performed more than once. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately set which effect is executed as a certain effect executed by the timer effect, that is, any of the embodiments disclosed in the present specification can be applied. Needless to say. Even when the hold icon (or variable icon) is displayed in the double timer hold display mode, the timer advance notice effect may be executed only once.

As described above, in this effect example, an example in which the timer notice display is moved and displayed is shown, and as a result of the timer notice effect being performed, there is an example in which a notice of the start of a new timer notice effect is performed as a certain effect. It is shown.

In this production example, the timer hold of the bomb display mode is increased from one to a plurality. For example, the display of the bomb included in the Yoshimune bomb hold is the result of the Yoshimune Kankan game. An effect that increases from one to three may be performed.

368 (G1) to 369 (G22) are diagrams showing another effect pattern of the hold change effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Since FIGS. 367 (G1) to 3 (G2) are the same as those in FIGS. 365 (E1) to (E2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 368 (G3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display becomes “2”. .. Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 has a display mode in which the panda icon PD is added together with the bomb display BD ″, and the timer advance notice effect is given as a look-ahead notice and as a look-ahead notice regarding the jackpot. It is functioning. The rank of the reliability of the jackpot when the icon PD of the panda is displayed is, for example, "2", and the reliability of the jackpot is a little high. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 368 (G4) to (G8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 368 (G4) to (G8) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 365 (E4) to (E8), except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. Since they are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (G9) shows that the “Yoshimune Cancan Game” has started. In the production example shown in FIG. 368 (G9), the dice roll is "
If there is no change with "1", the display mode of the hold icon does not change with the panda icon PD with the jackpot reliability of "2", and the dice roll is increased by one rank to "3". If, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded from the panda's icon PD to the lord's icon TS, and if the dice roll is raised by 2 ranks to "5", the hold icon is displayed. It is reported that the display mode of is upgraded from the panda icon PD to the Sabohani icon SH. In addition, the rank of the reliability of the jackpot when the icon TS of the lord is displayed is, for example, "4", and the reliability of the jackpot is higher than that of the panda's icon PD. Further, the rank of the reliability of the jackpot when the icon SH of Sabohani is displayed is, for example, "infinity", and the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 368 (G10) to 369 (G19) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 368 (G10) to 369 (G19) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 367 (F10) to (G19), except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. Therefore, the description is omitted. At this time, as shown in FIG. 368 (G11), the panda icon PD is displayed overlapping with the remaining time meter MT, but is displayed overlapping with the remaining time meter MT. May be good. Further, as shown in FIG. 368 (G18), the panda icon PD is displayed so as to overlap the dice rolls that are derived and displayed, but the dice rolls are overlapped and displayed. May be done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (G20), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode in which the panda icon PD is added to the bomb display BD ″ to the display mode of Sabohani. It is shown that it is. That is, although it is no longer the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect, it is shown that the look-ahead notice regarding the big hit is ranked up.

After that, after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in this order, the third stop is performed as shown in FIG. 369 (G21), and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol and temporarily stopped due to shaking fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 369 (G22), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. After that, for example, as shown in FIGS. 237 to 238, a symbol variation display in which the Sabohani group notice is performed without the timer notice effect may be performed, or as shown in FIG. 243 and the like, the timer notice may be displayed. A symbol variation display may be performed in which a production is performed and a Sabohani group notice is performed as a certain production. In addition, the Sabohani group notice to be performed may always be a strong Sabohani group notice, or a weak Sabohani group notice may be given.

In this production example, the display mode in which the panda icon PD is added to the bomb display BD ″ is changed to the display mode of Sabohani, so that the timer notice effect is pre-read from the timer notice effect display mode. The display mode has changed to a mode other than the notice display mode. For example, the hold icon, which is the display mode of the blue timer hold, changes to red hold as a result of the Yoshimune Kankan game, so that the timer notice effect is pre-read notice. The display mode may be changed to a display mode other than the pre-reading notice display mode of the timer notice effect, and the rank may be increased as the pre-reading notice regarding the jackpot.

FIGS. 369 (H1) to 370 (H38) are diagrams stepwise showing an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Since FIGS. 369 (H1) to (H2) are the same as those of FIGS. 363 (A1) to (A2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 369 (H3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (second hold icon) h12 of the special figure 1 is additionally displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is displayed. Is displayed as "2". Here, the second hold icon h12 has a display mode consisting of one bomb, and the characters "TIMER" are added above. In addition, the characters "timer is on hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. In this effect example, a state in which a notice display (pre-reading notice) of the timer notice effect is performed is shown by displaying the hold icon of the timer hold display mode, which is the display mode of the bomb.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 369 (H7). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the character "TIMER" displayed above the display of the bomb on the first hold icon h11 is switched to the timer display, and the timer notice effect is started. "03:00" is displayed on the timer display displayed on the first hold icon h11, suggesting that a certain effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "timer start" is displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed 3 seconds later. In addition, "timer start" may be displayed after the character of "TIMER" in the first hold icon h11 is switched to "03:00", or the first after "timer start" is displayed. The character of "TIMER" in the hold icon h11 may be switched to "03:00", or the character of "TIMER" in the first hold icon h11 is "03:00" at the timing when "timer start" is displayed. You may switch to.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H10), the timer display shows "02:75". That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the display of "timer start" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is switched to "attention to hold", and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H11), it is shown that the character YMN of the lord appears and shoots a bow toward the first hold icon h11. Further, the timer display countdown continues, and "00:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H11).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H12), when the timer display countdown is completed and the timer display reaches "00:00", the arrow shot by the character YMN of the lord becomes the first hold icon h11. It hits, the hold change animation is started, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. The hold change animation may be started after the timer display is set to "0:00", the timer display may be set to "00:00" after the hold change animation is started, or the timer may be started. The hold change animation may be started at the timing when the display becomes "00:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 369 (H13), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of one bomb to the display mode in which three bombs are represented as a mass, and above the display mode. Is added with the characters "TIMER x 3". Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "timer increase" are displayed, and it is shown that a notice display (pre-reading notice) that the timer notice effect is executed three times is performed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect being performed, as a certain effect, it is shown that the number of executions of the timer advance effect displayed by the hold icon is increased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H14), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H15), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H16), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 369 (H17). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H18), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which the three bombs are agglomerated is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that at least three timer notice effects related to the symbol variation are executed. It becomes the variable icon h0 which is a notice display mode of being done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H19), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "07: 00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 7 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-ream will be started as a certain effect. In addition, in the variable icon h0 of the display mode in which three bombs are grouped together, the display of "TIMER x 3" is erased and the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the right side of the three bombs is ignited. The situation is shown, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Something will happen after 7 seconds ..." are displayed, and a certain effect can be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed 7 seconds later. It has been suggested that there is sex. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed after the display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. Further, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, or the display position of the decorative symbol is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H20), "06:36" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the length of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H21), it is shown that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12, suggesting that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the Sabohani icon SBH is added to the second timer notice display TM12, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the Sabohani group notice will be started as a certain effect. In addition, the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which the three bombs are grouped together shows that the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the left side of the three bombs is ignited. The length of the fuse of the bomb placed on the left side also becomes shorter according to the time after the countdown of the timer display starts. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H21). In addition, the character "attention" is continuously displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H22), "19:20" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "04:95" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H22) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the characters "When a group notice is confirmed" are displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with the character of Sabohani. It has been announced that when the Sabohani character SBHN appears from the treasure box, a strong Sabohani group notice will be given. In addition, it may be notified that the Sabohani group notice will be performed including the weak Sabohani group notice. Further, when the Sabohani character SBHN does not appear from the treasure box, a weak Sabohani group notice is performed as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer notice effect related to the second timer notice display TM12. Alternatively, the Sabohani group notice may not be performed (a certain effect is not executed, that is, the timer notice effect of Gase is executed). In addition, the characters "Attention to mini-games" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to alert the mini-games along with the timer advance notice effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H23) shows how the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened, the Sabohani character SBHN appears from the inside, and the characters "Success!" Are displayed in the vicinity. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "I did it" are displayed, indicating that the mini game was successful. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 continue to count down, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H23), the first timer notice display TM11 displays "03:51" and the second timer. In the notice display TM12, "17:76" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 369 (H24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. The added Sabohani icon SBH is displayed in a manner of increasing to four, and it is notified that the strong Sabohani group notice is executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the "pseudo-ream", and as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11, the pseudo-ream effect can be performed as a certain effect. It has been suggested that there is sex. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 continue to count down, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H24), the first timer notice display TM11 displays "01:37" and the second timer. On the notice display TM12, "15:62" is displayed.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H25) and "00:00" is displayed, the right side of the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which the three bombs are agglomerated. Bomb explodes and the effect is displayed. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Replay symbol RP-Decoration 6" is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream!" Are displayed to notify that the pseudo-ream effect is performed. The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is "00:00". On the other hand, in the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “14:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H25).

After that, as shown in FIG. 369 (H26), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed to notify that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. The replay icon RPL may be started to be displayed after the second decoration symbol variation display by the pseudo-ream is started, or the second decoration by the pseudo-ream after the replay icon RPL is started to be displayed. The variation display of the symbol may be started, or the display of the replay icon RPL may be started at the timing when the variation display of the second decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Also,
At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the mode in which the bomb arranged on the right side is erased. As described above, in this effect example, the bombs are displayed in such a manner that the bombs are decremented by one each time the timer advance notice effect is performed once. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H26).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H27), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "05:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H27).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H28) following FIG. 369 (H27), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H29), "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "02:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 370 (H29).

After that, as shown in FIG. 370 (H30), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the variable icon h0 of the display mode in which the two bombs are agglomerated is displayed. The bomb on the left explodes, the effect is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a notice of the strong Sabohani group. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12. The timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 may be started after the timer display is "00:00", or the timer on the second timer notice display TM12 may be started after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 is "00:00".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H31), it is shown that the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. At this time, the icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed below the icon of the replay icon RPL, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been performed. At this time, the second timer notice display TM12 is erased.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 370 (H32), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area is erased. Further, in this production example, corresponding to the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb, which is the remaining one of the three, "waiting" with the bomb icon in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed, and it is notified that the third timer advance notice effect is scheduled to start. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H33), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the third timer advance notice display TM13 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, suggesting that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. At this time, the bomb icon displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen has been erased. The replay icon RPL overlaps the front side of the third timer notice display TM13, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 370 (H34), "01:25" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H35). That is, in this production example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain production.

After that, as shown in FIG. 370 (H36), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H37), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. Further, in this effect example, when the variable icon h0 is redisplayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer notice effect related to the third timer notice display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 370 (H38), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, the timer advance effect of the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon is executed, but it is not the same number of times as the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon. , The number of bombs displayed may be the minimum guaranteed number of times the timer advance notice effect is executed, or may be the maximum number of times that the timer can be executed.

In this production example, in FIG. 369 (H13), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the display mode of one bomb to the display mode in which three bombs are agglomerated. , As shown in FIG. 370 (H13'), the character of the lord may be further displayed in a display mode (Yoshimune triple bomb hold display mode), that is, the Yoshimune triple bomb hold display mode is described above. It is informed that the timer advance notice effect is executed more times than the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, and it can be said that the display mode is ranked higher than the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold. In other words, it can be said that the hold icon (variable icon) of the character display mode suggests the execution of the timer advance notice effect a plurality of times.

Further, in this effect example, as a certain effect executed by performing the timer notice effect, the display mode of one bomb changes to the display mode in which three bombs are agglomerated, but the display mode of each bomb is , It is the same before and after the change, but the display mode of each bomb may be different before and after the change. ) Is a display mode including a red hold display mode (triple red timer hold display mode) from the default display mode (round and white display mode: normal timer hold display mode) before and after a certain effect is performed. ), Or before and after a certain effect is performed, the display mode of the blue timer hold including the display mode of the blue hold is changed to the display mode of the triple red timer hold including the display mode of the red hold. May be good.

370 (H7a) to 371 (H34a) show another effect pattern following FIG. 369 (H6). However, in this production example, in FIG. 369 (H3), when the hold is increased, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a display mode in which three bombs are displayed as a group instead of a display mode consisting of one bomb. It shall be displayed. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 370 (H7a) to 370 (H12a) are shown in FIG. Since it is the same as the production shown in 369 (H7) to FIG. (H12), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H13a), as a result of the hold change animation, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is one bomb from the display mode in which three bombs are represented as a mass. The display mode is changed to, and the characters "TIMER" are added above it. On the other hand, although it has changed to the display mode of one bomb, the color has changed from the default color (white) to red, and it also has a pre-reading notice function regarding big hits. That is, the notice display (pre-reading notice) that the timer notice effect is executed three times has been changed to the notice display (pre-reading notice) that the timer notice effect is executed once. Although the number of executions of the timer advance notice effect suggested by the hold icon is reduced, the reliability of the jackpot is improved, and it is shown that the rank is substantially increased. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 370 (H14a) to 370 (H18a) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 370 (H14a) to 370 (H18a) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 369 (H14) to (H18), except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. Since they are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H19a) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, a decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner, three treasure chests BX1 to BX3 are arranged in a triangle shape, and the contents are displayed in each treasure chest. That is, the treasure box BX1 displays the timer notice icon, which is the display mode of the bomb, the treasure box BX2 displays the icon of the chief, and the treasure box BX3 displays the icon of Sabohani. .. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "mini game start" are displayed to notify the start of the mini game.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H20a), an animation in which the treasure chests are shuffled is started, and a display in which the three treasure chests move at high speed in a ring shape is shown. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select" are displayed, prompting the user to select one of the three treasure chests that move at high speed by operating the effect button 136.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H21a), the button image 136a is displayed on the upper left of the display screen together with the remaining time meter MT to notify that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has started, and the game is played. Encourage the person to operate the effect button 136. The display mode of the remaining time meter MT changes so that the gauge becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the operation acceptance period.

FIG. 370 (H22a) shows that the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the operation acceptance period. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H23a), the treasure chest BX3 out of the three treasure chests is selected, and the treasure chest BX3 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed, prompting attention to the result of the mini game.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H24a), the treasure box BX3 is opened, and the Sabohani icon SBHN appears from the inside. That is, it is foretold that a strong Sabohani group notice will be made. In the vicinity of the character YM, the characters "It's a group notice" are displayed, foretelling that the Sabohani group notice will be made.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H25a) following FIG. 370 (H24a) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the character "TIMER" displayed above the display of the bomb on the variable icon h0 is switched to the timer display, and the timer notice effect is started. "05:00" is displayed on the timer display displayed on the variable icon h0, suggesting that a certain effect is started 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "timer activation" are displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed 5 seconds later. In addition, "timer activation" may be displayed after the character of "TIMER" in the variable icon h0 is switched to "05:00", or "TIMER" in the variable icon h0 after "timer activation" is displayed. The character of "" may be switched to "05:00", or the character of "TIMER" in the variable icon h0 may be switched to "05:00" at the timing when "timer activation" is displayed. After that, the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H26a), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the timer display countdown continues, and "03:41" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 371 (H26a). That is, it is shown that 1.59 seconds have passed since the timer display countdown was started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H27a), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 371 (H28a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. The timer display countdown continues, and "01:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 371 (H28a).

After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (H29a), when the timer display countdown is completed and the timer display reaches "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this production example, as a result of the timer notice production, a state in which a strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a certain effect is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H30a), the super reach (
It is shown that it is developing into a swordsman reach). When it develops into a swordsman reach, a screen is displayed in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H31a) shows that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (H32a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H33a), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (H34a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, it is shown that the effect that the number of times the timer advance notice effect is executed is reduced is performed. .. Further, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an option for performing a timer advance notice effect is included in a mini game in which any one of a plurality of options is selected. Further, in this effect example, although the number of times the timer advance notice effect is executed decreases, the reliability of the jackpot is improved and the content of the notice is practically upgraded.

FIGS. 371 (H24a') to FIG. 371 (H27a') show another effect pattern following FIG. 370 (H23a). However, in this production example, it is assumed that the treasure box BX2 out of the three treasure boxes is selected in FIG. 370 (H23a).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H24a'), the treasure chest BX2 is opened, and the icon BCHO of the chief of the bancho appears from the inside. That is, it is foretold that the display mode of the variable icon (or the hold icon) will be changed. In the vicinity of the character YM, the character "icon change" is displayed, foretelling a change in the display mode of the variable icon (holding icon).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H25a'), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the character "TIMER" displayed above the display of the bomb on the variable icon h0 is switched to the timer display, and the timer notice effect is started. In this production example, unlike the production shown in FIG. 371 (H25a) (that is, different from the case where the Sabohani icon SBHN appears from the treasure box), the timer display displayed on the variable icon h0 has "02: "00" is displayed, suggesting that a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. That is, in this production example, a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not a Sabohani group notice but a change effect of a variable icon (hold icon). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "timer activation" are displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed 2 seconds later. After that, the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (H26a'), when the timer display countdown is completed and the timer display reaches "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the hold change animation and the first hold. It is notified that the display mode of the icon h11 may change.

After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (H27a'), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the bomb to the display mode of the bancho, resulting in a highly reliable notice display mode.

As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the initial value of the timer display displayed in the timer advance notice effect differs depending on the result selected in the mini game.

In this production example, for example, when the treasure box BX1 is selected in FIG. 370 (H23a) and the timer notice icon appears, the variable icon displayed in the bomb display mode is ranked up and a big hit. The display mode changes to increase the reliability.

Further, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the display mode including the increase / decrease of the bomb display on the hold icon (variable icon) and the display of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the bancho. Although the situation is shown, for example, the display mode may be changed as the display of the bomb on the hold icon (variable icon) increases or decreases. Further, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, it is shown that the hold icon (variable icon) is increased / decreased and the icon display mode is changed. The notice icon (notice item) may be increased or decreased, and the display mode of the notice icon may be changed.

In the present embodiment, the timer advance notice effect is performed when the hold icon (variable icon) is displayed in the timer hold display mode, but the hold icon (variable icon) is not displayed in the timer hold display mode (for example,). The timer notice effect may also be performed (when the hold icon (variable icon) is displayed depending on the display mode of the bancho, the display mode of Sabohani, or the display mode of the replay).

Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the advance notice effect may be performed as the effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, and the chance-up effect may be performed. Here, the "notice effect" is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of a big hit or that a reach effect (specific reach effect) may be performed, for example, a cut-in effect. There is a notice etc. Further, the "chance-up effect" is (1) a specific effect that improves the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display by being executed, and includes, for example, a pseudo continuous effect. Alternatively, (2) a notice effect, which is an effect of further improving the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display by being executed in a specific mode, for example, a cut-in notice effect. While the normal mode is displayed in a blue frame, there are some that are displayed in a red frame (displayed in a chance-up display mode). That is, the chance-up effect is an effect in which the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is executed than when it is not executed.

In the above description,
"A game table equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1 or the like shown in FIG. 239 (3)].
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1].
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, a pseudo-ream, a strong Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 243 (9), a resurrection effect shown in FIG. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 246 (6) to the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 246 (6) to (7)] may be started.
It is configured so that the certain effect may not be started even after the display of the timer display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 241 (5) to (6), the timer is used. The notice display TM1 is displayed, but the timer notice display TM1 is erased before it reaches "0:00", and a certain effect is not performed, etc.],
When the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time becomes a certain time [for example, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00" or the like], the certain effect is started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 239 (9), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is displayed. To be started, etc.],
The jackpot symbol is confirmed in the symbol variation display when the timer display is started and the certain effect is executed than when the timer display is started and the certain effect is not executed. Easy to be
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Conventionally, display effects by display means have tended to be diverse. However, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game console, it may be possible to expect the start of a certain effect by starting the timer display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, the timer display may include only the display of the time, or may include a display other than the display of the time. Further, the timer display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, it may be configured so that only a certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started, or an effect other than a certain effect is also started after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured to be. Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect may not be started after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured.

Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect may be started only after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect is started even after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, it may be configured so that only a certain effect may not be started even after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect may be started even after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that other effects may not be started. Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is not always started even after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect is started even after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that it may be.

Further, the display of the timer display may be started so that only a certain effect may be started depending on the time when the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that an effect other than a certain effect may be started depending on the display of the time being performed at a certain time. Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the time when the display of the timer display is started is started. It may be configured so that a certain effect may not be started even if the display of is reached a certain time.

Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect may be started only when the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that a certain effect may be started in response to something other than the display of the time being made to a certain time.

Further, when the display of the timer display is started and a certain effect is executed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or the jackpot symbol may not be fixedly displayed. It may be configured in.

In addition, "the certain effect may be started when the display of the time reaches the certain time after the display of the timer display is started [for example, FIGS. 239 (3) to 3). As shown in FIG. 9 (9), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" after the timer notice effect is started, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. etc],
If the display of the timer display ends after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches the certain time, the certain effect is not started [for example, FIG. 242. (3) As shown in FIG. 6 (6), if the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is erased before the timer display becomes "0:00" after the fake timer notice effect is started, the pseudo-ream causes. The second variation display of the decorative pattern is not started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to notice that the timer display reaches a certain time.

Here, after the display of the timer display is started, when the time display reaches a certain time, only a certain effect may be started, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, when the time display reaches a certain time, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, after the display of the timer display is started and the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect may be always started, or after the display of the timer display is started. When the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, a certain effect may be started only after the display of the timer display is started and the time display reaches a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started. A certain effect may be started later than when the time display reaches a certain time.

Further, if the display of the timer display is finished after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, only a certain effect may not be started, and the timer may not be started. If the display of the timer display ends after the display of the display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, the effect other than the certain effect may not be started. Further, if the display of the timer display ends after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, and the timer does not have to be started. If the display of the timer display ends after the display of the display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may be started.

Further, it is not necessary to start a certain effect only when the display of the timer display is finished after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, and the timer display does not have to be started. It is not necessary to start a certain effect except when the display of the timer display is finished after the display of is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying the display of a mini game [for example, the mini game shown in FIGS. 253 (3) to (9)].
When the first result [for example, the result of the appearance of the princess character HME from the treasure box image shown in FIG. 253 (9)] is derived as a result of the display of the mini game, the time is displayed. It is configured so that when the time is reached, the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 253 (9), when the princess character HME appears from the treasure box image, it is shown in FIG. 253 (17). As shown, the replay symbol RP is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there are cases where the trend of timer notice can be excited by a mini game.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the display of the mini game, or may be one that can display a display other than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

Further, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and only a certain effect is started, or the display of the mini game may be started. As a result, when the first result is derived, the time display may reach a certain time and the effects other than the certain effects may be started. Further, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and a certain effect is always started, or the mini game display may be configured. As a result, when the first result is derived, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the display of the time may be configured so that the display of the time reaches a certain time and a certain effect is started only when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, or the display of the mini game. As a result, the display of the time may be configured to reach a certain time and a certain effect is started even in cases other than the case where the first result is derived.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a notice item [for example, a princess character HME displayed at the lower left of the display screen shown in FIG. 253 (10)].
The notice item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game [For example, in the mini game shown in FIGS. 253 (5) to (9), the treasure chest image of the princess When the character HME appears, as shown in FIG. 253 (10), the princess character HME is displayed as a notice item at the lower left of the display screen, etc.],
The notice item includes a display suggesting that the certain effect is executed [for example, when the princess character HME is displayed as a notice item, a notice is given that a pseudo-ream will be performed, etc.] ,
After the notice item is started to be displayed, the display of the time reaches the certain time and the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 253 (10). , After the princess character HME is displayed as a notice item, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream starts at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A becomes "0:00", etc.] ,
When the notice item is not displayed, the display of the time is configured so that the certain time is reached and the certain effect is not started [for example, in FIGS. 254 (5) to (9). When the auntie character BBA (10) appears from the treasure chest image in the mini-game shown, the notice item is not displayed as shown in FIG. 254 (10), and the pseudo-ream is not performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to draw attention to the display of the notice item.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to recognize that a certain effect by the timer display is started by the notice icon as a result display while paying attention to the mini game.

Further, according to this game table, there is a case where the effect can be excited during the period until the timer display reaches (or does not reach) a certain time.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the notice item, or may be one that can display items other than the notice item. Further, the display means may always display the notice item, or may not display the notice item.

In addition, it may be configured so that only the notice item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game, or items other than the notice item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game. It may be configured to be. Further, the notice item may be configured to be always displayed according to the display result of the mini game, or the notice item may not be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game. Good.

Further, the notice item may include only a display suggesting that a certain effect is executed, or may include a display other than the display suggesting that a certain effect is executed. Further, the notice item may always include a display suggesting that a certain effect is executed, or may not include a display suggesting that a certain effect is executed.

Further, after the notice item is started to be displayed, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and only a certain effect is started, or after the notice item is started to be displayed, the time display may be started. The display of time may be configured so that when a certain time is reached, an effect other than a certain effect is started. Further, after the notice item is started to be displayed, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and a certain effect is always started, or after the notice item is started to be displayed, the notice item may be displayed. The display of time may be configured so that a certain time may be reached and a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and a certain effect is started only after the notice item is started to be displayed, or other than after the notice item is started to be displayed. Also, the display of time may be configured so that a certain time is reached and a certain effect is started.

Further, when the notice item is not displayed, the time display may be configured so that the time display reaches a certain time and only a certain effect is not started, and when the notice item is not displayed, the time is displayed. It may be configured so that when a certain time is reached, an effect other than a certain effect is not started. Further, when the notice item is not displayed, the time display may be configured so that a certain time is reached and a certain effect is not always started, and when the notice item is not displayed, the time is displayed. It may be configured so that a certain effect may be started when a certain time is reached.

Further, "It is configured so that the result of the display of the mini-game is derived after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change [for example, FIG. 253 (3). ), As shown in FIG. 253 (14), after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and before the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 starts, as shown in FIG. 253 (14). , The result of the mini game display is derived, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to concentrate and pay attention to the result of the display of the mini game.

Further, according to this game console, it may be possible to impress the relationship between the timer display and the mini game.

Here, after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change, only the result of the display of the mini game may be derived, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, other than the result of the display of the mini-game may be derived before the display of the time display starts to change. Further, it may be configured so that the result of the display of the mini game is always derived after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, the result of the display of the mini-game may not be derived before the display of the time display starts to change.

Further, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived only after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived other than before the display of the time display starts to change.

Further, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived only after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. The result of the display of the mini-game may be derived before the display of the time display starts to change.

Further, "It is configured so that the result of the display of the mini-game is derived after the display of the time display starts to change and before the display of the time reaches the certain time [for example, the figure. As shown in 249 (4), after the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1L is started, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1L becomes "0:00" at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (12) and counts down. As shown in FIG. 249 (9), the result of the display of the mini game is derived, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to concentrate on the result of voting in the mini-game.

Here, after the display of the time display starts to change, only the result of the display of the mini-game may be derived before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the time may be derived. After the display begins to change, other than the result of the mini-game display may be derived before the time display reaches a certain time. In addition, the display of the time display may be configured so that the result of the display of the mini-game is always derived after the display of the time display starts to change and before the display of the time reaches a certain time. May be configured such that the result of the mini-game display may not be derived before the time display reaches a certain time after the start of change.

Further, after the display of the time display starts to change, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived only before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the time display may be derived. May be configured to derive the result of the mini-game display after the start of change and before the time display reaches a certain time.

Also, the display of the time display may be configured so that the result of the display of the mini-game is derived only after the display of the time display starts to change before the display of the time reaches a certain time. It may be configured so that the result of the display of the mini-game is derived before the display of time reaches a certain time, other than after the start of change.

In addition, "the display of the mini-game may be started before the display of the timer display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 255 (3) to (4), the timer notice effect is produced. The mini-game was started before the start, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, when the display of the mini-game is started, it is not known whether or not the timer display is started, so that it may be possible to pay attention to the trend of the mini-game.

Here, only the display of the mini game may be started before the display of the timer display is started, or other than the display of the mini game before the display of the timer display is started. The display may also be started. In addition, the display of the mini game may always be started before the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the mini game may not be started before the display of the timer display is started. May be good.

In addition, the display of the mini game may be started only before the display of the timer display is started, and the display of the mini game may be started before the display of the timer display is started. It may be started.

In addition, the display of the mini game may be started before only the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the mini game may be started before the display other than the display of the timer display is started. May be started.

In addition, "a second result [for example, a result in which the icon BCF of the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box image shown in FIG. 255 (8), etc.] may be derived as a result of the display of the mini game.
The second result is a result not related to the certain effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 255 (8), when the result that the icon BCF of the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box image is derived, The strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 256 (25) is displayed, which is not related to the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 255 (4)],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to draw attention to whether or not the result of the display of the mini game is related to a certain effect.

Here, only the second result may be derived as a result of displaying the mini game, or a result other than the second result may be derived as a result of displaying the mini game. Good. Further, the second result may always be derived as a result of displaying the mini game, or the second result may not be derived as a result of displaying the mini game.

Further, the second result may be not related only to a certain effect, or may not be related to an effect other than a certain effect. In addition, the second result may not always be related to a certain effect, or may be related to a certain effect.

In addition, "the first notice [for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 246 (6) to (7)] may be executed as the above-mentioned effect.
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to expect that a timer display is displayed and a look-ahead notice is given.

Here, as a certain effect, only the first notice may be executed, or as a certain effect, a notice other than the first notice may be executed. Further, the first notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the first notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

In addition, "a second notice [for example, pseudo-ream, etc.] may be executed as the above-mentioned certain effect.
The second notice is a notice that the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timer display is displayed and the execution time of the symbol variation display becomes long, so that a feeling of expectation for a big hit may be given.

Here, as a certain effect, only the second notice may be executed, or as a certain effect, a notice other than the second notice may be executed. Further, the second notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the second notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

In addition, the second notice may be that only the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed, and when it is executed than when it is not executed. The time other than the execution time of the symbol variation display may be longer. In addition, the execution time of the symbol variation display may always be longer when the second notice is executed than when it is not executed, and when it is executed than when it is not executed. The execution time of the symbol variation display may not be long.

In addition, "a third notice [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 250 (35), etc.] may be executed as the above-mentioned certain effect.
The third notice is a notice that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that a timer display is displayed and a big hit notice is given.

Here, as a certain effect, only the third notice may be executed, or as a certain effect, a notice other than the third notice may be executed. Further, the third notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the third notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

In addition, the third notice may be easier to confirm and display only the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed than when it is not executed. May be easier to confirm and display symbols other than the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. In addition, the third notice may be that the jackpot symbol is always displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed than when it is not executed. In some cases, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, when the third notice is executed, the jackpot symbol may always be confirmed and displayed on the symbol variation display, and when executed, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed on the symbol variation display. There may be.

In addition, "a fourth notice [for example, a resurrection effect shown in FIG. 247 (30)] may be executed as the above-mentioned effect.
The fourth notice is a notice that it will be a big hit.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the timer display is displayed and it becomes a big hit.

Here, as a certain effect, only the fourth notice may be executed, or as a certain effect, a notice other than the fourth notice may be executed. Further, the fourth notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the fourth notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

Further, the fourth notice may be for notifying only that it will be a big hit, or may be for notifying other than being a big hit. Further, the fourth notice may always notify that a big hit will occur, or may not notify that a big hit will occur.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display [for example, lower plate full tank error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 289 (1)].
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a plate full tank error state [for example, a lower plate full tank error state, etc.].
The timer display is configured to overlap with the ball removal error display [for example, as shown in FIG. 289 (3), the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ERR1. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to motivate the player to quickly release the dish full tank error state in order to see the effect of the timer display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the ball removal error display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the ball removal error display. Further, the display means may always display the ball removal error display, or may not display the ball removal error display.

Further, the ball removal error display may be displayed only in the dish full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the dish full tank error state. Further, the ball removal error display may be always displayed in the dish full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the dish full tank error state.

Further, the timer display may be configured to overlap only with the ball removal error display, or the timer display may be configured to overlap with a display other than the ball removal error display. You may. Further, the timer display may be configured so as to always overlap with the ball removal error display, or the timer display may be configured so as not to overlap with the ball removal error display.

Further, "The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [for example, the default display mode shown in FIG. 248 (3)].
One of the plurality of types of modes is the second mode [for example, the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246 (3)].
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
It is configured so that the certain effect is more likely to be started when the timer display is displayed in the second aspect than when the timer display is displayed in the first aspect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have an expectation that a certain effect is started depending on the mode of the timer display.

Further, according to this game console, when a mini game is played, the possibility of success of the mini game may be expected depending on the mode of the timer display. That is, first of all, it is expected that a certain effect is executed by the player expecting the success of the mini game, but the mode of the timer display that is started in the middle is indirectly started first. In some cases, the result of the game display can be expected. That is, there are cases where the effect (timer display) started later functions as a notice of the effect (mini game, etc.) started earlier, and the player can be given an interest.

Here, the timer display may be displayed only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. Good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode.

Further, the first aspect and the second aspect may be partially different aspects or all may be different aspects.

Further, it may be configured so that only a certain effect is more likely to be started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode. It may be configured so that the effect other than a certain effect can be started more easily when the timer display is displayed in the second aspect than when the display is displayed in the first aspect. Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode. A certain effect may not be started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the display is displayed in the first mode.

Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, or a certain effect is displayed when the timer display is displayed in the second mode. May not be configured so that may not be started.

The timer display may be changed to the second mode after being displayed in the first mode, or may be changed to the first mode after the timer display is started to be displayed in the second mode. Good. Further, when the timer display is started in the first mode, it may be configured so as not to change to the second mode, or when the timer display is started in the second mode, the display may be started. It may be configured so as not to change to the first aspect.

Further, "One of the plurality of types is the third aspect [for example, the timer display of" 7:77 "shown in FIG. 290 (a) and" 99:99 "shown in FIG. 290 (b). , The rainbow display mode shown in FIG. 290 (g), etc.]
The third aspect is different from the first aspect, and is different from the first aspect.
The third aspect is different from the second aspect, and is different from the second aspect.
When the timer display is displayed in the third aspect, the jackpot symbol is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give expectations to the player at the start of displaying the timer display.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the display is performed in the third mode.

Here, the third aspect may be partially different from the first aspect, or may be completely different from the first aspect.

Further, the third aspect may be partially different from the second aspect, or may be completely different from the second aspect.

Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it may be configured so that only the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. , In the symbol variation display, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may also be fixedly displayed. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. , The jackpot symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, except when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. In the case of, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, "when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it is different from the big hit game performed in response to the definite display of the big hit symbol and is advantageous to the player (hereinafter, "First state") is configured to be granted,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timer display may be able to raise the expectation for the third aspect.

Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it may be configured so that only the first state is given, and when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be given. It may be configured so that a state other than one state is also given. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be always given, and when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be given. It may be configured so that the state of is not given.

Further, the first state may be given only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, or when the timer display is not displayed in the third mode. May be configured to give the first state.

In addition, "The first state is a probabilistic state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The probabilistic state may or may not be provided with the electric support state. Further, the probabilistic state may be a probabilistic state in which the state is maintained until the next big hit, or a probabilistic state (ST) in which the state ends when the symbol variation display is performed a certain number of times. Good.

Further, the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) may be used instead of the probability change state.

In addition, "The first state is a reserved villa.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The reserved villa may be a reserved villa in which a probable change jackpot is fixed, or a reserved villa in which a jackpot that is not a probable change jackpot is fixed.

Further, "When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the timer display is deleted before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the display of the time in the symbol variation display. Is configured as
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the timer display does not reach a certain time, the player may be expected to expect it.

Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, only the timer display is deleted before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. Alternatively, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the display other than the timer display is deleted before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is configured to be always erased before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. Alternatively, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display may not be erased before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured.

In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is configured to be erased only before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. Alternatively, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is deleted even before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured.

In addition, only when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is deleted before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. Alternatively, even when the timer display is not displayed in the third display, the timer display is deleted before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

It should be noted that the timer display may be configured to be erased before the time display changes and reaches a certain time.

Further, "When the timer display is displayed in the third aspect, the jackpot symbol is determined without starting the certain effect even when the time display reaches the certain time. It is configured to be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect an advantageous development even when a certain effect is not started.

Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and only the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. It may be configured, and when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is also displayed. It may be configured to be fixedly displayed. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is always displayed in a definite manner. If the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the jackpot symbol is not confirmed and displayed. It may be configured to have.

Further, only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. May be done. Further, even when the timer display is not displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. It may be configured as follows.

It should be noted that the time display may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed when a certain time is reached and a certain effect is started.

Further, "The first aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the first time [for example, the timer display of" 5:00 "etc.].
The second aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the second time [for example, the timer display of "20:00" or the like].
The third aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the third time [for example, the timer display of "7:77" or the like].
Of the first time and the second time, the second time is longer.
The third time is a time different from the first time,
The third time is a time different from the second time,
The third time is the time displayed only when the first state is granted.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to pay attention to the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started.

Here, the first aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is only the first time, or the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is the first. The mode may be a time other than the time of. Further, the first aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is always the first time, or the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is the first. It may be a mode in which time may not be reached.

Further, the second aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is only the second time, or the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is the second. The mode may be a time other than the time. Further, the second aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is always the second time, or the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is the second. It may be a mode that may not be time.

Further, the third aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is only the third time, or the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is the third. The mode may be a time other than the time. Further, the third aspect may be a mode in which the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is always the third time, or the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is the third. It may be a mode that may not be time.

Further, in the first time and the second time, the second time may always be a longer time, and the second time may not be a longer time.

Further, the third time may be a time different from only the first time, or may be a time different from the time other than the first time. Further, the third time may always be different from the first time, or may be the same time as the first time.

Further, the third time may be a time different from only the second time, or may be a time different from the time other than the second time. Further, the third time may always be different from the second time, or may be the same time as the second time.

Further, the third time may be a time displayed in a case other than the case where the first state is given, and is a time that is always given when the first state is given. It may be a time when the first state is given and may not be given.

Further, "The time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds, and the display after the decimal point can also be displayed [for example, the timer notice display shown in FIG. 239 (3)]. In the timer display in TM1, it is possible to display after the decimal point, etc.],
The display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0.
The display of the second time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0.
The display of the third time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the player may be able to recognize at a glance that it is a premier timer.

Here, the time displayed first in the timer display may be a display of the number of seconds and may be configured to display only the display after the decimal point, or the time displayed first in the timer display. The display may be configured to display the number of seconds and display other than the display after the decimal point. Further, the display of the time displayed first in the timer display may be configured to display the number of seconds and the display after the decimal point without fail, or the time displayed first in the timer display. The display of may be configured so that the display of the number of seconds is displayed and the display after the decimal point may not be displayed.

Further, "The display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice.
The display of the second time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice.
The third time display as the time display first displayed in the timer display is characterized in that the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the notice is given. Game table to play. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the player may be able to recognize at a glance that it is a premier timer.

Here, "The display of the time that is first displayed in the timer display is configured so that the display of the number of seconds and the display after the decimal point can also be displayed [for example, the timer notice shown in FIG. 239 (3)]. In the timer display on the display TM1, it is possible to display after the decimal point, etc.],
The display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0.
The display of the second time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0.
The display of the third time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0.
The display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice.
The display of the second time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice.
The third time display as the time display first displayed in the timer display is characterized in that the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the notice is given. Game table to play. 』\
It may be.

In addition, it is provided with an effect display means [for example, the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 284] capable of executing the effect display.
The effect display means is a means provided separately from the display means.
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display.
When displaying the timer display on either one of the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter, "in the first case [for example, one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG]" When the timer notice is displayed only in, etc.] ”).
When the timer display is displayed by both the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter, "the second case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 284 (3) to (12), the decorative symbol display device 208". When both the timer advance notice effect and the timer advance notice display on the 7-segment display device SEG are performed, etc.] ”).
In the first case, the effect may not be started.
In the second case, the effect is configured to start.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the start of a certain effect may be expected depending on the number of timer displays for one certain effect.

Here, the effect display means may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the effect display. Further, the effect display means may always execute the effect display, or may not execute the effect display.

Further, the effect display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the effect display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, in the first case, it may be configured so that only a certain effect may not be started, and in the first case, it may be configured so that an effect other than a certain effect may not be started. May be good. Further, in the first case, it may be configured so that a certain effect is not always started, or it may be configured so that a certain effect may be started.

Further, in the second case, it may be configured so that only a certain effect is started, and in the second case, it may be configured so that an effect other than a certain effect is also started. Further, in the second case, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started, or it may be configured so that a certain effect may not be started.

It should be noted that the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means and the display means, rather than the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means and the display means. The jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed in the end. In addition, the case where the timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means is finally a big hit than the case where the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means and the display means. The symbol may be configured so that it can be easily displayed.

Further, when the timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means, the timer display of either the effect display means or the display means may end in the middle.

Further, the effect display means and the display means display different times, and when a certain time is reached in the timer display of one of the effect display means and the display means, a certain effect is started. May be done.

Further, "The timer display is a display in which the display of the time is counted down. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 239 (3) to (9), the timer notice display TM1 counts down the timer display. Etc.],
The certain time is 0 [for example, the timer display of "00:00" shown in FIG. 239 (9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to recognize that a certain time has been reached.

It should be noted that the certain time may include 0 including the decimal point, for example, may be displayed as "0.00" or "00.00", or may be displayed as "0:00" or "0:00". The display may be "00:00".

In the above description,
A game console equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, a change effect display (hold change) of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIGS. 291 (f) to 291 (g). Pre-production display), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a hold icon in a red display mode shown in FIG. 291 (h)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 291 (d)].
The first display is a display of characters related to the second display.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The third display is a display indicating that a certain notice display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to 291 (p)] is waiting for the start of display.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (f) to 291 (h), the ninja character NJ4 The display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode after the pre-effect display has been performed.],
In the first state, the third display may be started [for example, FIG. 291 (d)).
As shown in, the display of the preparing image RDY is started while the UI part UI3 for displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed],
The display started in the first state, and the display may end in the second state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (d) to 291 (n), the UI The image RDY in preparation, which started to be displayed while the UI part UI3 is displayed, has finished displaying when the UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [for example, FIGS. 291 (n) to 291 (n) to FIG. As shown in (o), after the display of the preparing image RDY is completed, the display of the mini game is started with the UI part UI3 hidden, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q)] may be started [for example, FIGS. 291 (o) to FIG. 291 (q)]. As shown in (q), when the display result of the mini game is very successful, the iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed [for example, the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q) is a notice display for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed].
The second state may occur after the first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (l) to (m), it was displayed when shifting to the swordsman reach. UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed.
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI part UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

There was room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game console, it becomes easier to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance rather than the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and the fluctuation is concentrated. It may be entertaining.

In addition, according to this game table, for beginners, the preparatory notice can be used to excite and entertain whether it is the notice or the pre-reading notice, and for some experienced people, the preparatory notice is the notice. It may be easier to understand if it is a display about, and it may be possible to clarify the point of expectation.

Further, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is given depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be a display of a character related only to the second display, or may be a display of a character related to a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is always related to the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

Further, in the first state, only the third display may be started, or in the first state, a display other than the third display may be started. Further, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

In addition, the third display that started the display in the first state may end the display only in the second state, or the third display that started the display in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. Further, the third display whose display is started in the first state may always end the display in the second state, and the third display whose display is started in the first state is the second display. The display may not end in the state of.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of the display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be always started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In the second state, the display of a certain notice display may not be started after the end of.

Further, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In addition to after the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started even in a state other than the second state.

Further, after a certain notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also started. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may always be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain notice display is displayed.

In addition, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect may be a notice that is always related to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to the symbol variation display that is being executed.

Further, the second state may be reached only after the first state, or the second state may be reached even after a state other than the first state. Further, the second state may always be reached after the first state, or the second state may not be reached after the first state.

Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. .. Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

Further, the second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. Further, the second state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of a display mode of a hold icon, or an effect display in proofreading a character (navigation character) that is always displayed. ..

Further, the second display may be a display in which the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, the third display may be a character display being prepared, a character display, a notice item display, or a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be a running display.

Further, a certain notice display may be a display during execution of a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

Further, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display [for example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
The sixth display is at least a display of an image displayed behind the hold icon.
The hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed [for example, the hold icon can be displayed while the UI part UI3 is displayed, etc.],
It is configured so that the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 291 (m), when the UI unit UI3 is hidden, the hold icon is held. Icon is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make the hold icon stand out.

Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back surface of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be at least the display of an image that is always displayed on the back of the hold icon, or at least the display of an image that is not displayed on the back of the hold icon.

Further, it may be configured so that only the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. You may be. In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be always displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured in.

Further, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. You may be.

In addition, it may be configured so that only the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or display other than the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not always be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured in.

In addition, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

Further, "In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the third display [for example, FIG. 291 (Fig. 291). As shown in d), the image RDY being prepared is overlaid on the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 291 (d). The display position of the image RDY being prepared is the same as the display position of the image RDY being prepared as shown in FIG. 291 (m)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it strongly impresses that the third display is not a look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, it may be possible to prevent oversight by noticing that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

Here, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped and displayed only with the third display in the first state, or the display in the first state may be overlapped. It may be configured so that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with a display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display in the first state, or the sixth display may be displayed in the first state. At least a part of the display may be configured so as to overlap the third display and not be displayed.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed, or in the first state, the sixth display may be overlapped. Display other than at least a part of the display of is also configured to be displayed overlapping with the third display.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
One of the plurality of types of modes is the second mode [for example, the golden display mode shown in FIG. 291 (e)].
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The jackpot symbol is likely to be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and therefore the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change. , The jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first and second aspects, or may not be displayed in the first and second aspects. Good.

Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, only the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed in a definite manner, and the sixth display is from the first mode to the second mode as compared with the case where the sixth display does not change from the first mode to the second mode. When the mode is changed, it may be easier to confirm and display symbols other than the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, the jackpot symbol may always be definitely displayed, and the sixth display is from the first mode to the second mode as compared with the case where the sixth display does not change from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display is the first mode. The jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed from the second aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
One of the plurality of types of modes is the second mode [for example, the golden display mode shown in FIG. 291 (e)].
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is likely to be started [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode, the hold icon in the red display mode is likely to be displayed. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first and second aspects, or may not be displayed in the first and second aspects. Good.

In addition, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be more likely to be initiated, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than if the sixth display did not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. When it changes to, it may be easier to start the display display other than the second display. In addition, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may always be started, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of change, the display of the second display may not start.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display may start from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

Further, "At least a part of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (f), the ninja character NJ4 is attached to the UI part UI3. Overlapping, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, various information can be obtained by paying attention to the sixth display, and the game may be easy to understand.

Here, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display overlaps with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured to do so. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. It may be configured in.

Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. ..

Further, "The first display and the sixth display are configured so as not to overlap [for example, as shown in FIG. 306 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 overlaps the UI unit UI3. No etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, focusing on the sixth display, at first glance, the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be found that this is not the case.

Here, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. Good. Further, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap with each other. ..

In addition, "a certain reach effect [for example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q)] can be executed.
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [for example, the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q). ) Before the start],
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [for example, a state in which the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q) is being executed]. , A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not it is in a certain reach state.

Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured so that a certain reach effect is always executed, or it may be configured so that a certain reach effect may not be executed.

Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before the execution of the reach effect other than the certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states of. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

Further, the second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is executed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is executed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always executed, or a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to 291 (p)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q)].
The certain notice display is a display for notifying the start of the certain effect [for example, in the mini-games shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to 291 (p), the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord. Foretells the display of the iron plate image TP by sticking in the area around the target TGT],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain notice display may give a notice only that a certain effect is started, or may give a notice other than the start of a certain effect. Further, a certain notice display may always give a notice that a certain effect will be started, or may not give a notice that a certain effect will be started.

Further, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display. Further, the fourth display may always be displayed as a certain notice display, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain notice display.

Further, only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. Further, the fifth display may always be displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, "the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. 291 (for example, FIG. 291 ()). i) As shown in Fig. (J), the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to give a sense of expectation across a plurality of fluctuations by the third display, and since the goal is easy to understand, the period for giving a sense of expectation may be clarified.

Here, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display is started, or The third display, which is started to be displayed in the symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. Further, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed after the next start symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. The third display from which the display has been started may not be continuously displayed even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

Further, "The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, is erased before the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIGS. 291 (f) to FIG. As shown in h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display that is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be erased only before the next start symbol variation display is started, or the display may be erased in a certain symbol variation display. The started first display may be erased other than before the next started symbol variation display is started. Further, the first display that is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be erased before the next start symbol variation display is started, or the display is started in a certain symbol variation display. The first display may not be erased before the next symbol variation display is started.

In addition, "the certain effect may be executed in the area where the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 297 (a4), the characters" intense heat "in the tutorial display unit TT1". A notice display consisting of [may be displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be executed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also executed. May be the case. Further, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. May be the case.

In addition, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh display [for example, the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6)].
The seventh display is a display that prompts the operation of the operating means.
The seventh display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b6), the deca button image 136aL is prepared. The display is started after the medium image RDY is started to be displayed],
When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6) is displayed, the iron plate is operated. Image TP is displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends before the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b6), the image RDY being prepared. Is displayed before the deca button image 136aL is started to be displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operating means, or may also prompt other than the operation of the operating means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operating means, or may not prompt the operation of the operating means.

Further, the seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or may be started even after the third display is started. There may be. Further, the seventh display may always start after the third display is started, or may not start after the third display is started. May be good.

Further, a certain effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect is not started when the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated only while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated other than while the seventh display is displayed. It may be started. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while only the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed. May be started.

Further, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display ends other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be something to do. Further, the third display may be such that the display always ends before the display of the seventh display starts, or when the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be one.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b5)].
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b6), a button notice effect is produced by a combined animation. Foretelling the start of, that is, foretelling the display of the big button image 136aL, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the eighth display may be a notice only that the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice other than the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

Further, the third display may be terminated only during the display of the eighth display, or may be terminated during the display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 301 (a)].
The ninth display is a display of a variable icon.
Two of the third displays may be displayed [for example, two images RDY1 and RDY2 in preparation may be displayed as shown in FIG. 304 (a)],
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 301 (g), the preparing image RDY is enlarged and displayed. etc],
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 301 (g), the enlarged prepared image RDY overlaps with the variable icon h0. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easier to notice that two third displays are displayed.

Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, or only one third display may be displayed. May be done.

Further, only the display mode of the other may change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the display of the other of the two third displays may be completed after the display of the other is completed. The display mode other than the display mode of is also changed. Further, the display mode of the other may always change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the display mode of the other may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. There may be cases where the display mode of is not changed.

Further, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or other than after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. The other display mode may change.

Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with a display other than the ninth display. Good. Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may always overlap with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. ..

Further, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and the display other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. ..

In addition, "when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display [for example, in FIGS. 301 (b) to (k). As shown, the two preparing images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. May end the display of all the displays other than the third display in the one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may always end in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may not be completed.

In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be completed. Further, only when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. In the case of, the display of all the third displays may be completed in the one symbol variation display.

In addition, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed as the tenth display [for example," Panda is a master of the lord "displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 291 (a)." Explanation display, etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display and is an explanatory display.
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (a), the explanatory display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (d), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. Further, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. May be good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A game console equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a character related to the first display [change effect display of display mode of hold icon (hold change advance effect display), for example, FIGS. 291 (f) to 291 (g). ) Shown in the ninja character NJ4, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is the second display [hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode, for example, the hold icon in the red display mode shown in FIG. 291 (h)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [preparing display, for example, the preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d)].
The first display is a display of characters related to the second display.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The third display is a certain notice display [mini game or timer notice, for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to (p), and FIGS. 293 (b3) to (b4). It is a display indicating that the display of [Timer notice effect, etc. shown in] is waiting to be started.
It is configured so that the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [Hold icon after the hold change pre-effect display by the character is started. Is displayed in the pre-reading notice display mode, for example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (f) to (h), the first hold icon after the hold change pre-effect display by the ninja character NJ4 is performed. The display mode of h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc.],
It is configured so that the third display may be started in the first state [the display of the preparing display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, for example, FIG. 291 (d)). As shown in, the display of the preparing image RDY is started while the UI part UI3 for displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed],
The display is started in the first state. The third display is configured so that the display may end in the second state. [The display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed. The preparation display ends when the hold icon is hidden, for example, the display starts when the UI unit UI3 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 291 (d) to 291 (n). The image RDY being prepared is displayed when the UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [the hold icon is not. After the display of the preparation display is completed in the display state, the mini game or the timer notice is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (n) to (o), the display of the preparation image RDY is displayed. After the end, the display of the mini game is started with the UI part UI3 hidden, or as shown in FIGS. 293 (b1) to (b4), the image RDY being prepared. After the display is finished, the timer notice effect is started with the UI part UI3 hidden, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the notice, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q), the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (c4), etc.] Is configured to start [When the display result of the mini game becomes a great success or the countdown is completed by the timer notice, the notice is started, for example, in FIGS. 291 (o) to (q). As shown, when the display result of the mini game becomes a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 294 (c1) to (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed. Button notice production by big button 136aL will start],
The above-mentioned certain effect is a notice regarding the display of the symbol variation during execution.
It is configured so that the second state may occur after the first state [the state in which the hold icon can be displayed may shift to the state in which the hold icon is not displayed, for example, FIG. 291]. As shown in (l) to (m) of the same figure, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the displayed UI section UI3 is hidden, and the hold icon shifts from the displayable state to the non-displayable state. Etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed [for example,
The state where the UI part UI3 before shifting to the swordsman reach is displayed, etc.],
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI part UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

There was room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game console, it becomes easier to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance rather than the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and the fluctuation is concentrated. It may be entertaining.

In addition, according to this game table, for beginners, the preparatory notice can be used to excite and entertain whether it is the notice or the pre-reading notice, and for some experienced people, the preparatory notice is the notice. It may be easier to understand if it is a display about, and it may be possible to clarify the point of expectation.

Further, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is given depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be a display of a character related only to the second display, or may be a display of a character related to a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is always related to the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

Further, in the first state, only the third display may be started, or in the first state, a display other than the third display may be started. Further, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

In addition, the third display that started the display in the first state may end the display only in the second state, or the third display that started the display in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. Further, the third display whose display is started in the first state may always end the display in the second state, and the third display whose display is started in the first state is the second display. The display may not end in the state of.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of the display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be always started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In the second state, the display of a certain notice display may not be started after the end of.

Further, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In addition to after the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started even in a state other than the second state.

Further, after a certain notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also started. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may always be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain notice display is displayed.

In addition, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect may be a notice that is always related to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to the symbol variation display that is being executed.

Further, the second state may be reached only after the first state, or the second state may be reached even after a state other than the first state. Further, the second state may always be reached after the first state, or the second state may not be reached after the first state.

Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. .. Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

Further, the second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. Further, the second state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of a display mode of a hold icon, or an effect display in proofreading a character (navigation character) that is always displayed. ..

Further, the second display may be a display in which the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, the third display may be a character display being prepared, a character display, a notice item display, or a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be a running display.

Further, a certain notice display may be a display during execution of a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

In addition, "The third state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed.
The fourth state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed.
The third state is different from the first state.
The fourth state is different from the second state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

In addition, "the third display, which started in the first state, may end in the first state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

In addition, "the third display, which started in the first state, may end in the third state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

In addition, "the third display, which started in the first state, may end in the fourth state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

Further, the first state may be a state including the execution of the symbol variation display (decorative symbol, special symbol).

In addition, "It is configured so that a certain effect may be started after the certain notice display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

It should be noted that the certain notice display is not limited to the true notice display, and may be a fake notice display in which a certain effect is not started.

Further, when a certain notice display is a mini game, a certain effect may be a display showing the result of the mini game.

Further, the character is not limited to a person, and may be a display of a mini item such as a notice item.

Further, "the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started", but "the second display is started after the display of the first display is started". The display of the display of the above is started. The display may be made. " Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. Further, the second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

In addition, "it is configured so that the second state may occur after the first state" means "the second state may occur following the first state". It may be "structured like this".

In addition, there may be a case where the first state is followed by a second state without going through another state (for example, a fourth state). In addition, there may be a case where the first state is followed by another state (for example, a third state or a third state) and then the second state is entered. In addition, there may be a case where the first state is changed to the second state in the state where one symbol variation display is made.

Further, a certain effect may be faded in while a certain notice display is faded out.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display [display of an image including the hold icon display area, for example, UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
The sixth display is at least a display of an image displayed behind the hold icon.
The hold icon is configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed. [The hold icon is set to be displayable while an image including the hold icon display area is displayed, for example. The hold icon can be displayed while the UI part UI3 is displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, FIG. 291 (m). ), The hold icon is not displayed when the UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make the hold icon stand out.

Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back surface of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be at least the display of an image that is always displayed on the back of the hold icon, or at least the display of an image that is not displayed on the back of the hold icon.

Further, it may be configured so that only the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. You may be. In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be always displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured in.

Further, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. You may be.

In addition, it may be configured so that only the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or display other than the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not always be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured in.

In addition, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

The sixth display may be a display that does not overlap with the changing decorative pattern.

Further, in a configuration in which a part of the sixth display overlaps with a part of the third display, the display of a part different from the part of the third display overlaps with the decorative design. You may.

In addition, the sixth display may include the display of the pedestal of the hold icon.

In addition, the sixth display may include the display of the pedestal of the variable icon.

Further, the sixth display may be different from the display of the background image.

Further, "In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the third display. [The hold icon is displayed. In this state, a part of the image including the hold icon display area is displayed overlapping with the preparing display. For example, as shown in FIG. 291 (d), the preparing image RDY is a tutorial in the UI section UI3. It is overlaid on the display unit TT1 etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [Display of the preparation display in the state where the hold icon is displayed. The position and the display position of the preparation display in the non-display state of the hold icon are the same, for example, the display position of the preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d) and the preparation image shown in FIG. 291 (m). The display position of RDY is the same, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it strongly impresses that the third display is not a look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, it may be possible to prevent oversight by noticing that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

Here, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped and displayed only with the third display in the first state, or the display in the first state may be overlapped. It may be configured so that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with a display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display in the first state, or the sixth display may be displayed in the first state. At least a part of the display may be configured so as to overlap the third display and not be displayed.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed, or in the first state, the sixth display may be overlapped. Display other than at least a part of the display of is also configured to be displayed overlapping with the third display.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [default display mode, for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
One of the plurality of types is the second aspect [display mode of notice or look-ahead notice, for example, gold display mode shown in FIG. 291 (e)].
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is configured to be easy to start [The hold icon display is more than the case where the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode. When the image including the area changes from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode, the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode is more likely to be displayed. When it is displayed in the golden display mode, the hold icon in the red display mode is likely to be displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first and second aspects, or may not be displayed in the first and second aspects. Good.

In addition, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be more likely to be initiated, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than if the sixth display did not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. When it changes to, it may be easier to start the display display other than the second display. In addition, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may always be started, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of change, the display of the second display may not start.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display may start from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, "when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Is configured so that the display of the second display is more likely to be started. ”“ In a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. It is configured so that the display of the second display is more likely to be started when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change. It may be that there is.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [default display mode, for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
One of the plurality of types is the second aspect [display mode of notice or look-ahead notice, for example, gold display mode shown in FIG. 291 (e)].
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display. [The hold icon display is more than the case where the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode. When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode, it is more likely to be a big hit. For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode. Therefore, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and therefore, the jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first and second aspects, or may not be displayed in the first and second aspects. Good.

Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, only the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed in a definite manner, and the sixth display is from the first mode to the second mode as compared with the case where the sixth display does not change from the first mode to the second mode. When the mode is changed, it may be easier to confirm and display symbols other than the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, the jackpot symbol may always be definitely displayed, and the sixth display is from the first mode to the second mode as compared with the case where the sixth display does not change from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display is the first mode. The jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed from the second aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Is configured to facilitate the definite display of the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. ”“ In a certain state, the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when it does not change. It may be that there is.

In addition, "at least a part of the image including the hold icon display area is configured so that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the first display. It overlaps with the character related to the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (hold change advance effect display). For example, as shown in FIG. 291 (f), a part of the UI unit UI3 overlaps with the ninja character NJ4. Wrapped, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, various information can be obtained by paying attention to the sixth display, and the game may be easy to understand.

Here, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with only the first display, or at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed. It may be configured so that the display other than the first display may be overlapped and displayed. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured so as to be always overlapped with the first display, or at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed in the sixth display. It may be configured so that it may be overlapped with one display and may not be displayed.

Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to overlap the display of the first display, or a display other than at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed. The display may also be configured to overlap the first display.

Further, a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to overlap the display of the first display, or the entire display of the sixth display may be displayed as the first display. It may be configured so that it may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display overlaps with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured as follows. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. It may be configured in.

Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. ..

Further, "In a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. In the state where both the image including the hold icon display area and the character related to the change effect display (hold change advance effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon are displayed, the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. The character related to the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (hold change advance effect display) is not overlapped. For example, as shown in FIG. 306 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is overlapped with the ninja character NJ4. Not etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, focusing on the sixth display, at first glance, the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be found that this is not the case.

Here, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping only with the first display. Alternatively, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with a display other than the first display. It may be configured in. Further, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured to be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may not be displayed without overlapping with the first display.

Further, even if both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, only the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. Also, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the display other than the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. May be done. Further, even if the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display only when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed. Also, in a state other than the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. It may be configured.

Further, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may not overlap. .. Further, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap with each other. ..

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute "a certain reach effect [a specific super reach effect, for example, the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q)"].
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [the state before the specific super reach effect is started, for example, FIGS. 291 (m) to the same. The state before the start of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in Fig. (Q)].
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is executed, for example, a super reach (swordsman) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q). Reach) is being executed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not it is in a certain reach state.

Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured so that a certain reach effect is always executed, or it may be configured so that a certain reach effect may not be executed.

Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before the execution of the reach effect other than the certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states of. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

Further, the second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is executed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is executed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always executed, or a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.

The first state may be a reach state before developing into SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and the second state may be a state in which SP reach is being executed in the certain fluctuation.

Further, the first state is a state before developing into SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and is a certain state before reaching a reach state, and the second state is a state before reaching SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and the second state is SP in the certain fluctuation. It may be in the state where reach is being executed.

That is, there may be a case where the first state and the second state are one set.

Further, "The certain notice display is a timer notice display [for example, a display of a timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 294 (b3) to (b5)].
A game table that features that. 』\
Was also explained.

The timer notice display may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of timer notice displays, it may be a certain type of timer notice display.

Further, "The certain notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to (q)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of mini games, it may be a certain type of mini games.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6), etc.].
It is configured so that the fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. You may. Further, the fourth display may be configured to be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q), etc.].
It is configured so that the fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. You may. Further, the fifth display may be configured to be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

The fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, and it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed than when the fifth display is displayed. When the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, in the case where the fifth display appears only under special conditions, the case where at least one of the third display mode and a certain notice display mode is displayed only in a certain mode. There may be.

In addition, "the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started. [The preparatory display that has started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started, for example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (i) to (j). In addition, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, it is possible to give a sense of expectation across a plurality of fluctuations by the third display, and since the goal is easy to understand, the period for giving a sense of expectation may be clarified.

Here, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display is started, or The third display, which is started to be displayed in the symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. Further, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed after the next start symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. The third display from which the display has been started may not be continuously displayed even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, "the first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be erased before the next symbol variation display is started [a certain symbol]. The character related to the change effect display (hold change pre-effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon whose display has started in the variation display is deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, for example, FIG. 291 (f). ) ~ As shown in the figure (h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display that is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be erased only before the next start symbol variation display is started. The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be configured to be erased other than before the next start symbol variation display is started. Further, the first display which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be always erased before the next start symbol variation display is started, or a certain symbol variation may be made. The first display, which is started to be displayed in the display, may be configured so that it may not be erased before the next start of the symbol variation display is started.

It should be noted that a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variation display. Further, a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state).

Further, "In the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed. [The notice is executed in the area where the preparation display is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 297 (a4), a notice display consisting of the characters "extreme heat" may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in which the preparing image RDY is displayed],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be executed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also executed. May be the case. Further, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. May be the case.

In addition, it is equipped with "operation means [buttons and levers, for example, effect buttons 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh display [display of an image of a button or lever, for example, a deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6)].
The seventh display is a display that prompts the operation of the operating means.
The seventh display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started. [The display of the image of the button or the lever is started after the preparation display is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b6), the deca button image 136aL is started to be displayed after the preparing image RDY is started to be displayed, etc.],
When the operating means is operated while the seventh display is being displayed, the certain effect is started [when the button (or lever) is operated while the display of the image of the button or lever is being displayed, the notice is given. When the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6) is being displayed, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends before the display of the seventh display starts [The in-preparation display ends before the image of the button or lever starts to be displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b6), the display of the preparing image RDY is terminated before the display of the deca button image 136aL is started],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operating means, or may also prompt other than the operation of the operating means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operating means, or may not prompt the operation of the operating means.

Further, the seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or may be started even after the third display is started. There may be. Further, the seventh display may always start after the third display is started, or may not start after the third display is started. May be good.

Further, a certain effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect is not started when the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated only while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated other than while the seventh display is displayed. It may be started. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while only the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed. May be started.

Further, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display ends other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be something to do. Further, the third display may be such that the display always ends before the display of the seventh display starts, or when the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be one.

The seventh display may be a deca button image of a normal button image and a deca button image. Here, when the normal button image is displayed and when the big button image is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed when the big button image is displayed.

Further, the seventh display may be a button image of a special color among the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the normal color button image is displayed and when the special color button image is displayed, even if the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the special color button image is displayed. Good.

Further, the seventh display may be an image of the normal button image and an image of another operating means among the images of the operating means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the button. Here, when the normal button image is displayed and when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the jackpot symbol is displayed when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed. It may be easy to confirm and display.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b5)].
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b6), a button notice effect is produced by a combined animation. Foretelling the start of, that is, foretelling the display of the big button image 136aL, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the eighth display may be a notice only that the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice other than the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

Further, the third display may be terminated only during the display of the eighth display, or may be terminated during the display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 301 (a)].
The ninth display is a display of a variable icon.
The third display may be displayed twice. [Two preparation displays may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 304 (a), two preparation images RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. May be done, etc.],
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes [After the display of one of the two preparing displays is completed, the other is being prepared. The display mode of the display changes, for example, the image RDY being prepared is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 301 (g)],.
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [The preparing display whose display mode has changed overlaps the variable icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 301 (g), enlarged. The displayed preparing image RDY overlaps with the variable icon h0, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easier to notice that two third displays are displayed.

Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, or only one third display may be displayed. May be done.

Further, only the display mode of the other may change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the display of the other of the two third displays may be completed after the display of the other is completed. The display mode other than the display mode of is also changed. Further, the display mode of the other may always change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the display mode of the other may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. There may be cases where the display mode of is not changed.

Further, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or other than after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. The other display mode may change.

Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with a display other than the ninth display. Good. Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may always overlap with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. ..

Further, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and the display other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. ..

In addition, "when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is terminated in one symbol variation display. [Two preparation displays are displayed. If so, they are all digested in the same symbol variation display, for example, as shown in FIGS. 301 (b) to (k), the two preparing images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. May end the display of all the displays other than the third display in the one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may always end in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may not be completed.

In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be completed. Further, only when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. In the case of, the display of all the third displays may be completed in the one symbol variation display.

Further, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the tenth display [Explanatory display, for example," Panda is a master of the lord "displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 291 (a)." Displayed explanation display, etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display and is an explanatory display.
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed [Explanatory display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example. , As shown in FIG. 291 (a), the explanatory display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [The preparing display is displayed in a specific display area where the explanatory display is displayed, for example, FIG. 291 (d). ), The image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 where the explanation display is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. Further, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. May be good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Further, the "display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to be started" means "character display in preparation [for example," in preparation "in the preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d)". Character display, etc.] "
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the eleventh display [ball removal display, for example, ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 322 (a1)].
The eleventh display is a display for urging the game ball to be ejected [for example, in the ball removal error display ERR1, the character display of "please remove the ball" is used to encourage the ball to be removed, etc.],
In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. Configured [In a state where both the preparation display and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the preparation display overlaps with the ball removal display, for example, as shown in FIG. 322 (a2). In addition, the image RDY being prepared overlaps with the ball removal error display ERR1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the eleventh display may be a display prompting only to eject the game ball, or may be a display prompting other than discharging the game ball. In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts the ejection of the game ball, or may be a display that does not prompt the ejection of the game ball.

Further, the eleventh display may be a display urging only the game ball to be discharged, or a display urging the discharge of something other than the game ball.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping only with the eleventh display. In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed in addition to the eleventh display. It may be configured to be. Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be always overlapped with the eleventh display. Or, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the third display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In a state other than the state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, all the displays of the third display are configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. You may.

Further, "In a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. [In a state where both the mini game or timer notice and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the mini game or timer notice overlaps with the ball removal display, for example, the figure. As shown in 322 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 overlaps with the ball removal error display ERR1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped with only the eleventh display. It may be configured, and in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display overlaps with a display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be always overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In a state other than the state in which both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, all the displays of the certain notice display are configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. You may.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [ball game machine, for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a slot machine [rotary machine].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The hold icon may be used to indicate that the start of a certain effect on the slot machine is being held, but according to this game console, this can be realized.

In addition, in the above description,
"A production means capable of executing a timer effect [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons, and
It is a game table equipped with
The timer effect is configured so that the effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 347 (9) to (13), when the timer display becomes "00:00" after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed, a pseudo continuous effect is produced. Is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in the display mode of the bomb shown in FIG. 347 (3)].
The second hold icon is a look-ahead notice hold icon.
The second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 347 (3) to (9)). As shown, the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb suggests that the timer notice effect will be started in the symbol variation display that will be started next.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game console, it may be possible to know the content of the effect (timer effect is performed) by the hold icon.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may always execute the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be a display means that can display other than a plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. However, it may be configured so that when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the display is started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time only after the display of the timer display is started. However, it may be configured so that a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time other than after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect may be started only when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. However, it may be configured so that a certain effect may be started even when the timer display is not displayed at a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the second hold icon may only suggest that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the timer may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may also suggest something other than the fact that the production may be started. Further, the second hold icon may always suggest that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the timer may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may not suggest that the production may be started.

Hereinafter, the term "at least suggestion" includes not only implicit suggestion but also explicit notification.

Further, when the second hold icon is displayed, the timer effect may always start. For example, even if the second hold icon is displayed, the timer effect may not start. For example, a fake second hold icon that does not start the timer effect may be displayed, or a big hit occurs after the second hold icon is displayed and before the timer effect starts. After the jackpot game related to is completed, it may become a hold icon in the default display mode, and the timer effect may not be performed.

Further, "The second hold icon is a hold icon suggesting the content of the certain effect [For example, the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb is as a certain effect as shown in FIG. 349 (8). It suggests that there is a possibility of pseudo-continuous production],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to be interested in the production content executed in the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice.

Here, the second hold icon may be something that can suggest only the content of a certain effect, or may be something that can suggest other than the content of a certain effect. Further, the second hold icon may always suggest the content of a certain effect, or may not suggest the content of a certain effect.

Further, "the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which three bombs are grouped together as shown in FIG. 352 (3)]. ,
The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 352 (3) to 353 (23). As shown in, the hold icon in the display mode in which the three bombs are in a lump suggests that the timer notice effect will be started three times in the symbol variation display to be started next.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the display of one hold icon may give a feeling of expectation that the timer effect will be performed a plurality of times.

Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. You may. Further, the second hold icon may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, the second display mode may only suggest that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a plurality of display modes during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may also suggest something other than the start of the timer effect of the times. In addition, the second display mode may always suggest that a plurality of timer effects are started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of times during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may not suggest that the timer effect of the times is started.

Further, the second display mode may suggest that only a plurality of timer effects are started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of times during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may suggest that an effect other than the timer effect of the times is also started.

Further, the second display mode may suggest that the timer effect is started a plurality of times only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. May also suggest that the timer effect is started a plurality of times.

Further, "the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the display mode consisting of one bomb shown in FIG. 347 (3)].
The first display mode is a display mode that suggests that at least one timer effect is started before the end of the certain symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 347 (3) to 3). As shown in Fig. (9), the hold icon in the display mode consisting of one bomb suggests that one timer notice effect will be started in the next symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the hold icon may be used to give an expectation to the number of timer effects.

Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. You may. Further, the second hold icon may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first display mode may suggest that only one timer effect is started before the end of a certain symbol variation display, or the certain symbol variation display may be displayed. It may also suggest something other than the start of one timer effect before the end. Further, the first display mode may always suggest that one timer effect is started before the end of a certain symbol variation display, or the certain symbol variation display may be displayed. It may not suggest that one timer effect is started before the end.

Further, the first display mode may suggest that only one timer effect is started before the end of the certain symbol variation display, or the certain symbol variation display may be started. It may be suggested that an effect other than one timer effect is started before the end.

It should be noted that the second display mode may be configured so that the number of times the timer effect is executed is larger than that of the first display mode.

Further, as the display of the second hold icon, there are a plurality of display patterns (for example, pattern 1, pattern 2, etc.) suggesting one timer effect, and the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in pattern 2 rather than pattern 1. It may be configured for ease of use. Here, the pattern may be a color pattern, a size pattern, a shape pattern, or the like.

Further, even in the first display mode, the timer effect may be started a plurality of times.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon [for example, a hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 357 (3)].
The third hold icon is a look-ahead notice hold icon.
The second hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons.
The third hold icon is a hold icon on which a certain character [for example, a character of a lord] is displayed.
The third hold icon is a hold icon that does not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, shown in FIG. 357 (3). As described above, the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is a look-ahead notice of the jackpot (super reach) and does not suggest that the timer notice effect will be started, etc.],
The second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in the third display mode [for example, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3)].
The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display including the certain character [for example, FIGS. 358 (3) to the same. As shown in FIG. (9), the hold icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is composed of the character of the lord, suggests that the timer notice effect is started in the symbol variation display to be started next. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect the reliability of the look-ahead notice.

Here, the third hold icon may be one in which only a certain character is displayed, or one in which a character other than a certain character is also displayed. Further, the third hold icon may be one in which a certain character is always displayed, or may be one in which a certain character is not displayed.

Further, the third hold icon may not include only a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a display of a certain symbol variation display. It may not include a display other than a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during execution. Further, the third hold icon may not always include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a display of a certain symbol variation display. It may include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during execution.

Further, the third hold icon may not include a display suggesting only that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a display of a certain symbol variation display. It may not include a display suggesting other than that the timer effect may be started during execution.

Further, the third hold icon may not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a display of a certain symbol variation display. It may not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started other than during execution.

Further, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. May be good. Further, the second hold icon may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the third display mode may only suggest that the timer effect is started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. It may also suggest something other than the timer effect being started during the execution of the symbol variation display. Further, the third display mode may always suggest that the timer effect is started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. It may not suggest that the timer effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

Further, the third display mode may indicate that only the timer effect is started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. It may be suggested that an effect other than the timer effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

Further, the third display mode may suggest that the timer effect is started only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. It may be suggested that the timer effect is started other than during the execution of the symbol variation display.

It should be noted that the timer effect may be started in the symbol variation display before the start of a certain symbol variation display. For example, the timer effect that the second hold icon suggests execution may be performed in another symbol variation display before one symbol variation display. According to this, it may be possible to draw attention to the game while expecting that the timer effects are collectively performed in one symbol variation display.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to execute the notification regarding the certain effect performed by the timer effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 352 (16), the replay icon RPL indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect has been performed. Notifying by the display of],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player can grasp the type of a certain effect, and after that, he / she may be able to see the timer effect while imagining the content of the certain effect.

Here, it may be configured so that only the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect can be executed, or the notification other than the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect can also be executed. It may be a timer. Further, it may be configured to always execute the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect, or may not execute the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect. It may be the one that has been done.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable icon [for example, variable icon h0, etc.].
The second hold icon, which has been displayed as a hold icon, may be started to be displayed as a change icon (hereinafter, referred to as "first change icon") in connection with the start of the certain symbol change display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 352 (7) to (8), the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which three bombs are grouped together has the following symbol variation display. When started, it will be displayed as a variable icon h0 in the same display mode],
A display in which the display mode of the first variation icon changes in connection with the execution of the timer effect once during the execution of the certain symbol variation display (hereinafter, "first display [eg, FIG. As shown in 352 (9) to FIG. 16 (16), the display mode of the variable icon h0, which changes from the display mode in which three bombs are in a lump, to the display mode in which two bombs are in a lump, etc.] ". [For example, as shown in FIGS. 352 (8) to (16), a display mode in which three bombs are grouped together when one timer advance notice effect is executed. The variable icon h0 of is changed to a display mode in which two bombs are grouped together],
The first variation icon after the display mode is changed by the first display is a variation icon that can suggest the remaining number of times of the timer effect that can be started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, , As shown in FIG. 352 (16), the variable icon h0 changed to the display mode in which the two bombs are in a mass suggests that the timer advance notice effect is executed two more times, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the variable icon may be made to function as a means for notifying the number of times of the timer effect.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the variable icon, or may be a display means other than the variable icon. Further, the display means may always display the variable icon, or may not display the variable icon.

Also, the second hold icon that was displayed as the hold icon may be configured to start displaying only as the first variable icon, or the second hold that was displayed as the hold icon. The icon may be configured to start displaying as something other than the first variable icon. Further, the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured to always start to be displayed as the first variable icon, or the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured. It may be configured so that it may not be displayed as the first variable icon.

Also, only the second hold icon that was displayed as the hold icon may be configured to start displaying as the first variable icon, or the second hold that was displayed as the hold icon. Other than the icon, it may be configured so that it may be started to be displayed as the first variable icon.

Further, it may be configured so that only the first display is displayed in relation to the execution of one timer effect during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the execution of a certain symbol variation display. A display other than the first display may be displayed in connection with the execution of one timer effect. Further, it may be configured so that the first display is always displayed in relation to the execution of one timer effect during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured so that the first display may not be displayed in connection with the execution of one timer effect.

Further, the first display may be displayed only in relation to the execution of one timer effect during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the execution of a certain symbol variation display. The first display may be displayed in relation to something other than the execution of one timer effect.

Further, the first variable icon after the display mode is changed by the first display may be capable of suggesting only the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during the execution of a certain symbol variable display. , It may be possible to suggest something other than the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Further, the first variable icon after the display mode is changed by the first display may always indicate the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during the execution of a certain symbol variable display. It may not suggest the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display.

Further, "The second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a manner that can suggest the time to be displayed when the display of the timer display is started [for example, FIG. 362 (6). A timer display is displayed above the hold icon of the bomb display mode shown in.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to imagine the content of a certain effect executed by the suggestion of the initial value display of time in the timer display.

Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in a mode in which the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started can be suggested, or the display of the timer display may be displayed. The time displayed when it is started may be displayed in a mode other than the suggestable mode. Further, the second hold icon may always be displayed in a manner that can suggest the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started, or when the display of the timer display is started. The time displayed in may not be displayed in a suggestive manner.

Further, the second hold icon may be displayed in a mode in which only the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started can be suggested, or the display of the timer display is started. A time other than the time displayed when the time is displayed may also be displayed in a suggestable manner.

Further, "a plurality of the timer effects (hereinafter, referred to as" a plurality of timer effects ") may be started at the same time during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 360 (17). Two timer notice effects have started at the same time, etc.],
One of the plurality of timer effects is a first timer effect [for example, a timer advance effect related to the second timer advance display TM12 shown in FIG. 360 (17)].
One of the plurality of timer effects is a second timer effect [for example, a timer advance effect related to the third timer advance display TM13 shown in FIG. 360 (17)].
Displayed when the display of the timer in the first timer effect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display [for example, second timer notice display TM12 or the like shown in FIG. 360 (17)") is started. Time to be set [for example, 7 seconds ("07: 00"), etc.] and the timer display in the second timer effect (hereinafter, "second timer display [for example, the third shown in FIG. 360 (17)). The time [for example, 8 seconds (“ 08:00 ”), etc.] displayed when the display of the timer notice display TM13, etc. is started is a different time.
When the first timer display reaches the certain time, the first effect [for example, the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 361 (19)] may be performed as the certain effect.
When the second timer display reaches the certain time, the second effect [for example, the change effect of the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 361 (21)] is performed as the certain effect. There is
The first effect and the second effect are different effects.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be expected that a plurality of certain effects (notices) will be performed by combining timer effects.

Here, a plurality of timer effects may be started at the same time only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of timer effects may be started at the same time other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be cases. Further, a plurality of timer effects may always be started at the same time during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of timer effects may not be started at the same time during the execution of a certain symbol variation display.

Further, only a plurality of timer effects may be started at the same time during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and effects other than the plurality of timer effects may be started at the same time during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be cases.

It should be noted that the start times of the plurality of timer effects may be different, and at least a part of the execution periods of the respective timer effects may overlap.

Further, the time displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may always be different times. It may be the same time.

Further, when the first timer display reaches a certain time, only the first effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the first timer display reaches a certain time, the first effect may be performed. As a certain effect, an effect other than the first effect may be performed. Further, the first effect may always be performed as a certain effect when the first timer display reaches a certain time, or a certain effect when the first timer display reaches a certain time. As a result, the first production may not be performed.

Further, the first effect may be performed as a certain effect only when the first timer display reaches a certain time, and other than the case where the first timer display reaches a certain time. In some cases, the first effect may be performed as a certain effect.

Further, when the second timer display reaches a certain time, only the second effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the second timer display reaches a certain time. As a certain effect, an effect other than the second effect may be performed. Further, when the second timer display reaches a certain time, the second effect may always be performed as a certain effect, and when the second timer display reaches a certain time, a certain effect may be performed. As a result, the second production may not be performed.

Further, the second effect may be performed as a certain effect only when the second timer display reaches a certain time, and other than the case where the second timer display reaches a certain time. In addition, a second effect may be performed as a certain effect.

Further, the first effect and the second effect may always be different or may be the same.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display [for example, a ball removal error display shown in FIG. 345 (9")].
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a plate full tank error state [for example, as shown in FIG. 345 (9 ″), when a lower plate full tank error occurs, a ball removal error occurs. Display is displayed, etc.],
One of the timer display and the ball removal error display may overlap with the other display [for example, as shown in FIG. 345 (9 ″), the ball removal The error display overlaps the front side of the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timer display may speed up the ball removal operation.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the ball removal error display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the ball removal error display. Further, the display means may always display the ball removal error display, or may not display the ball removal error display.

Further, the ball removal error display may be displayed only in the dish full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the dish full tank error state. Further, the ball removal error display may be always displayed in the dish full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the dish full tank error state.

Further, one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be configured to overlap only with the other display, or one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be displayed. May be configured so that may overlap with displays other than the other display. Further, one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be configured to always overlap with the other display, or one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be the other display. It may be configured so that it may not overlap the display.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game table equipped with an effect means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of timer effects.
One of the plurality of types of timer effects is a first timer effect [for example, a timer advance effect related to the first timer advance display TM11 shown in FIGS. 325 (3) to (12)]. ,
One of the plurality of types of timer effects is a second timer effect [for example, a timer advance effect related to the second timer advance display TM12 shown in FIGS. 325 (5) to (7)]. ,
In the first timer effect, the first timer display is the first after the display of the first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 and the like shown in FIG. 325 (3)] is started. The first effect [for example, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 325 (13)] may be started in response to the display indicating the time [for example, "00:00" etc.]. It is a structured production,
In the second timer effect, the second timer display is the second after the display of the second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 and the like shown in FIG. 325 (5)] is started. A second effect [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 325 (8)] is started in response to the display indicating the time [for example, "00:00" etc.]. It is a production that is configured to be in some cases,
During the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, the period during which the first timer display is displayed [for example, the period shown in FIGS. 325 (3) to (12)] and the second timer display are displayed. The period in which the displayed periods [for example, the period shown in FIGS. 325 (5) to (7)] overlap (hereinafter, in the first period [for example, in FIG. 325 (5) to (7)) The period shown] ”) may occur,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to excite a certain decorative symbol variation display effect by performing the timer effect in an overlapping manner.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of timer effects, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the plurality of types of timer effects. Further, the effect means may always execute a plurality of types of timer effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of timer effects.

Further, in the first timer effect, only the first effect may be started in response to the first timer display being set to the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured as such, or other than the first effect depending on the first timer display being set to the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured so that the production may also be started. In addition, the first timer effect is such that the first effect is always started when the first timer display becomes the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured, or the first effect may not be started in response to the first timer display being set to the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured to be.

Further, in the first timer effect, the first effect may be started only when the first timer display becomes the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured to be, or it may be the first depending on anything other than the first timer display being the first time after the first timer display is started. It may be configured so that the production of the above may be started.

Further, in the first timer effect, the first effect may be started only after the display of the first timer display is started, in response to the first timer display becoming the first time. It may be configured as such, or the first effect is given according to the first timer display becoming the first time even after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured to be started.

Further, in the second timer effect, only the second effect may be started in response to the second timer display being set to the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured to be, or other than the second effect depending on the second timer display being set to the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured so that the production may also be started. In addition, the second timer effect is such that the second effect is always started when the second timer display becomes the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured, or the second effect may not be started in response to the second timer display being set to the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured to be.

Further, in the second timer effect, the second effect may be started only when the second timer display becomes the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured to be, or it may be second depending on anything other than the second timer display being set to the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured so that the production of the above may be started.

Further, in the second timer effect, the second effect may be started only after the display of the second timer display is started, in response to the second timer display becoming the second time. It may be configured as such, or a second effect may be produced according to the second timer display being set to the second time even after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured to be started.

Further, it may be configured so that only the first period may occur during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, a period other than the first period. May also occur. Further, it may be configured so that the first period always occurs during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first period may not occur during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

Further, the first period may be configured so that the first period may occur only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first period may occur even when the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display is not displayed. It may be configured to occur.

In addition, "at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a look-ahead notice [[. For example, as shown in FIGS. 325 (5) to (8), of the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer advance notice effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12, the second timer advance notice display TM12 The timer notice effect related to is an effect executed as a look-ahead notice that changes the display mode of the hold icon to the look-ahead notice display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by using the timer effect as a look-ahead notice, it may be possible to excite the effect of a certain decorative symbol variation display.

Here, it may be configured so that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed only as a look-ahead notice. However, it is configured so that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as something other than the look-ahead notice. May be good. Further, at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be configured to be executed as a look-ahead notice without fail. It may be configured so that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed during the period of is not executed as a look-ahead notice.

Further, it may be configured so that only at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a look-ahead notice. , An effect other than at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a look-ahead notice. ..

Further, the timer effect of either the first timer effect or the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a look-ahead notice, or the first timer effect may be executed. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed during the period may be configured to be executed as a look-ahead notice.

Further, "one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is executed as a look-ahead notice. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 325 (3) to (13), of the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer advance notice effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12, the first 1 The timer notice effect on the timer notice display TM11 is an effect for executing a pseudo-continuous effect which is a notice of the symbol variation display, and the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 is a display mode of the hold icon. It is a production to execute the change production of
Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 326 (24). ) ~ As shown in FIG. 327 (37), of the timer advance notice effect on the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the timer advance notice effect on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14, the timer advance notice effect on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is , It is an effect for executing the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a notice effect, and the timer advance effect related to the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 is an effect for executing the Sabohani group notice as a notice effect, etc. ],
There is a case where both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period are executed as pre-reading notices (hereinafter, referred to as "first case") [for example, "first case"). As shown in FIGS. 328 (3) to 328 (13), of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer advance notice effect on the second timer advance notice display TM12, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. The timer advance notice effect is an effect for executing a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, and the timer advance notice effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12 is an effect executed to start the look-ahead mode. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect that the effect started later targets the same decorative symbol variation display as the object of the effect started earlier.

Here, when one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is executed only as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is executed only as a look-ahead notice. There may be, or one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as something other than a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other may be read ahead. It may be executed as something other than a notice. Further, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be always executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other may be always executed as a look-ahead notice. However, in some cases, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is not executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is not executed as a look-ahead notice. May be good.

Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed only as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first one. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the period may be executed as other than the notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display. Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or may be executed in the first period. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect of the above may not be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display.

Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed only as a look-ahead notice, or the first timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect may be executed as something other than the look-ahead notice. Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a look-ahead notice, or the first timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed. And both of the second timer effect may not be executed as a look-ahead notice.

Further, "in the first case, the first effect [for example, the look-ahead mode shown in FIG. 328 (6)] may be started during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. Has been
In the first case, the decorative symbol started after the certain decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display executed in the period shown in FIGS. 328 (2) to (10)]. The first decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first decorative symbol variation display [for example, decorative symbol variation display executed during the period shown in FIGS. 328 (11) to (18)]") is displayed. The second effect [for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 328 (13)] may be started.
In the first case, the first timer effect [for example, the timer advance effect on the second timer advance display TM12 shown in FIGS. 328 (3) to (5)] and the second timer effect [ For example, the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 shown in FIGS. 328 (3) to 328 (13)] is the same decorative symbol variation display started after the first decorative symbol variation display [ For example, it is an effect executed as a look-ahead notice for [decorative symbol variation display, etc. executed during the period shown in FIGS. 329 (19) to (29)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect the first decorative symbol variation display as a look-ahead notice while enlivening a certain decorative symbol variation display by a timer effect.

Here, in the first case, it may be configured so that only the first effect may be started during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, and in the first case, a certain decorative symbol may be started. It may be configured so that an effect other than the first effect may be started during the display of the variable display. Further, in the first case, the first effect may be configured so as to always start during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, and in the first case, the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that the first effect may not be started during the process.

Further, in the first case, the first effect may be started only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or in the first case, a certain decorative symbol variation may be started. It may be configured so that the first effect may be started other than during the display of the display. Further, only in the first case, the first effect may be started during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or in a case other than the first case, or The first effect may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, in the first case, only the second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, and in the first case, the first decoration may be started. It may be configured so that an effect other than the second effect may be started during the display of the symbol variation display. Further, in the first case, the second effect may be always started during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, and in the first case, the first decorative symbol variation display may be started. It may be configured so that the second effect may not be started during the display of.

Further, in the first case, the second effect may be started only during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, and in the first case, the first decoration may be started. It may be configured so that the second effect may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Further, only in the first case, the second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, and in cases other than the first case, the second effect may be started. It may be configured so that the second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display.

Further, in the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are executed only as a look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variation display that is started after the first decorative symbol variation display. It may be one, or it may be executed as something other than the look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variation display started after the first decorative symbol variation display. Further, in the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are always executed as a look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variation display that is started after the first decorative symbol variation display. It may be one, or it may not be executed as a look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variation display started after the first decorative symbol variation display.

Further, "In the first case, at least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes [for example, FIGS. 328 (3) to 3). A certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance display TM11 shown in FIG. (13) is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the panda, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since one of the effects is a pending change, it may be expected that the other effect will be performed on the decorative symbol variation display that is the target of the pending change.

Here, in the first case, one of the first effect and the second effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, and in the first case, the first effect. The effect of both the first effect and the second effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes.

It should be noted that a look-ahead notice other than the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon may be given.

Further, "The first effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 334 (9)].
The second effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 334 (6)].
The hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may be further changed by the other effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 334 (9), the first effect. 1 Timer notice display As a result of the timer notice effect related to TM11, as a certain effect, an effect of changing the hold icon of the panda display mode to the display mode of the panda is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to boost the rank-up of the hold icon in multiple stages by a timer effect.

Here, the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first and second effects may be further changed only by the other effect, or the first and second effects may be further changed. The hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the effects may be further changed by an effect other than the other effect. Further, the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first and second effects may be changed by the other effect, or the first and second effects may be changed. The hold icon whose display mode has changed due to one effect may not change due to the other effect.

Further, only the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may be further changed by the other effect, and of the first effect and the second effect. Items other than the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the effects may be further changed by the other effect. Further, the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by only one of the first and second effects may be further changed by the other effect, and of the first and second effects. The hold icon whose display mode has been changed by an effect other than one effect may be further changed by the other effect.

In addition, "the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and the timing related to the second timer effect being executed in the first period. It is configured so that the timing at which the second effect is started may be different [for example, as shown in FIGS. 325 (5) to (13), the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11. The timing at which the pseudo-continuous effect executed by the second timer advance effect is started and the timing at which the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon executed by the timer advance effect on the second timer advance display TM12 is started are different, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there are cases where variations are given to the start timing of the effect related to the timer effect.

Here, the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started and the second effect related to the second timer effect being executed in the first period are started. It may be configured so that only the timing to be performed may be different, or the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started and the timing at which the first effect is executed are executed in the first period. The timing other than the timing at which the second effect related to the second timer effect in the medium is started may be different. In addition, the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started and the second effect related to the second timer effect being executed in the first period are started. The timing may be configured to be different, and the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started and the second effect being executed in the first period are started. It may be configured so that the timing at which the second effect related to the timer effect of the above is started may be the same.

Further, "as the first effect, the first notice icon [for example, the swordsman character KNG shown in FIG. 330 (10)] may be displayed [for example, FIG. 330 (3). )-As shown in FIG. (10) (FIGS. 332 (3) to (10)), as a result of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11, the swordsman character KNG is used as a certain effect. Is displayed, etc.],
When the first timer effect [for example, the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance display TM11 shown in FIGS. 332 (3) to 332 (10)] is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display. Is after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 332 (2) to 333 (24)]. Then, during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon [for example, the effect of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 333 (20) to (22)] is performed. It is configured to get started and
When the first timer effect [for example, the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11 shown in FIGS. 330 (3) to (10)] is executed as a look-ahead advance, the certain decorative symbol is executed. After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the variable display [for example, the decorative symbol variable display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 330 (2) to 18]], the certain decorative symbol is displayed. In response to the first notice icon during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 331 (19) to (29)] that is started after the variation display. The effect [for example, the effect of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 331 (25) to (27)] is configured to start.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to pay attention to whether the notice icon displayed as the first effect is performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice.

Also, if the second effect is started first, the advance notice effect according to the first notice icon is the same as the second effect, depending on whether the second effect is a notice or a look-ahead notice. In some cases, it can be expected to start with a decorative symbol variation display.

Here, it may be configured so that only the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect, or something other than the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect. It may be configured as follows. Further, the first notice icon may be configured to be always displayed as the first effect, or the first notice icon may not be displayed as the first effect.

Further, the first notice icon may be displayed only as the first effect, or the first notice icon may be displayed as an effect other than the first effect. It may be configured as follows.

Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol variation is performed after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that only the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or After the first notice icon is displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, an effect other than the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started while a certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed. May be done. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol variation is performed after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is always started during the display of the display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or After the first notice icon is displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon may not be started while a certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed. You may.

Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol variation is performed after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started only during the display of the display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or After the first notice icon is displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started in addition to the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. You may. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol is displayed only after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started during the display of the variable display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display, or In addition to after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. You may.

Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, it is started after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display and after a certain decorative symbol variation display. A decoration may be configured so that only the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, a certain decoration is used. Other than the effect corresponding to the first notice icon during the display of the decorative symbol variation display that starts after a certain decorative symbol variation display after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the symbol variation display. The production may also be configured to start. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, it is started after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display and after a certain decorative symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be always started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, a certain decoration is used. After the first notice icon is displayed while the symbol variation display is displayed, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon starts during the display of the decorative symbol variation display that starts after a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it may not be done.

Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, it is started after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display and after a certain decorative symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started only during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, a certain decoration may be started. After the first notice icon is displayed while the symbol variation display is displayed, the effect according to the first notice icon other than during the display of the decorative symbol variation display that starts after a certain decorative symbol variation display. May be configured to start. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, it starts after the certain decorative symbol variation display only after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, a certain decoration is performed. In addition to after the first notice icon is displayed while the symbol variation display is displayed, the effect according to the first notice icon during the display of the decorative symbol variation display that starts after a certain decorative symbol variation display. May be configured to start.

In addition, "It is configured so that a second notice icon may be displayed as the second effect.
When the second timer effect is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display, the certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed after the second notice icon is displayed. It is configured so that the effect corresponding to the second notice icon is started while the decorative pattern variation display is displayed.
When the second timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, after the second notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display, and after the certain decorative symbol variation display. It is configured so that the effect corresponding to the second notice icon is started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display to be started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
May be.

Further, when either the first effect or the second effect is a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display and the other is a look-ahead notice, the notice icon displayed as the first effect and the second effect The notice icon displayed as an effect may be the same notice icon.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of mini games,
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is the first mini-game [for example, the treasure chest mini-game shown in FIGS. 335 (15) to 18].
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game [for example, a dice mini-game shown in FIGS. 335 (7) to (10)].
In the first mini-game, the first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 335 (3)] becomes the first time [for example, "00:00" etc.]. It is a mini-game from which the result is derived before [For example, in the mini-game of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 335 (15) to (18), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 is "00:00". Results have been derived before],
In the second mini-game, the second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 or the like shown in FIG. 335 (5)] becomes the second time [for example, "00:00" or the like]. It is a mini-game from which the result is derived before [For example, in the mini-game of the dice shown in FIGS. 335 (7) to (10), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is "00:00". Results have been derived before],
The first effect is configured to be an effect according to the result of the first mini-game [for example, the result of the treasure box mini-game shown in FIGS. 335 (15) to (18) is successful. If the result is, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 336 (21) is executed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11],
The second effect is configured to be an effect according to the result of the second mini-game [for example, the result of the dice mini-game shown in FIGS. 335 (7) to (10) is successful. In the case of the result of, the effect of changing the hold icon shown in FIG. 335 (12) to the display mode of the bancho is executed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect applied to the second timer advance display TM12. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible not only to wait for the timer display time, but also to pay attention to the result of the mini game during that time.

Here, only a plurality of types of mini-games may be executable, or other than the plurality of types of mini-games may be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of mini-games, or may be configured to not execute a plurality of types of mini-games.

Further, in the first mini-game, only the result may be derived before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. Other than the result may be derived. Further, in the first mini-game, the result may be always derived before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. The result may not be derived in some cases.

Further, in the first mini-game, the result may be derived only before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. In addition to this, the result may be derived.

Further, in the second mini-game, only the result may be derived before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. Other than the result may be derived. Further, in the second mini-game, the result may be always derived before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. The result may not be derived in some cases.

Further, in the second mini-game, the result may be derived only before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. In addition to this, the result may be derived.

Further, the first effect may be configured to be an effect according to only the result of the first mini-game, or the first effect may be an effect according to a result other than the result of the first mini-game. It may be configured to be. Further, the first effect may be configured to be an effect that always corresponds to the result of the first mini-game, or the first effect may not be an effect that corresponds to the result of the first mini-game. It may be configured to be.

Further, the second effect may be configured to be an effect according only to the result of the second mini-game, or the second effect may be an effect according to a result other than the result of the second mini-game. It may be configured to be. In addition, the second effect may be configured to be an effect that always corresponds to the result of the second mini-game, or the second effect may not be an effect that corresponds to the result of the second mini-game. It may be configured to be.

The type of the mini-game may be the same for the first timer effect and the second timer effect, or may be different. Further, it may be configured so that the start order and the type of the mini-game are associated with each other.

Further, it may be configured to suggest the first effect or the second effect during the execution of the mini-game. For example, when the mini-game is successful, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. It may be possible to perform an effect such that is suggested.

Further, "When the result of the first mini-game is the first result, the first effect is performed in the first mode [for example, FIGS. 335 (15) to FIG. If the result of the treasure chest mini-game shown in (18) is a successful result, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 336 (21) is performed as a result of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11. It is executed as a production, etc.],
When the result of the first mini-game is the third result, the first effect is configured to be performed in the third aspect [for example, FIGS. 337 (15) to (18). If the result of the treasure chest mini-game shown in (1) is a failure result, the loss effect shown in FIG. 338 (20) is performed as a result of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11. Will be executed, etc.],
When the result of the second mini-game is the second result, the second effect is configured to be performed in the second aspect [for example, FIGS. 335 (7) to (10). When the result of the dice mini-game shown in FIG. 335 (12) is a successful result, the effect of changing the hold icon shown in FIG. 335 (12) to the display mode of the bancho is the effect of the timer advance effect on the second timer advance display TM12. Performed as a resulting production, etc.],
When the result of the second mini-game is the fourth result, the second effect is configured to be performed in the fourth aspect [for example, FIGS. 337 (7) to (10)). If the result of the dice mini-game shown in FIG. 337 is a failure result, the effect of changing the hold icon shown in FIG. 337 (12) to the display mode of the panda is the effect of the timer advance effect on the second timer advance display TM12. Performed as a resulting production, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, there are cases where the variation of the production by the combination of the mini game and the timer production is increased and the interest can be enhanced.

Here, when the result of the first mini-game is the first result, the first effect may be configured to be performed only in the first aspect, or the result of the first mini-game may be the first. The first effect may be configured to be performed in an aspect other than the first aspect when one result is obtained. Further, when the result of the first mini-game is the first result, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the first aspect without fail, or the result of the first mini-game may be the first. The first effect may not be performed in the first aspect when the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the first mini-game is the first result, only the first effect may be performed in the first aspect, or the result of the first mini-game may be the first. When the result is the above, the production other than the first production may be configured to be performed in the first mode. Further, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the first mode only when the result of the first mini game is the first result, or the result of the first mini game is the first. The first effect may be configured to be performed in the first aspect even in cases other than the case where the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the first mini-game is the third result, the first effect may be configured to be performed only in the third aspect, or the result of the first mini-game may be the third. The first effect may be configured to be performed in an aspect other than the third aspect when the result of the above is obtained. Further, when the result of the first mini-game is the third result, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the third aspect without fail, or the result of the first mini-game may be the third. The first effect may not be performed in the third aspect when the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the first mini-game is the third result, only the first effect may be performed in the third aspect, or the result of the first mini-game may be the third. When the result is the above, the production other than the first production may be configured to be performed in the third mode. Further, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the third mode only when the result of the first mini game is the third result, or the result of the first mini game is the third. The first effect may be configured to be performed in the third aspect even in cases other than the case where the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the second result, the second effect may be configured to be performed only in the second aspect, or the result of the second mini-game may be the second. The second effect may be configured to be performed in a mode other than the second mode when the result of the above is obtained. Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the second result, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second aspect without fail, or the result of the second mini-game may be the second. The second effect may not be performed in the second aspect when the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the second result, only the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second aspect, or the result of the second mini-game may be the second. If the result of the above is obtained, an effect other than the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second aspect. Further, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode only when the result of the second mini game is the second result, or the result of the second mini game is the second. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the second aspect even in cases other than the case where the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the fourth result, the second effect may be configured to be performed only in the fourth aspect, or the result of the second mini-game may be the fourth result. The second effect may be configured to be performed in an aspect other than the fourth aspect when the result of the above is obtained. Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the fourth result, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect without fail, or the result of the second mini-game may be the fourth result. The second effect may not be performed in the fourth aspect when the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the fourth result, only the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect, or the result of the second mini-game may be the fourth result. If the result of the above is obtained, an effect other than the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect. Further, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect only when the result of the second mini-game is the fourth result, or the result of the second mini-game may be the fourth. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect even in cases other than the case where the result of the above is obtained.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a third mini-game.
When the result of the third mini-game is the fifth result, the third effect is configured to be performed in the fifth mode.
When the result of the third mini-game is the sixth result, the third effect is configured to be performed in the sixth aspect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
May be.

Further, the time display [for example, "10:00" etc.] of the "first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 etc. shown in FIG. 341 (3)] is the first time. It is a display showing the time until [for example, 10 seconds, etc.].
The time display of the first timer display is configured to be changed before the first time is reached [for example, the th-order displayed as "10:00" in FIG. 341 (3). 1 As shown in FIGS. 341 (12) to 341 (13), the timer display TM11 has the time shown in the timer display added before it reaches “0:00”],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there is a case where the player can have expectations by functioning as an effect of changing the mode of the first timer effect.

Here, the time display of the first timer display may indicate only the time until the first time is reached, or may indicate the time other than the time until the first time is reached. You may. Further, the time display of the first timer display may always indicate the time until the first time is reached, or may not indicate the time until the first time is reached. You may.

Further, the time display of the first timer display may be changed only before the first time, or the time display of the first timer display becomes the first time. It may be configured so that it may be changed other than before. Further, the time display of the first timer display may be configured to be changed before the first time, or the time display of the first timer display may be changed before the first time. It may be configured so that it may not be done.

Further, only the time display of the first timer display may be changed before the first time, and the time display other than the time display of the first timer display is also the first. It may be configured to be changed before the time of.

Further, "The time display of the second timer display is a display indicating the time until the second time is reached.
The time display of the second timer display is configured to be changed before the second time.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there is a case where the player can have expectations by functioning as an effect of changing the mode of the second timer effect.

Here, the time display of the second timer display may indicate only the time until the second time is reached, or may indicate the time other than the time until the second time is reached. You may. Further, the time display of the second timer display may always indicate the time until the second time is reached, or may not indicate the time until the second time is reached. You may.

Further, the time display of the second timer display may be changed only before the second time, or the time display of the second timer display becomes the second time. It may be configured so that it may be changed other than before. Further, the time display of the second timer display may be configured to be changed before the second time, or the time display of the second timer display may be changed before the second time. It may be configured so that it may not be done.

Further, only the time display of the second timer display may be changed before the second time, and the time display other than the time display of the second timer display is also the second. It may be configured to be changed before the time of.

Further, during the display of "the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 325 (2) to 326 (22)], the first timer display [for example, FIG. The first timer notice display TM11 and the like shown in 325 (3)] may be set to the first time [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 325 (3) is the same. "00:00" is displayed at the timing shown in Fig. (12)],
The second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 325 (5)] may be set to the second time during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. [For example, in the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 325 (5), "00:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (7), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the first timer display may be the first time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The display other than the timer display of is also configured to be the first time. Further, the first timer display may be configured to always be the first time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first timer display may be set during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it may not be the first time.

Further, the first timer display may be set to the first time only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first timer display may be set to the first time only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. One timer display may be configured to be the first time.

Further, it may be configured so that only the second timer display may be the second time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the second time may be set during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The display other than the timer display may be configured to be the second time. Further, the second timer display may be configured to always be the second time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the second timer display may be set during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it may not be the second time.

Further, the second timer display may be configured to be the second time only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the second timer display may be set to a second time other than during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The second timer display may be configured to be the second time.

Further, "The timing at which the display of the first timer display is started and the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started may be different. [For example, the first timer notice display TM11 is shown in FIG. 325 (3). ), And the second timer notice display TM12 is started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (5), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the start timing of the timer display is diversified, so that it may be possible to enhance the interest.

Here, only the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started and the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started may differ, or the display of the first timer display is started. The timing may be different from the timing other than the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started. Further, the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started and the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started may always be different, and the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started and the second timing are started. The timing at which the timer display of is started may be the same.

Further, "The time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started [for example, the time display may be different. As shown in FIG. 325 (3), the first timer notice display TM11 displays "10:00" when the display is started, and the second timer notice display TM12 is shown in FIG. 325 (5). As shown, "03:00" is displayed when the display is started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the time displayed when the timer display is started is diversified, so that it may be possible to enhance the interest.

Here, only the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be different. , The time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display other than the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be different. .. Further, the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may always be different, and the first time display may be different. The time display displayed when the display of the timer display is started may be the same as the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started.

In addition, "the first time and the second time are the same time [for example," 00:00 "and the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the start timing of the production may be easily recognized.

The first time and the second time may be different times.

Also, "The first time is 0,
The second time is 0,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to more easily grasp the start timing of the production.

The first time may be other than 0. Moreover, the second time may be other than 0.

In addition, it is configured to be able to display "ball removal error display [for example, ball removal error display shown in FIG. 345 (9")].
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a plate full tank error state [for example, as shown in FIG. 345 (9 ″), when a lower plate full tank error occurs, a ball removal error occurs. Display is displayed, etc.],
The display of at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may overlap with the ball removal error display [for example, FIG. 345 (9 ″). As shown in, the ball removal error display overlaps the front side of the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timer display may speed up the ball removal operation.

Here, only the ball removal error display may be configured to be displayable, or a display other than the ball removal error display may be displayable. Further, the ball removal error display may be configured to be displayed without fail, or the ball removal error display may not be displayed.

Further, the ball removal error display may be displayed only in the dish full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the dish full tank error state. Further, the ball removal error display may be always displayed in the dish full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the dish full tank error state.

Further, at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to overlap only with the ball removal error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped with each other. The display of at least one of the two timer displays may be configured to overlap with a display other than the ball removal error display. Further, at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to always overlap the ball removal error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped with each other. The display may be configured so that at least one of the displays may not overlap the ball removal error display.

Further, only one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to overlap with the ball removal error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped. Both of the timer displays of the above may be configured to overlap the ball removal error display.

In addition, "The effect means is a display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Timer effect [for example, timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17)] can be executed with an effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.].
A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays.
In the timer effect, when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, a strong Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 358 (17)] is performed. It is an effect configured to be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17), the timer display is set to "00:00" after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. , The strong Sabohani group notice will start, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3), and FIG. Pre-reading notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in F20)].
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 357 (3), and FIG. 367 (F9). ), The look-ahead notice (the change notice), etc. by the hold icon of the red hold display mode].
The first notice display is a kind of notice display [for example, a notice display due to the display of the character of the lord, or a notice display due to a change in the color of the hold icon displayed in a circle. Etc.] is a notice display that is displayed as a notice by including [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), a hold icon (variable icon) of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold that includes the character of the lord. ) Foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F20), a red timer hold display composed of a round red display. The hold icon (variable icon) of the mode foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The second notice display is a notice display displayed as a notice by including the display of the certain type of notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 357 (3), it is configured to include a character of the lord. The hold icon (variable icon) of the Yoshimune hold display mode foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F9), it is round and red. The hold icon (variable icon) in the red hold display mode, which includes the display of, foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The first notice display is a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started (hereinafter, "first display [for example, hold of the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3))". It is a notice display including the display of the bomb included in the icon and the display of the fuse included in the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F20)] ”.
The second notice display is a notice display that does not include the first notice.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, even if the expectation of the big hit is the same, the expectation may be amplified at the start of the timer effect.

Further, according to this game console, it may be possible to anticipate and entertain the effect to be executed as the timer effect is executed.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , It may be configured so that a certain effect is started even in a case other than the case where the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display, or may not display the first notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display, or may not display the second notice display.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be other than the notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as a thing. Further, the first notice display may always be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may not be done.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a display of a certain type of notice, or may include a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain type of notice display. It may be something that may be done.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed other than the notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as a thing. Further, the second notice display may always be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may not be done.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a display of a certain type of notice, or may include a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain type of notice display. It may be something that may be done.

Here, the "notice" is a concept including both "the change notice" and "look-ahead notice".

Further, the first display may only suggest that the timer effect may be started, or may indicate that there is a case other than the case where the timer effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always suggest that the timer effect may be started, or may not suggest that the timer effect may be started. May be good.

The first display may indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may indicate something other than the timer effect (always) being started. Good. Further, the first display may always suggest that the timer effect is (always) started, or may not suggest that the timer effect is (always) started. May be good.

Further, the first notice display may include only the first display, or may include a display other than the first display. Further, the first notice display may always include the first display, or may not include the first display.

Further, the second notice display may not include only the first display, or may not include a display other than the first display. Further, the second notice display may not always include the first display, or may include the first display.

The display mode of the first display included in the first notice display and the display mode of the first display included in the second notice display may be the same or different. That is, if the function as the first display is common, it is included in the present invention. Further, the function may be different between the first display included in the first notice display and the first display included in the second notice display.

In addition, "The display of a certain type of notice is a display of a notice by an icon.
The icon is a hold icon or a variable icon.
The first notice display is a notice display including the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), Yoshimune. The hold icon (variable icon) of the bomb hold display mode is configured by adding the bomb display to the character of the lord, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the hold icon and the variable icon may be easy for the player to understand because it is easy to identify the symbol variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice.

Here, the first notice display may be configured to include only the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon, or may correspond to the icon and the icon. It may be configured to include a display other than the first display to be displayed. Further, the first notice display may be configured to always include the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon, or the icon and the display corresponding to the icon. It may be configured not to include the first indication to be made.

The icon may be a notice icon other than the hold icon and the variable icon.

In addition, a look-ahead notice may be given by a variable icon. That is, whether or not there is a hold of the symbol change display at the time when the display is started regardless of whether the hold icon or the change icon displays a certain type of notice (whether there is 1 or more hold or 0). ), So it is possible to think that the display of a certain kind of notice by the variable icon is a look-ahead notice. For example, in general, when the display of a certain type of notice in the first notice display is a hold icon, it is a look-ahead notice, and in the case of a variable icon, it is often the change notice. In the case where the hold is 0, if the start prize is won, the look-ahead may be performed before the winning / failing judgment is made, and as a result, a certain kind of notice may be displayed by the variable icon. Then, it may be said that it functions as a look-ahead notice instead of the change notice.

Further, "The first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are integrally displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold". The hold icon (variable icon) is a display mode in which a bomb display is integrally added to the character of the lord, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to understand whether or not the display is for performing a timer effect.

In addition, according to this game console, it may be easy to understand the symbol variation display that is the target variation of the notice.

Here, the first notice display may be a display in which only the icon and the first display are integrated, or the icon, the first display, and other displays are also displayed in an integrated manner. It may be the one that has been done. Further, the first notice display may be one in which the icon and the first display are always integrated and displayed, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed in an integrated manner. May be good.

Further, "The first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are displayed separately. [For example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 363 (B7') is above the character of the lord. The display mode is configured by arranging the bomb icon BD'on the screen, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice by the icon and the notice added may be easy to understand.

Here, in the first notice display, only the icon and the first display may be displayed separately, or the icon, the first display, and other displays are also displayed separately. It may be the one that has been done. Further, in the first notice display, the icon and the first display may always be displayed separately, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed separately. May be good.

In addition, "the icon is configured to be displayable in the default display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (1), the first hold icon h11 has a default display mode (round and white display). Aspects), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the notice may be easy to understand.

Here, the icon may be configured to be displayable only in the default display mode, or the icon may be configured to be displayable in a display mode other than the default display mode. Further, the icon may be configured to be always displayed in the default display mode, or may be configured so that the icon may not be displayed in the default display mode.

In addition, "the display of the certain type of notice is performed by changing the color of the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 365 (E3), the second hold icon h12 is a round and blue display mode. Pre-reading notice is given by displaying with],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the notice may be easy to understand.

Here, a certain kind of notice display may be displayed only by changing the color of the icon, or a certain kind of notice display may be displayed by a change other than the change in the color of the icon. There may be. In addition, a certain type of notice display may always be displayed due to a change in the icon color, or a certain type of notice display may not be displayed due to a change in the icon color. Good.

In addition, "The second notice display is a notice display that may include a notice display of a different type from that of the certain type of notice display [for example, the lord in the hold icon of the Yoshimune hold display mode. Characters may hold the pseudo-ren icon or Sabohani icon and give a pre-reading notice of the pseudo-ren or Sabohani group notice, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even when the second notice display is displayed, it may be possible to have expectations for something other than the timer effect.

Here, the second notice display may include only the display of a different type of notice from the display of a certain type of notice, or may be different from the display of a certain type of notice. It may include a display other than the display of the type of notice. Further, the second notice display may always include a display of a different type of notice from the display of a certain type of notice, or a notice of a type different from the display of a certain type of notice. It may not include the indication of.

Further, "The display of the certain type of notice is a display configured to be displayable in one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the round and blue display aspect shown in FIG. 367 (F9)].
One of the plurality of embodiments is a second embodiment [for example, a round red display embodiment shown in FIG. 367 (F9)].
The jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variation display when the display of the certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode than when it is displayed in the first mode. Is composed of
When the mode of displaying the certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying the certain type of notice in the second notice display are the same mode (hereinafter, "the first case [ For example, both the hold icon in the red timer hold display mode and the hold icon in the red hold display mode include a round red display, etc.] ”).
In the first case, the timer effect is configured to be more likely to be started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed. A game table featuring. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, depending on the display mode of a certain kind of notice display, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation for a big hit and also to give a feeling of expectation that a timer effect is started. ..

Here, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in one of a plurality of aspects, or may be an aspect other than one of the plurality of aspects. It may be configured to be displayable. Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in one of a plurality of aspects, or may not be displayed in one of a plurality of aspects. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the first aspect, or may be configured to be displayable in an aspect other than the first aspect. Good. Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the first aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect. There may be.

Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the second aspect, or may be configured to be displayable in an aspect other than the second aspect. Good. Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the second aspect. There may be.

In addition, when the display of a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode than in the case where the display is displayed in the first mode, it is easier to confirm and display only the jackpot symbol mode in a certain symbol variation display. In a certain symbol variation display, other than the jackpot symbol mode, when the display of a certain kind of notice is displayed in the second mode than in the case where it is displayed in the first mode. The symbol mode of the above may also be configured so as to be easily definitively displayed. In addition, when the display of a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode than when it is displayed in the first mode, the jackpot symbol mode is always more likely to be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variation display. In a certain symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be displayed in the second mode than in the case where the display of a certain type of notice is displayed in the first mode. It may be configured so that it may not be easily confirmed.

Further, it is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode only in a certain symbol variation display when the display of a certain kind of notice is displayed in the second mode than when it is displayed in the first mode. When the display of a certain kind of notice is displayed in the second aspect than when it is displayed in the first aspect, the symbol variation display other than the certain symbol variation display is displayed. Also, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed in a definite manner.

In addition, it is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode in a certain symbol variation display only when the display of a certain kind of notice is displayed in the second mode than when it is displayed in the first mode. In a certain symbol variation display, even when the display of a certain kind of notice is displayed in a second aspect rather than in the first aspect, the jackpot symbol aspect may be configured. May be configured so that is easily displayed.

Further, when the display of a certain kind of notice is displayed in the second mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured to be surely displayed in a certain symbol variation display. Further, when a certain kind of notice display is displayed in the first aspect, the jackpot symbol may not always be fixedly displayed in a certain symbol variation display.

Further, it may be configured so that there is a case where the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display are the same mode. , The mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display may be configured to be other than the same mode. .. Further, it may be configured so that the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display may always be the same mode. , The mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display may not be the same mode may be configured. ..

Further, in the first case, it may be configured so that only the timer effect is more likely to be started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed. In the first case, it may be configured so that the effect other than the timer effect is more likely to be started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed. Further, in the first case, it may be configured so that the timer effect is always started more easily when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed. In the first case, it may be configured so that the timer effect may be more difficult to start when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed.

Only in the first case, it may be configured so that the timer effect is more likely to be started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed. Even in cases other than the above case, the timer effect may be configured so that the timer effect is more likely to be started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed.

Further, in the first case, when the first notice display is displayed, the timer effect may be configured to always start. Further, in the first case, when the second notice display is displayed, the timer effect may not always be started.

In addition, "after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change to the first notice display [for example, in FIGS. 363 (B3) to (B7). As shown, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed from the display mode of Yoshimune hold to the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even when the second notice display is displayed, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the first notice display will be changed.

Here, after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change only to the first notice display, or after the second notice display is displayed, The second notice display may change to a display other than the first notice display. Further, after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may be changed to the first notice display without fail, and after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may be changed. The display may not change to the first notice display.

In addition, the second notice display may change to the first notice display only after the second notice display is displayed, and even after the second notice display is displayed. The second notice display may change to the first notice display.

Further, "The display means is a change effect display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIGS. 363 (B4) to (B5) or a display of a roulette effect shown in FIGS. 365 (E9) to 366 (E13). It is a means capable of displaying the Yoshimune Kankan game shown in FIGS. 367 (F9) to (F18), the pending change animation, etc.].
If the change effect display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change to the first notice display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the change effect display may give a feeling of expectation that the second notice display changes to the first notice display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the change effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the change effect display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the change effect display, or may not display the change effect display.

Further, if the change effect display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change only to the first notice display, or the second notice display may be displayed. If the change effect display is displayed after is displayed, the second notice display may change to a display other than the first notice display. Further, when the change effect display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may be changed to the first notice display without fail, or the second notice display is displayed. If the change effect display is displayed after that, the second notice display may not change to the first notice display.

In addition, the second notice display may change to the first notice display only when the change effect display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, or the second notice may be changed. In cases other than the case where the change effect display is displayed after the display is displayed, the second notice display may change to the first notice display.

In addition, the display mode of the hold icon of the target may be changed by the change effect display or the like in the hold icon of the hold different from the hold of the target.

In addition, "the change effect display is a display including a mini game [for example, a display of a Yoshimune cancan game shown in FIGS. 367 (F9) to (F18)].
When the first result [for example, the display result in which the dice roll is "5"] is derived as a result of the mini-game, the second notice display becomes the first notice display. Configured to change,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the first notice display will be changed by playing a mini game.

Here, the change effect display may include only the mini-game, or may include a display other than the mini-game. Further, the change effect display may always include a mini-game, or may not include a mini-game.

Further, when the first result is derived as a result of the mini-game being played, the second notice display may be configured to change only to the first notice display, or the mini-game may be played. As a result, when the first result is derived, the second notice display may be changed to a display other than the first notice display. Further, when the first result is derived as a result of the mini-game being played, the second notice display may be configured to always change to the first notice display, or the mini-game may be played. As a result, when the first result is derived, the second notice display may not change to the first notice display.

Further, the second notice display may be changed to the first notice display only when the first result is derived as a result of the mini game being played, or the mini game may be played. The second notice display may be changed to the first notice display even in cases other than the case where the first result is derived as a result.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying the selection effect display [for example, the display of the roulette effect shown in FIGS. 365 (E9) to 366 (E13)].
The selection effect display is a display of an effect in which one of a plurality of options is selected.
One of the plurality of options may include a first option [for example, a timer notice icon shown in FIG. 365 (E9)].
The selection effect display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display [for example, as shown in FIG. 365 (E9), the first hold icon h11 is being displayed in the blue hold display mode. The display of roulette effect has started, etc.],
When the first option is selected as a result of displaying the selection effect display, the second notice display is configured to change to the first notice display [for example, FIG. 366 (Fig. 366). As shown in E13) to the figure (E14), when the timer notice icon is derived and displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the first hold icon h11 displays the blue timer hold from the blue hold display mode. Change to mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the first option is selected in the selection effect display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the selected effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the selected effect display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the selection effect display, or may not display the selection effect display.

In addition, one of the plurality of options may include only the first option, and one of the plurality of options may include options other than the first option. May be good. Further, one of the plurality of options may always include the first option, or one of the plurality of options may not include the first option.

In addition, only the selected effect display may be displayed while the second notice display is displayed, or a display other than the selected effect display may be displayed while the second notice display is displayed. May be good. Further, the selection effect display may always be displayed during the display of the second notice display, or the selection effect display may not be displayed during the display of the second notice display.

In addition, the selection effect display may be displayed only while the second notice display is displayed, or the selection effect display may be displayed while the display other than the second notice display is displayed. You may.

In addition, "one of the plurality of options may include a second option [for example, the icon of Sabohani shown in FIG. 365 (E9)].
When the second option is selected as a result of displaying the selection effect display, the display mode of the second notice display is configured to change to another display mode [for example, FIG. 366 (Fig. 366). As shown in E13a) to FIG. 6 (E14a), when the Sabohani icon is derived and displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the first hold icon h11 changes from the blue hold display mode to the Sabohani display mode. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation for the second notice display itself.

Here, one of the plurality of options may include only the second option, and one of the plurality of options may include options other than the second option. You may. Further, one of the plurality of options may always include the second option, and one of the plurality of options may not include the second option.

Further, when the second option is selected as a result of displaying the selection effect display, the display mode of the second notice display may be configured to change only to another display mode, or the selection effect display may be configured. Is displayed, and when the second option is selected, the display mode of the second notice display may be changed to a display mode other than the other display mode. Further, when the second option is selected as a result of displaying the selection effect display, the display mode of the second notice display may be configured to always change to another display mode, or the selection effect display may be configured. Is displayed, and when the second option is selected, the display mode of the second notice display may not be changed to another display mode.

Further, when only the second option is selected as a result of displaying the selected effect display, the display mode of the second notice display may be configured to change to another display mode, or the selected effect display Is displayed, even if an option other than the second option is selected, the display mode of the second notice display may be changed to another display mode.

Further, "the display of the certain type of notice is a display by a character [for example, a display by a character of the lord shown in FIG.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the decorative effect may be improved.

Here, the display of a certain type of notice may be a display made only by characters, or the display of a certain type of notice may be a display including a display other than the character. Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be a display that always includes a character, or the display of a certain type of notice may be a display that does not include a character.

In addition, "The first display is a display suggesting that the timer effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 358 (3) to (9), the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold". The hold icon suggests that the timer notice effect will start due to the inclusion of the bomb display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the first display may further increase the expectation that the timer effect will be started.

Here, the first display may only suggest that the timer effect is started, or may also suggest something other than the start of the timer effect. Further, the first display may always suggest that the timer effect is started, or may not suggest that the timer effect is started.

In addition, in the above description,
"Timer effect [for example, timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17)] can be executed with an effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.].
A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays.
In the timer effect, when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, a strong Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 358 (17)] is performed. It is an effect configured to be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17), the timer display is set to "00:00" after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. , The strong Sabohani group notice will start, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the blue timer hold shown in FIG. 366 (E12c')]. ,
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the red timer hold display mode shown in FIG. 366 (E12c ″)]. Yes,
The first notice display is a notice displayed as a look-ahead notice by including some kind of notice display [for example, a notice display due to a change in the color of the hold icon displayed in a circle]. It is a display [for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c'), the hold icon (variable icon) of the display mode of the blue timer hold configured including the round and blue display is in the corresponding symbol variation display. Foretelling that there is a possibility of a big hit, etc.],
The second notice display is a notice display displayed as a look-ahead notice by including the display of the certain type of notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c ″), it is round and red. The hold icon (variable icon) of the red timer hold display mode, which is configured to include the display of, foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The first notice display includes a display suggesting that the timer effect is started [for example, a display of a fuse included in the hold icon of the display mode of the blue timer hold shown in FIG. 366 (E12c')]. It is a notice display,
The second notice display indicates that the timer effect is started [for example, the display of the fuse included in the hold icon of the red timer hold display mode shown in FIG. 366 (E12c ″)]. It is a notice display including
The mode of displaying the certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying the certain type of notice in the second notice display are different.
When the first notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started, the initial display of the timer display is the first time [for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c'), the hold icon is displayed. When displayed in the blue timer hold display mode, "10:00" is displayed as the initial display of the timer display, etc.],
When the second notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started, the initial display of the timer display is the second time [for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c ″), the hold icon Is displayed in the red timer hold display mode, "60:00" is displayed as the initial display of the timer display, etc.],
The first time is configured so that a longer time is more likely to be selected than the second time.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, even if the expectation of the big hit is the same, the expectation may be amplified at the start of the timer effect.

Further, according to this game console, it may be possible to anticipate and entertain the content of the effect to be executed as the timer effect is executed.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , It may be configured so that a certain effect is started even in a case other than the case where the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display, or may not display the first notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display, or may not display the second notice display.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as something other than. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may not be displayed as.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a look-ahead notice by including only a display of a certain type of notice, or may include a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be displayed as a look-ahead notice. Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a look-ahead notice by always including a certain type of notice display, or a look-ahead notice without including a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as something other than. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may not be displayed as.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a look-ahead notice by including only a display of a certain type of notice, or may include a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be displayed as a look-ahead notice. Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a look-ahead notice by always including a certain type of notice display, or a look-ahead notice without including a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as.

Further, the first notice display may include only a display suggesting that the timer effect is started, or may include a display other than the display suggesting that the timer effect is started. You may. Further, the first notice display may always include a display suggesting that the timer effect is started, or may not include a display suggesting that the timer effect is started. There may be.

The first notice display may include a display suggesting that the timer effect is (always) started.

Further, the second notice display may include only a display suggesting that the timer effect is started, or may include a display other than the display suggesting that the timer effect is started. You may. Further, the second notice display may always include a display suggesting that the timer effect is started, or may not include a display suggesting that the timer effect is started. There may be.

The second notice display may include a display suggesting that the timer effect is (always) started.

Further, only the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display may be different, or in the first notice display. The mode of displaying a certain type of notice may be different from the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display. Further, the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display may always be different, or in the first notice display. There may be cases where the mode of displaying a certain type of notice does not differ from the mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display.

When the first notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started, the initial display of the timer display may be only the first time or a time other than the first time. Further, the initial display of the timer display when the first notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started may always be the first time or may not be the first time.

When the second notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started, the initial display of the timer display may be only the second time or a time other than the second time. Further, the initial display of the timer display when the second notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started may always be the second time or may not be the second time.

In addition, only the time in which the first time is longer than the second time may be easily selected, or the time other than the time in which the first time is longer than the second time may be selected. It may be configured to be easy to select. Also, the first time may be configured to always select a longer time than the second time, or the first time may not be selected longer than the second time. It may be configured to have.

Further, "The certain effect is a notice effect [for example, a notice of a strong cut-in shown in FIG. 370 (H35)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation that a certain effect will be performed.

Here, a certain effect may include only the advance notice effect, or may include an effect other than the advance notice effect. Further, a certain effect may always include a notice effect, or may not include a notice effect.

In addition, "the above-mentioned certain effect is a chance-up effect [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 369 (H25) to (H26)].
The chance-up effect is an effect in which the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is executed than when it is not executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation for a big hit by performing a certain effect.

Here, a certain effect may include only a chance-up effect, or may include an effect other than the chance-up effect. Further, a certain effect may always include a chance-up effect, or may not include a chance-up effect.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Timer effect [for example, timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17)] can be executed with an effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.].
A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays.
The timer effect is produced when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started (hereinafter, "a certain effect [for example, the strong sabohani shown in FIG. 358 (17))". It is an effect configured to start [for example, as shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17), the first timer notice display TM11 has started to be displayed. Later, when the timer display becomes "00:00", the strong Sabohani group notice will start, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3), and FIG. Pre-reading notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in F20)].
The first notice display is a kind of notice display [for example, a notice display due to the display of the character of the lord, or a notice display due to a change in the color of the hold icon displayed in a circle. Etc.] is a notice display that is displayed as a notice by including [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), a hold icon (variable icon) of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold that includes the character of the lord. ) Foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F20), a red timer hold display composed of a round red display. The hold icon (variable icon) of the mode foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The first notice display is a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started (hereinafter, "first display [for example, hold of the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3))". It is a notice display including the display of the bomb included in the icon and the display of the fuse included in the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F20)] ”.
An effect using a certain character [for example, the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 367 (F9)] (hereinafter, "the first effect [for example, the Yoshimune Kankan game shown in FIGS. 367 (F9) to 18]" ] ”) Is executed, and the notice display of one of the plurality of types of notice displays displayed (hereinafter,“ a certain notice display [for example, the blue hold shown in FIG. 367 (F9)) is held. The first hold icon h11 or the like in the display mode] ”is displayed as the first notice display [for example, the first hold icon h11 or the like in the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F20)]. Is configured to be
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, even if the expectation of the big hit is the same, the expectation may be amplified at the start of the timer effect.

Further, according to this game console, it may be possible to anticipate and entertain the effect to be executed as the timer effect is executed.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , It may be configured so that a certain effect is started even in a case other than the case where the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display, or may not display the first notice display.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be other than the notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as a thing. Further, the first notice display may always be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may not be done.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a display of a certain type of notice, or may include a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain type of notice display. It may be something that may be done.

Here, the "notice" is a concept including both "the change notice" and "look-ahead notice".

Further, the first display may only suggest that the timer effect may be started, or may indicate that there is a case other than the case where the timer effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always suggest that the timer effect may be started, or may not suggest that the timer effect may be started. May be good.

The first display may indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may indicate something other than the timer effect (always) being started. Good. Further, the first display may always suggest that the timer effect is (always) started, or may not suggest that the timer effect is (always) started. May be good.

Further, the first notice display may include only the first display, or may include a display other than the first display. Further, the first notice display may always include the first display, or may not include the first display.

Further, by executing the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed only as the first notice display, or the first effect may be displayed. Is executed, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as a notice display other than the first notice display. Further, by executing the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be configured to be always displayed as the first notice display, or the first effect is executed. As a result, a certain notice display that has been displayed may not be displayed as the first notice display.

Further, by executing the first effect, only a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display, or the first effect may be displayed. Is executed, a notice display other than a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display.

Further, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display only when the first effect is executed, or the first effect may be displayed. It may be configured so that a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display by executing an effect other than the above.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 357 (3), and the figure. Pre-reading notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the red hold display mode shown in 367 (F9)].
The second notice display is a notice display displayed as a notice by including the display of the certain type of notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 357 (3), it is configured to include a character of the lord. The hold icon (variable icon) of the Yoshimune hold display mode foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F9), it is round and red. The hold icon (variable icon) in the red hold display mode, which includes the display of, foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The second notice display is a notice display that does not include the first notice.
By executing the first effect, the displayed second notice display may be changed to the first notice display [for example, FIGS. 367 (F9) to 367 (F9) to As shown in the figure (F20), when the Yoshimune Kankan game is executed, the first hold icon h11 of the displayed blue hold display mode changes to the red timer hold display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if it is a look-ahead notice that does not suggest the start of the timer effect, it may change to the first notice display when the first effect is executed, so it is possible to have expectations. There is.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display, or may not display the second notice display.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed other than the notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as a thing. Further, the second notice display may always be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may not be done.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a display of a certain type of notice, or may include a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain type of notice display. It may be something that may be done.

Here, the "notice" is a concept including both "the change notice" and "look-ahead notice".

Further, the second notice display may not include only the first display, or may not include a display other than the first display. Further, the second notice display may not always include the first display, or may include the first display.

Further, it may be configured so that the displayed second notice display may be changed only to the first notice display by executing the first effect, or the first effect may be changed. By being executed, the displayed second notice display may be changed to a notice display other than the first notice display. Further, by executing the first effect, the displayed second notice display may be configured to be changed to the first notice display without fail, or the first effect is executed. As a result, the displayed second notice display may not be changed to the first notice display.

Further, it may be configured so that only the displayed second notice display may be changed to the first notice display by executing the first effect, or the first effect may be changed to the first notice display. By being executed, the notice display other than the displayed second notice display may be changed to the first notice display.

Further, it may be configured so that the displayed second notice display may be changed to the first notice display only when the first effect is executed, or other than the first effect. The second notice display may be changed to the first notice display even when the effect of the above is executed.

Further, "The second notice display is a notice display that may include a notice display of a different type from the notice display of the certain type [for example, Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 357 (3). The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode may be displayed with the Sabohani icon or replay icon added.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even when the second notice display is displayed, it may be possible to have expectations for something other than the timer effect.

Here, the second notice display may include only the display of a different type of notice from the display of a certain type of notice, or may be different from the display of a certain type of notice. It may include a display other than the display of the type of notice. Further, the second notice display may always include a display of a different type of notice from the display of a certain type of notice, or a notice of a type different from the display of a certain type of notice. It may not include the indication of.

Further, "By executing the first effect, the display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed may be changed to another display mode of the first notice display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 367 (F8a) to (F20a), the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the blue timer hold displayed by executing the Yoshimune Kankan game is red. Change to the timer hold display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there are cases where it can be expected to upgrade the first notice display.

Here, by executing the first effect, the display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed may be changed only to another display mode of the first notice display. Alternatively, by executing the first effect, the displayed mode of the first notice display may change to a display mode other than the display mode of another first notice display. It may be configured as follows. Further, the display mode of the first notice display may be configured to be changed to another display mode of the first notice display by executing the first effect. , The display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed may not be changed to another display mode of the first notice display by executing the first effect. ..

Further, by executing the first effect, only the display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed may be changed to another display mode of the first notice display. Alternatively, when the first effect is executed, the display mode of the notice display other than the displayed mode of the first notice display changes to another display mode of the first notice display. It may be configured to have.

Further, the display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed may be changed to another display mode of the first notice display only by executing the first effect. Alternatively, the display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed may change to another display mode of the first notice display due to the execution of an effect other than the first effect. It may be configured in.

It should be noted that, by executing the first effect, the display mode of the display of a certain type of the first notice display that has been displayed may be changed, or the display mode of the first display may be changed. May change, or both the display mode of the display of a certain type of notice and the display mode of the first display may change.

Further, "The display of the certain type of notice is a display configured to be displayable in one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, a round and blue aspect].
One of the plurality of embodiments is a second embodiment [for example, a round and red embodiment].
From the case where the first notice display [for example, the hold icon of the blue timer hold display mode shown in FIG. 367 (F8a)] including the display of the certain type of notice of the first aspect is displayed. Also when the first notice display [for example, the hold icon of the red timer hold display mode shown in FIG. 367 (F20a)] including the display of the certain type of notice of the second aspect is displayed. Is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display.
By executing the first effect, the display of the certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 367 (F8a) to (F20a), the first hold icon of the display mode of the blue timer hold displayed by executing the Yoshimune Kankan game is executed. h11 changes to the display mode of red timer hold, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easy to see that it has been upgraded.

Here, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in one of a plurality of aspects, or may be an aspect other than one of the plurality of aspects. It may be configured to be displayable. Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in one of a plurality of aspects, or may not be displayed in one of a plurality of aspects. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the first aspect, or may be configured to be displayable in an aspect other than the first aspect. Good. Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the first aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect. There may be.

Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the second aspect, or may be configured to be displayable in an aspect other than the second aspect. Good. Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the second aspect. There may be.

In addition, the first notice display including the display of a certain type of notice in the second aspect is more than the case where the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice in the first aspect is displayed. When it is displayed, it may be configured so that only the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display, or a first aspect including a certain kind of notice display of the first aspect. When the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the second aspect is displayed, the symbol other than the jackpot symbol mode is displayed in a certain symbol variation display than when the notice display is displayed. The mode may also be configured so that it can be easily displayed. In addition, the first notice display including the display of a certain type of notice in the second aspect is more than the case where the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice in the first aspect is displayed. When it is displayed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is always more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display, or a first aspect including a certain kind of notice display of the first mode. When the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the second aspect is displayed than when the notice display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it may not be easy to do.

In addition, the first notice display including the display of a certain type of notice in the second aspect is more than the case where the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice in the first aspect is displayed. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be definitely displayed only in a certain symbol variation display when it is displayed, or a first aspect including a certain kind of notice display of the first mode. When the first notice display including a certain kind of notice display of the second aspect is displayed than when the notice display is displayed, even in the symbol change display other than a certain symbol change display, The jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed.

Further, when the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the second aspect is displayed, even if the jackpot symbol mode is always fixedly displayed in a certain symbol variation display. Good. Further, when the first notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice of the first aspect is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may not always be fixedly displayed in a certain symbol variation display. ..

Further, by executing the first effect, the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display may be changed from the first mode to the second mode only. By executing the first effect, the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display changes from the first mode to a mode other than the second mode. It may be configured to do so. Further, even if the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display is configured to always change from the first mode to the second mode by executing the first effect. It is configured so that the display of a certain kind of notice in the displayed first notice display may not change from the first mode to the second mode by executing the first effect. May be done.

Further, by executing the first effect, only the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display may be changed from the first mode to the second mode. However, by executing the first effect, the display other than the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display also changes from the first mode to the second mode. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, it is configured so that the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display may change from the first mode to the second mode only by executing the first effect. The display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display is changed from the first mode to the second mode by executing an effect other than the first effect. It may be configured to do so.

In addition, "the display of the certain kind of notice of the second aspect is included more than the case where the first notice display including the display of the certain kind of notice of the first aspect is displayed. "It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variation display when the first notice display is displayed." It is better when the second notice display including the certain kind of notice display of the second aspect is displayed than when the second notice display including the notice display is displayed. , It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed in a certain symbol variation display. " In addition, "a plurality of notice displays including the certain kind of notice display of the second aspect are included rather than a plurality of notice displays including the certain kind of notice display of the first aspect. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display when the notice display is displayed. "

Further, "The first display is a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started once or a plurality of times [for example, it is shown in FIG. 363 (B7) and FIG. 370 (H13'). The number of bombs included in the hold icon of the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode suggests the number of times the timer notice effect is started, etc.],
By executing the first effect, the number of executions of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect and the first effect. The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after the effect of is executed may be different [for example, by executing the Yoshimune Kankan game, Yoshimune The display of bombs included in the bomb hold has increased from one to three, suggesting the execution of one timer notice effect, but now suggesting the execution of three timer notice effects, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect an increase in timer production.

Further, according to this game console, it may be possible to inform the remaining guaranteed number of times of the timer effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

Here, the first display may be a display suggesting only that the timer effect may be started once or a plurality of times, or when the timer effect once or a plurality of times is started. It may be a display that suggests something other than the presence of. Further, the first display may be a display that always suggests that the timer effect may be started once or a plurality of times, or the timer effect may be started once or a plurality of times. It may be a display that may not suggest that there is.

Further, by executing the first effect, the number of times the timer effect is executed and the first effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect are executed. In some cases, only the number of times the timer effect is executed, which is suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after the first effect is executed, may be different, or the first effect is executed, so that the first effect is executed. The number of times the timer effect is executed and the first display in the first notice display displayed after the first effect is executed, which is suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of Other than the suggested number of times the timer effect is executed, it may be different. Further, by executing the first effect, the number of times the timer effect is executed and the first effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect are executed. The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after the first effect may be different, and the execution of the first effect causes the timer effect to be executed before the first effect is executed. The number of times the timer effect is executed as suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed on the screen and the timer suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after the first effect is executed. The number of times the effect is executed may not be different.

In addition, only by executing the first effect, the number of times the timer effect is executed and the first effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect can be obtained. The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after the execution may be different, or an effect other than the first effect may be executed. The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect and the first in the first notice display displayed after the first effect is executed. The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by one display may be different.

In addition, "The first effect may be started during the execution of the timer effect [For example, as shown in FIGS. 368 (F8c) to (F9c), Yoshimune Cancan during the execution of the timer notice effect. The game has started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the first effect is started by executing the timer effect.

Here, only the first effect may be started during the execution of the timer effect, or the effects other than the first effect may be started during the execution of the timer effect. Further, the first effect may always be started during the execution of the timer effect, or the first effect may not be started during the execution of the timer effect.

Further, the first effect may be started only during the execution of the timer effect, or the first effect may be started even when the timer effect is not being executed.

In addition, "The display of a certain type of notice is a display of a notice by an icon.
The icon is a hold icon or a variable icon.
The first notice display is a notice display including the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), Yoshimune. The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of the bomb hold is configured by adding the display of the bomb to the hold icon (variable icon)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the hold icon and the variable icon may be easy for the player to understand because it is easy to identify the symbol variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice.

Here, the first notice display may be configured to include only the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon, or may correspond to the icon and the icon. It may be configured to include a display other than the first display to be displayed. Further, the first notice display may be configured to always include the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon, or the icon and the display corresponding to the icon. It may be configured not to include the first indication to be made.

The icon may be a notice icon other than the hold icon and the variable icon.

In addition, a look-ahead notice may be given by a variable icon. That is, whether or not there is a hold of the symbol change display at the time when the display is started regardless of whether the hold icon or the change icon displays a certain type of notice (whether there is 1 or more hold or 0). ), So it is possible to think that the display of a certain kind of notice by the variable icon is a look-ahead notice. For example, in general, when the display of a certain type of notice in the first notice display is a hold icon, it is a look-ahead notice, and in the case of a variable icon, it is often the change notice. In the case where the hold is 0, if the start prize is won, the look-ahead may be performed before the winning / failing judgment is made, and as a result, a certain kind of notice may be displayed by the variable icon. Then, it may be said that it functions as a look-ahead notice instead of the change notice.

Further, "The first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are integrally displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold". The hold icon (variable icon) is such that the display of the bomb is integrally added to the hold icon (variable icon) of the display mode of the character of the lord],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to understand whether or not the display is for performing a timer effect.

In addition, according to this game console, it may be easy to understand the symbol variation display that is the target variation of the notice.

Here, the first notice display may be a display in which only the icon and the first display are integrated, or the icon, the first display, and other displays are also displayed in an integrated manner. It may be the one that has been done. Further, the first notice display may be one in which the icon and the first display are always integrated and displayed, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed in an integrated manner. May be good.

Further, "The first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are displayed separately. [For example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 363 (B7') is a display mode of Yoshimune hold. The bomb icon BD'is placed above the hold icon (variable icon), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice by the icon and the notice added may be easy to understand.

Here, in the first notice display, only the icon and the first display may be displayed separately, or the icon, the first display, and other displays are also displayed separately. It may be the one that has been done. Further, in the first notice display, the icon and the first display may always be displayed separately, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed separately. May be good.

In addition, "the icon is configured to be displayable in the default display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (1), the first hold icon h11 has a default display mode (round and white display). Aspects), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the notice may be easy to understand.

Here, the icon may be configured to be displayable only in the default display mode, or the icon may be configured to be displayable in a display mode other than the default display mode. Further, the icon may be configured to be always displayed in the default display mode, or may be configured so that the icon may not be displayed in the default display mode.

In addition, "the display of the certain type of notice is performed by changing the color of the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 365 (E3), the second hold icon h12 is a round and blue display mode. Pre-reading notice is given by displaying with],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the notice may be easy to understand.

Here, a certain kind of notice display may be displayed only by changing the color of the icon, or a certain kind of notice display may be displayed by a change other than the change in the color of the icon. There may be. In addition, a certain type of notice display may always be displayed due to a change in the icon color, or a certain type of notice display may not be displayed due to a change in the icon color. Good.

In addition, "The first effect is an effect in which one of a plurality of results is derived. [For example, as shown in FIG. 367 (F9), in the Yoshimune Kankan game, a dice" 1 "is output. Either the "3" roll of the roll and the dice or the "5" roll of the dice is derived],
One of the plurality of results is the first result [for example, the roll of "5" on the dice shown in FIG. 367 (F18), etc.].
When the first result is derived as a result of performing the first effect, the certain notice display that has been displayed is configured to be displayed as the first notice display [for example, , As shown in FIGS. 367 (F18) to (F20), when the dice roll is "5" in the Yoshimune Kankan game, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the blue hold display mode to the red timer. Change to hold display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the first result will be derived.

Here, in the first effect, only one of the plurality of results may be derived, or a result other than one of the plurality of results may be derived. You may. Further, in the first effect, the result of one of the plurality of results may be always derived, or the result of one of the plurality of results may not be derived. Good.

Further, in the first effect, only the first result may be derived, or a result other than the first result may be derived. Further, the first effect may be one in which the first result is always derived, or the first result may not be derived in some cases.

Further, when the first result is derived as a result of the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be configured to be displayed only as the first notice display. , When the first result is derived as a result of the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed is configured to be displayed as a notice display other than the first notice display. May be good. Further, when the first result is derived as a result of the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be configured to be always displayed as the first notice display. , When the first result is derived as a result of the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed may not be displayed as the first notice display.

Further, when the first result is derived as a result of the first effect, only a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display. , Even if the notice display other than a certain notice display that was displayed is displayed as the first notice display when the first result is derived as a result of the first effect being performed. Good.

Further, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display only when the first result is derived as a result of the first effect. , Even if it is configured so that a certain notice display that has been displayed is displayed as the first notice display even when the first result is not derived as a result of the first effect. Good.

Further, "the display of the certain type of notice is a display by a character [for example, a display by a character of the lord shown in FIG.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the decorative effect may be improved.

Here, the display of a certain type of notice may be a display made only by characters, or the display of a certain type of notice may be a display including a display other than the character. Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be a display that always includes a character, or the display of a certain type of notice may be a display that does not include a character.

In addition, "The first display is a display suggesting that the timer effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 358 (3) to (9), the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold". The hold icon suggests that the timer notice effect will start due to the inclusion of the bomb display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the first display may further increase the expectation that the timer effect will be started.

Here, the first display may only suggest that the timer effect is started, or may also suggest something other than the start of the timer effect. Further, the first display may always suggest that the timer effect is started, or may not suggest that the timer effect is started.

In addition, in the above description,
"Timer effect [for example, timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17)] can be executed with an effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.].
A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays.
The timer effect is produced when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started (hereinafter, "a certain effect [for example, the strong sabohani shown in FIG. 358 (17))". It is an effect configured to start [for example, as shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17), the first timer notice display TM11 has started to be displayed. Later, when the timer display becomes "00:00", the strong Sabohani group notice will start, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3), and FIG. Pre-reading notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in F20)].
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 357 (3), and FIG. 367 (F9). ), The look-ahead notice (the change notice), etc. by the hold icon of the red hold display mode].
The first notice display is a kind of notice display [for example, a notice display due to the display of the character of the lord, or a notice display due to a change in the color of the hold icon displayed in a circle. Etc.] is a notice display that is displayed as a notice by including [for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (3), a hold icon (variable icon) of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold that includes the character of the lord. ) Foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F20), a red timer hold display composed of a round red display. The hold icon (variable icon) of the mode foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The second notice display is a notice display displayed as a notice by including the display of the certain type of notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 357 (3), it is configured to include a character of the lord. The hold icon (variable icon) of the Yoshimune hold display mode foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F9), it is round and red. The hold icon (variable icon) in the red hold display mode, which includes the display of, foretells that there is a possibility of a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The first notice display is a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started (hereinafter, "first display [for example, hold of the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3))". It is a notice display including the display of the bomb included in the icon and the display of the fuse included in the hold icon of the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F20)] ”.
The second notice display is a notice display that does not include the first notice.
It is configured so that the certain effect is started while the first notice display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 371 (H28a) to 371 (H29a), a timer hold display is displayed. Strong Sabohani group notice has started with the variable icon h0 displayed in the mode],
By executing the effect using a certain character, the displayed first notice display may be displayed as the second notice display [for example, FIG. 368 (Fig. 368). As shown in G9) to FIG. 369 (G20), the first hold icon h11 of the timer hold display mode to which the panda icon PD is added changes to the display mode of Sabohani as a result of the Yoshimune Kankan game. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, even if the expectation of the big hit is the same, the expectation may be amplified at the start of the timer effect.

Further, according to this game console, it may be possible to anticipate and entertain the effect to be executed as the timer effect is executed.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , It may be configured so that a certain effect is started even in a case other than the case where the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display, or may not display the first notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display, or may not display the second notice display.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be other than the notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as a thing. Further, the first notice display may always be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may not be done.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a display of a certain type of notice, or may include a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain type of notice display. It may be something that may be done.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed only as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed other than the notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as a thing. Further, the second notice display may always be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice by including a certain type of notice display. It may not be done.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a display of a certain type of notice, or may include a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed as a notice without including a certain type of notice display. It may be something that may be done.

Here, the "notice" is a concept including both "the change notice" and "look-ahead notice".

Further, the first display may only suggest that the timer effect may be started, or may indicate that there is a case other than the case where the timer effect is started. May be good. Further, the first display may always suggest that the timer effect may be started, or may not suggest that the timer effect may be started. May be good.

The first display may indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may indicate something other than the timer effect (always) being started. Good. Further, the first display may always suggest that the timer effect is (always) started, or may not suggest that the timer effect is (always) started. May be good.

Further, the first notice display may include only the first display, or may include a display other than the first display. Further, the first notice display may always include the first display, or may not include the first display.

Further, the second notice display may not include only the first display, or may not include a display other than the first display. Further, the second notice display may not always include the first display, or may include the first display.

The display mode of the first display included in the first notice display and the display mode of the first display included in the second notice display may be the same or different. That is, if the function as the first display is common, it is included in the present invention. Further, the function may be different between the first display included in the first notice display and the first display included in the second notice display.

Further, it may be configured so that only a certain effect is started while the first notice display is displayed, or an effect other than a certain effect may be started while the first notice display is displayed. It may be configured to start. Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started while the first notice display is displayed, or when a certain effect is not started while the first notice display is displayed. May be configured to be.

Further, a certain effect may be started only when the first notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started even in a state other than the state where the first notice display is displayed. It may be configured to start.

Further, it may be configured so that the displayed first notice display may be displayed only as the second notice display by executing the effect using a certain character. By executing the effect using the character, the displayed first notice display may be displayed as a notice display other than the second notice display. Further, by executing the effect using a certain character, the first notice display that has been displayed may be configured to be always displayed as the second notice display, or a certain character may be used. It may be configured so that the displayed first notice display may not be displayed as the second notice display due to the execution of the effect.

Further, it may be configured so that only the first notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the second notice display by executing the effect using a certain character. By executing the effect using the character, the notice display other than the first notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the second notice display.

Further, it may be configured so that the first notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the second notice display only when the effect using a certain character is executed. It may be configured so that the displayed first notice display may be displayed as the second notice display even when the effect other than the effect using the character is executed.

Further, "The certain effect is a notice effect [for example, a notice of a strong cut-in shown in FIG. 370 (H35)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation that a certain effect will be performed.

Here, a certain effect may include only the advance notice effect, or may include an effect other than the advance notice effect. Further, a certain effect may always include a notice effect, or may not include a notice effect.

In addition, "the above-mentioned certain effect is a chance-up effect [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 369 (H25) to (H26)].
The chance-up effect is an effect in which the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is executed than when it is not executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation for a big hit by performing a certain effect.

Here, a certain effect may include only a chance-up effect, or may include an effect other than the chance-up effect. Further, a certain effect may always include a chance-up effect, or may not include a chance-up effect.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Timer effect [for example, timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17)] can be executed with an effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.].
A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays.
The timer effect is produced when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started (hereinafter, "a certain effect [for example, the strong sabohani shown in FIG. 358 (17))". The group notice and the pending change animation shown in FIG. 369 (H12) or FIG. 370 (H12a)] ”) are started [for example, FIGS. 358 (9) to 358 (H12a). As shown in 17), when the timer display becomes "0:00" after the first timer notice display TM11 is started, the strong Sabohani group notice is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3), and FIG. 369 ( Pre-reading notice (the change notice), etc. by the hold icon of one bomb display mode shown in H3)].
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a third notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 358 (18), and FIG. 369 (H13). ) Is a look-ahead notice (the change notice), etc. by the hold icon of the display mode in which the three bombs shown in a lump are displayed.
The second notice display is a notice display including a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started at least once [for example, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3). For the look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon and the look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of one bomb display mode shown in FIG. 369 (H3), at least one timer notice effect is started. Suggesting, etc.],
The third notice display is a notice display that may be displayed differently from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect [for example, shown in FIG. 358 (18). The look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode of Yoshimune hold and the look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the three bombs shown in FIG. 369 (H13) are shown. , It is displayed differently in connection with the timer notice effect],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the change in the notice display while expecting a certain effect.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. ,
When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , It may be configured so that a certain effect is started even in a case other than the case where the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display, or may not display the second notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third notice display, or may be capable of displaying a notice display other than the third notice display. Further, the display means may always display the third notice display, or may not display the third notice display.

Further, the second notice display may include only a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started at least once, or the timer effect may be started at least once. It may include a display other than the display suggesting that there is. Further, the second notice display may always include a display suggesting that at least one timer effect may be started, or at least one timer effect may be started. It may not include an indication suggesting that there is.

Further, the second notice display may include a display suggesting only that the timer effect may be started at least once, or the timer effect may be started at least once. It may include an indication that suggests something other than something else. Further, the second notice display may include a display that always suggests that the timer effect may be started at least once, or the timer effect may be started at least once. It may include an indication that does not suggest that it is.

Further, the second notice display may include a display suggesting that only one timer effect may be started, or an effect other than at least one timer effect is also started. It may include an indication suggesting that the timer may occur. Further, the second notice display may include a display suggesting that at least one timer effect is always started, or suggests that at least one timer effect may not be started. It may include a display to be displayed.

Further, the third notice display may be changed from the second notice display only in connection with the execution of the timer effect, or the timer effect may be displayed. In relation to this, the notice display other than the second notice display may be changed and displayed. Further, the third notice display may be displayed in a change from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect, or may be displayed in relation to the execution of the timer effect. Then, it may be displayed unchanged from the second notice display.

Further, the third notice display may be changed from the second notice display only in relation to the execution of the timer effect, or the timer effect may be displayed. It may be displayed differently from the second notice display in relation to other things.

Further, the third notice display may be changed from the second notice display in connection with the execution of only the timer effect, or the effect other than the timer effect may be displayed. It may be displayed differently from the second notice display in relation to what has been executed.

Further, "The second notice display is a notice display including a display suggesting that the timer effect of the second number of times [for example, once, etc.] may be started [for example, FIG. 358 (Fig. 358 (for example, FIG. 358). The look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode shown in 3) and the look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of one bomb display mode shown in FIG. 369 (H3) are at least. It suggests that one timer notice production will start],
The third notice display is a notice display including a display suggesting that the timer effect of the third number of times [for example, 0 times or 3 times, etc.] may be started [for example, FIG. 358 (for example, FIG. The look-ahead notice (the fluctuation notice) by the hold icon of the Yoshimune hold display mode shown in 18) does not have a bomb display and does not function as a notice for performing a timer notice effect (that is, 0 times). (It suggests that the timer notice effect may be started), and the look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of the display mode in which the three bombs shown in FIG. 369 (H13) are represented as a lump is , Suggesting that at least 3 timer notices will be started],
The second number and the third number are different times.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, attention may be paid to a change in the number of times the timer effect is started.

Here, the second notice display may include only a display suggesting that the timer effect of the second number of times may be started, or the timer effect of the second number of times is started. It may include a display other than the display suggesting that there is a case. Further, the second notice display may always include a display suggesting that the timer effect of the second number of times may be started, or the timer effect of the second number of times is started. It may not include an indication suggesting that it may be.

Further, the second notice display may include a display suggesting only that the timer effect of the second number of times may be started, or the timer effect of the second number of times is started. It may include an indication that suggests something other than the case. Further, the second notice display may include a display that always suggests that the timer effect of the second number of times may be started, or the timer effect of the second number of times is started. It may include indications that may not suggest that there are cases.

Further, the second notice display may include a display suggesting that only the timer effect of the second number of times may be started, and the effect other than the timer effect of the second number of times may be included. It may include an indication suggesting that it may be initiated. Further, the second notice display may include a display suggesting that the timer effect of the second number of times is always started, or the timer effect of the second number of times may not be started. It may include a display suggesting.

Here, the third notice display may include only a display suggesting that the timer effect of the third number of times may be started, or the timer effect of the third number of times is started. It may include a display other than the display suggesting that there is a case. Further, the third notice display may always include a display suggesting that the timer effect of the third number of times may be started, or the timer effect of the third number of times is started. It may not include an indication suggesting that it may be.

Further, the third notice display may include a display suggesting only that the timer effect of the third number of times may be started, or the timer effect of the third number of times is started. It may include an indication that suggests something other than the case. Further, the third notice display may include a display that always suggests that the timer effect of the third number of times may be started, or the timer effect of the third number of times is started. It may include indications that may not suggest that there are cases.

Further, the third notice display may include a display suggesting that only the timer effect of the third number of times may be started, and the effect other than the timer effect of the third number of times may be included. It may include an indication suggesting that it may be initiated. Further, the third notice display may include a display suggesting that the timer effect of the third number of times is always started, or the timer effect of the third number of times may not be started. It may include a display suggesting.

Further, the second number of times and the third number of times may always be different times or may be the same number of times.

In addition, "the certain effect [for example, the strong Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 358 (17), the pending change animation shown in FIG. 370 (H12a), etc.] is the third notice display from the second notice display. It is a production that changes to
The second number of times [for example, one time or three times, etc.] is larger than the third number of times [for example, 0 times or 1 time, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the remaining number of timer productions while expecting a certain production.

Here, a certain effect may change only from the second notice display to the third notice display, or change from the second notice display to a notice display other than the third notice display. It may be a thing. In addition, a certain effect may always change from the second notice display to the third notice display, or may not change from the second notice display to the third notice display. You may.

Also, the second number may always be higher than the third, may be the same, or the second is less than the third. There may be cases.

Further, "the certain effect [for example, the pending change animation shown in FIG. 369 (H12)] is an effect of changing from the second notice display to the third notice display.
The third number [for example, three times, etc.] is larger than the second number [for example, one time, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, as a result of a certain effect, it may be expected that the number of timer effects will increase.

Further, in a certain effect, the timer display generally indicates a certain time at a predetermined timing such as a pseudo-ream or a cut-in, but when it is used for changing the number of times of the timer effect itself, there are few timing restrictions. Therefore, in this game table, it is possible to give a variation to the timing at which the timer display indicates a certain time (that is, the timing at which a certain effect can be started), so that the interest in the timer effect may be improved.

Here, a certain effect may change only from the second notice display to the third notice display, or change from the second notice display to a notice display other than the third notice display. It may be a thing. In addition, a certain effect may always change from the second notice display to the third notice display, or may not change from the second notice display to the third notice display. You may.

Further, the third number may always be larger than the second number, or the third number may be less than the second number. Further, the second number of times and the third number of times may be the same. For example, the timer effect is executed and the number of times is digested once, and as a certain effect, the timer effect is started once. You may perform something like a so-called HOLD effect that makes a suggestive display.

Further, "The second notice display is a notice display including a certain type of notice display [for example, a bomb display, etc.] [for example, as shown in FIG. 370 (H7a). The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode, which includes the display of the three bombs in the default color, is a notice display in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The third notice display is a notice display including the certain type of notice display [for example, as shown in FIG. 370 (H13a), a display configured to include a display of a red bomb. The hold icon (variable icon) of the mode is a notice display in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The display of a certain type of notice is a display configured to be displayable in one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of embodiments is a second embodiment [for example, display of a bomb in the default color shown in FIG. 370 (H7a)].
One of the plurality of embodiments is a third embodiment [for example, display of a red bomb shown in FIG. 370 (H13a)].
The second aspect and the third aspect are different aspects.
In connection with the execution of the timer effect, the display of the certain type of notice according to the third aspect from the second notice display including the display of the certain kind of notice according to the second aspect. It is configured so that the third notice display including the above may be displayed in a different manner [for example, as shown in FIGS. 370 (H8a) to H13a, a timer notice effect is performed. As a result, the display has changed from the hold icon containing the display of the three bombs in the default color to the hold icon containing the display of the red bomb, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation to rank up when changing from the second notice display to the third notice display.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed including only a display of a certain type of notice, or may be displayed including a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be. Further, the second notice display may always include a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed without including a certain type of notice display. It may be a thing.

Further, the third notice display may be displayed including only the display of a certain type of notice, or may be displayed including a display other than the display of a certain type of notice. It may be. Further, the third notice display may always include a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed without including a certain type of notice display. It may be a thing.

Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured so that it can be displayed only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than one of the plurality of modes. It may be configured as possible. In addition, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayed in one of a plurality of modes without fail, or may not be displayed in one of a plurality of modes. It may be configured to have.

Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the second aspect, or may be configured to be displayable in an aspect other than the second aspect. Good. Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the second aspect. There may be.

Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the third aspect, or may be configured to be displayable in an aspect other than the third aspect. Good. Further, the display of a certain kind of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the third aspect, or may not be displayed in the third aspect. There may be.

In addition, in relation to the execution of the timer effect, a third including a second notice display including a display of a certain type of notice according to the second aspect to a third including a display of a certain type of notice according to the third aspect. It may be configured to change and be displayed only in the notice display of the second aspect, and includes a kind of notice display according to the second aspect in relation to the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured so that the notice display may be changed from the second notice display to a notice display other than the third notice display including a certain type of notice display according to the third aspect. In addition, in relation to the execution of the timer effect, a third including a second notice display including a display of a certain type of notice according to the second aspect to a third including a display of a certain type of notice according to the third aspect. The notice display may be configured to always change and be displayed, or a second notice including a display of a kind of notice according to the second aspect in connection with the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured so that the display may be displayed unchanged from the display to the third notice display including the display of a certain type of notice according to the third aspect.

In addition, in relation to the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including the display of a certain type of notice according to the second aspect to the third display including only the display of a certain type of notice according to the third aspect. It may be configured to change to the third notice display, and may include some kind of notice display according to the second aspect in connection with the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured so that the second notice display may be changed to a third notice display including a display other than a certain type of notice display according to the third aspect. In addition, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including the display of a certain type of notice according to the second aspect to the third notice display including the display of a certain type according to the third aspect are always included. It may be configured to change to the third notice display, and may include some kind of notice display according to the second aspect in connection with the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured so that the second notice display may be changed to a third notice display that does not include a certain type of notice display according to the third aspect.

In addition, in relation to the execution of the timer effect, the first including only the second notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect. It may be configured to change to the third notice display, and may include some kind of notice display according to the second aspect in connection with the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured so that the notice display other than the second notice display may be changed to a third notice display including a certain kind of notice display according to the third aspect.

In addition, in relation to the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including only the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the third notice display including the display of a certain kind according to the third aspect. It may be configured so that it may be displayed in a different manner from the third notice display, or a display other than the display of a certain type of notice according to the second aspect in relation to the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured so that the display may be changed from the second notice display including the display to the third notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect. In addition, in relation to the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display always includes the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect, and the third notice display including the display of a certain kind according to the third aspect is included. It may be configured to change to the third notice display and may not include some kind of notice display according to the second aspect in connection with the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured so that the second notice display may be changed to a third notice display including a certain kind of notice display according to the third aspect.

Also, only in connection with the execution of the timer effect, the second notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect to the third notice display including the display of a certain kind according to the third aspect. It may be configured so that it may be displayed in a different manner from the third notice display, or a kind of notice according to the second aspect in relation to other than the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured so that the second notice display including the display may be changed to the third notice display including the display of a certain kind of notice according to the third aspect.

In addition, "the third notice display is a notice display including a notice display by an icon [for example, a hold icon, a variable icon, a notice icon, etc.].
The third notice display is a change of the icon from the second notice display in relation to the execution of the timer effect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 371 (H25a') to (H27a'). In addition, the display mode of the timer notice has changed to the display mode of the number length due to the timer notice effect] and the increase / decrease [for example, as shown in FIGS. 369 (H9) to (H13), the timer The number of bombs has increased due to the advance notice effect, or as shown in FIGS. 370 (H9a) to (H13a), the number of bombs has decreased due to the timer advance effect. It is a notice display that is displayed when at least one of [is, etc.] is performed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect the change of the icon due to the timer effect.

Here, the third notice display may include only the display of the notice by the icon, or may include a display other than the display of the notice by the icon. Further, the third notice display may always include the display of the notice by the icon, or may not include the display of the notice by the icon.

Further, the third notice display may be displayed in which at least one of the change and increase / decrease of the icon is performed from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect. However, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, at least one of the change and increase / decrease of the icon may be performed and displayed from the second notice display. Further, the third notice display may be displayed in which at least one of the change and increase / decrease of the icon is always performed from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect. However, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, the icon may be displayed without at least one of the change and increase / decrease of the icon from the second notice display.

Further, the third notice display may be displayed in which at least one of the change and increase / decrease of the icon is performed from the second notice display only in relation to the execution of the timer effect. However, in connection with other than the execution of the timer effect, at least one of the change and increase / decrease of the icon may be performed and displayed from the second notice display.

The third notice display may be displayed by changing only the icon from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect. Further, the third notice display may be displayed by increasing only the icons from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect. Further, the third notice display may be displayed by reducing only the icons from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect.

In addition, "the icon is an icon displayed in response to a certain symbol variation display. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the expectation for a certain symbol variation display.

Here, the icon may be displayed only corresponding to a certain symbol variation display, or may be displayed corresponding to something other than a certain symbol variation display. Further, the icon may be displayed without being corresponding to a certain symbol variation display, or may be displayed not corresponding to a certain symbol variation display.

In addition, "the icon is a hold icon, a variable icon, or a notice icon.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "It is configured so that the timer effect can be executed a plurality of times during the execution of one symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 369 (H8) to 370 (H38), one symbol". During the execution of the variable display, the timer notice effect is executed three times, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the timer effect is performed a plurality of times during the execution of one symbol variation display.

Here, the timer effect may be configured to be able to be executed only a plurality of times during the execution of one symbol variation display, or an effect other than the plurality of timer effects may be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. It may be configured to be executable. Further, the timer effect may be configured to be executed a plurality of times during the execution of one symbol variation display, or when the timer effect is not executed a plurality of times during the execution of one symbol variation display. It may be configured to have.

Further, the timer effect may be configured to be able to be executed a plurality of times only during the execution of one symbol variation display, or the timer effect can be executed a plurality of times even when the symbol variation display is not being executed once. It may be configured in.

Further, "The second notice display is a notice display including a display suggesting that the timer effect is started at least once [for example, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358 (3). For the look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon and the look-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon of one bomb display mode shown in FIG. 369 (H3), at least one timer notice effect is started. Suggesting, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the second notice display may further increase the expectation that the timer effect will be started.

Here, the second notice display may indicate only that the timer effect is started at least once, or suggests other than that the timer effect is started at least once. It may be a thing. Further, the second notice display may always suggest that at least one timer effect is started, or may not suggest that at least one timer effect is started. It may be.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

FIGS. 372 to 383 are diagrams in which the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment is shown step by step. In FIGS. 372 to 383, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. In addition, in FIGS. 372 to 383, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 provided with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 372 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 372 (A1) to 372 (A18) show that the button effect is started as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A1), the combination of decorative symbols whose first decorative symbol is "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A1), the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. 119 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. The second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (A1), since the symbol is stopped, the variable icon h0 is hidden on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A1) is all white, but this all white color indicates that the background screen is not shown. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but in the case of a solid white color, it means that the background screen is not shown, as in FIG. 372 (A1).

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 372 (A1) is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 372 (A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good.

FIG. 372 (A2) shows that the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started. Then, the hold digestion animation is started, the change icon movement animation in which the first hold icon h11 moves toward the center of the upper surface of the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is performed, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the change icon h0. Will be done. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and is the default display mode. Further, the second hold icon h12 also moves to the first stage hs1 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. At the timing shown in FIG. 372 (A2), the second decorative symbol has started the variable display, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started the variable display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A3), it is shown that the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed in the central region.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A4), the flash effect EF401 is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and it is shown that the appearance animation of the timer button is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 372 (A5), after the flash effect EF401 is erased, the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed. Button timer notice display BTM1 displays a timer display of "10:00" indicating the time together with a button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136, and the timer advance effect (button timer advance effect) starts. I am informing you. That is, this effect example suggests that the button effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown starts. In this production example, the appearance animation of the timer button is always performed when the button timer notice production is performed, but the appearance animation of the timer button is not performed when the button timer notice production is performed. It may or may not be done. Further, although the appearance animation of the timer button is performed, another advance notice effect may be started without starting the button timer advance notice effect. Further, in this effect example, the countdown is started after the timer display is temporarily stopped and displayed as "10:00", but the timer display is not temporarily stopped and the button timer notice effect is displayed. It may be configured to start the countdown when it starts.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A6), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 shows “09:99”.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A7), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a state in which the shaking fluctuation display is performed is shown. .. Further, the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates "00:01".

Then, as shown in FIG. 372 (A8), when the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased and the button icon emits light as shown in FIG. 372 (A9). The effect EF402 is displayed around the button icon, and the IN animation of the operation display is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 372 (A10), after the effect EF402 is erased, a button icon is placed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 372 (A11) to 372 (A12). Move towards.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A13), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this production example, it is announced that the button production will be started in this way. In this production example, when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the button production is started after the IN animation of the operation display is performed, but the IN animation is not performed. The button effect may be started. Further, in this production example, the IN animation of the operation display is started from the state shown in FIG. 372 (A9), but the production shown in FIGS. 372 (A9) to (A10) starts the IN animation. It is a prior notification for attention, and the actual IN animation may have a configuration starting from FIG. 372 (A11). Further, the start timing of the IN animation of the operation display is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set at an appropriate timing. Further, the mode of the IN animation is not limited to that shown in this production example, and other types of IN animation described above or the IN animation shown in the following example may be adopted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A14), the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed to change to the button image 136a, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a to produce a button effect. Notifies that the notice has been started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has been started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started. In this effect example, when the button effect is performed with respect to the button timer advance notice effect, if the mode of the effect button 136 is, for example, the default mode (light emission in blue), the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode. In the case of the red button mode (light emission in red), the button image 136a is displayed in the red display mode. In this case, when the button image 136a is displayed in the red display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. Further, the light emitting mode of the effect button 136 and the display mode of the button image 136a may not match. For example, the effect button 136 may emit light in red, whereas the button image on which the character's pattern is drawn may be displayed, or the effect button 136 may emit light in white. , The button image 136a may be displayed in red (the red button image 136aR described later may be displayed). Further, for example, the effect button 136 emits light in red, while the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed, or the effect button 136 emits light in white, whereas the red button image 136aR emits light. It may be displayed and a highly reliable advance notice effect may be performed due to the inconsistency of the effect. Further, the light emitting mode of the effect button 136 and the display mode of the displayed button image 136a may always correspond to each other, and the effect may be produced. For example, when the effect button 136 emits red light, it is red. When the button image 136aR is displayed and the effect button 136 emits light in red, the button image may be displayed in a character pattern.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A15), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (A16), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A17) displays a display on the right side of the display screen. A character of the lord holding a placard with the words "Chance" has appeared, showing that a notice is being given. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect being performed and the countdown of the timer display being "00:00", the button effect is started, and the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect. , It is shown that a certain production (in this production example, a preview production in which the character of the lord appears) is being performed. The notice by displaying the character of the lord holding this placard is less reliable than the notice by displaying the background image including the spirit character CLA shown in FIG. 373 (A14) described later. For example, the reliability of the jackpot may change depending on the characters on the placard, and in addition to "chance", "super hot" or "iron plate" may be displayed. The reliability of the jackpot may be different even if the notice is displayed. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the advance notice effect is performed, but when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, the notice effect is performed. The advance notice effect may not be performed, it may be performed, and it may or may not be performed. In addition, a notice other than the notice by displaying the character of the lord holding the placard may be given. For example, even if a notice is given by displaying a background image including the spirit character CLA. Good. Further, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the advance notice effect may not occur. In this case, for example, only the button erasing animation in which the button image 136a is erased may be performed, or the display mode may be such that the button erasing animation is not performed and is erased in one frame.

In FIG. 372 (A18), the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that the super reach (SP reach) production of the VS swordsman reach is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 17 (27) and later are performed.

In this production example, when the timer display in the button timer advance notice production is "00:00" in FIG. 372 (A8), the button production is started after the IN animation is performed, but the IN animation is omitted. After the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A8) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A14) may be started suddenly, or the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A9) may be suddenly started. Even if the production shown in 372 (A14) starts, I will bear it.

FIG. 373 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 373 (A1) to 373 (A14) show a state in which the initial value of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is longer than the initial value of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 372. Note that FIG. 373 (A1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 372 (A4).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A1), the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. In the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 373 (A1), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 372, the initial value of the timer display is "60:00", and 60 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Then, it is suggested that the button production is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A2), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 shows “59:99”. After that, in this production example, one pseudo-continuous production is performed, and two variations of the decorative symbol are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A3), it is shown that the second pseudo continuous effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 373 (A4), the third variation display of the decorative symbol based on the second pseudo-continuous production is started. Therefore, "x3" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen to that effect. The countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 continues even while the above-mentioned effect is being performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 373 (A4), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is "21: 28 ”is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a state in which the shaking fluctuation display is performed is shown. .. Further, the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates "00:01".

Then, as shown in FIG. 373 (A6), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed and the IN animation of the operation display is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 373 (A7), after the effect EF402 is erased, a button icon is placed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 373 (A8) to (A9). Move towards.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A10), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A11), the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed to change to a button image, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image, and the button is displayed. It informs that the notice by the production has started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the timer advance notice effect has been started. Here, in this effect example, the red button image 136aR is displayed instead of the default button image 136a in which the button image is displayed. That is, in this production example, in the IN animation of the operation display, the display mode of the button icon is the default display mode, but it is changed to the button image 136a which is the default display mode at the timing when the button image is displayed. It is shown that the red button image 136aR in the upgraded mode is displayed. In the IN animation of the operation display, the display mode of the button icon may be changed to the display mode of the red button. Further, in the operation display IN animation, the display mode of the button icon may be displayed in the default display mode and may not change to the display mode of the red button. Further, in this effect example, when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the display of the button icon may be changed to the display mode of the red button. The timing at which the display mode of the button icon changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the red button is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be an appropriate timing. Further, the button icon may be displayed in the display mode of the red button at the start of the display of the button timer notice display BTM1. In addition, the display mode of the red button has a lower frequency of appearance than the default display mode, and the red button is displayed when the button icon or button image (red button image 136aR) is displayed in the display mode of the red button. It may be possible to make it easier to finally stop and display the jackpot symbol mode than when the button icon or button image is not displayed in the display mode of. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started. In this effect example, when the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer notice effect is a certain time or more (for example, "60:00" or more), the red button image 136aR is always displayed. Alternatively, the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, may be displayed, but the red button image 136aR may be displayed more easily.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A12), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 373 (A13), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A14) displays a background image including the spirit character CLA. A highly reliable notice display of the jackpot is performed. As described above, in this effect example, the button effect is started as a result of the timer advance effect being performed and the countdown of the timer display is "00:00", and the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect. It is shown that a certain effect (in this effect example, a background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed) is being performed. In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the advance notice effect is performed, but when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, the advance notice effect is performed. The advance notice may not be performed, it may be performed, and it may or may not be performed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 372 (A18) and later are performed. In this effect example, even if the length of the initial value of the timer display is different, a certain effect to be executed may be the same effect. For example, the initial value of the timer display is "30:00". When the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect started after the timer display countdown is completed, the background image including the spirit character CLA may be displayed, and the initial value of the timer display is "60:00". Therefore, the background image including the spirit character CLA may be displayed even when the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect started after the timer display countdown is completed. Further, when the lengths of the initial values of the timer display are different, the same effect may be performed as a certain effect, or the same effect may not be performed.

In this production example, the button timer notice display BTM1 in which the initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 372 (A5) is "10:00" is the initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 373 (A1). Is configured to start the countdown earlier than the button timer notice display BTM1 where is "60:00", but the countdown is not limited to this, for example, the initial timer display. The button timer notice display having a value of "10:00" and the button timer notice display having an initial value of "60:00" may start counting down at the same time, or the initial value of the timer display is "60". After the countdown of the button timer notice display of ": 00" starts, the countdown of the button timer notice display whose initial value of the timer display is "10:00" may start, or the initial value of the timer display is "60". After the countdown of the button timer notice display which is ": 00" is completed and becomes "00:00", the countdown of the button timer notice display whose initial value of the timer display is "10:00" is completed and "00". It may be ": 00" (for example, when the initial value of the timer display is "60:00" and the timer display of the button timer notice display is "02:00", the initial value of the timer display is "10:00". The countdown of the button timer notice display may start, or the initial value of the timer display is "60:00". The countdown of the button timer notice display is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00". After that, the countdown of the button timer notice display in which the initial value of the timer display is "10:00" may start.), And the countdown of the button timer notice display in which the initial value of the timer display is "60:00". The countdown of the button timer notice display in which the initial value of the timer display is "10:00" is started after the start of, and both countdowns may be completed at the same time to become "0:00".

FIGS. 373 (B1) to (B5) show another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 373 (A1) to (A14). Note that FIG. 373 (B1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 372 (A4).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (B1), the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. In the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 373 (B1), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 373 (A1), the display mode of the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 is not the default display mode but the display mode of the red button. It has become. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button icon is displayed in the display mode of the red button on the button timer notice display BTM1 when the button timer notice effect is started. Further, the initial value of the timer display is "60:00", which suggests that the button effect is started 60 seconds after the countdown starts. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 373 (B2) to (B5) are performed. The effect performed in the period of FIGS. 373 (B2) to (B5) is the same as the effect performed in the period shown in FIGS. 373 (A2) to (A10), but during this period as well. , Button timer notice display The display mode of the button icon in BTM1 is the display mode of the red button. After the effect shown in FIG. 373 (B5) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 373 (A11) and later is performed.

In this effect example, the display mode of the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM1 is left as the red button display mode, and then the red button image 136aR is displayed in the button effect. , The display mode of the button icon may change (rank down) from the display mode of the red button to the default display mode, and the display mode of the button icon is the display mode of the red button at the start of the button timer notice effect. However, when the button effect is performed, the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, may be displayed and the effect may be performed to lower the rank. Further, when the button icon is the default display mode or the red button display mode, the lever icon may be changed to a lever icon imitating the shape of the lever 136V to be ranked up.

FIGS. 373 (C1) to (C3) show another effect pattern of the IN animation of the operation display shown in FIGS. 373 (A8) to (A10). Note that FIG. 373 (C1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 373 (A7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (C1), it is shown that another effect pattern (combined IN animation) of the IN animation of the operation display is started. When this combined IN animation is started, the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed in semi-transparent appears from the left end of the display screen, and the button icon 136qR of the default display mode also displayed in translucent. Appears from the right edge of the display screen and is shown moving toward the center of the display screen so that they are close to each other. In this production example, either the red button image 136aR or the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed by displaying both the red button display mode and the default display mode as the semi-transparent button icon. It suggests that it may be done. Even during the display of the combined IN animation shown in this production example, the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed as it is in the production icon display area DIS, and the button timer notice display BTM1 is deleted after the combined IN animation is completed. May be good. Further, it is suggested that the red button image 136aR is confirmed to be displayed by displaying both the red button display mode and the button image 136a in the default display mode as the button icon to be displayed semi-transparently. It may be confirmed that the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (C2), the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed semi-transparently and the button icon 136qR of the default display mode displayed semitransparently are in the center of the display screen. It is shown that they overlap with. Then, as shown in FIG. 373 (C3), the bursting effect EF403 is displayed, and thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 372 (A14) and later and the effects shown in FIGS. 373 (A11) and later are performed.

FIG. 374 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 374 (A1) to 374 (A15) show that the button timer advance notice effect is being performed during the execution of SP reach. Note that FIG. 374 (A1) is, for example, an effect continuing from FIG. 17 (26).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. In addition, the button timer advance notice effect described in the present embodiment may show an effect example showing a state of being executed only during the decorative symbol variation display or an effect example showing a state of being executed only during the SP reach. However, it goes without saying that it may be executed even in a scene other than the decorative symbol variation display or the SP reach, for example, even during the normal reach production or the big hit game. It may be performed, or it may be executed straddling the jackpot game and the symbol variation display performed before and after the jackpot game.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A2), the flash effect EF401 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the appearance animation of the timer button is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 374 (A3), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. The button timer notice display BTM1 displays a timer display of "10:00" indicating the time together with the button icon above the button icon, and notifies that the button timer notice effect is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A4), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 shows “09:99”.

After that, the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A5), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is set to "00:01". Shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 374 (A6), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased and the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed around the button icon. , The operation display IN animation is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 374 (A7), after the effect EF402 is erased, a button icon is placed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 374 (A8) to (A10). Move towards.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A11), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this production example, it is announced that the button production will be started in this way.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A12), the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed to change to the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, and the remaining time display meter MT is below the button image 136a. Is displayed, notifying that the advance notice by the button effect has started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has been started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A13), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 374 (A14), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A15) shows a cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI3b) of the lord. Is displayed. In this effect example, since the initial value of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is as short as "10:00", it is shown that an effect with low reliability is likely to occur. Here, the cut-in image CI3b in this production example is a weak cut-in image, a red cut-in image (not shown) (a cut-in image having a display mode different from the weak cut-in image and the gold cut-in image), and a gold cut-in image CI3. There are three types, the weak cut-in image, the red cut-in image, and the gold cut-in image, and the reliability of the jackpot increases in that order. A cut-in image suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed may be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 17 (33) and later are performed.

FIGS. 374 (B1) to 374 (B11) show another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect performed during the execution of SP reach. Note that FIG. 374 (B1) is, for example, an effect continuing from FIG. 374 (A2).

As shown in FIG. 374 (B1), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. The button timer notice display BTM1 displays a timer display of "60:00" indicating the time together with the button icon above the button icon, and notifies that the button timer notice effect is started. That is, in this production example, a time longer than the initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 372 (A3) is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B2), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 shows “59:99”.

After that, the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B3), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is set to "00:01". Shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 374 (B4), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is deleted. After that, the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed around the button icon, and the IN animation of the operation display is started. After that, after the effect EF402 is erased, the button icon moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 374 (B5) to (B6).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B7), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this production example, it is announced that the button production will be started in this way.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B8), the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed to change to a button image, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image, and the button is displayed. It informs that the notice by the production has started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has been started. Here, in this effect example, the red button image 136aR is displayed instead of the default button image 136a in the display mode of the button image, and the appearance of the rank up is shown. In this effect example, since the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is "60:00", it is shown that the red button image 136aR is easily displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B9), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 374 (B10), as shown in FIG. 374 (B11), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and The Senryobako accessory 224H operates, the light guide plate IL emits light, and the effect image may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is notified that it will be a big hit. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is terminated, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H return to their initial positions, respectively. , The effect image fades out in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the button timer advance effect being performed and the countdown of the timer display being "00:00", the button effect was started, and the effect button 136 was operated in this button effect. As a result, it is shown that a certain effect (in this example, the effect by the movement of the character) is being performed. In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the advance notice effect is performed, but when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, the notice effect is performed. The advance notice may not be performed, it may be performed, and it may or may not be performed. It goes without saying that this can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described below. In addition, when the red button image 136aR is displayed after the button timer notice display is displayed, it may be a big hit, it may be a loss, or it may be a big hit. There may be. In addition, the button timer notice display itself may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed. In such an effect, the content of the effect is determined by an effect lottery according to the result of the winning / failing determination.

FIGS. 374 (C1) to (C2) show another effect pattern of the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (B8) to (B9). Note that FIG. 374 (C1) is, for example, an effect continuing from FIG. 374 (B7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (C1), the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed to change to the button image 136a, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a to produce a button effect. Notifies that the notice has been started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has been started. Here, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 374 (B8), and the default button image 136a is displayed. In this effect example, the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is "60:00", but the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, may be displayed instead of the red button image 136aR. It is shown. As described above, even if the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is "60:00", the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, may be displayed. Further, when the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is "60:00", the red button image 136aR may be displayed without fail. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (C2), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (B10) and later are performed.

FIG. 375 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

In FIGS. 375 (A1) to (A8), unlike the effects shown in FIGS. 373 (A1) to (A14), the display mode of the button timer notice display in the button timer notice effect is not a button icon but a lever icon. It is shown that it is. Note that FIG. 375 (A1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 372 (A4).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A1), it is shown that the lever timer notice display LTM1 is displayed instead of the button timer notice display BTM1 after the flash effect EF401 is erased. Lever timer notice display LTM1 displays a timer display of "60:00" indicating the time together with a lever icon imitating the shape of the effect lever 136V above it, and the timer advance effect (lever timer advance effect) starts. I am informing you. That is, this effect example suggests that the lever effect is started 60 seconds after the countdown starts. The lever timer advance notice effect by the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 is an effect in which the button timer advance notice effect is ranked up, and the case where the lever timer advance notice effect is executed is a big hit than the case where the button timer advance notice effect is executed. It is easy to confirm the design mode. After that, the same effect as in FIGS. 373 (A2) to (A5) is performed except that the button timer notice display BTM1 is changed to the lever timer notice display LTM1. Even if the effect lever 136V is operated while the lever timer notice display LTM1 is displayed, a certain effect is not started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A2), the lever timer notice display LTM1
It is shown that the timer display in is set to "00:00". Then, the effect EF402 in which the lever icon emits light is displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 375 (A3), after the effect EF402 is erased, the lever icon moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 375 (A4).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A5), the lever icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A6), the enlarged lever icon is reduced and displayed to change to the lever image 136V, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the lever image 136V. , Notifies that the notice by lever production has started. That is, it is notified that the lever effect by the timer advance notice effect has been started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started. In this production example, the lever image 136Va is configured to be always displayed when the countdown of the timer display in the lever timer notice display LTM1 is completed, but it may not be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A7), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V is reached. After that, when the effect lever 136V is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 375 (A8), for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 373 (A14) and later is performed.

In this effect example, when the lever image 136Va is displayed in the button effect, the jackpot symbol mode is finally more likely to be stopped and displayed than when the button image 136a is displayed. .. Further, when the lever image 136Va is displayed, it may be a big hit, it may be a big hit, or it may be a big hit or a miss.

FIGS. 375 (B1) to (B4) show another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 372 (A4) to (A12). Note that FIG. 375 (B1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 372 (A3).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (B1), a large-sized flash effect EF404 is displayed in the center of the display screen, indicating that the appearance animation of the timer button is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 375 (B2), after the flash effect EF404 is erased, the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed in the center of the display screen. The button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed in a larger size than that shown in FIG. 372 (A5). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed at the position where the button effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed, and the size is substantially the same as that of the button image 136a. Here, the size of the button image 136a and the image of the button on the button timer notice display BTM1 may be the same size or different sizes. Further, the display position of the button image 136a and the display position of the button timer notice display BTM1 may be the same, substantially the same, or different. Also in this effect example, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 displays a timer display of "10:00" indicating the time together with a button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136, and the button timer advance notice effect starts. Is being notified. That is, this effect example suggests that the button effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown starts. After that, in the button timer notice display BTM1, the timer display countdown starts.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (B3), it is shown that the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates “00:01”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 375 (B4), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", for example, after that, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A13) or later or the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A14) or later. The production shown in is performed. In this effect example, after the timer display is set to "00:00", for example, "PUSH!" Is displayed, suggesting that the operation of the effect button 136 is valid. You may try to do it. At that time, the remaining time display meter MT may or may not be displayed. Further, the display such as "PUSH!" Or "Press!" And the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed without displaying the button image 136a.

FIGS. 375 (C1) to 375 (C4) show a state in which the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 372 (A4) to 372 (A12) is temporarily suspended. Note that FIG. 375 (C1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 372 (A7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (C1), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is switched from "00:01" to "pause", and the timer display countdown is paused (paused). It is shown that it is doing. At this time, it is shown that the middle symbol is displayed to move the pseudo-continuous symbol from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed. The low-speed movement of the pseudo-continuous symbol is continued until the same figure (C3), but the button timer notice display BTM1 is not erased during this period, and the button timer notice display BTM1 continues with the timer display displaying "pause". Is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 375 (C3), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 375 (C4), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continue" is displayed. It is notified that the first pseudo-continuous production will be started. Then, for example, after another pseudo-continuous production is performed, for example, the production shown in FIG. 373 (A5) and thereafter is performed. In this effect example, the countdown is temporarily stopped when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed such as "00:01" indicating that there is a remaining time until the button effect is started. The state of stopping is shown, but when the timer display shows that there is no remaining time until the button effect starts, such as "00:00", the display is switched to "Pause". , The effect of delaying the start of the button effect may be performed.

FIGS. 375 (D1) to (D2) show another effect pattern of the button effect shown in FIGS. 373 (A11) to (A12). Note that FIG. 375 (D1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 373 (A10).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (D1), when the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed, the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time display meter MT instead of the red button image 136aR. It is shown. That is, in this production example, it is shown that a button image (deca button image 136aL) having a display mode different from the button icon displayed on the timer button notice display BTM1 is displayed. It should be noted that the display of the big button image 136aL may be suggested by the IN animation of the display by the button icon and / or the operation display. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started. In this production example, the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed more easily when the big button image 136aL is displayed than when the red button image 136aR is displayed. When 136aR is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be stopped and displayed in the end, and there is no difference in the ease of stopping and displaying the jackpot symbol mode regardless of which of the two is displayed. May be good. Further, when the deca button image 136aL is displayed, for example, a character display that promotes an operation such as "PUSH!" Or "Press!" May be performed, and the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (D2), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 373 (A13) and later are performed.

In FIGS. 375 (E1) to 375 (E3), an effect pattern in which a timer is added is performed in the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 372 (A5) to (A8). It is shown. Note that FIG. 375 (E1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 372 (A8).

In this production example, when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 375 (E1), the timer display displayed above the button icon on the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed. It is changed to "No !!" and the end of the timer display countdown in the button timer notice display BTM1 is denied. That is, it is suggested that the timer of the timer display is added and the countdown continues. In addition, another notice effect may be performed to suggest the addition of the timer of the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1. Further, in this production example, the timer display is changed to "No !!" after the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", but the button timer notice display BTM1 is used. The timer display is changed to "No !!" when a display indicating that there is time remaining until the button effect is started is displayed, such as "00:01". May be good.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (E2), the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed in high-speed fluctuation, and then, as shown in FIG. 375 (E3), a new timer is displayed. That is, in this production example, an addition of 45 seconds is performed, and as a result, it is shown that "45:00" is displayed as a timer display. It should be noted that this additional effect may be performed only once or may be performed a plurality of times. Further, the timer is not limited to the addition of the timer, and the timer may be reduced by the same effect during the countdown of the timer display. When the timer display becomes "00:00", the addition effect is performed and the timer display is displayed. In some cases, an additional effect may be performed during the countdown. In that case, the additional effect may be different or the same depending on the timing at which the additional effect is performed. Further, in that case, the reliability of the jackpot may differ or may be the same depending on the timing at which the additional effect is performed. After that, the timer display countdown is continuously performed, and then, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 373 (A5) and later are performed.

FIG. 376 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 376 (A1) to 376 (A5) are different effect patterns following FIG. 372 (A12), and show how the lever effect is performed in place of the lever icon when the button icon is enlarged. .. Note that FIG. 376 (A1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 372 (A12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (A1), when the button icon is enlarged and displayed in the IN animation of the operation display, it is shown that the button icon is replaced with the lever icon. That is, it is shown that the button timer advance notice effect has been upgraded to the lever timer advance notice effect. In this way, an animation that changes to another type of operation display may be performed in the middle of the IN animation of the operation display. In this production example, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed at a position overlapping the lever image 136Va and the remaining time display meter MT, but the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed so as to overlap the lever image 136Va and the remaining time display meter MT. It may be displayed so as to overlap. Further, the variable icon h0 may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the lever image 136Va or the remaining time display meter MT, or may be displayed at a position where it overlaps. It goes without saying that this can be applied to both the production examples described so far and the production examples described below.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (A2), the enlarged lever icon is reduced and displayed to change to the lever image 136V, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the lever image 136V. , Notifies that the notice by lever production has started. That is, it is notified that the lever effect by the lever timer advance notice effect has been started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (A3), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V is reached. After that, when the effect lever 136V is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 376 (A4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (A5) displays a background image including the spirit character CLA. It is shown that a highly reliable notice display of the jackpot is being performed. Even if the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V, the background image including the spirit character CLA is not displayed, but may be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 372 (A18) and later are performed.

FIG. 376 (B) shows another mode in which the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 376 (A1) to 376 (A3) is upgraded to the lever timer advance notice effect. FIG. 376 (B) is an effect following FIG. 372 (A13). After the button icon is enlarged and displayed and the IN animation of the operation display is completed, the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed on the button image 136a. It is shown that the button image 136a is replaced with the lever image 136V at the timing of the change. In this way, the lever image 136Va may be displayed as the operation display after the IN animation of the operation display is completed. After the effect shown in FIG. 376 (B) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 376 (A3) and later is performed.

FIGS. 376 (C1) to 376 (C3) show another effect pattern of the IN animation (combined IN animation) of the operation display shown in FIGS. 373 (C1) to (C3). Note that FIG. 376 (C1) is, for example, an effect continuing from FIG. 372 (A9).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (C1), it is shown that another effect pattern of the combined IN animation is started. When the combined IN animation in this production example is started, the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the production lever displayed in semi-transparent appears from the left end of the display screen, and the default display mode also displayed in translucent. It is shown that the button icon 136qR appears from the right end of the display screen and is heading toward the center of the display screen so as to be close to each other. In this effect example, either the lever image 136V or the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed by displaying both the display mode of the effect lever and the display mode of the default effect button as the button icon to be displayed semi-transparently. Suggests that may be displayed. It is confirmed that the lever image 136Va is displayed by displaying both the button icon 136qL in the display mode of the effect lever and the button icon 136qR in the default display mode as the button icons to be displayed semi-transparently. It may be suggested that the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (C2), the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the effect lever displayed semi-transparently and the button icon 136qR of the default display mode displayed semi-transparently are in the center of the display screen. It is shown that they overlap with. Then, as shown in FIG. 376 (C3), the bursting effect EF403 is displayed, and thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 372 (A14) and later and the effects shown in FIGS. 376 (A2) and later are performed.

FIGS. 376 (D1) to (D6) show another effect pattern of the IN animation (combined IN animation) of the operation display shown in FIGS. 373 (C1) to (C3). Note that FIG. 376 (D1) is, for example, an effect continuing from FIG. 372 (A9).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (D1) shows that another effect pattern of the combined IN animation has started. When the combined IN animation in this production example is started, the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed semi-transparently appears from the left end of the display screen, and the default display mode also displayed semi-transparently. The button icon 136qR appears from the right end of the display screen, and the button icon 136qC of the display mode of the effect lever, which is also displayed semi-transparently, appears from the upper end of the display screen so that they are close to each other. It is shown that it is heading toward the center. In this effect example, the lever image 136Va and the red button image 136aR are displayed as the semi-transparent button icons of the effect lever display mode, the red button display mode, and the default effect button display mode. And any of the button images 136a in the default display mode may be displayed. In this way, in the combined IN animation, three or more lever images and button images may be displayed to suggest that the operation display of any one of these display modes is displayed. In this effect example, there are two types of operation devices, the effect button 136 and the effect lever 136V, but it can also be applied to the case where there are three or more types. It is confirmed that the lever image 136Va is displayed by displaying three semi-transparent button icons: the display mode of the effect lever, the display mode of the red button, and the display mode of the default effect button. It may be suggested that the red button image 136aR is displayed, or the button image 136a in the default display mode may be displayed. It may be fixed. Further, it may be confirmed that two images of the lever image 136Va, the red button image 136aR, and the button image 136a in the default display mode are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (D2), the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed semi-transparently, the button icon 136qR of the default display mode displayed semitransparently, and semitransparently. It is shown that the button icon 136qC of the display mode of the displayed effect lever overlaps with the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 376 (D3), the bursting effect EF403 is displayed.

Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (D4) shows that the red button image 136aR is displayed. In addition, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A14) or later or the effect shown in FIG. 376 (A2) or later may be performed. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (D5), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 376 (D6), for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 376 (A5) and thereafter is performed.

FIGS. 376 (E1) to 376 (E4) show another effect pattern of the IN animation (combined IN animation) of the operation display shown in FIGS. 373 (C1) to (C3). Note that FIG. 376 (E1) is, for example, an effect continuing from FIG. 372 (A9).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (E1) shows that the combined IN animation has started. When this combined IN animation is started, the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed in semi-transparent appears from the left end of the display screen, and the button icon 136qR of the default display mode also displayed in translucent. Appears from the right edge of the display screen and is shown moving toward the center of the display screen so that they are close to each other. In this production example, either the red button image 136aR or the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed by displaying both the red button display mode and the default display mode as the semi-transparent button icon. It suggests that it may be done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (E2), the button icon 136qL of the display mode of the red button displayed semi-transparently and the button icon 136qR of the default display mode displayed semitransparently are in the center of the display screen. It is shown that they overlap with. Then, the bursting effect EF403 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 376 (E3), in this production example, the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time display meter MT instead of displaying the button image corresponding to the button icon in any of the display modes displayed in semi-transparent manner. The state of being displayed is shown. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the operation display (deca button image 136aL), which is not suggested in the combined IN animation, is displayed. In this case, a lever image 137V different from the button icon of any display mode displayed semi-transparently may be displayed. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (E4), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 376 (A5) and later are performed.

The combination of button icons displayed in the combined IN animation executed in this production example is not limited to the above, for example.
(1) In the combination of the button icon in the default display mode and the button icon in the default display mode, the button image 136a or the deca button image 136aL in the default display mode may be displayed, and the button image 136a may be displayed without fail. Alternatively, the button image 136a may be displayed and the big button image 136aL may be displayed.
(2) In the combination of the button icon in the default display mode and the button icon in the display mode of the red button, the button image 136a or the red button image 136aR in the default display mode may be displayed, and the red button image 136aR is always displayed. The button image 136a may be displayed, the red button image 136aR may be displayed, the button image 136a may be displayed, or the big button image 136aL may be displayed. It may be possible to display the red button image 136aR and the big button image 136aL.
May be displayed, the button image 136a may be displayed, the big button image 136aL may be displayed, and the red button image 136aR may be displayed.
(3) In the combination of the button icon in the default display mode and the button icon in the display mode of the big button, the big button image 136aL may be displayed without fail, and the case where the button image 136a is displayed and the case where the big button image 136aL is displayed are displayed. There may be cases. (4) In the combination of the button icon in the default display mode and the button icon in the display mode of the effect lever, the lever image 136V may be displayed without fail, and the button image 136a and the lever image 136V are displayed. In some cases.
(5) In the combination of the button icon in the display mode of the red button + the button icon in the display mode of the red button, the red button image 136aR or the deca button image 136aL may be displayed, and the red button image 136aR may always be displayed. Then, the red button image 136aR may be displayed, the big button image 136aL may be displayed, the red button image 136aR may be displayed, the big button image 136aL may be displayed, and the lever image 136Va may be displayed. It may be displayed.
(6) In the combination of the button icon in the display mode of the red button + the button icon in the display mode of the big button, the red button image 136aR or the big button image 136aL may be displayed, and the red button image 136aR may always be displayed. , The big button image 136aL may be displayed without fail, the red button image 136aR may be displayed, and the big button image 136aL may be displayed.
(7) In the combination of the button icon in the display mode of the red button + the button icon in the display mode of the effect lever, the red button image 136aR or the lever image 136Va may be displayed, and the red button image 136aR may always be displayed. However, the lever image 136Va may be displayed without fail, and the red button image 136aR may be displayed or the lever image 136Va may be displayed.
(8) In the combination of the button icon in the display mode of the big button + the button icon in the display mode of the big button, the big button image 136aL may be displayed without fail, and the case where the big button image 136aL is displayed and the lever image 136Va are displayed. There may be cases.
(9) In the combination of the button icon in the display mode of the deca button + the button icon in the display mode of the effect lever, the deca button image 136aL may always be displayed, the lever image 136Va may always be displayed, or the deca button image 136aL. May be displayed and the lever image 136Va may be displayed.
(10) In the combination of the button icon of the display mode of the effect lever + the button icon of the display mode of the effect lever, the lever image 136Va may be displayed without fail, and the case where the lever image 136Va is displayed and the deca button image 136aL are displayed. It may be done. (99) Further, a decal lever image having a size larger than that of the lever image 136Va may be displayed.
(100) The above describes the combination of two semi-transparent button icons, but when three or more semi-transparent button icons appear, the display mode of the displayed button image or lever image is appropriately set. be able to.
(101) Further, when the type of the button icon appearing from the left end portion and the type of the button icon appearing from the right end portion are interchanged, the mode and appearance ratio of the button image and the lever image appearing may be different.
Further, in the present embodiment, the reliability of the jackpot increases in the order of lever image 136Va> big button image 136aL> red button image 136aR> button image 136a (default), but the reliability is not limited to this.

FIG. 377 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 377 (A1) to 377 (A6) show the contents of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is operated during the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1. Note that FIG. 377 (A1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (A1), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. The button timer notice display BTM1 displays a timer display of "30:00" indicating the time together with the button icon above the button icon, and notifies that the button timer notice effect is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (A2), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 shows “29:99”.

After that, the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (A3), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is "19:57". Shown.

Then, at this timing, when the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 377 (A4), the area around the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 emits white light as shown in FIG. 377 (A5). The light emitting effect EF405, which is a display of the mode, is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) to notify that the effect button 136 has been operated. At this time, the display color of the light emitting effect EF405 may be different. In this case, for example, it may function as a big hit notice for the symbol variation display being executed. Specifically, for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be increased in the order of emission color of red>green>blue> white. Further, the emission color of the emission effect EF405 may be only one type (for example, only white), and the emission color may not be changed even if the effect button 136 is operated. Further, the effect button 136 may be displayed in a color other than white (for example, starting from blue) from the first operation. Further, in the first operation of the effect button 136, the display may always start from white (default color). Further, the step of the emission color may be skipped in the middle, and for example, the emission may be made in white and then in red. Further, the emission color may be changed in the order of white>blue>green> red. In addition, it may emit light in a color with a confirmed jackpot (for example, rainbow color), for example, it may emit light in rainbow color after emitting light in red, or emit light in white. It may later emit light in rainbow colors. Further, the chance button lamp 138 may be made to emit light in a color matching the light emitting color of the light emitting effect EF405, or the game board lamp 442 or the game underframe lamp 452 may be made to emit light in a color matching the light emitting color of the light emitting effect EF405. May be made to emit light. In this case, the emission color of the emission effect EF405 and the emission color of the various lamps may be different, may be the same, or may be the same or different. When the emission color of the light emission effect EF405 and the emission color of various lamps are the same or different, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher or different when they are the same than when they are different. The reliability of the jackpot may be higher than the case where is the same. Further, the sound effect corresponding to the emission color of the emission effect EF405 may be output from the speaker 120. Further, the effect movable body 224 may be operated by the operation corresponding to the light emission color of the light emission effect EF405. Further, when the emission color of the emission effect EF405 is a color of a certain rank or higher (for example, red or higher (red or rainbow color)), other effect means (for example, speaker 120, effect movable body 224, various lamps 442). , 452 may be performed. In this case, the emission color of the emission effect EF405 and the emission color of various lamps may be different, may be the same, or may be different from the case where they are the same. There may be cases. When the emission color of the emission effect EF405 and the emission color of various lamps are the same or different, the reliability of the jackpot is higher when they are the same than when they are different. It may be higher, or the reliability of the jackpot may be higher in different cases than in the same case. Further, when the light emitting effect EF405 emits light in a color that confirms the jackpot, other production means (for example, The effect (for example, the output of the jackpot confirmed sound) by the speaker 120) may be performed. This is applicable to both the effect examples described so far and the effect examples described later. Not to mention.

After that, when the display time of the light emitting effect EF405 elapses, the light emitting effect EF405 is erased as shown in FIG. 377 (A6). After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (A5) and later are performed.

FIGS. 377 (B1) to 377 (B7) show the contents of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed during the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1. Note that FIG. 377 (B1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 377 (A6).

FIG. 377 (B1) shows that the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed during the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1. FIG. 377 (B1) shows how the effect button 136 is operated 10 times by repeated hits.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (B2), it is shown that the emission color of the emission effect EF405 is changing from white to blue. Even when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the emission color of the emission effect EF405 may not change from white to blue. That is, whether or not the emission color of the light emission effect EF405 changes is determined by the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display being executed, and it can be said that the reliability of the jackpot increases as the emission color changes. is there.

FIG. 377 (B3) shows how the effect button 136 is further repeatedly pressed. FIG. 377 (B3) shows that the effect button 136 is operated 10 more times by repeated hits.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (B4), it is shown that the emission color of the emission effect EF405 is changing from blue to green. In this case as well, the emission color of the emission effect EF405 may not change from blue to green.

FIG. 377 (B5) shows how the effect button 136 is further repeatedly pressed. FIG. 377 (B5) shows that the effect button 136 is operated 10 more times by repeated hits.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (B6), it is shown that the emission color of the emission effect EF405 is changing from green to red. In this case as well, the emission color of the emission effect EF405 may not change from green to red.

After that, when the display time of the light emitting effect EF405 elapses, the light emitting effect EF405 is erased as shown in FIG. 377 (B7). After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (A5) and later are performed.

As described above, in this effect example, the jackpot notice is given by changing the emission color of the light emission effect EF405 according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed while the timer display countdown on the button timer notice display BTM1 is being executed, and the display color of the light emitting effect EF405 is changed according to the number of operations. Instead of, a long press operation may be performed to change the display color of the light emission effect EF405 according to the long press time. Further, the emission color of the effect button 136 may be changed along with the change of the display color of the light emission effect EF405 depending on the number of operations of the effect button 136. Further, the number of operations of the effect button 136 until the emission color changes may be determined by an effect lottery. For example, when the effect button 136 emits white light, it changes to blue only by operating the effect button 136 once. In some cases, it may turn blue after 10 operations. Further, the number of operations of the effect button 136 until the emission color changes may be always constant. Further, the number of operations that triggers the color change of the light emitting effect EF405 may change depending on whether the color is finally changed to red or blue. Further, the light emitting mode of other lamps (for example, a part or all of the frame lamp, the chance button lamp 138, and a part or all of the lamps of the game board) may be changed according to the operation of the effect button 136. Further, the light emission effect EF405 and the light emission color of the lamp may be matched. Further, the emission color of the emission effect EF405 and the emission color of the lamp may be different.

Further, in this effect example, the jackpot notice is given by the change in the light emission color of the light emission effect EF405. For example, in the button effect executed as a result of the button timer notice effect, it is executed by the button operation. The emission color of the emission effect EF405 may indicate that the effect is a more reliable effect. For example, when the light emitting color of the light emitting effect EF405 changes to red, a notice by an accessory may be given by a button operation in the button effect.

FIGS. 377 (C1) to 377 (C8) show another pattern of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is operated during the countdown of the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1. Note that FIG. 377 (C1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 377 (A4).

When the effect button 136 is operated during the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (C1) has a flame so as to cover the entire button timer notice display BTM1. It is shown that the promotion animation in which the effect EF406 is displayed has started. The promotion animation may not be performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 377 (C2), when the flame effect EF406 is erased, the display mode of the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM1 changes from the default display mode to the red button display mode. It is shown. That is, this effect can be said to be a back button effect that raises the rank of the button timer notice display BTM1. In this effect example, a period for accepting the operation of the back button is set, and if the effect button 136 is not operated within the period for accepting the operation of the back button, the display mode of the button icon does not change. Alternatively, the display mode of the button icon may change when the back button operation acceptance period ends, the display mode of the button icon may change during the IN animation of the operation display, or the IN animation ends. The red button image 136aR may be replaced at the timing when the button image 136a is displayed.

After that, the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (C3), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is set to "00:01". Shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 377 (C4), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is deleted. After that, the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed around the button icon, and the IN animation of the operation display is started. After that, after the effect EF402 is erased, the button icon moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 377 (C5) to (C7).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (C8), the button icon in the display mode of the red button is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this production example, it is announced that the button production will be started in this way. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (B8) and later are performed. When the effect EF402 turns red, the display color of the button icon on the button timer notice display BTM1 may also be upgraded to red. Further, if the effect button 136 is further operated after the display mode of the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 is changed to the display mode of the red button, the display mode of the button icon may be further changed, for example. The display mode of the red button may change to the display mode of the gold button or the display mode of the rainbow button. Here, in addition to the default display mode and the red button display mode, the button timer notice display BTM1 button icon display mode displayed in the present embodiment includes, for example, a gold button display mode and a rainbow button display mode. It may be displayed.

In FIGS. 377 (D1) to 377 (D3), the button timer advance notice display is started during the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1, and the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect to display the button timer advance notice. An example of an effect in which BTM1 ranks up is shown. Note that FIG. 377 (D1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 377 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 377 (D1), the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 is continuously counted down, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (D1), the button timer notice display is performed. The timer display in BTM1 indicates "20:24".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (D2), a state in which a small-sized button image 136a is displayed on the left side of the button timer notice display BTM1 and a remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a is shown. .. That is, it is notified that the button effect is started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (D3), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated in the manner shown in FIG. 377 (A4), for example, the effect shown in FIG. 377 (C1) or later may be performed (the button timer notice display BTM1 is ranked up). is there. If the effect button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button timer notice display BTM1 may not be ranked up, or the rank may be raised when the operation valid period has elapsed. You may be asked, or you may make sure that the rank is upgraded when the operation validity period has elapsed.

Further, when the button effect is started, instead of FIGS. 377 (D2) to (D3), as shown in FIG. 377 (E), "PUSH! ”Is displayed to facilitate the operation of the effect button 136. That is, the button timer notice display BTM1 itself may prompt the operation of the effect button 136. In this case, the light emitting mode of the effect button 136 may be changed (for example, light is emitted in the light emitting mode of blinking white) to encourage the operation of the effect button 136.

FIG. 378 is a diagram showing stepwise the effect pattern in which the mini game is executed in the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 378 (A1) to 378 (A18) show that the type of the button image (or lever image) finally displayed during the execution of the button timer advance notice effect is selected by the mini game. .. Note that FIG. 378 (A1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 374 (A2).

When the flash effect EF401 is erased, as shown in FIG. 378 (A1), the mini-game button timer notice display MTM1 is displayed to direct the start of the mini-game. That is, when the mini-game button timer notice display MTM1 is displayed and the mini-game is started, as shown in FIG. 378 (A1), a lever icon imitating the effect lever 136V is first displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 378 (A2), the button icon in the display mode of the red button is displayed so as to overlap the lever icon. After that, as shown in FIG. 378 (A3), the button icon in the default display mode is displayed so as to overlap the button icon in the display mode of the red button. In this way, the button image (lever image) displayed as a result of the button timer advance notice display BMT1 is selected from a plurality of types according to the result of the mini game. It should be noted that the button timer notice display such as roulette hold or selection hold may be displayed. In this case, for example, it may be determined by the operation of the player, or it may be determined arbitrarily at a certain timing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A4), a timer display of "30:00" indicating the time is displayed on the upper part of the mini game button timer notice display MTM1, and further, the mini game button timer notice display MTM1 The characters "PUSH !!" are displayed on top of each other, indicating that the effect button 136 is being pressed repeatedly. The operation validity period is started after that.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A5), the timer display countdown has started, and it is shown that the timer display on the mini-game button timer notice display MTM1 indicates "29:99". .. The start timing of the operation valid period and the countdown timing of the timer display on the mini-game button timer notice display MTM1 may be the same, the start timing of the operation valid period may be earlier, or the timer display may be displayed. The countdown start timing may be earlier.

After the operation valid period is started, the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed in the manner shown in FIG. 378 (A6), and when the effect button 136 is operated a specified number of times (for example, 10 times), FIG. 378 (A7) is shown. As shown in, in the mini game button timer notice display MTM1, the character of the lord appears, and among the three button icons (lever icon, button icon of red button display mode, button icon of default display mode), As a result of slashing the button icon in the default display mode and performing the button timer advance notice effect, an effect of denying the appearance of the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, may be performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (A8), in the mini-game button timer notice display MTM1, the button icon in the default display mode is deleted, and the button icon in the red button display mode appears on the foreground side. The countdown of the timer display is continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (A8), the timer display shows "24:55".

Further, as shown in FIG. 378 (A9), when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed and the effect button 136 is further operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), FIG. 378 (A10) shows. As shown, in the mini-game button timer notice display MTM1, the character of the lord appears again, and this time, the red button display mode of the two button icons (lever icon, red button display mode button icon) As a result of slashing the button icon of the button and performing the button timer notice effect, an effect of denying the appearance of the red button image 136aR may be performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (A11), in the mini-game button timer advance notice display MTM1, the button icon in the display mode of the red button is deleted, and the lever icon appears on the frontmost side. The countdown of the timer display is continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (A11), the timer display shows "12:31". If only the lever icon remains as the final form of the mini-game, the characters "PUSH !!" are hidden as if the mini-game was successful, but they may remain displayed.

After that, the countdown of the timer display on the mini game button timer notice display MTM1 is continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A12), the timer display on the mini game button timer notice display MTM1 is "00". : 01 "is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (A13), when the timer display on the mini-game button timer notice display MTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased and the effect EF402 in which the lever icon emits light is placed around the button icon. It is displayed and the IN animation of the operation display is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (A14), after the effect EF402 is erased, the lever icon moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 378 (A15).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A16), the lever icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A17), the enlarged lever icon is reduced and displayed to change to the lever image 136V, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the lever image 136V. , Notifies that the notice by lever production has started. That is, it is notified that the lever effect by the button timer advance notice effect has been started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started. Even if the effect button 136 is not operated or the lever icon is not reached due to insufficient number of operations, the lever image 136Va may be displayed when the timer display becomes "0:00". For example, if the timer display is set to "00:00" while the button icon is displayed, the IN animation of the operation display is not the IN animation by the lever image shown in FIGS. 378 (A14) to 378 (A15). Alternatively, the lever image 136V may be displayed after the display shown in FIG. 378 (B5) is performed in the IN animation shown in FIGS. 378 (B2) to 378 (B4). Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated or the lever icon is not reached due to insufficient number of operations, the lever image 136Va is not displayed and the display corresponding to the displayed button icon is displayed. It may be.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A18), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V is reached. After that, when the effect lever 136V is operated, for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 374 (B11) and later is performed.

In FIGS. 378 (B1) to 378 (B5), another effect pattern is performed in which the type of the button image (or lever image) finally displayed during the execution of the button timer advance notice effect is selected by the mini game. It shows how it is. Note that FIG. 378 (B1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 378 (A6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (B1), the timer display is set to "00:" without being able to slash the button icon in the default display mode even though the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed. It is shown that it became "00". As a result, three button icons (lever icon, button icon in red button display mode, button icon in default display mode) remain in the mini game button timer notice display MTM1, and one of these remains as a button timer notice effect. It is notified that the operation display will be displayed as a result of the above. Actually, when it is determined by the effect lottery that the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, is displayed as the operation display, the button icon in the default display mode no matter how many times the effect button 136 is operated. Is not erased. Further, when it is determined by the effect lottery that the red button image 136aR is displayed as the operation display, the button icon in the default display mode may be deleted, but the button icon in the red button display mode is Not erased. Even if the lever image 136Va or the red button image 136aR is displayed as an operation display by the effect lottery, the button icon in the default display mode may not be deleted.

Then, when the timer display on the mini-game button timer notice display MTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased, the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed around the button icon, and the IN animation of the operation display starts. Will be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (B2), after the effect EF402 is erased, as shown in FIGS. 378 (B3) to (B4), the button icon in the default display mode among the three button icons. Moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (B5), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this production example, it is announced that the button production will be started in this way. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (A12) and later are performed.

FIG. 379 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

In FIGS. 379 (A1) to 379 (A5), the button timer notice display BTM1 is ranked up while the timer display countdown in the button timer notice display BTM1 is being executed. Note that FIG. 379 (A1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 374 (A2). Further, since the effects shown in FIGS. 379 (A1) to (A3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 377 (A1) to (A3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (A4), it is shown that the promotion animation in which the flame effect EF406 is displayed so as to cover the entire button timer notice display BTM1 is started. In addition, although the promotion animation is performed, there may be a case where the promotion animation of Gase is performed in which the rank of the button timer notice display BMT1 is not upgraded. Further, the display mode of the promotion animation may suggest the ease of rank-up of the button timer notice display BTM1. For example, when the red promotion animation in which the flame effect EF406 is red is performed, the promotion animation may be displayed. , Button timer notice display BTM1 may be made to rank up without fail. In addition, a fanning effect may be performed to encourage whether or not to step up when the promotion animation is performed. In addition, the button timer notice display BTM1 may be upgraded by another notice effect. Needless to say, this can be applied to the timer advance notice effect described so far and the timer advance notice effect described below.

After that, as shown in FIG. 379 (A5), when the flame effect EF406 is erased,
Button timer notice display It is shown that the display mode of the button icon in the BTM1 is changed from the default display mode to the red button display mode. In addition to the display mode of the red button, there may be a case where the display mode of the lever icon is stepped up. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 377 (C3) and later are performed. After the button icon display mode changes from the default display mode to the red button display mode, the display mode may be upgraded to the lever timer notice display, or the button timer notice display in the default display mode may be changed to the lever timer notice display. You may rank up to.

In this production example, when the display mode of the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM1 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the red button, the display mode of the button icon is changed from the default display mode. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed more easily than when it is not present.

FIGS. 379 (B1) to 379 (B3) show how the button timer notice display BTM1 is further upgraded while the timer display countdown in the button timer notice display BTM1 is being executed. Note that FIG. 379 (B1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 379 (A5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (B1), the timer display countdown is continuously performed in the button timer notice display BTM1, and at the timing shown in FIG. 379 (B1), the timer display is "11:57". Is shown. Further, the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM1 is a display mode of a red button.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (B2), the flame effect EF406 is displayed so as to cover the entire button timer notice display BTM1, and it is shown that the second promotion animation is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 379 (B3), when the flame effect EF406 is erased, the display mode of the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM1 changes from the display mode of the red button to the lever icon. It is shown. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 378 (A12) and later are performed.

FIGS. 379 (C1) to 379 (C4) indicate that the button timer notice display BTM1 is being prepared after the display is started and before the timer display countdown starts, and the button timer notice effect is started. It shows that it is giving a notice. Note that FIG. 379 (C1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (C1), the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. In this effect example, the timer display of "10:00" indicating the time is not displayed together with the button icon, and the display of "preparing" suggesting that the button timer notice effect is started is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (C2), a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since "preparing" is displayed on the button timer notice display BTM1 is shown. At this time as well, the button timer notice display BTM1 continues to display "preparing".

After that, when the start timing of the button timer advance notice effect is reached, as shown in FIG. 379 (C3), the timer display is switched from the "preparing" display to the "30:00" display indicating the time, and then the countdown is started. To be started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (C4), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 shows “29:99”. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (A5) and later are performed.

In this production example, "preparing" is displayed instead of the time display in the timer display in order to suggest that the timer notice effect is started. For example, FIGS. 379 (C1) to the same. Instead of the effect shown in FIG. (C2), the characters "STANDBY" may be displayed as shown in FIGS. 379 (D1) to (D2). Needless to say, it also applies to the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below that display a notice (in preparation display) to suggest that the timer notice effect is started. can do.

FIGS. 379 (E1) to 379 (E4) show how the button timer notice display BTM1 ranks up while the button timer notice display BTM1 is displaying that preparations are being made. Note that FIG. 379 (E1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 379 (C2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (E1), a promotion animation is started in which the flame effect EF406 is displayed so as to cover the entire button timer notice display BTM1 in which "preparing" is displayed. The situation is shown. In addition, although the promotion animation is performed, there may be a case where the promotion animation of Gase is performed in which the rank of the button timer notice display BTM1 is not upgraded. Further, the display mode of the promotion animation may suggest the ease of rank-up of the button timer notice display BTM1. For example, when the red promotion animation in which the flame effect EF406 is red is performed, the promotion animation may be displayed. , Button timer notice display BTM1 may be made to rank up without fail. In addition, a fanning effect may be performed to encourage whether or not to step up when the promotion animation is performed. In addition, the button timer notice display BTM1 may be upgraded by another notice effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 379 (E2), the display mode of the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM1 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the red button, and it is shown that the rank is improved.

After that, when the start timing of the button timer advance notice effect is reached, the timer display is switched from the "preparing" display to the "30:00" display indicating the time, as shown in FIG. 379 (E3), and then the countdown is started. To be started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (E4), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 shows “29:99”. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 377 (C3) and later are performed.

In this production example, "preparing" is displayed on the button timer notice display BTM1 to indicate the start of the button timer notice effect. For example, FIGS. 379 (F1) to (F2). ), The button timer notice display BTM1 may swing up and down to notify the player that the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is about to start. As a result, the player may have a feeling of expectation that the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect will be started. It should be noted that a fake button timer advance notice effect in which the timer display is not counted down even if the rocking animation is performed may be performed, and when the rocking animation is performed, the timer display countdown is always performed. You may be asked. After the effect shown in FIG. 379 (F2) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 379 (C3) and later is performed. Needless to say, it is also possible to apply the swing animation of the embodiment described so far and the mode of the production example described below.

FIG. 380 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 380 (A1) to 380 (A3) show an effect of switching to the timer display when the button timer notice display BTM1 is performing the display being prepared. Note that FIG. 380 (A1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 379 (C2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (A1), the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed, and in this button timer notice display BMT1, "preparing" is displayed above the button icon. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (A1), a character CHM of Princess Chibi with a 10-ton iron mallet appears, and it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is not hit.

FIG. 380 (A2) shows the state after the character CHM of Princess Chibi hits the button timer notice display BTM1. The number of times the character CHM of Princess Chibi hits the button timer notice display BTM1 may be once or multiple times, or may be rarely hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 380 (A3), the exploding effect EF407 is displayed so as to cover the entire button timer notice display BTM1. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 379 (C3) and later are performed. Alternatively, when the effect EF407 disappears, there may be a case where the button timer notice display BTM1 also disappears.

FIGS. 380 (B1) to 380 (B5) show how the display position of the button timer notice display BTM1 is changed before the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 starts. Note that FIG. 380 (B1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 379 (C2).

In this production example, when the button timer notice display BTM1 changes from the "preparing" display to the timer display, a moving animation in which the button timer notice display BTM1 moves to the center of the display screen is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 380 (B1), when the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 moves to the center of the display screen, as shown in FIG. 380 (B2), the button icon is enlarged and displayed above it. A timer display of "30:00" indicating the time is displayed, and then the countdown is started. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 moves and displays before the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 starts. Further, in this effect example, the size is substantially the same as the button image 136a as the operation display, but the timer display may be counted down to the size shown in FIG. 380 (B1) without being enlarged. Then, the button icon may be displayed in a size different from that of the button image 136a, and the timer display may be counted down.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (B3), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 shows “29:99”.

After that, the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (B4), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is set to "00:01". Shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 380 (B5), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", for example, after that, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 374 (A11) or later or the effect shown in FIG. 374 (A12) or later. The production shown in is performed.

Further, in FIG. 380 (B1), when the button timer notice display BTM1 moves and displays in the center of the display screen, the display of "preparing" is deleted. However, as shown in FIG. 380 (C1), " The button timer notice display BTM1 is moved to the center of the display screen while displaying "Preparing", and then, as shown in FIG. 380 (C2), the button timer notice display BTM1 is enlarged and displayed, and then FIG. 380 (B2). ) The following effects may be performed. In this case, the display of "preparing" may be deleted during the movement display of the button timer notice display BTM1. Further, the display position of the button timer notice display BTM1 may be changed without moving the button timer notice display BTM1.

FIGS. 380 (D1) to 380 (D16) show a plurality of button timer notice displays, and "preparing" is displayed in each of them. Note that FIG. 380 (D1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 379 (C1). Needless to say, this effect example can also be applied to an effect example in which the preparation display is performed in each of the plurality of timer notice displays described so far.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D1), the flash effect EF401 is displayed above the button timer notice display BTM1 in which "preparing" is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. It is displayed, and it is suggested that the button timer notice display is further displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 380 (D2), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM2 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. The newly displayed button timer notice display BTM2 also displays "preparing" instead of the timer display, and announces that the button timer notice effect will start.

After that, when the start timing of the first button timer notice effect is reached, as shown in FIG. 380 (D3), the button timer notice display BTM1 displayed below the two button timer notice displays displayed above and below. The timer display switches from the "preparing" display to the "10:00" display indicating the time, and then the countdown is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D4), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 shows “00:99”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 380 (D5), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is deleted and the operation display IN animation is deleted as shown in FIG. 380 (D6). Is started. At this time, the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light before the start of the IN animation may be displayed around the button icon. After that, as shown in FIGS. 380 (D7) to (D9), the button icon related to the button timer notice display BTM1 moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at this time, the button timer notice display BTM2 moves downward during the IN animation of the button timer notice display BTM1 and moves to the position where the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D10), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, the IN animation of the operation display ends, and the button effect is announced to start.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D11), the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed to change to the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, and the remaining time display meter MT is below the button image 136a. Is displayed, notifying that the advance notice by the button effect has started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has been started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D12), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 380 (D13), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D14) displays the weak cut-in image CI3b, and then the figure. As shown in 380 (D15), the weak cut-in image CI3b is erased. At this time, the second button timer notice display BTM2 is still displayed as "preparing".

After that, when the start timing of the second button timer notice effect is reached, as shown in FIG. 380 (D16), the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM2 is "30:00" indicating the time from the "preparing" display. The display switches to the display, and then the countdown starts. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (B3) and later are performed. The timer display countdown of one button timer notice display may be started while the timer display countdown of one button timer notice display is being performed, or the timer display countdown of one button timer notice display may be started. When the countdown of the timer display in the other button timer notice display is completed while the operation is being performed, the animation of moving downward while performing the countdown of the timer display in the one button timer notice display is performed. Alternatively, the countdown may be interrupted and moved downward. Further, regardless of the interruption / movement of the countdown of the timer display, the balance of the remaining time displayed on the timer display after the movement may be adjusted. It goes without saying that this can be applied to both the production examples described so far and the embodiments described below. In addition, the symbol variation display may end without the preparation display starting the countdown, and the next symbol variation display may be straddled.

FIG. 381 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 381 (A1) to 381 (A15) show another pattern of the effect shown in FIGS. 380 (D1) to (D16), and the second button corresponding to the second button timer advance notice effect. It shows how the lever timer notice display LTM2 appears in place of the timer notice display BTM2. In the first button timer notice display BTM1 and / or the second button timer notice display BTM2, the button icon of the red button display mode and the button icon of the deca button display mode are displayed instead of the button icon of the default display mode. May be done. Here, FIG. 381 (A1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 380 (D1). The effects shown in FIGS. 381 (A1) to 381 (A15) are shown in FIGS. 380 (D2) to 380 (D2), except that the second button timer notice display BTM2 is changed to the lever timer notice display LTM2. Since it is the same as D16), the description thereof will be omitted. Further, after the production of FIG. 381 (A15) is performed, for example, the production shown in FIGS. 378 (A12) and later is performed. In this case, the first button timer notice display BTM1 may be digested first, or the lever timer notice display LMT2 may be digested first. Further, the first button timer notice display BTM1 may be digested first, or the lever timer notice display LMT2 may be digested first. It goes without saying that this can be applied to both the production examples described so far and the production examples described below. Further, the symbol variation display may end without starting the countdown of the timer display while the preparation display is being performed, and the preparation display may be carried over to the next intervening symbol variation display. Needless to say, this also applies to the production examples described so far and to the production examples described below.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 381 (B1) to 381 (B10), another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect is shown, and the fuse in the bomb display is not the countdown of the timer display. It is shown that the timing of starting the button effect is notified by the display mode of. Note that FIG. 381 (B1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 205 (B1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (B1), it is shown that the button timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the bomb timer display BOMB is displayed with a fuse added, and the character BYM of the lord appears, and an animation (extension animation) is performed to extend the fuse. In this production example, a button icon is also displayed on the bomb timer display BOMB, suggesting that the button production is started when the bomb timer display BOMB explodes. After that, as shown in FIG. 381 (B2), the extension animation extends the squib of the bomb timer display BOMB, and then the extension animation is completed, and as shown in FIG. 381 (B3), the tip of the squib is ignited. Then, the button timer notice production is started. In the button timer advance notice effect in this effect example, the countdown effect is performed in such a manner that the fuse is shortened with the passage of time, so that the start timing of the button effect executed as a result of the button timer advance notice effect is determined. The length of the fuse is used for notification. As shown in FIGS. 381 (B3) to (B5), the countdown effect is performed until the fuse runs out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 381 (B5), when the squib disappears and the spark at the tip of the squib reaches the main body of the bomb timer display BOMB, as shown in FIG. After the explosion effect EF304 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern at the substantially center of the display screen, as shown in FIG. 381 (B7), the remaining time display meter MT together with the button image 136a, which is the default display mode. Is displayed, and it is notified that the notice by the button effect has started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has been started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (B8), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 381 (B9), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Characters are displayed large. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the notice display with the characters "Gekiatsu !!" is performed as a result of the button effect related to the button timer notice effect. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 16 (16) and later are performed.

Needless to say, this effect example can be applied to any of the timer notice effects using the bomb timer display BOMB described so far. Further, similarly to the example of the timer advance notice effect different from the button timer advance notice effect described later, the same can be applied to the case where the timer display BOMB of the bomb that does not suggest the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. .. In addition, the combination with the effects described so far can be appropriately performed.

FIG. 382 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 382 (A1) to (A9) show that a button timer advance notice effect is performed and a new button timer advance notice effect is started as a result of the button effect. Note that FIG. 382 (A1) is, for example, an effect continuing from FIG. 374 (A2). Further, the effect during the period from FIG. 382 (A1) to FIG. 382 (A5) is the same as the effect shown in FIGS. 374 (A3) to (A13), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 382 (A6) during the operation valid period of the effect button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (A7) is replaced with the button image 136a. The new button timer notice display BTM2 is displayed in the center of the display screen. The button timer notice display BTM2 is displayed in a larger size than that shown in FIG. 382 (A1). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM2 is displayed at the position where the button effect is performed and the button image 136a is displayed, and at a position substantially the same size as the button image 136a. .. Also in this effect example, the button timer advance notice display BTM2 displays a timer display of "30:00" indicating the time together with a button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136, and the button timer advance notice effect starts. Is being notified. In this production example, as a result of the button timer notice effect being performed and the button effect being performed, a new button timer notice display BTM2 is displayed and a new button timer notice effect is performed. Instead of the button timer notice display BTM2, for example, the timer notice display TM as shown in FIG. 201 may be displayed. Further, instead of the button timer advance notice effect, the result of the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 being counted down in the above-mentioned timer advance notice effect (further, after "Attention!" Is displayed), the timer advance notice effect (or the timer advance notice effect). Button timer notice effect) may be performed.

After that, the button timer notice display BTM2 displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is temporarily erased, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (A8), a flash of light is emitted at the lower right corner of the display screen. The effect EF401 is displayed, showing that the animation of the appearance of the timer button has started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 382 (A9), after the flash effect EF401 is erased, the erased button timer notice display BTM2 is displayed in a reduced size. The button timer notice display BTM2 displays a timer display of "30:00" indicating the time together with the button icon above the button icon, and notifies that the button timer notice effect is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (B3) and later are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 382 (B1) to 382 (B5) show that the button effect is started as a certain advance effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect. Note that FIG. 382 (B1) is, for example, an effect continuing from FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (B1), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display area, the timer advance notice effect is started. Timer notice display The timer display on TM1 displays "10:00", which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (B2), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 shows "09:99".

Then, as shown in FIG. 382 (B3), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the explosion effect EF407 is displayed on the display screen in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (B4). It is displayed in the center. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (B5), the enlarged button icon is displayed, and it is foretold that the button effect will be started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (A12) and later are performed.

In this production example, as a result of the timer notice production, a button effect is shown as a certain notice effect, but other notices (for example, "Ikuze!" Is displayed or "Geki" is displayed. "Hot!" May be displayed. Further, in this effect example, the button effect may always be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

Further, in this production example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", the explosion effect EF407 is displayed, and then the button icon is displayed. For example, FIG. 382 is shown. As shown in (B3), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 382 (C), the timer notice display TM1 pays attention to the notice instead of the timer display. The characters "Attention !!" to urge may be displayed. After the characters "Attention !!" are displayed, the button icon may be displayed so that the button effect always starts, or after the characters "Attention !!" are displayed, the button effect is displayed. It may or may not be started. After the effect shown in FIG. 382 (C) is performed, for example, the effect shown after FIG. 201 (A25), the effect shown after FIG. 382 (B4), and the effect shown after FIG. 382 (B5). Etc. are performed. In this case, the button effect may always be displayed, or the button effect may be displayed and the effect different from the button effect may be displayed.

Further, instead of displaying "Attention !!" shown in FIG. 382 (C), the effects shown in FIGS. 382 (D1) to (D2) may be performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 382 (B3), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 382 (D1), "I'm going" together with the display YMF of the face up of the lord. A balloon with the characters "!!" is displayed. At this time, "00:00" is still displayed on the timer notice display TM1, but at least a part of it is hidden by the balloon, which makes it difficult to see. The timer notice display TM1 may overlap the balloons so that the timer notice display TM1 can be visually recognized. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be deleted at the timing when the up display YMF of the lord's face and the balloon are displayed, or the up display YMF and the balloon of the lord's face may be deleted after the timer notice display TM1 is deleted. May be displayed. Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 382 (D1), a part of the timer notice display TM1 is covered with a balloon, but the entire timer notice display TM1 may be covered with a balloon. In addition, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden by the up display YMF of the lord's face. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (D2), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. After that, for example, the effects shown after FIG. 201 (A25), the effects shown after FIG. 382 (B4), the effects shown after 392 (B5), and the like are performed. In addition, when two or more effect displays are performed, the fact that one effect display overlaps with the other effect display is appropriately performed in the effect examples described so far and the effect examples shown thereafter. There is.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 382 (E1) to 382 (E4) show another display mode of the button timer notice display. Note that FIG. 382 (E1) is, for example, an effect continuing from FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (E1), the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. The button timer notice display BTM1 in this production example displays a timer display of "10:00" indicating the time together with the button icon superimposed on the button icon, and notifies that the button timer notice display starts. The display mode of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 382 (E1) can also be applied to an effect example in which another button timer advance notice effect is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (E2), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 shows "09:99".

After that, as shown in FIG. 382 (E3), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is deleted and the IN animation of the operation display is started. The IN animation may be performed while the timer display is displayed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 382 (F1) to 382 (F2) show another display mode of the button timer notice display. Note that FIG. 382 (F1) is, for example, an effect continuing from FIG. 374 (A3).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (F1), a state in which the button timer notice display BTM1 is enlarged and displayed is shown. After that, the timer display countdown starts. It should be noted that the case where the button timer notice display BTM1 is enlarged and displayed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed more easily than when the button timer notice display BTM1 is not enlarged and displayed. Further, the timing at which the button timer notice display BTM1 is enlarged and displayed is not limited to that shown in this production example, and can be performed at an appropriate timing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 382 (F2), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is deleted, the operation display is IN-animated, and then the default operation display is performed. The button image 136a, the red button image 136aR, the lever image 136V, or the deca button image 136aL, which is the display mode of the above, is displayed, and the button effect is started.

FIG. 383 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

383 (A1) to 383 (A3) show another display mode of the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIGS. 379 (C1) to (C3). Note that FIG. 383 (A1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (A1), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. In this production example, the timer display of "10:00" indicating the time is not displayed together with the button icon, and the display of "preparing" suggesting that the button timer advance notice production is started is made, and this "preparing" is displayed. Is displayed superimposed on the button icon. The effects shown in FIGS. 383 (A1) to 383 (A3) are shown in FIG. 379, except that the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 is superposed with the "preparing" display and the timer display. (C1
) -Since it is the same as the effect shown in the figure (C3), the description thereof will be omitted. After the effect shown in FIG. 379 (C3) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 382 (E2) and later is performed.

FIGS. 383 (B1) to (B3) show another display mode of the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIGS. 379 (C1) to (C3). Note that FIG. 383 (B1) is an effect continuing from FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (B1), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. In this production example, "preparing" is displayed above the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM1, and the timer display of "10:00" indicating the time is superimposed on the button icon. According to this effect example, it may be possible to easily grasp how many seconds the timer is while displaying the "preparing" display. Further, in this case, the number of seconds of the timer displayed on the button icon may be added or decreased while "Preparing" is displayed, or the button timer notice display BTM1 may be upgraded. .. Needless to say, such an effect can be applied to other examples of the effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (B2), a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since "preparing" is displayed on the button timer notice display BTM1 is shown. At this time as well, the button timer notice display BTM1 continues to display "preparing", and the timer display on the button icon remains "10:00".

After that, at the start timing of the button timer advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 383 (B3), the display of "preparing" is erased, and then the countdown is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 382 (E2) and later are performed.

FIGS. 383 (C1) to 383 (C3) show a state in which the countdown is not started immediately even if the timer display is displayed on the button timer notice display BTM1, and the preparation is being made. Note that FIG. 383 (C1) is, for example, an effect continuing from FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (C1), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. In this production example, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display above the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM1. In this production example, the countdown is not started for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the timer display is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (C2), it is shown that a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since "10:00" was displayed on the button timer notice display BTM1. At this time as well, the timer display remains "10:00". In the period in which the timer display is "10:00" and the display continues, for example, the various effects described above may be performed. For example, the button timer notice display BTM1 may be oscillated. You may. After that, the timer display countdown starts.

FIG. 383 (C3) shows a state in which 10 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (B5) and later are performed. As in this production example, counting down the timer display after a certain period of time has elapsed after the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed applies to both the production examples described so far and the production examples described below. It goes without saying that it is possible.

In FIGS. 383 (D1) to 383 (D8), the button timer advance notice effect is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol and continues until the transition to SP reach, and the button effect related to the button timer advance notice effect is displayed during SP reach. It shows how it is being done. Note that FIG. 383 (D1) is, for example, an effect continuing from FIG. 372 (A4).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D1), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. Button timer notice display BTM1 displays a timer display of "90:00" indicating the time together with a button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136, and the timer advance effect (button timer advance effect) starts. I am informing you. That is, this effect example suggests that the button effect is started 90 seconds after the countdown starts.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D2), the timer display countdown has started, and the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 shows “89:99”.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D3) is shown to shift to SP reach via the reach effect. At this time, the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 indicates "31:48". In this production example, the display color of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 changes at the timing shown in FIG. 383 (D3), but the display color may not change and may always be a constant color. Further, the display color of the timer display may be changed according to the background color, or may be changed according to the progress of the game. Further, by changing the display color of the timer display, the timer notice effect by the button timer notice display BTM1 may be increased. When the display color of the timer display is changed in a certain period to produce a chance-up effect of the timer advance notice effect, only a player who knows the timing of the chance-up effect may be able to enjoy the effect. is there.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D4) shows that the SP reach animation is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 383 (D4), when the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is deleted and the IN animation of the operation display is started as described above.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D5), the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed to change to the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, and the remaining time display meter MT is below the button image 136a. Is displayed, notifying that the advance notice by the button effect has started. That is, it is notified that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has been started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D6), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is shown. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 383 (D7), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D8). In this effect example, since the initial value of the timer display on the button timer notice display BTM1 is as long as "90:00", it is shown that a highly reliable effect can be easily produced. Here, a weak cut-in image or a red cut-in image may be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 17 (33) and later are performed. In addition, FIG.
It may follow the production example other than 7 (33).

FIGS. 383 (E1) to 383 (E7) show a state in which the button timer advance notice effect is performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. Note that FIG. 383 (E1) is, for example, an effect continuing from FIG. 372 (A3).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (E1), it is shown that the game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 and the hold is increased by one during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (E2), the flash effect EF401 is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and it is shown that the appearance animation of the timer button is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 383 (E3), it is shown that the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. Button timer notice display The BTM1 has a button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136 and a "preparing" display indicating that the process is being prepared is displayed above the button icon, foretelling the start of the button timer advance notice effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (E4), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The stop display is displayed in combination, and the state of shaking fluctuation is shown. At this time, the button timer notice display BTM1 is still displaying "preparing".

After that, in FIG. 383 (E5), it is shown that the final display is performed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (E6), it is shown that the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 has started. After that, when the start timing of the button timer advance notice effect is reached, the timer display is switched from the "preparing" display to the "10:00" display indicating the time, as shown in FIG. 383 (E7), and then the countdown is started. To be started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 372 (A6) and later are performed.

In this production example, an example is shown in which the symbol variation display is straddled while the button timer notice display BTM1 is displaying "preparing", but the symbol is displayed while the timer display is being counted down. It may straddle the variable display. In addition, it may follow other production examples.

According to the above description
"Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
Operation means [for example, effect button 136, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means in which an operation display [for example, display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 374 (A12)] may be displayed.
The operation display is a display indicating that the operation by the operation means is effective.
The display means is a means in which a timer display [for example, the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 374 (A3)] may be displayed.
The timer display is a display that announces the timing at which the operation display is displayed [for example, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 374 (A3) is 10 seconds after the timer display countdown starts. It is announced that the button production will start later],
The timer display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time until the display of the operation display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 374 (A3) to (A6), buttons. The timer notice display BTM1 counts down the timer display from the start of the countdown until it reaches "00:00", which indicates the timing when the button effect is started],
When the timer display becomes a certain display mode after the timer display is displayed (hereinafter, "the first case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 374 (A3) to (A6), the button timer" After the notice display BTM1 is displayed, the operation display may be displayed in the button timer notice display BTM1 when the timer display is "00:00", etc.] ".
When the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 374 (A12) to (A15), buttons. When the effect button 136 is operated after the image 136a is displayed, the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, etc.],
Even if the operating means is operated while the timer display is being displayed, the execution of the certain effect is not started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 377 (A1) to (A6), the button timer notice display BTM1 Even if the effect button 136 is operated during the countdown of the timer display, the weak cut-in image CI3b is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to enhance the effect by not overlooking the timing at which the operation display is displayed.

Here, the display means may be one in which only the operation display may be displayed, or may be one in which a display other than the operation display may be displayed. Further, the display means may be one in which the operation display is always displayed, or may be one in which the operation display may not be displayed.

Further, the operation display may indicate only that the operation by the operating means is effective, or may indicate other than that the operation by the operating means is effective. Further, the operation display may always indicate that the operation by the operating means is effective, or may not indicate that the operation by the operating means is effective. Further, the operation display is displayed before the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid starts, and the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid is started after the operation display is displayed. May be good.

Further, when an operation is performed during the operation valid period, the operation valid period may be configured to end (for example, one timer notice display is displayed for each push / button). If it is done, etc.). This means that the embodiments described above are also applicable to the embodiments described below.

Further, even if an operation is performed during the operation valid period, the valid period may not end until the preset operation valid period ends (for example, a plurality of operations valid period). Press repeatedly, press repeatedly, press and hold, etc.). This means that the embodiments described above are also applicable to the embodiments described below.

Further, even if the operation means is not operated before the end of the operation valid period, the display displayed according to the operation may be displayed. This means that the embodiments described above are also applicable to the embodiments described below.

In addition, when the decorative symbol is stopped display (or only the symbol is stopped display) and the hold display area, the resident display character (if displayed) is displayed, and the animation (for example, a movie including the model title) Etc.) may be displayed, and it may be configured so that the stop display of the decorative symbol, the hold display area, or the like is not displayed in the display sky of the animation demo.

Further, the display means may be one in which only the timer display may be displayed, or may be one in which a display other than the timer display may be displayed. Further, the display means may be one in which the timer display is always displayed, or may be one in which the timer display may not be displayed.

Further, the timer display may be foretelling only the timing at which the operation display is displayed, or may be foretelling a timing other than the timing at which the operation display is displayed. Further, the timer display may always give notice of the timing at which the operation display is displayed, or may not give notice of the timing at which the operation display is displayed.

Further, the timer display may change its display mode only according to the passage of time until the display of the operation display is started, or other than the passage of time until the display of the operation display is started. The display mode may change accordingly. Further, the timer display may be such that the display mode always changes according to the elapse of the time until the display of the operation display is started, or the time elapses until the display of the operation display is started. The display mode may not change depending on the situation.

Further, the operation display may be displayed only in the first case, or the operation display may be displayed in cases other than the first case. Further, in the first case, the operation display may always be displayed, and in the first case, the operation display may not be displayed.

Further, if the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, only a certain effect may be executed, or the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started. Then, an effect other than a certain effect may be executed. Further, when the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed without fail, and when the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, the operation means may be executed. Certain effects may not be performed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only when the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, or the operation means may be executed after the display of the operation display is started. A certain effect may be executed even when it is not operated.

Further, if the operation means is operated only after the display of the operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed, or the operation means may be executed even after the display of the operation display is started. When manipulated, certain effects may be performed.

Further, even if the operating means is operated while the timer display is displayed, it is not necessary to start only the execution of a certain effect, and even if the operating means is operated while the timer display is displayed, other than the certain effect. The production does not have to be started. Further, even if the operating means is operated while the timer display is displayed, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily start, and even if the operating means is operated while the timer display is displayed, the execution of a certain effect is executed. May be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect does not have to be started only when the operation means is operated while the timer display is displayed, and also when the operation means is not operated while the timer display is displayed. , The execution of a certain effect does not have to be started.

Further, even if the operating means is operated only while the timer display is displayed, the execution of a certain effect does not have to be started, and even if the operating means is operated other than while the timer display is displayed, a certain effect is produced. Execution does not have to start.

The timer display may be a display configured to include an image of the appearance of the operating means.

Further, the operation display may be a display configured to include an image of the appearance of the operation means.

Further, when the operation means is operated during the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid (operation valid period) while the operation display is being displayed, a certain effect may be executed.

Further, the operation display may always be displayed after the timer display is displayed.

Further, after the timer display is displayed, the operation display may or may not be displayed.

Further, the operation display may be a display prompting the operation of the operation means. According to this, it may be possible to improve the motivation to operate the operation means by not missing the timing when the operation display is displayed.

Further, the timer display may be in a certain display mode in connection with the start of the display of the operation display.

Further, "even if the operation means is operated while the timer display is displayed, the execution of the certain effect is not started" means that "the timer display is displayed with the certain display mode after the timer display is displayed". Even if the operating means is operated in the meantime, the execution of the certain effect is not started. "

The timing at which the operation display is displayed may include the IN animation part of the operation display.

In addition, "as the timer display, the first timer display [for example, the button timer notice display BTM1 or the like in which the initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 372 (A5) is" 10:00 "] may be displayed. ,
When the first time [for example, 10 seconds, etc.] elapses after the change of the display mode of the first timer display is started, the operation display may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, , As shown in FIG. 372 (A14), the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed, etc.],
As the timer display, a second timer display [for example, a button timer notice display BTM1 or the like in which the initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 373 (A1) is "60:00"] may be displayed.
When a second time [for example, 60 seconds or the like] elapses after the change in the display mode of the second timer display is started, the operation display may be displayed in the second display mode [for example. , As shown in FIG. 373 (A11), the red button image 136aR in the display mode of the red button is displayed, etc.],
The second time is longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the operation display may differ depending on the length of the timer, so that the player may be able to pay attention to both the timer display and the operation display.

Here, as the timer display, only the first timer display may be displayed, or as the timer display, a display other than the first timer display may be displayed. Further, the first timer display may always be displayed as the timer display, or the first timer display may not be displayed as the timer display.

Further, when the first time elapses after the change of the display mode of the first timer display is started, the operation display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or the first display mode may be displayed. When the first time elapses after the change of the display mode of the timer display is started, the operation display may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, when the first time elapses after the change of the display mode of the first timer display is started, the operation display may always be displayed in the first display mode, or the display of the first timer display may be displayed. When the first time elapses after the change of the mode is started, the operation display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the operation display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the first time has elapsed since the change in the display mode of the first timer display is started. The operation display may be displayed in the first display mode even when the first time has not elapsed since the change in the display mode of the timer display was started.

Further, as the timer display, only the second timer display may be displayed, or as the timer display, a display other than the second timer display may be displayed. Further, the second timer display may always be displayed as the timer display, or the second timer display may not be displayed as the timer display.

Further, when the second time elapses after the change of the display mode of the second timer display is started, the operation display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or the second display mode may be displayed. When the second time elapses after the change of the display mode of the timer display is started, the operation display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, when the second time elapses after the change of the display mode of the second timer display is started, the operation display may always be displayed in the second display mode, or the display of the second timer display may be displayed. When the second time elapses after the change of the mode is started, the operation display may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, the operation display may be displayed in the second display mode only when the second time has elapsed since the change in the display mode of the second timer display is started. The operation display may be displayed in the second display mode even when the second time has not elapsed since the change in the display mode of the second timer display was started.

Also, the second time may always be longer than the first time, the second time may be shorter than the first time, and the first time and the first time may be shorter. The two times may be the same.

When the first time elapses, the operation display of the second display mode may be displayed.

Further, when the first time elapses, the operation display of the first display mode may be displayed without fail.

In addition, the operation display may not be displayed even after the first time has elapsed.

Further, when the second time elapses, the operation display of the first display mode may be displayed.

Further, when the second time elapses, the operation display of the second display mode may be displayed without fail.

In addition, the operation display may not be displayed even after the second time has elapsed.

Further, "The jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the operation display is displayed in the second display mode than when the operation display is displayed in the first display mode. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the operation display of the second display mode is displayed.

Here, when the operation display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally confirmed and displayed, and when the operation display is displayed in the second display mode, the final display mode is used. In some cases, the out-of-order symbol mode may be definitely displayed. Further, when the operation display is displayed in the first display mode, the missed symbol mode may be finally fixedly displayed, and when the operation display is displayed in the first display mode, the final display mode may be displayed. The jackpot symbol mode may be displayed in a definite manner.

Further, "In the first timer display, the change of the display mode is started earlier than the second timer display after a certain symbol variation display is started [for example, in FIG. 372 (A5). The button timer notice display BTM1 in which the initial value of the timer display shown is "10:00" is larger than the button timer notice display BTM1 in which the initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 373 (A1) is "60:00". , The countdown starts soon after the symbol fluctuation display starts],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to give a variation to the timing of starting the change of the timer display.

Here, in the first timer display than in the second timer display, only the change in the display mode may be started earlier than the second timer display after a certain symbol variation display is started. However, the first timer display may be started earlier than the change in the display mode after a certain symbol variation display is started. Further, the first timer display may always start the change of the display mode earlier than the second timer display after a certain symbol variation display is started, and the first timer display may be started earlier than the second timer display. In the first timer display, after a certain symbol variation display is started, the change in the display mode may not be started earlier.

Further, the first timer display may start the change of the display mode earlier than the second timer display only after a certain symbol variation display is started, and the first timer display may start earlier than the second timer display. In the first timer display, the change in the display mode may be started earlier than after a certain symbol variation display is started.

It should be noted that the second timer display may start a part of the display mode change before the first timer display.

In addition, "a second operating means [for example, an effect lever 136V, etc.] is provided.
The operating means is a first operating means [for example, an effect button 136, etc.].
The operation display is the first operation display [for example, the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 374 (A12)].
The display means may display a second operation display [for example, display of the lever image 136V shown in FIG. 378 (A17)].
The second operation display is a display indicating that the operation by the second operation means is effective.
In the first case, the second operation display may be displayed [for example, after the lever timer notice display LTM1 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 375 (A1) to (A6). Lever timer notice display When the timer display in LTM1 becomes "00:00", the lever image 136Va is displayed, etc.],
When the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, the certain effect may be executed [for example, FIGS. 375 (A6) to (A8). ) And FIG. 373 (A14), if the effect lever 136V is operated after the lever image 136V is displayed, a background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to surprise the player who was paying attention to the timer display, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this game table, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension until the operation display is displayed, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, the display means may display only the second operation display, or may display a display other than the second operation display. Further, the display means may be one in which the second operation display is always displayed, or may be one in which the second operation display may not be displayed.

Further, the second operation display may only indicate that the operation by the second operation means is effective, or also indicates other than that the operation by the second operation means is effective. It may be. Further, the second operation display may always indicate that the operation by the second operation means is effective, or may not indicate that the operation by the second operation means is effective. It may be one.

Further, in the first case, only the second operation display may be displayed, and in the first case, a display other than the second operation display may be displayed. .. Further, in the first case, the second operation display may always be displayed, and in the first case, the second operation display may not be displayed.

Further, if the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, only a certain effect may be executed, or the display of the second operation display may be executed. If the second operating means is operated after it has been started, something other than a certain effect may be executed. Further, if the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed without fail, or after the display of the second operation display is started. When the second operating means is operated in, a certain effect may not be executed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only when the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, or the display of the second operation display may be executed. A certain effect may be executed even in cases other than the case where the second operating means is operated after the start of.

While the timer display is being displayed, the first operation display may always be displayed after a certain period of time until the operation display is displayed.

Further, the second operation display may be a display configured to include an image of the appearance of the second operation means.

Further, the second operation display may be a display prompting the operation of the second operation means. According to this, since there is a possibility that the player is prompted to operate the second operating means, it may be possible to pay attention to the timer notice with a sense of tension until the operation display is displayed.

Further, "The case where the second operation display is displayed in the first case is finally more than the case where the first operation display is displayed in the first case. Is easy to confirm,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the second operation display will be displayed in the first case.

Here, when the second operation display is displayed in the first case, the jackpot symbol loan may be finally confirmed and the second operation display is displayed in the first case. In that case, the out-of-order symbol mode may be finally displayed. Further, when the first operation display is displayed in the first case, the missed symbol mode may be finally confirmed and displayed, or when the first operation display is displayed in the first case. May finally display the jackpot symbol mode in a definite manner.

In addition, "in the first case, after the display of the second operation display is started, the period during which the operation of the second operation means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as" second operation valid period "". ) Is started [For example, as shown in FIGS. 375 (A1) to (A6), after the lever timer notice display LTM1 is displayed, the timer display on the lever timer notice display LTM1 is set to "00:00". In that case, after the lever image 136V is started to be displayed, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, etc.],
During the second operation valid period, the certain effect is not started even if the first operation means is operated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 376 (A2) to (A5), the effect lever 136V. The background image including the spirit character CLA is not displayed even if the effect button 136 is operated during the operation validity period of.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to prevent confusion by preventing the player from performing an effect by an erroneous operation.

Here, in the first case, only the second operation valid period may be started after the display of the second operation display is started, and in the first case, the display of the second operation display may be started. A period other than the second operation validity period may be started after is started. Further, in the first case, the second operation valid period may be always started after the display of the second operation display is started, and in the first case, the display of the second operation display may be started. The second operation validity period may not be started after it is started.

Further, in the first case, the second operation valid period may be started only after the display of the second operation display is started, and in the first case, the display of the second operation display may be started. The second operation validity period may be started other than after it is started.

Further, only in the first case, the second operation valid period may be started after the display of the second operation display is started, and in cases other than the first case, the second operation may be started. The second operation validity period may be started after the display of the display is started.

Further, in the second operation valid period, even if the first operation means is operated, only a certain effect does not have to be started, and in the second operation valid period, the operation of the first operation means is performed. Even if there is, it is not necessary to start the production other than a certain production. Further, in the second operation valid period, a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started even if the first operation means is operated, and in the second operation valid period, the operation of the first operation means is performed. Even if there is, a certain production may be started.

Further, only in the second operation valid period, a certain effect may not be started even if the first operation means is operated, and the first operation may be performed in a period other than the second operation valid period. Even if the means is operated, a certain effect may not be started.

The second operation valid period may be a period in which only the operation of the second operating means is valid. According to this, even a player who has prepared for the operation of the first operation means in advance may be able to keep his / her mind until the operation display is displayed.

Further, it may be configured so that the operation becomes effective when the operation of the first operating means is performed during the period during which the operation of the second operating means is valid (the second operation valid period).

In addition, "a reaction display [for example, the light emitting effect EF405 shown in FIG. 377 (A5)] may be displayed in response to an operation of the operating means during the display of the timer display [for example, FIG. As shown in 377 (A3) to (A5), if the effect button 136 is operated while the button timer notice display BTM1 is being displayed, the light emission effect EF405 is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to allow some time before the operation display is displayed.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to improve the motivation to operate the operating means.

Here, depending on the operation of the operation means while the timer display is displayed, only the reaction display may be displayed, or the operation means is operated while the timer display is displayed. Depending on the situation, a display other than the reaction display may be displayed. Further, the reaction display may always be displayed according to the operation of the operating means while the timer display is displayed, or the reaction depending on the operation of the operating means while the timer display is displayed. The display may not be displayed.

Further, the reaction display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the operating means while the timer display is being displayed, or the operation means may be displayed while the timer display is being displayed. Depending on the situation, the reaction display may be displayed.

Further, the reaction display may be displayed depending on the operation of the operation means only while the timer display is displayed, or the operation means may be operated while the display other than the timer display is displayed. Depending on the situation, the reaction display may be displayed.

Here, the reaction display may change the display mode of the timer display itself, or may change the display mode of some display other than the timer display.

The timer display may be configured to prompt the operation of the operating means.

Further, the operation display may be displayed separately from the timer display.

Moreover, the reaction display may be by the back button.

Further, "The reaction display is a display performed by changing the display mode of the timer display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 377 (A5), the light emitting effect EF405 has a display mode of the button timer notice display BTM1. Displayed in a changing mode, etc.],
The reaction display is a display different from the display in the display mode according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed [For example, the light emitting effect EF405 shown in FIG. 377 (A5) is a button timer notice. Display BTM1 is a different display from the timer display countdown display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to give variation to the display of the timer display.

Further, "The timer display is shown in the third display mode [for example, FIG. 379 (A1)" during the period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. Button timer notice display BTM1 including button icon of default display mode] to fourth display mode [for example, button timer notice display BTM1 including button icon of red button display mode shown in FIG. 379 (A5)] Display mode of the button icon during the countdown of the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 as shown in FIGS. 379 (A2) to (A5). Has changed from the default display mode to the red button display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the display mode may change during the display of the timer display, so that the timer display may be noticed even during the period until the operation display is displayed.

Here, the timer display may change only from the third display mode to the fourth display mode during the period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. A display mode other than the third display mode to the fourth display mode during a period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. May also change. Further, the timer display always changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode during the period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. Alternatively, the display mode may not change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode during the period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. There may be.

Further, the timer display may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode only during the period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. The display mode may be changed from the third display mode to the fourth display mode even during a period other than the period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. It may change.

The timer display may be displayed in the fourth display mode from the beginning.

In addition, "when the timer display changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode, it is better than when the timer display does not change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode. Finally, the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the timer display changes to the fourth display mode.

Here, when the timer display changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally fixedly displayed, and the timer display may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode. When the display mode is changed to, the out-of-order symbol mode may be finally displayed. Further, when the timer display does not change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode, the missed symbol mode may be finally fixedly displayed, and the timer display may be changed from the third display mode to the third display mode. If the display mode of 4 is not changed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, "the display means may display a notice display [for example, a" preparing "display displayed above the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 379 (C1)". And
The notice display is a display for notifying that the timer display will be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the timer display is displayed.

Here, the display means may be one in which only the notice display may be displayed, or may be one in which a display other than the notice display may be displayed. Further, the display means may be one in which the notice display is always displayed, or may be one in which the notice display may not be displayed.

Further, the notice display may be a notice only that the timer display is displayed, or may be a notice other than the display of the timer display. Further, the notice display may always give a notice that the timer display will be displayed, or may not give a notice that the timer display will be displayed.

The timer display may always be displayed after the notice display is displayed.

In addition, the timer display may or may not be displayed after the notice display is displayed.

Further, the notice display may be a display including an image of the appearance of the operating means.

Further, the notice display may be a notice regarding the running symbol change display (the change notice).

Further, the notice display may be a look-ahead notice.

In addition, "Whether the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed or the lost symbol mode is finally confirmed is determined by the jackpot determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol. ,
The result of the jackpot determination does not change depending on the display mode of the timer display.
The jackpot determination is configured to be determined according to the result of a jackpot lottery using a random number acquired when the game ball enters the start port provided on the game board.
The probability of being judged as a big hit in the big hit lottery (hereinafter referred to as "big hit probability") is predetermined.
The jackpot probability does not change depending on the display mode of the timer display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display positions of the timer display and the operation display may be different or the same.

Further, a plurality of timer displays may be displayed, and in this case, the digestion order of the timer displays may be the order in which the timer displays are started, or may not be the order in which the timer displays are started. Good.

Further, when a plurality of button effects are duplicated and the operation valid periods overlap, the operation valid period in the button effects related to the button timer notice effect may be prioritized, or the operation valid period may be prioritized. The operation validity period in the button effect may be deprecated. Further, when the button hold is included, the operation validity period in the button hold may be prioritized. In addition, when the button effect related to the change notice and the button effect related to the look-ahead notice are overlapped and the operation valid period overlaps, the operation valid period in the button effect related to the change notice is prioritized. Alternatively, the operation validity period in the button effect related to the pre-reading notice may be prioritized.

Further, the countdown of the timer display may be started after the timer display is moved.

Further, the countdown of the timer display may be paused.

Further, the button timer advance notice effect may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, or the button timer advance notice effect may not be performed across a plurality of symbol change displays.

In addition, "a second operating means [for example, an effect lever 136V, etc.] is provided.
The operating means is a first operating means [for example, an effect button 136, etc.].
The operation display is the first operation display [for example, button image 136a, etc.].
The timer display is a third timer display [for example, button timer notice display BTM1 or the like].
The display means is a means in which a second operation display [for example, lever image 136Va, etc.] may be displayed.
The second operation display is a display indicating that the operation by the second operation means is effective.
The display means is a means in which a fourth timer display [for example, the lever timer notice display LTM1 or the like shown in FIG. 375 (A1)] may be displayed.
The fourth timer display is a display that announces the timing at which the second operation display is displayed. [For example, the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 shown in FIG. 375 (A1) has a timer display countdown. It is announced that the lever production will start 60 seconds after the start],
The fourth timer display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time until the display of the second operation display is started [for example, FIGS. 375 (A1) to (A2)). As shown in the above, the lever timer notice display LTM1 counts down the timer display from the start of the countdown until it reaches "00:00", which indicates the timing when the button effect is started.],
When the fourth timer display becomes a certain display mode after the fourth timer display is displayed (hereinafter, "in the second case [for example, in the second case [for example, FIGS. 375 (A1) to (A2)). As shown, the second operation display is displayed in the case where the timer display on the lever timer notice display LTM1 becomes "00:00" after the lever timer notice display LTM1 is displayed, etc.] "). May
When the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, the certain effect may be executed [for example, FIGS. 375 (A6) to (A8). ) And FIG. 373 (A14), when the effect lever 136V is operated after the lever image 136V is displayed, a background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed, etc.],
Even if the second operating means is operated during the display of the fourth timer display, the execution of the certain effect is not started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 375 (A1) to (A2)). Lever timer notice display Even if the effect lever 136V is operated during the countdown of the timer display in LTM1, the background image including the spirit character CLA is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to enhance the effect by not overlooking the timing when the second operation display is displayed.

According to this game table, it is possible to surprise the player who was paying attention to the timer display, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this game table, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension until the operation display is displayed, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, the display means may display only the second operation display, or may display a display other than the second operation display. Further, the display means may be one in which the second operation display is always displayed, or may be one in which the second operation display may not be displayed.

Further, the second operation display may only indicate that the operation by the second operation means is effective, or also indicates other than that the operation by the second operation means is effective. It may be. Further, the second operation display may always indicate that the operation by the second operation means is effective, or may not indicate that the operation by the second operation means is effective. It may be one.

Further, the display means may be one in which only the fourth timer display may be displayed, or may be one in which a display other than the fourth timer display may be displayed. Further, the display means may be such that the fourth timer display is always displayed. Further, the fourth timer display may not be displayed.

Further, the fourth timer display may foretell only the timing when the second operation display is displayed, or foretell a timing other than the timing when the second operation display is displayed. You may. Further, the fourth timer display may always give notice of the timing at which the second operation display is displayed, or may not give notice of the timing at which the second operation display is displayed. You may.

Further, the display mode of the fourth timer display may change only according to the passage of time until the display of the second operation display is started, or the display of the second operation display may be changed. The display mode may change according to something other than the passage of time until the start. Further, the display mode of the fourth timer display may always change according to the passage of time until the display of the second operation display is started, and the display of the second operation display may be changed. The display mode may not change depending on the passage of time until the start.

Further, the second operation display may be displayed only in the second case, and the second operation display may be displayed in cases other than the second case. Good. Further, in the second case, the second operation display may always be displayed, and in the second case, the second operation display may not be displayed.

Further, if the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, only a certain effect may be executed, or the display of the second operation display may be executed. If the second operating means is operated after the start, an effect other than a certain effect may be executed. Further, if the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed without fail, or after the display of the second operation display is started. When the second operating means is operated in, a certain effect may not be executed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only when the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, or the display of the second operation display may be executed. A certain effect may be executed even in cases other than the case where the second operating means is operated after the start of.

Further, if the second operation means is operated only after the display of the second operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed, or the display of the second operation display may be executed. When the second operating means is operated even after it has been started, a certain effect may be executed.

Further, even if the second operating means is operated while the fourth timer display is displayed, it is not necessary to start only the execution of a certain effect, and the second operation does not have to be started while the fourth timer display is displayed. Even if the means is operated, the execution of the effect other than a certain effect does not have to be started. Further, even if the second operating means is operated while the fourth timer display is displayed, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, and the second operation may be performed while the fourth timer display is displayed. Even if the means is operated, the execution of a certain effect may be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect does not have to be started only when the second operating means is operated during the display of the fourth timer display, and the second operation means is displayed during the display of the fourth timer display. The execution of a certain effect does not have to be started even when the operating means is not operated.

Further, even if the second operating means is operated only while the fourth timer display is displayed, the execution of a certain effect does not have to be started, and the second operation means other than the display of the fourth timer display. Even if the operating means is operated, the execution of a certain effect does not have to be started.

In addition, "In the second case, the second operation display is always displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

FIG. 384 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variable display of the decorative symbol executed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 384 is a flow of the variable display of the decorative symbol which is lost without reaching the reach state. FIG. 3B is a timing chart for explaining the flow of variable display of a decorative symbol that becomes a big hit or a miss after reaching a reach state.

In FIG. 384 (a), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (start of fluctuation), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped after the first stop of the decorative symbol, the second stop of the decorative symbol, and the third stop of the decorative symbol. It shows the flow. In the following description, the order of stopping the decorative symbols is, in principle, the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but the order is not limited to this. In addition, there may be cases where the first stop and the second stop are performed at the same time depending on the notice (the change notice or the look-ahead notice), the production of the mini game, the pseudo-ream, etc. , The second stop and the third stop may be performed at the same time. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop, the period from the first stop to the second stop, the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the final stop are set to "((. It may be expressed by the period of "11)". In the following description, regarding the production performed in the production example in which the production is not in the reach state, the branch numbers in the drawings are "Fig. XX (A (11) -1)" and "Fig. XX (A (11)-)-. 2) ”... etc. may be used. Further, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 384 (a), the effects that can be combined as various effects may be performed during the period shown in "(11)" (for example, a notice of disappointment). In addition, during the period from the 2nd stop to the 3rd stop and the period from the 3rd stop to the final stop, a pseudo-ream production and chance announcement (pre-reading notice) by stopping the same color (same type) symbol will be performed. May also be possible. This is a concept that can be applied to each of the production examples of the embodiments described so far.

FIG. 384 (b) shows the formation of the reach state after the start of the variation display (variation start) of the decorative symbol.
It shows the flow from the transition to the super reach (SP reach) and the derivation of the result of the reach effect, the decorative symbol is removed or the jackpot is fixedly stopped, and then the jackpot game is completed. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the formation of the reach state is represented by the period of "(1)", and the period from the formation of the reach state to the transition to SP reach is represented by the period of "(2)". The period from the transition to SP reach to the derivation of the result of the reach effect is represented by the period of "(3)", and the period from the derivation of the result of the reach effect to the definite stop is "(4)". , And the period from the fixed stop to the end of the jackpot game may be represented by the period of “(5)”. In the following description, regarding the production performed in the production example in which the jackpot or the miss is reached after the reach state is reached, the branch numbers in the drawings are "Fig. XX (A (2) -1)" and "Fig. XX (A (2)". ) -2) ”,“ FIG. XX (A (3) -1) ”,“ FIG. XX (A (3) -2) ”, and the like may be used. Further, in the explanation in the present embodiment, in the period of "(1)", various notices including a mini game and a look-ahead notice, and a pseudo-ream may be produced, and in the period of "(2)". , A notice or group notice by displaying a normal reach or cut-in image may be given, and during the period of "(3)", a notice of chance up during SP reach or a notice by displaying a cut-in image may be given. In the period of "(4)", shaking fluctuation, revival jackpot production, wipe display, etc. may be performed, and in the period of "(5)", the production during the jackpot game is performed, and the jackpot is also performed. Probability change notification, hold consecutive villa notification, etc. may be performed during the game. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and the embodiment described below, each notice or effect executed may be configured to be performed in a period other than the period in which the notice or effect is executed. Further, it may be configured so that these notices and effects may be combined, and in this case, even if one notice (effect) may overlap with the other notice (effect). Good. Further, in the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, the parts described by the same branch number can be appropriately replaced.

FIGS. 385 to 407 are diagrams for stepwise showing the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 385 to 407, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. In addition, in FIGS. 385 to 407, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 provided with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIGS. 385 to 407 are diagrams stepwise showing an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

FIGS. 385 (A (1) -1) to 386 (A (4) -66) show that the timer advance notice effect is executed not only during the variable display of the decorative symbol but also during the jackpot game. ..

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -1), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. That is, the state before the start of fluctuation is shown. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 385 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (non-electric support state). On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons in special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 in special figure 1. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 385 (A (1) -1), three hold icons h11, h12, h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h11, h12, of these three special figures 1 are displayed. All of h13 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 385 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is held. The icon is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good. This also applies to the following description.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device The symbol variation display in 212 is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 The third hold icon h13 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208,
Variable display of decorative patterns has also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Here, the first timer advance notice display TM11 in the present embodiment is configured to be capable of displaying the decimal point of less than 1 second.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -4), the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed as " 09:75 ”is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the characters "timer activation" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -5) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, suggesting that a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Here, the second timer advance notice display TM12 in the present embodiment is configured to be capable of displaying the decimal point of less than 1 second. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "09: 00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -5). In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -6), the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed as " 01:25 ”is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "07:25" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -7), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the navigation In the vicinity of the character YM, the characters "Attention to hold" are displayed to call attention to the hold change, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It is informed that the aspect may change. The hold change animation may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", or the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 after the hold change animation starts. May be "00:00", or the hold change animation may be started at the timing when the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes "00:00". The timer display countdown on the first timer notice display TM11 continues, and "06:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -7).

Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -8), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the bomb display mode, and the character "TIMER" is displayed above the display mode. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "hold change" are displayed, and it is notified that the first hold icon h11 has been given a look-ahead notice that changes to the display mode of the bomb. That is, in this effect example, as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12, the display of the hold icon that changes to the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb that announces the execution of the timer notice effect as a certain effect. It is shown that the mode change effect is being performed. The character display of "hold change" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed after the character display of "hold change" has been performed. Alternatively, the character display of "hold change" may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is still continuing, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -8). The second timer notice display TM12 has been erased. Here, the second timer notice display TM12 may be deleted after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed after the second timer notice display TM12 has been erased. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change at the timing when the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -9), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is continuing, and FIG. 385 (A (1)-). At the timing shown in 9), "05:11" is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "stock" are displayed together with the bomb icon BOM to notify that the timer notice effect may be started. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect (notice effect) executed as a result of the timer advance effect is notified by the icon. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Still there" are displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility that the advance notice display by the timer advance notice effect may be further performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -10), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “03:29” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -10). In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "what", which raises expectations as to which notice display will be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -11), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -11).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -12), the timing at which the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". The third stop is performed at, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream!" Are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is "00:
The middle symbol may be stopped and displayed after the middle symbol becomes "00", or the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 may be changed to "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer notice effects overlap, and it is shown that one of the timer notice displays (second timer notice display TM12) functions as a look-ahead notice. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timing at which the timer notice display is started is different for each of the plurality of timer notice effects.

After that, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -13), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased. Here, after the first timer notice display TM11 is erased, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream may be started, or after the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. The first timer notice display TM11 may be erased, or the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream may be started at the timing when the first timer notice display TM11 is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -14), it is shown that the second decorative symbol variation display is performed by the pseudo-ream. Then, the replay icon RPL is displayed below the bomb icon BOM displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the pseudo-continuous effect has been performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -16), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the normal reach is performed and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Timer notice due to SP development" are displayed, and it seems that the mission effect indicating that the timer notice effect is started by developing into super reach is started. Is also shown. In this production example, when the mission is achieved, the timer notice production is started and the reliability of the jackpot is increased. Therefore, by shifting to super reach, it may be possible to expect that the timer advance notice effect will be started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -19), it is shown that the normal reach is continuously performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -20), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during the normal reach, and does not shift to the super reach, but "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". It is notified that the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system does not shift to super reach.

Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". .. At this time, the replay icon RPL is deleted. Meanwhile, the bomb icon BOM is still displayed. The replay icon RPL may be erased after the decorative symbol swaying fluctuation starts, the decorative symbol swaying fluctuation may start after the replay icon RPL is erased, or the decorative symbol may be erased. The replay icon RPL may be deleted at the timing when the shaking fluctuation starts.

After that, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (4) -22), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -23), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure is started. The symbol variation display on the display device 212 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the bomb, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. That is, the variable icon h0 notifies that the timer advance notice effect is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -24), the characters "stock activation" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen corresponding to the display of the variable icon h0, and two timer notice effects are produced. Is shown to be starting at the same time. At this time, the bomb icon BOM has been erased. That is, in this production example, it is shown that a plurality of timer notice effects are started by displaying one bomb icon BOM or the variable icon h0 of the bomb display mode. The two timer advance notice effects may be started after the characters "stock activation" are displayed, or the characters "stock activation" may be displayed after the two timer advance notice effects are started. Two timer notice effects may be started at the timing when the characters "stock activation" are displayed. In this production example, the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, respectively, and the two timer notice effects are started at the same time. The third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are both default display modes. "30:00" is displayed as a timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests. Further, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests that. In this production example, since the two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 start the countdown at the same time, there is a certain effect both when 10 seconds have passed and when 30 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Is suggested to be initiated. Here, some effects that may start after 10 seconds and some effects that may start after 30 seconds may be the same or different. May be good.

After that, the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 and the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 start counting down (subtraction display), respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -25), the third timer The notice display TM13 shows "29:45".
"Is displayed, and" 09:45 "is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14. That is, it is shown that 0.55 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the characters "timer attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect. Further, in this production example, the change animation is started at the variable icon h0, and it is notified that the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -26), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the bomb to the display mode of the panda, and becomes the display mode of the notice. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 is still continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -26), the third timer notice display TM13 shows " "09:10" is displayed, and "29:15" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -27), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the countdown continues in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -27), the third timer notice display TM13 shows "28". : 02 ”is displayed, and“ 08:02 ”is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -28), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. The countdown continues in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (1) -28), the third timer notice display TM13 shows "26". : 75 "is displayed, and" 06:75 "is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

After that, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -29), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. The countdown continues in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -29), the third timer notice display TM13 has "25". : 23 ”is displayed, and“ 05:23 ”is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -30), it is shown that the normal reach is started and the middle symbol is fluctuating at a low speed. In addition, the characters "coming soon" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and there is a possibility that the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 will be "00:00" and the notice effect will be started soon. It is suggested that there is. The countdown continues in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -30), the third timer notice display TM13 shows "23". : 16 ”is displayed, and“ 03:16 ”is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -31), it is shown that the normal reach is continuously performed. The countdown is still continuing in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -31), the third timer notice display TM13 shows ""21:80" is displayed, and "01:80" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

After that, as shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -32), when the countdown in the fourth timer notice display TM14 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the Sabohani character. A notice of the Sabohani group that SBHN crosses in large numbers will be made. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with high expectation of big hit. That is, it can be said that when the Sabohani group notice is given, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the Sabohani group notice is not given. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -32), a strong Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the fourth timer notice display TM14. In other words, the strong Sabohani group notice can be said to be an example of a certain production. The timer display on the 4th timer notice display TM14 may be started after the timer display is "00:00", or the timer on the 4th timer notice display TM14 may be started after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 is "00:00". On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -32).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -33), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the supermarket is displayed. It has been reported that it will develop into reach. At this time, the fourth timer notice display TM14 is erased. On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "18:31" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (2) -33).

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -34) develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. The icon SBH of the Sabohani is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been executed. Further, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -34).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -35) shows that the swordsman reach is continuing. Then, the characters "timer attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the third timer notice display TM13. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and "11:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -35).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A (3) -36), the timer advance notice shortening animation is started during the countdown display on the third timer advance notice display TM13, and the effect is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13. It is shown that it is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (3) -37) following FIG. 385 (A (3) -36), the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is reduced, and the third timer notice display TM13 Is displayed as "03:00". As described above, in this effect example, it may be difficult to predict the type of effect executed by the timer advance notice effect by changing the timer display during the countdown display.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (3) -38). Further, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. That is, in this production example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain production.

As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer notice effects overlap, and both timer notice displays (third timer notice display TM13, fourth timer notice display TM14) change the symbol during execution. It is shown that it is functioning as a notice regarding the display (the change notice).

After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (3) -39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and the abbreviation of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the center, the "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -40), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -41), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -42), it is shown that the jackpot start effect is being performed. When the jackpot start production is started, the character MCK of Machiko-sensei (wedding Machiko-sensei) in a wedding dress will perform a production to celebrate the jackpot with four copandas. In addition, when the jackpot start effect starts, a right-handed display that encourages the player to hit right is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen.

FIG. 386 (A (5) -43) shows how the jackpot game has started and has shifted to the first round. In this production example, a production that introduces the production during the jackpot game is performed, and in the first round, the characters "Introduction of the production from the next round" are displayed together with the character of Copanda, and the fact is notified.

FIG. 386 (A (5) -44) shows the transition to the second round. In the second round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "When appears ..." together with the Sabohani icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -45). Along with the demonstration display of the strong Sabohani group notice, the words "Expect the group notice!" Will be displayed on top of this, and the Sabohani group notice will be explained.

FIG. 386 (A (5) -46) shows the transition to the third round. In the third round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." along with the bomb icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -47). Along with the demo display of the timer notice effect, the characters "Timer notice will be activated" will be displayed to explain the timer notice effect.

FIG. 386 (A (5) -48) shows the transition to the fourth round. In this production example, when the fourth round is entered, the characters "Attention!" Are displayed together with the Copanda character, suggesting that the timer advance notice production is started. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer notice production is performed during the big hit game.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -49), the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and "Timer activated!" Characters are displayed to notify that the timer notice effect has started. Here, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is the default display mode. On the timer display TM21 during the first big hit, "03:00" indicating 3 seconds, which is shorter than the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 234 in one round, which is 29 seconds, is displayed as a timer display, and the countdown is displayed. It suggests that a certain effect will start 3 seconds after the start.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -50), the characters "Timer activated!" Are erased together with the Copanda character, and the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit is substantially in the center of the display screen. It is enlarged while moving to. After that, the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -51), the timer display in the first jackpot medium timer notice display TM21 continues to count down, and is shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -51). At the timing, "02:66" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -52), the timer display in the first jackpot medium timer notice display TM21 continues to count down, and is shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -52). At the indicated timing, "00:35" is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -53), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 386 (A (A (5) -53) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5) -54), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -55), the characters "pending consecutive chan confirmation" are displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol variation whose execution is suspended (pending). It is announced that the display includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect being performed by the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, it is shown that the hold continuous chan announcement effect is performed as a certain effect. In addition, instead of the appearance of the family crest character CMON, the family crest accessory 224E may be activated to announce the pending ream chan.

When the hold-ream announcement effect is completed in this way, the character of Copanda appears again in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -56), and the characters "Next land effect introduction continued" are displayed. It is displayed, and it is notified that the continuation of the effect explanation that has been interrupted due to the timer advance notice effect is started. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN indicating that the family crest character CMON has appeared and the notification of the confirmation of the pending consecutive chan has been performed is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in one round of the big hit game, and a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 386 (A (5) -57) shows the transition to the fifth round. In the fifth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." together with the replay icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -58). Along with the replay icon with the characters "NEXT", the characters "Pseudo-ren" are displayed, and the pseudo-ren production is explained.

FIG. 386 (A (5) -59) shows the transition to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the Copanda character reappears and the word "final round" is displayed to notify the player that it is the final round.

In FIG. 386 (A (5) -60), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. Then, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -61), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the family crest character CMON reappears from the upper part of the display screen, and the notification that the hold ream is performed is also performed here. It has been.

FIG. 386 (A (1) -62) shows how the jackpot game has ended and the state has shifted to the probabilistic state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (1) -63), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device The symbol variation display in 212 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. And it is displayed as a variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (1) -64), the family crest character CMON descends from above the display screen, and it is notified that the jackpot is confirmed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A (1) -65), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -66), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is executed during the big hit game.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during one round in the big hit game, and a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed. And, in this production example, it is shown that the pending ream announcement production is performed as a certain production.

When the timer display in the timer notice display is counted down to "00:00", a new timer notice effect may be started.

Further, the display of the bomb icon BOM indicating that the timer advance notice effect is started and the display of the hold icon of the bomb display mode may indicate that one timer advance notice effect is started, or twice. It may indicate the start of the above timer notice effect.

Further, in this effect example, when the symbol variation display that is a big hit is included in the symbol variation display whose start is suspended, the above-mentioned hold consecutive chan notification effect is performed, but further, the symbol variation display is performed. However, for example, the hold continuous chan notification effect may be performed on the condition that it is determined by pre-reading that the ultra-shortening variation (for example, the variation without reach, the variation at the same time of all symbols, etc.) is executed. It may be a form-limited hold ream notification depending on the fluctuation time, the type of reach, etc., or it may be a hold ream notification based on the broad concept of a big hit.

Further, in this production example, the hold ream announcement effect was performed as a pre-reading notice in the special figure 1, but the same can be performed for the special figure 2.

Further, the production content introduced by the production explanation performed during the big hit game is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be other production content.

Further, the round in which the timer advance notice effect is started is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be started in an appropriate round. In addition, a timer advance notice effect may be performed a plurality of times in one big hit.

FIGS. 387 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 387 (B (4) -36) show another effect pattern of the timer advance notice effect executed during the jackpot game.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (1) -1), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. That is, the state before the start of fluctuation is shown. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 387 (B (1) -1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 387 is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state with electric support). On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this probabilistic state with electric support, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed. In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. Further, since the game state in FIG. 387 is the electric support state, the right-handed promotion display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 387 (B (1) -1), three hold icons h21, h22, h23 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h21, h22, h23 of these three special figures 2 are displayed. Are all displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 2 is also a round hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device The symbol variation display in 214 is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is changed to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21 and is displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is displayed as the first hold icon h21. It moves to the display position of the second hold icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h21, but may be different.

FIG. 387 (B (1) -3) shows that a game ball is won at the start port 232 of the special figure 2 and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h23 of the special figure 2 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 2 in the second hold number display becomes “3”. .. Here, the hold icon h23 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -4), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 2" fluctuates. Temporary stop is being carried out. After that, as shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -5), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (1) -6), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure is started. The symbol variation display on the display device 214 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21, is displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is the second hold. It moves to the display position of the icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (1) -7), the family crest character CMON descends from above the display screen, and it is notified that the jackpot is confirmed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -8), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. After that, a big hit occurs, and the effects shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -10) to (B (5) -15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -10) to (B (5) -15) are shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -42) to (A (5) -47). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 387 (B (5) -16) shows the transition to the fourth round. In this production example, when the fourth round is entered, the characters "Attention!" Are displayed together with the Copanda character, suggesting that the timer advance notice production is started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -17), the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and "Timer activated!" Characters are displayed to notify that the timer notice effect has started. Here, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is the default display mode. Unlike the timer display shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -49), the timer display TM21 during the first big hit displays "30:00" as the initial value of the timer display, and the countdown is started. It suggests that a certain effect will start when 30 seconds have passed since then.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -18), the characters "Timer activated!" Are erased together with the Copanda character, and the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit is substantially in the center of the display screen. It is enlarged while moving to. After that, the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -19), the timer display in the first jackpot medium timer notice display TM21 continues to count down, and is shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -19). At the timing, "29:66" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -20), the timer display in the first jackpot medium timer notice display TM21 continues to count down, and is shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -20). At the indicated timing, "13:75" is displayed.

FIG. 387 (B (5) -21) shows the transition to the fifth round. In this production example, it is shown that the timer notice production is continuously performed over a plurality of rounds. That is, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit continues even after the transition from the 4th round to the 5th round. The timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is "12:96" at the timing shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -21).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -22), the timer display in the first jackpot medium timer notice display TM21 continues to count down, and is shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -22). At the indicated timing, "00:35" is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -23), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 387 (B (B (5) -23) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5) -24), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -25), the characters "pending consecutive chan confirmation" are displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol variation whose execution is suspended (pending). It is announced that the display includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit.

When the hold-ream announcement effect is completed in this way, the character of Copanda appears again in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -26), and the characters "Continued to introduce the next round effect" are displayed. It is displayed, and it is notified that the continuation of the effect explanation that has been interrupted due to the timer advance notice effect is started. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN indicating that the family crest character CMON has appeared and the notification of the confirmation of the pending consecutive chan has been performed is displayed. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is performed over a plurality of rounds of the jackpot game.

FIG. 387 (B (5) -27) shows the transition to the sixth round. In the sixth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." together with the replay icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -28). Along with the replay icon with the characters "NEXT", the characters "Pseudo-ren" are displayed, and the pseudo-ren production is explained. As described above, in this production example, since the timer advance notice production is performed over a plurality of rounds, the round in which the continuation of the production explanation is started is different from the production example shown in FIG. 386. That is, it is shown that the correspondence between the content of the effect explanation and the round in which the effect explanation is performed may differ depending on the period during which the timer advance notice effect is performed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -29) to (B (4) -36) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -29) to (B (4) -36) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -59) to 386 (A (5) -59) to the same, except that the hold display is different. Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG. (A (4) -66), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 388 (C (5) -1) to (C (4) -28) show another effect pattern of the timer advance notice effect executed during the jackpot game. Note that FIG. 388 (C (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 388 (C (5) -1) to (C (5) -10) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 388 (C (5) -1) to (C (5) -10) are shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -10) to (B (5) -19). Since it is the same as the effect shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -11), the timer display in the first jackpot medium timer notice display TM21 continues to count down, and is shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -11). At the indicated timing, "19:75" is displayed.

FIG. 388 (C (5) -12) shows the transition to the fifth round. In this production example, it is shown that the timer notice production is continuously performed over a plurality of rounds. That is, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit continues even after the transition from the 4th round to the 5th round. The timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is "18:86" at the timing shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -13), the timer display in the first jackpot medium timer notice display TM21 continues to count down, and is shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -13). At the indicated timing, "07:21" is displayed.

FIG. 388 (C (5) -14) shows the transition to the sixth round. In this production example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit continues even after the transition from the 5th round to the 6th round. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit may be performed from the 4th round to the 6th round. This is due to the difference in the digestion time of the round game depending on the skill of the player and the like. The timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is "04:21" at the timing shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -14).

After that, as shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -15), when the countdown of the timer display in the first jackpot middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 388 (C (C (5) -15) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5) -16), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -17), the characters "pending consecutive chan confirmation" are displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol variation whose execution is suspended (pending). It is announced that the display includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit.

When the hold-ream announcement effect is completed in this way, the character of Copanda appears again in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -18), and the characters "Continued to introduce the next round effect" are displayed. It is displayed, and it is notified that the continuation of the effect explanation that has been interrupted due to the timer advance notice effect is started. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN indicating that the family crest character CMON has appeared and the notification of the confirmation of the pending consecutive chan has been performed is displayed. As described above, in this production example, even if the initial value of the timer display in the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit is the same, the round being executed may be different when the countdown of the timer display ends. It is shown. The timing at which the countdown of the timer display ends and a certain effect starts is not limited to during the round, for example, it may be an interval between rounds. In this case, a certain effect is performed in the interval between rounds. However, a certain effect may start after the next round starts.

FIG. 388 (C (5) -19) shows the transition to the seventh round. In the 7th round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." together with the replay icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 388 (C (5) -20). Along with the replay icon with the characters "NEXT", the characters "Pseudo-ren" are displayed, and the pseudo-ren production is explained. As described above, in this production example, since the timer advance notice production is performed over three rounds, the round in which the continuation of the production explanation is started is different from the production example shown in FIGS. 386 and 387. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 388 (C (5) -21) to FIG. 388 (C (4) -28) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 388 (C (5) -21) to (C (4) -28) are shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -29) to (B (4) -36). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 389 (D (5) -1) to (D (4) -17) show an effect pattern in which the timer advance notice is not executed during the jackpot game. Note that FIG. 389 (D (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 389 (D (5) -1) to (C (5) -6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 389 (D (5) -1) to (D (5) -6) are shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -10) to (B (5) -15). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 389 (D (5) -7) shows the transition to the fourth round. In this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is not started even after the transition to the fourth round, and the production explanation is continued. That is, in this production example, when the fourth round is performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." together with the replay icon, and then FIG. 389 (D (5)- As shown in 8), the characters "pseudo-ren" are displayed together with the replay icon with the characters "NEXT", and the pseudo-ren production is explained. As described above, in this effect example, since the timer advance notice effect was not performed, the round in which the pseudo-continuous effect is explained is different from the effect example shown in FIGS. 386 to 388.

FIG. 389 (D (5) -9) shows the transition to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the Copanda character reappears and the word "final round" is displayed to notify the player that it is the final round.

In FIG. 389 (D (5) -10), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. Then, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the grandfather V formation display is a display in which four grandfather characters form a V formation. GYV is displayed, and it is notified that the hold ream will be performed. That is, it is shown that the pending ream announcement is performed in a mode different from the appearance of the family crest character CMON. As shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11'), the family crest character CMON may appear. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -12), the character "one more time" is displayed in response to the display of the grandfather V formation display GYV, and the pending ream chan occurs. Is being notified. After that, when the jackpot game is completed, the effects shown in FIGS. 389 (D (1) -13) to (D (4) -17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 389 (D (1) -13) to (D (4) -17) are shown in FIGS. 387 (B (1) -32) to (B (4) -36). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this production example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the hold ream announcement (display of the family crest character CMON) performed as a certain effect and the hold ream as a separate effect from the timer notice effect. It is shown that the mode is different from that of Chang's announcement (display by old V formation display GYV).

Further, in this production example, a plurality of types of reserved continuous chan notifications can be executed, and at least one mode of the reserved continuous chan notification is shown in, for example, FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b). In the case of a game board configuration, it may be a notification by a movable effect by an effect movable body, a notification by voice, a notification by a light emitting body, or a part or all of them. It may be a notification by a combination of.

389 (E (5) -1) to 390 (E (1) -18) show another effect pattern of the timer advance effect executed during the jackpot game. Note that FIG. 389 (E (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -41), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. However, in this production example, it is assumed that all three "decoration 2" are big hits. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 389 (E (5) -1) to 390 (E (5) -12) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 389 (E (5) -1) to 390 (E (5) -12) are shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -42) to (A (5) -53). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 390 (E (5) -12), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 390 (E (5)) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in -13), it is shown that the character TDR of the chief wearing the school run (clothes) appears instead of the character CMON of the family crest. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (E (5) -14), the display is changed so that the clothes of the character TDR of the Bancho are torn and naked, and the characters "probability change" are displayed. , It is notified that the game state after the end of the big hit shifts to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability (that is, the probability change state with electric support). As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect being performed by the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, it is shown that the probability change notification effect is performed as a certain effect. After that, the production explanation is continued as described above until the 16th round, which is the final round.

FIG. 390 (E (5) -15) shows the transition to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the Copanda character reappears and the word "final round" is displayed to notify the player that it is the final round. In the lower left corner of the display screen, the Bancho icon TDRK is displayed, indicating that the Bancho character TDR has appeared and the probability change confirmation has been notified.

In FIG. 390 (E (5) -16), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (E (5) -17), the character TDR of the Bancho appears again with the character display of "next probability change", and the notification of transition to the probability change state is performed here as well. ing.

FIG. 390 (E (1) -18) shows a state in which the jackpot game is completed and the state is changed to the probabilistic state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

In this production example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed, the probability change confirmation notification is performed as a certain effect, but the probability change confirmation notification may be performed without the timer advance notice effect being performed.

FIGS. 390 (F (5) -1) to 391 (F (1) -29) show another effect pattern of the timer advance notice effect executed during the jackpot game. Note that FIG. 390 (F (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -41), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. However, in this production example, it is assumed that all three "decoration 2" are big hits. The big hit in this production example is a rank-up bonus, and at the time of the big hit, it is a big hit that notifies which of the 4 rounds, the 8 rounds, the 12 rounds, and the 16 rounds is a big hit in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 390 (F (5) -1) to 390 (F (5) -12) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 390 (F (5) -1) to 390 (F (5) -12) are shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -42) to (A (5) -53). Since it is the same as the effect shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -12), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 390 (F (5)) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in -13), it is shown that the character HSG of the lord appears, and the fanning effect of whether the jackpot game continues after the 5th round or ends in the 4th round is started. Has been done. As a result, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -14), the character HSG of the lord shows a lively expression, and the characters "I'm still going on" are displayed, and the jackpot game is the fifth round. It is notified that it will continue thereafter. That is, it is shown that the round continuous production is being performed. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect being performed by the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, it is shown that the round continuous effect is performed as a certain effect.

FIG. 390 (F (5) -15) shows the transition to the fifth round. In the fifth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." together with the replay icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -16). Along with the replay icon with the characters "NEXT", the characters "Pseudo-ren" are displayed, and the pseudo-ren production is explained.

FIG. 390 (F (5) -17) shows the transition to the eighth round. In this production example, when the game shifts to the 8th round, the characters "Attention!" Are displayed together with the character of Copanda, and then the characters "Round continuation chance" are displayed as shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -18). Is displayed. That is, in this production example, it is notified that in the 8th round, a round judge production that encourages whether to continue after the 9th round or to end in the 8th round is started. Then, when the round judge effect is started, the character HSG of the lord appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -19), and the jackpot game continues after the ninth round. It is shown that the production of fanning to finish in the 8th round has started. As a result, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -20), the character HSG of the lord shows a lively expression, and the characters "I'm still going on" are displayed, and the jackpot game is the ninth round. It is notified that it will continue thereafter. That is, it is shown that the round continuous production is being performed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the round continuation effect may be performed without going through the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 390 (F (5) -21) shows the transition to the ninth round. In the ninth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a timer notice as an explanatory display and a character display of "timer display time ...", and then FIG. 390 (F (5) -22). ), The characters "de super hot" are displayed together with the display of "77:77" as the initial value of the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect with extremely high reliability is explained.

FIG. 390 (F (5) -23) shows the transition to the 12th round. In this production example, when the 12th round is entered, the characters "Attention!" Are displayed together with the character of Copanda, and then, as shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -24), the characters "Round continuation chance" are displayed. Is displayed. That is, in this production example, in the 12th round, it is notified that the round judge production for inciting whether to continue after the 13th round or to end in the 12th round is started. Then, when the round judge effect is started, the character HSG of the lord appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -25), and the jackpot game continues after the 13th round. It is shown that the production of fanning to finish in the 12th round has started. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F (5) -26), the character HGS of the lord is displayed in a fluttering manner, and the characters "Sorry!" Are displayed, and the jackpot game is played for 12 rounds. You will be notified that it will end with your eyes. In addition, there may be a case where a revival effect is performed and it is notified that the revival effect will be continued after the 13th round.

In FIG. 390 (F (5) -27), the twelfth round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 391 (F (5) -28) following FIG. 390 (F (5) -27), the characters "next right-handed" are displayed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the characters are displayed. Notification of transition to a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (that is, a time saving state) is being performed.

FIG. 391 (F (1) -29) shows a state in which the jackpot game is completed and the state is shifted to the time saving state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

In this way, in this production example, a timer notice effect is performed during the jackpot game, and as a result, a definite notification (probability change notification, round continuation notification, etc.) that is advantageous to the player other than the hold consecutive Chan notification is provided as a certain effect. It shows how it is being done.

In addition, in the effect example described above, a plurality of timer notice effects of different types of a certain effect may be performed in one big hit game. For example, in one big hit game, the first timer advance notice effect is performed, and as a result, the hold continuous chan announcement is performed as a certain effect, and then the second timer advance notice effect is performed, and as a result, there is a certain effect. Probability change confirmation notification may be performed as an effect.

FIGS. 391 (G (5) -1) to 393 (G (5) -64) show an example of an effect in the case where a plurality of symbol variation displays that are big hits are included in the symbol variation display whose execution is suspended. ing. Note that FIG. 391 (G (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 391 (G (5) -1) to 391 (G (5) -21) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 391 (G (5) -1) to 391 (G (5) -21) are shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -10) to (B (5) -30). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 391 (G (5) -21), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. Then, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 391 (G (5) -22), it is shown that the character CMON of the family crest does not appear and the grandfather V formation display GYV is displayed. This grandfather V formation display GYV display is different from the display corresponding to the family crest character CMON that appeared during the jackpot game, that is, the event of the pending ream chan announced by the appearance of the family crest character CMON. Is separately informing that an event of Hold Ren Chan will occur. In other words, it informs that the big hit of the triple chan including this big hit has been confirmed. In this case, the family crest character CMON may appear instead of the old V formation display GYV. After that, when the jackpot game is completed, the effects shown in FIGS. 391 (G (1) -23) to FIG. 391 (G (4) -27) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 391 (G (1) -23) to (G (4) -27) are shown in FIGS. 387 (B (1) -32) to (B (4) -36). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (5) -28) following FIG. 391 (G (4) -27), it is shown that the jackpot start effect related to the jackpot of the second consecutive channel is being performed. Has been done. When the jackpot start production is started, the wedding Machiko-sensei's character MCK will perform a production to celebrate the jackpot with four copandas. Further, in this effect example, when the jackpot start effect is started, the grandfather V icon GV is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the symbol variation display that becomes a jackpot in the symbol variation display whose start is suspended is already displayed. Notifies that one is included. It should be noted that this big hit corresponds to the appearance of the family crest character CMON executed as a certain effect as a result of the timer advance notice effect executed in the previous big hit game. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 392 (G (5) -29) to (G (5) -37) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 392 (G (5) -29) to (G (5) -37) are different in that the grandfather V icon GV is displayed and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is different. Except for the above, the effects are the same as those shown in FIGS. 389 (D (5) -2) to (D (5) -10), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 392 (G (5) -37), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. Then, in this production example, since the pending ream announcement has already been made by displaying the old V icon GV, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (5) -38), the character "one more time" is displayed. It is displayed and informs that a pending ream will occur.

FIG. 392 (G (1) -39) shows how the jackpot game has ended and the state has shifted to the probabilistic state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -40), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device The symbol variation display in 214 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. And it is displayed as a variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -41) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM11 from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

After that, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -42), "04:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM11. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the characters "may be pseudo-ream" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that pseudo-ream may be performed as a result of counting down the timer display on the timer notice display TM11. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -43), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -43).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -44), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -44).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -45), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -45). After that, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -46), the characters "Continue!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. In the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -46).

After that, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -47), the countdown on the timer notice display TM11 is completed, and the vicinity of the navigation character YM is reached at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". The character "Ikuze" is displayed on the screen, and the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-ream is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -48), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM11 is completed, the disappearance animation of the timer notice display is performed in order to erase the timer notice display TM11. It is shown that it is.

However, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -49), not only the timer notice display TM11 is not erased, but also the timer display in the timer notice display TM11 is added. 22:35 "is displayed. At this time, the display mode of the outer frame of the timer notice display TM11 changes to red to notify that the timer display has been added. The timer notice display TM11 then returns to the default display mode, but the display mode may remain changed. As described above, it is found that the animation performed in FIG. 392 (G (1) -48) was not actually a disappearing animation, but a timer advance notice addition animation which is an animation similar to the disappearing animation. .. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that a new timer advance notice effect is started using the same timer advance notice display TM11. Further, in this production example, it can be said that a part of the animation for adding the timer display in the timer notice display and a part of the animation for erasing the timer notice display are the same. Note that the timer advance notice addition animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -50), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" is displayed to indicate that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the pseudo-ream. Further, in the timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and FIG. 392 (G (1) -5)
At the timing shown in 0), "20:00" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (1) -51), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -52), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "18:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -52).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 392 (G (2) -53) to (G (1) -54), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs normal reach, and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. It is shown. In the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "16:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -54).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -55), the grandfather V formation display GYV is displayed during the execution of the normal reach, indicating that the big hit confirmation notice is being given. At this time, the timer notice display TM11 still continues the countdown, and at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -55), "15:12" is displayed, but the grandfather V formation display GYV displays it. Part of it overlaps, and it is more difficult to see than when the grandfather V formation display GYV is not displayed. The grandfather V formation display GYV may overlap with the timer notice display TM11.

After that, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -56), instead of the Sabohani group notice, a large number of Echigoya character ECGs are chased by the lord's character. It is shown that the notice is being given. This Echigoya group notice is an example of a premier notice, and the appearance of the Echigoya group notice will notify the big hit confirmation. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -56).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -57), it is shown that the cut-in image HBK of the capture showing how the character ECG of Echigoya is captured by the character of the lord is displayed. There is. A part of the timer notice display TM11 is overlapped by the cut-in image HBK of the capture, and it is considered to be more difficult to see than the case where the cut-in image HBK of the capture is not displayed. The capture cut-in image HBK may overlap with the timer notice display TM11. In addition, "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that it will develop into super reach. In the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (2) -57).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -58), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into SP reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. .. At this time, the characters "timer attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to the countdown on the timer notice display TM11. In the timer notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -58).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -59), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM11 changes is performed. The effect of this timer display step-up animation is also the same as the above-mentioned disappearance animation. That is, it can be said that a part of the animation that changes the display mode of the timer notice display and a part of the animation that erases the timer notice display are the same. The timer display step-up animation and the disappearing animation may be completely different animations.

After the timer display step-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -60), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the timer notice display TM11 as a result of the timer display step-up animation. It is shown that the mode is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM11B) and stepped up, and that the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically improved. Further, the timer notice display TM11B whose display mode has been changed has an icon BCHO of the face of the chief, foretelling that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In the timer notice display TM11B, a countdown is performed, and "4:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -60).

Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM11B becomes "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -61). That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM11B in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect for displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 392 (G (3) -62), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and the abbreviation of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the center, the "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G (4) -63), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 393 (G (5) -64) following FIG. 392 (G (4) -63), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the jackpot decoration of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of symbols. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, both the hold consecutive chan notification performed in the timer advance notice effect and the hold consecutive chan notification performed without relying on the timer advance notice effect are performed, and the hold consecutive chan is generated twice. The state of notifying is shown.

Further, in this production example, it is shown that the timer notice display overlaps with other notice displays and the visibility of at least a part of the timer notice display is reduced. In addition, the timer notice display may be overlapped by the effect movable body.

Further, in this production example, instead of the Sabohani group notice, it is shown that the Echigoya group notice is being performed to notify the big hit confirmation.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed not only during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 but also during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

In FIGS. 393 (H (5) -1) to 394 (H (1) -40), button stock is performed in the timer advance notice effect executed during the jackpot game, and the number of button stocks is increased during the jackpot game. It shows how the corresponding mini-game is played. Note that FIG. 393 (H (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -41), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 393 (H (5) -1) to 393 (H (5) -12) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 393 (H (5) -1) to 393 (H (5) -12) are shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -42) to (A (5) -53). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -12), when the countdown of the timer display in the first jackpot medium timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 393 (H (5)) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in -13), the button image 136a appears instead of the family crest character CMON, and the characters "x1 stock" are displayed, and the button effect is performed at least once during the jackpot game. Will be announced. As described above, in this production example, as a result of the timer notice production by the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit, it is shown that the button stock notification effect for notifying that the button effect is performed as a certain effect is performed. Has been done. The button image 136a has a default display mode, and the reliability in the button effect is low. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -14), the character "x1" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen together with the button icon, and the button effect is performed at least once. I am informing you.

FIG. 393 (H (5) -15) shows the transition to the eighth round. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -16), the characters "Attention!" Are displayed together with the character of Copanda, suggesting that the timer advance notice effect is started. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is performed a plurality of times during the big hit game.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -17), the timer advance notice display TM22 during the second big hit is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and "Timer activated!" A character is displayed to notify that the second timer notice effect has started. Here, the second big hit middle timer notice display TM22 has a special display mode that is more reliable than the default display mode. The timer display TM22 during the second big hit displays "05:55" as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started when 5.55 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. There is. In this production example, the initial value of the timer display of the timer display TM22 during the second big hit is set to three "5" s, and the reliability for adding the privilege can be further increased. In some cases.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -18), the second big hit middle timer notice display TM22 is enlarged and displayed while moving to substantially the center of the display screen. After that, the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started on the timer advance notice display TM22 during the second big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -19), the timer display countdown in the second jackpot medium timer notice display TM22 continues, and is shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -19). At the timing, "04:85" is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -20), when the countdown of the timer display in the second big hit middle timer notice display TM22 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 393 (H (H (5) -20) 5) In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in -21), the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, which is a mode in which the button image vibrates / rotates, appears, and the characters "x1 stock" are displayed during the jackpot game. It is announced that the button effect will be performed at least once more. As described above, in this production example, as a result of the timer notice production by the second big hit middle timer notice display TM22, it is shown that the button stock notification effect for notifying that the button effect is performed as a certain effect is performed. Has been done. The vibration / rotation button image 136aV has higher reliability than the default display mode. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -22), the vibration / rotation button icon is displayed below the button icon in the default display mode together with the characters “x1”. The button icon of is informing that the button effect is performed at least twice.

FIG. 393 (H (5) -23) shows the transition to the 12th round. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -24), it is shown that the mini game of the button effect is started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed in the center of the display screen, and when "button PUSH" appears above the treasure box image BOX with the icon of the face of the bancho, it is probable. The characters "da" are displayed, and it is notified that when the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box, the game state after the big hit game will be in a probable change state.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -25), a digestion animation showing how the button icon of the default display mode that appears first of the two button icons is digested is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -26), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the button image 136a in the default display mode, the characters "press!" Are displayed, and the effect button 136 is displayed. Is urging the operation of. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT changes in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation effective period. At the timing shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -26), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid. The operation validity period is then started.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -27), the effect button 136 is displayed in FIG. 393 (H (5) -27). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -28), the panda's face PND appears from the treasure box image BOX and the word "chance" is displayed, indicating that the mini game has failed. ing. However, since it has not been denied that the benefits will be granted due to the appearance of the panda's face PND, the reliability is low, but there are cases where the expectation for the benefits can still be maintained. After that, when the mini-game of the button effect is completed, the effect in the jackpot game is resumed as shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -29).

FIG. 394 (H (5) -30) shows the transition to the 14th round. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -31), it is shown that the second mini-game of the button effect is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed in the center of the display screen and above the treasure box image BOX as shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -24) as described above. In addition to the icon of the face of the bancho, the characters "with button PUSH" and "it's a probable change when it appears" are displayed, and when the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box, it is notified that the game state after the big hit game will be in the probable change state Has been done. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -31), the character "last chance" is also displayed corresponding to the remaining one button icon in stock. There is.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -32), a digestion animation showing how the last remaining button icon is digested is performed, and then in FIG. 394 (H (5) -32). As shown in 33), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, and the characters “press!” Are displayed, prompting the operation of the effect button 136. At this time, the effect button 136 is also vibrating and rotating, but it does not have to be performed. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT changes in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation effective period. At the timing shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -33), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid. The operation validity period is then started.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -34), it becomes FIG. 394 (H (5) -35). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown, the face TRF of the bancho appears from the treasure box image BOX and the characters "probability change!" Are displayed, and it is notified that the state will shift to the probability change state after the jackpot game is completed. After that, when the mini-game of the button effect is completed, the effect in the jackpot game is resumed as shown in FIG. 394 (H (5) -36). At this time, the icon TDRF of the face of the bancho is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen together with the characters "next probability change" to notify that the state will shift to the probability change state after the jackpot game is completed.

FIG. 394 (H (5) -37) shows the transition to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the Copanda character reappears and the word "final round" is displayed to notify the player that it is the final round.

In FIG. 394 (H (5) -38), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. In this production example, when the jackpot end effect is started, an animation is performed in which the character of Copanda and the icon TDRF of the face of the Bancho displayed at the lower left of the display screen are erased, and then FIG. 394 (H (5) ) -39), the character TDR of the Bancho appears along with the character display of "next probability change", and the notification of transition to the probability change state is also performed here.

FIG. 394 (H (1) -40) shows how the jackpot game has ended and the state has shifted to the probabilistic state. At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, it is shown that the effect of stocking the execution of a certain effect (mini game of button effect) is performed as a certain effect.

Further, in this production example, as a result of the timer notice production, a chance-type production suggesting that some privilege may be given may be performed as a certain production. ..

In this production example, as a result of the timer notice production, button stock is performed as a certain production, and a mini game of the button production is performed a number of times according to the number during the jackpot game. A button-directed mini-game corresponding to the button stock may be played during the symbol variation display after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, in this effect example, a timer advance notice effect is performed during the jackpot game, and a button stock effect is performed as a certain effect executed as a result. However, the timer advance notice is performed during the symbol variation display before the start of the jackpot game. The effect may be started and the button stock effect related to the timer advance effect may be performed during the jackpot game, or the timer advance effect may be started during the jackpot game and the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game ends. A button stock effect related to the timer advance notice effect may be performed. In addition, the timer advance notice effect is started during the symbol variation display before the start of the jackpot game, the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed during the jackpot game, and then the relevant timer advance notice effect is performed during the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game ends. A button stock effect related to the timer advance notice effect may be performed.

In FIGS. 394 (I (5) -1) to 395 (I (1) -31), button stock is performed in the timer advance notice effect executed during the jackpot game, and the number of button stocks is increased during the jackpot game. It shows another production pattern in which the corresponding mini-game is played. Note that FIG. 394 (I (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -41), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 394 (I (5) -1) to 394 (I (5) -16) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 394 (I (5) -1) to 394 (H (5) -16) are shown in FIGS. 383 (H (5) -1) to (H (5) -16). Since it is the same as the effect shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (I (5) -17), the timer notice display TM22 during the second big hit is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and the characters "Timer activated!" Are displayed above the timer. It is displayed to notify that the second timer notice effect has started. Here, the timer advance notice display TM22 during the second big hit is the default display mode. The timer display TM22 during the second big hit displays "03:00" as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect may be started 3 seconds after the countdown is started. ing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (I (5) -18), the second big hit middle timer notice display TM22 is enlarged and displayed while moving to substantially the center of the display screen. After that, the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started on the timer advance notice display TM22 during the second big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (I (5) -19) following FIG. 394 (I (5) -18), the timer display in the second jackpot middle timer notice display TM22 continues to count down. At the timing shown in FIG. 395 (I (5) -19), "02:77" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (I (5) -20), the disappearance animation is started during the countdown display on the second jackpot timer advance notice display TM22, and the second jackpot timer advance notice display TM22 is erased. The state is shown. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer display TM22 during the second big hit, it is notified that the notice that a certain effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, the timer notice display TM22 during the second big hit was erased in the middle of the countdown before it became "00:00", indicating that a certain effect (button stock) was not performed. Can be done.

When the disappearance animation is completed, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (I (5) -21), the auntie character BBA appears and the characters "Hihihi sorry" are displayed, and the timer notice effect is a fake effect. It is notified that the button stock has not been performed.

FIG. 395 (I (5) -22) shows the transition to the 14th round. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 395 (I (5) -23) to FIG. 395 (I (5) -27), it is shown that the mini game of the button effect is started. Note that FIG. 39
The effects shown in 5 (I (5) -23) to FIG. 6 (I (5) -27) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 393 (H (5) -24) to 394 (H (5) -28). Since it is done in the same way, the explanation is omitted.

FIG. 395 (I (5) -28) shows the transition to the 16th round. At the 16th round, the Copanda character reappears and the word "final round" is displayed to notify the player that it is the final round.

In FIG. 395 (I (5) -29), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. In this production example, instead of the jackpot end production by Copanda, the appearance of the character TDR of the Bancho wearing a school uniform (clothes) is shown. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (I (5) -30), the display is changed so that the clothes of the character TDR of the Bancho are torn and naked, and the characters "next probability change" are displayed. , It is notified that the game state after the end of the big hit will be a probable change state. In this production example, when the character TDR of the bancho appears, it is confirmed that the character TDR of the bancho will shift to the probabilistic state after the big hit game. May be determined that the transition to the probabilistic state occurs when the clothes are torn and changed to a naked state.

FIG. 395 (I (1) -31) shows how the jackpot game has ended and the state has shifted to the probabilistic state. At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

As described above, in this effect example, as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, an effect suggesting the possibility of a privilege being given is performed, while a privilege advantageous to the player is given. It is shown that the effect of notifying that the timer is to be performed (probability change confirmation effect) is being executed without the timer advance notice effect being performed.

Further, in this production example, even if the timer notice effect is performed in one big hit game, it is definitively announced that the player will be given an advantageous privilege without the timer advance effect. It is shown that the production to be performed is being executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold continuous chan notification and the probability change confirmation effect may be performed without the timer advance notice effect being performed, but when the timer notice effect is not performed, the probability change confirmation is performed rather than the hold consecutive chan notification. Although it is configured so that the production is easier to be executed, it may be configured so that the hold consecutive villa notification is easier to be executed.

Further, in this effect example, a button stock effect is performed as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, and a mini game of the button effect is performed for the number of stocked buttons. For example, in the case where a mission of winning a plurality of balls to the second special figure start port 232 is performed, if one ball or a predetermined number (for example, three balls) is won, a mini game with a button effect may be played. ..

FIGS. 395 (J (1) -1) to 397 (J (1) -67) continue even after the timer advance notice effect started during the variable display of the decorative symbol shifts to the jackpot game, and the jackpot game It shows how a certain effect is performed during execution. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 395 (J (1) -1) to 396 (J (4) -22) are shown in FIGS. 385 (A (1) -1) to (A (4) -22). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (1) -23), the special figure 1 is held (first).
(Hold) is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the bomb, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. That is, the variable icon h0 notifies that the timer advance notice effect is started. The symbol variation display this time is a symbol variation display that is a big hit, and the variation time is 30 seconds.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (1) -24), the characters "stock activation" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen corresponding to the display of the variable icon h0, and two timer notice effects are produced. Is shown to be starting at the same time. At this time, the bomb icon BOM has been erased. In this production example, the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, respectively, and the two timer notice effects are started at the same time. The third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are both default display modes. "90:00" is displayed as a timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 90 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests. That is, it is shown that a time longer than the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display this time is set as the initial value of the timer display. Further, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests that. In this production example, since the two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 start the countdown at the same time, there is a certain effect both when 10 seconds have passed and when 90 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Is suggested to be initiated. Here, some effects that may start after 10 seconds and some effects that may start after 90 seconds may be the same or different. May be good. After that, as shown in FIGS. 385 (A (1) -25) to (A (3) -34) and described above, FIGS. 396 (J (1) -25) to (J (3)). The production shown in -34) is performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 396 (J (1) -25) to FIG. 396 (J (3) -34) are shown in FIG. 385, except that the time indicated by the timer display of the third timer notice display TM13 is different. Since it is the same as (A (1) -25) to FIG. 6 (A (3) -34), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (3) -35), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The strong cut-in image CI1a displayed in FIG. 386 (A (3) -38) is displayed as a certain effect as a result of the timer advance notice effect. It is shown that the effect is displayed as a different effect from a certain effect executed as a result of the operation. That is, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed without the timer advance notice effect being performed. In the third timer notice display TM13, the timer display countdown is continuously performed, and "68:88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (3) -35).

After that, as shown in FIG. 396 (J (3) -36), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and the abbreviation of the decorative symbol display device 208 In the center, "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. Further, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is still continuing, and “66:21” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (3) -36).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (4) -37), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. At this time, the display position of the third timer notice display TM13 has moved from the upper right corner to the upper left corner. The movement of the third timer notice display TM13 may be performed by the moving animation or by the switching display. In the third timer notice display TM13, the timer display countdown is continuously performed, and "64:30" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (4) -37).

After that, as shown in FIG. 396 (J (4) -38), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is still continuing, and “62:30” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (4) -38). The timer display countdown may be temporarily suspended during the final display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (5) -39), it is shown that the jackpot start effect is being performed. When the jackpot start production is started, the wedding Machiko-sensei's character MCK will perform a production to celebrate the jackpot with four copandas. In addition, when the jackpot start effect starts, a right-handed display that encourages the player to hit right is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. Further, in this production example, the timer notice production related to the third timer notice display TM13, which has been performed before the start of the big hit game, is continuously performed even after the big hit game starts, and FIG. 396 (Fig. 396) At the timing shown in J (5) -39), "62:11" is displayed. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect started during the symbol variation display continues even after the shift to the jackpot game. In this production example, the third timer notice display TM13 moves slightly downward at the timing when the jackpot start effect is started.

FIG. 396 (J (5) -40) shows how the jackpot game has started and has shifted to the first round. In this production example, a production that introduces the production during the jackpot game is performed, and in the first round, the characters "Introduction of the production from the next round" are displayed together with the character of Copanda, and the fact is notified. At this time, the third timer notice display TM13 is overlapped by the Copanda character appearing in the production during the big hit game, and it is difficult to see a part of it, but the Copanda character is the third timer notice. It may overlap with the display TM13. Further, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the timer display countdown continues, and “60:37” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (5) -40).

FIG. 396 (J (5) -41) shows the transition to the second round. In the second round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "When appears ..." together with the Sabohani icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 396 (J (5) -42). Along with the demonstration display of the strong Sabohani group notice, the words "Expect the group notice!" Will be displayed on top of this, and the Sabohani group notice will be explained. In the third timer notice display TM13, the timer display countdown is still continuing, and “44:24” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (5) -42). Further, in FIGS. 396 (J (5) -41) and FIG. 396 (J (5) -42), the third timer notice display TM13 is overlapped by the Sabohani character appearing in the production explanation, and the third timer is displayed. Timer notice display TM
It is said that a part of 13 is difficult to see. Here, the Sabohani character appearing in the production description may overlap with the third timer notice display TM13.

FIG. 396 (J (5) -43) shows the transition to the fourth round. In the fourth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." together with the replay icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 396 (J (5) -44). Along with the replay icon with the characters "NEXT", the characters "Pseudo-ren" are displayed, and the pseudo-ren production is explained. In the third timer notice display TM13, the timer display countdown is still continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J (5) -44), "06:33" is displayed, but the third timer is displayed. At least a part of the timer notice display TM13 is overlapped by the replay icon, and a part of the third timer notice display TM13 is difficult to see. Here, the replay icon may overlap with the third timer notice display TM13.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 becomes "01:00", the display position of the third timer notice display TM13 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J (5) -45). As it moves to the lower center of the screen, it is displayed on the front side of the replay icon, showing how the remaining time on the timer display becomes easier to see.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -46) following FIG. 396 (J (5) -45) , A cut-in image (graphic novel image) 565G of a graphic novel-like character of a graphic novel that smokes a cigarette is displayed. At this time, the graphic novel image 565G is displayed on the back side of the third timer advance notice display TM13. Then, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -47), in the third timer advance notice display TM13, instead of the timer display, the character "probability change" is displayed. That is, it is shown that the notice display is performed using the timer display area.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -48), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is switched to the character display of "Yes!". That is, it is informed that after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the probabilistic state. In addition, in FIG. 397 (J (5) -48), it is shown that the transition from the 4th round to the 5th round is performed during the execution of the production by the graphic novel grandfather image 565G.

Further, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -49), the third timer notice display TM13 is switched to the character display of "that's it", which is a privilege advantageous to the player in addition to the probabilistic state. Suggests that may be granted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -50), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is switched to the character display of "No!". That is, it informs that it is confirmed that some advantageous privilege will be given to the player in addition to the probabilistic state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -51), in the third timer notice display TM13, the character display is switched to the character display of "Gekiatsu in hold", and the symbol whose execution is suspended in addition to the probabilistic state. It is informed that the symbol variation display, which is a big hit in the variation display, is included (that is, a hold consecutive channel occurs). That is, in this production example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the effect display by the graphic novel grandfather image 565G is shown as a certain effect.

In addition, in the production by the graphic novel grandfather image 565G, the game state after the big hit game is a probable change state.
In addition, it is executed when a pending consecutive chan occurs, but further, it may be executed only when the jackpot by the reserved consecutive chan is a probabilistic jackpot.

When the production by the graphic novel image 565G is completed as described above, the character BCMN of the oversized family crest appears in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -52). With the appearance of the character BCMN of this oversized family crest, the transition to the probabilistic state and the occurrence of the pending ream chan are notified.

FIG. 397 (J (5) -53) shows the transition to the sixth round. In the 6th round, the character TDR of the bancho whose clothes are torn appears, and it is notified that the character TDR will shift to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game is over. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN indicating that the character BCMN of the oversized family crest has appeared and the notification of the confirmation of the pending consecutive chan has been performed is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 397 (J (5) -53) to (J (5) -54), this effect is continuously performed until the 16th round is completed.

In FIG. 397 (J (5) -55), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. In this effect example, even if the jackpot end effect is started, the character TDR of the Bancho is still displayed, and further, the characters "next probability change" are displayed to notify that the state will shift to the probability change state. After that, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the family crest character CMON reappears from above the display screen, and notification that the hold ream is performed is also performed. Then, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -57), it is shown that the characters of "next probability change" displayed together with the character TDR of the bancho are switched to "next big hit". There is. After that, when the jackpot game is completed, the effects shown in FIGS. 397 (J (1) -58) to (J (4) -62) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 397 (J (1) -58) to (J (4) -62) are shown in FIGS. 386 (A (1) -62) to (A (4) -66). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (J (5) -63), it is shown that the jackpot start effect related to the second jackpot is being performed by the hold ream chan. When the jackpot start production is started, the wedding Machiko-sensei's character MCK will perform a production to celebrate the jackpot with four copandas.

FIG. 397 (J (5) -64) shows how the jackpot game has started and has shifted to the first round. In this production example, the character TDR of the bancho whose clothes are torn appears from the first round, and it is notified that this big hit is a probabilistic big hit. This production will continue until the start of the 16th round. As described above, the production explanation may be given during the round game.

FIG. 397 (J (5) -65) shows the transition to the 16th round. When the game shifts to the 16th round, the characters "Probability change jackpot" are added to the character TDR of the Bancho and displayed to notify that it is a probability variation jackpot.

In FIG. 397 (J (5) -66), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. In this effect example, even if the jackpot end effect is started, the character TDR of the Bancho is still displayed, and further, the characters "next probability change" are displayed to notify that the state will shift to the probability change state.

FIG. 397 (J (1) -67) shows a state in which the jackpot game is completed and the state is changed to the probabilistic state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is performed across the symbol variation display and the big hit game.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display may overlap with other effect displays, and at least a part of the timer notice display may be difficult to see.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that it is suggested that a plurality of advantageous benefits are given in a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that a time longer than the fluctuation time, which is the time for executing the symbol variation display, may be displayed as the initial value of the timer display.

Further, in this production example, it is shown that the initial value of the timer display is set so that the timer display is surely set to "00:00" during the big hit game by physically calculating, for example. When the time indicated by the initial value of the timer display in the timer notice display is longer than the fluctuation time and the shortest time in the jackpot game (for example, in a pachinko machine with 16 rounds and 10 counts, all the fired balls win the attacker) It is shown that the time is set until the elapse of about 1 minute and 30 seconds at the shortest.

In FIGS. 397 (K (5) -1) to 398 (K (4) -30), the timer advance notice effect is started during the jackpot game, but the timer advance notice effect does not end during the jackpot game, and then. It shows a state in which a certain effect related to the timer advance notice effect is performed in the symbol variation display started in. Note that FIG. 397 (K (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 397 (K (5) -1) to FIG. 397 (K (5) -6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 397 (K (5) -1) to (K (5) -6) are shown in FIGS. 387 (B (5) -10) to (B (5) -15). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 397 (K (5) -7) shows the transition to the 15th round. In this production example, when the 15th round is entered, the characters "Attention!" Are displayed together with the Copanda character, suggesting that the timer advance notice production is started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (K (5) -8), the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and "Timer activated!" Characters are displayed to notify that the timer notice effect has started. Here, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is the default display mode. "40:00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, suggesting that a certain effect is started 40 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. That is, in this effect example, the jackpot game may end within 40 seconds after the timer display countdown starts, and a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is performed during the jackpot game. Indicates that it may not be possible. That is, if the jackpot game is digested early, a certain effect may not be performed during the jackpot game.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (K (5) -9), the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is enlarged and displayed while moving to substantially the center of the display screen. After that, the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (5) -10) following FIG. 397 (K (5) -9), the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit continues. At the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (5) -10), "39:52" is displayed.

FIG. 398 (K (5) -11) shows the transition to the 16th round. In this production example, it is shown that the timer notice production is continuously performed over a plurality of rounds. That is, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit continues even after the transition from the 15th round to the 16th round. The timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is "24:33" at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (5) -11).

In FIG. 398 (K (5) -12), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. However, the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit continues, and "10:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (5) -12). That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is continued even after the 16th round is completed and the jackpot game is completed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (5) -13), the characters "next electric support" are displayed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (that is, Notification of the transition to the time saving state) has been made. At the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (5) -13), "08:77" is displayed as the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit.

FIG. 398 (K (1) -14) shows how the jackpot game has ended and the state has shifted to the electric support state. At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In addition, in FIG. 398 (K (1) -14), there are two holds of the special figure 2, and the first hold icon h21 and the second hold icon h22 are displayed. Further, in this production example, even after the jackpot game is completed and the game state shifts to the electric support state, the timer display countdown on the first jackpot middle timer notice display TM21 continues, and FIG. 398 (K (1)) At the timing shown in -14), "06:10" is displayed as the timer display on the timer display TM21 during the first big hit. Further, in this production example, when the big hit game ends and the game state shifts, the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is moved and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen while being reduced.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -15), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device The symbol variation display in 214 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. Then, it is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21, and is displayed as the first hold icon h21. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "05:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -15).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -16), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is continuing, and it is shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -16). ) -16), "03:00" is displayed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "timer attention" are displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -17), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the countdown continues on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, and "01:06" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -17).

After that, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -18), when the countdown of the timer display in the first jackpot middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 398 (K (K (1) -18) In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 1) -19), the family crest character CMON appears so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and the characters "family crest advent" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the big hit is confirmed. It is shown that the notification is being performed. That is, it is notified that the symbol variation display being executed is a symbol variation display that is a big hit. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is erased. At this time, it is shown that the symbol on the right fluctuates at a low speed and is stopped and displayed at "Decoration 5". As described above, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect started during the big hit game continues even after the end of the big hit game, and is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed in the symbol variation display executed thereafter. As a certain effect, it is shown that the jackpot confirmation notification is performed by displaying the character CMON of the family crest.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (1) -20), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the big hit confirmation notification is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (2) -21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. After that, the family crest character CMON is erased.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 398 (K (2) -22) to (K (1) -23), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs normal reach, and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. It is shown.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (2) -24), it is shown that the Echigoya group notice is being performed. At this time, the characters "premier appearance" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the premier notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (2) -25), it is shown that the cut-in image HBK of the capture is displayed. In addition, "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that it will develop into super reach.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (3) -26), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into SP reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (3) -27), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, the characters "strong cut-in" are also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the content of the executed notice is notified. The display of today's cut-in image CI1a in this effect example is executed as an effect different from a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (3) -28), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and the abbreviation of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the center, the "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K (4) -29), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Has been done. At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 398 (K (4) -30), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed straddling the time during the big hit game and the display of the symbol variation display after the end of the big hit game.

FIGS. 398 (L (5) -1) to 399 (L (4) -30) are different effects shown in FIGS. 397 (K (5) -1) to 398 (K (4) -30). Shows the pattern. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 398 (L (5) -1) to 399 (L (5) -10) are shown in FIGS. 397 (K (5) -1) to 398 (K (5) -10). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 399 (L (5) -11) shows the transition to the 16th round. The timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is "12:52" at the timing shown in FIG. 399 (L (5) -11).

FIG. 399 (L (5) -12) shows that the 16th round is still being carried out. At this time, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is completed and becomes "0:00". In this production example, the digestion of the jackpot game in the 15th to 16th rounds takes longer than the production examples shown in FIGS. 397 (K (5) -8) to 398 (K (5) -11). It is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed by the end of the big hit game.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 399 (L (5) -13), the family crest character CMON appears. That is, in this production example, the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed by the end of the big hit game, and as a certain effect, the pending continuous chan notification is performed by displaying the family crest character CMON. It is shown that it is. After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 399 (L (5) -14), the characters "super heat in the hold" are displayed together with the family crest icon CMN, suggesting that the hold ream is performed. ing.

In FIG. 399 (L (5) -15), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 399 (L (5) -16), the characters "next consecutive chan" are displayed in response to the announcement of the pending consecutive chan during the jackpot game. Here, too, the notification that the hold ream will be performed is performed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 399 (L (1) -17) to (L (4) -30) are performed. In the productions shown in FIGS. 399 (L (1) -17) to (L (4) -30), the timer notice production was completed during the big hit game, and the pending consecutive chan announcement was already made. As shown in 388 (K (1) -14) to the same figure (K (4) -30), the timer advance notice effect is not performed during the symbol variation display. In other words, the effects shown in FIGS. 399 (L (1) -17) to (L (4) -30) are shown in FIG. 388 (K (1)-" except that the timer advance notice effect is not performed. 14) -The same effect as shown in the figure (K (4) -30) is performed. Therefore, the description of the effects shown in FIGS. 399 (L (1) -17) to FIG. 399 (L (4) -30) will be omitted.

As described above, in this production example, even if the contents of the timer advance notice effect are the same, the timer advance notice effect may be completed during the big hit game or the big hit due to the difference in the progress of the game (digestion speed of the big hit game). It is shown that it may be completed during the symbol variation display performed after the game is completed.

In FIGS. 400 (M (1) -1) to 401 (M (11) -68), the timer advance notice effect is started during the symbol variation display, which is a big hit, but is started during and after the symbol variation display. It shows that the timer advance notice effect does not end even during the big hit game, and a certain effect related to the timer advance notice effect is performed in the symbol variation display started after that. The effects shown in FIGS. 400 (M (1) -1) to 401 (M (5) -42) are shown in FIGS. 395 (J (1) -1) to 396 (J (5) -42). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 401 (M (5) -43) shows the transition to the fourth round. In the fourth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "when appears ..." together with the replay icon, and the explanation of the pseudo-continuous production is started. However, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -44), the explanation of the pseudo-continuous production was interrupted, the character HSG of the lord who made a thumb-up pose appeared, and "emergency notification!" The characters are displayed. In the third timer notice display TM13, the timer display countdown continues, and "09:31" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -44).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -45), the character "timer extension" is displayed, and the timer notice is displayed during the countdown of the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13. It is shown that the addition animation is started. As a result, the player may be expected to add the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13.

When the timer advance notice addition animation is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -46) shows that the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is updated to "99:99". Has been done.

FIG. 401 (M (5) -47) shows the transition to the fifth round. In the fifth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 resumes the explanation of the interrupted pseudo-continuous production, displays the characters "when appears ..." along with the replay icon, and then shows FIG. 401 ( As shown in M (5) -48), the characters "pseudo-ren" are displayed together with the replay icon with the characters "NEXT", and the pseudo-ren production is explained. In the third timer notice display TM13, the timer display countdown continues, and "90:26" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -48). However, at least a part of the third timer notice display TM13 overlaps with the pseudo-ream icon related to the explanation of the pseudo-ream effect, and the third timer notice display TM13 is difficult to see.

FIG. 401 (M (5) -49) shows the transition to the ninth round. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -50), the character HSG of the lord who made a thumb-up pose appears again, and the characters "emergency notification!" Are displayed. In the third timer notice display TM13, the timer display countdown continues, and “13:58” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -50). In addition, in FIG. 401 (M (5) -48) to FIG. (M (5) -49), two game balls are won in the special drawing 2 starting port 232 between the 5th round and the 9th round. Therefore, the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 has increased by two.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -51), the character "timer extension" is displayed, and the timer notice is displayed during the countdown of the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13. It is shown that the addition animation is started. As a result, the player may be able to expect that the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is further added.

When the timer advance notice addition animation is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -52) shows that the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is updated to the display indicating infinity. Has been done. That is, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is extended by updating the timer display to a display indicating infinity. At this time, the countdown of the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 is temporarily suspended.

FIG. 401 (M (5) -53) shows the transition to the 10th round. Third timer notice display The timer display in TM13 remains unchanged as the display indicating infinity. This state continues until the end of the 16th round, as shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -54).

In FIG. 401 (M (5) -55), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. Here, too, the character HSG of the lord is displayed, and the third timer notice display TM13 also remains a display indicating infinity. Then, when the jackpot end effect is started, the characters "Timer is ..." are displayed, foretelling that the display of the third timer notice display TM13 will change.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -56), the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 changes to "10:00", and 10 after the timer display countdown is restarted. It suggests that a certain effect will start when the seconds have passed. Further, at this time, the characters "next electric support" are displayed, and it is notified that the game state after the big hit game is the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (time saving state). Actually, as will be described later, the game state after the big hit game is the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state), but here, the notification that the probability change state is reached is not given. It notifies that it is in a time-saving state, and shifts to a so-called latent state.

FIG. 401 (M (11) -57) shows how the jackpot game has ended and the state has shifted to the electric support state (latent state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown has not restarted, and the display remains "10:00".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -58), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device The symbol variation display in 214 is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h21 and h22 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is changed to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21 and is displayed as the first hold icon h21. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 20
In No. 8, the variable display of the decorative pattern is also started. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display has not started yet and remains at "10:00", but the countdown starts after that.

FIG. 401 (M (11) -59) shows that the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 is continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -59), the third timer is displayed. "09:77" is displayed on the timer notice display TM13. That is, it is shown that 0.23 seconds have passed since the countdown was restarted.

In FIGS. 401 (M (11) -59) to FIG. 401 (M (11) -60), two game balls have won a prize at the special drawing 2 starting port 232, and the number of holdings in special drawing 2 has increased by two. It is shown. Here, the hold icons h22 and h23 of the special figure 2 are both in the default display mode. In the third timer notice display TM13, the timer display countdown continues, and “07:44” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -60).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -61), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" fluctuates. Temporary stop is being carried out. After that, as shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -62), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, at this time as well, the timer display countdown continues on the third timer advance notice display TM13, and “02:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -62).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -63), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure is started. The symbol variation display on the display device 214 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21, is displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is the second hold. It moves to the display position of the icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, at this time as well, the timer display countdown continues on the third timer advance notice display TM13, and “02:54” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -63).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -64), the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed, and the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes "00:00". It is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -65), in the third timer notice display TM13, the characters “probability change confirmed” are displayed in the area where the timer display is displayed. That is, it is notified that the current gaming state is not the time saving state but the probabilistic state. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the probability change notification is performed as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -66), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased, and the characters "probability changing" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the game is played. It is notified that the state is a probabilistic state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -67), the left symbol, the middle symbol,
The right symbol is stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is temporarily stopped due to shaking fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -68), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is performed including the symbol variation display performed before and after the big hit game.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is paused by performing a predetermined display (for example, infinite display) while the timer advance notice effect is being executed, and then restarted.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the time shown on the timer display is added during the execution of the timer advance notice effect.

Further, in this production example, the timer advance notice production is performed in a pachinko machine having a game property in which there is a case where the game state after the end of the big hit game is not notified as to whether or not the game state is a probability change state (a so-called “latent probability”). It is shown that a certain effect to be executed as a result of the performance is to notify that the player is in a probabilistic state.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the display position of the timer notice display is likely to be changed (movement display is easy) when the timer notice effect straddles the big hit game and the symbol variation display performed before and after the big hit game.

Further, in this production example, for example, as shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -55), the display of a long timer display (infinity display) gives a higher expectation to the content of a certain production. It has been shown that it may be possible. As a result, the player may be expected to have a long timer display.

In the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine capable of executing the small hit game, such a timer advance notice effect is not performed in the symbol variation display which is a small hit, but is performed in the symbol variation display which is a big hit. May be good.

FIGS. 402 (N (5) -1) to FIG. (N (11) -11) show the timer advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 400 (M (1) -1) to 401 (M (11) -68). It shows another production pattern. Note that FIG. 402 (N (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -54), and shows that the 16th round has ended and the big hit end effect has started. Shown. The production example shown in FIG. 402 (N (5) -1) is different from the production example shown in FIG. 401 (M (5) -55) in the number of holds, and is different from that in FIG. 402 (N (5)-55). The number of reservations in the production shown in 1) is 0 for special figure 1 and 1 for special figure 2.

FIG. 402 (N (5) -1) shows that the 16th round has ended and the jackpot end effect has started. Here, too, the character HSG of the lord is displayed, and the third timer notice display TM13 also remains a display indicating infinity. Then, when the jackpot end effect is started, the characters "Timer is ..." are displayed, foretelling that the display of the third timer notice display TM13 will change.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (5) -2), the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 changes to "30:00", and 30 after the timer display countdown is restarted. It suggests that a certain effect will start when the seconds have passed. Further, at this time, the characters "next electric support" are displayed, and it is notified that the game state after the big hit game is the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (time saving state).

FIG. 402 (N (11) -3) shows a state in which the jackpot game is completed and the state is shifted to the electric support state (latent state). At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown has not restarted, and the display remains "10:00".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -4), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device The symbol variation display in 214 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. And it is displayed as a variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display has not started yet and remains at "30:00", but the countdown starts after that.

FIG. 402 (N (11) -5) shows that the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 is continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -5), the third timer is displayed. "29:77" is displayed on the timer notice display TM13. That is, it is shown that 0.23 seconds have passed since the countdown was restarted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -6), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" fluctuates. Temporary stop is being carried out. After that, as shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -7), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, at this time as well, the timer display countdown continues on the third timer advance notice display TM13, and “21:45” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -7). In this production example, at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -7), since the hold is 0 in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the standby state is set.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -8), it is shown that the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is being counted down while in the standby state. At the timing shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -8), "20:19" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -9), the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed in the standby state, and the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is “00:00”. It is shown that it became. Then, as shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -10), in the third timer notice display TM13, the characters “probability change confirmed” are displayed in the area where the timer display is displayed. That is, it is notified that the current gaming state is not the time saving state but the probabilistic state. As described above, in this effect example, even when the symbol variation display is not performed and the hold is 0, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed, the probability change notification is performed as a certain effect. Is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N (11) -11), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased, and the characters "probability changing" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the game is played. It is notified that the state is a probabilistic state.

FIGS. 402 (O (5) -1) to FIG. (O (99) -13) show the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 402 (N (5) -1) to (N (11) -11). Another example is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 402 (O (5) -1) to FIG. (O (11) -8) are shown in FIGS. 402 (N (5) -1) to (N (11) -8). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

When a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed from the standby state, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -9) shows that the customer waiting demo display is displayed. There is. Even at this time, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM13 continues, and “14:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -9). At this time, although the customer waiting demo display overlaps with the timer notice display TM13, the timer notice display TM13 may overlap with the customer waiting demo display. Further, the time from the standby state to the start of the customer waiting demo display is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set to an appropriate time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -10), the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed in the state where the customer waiting demo display is displayed, and the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13. Is shown to be "00:00". Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -11) returns from the customer waiting demo display to the display indicating the state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the third timer notice display TM13 displays. In the area where the timer display was displayed, the characters "Probability change confirmed" are displayed. That is, it is notified that the current gaming state is not the time saving state but the probabilistic state. As described above, in this production example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed during the customer waiting demo display, the display returns to the state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed from the customer waiting demo display. It is shown that the probability change notification is performed as a certain effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -12), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is erased, and the characters “probability changing” are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the game is played. It is notified that the state is a probabilistic state.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O (99) -13) shows that the customer waiting demo display is displayed again.

FIGS. 403 (P (5) -1) to (P (99) -12) show the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 402 (O (5) -1) to (O (99) -13). Another example is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 403 (P (5) -1) to (P (99) -10) are shown in FIGS. 402 (O (5) -1) to (O (99) -10). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 403 (P (99) -10), the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed in the state where the customer waiting demo display is displayed, and the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is set to “00: When it becomes "00", as shown in FIG. 403 (P (99) -11), in this production example, the characters "probability change confirmed" are displayed on the third timer notice display TM13 in the state where the customer waiting demo display is displayed. To. That is, it is notified that the current gaming state is not the time saving state but the probabilistic state. As described above, in this production example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed during the customer waiting demo display, the probability change notification is performed as a certain effect while the customer waiting demo display is displayed. It is shown that it is.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 403 (P (99) -12), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased while the customer waiting demo display is continuously displayed, and the upper center of the display screen is displayed. The characters "Probability change in progress" are displayed on the screen, and it is notified that the game state is the probability change state.

FIGS. 403 (Q (5) -1) to (Q (11) -16) show the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 402 (O (5) -1) to (O (99) -13). Another example is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 403 (Q (5) -1) to (Q (99) -10) are shown in FIGS. 402 (O (5) -1) to (O (99) -10). Since it is the same as the effect shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 403 (Q (99) -10), the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed in the state where the customer waiting demo display is displayed, and the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is set to "00: When it becomes "00", in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 403 (Q (99) -11), the start of execution of a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is reserved, and the timer display is displayed. It waits in the state of "00:00". That is, in this effect example, in the standby state, even if the countdown of the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the start of execution of a certain effect is reserved. The state is shown.

After that, when the customer waiting demo display is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 403 (Q (11) -12) is shown to return to the display indicating the state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. However, even in this case, the start of execution of a certain effect is reserved, and the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 remains at "00:00".

After that, when the game ball wins the special figure 2 starting port 232, as shown in FIG. 403 (Q (11) -13), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the symbol in the second special figure display device 214 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 403 (Q (11) -14), a change animation suggesting that the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 changes is started, and when the change animation is completed, FIG. As shown in 403 (Q (11) -15), on the third timer notice display TM13, the characters "probability change confirmed" are displayed instead of the timer display, and the current gaming state is not the time saving state but the probable change state. You will be notified that there was. As described above, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed, the probability change notification is performed as a certain effect after waiting for the start of the symbol variation display. Is shown to be done. In other words, when the timer display in the timer advance notice effect becomes "00:00", the symbol changes when the customer waiting demo display is displayed or the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the standby state. It can be said that it is shown that a certain effect is delayed and executed until the display is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 403 (Q (11) -16), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased, and the characters "probability changing" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the game is played. It is notified that the state is a probabilistic state.

In FIGS. 404 (R (5) -1) to FIG. 404 (R (4) -25), a mission is started during the jackpot game, and when the mission is completed, a timer advance notice effect is started. It shows how it is. Note that FIG. 404 (R (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. However, in this production example, it is assumed that three "decorations 2" are aligned and a big hit is made, and the number of reservations when the big hit occurs is 0 for special figure 1 and 4 for special figure 2. .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 404 (R (5) -1) to FIG. 404 (R (5) -6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 404 (R (5) -1) to (R (5) -6) are shown in FIGS. 389 (E (5) -1) to (E (5) -6). Since it is the same as the effect shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 404 (R (5) -7) shows the transition to the fourth round. In this production example, when moving to the 4th round, the character KGG of the god with a cane will appear, and the characters "Emergency mission" and "Let the electric chew win 3 balls" will be displayed, and the mission production will start. I am informing you that. In this mission production, the purpose of the mission is to make the special figure 2 starting port 232 win three game balls during the big hit game, and when the mission is completed, the timer notice production is started. .. After that, as shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -8), the mission effect is started. When the mission production is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "Let the electric chew win 3 balls" in the upper center of the display screen, and displays the characters "3 more balls" below it. And the remaining quota until the mission is completed is displayed.

FIG. 404 (R (5) -9) shows how the sixth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -9), one game ball won a prize at the special figure 2 starting port 232, so the display of the remaining quota until the mission is completed is updated to "two more balls". ..

FIG. 404 (R (5) -10) shows how the seventh round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -10), one more game ball was won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, so the display of the remaining quota until the mission was completed was updated to "one more ball". There is.

FIG. 404 (R (5) -11) shows how the 10th round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -11), since one more game ball has won a prize in the special drawing 2 starting port 232, the mission is completed and the characters "mission achieved" are displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -12), the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is displayed in the center of the display screen, and below that, "Expect in 30 seconds". Is displayed to notify that the timer notice effect has been started due to the achievement of the mission. Here, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is the default display mode. "30:00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, suggesting that a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. After that, the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -13), the timer display in the first jackpot medium timer notice display TM21 continues to count down, and is shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -13). At the timing, "29:76" is displayed.

FIG. 404 (R (5) -14) shows the transition to the 11th round. The countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is still continuing, and "12:92" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -14).

After that, as shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -15), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 404 (R (R (5) -15) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5) -16), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -17), the characters "pending consecutive chan confirmation" are displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol variation whose execution is suspended (pending). It is announced that the display includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 404 (R (5) -18) to FIG. 404 (R (4) -25) are performed. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 404 (R (5) -18) to FIG. 404 (R (4) -25) are shown in FIG. 29) -Since it is the same as the effect shown in the figure (B (4) -36), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, the mission is achieved by winning a predetermined number of prizes in the special figure 2 starting port 242 during the big hit game, but the conditions for achieving the mission are not limited to those described above, for example. The mission may be achieved when the game ball is won (over winning) in the variable winning opening 234 exceeding the specified number (for example, 10) in one round. In this case, the mission may be achieved when the number of over prizes is a predetermined number (for example, 3). Further, the mission may be achieved when the digestion rate of one round is within a predetermined time (for example, within 10 seconds). In addition, the success of the button repeated hitting effect, the button long pressing effect, and the button pressing effect may be a condition for accomplishing the mission. Further, a mini-game may be played, and the result of the mini-game may be a certain result (for example, the result of success) as a condition for accomplishing the mission.

In FIGS. 404 (S (5) -1) to 405 (S (4) -24), another effect pattern is shown in which the mission is started during the jackpot game and the timer advance effect is started when the mission is completed. It shows how it is being done. The effects shown in FIGS. 404 (S (5) -1) to (S (5) -9) are shown in FIGS. 404 (R (5) -1) to (R (5) -9). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 405 (S (5) -10) following FIG. 404 (S (5) -9) shows that the eleventh round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -10), one more game ball was won at the special figure 2 starting port 232, so the display of the remaining quota until the mission was completed was updated to "one more ball". There is.

FIG. 405 (S (5) -11) shows that the 15th round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -11), since one more game ball has won a prize in the special drawing 2 starting port 232, the mission is completed and the characters "mission achieved" are displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -12), the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is displayed in the center of the display screen, and "Expect after 30 seconds" below it. Is displayed to notify that the timer notice effect has been started due to the achievement of the mission. Here, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is the default display mode. "30:00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, suggesting that a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. After that, the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -13), the timer display countdown in the first jackpot medium timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -13). At the timing, "29:76" is displayed.

FIG. 405 (S (5) -14) shows that the 16th round is being performed. That is, it is shown that the final round is being carried out. At this time, the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is still continuing, and "15:31" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -14).

In FIG. 405 (S (5) -15), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. However, the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit continues, and "12:09" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -15). That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is continued even after the 16th round is completed and the jackpot game is completed. In this effect example, when the big hit end effect is started, the display position of the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is moved to the lower left corner of the display screen. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -16), the characters "next electric support" are displayed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (that is, Notification of the transition to the time saving state) has been made. At the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (5) -16), "10:88" is displayed as the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit.

FIG. 405 (S (1) -17) shows how the jackpot game has ended and the state has shifted to the electric support state. At this time, the hold is not digested, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the combination of the jackpot of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In FIG. 405 (S (1) -17), there are four holds in FIG. 2, and the first hold icon h21 to the fourth hold icon h24 are displayed. Further, in this production example, even after the jackpot game is completed and the game state shifts to the electric support state, the timer display countdown on the first jackpot middle timer notice display TM21 continues, and FIG. 405 (S (1)) At the timing shown in -17), "09:10" is displayed as the timer display on the timer display TM21 during the first big hit. Further, in this production example, when the big hit game ends and the game state shifts, the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 moves and displays in the upper left corner of the display screen.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -18), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure display device The symbol variation display in 214 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the change icon display area. Then, it is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21, is displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is the second. It moves to the display position of the hold icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22, the fourth hold icon h24 moves to the display position of the third hold icon h23, and is displayed as the third hold icon h23. Will be done. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, the timer display countdown continues, and "08:85" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -18).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -19), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the countdown continues on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, and "01:85" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -19).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -20), it is shown that the right symbol fluctuates at a low speed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is completed, and the timer display becomes "00:00". Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -21), the grandfather V formation display GYV appears so as to overlap the decorative symbol, indicating that the jackpot confirmation notification is being performed. Has been done. That is, it is notified that the symbol variation display being executed is a symbol variation display that is a big hit. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is erased. At this time, the symbol on the right is still fluctuating at a low speed. As described above, in this effect example, the timer advance effect started during the jackpot game due to the achievement of the mission continues even after the end of the jackpot game, and the timer advance effect is performed in the symbol variation display executed thereafter. As a certain effect to be executed, it is shown that a big hit confirmation notification is performed by displaying the grandfather V formation display GYV. After that, as shown in FIG. 405 (S (1) -22), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is reached. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S (4) -23), the third stop is performed without performing the reach effect, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to display "decoration 5-decoration". It is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "5-Decoration 5". After that, as shown in FIG. 405 (S (4) -24), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, depending on the time when the mission is achieved in the mission production in the jackpot game, the timer notice production started during the jackpot game is performed over the symbol variation display started after the end of the jackpot game. It is shown that it is.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that a certain mode of the effect differs depending on the time when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice effect started after the mission is achieved is completed. Specifically, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display started after the mission is completed is completed during the jackpot game, the family crest character CMON appears and is not completed during the jackpot game, but after the jackpot game. If it is completed during the symbol variation display of, the grandfather V formation display GYV is displayed.

FIGS. 405 (T (5) -1) to FIG. 405 (T (4) -18) show that the mission is started during the jackpot game, the mission fails, and the timer advance notice effect is not started. The effects shown in FIGS. 405 (T (5) -1) to (T (5) -9) are shown in FIGS. 404 (R (5) -1) to (R (5) -9). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 405 (T (5) -10) shows that the 14th round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 405 (T (5) -10), one more game ball was won at the special figure 2 starting port 232, so the display of the remaining quota until the mission was completed was updated to "one more ball". There is.

FIG. 405 (T (5) -11) shows that the 16th round (final round) is being performed. As for the degree of achievement of the mission, one ball is still left in the special figure 2 starting port 242, and the display of the remaining quota until the mission is completed is still "one more ball".

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (T (5) -12) shows the state when the 16th round is completed. However, by the end of the 16th round, the mission of winning three game balls to the special figure 2 starting port 242 could not be achieved, so the characters "Mission not achieved" and "Sorry" are displayed, and a timer notice effect is produced. Is shown not to start.

In FIG. 405 (T (5) -13), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (T (5) -14), the characters "next electric support" are displayed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (that is, Notification of the transition to the time saving state) has been made.

In this production example, the timer advance notice production was not started because the mission was not achieved, and as a result, the pending ream announcement was not performed, but in reality, FIGS. 404 (R (5) -1) to the same. Similar to the above-mentioned production example shown in FIG. (R (4) -25), the symbol variation display is such that the first hold of the special figure 2 is a big hit. Therefore, when the jackpot game is completed, the effects shown in FIGS. 405 (T (1) -15) to (T (4) -18) are performed. That is, except that the family crest character CMON does not appear during the symbol variation display, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is shown in FIGS. 404 (R (1) -21) to FIG. It will be done in the same way as it was done. Therefore, the description of the effects shown in FIGS. 405 (T (1) -15) to FIG. 405 (T (4) -18) will be omitted.

In FIGS. 406 (U (5) -1) to FIG. 406 (U (5) -6), as a result of the timer advance notice effect during the jackpot game, an event occurs in which the number of songs that can be selected as a certain effect increases. The situation is shown. Note that FIG. 406 (U (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A (4) -41), for example, showing that a big hit has occurred and the big hit start effect is being performed. Shown. However, in this production example, it is assumed that all three "decoration 2" are big hits.

FIG. 406 (U (5) -2) shows how the jackpot game has started and has shifted to the first round. In this effect example, the effect explanation is not started, the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit is displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the characters "timer activation" are displayed below it, and the timer notice effect starts. It informs that it was done. Here, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is the default display mode. The timer display TM21 during the first big hit displays "10:00" as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. After that, the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started on the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (U (5) -3), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit continues, and is shown in FIG. 406 (U (5) -3). At the timing, "09:77" is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 406 (U (5) -4), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 406 (U (U (5) -4) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5) -5), the character of the princess appears, and in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21, the characters "new song get" are displayed instead of the timer display. For example, the big hit. It has been reported that the lineup of songs played during the game will increase. That is, it is reported that the lineup of songs that the player wants to play during the jackpot game will increase.

FIG. 406 (U (5) -6) shows the transition to the second round. When shifting to the second round, the song titles of the songs to be added to the lineup are displayed on the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the number of songs is increased as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

As described above, in this effect example, as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the player's notification such as notification of the occurrence of a pending consecutive chan or notification of a probable change jackpot, etc. In addition to the effect of notifying or notifying the contents directly related to the profit, it is shown that the effect of giving a privilege to enhance the effect of the effect is performed although it is not related to the interest of the player.

In this production example, an effect of increasing the number of songs is performed as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. For example, an effect of increasing the premier effect in which the restriction on appearance is lifted is performed. It may be broken, or an effect may be performed to increase the number of characters whose appearance is released.

FIGS. 406 (V (5) -1) to FIG. 406 (V (5) -14) show a state in which a mission is started during a jackpot game and a certain privilege is notified when the mission is completed within the time limit. Shown. Note that FIG. 406 (V (5) -1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B (4) -9), and shows a state in which a big hit is generated and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. However, in this production example, it is assumed that three "decorations 2" are aligned and a big hit is made, and the number of reservations when the big hit occurs is 0 for special figure 1 and 4 for special figure 2. .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 406 (V (5) -1) to FIG. 406 (V (5) -6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 406 (V (5) -1) to (V (5) -6) are shown in FIGS. 404 (R (5) -1) to (R (5) -6). Since it is the same as the effect shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 406 (V (5) -7) shows the transition to the fourth round. In this production example, when moving to the 4th round, the character KGG of the god with a cane will appear, and the characters "Emergency mission" and "Let's win the electric chew within 30 seconds" will be displayed, and the mission production will start. It informs that it will be done. In this mission production, the purpose of the mission is to win one game ball to the special figure 2 starting port 232 within a predetermined time (30 seconds) after the mission starts, and when the mission is achieved, a certain production is performed. Is configured to start. After that, as shown in FIG. 404 (R (5) -8), the mission effect is started. When the mission production is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "Let's win the electric chew within 30 seconds" in the upper center of the display screen, and the first jackpot timer notice display TM21 below it. Is displayed, the character "30:00" is displayed as the initial display of the timer display on the first jackpot timer notice display TM21, and then the timer display countdown (timer subtraction) is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -9), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit continues, and is shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -9). At the timing, "29:76" is displayed.

FIG. 406 (V (5) -10) shows how the fifth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -10), one game ball has won a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232, so that the mission has been completed and the characters "achieved!" To that effect are displayed. In addition, "13:44" is displayed as the timer display in the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -11), the character "attention" is displayed instead of the timer display on the first jackpot medium timer notice display TM21, and then FIG. 406 (V (5)). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in -13), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -14), the characters "pending consecutive chan confirmation" are displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol variation whose execution is suspended (pending). It is announced that the display includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit.

As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display used in the timer notice effect may be used as a display indicating the remaining time of the mission.

In this production example, when the mission is completed, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is stopped and the family crest character CMON is displayed. For example, the family crest is displayed immediately after the mission is completed. Character CMON is not displayed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 406 (V (5) -11') to (V (5) -14'), the family crest character after the timer display countdown is completed. CMON may be displayed.

Specifically, FIG. 406 (V (5) -11') is an effect following FIG. 406 (V (5) -10). In this effect example, the timer display on the first jackpot medium timer notice display TM21. The countdown is continued without stopping, and "13:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -11'). Then, above the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, the characters "At timer 0 ..." are displayed, suggesting that some effect (a certain effect) is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. doing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -12'), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 406 (V) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in (5) -13'), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (V (5) -14'), the characters "pending consecutive chan confirmation" are displayed together with the character of the family crest, and the symbol whose execution is suspended (pending) is displayed. It is announced that the variable display includes a symbol variable display that is a big hit.

As described above, in this production example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is continued as it is after the mission is completed, and when the countdown is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the family crest is displayed as a certain effect. It is shown that the character CMON is displayed and the occurrence of the pending consecutive chan is announced.

Figures 407 (X (5) -1) to (X (5) -11) show that the mission is started during the jackpot game, the mission is not completed within the time limit, and no benefits are obtained. Is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 407 (X (5) -1) to (X (5) -9) are shown in FIGS. 406 (V (5) -1) to (V (5) -9). Since it is the same as the production shown in the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 407 (X (5) -10) shows how the fifth round is being performed. In this production example, during the execution of the fifth round of the game, the timer display on the timer display TM21 during the first big hit is displayed without any game ball winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 after the mission starts. It is shown that the countdown is completed and the timer display is set to "00:00". Therefore, the character "sorry" is displayed above the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit to notify that the mission has failed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 407 (X (5) -11), the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit is erased, and the characters "Introduction of production from the next round" are displayed together with the Copanda character, and the mission production is performed. It is notified that the continuation of the production explanation that was interrupted due to the damage will be started.

As described above, in this effect example, if the mission is not completed by the time the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed in the mission in the mission effect, the timer notice display is deleted without performing a certain effect. It is shown that the mission production is finished.

FIGS. 407 (Y (5) -1) to FIG. 407 (Y (5) -3) show a modified example of the effect following FIG. 406 (V (5) -10). In the production examples shown in FIGS. 407 (Y (5) -1) to (Y (5) -3), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game progresses. The display state can be changed or moved to change the position according to the above. It should be noted that such a configuration can also be applied to other embodiments described above.

FIG. 407 (Y (5) -1) shows how the fifth round is being performed. In FIG. 407 (Y (5) -1), the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit shows that the character "attention" is displayed instead of the timer display because the mission has been completed. .. In addition, the character "achieved!" Is displayed above the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit to notify the achievement of the mission.

Then, as shown in FIG. 407 (Y (5) -2), the sub-display device 208S arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 rises and overlaps the front side of the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is shown that it is moving to the position. That is, at least a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 is more difficult to see than the non-overlapping state. Then, on the sub-display device 208S, the characters "super-hot in hold" are displayed together with the character of the lord who got on the motorcycle, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a hold ream will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 407 (Y (5) -3), it is shown that the sub-display device 208S starts descending and returns to the reference position. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit was erased, and the characters "Introduction of production from the next round" were displayed together with the Copanda character, which was interrupted by the mission production. It is notified that the continuation of the production explanation will be started.

As described above, in this production example, a state in which a movable body such as the sub display device 208S operates as a certain production is shown when the mission is achieved.

In this production example, the sub display device 208S has been applied as an example of the movable body, but for example, one or two or more of the various production movable bodies shown in FIG. 14 may be operated. Good.

In this production example, the purpose of the mission is to win a predetermined number of prizes in the second special figure start port 232, but the contents of the mini-games and missions explained so far are applied to this production example. It is also possible to do. In addition to this, for example, the purpose of the mission may be to pass through a production gate that is placed on the game board and allows the game ball to pass through, or the purpose of the mission may be achieved by repeatedly hitting or holding down the production button 136. It may be achievably configured.

Further, in the present embodiment, one or two or more of the effect movable bodies (for example, various effect movable bodies shown in FIG. 14) are operated as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. May be good. In this case, for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display is "00:00" and a certain effect movable body (first effect movable body) is operated, another certain effect movable body (second effect movable body) is operated. When the effect movable body) is in operation, after the operation of the second effect movable body is completed, in order to avoid interference between the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body. One effect movable body may be operated to delay the start of a certain effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the timer display in the timer notice display is "00:00" in the timer notice effect, a predetermined effect is performed as a certain effect. When there are a plurality of effects and the timer display is "00:00", one of them may be selectively selected and executed. For example, the timer display may be "00:00". Then, it is possible to select whether to perform the hold continuous channel notification effect or the probability change notification effect, and the selected effect may be configured to be executed. With such a configuration, it is difficult to specify which privilege is notified even if the timer display is "00:00", so that it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the production.

Further, the content of a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect may be randomly selected from a plurality of types according to the conditions, and the increase notification of the songs, etc. may be included in the effect. It may be possible to include items that are not directly related to the benefits of the game, and by doing so, the range of timer effects may be expanded. In addition, it may be possible to reduce the value of the privilege by increasing the frequency of appearance of the timer notice effect.

Further, for example, when a lower plate full tank error occurs during the display of the timer notice display, the ball removal display may be displayed so as to overlap the timer notice display. By doing so, since attention is paid to whether the timer notice display indicates a certain time, it may be possible to encourage the player to pull out the ball. The display example of the ball-less display can be applied to any of the display modes described so far.

Further, in the effect example in which the timer notice display overlaps with the other effect display in the above-described embodiment, the other effect display may be configured to overlap the timer notice display. Further, in the effect example in which the other effect display overlaps with the timer notice display in the above-described embodiment, the timer notice display may be configured to overlap with the other effect display.

And, as appropriate, an example of an effect in which other effect displays overlap with the timer notice display is shown.
In the above description,
"Timer effect [for example, timer advance effect related to the first jackpot medium timer advance display TM21 shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -49) to FIG. 386 (A (5) -55)] can be executed. A game table equipped with [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The timer effect is a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display [for example, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 or the like shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -49)] is started. When [for example, "00: 00" etc.] is reached, a certain effect [for example, a hold consecutive chan announcement effect due to the appearance of the family crest character CMON shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -54)] is started. It is a production configured to
It is configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game [for example, in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -49) to (A (5) -55)). 1st big hit timer notice display The timer notice effect related to TM21 is performed during the big hit game, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to expect a timer effect even during a big hit game.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , It may be configured so that a certain effect is started even in a case other than the case where the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

It may be configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game, or an effect other than at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured in. Further, it may be configured so that at least a part of the timer effect is always performed during the execution of the jackpot game, or at least a part of the timer effect may not be performed during the execution of the jackpot game. You may.

Further, it may be configured so that only a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game, or the entire timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game. May be good.

It should be noted that only a certain effect of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game, or may be performed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, "The timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the jackpot game, and the timer display may be a display indicating the certain time during the execution of the jackpot game. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 396 (J (1) -24) to 397 (J (5) -52), the third timer notice display TM13 is displayed during the symbol variation display that is a big hit. The timer advance notice effect is started, and the effect display by the dramatic picture grandfather image 565G as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is being performed during the big hit game, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to note that the timer display indicates a certain time.

In addition, according to this game table, a big hit can be given by generating a big hit before the timer display reaches a certain time, and another big hit is made by the timer effect started during the execution of the symbol variation display. It may be possible to have expectations for the score.

Here, the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be displayed to indicate a certain time only during the execution of the big hit game. Alternatively, the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the jackpot game, and the timer display may be displayed to indicate a certain time even during the execution of a game other than the jackpot game. It may be configured to be. Further, the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be configured to always indicate a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. , The timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may not be displayed to indicate a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. ..

In addition, only the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the jackpot game, and the timer display may be displayed to indicate a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game. Alternatively, a display other than the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the jackpot game, and the timer display may be displayed to indicate a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured in.

In addition, the timer display may be displayed only during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the jackpot game, and the timer display may be displayed to indicate a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game. Alternatively, the timer display may be displayed in addition to the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the jackpot game, and the timer display may be displayed to indicate a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured.

It should be noted that the timer effect may be a game table characterized in that the symbol variation display is executed before the start of the big hit game and at least one after the end of the big hit game, and the timer effect is executed over the big hit game.

In addition, "the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the display may indicate the certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 397 (K (5) -8) to 398 (K (1) -19), the timer notice effect related to the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed during the big hit game. The effect of the jackpot confirmation notification due to the appearance of the family crest character CMON as a certain effect that is started and executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is performed during the symbol variation display performed after the end of the jackpot game, etc. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, a timer display may be displayed as a look-ahead notice during a big hit.

Here, even if the timer display is displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the display may indicate a certain time only during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured so that the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the display may indicate a certain time other than the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. May be good. Further, the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the display may be configured to always indicate a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. The timer display may be displayed during the execution of the game, and may not be displayed to indicate a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only during the execution of the jackpot game, and may be configured to indicate a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. However, the timer display may be displayed even during the execution of a game other than the jackpot game, and the display may indicate a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. You may.

Further, only the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the display may indicate a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. However, a display other than the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. May be good.

Further, "The timer effect is an effect that may start execution when a certain condition related to the game is achieved [for example, FIGS. 404 (R (5) -7) to FIG. As shown in -12), when the mission to win three game balls to the special figure 2 start port 232 during the big hit game is achieved, the timer notice effect related to the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is started, etc. ],
Depending on the timing at which the certain condition is achieved, the display indicating the certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed [for example, the display indicating the certain time]. As shown in FIGS. 405 (S (5) -12) to FIG. 405 (S (5) -21), the countdown of the timer display on the first jackpot middle timer notice display TM21 is a jackpot game depending on the timing when the mission is completed. It is completed during the symbol variation display after the end, the timer display becomes "00:00", and the big hit confirmation notification is performed by the grandfather V formation display GYV display during the symbol variation display, etc.],
Depending on the timing at which the certain condition is achieved, the display indicating the certain time may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game [for example, FIG. 404 (R (5) -12)). -As shown in the figure (R (5) -16), the countdown of the timer display in the first jackpot timer notice display TM21 is completed during the jackpot game and the timer display is set to "00" depending on the timing when the mission is completed. : 00 ”, and during the jackpot game, the family crest character CMON will be displayed to notify you of the pending consecutive chans, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to motivate the timer to start the effect.

Here, the timer effect may start execution only when a certain condition related to the game is achieved, or may start execution only when a certain condition related to the game is achieved. It may be something that may be done. Further, the timer effect may always start execution when a certain condition related to the game is achieved, or may not start execution when a certain condition related to the game is achieved. There may be.

Further, it may be configured so that the display may indicate a certain time only during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved. It may be configured so that the display may indicate a certain time other than the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved. Further, the display may be configured to always indicate a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved, or a certain condition. It may be configured so that the display indicating a certain time may not be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed according to the timing at which is achieved.

Further, it may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed only according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved. It may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed according to a timing other than the timing when a certain condition is achieved.

Further, it may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed only during the execution of the jackpot game depending on the timing when a certain condition is achieved, or depending on the timing when a certain condition is achieved. It may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed even during the execution of a game other than the big hit game. Further, the display may be configured to always indicate a certain time during the execution of the big hit game according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved, or the big hit game may be configured according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved. It may be configured so that the display indicating a certain time may not be displayed during the execution of.

Further, it may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game only according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved, or other than the timing when a certain condition is achieved. Depending on the timing, the display may indicate a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game.

In addition, "as the certain effect, an effect suggesting a game state after the jackpot game is completed (hereinafter," eleventh effect [for example, FIG. 390 (E (5) -13) to FIG. (5) -14) may be executed [for example, FIGS. 389 (E (5) -8) to 390 (E (5) -14)). As described above, it is suggested that the character TDR of the bancho appears as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit, and the game shifts to the probabilistic game state after the big hit game ends. Etc.],
As the above-mentioned certain effect, an effect for notifying that the symbol variation display whose execution is suspended includes a symbol variation display which is a big hit (hereinafter, "12th effect [for example, FIG. 386 (A (5))" )-54) to the same figure (A (5) -55) shown in the figure (A (5) -55), etc.] ”) may be executed [for example, FIG. 386 (A (5) -49) to the same figure. As shown in FIG. (A (5) -55), the family crest character CMON appears as a certain effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the timer advance display TM21 during the first big hit. Notifying that a chan will occur, etc.],
The certain effect is an effect configured so that the timer display may be executed even when the display does not indicate the certain time [for example, FIG. 389 (D (5) -11). As shown in ´) and FIGS. 395 (I (5) -29) to (I (5) -30), the pending consecutive chan notification and the bancho due to the appearance of the family crest character CMON without the timer advance notice effect are performed. There may be a notification that the character TDR will shift to the probabilistic game state due to the appearance of
When the timer display does not indicate the certain time during the execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect is more likely to be executed than the twelfth effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the so-called hold ream chan actually hits a big hit without notifying, but since the so-called probability change notification is important as a notification of the game state, it is easier to understand if it is notified during the execution of the big hit game. There is.

Here, as a certain effect, only the eleventh effect may be executed, or as a certain effect, an effect other than the eleventh effect may be executed. Further, the eleventh effect may always be executed as a certain effect, or the eleventh effect may not be executed as a certain effect.

Further, as a certain effect, only the twelfth effect may be executed, or as a certain effect, an effect other than the twelfth effect may be executed. Further, the twelfth effect may always be executed as a certain effect, or the twelfth effect may not be executed as a certain effect.

Further, a certain effect may be configured only so that the timer display may be executed even if the display does not indicate a certain time, or the timer display may display a certain time. It may be configured so that it may be executed even in cases other than the case where the display is not shown. Further, a certain effect may be configured to be executed without fail even when the timer display does not indicate a certain time, or the timer display may indicate a certain time. It may be configured so that it may or may not be executed.

Further, only when the timer display does not indicate a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect may be configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect. In addition to the case where the timer display does not indicate a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect may be configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect. Further, when the timer display does not indicate a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect may be configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect. When the timer display does not indicate a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect may be more difficult to execute than the twelfth effect.

Further, when the timer display does not display a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect may be configured to be executed without fail, or the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game. The twelfth effect may be configured not to be executed when the display does not indicate a certain time.

In addition, "when the timer display becomes a display indicating the certain time and the certain effect is started (hereinafter," first case [for example, FIG. 386 (A (5) -49) to FIG. As shown in (A (5) -55), when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit is completed, the timer display becomes "00:00", and the hold continuous chan notification effect is performed. Etc.] ”),
When the certain effect is started without displaying the timer display (hereinafter, as shown in "the second case [for example, FIG. 389 (D (5) -11)), the timer advance notice effect is performed. If there is a hold-up continuous chan announcement production, etc.] ”.
The certain effect in the first case is an effect executed in the first aspect (hereinafter, "first effect [for example, FIGS. 386 (A (5) -54) to FIG. 386 (A (5))". -55), the display of the family crest character CMON, etc.] ”.
The certain effect in the second case may be performed in the second aspect (hereinafter, the grandfather V formation shown in the second effect [for example, FIG. 389 (D (5) -11)). Display GYV display, etc.] ”.
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The type suggested by performing the first effect and the type suggested by performing the second effect are the same type [for example, FIGS. 386 (A (5) -54) to the same. The display of the family crest character CMON shown in FIG. (A (5) -55) and the display of the grandfather V formation display GYV shown in FIG. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation of a certain effect.

Here, a certain effect in the first case may be only the first effect or may be an effect other than the first effect. Further, a certain effect in the first case may or may not be the first effect.

Further, a certain effect in the second case may be only the second effect or may be an effect other than the second effect. Further, a certain effect in the second case may or may not be the second effect.

It should be noted that a certain effect in the first case and a certain effect in the second case may be the same effect (first effect or second effect).

Further, the first aspect and the second aspect may be partially different aspects or all may be different aspects.

Further, the type suggested by the first effect and the type suggested by the second effect may always be the same type or may be different types. Good.

Further, "It is configured so that the timing at which the first effect can be started is likely to be earlier than the timing at which the second effect can be started [for example, FIG. 389 (D (5) -11)). The pending consecutive chan announcement effect by displaying the grandfather V formation display GYV shown in FIG. 386 is started during the jackpot end effect, and is shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -54) to (A (5) -55). The production of the pending ream announcement by displaying the family crest character CMON is likely to start during the round of the jackpot game, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to expect the appearance of the timer effect and also to expect that a certain effect is executed without going through the timer effect as a relief.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to have a long time display.

Here, the timing at which the first effect can be started may be configured to be earlier than the timing at which the second effect can be started, or the first effect may be started earlier than the timing at which the first effect can be started. It may be configured so that the timing at which the second effect can be started is always later.

Further, when the first effect is started, the second effect may not be started, and when the second effect is started, the first effect is not started. May be done.

Further, the timing at which the second effect can be started and the timing at which the first effect can be started may be the same, and the first effect is higher than the timing at which the second effect can be started. May be configured so that there are cases where the startable timing is later.

Further, "In the second case, the certain effect may be executed in the first aspect as the second effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11'). In addition, there is a case where the hold ream announcement effect is performed by displaying the family crest character CMON without the timer notice effect],
In the first case, the timing at which the certain effect is executed in the first aspect as the first effect, and in the second case, the second effect is the same in the first aspect. The timing at which the effect is executed is different [for example, as shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -49) to (A (5) -54)), the effect is executed as a result of the timer advance effect. The pending ream announcement effect by displaying the family crest character CMON as an effect starts during the round of the jackpot game, but does not go through the timer notice effect as shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11'). The pending ream announcement effect by displaying the family crest character CMON executed in is started during the big hit end effect, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, there are cases where the first effect can be expected even if the timer effect is not started.

Here, in the second case, only a certain effect may be executed in the first aspect as the second effect, and in the second case, the first aspect as the second effect. In some cases, an effect other than a certain effect may be executed. Further, in the second case, a certain effect may always be executed in the first aspect as the second effect, and in the second case, a certain effect is performed in the first aspect as the second effect. It may not be executed.

Further, in the second case, a certain effect may be executed only in the first aspect as the second effect, and in the second case, other than the first aspect as the second effect. A certain effect may be performed in the manner described in the above.

Further, in the second case, a certain effect may be executed in the first aspect only as the second effect, and in the second case, the first effect other than the second effect may be performed. A certain effect may be performed in the manner described in the above.

Further, only in the second case, a certain effect may be executed in the first aspect as the second effect, and in cases other than the second case, the second effect is the second effect. A certain effect may be performed in one embodiment.

Further, in the first case, the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first aspect as the first effect, and the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first aspect as the second effect in the second case. Only may be different, the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first aspect as the first effect in the first case, and the first aspect as the second effect in the second case. The timing other than the timing at which the effect is executed may be different. Further, in the first case, the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first aspect as the first effect, and the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first aspect as the second effect in the second case. May be different, and in the first case, the timing at which a certain effect is executed in the first aspect as the first effect, and in the second case, the first aspect as the second effect. The timing at which the effects are executed may be the same.

Further, "The above-mentioned certain effect is a definite effect for notifying the player that an advantageous privilege is given [for example, FIGS. 386 (A (5) -54) to (A (5) -55) to FIG. ), The display of the family crest character CMON announces that a pending ream will occur, or FIGS. 390 (E (5) -13) to (E (5) -14). As shown in, the appearance of the character TDR of the Bancho notifies the confirmation of the probability change, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize what kind of privilege is given by performing a certain effect, and to play the game with peace of mind.

Here, a certain effect may only notify that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, or may also notify that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given. There may be. In addition, a certain effect may always notify the player that an advantageous privilege is given, or may not notify the player that an advantageous privilege is given. You may.

In addition, as a privilege advantageous to the player, for example, one or more of one or more of the probability change confirmation notification, the notification of the number of time reductions, and the notification of increasing the number of rounds in the big hit game can be mentioned. Not limited to these.

In addition, "The above-mentioned certain effect is a definite effect for notifying the player that an advantageous privilege is given [for example, in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -54) to (A (5) -55)). Shown, hold ream announcement production by displaying the family crest character CMON, etc.]
The final effect is an effect of notifying that the symbol variation display whose execution is suspended (hereinafter, referred to as "pending symbol variation display") includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit.
When the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, one of the first effect and the second effect may be executed. [For example, in the case of notifying that one pending continuous change occurs, as shown in FIGS. 386 (A (5) -49) to FIG. 386 (A (5) -55), the first Timer notice display As shown in FIG. 389 (D (5) -11), whether a timer notice effect related to TM21 is performed, and as a result, a hold ream announcement effect is performed by displaying the family crest character CMON. , In the big hit end production, the holding continuous chan announcement production will be performed by displaying the old V formation display GYV, etc.],
When the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. [For example, when notifying that two pending consecutive chans will occur, first, as shown in FIGS. 391 (G (5) -6) to FIG. 391 (G (5) -16), First timer notice display A timer notice effect related to TM21 is performed, and as a result, a hold continuous change notification effect is performed by displaying the family crest character CMON, and then, as shown in FIG. 391 (G (5) -22). In addition, in the big hit end production, the holding continuous chan announcement production by displaying the old V formation display GYV, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to have a great sense of expectation when both the first and second effects are executed, while eliminating the confusion of the effects.

Here, a certain effect may only notify that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, or may also notify that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given. There may be. In addition, a certain effect may always notify the player that an advantageous privilege is given, or may not notify the player that an advantageous privilege is given. You may.

In addition, the final effect may only notify that the reserved symbol variation display includes the big hit symbol variation display, or the reserved symbol variation display includes the big hit symbol variation display. It may also notify other things than being present. In addition, the final effect may always notify that the reserved symbol variation display includes the big hit symbol variation display, or the reserved symbol variation display includes the big hit symbol variation display. It may not be notified that the person is present.

In addition, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is 1, only one of the first effect and the second effect may be executed. If the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in the pending symbol variation display is 1, an effect other than one of the first effect and the second effect is executed. It may be configured to be the case. In addition, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is 1, even if it is configured to always execute one of the first effect and the second effect. If the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is 1, one of the first effect and the second effect may not be executed. May be done.

Further, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, it may be configured so that only the first effect may be executed, or the reserved symbol variation display may be used. If the number of big hit symbol variation displays included is one, it may be configured to always execute the first effect. Further, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, it may be configured so that only the second effect may be executed, or the reserved symbol variation display may be used. If the number of big hit symbol variation displays included is one, the second effect may be configured to be executed without fail.

Further, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is 1, it may be configured not to execute the first effect, or it is included in the reserved symbol variation display. When the number of symbol variation displays that are big hits is one, the second effect may not be executed.

In addition, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, only the first effect and the second effect may be executed. Alternatively, if the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in the pending symbol variation display is two or more, an effect other than both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. It may be configured to be. In addition, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, both the first effect and the second effect may be configured to be executed without fail. However, if the number of jackpot symbol variation displays included in the pending symbol variation display is two or more, both the first and second effects may not be executed. May be good.

Further, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, it may be configured so that only the first effect may be executed, or the reserved symbol variation display may be executed. When the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in is two or more, the first effect may be configured to be executed without fail. Further, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, it may be configured so that only the second effect may be executed, or the reserved symbol variation display may be executed. When the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in is two or more, the second effect may be configured to be executed without fail.

In addition, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, it may be configured not to execute the first effect, or it may be included in the reserved symbol variation display. When the number of symbol variation displays that are big hits is two or more, the second effect may not be executed.

When the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, only the first effect may be executed, and both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. You may not execute it.

In addition, when the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, the second effect may be easier to execute than the first effect. The first effect may be easier to execute than the second effect, only the second effect may be executed, or only the first effect is executed. In some cases, neither the first effect nor the second effect may be executed.

Further, when the first effect is performed, two or more reserved consecutive chans may be generated, and when the second effect is performed, only one reserved continuous chan may be generated.

Also, when the timer effect is performed and the first effect is started, two or more pending consecutive chans are more likely to occur than when the first effect is started without the timer effect. Alternatively, when the first effect is started without the timer effect, two or more pending consecutive chans are generated than when the timer effect is performed and the first effect is started. You may make it easier.

Also, when the timer effect is performed and the second effect is started, two or more pending consecutive chans are more likely to occur than when the second effect is started without the timer effect. Alternatively, when the second effect is started without the timer effect, two or more pending consecutive chans are generated than when the timer effect is performed and the second effect is started. You may make it easier.

Further, "the jackpot game is composed of a plurality of round games [for example, 16 round games, etc.].
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one of the plurality of round games [for example, FIGS. 386 (A (5) -49) to FIG. 386 (A (5) -55). ), The timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit may start after the fourth round starts and end during the execution of the fourth round, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to reliably show the timer effect during the big hit.

Here, it may be configured only by the jackpot game by a plurality of round games, or may be configured by including the jackpot game by one round game.

Further, the timer effect may be executed only in one of the plurality of round games, or may be executed in a game other than one of the plurality of round games. It may be something that may occur. Further, the timer effect may be always executed in one round game of a plurality of round games, or may not be executed in one round game of a plurality of round games. You may.

In addition, "The jackpot game is composed of a plurality of round games.
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed over two or more round games among the plurality of round games [for example, FIGS. 387 (B (5) -17) to B (5). ) -25), the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM21 during the first big hit may be performed over the 4th to 5th rounds, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained differently.

According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain the timer effect for a long time.

Here, it may be configured only by the jackpot game by a plurality of round games, or may be configured by including the jackpot game by one round game.

Further, the timer effect may be executed only over two or more round games of the plurality of round games, or may be executed only over two or more round games of the plurality of round games. It may also be executed across. In addition, it may be executed across two or more round games of a plurality of round games, or may not be executed across two or more round games of a plurality of round games. It may be.

Further, "The timer display is a display configured so that after displaying the initial value, the display is subtracted from the initial value and the display indicating the certain time is displayed [for example, FIG. 387 (B (B) (B). 5) -17) -As shown in the figure (B (5) -23), after displaying "30:00" as the initial value of the timer display on the first jackpot medium timer notice display TM21, "0:00" Countdown until it becomes],
The display indicating a certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0 [for example, "00:00" in the first jackpot middle timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -23). Timer display, etc.]
A certain timer effect (hereinafter, "first timer effect [for example, FIG. 387 (B (5) -17) to FIG. (B (5) -25) or FIG. 388 (C (5) -8) to the same". The timer display displayed during the execution of the first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. (B (5) -17) is the first time as the initial value. It is a display indicating [for example, 30 seconds, etc.] [for example, the timer display of "30:00" in the first jackpot middle timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 387 (B (5) -17)].
The first timer effect is an effect that may be executed over the first number of round games [for example, “2”, etc.] of the plurality of round games [for example, FIG. 387 (B). In the cases shown in (5) -17) to FIG. 6 (B (5) -25), the timer notice effect related to the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 started in the fourth round is performed over the fifth round. Etc.],
The first timer effect is an effect that may be executed over a second number of round games [for example, “3”, etc.] of the plurality of round games [for example, FIG. 388 (C). In the cases shown in (5) -8) to FIG. 6 (C (5) -17), the timer notice effect related to the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 started in the fourth round is performed over the sixth round. Etc.],
The second number of times is more than the first number of times.
The first number of times is one or more times.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even with the same timer effect, the number of rounds straddling differs depending on the game situation (such as winning a game ball to a variable winning opening and the type of big hit), so that it may be possible to increase the variation of the effect.

In addition, in the conventional game table, the production during the execution of the big hit game is mainly related to the round game, but according to this game table, a timer production performed according to the elapsed time is adopted. This may improve the interest of big hit games.

Here, the timer display may be configured so that only the display indicating a certain time is displayed by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value, or the initial value is displayed. It may be configured so that a display other than the display indicating a certain time is displayed after being subtracted from the initial value. Further, the timer display may be configured so that after the initial value is displayed, the display is subtracted from the initial value and the display indicating a certain time is always displayed, or after the initial value is displayed. It may be configured so that the display indicating a certain time may not be displayed after being subtracted from the initial value.

Further, the timer display may be configured so that the display indicating a certain time is displayed by subtracting from the initial value only after the initial value is displayed, or after the initial value is displayed. Other than the above, it may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time is displayed by subtracting from the initial value.

Further, the display indicating a certain time may indicate only the time when the timer display becomes 0, and the display indicating a certain time also indicates a time other than the time when the timer display becomes 0. There may be. Further, the display indicating a certain time may always indicate the time when the timer display becomes 0, and the display indicating a certain time may not indicate the time when the timer display becomes 0. It may be.

Further, the timer display displayed during the execution of the first timer effect may indicate only the first time as an initial value, or may indicate a time other than the first time as an initial value. There may be. Further, the timer display displayed during the execution of the first timer effect may always indicate the first time as an initial value, or may not indicate the first time as an initial value. It may be.

Further, the first timer effect may be executed only over the first number of round games in the plurality of round games, or the first of the plurality of round games. It may be executed over a number of round games other than the above. Further, the first timer effect may be executed over the first round game of the plurality of round games without fail, or may be executed over the first round game of the plurality of round games. It may not be executed across round games.

Further, the first timer effect may be executed only over the second round game of the plurality of round games, or the second timer effect of the plurality of round games. It may be executed over a number of round games other than the above. Further, the first timer effect may be executed always straddling the second round game of the plurality of round games, or the second timer effect of the plurality of round games. It may not be executed across round games.

Further, the second number may always be larger than the first number, may be the same as the first number, or may be less than the first number. There may be.

Further, the first number of times may always be once or may be a plurality of times.

The round game is performed when either one of the conditions of the passage of time (for example, the passage of 29 seconds) and the winning of a game ball into a certain number (for example, 10) of variable winning openings is satisfied. It is the one to end.

In addition, "one round game is configured to end when the second time [for example, 29 seconds, etc.] has elapsed.
The timer display is a display configured so that after displaying the initial value, the display is subtracted from the initial value and the display indicating the certain time is displayed [for example, FIG. 386 (A (5)-). 49) -As shown in the figure (A (5) -53), the timer notice display TM21 during the first big hit displays "03:00" as the initial value of the timer display, and then becomes "00:00". Countdown to, etc.],
The display indicating a certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0 [for example, "00:" in the first jackpot middle timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 386 (A (5) -53). 00 "timer display, etc.],
The timer of "03:00" in the first jackpot middle timer notice display TM21 shown in the display [for example, FIG. 386 (A (5) -49)] showing the third time [for example, 3 seconds, etc.] as the initial value. Display, etc.] may be displayed,
The third time is shorter than the second time,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timer effect may be executed during one round game.

Here, one round game may be configured to end only when the second time has elapsed, or may be configured to end only when the second time has not elapsed. May be good. Further, the one round game may be configured so as to always end when the second time elapses, or may not end when the second time elapses. ..

Further, the timer display may be configured so that only the display indicating a certain time is displayed by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value, or after displaying the initial value. It may be configured so that a display other than the display indicating a certain time is displayed by subtracting from the initial value. Further, the timer display may be configured so that after the initial value is displayed, the display is subtracted from the initial value and the display indicating a certain time is always displayed, or after the initial value is displayed. It may be configured so that the display indicating a certain time may not be displayed after being subtracted from the initial value.

Further, the timer display may be configured so that the display indicating a certain time is displayed by subtracting from the initial value only after the initial value is displayed, or after the initial value is displayed. Other than the above, it may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time is displayed by subtracting from the initial value.

Further, the display indicating a certain time may indicate only the time when the timer display becomes 0, and the display indicating a certain time also indicates a time other than the time when the timer display becomes 0. There may be. Further, the display indicating a certain time may always indicate the time when the timer display becomes 0, and the display indicating a certain time may not indicate the time when the timer display becomes 0. It may be.

Further, only the third time may be displayed as the initial value, or the time other than the third time may be displayed as the initial value. Further, the third time may always be displayed as the initial value, or the third time may not be displayed as the initial value.

The third time may be shorter than the second time, may be the same as the second time, or may be longer than the second time. ..

In addition, "when the timer effect is executed in one symbol variation display (hereinafter," third case [for example, FIG. 385 (A (1) -24) to FIG. (A (2) -33)). As shown in the above, when the timer advance notice effect is performed by the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 that starts and ends in one symbol variation display, etc.] ”).
The certain effect in the third case is a notice effect related to a symbol variation display being executed [for example, a strong sabohani group shown in FIGS. 385 (A (2) -32) to (A (2) -33). Notice, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the variation of the timer effect increases, so that the effect may be improved.

Here, it may be configured so that there is only the third case, or it may be configured so that there may be cases other than the third case. Further, it may be configured so that there is always a third case, or it may be configured so that there is no third case. Further, it may be configured so that there is no third case.

Further, a certain effect in the third case may be a notice effect related only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice effect related to other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect in the third case may be a notice effect that is always related to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice effect that may not be related to the symbol variation display being executed.

In addition, a certain effect in the third case may be a look-ahead notice.

Further, "timer effect [for example, timer advance effect related to the first jackpot middle timer advance display TM21 shown in FIGS. 393 (H (5) -8) to FIG. 393 (H (5) -13)] can be executed. A game table equipped with a directing means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.].
The timer effect is a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display [for example, the first big hit middle timer notice display TM21 or the like shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -8)] is started. An effect configured to start a certain effect [for example, the button stock notification effect shown in FIG. 393 (H (5) -13)] when [for example, "00: 00" etc.] is reached. Yes,
It is configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game [for example, in FIGS. 393 (H (5) -8) to (H (5) -13)). 1st big hit timer notice display The timer notice effect related to TM21 is performed during the big hit game, etc.],
An effect suggesting that a privilege advantageous to the player is given during the execution of the jackpot game (hereinafter, "third effect [for example, FIG. 393 (H (5) -24) to FIG. 394 (H (5))". )-28) The button-directed mini-games, etc.] ”) may be executed.
The third effect is an effect that may be executed when the certain effect is executed at least once [for example, FIGS. 393 (H (5) -24) to 394 (H (5)). The mini-game of the button effect shown in) -28) is executed when the button stock notification effect is performed as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance effect.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to expect a timer effect even during a big hit game.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, the effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , When the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , It may be configured so that a certain effect is started even in a case other than the case where the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

It may be configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game, or an effect other than at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured in. Further, it may be configured so that at least a part of the timer effect is always performed during the execution of the jackpot game, or at least a part of the timer effect may not be performed during the execution of the jackpot game. You may.

Further, it may be configured so that only a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game, or the entire timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game. May be good.

Further, it may be configured so that only the third effect may be executed during the execution of the jackpot game, or an effect other than the third effect may be executed during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured in. Further, the third effect may be configured to be executed without fail during the execution of the jackpot game, or the third effect may not be executed during the execution of the jackpot game.

Further, the third effect may be executed only during the execution of the jackpot game, or the third effect may be executed even during the execution of a game other than the jackpot game. It may be configured as follows.

Further, the third effect may be executed only when a certain effect is executed at least once, or other than when a certain effect is executed at least once. It may also be executed in some cases. Further, the third effect may be executed when a certain effect is executed at least once, or when a certain effect is executed at least once. It may not be done.

Further, the third effect may be executed when a certain effect is executed once, or may be executed when a certain effect is executed a plurality of times. It may be a thing.

It should be noted that only a certain effect of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game, or may be performed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, the game table is characterized in that "the effect means is a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the visual effect.

Here, the effect means may be composed of only the display means, or may include means other than the display means. Further, the effect means may always include the display means, or may not include the display means.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, an effect means capable of executing "timer effect [for example, timer advance effect related to the third timer advance display TM13 shown in FIGS. 400 (M (1) -24) to 401 (M (11) -65)]. A game table equipped with [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The timer effect is a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display [for example, the third timer notice display TM13 shown in FIG. 400 (M (1) -24)] is started [for example, the timer display indicates a certain time]. , "00: 00", etc.], so that the effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect [for example, the probability change notification shown in FIG. 401 (M (11) -65)]") is started. It is a structured production,
At least a certain symbol variation display (hereinafter, "first symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display executed in the period from FIG. 402 (N (11) -4) to FIG. (N (11) -7), etc." ] ”), The timer effect is performed, and after the first symbol variation display is completed, a new symbol variation display is not performed [for example, FIG. 402 (N (11) −]. 8) -The above-mentioned certain effect may be performed in the waiting state period, etc. shown in the figure (N (11) -11)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the above description of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be the variable display of the symbol (more specifically, the special symbol), and the description of the stop display of the decorative symbol is the symbol (more specifically). Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

Hereinafter, based on the effect examples described so far, other effect patterns of the timer advance notice effect will be described while appropriately showing the above-mentioned drawings.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 246 to 247, for example, the timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246 (3) and the timer notice display TM1 of the default display mode shown in FIG. 247 (19) are displayed. Has been done. The timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode and the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode can be distinguished from each other in that the background color of the timer notice display is different. For example, in the timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode, the background color of the timer notice display TM1A is red, whereas in the timer notice display TM1 of the default display mode, it is white. The color and shape of the display (frame display) of the frame portion constituting the timer notice display may be different between the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode and the timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode. For example, in the timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode, the color of the frame display may be red, and in the timer notice display TM1 of the default display mode, the color of the frame display may be white. Further, the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode and the timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode may have different display colors of the timer display so that they can be distinguished from each other. For example, the high reliability display mode may be used. The display color of the timer display of the timer notice display TM1A in the degree display mode may be red, and the display color of the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode may be black. In this case, the colors may be different for all the digits of the numerical value shown on the timer display, or some digits (single digit or a plurality of digits) of the numerical values shown on the timer display may be different. The colors may be different by the order of.). Further, the display size of the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode and the display size of the timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode may be made different so that they can be distinguished. For example, the default display may be used. The display size of the timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode may be larger than the display size of the timer notice display TM1 of the mode. Here, the display size of the timer notice display is the same for both, but the display size of the timer display displayed on the timer notice display may be different. For example, the timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode may be different. The display size of the timer display of the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode may be larger than the display size of the timer display of. As described above with reference to FIGS. 246 to 247, the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode has been described as indicating that it is less likely to be a false timer notice than the default display mode. When this timer notice display is displayed in a high reliability display mode, the notice effect (pre-reading notice) may be always performed when the timer display becomes "0:00". In this case, for example, as in the timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246 (3), the timer notice display TM1A may be set to the high reliability display mode when the display is started. As shown in 253 (3) to FIG. 10 (10), when the timer notice display (timer notice display TM1) is started to be displayed, it is displayed in the default display mode, and then the timer countdown in the timer display starts. It may be changed to a high reliability display mode before.

Further, when the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 290 (a) to 290 (e), the value after the decimal point (value of a digit less than 1 second) is set. If it is other than 0, as a result of the countdown in the timer display, a notice effect of confirming the big hit (for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v) may be performed. On the other hand, when the timer notice display is displayed in the default display mode, the timer display in which the value after the decimal point is always 0 is displayed, for example, "10:00" or "05:00". However, as shown in FIGS. 290 (a) to 290 (e), the value after the decimal point may be displayed with a value other than 0. Further, even if the timer display when the timer notice display is displayed is, for example, "10:00" or the like, the value after the decimal point is 0, when the countdown is stopped after the timer display is counted down. The timer display countdown is also performed when the time indicated by the timer display displayed in is, for example, a special result such as "7:77" or a special result such as "2:23". As a result, a notice effect of confirming the big hit may be performed. Further, the value after the decimal point of the timer display in the timer notice display of the high reliability display mode is 0 (for example, the timer display is "10:00", etc.), and the countdown of the timer display starts and "00:00". When it becomes, a notice effect of confirming the big hit may be performed.

Further, the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode may be displayed to function as a big hit confirmation notice. In this case, for example, the timer notice display may be displayed and erased before the timer display countdown starts, and then the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed. At this time, for example, the color, pattern, or shape of the display frame of the timer notice display may change (for example, the color of the display frame changes from red to rainbow). Further, the timer notice display may be displayed and the timer display countdown may be started. In this case, when the timer display becomes "00:00", the notice effect (for example, FIG. 252 (35a)) may be displayed. A notice effect of confirming a big hit such as displaying the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in the above) may be performed. Further, the timer notice display is displayed and erased before the timer display countdown starts, but after that, a big hit confirmation such as a notice effect (for example, the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a) is displayed) is confirmed. The big hit symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed after the advance notice effect) is performed. In addition, when the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed but the big hit is not confirmed, the timer notice display is displayed and erased before the timer display countdown starts, and the notice effect is started. It may not be started. In this case, the notice effect starts when the timer notice display is displayed and the timer display countdown is started, rather than when the timer notice display is displayed and the timer display is erased before the countdown starts. It may be easier to do, and it is better when the timer notice display is displayed and the timer display is erased before the timer display countdown starts than when the timer notice display is displayed and the timer display countdown is started. However, the advance notice effect may be easily started. On the other hand, when the timer notice display of the default display mode is displayed, the timer display of the timer notice display is counted down, and when the timer display becomes "00:00", the high reliability display mode is displayed. It may be configured so that an effect different from the advance effect performed when the timer display in the timer advance display of the above is "00:00" may be performed.

Further, when the timer notice display of the high reliability display mode is displayed, for example, the notice display of the jackpot confirmation such as the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a) is always displayed, while the default display is displayed. When the timer notice display of the mode is displayed, the notice display of the jackpot confirmation is not displayed, and for example, a symbol such as a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 239 (9) or a strong Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 243 (9). A notice effect may be performed to increase the reliability of the variable display. Further, the timer notice display of the default display mode is displayed, but as shown in FIGS. 241 (3) to (6) and 244 (3) to (9), the timer display is "00: There may be a case where a fake timer advance notice effect is performed, which is "00" or is erased without becoming "00: 00" and the advance notice effect is not performed. Further, even when the timer notice display of the default display mode is displayed, the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a) may be displayed. That is, even if the content of the notice effect performed by displaying the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode and the content of the notice effect performed by displaying the timer notice display in the default display mode may be the same. Good.

Further, even when the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed, the notice display other than the notice display for confirming the big hit may be performed. For example, the change of the hold icon due to the hold change animation shown in FIG. 246 (6). Alternatively, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 250 (35) and the pseudo-continuous effect by stopping the replay symbol RP shown in FIG. 253 (17) may be performed. Further, for example, a notice item (notice icon) for notifying the appearance of the princess character HME shown in FIG. 249 (9) and the pseudo-ream may be performed may be performed. Further, for example, when the timer display becomes "00:00", the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 237 (15) to 238 (19) may be started. In addition, when the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed, the notice effect is not performed as a result of the timer display countdown, and when the timer display becomes "00:00", the jackpot symbol is displayed. The mode may be fixedly stopped. In this case, the timer display in the timer notice display is "00:00" when the timer notice display in the default display mode is displayed rather than when the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed. It can be said that it is easy to carry out the advance notice effect.

Further, in the embodiments described so far, an example in which a certain advance notice effect is performed when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the timer display of the timer advance notice display becomes "00:00" will be described. However, when the timer display becomes "00:00", two or more notice effects may be performed. For example, a pseudo continuous effect, a change effect of a hold icon, and a stock of notice items. There may be a case where two or more of the effects, the transition to super reach, the strongest cut-in image CI1v, and the like are performed by one timer advance effect. Further, it goes without saying that these effects may be executed without the timer advance notice effect being performed.

Further, in the effect examples described so far, the timer notice display of the high reliability display mode or the default display mode is displayed, and after the timer display countdown of the timer notice display is started, the timer display is set to "00:00". , But the time until the timer display becomes "00:00" and the timer notice display is erased depends on the high reliability display mode and the default display mode. It may be different. For example, the time from when the timer display in the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode becomes "00:00" until it is erased is the timer notice display in the default display mode. After the timer display in is "00:00", the time until it is erased may be longer, shorter, or the same. In particular, when the timer display in the timer notice display of the high reliability display mode is "00:00", the timer display can be made to look longer when the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. In some cases.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 253 (3) to 253 (13), the symbol changes a plurality of times from the start of the timer advance notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode to the start of the timer display countdown. The display may be straddled. In FIGS. 253 (3) to 253 (13), the timer display countdown starts after the timer notice display TM1A is started and then the next symbol variation display is started. However, for example, after the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is started, the timer display countdown is not started from the start to the end of the next symbol variation display, and the countdown is not started. The timer display countdown may be started after the next symbol variation display is started. That is, a pre-reading notice is given that the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is performed and the notice effect is executed during the execution of the symbol variation display related to the second hold icon. It may be said. In this case, it can be said that the period from the start of the timer advance notice display to the start of the timer display countdown may be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display.

Further, even if the time indicated by the timer display at the time when the timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode or the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is started to be displayed, the time indicated by the timer display may be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display. Good. That is, the symbol variation display may end while the timer display countdown in the timer notice display is being performed, and the timer display countdown may continue from the start to the end of the next symbol variation display. For example, the timer display at the time when the timer notice display is started is "30:00", and the symbol variation display ends after the countdown starts. At this time, for example, it is assumed that the timer display indicates "25:00". After that, for example, when the symbol variation display with a variation time of 10 seconds starts, the timer display countdown does not end during the period from the start to the end of the symbol variation display. In this way, the time indicated by the timer display may be longer than the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display. ,
Further, in this effect example, the display position of the timer notice display may be changed during the period from the start of the display of the timer notice display to the start of the countdown of the timer display, or the timer notice may be changed. The display may be enlarged or reduced. Further, after the timer display countdown in the timer notice display is started, the display position of the timer notice display may be changed, the timer notice display may be enlarged or reduced. May be good.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, a 7-segment display device SEG is provided in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, and a timer notice display is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG. In this case, for example, the timer notice display of the default display mode is more easily displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 than the 7-segment display device SEG, and the timer notice display of the high reliability display mode is the decorative symbol. It may be easier to be displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG than on the display device 208. In this case, when displaying the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode on the 7-segment display device SEG, for example, as shown in FIG. 285 (5), the timer display is displayed in the red light emitting mode. It may be distinguished from the timer display of the default display mode.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 284, the timer notice display is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. An example is shown in which the indicated time and the time indicated by the timer display in the timer advance notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG are the same. In this case, the countdown in the timer display of each timer advance notice display is performed. When the timer display becomes "00:00", for example, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 250 (35) is likely to be displayed, while either the decorative symbol display device 208 or the 7-segment display device SEG is displayed. The timer notice display may be displayed only on one side. In this case, when the timer display is counted down and the timer display becomes "00:00", for example, FIG. 241 is shown. The weak cut-in image CI1b shown in (14) may be easily displayed. That is, the timer notice display is displayed only on one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, and the decorative symbol is more than the mode of the notice effect performed when the timer display becomes "0:00". The timer notice display is displayed on both the display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, and the mode of the notice effect performed when the timer display becomes "00:00" is a more reliable mode. Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot symbol mode is easily displayed in a definite manner. In the production example shown in FIG. 284, the time indicated by the timer display when the display is started in the timer notice display displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG is the same, and the countdown is performed. The time indicated by the timer display displayed during execution is the same, and the timing at which the timer display becomes "00:00" is also the same.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 284, when another timer notice display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (that is, when two timer notice displays are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208). In this case, the time indicated by the timer display in the timer display of one of the two timer notice displays displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (timer notice display A) and the time indicated by the timer display are displayed on the 7-segment display device. The time indicated by the timer display in the timer advance notice display is the same as the time indicated by the timer display in the timer display of the other of the two timer advance notice displays (timer advance notice display B) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. , The time indicated by the timer display in the timer display displayed on the 7-segment display device may be different. In other words, it can be said that the time indicated by the timer display in the two timer notice displays displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is different from each other. In this case, when the timer notice display B has a longer time indicated by the timer display than the timer notice display A, the time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device is the timer notice display B. It may be the same as (the one with the larger time indicated by the timer display) or the same as the timer notice display A (the one with the smaller time indicated by the timer display). Further, the timer notice effect performed when the timer display of the timer notice display B is counted down and the timer display becomes "00:00" is displayed on the timer notice display A and the 7-segment display device SEG. It may be different from the advance notice effect performed when the timer display becomes "00:00" due to the countdown in each timer display of the display. Even if the time indicated by the timer display on the timer advance notice display A, the time indicated by the timer display on the timer advance notice display B, and the time indicated by the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are different from each other. Good. Further, one timer notice display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and two timer notice displays may be displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG. Further, in this effect example, an example of displaying the timer notice display on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG is shown. For example, the decorative symbol display devices 208 and 7 have the same variation pattern. Only one of the seg display devices SEG may display the timer notice display, or neither the decorative symbol display device 208 nor the 7-segment display device SEG may display the timer notice display. Good.

Further, also in the effect example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, the timer notice display is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, and the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. An example is shown in which the time indicated by the timer display in 1 and the time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG are different. In this case, FIGS. 285 (3) to 285 (11). ), When the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is counted down and the timer display becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the default. While changing from the display mode of Sabohani to the display mode of Sabohani (display mode of pre-reading notice), as shown in FIGS. 285 (5) to 287 (28), the timer of the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG. When the countdown on the display is performed and the timer display becomes "00:00", it is shown that the premiere notice is being given for the character of the chief whose clothes are torn. That is, the notice effect displayed when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is counted down and the timer display becomes "00:00", and the 7-segment display device SEG It can be said that the timer display on the displayed timer notice display TM1 is different from the notice effect displayed when the timer display is counted down to "00:00". In addition, both notice productions may be the same. Further, in this effect example, the time indicated by the timer display at the time when the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 starts to be displayed (for example, "10:00") and the display on the 7-segment display device SEG. The time indicated by the timer display at the time when the displayed timer notice display is started (for example, "30:00") is different, and the timer at the start of the display in the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG is different. Although the time indicated by the display is longer, the time indicated by the timer display at the start of the display on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be longer. Further, the timing at which the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started and the timing at which the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG is started are different, but they may be the same. You may. Further, as shown in FIG. 286 (24), the mode of the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIGS. 285 (5) to 287 (28) is such that the display mode is rainbow during the countdown. The display mode has changed, and it may be notified that the jackpot symbol is definitely displayed. In this production example, an example of displaying the timer notice display on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG is shown. For example, the decorative symbol display devices 208 and 7 have the same variation pattern. Only one of the seg display devices SEG may display the timer notice display, or neither the decorative symbol display device 208 nor the 7-segment display device SEG may display the timer notice display. Good.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, after the timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer display is started to be displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. After the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is set to "00:00" and the advance notice effect is performed, the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG is changed to "00:00". An example of performing the advance notice effect is shown. For example, after the timer advance notice display is started on the 7-segment display device SEG and then the timer advance notice display TM1 is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol display device is displayed. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed on the 208 is set to "00:00" and the advance notice effect is performed. After that, the timer display on the timer advance notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG is changed to "00:00". There may be a case where a notice effect is performed. Specifically, the timer notice display in which the timer display is "30:00" is first displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and the timer display countdown is started. After that, the timer notice display TM1 whose timer display is "05:00" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the timer display countdown is started. Then, the timer display TM1 on the decorative symbol display device 208 sets the timer display to "00:00" earlier than the timer notice display on the 7-segment display device SEG, and the notice effect related to this is started. At this time, the timer display countdown continues in the timer notice display on the 7-segment display device SEG. After that, the timer display of the timer notice display on the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00", and the notice effect related to this is started. After the timer notice display TM1 is first displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer notice display is displayed on the 7-segment display device, and then the timer display of the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG is changed to ". After the notice effect is performed at "0:00", the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be set to "00:00" and the notice effect may be performed. Further, after the timer notice display is first displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and then the timer display of the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG is displayed. The timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the notice effect is performed at "0:00" may be set to "00:00" and the notice effect may be performed.

Further, in this effect example, an example in which the notice effect is performed when the timer display is counted down in the timer notice display and becomes "00:00" has been described. For example, the high reliability display has been described. When the timer advance notice effect is performed by the timer advance notice display of the mode, the advance notice effect is started in the middle of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display (that is, before the timer display becomes "0:00"), and the timer display is performed. The timer notice display may end before "00:00" is reached. Further, after the timer notice display is displayed, the notice effect may be started before the timer display countdown starts, and the timer notice display may end before the timer display countdown starts. This may be particularly effective when a jackpot confirmation effect is performed. Further, even in the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display of the default display mode, the advance notice effect may be started in the middle of the countdown of the timer display. Further, after the timer notice display is started, the timer notice display may be deleted during the countdown of the timer display and the notice effect may not be performed. After the timer notice display is started, the timer notice display may not be performed. Before the countdown of the timer display starts, the timer notice display may be erased and the notice effect may not be performed. That is, even though the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed, there is a fake timer notice effect that is erased before the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display or during the countdown and the timer effect is not performed. It may be done. In this case, the countdown is performed in the timer display in the timer notice display, and the notice effect is more likely to be performed when the timer display becomes "00:00". In other words, if the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed but is erased before the start of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display or during the countdown, the notice effect is not performed. When the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed, the timer display is counted down, and the timer display becomes "00:00", the notice effect may be performed without fail. In addition, although the timer notice display is displayed, the notice effect may be performed even if the timer notice display is deleted before the start of the countdown or during the countdown, and the timer notice display is displayed. Therefore, even if the timer display in the timer notice display is counted down and the timer display becomes "00:00", the notice effect may not be performed. Further, even though the timer notice display of the high reliability display mode is displayed, the display mode of the timer notice display changes when the timer notice display is erased before the start of the countdown of the timer display or during the countdown. For example, the display color of the timer display may change from black to rainbow, or the background or frame of the timer notice display may change. If the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode is deleted before the start of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display or during the countdown, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. You may do so. The above may be applied to the timer notice display of the default display mode.

Further, when the timer notice display of the high reliability display mode is displayed and the timer display is deleted before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, the display time is displayed as the timer notice display of the default display mode. When the timer display countdown starts after that, the time from the timer notice display to the start of the timer display countdown may be longer or shorter, or the same. It may be time.

Further, when the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed and the timer display is erased before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, the display time is set to the time shown in the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be longer than the corresponding period. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed, the time shown on the timer display is the time displayed as a premier notice such as "07:77", and the timer If the display is erased before the countdown starts, the time from the start of the display of the timer notice display to the clearing may be 10 seconds, which is longer than 7.77 seconds. When the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed and the timer display is erased before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, the display time is set to the time shown in the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be shorter than the corresponding period, or it may be the same. In addition, this city can also be applied to the timer notice display of the default display mode.

Further, when the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed and the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, the time until the timer notice display is displayed and the timer display countdown starts is set as the default. The timer notice display of the display mode of is displayed, and the time until the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts may be longer or shorter, or may be set to the same time. May be good.

In the above description, for example, there is a certain advance notice effect (for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v) that is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display in the high reliability display mode. In the case where the advance notice effect executed as a result of performing the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display in the default display mode is a certain advance notice effect different from a certain advance notice effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect). In addition, these effects may be interchanged. That is, the advance notice effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the timer advance display in the high reliability display mode is the pseudo continuous effect, and the timer advance effect related to the timer advance display in the default display mode is performed. The notice effect executed as a result may be the display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v.

In addition, it is executed as a result of performing the timer advance effect related to the timer advance display in the high reliability display mode and the timer advance effect related to the timer advance display in the default display mode. The notice effects may be the same.

In the explanation of this effect pattern, an example of the effect executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol has been described, but for example, as shown in FIGS. 386 to 407, the timer advance effect during the big hit game is also applied. Can be done.

In the above description,
"A game table equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1 or the like shown in FIG. 239 (3)].
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1].
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00"] is satisfied, and a certain effect (hereinafter, "" The first effect [for example, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 239 (9), the strong Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 243 (9), the pending change shown in FIG. 246 (6), and the strong cut-in shown in FIG. 350 (35). The display of the image CI1a, the display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a), etc.] ”) may be started.
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the default display mode shown in FIG. 247 (19)].
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, the high reliability display aspect shown in FIG. 246 (3)].
The display of the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246 (3)]") has been started. In this case, the first effect is always started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (3) to (7), in the timer advance effect related to the timer advance display TM1A in the high reliability display mode, the timer display is displayed. When becomes "00:00", a pending change is always performed, etc.],
The timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1 and the like of the default display mode shown in FIG. 247 (19)") and the second timer display. Is at least partially different in the period from the start of the display of the time display to the start of the change of the display of the time display (hereinafter, referred to as "first period") [for example, The timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode shown in FIG. 247 (19) and the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246 (3) have different display modes at the start of display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, the timer display may include only the display of the time, or may include a display other than the display of the time. Further, the timer display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, only the first effect may be started depending on the condition that a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display is started, or after the display of the timer display is started. Depending on the condition that is satisfied, an effect other than the first effect may be started. Further, the first effect may always be started according to the fact that a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display is started, or the certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display is started. The first production may not be started depending on what is done.

The first effect may be started only when a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain condition is started after the display of the timer display is started. The first production may be started in response to a matter other than the fact that is established.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than any one of the plurality of modes. May be good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, or may not be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes. Good.

Further, when the display of the second timer display is started, only the first effect may be started without fail, and when the display of the second timer display is started, other than the first effect. The production may also be started without fail. Further, the first effect may always be started only when the display of the second timer display is started, and the first effect may be started even when the display of the second timer display is not started. The production of is always started.

Further, the first timer display and the second timer display may have different modes at least in part only in the first period, and the first timer display and the second timer display may be in the first period. The mode may be different in at least a part of the period other than the above. Further, the first timer display and the second timer display may be different in mode at least in part in the first period, and the first timer display and the second timer display are in the first period. In some cases, the mode may not be different at least in part.

The first timer display and the second timer display may have different modes in a part of the first period, and the first timer display and the second timer display are all in the first period. The mode may be different.

In addition, "In the first period, the time display of the first timer display is a display representing the first time (hereinafter," the first time display [for example, the default shown in FIG. 247 (19)). The timer notice display of the display mode of TM1 is referred to as "display of" 5:00 "in the timer display of TM1]".
In the first period, the time display of the second timer display is a display representing the second time (hereinafter, "second time display [for example," 7:77 "shown in FIG. 290 (a)". "Timer display, etc.]".
The first time display is a display indicating that the value of a place lower than a certain place [for example, one place, etc.] [for example, a place after the decimal point] is 0.
The second time display is a display indicating that a value lower than the certain place is a certain value [for example, "77" or the like].
The certain value is a value other than 0,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by setting the timer display value as a special value, the player can recognize that a certain effect is started in advance, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. In some cases.

In addition, "the value of the place lower than a certain place" means "the value after the decimal point".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The color of the time display of the first timer display is the first color [for example, black or the like].
The color of the time display of the second timer display is a second color [for example, red, etc.].
The first color and the second color are different colors.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first color and the second color may be partially different colors or all may be different colors.

The first color may be composed of one color or two or more colors. Further, the second color may be composed of one color or may be composed of two or more colors.

Further, "The first timer display is a display including a display of the time and a frame display surrounding the display of the time.
The second timer display is a display including a display of the time and a frame display surrounding the display of the time.
The color of the frame display of the first timer display is a third color [for example, white, etc.].
The color of the frame display of the second timer display is a fourth color [for example, red, etc.].
The third color and the fourth color are different colors.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first timer display may include only the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display, or may include a display other than the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display. There may be. Further, the first timer display may always include the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display, or may not include the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display. There may be.

Further, the second timer display may include only the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display, or may include a display other than the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display. You may. Further, the second timer display may always include the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display, or may not include the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display. There may be.

Further, the third color and the fourth color may be partially different colors or all may be different colors.

The third color may be composed of one color or two or more colors. Further, the fourth color may be composed of one color or two or more colors.

Further, "The size of the display of the time in the first timer display is the first size [for example, the default size, etc.].
The size of the time display in the second timer display is the second size [for example, a size larger than the default size, etc.].
The first size and the second size are different sizes.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second size may be larger than the first size, and the first size may be larger than the second size.

Further, "When the display of the first timer display is started, a certain effect different from the first effect [for example, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 239 (9), FIG. 243 (9). The strong Sabohani group notice shown, the pending change shown in FIG. 246 (6), the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 350 (35), etc.] may be started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation to the first timer display.

Here, when the display of the first timer display is started, only a certain effect different from the first effect may be started, or the display of the first timer display is started. If so, an effect other than a certain effect other than the first effect may be started. Further, when the display of the first timer display is started, a certain effect different from the first effect may be started without fail, or when the display of the first timer display is started, the display of the first timer display may be started. There may be cases where a certain effect other than the first effect is not started.

Further, only when the display of the first timer display is started, a certain effect different from the first effect may be started, or the display of the first timer display is started. In cases other than the above, a certain effect other than the first effect may be started.

Further, "When the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect may be started [For example, the timer notice display TM1A of the default display mode shown in FIG. 247 (19) may be started. When displayed, a specific advance notice effect (for example, the display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a)) may be performed],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation to the first timer display.

Here, when the display of the first timer display is started, only the first effect may be started, or when the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect is started. There may be a case where an effect other than the effect of is started. Further, the first effect may always be started when the display of the first timer display is started, and the first effect is not started when the display of the first timer display is started. There may be cases.

Further, the first effect may be started only when the display of the first timer display is started, or the case other than the case where the display of the first timer display is started. , The first production may be started.

Further, "The first effect is started only when the display of the second timer display is started [For example, the timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246 (3) is displayed. Only when this is done, a specific advance notice effect (for example, the display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a)) is performed],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation for the second timer display.

Here, only the first effect may be started only when the display of the second timer display is started, or the first effect may be started only when the display of the second timer display is started. Other effects may be started. Further, the first effect may always be started only when the display of the second timer display is started, and the first effect may be started only when the display of the second timer display is started. It may not be started.

Further, "The first effect is a pseudo-ream effect [for example, a pseudo-ream effect shown in FIGS. 239 (7) to (9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first effect is an effect of pre-reading notice [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 246 (6) to (7)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect in which the notice icon is stocked [for example, an effect in which the princess character HME as a notice item shown in FIGS. 253 (9) to (10) is stocked]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first effect is a certain super reach effect [for example, the effect of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 237 (15) to (19)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect of notifying that the jackpot symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display [for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The first effect is a pseudo-ream effect, a look-ahead advance notice effect, a notice icon stocking effect, a certain super reach effect, and a symbol variation display that confirms the jackpot symbol mode. One of the effects to be notified or two or more effects,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When a plurality of effects are executed as the first effect, each effect may be started at the same time, or the start timings may be different. Further, the number of the effects to be executed is not limited to one and two, but may be three or more, a pseudo-ream effect, a look-ahead advance notice effect, a notice icon stocked effect, and a certain super reach. The effect and the effect of notifying that the jackpot symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display may be performed.

In addition, "as the first effect, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. [For example, when the timer display in the timer notice display becomes" 00:00 ", the combination of the decorative symbols of" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "is displayed. Is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (2) to (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol. It is done, etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (2) to (3), high reliability during the variation display of the decorative symbol. Timer notice display of display mode TM1A has started timer notice effect, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

In addition, only the timer display may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or a display other than the timer display may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. May be good. Further, the display of the timer display may always be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the timer display may not be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the timer display may be started only while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the timer display may be started other than while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. Good. For example, the display of the timer display may be started during the big hit game or in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed.

In addition, "the time represented by the time display in the first period of the second timer display may be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display [for example, high reliability display mode]. The time indicated by the timer display when the timer notice display TM1A is started is "30:00", and the execution time of the symbol variation display may be 10 seconds, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the time represented by the time display in the first period of the second timer display may be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display, or the second timer display. The time other than the time indicated by the time display in the first period of the above may be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display. Further, the time represented by the time display in the first period of the second timer display may always be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display, or the first of the second timer display. The time represented by the time display in the period may not be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display.

Further, "a second display means [for example, the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 284] is provided.
The display means is the first display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284].
The first timer display is more likely to be displayed by the first display means than by the second display means.
The second timer display is more likely to be displayed by the second display means than by the first display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first timer display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed on the first display means or the second display means. ..

Further, the second timer display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed on the first display means or the second display means.

In addition, "the certain condition means that the display of the time has become a display representing a certain time [for example, a display of" 00:00 ", etc.].
The certain time is a time indicating 0.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that a certain condition for starting the first effect may be a condition other than the display of the time being a display representing a certain time.

In addition, "after the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be started before the display of the time becomes the display representing the certain time [for example, high reliability]. Timer notice display in the degree display mode During execution of the timer countdown in the timer display of TM1A, for example, the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a) may be displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the display of the second timer display is started, only the first effect may be started before the time display becomes the display representing a certain time, or the second effect may be started. After the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than the first effect may be started before the display of the time becomes a display representing a certain time. Further, after the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be always started before the time display becomes the display representing a certain time, or the display of the second timer display may be started. After the start, the first effect may not be started before the time display becomes a display representing a certain time.

Further, after the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be started only before the time display becomes the display representing a certain time, or the second timer may be started. After the display of the display is started, the first effect may be started other than before the display of the time becomes the display representing a certain time.

Further, only after the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be started before the time display becomes the display representing a certain time, or the second timer may be started. In addition to after the display of the display is started, the first effect may be started before the display of the time becomes the display representing a certain time.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game table equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1 or the like shown in FIG. 239 (3)].
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1].
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00"] is satisfied, and a certain effect (hereinafter, "" The first effect [for example, the display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a)] ") may be started.
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the default display mode shown in FIG. 247 (19)].
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, the high reliability display aspect shown in FIG. 246 (3)].
When the display of the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1 of the default display mode shown in FIG. 247 (19)]") is started. May start a certain effect other than the first effect [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 257 (6) to (7)].
The display of the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246 (3)]") has been started. In that case, the first effect is always started [For example, in the timer advance effect related to the timer advance display TM1A in the high reliability display mode, the strongest cut-in image CI1v is always displayed when the timer display becomes "0:00". Etc.],
The first timer display and the second timer display are the period from the start of the display of the time display to the start of the change of the display of the time display (hereinafter, referred to as "first period"). ), The mode is different in at least a part [For example, the timer notice display TM1 of the default display mode shown in FIG. 247 (19) and the timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246 (3) are displayed. The display mode is different at the start, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, the timer display may include only the display of the time, or may include a display other than the display of the time. Further, the timer display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, only the first effect may be started depending on the condition that a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display is started, or after the display of the timer display is started. Depending on the condition that is satisfied, an effect other than the first effect may be started. Further, the first effect may always be started according to the fact that a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display is started, or the certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display is started. The first production may not be started depending on what is done.

Further, the first effect may be started only when a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display is started, or after the display of the timer display is started. The first production may be started in response to a matter other than the fact that the above conditions are satisfied.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than any one of the plurality of modes. May be good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, or may not be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes. Good.

Further, when the display of the first timer display is started, only a certain effect different from the first effect may be started, or the display of the first timer display is started. In that case, an effect other than a certain effect other than the first effect may be started. Further, when the display of the first timer display is started, a certain effect different from the first effect may be started without fail, and when the display of the first timer display is started, the display of the first timer display may be started. There may be cases where a certain effect other than the first effect is not started.

Further, when the display of the second timer display is started, only the first effect may be started without fail, and when the display of the second timer display is started, other than the first effect. The production may also be started without fail. Further, the first effect may always be started only when the display of the second timer display is started, and the first effect may be started even when the display of the second timer display is not started. The production of is always started.

Further, the first timer display and the second timer display may have different modes at least in part only in the first period, and the first timer display and the second timer display may be in the first period. The mode may be different in at least a part of the period other than the above. Further, the first timer display and the second timer display may be different in mode at least in part in the first period, and the first timer display and the second timer display are in the first period. In some cases, the mode may not be different at least in part.

The first timer display and the second timer display may have different modes in a part of the first period, and the first timer display and the second timer display are all in the first period. The mode may be different.

Further, "At least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may move in the display position during the first period.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the timer display is displayed.

Here, at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may move only the display position in the first period, or the first timer display and the second timer may move. At least one of the displays may move to a position other than the display position during the first period. Further, the display position of at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may always move in the first period, and of the first timer display and the second timer display. At least one may not move the display position during the first period.

Further, at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may move the display position only in the first period, and the first timer display and the second timer display may be moved. At least one of them may move the display position even in a period other than the first period.

Further, only the first timer display may move the display position in the first period, or only the second timer display may move the display position in the first period. , The display position of both the first timer display and the second timer display may move in the first period.

Further, "When the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect may be started [For example, the timer notice display TM1A of the default display mode shown in FIG. 247 (19) may be started. When displayed, the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a) may be displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation to the first timer display.

Here, when the display of the first timer display is started, only the first effect may be started, or when the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect is started. There may be a case where an effect other than the effect of is started. Further, the first effect may always be started when the display of the first timer display is started, and the first effect is not started when the display of the first timer display is started. There may be cases.

Further, the first effect may be started only when the display of the first timer display is started, or the case other than the case where the display of the first timer display is started. , The first production may be started.

Further, "The first effect is started only when the display of the second timer display is started. [For example, the timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246 (3) is displayed. Only when this is done, the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a) is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation for the second timer display.

Here, only the first effect may be started only when the display of the second timer display is started, or the first effect may be started only when the display of the second timer display is started. Other effects may be started. Further, the first effect may always be started only when the display of the second timer display is started, and the first effect may be started only when the display of the second timer display is started. It may not be started.

Further, "The first effect is a pseudo-ream effect [for example, a pseudo-ream effect shown in FIGS. 239 (7) to (9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first effect is an effect of pre-reading notice [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 246 (6) to (7)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect in which the notice icon is stocked [for example, an effect in which the princess character HME as a notice item shown in FIGS. 253 (9) to (10) is stocked]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first effect is a certain super reach effect [for example, the effect of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 237 (15) to (19)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect of notifying that the jackpot symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display [for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The first effect is a pseudo-ream effect, a look-ahead advance notice effect, a notice icon stocking effect, a certain super reach effect, and a symbol variation display that confirms the jackpot symbol mode. One of the effects to be notified or two or more effects,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When a plurality of effects are executed as the first effect, each effect may be started at the same time, or the start timings may be different. In addition, the number of effects to be executed is 1 and 2.
It is not limited to one, and may be three or more, and the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed by the pseudo-ream effect, the look-ahead advance notice effect, the advance notice icon stocking effect, a certain super reach effect, and the symbol variation display. All of the effects that inform that it will be done may be performed.

In addition, "as the first effect, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. [For example, when the timer display in the timer notice display becomes" 00:00 ", the combination of the decorative symbols of" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "is displayed. Is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "In the first period, the time display of the first timer display is a display representing the first time (hereinafter," the first time display [for example, the default shown in FIG. 247 (19)). The timer notice display of the display mode of TM1 is referred to as "display of" 5:00 "in the timer display of TM1]".
In the first period, the time display of the second timer display is a display representing the second time (hereinafter, "second time display [for example," 7:77 "shown in FIG. 290 (a)". "Timer display, etc.]".
The first time display is a display indicating that the value of a place lower than a certain place [for example, one place, etc.] [for example, a place after the decimal point] is 0.
The second time display is a display indicating that a value lower than the certain place is a certain value [for example, "77" or the like].
The certain value is a value other than 0,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by setting the timer display value as a special value, the player can recognize that a certain effect is started in advance, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. In some cases.

In addition, "the value of the place lower than a certain place" means "the value after the decimal point".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The color of the time display of the first timer display is the first color [for example, black or the like].
The color of the time display of the second timer display is a second color [for example, red, etc.].
The first color and the second color are different colors.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first color and the second color may be partially different colors or all may be different colors.

The first color may be composed of one color or two or more colors. Further, the second color may be composed of one color or may be composed of two or more colors.

Further, "The first timer display is a display including a display of the time and a frame display surrounding the display of the time.
The second timer display is a display including a display of the time and a frame display surrounding the display of the time.
The color of the frame display of the first timer display is a third color [for example, white, etc.].
The color of the frame display of the second timer display is a fourth color [for example, red, etc.].
The third color and the fourth color are different colors.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first timer display may include only the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display, or may include a display other than the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display. There may be. Further, the first timer display may always include the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display, or may not include the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display. There may be.

Further, the second timer display may include only the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display, or may include a display other than the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display. You may. Further, the second timer display may always include the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display, or may not include the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display. There may be.

Further, the third color and the fourth color may be partially different colors or all may be different colors.

The third color may be composed of one color or two or more colors. Further, the fourth color may be composed of one color or two or more colors.

Further, "The size of the display of the time in the first timer display is the first size [for example, the default size, etc.].
The size of the time display in the second timer display is the second size [for example, a size larger than the default size, etc.].
The first size and the second size are different sizes.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second size may be larger than the first size, and the first size may be larger than the second size.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (2) to (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol. It is done, etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (2) to (3), high reliability during the variation display of the decorative symbol. Timer notice display of display mode TM1A has started timer notice effect, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

In addition, only the timer display may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or a display other than the timer display may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. May be good. Further, the display of the timer display may always be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the timer display may not be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the timer display may be started only while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the timer display may be started other than while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. Good. For example, the display of the timer display may be started during the big hit game or in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed.

In addition, "the time represented by the time display in the first period of the second timer display may be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display [for example, high reliability display mode]. The time indicated by the timer display when the timer notice display TM1A is started is "30:00", and the execution time of the symbol variation display may be 10 seconds, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the time represented by the time display in the first period of the second timer display may be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display, or the second timer display. The time other than the time indicated by the time display in the first period of the above may be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display. Further, the time represented by the time display in the first period of the second timer display may always be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display, or the first of the second timer display. The time represented by the time display in the period may not be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display.

Further, "a second display means [for example, the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 284] is provided.
The display means is the first display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284].
The first timer display is more likely to be displayed by the first display means than by the second display means.
The second timer display is more likely to be displayed by the second display means than by the first display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first timer display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed on the first display means or the second display means. ..

Further, the second timer display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed on the first display means or the second display means.

In addition, "the certain condition means that the display of the time has become a display representing a certain time [for example, a display of" 00:00 ", etc.].
The certain time is a time indicating 0.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that a certain condition for starting the first effect may be a condition other than the display of the time being a display representing a certain time.

In addition, "after the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be started before the display of the time becomes the display representing the certain time [for example, high reliability]. Timer notice display in the degree display mode During execution of the timer countdown in the timer display of TM1A, for example, the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a) may be displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the display of the second timer display is started, only the first effect may be started before the time display becomes the display representing a certain time, or the second effect may be started. After the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than the first effect may be started before the display of the time becomes a display representing a certain time. Further, after the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be always started before the time display becomes the display representing a certain time, or the display of the second timer display may be started. After the start, the first effect may not be started before the time display becomes a display representing a certain time.

Further, after the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be started only before the time display becomes the display representing a certain time, or the second timer may be started. After the display of the display is started, the first effect may be started other than before the display of the time becomes the display representing a certain time.

Further, only after the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be started before the time display becomes the display representing a certain time, or the second timer may be started. In addition to after the display of the display is started, the first effect may be started before the display of the time becomes the display representing a certain time.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

A game table equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1 or the like shown in FIG. 239 (3)].
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1].
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the default display mode shown in FIG. 247 (19)].
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, the high reliability display aspect shown in FIG. 246 (3)].
The display of the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246 (3)]") has been started. In that case, a certain effect (hereinafter referred to as "first effect [for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v]") may be started.
When the display of the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1 of the default display mode shown in FIG. 247 (19)]") is started. Is referred to as a certain effect different from the first effect (hereinafter, "second effect [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 257 (6) to (7)]". .) May be started,
The second timer display disappears after the display of the time display is started and before the change of the display of the time display starts (hereinafter, "the first case [for example, the countdown in the timer display is "When erasing before starting, etc.]"] "[For example, the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is erased before the countdown in the timer display starts, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, the timer display may include only the display of the time, or may include a display other than the display of the time. Further, the timer display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than any one of the plurality of modes. May be good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, or may not be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes. Good.

Further, when the display of the second timer display is started, only the first effect may be started, and when the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be started. A production other than the production may be started. Further, when the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may always be started, and when the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect is not started. There may be cases.

Further, when the display of the first timer display is started, only the second effect may be started, and when the display of the first timer display is started, the second effect may be started. A production other than the production may be started. Further, when the display of the first timer display is started, the second effect may always be started, and when the display of the first timer display is started, the second effect is not started. There may be cases.

Further, the second timer display may disappear only after the display of the time display is started and before the change of the display of the time display is started, or the display of the time display may be displayed. The change in the display of the time display after the start may disappear other than before the start. Further, the second timer display may always disappear after the display of the time display is started and before the change of the display of the time display is started, or the display of the time display is started. It may not disappear before the change of the display of the time display starts from.

In addition, "The second timer display is when the display of the time display starts changing after the display of the time display is started (hereinafter," the second case [for example, high reliability display mode]. When the timer display countdown in TM1A starts, etc.] ”.
In the second case, the first effect is more likely to be started than in the first case [for example, the strongest cut-in image when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode starts. CI1v is easy to display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to improve the appearance frequency of the timer display in which the first effect may be started, and the interest of the game may be improved.

Here, in the second timer display, only the change of the time display display may start after the time display display is started, or the time after the time display display is started. In some cases, something other than a change in the display of is started. Further, in the second timer display, the change of the time display may always start after the time display is started, or the time display may be displayed after the time display is started. The change in may not start.

Further, in the second case, only the first effect may be started more easily than in the first case, and in the second case, other than the first effect, than in the first case. The production may be easy to start. In addition, the first effect may always be started more easily in the second case than in the first case, and the first effect may start in the second case than in the first case. It may not be easy to do.

In the first case, the first effect may not always be started, and the first effect may or may not be started.

Further, in the second case, the first effect may always be started, and the first effect may or may not be started.

In addition, "In the first case, the first effect is not started [for example, if the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is erased before the countdown in the timer display starts, the strongest cut is performed. In-image CI1v is not displayed, etc.],
In the second case, the first effect is started [for example, when the countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is started, the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the first case, only the first effect may not be started, and in the first case, the effects other than the first effect may not be started. Further, in the first case, the first effect may not always be started, and in the first case, the first effect may be started.

Further, in the second case, only the first effect may be started, and in the second case, an effect other than the first effect may be started. Further, in the second case, the first effect may always be started, and in the second case, the first effect may not be started.

In addition, "In the first case, the first effect is always started [For example, when the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is erased before the countdown in the timer display starts, the strongest cut In-image CI1v is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The period from the start of the display of the time display in the first timer display to the start of the change of the display of the time display is the first period [for example, the timer notice of the default display mode]. The period from the start of display TM1 to the start of the timer display countdown].
In the first case, the period from the start of the display of the time display in the second timer display to the disappearance of the time display is the second period [for example, the timer in the high reliability display mode. The period from when the notice display TM1A is started to when the timer notice display TM1A is erased].
The second period is longer than the first period,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to notify for a long time that the display of the time display does not change.

Here, the second period may always be longer than the first period, the first period and the second period may be the same length, or the second period. The first period may be longer than the first period.

In addition, "The second timer display is when the display of the time display starts changing after the display of the time display is started (hereinafter," the second case [for example, high reliability display mode]. When the timer display countdown in TM1A starts, etc.] ”.
In the second case, the period from the start of the display of the time display in the second timer display to the change of the display of the time display is the third period [for example, high reliability display. The period from when the timer notice display TM1A of the mode is started to when the countdown of the timer display is started].
The third period is longer than the first period,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the change in the display of the time display, and it may be possible to improve the sense of premiere.

Here, the third period may always be longer than the first period, the first period and the third period may be the same length, or the third period may be the same length. The first period may be longer than the first period.

In addition, "the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display may be a display representing the first time [for example, a display of" 7:77 ", etc.].
The second period is longer than the period corresponding to the first time,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display of the time first displayed in the second timer display may be only the display representing the first time, or the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display. May be a display other than the display representing the first time. Further, the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display may always be the display representing the first time, and the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display may be the first display. It may not be a time display.

Further, only the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display may be the display representing the first time, or the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display may be other than the display. The display of may be a display representing the first time.

The period corresponding to the first time may be longer than the second period, or the period corresponding to the first time and the second period may be the same length. ..

Further, "In the first case, the display mode of the display other than the time display in the second timer display may change [for example, in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode. When erasing before the countdown starts, the color of the display frame of the timer notice display TM1A changes from red to rainbow, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to increase the sense of premiere by changing the display mode of the timer display that does not change the display of the time display.

Here, in the first case, only the display mode of the display other than the time display in the second timer display may change, and in the first case, the time in the second timer display may change. Other than the display, the display mode other than the display may change. Further, in the first case, the display mode of the display other than the time display in the second timer display may be changed without fail, and in the first case, the display other than the time display in the second timer display may be changed. There may be cases where the display mode of is not changed.

Further, in the first case, the display mode may change only for the display other than the time display in the second timer display, and in the first case, other than the time display in the second timer display. The display mode of the display other than the display of is may change.

Further, only in the first case, the display mode of the display other than the time display in the second timer display may change, and even in the case other than the first case, the second timer display may change. The display mode of the display other than the time display in the above may be changed.

Further, "The first effect is a pseudo-ream effect [for example, a pseudo-ream effect shown in FIGS. 239 (7) to (9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first effect is an effect of pre-reading notice [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 246 (6) to (7)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect in which the notice icon is stocked [for example, an effect in which the princess character HME as a notice item shown in FIGS. 253 (9) to (10) is stocked]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first effect is a certain super reach effect [for example, the effect of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 237 (15) to (19)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect of notifying that the jackpot symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display [for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The first effect is a pseudo-ream effect, a look-ahead advance notice effect, a notice icon stocking effect, a certain super reach effect, and a symbol variation display that confirms the jackpot symbol mode. One of the effects to be notified or two or more effects,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When a plurality of effects are executed as the first effect, each effect may be started at the same time, or the start timings may be different. Further, the number of the effects to be executed is not limited to one and two, but may be three or more, a pseudo-ream effect, a look-ahead advance notice effect, a notice icon stocked effect, and a certain super reach. The effect and the effect of notifying that the jackpot symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display may be performed.

In addition, "as the first effect, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. [For example, when the timer display in the timer notice display becomes" 00:00 ", the combination of the decorative symbols of" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "is displayed. Is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (2) to (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol. It is done, etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (2) to (3), high reliability during the variation display of the decorative symbol. Timer notice display of display mode TM1A has started timer notice effect, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

In addition, only the timer display may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or a display other than the timer display may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. May be good. Further, the display of the timer display may always be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the timer display may not be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the timer display may be started only while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the timer display may be started other than while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. Good. For example, the display of the timer display may be started during the big hit game or in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed.

Further, "a second display means [for example, the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 284] is provided.
The display means is the first display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284].
The first timer display is more likely to be displayed by the first display means than by the second display means.
The second timer display is more likely to be displayed by the second display means than by the first display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first timer display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed on the first display means or the second display means. ..

Further, the second timer display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed on the first display means or the second display means.

Further, "when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode becomes" 00:00 "" under a certain condition after the display of the timer display in the second timer display is started. Etc.] may be established, and the first effect [for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a)] may be started.
After the display of the timer display in the first timer display is started, the certain condition [for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 of the default display mode becomes "00:00"] is satisfied. Depending on the establishment, the second effect [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 257 (6) to (7)] may be started.
The certain condition means that the display of the time has become a display representing a certain time [for example, a display of "00:00", etc.].
The certain time is a time indicating 0.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the display of the timer display in the second timer display is started, only the first effect may be started in response to the satisfaction of a certain condition, or the second timer may be started. After the display of the timer display in the display is started, an effect other than the first effect may be started depending on the condition that a certain condition is satisfied. Further, the first effect may always be started when a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display in the second timer display is started, or the timer display in the second timer display may be started. The first effect may not be started depending on the condition that a certain condition is satisfied after the display is started.

Further, the first effect may be started only when a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display in the second timer display is started, or the second timer display may be started. The first effect may be started in response to something other than the fact that a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display in the above is started.

Further, after the display of the timer display in the first timer display is started, only the second effect may be started in response to the satisfaction of a certain condition, or the first timer display may be started. After the display of the timer display in the above is started, an effect other than the second effect may be started depending on the condition that a certain condition is satisfied. Further, the second effect may always be started when a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display in the first timer display is started, or the timer display in the first timer display may be started. The second effect may not be started depending on the condition that a certain condition is satisfied after the display is started.

Further, the second effect may be started only when a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display in the first timer display is started, or the first timer display may be started. The second effect may be started in response to something other than the fact that a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display in the above is started.

It should be noted that a certain condition for starting the first effect may be a condition other than the display of the time being a display representing a certain time.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game table equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1 or the like shown in FIG. 239 (3)].
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1].
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain condition [for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00"] is satisfied, and a certain effect [for example, FIG. Display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in 252 (35a), etc.] may be started.
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, the high reliability display aspect shown in FIG. 246 (3)].
When the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246 (3)]") is displayed. , The jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.
In the symbol variation display on which the second timer display is displayed, the second timer display disappears before the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed without changing the display of the time display (hereinafter, "the second timer display"). In the case of one [For example, in the symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed, the timer notice display TM1A in the timer display of the high reliability display mode is erased without starting the countdown before the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. A game table characterized by the fact that there is a timer. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, the timer display may include only the display of the time, or may include a display other than the display of the time. Further, the timer display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

In addition, there may be a case where only a certain effect is started in response to a certain condition being satisfied after the display of the timer display is started, or after the display of the timer display is started. Depending on the condition being satisfied, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. In addition, a certain effect may always be started in response to a certain condition being satisfied after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display is started. Depending on the situation, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, a certain effect may be started only when a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started. A certain effect may be started in response to something other than the condition being satisfied.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than any one of the plurality of modes. May be good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, or may not be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes. Good.

Further, when the second timer display is displayed, only the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, and when the second timer display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be displayed in the symbol variation display. A symbol mode other than the above may be definitively displayed. Further, when the second timer display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may always be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, and when the second timer display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be displayed in the symbol variation display. May not be confirmed.

Further, the jackpot symbol mode may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the second timer display is displayed, and the symbol variation display may be performed even when the second timer display is not displayed. The jackpot symbol mode may be definitely displayed in.

Further, in the symbol variation display in which the second timer display is displayed, only the second timer display may disappear before the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed without changing the display of the time display. However, in the symbol variation display on which the second timer display is displayed, the display other than the second timer display may disappear before the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed without changing the display of the time display. May be good. Further, in the symbol variation display in which the second timer display is displayed, the second timer display may always disappear before the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed without changing the display of the time display. In the symbol variation display in which the second timer display is displayed, the second timer display may not disappear before the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed without changing the display of the time display.

Further, in the symbol variation display in which the second timer display is displayed, the second timer display may disappear only before the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed without changing the display of the time display. However, even if the second timer display disappears other than before the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display display in the symbol variation display on which the second timer display is displayed. Good.

In addition, the second timer display may disappear before the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed without changing the display of the time display only in the symbol variation display in which the second timer display is displayed. However, in the symbol variation display where the second timer display is displayed, the second timer display may disappear before the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display display. May be good.

In addition, "when the display of the time display starts after the display of the time display is started in the symbol variation display on which the second timer display is displayed (hereinafter," in the second case [for example, " , When the countdown of the timer display starts in the symbol variation display in which the timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode is displayed] ”.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the symbol variation display in which the second timer display is displayed, only the change in the display of the time display may start after the display of the time display is started, or the second timer display may start. In the symbol variation display in which is displayed, something other than the change in the display of the time display may start after the display of the time display is started. Further, in the symbol variation display in which the second timer display is displayed, the change in the display of the time display may always start after the display of the time display is started, or the second timer display is displayed. In the symbol variation display, there may be a case where the change of the display of the time display does not start after the display of the time display is started.

In addition, the time display may start changing after the time display is started only in the symbol variation display on which the second timer display is displayed, or the second timer display may start. In the symbol variation display other than the displayed symbol variation display, the change of the time display display may start after the display of the time display is started.

In addition, "one of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the default display aspect shown in FIG. 247 (19)].
Compared to the case where the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246 (3)]") is displayed. When the second timer display is displayed, the certain effect is more likely to be started.
The period from the start of the display of the time display in the first timer display to the start of the change of the display of the time display is the first period [for example, the timer notice display TM1 of the default display mode. The period from the start of display to the start of the timer display countdown, etc.]
In the first case, the period from the start of the display of the time display in the second timer display to the disappearance of the time display is the second period [for example, the timer in the high reliability display mode. The period from when the notice display TM1A is started to when the timer notice display TM1A is erased].
The second period is longer than the first period,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to notify for a long time that the display of the time display does not change.

Here, it may be easier for only a certain effect to be started when the second timer display is displayed than when the first timer display is displayed, and the first timer display is displayed. When the second timer display is displayed, it may be easier to start an effect other than a certain effect than in the case. Further, a certain effect may be more likely to be started when the second timer display is displayed than when the first timer display is displayed, or when the first timer display is displayed. It may not be easier to start a certain effect when the second timer display is displayed than when it is displayed.

Further, when the first timer display is displayed, a certain effect may not always be started, and a certain effect may or may not be started. Further, when the second timer display is displayed, a certain effect may be easily started, or a certain effect may or may not be started.

The second period may be longer than the first period, the first period and the second period may be the same length, and the second period may be longer than the second period. The first period may be longer.

In addition, "one of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the default display aspect shown in FIG. 247 (19)].
Compared to the case where the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246 (3)]") is displayed. When the second timer display is displayed, the certain effect is more likely to be started.
The period from the start of the display of the time display in the first timer display to the start of the change of the display of the time display is the first period [for example, the timer notice display TM1 of the default display mode. The period from the start of display to the start of the timer display countdown, etc.]
In the second case, the period from the start of the display of the time display in the second timer display to the start of the change of the display of the time display is the third period [for example, high reliability]. The period from the start of the timer notice display TM1A in the degree display mode to the start of the timer display countdown].
The third period is longer than the first period,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the change in the display of the time display, and it may be possible to improve the sense of premiere.

Here, it may be easier for only a certain effect to be started when the second timer display is displayed than when the first timer display is displayed, and the first timer display is displayed. When the second timer display is displayed, it may be easier to start an effect other than a certain effect than in the case. Further, a certain effect may be more likely to be started when the second timer display is displayed than when the first timer display is displayed, or when the first timer display is displayed. It may not be easier to start a certain effect when the second timer display is displayed than when it is displayed.

Further, when the first timer display is displayed, a certain effect may not always be started, and a certain effect may or may not be started. Further, when the second timer display is displayed, a certain effect may be easily started, or a certain effect may or may not be started.

The third period may be longer than the first period, the first period and the third period may be the same length, and the third period may be longer than the third period. The first period may be longer.

Further, "In the first case, the period from the start of the display of the time display in the second timer display to the disappearance of the time display is the second period [for example, high reliability display. The period from when the timer notice display TM1A of the mode is started to when the timer notice display TM1A is erased].
The second period is longer than the first period,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to notify for a long time that the display of the time display does not change.

Here, the second period may always be longer than the first period, the first period and the second period may be the same length, or the second period. The first period may be longer than the first period.

In addition, "the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display may be a display representing the first time [for example, a display of" 7:77 ", etc.].
The second period is longer than the period corresponding to the first time,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display of the time first displayed in the second timer display may be only the display representing the first time, or the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display. May be a display other than the display representing the first time. Further, the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display may always be the display representing the first time, and the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display may be the first display. It may not be a time display.

Further, only the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display may be the display representing the first time, or the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display may be other than the display. The display of may be a display representing the first time.

The period corresponding to the first time may be longer than the second period, or the period corresponding to the first time and the second period may be the same length. ..

Further, "The certain effect is a pseudo-ream effect [for example, a pseudo-ream effect shown in FIGS. 239 (7) to (9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the above-mentioned certain effect is an effect of pre-reading notice [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 246 (6) to (7)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the above-mentioned certain effect is an effect in which the notice icon is stocked [for example, an effect in which the princess character HME as a notice item shown in FIGS. 253 (9) to (10) is stocked].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The certain effect is a certain super reach effect [for example, the effect of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 237 (15) to (19)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the above-mentioned certain effect is an effect of notifying that the jackpot symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display [for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The certain effect is a pseudo-ream effect, a look-ahead advance notice effect, a notice icon stocking effect, a certain super reach effect, and a symbol variation display that informs that the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. One of the productions to be performed or two or more productions,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When a plurality of effects are executed as the first effect, each effect may be started at the same time, or the start timings may be different. Further, the number of the effects to be executed is not limited to one and two, but may be three or more, a pseudo-ream effect, a look-ahead advance notice effect, a notice icon stocked effect, and a certain super reach. The effect and the effect of notifying that the jackpot symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display may be performed.

In addition, "The jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed as the above-mentioned effect [For example, when the timer display in the timer notice display becomes" 00:00 ", the combination of the decorative symbols of" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "is displayed. Displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (2) to (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol. It is done, etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (2) to (3), high reliability during the variation display of the decorative symbol. Timer notice display of display mode TM1A has started timer notice effect, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

In addition, only the timer display may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or a display other than the timer display may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. May be good. Further, the display of the timer display may always be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the timer display may not be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the timer display may be started only while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the timer display may be started other than while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. Good. For example, the display of the timer display may be started during the big hit game or in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed.

In addition, "the certain condition means that the display of the time has become a display representing a certain time [for example, a display of" 00:00 ", etc.].
The certain time is a time indicating 0.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that a certain condition for starting the first effect may be a condition other than the display of the time being a display representing a certain time.

In addition, "after the display of the second timer display is started, the certain effect may be started before the display of the time becomes the display representing the certain time [for example, high reliability]. After the timer notice display TM1A of the display mode is displayed, the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a) is displayed before the timer display becomes "0:00"],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the display of the second timer display is started, only a certain effect may be started before the time display becomes the display representing a certain time, or the second timer may be started. After the display of the display is started, an effect other than a certain effect may be started before the display of the time becomes a display representing a certain time. Further, after the display of the second timer display is started, a certain effect may be always started before the time display becomes the display representing a certain time, or the display of the second timer display is started. After that, a certain effect may not be started before the time display becomes a display representing a certain time.

Further, after the display of the second timer display is started, a certain effect may be started only before the time display becomes the display representing a certain time, or the second timer display may be started. After the display of is started, a certain effect may be started other than before the display of the time becomes a display representing a certain time.

Further, only after the display of the second timer display is started, a certain effect may be started before the time display becomes the display representing a certain time, or the second timer display may be started. In addition to after the display of is started, a certain effect may be started before the display of time becomes a display representing a certain time.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game table equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1 or the like shown in FIG. 239 (3)].
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1].
After the display of the timer display is started, the display of the time represents a certain time (hereinafter,
It is called "first display [for example, display of" 00:00 ", etc.]". ), A certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect [for example, effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 246 (6) to (7)]"). May be started,
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, the high reliability display aspect shown in FIG. 246 (3)].
When the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246 (3)]") is displayed. , The jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.
When the second timer display is displayed, even if the time display is the first display, the jackpot symbol mode is definitely displayed without starting the first effect. [For example, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode becomes "00:00", the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, the timer display may include only the display of the time, or may include a display other than the display of the time. Further, the timer display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, only a certain effect may be started according to the time display becoming the first display after the timer display is started, or the timer display is started. After that, depending on the time display becoming the first display, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. In addition, a certain effect may always be started according to the fact that the time display becomes the first display after the timer display is started, or the time after the timer display is started. There may be a case where a certain effect is not started depending on the display of is changed to the first display.

Further, a certain effect may be started only when the time display becomes the first display after the timer display is started, or the timer display is started. After that, a certain effect may be started in response to something other than the display of the time being the first display.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than any one of the plurality of modes. May be good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, or may not be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes. Good.

Further, when the second timer display is displayed, only the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, and when the second timer display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be displayed in the symbol variation display. A symbol mode other than the above may be definitively displayed. Further, when the second timer display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may always be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, and when the second timer display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be displayed in the symbol variation display. May not be confirmed.

Further, the jackpot symbol mode may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the second timer display is displayed, and the symbol variation display may be performed even when the second timer display is not displayed. The jackpot symbol mode may be definitely displayed in.

In addition, when the second timer display is displayed, even if the time display is the first display, the first effect may not be started and only the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed. When the second timer display is displayed, even if the time display is the first display, the first effect is not started and the symbol mode other than the jackpot symbol mode is displayed. May be confirmed and displayed. Further, when the second timer display is displayed, even if the time display is the first display, the jackpot symbol mode may always be confirmed and displayed without starting the first effect. However, when the second timer display is displayed, even if the time display is the first display, the first effect may not be started and the jackpot symbol mode may not be confirmed. May be good.

Further, only when the second timer display is displayed, even if the time display is the first display, the first effect may not be started and the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed. It may be present, and even when the time display is the first display, the first effect is not started and the jackpot symbol mode is not displayed even when the second timer display is displayed. May be confirmed and displayed.

In addition, "one of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the default display aspect shown in FIG. 247 (19)].
The first effect is started when the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display") is displayed rather than when the second timer display is displayed. Cheap,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to have expectations for the first timer display.

Here, only the first effect may be started more easily when the second timer display is displayed than when the first timer display is displayed, or the first timer display is displayed. It may be easier to start an effect other than the first effect when the second timer display is displayed than when the second timer display is displayed. Further, the first effect may be more likely to be started when the second timer display is displayed than when the first timer display is displayed, and the first timer display is displayed. It may not be easier to start the first effect when the second timer display is displayed than in the case.

Further, when the first timer display is displayed, the first effect may not always be started, and a certain effect may or may not be started. Further, when the second timer display is displayed, the first effect may be easily started, or a certain effect may or may not be started.

Further, "The period from when the time display in the first timer display becomes the first display until the first timer display disappears is the first period [for example, the timer in the default display mode. The period from when the timer display of the notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" until the timer notice display TM1 is deleted].
The time from when the time display in the second timer display becomes the first display until the second timer display disappears is the second period [for example, the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode. The period from when the timer display of TM1 becomes "00:00" until the timer notice display TM1A is erased].
The second period is longer than the first period,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
According to this game table, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the display of time, and it may be possible to improve the sense of premiere.

The second period may be longer than the first period, the first period and the second period may be the same length, and the second period may be longer than the second period. The first period may be longer.

Further, "In response to the display of the time in the second timer display becoming the first display, an effect different from the first effect (hereinafter," second effect [for example, FIG. 252] (Display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in (35a), etc.] ”) has started.
The second effect is an effect that is executed only when the jackpot symbol mode is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the second effect may be started in response to the time display in the second timer display becoming the first display, or the time display in the second timer display is the first. An effect other than the second effect may be started depending on the display. Further, the second effect may always be started according to the time display in the second timer display becoming the first display, and the time display in the second timer display may be the first display. The second production may not be started depending on the situation.

Further, the second effect may be started only when the time display in the second timer display is changed to the first display, or the time display in the second timer display is the first display. The second production may be started in response to something other than that.

Further, "The first effect is a pseudo-ream effect [for example, a pseudo-ream effect shown in FIGS. 239 (7) to (9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first effect is an effect of pre-reading notice [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 246 (6) to (7)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect in which the notice icon is stocked [for example, an effect in which the princess character HME as a notice item shown in FIGS. 253 (9) to (10) is stocked]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first effect is a certain super reach effect [for example, the effect of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 237 (15) to (19)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The first effect is a pseudo-ream effect, a look-ahead advance notice effect, an effect in which advance notice icons are stocked, and one or more of a certain super reach effect. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When a plurality of effects are executed as the first effect, each effect may be started at the same time, or the start timings may be different. Further, the number of the effects to be executed is not limited to one and two, but may be three or more, a pseudo-ream effect, a look-ahead advance notice effect, an effect in which the notice icon is stocked, and a certain effect. The entire super reach production may be performed.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (2) to (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol. It is done, etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (2) to (3), high reliability during the variation display of the decorative symbol. Timer notice display of display mode TM1A has started timer notice effect, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

In addition, only the timer display may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or a display other than the timer display may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. May be good. Further, the display of the timer display may always be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the timer display may not be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the timer display may be started only while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the timer display may be started other than while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. Good. For example, the display of the timer display may be started during the big hit game or in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed.

Further, "a second display means [for example, the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 284] is provided.
The display means is the first display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284].
The first timer display is more likely to be displayed by the first display means than by the second display means.
The second timer display is more likely to be displayed by the second display means than by the first display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first timer display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed on the first display means or the second display means. ..

Further, the second timer display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed on the first display means or the second display means.

In addition, "the certain time is a time indicating 0.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the display of the time first displayed in the second timer display represents the second time (hereinafter," the second time display [for example, "7:77" shown in FIG. 290 (a)). "Timer display, etc.]".
The second time display is a display indicating that a value lower than a certain place is a certain value [for example, "77" etc.].
The certain value is a value other than 0,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by setting the timer display value as a special value, the player can recognize that a certain effect is started in advance, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. In some cases.

In addition, "the value of the place lower than a certain place" means "the value after the decimal point".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game table equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1 or the like shown in FIG. 239 (3)].
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1].
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect (hereinafter, "first" is performed in response to the display of the time becoming a display representing a certain time [for example, a display of "00:00" or the like]. (For example, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 246 (6) to (7)]] may be started.
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the default display mode shown in FIG. 247 (19)].
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, the high reliability display aspect shown in FIG. 246 (3)].
The timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, "first timer display [for example, FIG. 247 (1)"
9) The timer notice display TM1 etc. of the default display mode shown in) ”. ) Is started, the first effect may not be started.
The display of the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246 (3)]") has been started. In this case, a certain effect different from the first effect (hereinafter, referred to as "second effect [for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v]") is always performed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, the timer display may include only the display of the time, or may include a display other than the display of the time. Further, the timer display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, only the first effect may be started according to the time display becoming the first display after the timer display is started, or the timer display is started. After that, depending on the time display becoming the first display, an effect other than the first effect may be started. Further, the first effect may always be started according to the time display becoming the first display after the timer display is started, or the time after the timer display is started. The first effect may not be started depending on the display of.

Further, the first effect may be started only when the time display becomes the first display after the timer display is started, or the timer display is started. After that, the first effect may be started according to something other than the time display becoming the first display.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than any one of the plurality of modes. May be good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, or may not be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes. Good.

Further, when the display of the first timer display is started, only the first effect may not be started, and when the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect may not be started. Other effects may not be started. Further, when the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect does not necessarily have to be started, and when the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect is started. May be done.

Further, the first effect may not be started only when the display of the first timer display is started, and the first effect may not be started even when the display of the first timer display is not started. The first production may not start.

Further, when the display of the second timer display is started, only the second effect may be performed without fail, and when the display of the second timer display is started, other than the second effect. The production may always be performed. Further, the second effect may always be performed only when the display of the second timer display is started, and the second effect is also performed except when the display of the second timer display is started. May be always performed.

In addition, "When the display of the second timer display is started, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, when the display of the second timer display is started, only the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, and when the display of the second timer display is started, the symbol variation display may be displayed. In, a symbol mode other than the jackpot symbol mode may be definitely displayed. Further, when the display of the second timer display is started, the jackpot symbol mode may always be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, and when the display of the second timer display is started, the symbol variation display may be displayed. In some cases, the jackpot symbol mode may not be fixedly displayed.

Further, the jackpot symbol mode may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the display of the second timer display is started, or when the display of the second timer display is not started. , The jackpot symbol mode may be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, "The first effect is a pseudo-ream effect [for example, a pseudo-ream effect shown in FIGS. 239 (7) to (9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first effect is an effect of pre-reading notice [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 246 (6) to (7)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect in which the notice icon is stocked [for example, an effect in which the princess character HME as a notice item shown in FIGS. 253 (9) to (10) is stocked]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first effect is a certain super reach effect [for example, the effect of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 237 (15) to (19)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The first effect is a pseudo-ream effect, a look-ahead advance notice effect, an effect in which advance notice icons are stocked, and one or more of a certain super reach effect. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When a plurality of effects are executed as the first effect, each effect may be started at the same time, or the start timings may be different. In addition, the number of effects to be executed is 1 and 2.
The number is not limited to one, and may be three or more, and a pseudo-ream effect, a look-ahead advance notice effect, a notice icon stocking effect, and a certain super reach effect may all be performed.

In addition, "the second effect is an effect of notifying that the jackpot symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display [for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "as the second effect, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. [For example, when the timer display in the timer notice display becomes" 00:00 ", the combination of the decorative symbols of" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "is displayed. Is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (2) to (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol. It is done, etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (2) to (3), high reliability during the variation display of the decorative symbol. Timer notice display of display mode TM1A has started timer notice effect, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

In addition, only the timer display may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or a display other than the timer display may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. May be good. Further, the display of the timer display may always be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the timer display may not be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the timer display may be started only while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the timer display may be started other than while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. Good. For example, the display of the timer display may be started during the big hit game or in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed.

Further, "a second display means [for example, the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 284] is provided.
The display means is the first display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284].
The first timer display is more likely to be displayed by the first display means than by the second display means.
The second timer display is more likely to be displayed by the second display means than by the first display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first timer display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed on the first display means or the second display means. ..

Further, the second timer display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed on the first display means or the second display means.

In addition, "the certain time is a time indicating 0.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the display of the time first displayed in the first timer display represents the first time (hereinafter," the first time display [for example, the default display mode shown in FIG. 247 (19)). Timer display of TM1 "Display of" 5:00 "in the timer display of TM1, etc.]").
The display of the time first displayed in the second timer display represents the second time (hereinafter, the timer of "7:77" shown in the "second time display [for example, FIG. 290 (a)"). Display, etc.] ".
The first time display is a display indicating that the value of a place lower than a certain place [for example, one place, etc.] [for example, a place after the decimal point] is 0.
The second time display is a display indicating that a value lower than the certain place is a certain value [for example, "77" or the like].
The certain value is a value other than 0,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by setting the timer display value as a special value, the player can recognize that a certain effect is started in advance, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. In some cases.

In addition, "the value of the place lower than a certain place" means "the value after the decimal point".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"It ’s a game console with multiple display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 284].
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1 or the like shown in FIG. 284 (3)].
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, a timer notice display in the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 284 (3)].
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display in the timer notice display TM1 or the 7-segment display device SEG].
After the display of the timer display is started, the display of the time becomes a display representing a certain time (hereinafter, referred to as "first display [for example, display of" 00:00 "and the like]"). A certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect [for example, weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 241 (14), strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 250 (35), etc.]") starts. Being done
There is a case where the timer display is displayed by either one of the first display means and the second display means (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
When the timer display is displayed on both the display means of the first display means and the display means of the second display means (hereinafter, "in the second case [for example, in the case of FIGS. 284 (3) to (11)). As shown, when the timer notice display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, respectively] ”).
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the first display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the second display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, the timer display may include only the display of the time, or may include a display other than the display of the time. Further, the timer display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, only the first effect may be started according to the time display becoming the first display after the timer display is started, or the timer display display is started. In some cases, an effect other than the first effect may be started depending on the time display being changed to the first display. Further, the first effect may always be started according to the time display becoming the first display after the timer display is started, or after the timer display is started. The first effect may not be started depending on the time display being the first display.

Further, the first effect may be started only when the time display becomes the first display after the timer display is started, or the timer display display starts. The first effect may be started in response to something other than the display of the time being the first display.

Further, only the timer display may be displayed by either one of the first display means and the second display means, or the first display means and the second display means may display only the timer display. A display other than the timer display may be displayed by one of the display means. Further, the timer display may always be displayed by either one of the first display means and the second display means, or one of the first display means and the second display means. The timer display may not be displayed by one of the display means.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only by one of the first display means and the second display means, or the first display means and the second display means may display the timer display. The timer display may be displayed by a display means other than one of the display means.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only by the first display means, or the timer display may be displayed only by the second display means.

Further, only the timer display may be displayed by both the first display means and the second display means, or both the first display means and the second display means may display the timer display. In some cases, a display other than the timer display may be displayed. Further, the timer display may always be displayed by both the first display means and the second display means, and the timer display may be displayed by both the first display means and the second display means. It may not be displayed.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only by the display means of both the first display means and the second display means, or the display means of both the first display means and the second display means. The timer display may be displayed by a display means other than the above.

Further, "In the second case, the timer display displayed on the first display means (hereinafter," displayed on the first timer display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (3)). The timer display (referred to as "timer notice display TM1 and the like") "and the timer display displayed on the second display means (hereinafter," second timer display [for example, shown in FIG. 284 (3)). There is a case where the time display is the same (hereinafter, referred to as "third case") in the case of "timer notice display, etc. displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG") [for example, FIGS. 284 (3) to the same. As shown in FIG. (11), the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG are the same. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the timer display may be recognizable even if one of the display devices fails.

Here, in the second case, only the display of the time of the first timer display and the display of the time of the second timer display may be the same, or in the second case, the display of the first timer display. The display of the time and the display other than the display of the time of the second timer display may be the same. Further, in the second case, the display of the time of the first timer display and the display of the time of the second timer display may always be the same, and in the second case, the display of the time of the first timer display The display and the time display of the second timer display may be different.

Further, the time display of the first timer display and the time display of the second timer display may be the same only in the second case, and the first case may be other than the second case. The time display of the timer display and the time display of the second timer display may be the same.

In this case, the time display when the first timer display and the second timer display are started is the same, and the time display of the first timer display and the second timer display is changing. The time display in the above is the same, and the timing at which the time display of the first timer display and the second timer display becomes a display representing a certain time is also the same.

In addition, "The first effect is an effect that can be executed in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the display mode of the cut-in image by the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 241 (14)].
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, the display mode of the cut-in image by the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 250 (35)].
When the first effect is performed according to the second aspect than when the first effect is performed according to the first aspect, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display. ,
When the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the same in the first case and the third case, the third case is more than the first case. The first effect according to the embodiment is likely to be started [for example, when the timer notice display is performed only on one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device. When the timer notice display is performed on both SEGs and the timer display is the same, the stronger cut-in image CI1a is obtained when the timer notice display is performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG. Is easy to display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first effect may be feasible only in a plurality of modes, or may be feasible in a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, the first effect may be performed in a plurality of modes without fail, or may not be performed in a plurality of modes.

In addition, when the first effect is performed according to the second aspect than when the first effect is performed according to the first aspect, only the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display. Alternatively, when the first effect is performed according to the second aspect than when the first effect is performed according to the first aspect, the symbol mode other than the jackpot symbol mode is also displayed in the symbol variation display. It may be easy to confirm. In addition, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the first effect is performed according to the second aspect than when the first effect is performed according to the first aspect. Alternatively, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the first effect is performed by the second aspect than when the first effect is performed by the first aspect. It may not be available.

Further, when the first effect is performed by the first aspect, the jackpot symbol aspect may not always be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, and the jackpot symbol aspect may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display. It may not be done. Further, when the first effect is performed by the second aspect, the jackpot symbol aspect may always be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, and the jackpot symbol aspect may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display. There may be cases.

Further, when the time displayed first in the timer display is the same in the first case and the third case, the third case is the first according to the second aspect than the first case. Only the production may be easy to start, and when the time displayed first in the timer display is the same in the first case and the third case, the third case is better than the first case. , An effect other than the first effect according to the second aspect may be easily started. Further, when the time displayed first in the timer display is the same in the first case and the third case, the third case is the first according to the second aspect than the first case. The effect may always be easy to start, and if the time displayed first in the timer display is the same in the first case and the third case, the third case is better than the first case. , The first effect according to the second aspect may not be easy to start.

Further, only when the time displayed first in the timer display is the same in the first case and the third case, the third case is the first according to the second aspect than the first case. It may be easy to start the production of, and even if the time displayed first in the timer display is not the same in the first case and the third case, the third case is more than the first case. May be easier to start the first effect according to the second aspect.

Further, in the first case, the first effect according to the second aspect does not necessarily have to be started, and the first effect according to the second aspect may or may not be started. Good. Further, in the third case, the first production by the ocean may always be started, and the first production according to the second aspect may or may not be started. May be good.

Further, "In the second case, a third timer is displayed on one of the first display means and the second display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 249 (3)]. One of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R displayed on 208, the timer notice display TM1L, etc.] may be displayed.
The display of the time to be displayed is different between the third timer display and the first timer display [for example, two timer notice displays displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (3). The timer display on one of TM1L and TM1R is "10:00", and the timer display on the other timer display TM1R is "45:00", which are different, etc.],
The displayed time is different between the third timer display and the second timer display.
After the display of the third timer display is started, a certain effect different from the first effect depends on the display of the time in the third timer display becoming the certain time. [For example, the effect of the pseudo-ream shown in FIGS. 249 (12) to (13)] may be started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the second case, only the third timer display may be displayed on one of the first display means and the second display means, or in the second case. In some cases, a display other than the third timer display may be displayed on one of the first display means and the second display means. Further, in the second case, the third timer display may always be displayed on one of the first display means and the second display means, and in the second case, the first display means. The third timer display may not be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means.

Further, in the second case, the third timer display may be displayed only on one of the first display means and the second display means, and in the second case, the third timer display may be displayed. , The third timer display may be displayed on a display means other than one of the first display means and the second display means.

Further, only in the second case, the third timer display may be displayed on one of the first display means and the second display means, and other than the second case. In this case as well, the third timer display may be displayed on one of the first display means and the second display means.

Further, only the display of the displayed time may be different between the third timer display and the first timer display, and the display of the displayed time is different between the third timer display and the first timer display. The display of may also be different. Further, the displayed time may always be different between the third timer display and the first timer display, and the displayed time is displayed between the third timer display and the first timer display. It may not be different.

Further, only the display of the displayed time may be different between the third timer display and the second timer display, and the display of the displayed time is different between the third timer display and the second timer display. The display of may also be different. Further, the display of the displayed time may always be different between the third timer display and the second timer display, and the displayed time is displayed in the third timer display and the second timer display. It may not be different.

Also, after the display of the third timer display is started, only a certain effect different from the first effect is started according to the time display in the third timer display becoming a certain time. In some cases, after the display of the third timer display is started, what is the first effect according to the time display in the third timer display reaches a certain time? An effect other than a certain effect may be started. In addition, after the display of the third timer display is started, a certain effect different from the first effect is always started according to the time display in the third timer display becoming a certain time. It may be done, or after the display of the third timer display is started, the time display in the third timer display may be different from the first effect depending on the time. The production may not start.

Further, after the display of the third timer display is started, a certain effect different from the first effect is started only when the time display in the third timer display reaches a certain time. In some cases, after the display of the third timer display is started, the time display in the third timer display becomes a certain time. There may be a case where a certain effect other than the effect of is started.

Also, only after the display of the third timer display is started, a certain effect different from the first effect is started in response to the time display in the third timer display becoming a certain time. It may be performed, and even after the display of the third timer display is started, the time display in the third timer display becomes the first effect according to a certain time. May start another rendition.

Further, "In the second case, the timer display displayed on the first display means (hereinafter," 11th timer display [for example, displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (5)). "Timer notice display TM1 etc.]") and the timer display displayed on the second display means (hereinafter, "12th timer display [for example, in FIG. 285 (5)). There is a case where the display of the time is different (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth case") in the case of "timer notice display etc. displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG shown") [for example, in FIG. 285 (5). As shown, the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (“06:11”) and the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG. ("30:00") is different, etc.],
In the fourth case, the first display corresponds to the display of the time of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display becoming the first display. Production starts,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the second case, only the display of the time of the eleventh timer display and the display of the time of the twelfth timer display may be different, and in the second case, the eleventh The display of the time of the timer display and the display other than the display of the time of the twelfth timer display may be different. Further, in the second case, the display of the time of the eleventh timer display and the display of the time of the twelfth timer display may always be different, and in the second case, the time of the eleventh timer display. The display of the time of the twelfth timer display may not be different from the display of.

Further, only in the second case, the display of the time of the eleventh timer display and the display of the time of the twelfth timer display may be different, and in cases other than the second case, the first The display of the time of the eleventh timer display and the display of the time of the twelfth timer display may be different.

Further, in the fourth case, only the first effect is displayed according to the time display of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display becoming the first display. It may be started, and in the fourth case, the display of the time of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display becomes the first display. Productions other than one production may also be started. Further, in the fourth case, the first effect is always performed according to the display of the time of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display becoming the first display. It may be started, and in the fourth case, the display of the time of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display becomes the first display. One production may not be started.

Further, in the fourth case, the first effect is performed only when the time display of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display becomes the first display. It may be started, and in the fourth case, other than that the time display of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display becomes the first display. The first production may be started accordingly.

Further, in the fourth case, the first effect may be started in response to the display of the time of the eleventh timer display becoming the first display, and in the fourth case, the tenth. The first effect may be started in response to the time display of the second timer display becoming the first display, and in the fourth case, the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer may be started. The first effect may be started in response to the display of both times of the display becoming the first display.

Further, only in the fourth case, the first effect is performed according to the display of the time of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display becoming the first display. It may be started, and even in cases other than the fourth case, the time display of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display has become the first display. The first production may be started according to the situation.

Further, "The first display means is a means in which only one timer display may be displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 284 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays one timer notice. Only TM1 is displayed, etc.],
The first display means is a means in which a plurality of timer displays may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 249 (3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are displayed. Displayed, etc.],
The second display means is a means in which only one timer display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 284 (3), in the 7-segment display device SEG, only one timer notice display TM1 is displayed. Displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display means may display only one timer display, or may display a display other than one timer display. .. Further, the first display means may be one in which only one timer display is always displayed, or may be one in which only one timer display is not displayed.

Further, the first display means may display only a plurality of timer displays, or may display a display other than the plurality of timer displays. Further, the first display means may be one in which a plurality of timer displays are always displayed, or may be one in which a plurality of timer displays may not be displayed.

Further, the second display means may display only one timer display, or may display a display other than one timer display. Further, the second display means may be one in which only one timer display is always displayed, or may be one in which only one timer display is not displayed.

In addition, "the first display means may display a plurality of the timer displays (hereinafter, referred to as" a plurality of timer displays ").
One of the plurality of timer displays in the first display means is the 21st timer display [for example, the timer notice display displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (3). TM1L, etc.]
One of the plurality of timer displays in the first display means is the 22nd timer display [for example, the timer notice display displayed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (3). TM1R, etc.]
The display of the time displayed first in the 21st timer display is a display representing the 21st time [for example, a display of "10:00", etc.].
The time display first displayed in the 22nd timer display is a display representing the 22nd time [for example, "45:00" display, etc.].
The period corresponding to the 22nd time [for example, 45 seconds, etc.] is longer than the period corresponding to the 21st time [for example, 10 seconds, etc.].
In the second case, the display of the time displayed on the timer display displayed on the second display means and the display of the time displayed on the 22nd timer display are the same. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display means may display only a plurality of timer displays, or the first display means may display a display other than the plurality of timer displays. Further, a plurality of timer displays may always be displayed on the first display means, or a plurality of timer displays may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, a plurality of timer displays may be displayed only on the first display means, or a plurality of timer displays may be displayed on display means other than the first display means. ..

Further, in the second case, only the display of the time displayed on the timer display displayed on the second display means and the display of the time displayed on the 22nd timer display may be the same. However, in the second case, the display of the time displayed on the timer display displayed on the second display means and the display other than the display of the time displayed on the 22nd timer display are the same. May be good. Further, in the second case, the display of the time displayed on the timer display displayed on the second display means and the display of the time displayed on the 22nd timer display may always be the same. However, in the second case, the display of the time displayed on the timer display displayed on the second display means may be different from the display of the time displayed on the 22nd timer display. ..

Further, only in the second case, the display of the time displayed on the timer display displayed on the second display means and the display of the time displayed on the 22nd timer display may be the same. However, even in cases other than the second case, the time display displayed on the timer display displayed on the second display means and the time display displayed on the 22nd timer display are the same. You may.

Further, "The second display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect [for example, a rainbow display aspect shown in FIG. 286 (24)].
When the second display means displays the timer display in the third mode, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying the timer display only in a plurality of modes, or may be capable of displaying the timer display in a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, the second display means may always display the timer display in a plurality of modes, or may not display the timer display in a plurality of modes.

Further, when the second display means displays the timer display in the third mode, only the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, or the second display means may display the timer in the third mode. When the display is displayed, a symbol mode other than the jackpot symbol mode may also be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display. Further, when the second display means displays the timer display in the third mode, the jackpot symbol mode may always be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, and the second display means may display the timer in the third mode. When the display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, the jackpot symbol mode may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the second display means displays the timer display in the third mode, and the second display means may display the timer in the third mode. In cases other than the case where the display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, "the display of the time displayed first in the first timer display represents the second time (hereinafter," the second time display [for example, "7:77" shown in FIG. 290 (a)). "Timer display, etc.]"), the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.
In the second time display, the value of a place lower than a certain place [for example, one place etc.] [for example, a place after the decimal point] is a certain value [for example, "77" etc.]. It is a display representing
The certain value is a value other than 0,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by setting the timer display value as a special value, the player can recognize that a certain effect is started in advance, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. In some cases.

In addition, "the value of the place lower than a certain place" means "the value after the decimal point".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first effect is a pseudo-ream effect [for example, a pseudo-ream effect shown in FIGS. 239 (7) to (9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first effect is an effect of pre-reading notice [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 246 (6) to (7)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect in which the notice icon is stocked [for example, an effect in which the princess character HME as a notice item shown in FIGS. 253 (9) to (10) is stocked]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first effect is a certain super reach effect [for example, the effect of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 237 (15) to (19)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The first effect is a pseudo-ream effect, a look-ahead advance notice effect, an effect in which advance notice icons are stocked, and one or more of a certain super reach effect. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When a plurality of effects are executed as the first effect, each effect may be started at the same time, or the start timings may be different. Further, the number of the effects to be executed is not limited to one and two, but may be three or more, a pseudo-ream effect, a look-ahead advance notice effect, an effect in which the notice icon is stocked, and a certain effect. The entire super reach production may be performed.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (2) to (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol. It is done, etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (2) to (3), high reliability during the variation display of the decorative symbol. Timer notice display of display mode TM1A has started timer notice effect, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

In addition, only the timer display may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or a display other than the timer display may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. May be good. Further, the display of the timer display may always be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the timer display may not be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the timer display may be started only while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the timer display may be started other than while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. Good. For example, the display of the timer display may be started during the big hit game or in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed.

In addition, "the certain time is a time indicating 0.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"It ’s a game console with multiple display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 284].
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer notice display TM1 or the like shown in FIG. 285 (5)].
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, a timer notice display in the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 285 (5)].
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display in the timer notice display TM1 or the 7-segment display device SEG].
After the display of the timer display is started, the display of the time becomes a display representing a certain time (hereinafter, referred to as "first display [for example, display of" 00:00 "and the like]"). Depending on the situation, a certain effect [for example, the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 241 (14), the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 250 (35), etc.] is started.
When the timer display is displayed on both the first display means and the second display means during the execution of a certain symbol variation display (hereinafter, "the second case [for example, FIG. 285 (for example, FIG. 285)). As shown in 5), there is a case where the timer notice display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, respectively] ”).
In the second case, the time display of the timer display (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display") displayed on the first display means and the display on the second display means. The time display of the timer display (hereinafter referred to as “second timer display”) may be different [for example, as shown in FIG. 285 (5), the timer notice displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The time indicated by the timer display of the display TM1 (“06:11”) and the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG (“30:00”) are different, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the first display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the second display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, the timer display may include only the display of the time, or may include a display other than the display of the time. Further, the timer display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, only a certain effect may be started according to the time display becoming the first display after the timer display is started, or the timer display is started. After that, depending on the time display becoming the first display, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. In addition, a certain effect may always be started according to the fact that the time display becomes the first display after the timer display is started, or the time after the timer display is started. There may be a case where a certain effect is not started depending on the display of is changed to the first display.

Further, a certain effect may be started only when the time display becomes the first display after the timer display is started, or the timer display is started. After that, a certain effect may be started in response to something other than the display of the time being the first display.

Further, during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, only the timer display may be displayed by both the first display means and the second display means, or the execution of a certain symbol variation display. In some cases, a display other than the timer display may be displayed by both the display means of the first display means and the display means of the second display means. Further, the timer display may be always displayed by both the first display means and the second display means during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the first display during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. The timer display may not be displayed by both the display means of the above and the display means of the second display means.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only by the display means of both the first display means and the second display means during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the execution of a certain symbol variation display. The timer display may be displayed by a display means other than the display means of both the first display means and the second display means.

Further, in the second case, only the display of the time of the first timer display and the display of the time of the second timer display may be different, and in the second case, the time of the first timer display may be different. The display other than the time display of the second timer display may be different from the display of. Further, in the second case, the display of the time of the first timer display and the display of the time of the second timer display may always be different, and in the second case, the display of the time of the first timer display and the display of the time. , The time display of the second timer display may not be different.

Further, the display of the time of the first timer display and the display of the time of the second timer display may be different only in the second case, and the first case may be different from the case other than the second case. The time display of the timer display and the time display of the second timer display may be different.

In addition, "when either one of the first timer display and the second timer display is displayed during the execution of the certain symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" first case "). A game table characterized by being. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to perform an effect by a variety of timer displays using the first display device and the second display device.

Here, either one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be displayed only while a certain symbol variation display is being executed, or a certain symbol variation display is being executed. In addition to this, either one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be displayed. Further, either one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be displayed without fail during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the first timer may be displayed during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Either the display or the second timer display may not be displayed.

Further, only the first timer display may be displayed, or only the second timer display may be displayed.

In addition, "In the second case, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the certain symbol variation display than in the first case.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the second case than in the first case, only the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display, and in the second case than in the first case. In the symbol variation display, symbol modes other than the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed in a definite manner. Further, in the second case than in the first case, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display, and in the second case than in the first case. In the symbol variation display, it may not be easy to confirm the jackpot symbol mode.

Further, in the first case, the jackpot symbol mode may not always be fixedly displayed in a certain symbol variation display, and the jackpot symbol mode may or may not be fixedly displayed in a certain symbol variation display. May be good.

Further, in the second case, the jackpot symbol mode may always be fixedly displayed in a certain symbol variation display, and the jackpot symbol mode may or may not be fixedly displayed in a certain symbol variation display. Good.

Further, "The period corresponding to the time display first displayed in the first timer display is the first period [for example, the timer notice displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (3). 10 seconds corresponding to "10:00" that is first displayed on the timer display of the display TM1].
The period corresponding to the time display first displayed in the second timer display is the second period [for example, the timer of the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 285 (5). 30 seconds corresponding to "30:00" that is first displayed on the display],
The second period is longer than the first period,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "In the second case, the timing at which the first timer display is started and the timing at which the second timer display is started may be the same.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the second case, only the timing at which the first timer display is started and the timing at which the second timer display is started may be the same, and in the second case, the first The timing at which the timer display is started and the timing other than the timing at which the second timer display is started may be the same. Further, in the second case, the timing at which the first timer display is started and the timing at which the second timer display is started may always be the same, and in the second case, the first timer display may be started. The timing at which the display starts and the timing at which the second timer display starts may not be the same.

Further, the timing at which the first timer display is started and the timing at which the second timer display is started may be the same only in the second case, and even in cases other than the second case. The timing at which the first timer display is started and the timing at which the second timer display is started may be the same.

Further, "In the second case, the timing at which the first timer display is started and the timing at which the second timer display is started may be different [for example, FIGS. 285 (3) to 285 (3) to FIG. As shown in (5), the timing at which the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 starts to be displayed differs from the timing at which the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG starts to be displayed. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the second case, only the timing at which the first timer display is started and the timing at which the second timer display is started may be different, and in the second case, the first The timing at which the timer display is started and the timing other than the timing at which the second timer display is started may be different. Further, in the second case, the timing at which the first timer display is started and the timing at which the second timer display is started may always be different, and in the second case, the first timer display is displayed. There may be cases where the start timing and the display start timing of the second timer display do not differ.

Further, the timing at which the first timer display is started and the timing at which the second timer display is started may be different only in the second case, and even in cases other than the second case. The timing at which the first timer display is started and the timing at which the second timer display is started may be different.

Further, "In the second case, the first timer display is started after the second timer display is started, and the time display of the first timer display is the first. The second timer display may be displayed even after the certain effect is started according to the display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the second case, the first timer display is started after the second timer display is started, and the time display of the first timer display is changed to the first display. Correspondingly, only the second timer display may be displayed even after a certain effect is started, or in the second case, the first after the second timer display is started to be displayed. The timer display of is started, and the display other than the second timer display is displayed even after a certain effect is started according to the display of the time of the first timer display becoming the first display. May be present. Further, in the second case, the first timer display is started after the second timer display is started, and the time display of the first timer display is changed to the first display. The second timer display may always be displayed even after a certain effect is started, and in the second case, the first timer display is displayed after the display of the second timer display is started. The second timer display may not be displayed even after a certain effect is started in response to the start and the display of the time of the first timer display becoming the first display.

Further, in the second case, the first timer display is started after the second timer display is started, and the time display of the first timer display is changed to the first display. The second timer display may be displayed even after only a certain effect is started, and in the second case, the first timer display may be displayed after the second timer display is started. The timer display is started, and the second timer display is displayed even after the effect other than a certain effect is started according to the time display of the first timer display being changed to the first display. There may be cases.

Further, in the second case, only that the first timer display is started after the second timer display is started and the time display of the first timer display is changed to the first display. Correspondingly, the second timer display may be displayed even after a certain effect is started, and in the second case, the first timer display may be displayed after the second timer display is started. The timer display is started, and the second timer display is displayed even after a certain effect is started according to other than the fact that the time display of the first timer display is changed to the first display. May be present.

Further, in the second case, the first timer display is started only after the second timer display is started, and the time display of the first timer display becomes the first display. Correspondingly, the second timer display may be displayed even after a certain effect is started, and in the second case, the first is not even after the second timer display is started. The timer display of is started, and the second timer display may be displayed even after a certain effect is started according to the time display of the first timer display becoming the first display. There may be.

Also, only in the second case, the first timer display is started after the second timer display is started, and the time display of the first timer display becomes the first display. Correspondingly, the second timer display may be displayed even after a certain effect is started, and even in cases other than the second case, after the second timer display is started to be displayed. The first timer display is started to be displayed, and the second timer display is displayed even after a certain effect is started according to the time display of the first timer display being changed to the first display. May be present.

Further, "The first display means is a means in which only one timer display may be displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 284 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays one timer notice. Only TM1 is displayed, etc.],
The first display means is a means in which a plurality of timer displays may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 249 (3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are displayed. Displayed, etc.],
The second display means is a means in which only one timer display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 284 (3), in the 7-segment display device SEG, only one timer notice display TM1 is displayed. Displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display means may display only one timer display, or may display a display other than one timer display. .. Further, the first display means may be one in which only one timer display is always displayed, or may be one in which only one timer display is not displayed.

Further, the first display means may display only a plurality of timer displays, or may display a display other than the plurality of timer displays. Further, the first display means may be one in which a plurality of timer displays are always displayed, or may be one in which a plurality of timer displays may not be displayed.

Further, the second display means may display only one timer display, or may display a display other than one timer display. Further, the second display means may be one in which only one timer display is always displayed, or may be one in which only one timer display is not displayed.

Further, "The second display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect [for example, a rainbow display aspect shown in FIG. 286 (24)].
When the second display means displays the timer display in the third mode, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying the timer display only in a plurality of modes, or may be capable of displaying the timer display in a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, the second display means may always display the timer display in a plurality of modes, or may not display the timer display in a plurality of modes.

Further, when the second display means displays the timer display in the third mode, only the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, or the second display means may display the timer in the third mode. When the display is displayed, a symbol mode other than the jackpot symbol mode may also be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display. Further, when the second display means displays the timer display in the third mode, the jackpot symbol mode may always be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, and the second display means may display the timer in the third mode. When the display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, the jackpot symbol mode may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the second display means displays the timer display in the third mode, and the second display means may display the timer in the third mode. In cases other than the case where the display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, "the display of the time displayed first in the first timer display represents the second time (hereinafter," the second time display [for example, "7:77" shown in FIG. 290 (a)). "Timer display, etc.]"), the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.
In the second time display, the value of a place lower than a certain place [for example, one place etc.] [for example, a place after the decimal point] is a certain value [for example, "77" etc.]. It is a display representing
The certain value is a value other than 0,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by setting the timer display value as a special value, the player can recognize that a certain effect is started in advance, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. In some cases.

In addition, "the value of the place lower than a certain place" means "the value after the decimal point".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The certain effect is a pseudo-ream effect [for example, a pseudo-ream effect shown in FIGS. 239 (7) to (9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the above-mentioned certain effect is an effect of pre-reading notice [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 246 (6) to (7)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the above-mentioned certain effect is an effect in which the notice icon is stocked [for example, an effect in which the princess character HME as a notice item shown in FIGS. 253 (9) to (10) is stocked].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The certain effect is a certain super reach effect [for example, the effect of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 237 (15) to (19)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the above-mentioned certain effect is an effect of notifying that the jackpot symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display [for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The certain effect is a pseudo-ream effect, a look-ahead advance notice effect, a notice icon stocking effect, a certain super reach effect, and a symbol variation display that informs that the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. One of the productions to be performed or two or more productions,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When a plurality of effects are executed as a certain effect, each effect may be started at the same time, or the start timings may be different. Further, the number of the effects to be executed is not limited to one and two, but may be three or more, a pseudo-ream effect, a look-ahead advance notice effect, a notice icon stocked effect, and a certain super reach. The effect and the effect of notifying that the jackpot symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display may be performed.

In addition, "The jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed as the above-mentioned effect [For example, when the timer display in the timer notice display becomes" 00:00 ", the combination of the decorative symbols of" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "is displayed. Displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (2) to (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol. It is done, etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246 (2) to (3), high reliability during the variation display of the decorative symbol. Timer notice display of display mode TM1A has started timer notice effect, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

In addition, only the timer display may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or a display other than the timer display may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. May be good. Further, the display of the timer display may always be started while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the timer display may not be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the timer display may be started only while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, or the timer display may be started other than while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. Good. For example, the display of the timer display may be started during the big hit game or in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed.

In addition, "the certain time is a time indicating 0.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Below, based on the effect examples described so far, other effect patterns of the preparatory notice effect will be described while appropriately showing the above-mentioned drawings.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 307 (a1) to 307 (a14), an example is shown in which a notice display corresponding to the area lit in red is prepared in the roulette effect, but it can be executed, for example. A plurality of (for example, six) notice effects are displayed, and one or two or more notice effects are prepared from the plurality of notice effects by operating the above-mentioned roulette effect shown in FIG. 307 or the effect button 136. You may do it. Specifically, each thumbnail screen of the advance notice effect A to the advance notice effect F is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and an operation promotion display for promoting the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, one or more advance notice effects may be selected (in the following description, it is assumed that the advance notice effect A and the advance notice effect F are selected. To do.). For the selected advance notice effect A and advance notice effect F, the preparation display RDY1 and RDY2 indicating that the advance notice effect will be performed at the corresponding positions are displayed. After that, when the execution start timing of the advance notice effect A comes, the preparation display RDY1 corresponding to the advance notice effect A starts moving, and for example, a display indicating a state toward the family crest accessory 224E is performed. That is, a state in which the preparing display RDY1 moves to the lower center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Then, the preparation display RDY1 is erased, the family crest accessory 224E performs an ascending operation, and then returns to the initial position. After that, the preparing display RDY2 corresponding to the advance notice effect F moves to the center while being enlarged, and then an effect is performed in which the cut-in image is displayed on the entire surface of the display screen.

Further, as another effect example, in the effect example shown in FIG. 305 (a1), the number of times the button effect occurs (that is, the number of button stocks) is determined in the reception number display 850 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is assumed that "4 more times" indicating that it is 4 times is displayed. That is, it is displayed that the four button effects are being prepared. After that, the reception number display 850 starts blinking, and it is notified that the first button effect of the four button effects whose start is reserved starts. At this time, the time until the button effect is started may be configured such that a countdown is displayed by, for example, a timer display.

When the first button effect is started, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the operation of the effect button 136 is ready to be accepted. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, for example, a response display (notice display) such that a certain character appears and ranks up is started. It should be noted that a button effect unrelated to the button stock may occur while the digestion of the button effect related to the button stock is started.

After that, the reception number display 850 starts blinking again, and it is notified that the second and third button effects of the three button effects whose start is reserved are started. At this time, two timer displays are displayed, and a countdown is performed at each timer display. In these timer displays, the start and end of the countdown are performed at the same timing, but one timer display may start the countdown first, and then the other timer display may start the countdown. Further, one timer display may end the countdown first, and then the other timer display may end the countdown.

After that, the two operation promotion displays are displayed at the same time, and the operation of the effect button 136 becomes effective. However, in this effect example, only one button effect is accepted by one operation of the effect button 136, and when the response display is displayed for each of the two button effects, the operation of the two effect buttons 136 is performed. is necessary. It should be noted that the response display of both of the two button effects may be displayed by one operation of the effect button 136. Further, in this production example, the decreasing speed of the remaining time meter MT included in the two operation promotion displays is different, indicating that the operation effective period is different. Further, when the two operation promotion displays are displayed, the button effects that become effective when the effect button 136 is operated may be in a predetermined order, or the reduction speed of the remaining time meter MT. May be in the order of fastest. In this effect example, when a response display corresponding to the two button effects is performed with one reserved button effect left, it may be notified that a big hit will occur. In addition, there may be a case where it is notified that the loss will occur.

After that, a promotion effect is performed to determine whether or not it will be a big hit with a probabilistic pattern. Then, the remaining one button effect that has been reserved is digested, and the operation promotion display is displayed. That is, the promotion chance-up effect is started. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the promotion effect is succeeded as a response display, and it is notified that the jackpot will be a big hit with the probability variation symbol. The promotion effect is not limited to the lottery as to whether or not the jackpot will be a jackpot with a probabilistic symbol. ) May be the production.

In addition, in the above description,
A game console equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [preparing display, for example, the preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d)].
The third display is a certain notice display [mini game or timer notice, for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to (p), and FIGS. 293 (b3) to (b4). It is a display indicating that the display of [Timer notice effect, etc. shown in] is waiting to be started.
It is configured so that the third display may be started in the first state [the display of the preparing display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, for example, FIG. 291 (d)). As shown in, the display of the preparing image RDY is started while the UI part UI3 for displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed],
The display of the third display, which is started in the first state, may end in the second state. [The display in preparation, which is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, is on hold. The display ends when the icon is hidden. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (d) to 291 (n), the preparing image RDY whose display is started while the UI unit UI3 is displayed is displayed. , UI part UI3 is hidden and the display is finished, etc.],
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [Preparing in the state where the hold icon is hidden]. After the display of the display is finished, the mini game or the timer notice is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (n) to (o), the UI is after the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished. The display of the mini game is started with the part UI3 hidden, or after the display of the preparing image RDY is completed as shown in FIGS. 293 (b1) to (b4). , UI part UI3 is hidden and the timer notice effect is started, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the notice, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q), the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (c4), etc.] Is started [When the display result of the mini game becomes a great success or the countdown is completed by the timer notice, the notice is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to (q), the mini game When the display result becomes a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 294 (c1) to (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed, the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL is displayed. To be started, etc.],
The above-mentioned certain effect is a notice regarding the display of the symbol variation during execution.
The second state may occur after the first state [the state in which the hold icon can be displayed may shift to the state in which the hold icon is not displayed, for example, FIGS. 291 (l) to FIG. As shown in (m), when shifting to the swordsman reach, the displayed UI part UI3 is hidden, and the hold icon shifts from the displayable state to the hidden state, etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed [for example, the state in which the UI part UI3 before the transition to the swordsman reach is displayed].
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI part UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

There was room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game console, it becomes easier to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance rather than the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and the fluctuation is concentrated. It may be entertaining.

In addition, according to this game table, for beginners, the preparatory notice can be used to excite and entertain whether it is the notice or the pre-reading notice, and for some experienced people, the preparatory notice is the notice. It may be easier to understand if it is a display about, and it may be possible to clarify the point of expectation.

Further, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is given depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, in the first state, only the third display may be started, or in the first state, a display other than the third display may be started. Further, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

In addition, the third display that started the display in the first state may end the display only in the second state, or the third display that started the display in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. Further, the third display whose display is started in the first state may always end the display in the second state, and the third display whose display is started in the first state is the second display. The display may not end in the state of.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of the display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be always started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In the second state, the display of a certain notice display may not be started after the end of.

Further, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In addition to after the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started even in a state other than the second state.

Further, after a certain notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also started. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may always be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain notice display is displayed.

In addition, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect may be a notice that is always related to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to the symbol variation display that is being executed.

Further, the second state may be reached only after the first state, or the second state may be reached even after a state other than the first state. Further, the second state may always be reached after the first state, or the second state may not be reached after the first state.

Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. .. Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

Further, the second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. Further, the second state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.

Further, the third display may be a character display being prepared, a character display, a notice item display, or a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be a running display.

Further, a certain notice display may be a display during execution of a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

In addition, "The third state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed.
The fourth state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed.
The third state is different from the first state.
The fourth state is different from the second state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

In addition, "the third display, which started in the first state, may end in the first state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

In addition, "the third display, which started in the first state, may end in the third state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

In addition, "the third display, which started in the first state, may end in the fourth state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

Further, the first state may be a state including the execution of the symbol variation display (decorative symbol, special symbol).

In addition, "It is configured so that a certain effect may be started after the certain notice display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

It should be noted that the certain notice display is not limited to the true notice display, and may be a fake notice display in which a certain effect is not started.

Further, when a certain notice display is a mini game, a certain effect may be a display showing the result of the mini game.

Further, the character is not limited to a person, and may be a display of a mini item such as a notice item.

In addition, "it is configured so that the second state may occur after the first state" means "the second state may occur following the first state". It may be "structured like this".

In addition, there may be a case where the first state is followed by a second state without going through another state (for example, a fourth state). In addition, there may be a case where the first state is followed by another state (for example, a third state or a third state) and then the second state is entered. In addition, there may be a case where the first state is changed to the second state in the state where one symbol variation display is made.

Further, a certain effect may be faded in while a certain notice display is faded out.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display [display of an image including the hold icon display area, for example, UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
The sixth display is at least a display of an image displayed behind the hold icon.
The hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. [The hold icon can be displayed while the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. For example, the hold icon is UI part It is possible to display while UI3 is displayed],
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (m). UI part When UI3 is hidden, the hold icon is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make the hold icon stand out.

Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back surface of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be at least the display of an image that is always displayed on the back of the hold icon, or at least the display of an image that is not displayed on the back of the hold icon.

Further, it may be configured so that only the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. You may be. In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be always displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured in.

Further, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. You may be.

In addition, it may be configured so that only the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or display other than the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not always be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured in.

In addition, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

The sixth display may be a display that does not overlap with the changing decorative pattern.

Further, in a configuration in which a part of the sixth display overlaps with a part of the third display, the display of a part different from the part of the third display overlaps with the decorative design. You may.

In addition, the sixth display may include the display of the pedestal of the hold icon.

In addition, the sixth display may include the display of the pedestal of the variable icon.

Further, the sixth display may be different from the display of the background image.

In addition, "In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the third display. [Hold in the state where the hold icon is displayed. A part of the image including the icon display area is displayed overlapping with the preparing display. For example, as shown in FIG. 291 (d), the preparing image RDY is superimposed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3. Displayed, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [Display of the preparation display in the state where the hold icon is displayed. The position and the display position of the preparation display in the non-display state of the hold icon are the same, for example, the display position of the preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d) and the preparation image shown in FIG. 291 (m). The display position of RDY is the same, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it strongly impresses that the third display is not a look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, it may be possible to prevent oversight by noticing that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

Here, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped and displayed only with the third display in the first state, or the display in the first state may be overlapped. It may be configured so that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with a display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display in the first state, or the sixth display may be displayed in the first state. At least a part of the display may be configured so as to overlap the third display and not be displayed.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed, or in the first state, the sixth display may be overlapped. Display other than at least a part of the display of is also configured to be displayed overlapping with the third display.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [default display mode, for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
One of the plurality of types is the second aspect [display mode of notice or look-ahead notice, for example, gold display mode shown in FIG. 291 (e)].
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is more likely to start [The image including the hold icon display area is the default than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode. When the display mode of the look-ahead notice is changed to the display mode of the look-ahead notice, the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode is more likely to be displayed. If this is the case, the hold icon in the red display mode is likely to be displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first and second aspects, or may not be displayed in the first and second aspects. Good.

In addition, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be more likely to be initiated, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than if the sixth display did not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. When it changes to, it may be easier to start the display display other than the second display. In addition, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may always be started, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of change, the display of the second display may not start.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display may start from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, "when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Is configured so that the display of the second display is more likely to be started. ”“ In a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. It is configured so that the display of the second display is more likely to be started when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change. It may be that there is.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [default display mode, for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
One of the plurality of types is the second aspect [display mode of notice or look-ahead notice, for example, gold display mode shown in FIG. 291 (e)].
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display. [The image including the hold icon display area is the default than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode. It is more likely to be a big hit when the display mode is changed from the display mode of the look-ahead notice. For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (e) is displayed in the golden display mode, the hold icon is displayed. The display mode is liable to change, and therefore the jackpot symbol is liable to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first and second aspects, or may not be displayed in the first and second aspects. Good.

Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, only the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed in a definite manner, and the sixth display is from the first mode to the second mode as compared with the case where the sixth display does not change from the first mode to the second mode. When the mode is changed, it may be easier to confirm and display symbols other than the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, the jackpot symbol may always be definitely displayed, and the sixth display is from the first mode to the second mode as compared with the case where the sixth display does not change from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display is the first mode. The jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed from the second aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Is configured to facilitate the definite display of the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. ”“ In a certain state, the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when it does not change. It may be that there is.

In addition, "a certain reach effect [a specific super reach effect, for example, the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q)] can be executed.
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [the state before the specific super reach effect is started, for example, FIGS. 291 (m) to the same. The state before the start of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in Fig. (Q)].
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is executed, for example, a super reach (swordsman) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q). Reach) is being executed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not it is in a certain reach state.

Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured so that a certain reach effect is always executed, or it may be configured so that a certain reach effect may not be executed.

Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before the execution of the reach effect other than the certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states of. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

Further, the second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is executed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is executed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always executed, or a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.

The first state may be a reach state before developing into SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and the second state may be a state in which SP reach is being executed in the certain fluctuation.

Further, the first state is a state before developing into SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and is a certain state before reaching a reach state, and the second state is a state before reaching SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and the second state is SP in the certain fluctuation. It may be in the state where reach is being executed.

That is, there may be a case where the first state and the second state are one set.

Further, "The certain notice display is a timer notice display [for example, a display of a timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 294 (b3) to (b5)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The timer notice display may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of timer notice displays, it may be a certain type of timer notice display.

Further, "The certain notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to (q)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of mini games, it may be a certain type of mini games.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6), etc.].
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. You may. Further, the fourth display may be configured to be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q), etc.].
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. You may. Further, the fifth display may be configured to be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

The fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, and it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed than when the fifth display is displayed. When the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, in the case where the fifth display appears only under special conditions, the case where at least one of the third display mode and a certain notice display mode is displayed only in a certain mode. There may be.

In addition, "The third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next start symbol variation display is started [in a certain symbol variation display]. The in-preparation display in which the display has started is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (i) to 291 (j), the in-preparation image RDY Is displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to give a sense of expectation across a plurality of fluctuations by the third display, and since the goal is easy to understand, the period for giving a sense of expectation may be clarified.

Here, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display is started, or The third display, which is started to be displayed in the symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. Further, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed after the next start symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. The third display from which the display has been started may not be continuously displayed even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

Further, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a character related to the first display [change effect display of display mode of hold icon (hold change advance effect display), for example, FIGS. 291 (f) to the same. Ninja character NJ4, etc. shown in Fig. (G)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is the second display [hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode, for example, the hold icon in the red display mode shown in FIG. 291 (h)].
The first display is a display of characters related to the second display.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started. [The hold icon is the display mode of the look-ahead notice after the hold change pre-effect display by the character is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (f) to 291 (h), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the default after the hold change pre-effect display by the ninja character NJ4 is performed. The display mode has changed to red, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character related only to the second display, or may be a display of a character related to a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is always related to the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of a display mode of a hold icon, or an effect display in proofreading a character (navigation character) that is always displayed. ..

Further, the second display may be a display in which the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, "the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started", but "the second display is started after the display of the first display is started". The display of the display of the above is started. The display may be made. " Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. Further, the second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

In addition, "The first display that started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be deleted before the next start symbol variation display is started [Display starts in a certain symbol variation display. The character related to the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (hold change advance effect display) is deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, for example, FIGS. 291 (f) to 291 (h). ), The ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display that is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be erased only before the next start symbol variation display is started. The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be configured to be erased other than before the next start symbol variation display is started. Further, the first display which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be always erased before the next start symbol variation display is started, or a certain symbol variation may be made. The first display, which is started to be displayed in the display, may be configured so that it may not be erased before the next start of the symbol variation display is started.

It should be noted that a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variation display. Further, a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state).

Further, "In the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed. [The notice is executed in the area where the preparation display is displayed, for example, FIG. 297 (a4). ), In the tutorial display section TT1 where the image RDY being prepared is displayed, a notice display consisting of the characters "super heat" may be displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be executed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also executed. May be the case. Further, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. May be the case.

In addition, it is equipped with "operation means [buttons and levers, for example, effect buttons 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh display [display of an image of a button or lever, for example, a deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6)].
The seventh display is a display that prompts the operation of the operating means.
The seventh display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started. [The display of the image of the button or the lever is started after the preparation display is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b6), the deca button image 136aL is started to be displayed after the preparing image RDY is started to be displayed, etc.],
When the operating means is operated while the seventh display is being displayed, the certain effect is started [when the button (or lever) is operated while the display of the image of the button or lever is being displayed, the notice is given. When the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6) is being displayed, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends before the display of the seventh display starts [The in-preparation display ends before the image of the button or lever starts to be displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b6), the display of the preparing image RDY is terminated before the display of the deca button image 136aL is started],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operating means, or may also prompt other than the operation of the operating means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operating means, or may not prompt the operation of the operating means.

Further, the seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or may be started even after the third display is started. There may be. Further, the seventh display may always start after the third display is started, or may not start after the third display is started. May be good.

Further, a certain effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect is not started when the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated only while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated other than while the seventh display is displayed. It may be started. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while only the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed. May be started.

Further, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display ends other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be something to do. Further, the third display may be such that the display always ends before the display of the seventh display starts, or when the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be one.

The seventh display may be a deca button image of a normal button image and a deca button image. Here, when the normal button image is displayed and when the big button image is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed when the big button image is displayed.

Further, the seventh display may be a button image of a special color among the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the normal color button image is displayed and when the special color button image is displayed, even if the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the special color button image is displayed. Good.

Further, the seventh display may be an image of the normal button image and an image of another operating means among the images of the operating means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the button. Here, when the normal button image is displayed and when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the jackpot symbol is displayed when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed. It may be easy to confirm and display.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b5)].
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b6), a button notice effect is produced by a combined animation. Foretelling the start of, that is, foretelling the display of the big button image 136aL, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the eighth display may be a notice only that the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice other than the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

Further, the third display may be terminated only during the display of the eighth display, or may be terminated during the display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 301 (a)].
The ninth display is a display of a variable icon.
The third display may be displayed twice. [Two preparation displays may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 304 (a), two preparation images RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. May be done, etc.],
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes [After the display of one of the two preparing displays is completed, the other is being prepared. The display mode of the display changes, for example, the image RDY being prepared is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 301 (g)],.
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [The preparing display whose display mode has changed overlaps the variable icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 301 (g), enlarged. The displayed preparing image RDY overlaps with the variable icon h0, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easier to notice that two third displays are displayed.

Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, or only one third display may be displayed. May be done.

Further, only the display mode of the other may change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the display of the other of the two third displays may be completed after the display of the other is completed. The display mode other than the display mode of is also changed. Further, the display mode of the other may always change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the display mode of the other may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. There may be cases where the display mode of is not changed.

Further, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or other than after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. The other display mode may change.

Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with a display other than the ninth display. Good. Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may always overlap with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. ..

Further, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and the display other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. ..

The ninth display may overlap with the third display whose display mode has changed.

Further, the third display may overlap with a display other than the ninth display, or may be overlapped. Further, although the third display and the mini item do not have an overlapping relationship, the ninth display may have an overlapping relationship.

Further, the "display mode changes" includes enlarged display, color change (red timer becomes gold timer, rainbow timer, etc.) and the like. Further, the change in the display mode may be performed even in a state where only one third display is performed.

Further, when two or three third displays are displayed at the same time, the display mode may be changed more easily than when only one is displayed.

Further, the display mode of the third display may be changed more easily when the display mode of the sixth display is changed to a certain display mode.

Further, after the start of the countdown in the timer notice display as a certain notice display, at least one of the various changes in the display may not be performed.

Further, in the timer notice display as a certain notice display, the timer may be added or the countdown may be paused.

Further, the timer may be additionally displayed in the timer notice display while the third display is displayed. For example, a small display such as "+20" or "+5" may be overlapped with the third display. It may be displayed or displayed in the vicinity of the third display, and then, at the start of the countdown, for example, "60" may be displayed, then "85" may be displayed, and then the countdown may be started. ..

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 408 to 485 and described later, the tutorial display is enlarged, and after a certain display displayed in the tutorial display section of the enlarged mode is displayed, the display mode of the third display is displayed. Changes may be made. Further, the display mode of the third display may be changed more easily after the certain display is displayed than when the certain display is not displayed.

In addition, "when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display. [When two displays in preparation are displayed, they are the same. All are digested in the symbol variation display, for example, as shown in FIGS. 301 (b) to (k), the two preparing images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. May end the display of all the displays other than the third display in the one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may always end in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may not be completed.

In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be completed. Further, only when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. In the case of, the display of all the third displays may be completed in the one symbol variation display.

Further, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the tenth display [Explanatory display, for example," Panda is a master of the lord "displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 291 (a)." Displayed explanation display, etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display and is an explanatory display.
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area (sometimes referred to as "a certain display area") in the display means when displayed. [Explanatory display is a display when displayed. Is displayed in a specific display area, for example, the explanatory display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 as shown in FIG. 291 (a)],.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [The preparing display is displayed in a specific display area where the explanatory display is displayed, for example, FIG. 291 (d). ), The image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 where the explanation display is displayed],
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. Further, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. May be good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Further, the "display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to be started" means "character display in preparation [for example," in preparation "in the preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d)". Character display, etc.] "
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the eleventh display [ball removal display, for example, ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 322 (a1)].
The eleventh display is a display for urging the game ball to be ejected [for example, in the ball removal error display ERR1, the character display of "please remove the ball" is used to encourage the ball to be removed, etc.],
In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display [Preparation]. In the state where both the middle display and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the preparation display overlaps with the ball removal display, for example, as shown in FIG. 322 (a2), the preparation image RDY Is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the eleventh display may be a display prompting only to eject the game ball, or may be a display prompting other than discharging the game ball. In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts the ejection of the game ball, or may be a display that does not prompt the ejection of the game ball.

Further, the eleventh display may be a display urging only the game ball to be discharged, or a display urging the discharge of something other than the game ball.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping only with the eleventh display. In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed in addition to the eleventh display. It may be configured to be. Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be always overlapped with the eleventh display. Or, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the third display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In a state other than the state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, all the displays of the third display are configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. You may.

Further, "In a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. [In a state where both the mini game or timer notice and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the mini game or timer notice overlaps with the ball removal display, for example, shown in FIG. 322 (b1). As such, the remaining time display meter MT4 overlaps with the ball removal error display ERR1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped with only the eleventh display. It may be configured, and in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display overlaps with a display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be always overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In a state other than the state in which both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, all the displays of the certain notice display are configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. You may.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [ball game machine, for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a slot machine [rotary machine].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The hold icon may be used to indicate that the start of a certain effect on the slot machine is being held, but according to this game console, this can be realized.

In addition, in the above description,
A game console equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [preparing display, for example, the preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d)].
The third display is a certain notice display [mini game or timer notice, for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to (p), and FIGS. 293 (b3) to (b4). It is a display indicating that the display of [Timer notice effect, etc. shown in] is waiting to be started.
It is configured so that the third display may be started in the first state [the display of the preparing display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, for example, FIG. 291 (d)). As shown in, the display of the preparing image RDY is started while the UI part UI3 for displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed],
The display of the third display, which is started in the first state, may end in the second state. [The display in preparation, which is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, is on hold. The display ends when the icon is hidden. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (d) to 291 (n), the preparing image RDY whose display is started while the UI unit UI3 is displayed is displayed. , UI part UI3 is hidden and the display is finished, etc.],
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [Preparing in the state where the hold icon is hidden]. After the display of the display is finished, the mini game or the timer notice is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (n) to (o), the UI is after the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished. The display of the mini game is started with the part UI3 hidden, or after the display of the preparing image RDY is completed as shown in FIGS. 293 (b1) to (b4). , UI part UI3 is hidden and the timer notice effect is started, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the notice, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q), the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (c4), etc.] Is started [When the display result of the mini game becomes a great success or the countdown is completed by the timer notice, the notice is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to (q), the mini game When the display result becomes a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 294 (c1) to (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed, the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL is displayed. To be started, etc.],
The above-mentioned certain effect is a notice regarding the display of the symbol variation during execution.
The second state may occur after the first state [the state in which the hold icon can be displayed may shift to the state in which the hold icon is not displayed, for example, FIGS. 291 (l) to FIG. As shown in (m), when shifting to the swordsman reach, the displayed UI part UI3 is hidden, and the hold icon shifts from the displayable state to the hidden state, etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed [for example, the state in which the UI part UI3 before the transition to the swordsman reach is displayed].
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI part UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach].
The third display may not be displayed before the display of a certain notice display is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

There was room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game console, it becomes easier to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance rather than the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and the fluctuation is concentrated. It may be entertaining.

In addition, according to this game table, for beginners, the preparatory notice can be used to excite and entertain whether it is the notice or pre-reading notice, and for some experienced people, the preparatory notice is the notice. It may be easier to understand if it is a display about, and it may be possible to clarify the point of expectation.

Further, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is given depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, in the first state, only the third display may be started, or in the first state, a display other than the third display may be started. Further, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

In addition, the third display that started the display in the first state may end the display only in the second state, or the third display that started the display in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. Further, the third display whose display is started in the first state may always end the display in the second state, and the third display whose display is started in the first state is the second display. The display may not end in the state of.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of the display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be always started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In the second state, the display of a certain notice display may not be started after the end of.

Further, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In addition to after the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started even in a state other than the second state.

Further, after a certain notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also started. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may always be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain notice display is displayed.

In addition, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect may be a notice that is always related to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to the symbol variation display that is being executed.

Further, the second state may be reached only after the first state, or the second state may be reached even after a state other than the first state. Further, the second state may always be reached after the first state, or the second state may not be reached after the first state.

Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. .. Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

Further, the second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. Further, the second state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.

Further, the third display may be a character display being prepared, a character display, a notice item display, or a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be a running display.

Further, a certain notice display may be a display during execution of a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

Further, only the third display may not be displayed before the display of a certain notice display is started, or other than the third display may be displayed before the display of a certain notice display is started. The display may not be displayed either. Further, the third display does not necessarily have to be displayed before the display of a certain notice display is started, and the third display is displayed before the display of a certain notice display is started. There may be cases.

In addition, the third display may not be displayed only before the display of a certain notice display is started, and the third display may not be displayed before the display of a certain notice display is started. May not be displayed.

In addition, "The third state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed.
The fourth state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed.
The third state is different from the first state.
The fourth state is different from the second state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

In addition, "the third display, which started in the first state, may end in the first state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

In addition, "the third display, which started in the first state, may end in the third state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

In addition, "the third display, which started in the first state, may end in the fourth state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

Further, the first state may be a state including the execution of the symbol variation display (decorative symbol, special symbol).

In addition, "It is configured so that a certain effect may be started after the certain notice display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

It should be noted that the certain notice display is not limited to the true notice display, and may be a fake notice display in which a certain effect is not started.

Further, when a certain notice display is a mini game, a certain effect may be a display showing the result of the mini game.

Further, the character is not limited to a person, and may be a display of a mini item such as a notice item.

In addition, "it is configured so that the second state may occur after the first state" means "the second state may occur following the first state". It may be "structured like this".

In addition, there may be a case where the first state is followed by a second state without going through another state (for example, a fourth state). In addition, there may be a case where the first state is followed by another state (for example, a third state or a third state) and then the second state is entered. In addition, there may be a case where the first state is changed to the second state in the state where one symbol variation display is made.

Further, a certain effect may be faded in while a certain notice display is faded out.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display [display of an image including the hold icon display area, for example, UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
The sixth display is at least a display of an image displayed behind the hold icon.
The hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. [The hold icon can be displayed while the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. For example, the hold icon is UI part It is possible to display while UI3 is displayed],
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (m). UI part When UI3 is hidden, the hold icon is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make the hold icon stand out.

Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back surface of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be at least the display of an image that is always displayed on the back of the hold icon, or at least the display of an image that is not displayed on the back of the hold icon.

Further, it may be configured so that only the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. You may be. In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be always displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured in.

Further, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. You may be.

In addition, it may be configured so that only the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or display other than the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not always be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured in.

In addition, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

The sixth display may be a display that does not overlap with the changing decorative pattern.

Further, in a configuration in which a part of the sixth display overlaps with a part of the third display, the display of a part different from the part of the third display overlaps with the decorative design. You may.

In addition, the sixth display may include the display of the pedestal of the hold icon.

In addition, the sixth display may include the display of the pedestal of the variable icon.

Further, the sixth display may be different from the display of the background image.

In addition, "In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the third display. [Hold in the state where the hold icon is displayed. A part of the image including the icon display area is displayed overlapping with the preparing display. For example, as shown in FIG. 291 (d), the preparing image RDY is superimposed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3. Displayed, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [Display of the preparation display in the state where the hold icon is displayed. The position and the display position of the preparation display in the non-display state of the hold icon are the same, for example, the display position of the preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d) and the preparation image shown in FIG. 291 (m). The display position of RDY is the same, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it strongly impresses that the third display is not a look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, it may be possible to prevent oversight by noticing that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

Here, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped and displayed only with the third display in the first state, or the display in the first state may be overlapped. It may be configured so that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with a display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display in the first state, or the sixth display may be displayed in the first state. At least a part of the display may be configured so as to overlap the third display and not be displayed.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed, or in the first state, the sixth display may be overlapped. Display other than at least a part of the display of is also configured to be displayed overlapping with the third display.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [default display mode, for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
One of the plurality of types is the second aspect [display mode of notice or look-ahead notice, for example, gold display mode shown in FIG. 291 (e)].
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is more likely to start [The image including the hold icon display area is the default than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode. When the display mode of the look-ahead notice is changed to the display mode of the look-ahead notice, the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode is more likely to be displayed. If this is the case, the hold icon in the red display mode is likely to be displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first and second aspects, or may not be displayed in the first and second aspects. Good.

In addition, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be more likely to be initiated, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than if the sixth display did not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. When it changes to, it may be easier to start the display display other than the second display. In addition, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may always be started, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of change, the display of the second display may not start.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display may start from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, "when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Is configured so that the display of the second display is more likely to be started. ”“ In a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. It is configured so that the display of the second display is more likely to be started when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change. It may be that there is.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [default display mode, for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
One of the plurality of types is the second aspect [display mode of notice or look-ahead notice, for example, gold display mode shown in FIG. 291 (e)].
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display. [The image including the hold icon display area is the default than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode. It is more likely to be a big hit when the display mode is changed from the display mode of the look-ahead notice. For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (e) is displayed in the golden display mode, the hold icon is displayed. The display mode is liable to change, and therefore the jackpot symbol is liable to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first and second aspects, or may not be displayed in the first and second aspects. Good.

Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, only the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed in a definite manner, and the sixth display is from the first mode to the second mode as compared with the case where the sixth display does not change from the first mode to the second mode. When the mode is changed, it may be easier to confirm and display symbols other than the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, the jackpot symbol may always be definitely displayed, and the sixth display is from the first mode to the second mode as compared with the case where the sixth display does not change from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display is the first mode. The jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed from the second aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Is configured to facilitate the definite display of the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. ”“ In a certain state, the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when it does not change. It may be that there is.

In addition, "a certain reach effect [a specific super reach effect, for example, the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q)] can be executed.
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [the state before the specific super reach effect is started, for example, FIGS. 291 (m) to the same. The state before the start of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in Fig. (Q)].
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is executed, for example, a super reach (swordsman) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q). Reach) is being executed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not it is in a certain reach state.

Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured so that a certain reach effect is always executed, or it may be configured so that a certain reach effect may not be executed.

Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before the execution of the reach effect other than the certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states of. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

Further, the second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is executed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is executed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always executed, or a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.

The first state may be a reach state before developing into SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and the second state may be a state in which SP reach is being executed in the certain fluctuation.

Further, the first state is a state before developing into SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and is a certain state before reaching a reach state, and the second state is a state before reaching SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and the second state is SP in the certain fluctuation. It may be in the state where reach is being executed.

That is, there may be a case where the first state and the second state are one set.

Further, "The certain notice display is a timer notice display [for example, FIGS. 294 (b3) to FIG.
Display of timer notice effect shown in b5)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The timer notice display may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of timer notice displays, it may be a certain type of timer notice display.

Further, "The certain notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to (q)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of mini games, it may be a certain type of mini games.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6), etc.].
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. You may. Further, the fourth display may be configured to be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291 (q), etc.].
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. You may. Further, the fifth display may be configured to be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

The fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, and it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed than when the fifth display is displayed. When the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, in the case where the fifth display appears only under special conditions, the case where at least one of the third display mode and a certain notice display mode is displayed only in a certain mode. There may be.

In addition, "The third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next start symbol variation display is started [in a certain symbol variation display]. The in-preparation display in which the display has started is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (i) to 291 (j), the in-preparation image RDY Is displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to give a sense of expectation across a plurality of fluctuations by the third display, and since the goal is easy to understand, the period for giving a sense of expectation may be clarified.

Here, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display is started, or The third display, which is started to be displayed in the symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. Further, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed after the next start symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. The third display from which the display has been started may not be continuously displayed even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In the above description,
A game console equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
The one of the display of a plurality of types of display, the third display [Preparation displayed, for example, indicate to the preparing image RDY like in FIG. 291 (d)] a,
One of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display [display of an image including the hold icon display area, for example, UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
The third display is shown in the timer notice display [for example, FIGS. 293 (b3) to (b4), 294 (b3) to (b5), and 294 (c1) to (c3). It is a display indicating that the display of [Timer notice effect] is waiting to start.
The timer predictive display [for example, FIG. 293 (b3) ~ FIG timer informational display or the like shown in (b4)] via the display of the third display display is started,
The timer notice display is a display that counts the time until a certain effect is started.
After the symbol variation display is started [for example, after the decorative symbol variation display is started as shown in FIG. 291 (a)], the state before the super reach is started in the symbol variation display (hereinafter, """Firststate".) [For example, the state before the start of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q) (FIGS. 291 (a) to (l)). In the state, etc.], the third display may be started [for example, the display of the preparing image RDY is started as shown in FIG. 291 (d)],
The state in which the super reach is being executed (hereinafter, referred to as the "second state") [For example, the state in which the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q) is being executed, etc. ], The display of the third display may end [for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (n), the image RDY being prepared overlaps with the effect EF5, making it difficult to see].
When the count is completed in the timer predictive display [for example, FIG. 293 (b 4)], the certain effect [e.g., display of iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 29 3 (b5), FIG. 294 (b6) and FIG. (c4) button notice Starring unloading by Dekabotan 136aL shown] is started [e.g., FIG. 293 (b5), FIG. 294 (b6), FIG. 294 (c4)],
The certain effect is a notice [for example, the notice] regarding the symbol variation display.
In the first state, the hold icon may be displayed [for example, the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in FIGS. 291 (a) to 291 (l)].
In the second state, the hold icon may not be displayed [for example, the hold icon h11 is not displayed in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q)].
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed on the back of the hold icon.
The hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed [For example, in the UI unit UI3, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. (Fig. 291 (a) to Fig. 291 (l))],
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 291 (m) to 291 (q)].
In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the third display [for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (d), in preparation. The image RDY is superimposed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display displayed halfway in the second state are the same display position [for example, in FIG. 291 (d). The display position of the preparing image RDY shown and the display position of the preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 291 (m) are the same, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.
Further, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a character related to the first display [change effect display of display mode of hold icon (hold change advance effect display), for example, FIGS. 291 (f) to the same. Ninja character NJ4, etc. shown in Fig. (G)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is the second display [hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode, for example, the hold icon in the red display mode shown in FIG. 291 (h)].
The first display is a display of characters related to the second display.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started. [The hold icon is the display mode of the look-ahead notice after the hold change pre-effect display by the character is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (f) to 291 (h), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the default after the hold change pre-effect display by the ninja character NJ4 is performed. The display mode has changed to red, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character related only to the second display, or may be a display of a character related to a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is always related to the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of a display mode of a hold icon, or an effect display in proofreading a character (navigation character) that is always displayed. ..

Further, the second display may be a display in which the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, "the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started", but "the second display is started after the display of the first display is started". The display of the display of the above is started. The display may be made. " Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. Further, the second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

In addition, "The first display that started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be deleted before the next start symbol variation display is started [Display starts in a certain symbol variation display. The character related to the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (hold change advance effect display) is deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, for example, FIGS. 291 (f) to 291 (h). ), The ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display that is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be erased only before the next start symbol variation display is started. The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be configured to be erased other than before the next start symbol variation display is started. Further, the first display which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be always erased before the next start symbol variation display is started, or a certain symbol variation may be made. The first display, which is started to be displayed in the display, may be configured so that it may not be erased before the next start of the symbol variation display is started.

It should be noted that a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variation display. Further, a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state).

Further, "In the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed. [The notice is executed in the area where the preparation display is displayed, for example, FIG. 297 (a4). ), In the tutorial display section TT1 where the image RDY being prepared is displayed, a notice display consisting of the characters "super heat" may be displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be executed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also executed. May be the case. Further, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. May be the case.

In addition, it is equipped with "operation means [buttons and levers, for example, effect buttons 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh display [display of an image of a button or lever, for example, a deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6)].
The seventh display is a display that prompts the operation of the operating means.
The seventh display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started. [The display of the image of the button or the lever is started after the preparation display is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b6), the deca button image 136aL is started to be displayed after the preparing image RDY is started to be displayed, etc.],
When the operating means is operated while the seventh display is being displayed, the certain effect is started [when the button (or lever) is operated while the display of the image of the button or lever is being displayed, the notice is given. When the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294 (b6) is being displayed, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends before the display of the seventh display starts [The in-preparation display ends before the image of the button or lever starts to be displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b6), the display of the preparing image RDY is terminated before the display of the deca button image 136aL is started],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operating means, or may also prompt other than the operation of the operating means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operating means, or may not prompt the operation of the operating means.

Further, the seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or may be started even after the third display is started. There may be. Further, the seventh display may always start after the third display is started, or may not start after the third display is started. May be good.

Further, a certain effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect is not started when the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated only while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated other than while the seventh display is displayed. It may be started. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while only the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed. May be started.

Further, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display ends other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be something to do. Further, the third display may be such that the display always ends before the display of the seventh display starts, or when the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be one.

The seventh display may be a deca button image of a normal button image and a deca button image. Here, when the normal button image is displayed and when the big button image is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed when the big button image is displayed.

Further, the seventh display may be a button image of a special color among the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the normal color button image is displayed and when the special color button image is displayed, even if the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the special color button image is displayed. Good.

Further, the seventh display may be an image of the normal button image and an image of another operating means among the images of the operating means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the button. Here, when the normal button image is displayed and when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the jackpot symbol is displayed when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed. It may be easy to confirm and display.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b5)].
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b6), a button notice effect is produced by a combined animation. Foretelling the start of, that is, foretelling the display of the big button image 136aL, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the eighth display may be a notice only that the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice other than the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

Further, the third display may be terminated only during the display of the eighth display, or may be terminated during the display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 301 (a)].
The ninth display is a display of a variable icon.
The third display may be displayed twice. [Two preparation displays may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 304 (a), two preparation images RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. May be done, etc.],
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes [After the display of one of the two preparing displays is completed, the other is being prepared. The display mode of the display changes, for example, the image RDY being prepared is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 301 (g)],.
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [The preparing display whose display mode has changed overlaps the variable icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 301 (g), enlarged. The displayed preparing image RDY overlaps with the variable icon h0, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easier to notice that two third displays are displayed.

Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, or only one third display may be displayed. May be done.

Further, only the display mode of the other may change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the display of the other of the two third displays may be completed after the display of the other is completed. The display mode other than the display mode of is also changed. Further, the display mode of the other may always change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the display mode of the other may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. There may be cases where the display mode of is not changed.

Further, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or other than after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. The other display mode may change.

Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with a display other than the ninth display. Good. Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may always overlap with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. ..

Further, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and the display other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. ..

The ninth display may overlap with the third display whose display mode has changed.

Further, the third display may overlap with a display other than the ninth display, or may be overlapped. Further, although the third display and the mini item do not have an overlapping relationship, the ninth display may have an overlapping relationship.

Further, the "display mode changes" includes enlarged display, color change (red timer becomes gold timer, rainbow timer, etc.) and the like. Further, the change in the display mode may be performed even in a state where only one third display is performed.

Further, when two or three third displays are displayed at the same time, the display mode may be changed more easily than when only one is displayed.

Further, the display mode of the third display may be changed more easily when the display mode of the sixth display is changed to a certain display mode.

Further, after the start of the countdown in the timer notice display as a certain notice display, at least one of the various changes in the display may not be performed.

Further, in the timer notice display as a certain notice display, the timer may be added or the countdown may be paused.

Further, the timer may be additionally displayed in the timer notice display while the third display is displayed. For example, a small display such as "+20" or "+5" may be overlapped with the third display. It may be displayed or displayed in the vicinity of the third display, and then, at the start of the countdown, for example, "60" may be displayed, then "85" may be displayed, and then the countdown may be started. ..

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 408 to 485 and described later, the tutorial display is enlarged, and after a certain display displayed in the tutorial display section of the enlarged mode is displayed, the display mode of the third display is displayed. Changes may be made. Further, the display mode of the third display may be changed more easily after the certain display is displayed than when the certain display is not displayed.

In addition, "when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display. [When two displays in preparation are displayed, they are the same. All are digested in the symbol variation display, for example, as shown in FIGS. 301 (b) to (k), the two preparing images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. May end the display of all the displays other than the third display in the one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may always end in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may not be completed.

In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be completed. Further, only when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. In the case of, the display of all the third displays may be completed in the one symbol variation display.

Further, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the tenth display [Explanatory display, for example," Panda is a master of the lord "displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 291 (a)." Displayed explanation display, etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display and is an explanatory display.
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area (sometimes referred to as "a certain display area") in the display means when displayed. [Explanatory display is displayed. In some cases, it is displayed in a specific display area, for example, the explanatory display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 as shown in FIG. 291 (a)],.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [The preparing display is displayed in a specific display area where the explanatory display is displayed, for example, FIG. 291 (d). ), The image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 where the explanation display is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed as the tenth display [for example," Panda is a master of the lord "displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 291 (a)." Explanation display, etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display for the timer notice display [for example, a display for explaining the timer notice].
After the tenth display is displayed in the first display area of the display means [for example, FIG. 291 (a)], the third display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 291 (d)]. )],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. Further, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. May be good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Further, the "display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to be started" means "character display in preparation [for example," in preparation "in the preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 291 (d)". Character display, etc.] "
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the eleventh display [ball removal display, for example, ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 322 (a1)].
The eleventh display is a display for urging the game ball to be ejected [for example, in the ball removal error display ERR1, the character display of "please remove the ball" is used to encourage the ball to be removed, etc.],
In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display [Preparation]. In the state where both the middle display and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the preparation display overlaps with the ball removal display, for example, as shown in FIG. 322 (a2), the preparation image RDY Is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the eleventh display may be a display prompting only to eject the game ball, or may be a display prompting other than discharging the game ball. In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts the ejection of the game ball, or may be a display that does not prompt the ejection of the game ball.

Further, the eleventh display may be a display urging only the game ball to be discharged, or a display urging the discharge of something other than the game ball.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping only with the eleventh display. In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed in addition to the eleventh display. It may be configured to be. Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be always overlapped with the eleventh display. Or, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the third display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In a state other than the state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, all the displays of the third display are configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. You may.

Further, "In a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. [In a state where both the mini game or timer notice and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the mini game or timer notice overlaps with the ball removal display, for example, shown in FIG. 322 (b1). As such, the remaining time display meter MT4 overlaps with the ball removal error display ERR1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped with only the eleventh display. It may be configured, and in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display overlaps with a display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be always overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In a state other than the state in which both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, all the displays of the certain notice display are configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. You may.

Further, "The timer notice display may be started without going through the display of the third display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [ball game machine, for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a slot machine [rotary machine].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The hold icon may be used to indicate that the start of a certain effect on the slot machine is being held, but according to this game console, this can be realized.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 408 to 455. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far. That is, each of the effects shown in FIGS. 408 to 455 may be performed in combination with any of the effects shown and described in FIGS. 14 to 407. In other words, in the present embodiment, a mini item (sometimes also called a notice icon or a notice item), a timer notice, a mini game, and a chance-up timing meter are used as appropriate according to the progress of the game. It may be executed in combination. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 408 to 455 are used only for the description of the examples shown in FIGS. 408 to 455, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are shown in FIG. Priority is given to the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 408 to 455. Further, in FIGS. 408 to 455, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 provided with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 408 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 408, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a normal figure are shown. Hold lamp 216 is shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 408 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, the default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped), and from the top, the symbol changing notification area of the normal symbol and the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1. , It becomes the notification area during the symbol change of the special figure 2. While the symbol of the normal figure is stopped, the quadrangle figure is lit and displayed, but when the symbol of the normal figure is fluctuating, the quadrangle figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, the round figure is lit and displayed, but when the symbol of the special figure 1 is fluctuating, the round figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit and displayed, but when the symbol of the special figure 2 is fluctuating, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. As described above, the fourth symbol is not only different in the display position but also in the display mode (here, the shape), so that the player can distinguish it at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 408 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special drawing 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

The hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. .. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special drawing 1 in addition to the number of lighting of special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is the number of lighting of special drawing 2 holding lamp 220. In addition, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, the hold icon on the right side becomes the old hold icon, and in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons are displayed vertically. , The lower the hold icon, the older the hold icon.

In FIG. 408 (a), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 408 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 408 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is. The hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the hold icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display the line defining the area, but in FIG. 408 (a), the area is shown. Is shown by a dotted line for the sake of clarity. A line defining the area may be provided, or a line defining the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easy to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the hold icon display area of the other special figure is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 408 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. The area 282 is displayed at the right end. When the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed at the right end.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is a square unpatterned and white display mode, and not only the display position is different from that of the hold icon of the special figure 1, but also the display mode ( The shape) is also different here, so that the player can make a distinction at a glance. The default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → blinking start or turn off of the fourth symbol → movement animation start or erase of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

In FIG. 408 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and decoration are performed. The design has not changed yet.

In FIG. 408 (c), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern has not started.

In FIG. 408 (d), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 408 (e), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the fluctuation, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, but it is still displayed at this stage. The variable display of decorative icons has not started. When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be viewed as the change icon h0. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

Then, in FIG. 408 (f), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 408 (g), the operation promotion notification image 136P urging the effect button 136 to be pressed within the valid period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 408 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 408 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 408 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the reach state entry notice image 2071 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. .. In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the characters "It's a chance" are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

In FIG. 408 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and then the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 408 (l). Even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the reach state may be entered without fail.

As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the symbol variation display currently being performed.

In FIG. 408 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced to be displayed. , Has developed into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 408 (n) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The animation of the scene is displayed.

The reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to the notice of entering the reach state, but may be a notice of development to super reach.

FIG. 409 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 408 step by step.

In FIG. 409 (p) following from FIG. 408 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 409 (s). In FIG. 409 (s), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 409 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Instead of hiding, a different background image may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in FIG. (U), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be hidden or may be a background image different from the conventional one. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 409 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" for which the 15R probability variation jackpot is confirmed is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 409 (v) is lit. In FIG. 409 (v), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 409 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of "probability change big hit" is made together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit.

On the other hand, in the case of reaching the reach state with different decorative symbols (substantially 5R probability variation jackpot, 5R normal jackpot, 2R normal jackpot) in FIG. 408 (l), the figure in another case continued from FIG. 409 (t). In 409 (u'), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed, and in FIG. 409 (v') following FIG. 409 (u'), "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration" is displayed. The combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "6-Decoration 6" is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 409 (w') following FIG. 409 (v'), the characters "big hit" are displayed together with the background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit as the big hit game start effect.

FIG. 410 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in another case following FIG. 409 (q).

In FIG. 410 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 408 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 410 (b). In FIG. 410 (b), the hero's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 410 (c), as in FIG. 409 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 410 (d), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is started. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is restored, and the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 410 (e), the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 lights up, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period of the special figure 1, the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is executed in the variable icon display area 280. In the figure (f), the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is started, the erasing animation continues in the figure (g), and the variable icon h0 disappears completely in the figure (h). It should be noted that the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 may be executed before the final display of the special figure 1 is performed.

Next, the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 411 and 412. Here, FIG. 411 (a) is a diagram for explaining a display example of the notice icon, and FIG. 411 (b) is a diagram for explaining the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. (C) is a diagram for explaining an example of the digestion timing of the notice icon, and FIG. (D) is a diagram for explaining an example of the increase timing of the notice icon. Further, FIG. 412 (a) is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon before the change, and FIG. 4 (b) is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon after the change.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 411 (a), the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas, and from the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. The area YA4, the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and the notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of special figure 2 is further displayed). Is 8 in total), so it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area are different. The number of notice icons that can be displayed and the number of hold icons may be the same. Further, the number of areas constituting the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one, or may be set to any number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

In the notice icon display area 285, one notice icon may be displayed for one area. For example, as shown in FIG. 411 (a), the notice icon I6 of the hat composed of the pattern of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 has a thousand-car box. The notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box consisting of the symbols is displayed, the notice icon I10 of the fan consisting of the symbols of the fan is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is displayed. The notice icon I7 of the back sword consisting of the design of the back sword is displayed, and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon consisting of the design of the ribbon is displayed in the notice icon 5th display area YA5. It is blank. Which notice icon is displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285 is based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. 411 (b). It is determined. In the present embodiment, one notice icon is displayed per area, but two or more notice icons may be displayed per area.

As shown in FIG. 411 (a), each notice icon displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 411 (c), for example. It is controlled to be done. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400, and is appropriately read and executed according to the progress of the game. That is, when 8 seconds have passed from the start of the variation display (the variation) of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 411 (a), the ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, and then the digested ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed. Corresponding effects may be performed. After that, when the fluctuation ends,
When the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and the variable display of the decorative symbol (the symbol change corresponding to the hold 1) is started, the symbol change is started. After 12 seconds have passed, the shuriken notice icon I7 may be digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested shuriken notice icon I7 may be executed. After that, when the symbol change corresponding to the hold 1 is completed, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 (the hold icon h12 is moved to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 411 (a)) moves toward the change icon display area 280. When the decoration symbol variation display (symbol variation corresponding to hold 2) is started, the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested 4 seconds after the symbol variation is started, and then the hat notice icon I6 is digested. An effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. Further, when 10 seconds have passed from the start of SP reach, the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako may be digested, and then the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon I9 of the Senryobako may be executed. After that, when 2 seconds have passed since all the decorative symbols were temporarily stopped, the fan notice icon I10 may be digested, and then the effect corresponding to the digested fan notice icon I10 may be executed. .. In this way, it can be said that the digestion of the notice icon is to notify the player in advance that the notice or effect will be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 411 (a), each notice icon displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is, for example, the timing shown in FIG. 411 (d). Is controlled to be increased by. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400, and is appropriately read and executed according to the progress of the game. That is, when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the variation display (the variation) of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 411 (a), the palace effect appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the notice icon is increased. Will be done. In this lord's production, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I8 of the ribbon, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken are increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the change is completed and the symbol change corresponding to the hold 1 is started, a DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and a DJ effect of increasing the notice icon is executed. In this DJ effect, the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is increased to the notice icon display area 285 and displayed. After that, after the symbol change corresponding to the hold 1 is completed and the symbol change corresponding to the hold 2 is started, 4 seconds have passed from the start of the second pseudo-continuous production, the lord effect is executed, and the fan The notice icon I10 is increased to the notice icon display area 285 and displayed. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is a variation display mode of the decoration symbol in which the variation start and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times in one variation display of the special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the big hit symbol variation display may be larger than the number of notice icons that increase in the outlying symbol variation display. For example, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is out of order may be set to a maximum of 1, and the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be set to at least 2.

Next, the types of the notice icons displayed in the present embodiment and the corresponding effect contents will be described with reference to FIG. 412. The notice icons include those in which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear as shown in FIG. 412 (a) and those in which the content of the corresponding effect is clear as shown in FIG. 412 (b).

The notice icons (notice icons before change) whose corresponding effects are not clear include, for example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord and the notice icon I2 of the second lord, as shown in FIG. 412 (a). There are a third lord's notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The first lord's notice icon I1 is a notice icon showing the silhouette of the lord's face in white, and the reliability of the jackpot is weak. The second lord's notice icon I2 is a notice icon that shows the silhouette of the lord's face in green, and the reliability of the jackpot is medium. Further, the third lord's notice icon I3 is a notice icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is represented in red, and the reliability of the jackpot is high. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the jackpot is either weak to strong. When the notice icon I1 of the first lord, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord come to the predetermined change display timing (for example, the timing of the increase display of the notice icon), the figure. It changes to one of the changed notice icons shown in 412 (b). Further, the first button notice icon I4 changes to any of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 412 (b) at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player. The first button notice icon I4 may be changed to any of the notice icons before the change at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player.

In this way, the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, the third lord's notice icon I3, and the first button notice icon I4 are started to be read ahead. It may be displayed before the icon, and it may function as a look-ahead notice. Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the character notation may be displayed accompanying the notice icon I1, the first lord's notice icon I1, the first. When the notice icon I2 of the second lord and the notice icon I3 of the third lord are displayed, a "question mark" may be added and displayed.

On the other hand, the notice icons (notice icons after change) whose corresponding effects are clear include, for example, the notice icon I6 for the hat, the notice icon I7 for the back sword, and the ribbon, as shown in FIG. 412 (b). There are a notice icon I8, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, a notice icon I10 for a fan, and a second button notice icon I11.

The hat notice icon I6 is a notice icon that imitates the hat worn by the character of the bancho, and the reliability of the jackpot is about strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous production may be performed only once. Here, there are a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a ghost pattern in the pseudo-continuous production. In the strong pattern pseudo-continuous production, for example, as will be described later, the character of the bancho appears when the pseudo-continuous production starts, but the display mode of the character of the bancho is different from usual (for example, the bancho becomes an aura). (The display mode is wrapped) to notify that the reliability is high. In addition, for example, although it is the second pseudo-continuous production, it may be notified that it is the third pseudo-continuous production to indicate that the reliability is high. In addition, the pseudo-continuous effect of the weak pattern notifies that the reliability is low by displaying the character of the appearing Bancho in the normal display mode. Further, as will be described later, the pseudo-continuous production of the Gase pattern is an production in which the pseudo-continuous production is pretended to be performed and the display is off. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I6 of the hat, if the reliability is high, "continue" is displayed in red or black as the A pattern. May occur. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed as "continuation" in black letters with "continuation" or "question mark". Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. When the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous production may be performed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon that imitates the shuriken thrown by the character of Oniwaban (ninja), and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I7 of one shuriken is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is high, the notice effect being executed may be switched to the highly reliable strong notice effect after the freeze effect. There is (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the jackpot is weak, a stop symbol notice may be given to notify in advance a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, if the reliability is high, "freeze" may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is weak, it may be displayed as "Chan-me" as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. When the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted, either the freeze notice or the stop symbol notice may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The ribbon notice icon I8 is a notice icon that imitates the ribbon worn by the character of Princess Chibi, and the reliability of the jackpot is high or low. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is high, the effect of shifting to a special stage such as the look-ahead mode or the fluctuation notice mode may be executed (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, an effect of changing the displayed background from a plurality of types of backgrounds used in a normal gaming state may be executed (stage change weak). Direction). Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I8 on the ribbon, if the reliability is high, "Stechen" is displayed as the A pattern in red or black characters. May occur. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is weak, "Stechen" may be displayed in black as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. When the notice icon I8 on the ribbon is exhausted, either the stage change strong effect or the stage change weak effect may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The Senryobako notice icon I9 is a notice icon that imitates the Senryobako thrown by the character of the lord toward the peasant, and the reliability of the jackpot is confirmed as a jackpot, strong or weak. When the notice icon I9 of one Senryobako is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is high, the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is digested during the execution of the weak reach effect with low reliability, and the reach transition effect is performed. Later, a production that shifts (promotes) to a highly reliable strong reach production is performed (reach transition production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, the Senryobako notice icon I9 is digested after the execution of the low reliability weak cut-in notice, and then the highly reliable strong cut-in notice is executed (notice promotion). Direction). If the jackpot is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the advance notice promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako, if the big hit is confirmed, "Large board behavior" may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is high, "promotion" may be displayed in red or black characters as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is weak, "promotion" may be displayed in black characters as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. When the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is exhausted, one of the final effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance promotion effect may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon that imitates the fan worn by the princess character, and the reliability of the big hit is confirmed. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is digested, a premier notice that notifies in advance that the big hit is confirmed appears, or a premier reach that the big hit is confirmed is executed (premier production). Alternatively, the fan notice icon I10 is digested after the reach out-of-reach is displayed, and a big hit revival effect is executed (revival effect). Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I10 of the fan, it may be displayed as "blessing". When the notice icon I10 of the fan is exhausted, either the premier effect or the revival effect may be executed without fail. Further, in the present embodiment, the content to be produced differs depending on the timing at which the fan notice icon I10 is digested, but the digestion timing may be the same.

The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon that imitates the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is either the weakest to the big hit confirmation. When one second button notice icon I11 is digested, a button effect is performed to urge the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the operation reception period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation reception period, the digestion display of the second button notice icon I11 is displayed as the hat notice icon I6, the back sword notice icon I7, and the ribbon. The notice icon I8 of the above, the notice icon I8 of the Senryo box, and the notice icon I10 of the fan may be changed to the digestion display, and the corresponding effect may be executed. Alternatively, it may be erased and displayed without changing to any of the notice icons.

In the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned notice icon before the change changes to the notice icon after the change, the change display of the notice icon is performed, but the notice icon before the change is displayed via the change display of the notice icon. It is also possible to display the notice icon to be erased (notice icon "none" shown in item 5 of FIG. 412 (b): erasure effect). In this production, it is notified that the fluctuation will be out of order. That is, it is a false notice indicating that it is an out-of-order confirmation pattern. Naturally, the reliability is the weakest. Even if the erasing effect is executed, it may be a big hit.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 413 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 413, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a normal figure display device 210, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, and a normal figure display device 210 The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the fourth symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 408, and for example, the display result of the fourth symbol is displayed depending on the light emitting mode of the LED. It is possible to do. The fourth symbol display device 284a may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284a is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 200, for example, and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a includes a symbol changing notification area of a normal diagram, a symbol changing notification region of special figure 1, and so on.
It becomes the notification area during the symbol change of the special figure 2. When the symbol of the normal figure is stopped, the LED in the area where the square figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but when the symbol of the normal figure is changing, the LED is blinking or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, the LED in the area where the round figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but when the symbol of the special figure 1 is changing, the LED is blinking or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but when the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the LED is blinking or turned off. As described above, the fourth symbol is not only different in the display position but also in the display mode (here, the shape), so that the player can distinguish it at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be lit and displayed while the symbol is changing, and may be turned off while the symbol is stopped.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 413 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the upper part. In FIG. 413 (1), the notice icon is not displayed in any of the notice icon display areas 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 413 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the variation display of the decorative symbol accordingly. At the same time, in the fourth symbol display device 284a, the variation display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is performed. The notice icon display area 285 may be displayed at all times, or may or may not be displayed as needed.

Further, in FIG. 413 (1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the two special figure 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Both the hold icons h11 and h12 and the variable icons h0 of the two special figures 1 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). Although the display of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is omitted in this effect example, the second hold icon display area 282 may be displayed.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 413 (2), the number of lights on the first special figure hold lamp 218 increases by one to three, and is held. It is shown that the number is now three. Further, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold that is the target of pre-reading, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display the notice icon, as will be described later. For convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 which is the target of pre-reading is shown by hatching, but in reality, it is the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figures 1. It is a display mode (a round, non-patterned and white display mode). The same applies to the following description.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 413 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in FIG. 413 (4), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and the decorative symbol have not yet changed.

In FIG. 413 (5), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The variable icon h0 is changed, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the second hold icon h12 of 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 413 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. This is an effect executed when it is decided to display the notice icon based on the pre-read result. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I6 of the hat.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 413 (7), the character YM of the lord moves and displays the character YM to the predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 413 (8), the notice icon I6 of the hat in possession is displayed as a notice icon. An effect display of throwing toward the area 285 is performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 413 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then, as shown in FIG. 413 (10). In the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect display is performed in which the character YM of the lord succeeds in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, the player expects that the effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future. That is, it can be said that by displaying the notice icon I6 of the hat in the notice icon display area 285, it is foretold that the pseudo continuous effect will be executed in the future.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 413 (11) to 413 (12), the character YM of the lord is displayed to be framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 413 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 414 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 413 step by step.

In FIG. 414 (14) following from FIG. 413 (13), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and the decorative symbol are not changed. It hasn't happened yet.

In FIG. 414 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 414 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. This is also an effect executed when it is decided to display the notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako, and the notice icon I10 of the fan.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 414 (17), the character YM of the lord moves and displays the movement to the predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display is performed in which the icon I9 and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 414 (19), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is the notice icon third display area. It is displayed on YA3, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed on the notice icon fourth display area YA4. After that, the same effect display as in FIGS. 413 (10) to (12) is performed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 414 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in FIG. 414 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and the decorative symbol have not yet changed.

In FIG. 414 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 414 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is displayed to move from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the notice icon digestion effect for digesting the notice icon is performed in this way. As shown in FIG. 414 (23), when two or more same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, such as two hat notice icons I6 being displayed, for example, on the left side. Although it is set in advance to give priority to the displayed notice icon for digestion, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which notice icon to use may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the right side may be set to be preferentially digested. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested is limited to those described above and can be appropriately set.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 414 (24), and then enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 414 (25). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character display of "continue" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is additionally displayed. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. May be good. Further, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, for example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the look-ahead notice. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the character display of "continue" at the timing of FIG. The left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown to be in a non-reach state.

FIG. 415 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 414 step by step.

In FIG. 415 (28) following from FIG. 414 (27), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is stopped and displayed on the right. An effect display that pushes up the symbol is performed to notify the player that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect will be started. In the present embodiment, after the character BC of the Bancho pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again. For example, the right symbol is the same decorative symbol as the left symbol (for example, " It may become decoration 1 ”) to form a reach state, and the reach effect may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 415 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol and the right symbol are continuously stopped and displayed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a pseudo-continuous symbol representing the character of the lord is displayed. There is a display that moves at a low speed from the top to the bottom.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 415 (30), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display of is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. If the pseudo-ream symbol is not stopped and displayed and the frame is out downward, the pseudo-ream is not started and the combination of the decorative symbols that is out of alignment is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed even when the notice icon I6 of the hat is not digested.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 415 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo × 2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous effect has started is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 415 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. .. At this time, the reach production has not started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 415 (34), the display that the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is displayed to move from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 415 (35), and then enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 415 (36). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character display of "continue" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is additionally displayed.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased with the character display of "continue" at the timing of FIG. 415 (37), and then, in FIG. In response to the digestion of the notice icon I6, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect display is performed to push up the right symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the second pseudo-continuous production is performed. Notifies the player that may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 415 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character BC of the Bancho pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is changed from "decoration 1" to "decoration 1". It has been changed to "decoration 2" to form a non-reach state, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a display is performed in which the pseudo-continuous symbol moves at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. At this time, the character information of "pseudo x 2" is deleted while the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed, the character information of "pseudo x 2" may be displayed in another area. Further, the display mode of the character information of "pseudo x 2" may be changed while the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed. In this effect example, after the character BC of the Bancho pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again to maintain the reach state, and the reach effect may be started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 415 (40), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display of is performed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. In the present embodiment, the more the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested in one symbol variation display, the more likely it is to become a big hit. That is, there is a case where only one notice icon I6 of the hat is digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed only once, and a case where two notice icons I6 of the hat are digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice. It is easier to get a big hit if two notice icons I6 are digested, and there are cases where only two notice icons I6 of the hat are digested and the pseudo-continuous production is performed only twice, and three notice icons I6 of the hat are digested. In the case where the pseudo-continuous production is performed three times, it can be said that it is easier to win a big hit if three notice icons I6 of the hat are digested.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 415 (42), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo × 3” indicating that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous effect has started is displayed.

FIG. 416 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 415 step by step.

In FIG. 416 (43) following from FIG. 415 (42), the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. Here, the reach production will be started.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 416 (44), it develops into the above-mentioned super reach (swordsman reach). The variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and reduced. Is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 416 (44) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 416 (45) follows the duel between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. The animation display of the scene starts.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 416 (46), the display in which the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is displayed to move from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. The text display of "promotion" is added to announce that the production will shift to a more reliable production. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. May be good.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing of FIG. 416 (48), the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is erased together with the character display of "promotion", and then the figure is shown. At the timing of 416 (49), the above-mentioned reach transition effect is started. When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 416 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect display that has been executed becomes slightly darker, and the character of the lord appears in the cut-in display. The display for cutting off the reach effect display during execution is performed, and then the background is darkened as shown in FIG. 416 (50).

After that, as shown in FIG. 416 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a highly reliable strong reach effect (button reach effect). When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 416 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "Is it too hot?" On the darkened background, and then FIG. 416 (52). The character "No" is displayed at the timing shown in. After that, as shown in FIG. 416 (53), the character display of "blow" is performed to notify that the button effect is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 416 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter to notify the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received, and informs the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 416 (55), as shown in FIG. 416 (56), the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the button image 136a. It is shown that the button reach production failed.

Eventually, in FIG. 416 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1".

FIG. 417 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 416 step by step.

In FIG. 417 (58) following from FIG. 416 (57), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 417 (59), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1" (temporary symbol stop display) is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

After that, for example, when 2 seconds have passed from the provisional symbol stop display, the display that the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon 4th display area YA4 is digested is started at the timing shown in FIG. 417 (60). .. That is, the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon 4th display area YA4 is displayed to move from the notice icon 4th display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I10 of the fan moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 417 (61). At this time, for example, a character display of "blessing" may be added below the enlarged notice icon I10 of the fan to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. When the character display is added, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I10 of the fan is enlarged or displayed before the enlarged display. , May be done after enlarged display.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the fan notice icon I10 at the timing of FIG. 417 (62), and the notice icon display area 285 is framed out upward. Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 417 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbol that had fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. .. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely out of frame. The notice icon display area 285 may continue to be displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 417 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed in a reduced size. To.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 417 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 417 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols for which the jackpot is confirmed in "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, the "special figure A" which is a 15R probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display device 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 is displayed. Is lit. After that, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above-mentioned jackpot game start effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, the fan's notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, so that the re-variation effect is executed and a big hit is obtained. However, the fan's notice icon I10 is the notice icon display area. If it is not displayed on the 285, the display result of the deviation may be derived without performing the re-variation effect. That is, when the reach transition effect executed by digesting the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is performed and is out of order, this reach shift effect can be said to be a fake notice effect. That is, when one notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is digested and a reach transition effect as a kind of fake notice corresponding to the digested Senryobako notice icon I9 is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is performed. Can be said to be out of the question. This also applies to the notice effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, the notice effect corresponding to the shuriken notice icon I7, and the notice effect corresponding to the ribbon notice icon I8.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the advance notice effect can be executed according to the number of the advance notice icons displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.

In the present embodiment, the notice icon is digested only during the execution of the symbol variation display, which is the target of the look-ahead notice, and the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is executed, but the look-ahead notice is the target. Even in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be digested and the effect corresponding to the notice icon may be executed. In this case, the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display subject to the look-ahead notice and the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display subject to the look-ahead notice are different. It may be the same or the same.

Next, another effect example of the above-mentioned increase effect of the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 418 to 420. Here, FIGS. 418 to 420 are diagrams showing stepwise examples of other effects of increasing the notice icon. In FIGS. 418 to 420, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

FIGS. 418 (8a) to 418 (10a) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 413 (8) to (10). That is, in FIG. 418 (8a), instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 418 (9a-1), the thrown notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 418 (9a-2), after the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed to explode, the timing shown in FIG. 418 (10a) is displayed. Then, the notice icon I1 of the first lord who exploded changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the character YM of the lord succeeds in increasing the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Even with this production example, the player expects that the production corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future.

FIGS. 418 (8b) to 418 (9b) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 413 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 418 (8b), an effect display is performed in which the first button notice icon I4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I6.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 418 (9b), the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. When the effect button 136 is operated between the time when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and the time when the first button notice icon I4 is digested, the first lord It changes to one of the notice icon I1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord. As described above, in this effect example, it is difficult to recognize the reliability of the jackpot indicated by the notice icon until the effect button 136 is operated. Therefore, there is an incentive to operate the effect button 136 in order to know the reliability of the jackpot. May work and enhance the effect of production. The period from when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 until it is digested may be the valid period for the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be invalidated during the symbol stop display period, or the symbol may be invalidated. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid even during the stop display period. Further, if the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is digested, the notice icon that was planned to be displayed when the effect button 136 is operated during the digestion effect of the notice icon is displayed. The corresponding effect display may be performed, or when the button effect is performed when the first button notice icon I4 is exhausted and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136, The effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or the notice that was scheduled to be displayed when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated. An effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. Further, after the first button notice icon I4 is digested and the button effect is started, the notice icon that was planned to be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136. The effect display corresponding to may be performed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, the effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed after the button effect is started may be performed. Further, until the first button notice icon I4 is exhausted, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the first button notice icon may be configured so as not to change to another notice icon.

FIGS. 418 (8c) to 418 (9c) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 413 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 418 (8c), as in FIG. 413 (8), the effect display of throwing the notice icon I6 of the hat toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

However, in the case of FIG. 418 (9c), it is shown that the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is framed out from the left side of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the number of Gase, which fails to increase the number of notice icons. It should be noted that the notice icon other than the notice icon I6 of the hat may be used to increase the gap. For example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, the more difficult it is to perform the increase effect.

FIGS. 418 (7d) to 418 (9d) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 413 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 418 (7d), as in FIG. 413 (7), the character YM of the lord holding the notice icon I6 of the hat is moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position. After that, in FIG. 418 (8d), not only one notice icon I6 of the hat but also three notice icons I6 of the hat are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. It should be noted that the effect display may be one by one, not at the same time.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 418 (9d), the notice icons I6 of the three thrown hats are the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display. Each is displayed in the area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, the increase of the plurality of notice icons can be executed by one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of the notice icons at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of times the notice is executed may be improved, and the effect of the effect may be enhanced. For example, as shown in FIG. 418 (9d), the same notice icon (for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, so that the pseudo-ream Since it is guaranteed that the production will be executed three times, it may be announced that the jackpot will be confirmed. Further, the notice icon with high reliability is hard to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (hard to be stocked), and the notice icon with low reliability is easy to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (easy to be stocked). It may be vice versa.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 418 (9d'), part or all of the notice icon I6 of the three thrown hats did not reach the notice icon display area 285, and from the left side of the display area. It is also possible to execute a partial loss increase effect or a total loss increase effect that causes the frame to be out.

FIGS. 418 (7e) to 418 (9e) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 413 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 418 (7e), unlike the production example shown in FIG. 413 (7), the character YM of the lord who has the notice icon I6 of one hat, the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako, and the notice icon I10 of the fan. Is shown to be moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position. At this time, only one or two notice icons out of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, only the notice icon with the highest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or a randomly selected notice icon may be displayed. You may want to display only. After that, in FIG. 418 (8e), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. It should be noted that the effect display may be one by one, not at the same time. Further, as described above, the three notice icons do not have to be different from each other, and for example, the same notice icon may be included more than once.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 418 (9e), the three thrown notice icons are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3. Each is displayed. As described above, even in this effect example, the increase of a plurality of types of notice icons can be executed by one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of times the notice is executed can be increased, and the expectation for the execution of a plurality of types of notices can be increased, so that the effect of the effect can be further enhanced. In some cases.

Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 418 (9e'), part or all of the three thrown notice icons did not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative symbol display device 208 was displayed. It is also possible to execute a partial ghost increase effect or a total ghost increase effect that frame out from the left side of the area.

FIGS. 418 (12f-1) to 418 (12f-2) show other production examples of the production shown in FIG. 413 (12). That is, in FIG. 418 (12f-1), as in FIG. 413 (12), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Is being done. After that, as shown in FIG. 418 (12f-2), the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. To. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach effect, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the jackpot ends.

FIG. 419 (8 g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 413 (8). That is, in FIG. 419 (8 g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (display mode by the Sabohani character), the character YM of the lord displays the hat notice icon I6 as the notice icon display area 285. There is a production display that throws at. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the notice icon even during the execution of the look-ahead notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the pre-reading notice by the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

FIG. 419 (8h) shows another production example of the production shown in FIG. 413 (8). That is, in FIG. 419 (8h), the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect hold lamp 286 is placed at a predetermined position (for example, for example) of the game board 200. It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208) to display the number of holds. The effect hold lamp 286 includes, for example, a full-color LED, and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, in addition to lighting in the default light emitting mode (for example, lighting in white), light emission of a look-ahead notice is emitted. Drive control is possible depending on the mode (for example, lighting while switching 7 colors). In FIG. 419 (8h), for convenience of explanation, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 which is the object of pre-reading is hatched, but in reality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Like the hold lamp of No. 1, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 is also lit by the default light emission mode.

FIGS. 419 (8i) to (9i-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 413 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 419 (8i), as in FIG. 413 (8), the effect display of throwing the notice icon I6 of the hat toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

However, in the case of FIG. 419 (9i-1), it is shown that the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 419 (9i-2), the notice icon I6 of the hat acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to display the look-ahead notice. The effect display (holding change effect) that changes to is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the notice icon I6 of the hat may not be displayed as the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, but may appear as an opportunity to start the look-ahead notice by the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, the more difficult it is to execute the hold change effect.

As shown in FIG. 420 (9i-2'), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and holds the display using the effect hold lamp 286. In the case of displaying the number, after the notice icon I6 of the hat falls below the display area, the light emission mode of the hold lamp of the first special figure 1 may be changed to the light emission mode of the look-ahead notice.

FIGS. 419 (8j) to 419 (9j) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 413 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 413 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 419 (8j), it is different from FIG. 413 (8). , It is shown that the DJ character BY with the notice icon appears from the right side of the display area on the flying carpet instead of the character YM of the lord (DJ production). In the example shown in FIG. 419 (8j), the DJ character appears with the hat notice icon I6. After that, as shown in FIG. 419 (9j), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner and holds the notice icon I6 of the hat on the notice icon display area 285 of the notice icon first display area YA1. The production display to be placed in is performed. The number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, in the effect of increasing the notice icons by the DJ character BY once, a plurality of types of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of notice icon increase effects (for example, the first notice icon increase effect by the character YM of the lord and the second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY) may be prepared. Depending on the configuration, the effect may be diversified and the effect of the effect may be enhanced.

FIGS. 419 (8k) to 419 (9k) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 413 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 413 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 419 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further formed. Character BY appears on a flying carpet from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 419 (8k), the DJ character appears with the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 419 (9k), the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character is displayed. While flying toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged on a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if passing through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 419 (9k'), the DJ character passes through the back side of the notice icon by arranging it on the layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. It may be displayed as if it were. Further, as shown in FIG. 419 (9k ″), the DJ character BY is placed in the Senryobako box so as to overlap the hat notice icon I6 thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display may be performed in which the notice icon I9 is placed in the notice icon first display area YA1. That is, the notice icon may be overwritten. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect.

FIG. 419 (12l) shows another production example of the production shown in FIG. 413 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 419 (12l), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is accompanied by the corresponding character notation. For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is additionally displayed with the characters "continue", and the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. The word "promotion" is additionally displayed on the, and the word "blessing" is additionally displayed on the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon 3rd display area YA3, and the notice icon 4th display. The notice icon I7 of the back sword displayed in the area YA4 is additionally displayed with the characters "Chan eyes", and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the fifth display area YA5 of the notice icon is "Stechen". Characters are additionally displayed, and the characters of "question mark" are additionally displayed together with "continuation" on the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon 6th display area YA6. As a result, the content of the advance notice effect whose execution is announced after that may become easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 419 (12l') and FIG. 419 (12l'), some or all of the characters added to the notice icon are set as “question marks” to clarify the corresponding notice effect. It may not be displayed in. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is executed, and the interest may be improved.

Further, it may be announced that the effect display in which the big hit is confirmed is executed depending on the combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and the number of the displayed notice icons. For example, FIG. 419 may be used. As shown in (12l ″ ″), when three notice icon I6s of the hat with the character notation of “continue” are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the jackpot is confirmed four times. It is also possible to give notice that the production display including the continuous production will be performed. If the characters added to the notice icon do not correspond to the notice icon (for example, if the word "promotion" is added to the hat notice icon I6), the hat notice icon I6 It may be a premier notice display that announces that the result of the symbol variation display when is digested is a big hit confirmed (or that there is a big hit in the hold).

In the above-mentioned production example, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of the character YM of the lord and the character BY of the DJ, but in the production example shown in FIG. 420, the notice icon is increased by displaying the decorative pattern. It is something to do.

In FIG. 420 (A1), the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a reach effect is started. This reach effect is, for example, a normal reach.

After the reach effect is started, the notice icon symbol imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 420 (A2). In the example shown in FIG. 420 (A2), the hat notice icon symbol imitating the hat notice icon I6 is stopped and displayed. The character notation of "stock" is added near the lower part of the notice icon symbol of this hat, and when the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the notice icon is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285. doing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 420 (A3), the notice icon symbol of the hat is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in (A4), the decorative symbol of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is off. In the present embodiment, the effect of increasing the notice icon may be performed in this way.

In FIG. 420 (B1), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 420 (A1), the decorative symbols of “Decoration 6” are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. , Normal reach production starts.

After the reach effect starts, at the timing shown in FIG. 420 (B2), the notice icon symbol of the first lord imitating the notice icon I1 of the first lord is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the production example shown in FIG. 420 (B2), the character notation of "stock" is added over the notice icon symbol of the first lord, and the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed to display the notice icon display area. It is informed that the notice icon is increased and displayed on 285.

After that, as shown in FIG. 420 (B3), the notice icon symbol of the first lord changes to the notice icon I1 of the first lord and moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is performed, and as shown in FIG. 420 (B4), the decorative symbol of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is out of alignment. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. Needless to say, the notice icon after the change is not limited to the hat notice icon I6, and may be another type of notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon changes is not limited to the period during which the symbol change display is being executed. For example, the notice icon may be changed during the execution of the symbol change display from the next time onward, or the notice may be changed. It may not change until the timing when the icon is digested. In the present embodiment, the effect of increasing the notice icon may be performed in this way.

Next, another effect example of the above-mentioned notice icon digestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 421 to 424. Here, FIGS. 421 to 424 are diagrams showing stepwise examples of other effects of the notice icon digestion effect. In addition, in FIGS. 421 to 424, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

421 (38 m) to FIG. 421 (40 m-3) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 415 (38) to (40). FIGS. 421 (38 m) to 421 (39 m) have the same effects as those of FIGS. 415 (38) to 415 (39), but in FIG. 421 (40 m-1), the medium symbol display area 208b is displayed at a low speed. Pseudo-continuous symbols appear in a variable display, but after that, as shown in FIG. 421 (40 m-2), the variable display becomes high speed and the pseudo-continuous symbols become high speed just before the pseudo-continuous symbols reach the stop display position of the decorative symbol. Is scrolled out to the lower part of the display area, and as shown in FIG. 421 (40 m-3), a temporary stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 2", and then the shaking fluctuation is displayed. , The stop display is displayed and it is notified that the result is out of order. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous production may not be performed.

421 (23n) to FIG. 421 (24n) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 414 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 421 (23n), the display that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is started, but as shown in FIG. 421 (24n), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is enlarged and displayed. It may be displayed that the display is erased as it is, and it may be notified that the digested effect is not performed.

421 (23o) to (24o-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 414 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 421 (23o), the display that the hat notice icon I6 is digested is started, and the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 421 (24o-1), but the hat is displayed as it is. The notice icon I6 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 421 (24o-2), the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of alignment without starting the pseudo-continuous production (in FIG. 421 (24o-2), "decoration 1-decoration 2" -The combination of the decorative symbols in "Decoration 2") is displayed as a temporary stop to display the shaking fluctuation, and then the stop is displayed to notify that the result is the result of the disconnection. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous production may not be performed.

421 (22p) to FIG. 421 (23p) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 414 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 421 (22p), for example, when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, in FIG. 421 (23p), the leftmost side (notice icon) of the notice icon display area 285 is formed. Instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the first display area YA1), other notice icons may be digested. In the effect example shown in FIG. 421 (23p), the effect that the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the notice icons may not be digested in order from the left. Further, in the present embodiment, the notice icons are digested in the order displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the stock order), but the notice icons stocked later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, if the notice icon stocked later is digested first, it may be easy to be a big hit, or conversely, it may be difficult to be a big hit. Further, the digestion order of the notice icons may be determined regardless of the stock order. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected, or the reliability of the jackpot changes depending on the digestion order of the notice icons. You may try to do it. Further, by digesting a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a specific order, it may be possible to give a notice that the big hit will be confirmed. A rule may be set such that the jackpot is confirmed when the notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, the back sword notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, and the back sword notice icon I7 are digested in this order. This may give the player an incentive to find the law of the digestion order of the notice icons that will be a big hit, and may improve the motivation to play.

421 (24q-1) to 421 (24q-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIG. 414 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 421 (24q-1), the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested and becomes the notice icon first display area YA1. After the vacancy occurs, as shown in FIG. 421 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon 2nd display area YA2 to the notice icon 4th display area YA4 are moved to the left. You may do it. At this time, for example, a movement animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left side may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing of changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. However, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started, or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is finished.

FIGS. 422 (Aa) to 422 (Ae) show an example of an effect when an increase effect of the advance notice icon is performed after the digestion effect of the advance notice icon is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 422 (Aa), after the notice icon I7 of the shuriken displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the stop symbol notice is executed, and the figure is shown. At the timing shown in 422 (Ab), the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and it is notified that the display result is out of alignment. After that, as shown in FIG. 422 (Ac), after the hold is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 422 (Ad), the increase effect of the notice icon by the character YM of the lord is performed. When the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 422 (Ae), the notice icon I7 of the back sword is exhausted and the notice icon No. 3 becomes blank. The notice icon I9 of the Senryobako thrown into the display area YA3 is displayed. In this way, the notice icon that increases as the notice icon is digested may be displayed in the blank notice icon display area.

FIG. 422 (B) shows an example of an effect in which the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of blanks are generated in the notice icon display area due to the plurality of notice icons being digested. That is, as shown in FIG. 422 (B), in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested, the character YM of the lord When the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3, which are blank, are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left side. In this way, the notice icon may be displayed to be increased. When there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas for displaying the increasing notice icons is not limited to the above, and may be any other order. It may be set in advance in 400. In addition, in this production example, the reliability of the jackpot and the number of the notice icons displayed are not changed depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed, but the jackpot is hit depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed. It may be suggested that the reliability and the number of notice icons displayed are different. For example, if an increasing notice icon is displayed in the rightmost notice icon 6th display area YA6 among the blank display areas in the notice icon display area 285, at least 6 notice icons are the notice icons. It may be suggested that it is displayed in the display area 285, or it may be suggested that the jackpot has the highest reliability.

FIG. 422 (C) shows an example of an effect in which the digestion effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon are executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 422 (C), while the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is being digested, the lord The notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by the character YM. Here, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is an increased notice icon in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display is executed. In this way, the digestion effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon may be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. At this time, the period in which the notice icon digestion effect is performed and the period in which the notice icon increase effect is performed may overlap. Further, the increase effect of the notice icon may be started after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started, the digestion effect of the notice icon may be started after the increase effect of the notice icon is started, or the notice icon may be started. The digestion effect and the increase effect of the notice icon may be started at the same time. Here, the area where the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area that is blank at the start of the symbol variation display, or after the symbol variation display is started, the increase effect of the notice icon is displayed. It may be an area that will be blank before it is started.

FIG. 422 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 417 (59). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 422 (59r), before the digestion effect of the notice icon is started, the effect of inciting whether or not the notice icon is digested is performed. Specifically, for example, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether or not the notice icon that is the target of digestion starts to shake and fluctuate to be digested. I'm trying to fan it. After that, as shown in FIG. 417 (60), the fan notice icon I10 may be digested, or the fan notice icon I10 may not be digested. If it is not digested, the notice icon may be deleted without being digested, or the notice icon may be displayed and the digestion of the notice icon may be suspended. In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 422 (59r), when the notice icon I10 of the fan is erased without being digested, after that, it is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of the way, and the display result of the out of place. You may notify that.

FIGS. 422 (59s) to (60s) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 417 (59) to (60). That is, in FIG. 422 (59s), the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Of these notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, after the shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of the decoration symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1", the notice icon of the fan When I10 is digested, it becomes a notice that it will be a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 422 (60s), when other notice icons (for example, hat notice icon I6) are digested, it is removed as it is. It is also possible to notify that the combination of the decorative symbols of the above is stopped and displayed and the icon is out of alignment.

422 (23t) to 422 (32t) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 414 (23) to 415 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 422 (23t), in this production example, in the notice icon display area 285, a digestion notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the digested notice icon is added. As shown in FIGS. 422 (23t) to (25t), when the digestion effect of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the digested hat notice icon I6 Is displayed in the digestion notice icon display area YA0. As shown in FIGS. 422 (28t) to (32t), the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the digestion notice icon display area YA0 is continuously displayed even after being digested, and the corresponding effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is displayed. ) Is displayed continuously until the end. The timing at which the notice icon display in the digestion notice icon display area YA0 starts may be after the notice icon digestion effect starts or before the notice icon digestion effect starts. Alternatively, it may be performed at the same time as the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is deleted may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is completed or before the digestion effect of the notice icon is completed. It may be at the same time as the end of the digestion effect of the notice icon, it may be after the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon has started, or after the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon has ended. It may be at the same time as the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, it may be before the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, or it may be the digested notice icon. It may be deleted at the same time as the end of the corresponding effect, or it may be deleted at the end of the symbol change in which the notice icon is deleted (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special figure), or the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion. Is deleted at the timing when is deleted (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the digestion notice icon display area YA0 are erased at FIG. 416 (44), or only the digestion notice icon display area YA0 is erased). You may. When a plurality of notice icons are digested during one symbol variation display, the notice icon a in the digestion notice icon display area YA0 corresponding to the first digested notice icon A is the digestion of the notice icon A. It may be in a state where no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion, which is deleted after or at the end of the effect, or the digestion effect of the notice icon B to be digested next is started. It may be erased at the same time as or after it has been started, or it may be erased at the same time as or after the notice icon b displayed in the digestion notice icon display area corresponding to the next digested notice icon B is displayed. Alternatively, during the digestion effect of the notice icon B, for example, the notice icon a may be left as a history, or at the end of the symbol change in which the notice icon A and the notice icon B are digested (for example, special). It may be erased at the symbol stop timing in the figure). If the notice icon display area 285 is deleted when a specific effect display (for example, during super reach effect, big hit effect, island simultaneous effect, etc.) is performed, only the notice icon display area 285 is deleted and the notice is being digested. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be deleted and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the area 285 and the digestion notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted.

FIGS. 423 (Aa) to 423 (Ae) show an example of an effect in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are digested at the same time. That is, in FIG. 423 (Aa), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3. The notice icon I8 of the ribbon is displayed, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Then, among these notice icons, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the first display area YA1 of the notice icon and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the third display area YA3 of the notice icon are digested. The production starts. Here, the start timing of the digestion effect of each notice icon may be the same or different. In this case, the digestion order of the notice icons may be the order corresponding to the execution order of the effect.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed with additional characters as shown in FIG. 423 (Ab). .. Specifically, the character display of "continue" is added near the lower part of the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat, and the character display of "Stechen" is added near the lower part of the notice icon I8 of the enlarged ribbon. Is displayed.
After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the stage change effect is started in response to the digestion of the notice icon I8 on the ribbon. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 423 (Ac), the shoji is closed, and after the character CH of Princess Chibi appears on the front side thereof, the shoji is opened and the moon is opened as shown in FIG. 423 (Ad). The display of the background (moon background) showing how the universe is viewed from the surface is started. During the execution of the stage change effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Moves to and is displayed in reduced size.

After that, as shown in FIG. 423 (Ae), the decorative symbol that had been reduced and displayed was enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area, and then, in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the character BC of the bancho. Appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect display is performed to push up the stopped displayed right symbol, and then the player is notified that a pseudo continuous effect may be executed. ..

In this production example, a plurality of productions corresponding to the digested notice icons are started at different start timings, but they may be started at the same time.

423 (66u-1) to FIG. (66u-3) show other production examples of the production shown in FIG. 417 (66). That is, in FIG. 423 (66u-1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 is still displayed. And it is shown that there is an undigested notice icon. After that, as shown in FIG. 423 (66u-2), after the jackpot start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 423 (66u-3), even after the jackpot round game is started, the undigested A notice icon is displayed. In this production example, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area during the execution of the jackpot game, but it may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the undigested notice icon may be used, for example, in a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, an effect for notifying that a probability change big hit is confirmed), for example, FIG. 423 (66u). In the example shown in -3), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested during the execution of the big hit game, the notification that the probability change big hit is confirmed is given, and when the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested. May notify that the 15R jackpot is confirmed. In addition, when other notice icons are digested, for example, it may have a meaning suggesting that there is a possibility of promotion. In this way, even if the same notice icon is used, if it is digested during the execution of the jackpot game, an effect such as giving a different meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be different. That is, a notice icon peculiar to the jackpot may be prepared. Further, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be the same, or only some of the notice icons may be used in common. ..

FIGS. 423 (Ba) to FIG. 423 (Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 423 (Ba), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and then the hold is digested and the symbol changes. When the display is started, the stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 423 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the stage change effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 423 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variation display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted when the stage is changed. After the stage change is performed, the notice icon may be deleted without fail, only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or even if the notice icon is not deleted in some cases. Good.

FIGS. 423 (22v-1) to FIG. (23v) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 414 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 423 (22v-1).
When the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 423 (22v-2), the character YM2 of the lord holding the placard appears, and the type of the notice icon to be digested is notified in advance. After that, as shown in FIG. 423 (23v), the digestion effect of the notice icon in which the advance notice type notice icon (hat notice icon I6) is digested is started. Even when the advance notice of the type of the advance notice icon to be digested is performed, the notice icon may not be digested, and the notice icon of a type different from the advance notice icon is digested. May be done. When a notice icon of a type different from the notice icon notified in advance is digested, it may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

FIG. 423 (22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 414 (22). That is, as shown in FIG. 423 (22w), after the symbol variation display is started, the notice icon that may be digested is highlighted so that the player pays attention to the digestion of the notice icon. May be good.

In the above-described embodiment, for example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the character BC of the chief appears and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the other effects are not executed. The effect corresponding to is executed, and the other effects are not executed. For example, although the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the chief character BC does not appear and the princess character appears. When an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (so-called breaking of the law), the jackpot may be fixed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the notice icon to be digested is determined and is configured so that it cannot be selected by the player. However, for example, by operating the effect button 136 or the like, the notice icon to be digested can be displayed. It may be possible to select.

In addition, if a big hit occurs while the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is deleted when the big hit game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to a probabilistic state or a time saving state. It may be configured so that it is not. In addition, when a big hit is made while the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is temporarily hidden when the big hit game is started, and is returned and displayed after the probability change state or the time saving state is completed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, it may be configured so that it is not carried over even after the probabilistic state or the time saving state ends.

Next, an example of an effect that announces the content of the reach effect that will be transferred thereafter depending on the type of the advance notice icon to be digested will be described.

As shown in FIG. 424 (Aa), when "Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a and is in the reach state, the advance notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 424 (Ab-1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 424 (Ac-1), the enlarged character BC2 of the bancho is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the Bancho reach corresponding to the appearing character. Further, as shown in FIG. 424 (Ab-2), when the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 424 (Ac-2), the enlarged display of the character YM3 of the lord is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the lord reach corresponding to the appearing character. Further, as shown in FIG. 424 (Ab-3), when the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 424 (Ac-3), the enlarged princess character HM is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the princess reach corresponding to the appearing character. In this production example, it corresponds to the reliability of the jackpot that the notice icon means, and the reliability of the jackpot of these reach productions is configured in the order of princess reach> lord reach> bancho reach. There is. In addition, when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a character of the lord who is enlarged and displayed after the hat notice icon I6 is digested) (so-called law breakage occurs). May be configured so that the jackpot is fixed. Further, a plurality of notice icons may be combined and digested, and a plurality of characters may appear in response to the combined digestion to execute the combined notice. In addition, a unique effect for digesting a plurality of notice icons (a special effect for multiple digestion) may be executed, and it is a big hit if a plurality of notice icons are digested rather than one notice icon is digested. It may be configured to increase the reliability of.

Next, the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

As shown in FIG. 424 (Ba), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and after the symbol variation display is started, FIG. 424 At the timing shown in (Bb), the display that the second button notice icon I11 is digested is started. That is, the display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter as shown in FIG. 424 (Bc), and the effect button 136 is displayed. Notifies that the operation can be accepted and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136.

Next, another effect example of the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

As shown in FIG. 424 (Ca), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the button reach effect described above, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. After that, at the timing of FIG. 424 (Cb), the display that the second button notice icon I11 is digested is started. That is, the display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps with the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and is shown in FIG. 424 (Cc). As described above, the effect button 136 changes to the protruding button image 136b represented in the protruding mode. In other words, it is shown that the jackpot has been promoted to a button reach production with higher reliability.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 425 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 426 is a stepwise continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 425. 427 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 426 stepwise, and FIG. 428 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 427 stepwise. 429 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 428 step by step.

In addition, in FIGS. 425 (1) to 426 (14), the notice icon used in the increase effect of the notice icon was changed from the hat notice icon I6 to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Since it is the same as that of FIGS. 413 (1) to 414 (14) except for the points, the description thereof is omitted here. Also, regarding the effect performed between FIGS. 426 (14) and 426 (20), all the advance notice icons used in the increase effect of the notice icon have been changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. It is the same as FIG. 414 (15) to FIG.

In FIG. 426 (20), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of the detachment is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in FIG. 426 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and the decorative symbol have not yet changed.

In FIG. 426 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 426 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I1 of the first lord is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is displayed to move from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as shown in FIG. 426 (23), when the same notice icon is displayed more than once in the notice icon display area 285, for example, four notice icons I1 of the first lord are displayed, for example, Although it is preset to give priority to the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. In addition, which notice icon to use may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the far right may be set to be preferentially digested. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested is not limited to those described above, and can be appropriately set.

After that, when the notice icon I1 of the first lord moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (24) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown in 426 (25), below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is additionally displayed. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. May be good.

After that, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (26), the character display of "continue" attached to the hat notice icon I6 is erased, and the hat notice icon is deleted. After the I6 is reduced and displayed, the display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. In this way, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be redisplayed at the original position. When the digested notice icon is redisplayed in the original position, the digested notice icon may be displayed so as to be recognizable. For example, the display area in which the digested notice icon is displayed may be displayed. It may be displayed in gray out, or the character information of "done" may be added. Further, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

After that, as for the effect contents shown in FIGS. 426 (27) to 427 (33), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon. It is the same as in FIGS. 414 (27) to 415 (33) except that all the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are changed to the notice icons I1 of the first lord. The description of is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 427 (34), the display in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is displayed to move from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I1 of the first lord moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat at the timing shown in FIG. 427 (35) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown in 427 (36), below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is additionally displayed.

After that, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 427 (37), the character display of "continue" attached to the hat notice icon I6 is erased, and the hat notice icon is deleted. After the I6 is reduced and displayed, the display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285.

After that, in the effect contents shown in FIGS. 427 (38) to (45), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively, and the notice is given. Icon 3rd display area YA3 and notice icon The notice icon displayed in the 4th display area YA4 is changed to the notice icon I1 of the 1st lord, but FIGS. 415 (38) to 416 (Fig. 415 (38)). Since it is the same as 45), the description here will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 427 (46), the display in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is displayed to move from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I1 of the first lord moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako at the timing shown in FIG. 427 (47) and is enlarged and displayed. Above the displayed notice icon I9 of the Senryobako, a character display of "promotion" is additionally displayed to notify that the production will shift to a more reliable production. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. May be good.

After that, in the decorative design display device 208, the character display of "promotion" attached to the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is erased, and the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 427 (48). In addition, the original display position, that is, the notice icon display area 285
Notice icon A display for moving to the third display area YA3 is performed.

After that, at the timing of FIG. 428 (49), the above-mentioned reach transition effect is started. In this production example, when the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 428 (49), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the effect display as if a power failure has occurred, and then has a highly reliable strong reach. The production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach effect in this effect example is started, as shown in FIG. 427 (50-1), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "Is it a chance?" On the darkened background. , The character "No" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (50-2). After that, as shown in FIG. 428 (51), the character "Is it too hot?" Is displayed, and then the character "No" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (52). After that, as shown in FIG. 428 (53), the character display of "blow" is performed to notify that the button effect is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 428 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter to notify the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received, and informs the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (55), as shown in FIG. 428 (56), the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the button image 136a. It is shown that the button reach production failed.

Eventually, in FIG. 428 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1".

In FIG. 428 (58), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 428 (59), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1" (temporary symbol stop display) is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

After that, for example, when 2 seconds have passed from the provisional symbol stop display, at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (60), the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon 4th display area YA4 is displayed to be digested. To be started. That is, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon 4th display area YA4 is displayed to move from the notice icon 4th display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I1 of the first lord moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I10 of the fan at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (61) and is enlarged and displayed. At this time, for example, a character display of "blessing" may be added below the enlarged notice icon I10 of the fan to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. When the character display is added, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I10 of the fan is enlarged or displayed before the enlarged display. , May be done after enlarged display.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the notice icon I10 of the fan is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 429 (62), the original display position, that is, the notice icon fourth display area of the notice icon display area 285. The display to move to YA4 is performed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 429 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbol that had fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. .. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is still displayed.

In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 429 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed in a reduced size. To.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 429 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols for which the jackpot is confirmed in "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, the "special figure A" which is a 15R probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display device 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 is displayed. Is lit. After that, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above-mentioned jackpot game start effect is executed.

Next, another effect example of the above-mentioned increase effect of the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 430 to 432. Here, FIGS. 430 to 432 are diagrams showing stepwise examples of other effects of increasing the notice icon. In addition, in FIGS. 430 to 432, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

FIGS. 430 (8a) to (9a) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 425 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 430 (8a), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I3 of the third lord is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I1 of the first lord. The same can be done for the notice icon I2 of the second lord. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 429 (9a), the thrown third lord's notice icon I3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

FIGS. 430 (8b) to (9b) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 425 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 430 (8b), as in FIG. 425 (8), the effect display of throwing the notice icon I1 of the first lord toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

However, in the case of FIG. 430 (9b), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is framed out from the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the amount of waste using the notice icon of the lord.

FIGS. 430 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 425 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 430 (8c), not only one notice icon I1 of the first lord but also three notice icons I1 of the first lord are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. ing. It should be noted that the effect display may be one by one, not at the same time.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 430 (9c), the notice icons I1 of the three first lords thrown are the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon. It is displayed in the third display area YA3, respectively. As described above, in this effect example, the increase of the plurality of notice icons can be executed by one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of the notice icons at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of times the notice is executed may be improved, and the effect of the effect may be enhanced. Further, the notice icon with high reliability (for example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord) is difficult to be displayed (hard to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon with low reliability (for example, the notice icon I3 of the first lord) is hard to be displayed. The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (easily stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, or vice versa. In this production example, the same notice icon (notice icon I1 of the first lord) is increased by three, but a plurality of types of notice icons having different reliability may be increased at the same time, for example. , The notice icon I1 of the first lord and the notice icon I3 of the third lord may be increased at the same time.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 430 (9c'), a part or all of the notice icon I1 of the three thrown first lords did not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative symbol was displayed. It is also possible to execute a partial ghost increase effect or a total ghost increase effect that frame out from the left side of the display area of the display device 208.

FIG. 430 (8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 425 (8). That is, in FIG. 430 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (display mode by the Sabohani character), the lord's character YM gives the first lord's notice icon I1 a notice icon. An effect display that is thrown toward the display area 285 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the notice icon even during the execution of the look-ahead notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the pre-reading notice by the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

FIG. 430 (8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 425 (8). That is, in FIG. 430 (8f), the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold number is displayed by the effect hold lamp 286. In FIG. 430 (8f), for convenience of explanation, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 which is the object of pre-reading is hatched, but in reality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Like the hold lamp of No. 1, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 is also lit by the default light emission mode.

FIGS. 430 (8 g) to (9 g-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 425 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 430 (8 g), as in FIG. 425 (8), the effect display of throwing the notice icon I1 of the first lord toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

However, in the case of FIG. 430 (9g-1), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 430 (9g-2), the notice icon I1 of the first lord acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to give a look-ahead notice. An effect display (holding change effect) that changes to the display mode of is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the notice icon I1 of the first lord may not be displayed as a notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, but may appear as an opportunity to start the look-ahead notice by the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the notice icon I1 of the first lord. For example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, the more difficult the hold change effect is to be executed. Good.

430 (12h-1) to 430 (12h-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIG. 425 (12). That is, in FIG. 430 (12h-1), as in FIG. 425 (12), the decorative symbol is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Fluctuation display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 430 (12h-2), the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. To. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach effect, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the jackpot ends.

FIGS. 431 (8i) to (9i) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 425 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 425 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 431 (8i), it is different from FIG. 425 (8). It is shown that the DJ character BY with the notice icon appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 on the flying carpet instead of the character YM of the lord. In the example shown in FIG. 431 (8i), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. After that, as shown in FIG. 431 (9i), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner and holds the notice icon I1 of the first lord who holds the notice icon I1 of the notice icon display area 285. The effect display placed in the display area YA1 is performed. The number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, in the effect of increasing the notice icons by the DJ character BY once, a plurality of types of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of notice icon increase effects (for example, the first notice icon increase effect by the character YM of the lord and the second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY) may be prepared. Depending on the configuration, the effect may be diversified and the effect of the effect may be enhanced.

FIGS. 431 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 425 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 425 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 431 (8j), a DJ having a notice icon is further formed. Character BY appears on a flying carpet from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 431 (8j), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 431 (9j), the notice icon I1 of the first lord thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ While the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character BY is arranged on a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if passing through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 431 (9j'), by arranging the DJ character BY on the layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the back side of the notice icon is placed. It may be displayed as if it is passing.

431 (8k) to 431 (9k) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 425 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 425 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 431 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further formed. Character BY appears on a flying carpet from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 431 (8k),
The DJ character BY appears with the third lord's notice icon I3. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 431 (9k), the notice icon I1 of the first lord thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then the DJ While the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the notice icon I3 of the third lord in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I1 of. That is, the promotion may be performed by overwriting the notice icon with low reliability of the big hit with the notice icon with high reliability of the big hit. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. It should be noted that this promotion effect may be performed while the same symbol variation display is being executed, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the promotion effect may be executed every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed.

FIG. 431 (12l) shows another production example of the production shown in FIG. 425 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 431 (12l), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is accompanied by the character notation of "question mark". For example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area. The notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in YA3, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon 4th display area YA4, and the notice icon 5th display area YA5 of the third lord. The notice icon I3 is displayed, and the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon 6th display area YA6, and the character notation of "question mark" is added to each. According to this production example, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation to the notice icon after the change.

Further, as shown in FIG. 431 (12l'), the type of the notice icon after the change may be announced in character notation for some of the notice icons before the change. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the first display area YA1 of the notice icon, the notice icon I2 of the second lord displayed in the second display area YA2 of the notice icon, and the notice icon 4th. The notice icon I2 of the second lord displayed in the display area YA4 has the character notation of "question mark" added and cannot recognize the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon third display area. The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed on YA3 is annotated to change to the notice icon I7 of the back sword with the character notation of "Chan eyes" added, and is displayed in the notice icon 5th display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third lord is marked with the character "continue" to announce that it will change to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the notice icon 6th display area YA6 is displayed. It is foretold that the notice icon I1 of the lord of No. 1 will be changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat by adding the character notation of "question mark" together with "continuation". These character notations may be notified at once for all or part of the notice icons, or may be notified gradually over time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 431 (12l ″), all or part of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are changed to the changed notice icons, and the changed notice icons are displayed. The corresponding character notation may be added only for the thing.

432 (8m-1) to (9m) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 425 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 425 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 432 (8m-1), the notice icon is further held. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 on a flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 432 (8m-1), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 432 (8m-2), the notice icon I1 of the first lord thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 432 (9 m), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box that he has is thrown by the character YM of the lord, and the notice icon first display area. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed on YA1. According to this effect example, the notice icon before the change may be overwritten with the notice icon after the change. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. It should be noted that this overwriting effect may be performed while the same symbol variation display is being executed, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the overwrite effect may be executed every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed.

432 (8n-1) to 432 (9n) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 425 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 425 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 432 (8n-1), the notice icon is further provided. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 on a flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 432 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 432 (8n-2), the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then FIG. 432 ( As shown in 9n), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I1 of the first lord who has it is thrown by the character YM of the lord and the notice icon first display area. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the notice icon I1 of the first lord in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box displayed on YA1. In this way, the notice icon after the change may be overwritten with the notice icon before the change. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. It should be noted that this overwriting effect may be performed while the same symbol variation display is being executed, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the overwrite effect may be executed every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed. Further, when the notice icon before the change after overwriting (for example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord) is digested, the notice icon after the change becomes the notice icon before overwriting (for example, the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako). May be another notice icon. At this time, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher when the notice icon after overwriting is digested than when the notice icon before overwriting is digested, or the reliability of the jackpot may be lower. It may be configured so that the reliability of the jackpot does not change.

Next, an example of the effect in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. 433. Here, FIG. 433 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect in which the notice icon changes. In FIG. 433, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 433 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, indicating that the start of the two symbol fluctuations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be read ahead, and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The aspects are the same. Further, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 433 (A), the character YM2 of the lord holding the placard appears during the variable display of the decorative pattern. This placard is marked with the words "It will change", foretelling that the display mode of either the notice icon or the hold icon will change.

After that, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, it is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 433 (B1). The notice icon I3 of the third lord changes to the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako. The display mode of the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may be changed, or both notice icons may be changed. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 433 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold displayed in the default display mode is the display mode of the look-ahead notice. Changes to. The display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may be changed, the display mode of any of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may be changed, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed. May change. As described above, in this production example, as a result of performing a certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the above-mentioned effect, the notice icon is held without being changed. It can be said that the icon may change. It should be noted that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

Further, as shown in 39 (C), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, but it is reduced and displayed in the lower right. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, indicating that the start of the two symbol fluctuations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be read ahead, and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The aspects are the same. Further, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 433 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to produce a chance for Princess Chibi. The Chibihime chance production is a production that may be started when the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation game is executed. The Chibihime chance production is a production that imitates the Amida lottery, and the character of the Chibihime selects one from the five start points, moves along the Amida route from the selected start point, and reaches the goal point It is a notice that the effect corresponding to the indicated icon will be executed. For example, when the character of Princess Chibi reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, it is announced that the blade member 2321 of the second special figure start port 232 will be opened for a long time, and it will be "super hot". When the goal point indicated by the character notation is reached, it is suggested that the result of the symbol variation display being executed is likely to be a big hit, and when the goal point indicated by the cross icon is reached. Foretells that the variable display result of the general map is out of order.

Further, in this production example, when the goal point indicated by the notice icon of the lord is reached, among the notice icons before the change displayed in the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 433 (D1). At least one of the changes to a notice icon after the change. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 433 (D1), the notice icon I3 of the third lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako. The display mode of the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may be changed, or both notice icons may be changed.

Further, when the Sabohani character reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 433 (D2), at least one of the hold icons in the default display mode in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 One changes to the display mode of the look-ahead notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 433 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the default display mode, is changed to the look-ahead notice display mode. The display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may be changed, the display mode of any of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may be changed, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed. May change.

As described above, in this production example, as a result of performing a certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the above-mentioned effect, the notice icon is held without being changed. It can be said that the icon may change. It should be noted that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

Next, a display example when the power is cut off or restored while the notice icon is being displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 434. Here, FIG. 434 is a diagram stepwise showing a display example when the power is cut off or restored while the notice icon is being displayed.

As shown in FIG. 434 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, indicating that the start of the two symbol fluctuations is held. ing. Of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is the default display. It is an aspect. Further, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, respectively, and the notice icon third display area YA3 has a thousand boxes. The notice icon I9 is displayed, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4.

FIG. 434 (B) shows a power failure for some reason, and FIG. 434 (C) shows a decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the power is instantly restored. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434 (C) has a character display of "Please wait for a while during restoration", which is a restoration display. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 resumes the variable display, and the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 has returned to the state before the power failure. After that, as shown in FIG. 434 (D), the symbol variation display is completed, and the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed as the display result of the detachment. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the symbol variation display is completed, the display is stopped at "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7" which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. Then, when the power is cut off or restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are deleted. Further, when the power is cut off or restored, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, also becomes the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when the power is cut off or restored, the look-ahead result information stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit or the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308 is "undetermined" information. It may be configured to be. Here, if there is at least one hold containing "undetermined" information in the subcommand including the look-ahead result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit, the "undetermined" information is included. The look-ahead notice including the digestion effect and the increase effect of the advance notice icon may not be performed until all the pending reservations are exhausted. In addition, the pre-reading notice is not given for the newly increased hold (hold where the look-ahead result is saved) after the power is cut off or restored, and the look-ahead notice is given after all the holds containing "undetermined" information are exhausted. However, for the newly increased hold after the power is cut off or restored, the look-ahead notice may be given before the hold containing the "undetermined" information is exhausted.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 435 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and stepwise shows another effect example of the increase effect of the notice icon and the digestion effect. 436 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 435 step by step. In addition, in FIGS. 435 to 436, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIG. 435, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held, but the display mode is as follows. For example, like the first hold icon h11, the display mode is the default.

FIG. 435 (1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 413 (5) described above. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed in large size in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c in the center of the display screen. It differs from FIG. 413 (5) in that a second decorative symbol display area is formed above the hold icon display area 281 and the three-digit second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size. The second decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area is configured such that after the change starts, the decorative symbols in any of the symbol rows continue to change until the determination is stopped.

At the timing shown in FIG. 435 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, unlike FIG. 413 (6), the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I21 of the "house" in which the characters "house" are surrounded by a circle.

After the character YM of the lord moves to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (3), the notice icon I21 of the possessed "house" is displayed as a notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (4). An effect display of throwing toward the area 285 is performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (5), the notice icon I21 of the thrown "house" is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then as shown in FIG. 435 (6). In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the character YM of the lord succeeds in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, it can be said that the notice icon I21 of the "house" is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, at least suggesting that the family crest effect described later may be executed in the future.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 435 (7) to (8), the character YM of the lord is displayed to be framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 435 (10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special diagram 1 are moved by the movement animation, respectively. The hold icon displayed and located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 to become the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is special drawing 1. It becomes the first hold icon h11 of. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 435 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. This is also an effect executed when it is decided to display the notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I22 of the "crest" in which the characters of the "crest" are surrounded by a circle.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (12), the character YM of the lord moves and displays the character YM to the predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display of throwing toward the icon display area 285 is performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (14), the notice icon I22 of the thrown “crest” is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. After that, the same effect display as in FIG. 435 (6) is performed, and then the same effect display as in FIGS. 435 (7) to (8) is performed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 435 (17), the hold icon h11 of the special diagram 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation on the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 435 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. ..

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I21 and the notice icon of the "house" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 at the timing shown in FIG. 436 (19) following FIG. 435 (18). The display that the notice icon I22 of the "crest" displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the notice icon I21 of the "house" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and The notice icon is displayed so as to move from the second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" have been digested. The timing at which the notice icon display area 285 is deleted may be deleted when the effect corresponding to the digestion of the notice icon is started, or the effect corresponding to the digestion of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued after that. Further, the timing of starting the movement of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 may be the same, or the start of the movement of the "house" notice icon I21 may be the "crest" notice icon I22. The movement start of the "crest" notice icon I22 may be earlier than the movement start of the "house" notice icon I21.

After that, when the notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. At the timing shown in 21), the family crest accessory 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect image to that effect. A fall effect is performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 436 (22), it develops into a super reach (swordsman reach). The contents of the swordsman reach are as described above in FIGS. 408 to 410, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

In the present embodiment, when two specific notice icons (for example, "house" notice icon I21 and "crest" notice icon I22) are digested, the corresponding notice effect (family crest drop effect) is performed. It is configured in. Even if these notice icons are digested, the family crest drop effect may not be performed, or other effects may be performed. In addition, when the family crest drop effect is performed, it may be guaranteed that the symbol variation display will be a big hit, or it may result in a loss. In addition, it may be configured so that the case where the family crest drop effect is performed is easier to hit than the case where the family crest drop effect is not performed. In addition, the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured so that the family crest drop effect is performed more frequently than the symbol variation display that is a loss. In addition, the two specific notice icons (for example, the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22) are more easily digested in the big hit symbol change display than in the lost symbol change display. It may be configured in.

437 and 438 are diagrams showing stepwise examples of other effects of the notice icon digestion effect. In addition, in FIGS. 437 to 438, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

In FIG. 437 (a1), unlike FIG. 435 (5), the “crest” notice icon I22 appears before the “house” notice icon I21 and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. , As shown in FIG. 437 (a2), the notice icon I21 of the “house” appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (a3), the "crest" notice icon I22 and the notice icon second display area YA2 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 are displayed. The display that the notice icon I21 of the "house" that had been used is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I21 of the "house" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and The notice icon is displayed so as to move from the second display area YA2 to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the reach state by the "decoration 1" is formed, and the reach effect is started.

After that, when the "crest" notice icon I22 and the "house" notice icon I21 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (a4-1). To. At this time, it is displayed in the correct order (that is, the order of "house" and "crest") instead of the order of "crest" and "house". Further, as shown in FIG. 437 (a4-2), the notice icon I22 of the "crest" and the notice icon I21 of the "house" may be enlarged and displayed in the order of the "crest" and "house". In this production example, regardless of whether it is shown in FIG. 437 (a4-1) or the case shown in FIG. (a4-2), the above-mentioned family crest drop effect is subsequently performed. For example, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "house" and "crest" (that is, the correct order), the family crest drop effect is performed and the order of "crest" and "house" (that is, that is). If the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the wrong order), the family crest drop effect may not be performed. In addition, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "Crest" and "House", it is more difficult to start the family crest drop effect than when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "Crest" and "Crest". It may be configured in.

FIGS. 437 (b1) to 437 (b6) show another form of the family crest drop effect.

First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 437 (b1), only the notice icon I21 of the “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the “crest” is displayed. It is shown that the notice icon I22 is digested without waiting for the notice icon I22 to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 437 (b2), when only the notice icon I21 of the “house” is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 437 (b3), it serves as a family crest. The object 224B descends slightly from above the decorative symbol display device 208 and moves up and down while overlapping the front side of a part of the notice icon display area 285 arranged at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It behaves as if it is vibrating in the direction (fanning motion). At this time, in the upper right portion of the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "preparing for the family crest" are displayed to indicate that the family crest drop effect may be performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 437 (b2), the notice icon I21 of "house" is enlarged and displayed, while the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, the production of the lord has started. At this time, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I22 of the "crest". Then, as shown in FIG. 437 (b4), when the character YM of the lord moves to a predetermined throwing position and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 Notice icon is displayed in the second display area YA2.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (b5), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. The notice icon I22 of the "crest" remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, at this time, the family crest accessory 224B is temporarily retracted to the initial position to make it easier to recognize that the symbol has been fixed and stopped, but the family crest accessory 224B is not retracted to the initial position and continues the fanning operation. May be good. On the other hand, the character display of "Preparing for family crest" is continuously displayed.

After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 437 (b6), the hold icon h11 of the special diagram 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation on the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the evacuated family crest accessory 224B descends again and resumes the fanning operation. In this production example, after that, for example, when the notice icon I22 of the "crest" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the family crest accessory 224B is lowered, and FIG. 436 is shown. The family crest fall effect shown in (21) is performed. In addition, there may be a case where the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is not digested and the family crest drop effect is not performed. Further, in FIG. 437 (b2), the notice icon I21 of the “house” may be displayed in an enlarged display until the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed later is digested. At that time, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" may be stocked, but it may be digested as it is without being stocked.

FIGS. 437 (c1) to 437 (c2-3) show other examples of the advance notice icon digestion effect. In this production example, it is shown that the background notice that the background changes is performed by digesting the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 437 (c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of the “Den” surrounded by the characters “Den” in a circle is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon I32 of the "princess" that encloses the letters "princess" in a circle is displayed in the second display area YA2 of the notice icon, and the notice icon I33 of the "grandfather" that encloses the letters "old man" in a circle gives a notice. The icon is displayed in the third display area YA3.

In FIG. 437 (c2-1), the background display after the three notice icons I31 of the “Den”, the notice icon I32 of the “princess”, and the notice icon I33 of the “old man” have been digested is shown. ing. As shown in FIG. 437 (c2-1), when these three notice icons are digested, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image in which the grandfather's face is uploaded from the left side of the display screen and the face of the lord. A background display is displayed in which the uploaded image and the image with the princess's face uploaded are divided into three equal parts. In the present embodiment, when all three notice icons of "Den" notice icon I31, "Princess" notice icon I32, and "Grandfather" notice icon I33 are digested, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display is high. Is configured to display a background display indicating that is the highest. Also, the three notice icons may be digested at the same time or one by one. Here, when the three notice icons are digested one by one, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the order of the notice icons to be digested. For example, the notice icon I31 of "Den"> "Princess" The reliability may be the highest when digested in the order of "notice icon I32"> "old man" notice icon I33, but the relationship between the digestion order and the reliability of the jackpot can be appropriately set. ..

Further, in FIG. 437 (c2-2), among the three notice icons of the "Den" notice icon I31, the "princess" notice icon I32, and the "old man" notice icon I33, the "princess" notice icon I32 and The state of the background display after only the notice icon I33 of the "old man" has been digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 437 (c2-2), when these two notice icons are digested, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image in which the princess's face is uploaded from the left side of the display screen and the grandfather's face. A background display in which the uploaded image is divided into two equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two of the three notice icons of the "Den" notice icon I31, the "princess" notice icon I32, and the "old man" notice icon I33 are digested, the symbol variation display is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot is relatively high, but the background display indicating that the reliability is lower than when the three notice icons are digested is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "old man" are digested among the three notice icons has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, "Den". The notice icon I31 of "Princess" and the notice icon I32 of "Princess" may be digested, or the notice icon I31 of "Den" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Den" and the notice icon I32 of "Princess" are digested, "Don" The notice icon I31 of the "old man" and the notice icon I33 of the "old man", the notice icon I32 of the "princess" and the notice icon I33 of the "old man" are more reliable than when the notice icon I33 of the "old man" is digested. And when the "old man" notice icon I33 is digested, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the "princess" notice icon I32 and the "old man" notice icon I33 are digested. These can be set as appropriate.

Further, in FIG. 437 (c2-3), of the three notice icons I31 of the "Den", the notice icon I32 of the "princess", and the notice icon I33 of the "old man", only the notice icon I33 of the "old man" The state of the background display after the icon is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 437 (c2-3), when this one notice icon is digested, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a background display in which the image with the grandfather's face up is displayed on the entire display screen. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, when one of the three notice icons of the "Den" notice icon I31, the "princess" notice icon I32, and the "old man" notice icon I33 is digested, the symbol variation display is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot in is configured to display a background display indicating that the reliability is lower than when the two notice icons are digested. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the notice icon I33 of "old man" is digested among the three notice icons has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the notice icon I31 of "Den" is digested. Alternatively, the "princess" notice icon I32 may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the notice icon to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Den" is digested, the notice icon I32 of "Princess" or the notice icon I32 of "Grandfather" The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the icon I33 is digested, and when the notice icon I32 of the "princess" is digested, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I33 of the "old man" is digested. However, these can be set as appropriate.

Further, in this production example, an example in which all three notice icons are displayed has been described, but only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the type of the displayed notice icon. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Den" is displayed, the notice icon I32 of "Princess" or "Grandfather" The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I33 of "Princess" is displayed, and when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" is displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Den" and the notice icon I32 of "Princess" are displayed, the notice icon I31 of "Den" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" are displayed. Or, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "old man" are displayed, and the notice icon I31 of "den" and the notice icon I33 of "old man" are displayed. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the notice icon I32 of the "princess" and the notice icon I33 of the "old man" are displayed, but these can be set as appropriate.

Further, in this production example, the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed, but the background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed. In some cases, the background display may not change, and in this case, as a so-called breaking of the law, it may be notified that the big hit is confirmed.

Further, when displaying three notice icons, three notice icons may be displayed in one symbol change display, or one notice icon may be displayed each time the symbol change display is performed. You may do it. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the display order.

Further, in this production example, when the notice icon I31 of "Den" is digested, the character of the lord appears and the reach of the lord is started, and when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" is digested, When the princess character appears and the princess reach is started, and the notice icon I33 of the "old man" is digested, the old man character may appear and the old man reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I33 of "old man" and the notice icon I32 of "princess" are digested, the character of the old man and the character of the princess appear and the old man & princess reach is started, and the notice icon of "Den" is started. When I31 and the notice icon I32 of "Princess" are digested, the character of the lord and the character of the princess appear and the lord & princess reach is started. When I33 is digested, the character of the lord and the character of the grandfather may appear and the lord & grandfather reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I31 of "Den", the notice icon I32 of "Princess", and the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" are digested, the character of the lord, the character of the princess, and the character of the grandfather appear. The princess & grandfather reach may be started. In this way, the reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested notice icon may be performed.

Further, what is displayed after these notice icons are digested is not limited to the above-mentioned notice of reach effect and background display, and for example, the effect mode in the jackpot game and the mode during the symbol change are changed. Other notices (for example, various notices such as characters that increase the notice icon) may be given. Further, the effect performed by digesting the notice icon is not limited to the effect display, and audio output (for example, music, etc.) corresponding to the digested notice icon may be performed, or the digested notice icon may be used. The effect may be performed by the corresponding light emission pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 438, there may be an example in which an effect is performed for each of the time when the notice icon I21 of the "house" is digested and the time when the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is digested. explain.

First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 438 (d1), the notice icon I21 of the “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of the “crest”. I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms a reach state by the "decoration 1", and the reach effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 438 (d2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, only the "house" notice icon I21 of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 is digested. It is shown that it is. Then, as shown in FIG. 438 (d3), the notice icon I21 of the “house” is enlarged and displayed as the middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, it is shown that the notice icon I21 of the "house" is digested and changed to a chance symbol which is a special symbol.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 438 (d4-1), an effect image is displayed in connection with the display of the chance symbol, or as shown in FIG. 438 (d4-2), the family crest is displayed together with the effect image. In some cases, a family crest drop effect is performed to drop the accessory 224B. After such an effect is performed, for example, there is a case where the swordsman reach described above is performed. In addition, it is possible to shift to the swordsman reach after performing the effect of dropping the family crest character 224B without displaying the effect image, or to the swordsman reach without dropping the effect image or the family crest character 224B. You may want to migrate. Further, as shown in FIG. 438 (d4-3), no effect was produced due to the digestion of the "house" notice icon I21.
The normal reach effect may be started.

In addition, when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be shifted to another super reach (family crest challenge reach). For example, as shown in FIG. 438 (d3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the stop display is performed by the combination of "decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1", at the timing shown in FIG. 438 (d4-4). In the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters of "family crest challenge" indicating that the family crest challenge reach has been started are displayed. The first decorative symbol is shaken and fluctuated while maintaining the combination of "decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1" at the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 438 (d5-4), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the character YM of the lord pulls the "crest" notice icon I22 with a rope, and the "crest" notice. It is suggested that the attraction of the icon I22 raises the expectation for the big hit.

As shown in FIG. 438 (d6-4), when the character YM of the lord succeeds in attracting the notice icon I22 of the "crest", the family crest accessory 224B falls as shown in FIG. 438 (d7-4). At the same time, a family crest drop effect is performed in which a predetermined effect image is displayed. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I22 of the "crest" has been successfully digested. After the family crest fall effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above will be performed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 438 (d6-4a), the rope pulled by the character YM of the lord may break and the "crest" notice icon I22 may fail to be attracted. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 438 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the process may shift to the above-mentioned swordsman reach. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be lower than that in the case where the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is successfully attracted. Further, as shown in FIG. 438 (d6-4b), when the rope pulled by the character YM of the lord is broken and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" fails to be drawn, it is shown in FIG. 438 (d7-4b). As shown, the result of the loss may be displayed as it is. The same may be applied when the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is digested first. Further, it may be configured so that the family crest drop effect is more likely to occur when the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is digested than when the notice icon I21 of the "house" is digested. The reverse may be true.

In addition to the above-mentioned "house" notice icon I21, "crest" notice icon I22, "den" notice icon I31, "princess" notice icon I32, and "old man" notice icon I33, these There may be a Gase notice icon that resembles an icon, for example, a "U" notice icon, a "shark" notice icon, an "old" notice icon, a "minister" notice icon, or an "auntie". You may prepare a notice icon or the like. For example, even if the notice icon of "house" and the notice icon of "shark" are digested, the family crest drop effect may not be performed, or the notice icon of "house" and the notice icon of "crest" are digested. The family crest drop effect may be performed less frequently when the "house" notice icon and the "shark" notice icon are digested than when the notice icon is displayed. In addition, the notice icon of Gase such as "shark" may be changed to the notice icon such as "crest".

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, one word is formed by the two characters "house" and "crest", and a predetermined production is performed by satisfying the requirements for forming the word. However, for example, a word composed of three or more letters may be applied to this production example. For example, a "suspicious" notice icon, a "similar" notice icon, and a "ream" notice icon may be applied. When the three icons of the icons are digested, the pseudo-continuous production may be performed.

Further, in this production example, for example, when it is desired to stock the notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest", when there is only one stock space in the notice icon display area 285. , The notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" may not be displayed. Further, only one of the notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" may be displayed. In this case, the notice icon of the person who could not be displayed may be displayed as the notice icon. When there is a vacancy in the area 285, the increase display may be performed, or when there is no vacancy in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon displayed in the first place may not be digested. Further, even if there is a vacancy in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon may not be stocked and may be digested as it is.

Further, when there is no space in the notice icon display area 285 and at least one of them is not displayed by the time the notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" are exhausted, for example, "house". When the notice icon I21 of the "house" is digested, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" may be digested together, or only the notice icon I21 of the "house" may be digested.

FIG. 439 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is an increase effect of a notice icon and a digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification step by step. In FIG. 439, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 439 (e1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold icon that is the target of the look-ahead notice, and its display mode is another hold icon (for example, the first hold icon). It is displayed larger than the hold icon h11), and is a display mode of the look-ahead notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner. The first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in a manner in which the decorative symbol is displayed in large size in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. Further, the second decorative symbol is displayed small at the left end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any of the display areas. In this production example, the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, shows how various parts are added. In FIG. 439 (e1), the hold icon display area 281 shows. The second hold icon h12, which is set, constitutes the first notice part P1. This first notice part P1 is an image imitating the body part of a snowman. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (e1), it is shown that the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed in from the left side of the display screen, and the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is the first. We are carrying the second notice part P2 to be given to the notice part P1. The second notice part P2 is an image imitating the head of a snowman.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (e2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the third notice part P3. This third notice part P3 is an image that imitates a bucket that covers the head of a snowman.

At the timing shown in FIG. 439 (e3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed out, and eyes and mouth are drawn on the second notice part P2. On the other hand, after the character YM of the lord moves to the predetermined throwing position and displays, at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (e4), the third notice part P3 possessed is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (e5), the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. That is, it can be said that the present embodiment has a function of stocking the notice parts constituting the hold icon in the notice icon display area 285. After that, the character YM of the lord is framed out as described above as shown in FIGS. 435 (6) to (8).

FIG. 439 (e6) shows how the display result of the loss is derived, one of the pending variation displays of the special figure 1 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 439 (e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. The chance roulette display area 287 notifies, for example, that the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode, or the hold icon display mode that is already the look-ahead notice display mode is more reliable. Notifies that the display mode is changed to a higher degree. In addition, a big hit notice display in the running symbol change display is also performed. Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that the notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (e7), the variable display of the symbol is started in the chance roulette display area 287.

After that, as shown in FIG. 439 (e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the third notice part P3 is digested. The third notice part P3 is moving toward the first hold icon, which is the display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, it is shown that the DJ character BY appears on a flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen. This DJ character BY possesses the fourth notice part P4. This fourth notice part P4 is an image imitating a muffler wrapped around the neck of a snowman.

After that, as shown in FIG. 439 (e9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the third notice part P3 imitates the head constituting the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the snowman. The DJ character BY is placed on the upper part of the notice part P2, and while flying toward the upper left corner of the display screen, the fourth notice part P4 in possession is displayed on the notice icon display area 285. 2 The effect display placed in the display area YA2 is performed. In the chance roulette display area 287, the variable display of the symbol is still performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (e10), a display result in which the characters “Get” are displayed together with the fifth notice part P5 is derived in the chance roulette display area 287. That is, it is notified that the fifth notice part P5 is displayed. The fifth notice part P5 is an image imitating a pair of twigs that function as both arms of a snowman.

Then, as shown in FIG. 439 (e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fifth notice part P5 is the first that imitates the body portion constituting the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. As shown in FIG. 439 (e11'), the first notice icon in the notice icon display area 285 on which the third notice icon P3 was once displayed without immediately mounting the fifth notice part P5. It may be displayed (stocked) once in the display area YA1. In this case, the notice icon may not be displayed in the first display area YA1 but may be displayed in another display area (for example, the notice icon third display area YA3 or the like).

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 439 (e12), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and is removed. The display result of is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". In this production example, the variable icon h0 is still displayed at this time, but it may be erased. The fourth notice part P4 remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 439 (e13), the hold icon h11 of the special diagram 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation on the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 439 (e14-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the fourth notice part P4 is digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the variable icon h0, which is a display mode of the snowman. After that, as shown in FIG. 439 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wrapped around the neck of the variable icon h0, which is the display mode of the snowman, and the variable icon h0 (or the hold icon), which is the display mode of the snowman. ) Is completed. As a result, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display is high. When the display mode of the completed snowman is a hold icon, it is displayed as a look-ahead notice, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot in the fluctuation is high.

Further, the fourth notice part P4 may be attached not only during the normal symbol variation display but also when, for example, a super reach effect is being performed. For example, FIG. 439 (e14-2). As shown in FIG. 439 (e15-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth notice part P4 is digested in the swordsman reach, and is attached to the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the snowman at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (e15-2). You may do so. Here, the variable icon h0 is displaced downward because the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are framed out downward due to the shift to the super reach.

In this production example, all the displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon that is the target of the look-ahead notice. For example, the displayed notice parts are digested, but the attachment to the hold icon fails. The display may be made. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be lowered. In addition, when the displayed notice part is digested, it is attached to a hold icon other than the hold icon that is the target of look-ahead, functions as a look-ahead notice of other hold, or is attached to a variable icon that is not the target of look-ahead. , It may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

FIG. 440 is a diagram showing a stepwise modification of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment, and is an increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment and It is a figure which shows the modification of the digestion effect stepwise, and FIG. 441 is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 440 to 441, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIG. 440, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold icon h12 is the target of the look-ahead notice. Similar to the second hold icon h11, the display mode is the default. Further, FIGS. 440 to 441 are different from the above-described embodiment in that the first decorative symbol display device 208A as the main display device and the second decorative symbol display device 208B as the sub display device are provided. .. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower end edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is the upper end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It overlaps part of the front side. The variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved.

As shown in FIG. 440 (1), the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B perform variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208A performs the second. The decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. As shown in FIG. 440 (1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

At the timing shown in FIG. 440 (2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lord effect is started. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I6 of the hat. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A according to the appearance of the character YM of the lord. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas: a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. The display area in which the notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be 3 or less, or 5 or more. Further, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second display area is displayed. When the notice icon is displayed in all four display areas displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, the display area is increased and the notice icon can be stocked. Often, for example, each time the display area being displayed is full with the notice icon, the display area may be increased by one, or when the four display areas are full with the notice icon. May display all the remaining four display areas that were hidden. Further, when the character YM of the lord appears, the display area may be increased by the number of the notice icons possessed by the character YM of the lord. Specifically, for example, when the number of display areas in the notice icon display area displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and these four display areas are filled with the notice icons. In the case where the character YM of the lord possesses one notice icon when the production of the lord is started, one display area is displayed when the character YM of the lord throws the notice icon. It may be increased by the amount, or all the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, when the character YM of the lord possesses three notice icons, the display area may be increased by three when the character YM of the lord throws the notice icon. , The remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B
Then, when four display areas less than eight are displayed and the notice icon is displayed in all four display areas displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the four display areas are displayed. The notice icon display area (first notice icon display area) consisting of four display areas in which the notice icon is displayed is reduced and displayed, and the notice icon display area consisting of four new display areas in which the notice icon is not yet displayed is displayed. (The second notice icon display area) may be newly displayed, and the notice icon newly stocked may be displayed in the second notice icon display area. Here, the timing for displaying the second notice icon display area may be the timing when the first notice icon display area is full, or the timing when the notice icon is newly stocked. Good. Further, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing a super reach effect, the notice icon display area 285 may be reduced and displayed, or the number of stocks of the notice icon may be displayed instead of the notice icon display area 285. , The notice icon display area 285A may be erased. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the pre-reading notice may be performed by switching from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A.

After the character YM of the lord moves to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 440 (3), the notice icon I6 of the hat in possession is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A at the timing shown in FIG. 440 (4). An effect display is performed to throw at. In this production example, the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed straddling the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. When displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285A, the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B may not be straddled. For example, the first decorative symbol display device may be displayed. The notice icon displayed on the 208A that has entered the predetermined warp entrance may be displayed in the notice icon display area 285A after appearing at a predetermined position on the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 440 (5), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, and then, as shown in FIG. 440 (6). In the first decorative pattern display device 208A, the effect display is performed in which the character YM of the lord succeeds in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, foretelling that there is a possibility that the pseudo-continuous production effect will be executed in the future. After that, the character YM of the lord is framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

FIG. 440 (7) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2" on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

After that, as a result of performing the symbol variation display based on the hold of the variation display of the first special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 440 (8), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, "decoration 7-decoration 6". -The combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the off display is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued as usual, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

After that, when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 440 (9), on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved by the movement animation. The hold icon displayed and located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 440 (10), the notice icon first of the notice icon display area 285A in the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The display that the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is displayed to move from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. When the notice icon is digested, the notice icon may be displayed so as not to straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Further, at this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 440 (11), the digested hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and then is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 440 (12). Will be done. The digested notice icon shown in FIG. 440 (11) indicates the timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display. It may be the timing when the device 208A is moved to the center, or the timing when the notice icon shown in FIG. 440 (12) is enlarged and displayed.

In FIG. 441 (13), which continues from FIG. 440 (12), the character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is additionally displayed below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat. The timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display may be the timing when the character display of "continue" is additionally displayed. It may be the timing after the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed, or the timing before the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing of FIG. 441 (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the character display of "continue", and the second decorative symbol display device 208B gives a notice. The display including the icon display area 285A is switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative symbol is displayed over two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative symbol is displayed on one display screen. After that, as shown in FIG. 441 (15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown to be in a non-reach state.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 441 (16), the enlarged character BC2 of the Bancho appears, is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and then is displayed in FIG. 441. As shown in (17), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character BC of the Bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display that pushes up the right symbol that is stopped and displayed is displayed. It is performed and informs the player that there is a possibility that the pseudo-continuous production will be started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the character BC of the Bancho is displayed straddling the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In the case shown in FIG. 441 (16), the character BC2 of the Bancho does not have to be displayed straddling the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, "displaying across" is displayed in cooperation with each other in the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It may be. Further, the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be used for integrated display. Further, the display moving from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 441 (18), the pseudo-continuous symbol is framed in from above the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the display is performed so as to move downward at a low speed. At this time, the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

Then, as shown in FIG. 441 (19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 441 (19). After that, for example, the pseudo-continuous production is performed in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 415 (31) and later.

442 and 443 are diagrams showing stepwise another variation example of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 444 is a diagram showing the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of the digestion effect step by step. In addition, in FIGS. 442 to 444, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIGS. 442 and 443, the hold icon, which is the target of the look-ahead notice in the hold icon display area 281, is hatched for the preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

In FIGS. 442 (a1) to 442 (a7-2), the configuration is the same as that shown in FIGS. 440 to 441, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The difference is that when the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered, it is configured so that it can overlap with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

As shown in FIG. 442 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the symbol is variablely displayed. The content displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is as described above as shown in FIG. 439, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 442 (a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 442 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 442 (a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B descends and overlaps substantially the center of the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208B switches from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays an effect image that surrounds the periphery of the second decorative symbol display device 208B to make the second decorative symbol display device 208B stand out. Since the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 442 (a3) is the same as that shown in FIG. 440 (2) and described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 442 (a4), after the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, FIG. 442 As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B rises and returns to the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 442 (a5-1), the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, and the stop display is stopped by the combination of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2" which is the result of the loss. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is not erased, but it may be erased at a timing before the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 ends. Further, in FIG. 442 (a5-1), the result of the loss is displayed only in the second decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but the first decorative symbol is displayed and the first decorative symbol is also displayed. The result of the loss may be displayed. In this production example, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), it may be possible to easily recognize that the notice icon is stocked by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Although the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during the symbol stop display, it may be configured to be operable even during the symbol stop display. Further, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without interruption regardless of whether the symbol stop display or the symbol variation display is in progress.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 442 (a5-2), the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised even after the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A. Instead, the overlapping state may be maintained on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is maintained in a lowered state until the symbol variation display in which all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A are exhausted is completed. 2 Whether to raise the decorative symbol display device 208B can be appropriately set. At the timing shown in FIG. 442 (a5-2), the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, and both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are lost as a result of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". Is displayed as a stop in combination. Here, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

FIG. 442 (a6-2) shows that after that, two holds are exhausted and the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is started. Specifically, the variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the variation of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display is being performed.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A is digested, the notice icon I6 of the hat expands as shown in FIG. 442 (a7-2). Then, it is displayed so as to extend from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Further, below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat, the character display of "continue" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It is displayed over. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so that the player can easily see it. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may then rise and return to the initial position, or may maintain the lowered state until the symbol variation is completed.

In FIGS. 442 (b1) to 442 (b4), the number of notice icon displays is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, a position near the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 208) instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. An example in which the device 288 is provided is shown. The notice icon display number display device 288 is composed of, for example, two 7-segments, and can display the number (stock number) on which the notice icon is displayed.

FIGS. 442 (b1) to (b3) have the same effect contents as those of FIGS. 414 (17) to (19), but the notice icon display number display device 288 applied in this effect example has the same effect. It is shown that the numerical value changes according to the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. That is, in FIG. 442 (b1), since only one notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, “01” indicating the number is displayed on the notice icon display number display device 288. There is. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 442 (b2), the character YM of the lord throws three notice icons (hat notice icon I6, Senryobako notice icon I9, fan notice icon I10). However, since it has not yet been displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the value shown in the notice icon display number display device 288 remains “01”. The value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the character YM of the lord throws these notice icons. Further, a number different from the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed (so-called ghost is displayed). Then, when the above-mentioned three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 442 (b3), the value is updated and "04" is displayed on the notice icon display number display device 288. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 442 (b4), when the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, it is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of the notice icons is reduced by one, the value is updated and "03" is displayed on the notice icon display number display device 288. The timing for reducing and displaying the value of the notice icon display number display device may be the timing before the notice icon is digested, may be at the same time as the notice icon is digested, or the notice icon may be displayed. It may be the timing after digestion. As shown by enclosing with a broken line, the value does not decrease even if the notice icon is digested, and the total number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (4 in this example) is counted and displayed. You may do so. In this production example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7 segments, but for example, an operation by a light emitting means such as an LED or a movable means such as a production movable body, for example, , A transparent plate member is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to emit light in a predetermined pattern, or a sound, a decorative symbol display device (a decorative symbol display device on which the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, and other decorative symbol display devices). The number of notice icons displayed may be notified by a decorative pattern display device or the like).

The production examples shown in FIGS. 443 (c1) to (c9) use two display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208C and second decorative symbol display device 208D) as in FIGS. 440 to 441. However, they differ in that they use the same size display device. In FIG. 443, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 443 (c1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held. The mode is, for example, the default display mode as in the first hold icon h11. The second decorative symbol display device 208D is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower end edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C are aligned with each other. They are arranged so as to substantially overlap. The variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special figure 1 second hold number display H1 and the special figure 2 second hold number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are held. "2" and "0" are displayed corresponding to the numbers, respectively. Further, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and is displayed in large size in FIG. 443 (c1). At the timing shown in, the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the lower right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the above-mentioned chance roulette display area 287 is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 443 (c1), the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed. It is shown. Further, the background display is also displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, the background is displayed on the entire two screens.

As shown in FIG. 443 (c1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, the second decorative symbol display device 208D sets the first decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 443 (c2). It descends to a position that covers the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C on which the background display was performed was switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285B, and was derived and displayed in the notice icon first display area Y1 of the notice icon display area 285B. The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed (stocked). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the first decorative symbol display device 208C is changed to the display mode when the notice icon is displayed. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, but the size of the symbol becomes smaller and is displayed only in the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

In FIG. 443 (c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively, and the shuriken notice icon I7 is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. .. Since the number of holdings is one at the timing shown in FIG. 443 (c3), "1" indicating that is displayed in the special figure 1 second holding number display H1.

FIG. 443 (c4) shows the state when the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is digested. That is, it is notified that the chance eye notice is performed by digesting the notice icon I7 of the shuriken. At this time, the effect display in which the notice icon is digested is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

After that, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 443 (c5), the second decorative symbol display device 208D stops at the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" which is the result of the loss. it's shown. However, the combination of the results of this loss is an opportunity, and it is informed that the symbol variation display, which is likely to be a big hit, is suspended. That is, the pre-reading notice is given by displaying this chance eye.

FIG. 443 (c6) shows a state when the notice icon I6 of the second hat is digested after the symbol change of the special figure 1 starts. That is, it is foretelling that the second pseudo-ream notice will be made. Since the notice icon I6 of the second hat is digested, no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285B.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 443 (c7), the notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 443 (c8), the decorative symbol is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and the background display is also the first decorative symbol display device 208C. And, it will be displayed on the entire two screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

After that, as shown in FIG. 443 (c9), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the second hat, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the stop display is displayed. An effect display is performed to push up the right symbol, and the player is notified that the second pseudo-continuous effect may be started. At this time, the character BC of the Bancho is displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 443 (c9), when the decorative symbol is displayed in a large size, for example, a large symbol in which a number symbol and a character image are integrated is displayed, and a notice icon display area 285B is displayed. When displaying a decorative symbol in a small size, a small symbol consisting of only a number symbol is displayed, and the large symbol and the small symbol are displayed in different display modes. It is also possible to make the display mode the same by changing only the size.

In this production example, when displaying the notice icon display area 285B, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. , Both the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be moved in the directions in which they are separated from each other. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display When the devices 208D are separated from each other, the accessories arranged on the back side thereof may be visible, and further, the accessories may be moved so as to project forward. You may. Such a state may be maintained until all the notice icons are exhausted.

FIG. 443 (d) shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, in FIG. 443 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208E arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display device 208E arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but are slightly smaller in width. In addition, all three decorative symbol display devices may have the same size.

The variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed over three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 443 (d), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively, and in particular, the notice icon second display area YA2. The notice icon I6 of the hat displayed on the above is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208F to the first decorative symbol display device 208E. Further, the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and the fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Further, the decorative symbols are displayed on one decorative symbol display device for each symbol row. That is, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display area 208c is displayed on the third decorative symbol display. It is displayed on the device 208G. In addition, there may be a decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285C is not displayed. Further, there may be a decorative symbol display device in which the effect display related to the notice icon is not displayed. This is applicable both in the examples described so far and in the examples described below.

FIG. 444 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, in FIG. 444, the first decorative symbol display device 208H arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display device 208I arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. , The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208J arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same display area in the vertical direction as compared with the first decorative symbol display device 208H, but are slightly shorter in the horizontal direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208I is provided with frame portions protruding from the upper end side, the lower end side, and the left end side, respectively, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J has the upper end side, the lower end side, and the right end side. Each frame is provided so as to project. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, respectively, and when they are closest to each other, they are positioned. It is possible to display as if one screen is displayed on the two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The whole can be covered.

Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done.

FIG. 444 (e1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 416 (47), and covers the entire display screens of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. It is shown that the swordsman reach is being carried out. That is, in FIG. 444 (e1), during the execution of the swordsman reach, the icon I9 of the Senryobako displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested, and it is announced that the production will shift to a more reliable production. It is shown that it is.

Then, as shown in FIG. 444 (e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start moving in directions close to each other. At this time, both ends of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, so that the display state is difficult to see. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by digesting the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 444 (e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to the positions closest to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H is almost invisible. It becomes a state. Then, at this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J perform the reach transition effect as shown in FIG. 416 (49) as described above. That is, over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the reach effect display that was being executed becomes slightly darker, and the character of the lord appears in the cut-in display, and the reach effect that is being executed. The display is cut off. This display is rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative symbol and the notice icon display area 285 are hidden.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 444 (e3) to (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrally formed on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise along. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect starts before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start rotating.

After that, as shown in FIG. 444 (e6), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to accept the operation of the effect button 136. Is possible, and the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed is performed in the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 444 (e7), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are covered with "decoration 1-decoration 2-". The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 444 (e8) to (e9), all of them are temporarily hidden, and in that state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. The first decorative symbol display device 208H is rotated 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface.

Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in the direction away from each other and return to the initial position, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, at the timing shown in FIG. 444 (e10), The display of the fluctuation variation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1" is started over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 444 (e11-1), the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is erased, and the decoration of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1" that has fluctuated. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed as a result of the loss.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the display that the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is digested is started at the timing shown in FIG. 444 (e11-2). That is, the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon 4th display area YA4 is displayed to move from the notice icon 4th display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. As described above, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may not operate even if the notice icon is digested.

Then, as shown in FIG. 454 (e12-2), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 20 are displayed.
The decorative symbol displayed in 8c is reduced and displayed, displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, re-variable display is performed, and then a combination of jackpot decorative symbols (for example, The combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1") is derived and displayed.

FIG. 444 (e7') shows an example in which a combination of jackpot decorative symbols is derived and displayed when the effect button 136 is operated by the player after the display shown in the figure (e6) is performed. It is a figure. That is, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in a direction away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 444 (e7'), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the grandfather's character is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. That is, it is also possible to derive the jackpot display result without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to return to the original position (for example, the initial position).

FIG. 444 (e7 ″) is configured so that when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together. An example of the production when it is done is shown. That is, as shown in FIGS. 444 (e3) to (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also has these. It is also possible to rotate it together with. In this case, for example, the mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be integrally configured or separately. It may be configured as a body and may be configured to be driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H may be rotated in a state where it is difficult to see by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player after the display shown in the figure (e6) is performed, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The device 208J moves in a direction away from each other. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears in a state of being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, and unlike FIG. 444 (e7'), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208I. It is possible to display the decorative pattern display device 308J in a state where the widths of the display screens are the same.

FIG. 445 is a diagram stepwise showing another modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 445, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative design display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative design display device 208 via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and a predetermined lens cut is applied to the transmission region of each layer. Light emitting means such as LEDs are provided at appropriate positions near the side ends of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion so that the transmission region has a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is emitting light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 445, the first layer panel arranged on the front side is provided with a lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6, and is arranged on the back side of the first layer panel. The second layer panel is provided with a lens cut that imitates a predetermined effect image. In FIG. 445, the light guide plate IL is shown surrounded by a broken line. Further, the number of layers of the light guide plate IL panel is not limited to two, and may be one layer or three or more layers. Here, if it is composed of one layer,
For example, by changing the lens cut pattern, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when the light is emitted may be different. Further, in FIG. 445, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and The illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 445, the hold icon, which is the target of the look-ahead notice in the hold icon display area 281, is hatched for the preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode.

As shown in FIG. 445 (f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the variable icon display area 280 and the variable icon display area 280 are displayed. In the hold icon display area 281, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, and the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. The content displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is as described above as shown in FIG. 439, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 445 (f1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a dark display as shown in FIG. 445 (f2-1). At the same time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. That is, in FIG. 445 (f2-1), the stock effect of the notice icon is performed by the darkening display and the light emission of the light guide plate IL. After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends (turns off), and the dark display in the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. The blackout display of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be ended after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or the light guide plate IL may be turned off after the blackout display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 445 (f2-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. While displaying the movement toward, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, so that the stock effect of the notice icon is performed. You may be asked.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 445 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs dark display and guides. The stock effect of the notice icon is performed by rotating the light plate IL 90 degrees counterclockwise to cause the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. You may do so. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured separately by the panel of the first layer and the panel of the second layer. In this case, for example, only the panel of the second layer is rotated and the first layer is rotated. The layer panel may not be rotated, or the first layer panel may be rotated along with the second layer panel.

After that, as shown in FIG. 445 (f3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, thereby simulating in the future. It is foretold that the continuous production will be executed.

FIG. 445 (g) shows how the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 has been digested. As shown in FIG. 445 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, and at that timing. The warning icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the warning icon I6 of the hat.

FIG. 445 (h) shows the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (before the stock effect of the notice icon is executed). It shows that it has been announced in advance. As shown in FIG. 445 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the symbol is performed in the chance roulette display area 287 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat, as a result of the variation display of the pattern in the chance roulette display area 287, the hat Notice icon I6 is announced to be derived.

FIG. 445 (i) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 445 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, and at that timing, the light guide plate is erased. A pattern that imitates the effect image by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat, and also causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer to emit light. The notice icon is digested so that it is also formed. At this time, if the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer and the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer are different, the pattern formed on the panel of the first layer and the second layer In some cases, the patterns formed on the panels of the above can be made to stand out.

FIG. 445 (j) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 445 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the center of the display screen, and then the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. The image is enlarged to fill the screen, and at that timing, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL is made to emit light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, and the notice icon digestion effect is performed. At this time, although the notice icon display area 285 is erased, it may be in the displayed state.

FIG. 446 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of another effect of the notice icon digestion effect. In addition, in FIG. 446 (1) to FIG. 11 (11), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon 4th display area YA4 is replaced with the fan notice icon I10 and is replaced with the drink notice icon I31. Since it is the same as that of FIGS. 416 (44) to 416 (54), only the parts different from the above description will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 416, and the common parts will be omitted. Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 is configured to be able to project upward by an actuator such as a motor, and its position can be displaced according to the content of the effect. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed to a normal position (default position) and a protruding position.

As shown in FIG. 446 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I31 of this drink is a notice icon that announces that the content to be produced will be changed by digestion.

At the timing shown in FIG. 446 (11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 446 (12). Then, as shown in FIG. 446 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the drink notice icon I31 is digested. I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 446 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 is enlarged and displayed, and the button image 136a is displayed with the effect of sprinkling the contents of the drink.

Then, as shown in FIG. 446 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136a is hidden.

Then, as shown in FIG. 446 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the protruding button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is in the protruding position after the liquid image disappears. At this time, it is the state before the start of operation acceptance of the effect button 136.

Then, after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position at the timing shown in FIG. 446 (17), the button reception time meter is reduced in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 446 (18). Then, it is notified that the operation reception of the effect button 136 has started. The timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position may be the same as the timing at which the protruding button image 136b is displayed, as shown in FIG. 446 (16), or the protruding button image 136b. It may be the timing before the display of, or the timing after the protruding button image 136b is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 446 (13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the protruding position with the start of the digestion effect of the drink notice icon I31. Further, in this effect example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off during a period other than the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136. Further, in the period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136, for example, the light is turned on in a manner of notifying that the period is other than the operation reception period (for example, it lights in blue), and when the operation reception period is reached, the operation reception period is reached. It may be lit (for example, lit in red) in a manner of notifying that fact.

FIG. 447 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect using a movable means applicable to the present embodiment.

In FIGS. 447 (a1) to 447 (a3), when the notice icon is stocked, the effect movable body 224C is moved to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the stock of the notice icon. There is. FIG. 447 (a1) has the same display as that of FIG. 435 (1), but the effect movable body 224C imitating a placard with the character display of “STOCK” on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the effect device. It is arranged so as to be hidden behind the 206.

FIG. 447 (a2) shows how the effect movable body 224C has moved from the initial position hidden in the effect device 206 to the visible position which is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that any one of the plurality of types of notice icons will be stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified. For example, the type of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the type of the notice icon may be notified by voice, a lamp, or the like. , A plurality of types of the effect movable body 224C may be prepared according to the type of the notice icon, and the type of the notice icon stocked depending on the type of the effect movable body 224C that appears may be notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 447 (a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visible position to the initial position, the notice icon to be stocked is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 447 (a3) shows how the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

In FIG. 447 (b), effect movable bodies 224Da to 224Df that can rotate with the depth direction as the rotation axis are arranged in the upper and lower neighborhoods of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. More specifically, in the vicinity of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first effect movable body 224 Da with the letters "Large", the fifth effect movable body 224 De with the asterisk symbol, and the "board". The second effect movable body 224Db with the characters of is arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and in the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the third effect movable body 224Dc with the characters of "shake" is attached. The sixth effect movable body 224Df with the asterisk symbol and the fourth effect movable body 224Dd with the characters "Mai" are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. The first effect movable body 224Da to the sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate according to the number of notice icons displayed (stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 447 (b), when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd are displayed. Rotates. When the notice icon is digested, the rotation of the digested number of effect movable bodies may be stopped, or the number of effect movable bodies corresponding to the total number of stocked notice icons may be rotated. May be good.

FIGS. 447 (c1) to 447 (c6) show that the pre-reading mode is notified by operating the effect movable body 224. In this production example, the special training notice icon I41 as a notice icon may be displayed. When the special training notice icon I41 is digested, the mode shifts to the look-ahead mode for notifying that the variable display of the special figure, which is likely to be a big hit, is suspended.

FIG. 447 (c1) shows how the special training notice icon I41 has been digested. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special training notice icon I41 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested and moved to the center of the display screen. An effect movable body 224 imitating an arm is arranged on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208. The effect movable body 224 is composed of an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and the base end portion of the upper arm portion 224a is rotatably attached to the effect device 206 via a rotation shaft ax1. .. Further, the forearm portion 224b is rotatably attached to the tip end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via a rotation shaft ax2 at its base end portion.

When the special training notice icon I41 is digested and the look-ahead mode is started, as shown in FIG. 447 (c2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display "preparing for special training" is displayed on the right in the strip-shaped scroll display area. It is scrolled to the left from. As a result, the player is notified that the read-ahead mode has been entered. On the other hand, in the effect movable body 224, the initial position where the upper arm portion 224a does not overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the position covering the front side of the upper right corner portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 (first position). A reciprocating operation (look-ahead operation) is performed between the two. The look-ahead operation by the effect movable body 224 is set to temporarily return to the initial position during the stop display of the symbol, but the operation may be continued even during the stop display of the symbol. Further, during the execution of the look-ahead operation, only the upper arm portion 224a operates and the forearm portion 224b does not operate, but the forearm portion 224b may also operate in addition to the upper arm portion 224a, or the upper arm portion 224a does not operate and the forearm portion 224a does not operate. Only part 224b may operate.

FIG. 447 (c3) shows a state in which two “decorations 1” are aligned to form a reach state during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which is the target of pre-reading. Here, too, the look-ahead operation is continuously performed.

FIG. 447 (c4) shows how the special training reach as a super reach effect has been started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of "preparing for special training" is finished, and the characters "start of special training" indicating that the special training reach has been started are displayed. Further, in the effect movable body 224, after returning to the initial position once, the upper arm portion 224a moves from the initial position to the maximum moving position as shown in FIG. 447 (c5), and then as shown in FIG. 447 (c6). In addition, the forearm portion 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum moving position. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image, and notifies that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

FIG. 448 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing another effect example of the increase effect of the notice icon stepwise. Is. In FIG. 448, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 448, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold icon h12 is the target of the look-ahead notice. Similar to the second hold icon h11, the display mode is the default.

Since FIG. 448 (1) has the same display as that of FIG. 435 (1) described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 448 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I6 of the hat.

In this production example, the character YM of the lord moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 448 (3), but the notice icon I6 of the hat he possesses has not yet thrown, and FIG. 448 (4) As shown in the above, while the character YM of the lord is waiting at the throwing position, the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 448 (5), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special diagram 1 are moved by the movement animation, respectively. The hold icon displayed and located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 to become the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is special drawing 1. It becomes the first hold icon h11 of. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The character YM of the lord is still waiting at the throwing position.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 448 (6), the effect display of throwing the notice icon I6 of the hat in possession toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed. That is, in this production example, when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended, the advance notice icon is displayed during the symbol variation display that is being executed, but the advance notice icon is stocked. Instead, the notice icon is stocked after the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts. In addition, when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended, a notice is given that the notice icon will be displayed during the running symbol change display, but a so-called false notice is given without displaying the notice icon. You may. In this case, for example, the character YM of the lord may end the display by the time the variable display of the symbol to be read ahead starts, for example, one before the variable display of the symbol to be read ahead. The display may be terminated at the timing when the result of the symbol variation display to be performed is derived. Further, the display of the character YM of the lord may be terminated before the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is completed. For example, the super reach performed during the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is started. The display of the character YM of the lord may be terminated before. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, the character YM of the lord may be continuously displayed even after the notice icon is stocked. In addition, when the character of the lord is on standby and a big hit occurs in the symbol fluctuation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is thrown, the timing for deriving the jackpot symbol after super reach (for example). , During the shaking fluctuation display), the standby display may be continued with the character of the lord holding the notice icon, or may be deleted.

After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 448 (7) to (10) are performed, and the effects shown in FIGS. 448 (7) to (10) are shown in FIGS. 413 (9) to (10). Since it is the same as (12) except that the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 448 (11) shows how the result of the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be read ahead is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 448 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. There is. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In FIG. 448 (12), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 448 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. The notice icon I6 of the hat is digested. The notice icon digestion effect is performed.

FIG. 449 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of another effect of increasing the notice icon. In FIG. 449, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 449, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held, but the display mode is as follows. For example, like the first hold icon h11, the display mode is the default.

FIGS. 449 (a1) to 449 (a6) show the state in which the notice icon is stocked after the effect of notifying that the notice icon is stocked is performed.

FIG. 449 (a1) shows that when the symbol variation display to be read ahead is suspended, the bowling effect performed during the symbol variation display being executed is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 449 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an explanatory display unit 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and its success reward are shown. In the explanation display unit 288 shown in FIG. 449 (a1), when a strike is acquired in the bowling game, the character display of "Item Get by strike" indicating that the item can be obtained as a reward is displayed. In this production example, if a strike is won in a bowling game, a notice item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a bowling effect by the character of the lord has started. The contents of the mission and its success reward displayed on the explanation display unit 288 are related to the stock of the notice item, for example, the hold display is related to the change to the display mode of the look-ahead notice, and are being executed. It may be related to the notice about the symbol variation display of. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a dedicated effect display displayed only on the notice regarding the stock of the notice icon. In this effect example, it can be said that the advance notice that the notice icon is stocked is performed by performing the bowling effect as shown in FIG. 449 (a1). It should be noted that this bowling effect may be a dedicated effect performed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon, may be used for the advance notice effect in the running symbol variation display, or may be used as another look-ahead advance notice. May be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 449 (a2), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the bowling effect is not finished, and the character display of "following the next fluctuation" is displayed indicating that the bowling effect is continuously performed in the symbol variation display to be executed next. In addition, "Item Get by Strike" indicating the mission and its success reward is also displayed on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, as shown in FIG. 449 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the ball thrown by the character of the lord rolls on the lane and heads toward the ten aligned bowling pins. , Fueling expectations that notice icons may be stocked.

After that, as shown in FIG. 449 (a4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the scene where the strike was taken is displayed together with the character display of "strike", and it is assumed that the mission has been achieved, as shown in FIG. 449 (a5). As shown, the character display of "GET" is displayed together with the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat to notify that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 449 (a6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. You will be notified that it has been stocked. As described above, in this effect example, the notice item is displayed without displaying the notice item (stock) during the symbol change display that is being executed when the symbol change display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended. Has been announced.

As shown in FIG. 449 (b), the wipe display area WP1 may be displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the above-mentioned bowling effect may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 449 (c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display devices 208K are arranged side by side on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and wiped on the upper half of the display screen of the sub display device 208K. The notice icon display area 285C that displays the display area WP2 and displays the notice icon in the lower half is displayed, the above-mentioned boring effect is performed in the wipe display area WP2, and the stock notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285C. It may be displayed in.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 449, when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, when the bowling effect is started at the timing of displaying the big hit symbol derived after the super reach (for example, during the shaking fluctuation display). The background display may be displayed, or a background display different from the background display may be displayed. For example, the state shown in FIG. 449 (a2) may be displayed.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 449 (b), when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be terminated, but the display may be continued as it is. .. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 449 (c), if a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the bowling effect on the sub display device 208K may be terminated, but the display is continued as it is. You may.

FIG. 450 is a diagram stepwise showing another modification of the increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, the variable display of the special figure 2 is given priority over the special figure 1, but in this production example, either the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game is prioritized. However, it is applied to the game in which the special figure variation game related to the holding of each of the special figures 1 and 2 is started in the starting opening winning order, and the starting opening winning order is changed. It should be noted that this effect example can also be applied to the one in which the special figure 2 priority change is performed. Further, in FIG. 450, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and the like. The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 450, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold icon h13 is the target of the look-ahead notice. Similar to the second hold icon h11, the display mode is the default. Further, among the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 281, the first hold icon h11, the third hold icon h12, and the fifth hold icon h13 are located at the first special figure start port 230. It is a hold icon indicating the variable display of the special figure 1 which has been won and held, and the second hold icon h21 and the fourth hold icon h22 have been held by winning the second special figure start port 232. It is a hold icon which shows the fluctuation display of special figure 2.

The effect shown in FIG. 450 is an effect that may be started after the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended, and the Sabohani character SB moves on the line according to the rules of the ghost leg and reaches the destination. It is a production (Amida production) to acquire notice items and the like.

First, as shown in FIG. 450 (a1-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and displays the variation of the special figure 2. It has been reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the Amida effect has started. Specifically, when the Amida production is started, as shown in FIG. 450 (a1-1), the Sabohani character SB is assigned to any one of the starting points of the three horizontal lines extending in the horizontal direction. Is arranged, and a hat notice icon I6, a fan notice icon I10, and a loss icon IX are placed at each end point of each of the three horizontal lines. In addition, a number of vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines are set as appropriate, and the central portion of these vertical lines is hidden by smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined according to, for example, the number of reservations at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited to this. In this Amida production, when the Sabohani character moves on the line according to the Amida rule and reaches the end point where the hat notice icon I6 or the fan notice icon I10 is placed, the notice icon is stocked. When the end point where the lost icon IX is placed is reached, it is notified that the notice icon will not be stocked. Then, each time the symbol variation display is started, the Sabohani character SB moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. In addition, the character SB of Sabohani may move to the position where the vertical line is arranged every time the pseudo-ream is performed. For example, when the pseudo-ream occurs, the character SB advances to the position two vertical lines ahead. Etc. In addition, one symbol variation display may be advanced to two or more vertical lines ahead. It should be noted that the effect as shown in FIG. 450 can be performed, for example, in the wipe display area WP1 or in the sub display device 208K as described above with reference to FIGS. 449 (c) and FIG. 449 (d). is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue to display the extraordinary effect even during the execution of super reach. Then, for example, it may be possible to simultaneously perform an effect in which the notice icon increases during super reach.

Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 450 (a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22, and h13 are moved by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon is moved. The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 to become the variable icon h0, and the other hold icons move to the right one by one. On the other hand, the decorative design starts to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, as shown in FIG. 450 (a2-1), when the symbol variation display is started, the character SB of Sabohani starts moving from the start point of the upper horizontal line among the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line is started. When it reaches the line, the smoke that was hiding the vertical line is erased, and it is displayed that the upper horizontal line and the middle horizontal line are connected by the vertical line, and the character SB of Sabohani moves on the vertical line. , At the timing shown in FIG. 450 (a2-1), the character has reached the middle of the horizontal line in the middle row.

After that, when the variation display of the special figure 1 is completed, the variation display of the special figure 2 is continuously started, and the four hold icons h21, h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the movement animation, respectively. Will be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 450 (a3-1), when the character SB of Sabohani reaches the second vertical line connecting the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the lower row, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. .. As a result of the smoke being erased, it was found that this vertical line was cut off in the middle, and the vertical line could not be moved from the middle horizontal line to the lower horizontal line. Continue straight on the horizontal line toward the end point.

Then, when the variation display of the special figure 2 is completed, the variation display of the special figure 1 is continuously started, and the three hold icons h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the movement animation, respectively. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 450 (a4-1), when the character SB of Sabohani reaches the third vertical line connecting the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the upper row, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. .. As a result of the smoke being erased, this vertical line is connected to the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the upper row. Therefore, according to the rules of Amidakuji, the character SB of Sabohani is changed from the horizontal line in the middle row to the upper row by the vertical line. Move to the horizontal line. As a result, the character SB of Sabohani reaches the end point of the horizontal line in the upper row where the notice icon I6 of the hat is arranged, and as shown in FIG. 450 (a5), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. After the display indicating that the acquisition is performed, the Amida effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 450 (a6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Will be done.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 450 (a1-1) and described above, any one of a plurality of different types of notice icons was selected. For example, in FIG. 450 (a1-). As shown in 2), the hat notice icon I6 is placed at all the end points of the horizontal line, and as shown in FIG. 450 (a1-3), the fan notice icon I10 is placed at all the end points of the horizontal line. May be good. By arranging the same type of notice icons at all the end points of the horizontal lines in this way, it is possible to notify the player that it is confirmed that the displayed notice icons will be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 450 (a1-3), the fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon indicating that the effect of notifying that the big hit is confirmed is performed as described above, so that the player can use the notice icon. In some cases, the expectation for a big hit can be further increased. The production as shown in FIG. 450 (a1-3) is a kind of premier production that rarely appears.

Further, as shown in FIG. 450 (a1-4), the loss icon IX is not arranged, and the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the Senryobako notice icon I9 are placed at the end points of each horizontal line. You may make sure that one of the notice icons is always in stock. According to this, the player may be able to enjoy the Amida production with peace of mind.

Further, as shown in FIG. 450 (a1-5), the Sabohani character SB is arranged at all the start points of the horizontal lines, and the notice icons (hat notice icon I6, fan notice icon I10) are placed at the end points of each horizontal line. And it may be confirmed that all of the notice icons I9) of the Senryobako are stocked. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 450 (a1-5), since the fan notice icon I10 is included, it is guaranteed that the effect of notifying that the big hit will be confirmed will be performed, so that the player goes to the big hit. In some cases, the feeling of expectation can be further increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 450 (a1-6), the notice icon of the lord whose type of notice icon is not clear at the end point of each horizontal line (first lord's notice icon I1, second lord's notice icon I2, first The notice icon I3) of the lord of 3 may be placed, and in this way, the player does not know what kind of notice icon will be stocked until the end point is reached. It may be possible to improve expectations. In addition, as mentioned above, the color of the notice icon of the lord differs depending on the type, and the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase the expectation for the notice icon after the change from the notice icon of the lord, depending on which color of the notice icon of the lord is acquired. For example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord, which is the notice icon of the red lord, is more likely to be changed to the notice icon in which the "pseudo-ren" is confirmed than the notice icon in which the "pseudo-ren" is not confirmed, and the white lord. On the contrary, the notice icon I1 of the first lord, which is the notice icon of the above, can be easily changed to the notice icon in which the "pseudo-ream" is not fixed.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 450 (a3-1) and described above, the central portion of the vertical line is hidden by smoke to make it difficult to identify the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be hidden by smoke, and the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB may be specified when the Amida effect is started. As a result, the player can recognize in advance which notice icon will be stocked, so that the player may be able to enjoy the Amida effect with peace of mind. Further, in this case, a roulette effect for determining the start point of the horizontal line on which the Sabohani character SB is arranged may be performed to make the effect more exciting.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 450 (a2-1) and described above, the notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the Amida production is displayed so as to be recognizable. , As shown in FIG. 450 (a2-2), during the execution of the Amida effect, the area where the notice icon placed at the end point of each horizontal line is displayed is hidden by smoke, and then in FIG. 450 (a2-2a). ), The notice icon placed at the end point of each horizontal line may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 450 (a2-2a), the lost icon IX is changed to the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako, and the content of the Amida production is promoted. In addition, for example, some or all of the notice icons placed at the end points of each horizontal line will be changed to the lost icon IX or the lower rank notice icon, so that the content of the Amida production will be demoted. You may do it.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 450 (a4-1), the central portion of the vertical line is hidden by smoke so that the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB can be predicted to some extent. As shown in a4-2), the smoke hiding a part of the vertical line extends in the vertical direction during the execution of the Amida effect, and the smoke disappears as shown in FIG. 450 (a4-2a). The vertical lines may increase or decrease before and after. In the example shown in FIG. 450 (a4-2a), before the smoke was extended, it was suggested that either the hat notice icon I6 or the fan notice icon I10 could be obtained, but after the smoke disappeared. Then, the third vertical line disappears, and it is guaranteed that the fan notice icon I10 will be stocked.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 450 (a4-1), since the second vertical line is cut off in the middle, the loss icon IX was not selected. As shown in 450 (a4-3), the second vertical line is not cut, so that after the loss icon IX is selected and the Amida production is completed, FIG. 450 (a4-3a) As shown in the above, the notice icon may be notified that the notice icon is not stocked in any of the display areas of the notice icon display area 285.

In the above-mentioned Amida effect, a look-ahead notice for the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead may be given depending on the type of the notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

FIG. 451 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing another effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect stepwise. is there. In FIG. 451, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 451, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold of the symbol variation display to be read ahead, and the hold display is the display mode of the look-ahead notice (hold icon of Sabohani). It differs from the above-described embodiment in that.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 451 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the upper part. In FIG. 451 (1), the notice icon is not displayed in any of the notice icon display areas 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 451 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 responds to the first decorative symbol and the second decoration. The variable display of the design is performed.

Further, in FIG. 451 (1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the two special figure 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1. Both the hold icons h11 and h12 and the variable icons h0 of the two special figures 1 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

Subsequently, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 451 (2), the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. It is displayed and it is notified that the number of pending numbers has reached three. Here, the third hold is a hold that is the target of pre-reading. In this production example, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed not in the default display mode but in the look-ahead notice display mode (sabohani display mode).

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 451 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 451 (4), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the first The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280 to become the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold in FIG. It becomes the icon h11, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 451 (5) shows how the symbol variation display is continuously performed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 451 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I6 of the hat. In this way, in this effect example, the notice icon is displayed (stocked) in the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is performed when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended. A certain lord production has started.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 451 (7), the character YM of the lord moves and displays the character YM to the predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 451 (8), the notice icon I6 of the hat in possession is displayed as a notice icon. An effect display of throwing toward the area 285 is performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 451 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then, as shown in FIG. 451 (10). In the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect display is performed in which the character YM of the lord succeeds in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 451 (11) to 451 (12), the character YM of the lord is displayed to be framed out toward the lower side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 451 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 451 (14), the movement is displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The variable icon display area 280 is moved to the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. ..

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2" at the timing shown in FIG. The display result of is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 451 (16), the movement is displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The variable icon display area 280 is moved to the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. That is, the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 451 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. The notice icon I6 of the hat is digested. The notice icon digestion effect is performed. As described above, according to this production example, it can be said that the pre-reading notice by the hold icon is simultaneously performed together with the pre-reading notice by the notice icon.

FIG. 452 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and stepwise shows another effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect. It is a figure which shows. In FIG. 452, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 452, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held, but the display mode is as follows. For example, like the first hold icon h11, the display mode is the default.

FIGS. 452 (a1) to 452 (a3-1) show a state in which a notice effect is performed to notify in advance that the notice icon will be stocked. As shown in FIG. 452 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1", and the display is out of alignment. The result is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any of the display areas.

After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 452 (a2-1), the movement is displayed by the movement animation, and the hold is held at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The icon moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the third hold icon h13. The hold icon at the display position becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 452 (a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a placard PL1 that announces that the notice icon will be stocked in the next symbol variation display to be started. Specifically, on this placard PL1, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed following "at the next fluctuation", and then "is stock" is displayed, and the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. Is informed that it will always be stocked during the next symbol change display.

After that, when the variation display of the special figure 1 elapses and the variation display ends and the next variation display of the special figure 1 is started, for example, a lord effect is performed during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the figure is shown. As shown in 452 (a3-1), the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As a result, the player can recognize in advance that the notice icon I6 of the hat will be stocked, so that the player may be able to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In the above-mentioned production example, the notice icon is always stocked by displaying the placard PL1, but for example, the placard PL2 as shown in FIG. 452 (a2-2) is used. It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on this placard PL2, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed after "in the next fluctuation", and then "is stock" is displayed, but a question mark is added. The notice icon I6 of the hat may be stocked during the next symbol variation display.

If the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked during the next symbol variation display, no effect regarding the stock of the notice icon is performed as shown in FIG. 452 (a3-2). It should be noted that the effect related to the stock of the notice icon (for example, the effect of the lord) may be performed, but in this case, the so-called Gasestock effect without stocking the notice icon is performed.

FIGS. 452 (b1) to 452 (b3) show a pre-reading mode, which is one of the pre-reading notices, during the running symbol variation display at the time when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended. It is shown.

As shown in FIG. 452 (b1), the game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port 230, and the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended, and the pre-reading notice is displayed as the display mode of the third hold icon h13. The hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani as the display mode of is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is performed in response to the variable display of the special figure 1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 452 (b2), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the look-ahead mode, which is an effect of notifying that the symbol variation display, which is likely to be a big hit, is suspended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 452 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "approaching intense heat" scroll from right to left in each of the two strip-shaped scroll display areas. Is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the fluctuation display ends, and the next fluctuation display of the special figure 1 starts, as shown in FIG. 452 (b3), during the execution of the symbol variation display. The lord's production is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. As described above, according to this effect example, it is possible to perform a look-ahead notice by changing the display mode of the hold icon, as well as a look-ahead notice by changing the background display.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 452 (c1) to 452 (c2), during the symbol variation display that is being executed at the time when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended, a lord effect or the like is performed and a notice icon is displayed. May be stocked.

FIGS. 452 (d1) to 452 (d3) show how the advance notice icon is stocked and digested during the execution of the same symbol variation display. That is, the stocking and digestion of the warning icon regarding the performance of the warning effect during the symbol variation display is also feasible.

As shown in FIG. 452 (d1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by the direction of the lord, the notice icon I6 of the hat displays the notice icon as shown in FIG. 452 (d2). The notice icon in the area 285 is temporarily stocked in the first display area YA1. Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 452 (d3), the notice icon digestion effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

As shown in FIGS. 452 (e1) to 452 (e2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown into the notice icon display area 285 by the direction of the lord, but it is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may do so.

FIG. 453 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is different from the notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of. In FIG. 453, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 453, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held, but the display mode is as follows. For example, like the first hold icon h11, the display mode is the default.

FIGS. 453 (a1) to 453 (a3) show a state in which the notice icon display area and the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display are also used.

As shown in FIG. 453 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage becomes a "castle town". There is. In addition to displaying the current stage name, the stage display area 289 may display a tutorial such as the content of the notice and the explanation of the characters appearing, or the notice may be displayed. May be good. In this way, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as an explanatory display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 453 (a1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the above-mentioned lord effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 453 (a2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, and the character display of "stock" is added, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked. Is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 453 (a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice in the notice icon display area 285D is changed. The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the icon first display area YA1.

As shown in FIGS. 453 (b1) to 453 (b3), the stage display area 289 is not changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice icon I6 of the hat that appears due to the production of the lord is not stocked as it is. You may try to digest it. As a result, it is possible to perform the digestion effect of the notice icon regarding the notice during the symbol change display.

FIGS. 453 (c1) to 453 (c2) show a state in which a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided and a notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the type of the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 453 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first notice icon display area 285E is provided at the left end of the display screen, and the second notice icon display area is provided at the right end of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this production example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area in which a notice icon other than the button notice icon is displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. However, it is not limited to this. The first notice icon display area 285E is provided with four display areas (notice icon first display area YAL1, notice icon second display area YAL2, notice icon third display area YAL3, notice icon fourth display area YAL4). The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon 1st display area YAL1 and the notice icon 2nd display area YAL2, respectively, and the notice icon I7 of the back sword is displayed in the notice icon 3rd display area YAL3. It is displayed. In addition, the second notice icon display area 285F also has four display areas (notice icon first display area YAR1, notice icon second display area YAR2, notice icon third display area YAR3, notice icon fourth display area YAR4). Is provided, and the notice icon is not displayed in any of the display areas. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, two second button notice icons I11 are enlarged and displayed side by side in the substantially center of the display screen, and it is shown that these second button notice icons I11 are stocked. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 453 (c2), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1 and the notice icon second display area YAR2 of the second notice icon display area 285F, respectively. In this production example, the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, and the notice icon third display area YA
R3, notice icon After the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the fourth display area YAR4, that is, after the second button notice icon I11 is full in the second notice icon display area 285F, these The second button notice icon I11 is exhausted, and after a smaller number of second button notice icons I11 are displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F, these second button notice icons are announced. The reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on whether the icon I11 is digested. For example, the larger the number of the second button notice icon I11 in stock, the more likely it is to become a jackpot. May be good. It should be noted that not all of the stocked button notice icons I11 need to be digested. For example, even if four button notice icons I11 are displayed, only two may be digested. In this case, In, the remaining two button notice icons I11 may be kept in stock until the next symbol variation display, or may be erased without being digested. Further, the first notice icon display area 285E may also be configured so that the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the number of stocked notice items.

FIGS. 453 (d1) to 453 (d3) show other examples of the increase effect of the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 453 (d1), the notice icon I6s of the hat is displayed small on the variable icon h0 and the second hold icon h12, respectively, and the notice icon I7s of the shuriken is the first hold. It is displayed small on top of the icon h11. That is, in this effect example, an example in which the hold icon may be displayed including the notice icon is shown.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 453 (d2), the notice icon I6s of the reduced hat displayed on the variable icon h0 pops out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 453 (d3), the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, and the character display of "stock" is added to notify that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Will be done. In this production example, every time the hold of the symbol variation display is exhausted, the effect of stocking the notice icon displayed on the change icon h0 is performed, but the timing of stocking the notice icon is set to this. Not limited.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 453 (e1), the notice icon may not be displayed on all of the variable icon and the hold icon, but may be displayed only on a part of the variable icon or the hold icon.

FIGS. 453 (f1) to 453 (f3) show an example in which the notice icon may not be stocked even though the notice icon is displayed on the variable icon h0.

FIG. 453 (f1) shows the same figure (d1) as described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, after that, the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is started at the timing when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 453 (f2), and then the variable icon is started as shown in FIG. 453 (f3). Although h0 is erased, at this time, along with the variable icon h0, the hat notice icon I6s displayed on the variable icon h0 is also erased, and it is notified that the hat notice icon I6 is not stocked. In this way, even if the notice icon is displayed on the variable icon or the hold icon, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked.

FIGS. 453 (g1) to 453 (g3) show that when a certain notice icon is digested, the same effect as when a plurality of notice icons are digested is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 453 (g1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I51 of the bouquet as the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I51 of the bouquet includes two or more of the above-mentioned plurality of types of notice icons with reference to FIG. 412 (b). It is a difficult aspect to identify.

Then, as shown in FIG. 453 (g2), when the notice icon I51 of the bouquet is digested, the notice icon I51 of the bouquet is enlarged and displayed after moving from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen. To.

After that, as shown in FIG. 453 (g3), the display of the bouquet notice icon I51 changes to the hat notice icon I6 and the ribbon notice icon I8, and the type of the notice icon included in the bouquet notice icon I51. Becomes recognizable. Therefore, the player may be able to have the pleasure of stocking the notice icon and have a sense of expectation as to which type of notice icon is included.

In the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described thereafter, the notice icon may be continued to be displayed even after the symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the symbol variation display may be suspended. Not only when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, but also when the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and displayed without holding the symbol fluctuation display, the stock status even during the demo display. May be maintained. Further, as long as the notice icon is stocked, the stock state may be maintained regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display is held.

Further, the time until the notice icon is displayed may be noticed.

Further, the stocked notice icon may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the stocked hat notice icon I6 may be changed to the fan notice icon I10. , When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of chance eyes while the hat notice icon I6 is in stock, the hat notice icon I6 may be changed to the Senryobako notice icon I9. .. On the contrary, the stocked notice icon may be demoted (leveled down).

Further, the effect display performed when the notice icon is digested may be changed or promoted (level up). For example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed. The effect of changing to the fan notice icon I10 may be performed while the fan is on, or the number of pseudo-reams may be increased in the pseudo-ream effect executed by digesting the hat notice icon I6. Good. On the contrary, the effect display performed when the notice icon is digested may be demoted (level down).

When the button notice icon is displayed, the button hold icon may be displayed, but it may not be displayed.

When the button notice icon is displayed, the button notice may be displayed, but it may not be displayed.

Further, it may be decided whether or not to give a notice to stock the notice icon depending on the length of the symbol variation display time.

Further, the length of the variation display time when the advance notice for stocking the notice icon is not performed between the symbol variation display that is a big hit and the symbol variation display that is a loss may be the same or different.

Further, as the variation display time of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, a variation time having a length that does not stock the notice icon may be selected.

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed, the advance notice of stocking the notice icon may be regulated in a controlled manner.

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed, the effect data table may be set so as not to give a notice of stocking the notice icon.

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed, the variation time of the length for stocking the notice icon may be selected. Here, the stock notice icon may be digested in the interrupted symbol variation display of the special figure 1, or may be digested during the interrupted symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed, it is stocked in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed before the interruption. The notice icon may remain in stock and not be digested, or may be configured to be digested.

Further, the type of the notice icon is not limited to the one described above or the one described later, and various types can be adopted.

For example, an item for customization may be displayed as a notice icon, and when this item for customization is digested, for example, an increase in selectable BGM, an increase in selectable background, and a player's selection. It may be possible to increase the possible production modes (for example, one-shot notification mode, etc.).

Further, for example, an item for production selection may be displayed, and when the item for production selection is exhausted, for example, BGM can be changed, the production mode can be changed, volume setting, and the like. The brightness may be set.

Further, for example, the item for clearing the user setting may be displayed, and when the item for clearing the user setting is exhausted, for example, the user setting may be made clear or the user setting may be cleared. It may be possible to clear after confirming whether or not to do so.

Further, for example, an item for ending the effect mode may be displayed, and when the item for ending the effect mode is exhausted, for example, it is possible to end the look-ahead mode or end the effect mode. It may be possible to end after confirming the end of the look-ahead mode or the end of the effect mode.

In addition, for example, points earned items and level-up gift items may be displayed, and when these items are digested, for example, points can be presented and the level can be raised. You may do it.

Further, for example, the reach effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started, and for example, when the icon of the lord is digested, the lord VS swordsman reach may be performed.

Further, for example, a notice effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the present icon is digested, the icon "next notice" is displayed, and the notice effect of "next notice" is displayed. May be started.

Further, for example, there may be an icon (fortune-telling icon) in which fortune-telling is started when digested. In this case, the fortune-telling icon may be displayed only during the customer waiting demonstration effect, or may be displayed other than during the customer waiting demo effect.

In addition, for example, there may be an icon that displays information about the simultaneous production of islands when digested. For example, the countdown to the start of the simultaneous island production may be started, the time until the start of the simultaneous island production may be displayed, or the content of the next simultaneous island production may be displayed. May be good.

Further, for example, there may be an icon that can be customized on the store side when it is digested. For example, even if it is possible to set the production to be performed according to the area of the game store to be installed (for example, the Tohoku region mode, the Chubu region mode, etc.) and the name of the game store to be installed. Good. For example, depending on the setting, the group notice character that appears in the Tohoku region mode (for example, Namahage group) and the group notice character that appears in the Chubu region mode (for example, Shachihoko group) can be made different. In some cases.

Also, for example, there may be an icon that starts the tutorial display when it is digested.

Also, for example, there may be an icon that starts the roulette effect when it is digested. In this roulette effect, for example, a result indicating that the promotion effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed, or a result indicating that a notice about the symbol variation display is performed may be displayed.

Further, for example, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original state when it is digested.

Next, a modification of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 454 and 455. Here, FIG. 454 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 455 is a diagram illustrating a lottery table related to advance notice items. Is.

FIG. 454 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp 220. The normal figure display device 210, the normal figure holding lamp 216, and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 454 (a), the hold icon display area 2 of the special figure 1
The 81A and the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2 are displayed so as to be adjacent to each other on the left and right below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 454 (a), the number of reservations is 0 in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4", which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the detachment, is stopped and displayed. Further, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2, and the notice icon Ih of the princess is displayed. In the notice icon display area 285A, the notice icon is displayed left-justified, but the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed at all times, or may or may not be displayed as needed.

FIG. 454 (b) shows how two game balls have won a prize at the first special figure starting port 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special figure 1, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side left-justified. All of these hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 454 (c), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special figure 1, since the first hold is exhausted, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is moved to the left side as the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. Further, at this time, since the game ball has won a prize in the second special figure start opening 232, the hold icon h21 corresponding to the first hold is displayed left-justified in the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2. The hold icon h21 is the default display mode.

Then, when the timing shown in FIG. 454 (d) is reached, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold of the special figure 1 is the display mode of the look-ahead notice (the display mode displayed as "heat"). ).

After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, when the timing shown in FIG. 454 (e) is reached, the notice icon It of the lord and the notice icon Ih of the princess are additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. To. That is, the notice icon is displayed to increase.

After that, as shown in FIG. 454 (f), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih that has increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is digested. Then, a princess character HI appears with a balloon with the characters "Atari" and "Question mark". The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol.

After that, as shown in FIG. 454 (g), after "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, which is the result of the deviation. Is notified.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed in preference to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, so that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 454 (h). To. In the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, if the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order, a notice icon is displayed. Is not digested, and the notice icon is not displayed in an increased manner. Therefore, the notice icon is not displayed or the notice icon display area 28 is displayed while the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is being performed.
5A may not be displayed. If the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, neither the digestion of the notice icon nor the increase display may be performed, or the notice icon may be digested and the increase display is performed. There may be. On the other hand, the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, any of the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 may be hidden. Only the area 282A may be displayed. When the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When the dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 454 (i), the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 3", and it is notified that the result of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 2 is out of order. ..

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 454 (j), after the pending symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, the notice icon It of the lord is digested, and the "Atari" and "question mark" are displayed. The character YI of the lord appears with a balloon of character notation. The timing of the appearance of the character YI of the lord may be before, after, or at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 454 (j), the notice icon Id of the villain is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, the notice icon is displayed to increase. Here, the timing at which the villain's notice icon Id is additionally displayed may be before, after, or at the same time the digestion display of the lord's notice icon It is started. It may be.

After that, as shown in FIG. 454 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess's notice icon Ih and the villain's notice icon are displayed. Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the villain character DI appear. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol. Further, the appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the appearance timing of the villain character DI.

Then, at the timing of FIG. 454 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. , It is notified that it was a big hit.

Subsequently, the configuration of the lottery table related to the notice icon for deciding whether or not to execute the increase display and the digestion display of the notice icon in this effect example will be described.

As shown in FIG. 455 (A), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a jackpot, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of the hold of the special figure 1, 4 Executes the increase display of the lord's notice icon with a probability of / 50, executes the increase display of the princess's notice icon with a probability of 3/50, and executes the increase display of the notice icon of the villain with a probability of 2/50. .. On the other hand, there is a 40/50 chance that the lord's notice icon will be digested, a 35/50 chance that the princess' notice icon will be digested, and a 25/50 chance that the villain's notice icon will be displayed. Perform a digestive display of. Since the lottery for executing these increase display and digestion display is performed for each notice icon, when the increase display is performed for two or more notice icons at the same time, or the digestion display is performed for two or more notice icons at the same time. There is.

Further, if the result of the jackpot determination executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is incorrect, the symbol variation display that becomes the jackpot is suspended as a result of the pre-reading of the hold of the special figure 1. In that case, there is a 3/50 chance that the lord's notice icon will be increased, a 2/50 chance that the princess' notice icon will be increased, and a 1/50 chance that the villain's notice icon will be displayed. Perform an augmentation display. On the other hand, there is a 1/50 chance that the lord's notice icon will be digested, a 10/50 chance that the princess' notice icon will be digested, and a 15/50 chance that the villain's notice icon will be displayed. Perform a digestive display of.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 455 (B), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a jackpot, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of the hold of the special figure 1. , 25/50 chance to increase the lord's notice icon, 20/50 chance to increase the princess' notice icon, and 7/50 chance to increase the villain's notice icon. Execute. On the other hand, there is a 20/50 chance that the lord's notice icon will be digested, a 15/50 chance that the princess' notice icon will be digested, and a 5/50 chance that the villain's notice icon will be displayed. Perform a digestive display of. For example, in a pachinko machine that is not supposed to win a prize in the second special figure start port 232 in a normal gaming state (non-electric support state), even if the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, anytime The increase display may not be performed on the notice icon of, and the digestion display may not be performed on any of the notice icons.

In addition, if the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order, the increase display is displayed for all the notice icons regardless of the pre-reading result of the hold of the special figure 1. No, and no digestion display is performed for any of the notice icons.

In addition, for example, when the electric support state ends and one or more holds remain for the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the notice icon is not displayed as a pre-reading notice for the hold of the special figure 2. Alternatively, the notice icon may be increased or digested according to the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 456 to 468. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far. That is, each of the effects shown in FIGS. 456 to 468 may be performed in combination with any of the effects shown and described in FIGS. 14 to 455. In other words, in the present embodiment, a mini item (sometimes also called a notice icon or a notice item), a timer notice, a mini game, and a chance-up timing meter are used as appropriate according to the progress of the game. It may be executed in combination. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 456 to 468 are used only for the description of the examples shown in FIGS. 456 to 468, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are shown in FIG. Priority is given to the reference numerals shown in 456 to 468.

FIGS. 456 to 468 are diagrams stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on a decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 456 to 468, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 456 to 468 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is second. 1 It overlaps the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. Further, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, so that the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate. .. The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can be made to look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 456 to 468, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that irradiates the light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in FIGS. 456 to 466 and 468, the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 is shown. In this embodiment, the POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 456 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of the advance notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 457 is a diagram showing a continuation of one example of the effect shown in FIG. 456 stepwise. Is.

As shown in FIG. 456 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) portion is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is located in the center of the user interface (UI) portion. It is displayed in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 456 (a), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanation display unit is arranged, various information related to the game and the production is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at appropriate timings. Will be done. In the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 456 (a), "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" is displayed, and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Further, here, the explanation display unit (or the explanation display area) may be a place where something is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and the stage name is displayed in red when the stage is moved to a certain stage, the display may be an explanation display instead of a notice. Conversely, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not as hot as the red stage name display, so this may also be a kind of notice.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanatory display unit for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 456 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed. The character of the lord may or may not be displayed all the time.

Further, below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect content. ing. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each of them moves in the vertical direction according to the effect content. Is configured to allow Further, both the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 456 (b), the hold icon h13 (third hold icon) of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of pending numbers has reached three. Here, the third hold is the hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. In this production example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a look-ahead notice display mode (for example, a display mode with a blue circle) instead of the default display mode. At this time, a voice output of "pon" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the pre-reading notice has been given by the hold display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 456 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is lost. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, as shown in FIG. 456 (d), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 456 (d) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the characters "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" are still displayed. As described above, the explanatory display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

After that, as shown in FIG. 456 (e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the character of the lord displays the icon (bomb icon) I61 like a bomb. It is shown trying to throw. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that has various effects on the production when thrown by the character of the lord. The throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed with an animation in which the notice icon to be displayed can be specified or cannot be specified. In this case, it may be identifiable from the middle of throwing, or it may be identifiable from the beginning. In addition, the animation related to the notice icon with high expectation of big hit when digested (high expectation notice icon) and the animation related to the notice icon with low expectation of big hit when digested than the high expectation notice animation. , The display mode of the animation may be the same or different.

At the timing shown in FIG. 456 (f), the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 456 (g), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" has been changed to "By digesting the notice icon ...", and something happens when the notice icon is digested. There is an explanation of what will happen. The timing at which the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61. The timing may be before the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the bomb icon I61. The timing may be later than the move to. As described above, in the tutorial display unit TT1, a plurality of types of explanatory displays may be displayed in one symbol variation display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 456 (h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord bursts, the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62 at the timing shown in FIG. 456 (i). .. The swordsman's notice icon I62 is an icon that announces the transition to the swordsman reach, as will be described later. Further, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Don" to notify the effect. Here, the notice icon may have a combination of one-to-one to many-to-many (for example, N to N).

Then, as shown in FIG. 456 (j), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is reduced and displayed, and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display unit TT1. Then, the voice "Pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked, and then, as shown in FIG. 456 (k), the bomb icon I61 is thrown by the character of the lord. The animation ends. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see.
Here, "difficult to see" means that it is more difficult to see than when the notice icon does not overlap the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. In other words, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the tutorial display section TT1 display and the swordsman's notice icon I62 display. May be possible. In addition, it may be possible to notice the existence of the tutorial, or to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the explanation of the effects that may occur in the future.
The position of the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be arranged in a position close to the tutorial display unit TT1 in addition to a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. You may be able to get it. Further, the content indicated by the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the content having nothing to do with the swordsman's notice icon I62. The content may be related to the current production, or may have nothing to do with the content currently being produced. In FIG. 456 (j), the content of the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is a display related to the notice icon, which is related to the swordsman's notice icon I62, but the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed. Although it is not displayed in relation to, but happens to be related to the content of the explanation, the content of the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is decided according to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. It may be configured to be. When displaying the tutorial display according to the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed before the notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed before the tutorial display, or the tutorial display and the notice icon may be displayed. It may be displayed at the same time. The swordsman's notice icon I62 arranged so as to overlap the tutorial display unit TT1 is digested in the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading, as will be described later. It should be noted that the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be digested in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display to be read ahead. As a result, the overlap with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated before the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is started. In this production example, the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display unit TT1, but the notice icon may be stocked in the stage name display unit ST1.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 456 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination is stopped and displayed, and the off display result is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". Further, as shown in FIG. 456 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed from "preliminary icon digestion ..." to "panda is a master of the lord". , The relationship between the character of the lord and the character of the panda is explained. That is, in this production example, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be changed to a new content while the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display unit TT1. In other words, it can be said that a new explanation display has started with the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlapping the tutorial display unit TT1. The timing of the display change of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The timing may be later than the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. If the timing of the display change of the tutorial display unit TT1 is earlier than the timing of the stop display of the decorative symbol, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the explanation a plurality of times in one symbol variation display. It can be said that it may be started.

FIG. 456 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display targeted for pre-reading is completed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6". Further, as shown in FIG. 456 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed from "Panda is a master of the lord" to "When Shogun Yatsushiro moves ...". It is explained that something happens when the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the Shogun character 224Fb operate.

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 456 (n), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The hold icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed, and becomes the variable icon h0. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 456 (n) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 456 (o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols of "decoration 2" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Will be done.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 456 (p), the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging, fueling expectations as to whether or not the swordsman's notice icon I62 will be digested. By doing so, the player may be eager to use the notice icon as soon as possible. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect is displayed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62. It is not necessary to display the effect. This effect display depends on the character display portion of the tutorial display unit TT1, and therefore, it may be possible to pay attention to the explanation display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 456 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At this time, the voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been digested. As a result, the overlapping state due to the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, and the player may be able to easily see the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 457 (a) following FIG. 456 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays to notify that it will develop into a super reach (swordsman reach). That is, in this production example, the development to the swordsman reach is foretold by digesting the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Then, as shown in FIG. 457 (b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, and it is produced that the reliability of the big hit in this swordsman reach is high. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see.

FIG. 457 (c) shows how the swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display. In the stage name display unit ST1 of the device 208M, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 457 (c), a state in which the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed out downward, and therefore the display position of the variable icon h0 is moved downward. At this time, the UI unit may be framed out after the hold icon is deleted, or the UI unit may be framed out together with the hold icon. In addition to the hold icon, in the state where the explanation is displayed, the UI may be framed out after the hold icon and the explanation display are deleted at the same time. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are deleted may be different.

In FIG. 457 (d), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 457 (e), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Notifies that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emitting mode (for example, emitting red) indicating that the operation is being accepted. The timing at which the light emitting mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or may be before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. Alternatively, it may be after the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 457 (f), as shown in FIG. 457 (g), the first decorative symbol display device 208L "goes" with the up of the lord. A cut-in image with the characters "ze" is displayed overlaid on the animation display of the duel scene.

After that, as shown in Fig. 457 (h), the main character, the lord, was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role. The combination of decorative symbols is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 457 (j), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N becomes "decoration 2" on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. -Decoration 3-Decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols, and the display result of the off display is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". If a notice icon (for example, the above-mentioned fan notice icon I10) is stocked after the display is lost, the background display changes from the background of the swordsman reach to the background of the castle town, which is the normal background. It may be digested after returning.

FIG. 458 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of the advance notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 459 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 458 stepwise. Is. Since FIGS. 458 (a) to 458 (l) are the same as those of FIGS. 456 (a) to 456 (l), the description thereof is omitted here.

FIG. 458 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display targeted for pre-reading is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 458 (m), the notice icon symbol CS (sometimes referred to as "decoration C") displayed as "C" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration" is displayed. The temporary stop is displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "6". The notice icon symbol CS has a function of notifying that the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance, which will be described later, will be stocked when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed. When the notice icon symbol CS is displayed, the chance-up notice icon I63 may be stocked, or the chance-up notice icon I63 may not be stocked. Further, the notice icon symbol CS may include an image imitating the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance (including the enlarged / reduced image itself), and may move to the notice icon display area. That is, unlike the throwing animation, the notice icon acquisition animation by the symbol may be displayed so that the notice icon can be identified. Further, there may be some that do not correspond to each other, such as the notice icon symbol CS and the chance-up notice icon I63. Further, the types of the notice icons displayed by the symbols may be larger or less than the types of the notice icons that are not displayed by the symbols. The type of notice icon displayed in the wake of the animation related to the character of the lord (for example, the throwing animation) is the notice displayed in the wake of the animation related to the symbol (for example, the animation performed by displaying the notice icon symbol CS). It may be different from the type of icon, and at least some of the notice icons may be icons displayed at the trigger of both animations. A notice icon may be displayed as both a symbol and a mini character. For example, the pseudo-continuous notice icon may be displayed at two triggers, and may or may not be stocked at two triggers with one fluctuation. Further, in the second decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in any of the symbol rows. Although the variable icon h0 is deleted here, it may be displayed. In addition, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 has been changed from "Panda is a master of the lord" to "When Shogun Yashiro moves ...".

As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 458 (n), the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out from the notice icon symbol CS, and FIG. 458 (o). ), The position overlaps with the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, and is moved to the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 and placed (stocked). Then, the voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the chance-up notice icon I63 has been stocked. At the timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out, the notification by voice output is not particularly performed. This is because the player can easily recognize that the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is stocked by deriving the notice icon symbol CS, but the voice notification may be performed. As described above, in this production example, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be made difficult to see by the plurality of notice icons. Further, according to this production example, a plurality of notice icons can be stocked. Further, in this production example, the swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance-up notice icon I63 have different opportunities to be stocked, and therefore, the production contents until they are stocked are different.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 458 (p), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6", and the display result of the deviation is lost. Is confirmed. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6".

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation as shown in FIG. 458 (q), and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The hold icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed, and becomes the variable icon h0. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 458 (q) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 459 (a) following FIG. 458 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols of "decoration 2" are stopped in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. It is displayed and a reach state is formed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 459 (b), the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed according to the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed on the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in addition to the character display portion of the tutorial display unit TT1. It also depends on the chance-up notice icon I63 that is stocked in the above. Therefore, it may be possible to pay attention to the chance-up notice icon I63 that is stocked in addition to the explanation display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 459 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At this time, the voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been digested. In this production example, the overlap state of the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, but the chance-up notice icon I63 is still in a state of overlapping with the tutorial display part TT1. Further, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is digested, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the swordsman's notice icon I62 to make the swordsman's notice icon I62 stand out. As shown, this effect display depends on the tutorial display unit TT1 and the chance-up notice icon I63, and it may be possible to draw attention to the explanation display and the chance-up notice icon I63.

At the timing shown in FIG. 459 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays to notify that the player will reach the swordsman. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Then, as shown in FIG. 459 (e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. In addition, the pattern formed on this light guide plate also overlaps with the chance-up notice icon I63, which was not digested before the transition to super reach (swordsman reach), and the display state of the chance-up notice icon I63. May be difficult to see. That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 459 (e), a part of the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the chance-up notice icon I63. There is. Here, since a predetermined space is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative symbol display device, it is possible to avoid overlap due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate depending on the position viewed by the player. In some cases, the chance-up notice icon I63 can be made easy to see.

FIG. 459 (f) shows how the swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display. In the stage name display unit ST1 of the device 208M, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 459 (f), a state in which the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed out downward, so the display position of the variable icon h0 has moved downward, but the chance-up notice icon I63 is not affected by that, and the display position is Not changed.

In FIG. 459 (g), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 459 (h), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emitting mode (for example, emitting red light) indicating that the operation is being accepted. Here, the chance-up notice icon I63 has begun to swing, fueling expectations as to whether or not the chance-up notice icon I63 will be digested. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect is displayed in accordance with the swing of the chance-up notice icon I63.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 459 (i), as shown in FIG. 459 (j), the first decorative symbol display device 208L "goes" with the up of the lord. The cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display "ze" is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

Then, as shown in FIG. 459 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the swinging chance-up notice icon I63 is moved upward and digested.

Then, as shown in FIG. 459 (l), the second cut-in image in which the angle of the face of the lord is different and the display image extends in the upper right direction is displayed superimposed on the first cut-in image, and is a big hit. It has been reported that the reliability of the product has increased. That is, it is shown that the notice by the cut-in image is ranked up by digesting the notice icon I63 of the chance up. The first cut-in image may be deleted when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image is replaced with the second cut-in image and displayed. You may. Further, when the second cut-in image is displayed, if another notice icon is stocked, the notice icon in which the second cut-in image is stocked may be overlapped. , The second cut-in image may be overlapped with the stocked notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stocked notice icon. The second cut-in image may not overlap the stock notice icon. In the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is the same as the timing at which the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. It may be the timing before the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started, or it may be the timing after the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. Further, in this production example, the notice icon overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1 when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed, but any display is displayed when the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed. Does not overlap. That is, the stocked notice icon has a predetermined display area, and may overlap with another image at a certain moment, but may not overlap with another image at a certain moment. Can be done. When the chance-up notice icon I63 is used for promotion of the button display shown in FIG. 459 (h), the notice icon is digested and disappears before the start of the cut-in display, which is another promotion target. It may or may not have disappeared.

After that, as shown in Fig. 459 (m), the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role, and in the same figure (n), both the first decorative design and the second decorative design were "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination of the decorative symbols of is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N becomes "decoration 2" on the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 459 (o). -Decoration 2-Decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed by the combination of decorative symbols, and the display result of the big hit is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

FIG. 460 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the advance notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 460, after the notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the displayed notice icon is moved to the stock position by sliding the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It shows how it is going.

As shown in FIG. 460 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 460 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are displayed in the default display mode, while the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 460 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and as will be described later, an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR may be performed. Further, in this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 460 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure box image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 is shown to pop out downward from the inside. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from "By digesting the notice icon ..." to "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord." The timing of changing the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR, or at a timing before the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR. It may be present, or it may be a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR.

Then, as shown in FIG. 460 (a3), the bomb icon I6 that jumped out of the treasure box image TR bursts. The burst effect display overlaps the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 460 (a4), the exploding bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. Then, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, a voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked.

Then, as shown in FIG. 460 (a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. After that, as shown in FIG. 460 (a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as if the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At the timing shown in FIG. 460 (a6), it is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the swordsman's notice icon I62 completely moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap of the swordsman's notice icon I62 with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide to the right toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 460 (a7).

Next, another example of the advance notice icon increasing effect performed across the plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described with reference to FIGS. 460 (b1) to (b8).

As shown in FIG. 460 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 460 (b1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are displayed in the default display mode, while the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, in this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged in the lower right part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord" is displayed as an explanatory display. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 460 (b1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the treasure box image TR is displayed at the lower part of the display screen, and the effect display in which the notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR may be performed. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 460 (b2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure box image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 is shown to pop out upward from the inside.

Then, as shown in FIG. 460 (b3), the bomb icon I6 that jumped out of the treasure box image TR changes to the enlarged swordsman's notice icon I62, and then, as shown in FIG. 460 (b4), the treasure box image TR. Is erased. At this time, a voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked. The timing of the audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be the timing before, the timing after the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the timing before the treasure box image TR is erased. Alternatively, the timing may be the same as the timing at which the treasure chest image TR is erased, or the timing may be later than the timing at which the treasure chest image TR is erased.

Then, as shown in FIG. 460 (b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 460 (b5), the portion overlapping the UI unit displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to see. May be.

After that, as shown in FIG. 460 (b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as if the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At the timing shown in FIG. 460 (b6), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide to the right toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 460 (b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial position, the overlap of the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L by the third decorative symbol display device 208N is eliminated, and the player can see the player. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be easy to see.

Then, as shown in FIG. 460 (b8), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is reduced and displayed, and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display unit TT1. Then, the voice "Pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see.

In this production example, for example, as shown in FIG. 460 (b5'), the height of the lower end edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is set to at least the height of the lower end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208N. When the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the 208L is higher than the displayed position, even if the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides and overlaps with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed. On the other hand, since it is possible to create a state in which they do not overlap, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N on which the notice icon is displayed is in the vicinity of the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Since the slide is moved with, the effect of the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be seen while visually recognizing the display state of the tutorial display unit TT1.

In the production example shown in FIG. 460, when the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, after the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid and moved, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the notice icon. May be overlapped, and an effect display may be performed such that the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and carried. As a result, the notice icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that the overlapping state of the notice icon on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily visible.

FIG. 461 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the advance notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 461, the tutorial display unit TT1 is normally out of frame, and when the explanation is displayed, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in from below.

As shown in FIG. 461 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 461 (a1), since the three variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all displayed in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. There is. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 461 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative pattern display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb Is placed. At the timing shown in FIG. 461 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ..

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 461 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in of the tutorial display unit TT1 is started from below the frame on the right side of the display screen, and then, as shown in FIG. 461 (a3). At the timing, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and at the timing shown in FIG. 461 (a4), "The lord is Shogun Yatsushiro" is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

After that, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward as shown in FIGS. 461 (a5) to (a6), and the first decorative symbol is displayed. Frame out from the display device 208L. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the frame-out animation starts, may be deleted at the timing when the frame-out animation starts, or may be framed out. It may be erased at a timing after the animation starts, or it may be displayed until the frame-out of the tutorial display unit TT1 is completed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 461 (a7), for example, as shown in FIGS. 456 (e) to 456 (j) and described above, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked and then shown in FIG. 461 (a8). As shown, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord ends.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 461 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in by the tutorial display unit TT1 is started again from below the frame on the right side of the display screen, and then in FIG. 461 (a10). At the timing indicated, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the back side of the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62, and as a result, overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 461 (a11), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the explanation display "By digesting the notice icon ...", but the tutorial display unit TT1 is overlapped by the swordsman's notice icon I62. Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden, making it difficult to see.

After that, when the tutorial display unit TT1 displays is performed for a predetermined time, the animation in which the tutorial display unit TT1 frames out starts, and then, as shown in FIG. 461 (a12), the tutorial display unit by the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts. The overlapping state with TT1 is eliminated. If the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out, the explanation display may be easier to see by eliminating the overlapping state. Then, as shown in FIG. 461 (a13), when the tutorial display unit TT1 completely frame-outs from the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-out animation ends.

Further, also in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 461 (b1) to (b2), even if the notice icon is digested and rises during the period when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is used. The overlapping state with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated. 461 (b1) to 461 (b2) are as described above as shown in FIGS. 456 (p) to 456 (q), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 462 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 462 shows how the tutorial display is performed not only in the tutorial display unit TT1 but also in the conversation production of the character.

As shown in FIG. 462 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 462 (a1), since the three variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all displayed in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. There is. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 462 (a1), "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" is displayed. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display unit. Further, in this production example, a balloon unit TT2 as a second tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the balloon part TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 462 (a1), the balloon portion TT2 is provided with an explanatory display that "gold is hotter than red", and an explanation is given regarding the notice given in the pachinko machine 100. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The balloon portion TT2 may overlap with the first decorative symbol, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the balloon unit TT2 or the balloon unit TT3 described later. Further, the display that is exactly the same as the display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 may have a larger display area or a smaller display area than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 may have a larger or smaller character font than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, the fonts of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloon units TT2 and TT3 may be the same or different. Further, the balloon portions TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative symbols, but the decorative symbols are configured so as not to overlap in the display area where the other explanatory display is performed, but they may overlap. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display the explanation less frequently or may be higher than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, both the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloon units TT2 and TT3 may be display areas partitioned by lines, or one or both of them may be display areas not partitioned by lines.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 462 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative pattern display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb Is placed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (a2), the balloon portion TT2 is erased together with the character CH of Princess Chibi. In addition, the decorative design is still being displayed in a variable manner. As described above, unlike the tutorial display unit TT1, the balloon unit TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. The balloon portion TT2 may also be configured to be displayable across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is lost. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1". In the tutorial display section TT1, it is still displayed that "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro."

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, as shown in FIG. 462 (a4), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 462 (a4) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the characters "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" are still displayed. As described above, the explanatory display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

After that, as shown in FIG. 462 (a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the character of the lord tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been done. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is displayed again together with the balloon portion TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the conversation effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 462 (a5), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation that "the swordsman reach is hot", and an explanation regarding a specific super reach is given. The timing at which the balloon portion TT2 is displayed may be the timing before the throwing animation is started, the timing may be the same as the start of the throwing animation, or the timing after the throwing animation is started. There may be.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (a6), it is shown that the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61. Further, as shown in FIG. 462 (a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the balloon unit TT3 as the third tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed together with the grandfather character GY1 on the right side of the display screen. ing. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon unit TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 462 (a6), the balloon portion TT3 is provided with an explanatory display saying "when a panda intrudes", and an explanation regarding the advance notice effect is given. Here, the balloon portion TT3 overlaps on the front side of the first decorative symbol, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. The timing at which the blowout portion TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing at which the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61. It may be the timing after the timing when the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61. Further, the conversation effect by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" has been changed to "By digesting the notice icon ...". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon portion TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the balloon portion TT3 may be difficult to see. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the display of the balloon portion TT3 and the bomb icon I61. The timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon unit TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon unit TT3. The timing may be earlier than the timing, or the timing may be later than the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon portion TT3.

After that, as shown in FIG. 462 (a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord bursts. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has burst may be positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon portion TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the balloon portion TT3 may be difficult to see.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (a9), the exploding bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon portion TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the balloon portion TT3 may be difficult to see. Further, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Don" to notify the effect. As described above, in this effect example, only one of the two displayed conversation effect displays (speech balloon TT2 and balloon TT3) may be overlapped by another image. It is configured.

Then, as shown in FIG. 462 (a10), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is reduced and displayed, and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display unit TT1. Then, the voice "Pakin" is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. As described above, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may overlap with a plurality of display units (tutorial display unit TT1 and balloon unit TT3) on which the explanation is displayed.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 462 (a1) to 462 (a10), an explanatory display (tutorial display) for explaining the effect is displayed on the balloons (speech balloon TT2 and balloon TT3) displayed together with the character. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 462 (b), the display mode of the blowout portion TT2 is changed (for example, the background color of the blowout portion TT2 is changed to red), and the characters "extreme heat" are added. In some cases, a notice display or a look-ahead notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed, such as by displaying.

FIGS. 462 (c1) to 462 (c3) show other examples of the contents displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

As shown in FIG. 462 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols of "decoration 2" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. It is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is starting to swing. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the explanation display "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (c2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (c3), the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 has been changed from "Panda is a master of the lord" to "Development into a swordsman reach", and an explanation display (live broadcast) about the event that will occur in the future. Display) is made. With this configuration, the player may be able to easily understand what happens when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is digested. At the timing of FIG. 462 (c3), the voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been digested.

In the above-mentioned production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having a function of displaying an explanation about the production. For example, as shown in FIG. 462 (d), the display mode of the tutorial display unit TT1 is shown. In addition to changing (for example, changing the background color of the tutorial display unit TT1 to red), the characters "extreme heat" may be displayed to display a notice or look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display. May be good.

FIG. 463 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 463 shows that the UI unit is displayed at the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in which the variable icon display area, the hold icon display area, the tutorial display unit TT4, and the stage name display unit ST2 are integrated. Has been done. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, it is shown that the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 is deleted. In this production example as well, in the case of super reach, the UI unit is framed out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but even if it becomes super reach, it is displayed without frame out. You may leave it as it is.

As shown in FIG. 463 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI unit shown in FIG. 463 (a1) has a hold icon display area formed in the center thereof. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI unit, and the variable icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. At the timing shown in FIG. 463 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT4 as an explanation display unit is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display unit ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, the description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 463 (a1), "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display unit ST2, "Castle town stage" is displayed. It has been reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the general accessory are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb and the like are arranged.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 463 (a2), the hold icon of the third special figure 1 (third hold icon h13) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of pending numbers has reached three. Here, the third hold is the hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. In this production example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a look-ahead notice display mode (for example, a display mode with a blue circle) instead of the default display mode.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 463 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is lost. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is not erased, but it may be erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

After that, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 463 (a4), the throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is the same as the throwing animation shown in FIGS. 456 (e) to 456 (k) and described above.

In FIG. 463 (a5), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord bursts, the burst bomb icon I61 changes to the princess's notice icon I64, and while being reduced and displayed, it moves to the stage name display unit ST2. At the timing shown in FIG. 463 (a5), it is shown that the stage name display unit ST2 overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2 but does not reach a predetermined display position (stock position). .. In this case, the princess notice icon I64 is not yet displayed on the stage name display unit ST2, so the explanation display of the "castle town stage" is displayed, and at least a part of the princess notice icon I64 is displayed. It is difficult to see. The explanation display may be deleted before the notice icon overlaps the stage name display unit ST2. Further, in the case of the notice icon related to the notice icon symbol CS (see FIG. 458), the explanation display is deleted before overlapping with the stage name display unit ST2, and the explanation display is based on the opportunity to acquire the notice icon. May be configured so that the timing at which is deleted is different. Further, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display unit. Further, a pattern (so-called ghost) in which the notice icon is not acquired may be provided after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61. For example, the bomb icon I61 may pass through the stage name display unit ST2 so that the notice icon is not acquired. In this case, the explanation display may not be erased even when the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2 (that is, in the case of the Gase pattern, the explanation display is not erased and is really In the true pattern in which the notice icon is acquired, for example, the explanation display may be erased when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the stage name display unit ST2. Is enabled, and when the UI part is hidden during this darkening effect, at least part of the process from the start of the bomb icon throwing animation to the acquisition of the notice icon and the disappointment is executed while the darkening effect is being executed. Specifically, when the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 is started, the darkening effect is started, and when the darkening effect is finished and the UI part is redisplayed, a notice is given. It may be configured so that the icon is acquired (the state in which the explanation display is displayed and the state in which the explanation display is extinguished). At this time, at least one of the sound and the lamp effect is performed. It may be in a state where both are not performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 463 (a6), when the princess notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position of the stage name display unit ST2, the “castle town” that has been displayed until now on the stage name display unit ST2. The explanation display of "Stage" is erased, and it functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. Therefore, the characters "STOCK" are displayed on the upper part of the stage name display unit ST2. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display unit ST2, the stage name is not displayed. It should be noted that the scene in which the notice icon is digested and the execution of the above-mentioned darkening effect may be configured to overlap. Further, when the notice icon is acquired, the movable means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.) is moved to move the movable means. Or to overlap at least a part of the already acquired notice icons (such as the entire notice icon of at least one of multiple notice icons, a part of one notice icon, etc.) You may. Further, the movable means is moved during at least a part of the period from before the start to the end of the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61, and at least a part of the explanation display is overlapped by the movable means. May be good. That is, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means before the notice icon is displayed, and the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon after the notice icon is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 463 (a7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination is stopped and displayed, and the off display result is confirmed. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2".

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, as shown in FIG. 463 (a8), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 463 (a8) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done. Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 463 (a8), the stage is changed at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this effect example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display unit ST2 is hidden, and when the stage name display unit ST2 is hidden, the changed stage name is displayed. It is not displayed either. When the stage is changed, the stage name after the change may be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 for a predetermined time, and then the stage name may be deleted and the notice icon may be displayed.

FIG. 463 (a9) shows that five notice icons are stocked. That is, a maximum of three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2, but when the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 is deleted, and the area functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display unit TT4, the tutorial display (explanatory display) is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 463 (a9), the princess notice icon I64 and the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are first stocked in the stage name display unit ST2, and then the tutorial display unit. The swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance-up notice icon I63 are stocked in TT4.

In this production example, for example, when the notice icons are digested in order from the left side, an animation may be performed to change the display position of the notice icons other than the digested notice icons. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 463 (a9), when the princess notice icon I64 is digested, the two pseudo-ream notice icons I65 are moved to the left one by one, and the tutorial display is displayed. The swordsman's notice icon I62 displayed on the left side of the part TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display part ST2, and the chance-up notice icon I63 displayed on the tutorial display part TT4 moves to the left side. To do. When the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 moves to the stage name display unit ST2, the visibility of other displays may not be affected by teleporting or the like.

Then, when all the notice icons displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 have been digested, the explanation display is restarted on the tutorial display unit TT4, and all the notice icons displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 have been digested. In that case, the stage name display unit ST2 restarts the display of the stage name. It is not necessary to restart the explanation display and the stage name display. The explanation display may be resumed within the same fluctuation display as the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested (for example, restarted after the super reach). Further, when the explanation display is resumed, the exact same display may be resumed, or the telop type (scroll type) display may be restarted from the display of a different part.

Further, the type of the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 and the type of the notice icon displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 may be predetermined. In this case, when the notice icon is digested, it may not move with respect to other notice icons.

Further, the execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon, may be shorter than the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon, or may be held. It may be longer than the execution time of the icon movement animation.

Further, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, it is first stocked in the stage name display unit ST2, and when the number of stocks is 3, the notice icon to be stocked after that is stored in the tutorial display unit. Up to 3 more can be stocked in TT4, but if the tutorial display part TT4 is stocked first and the number of stocks becomes 3, the notice icon to be stocked after that is further 3 in the stage name display part ST2. Up to one may be configured to be stockable.

Further, in this production example, a part of the notice icon is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4 (a part of the notice icon is displayed in a part of the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4). In the state), the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after the notice icon is completely settled in the stage name display unit ST2 or the tutorial display unit TT4, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. In addition, the explanation display may or may not be displayed immediately after the notice icon starts to move upward when the notice icon is digested. In addition, the explanation display is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display unit ST2 and the tutorial display unit TT4, and the explanation display is displayed immediately after the notice icon starts to move upward when the notice icon is digested. It may not be done.

Further, in this production example, the above-mentioned one shown in FIG. 456 is referred to as an example of the throwing animation, but it goes without saying that it is naturally possible to combine the modes shown in other figures.

Further, in the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, there may be a display area dedicated to the notice icon to be digested, such as a variable icon display area.

Further, the notice icons do not have to be displayed in the order in which they are digested. For example, even if a plurality of notice icons are digested in a toothless manner and other notice icons are moved so as to fill the vacant spots. You don't have to move.

In addition, one starting port can be divided into a first special figure winning opening and a second special drawing winning opening, and eight symbol variation displays can be held in a normal game state, so-called MAX 8 machines (8). The hold icon display area is prepared in advance for four hold icons, and when there are four hold icons, the display area expands to five hold icon display areas. Or may be expanded up to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged hold icon display area may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display unit ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

FIGS. 463 (b1) to (b2) show a state in which the stocked notice icon is digested.

As shown in FIG. 463 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. Both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are being displayed in a variable manner.

After that, it is time to digest the chance-up notice icon I63, and as shown in FIG. 462 (b2), the chance-up notice icon I63 is shown to move upward. In this production example, even if the chance-up notice icon I63 moves from the display position on the stage name display unit ST2, if at least a part of the notice icon overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2, it is used as an explanatory display. The display of the stage name has not been resumed. This also applies to the tutorial display unit TT4. The display of the stage name may be resumed immediately after the notice icon moves from the display position on the stage name display unit ST2.

FIG. 464 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of another effect according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 464 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 464 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 464 (a1) displays "By digesting the notice icon ...". Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 464 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative pattern display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb Is placed.

FIGS. 464 (a1) to 464 (a3) show how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

FIG. 464 (a1) shows the state of the castle town stage. The display mode of the castle town stage is the same as that shown in FIG. 456 (a), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 464 (a2) shows the state of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L in the space stage is different from the castle town stage described above in that the UI portion is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. That is, in the UI section of the space stage, the variable icon display area is arranged in the lower center of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal, and the hold icon is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged side by side. The display position of the stocked notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon on the castle town stage described above as shown in FIG. 456. The hold icon display area has a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 464 (a2), since the three variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The display modes of the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 on the space stage are pentagonal, unlike the display modes of the variable icons and the hold icons on the castle town stage. , A white pentagonal display mode, and a look-ahead notice display mode is, for example, a blue pentagonal display mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 464 (a2), the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are the default display modes, and the third hold icon h13 is the display mode of the look-ahead notice. It has become. Further, in the tutorial display area TT1 arranged below the hold icon display area, "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. As described above, in the space stage, the display position of the notice icon and the display position of the tutorial display area TT1 are different, so that the tutorial display area TT1 does not overlap with the notice icon.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are also displayed.

FIG. 464 (a3) shows the state immediately after the transition from the other stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 464 (a3), the tutorial display area TT1 is hidden immediately after the transition to the castle town stage, and remains hidden until a new explanation is displayed. Will be done. As shown in FIG. 464 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1 which is in the hidden state. The explanation display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition is performed. Further, when the tutorial display area TT1 is hidden in a certain stage (for example, a castle town stage) and the stage is moved to another stage (for example, a space stage), the explanation is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 in the stage after the transition. May be displayed.

FIGS. 464 (b1) to 464 (b2) show that the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the tutorial display area TT1 is erased when the notice icon is stocked. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 464 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 464 (b1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are displayed in the default display mode, while the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 464 (b1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the display screen, and "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are also displayed.

In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 464 (b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, it is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this case, the third is displayed. Tutorial display unit T displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208N
T1 is erased. Here, the button icon IBT can be stocked in a plurality of sizes, and is, for example, an icon that notifies in advance the number of times the effect of operating the button is generated during a specific effect. For example, the number of times the button operation effect is generated is large. It can be said that the higher the reliability of the jackpot, that is, the larger the stock number of the button icon IBT, the easier it is to win the jackpot.

As described above, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed, it can be said that the other display is sacrificed.

FIG. 465 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 465 shows another production example using the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the above-mentioned character of the lord.

FIGS. 465 (a1) to 465 (a6) show how the already-stocked notice icons change due to the throwing animation.

As shown in FIG. 465 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 465 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 465 (a1), "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 465 (a1), the Hatena notice icon I66 is displayed (stocked) so as to overlap the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. Hatena's notice icon I66 is an icon that may change to another notice icon before it is time to be digested, but it does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens even if it is digested, so-called Gase It may also function as a notice icon for. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 465 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative pattern display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb Is placed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 465 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the character of the lord tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been done.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 465 (a3), it is shown that the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 465 (a4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" has been changed to "By digesting the notice icon ...".

After that, as shown in FIG. 465 (a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord reaches Hatena's notice icon I66 and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps with the front side of Hatena's notice icon I66, and at least a part of Hatena's notice icon I66 is difficult to see. The size of the effect image of the exploding bomb icon I61 is at least large enough to cover Hatena's notice icon I66. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon that is the change target.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 465 (a6), the effect image of the exploding bomb icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 is changed to the swordsman's notice icon I62. Then, the voice "Pakin" is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the notice icon I66 of Hatena has been changed to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. At this time, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 465 (a6), what was displayed as "By digesting the notice icon ..." has been changed to "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord." The timing of changing the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing when the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started, or from the timing when the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started. It may be the timing before, or it may be the timing after the timing when the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the stocked notice icon.

FIGS. 465 (b1) to 465 (b3) show how the already-stocked notice icons change due to the throwing animation. Since FIG. 465 (b1) is the same as FIG. 465 (a4) and FIG. 465 (b3) is the same as FIG. 465 (a6), the description of these drawings will be omitted. In the tutorial display unit TT1 in FIG. 465 (b3), "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed.

After the effect shown in FIG. 465 (b1) is performed, the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord reaches Hatena's notice icon I66 and bursts, as shown in FIG. 465 (b2). At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is displayed overlapping on the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display unit TT1. As a result, at least a part of Hatena's notice icon I66 and the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to see, and the overlapping range is larger than that of the effect image shown in FIG. 465 (a5). If a plurality of notice icons are stocked, they may be overlapped with all the notice icons. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the stocked notice icon.

FIGS. 465 (c1) to 465 (c3) show how the already stocked notice icons change due to the throwing animation. Since FIG. 465 (c1) is the same as FIG. 465 (b1) and FIG. 465 (c2) is the same as FIG. 465 (b2), the description of these drawings will be omitted.

After the bomb icon I61 bursts at the timing shown in FIG. 465 (c2), the effect image of the burst bomb icon I61 is erased as shown in FIG. 465 (c3), and Hatena's notice icon I66 is the swordsman's notice. It has changed to icon I62 and chance-up notice icon I63. That is, one notice icon is changed to two notice icons. In other words, it can be said that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are performed at the same time by one throwing animation. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the effect of changing the stocked notice icon and stocking a new notice icon.

FIGS. 465 (d1) to 465 (d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes depending on the throwing animation. Since FIG. 465 (d1) is the same as FIG. 465 (a4), the description of this drawing will be omitted.

After the effect shown in FIG. 465 (d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 465 (d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord is placed on the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice. Reach and burst. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps with the front side of the second hold icon h12, and at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is difficult to see. The size of the effect image of the exploding bomb icon I61 is at least large enough to cover the second hold icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the hold icon that is the change target.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 465 (d3), the effect image of the exploding bomb icon I61 is erased, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, the display mode changes from blue to red). )doing. Then, the sound of "pon" is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

As described above, in the production example shown in FIG. 465, at least a part of the animation at the time of acquiring the notice icon is the same as a part of the other animation. For example, when the display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is displayed. The same applies to the animation performed on the display device 208N).

FIG. 466 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment.

FIGS. 466 (a1) to 466 (a7) show that a specific notice icon has been stocked, and by displaying that fact, a notification that the mission has been completed is given. Since FIGS. 466 (a1) to (a3) are the same as those of FIGS. 456 (h) to (j), the description of these drawings will be omitted.

After the effect shown in FIG. 466 (a3) is performed, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord ends as shown in FIG. 466 (a4). In addition, FIG.
As shown in 66 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the achievement display unit KM1 as an explanatory display unit for notifying that a specific effect has been performed is displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1. There is. On the achievement display unit KM1, "swordsman stock" indicating that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked is displayed. That is, when a mission to acquire the swordsman's notice icon I62 is imposed and the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed to that effect to notify the achievement of the mission. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed in order to explicitly notify that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman who announces that the production with extremely high expectation for the big hit will be performed. May be good. The timing at which the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed may be at the same time as the end of the throwing animation, may be before the end of the throwing animation, or after the end of the throwing animation. It may be timing. Since the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed in the vicinity of the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62, it may be possible to draw attention to the achievement display unit KM1. In addition, the notice icon to be stocked may be displayed so as to overlap with the achievement display unit KM1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 466 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration C" as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration" is displayed. The temporary stop is displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "6". Although the variable icon h0 is deleted here, it may be displayed.

As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIGS. 466 (a6) to (a7), the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is generated from the notice icon symbol CS. The tutorial display section TT1 pops out toward the display position to the right of the swordsman's notice icon I62. At the timing shown in FIG. 466 (a6), the chance-up notice icon I63 overlaps the front side of the achievement display unit KM1, making at least a part of the explanatory display on the achievement display unit KM1 difficult to see.

In this production example, for example, when the notice icon is stocked and the display position of the notice icon is predetermined by the type of the notice icon, the achievement display unit KM1 depends on the type of the notice icon to be digested. The overlap with may be eliminated. Further, for example, when a plurality of notice icons are stocked and the remaining notice icons are moved so as to be aligned at predetermined intervals due to the digestion of the notice icons, the notice icons are among the plurality of notice icons. When a predetermined number of notice icons are exhausted, the overlap of the notice icons with the achievement display unit KM1 may be eliminated.

In FIGS. 466 (b1) to (b3), for example, an example of the operation mode of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that operate at the time of development to super reach or when it becomes a big hit is shown. It is shown.

FIG. 466 (b1) shows how super reach is being performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 466 (b1), the background screen of the super reach is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon h0 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. .. As described above, the UI unit is framed out downward during super reach. Therefore, the display position of the variable icon h0 is lower than when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed above the display screen, and the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. The fourth symbol is also displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 466 (b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In some cases. According to this, due to the phenomenon that the movable operation by the decorative symbol display device and the explanation display are hidden, it may be possible to draw attention to the explanation display while giving a feeling of expectation for a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 466 (b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are close to each other, are integrated along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is rotated 90 degrees clockwise. Further, the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the left end of the display screen straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and is rectangular. An image with the characters "celebration" in the frame is also displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the third decorative symbol display unit 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Further, as shown in FIG. 466 (b3), the family crest accessory 224E arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward and overhangs the lower center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the general accessory 224Fb, which were wrapped and arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, moved downward and overlapped with the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In some cases. Further, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may overlap with the Yatsushiro character 224Fa or the general character 224Fb. Further, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may overlap with the family crest accessory 224E. According to this, due to the phenomenon that the movable movement and the explanation display by the decorative symbol display device or the effect movable body are hidden, it may be possible to draw attention to the explanation display while giving a feeling of expectation for the big hit.

In FIGS. 466 (c1) to 466 (c4), the effect button 136 is displayed by displaying the button image 136a at all times or at least for a certain period of time in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and changing the display state of the button image 136a. It is shown that the state is being notified.

FIG. 466 (c1) shows how the duel scene in the swordsman reach is being animated. FIG. 466 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 457 (d), but the stage name display unit ST1 is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The difference is that the button image 136a is always or at least for a certain period of time displayed below the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in a normal state (default display state).

In FIG. 466 (c2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 466 (c2), the button reception time meter is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208L, and the button image is displayed. The display mode of 136a is displayed in a display mode for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136. This display notifies the player that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and promotes the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emitting mode (for example, emitting red light) indicating that the operation is being accepted.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 466 (c3), as shown in FIG. 466 (c4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L "goes" with the up of the lord. A cut-in image with the characters "ze" is displayed overlaid on the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode on the assumption that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has expired. In this production example, with the above-described configuration, for example, when the operation of the above-mentioned button notice icon (first button notice icon I4 or second button notice icon I11) becomes effective, as described above. In some cases, the player can be encouraged to operate the effect button 136.

FIG. 466 (d) shows an example of a notice icon applicable in the present embodiment. For example, Hatena's notice icon I66, pseudo-ream notice icon I65, chance-up notice icon I63, princess's notice icon I64, swordsman's notice icon I62, hold promotion notice icon I67, chance eye notice icon I68, for example. , Panda notice icon I69 is available. Here, the hold promotion notice icon I67 is an icon that gives a notice that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon will be changed to a display mode with higher reliability for a jackpot when it is digested. In addition, the pseudo-ream notice icon is an icon that announces that the pseudo-ream effect will be performed when digested. Further, the chance eye notice icon I68 is an icon for notifying that the chance eye will be derived as a result of displaying the decorative pattern when digested. In addition, the princess's notice icon is an icon that announces that it will move to the look-ahead zone when it is digested. In addition, the panda's notice icon I69 is an icon that announces that when the panda is digested, the panda will intrude into the effect and it will surely be a big hit.

FIG. 467 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display.

FIGS. 467 (a1) to 467 (a7) show that the explanation display (for example, the display of "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord") displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is scrolled. The left side of the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 467 overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62.

FIG. 467 (a1) shows a state before the start of the scroll display of the explanatory display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 467 (a2), when the scrolling of the explanation display is started, the display "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord" is scrolled in sequentially from the right side of the tutorial display unit TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 467 (a2), only the part of "Swordsman is" is scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 467 (a3), only the part of "Swordsman is a lord" is scrolled in. There is. In these cases, since none of the characters overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62, the explanation display may be clearly recognizable.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 467 (a4), the entire characters "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord" are displayed. In this case, at least the character portion of "swordsman" overlaps with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is difficult to see.

Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 467 (a5), the part "Swordsman is" scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the part "I am the nemesis of the lord" is displayed on the tutorial display part TT1. .. In this case, at least the character part of "Den-sama" overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 467 (a6), the part "Swordsman is a lord" scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the part "I am a nemesis" is displayed on the tutorial display part TT1. .. In this case, at least the character part of "at the nemesis" overlaps with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 467 (a7), the scrolling of the explanation display ends. As described above, in this production example, the characters overlapped by the notice icon are changed over time by scrolling the explanation display. In addition, scrolling of the explanation display causes a period in which the explanation display overlaps with the notice icon and a period in which the explanation display does not overlap. When the explanation display is repeatedly scrolled, these periods also occur repeatedly.

FIGS. 467 (b1) to 467 (b7) are shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 while scrolling the explanation display (for example, "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord") displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. The state when the display (for example, the notice display of "extreme heat") is performed is shown. It should be noted that FIGS. 467 (b1) to (b3) and 467 (b6) to (b7) are shown in FIGS. 467 (a1) to (a3) and 467 (a6) to (a6), respectively. Since it is the same as FIG. (A7), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the explanatory display is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 467 (b3), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the notice as shown in FIGS. 467 (b4) to 467 (b5). As for the notice display, the background color of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed to red, and the characters "extreme heat" are displayed, so that the notice display and the look-ahead notice display in the symbol variation display are performed. During the notice display, the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted. For example, the above-mentioned notice display may be overlapped with the explanation display to make the explanation display difficult to see, or the display may be switched from the scroll display of the explanation display to the notice display.

After that, when the notice display ends, as shown in FIG. 467 (b6), the scroll display of the explanation display resumes. The scroll display of the explanation display is progressing in the background even during the period when the notice display is being performed, and the display mode of the explanation display at the time when the display of the explanation display is resumed is the display after proceeding in the background. It is an aspect. The display mode of the explanatory display at the time when the display of the explanatory display is resumed may be the display mode at the time of interruption. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 467 (b7), the scroll display of the explanation display ends. Although the notice display has been described as an example to interrupt the scroll display of the explanation display, the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the notice display.

FIGS. 467 (c1) to 467 (c5) show the explanation display (for example, "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord") displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 when a plurality of notice icons are stocked. During the display, it is shown that other notice icons move as some notice icons are exhausted.

In FIG. 467 (c1), the chance-up notice icon I63, which is the first notice icon to be digested, and the swordsman's notice icon I62, which is the second notice icon to be digested, are the chance-up notice icons I63. Arranged side by side on the right side of, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is shown to overlap on the left side of the tutorial display unit TT1. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 467 (c2), when the chance-up notice icon I63 is digested, the swordsman's notice icon I62 has a chance-up as shown in FIGS. 467 (c3) to (c5). An animation of moving the notice icon I63 to the position where the notice icon I63 was displayed is performed. As a result, after the range of overlap with the tutorial display unit TT1 by the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes over time, the overlap state is released, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is easy to see. May become. That is, in this production example, the notice icons may or may not overlap with the tutorial display unit TT1 depending on the number of stocked notice icons. When the explanation display is scrolled on the tutorial display unit TT1, the movement display of the notice icon in the movement animation of the notice icon and the scroll display of the explanation display may overlap.

FIG. 468 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 468, when the notice icon is stocked, the stocked notice icon is enlarged and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 468 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the UI unit UI1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In this UI section UI1, a hold icon display area in which four hold icons can be displayed in the abbreviated display frame is formed on the left side, and four notice icons are in the abbreviated display frame on the upper right side. The notice icon display area that can be displayed is formed in the upper right, and the tutorial display unit TT5 is formed below the notice icon display area. The variable icon display area is displayed above the UI unit UI1 and at a position close to the hold icon display area. More specifically, the variable icon display area is arranged above the display frame on which the first hold icon h11 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 468 (a), three variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, so that the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all displayed in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. There is. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT5 shown in FIG. 468 (a), "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" is displayed. Further, in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 468 (a), two pseudo continuous notice icons I65 are stocked, and both are referred to as normal display modes (in this production example, "first display mode"). It may be displayed in). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Here, since the notice icon of the normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area is located at a position separated from the display area of the decorative symbol, it does not overlap with the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol does not overlap. Does not overlap. In addition, the notice icon of the normal display mode may overlap with the decorative symbol, or may overlap with the decorative symbol.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 468 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display unit ST1, and the display mode is configured to change when the operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed at all times or may not be displayed for a period of time. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the general accessory are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb and the like are arranged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 468 (b), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the character of the lord tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been done.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 468 (c), it is shown that the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 468 (d), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Although the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the decorative symbol in the variable display, the bomb icon I61 may overlap with the decorative symbol in the variable display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 468 (e), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord reaches the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked and bursts. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps with the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked, and the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. At least a part of the display frame to be displayed is difficult to see. The size of the effect image of the exploding bomb icon I61 is such that it at least covers the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. As a result, the third notice icon is announced to be stocked. In the example shown in FIG. 468 (e), the effect image of the bomb icon I61 is adjacent to a part of the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT5 and the display frame of the hold display area where the bomb icon I61 burst. If a notice icon is stocked in the display frame to be displayed and this display frame, the notice icon overlaps with the notice icon.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 468 (f), the effect image of the exploding bomb icon I61 is enlarged, and the display mode is changed to the flame effect EF1 that covers the entire UI unit UI1 with a flame. Therefore, along with the notice icon displayed on the UI unit UI1, the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 and the tutorial display unit TT5 are also difficult to see. At this time, the UI unit UI1 may be hidden, or the UI unit UI1 may be displayed so that the entire UI unit UI1 is overlapped by the flame effect EF1. Further, the flame effect EF1 may cover only a part of the UI unit UI1 so that at least a part of the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, h12, h13 and the tutorial display unit TT5 can be visually recognized, or the notice icon display area. Only may be difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 468 (g), the advance notice icon enlargement animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 468 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF formed by extracting the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 has a flame effect. The appearance from the EF1 is displayed. At this time, in the notice icon display frame YF, two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are displayed in a display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked and a display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked. The swordsman's notice icon I62 is newly displayed in the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 468 (g), the notice icon display frame YF is displayed larger than the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1, and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is displayed. , Each is enlarged and displayed with respect to the normal display mode according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. As a result, the player may be able to easily recognize that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 468 (h), the notice icon display frame YF moves toward the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is further enlarged and displayed, and the first notice is displayed. A part of the left side of the display frame in which the icon is stocked and a part of the right side of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are displayed so as to be outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. To. Further, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also further enlarged and displayed according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. As a result, at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is difficult to see. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 468 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap each other on the front side of the left and right ends of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, it is said that a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is more difficult to see. That is, it can be said that at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, making it difficult to see. Further, since the notice icon display frame YF is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner, it may be possible to make it easier to understand that the notice icon has been stocked. In other words, it can be said that the enlarged notice icon may overlap with the decorative pattern. The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, in this effect example, when the effect in which the notice icon is stocked is performed, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame is displayed with priority over other displays (for example, the notice display) (overlap). ), But the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame may overlap with other notice displays.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 468 (i), the notice icon display frame YF is enlarged to the maximum size, and the notice icon enlargement animation ends. A display frame in which the third notice icon with the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed is displayed in the substantially center of the display screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208L. In addition, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is also enlarged to the maximum size and displayed. That is, the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62 and the already stocked pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 are enlarged display modes (in this production example) that are larger in size than the normal display mode (first display mode). It may be referred to as "second display mode"). At this time, a part of the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked adjacent to the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked and a part of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are , Each is displayed so as to be outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As a result, at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is difficult to see. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 468 (i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap each other on the front side of the left and right ends of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, it is said that a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is more difficult to see. That is, at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 in the display frame in which the second notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stocked is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and visually recognized. It can be said that it is difficult. In other words, it can be said that a part of the already stocked pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is visible in the state where the third notice icon is in the enlarged display mode. Since all of the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is displayed. The pseudo-ream notice icon I65 is hidden.

After that, as shown in FIG. 468 (j), the advance notice icon reduction animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 468 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is reduced and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed at a position. There is a display that moves toward. Further, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced and displayed according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the entire display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is completely displayed. That is, the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed, and the state is easy to see. Further, a part of the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the pseudo-ream displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. A part of the notice icon I65 is made visible. That is, in this production example, in the notice icon reduction animation, the notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is gradually visible. In other words, it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be visually recognized is increasing due to the notice icon reduction animation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 468 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the notice icon display frame YF continues. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 468 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is further reduced, and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed at a position. There is a display that moves toward. Further, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced and displayed according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the entire notice icon display frame YF is within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the notice icon displayed on the notice icon display frame YF (two pseudo continuous notice icons I65). The swordsman's notice icon I62) is all visible. That is, although the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are enlarged and displayed with respect to the normal display mode, it can be said that all of them are visible.

After that, the notice icon reduction animation ends at the timing shown in FIG. 468 (l). That is, as shown in FIG. 468 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is erased, and the flame effect EF1 overlapped with the notice icon display frame YF is also erased. , UI part UI1 is displayed again. At this time, in the notice icon display area, in addition to the two pseudo continuous notice icons I65, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is shown to be stocked. Also, in the tutorial display section TT5, what was displayed as "Den-sama is the 8th Shogun" has been changed to "Panda is the master of the lord". Here, the flame effect EF1 may be erased after the notice icon display frame YF is erased, or the notice icon display frame YF may be erased after the flame effect EF1 is erased. The icon display frame YF and the flame effect EF1 may be erased at the same time. Further, the display change of the tutorial display unit TT5 may be the timing before the flame effect EF1 is erased, or may be the timing after the flame effect EF1 is erased. Further, the display of the tutorial display unit TT5 may not be changed. Further, the variable icon and the hold icon may be displayed at a timing between the timing shown in FIG. 468 (k) and the timing shown in FIG. 468 (l). In this case, the configuration may be such that when the number of holds increases, it is reflected firmly.

In this production example, the case where the third notice icon is stocked has been described. For example, when the first notice icon is stocked, when the above-mentioned notice icon enlargement animation ends, Since the display frame in which the first notice icon in the notice icon display frame YF is stocked is the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the left end portion of the notice icon display frame YF is visible. The background display appears in the area on the left side of the left end of the notice icon display frame YF in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in this case, since there is no notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon that is difficult to see does not occur.

Further, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation and the notice icon reduction animation are performed to produce the notice icon stock. For example, the flame effect EF1 is displayed. After that, the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed as shown in FIG. 468 (i) without going through the notice icon enlargement animation, and for example, the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed as shown in FIG. 468 (i). After the display as shown in i), the UI part UI1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 468 (l) without going through the notice icon reduction animation, and the notice icon stocked this time is added to the hold icon display area. May be displayed.

Further, in this production example, the stock notice icon is enlarged and then displayed in a normal display mode by a reduced animation. For example, the notice icon is digested in the enlarged display state. In some cases, the notice icon may be digested without being displayed in the normal display mode.

Further, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation is performed to enlarge the stock notice icon, but when the notice icon is digested, the procedure described above is used. The notice icon to be digested may be enlarged and displayed (displayed in the second display mode) and then digested, or the notice icon may be enlarged and displayed (displayed in the second display mode) when digested. You may do so.

Further, in this production example, a part of the notice icon enlargement animation performed when stocking the notice icon may be canceled due to the stock trigger. For example, in the stock of the notice icon by the action of the character (for example, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord), if it is performed immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol, a part is canceled (for example, the latter half part). May be canceled), or may not be canceled, for example, in the stock of the notice icon due to the stop of a special symbol such as a pseudo-continuous symbol.

Further, the enlarged display mode may differ depending on the number of the notice icons already in stock and the number of the notice icons in stock. Further, the enlarged display mode may be the same regardless of the number of notice icons.

In addition, if the hold increases while the notice icon is enlarged, the effect image is displayed, the LED (for example, the LED provided at the start port) blinks, or the effect sound is output. Etc. may be present. This may be done, for example, when the hold is increased, which is the target of pre-reading at the time of starting winning. In addition, even if the hold is increased when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed, the effect image is displayed, the LED (for example, the LED provided at the start port) is blinked, and the effect sound is output. Etc. may not be performed, and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the enlarged display of the notice icon is completed. By doing so, the player notices the change in the display mode of the hold icon. It may be easier.

Further, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed, the variable icon and the hold icon may also be enlarged and displayed. In this case, if the hold increases when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed, the hold increase animation may not be performed.

Further, in the description so far, when the notice icon is composed of characters (for example, "chance", "super heat", "SP", "pseudo-ren", etc.), it may be called a notice text.

Next, an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 469. Here, FIG. 469 is a schematic explanatory view showing an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 469 (a-1), in the game board 200 applicable to the present embodiment, a plate shape extending substantially parallel to the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The transparent protective member CL is provided. For example, the transparent protective member CL is formed so as to rise from the rear end of the stage 244, and a rib RB is formed at the upper end thereof, and is projected forward substantially along the shape of the stage 244. The transparent protective member CL covers about one-third below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the transparent protective member CL. There is. The rib RB prevents the game ball that has jumped into the stage 244 from jumping over the transparent protective member CL and deviating backward, and between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent a problem from colliding with an effect movable body or the like arranged in.

FIG. 469 (a-2) shows a state in which the effect display device 206 shown in the figure (a-1) is applied and the effect display is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 469, a family crest accessory 224E as one of the effect movable bodies is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208, and is between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL. It is configured so that it can be displaced with. As shown in FIG. 469 (a-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is a square hold display in the center of the UI unit. It is displayed in a mode housed in the frame FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 469 (a-2), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is in the default display mode but is blinking and pre-read. It is a display mode of the notice. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the display content is updated at an appropriate timing. The tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 469 (a-2) is in a non-display state. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 469 (a-2), the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is displayed together with the balloon portion TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the character GY1 of the grandfather is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The balloon part TT3 is displayed. The speech balloon TT2 displays the line "Where is the old man?", And the balloon section TT3 displays the line "Here". The balloon portions TT2 and TT3 overlap with the decorative symbol during the variable display, and are in a state of being difficult to see as compared with the state where the decorative symbol during the variable display is not overlapped. Further, a part of the UI part (variable icons h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 and the hold display frame FL1) and the character CH1 of Princess Chibi overlap with the transparent protective member CL and are transparent. Visibility may be reduced as compared with the case where it does not overlap with the protective member CL.

FIG. 469 (a-3) shows that the family crest accessory 224E rises and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the range of the hold display frame FL1 is expanded so as to extend upward, and the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion. At the timing shown in FIG. 469 (a-3), a part of the ninja character NJ1 overlaps with the family crest character 224E.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 469 (a-4), the family crest accessory 224E returns to the initial position below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the overlapping state with the decorative symbol display device 208 is eliminated. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 469 (a-4), it is shown that the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are displayed side by side in the vertical direction on the extended display hold display frame FL1. Has been done. It should be noted that the balloon portion TT2 overlaps with the extended portion of the extended display of the hold display frame FL1 and is difficult to see as compared with the case where it does not overlap with the expanded portion of the extended display of the hold display frame FL1. Since the balloon portion TT3 is displayed above the hold display frame FL1, it does not overlap. Further, the decorative symbol during the variable display overlaps with the hold display frame FL1 and is partially difficult to see as compared with the case where it does not overlap with the hold display frame FL1. In the present embodiment, since the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, it is possible to display the hold display frame FL1 above the transparent protective member CL, so that the visibility of the hold display frame FL1 may be improved.

FIG. 469 (b-1) shows the above-mentioned state as shown in FIG. (A-2), and FIG. 469 (b-1a) is a cross section taken along the line AA of FIG. The situation is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 469 (b-1a), between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL, in addition to the family crest accessory 224E described above, the size is substantially the same as the size of the decorative symbol display device 208. The light guide plate IL is arranged. The light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side (that is, the player side) of the family crest accessory 224E. In the state shown in FIG. 469 (b-1), the family crest accessory 224E is retracted below the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the player is configured in this way, a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visually recognized only through the light guide plate IL, and the other part is through the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL. Will be visually recognized. The configuration of the light guide plate IL is as described above as shown in FIG. 445, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 469 (b-2) shows the above-mentioned state as shown in FIG. (a-3), and FIG. 469 (b-2a) is a cross section taken along the line BB of FIG. The situation is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 469 (b-2a), the family crest accessory 224E is interposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL, and the family crest accessory 224E is the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. The decorative pattern display device 208 is more difficult to see than the case where there is no intervening space.

FIG. 469 (b-3) shows the above-mentioned state as shown in FIG. (a-4), and FIG. 469 (b-3a) is a cross section taken along the line CC of FIG. The situation is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 469 (b-3a), since the family crest accessory 224E has moved below the decorative symbol display device 208, the player can see that the family crest accessory 224E is between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. The display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 is easily visible via the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL as compared with the case where the display state is interposed in the display device.

469 (c-1) and (c-2) are diagrams for explaining an example of a layer configuration in which an image to be displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 469 (c-1), the above-mentioned hold display frame FL1 is arranged in the first layer layer LY1. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 469 (c-2), the upwardly expanded portion (extended portion) of the reserved display frame FL1 is a second layer arranged behind the first layer layer LY1. It is arranged on the layer LY2. The ninja character NJ1 displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 is also arranged in the second layer layer LY2. That is, it can be said that the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 has a low display priority. Here, another layer LY3 is formed between the parts arranged in the two layers constituting the hold display frame FL1, for example, a dialogue notice, a decorative pattern, and a notice display (for example, a display in which an arrow flies). ) Etc., it is possible to display any display. Further, the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 is also displayed on the first layer layer LY1 (or the second layer layer LY2) so that the parts do not straddle two or more layers and are configured as one image data. You may do it.

The display mode of the UI unit may be configured to be different depending on the effect stage and the effect mode according to each game state (hereinafter, referred to as “effect stage and the like”), or may be common.

Further, at least a part of the production stage and the like may be selectable by the operation of the player, or may change according to the progress of the game (for example, for each fluctuation number of times). May be good.

Further, the operation of "the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward", which is a characteristic operation of the present invention, is at least a part of the effect stage or the like (for example, the effect stage in the non-electric support state or the like, or a design. It may be performed at a part of the production stages or the like that can be selected by the player while the setting screen is being displayed during the fluctuation, or may be performed at all the production stages or the like.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 470 to 485. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far. That is, each of the effects shown in FIGS. 470 to 485 may be performed in combination with any of the effects shown and described in FIGS. 14 to 468. In other words, in the present embodiment, the production by the mini item (sometimes also called the notice icon or the notice item), the production by the timer notice, the production by the mini game, and the production by the chance up timing meter are appropriate according to the progress of the game. It may be executed in combination. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 470 to 485 are used only for the description of the examples shown in FIGS. 470 to 485, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are shown in FIG. Priority is given to the reference numerals shown in 470 to 485.

470 to 485 are diagrams stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on a decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 470 to 485, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 470 to 481, 483 and 485 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is second. 1 It overlaps the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, so that the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 470 to 485, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that irradiates the light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. Further, the light guide plate IL may be provided on the front side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in FIGS. 470 to 481 and 483 to 485, the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 is shown. In this embodiment, the POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 470 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of a hold change notice effect as a look-ahead notice effect by a hold icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 471 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 470 stepwise. It is a figure shown in.

As shown in FIG. 470 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) portion is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is located in the center of the UI portion. It is displayed in a manner housed in the rectangular hold display frame FL1, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. There is. In a broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as the pedestal of the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 470 (a), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanation display unit is arranged, and various information related to the game and the production is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at appropriate timings. Will be done. In the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 470 (a), "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" is displayed, and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Further, here, the explanation display unit (or the explanation display area) may be a place where something is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and the stage name is displayed in red when the stage is moved to a certain stage, the display may be an explanation display instead of a notice. Conversely, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not as hot as the red stage name display, so this may also be a kind of notice.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanatory display unit for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 470 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display unit ST1, and the display mode is configured to change when the operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed at all times or may not be displayed for a period of time. Further, the UI unit may be displayed at all times, or may not be displayed for a period of time. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed. The character of the lord may or may not be displayed all the time.

Further, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect content. ing. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each of them moves in the vertical direction according to the effect content. Is configured to allow Further, both the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 470 (b), the hold icon h13 (third hold icon) of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of pending numbers has reached three. Here, the third hold is the hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. However, in this production example, at the timing shown in FIG. 470 (b), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the default display mode.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 470 (c), the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 in the hold icon display area changes to the look-ahead notice display mode (for example, the display mode blinking in white). At this time, a voice output of "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the pre-reading notice has been given by the hold display. The audio output from the speaker 120 may be performed before the display mode of the hold icon h13 changes, or the display mode of the hold icon h13 may change before the audio output from the speaker 120. You may. In this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, the timing of the change in the display mode of the hold icon h13 and the timing of the audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same timing. Further, on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon unit TT2 as a second tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. The character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the balloon part TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 470 (c), an explanatory display "This fluctuation is ..." is displayed on the balloon portion TT2, and a suggestion regarding the advance notice to be performed in the pachinko machine 100 is made. Although the balloon portion TT2 overlaps with the first decorative symbol, it may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. Further, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the balloon portion TT2 may be displayed at the same timing, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi may be displayed and then the balloon portion TT2 may be displayed, or the balloon portion TT2 may be displayed. After that, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi may be displayed. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 470 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which a plurality of arrows fall from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen is shown. These multiple arrows appear as a notice display and overlap with the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the balloon portion TT2 has been changed to an explanatory display of "Maybe ...". Here, the timing at which the display of the plurality of arrows is started may be the timing before the explanation display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed, or the timing after the explanation display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed. Alternatively, the timing may be the same as the timing at which the explanation display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, although the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the balloon portion TT2 overlap with a plurality of arrows, they may be overlapped with a plurality of arrows. Further, it is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1. The timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden may be the timing after the display of the balloon unit TT2 is changed, or the timing before the display of the balloon unit TT2 is changed. May be good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased and the timing at which the display of the balloon unit TT2 is changed may be the same. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 470 (e), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the left symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6". The left design stopped and displayed in "Decoration 6" is displayed so as to overlap a part of the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the balloon portion TT2. Further, a plurality of arrows are displayed so as to be pierced on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 470 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the right symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 2". The plurality of arrows and the character CH1 of Princess Chibi have been erased. The timing at which the plurality of arrows are erased may be after the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is erased, before the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is erased, or the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is erased. It may be the same timing as the timing. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 470 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 2", the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed. After the shaking fluctuation is performed in, the display result of the loss is confirmed. Further, at the timing of the fixed stop display of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". .. At this time, the variable icon h0 may be deleted or may remain displayed. Further, it may be configured to be erased before the shaking fluctuation state of the decorative symbol is started.

FIG. 471 (a) shows a state in which the symbol is stopped and displayed, continuing from FIG. 470 (g).

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, as shown in FIG. 471 (b), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of is accommodated in the hold display frame FL1 where the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. Then, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 471 (b) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the characters "Panda is a master of the lord" are displayed. Here, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the timing after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the same timing as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or the variation of the decorative symbol. The timing may be before the start of the display. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 471 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, on the left side of the display screen, along with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, a balloon unit TT2 as a second tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) It is displayed. The speech balloon TT2 is displayed with a line saying "Where is the old man?", And the conversation notice has started. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that a plurality of arrows fall again from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen. As described above, the plurality of arrows may function as a continuous notice performed in the symbol variation display a plurality of times in succession. In this production example, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is displayed as in FIG. 470 (c), but other characters may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 471 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the balloon unit TT3 as the third tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed together with the grandfather character GY1 on the right side of the display screen. ing. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon unit TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 471 (d), in response to the dialogue display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, the speech balloon TT3 is displayed with the dialogue "here", and the conversation notice is continuing. Here, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol. Further, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at positions that do not overlap with the first decorative symbol. Further, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed after the grandfather character GY1 is displayed, or the balloon portion TT3 is displayed. The grandfather character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation notice by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather may be given by operating the effect button 136. Further, it is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1. The timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden may be the timing after the grandfather character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the grandfather character GY1 is displayed. May be good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased and the timing at which the grandfather character GY1 is displayed may be the same timing. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, a plurality of arrows are displayed so as to be pierced on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

After that, as shown in FIG. 471 (e), it is shown that the family crest accessory 224E rises from the initial position and overlaps with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, the family crest accessory 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after moving, and also has a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one of the balloon parts TT2. Each part is covered.

After that, as shown in FIG. 471 (f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extended animation (extended animation) of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 expands upward, and the family crest accessory 224E. It is shown that it appears above. That is, it can be said that the portion where the hold display frame FL1 does not overlap with the family crest accessory 224E appears. Further, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps with the blowing portion TT2 and overlaps with the blowing portion TT2, but does not overlap with the blowing portion TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this production example, the dialogue notice (speech balloon portion TT3) displayed later may not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. As described above, the display mode of the hold display frame FL1 after expansion may be referred to as an extended display mode. In this production example, the figure of the hold display frame FL1 before expansion and the hold display frame FL1 after expansion is shown, but the expansion animation includes the one in which the hold display frame FL1 is gradually expanded.

After that, as shown in FIG. 471 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1 is shown. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 has a part overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is considered to be more difficult to see than the case where the family crest character 224E does not partially overlap.

FIG. 471 (h) shows how the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, in the ninja character NJ1, the part that does not overlap with the family crest character 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a look-ahead notice. The production display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side of the conversation notice displayed by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi or the character GY1 of the grandfather, or may be displayed on the rear side. .. It can be said that the production by the ninja character NJ1 is performed in the expanded portion of the reserved display frame FL1 after the expansion. In other words, it can be said that the ninja character NJ1 which is an example of the effect display is displayed in the expanded part of the hold display frame FL1. In other words, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the area of the difference between the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode and the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. You can also say that. The effect of the ninja character NJ1 may function as a pre-reading notice or a change notice. Further, the effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect performed in the expanded hold display frame FL1 (the effect by the ninja character NJ1), but it can be said that the effect is performed outside the hold display frame FL1.

After that, FIG. 471 (i) shows that the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12. As shown in FIG. 471 (i), the area within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode includes the area within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. In other words, it can be said that the hold display frame FL1 of the extended display mode is a display mode in which the area of the area within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 of the default display mode is increased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 471 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. ing. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to see the entire second hold icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11. As a result, the player may be given a sense of expectation that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may be changed to increase the reliability of the jackpot.

After that, FIG. 471 (k) shows how the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the notice that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green is announced. In other words, prior to the change of the hold hold icon that is the target of pre-reading, a predetermined light emitting means (LED built in the family crest accessory 224E, LED provided at the special figure start port, etc.) is set as the hold icon. It can be said that the mode is changed according to the mode after the change.

After that, as shown in FIG. 471 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed again easily visually. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a voice "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. The audio output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed, the display mode of the hold icon h12 may be changed after the audio output is performed, or the hold icon h12 may be displayed. The mode change and the audio output may be performed at the same time. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 471 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and then the hold display frame FL1 appears in the same figure (a). An animation display (reduced animation) that reduces the shape to the indicated shape is performed. The reduced animation may be performed without erasing the ninja character NJ1. In this case, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed so as to move downward according to the reduction of the hold display frame FL1, and the variable icon h0 It may be overlapped with and finally erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 471 (n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode.

In the above-mentioned production example, the start timing of each production such as the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, the character GY1 of the grandfather, the notice display of a plurality of arrows, the family crest accessory 224E, the decorative pattern variation display, and the expansion operation of the hold display frame FL1. And the end timing can be performed in any combination.

Further, in this production example, a character for changing the hold icon (for example, the ninja character NJ1) is displayed in the hold display frame FL1 after the expansion, but an image substantially the same as the hold icon after the change is displayed. It may be configured to display an image reminiscent of the changed hold icon (corresponding to the changed hold icon).

Next, in the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1, an example of the effect when the change of the display mode of the hold icon fails will be described.

FIG. 471 (i') corresponds to FIG. 471 (i), and has the same effect content as that of FIG. 471 (i). After that, as shown in FIG. 471 (j'), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, but the effect EF2 is not displayed and the shuriken SH1 is held for the second time. After passing through the icon, as shown in FIG. 471 (k'), the shuriken SH1 failed to change the display mode of the hold icon by frame-out to the lower part of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. I am directing. Therefore, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains the mode of blinking in white.

FIG. 472 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. FIG. 472 shows a state in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed when the decorative symbol in which the character display of “change” is displayed is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. That is, the decorative pattern of "change" can be said to be a display suggesting the content of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 472 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and a variable icon h0 is placed in the center of the UI unit on the hold display frame FL1. It is displayed in a housed manner, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 472 (a), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and displays a look-ahead notice. It is displayed in the mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Change-Decoration 1" sways and fluctuates. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is the default display mode and does not overlap with the decorative symbol. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 472 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display unit ST1, and the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the character of the lord is on the stage, and at the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and special figure 1 are shown. And the fourth symbol of special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

After that, FIG. 472 (b) shows that the family crest accessory 224E rises from the initial position and overlaps with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the family crest accessory 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 and covers a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and a part of the middle symbol of "change", respectively. Covering. The family crest accessory 224E may not overlap the decorative patterns.

After that, as shown in FIG. 472 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward and appears above the family crest accessory 224E. At this time, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps the decorative symbol (the medium symbol of "change"). In other words, it can be said that the decorative symbol (the medium symbol of "change") overlaps the reserved display frame FL1 after expansion. The expanded hold display frame FL1 may not overlap with the decorative symbol.

After that, as shown in FIG. 472 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1 is shown. The ninja character NJ1 has a part overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and it is difficult to see the character NJ1 as compared with the case where the family crest character 224E does not partially overlap.

FIG. 472 (e) shows how the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, in the ninja character NJ1, the part that does not overlap with the family crest character 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a look-ahead notice. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is started in a state where the display suggesting the effect content (decorative pattern of "change") is overlapped.

After that, FIG. 472 (f) shows how the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 472 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. ing. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to see the entire second hold icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11.

After that, FIG. 472 (h) shows how the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes from white to green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 472 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is easily visible again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Is displayed. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a voice "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 472 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed on the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and then the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 472 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode. That is, the overlap with the decorative symbol by the hold display frame FL1 is eliminated, and the decorative symbol is easier to see than the state in which the overlap with the decorative symbol by the hold display frame FL1 is not eliminated.

FIG. 473 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 471. In FIG. 473, the tutorial display unit TT1 is normally out of frame, and when the explanation is displayed, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in from below. It should be noted that FIGS. 473 (a) to 473 (n) are the same as those of FIGS. 471 (a) to 471 (n) except that the tutorial display unit TT1 performs an animation of frame-in and frame-out. Only the part will be described, and the description of the same contents as those in FIGS. 471 (a) to 471 (n) will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 473 (a), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the frame is out.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 473 (b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in animation (frame-in animation) of the tutorial display unit TT1 is started from the bottom of the frame on the right side of the display screen, and then, after that, the frame-in animation (frame-in animation) of the tutorial display unit TT1 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 473 (c), the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and the character display of "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. The timing at which the character display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed may be the same as the completion of the frame-in animation, the timing after the completion of the frame-in animation, or the timing before the completion of the frame-in animation. It may be. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, the character display of "Panda is a master of the lord" in the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed until the frame-out animation (frame-out animation) of the tutorial display unit TT1 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 473 (f) (for example). It is displayed continuously (for 5 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 473 (e), when the family crest accessory 224E rises and overlaps with a part of the tutorial display unit TT1, a part of the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed. May overlap.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 473 (f) to 473 (h), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward, and a frame-out animation for frame-out from the first decorative symbol display device 208L is performed. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the frame-out animation starts, may be deleted at the timing when the frame-out animation starts, or the frame-out animation starts. It may be erased at the timing after it is done, or it may be displayed until the frame-out of the tutorial display unit TT1 is completed. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, the start timing of the frame-out animation may be the same as the start timing of the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1, or may be the timing before the start of the extended animation, or the start timing of the extended animation. The timing may be later than the start. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 can be said to be an example of the second extended display. For example, the tutorial display unit TT1 is similar to the extended hold display frame FL1 (in this production example, it may be referred to as an example of the first extended display) in that it does not overlap with the decorative symbol, but the dialogue is It can be said that they differ in that they do not overlap with the notice, that there are few overlapping areas, and that they overlap infrequently.

FIG. 474 is a diagram showing another modification of the effect shown in FIG. 471. In FIG. 474, after the explanation is displayed by the tutorial display unit TT1 and the frame is out, the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in again, and the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a notice. In addition, in FIGS. 474 (a) to 474 (n), after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out, the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in again, and the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a notice. Since it is the same as that of FIGS. 473 (a) to (n), only the different parts will be described, and the description of the same contents as those of FIGS. 473 (a) to (n) will be omitted.

After the effects shown in FIGS. 474 (a) to 474 (h) are performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 474 (i), the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a tutorial from the bottom of the right frame of the display screen. The frame-in animation of the display unit TT1 is started again, and then the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at the timing shown in FIG. 474 (j), and the characters "pseudo-ream" are displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. The display is displayed. That is, there is a display suggesting that a pseudo-ream may be performed. That is, in the tutorial display unit TT1, in addition to the tutorial display, a notice display can also be performed. The character display of this "pseudo-ren" may be a notice of the change or a look-ahead notice. The timing of the completion of the frame-in animation of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be before the display of the effect EF2 is started, or at a timing after the display of the effect EF2 is started. It may be present, or it may be at the same timing as the display of the effect EF2 is started. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. After that, as shown in FIGS. 474 (j) to (n), the tutorial display unit TT1 is continuously displayed. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 is configured so that the display time is longer when the notice display is performed than when the explanation display is performed, but even if the display time is the same. Alternatively, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to have a longer display time when the explanation display is performed than when the notice display is performed. Further, the color of the characters may be different between the case of the explanation display and the case of the notice display. As described above, in this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be displayed a plurality of times.

In the tutorial display unit TT1, a plurality of types of mini-games having a pattern of success or failure are displayed, and when the success pattern of the mini-game is performed, at the same time as or after the display indicating success. , Display that changes other effect displays such as hold change (for example, change in display mode of hold icon, change in display mode of variable icon, stop of pseudo-ream symbol, occurrence of pseudo-ream, display mode of dialogue notice Change (for example, change the blue line or blue background line to red line or red greeting line), step up the line notice (for example, in the state where the line notice display of character A is performed, then the line of character B It may be configured to display a notice, etc.)).

FIG. 475 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a super reach effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 475, for example, the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is changed as described above, which is executed after the effect display shown in FIG. 471 is performed, is performed. It is shown that it is.

As shown in FIG. 475 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and a variable icon h0 is placed in the center of the UI unit on the hold display frame FL1. It is displayed in a housed manner, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 475 (a), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 is a display mode of the look-ahead notice that is lit in green, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is erased. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is the default display mode and does not overlap with the decorative symbol. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 shows that the characters "Panda is the master of the lord" are displayed and the explanation is displayed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 475 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display unit ST1, and the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the character of the lord is on the stage, and at the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and special figure 1 are shown. And the fourth symbol of special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. The family crest accessory 224E emits green light in accordance with the color of the variable icon h0.

After that, as shown in FIG. 475 (b), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays to notify that it will develop into a super reach (swordsman reach).

Then, as shown in FIG. 475 (c), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, and it is produced that the reliability of the big hit in this swordsman reach is high. .. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the variable icon, and the hold icon, and the tutorial display unit TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the variable icon, and the hold icon. These displays may be more difficult to see than when they do not overlap.

After that, as shown in FIG. 475 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit is framed out to the lower part of the display screen is started. Specifically, when the UI unit FO animation is started, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is deleted, and the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted. The timing of erasing the character display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be a timing before the timing of erasing the hold icon, or a timing after the timing of erasing the hold icon. , The timing may be the same as the timing of deleting the hold icon. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Although the variable icon h0 is not deleted, the variable icon h0 may also be deleted.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 475 (d) to 475 (g), the UI unit is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. Even if the hold display frame FL1 is erased, the display mode of the hold icon may be recognized by the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E. That is, as described above, it is displayed by performing the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon changed by the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL1. Even after the hold display frame FL1 in which the variable icon is housed is hidden, it may be possible to confirm the display mode after the change of the hold icon.

FIG. 475 (h) shows how the swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display. In the stage name display unit ST1 of the device 208M, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 475 (h), a state in which the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman confront each other is displayed.

After that, for example, after the animation display of the duel scene by the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman shown in FIGS. 457 (c) to 457 (h) is performed, the first decoration is performed as shown in FIG. 475 (i). In the design display device 208L, the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and as a result, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is derived for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and the shaking fluctuates. Is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 475 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background dedicated to the swordsman reach is changed to the background of the castle town. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIGS. 475 (j) to 475 (n), an animation (UI unit FI animation) in which the UI unit is framed in from the lower part of the display screen is performed. The hold icon is redisplayed after the display of the UI part FI animation is completed, but it may be displayed from the time when the display of the UI part FI animation is started, or the display of the UI part FI animation is displayed. It may be displayed as soon as it is completed. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 475 (o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to "decoration 2-decoration 3-" on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.
The combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". Further, the family crest accessory 224E changes from a green light emitting mode to a default light emitting mode (white light emitting mode). Although the first decorative symbol is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be deleted when the stop display is displayed. Further, the timing at which the family crest accessory 224E changes to the default light emitting mode may be the same timing as the stop display of the decorative symbol, may be a timing before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or may be a decoration. The timing may be later than the stop display of the symbol. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, the variable icon h0 may be changed to the default display mode and then deleted before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or may be changed to the default display mode after the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be erased after that, or it may be erased without changing the display mode before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the display mode may be erased after the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be erased without changing, or may be erased without changing the display mode at the same timing as the stop display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, in the state where the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL is displayed, the hold display frame FL1 which is being expanded, expanded, or reduced may be displayed. In this configuration, after expansion. The reserved display frame FL1 may be configured so as not to overlap the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL.

Further, the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 may be displayed during the super reach, and in the configuration, each timing during the super reach (for example, a cut-in of a ally character or a cut-in of an enemy character) may be displayed. The display mode of the above, or the display mode of the lines displayed in blue, the display timing of the lines displayed in red, etc.) may be changed.

Further, in addition to the above configuration or by replacing the above configuration, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured so that it can be framed in during super reach, and the display mode at each of the above timings may be changed. One of a plurality of types of displays indicating the above may be displayed.

FIG. 476 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 476 (a-1) to 476 (a-4), it is shown that the effect display of stocking the notice icon is performed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and FIG. 476 (b-). 1) to the same figure (b-6) show that the display mode of the hold icon is changed while the notice icon is stocked, and FIGS. 476 (c-1) to the same figure (c-1) to the same. FIG. (C-6) shows how the display mode of the notice icon is changed by the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon and the effect that is partially common to the effect.

The production example shown in FIG. 476 (a-1) is the same as that of FIG. 471 (g) except that the notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed instead of the ninja character NJ1. Omit. As shown in FIG. 476 (a-1), the notice icon BX of the treasure box is partially overlapped with the family crest accessory 224E and is not partially overlapped with the family crest accessory 224E. It is said that it is difficult to see by comparison. Further, in this production example, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is used as an example of the notice icon, but it can also be applied to display various notice icons shown in FIGS. 412 and 467 (d), for example. Needless to say.

After that, as shown in FIG. 476 (a-2), it is shown that the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, in the notice icon BX of the treasure box, the part that does not overlap with the family crest accessory 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to see.

After that, FIG. 476 (a-3) shows that the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the notice icon BX of the treasure box is moving toward the second hold icon h12. At this time, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed in a reduced size, but it may be displayed without being reduced or may be displayed in a larger size. Further, the shape may be changed or the display color may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 476 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the second hold icon h12, and corresponds to the second hold icon h12. It suggests that some kind of notice will be given in the symbol change display based on the hold. That is, a look-ahead notice is given by the notice icon BX of the treasure box.

The production example shown in FIGS. 476 (b-1) to 476 (b-6) is shown in FIG. 471 (g), except that the treasure box notice icon BX is displayed above the second hold icon h12. -Since it is the same as the figure (l), detailed description thereof will be omitted. The notice icon BX shown in FIG. 476 (b-1) is not limited to the one displayed as described above in FIGS. 476 (a-1) to (a-4), and for example, other effects. It may be displayed by (for example, an effect performed by stopping the chance symbol). Further, the notice icon may not be displayed in the effect in the hold display frame FL1.

FIG. 476 (b-3) shows that the shuriken SH1 overlaps the notice icon BX of the treasure box. Here, the shuriken SH1 may be overlapped with the notice icon BX of the treasure box, or may be overlapped with the notice icon BX of the treasure box. That is, for example, even if the notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed as described above in FIGS. 476 (a-1) to (a-4), the shuriken SH1 is better than the notice icon BX of the treasure box. May be displayed on the front side or may be displayed on the back side.

FIG. 476 (b-4) shows that the effect EF2 overlaps all of the treasure chest notice icons BX in addition to the second hold icon h12. As a result, it may not be possible to know whether the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes or the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX changes, and the player may have a sense of expectation.

Since the production examples shown in FIGS. 476 (c-1) to (c-5) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 476 (b-1) to (b-5), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 476 (c-5), the effect EF2 is displayed so as to cover the entire second hold icon h12, but the light emission of the family crest accessory 224E corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the hold icon after the change. No change in aspect is seen. That is, it can be said that the change display of the hold icon is not performed due to the unchanged emission color of the family crest accessory 224E.

FIG. 476 (c-6) following FIG. 476 (c-5) shows the state after the effect EF2 is erased. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 476 (c-6), after the effect EF2 is erased, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 does not change, and the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX changes. , The player may be able to give unexpectedness to the production and further raise the expectation for the big hit by changing the advance notice icon BX of the treasure box instead of changing the display mode of the hold icon. is there. The mode of change of the notice icon BX of the treasure box is not limited to the change of size, for example, the shape may change, the color may change, or the combination thereof may change. .. As shown in FIG. 476 (c-6), the speaker 120 outputs a voice to notify that the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box has changed, but the voice is not output. You may do it.

FIG. 477 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 477 (a-1) to (a-6), the display mode of the hold icon other than the hold icon displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (for example, blinking in white) is changed. In FIGS. 477 (b-1) to (b-4), another character appears in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 to show the display mode of the hold icon. It is shown that the effect of changing is performed, and in FIGS. 477 (c-1) to (c-5), the effect of changing the display mode of all the displayed hold icons is performed. It is shown that it is.

The effect example shown in FIG. 477 (a-1) is the same as that of FIG. 471 (g) except that the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 477 (a-1), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the default display mode.

In the figure (a-2) following FIG. 477 (a-1), a state in which the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, in the ninja character NJ1, the part that does not overlap with the family crest character 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the third hold icon h13 adjacent to the second hold icon h12 that gives a look-ahead notice.

After that, FIG. 477 (a-3) shows that the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the third hold icon h13.

After that, as shown in FIG. 477 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the third hold icon h13, and the effect EF2 in which the third hold icon h13 explodes is displayed. It is done. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to see the entire third hold icon h13, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent second hold icon h12. The second hold icon h12 remains in the pre-reading notice display mode (blinking in white).

After that, FIG. 477 (a-5) shows how the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the notice that the display color of the third hold icon h13 changes from white to green is announced.

After that, as shown in FIG. 477 (a-6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the third hold icon h13 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Easy to display. At this time, the display mode of the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a voice "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. The audio output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed, the display mode of the hold icon h13 may be changed after the audio output is performed, or the hold icon h13 may be displayed. The mode change and the audio output may be performed at the same time. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains unchanged from the display mode of the look-ahead notice. According to this effect example, by changing the display mode of the third hold icon h13 adjacent to the second hold icon h12 instead of the second hold icon h12, the effect can be made unexpected and the second While maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon h12, it may be possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the third hold icon h13. .. Although this effect example has been described for the third hold icon adjacent to the second hold icon that is the target of the look-ahead notice, it may be performed for the first hold icon. However, if there is a fourth hold, it may be performed for the fourth hold icon h14.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 477 (b-1) to (b-4), the chief character BC1 is displayed in place of the ninja character NJ1 in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the thrown object is displayed. Is the same as in FIGS. 471 (g) to 471 (j) except that is changed. Therefore, only the different points will be described in detail, and the other details will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 477 (b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, not the ninja character NJ1 but the chief character BC1 appears at the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. It should be noted that the character BC1 of the Bancho has a part overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and it is difficult to see the character BC1 as compared with the state where the family crest character 224E does not partially overlap.

FIG. 477 (b-2) shows how the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the portion of the Bancho character BC1 that does not overlap with the family crest accessory 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the character BC1 of the Bancho is throwing the Qigong wave KK1 instead of the shuriken SH1 as a throwing object. This Qigong wave KK1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12, which is giving a look-ahead notice. The Qigong wave KK1 effect display may be displayed on the front side of the conversation notice displayed by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi or the character GY1 of the grandfather, or may be displayed on the back side. Good.

After that, FIG. 477 (b-3) shows that the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the Qigong wave KK1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 477 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Qigong wave KK1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes. Is being done. Here, the display mode of the effect EF2 may be different between the case of the shuriken SH1 and the case of the Qigong wave KK1. Further, at this time, the character BC1 of the Bancho is erased from the hold display frame FL1, but may be displayed. As described above, in this production example, by making it possible to display characters other than the ninja character NJ1, for example, it may be possible to change the reliability of the jackpot depending on the characters that appear.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 477 (c-1) to (c-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode. Is the same as in FIGS. 477 (b-1) to (b-3) except that, only the differences will be described in detail, and the other details will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 477 (c-4) following FIG. 477 (c-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208
In L, the Qigong wave KK1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the exploding effect EF3 is displayed. However, this effect EF3 explodes not only in the second hold icon h12 but also in the entire hold icon display area. It is an effect display. That is, the display of the effect EF3 informs that all the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area are subject to the change of the display mode. This may give the expectation that all holds may be more credible. At the timing shown in FIG. 477 (c-4), the character BC1 of the Bancho is erased from the hold display frame FL1, but it may be in the displayed state. Further, the effect by the effect EF3 may be an effect that is performed only when the Bancho character BC1 appears, and may not be performed when the ninja character NJ1 appears. Further, when the character BC1 of the Bancho appears, the effect EF3 may be used to produce the effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 477 (c-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased, and the first hold icon h11 to the third is compared with the state in which the effect EF3 is not erased. The hold icon h13 of is displayed again easily visually. At this time, all the display modes of the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the main character. According to this effect example, not only the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading but also the display mode of all the displayed hold icons is changed, so that the effect can be made unexpected and for all the hold. In some cases, the expectation for a big hit can be dramatically improved. This production example may be performed, for example, when the hold increases at a specific timing, and more specifically, when the hold increases after the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is started. You may try to do it.

FIG. 478 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIGS. 478 (a-1) to (a-5) show that the expansion range of the hold display frame FL1 is increased, and FIGS. 478 (b-1) to FIG. In b-5), it is shown that the background of the hold display frame FL1 is opened and the character related to the hold change notice effect appears there. FIGS. 478 (c-1) to (c-4). Shows how the effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is being performed.

Since the effect example shown in FIG. 478 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 471 (g) and described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 478 (a-2) following FIG. 478 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the hold display frame FL1 is further expanded upward. In addition, the ninja character NJ1 has also moved further upward in response to the further expansion of the hold display frame FL1 upward. At this time, the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is easier to see than the state in which it is overlapped with the family crest character 224E. Further, the hold display frame FL1 overlaps with the blowing portion TT3, and the display of the blowing portion TT3 is difficult to see as compared with the state where the holding display frame FL1 does not overlap with the blowing portion TT3. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E is descending toward the initial position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 478 (a-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing three shurikens SH1. All of these three shurikens SH1 are moving toward the second hold icon h12, which is giving a look-ahead notice. The effect display of the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the balloon portion TT2. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 478 (a-3), the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 478 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the three shurikens SH1 overlap with the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 explodes in the effect EF2. The display is being made.

After that, as shown in FIG. 478 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Easy to display. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the lord. At this time, the speaker 120 may output a notification sound indicating that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Further, at this time, the light emitting mode of the family crest accessory 224E has not changed, but it may change. As described above, in this effect example, the expansion range of the hold display frame FL1 is further increased upward as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 471, and the effect contents are also partially different. Even if the expansion range of the hold display frame FL1 is increased, the effect content may be the same. Further, the expansion range of the hold display frame FL1 may be changed according to the reliability. As a result, it may be possible to change the feeling of expectation for a big hit depending on the amount of change in the hold display frame FL1.

The expansion range of the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded not only upward but also in the width direction. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 478 (a-3'), in addition to expanding the hold display frame FL1 upward, the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded in the width direction to a range overlapping the hold icon to be read ahead. Good. Further, the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 in the vertical direction may be set to the extent shown in FIG. 471 (g), and the extension range in the width direction may be set to a range overlapping the hold icon to be read ahead. Further, when the third hold icon that is digested after the second hold icon h12 that is the target of pre-reading is displayed, it is expanded in the width direction to at least a part of the third hold icon. It may be configured as. In other words, a part of the hold display frame FL1 may be configured to overlap with the third hold icon.

In FIG. 478 (b-1), the family crest accessory 224E rises from the initial position, and the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward by the expansion animation of the hold display frame FL1, but the character does not appear in the expansion portion, and then. It is shown that the family crest character 224E has moved to the initial position. Since other production contents are the same as those shown in FIG. 471 (g), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 478 (b-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an opening operation in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 rises like a shutter is started so that the back side of the background can be visually recognized. It is shown that the display of various aspects is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 478 (b-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened, and the ninja character NJ1 appears. It should be noted that a plurality of types of back colors of the hold display frame FL1 with the background fully open may be prepared, and the colors may be different depending on the degree of expectation of a change in the display mode of the hold icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 478 (b-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The timing at which the throwing effect of the shuriken SH1 is started may be later than the timing at which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened, and is the same as the timing at which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened. It may be the timing before the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 478 (b-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 478 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. It is done. At this time, the closing operation in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 descends like a shutter is started, and then the door is closed. The start timing of the background closing operation of the hold display frame FL1 may be earlier than the timing at which the display of the effect EF2 is started, or may be the same as the timing at which the display of the effect EF2 is started. It may be after the timing when the display of the effect EF2 is started. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

The production example shown in FIG. 478 (c-1) is the same as that of FIG. 471 (i) except that the ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken toward the variable icon h0. A detailed description will be given, and the description of the others will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 478 (c-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1 toward the variable icon h0.

After that, as shown in FIG. 478 (c-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the variable icon h0, and the effect EF3 in which the variable icon h0 explodes is displayed. This effect EF3 makes it difficult to see the entire variable icon h0, and also overlaps a part of the ninja character NJ1. The second hold icon h12 has not changed in the display mode of the look-ahead notice. As a result, while maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the second hold icon, the display mode of the variation icon h0 may change to increase the reliability of the jackpot for the variation. In some cases, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

After that, FIG. 478 (c-3) shows how the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the notice that the display color of the variable icon h0 changes from white to green is announced. In other words, the predetermined light emitting means (LED built in the family crest accessory 224E, LED provided at the special drawing start port, etc.) is changed before the notice that the display mode of the variable icon is changed is given. It can be said that the mode is changed according to the mode after the change of h0.

After that, as shown in FIG. 478 (c-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased, and the variable icon h0 is displayed again easily visually. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a voice "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed. The audio output may be performed after the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed after the audio output has been performed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be displayed. The mode change and the audio output may be performed at the same time.

FIG. 479 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. FIG. 479 shows how the display mode of the hold icon is changed when the UI unit is out of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 479 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and a variable icon h0 is placed in the center of the UI unit on the hold display frame FL1. It is displayed in a housed manner, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 479 (a), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is the default display mode and does not overlap with the decorative symbol. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the balloon portion TT2 is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi on the left side of the display screen. A plurality of question marks are displayed side by side on the balloon portion TT2, suggesting that the UI portion FO animation in which the UI portion including the hold display frame FL1 is framed out, which will be described later, is performed. That is, it can be said that the display of the balloon portion TT2 shown in FIG. 479 (a) is related to a predetermined effect in which the hold display frame FL1 is hidden by the frame out.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 479 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display unit ST1, and the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the character of the lord is on the stage, and at the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display and the special figure of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed. The fourth symbol of 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

FIG. 479 (b) shows a state in which the UI unit FO animation is performed and the UI unit is framed out to the lower part of the display screen together with the hold display frame FL1. This UI unit FO animation is performed, for example, when shifting to a darkening effect or SP reach.

After that, as shown in FIG. 479 (c), the ninja character NJ1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the shuriken SH1 is thrown toward the position where the second hold icon h12 is displayed. Is being done. That is, in this effect example, even when the hold display frame FL1 is not displayed, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed. As shown in FIG. 479 (c), the ninja character NJ1 overlaps with the decorative pattern and also overlaps with the balloon portion TT2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 479 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 reaches the position where the second hold icon h12 is displayed, and the explosive effect EF2 is displayed. There is.

After that, FIG. 479 (e) shows how the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes from white to green. That is, a notice is given that the display color of the second hold icon h12 will change from white to green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 479 (f), the effect EF2 is erased in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but the second hold icon h12 is still displayed because the UI unit is still in the frame-out state. It has not been. On the other hand, a voice "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

In FIG. 479 (g), an animation in which the UI unit is framed in (UI unit FI animation) is performed, and a state in which the UI unit FI animation is completed is shown. When the UI unit FI animation is completed, the UI unit is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from white to green.

In this production example, the UI unit includes the hold display frame FL1 and the UI unit is framed out, and during this time, the display mode of the hold icon is changed. As shown in'), the UI unit may be framed out while leaving the hold display frame FL1. Here, since the production example shown in FIG. 479 (a') is the same as that in FIG. 479 (a), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the figure (b') following FIG. 479 (a'), it is shown that the UI unit FO animation is completed. As shown in FIG. 479 (b'), in this production example, when the UI unit FO animation is performed, the UI unit is framed out to the lower part of the display screen, but the hold display frame FL1 is displayed without being framed out. The state is maintained.

In FIG. 479 (c'), the expansion animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and then the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1 in the hold display frame FL1. It is shown. That is, as shown in FIG. 479 (c'), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the shuriken SH1 is displayed by the second hold icon h12. The production of throwing at the position where it was done is being performed. That is, in this effect example, even when the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode is not displayed, the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed by the ninja character NJ1.

FIG. 480 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 480 (a-1) to 480 (a-7), it is shown that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon and the display of the notice icon are performed at the same time. FIGS. 480 (b-1) to 480 (b-5) show how the hold icon changes to the look-ahead notice display mode.

Since the effect example shown in FIG. 480 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 471 (f) and described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 480 (a-2) following FIG. 480 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1 is shown. The ninja character NJ1 has a part overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and it is difficult to see the character NJ1 as compared with the state where the family crest character 224E does not partially overlap.

Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and it is shown that the character of the lord is about to throw the bomb icon I61.

After that, FIG. 480 (a-3) shows how the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, in the ninja character NJ1, the part that does not overlap with the family crest character 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a look-ahead notice.

On the other hand, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61. The timing to start throwing the bomb icon I61 may be the same as the timing when the ninja character NJ1 starts throwing the shuriken SH1, or the timing before the throwing of the shuriken SH1. It may be the timing after the throwing of the shuriken SH1 is started. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, FIG. 480 (a-4) shows that the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12.

On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 480 (a-4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The bomb icon I61 overlaps with the first decorative pattern, and also overlaps with the grandfather's character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3. In other words, the first decorative symbol overlaps the bomb icon I61, and the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon TT3 also overlap the bomb icon I61. The bomb icon I61 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol, or may be overlapped with the grandfather character GY1 or the balloon portion TT3.

After that, as shown in FIG. 480 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. It is done.

On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 480 (a-5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord bursts. The timing at which the bomb icon I61 bursts may be the same as the timing at which the effect EF2 is displayed, the timing before the effect EF2 is displayed, or after the effect EF2 is displayed. It may be the timing of. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, in FIG. 480 (a-6), the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes from white to green, and the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 480 (a-6), the exploding bomb icon I61 is changed to the swordsman's notice icon I62, and it is announced that it will shift to the swordsman reach. Here, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, a voice notifying the fact may be output from the speaker 120. Further, the timing at which the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes may be the same as the timing at which the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes to green, or before the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes to green. It may be the timing of, or it may be the timing after the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes to green. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 480 (a-7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Easy to display. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a voice "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 480 (a-7), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display unit TT1 while being reduced in size, and then the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord. The throwing animation ends. It should be noted that the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be notified by voice output that it has been placed on the tutorial display unit TT1. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, compared with the state where the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. Then, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. In other words, according to this production example, it can be said that the swordsman's notice icon I62 may overlap the tutorial display unit TT1 as a part of the hold display frame. As described above, in this production example, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, so that the player can easily draw attention to the tutorial display part TT1 display and the swordsman's notice icon I62 display. You may be able to. In addition, it may be possible to notice the existence of the tutorial, or to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the explanation of the effects that may occur in the future.

The production example shown in FIG. 480 (b-1) is the same as that in FIG. 470 (a) except that the characters "Panda is the master of the lord" are displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. The description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 2B following FIG. 480 (b-1), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the character of the lord is the bomb icon. It is shown that I61 is about to be thrown.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 480 (b-3), the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61, and the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown how to do it.

After that, as shown in FIG. 480 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord reaches the second hold icon h12, and the bomb icon I61 bursts. It is shown that it is. The display of the exploding bomb icon I61 covers the entire second hold icon h12 and also overlaps a part of the first hold icon h11.

After that, as shown in FIG. 480 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ruptured bomb icon I61 is erased, and the second is compared with the state in which the ruptured bomb icon I61 is not erased. The hold icon h12 of is displayed again easily visually. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the look-ahead notice (display mode blinking in white). As described above, the mode of changing the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the hold icon is not limited to the time when the hold is increased, but may be performed at an appropriate timing after the hold increase. Further, as in this effect example, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed by another change effect. Further, the effect of changing the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the hold icon described above may be performed, for example, in a state where the UI unit is framed out.

FIG. 481 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIG. 481 shows a state in which the sub-display devices (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) are moved while performing an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon.

Since the effect example shown in FIG. 481 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 471 (d) and described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 481 (a-2) following FIG. 481 (a-1), it is shown that the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is erased for each stage.

After that, in FIG. 481 (a-3), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The situation is shown. At this time, each part of the grandfather character GY1, the balloon unit TT3, the tutorial display unit TT1, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon unit Compared with the state where each part of the TT3, the tutorial display unit TT1 and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is difficult to see each of them.

After that, FIG. 481 (a-4) shows that the third decorative symbol display device 208N is continuously moving. Then, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the hold display frame FL2 is displayed at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h00 is displayed in the frame. The hold display frame FL2 and the variable icon h00 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N are larger in size than the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. .. That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is an extended display of the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 481 (a-4), the overlap with the old character GY1 was eliminated, but each part of the balloon portion TT3 and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is still displayed as the third decorative symbol. It overlaps with device 208N. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 481 (a-4), each part of the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 accommodated therein and the balloon portion TT2 are overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is said that it is difficult to see when compared with the state in which the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 housed therein and each part of the balloon portion TT2 are not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ..

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 481 (a-5), the center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is aligned with the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the movement of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is completed. Then, all of the reserved display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol overlap with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, together with the middle symbol and the reserved display frame FL1. The variable icon h0 becomes invisible when viewed from the front. Further, a part of the first hold icon h11, the balloon part TT2, and the balloon part TT3 is also overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a part of the first hold icon h11, the balloon part TT2, and the balloon part TT3 is overlapped. It is difficult to see when compared with the state where the third decorative symbol display device 208N does not overlap.

After that, as shown in FIG. 481 (a-6), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, an expansion animation of the hold display frame FL2 is performed, the hold display frame FL2 expands upward, and the ninja's extension portion is covered by the ninja. It is shown that the character NJ2 appears. That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL2 in which the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is expanded and displayed is further expanded and displayed. The ninja character NJ2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is larger in size than the ninja character NJ1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be the same. And may be made smaller.

Then, as shown in FIG. 481 (a-7), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the ninja character NJ2 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second notice icon h12 that gives a look-ahead notice. The production display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side of the conversation notice displayed by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi or the character GY1 of the grandfather, or may be displayed on the back side. .. It can be said that the production by the ninja character NJ2 is performed in the expanded portion of the reserved display frame FL2 after the expansion. In other words, it can be said that the ninja character NJ2, which is an example of the effect display, is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL2. The effect of the ninja character NJ2 may function as a pre-reading notice or a change notice. Further, the effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect performed in the expanded hold display frame FL2 (the effect by the ninja character NJ2), but it can be said that the effect is performed outside the hold display frame FL2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 481 (a-8), the shuriken SH1 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N so as to straddle the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and moves toward the second hold icon h12. The situation is shown.

After that, as shown in FIG. 481 (a-9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. It is done. A part of this effect EF2 overlaps with the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, FIG. 481 (a-10) shows how the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes from white to green. Further, the LEDs arranged around the third decorative symbol display device 208N emit green light, and the display color of the second hold icon h12 is changed from white to green by these light emitting means. To do. The timing of the change in the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E may be the same as the timing when the LED provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N may have the same timing. The timing may be after the provided LED emits green light, or the timing may be before the LED provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 481 (a-11), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Easy to display. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, it may be notified by voice output that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 481 (a-12), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the hold display frame FL2 is erased together with the ninja character NJ2. In this case, for example, it may be performed by an animation framed out from the third decorative symbol display device 208N, may be erased by fading out, or may be erased suddenly.

After that, FIG. 481 (a-13) shows how the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves to the right and moves toward the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 481 (a-13), the overlap of the first hold icon h11 is eliminated, and the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the third decorative symbol. A part of the device 208N is overlapped with the device 208N, and a part of the device 208N is visible together with the variable icon h0. Further, the medium symbol of the first decorative symbol is also in a state of being partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which is one comparison with the state of not partially overlapping with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. While the portion is visible, the right symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which makes it difficult to see as compared with the non-overlapping state.

After that, FIG. 481 (a-14) shows how the third decorative symbol display device 208N is in the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 481 (a-14), the overlap was eliminated for each display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which had been overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that they overlapped. Compared to the state in which is not resolved, both displays are in a state where they are easy to see.

After that, FIG. 481 (a-15) shows that the LED that was emitting light around the third decorative symbol display device 208N is turned off. It should be noted that the light may be turned on in the default light emitting mode (for example, a light emitting mode that lights in white) without turning off the light. On the other hand, the family crest accessory 224E still emits green light corresponding to the display color of the second hold icon h12.

In this production example, one of the two sub-display devices (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) (third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as the first decorative symbol. The display device 208L was moved so as to overlap with each other to change the display mode of the hold icon. For example, as shown in FIG. 481 (b), both of the two sub-display devices were used. It may be moved to change the display mode of the hold icon.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 481 (b), when the hold icon display mode is changed, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are used as the first decorative symbol. Move to a position close to each other in the center of the display device 208L. Then, the hold display frame FL2 is expanded and displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the lower part of the hold display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The variable icon h00 is displayed on the screen, and the ninja character NJ2 is displayed above the variable icon h00. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N provide a balloon portion TT2, a balloon portion TT3, a first hold icon h11, a second hold icon h12, a hold display frame FL1, and a variable icon. All of h0 are overlapped, and a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the character CH1 of Princess Chibi are overlapped.

FIG. 482 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIG. 482, instead of the two sub-display devices described above, only one sub-display device (only one sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is provided, and the display mode of the hold icon is changed in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P). Is shown.

FIG. 482 is different from the above-described embodiment in that it includes a decorative symbol display device 208 as a main display device and a sub-decorative symbol display device 208P as a sub display device. The sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper end edge of the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P overlaps the front side of a part of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. Then, as shown in FIG. 482 (a), the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area are arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, and the tutorial display unit TT1 is below them. Is displayed, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, while the second hold icon h12 is in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the panda and the lord is explained. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the balloon portion TT2 is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi on the left side of the display screen. On the balloon portion TT2, the line "Where is the old man?" Is displayed. Further, on the right side of the display screen, the balloon portion TT3 is displayed together with the grandfather character GY1. On the balloon TT3, the line "Here" is displayed. That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 482 (a), the conversation notice is given. Although the blowout portion TT2 and the blowout portion TT3 are overlapped with the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols may be overlapped with the blowout portions TT2 and TT3. Further, in the upper right portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 482 (a), the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

After that, FIG. 482 (b) shows that the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and the ninja character NJ2 appears in the expanded portion. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P extends from the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P to the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended part of FL1. Here, a part of the balloon part TT2 is overlapped with the expanded hold display frame FL1, and a part of the balloon part TT2 is visually recognized as compared with the state where it is not overlapped with the expanded hold display frame FL1. It is said to be difficult. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 482 (b), the thrown shuriken SH1 is displayed on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P. It is shown that the player is moving toward the displayed second hold icon h12.

After that, FIG. 482 (c) shows that the thrown shuriken SH1 moves from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P and heads toward the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 482 (d), in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. There is. This effect EF2 overlaps a part of the first hold icon h11 displayed adjacently.

After that, as shown in FIG. 482 (e), in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed again easily visually as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Will be done. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, it may be notified by voice output that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

FIG. 483 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIGS. 483 (a-1) to 483 (a-6) show that the display mode of the hold icon is changed when the error is displayed. FIG. 483 (b) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the effect display is performed over a plurality of decorative symbol display devices, and FIG. 483 shows. (C-1) to (c-3) show that the display mode of the hold icon is changed by operating the effect button 136, and FIGS. 483 (d-1) to 483 (d-1). FIG. 3 (d-3) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the effect button effect is being performed, which prompts the user to operate the effect button 136.

The production example shown in FIG. 483 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 471 (d) except that an error is displayed. Therefore, only the different points will be described in detail. Detailed explanations of others will be omitted.

In FIG. 483 (a-1), when the lower plate is full, the characters "Please pull out the ball" are displayed to notify that the lower plate is full. It is shown that the tongue error display ER is displayed. The lower plate full tank error display ER is an example of an error display in the present embodiment, and other error displays include, for example, a door opening display for notifying that the front frame door 106 is open. Since such an error display needs to be promptly notified to the player, it is displayed in preference to other displays. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 483 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the lower plate full tank error display ER overlaps a part of the balloon portion TT2. It should be noted that such an error display is continuously displayed until the error is resolved.

After that, as shown in FIG. 483 (a-2), it is shown that the family crest accessory 224E rises from the initial position and overlaps with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 483 (a-2), since the family crest accessory 224E is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a part of the lower plate full tank error display ER is overlapped with the family crest accessory 224E. It is said that it is difficult to see when compared with the state where a part of the lower plate full tank error display ER is not overlapped with the family crest accessory 224E.

After that, as shown in FIG. 483 (a-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the expansion animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 expands upward, and the hold display frame FL1 expands upward, and the crest accessory 224E It is shown that it appears above. In this production example, since the error display is displayed with priority over the hold display frame FL1, a part of the hold display frame FL1 overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ER, and a part of the hold display frame FL1. Is difficult to see when compared with the state where the lower plate full tank error display ER does not overlap.

After that, as shown in FIG. 483 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1 is shown. It should be noted that a part of the ninja character NJ1 overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ER, and it is difficult to see when compared with the state where a part of the ninja character NJ1 does not overlap with the lower plate full tank error display ER. It is said that.

FIG. 483 (a-5) shows how the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, in the ninja character NJ1, the part that does not overlap with the family crest character 224E expands. However, since a part of the ninja character NJ1 still overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ER, the ninja character NJ1 is compared with the state where a part of the ninja character NJ1 does not overlap with the lower plate full tank error display ER. Character NJ1 is difficult to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a look-ahead notice.

After that, FIG. 483 (a-6) shows that the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, the overlapping state of the family crest accessory 224E with respect to the hold display frame FL1, the variable icon h0, and the ninja character NJ1 is eliminated. However, since the lower plate full tank error is still continuing, the lower plate full tank error display ER is still displayed, and the ninja character NJ1 displayed in a part of the hold display frame FL1 and the extended part of the hold display frame FL1. A part of it overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ER. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12.

In FIG. 483 (b), the notice display YK is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and shows a state of scrolling to the left. Has been done. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward and displayed, and the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion, so that the display mode of the hold icon is changed. The situation is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 483 (b), the second hold icon h12 is the display mode of the look-ahead notice. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the character display of "enemy invades" is displayed, and the content related to the notice display YK is displayed. In this effect example, since the effect display of the display mode of the hold icon is displayed with priority over the notice display YK, a part of the notice display YK is overlapped with the extended display frame FL1.

In FIG. 483 (c-1), as an example of the display mode of the look-ahead notice, the second hold icon h12 is shown as a button hold icon which is a display mode imitating the effect button 136. In this production example, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather are not displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a hidden state. Further, although the button image 136a is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a may be displayed. Further, since this button hold icon is displayed at a position separated from the hold display frame FL1, it can be said that the display does not overlap even when the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged and displayed. Further, the display mode of the hold icon of the button may be displayed when the hold is increased, or may be changed from another display mode (for example, the default display mode) after the hold increase.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 483 (c-2), the second hold icon h12 is changed from the button hold icon as shown in FIG. 483 (c-3). It changes to the hold icon of the display mode of the character of the lord. It should be noted that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted on condition that the symbol is changing, and it cannot be accepted while the symbol stop display is displayed, but the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted even while the symbol stop display is displayed. May be good.

FIG. 483 (d-1) shows how the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the button effect is being performed. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the center, and a remaining time display bar indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 136 is displayed below the button image 136a. It is displayed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a button effect is performed. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward and displayed, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion, and the display mode of the hold icon is changed. .. In this effect example, since the effect display that changes the display mode of the hold icon is displayed with priority over the button effect, the button image 136a and a part of the remaining time display bar are expanded and displayed on the hold display frame FL1. It is overlapped. Further, while the button effect is being performed, the first decorative pattern is not displayed. Therefore, it can be said that the button effect is an effect that does not overlap with the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is used as the button effect. It can also be said that the production does not overlap. At this time, when the above-mentioned error display is performed, it is displayed with priority over the button effect and the hold display frame FL1. Further, when the button hold icon described above is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the button image 136a and the remaining time display bar, and is displayed on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but the button image 136a is displayed. And may be displayed on the back side of the remaining time display bar, or may be displayed on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 483 (d-2), the cut-in in which the character of the lord is displayed up as shown in FIG. 483 (d-3) is displayed. It may be displayed. By performing this cut-in display, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot reliability is high. In this effect example, since the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is prioritized over the cut-in effect, a part of the cut-in image is overlapped with the expanded display frame FL1. .. At this time, when the above-mentioned error display is performed, the cut-in display and the hold display frame FL1 are displayed with priority. Further, when the button hold icon described above is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the cut-in display and on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but on the back side of the cut-in display. It may be displayed, or it may be displayed on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

FIG. 484 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a symbol variation display applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 484 (a-1) to (a-5) do not include a sub display device, and the effect display is performed only by the decorative symbol display device 208 as the main display device. It is shown that it is configured to be used, and FIGS. 484 (b-1) to (b-2) show a state when an error display is performed. Further, FIG. 484 (c) shows that the display positions of the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1, and FIGS. 484 (d-1) to FIG. 484 (d). In -2), it is shown that the hold display frame is displayed in the hold icon display area.

FIG. 484 (a-1) is different from the above-described embodiment in that it includes only the decorative symbol display device 208 as the main display device and does not include the sub display device. Then, as shown in FIG. 484 (a-1), the UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol is displayed at the upper left of the display screen. In the upper right of the above, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208, and a Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and a general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208.

As shown in FIG. 484 (a-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2", and the fluctuation is performed. In addition, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the UI unit, the hold display frame FL1 in which the variable icon h0 is housed is displayed, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden.

After that, as shown in FIG. 484 (a-2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 move from the left and right of the display screen toward the center. In this production example, images imitating the sliding doors are used as the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and the wipe display is such that the sliding doors are closed. Here, the wipe refers to a video effect that is displayed by interrupting the next image to be displayed from a part of the display screen when switching images. There are various types of wipes, but any technique can be applied. In this production example, the wipe display is performed by the wipe images WP1 and WP2 after the shaking fluctuation is started by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, but the wipe display is performed at the timing when the shaking fluctuation is completed and the confirmation is displayed. May be done. Further, for example, it may be performed when the stage is changed, or it may be performed when shifting to the super reach effect, and it can be performed at an appropriate timing. The wipe images WP1 and WP2 overlap with the UI portion and the first decorative symbol, while overlapping with the second decorative symbol, the second hold number display, and the fourth decorative symbol. At the timing shown in FIG. 484 (a-2), the two hold icons h11 and h12 and the hold display frame FL1 displayed in the hold icon display area do not overlap the wipe images WP1 and WP2. The variable icon h0 is deleted at the timing when the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are displayed. Here, the timing at which the variable icon h0 is deleted may be a timing before the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed, or at the same timing as the timing at which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. It may be present, or it may be a timing after the timing at which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

FIG. 484 (a-3) shows that the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are further moving toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 484 (a-3), the two hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold icon display area overlap the wipe image WP1, but the hold display frame FL1 is the wipe image WP1. , Does not overlap with WP2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 484 (a-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire display screen is covered with the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and a state in which the display is confirmed with a lost symbol is displayed. Therefore, the entire hold display frame FL1 is in a state of being overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Further, the second decorative symbol displayed on the upper left of the display screen is a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" according to the combination of the decorative symbols displayed when the first decorative symbol fluctuates. The stop display is displayed, and the special figure 1 and 4 symbols are also stopped and displayed with a lost symbol.

After that, when the hold is exhausted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are framed out in the left-right direction of the display screen, respectively. Wipe. As a result, the UI unit is made visible, and the hold display frame FL1 is also made visible. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the special diagram 1 fourth symbol have started variable display, respectively. At this time, for example, by the hold movement animation, the first hold icon displayed as the first hold icon h11 moves to the hold display frame FL1 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. Also,
The second hold icon displayed as the second hold icon h12 also moves to the display position of the first hold icon and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the character display of "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed.

In FIGS. 484 (b-1) to (b-2), it is shown that the wipe display is performed while the error display is displayed. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 484 (b-1) to (b-2), FIGS. 484 (a-3) to FIG. Since it is the same as a-4), only the different points will be described in detail, and the other points will be omitted in detail. As shown in FIGS. 484 (b-1) to (b-2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the above-mentioned lower plate full tank error display ER overlaps the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Has been done. Since such an error display needs to be promptly notified to the player, it is displayed in preference to other displays. Therefore, even in the case shown in FIG. 484 (b-1), the display of the lower plate full tank error display ER is prioritized over the wipe images WP1 and WP2. As shown in FIG. 484 (b-2), even when the symbol is confirmed and displayed, the lower plate full tank error display ER is not erased and is displayed overlapping the wipe images WP1 and WP2. .. The error display such as the lower plate full tank error display ER may be overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2.

FIG. 484 (c) shows that the display positions of the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1. Here, FIG. 484 (c) is the same as FIG. 471 (i) except that the display positions of the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed. A detailed description of the above will be omitted. In the production example shown in FIG. 484 (c), for example, when the expansion animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the variable icon h0 moves upward along with the expansion of the hold display frame FL1 from the back side of the variable icon h0. A production will be performed in which the ninja character NJ1 appears. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that the display position of the variable icon h0 is changed when the hold display frame FL1 is expanded.

In FIG. 484 (d-1), the hold display frame FL4 surrounding the second hold icon h12, which is the target of the look-ahead notice, is displayed, and the hold display frame FL4 expands upward, and the ninja's extension portion is covered with the hold display frame FL4. It is shown that the character NJ3 is displayed. In the production example shown in FIG. 484 (d-1), the hold display frame FL4 surrounding the second hold icon h12 is displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 does not display the hold display frame FL4. Since it is the same as b), only the different points will be described in detail, and the other points will be omitted in detail. As shown in FIG. 484 (d-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL4 is displayed so as to surround the second hold icon h12, which is a display mode of the look-ahead notice. The hold display frame FL4 is framed in from the lower part of the display screen and moved to a position surrounding the second hold icon h12 in a default display mode having a size matching the size of the second hold icon h12, for example. After that, the extended animation displays that the hold display frame FL4 is expanded upward in the same manner as described above. Then, the ninja character NJ3 is displayed in the extended portion of the extended hold display frame FL4, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as described above. It should be noted that the time when both the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL1 and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL4 are performed. May overlap, or the times when both productions are performed may not overlap.

Further, when the symbol is stopped and displayed and the next symbol variation display is started while the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed, as shown in FIG. 484 (d-2), the symbol is stopped and displayed. The hold display frame FL4 also moves in accordance with the movement of the hold icon. In this case, for example, when the symbol stop display is performed, the expanded hold display frame FL4 is reduced to change to the default display mode, and then the symbol is confirmed and displayed. Then, the hold display frame FL4 in the default display mode also moves in accordance with the movement of the second hold icon h12 by the movement animation, and the symbol variation display is started. After that, the hold display frame FL4 is expanded upward by the expansion animation. The hold display frame FL4 may be moved in such an manner. Further, at the time of the symbol stop display, the hold display frame FL4 may be deleted once, and the hold display frame FL4 may be displayed again after the next symbol variation display is started. Further, the display of the hold display frame FL4 may be maintained in an expanded state even when the symbol is stopped, and the hold display frame FL4 may also be moved according to the movement display by the movement animation of the second hold icon h12.

FIG. 485 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the expansion effect of the hold display frame. Here, FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a-4) show how the tutorial display unit TT6 as a hold display frame is expanded, and FIGS. 485 (b-1) to FIG. In b-5), it is shown that the hold display frame in which the hold icon is housed is expanded and displayed to change the display mode of the hold icon.

As shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is held in the center of the UI unit. It is displayed in a mode housed in FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is the default display mode and does not overlap with the decorative symbol. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT6 extends in the left-right direction along the lower end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is arranged below the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area. .. Then, on the tutorial display unit TT6, the characters "Panda is the master of the lord" are displayed, and it is shown that the explanation is displayed. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT6 may function as a hold display frame.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed. In this production example, the button image 136a is not displayed.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the character of the lord is on the stage, and at the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and special figure 1 are shown. And the fourth symbol of special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

In FIG. 485 (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded upward by pushing up the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area, and the range of the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded. ing. The tutorial display unit TT6 after expansion is configured to include the tutorial display unit TT6 before expansion. In addition, the extended tutorial display unit TT6 has started the drink confrontation reach production. At this time, the first decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the variable display is continued. Therefore, in this production example, it can be said that the area where the display of the decorative pattern is not obstructed is expanded. In other words, by moving the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area, the lower area (lower area) of the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area expands. The display performed in the lower area is a display that does not overlap with the variable display of decorative patterns, for example, the display of lines such as conversation notices, the display of notices, and the production of changes in the display of hold icons. It can be said. For example, in addition to the first decorative symbol, a mini decorative symbol may be displayed in the lower left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this case, the tutorial display unit TT6 is displayed even after the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded. It may be displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the characters "SP development by victory" are displayed, and the content of the effect to be performed when the drinker confrontation reach effect is won is notified. In the drink confrontation reach production, a confrontation is performed between the main character and the grandfather, and if the grandfather gets drunk, it is predicted that the main character will win and will develop into SP reach. When the drink confrontation reach effect is started, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area may be hidden, or the hold display frame FL1 may be displayed and the hold icon display area may be hidden. You may. Further, in this production example, the enlarged tutorial display unit TT6 does not display the explanation display displayed in the reduced tutorial display unit TT6, but the enlarged tutorial display unit TT6 also displays the explanation display. It is also good. In this case, an explanation display different from the explanation display displayed on the reduced tutorial display unit TT6 (for example, an explanation display such as "When oolong tea appears in the drink confrontation reach production, it is extremely hot!") Is displayed, and the reduced tutorial display is displayed. The explanation display displayed in the section TT6 may not be displayed in the enlarged tutorial display section TT6, and conversely, the explanation display displayed in the enlarged tutorial display section TT6 may be displayed in the reduced tutorial display section TT6. It may not be done.

FIG. 485 (a-3) shows how the drinker confrontation reach production is continuously performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-4), when shifting to SP reach, the grandfather gets drunk and the hero's lord wins the production display. Specifically, after the production display in which the main character's lord has won (hereinafter, may be referred to as "production display of success pattern") is performed, the UI part is erased and SP reach (for example, FIG. 457, etc.) is performed. The above-mentioned swordsman reach, etc.) is started. The type of SP reach to be developed may be one predetermined type of reach, or any one of a plurality of types may be selected and performed. Further, when the UI unit is deleted, the hold icons h11 to h14 and the variable icon h0 may also be deleted, and a part of the configuration of the UI unit (for example, the hold display frame FL1 and the pedestal for displaying the hold icon, etc.) may be deleted. ) May be left to maintain the display of the hold icons h11 to h14 and the variable icon h0. The types of icons to be deleted may include, for example, the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the notice icon when the notice icon is displayed. Moreover, any one or more of these may be considered as an icon, or all of them may be considered as an icon. Further, the icon may be hidden even when the tutorial display unit TT6 is not enlarged. For example, the icon may be hidden when shifting to SP reach. Then, when the SP reach is completed, the UI section is displayed again. At this time, for example, it is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 485 (a-1). In this case, for example, when a display suggesting a loss is performed in SP reach, a loss wipe is displayed after the display is performed so that the display is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 485 (a-1). You may. On the other hand, if the result of the loss is displayed without shifting to SP reach, as shown in Fig. 485 (a-4'), the hero's lord is drunk and the hero's lord is defeated by the grandfather. (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "effect display of failure pattern".). After that, after the tutorial display unit TT6 is animated to shrink downward, the UI unit returns to the state shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the variable display of the decorative symbol may continue and the state may shift to the reach state, and then the SP reach state may be shifted. In addition, a plurality of types of success pattern production displays may be prepared. For example, when the production display in which the hero's lord wins is displayed as described above, the hero's lord also shifts to SP reach. When the effect display that is a draw without getting drunk is displayed, the extended tutorial display unit TT6 may be animated to shrink, and the normal reach may be started after the reduced display mode is reached. .. Further, the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 485 (a-1) may be configured so that the effect display performed by the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 485 (a-2) is not performed. , The tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 485 (a-2) may be configured so that the explanation display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 485 (a-1) is not performed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 485 (a-2), the hold icon and the variable icon may be hidden.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a-4) or (a-4'), the tutorial display unit TT6 is enlarged to provide a display mode in which the UI unit is expanded. In addition, the hold icons h11 to h14 and the variable icons h0 are also moved upward as the tutorial display unit TT6 expands upward, but when the UI unit has an expanded display mode, it is reserved. The icons h11 to h14 and the variable icon h0 may be hidden. As a display mode in this case, for example, an animation (extended animation) in which the tutorial display unit TT6 expands upward after the hold icons h11 to h14 and the variable icon h0 are erased may be performed, or the extended animation is completed. After that, the hold icons h11 to h14 and the variable icon h0 may be deleted, or the hold icons h11 to h14 and the variable icon h0 may be deleted during the execution of the extended animation. If the hold increases during the execution of the extended animation, the extended animation continues without starting the animation in which the hold icon increases (hold increase animation), but the hold increase animation while the extended animation is running. May be started.

Further, the drink confrontation reach effect may be an effect performed only in the extended tutorial display unit TT6, or may be performed in an area other than the tutorial display unit TT6.

In addition, the production example shown in FIGS. 483 (a-1) to (a-4) or (a-4') is executed in one variable display of the decorative symbol, but for example, look-ahead. As a notice, the tutorial display unit TT6 may be maintained in an expanded state over a plurality of fluctuations. In addition, as a look-ahead notice, there may be a case where the tutorial display unit TT6 in the reduced state performs a fanning effect that shows the expansion of the tutorial display unit TT6 a plurality of times.

As shown in FIG. 485 (b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the UI unit UI2 in this production example, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, each of which constitutes a hold display frame, and is configured such that one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 485 (b-1), four hold icons are housed in each frame in the hold icon display area, and among the first hold icons h11 to the fourth hold icon h14. The second hold icon h12 is a display mode of the look-ahead notice (for example, a display mode that lights up in blue), and the other hold icons are the default display modes. Further, a variable icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is housed, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area during the symbol variation display. Here, the area in which the variable icon h0 is displayed may also be included in the UI unit UI2. Further, a tutorial display unit TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 485 (b-1), the character display of "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT7, suggesting that the notice effect is performed. The tutorial display unit TT7 may display the explanation. Neither the variable icon h0 nor the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 overlaps the decorative symbol.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen. In this production example, the stage name display unit and the button image 136a are not displayed.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the character of the lord is on the stage, and at the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and special figure 1 are shown. And the fourth symbol of special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 485 (b-1), the family crest accessory 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 485 (b-2), the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The enlarged display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually expands. At the timing shown in FIG. 485 (b-2), the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is housed is displayed in an expanded manner. At the timing shown in FIG. 485 (b-2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 485 (b-3), the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E, which was emitting light in blue, changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is foretold to change from blue to green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 485 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase the expectation for the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the hold corresponding to the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 485 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced to return to the default display mode. The reduced display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces the display area. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed in the expanded hold display frame.

Subsequently, other effect patterns performed in association with the extended effect of the tutorial display unit TT6 in the UI unit shown in FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a-4) will be described. In the following description, the mode of the UI unit in which the tutorial display unit TT6 is reduced as shown in FIG. 485 (a-1) may be referred to as the reduced mode of the UI unit, and as shown in FIG. 485 (a-2). The mode of the UI section in which the tutorial display section TT6 is extended may be referred to as an extended mode of the UI section. Further, the effect pattern described below is applied to an embodiment provided with three decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N). Alternatively, it may be applied to an embodiment in which a sub display device 208P is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be applied to an embodiment in which the display device is configured by one decorative symbol display device 208. Good. Further, for example, a display device separate from the decorative symbol display device 208, such as the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 285, is provided, and a timer advance notice effect is performed in place of the decorative symbol display device 208 or together with the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be configured as follows. It should be noted that the effect performed in the effect pattern accompanied by the extended effect of the tutorial display unit TT6 in the UI unit described below is any effect pattern described so far (particularly, the effect pattern shown in FIGS. 291 to 324). Although it can be applied, a typical production pattern among them will be appropriately shown and described below.

(First production pattern)
In the first effect pattern, the mini game is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT6 in the reduced mode of the UI unit shown in FIG. 485 (a-1). The mini-game played here may be any of the above-mentioned mini-games, but in this production pattern, for example, the target mini-games shown in FIGS. 296 (a3) to (a4) are played. Alternatively, the boring chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to 312 (a6) may be played, or the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7) may be played. .. When the target mini-game is played, for example, as shown in FIG. 296 (a3), the target TGT is divided into a plurality of areas (for example, four areas), and the character MC1 of the lord releases it. When the arrow hits the hit area, the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded, and the drink confrontation reach effect shown in FIG. 91 (a-2) is started. On the other hand, when an arrow hits the lost area (in the case of a failure pattern), the tutorial display unit TT6 is not expanded and the UI unit remains in the reduced mode, and the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Further, in the boring chance game and the golf game, when the mini game is successful (in the case of the success pattern; in the boring chance game, when the strike display shown in FIG. 312 (a5) is derived). In a golf game, when the display of the cup-in shown in FIG. 312 (b6) is derived), the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded and the drinker confrontation reach production is started, while when it fails (failure). In the case of a pattern; in a boring chance game, if an indication that an infallible pin remains and misses a strike is derived, or in a golf game, an indication that a cup-in fails is derived). , The tutorial display unit TT6 is not expanded, and the UI unit remains in the reduced mode, and the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the first production pattern, when the result of the mini game is the result of success (success pattern), the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded so that the UI unit is changed from the reduced mode to the expanded mode. The tutorial display unit TT6 may be expanded to change the UI unit from the reduced mode to the expanded mode regardless of the result of the game. That is, even if the result of the mini game is the result of failure (failure pattern), the tutorial The display unit TT6 may be expanded and the UI unit may be changed from a reduced mode to an expanded mode. The position of the mini-game in this case may be, for example, an example of a big hit notice. Further, before the mini-game ends, the UI unit may start changing from the reduced mode to the expanded mode regardless of the result of the mini-game. Further, even when a success pattern is performed in the mini game, the UI part does not change from the reduced mode to the expanded mode in the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed, and the enlarged tutorial display unit TT6 produces a drink confrontation reach. May not be started.

Further, in the first production pattern, when the result of success is derived as a result of the mini game, the tutorial display unit TT6 may be in a reach state and develop into SP reach without expanding. .. As the SP reach developed in this case, a type of SP reach different from the above-mentioned swordsman reach (for example, ultra long reach, triple line reach, amedori reach, etc.) is performed. This SP reach may be an SP reach that is performed only when the result of success is derived as a result of the mini game. In addition, SP reach may be prepared, which may be performed without going through the mini game or via the mini game. In this case, when the SP reach is started without going through the mini game. Rather than making it easier for the jackpot symbol mode to be confirmed and displayed when the SP reach is started via the mini game. In addition, the same SP reach as the SP reach (swordsman reach) that starts when the drinker confrontation reach production is won may be performed. Further, after the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded and the UI unit is expanded, the SP reach may be produced in the enlarged tutorial display unit TT6.

Further, when a mini game is played in the tutorial display unit TT6 when the UI unit is in the reduced mode and the result of success is derived as a result, the UI unit changes from the reduced mode to the extended mode, and the extended mode is used. The tutorial display unit TT6 in the UI unit may produce a drink confrontation reach, and the main character may always win and move to SP reach according to the result of the success of the mini game.

Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 485 (a-1) to FIG. 485 (a-4), the drink confrontation reach effect is performed after the UI unit is changed from the reduced mode to the expanded mode, but the UI unit is changed from the reduced mode. The mini-game described above may be played in the expanded tutorial display section TT6 instead of the reach production, or the mini-game may not be played in the expanded tutorial display section TT6. The reach effect may always be performed.

Here, when the UI section is expanded and the tutorial display section TT6 is used to perform a drink confrontation reach effect or a mini game, the success pattern effect display is displayed in the drinker confrontation reach effect. The symbol variation display that is being executed when the success pattern production display is performed in the mini-game may be easier to confirm in the jackpot symbol mode than the symbol variation display that is being executed when it is performed. In this case, for example, the success pattern is displayed in the mini-game rather than the SP reach (for example, the swordsman reach) that shifts after the success pattern is displayed in the drinker confrontation reach effect. When the SP reach (for example, ultra long reach, triple line reach, amedori reach, etc.) to be transferred later is performed, the jackpot symbol mode may be more easily displayed. Also, even if the type of SP reach that shifts after the success pattern is displayed in the mini-game is the same as the type of SP reach that shifts after the success pattern is displayed in the drinker confrontation reach production. Good. In the mini-game performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 of the UI unit in the enlarged mode, the effect display of the success pattern is displayed and the process shifts to the SP reach, and when the SP reach is completed, the UI unit is in the reduced mode.

In addition, the symbol variation display that is being executed when the success pattern effect is displayed in the drink confrontation reach effect is better than the symbol variation display that is being executed when the success pattern effect is displayed in the mini game. It may be easy to confirm the display in the jackpot symbol mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), when the UI unit is in the reduced mode, the first half portion (first part) of the mini game is performed in the tutorial display unit TT6, and then FIG. 485 (a-1). As shown in -2), the UI section may be expanded, and the latter half (second part) of the mini-game may be performed instead of the drinker confrontation reach effect to excite the mini-game. Specifically, for example, in a bowling chance game, the first half of the mini-game is a display showing how the character of the lord throws a bowling ball, as shown in FIG. 312 (a3). Is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT6 before enlargement when the UI unit is in the reduced mode, and after the tutorial display unit TT6 is enlarged and the UI unit is in the expanded mode, FIGS. 312 (a4) to (a5). ) Shows how the bowling ball approaches the pin and encourages whether or not it will be a strike, even if a success pattern that finally becomes a strike or a failure pattern that leaves an unbeatable pin is performed. Good. Further, in the golf game, as shown in FIG. 312 (b4), the display showing how the character of the lord is putting is set as the first half of the mini game, and the first half is the UI portion in the reduced mode. After displaying on the tutorial display unit TT6 before enlargement in the above, after the tutorial display unit TT6 is enlarged and the UI unit is expanded, the ball is cupped in the manner shown in FIGS. 312 (b5) to (b6). It may be possible to show a state of approaching to and incite whether or not to cup in, so that a success pattern of finally cupping in or a failure pattern of getting out of the cup is performed. The first half of the mini-game may be performed in an area other than the tutorial display unit TT6. In addition, chance-up effects may be performed in at least one of the first half and the second half of the mini game to increase the reliability of the jackpot. For example, the background color in the first half of the mini game is blue. In some cases, the background color in the latter half is blue, and in some cases, the background color in the first half of the mini game is blue and the background color in the second half is red. There may be cases.

In addition, two types of mini-games may be played in each of the reduced mode and the expanded mode of the UI unit. Specifically, for example, in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the reduced mode of the UI unit, the target mini-game shown in FIGS. 296 (a3) to (a4) is played, and when the bow is set to the target TGT, the tutorial is displayed. After the part TT6 is expanded and the UI part is expanded, a mini-game (for example, a boring chance game, a golf game, etc.) according to the hit area may be played. Further, when a boring chance game (or golf game) is played on the tutorial display unit TT6 in the reduced mode of the UI unit and the mini game is successful, the UI unit is changed from the reduced mode to the expanded mode and changed to the expanded mode. A golf game (or a boring chance game) may be played on the tutorial display unit TT6 later. Further, the mini game played in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the reduced mode of the UI unit and the mini game played in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the extended mode may be the same. For example, the tutorial display unit in the reduced mode of the UI unit. The first target mini-game is played in TT6, and when the bow hits the area of development in the target TGT, the UI part changes from the reduced mode to the expanded mode, and then the tutorial display unit TT6 in the expanded mode of the UI part. A second target mini-game is played in, and when the bow hits the area of SP reach development in the target TGT, it may develop into SP reach. In this case, the content of each area of the target TGT in the first target mini-game and the content of each area of the target TGT in the second target mini-game are different (that is, the content of the winning reward). Are different.), But they may be the same. Further, for example, in the case of a sugoroku-style mini-game, an effect of shifting from the first map to the second map may be performed.

In this production example, a plurality of mini games are not played at the same time (for example, a boring chance game and a golf game are not played at the same time), but they may be played at the same time. A second mini-game may be started during the execution of the mini-game.

Further, for example, when the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 293 (b3) to (b4) is performed and the countdown in the timer display is performed and the result is "0:00", the tutorial display unit TT6 is enlarged. Then, after the UI unit changes from the reduced mode to the expanded mode, the drinker confrontation reach effect shown in FIG. 485 (a-2) may be performed. In addition, a production other than the drink confrontation reach production (for example, a mini game, SP reach production, advance notice production, etc.) may be performed. In this case, the preparing image RDY may be displayed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 293 (b1) to (b2) before the countdown in the timer display starts. Further, in this effect pattern, either one or both of the timer display and the image RDY being prepared may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT6. In addition, during the countdown in the timer display, the countdown may be paused or the timer may be added to make it difficult to understand the timing when the UI section changes from the reduced mode to the expanded mode. It may be. In the timer advance notice effect in this effect example, the countdown is performed from the time indicated when the timer display is started, and when it becomes 0, a certain effect is performed. The time indicated when the timer display is started may be 0, and a certain effect may be performed when the timer display is counted up to the target time.

Further, in this effect pattern, for example, the display mode of the UI unit may change as shown in FIGS. 291 (d) to 291 (e). Specifically, FIG. 485 (a-). The display color of the frame part arranged above the tutorial display part TT6 in the UI part shown in 1) may change from the default color (for example, blue) to the notice color (for example, gold), and the UI concerned. The look-ahead notice may be given depending on the change in the display mode of the unit, or the change notice may be given. The notice color is not limited to one color, and may be a plurality of colors, and the reliability of the jackpot and the degree of expectation that the UI unit is an extended mode may change depending on the changing color. Further, in this case, the color may change to a color in which the jackpot is fixed (for example, rainbow color). Then, when the display color of the frame part of the UI part changes from the default color to the notice color, the tutorial display part TT6 expands and the UI part is more likely to change from the reduced mode to the enlarged mode than when the color does not change to the notice color. May be made. Further, when the display color of the frame portion of the UI portion changes from the default color to the notice color, it may be made easier to become a success pattern in the mini game than when it does not change to the notice color. As a result, it may be possible to indirectly give a feeling of expectation that the tutorial display unit TT6 will be expanded. That is, the change in the display color of the frame portion of the UI portion may be a pre-reading notice that the UI portion is in an enlarged mode, or the change notice. Further, although the display color of the frame portion does not change even after the UI portion changes from the reduced mode to the enlarged mode, the display color of the frame portion changes to another color after the UI portion changes to the enlarged mode ( For example, it may return to the default color). In addition to changing the color of the frame portion, the display mode of the UI portion may be changed by changing the shape and pattern of the frame portion.

Subsequently, a modified example of the extended mode of the UI unit will be described. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 482, the configuration of the display device adopts a mode in which the sub display device 208P is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 as the main display device. In this production example, in the reduced mode of the UI unit in which the tutorial display unit TT6 is reduced, the entire UI unit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the production example shown in FIG. 485 (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 is extended upward, and the UI unit is expanded in a manner of expanding the display area in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT6 is extended downward, and the tutorial display unit TT6 is displayed so as to straddle the decorative symbol display device TT6 and the sub display device 208P so that the UI unit is extended downward. In the extended mode of the UI unit, the entire tutorial display unit TT6 may be displayed on the sub display device 208P. In this case, when the UI unit is in the reduced mode, the mini-game described above may be performed on the sub-display device 208P, or an explanatory display may be displayed.

In this production example, the mode of the tutorial display unit TT6 has a two-stage display mode of a reduced mode and an expanded mode. For example, there are a plurality of types of results in a mini game, and depending on the results. The degree of expansion of the tutorial display unit TT6 may be different. Specifically, for example, in the target mini-game, the degree of expansion of the tutorial display unit TT6 is medium according to the area of the target TGT hit by the arrow (for example, the tutorial display shown in FIG. 485 (a-2)). The area may be about half of the area of the part TT6) or a large part (for example, the aspect of the tutorial display part TT6 shown in FIG. 485 (a-2)).

Further, when an animation in which the tutorial display unit TT6 expands upward is executed, a meter or a numerical value indicating the degree of expansion may be displayed. For example, a frame portion of the UI unit may be displayed depending on the size of the meter or the numerical value. The display mode (for example, display color, pattern, etc.) of the above may be changed.

The effect on the tutorial display unit TT6 and the extended animation of the tutorial display unit TT6 may be performed only in a certain effect state (certain effect mode). Further, for example, it may not be performed in the probabilistic state with electric support in which the game speed is prioritized.

Further, the mini game may be played only in the tutorial display unit TT6 when the UI unit is in the reduced mode.

Further, in this production example, a state in which the drinker confrontation reach effect is performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 when the UI unit is an extended mode is described, but this drinker confrontation reach effect is executed only in the extended tutorial display unit TT6. On the other hand, the mini-game may be played in an area other than the tutorial display unit TT6.

Further, for example, the following effects may be performed. Specifically, for example, at the start of SP reach (and / or during SP reach), the UI section changes from the reduced mode to the expanded mode, and the tutorial display unit TT6 expands, where there is a chance of SP reach. Opportunity-up availability effect (for example, SP reach is the character of the lord vs. the swordsman character, and the panda character trains and succeeds in the chance-up availability effect (success pattern effect display) It is performed or a failure effect (failure pattern effect display) is performed. If the success pattern effect display is displayed, the panda character becomes the lord's character in the SP reach after the chance up possibility effect ends. With the help, the composition changes to the confrontation composition of the character of the lord + the character of the panda vs. the character of the swordsman, and the expectation of the big hit is improved. That is, the SP reach is stepped up. After that, the UI part is subjected to a reduction animation that returns from the expansion mode to the reduction mode, and then the SP reach is continued in the form in which the panda character is added.

(Second production pattern)
In the second effect pattern, the tutorial display unit TT6 expands from the reduced mode of the UI unit shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), but the expanded mode of the UI unit shown in FIG. 485 (a-2) (the second effect pattern). In addition to the enlarged mode of 1), another extended mode in which the tutorial display unit TT6 is reduced from the enlarged mode of the UI unit shown in FIG. 485 (a-2) (referred to as the second enlarged mode). In some cases.) Can also be changed. The degree of expansion of the tutorial display unit TT6 in this second expansion mode is, for example, intermediate between the size of the tutorial display unit TT6 in the reduction mode of the UI unit and the size of the tutorial display unit TT6 in the first expansion mode of the UI unit. However, the size is not limited to this, and any size can be set. The tutorial display unit TT6 in the second enlarged mode of the UI unit may be larger than the tutorial display unit TT6 in the first enlarged mode of the UI unit. In this production example, the drink confrontation reach effect may be performed in both the tutorial display unit TT6 of the first enlarged mode of the UI unit and the tutorial display unit TT6 of the second expanded mode of the UI unit. In this case, the main character is more likely to have a drink confrontation reach effect on the tutorial display unit TT6 of the first expanded mode than when the drinker confrontation reach effect is performed on the tutorial display unit TT6 of the second enlarged mode. The production display (that is, the success production pattern) that the lord won is easy to display (high reliability). Therefore, the drink confrontation reach effect is more likely to be performed when the UI unit is in the second expansion mode than in the case where the UI unit is in the first expansion mode. The frequency of appearance of the drink confrontation reach effect does not change depending on whether the UI unit is in the first expansion mode or the second expansion mode, and the reliability may be the same.

Further, in the second production pattern, when the UI unit is in the second expansion mode, the above-mentioned mini-games (bowling chance game, golf game, target mini-game, etc.) are played instead of the drink confrontation reach production. It may be done. Further, when the UI unit is in the second expanded mode, there may be a case where a drinker confrontation reach effect is performed or a case where a mini game is performed. In this production example, when the UI part is in the first expansion mode, the drink confrontation reach effect is more likely to be performed than in the mini game, and when the UI unit is in the second expansion mode, the mini game is more likely to be performed than in the drinker confrontation reach effect. It has become. In other words, when the UI unit is in the first expanded mode, it is easier for the drinker confrontation reach effect to be performed than in the case where the UI unit is in the second expanded mode. The reverse pattern may be used. Further, in this production example, for example, in comparison in the case where the pseudo-continuous production is not performed, when the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded, the UI unit becomes the second expansion mode and the second expansion mode is used. Compared to the case where the mini game is played on the tutorial display unit TT6 and becomes a success pattern, the UI unit becomes the first expansion mode and the tutorial display unit TT6 in the first expansion mode performs the drink confrontation reach effect and succeeds. In the case of a pattern, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display. On the contrary, when the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded, the UI unit becomes the first expansion mode, and the tutorial display unit TT6 of the first expansion mode performs the drink confrontation reach effect and becomes a success pattern. , When the UI part becomes the second enlargement mode and the mini game is performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 of the second enlargement mode and becomes a success pattern, the big hit symbol mode is finally confirmed in the symbol variation display. It may be easy to display. Further, there are cases where the UI unit becomes the first expansion mode and the tutorial display unit TT6 of the first expansion mode performs a drink confrontation reach effect and becomes a success pattern, and the UI unit becomes the second expansion mode. The reliability may be the same as in the case where the mini game is played in the tutorial display unit TT6 of the second expansion mode and becomes a success pattern.

Also, when the UI unit becomes the first expansion mode and the tutorial display unit TT6 of the first expansion mode performs the drink confrontation reach effect, and the SP reach is performed after the effect display of the success pattern is displayed. Even when the UI unit becomes the second expansion mode and the tutorial display unit TT6 of the second expansion mode performs the drink confrontation reach effect and the SP reach is performed after the effect display of the success pattern is displayed. After that, the UI unit is displayed in a reduced mode.

In addition, when the UI unit changes from the reduced mode to the second expanded mode and the drinker confrontation reach effect is performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 of the second expanded mode, and the effect display of the success pattern is displayed, the tutorial is displayed. The unit TT6 may be further expanded so that the UI unit changes from the second expansion mode to the first expansion mode. That is, the aspect of the UI unit may be upgraded. Then, in the tutorial display unit TT6 of the first expanded mode, the second drink confrontation reach effect may be performed, or the mini-game described above may be performed. Then, when the drink confrontation reach effect performed on the tutorial display unit TT6 of the first expanded mode or the mini game is performed and the result is the effect display of the success pattern, the process may be shifted to SP reach. .. When the UI unit becomes the first expansion mode and the tutorial display unit TT6 of the second expansion mode performs the drink confrontation reach effect, the UI unit displays the effect display of the failure pattern. Instead of the first expansion mode, the tutorial display unit TT6 may be reduced to a reduced mode so that the effect does not develop.

Further, in this production example, an example in which the drink confrontation reach effect is performed when the UI unit is expanded, but for example, the multi-chance up notice shown in FIGS. 309 (b) to (i) is given. It may be displayed on the enlarged tutorial display unit TT6. That is, when the UI part changes from the reduced mode to the first expanded mode and the multi-chance up notice is started, and at least one of the missions of the Chibihime Musou production and the drinking comparison production is achieved, the SP reach You may want to move to. In this case, the type of SP reach that shifts when the mission of Chibi Hime Musou production is completed and the type of SP reach that shifts when the mission of drinking comparison production is achieved may be the same. , May be different. In addition, when both the mission of Chibi Hime Musou production and the mission of drinking comparison production are achieved, it is possible to shift to another highly reliable SP reach. In addition, the type of SP reach that shifts when the mission of Chibihime Musou production is achieved and the mission of drinking comparison production is not achieved, the mission of drinking comparison production is achieved, and the mission of Chibihime Musou production is achieved. The type of SP reach that will be transferred if there is not, and the type of SP reach that will be transferred if both the mission of Chibi Hime Musou production and the mission of drinking comparison production are achieved may be the same. The reliability may be different depending on whether or not the mission of the production of is achieved. For example, when both missions are achieved, the jackpot symbol mode is more than when only one of the missions is achieved. May be easily confirmed and displayed, or when both missions are achieved, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed (that is, the jackpot is confirmed) in the symbol variation display. In this production example, the case where the tutorial display unit TT6 in the first enlarged mode of the UI unit gives a multi-chance up notice has been described, but the UI unit also has a multi-chance in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the second enlarged mode. An up notice may be given. In this case, the case where the multi-chance up notice is given when the UI unit is the first expanded mode is a big hit than the case where the multi-chance up notice is given when the UI unit is the second expanded mode. The design mode may be easily displayed in a definite manner.

Further, also in this production example, when the UI unit is in the reduced mode, the mini-game described above may be performed in the tutorial display unit TT6, and when the success pattern is displayed as a result of the mini-game being performed, The UI unit may be changed from the reduced mode to the first expanded mode. Further, when a failure pattern is displayed as a result of the mini-game being played, the UI unit may be changed from the reduced mode to the second enlarged mode, or the UI unit mode may not be changed. May be good.

Further, in this production example, for example, the display mode of the frame portion may be changed according to the mode of the UI portion. Specifically, when the UI portion is in the reduced mode, the color of the frame portion is the default color (for example, blue), and in the second enlarged mode, the color of the frame portion is green, and the second In the case of the expanded mode of 3, the color of the frame portion may be red, and the mode of the UI portion may be notified by the color. Further, the pattern or a part of the shape may be changed in place of the color or with the color. Further, the tutorial display unit TT6 may be increased in size to function as a rank-up effect for improving the reliability of the jackpot. For example, depending on how much the tutorial display unit TT6 is increased in size, after that. The degree of expectation of development for developing SP reach and the degree of expectation of big hit may be different.

(Third production pattern)
In the third effect pattern, the tutorial display unit TT6 expands from the reduced mode of the UI unit shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), and the tutorial display in the expanded mode of the UI unit shown in FIG. 485 (a-2). In Part TT6, the above-mentioned drink confrontation reach effect may be performed or a mini-game may be performed. As the mini-game to be performed here, for example, the targeting shown in FIGS. 291 (o) to 291 (p). An example of the production in which the mini-game is performed will be described.

When the target mini-game is started in the tutorial display unit TT6 after the UI unit has changed from the reduced mode to the expanded mode, for example, the target TGT whose area is divided into three is displayed. These regions are composed of, for example, a "big hit" region, a "medium hit" region, and a "missing" region. Then, when the mini character MC1 of the lord shoots a bow and hits the area of "big hit" (that is, when the production display of the second success pattern is performed), for example, the UI part is erased and the SP reach (for example) , Swordsman Reach). When shifting to SP reach, the display may be maintained only for a part of the configuration in the UI section. For example, the display is maintained only for the hold icon display area and the hold display frame FL1, and the tutorial display section TT6 And the frame part may be erased. Also, when hitting the "middle hit" area (that is, when the effect display of the first success pattern is performed), for example, after the animation in which the UI part changes from the enlarged mode to the reduced mode is performed, the normal reach is performed. Is done. Further, when hitting the "off" area, for example, after the animation in which the UI unit changes from the enlarged mode to the reduced mode is performed, the off display mode is displayed. In addition, the target TGT displayed in the target mini-game is divided into two areas, which are composed only of the "big hit" area and the "medium hit" area, and the effect of determining the normal reach or higher is performed. It may be divided, or it may be composed only of the "big hit" area, and the effect of confirming the transition to SP reach may be performed. As the mini-games applicable to this effect, in addition to the above-mentioned targeting mini-games, for example, the drum mini-games shown in FIGS. 292 (c3) to (c4) and the mini-games shown in FIGS. A mini game or the like produced by the roulette wheel shown in FIG. 3 (a3) can be applied.

In the above description,
"Image display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
A symbol display means capable of executing a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
With notice means capable of executing a plurality of types of notices [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542, etc.] ,
It is a game table equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon, etc.].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons.
The hold display is a display displayed in the hold display area [for example, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, etc.] in the image display means.
The hold display is a display according to the number of times the operation of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter, referred to as "hold number") [for example, the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 has a hold icon display area 281. , The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285, etc.] in the image display means.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area.
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or more of the notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 is composed of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
The notice means is a means capable of executing the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, , If the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, a pseudo-ream effect may be executed, and if the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is digested, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
During the period in which the symbol variation display is executed once, the first notice icon [for example, hat notice icon I6, etc.] among the plurality of types of notice icons is the first number [for example, two, etc.]. ] It is configured so that a second number [for example, three, etc.], which is larger than the first number, is more likely to be a big hit than when it is digested.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the image display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation of the production.

In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easier to recognize that there is a fluctuation that the notice icon may be digested, so the player pays attention to the display in the hold. , It may be possible to prevent overlooking the notice display corresponding to the notice icon.

Further, according to this game table, the player may be able to pay attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icon and improve the interest of the game.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be executable other than the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

Further, the advance notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be executable in addition to the plurality of types of advance notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of types of notices, or may not execute a plurality of types of notices.

Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display, or may be displayable in addition to the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display, or may not display the hold display.

Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the image display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area of the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the hold display area of the image display means.

Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be a hold icon, and may be represented by, for example, letters, numbers, or symbols.

Further, the hold display may display only the number of holds, or may display other than the number of holds.

Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started other than when the hold is digested. Further, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is digested, or may not be started when the hold is digested.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may be displayed in a field other than the notice icon display area of the image display means. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means.

Further, the notice icon display area may be one that can display only one or more notice icons, or may be one that can display other than one or more notice icons. Further, the notice icon display area may always display one or more notice icons, or may not display one or more notice icons.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the type of notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. , When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice other than the type of notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be feasible. Further, the notice means may be one that always executes a notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the type of notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, "the notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed [for example, as many notice icons as the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. The notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to expect the number of times to execute the notice displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change in which the notice icon is digested. You may be able to do it.

Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in a number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may be a number other than the number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed. Things may also be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may not display the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed. There may be.

In addition, "the advance notice means gives a fake notice [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a reach transition effect that is out of place] in the same manner as the mode of the advance notice [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a reach transition effect that becomes a big hit]. It ’s a viable means,
The notice means is the type of the notice icon that has been digested when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is a means capable of executing the above-mentioned fake notice [for example, a pseudo-continuous notice that is out of order, a reach transition effect, etc.] corresponding to the above.
After the false notice is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to give the player a sense of tension until the notice icon is digested and the notice is executed.

Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a fake notice in the same mode as the notice, or may be capable of executing other than the fake notice in the same mode as the notice. You may. In addition, the notice means may always execute a fake notice in the same mode as the notice, or may not execute a fake notice in the same mode as the notice.

Further, even if the notice means can execute only a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, something other than a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be executable. .. Further, the notice means may always execute a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. However, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be executed.

Further, the result of the symbol variation display may be configured to be out of order after the fake notice is executed, or the result of the symbol variation display may be a big hit after the fake notice is executed. There may be.

After the fake notice is executed, the notice that is likely to display the big hit symbol on the symbol display means may be executed.

Further, "During the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than that of the third number [for example, one or the like]. The fourth number [for example, three, etc.], which is larger than the three, is configured to be more likely to be a big hit.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, "a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.] capable of executing display according to the number of holds is provided.
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to clearly distinguish between the hold display and the notice icon display.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only the display according to the number of holds, or may be capable of executing the display other than the display according to the number of holds. Further, the hold display means may always execute the display according to the number of holds, or may not execute the display according to the number of holds.

Further, "The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.].
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, the hold display may be clearly recognized.

Here, the hold display means may be configured by only the light emitting means, or may be configured by including other than the light emitting means (for example, an image display means).

The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be one composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, and may be a hand-held one including a plurality of LEDs in one package, such as a full-color LED. Further, it may be composed of a single color LED.

Further, in addition to the hold display means, the launch operation notification means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the launch operation means may also be realized by the light emitting means.

In addition, "pre-reading notice means capable of executing pre-reading notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 540, etc." ] With
The look-ahead notice means is a means capable of executing the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the notice icon, it may be possible to raise the expectation for the big hit.

Here, the look-ahead notice means may be capable of executing only the look-ahead notice, or may be capable of executing other than the look-ahead notice. Further, the look-ahead notice means may always execute the look-ahead notice, or may not execute the look-ahead notice.

Further, the look-ahead notice means may be capable of executing the look-ahead notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or may be other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The look-ahead notice may be executable. Further, the look-ahead notice means may always execute the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or may not execute the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, "the symbol variation display to be read ahead (hereinafter," second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of look-ahead shown in FIG. 413 (2), etc.]] The notice icon may be digested by the fifth number [for example, three, etc.] during the period in which the notice icon is being executed.
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, "three objects to be read ahead shown in the first symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 413 (2))". The notice icon may be digested by the sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period during which the "design variation display based on the hold held before the eye hold, etc.]" is being executed. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period during which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, in FIG. 413 (4). During the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of the look-ahead is executed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the target of the look-ahead is displayed. It is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of Special Figure 1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the number of digested notice icons differs depending on whether the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is being displayed or the symbol variation display that is executed before the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to understand the symbol variation display that should be noted.

Here, in the period during which the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period during which the second symbol variation display is executed. In, the notice icon may be digested in a number different from the fifth number. Further, the notice icon may be configured to be always digested by the fifth number during the period when the second symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the second symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may not be digested by the fifth number.

Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may be digested in a different number than the sixth number. Further, the notice icon may be configured to be always digested by the sixth number during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may not be digested by the sixth number.

Further, the hold display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol change display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol change display is being executed, or the first one. During the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. Further, the hold display may always notify that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period when the first symbol variation display is being executed, or the first symbol may be displayed. During the period when the variation display is being executed, it may not be notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" fourth symbol variation display ") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed [for example," As shown in FIG. 422 (C), the digestion display of the hat notice icon I6 and the increase display of the hat notice icon I6, the Senryobako notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are displayed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, it may be possible to give the player expectation until all the notice icons are digested.

Here, the notice icon may always start to be displayed during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may be started to be displayed only during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed, and the notice icon may be displayed during the period other than the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed. May start to be displayed.

In addition, the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, "in the period during which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" third symbol variation display ") executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed is executed, the fourth symbol variation display is executed. The notice icon that is digested during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed may start to be displayed [For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is digested at the timing shown in FIG. Increased display during execution of symbol variation display executed before],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the notice icon to be digested may be started to be displayed only during the period when the third symbol variation display is executed, or it may be configured to start displaying during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed. Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed may be started to be displayed. Further, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed may be configured to always start to be displayed, or the third symbol variation display may be started. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not be started to be displayed.

It should be noted that the notice icon that is digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed does not have to start displaying during the period when the third symbol variation display is executed.

Further, "The hold display area is an area in which the hold display can be displayed up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.].
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.].
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the displayable number of the hold display and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, so that the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

Here, the hold display area may always display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

Further, the notice icon display area may always display the notice icons up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

The maximum number of pending displays that can be displayed and the maximum number of notice icons that can be displayed may be the same.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the maximum number of displayable hold displays of the special figure 1, or at least the number may be the same.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the maximum number of displayable hold displays of the special figure 2, or at least the number may be the same.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the total number of maximum displayable numbers of the hold display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, or at least may be the same.

In addition, "the effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542". Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notices is the first notice [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIGS. 416 (49) to (50) and 428 (49)].
One of the plurality of types of notices is a second notice [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 423 (Ac) and FIG. (Bb)].
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, strong reach shown in FIGS. 416 (51) to (57) and 428 (50-1) to (57). Directing, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a lunar background].
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice is a notice that the first effect is executed.
The second notice is a notice that the second effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the content of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice and the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the first effect and the second effect. .. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the first effect and the second effect, or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

Further, the first notice may only notify that the first effect is executed, or may also notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. .. Further, the first notice may always notify that the first effect will be executed, or may not notify that the first effect will be executed.

Further, the second notice may only notify that the second effect is executed, or may also notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. .. Further, the second notice may always notify that the second effect will be executed, or may not notify that the second effect will be executed.

Further, "The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail [for example, FIGS. 413 (1) to 417 (66) and FIGS. 425 (1) to 425 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 429 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon is displayed is always executed, the player's expectation may be improved.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first display means capable of executing the symbol variation display [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.] and
A second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the effect hold lamp 286].
It is a game table equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol advance, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, revariation effect, etc.]. And
The second display means displays a display according to the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “suspended number”) in the reserved display area [for example, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. , The hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the hold display area of the effect hold lamp 286, etc.] The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285, etc.] in the second display means.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the pending number depending on the displayed number.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area.
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or more of the notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 is composed of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
The second display means is a display capable of displaying the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is a means [for example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is digested, the reach transition effect is executed. In some cases, etc.],
During the period in which the symbol variation display is executed once, a second number [for example, three, etc.] that is larger than the first number is digested than when the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured so that it is easier to get a big hit if it is done,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the image display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation of the production.

In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easier to recognize that there is a fluctuation that the notice icon may be digested, so the player pays attention to the display in the hold. , It may be possible to prevent overlooking the notice display corresponding to the notice icon.

Further, according to this game table, the player may be able to pay attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icon and improve the interest of the game.

Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be executable other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be displayable in addition to the plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice displays, or may be displayable in addition to the plurality of types of notice displays. Further, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

Further, the second display means may be able to display the display according to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or may display the display according to the number of holds in a field other than the hold display area. There may be. Still, the second display means may always display the display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display the display according to the number of holds in the hold display area. ..

Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started even when the hold is not digested. Further, the symbol variation display may be started whenever the hold is exhausted, or may not be started even if the hold is digested.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the notice icon display area in the second display means. Good. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means.

Further, the notice icon display area may be one that can display only one or more notice icons, or may be one that can display other than one or more notice icons. Further, the notice icon display area may always display one or more notice icons, or may not display one or more notice icons.

Further, the second display means can display only the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice display other than the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon can be displayed. May be good. Further, the second display means is to always display the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be displayed.

In addition, "the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to expect the number of times to display the notice display displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player does not miss the notice display. May be possible.

Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may be a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. Other than that may be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or display the number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. It may not be possible.

In addition, "the second display means is a fake notice display [for example, a pseudo-ream effect or reach that is out of place] in the same manner as the mode of the notice display [for example, a pseudo-ream effect or a reach transition effect that is a big hit] It is a display means that can display [transition effect, etc.]
The second display means is the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is a display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the icon [for example, a pseudo-continuous notice that is out of order, a reach transition effect, etc.].
After the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to give the player a sense of tension until the notice icon is digested and the notice display is displayed.

Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display, or something other than the fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display. May also be displayable. In addition, the second display means may always display a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display, or may not display a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display. There may be.

In addition, the second display means is capable of displaying only a fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. If one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, it is possible to display something other than the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon. It may be. In addition, the second display means always displays a fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It may be present, or when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be displayed. ..

Further, the result of the symbol variation display may be configured to be out of order after the fake notice display is displayed, or the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit after the fake notice display is displayed. There may be cases.

After the fake notice display is displayed, the symbol display means may display a notice display that is likely to display the jackpot symbol.

Further, "During the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than that of the third number [for example, one or the like]. The fourth number [for example, three, etc.], which is larger than the three, is configured to be more likely to be a big hit.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, "The second display means is a display means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.].
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area.
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, turning on a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to clearly distinguish between the hold display and the notice icon display.

Here, the second display means may be composed of two display means or may be composed of three or more display means.

Further, the second display means may be composed of only the image display means and the hold display means, or may be composed of other than the image display means and the hold display means. Further, the second display means may be one in which the image display means and the hold display means are always configured, or may not form at least one of the image display means and the hold display means.

Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. Further, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying the display according to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or may be able to display the display according to the number of holds other than the hold display area. May be good. Further, the hold display means may always display the display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display the display according to the number of holds in the hold display area.

Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

Further, "The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the hold display may be clearly recognized.

Here, the hold display means may be configured by only the light emitting means, or may be configured by including other than the light emitting means (for example, an image display means).

The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be one composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, and may be a hand-held one including a plurality of LEDs in one package, such as a full-color LED. Further, it may be composed of a single color LED.

Further, in addition to the hold display means, the launch operation notification means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the launch operation means may also be realized by the light emitting means.

Further, "the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the variable display of the decorative symbol and the hold icon are displayed on the same image display means, it may be possible to easily confirm the number of hold while visually recognizing the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, "pre-reading notice means capable of executing pre-reading notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 540, etc." ] With
The look-ahead notice means is a means capable of executing the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the notice icon, it may be possible to raise the expectation for the big hit.

Here, the look-ahead notice means may be capable of executing only the look-ahead notice, or may be capable of executing other than the look-ahead notice. Further, the look-ahead notice means may always execute the look-ahead notice, or may not execute the look-ahead notice.

Further, the look-ahead notice means may be capable of executing the look-ahead notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or may be other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The look-ahead notice may be executable. Further, the look-ahead notice means may always execute the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or may not execute the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, "the symbol variation display to be read ahead (hereinafter," second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of look-ahead shown in FIG. 413 (2), etc.]] The notice icon may be digested by the fifth number [for example, three, etc.] during the period in which the notice icon is being executed.
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, "three objects to be read ahead shown in the first symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 413 (2))". The notice icon may be digested by the sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period during which the "design variation display based on the hold held before the eye hold, etc.]" is being executed. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. 413. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of look-ahead during the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold that was held before the second hold that is the target of look-ahead shown in (4) is being executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the number of digested notice icons differs depending on whether the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is being displayed or the symbol variation display that is executed before the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to understand the symbol variation display that should be noted.

Here, in the period during which the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period during which the second symbol variation display is executed. In, the notice icon may be digested in a number different from the fifth number. Further, the notice icon may be configured to be always digested by the fifth number during the period when the second symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the second symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may not be digested by the fifth number.

Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may be digested in a different number than the sixth number. Further, the notice icon may be configured to be always digested by the sixth number during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may not be digested by the sixth number.

Further, the display according to the number of holds may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol change display is held during the period when the first symbol change display is being executed. , It may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period during which the first symbol variation display is being executed. In addition, the display according to the number of holds may always notify that the operation of the second symbol change display is suspended during the period when the first symbol change display is being executed. During the period when the first symbol variation display is being executed, it may not be notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" fourth symbol variation display ") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed [for example," As shown in FIG. 422 (C), the digestion display of the hat notice icon I6 and the increase display of the hat notice icon I6, the Senryobako notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are displayed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, it may be possible to give the player expectation until all the notice icons are digested.

Here, the notice icon may always start to be displayed during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may be started to be displayed only during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed, and the notice icon may be displayed during the period other than the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed. May start to be displayed.

In addition, the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, "in the period during which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" third symbol variation display ") executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed is executed, the fourth symbol variation display is executed. The notice icon that is digested during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed may start to be displayed [For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is digested at the timing shown in FIG. Increased display during execution of symbol variation display executed before],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the notice icon to be digested may be started to be displayed only during the period when the third symbol variation display is executed, or it may be configured to start displaying during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed. Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed may be started to be displayed. Further, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed may be configured to always start to be displayed, or the third symbol variation display may be started. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not be started to be displayed.

It should be noted that the notice icon that is digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed does not have to start displaying during the period when the third symbol variation display is executed.

Further, "The hold display area is an area capable of displaying up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.] according to the number of holds.
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.].
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the displayable number of the display according to the number of holds and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, so that the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

Here, the hold display area may always display the display according to the number of holds up to the seventh number, or may not display the display according to the number of holds up to the seventh number. Good.

Further, the notice icon display area may always display the notice icons up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

The maximum number of displays that can be displayed according to the number of reservations and the maximum number of notice icons that can be displayed may be the same.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the maximum number of displayable displayable numbers according to the number of reservations in Special Figure 1, or at least the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be the same.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the maximum number of displayable displayable numbers according to the number of reservations in Special Figure 2, or at least it may be the same.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the total number of maximum displayable numbers according to the number of reserved figures 1 and 2, or at least the same. Good.

In addition, "the effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542". Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIGS. 416 (49) to (50) and 428 (49)].
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 423 (Ac) and FIG. (Bb)].
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, strong reach shown in FIGS. 416 (51) to (57) and 428 (50-1) to (57). Directing, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a lunar background].
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed.
The game table is characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is executed. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the content of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, and may also display notice displays other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. Further, the second display means may always display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. May be good.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the first effect and the second effect. .. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the first effect and the second effect, or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

Further, the first notice display may only notify that the first effect is executed, or may also notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. Good. Further, the first notice display may always notify that the first effect will be executed, or may not notify that the first effect will be executed.

Further, the second notice display may only notify that the second effect is executed, or may also notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. Good. Further, the second notice display may always notify that the second effect will be executed, or may not notify that the second effect will be executed.

Further, "The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail [for example, FIGS. 413 (1) to 417 (66) and FIGS. 425 (1) to 425 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 429 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon is displayed is always executed, the player's expectation may be improved.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that.

In the embodiment described above, the notice icon functions as a look-ahead notice, but it may be displayed separately from the look-ahead notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the look-ahead mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or be digested even in the normal background display, and the notice icon may be increased or digested even while the special background mode for look-ahead is being executed. May be good.

Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, the notice icon C is displayed. When the notice display b, the notice display c or the notice display d is displayed and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice icon A is digested in the notice display a when the notice c is always displayed. It is a display that is displayed when the other notice icons (B, C, D) are digested, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (B, C, D) are digested. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed when the "symbol variation display in which the notice display a is displayed" is performed than when the "variation display" is performed. Further, the notice display b is a display displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is digested, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C or the notice icon D is digested. It is a display, and it is easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed when the "symbol variation display with the notice display b displayed" is executed than when the "symbol variation display with the notice display c displayed" is executed. It may be configured in. Further, the notice display d is a display displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (A, B, D) are digested, and the notice icon C is displayed. When digested, either the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed when "notice icon A, notice icon B or notice icon D is digested" is executed rather than "notice icon C is digested symbol change display". It may be configured to be easy. In addition, the jackpot symbol is better when the "signature variation display in which the notice display a, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed" is executed than when the "symbol variation display in which the notice display d is displayed" is executed. It may be configured so that it can be easily confirmed and displayed.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first display means capable of executing the symbol variation display [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.] and
A second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the effect hold lamp 286].
It is a game table equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol advance, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, revariation effect, etc.]. And
The second display means displays a display according to the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “suspended number”) in the reserved display area [for example, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. , The hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the hold display area of the effect hold lamp 286, etc.] The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285, etc.] in the second display means.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the pending number depending on the displayed number.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area.
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 is composed of a notice icon first display area YA1 and a notice icon sixth display area YA6. It is configured so that a notice icon can be displayed in each area],
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, , If the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, a pseudo-ream effect may be executed, and if the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is digested, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
A second number that is greater than the first number [eg, one, etc.] than if the notice icon was digested by the first number [eg, one, etc.] during the period in which the symbol variation display was executed once. For example, 3 etc.] It is configured so that it is easier to get a big hit when it is digested.
The second display means is based on the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, based on the third hold which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 413 (2)". It is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a look-ahead notice display before the start of "design variation display, etc.]".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In addition, "the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second display means is a fake notice display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach that is out of place] in the same manner as the mode of the notice display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect that is a big hit, a reach transition effect, etc.]. It is a display means that can display [transition effect, etc.]
The second display means is the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is a display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the icon [for example, a pseudo-continuous notice that is out of order, a reach transition effect, etc.].
After the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the second display means is composed of a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.]. Is a display means,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "One of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.].
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area.
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, turning on a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413 (9) to 414 (20), display of the notice icon as a look-ahead notice. Is done by the decorative icon display device 208, etc.],
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, during the period in which "the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 413 (2)] is being executed, the notice icon is displayed. Fifth number [eg, 3 etc.] may be digested,
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, "three objects to be read ahead shown in the first symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 413 (2))". The notice icon may be digested by the sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period during which the "design variation display based on the hold held before the eye hold, etc.]" is being executed. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. 413. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of look-ahead during the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold that was held before the second hold that is the target of look-ahead shown in (4) is being executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be surely digested by the end of the symbol variation display to be read ahead [for example, FIG. 413 (1)). As shown in FIGS. 417 (66) and 425 (1) to 429 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested by the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" fourth symbol variation display ") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed [for example, the notice icon may be started to be displayed. As shown in FIG. 422 (C), the digestion display of the hat notice icon I6 and the increase display of the hat notice icon I6, the Senryobako notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are displayed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "in the period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, it is digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed. The notice icon may be started to be displayed [For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat to be digested at the timing shown in FIG. 422 (C) is during execution of the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display. Increased display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The hold display area is an area capable of displaying up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.] according to the number of holds.
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.].
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542". Etc.]
As the notice icon, the first notice icon [for example, the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako shown in FIGS. 416 (47) and 427 (47)] can be displayed.
As the notice icon, a second notice icon [for example, the ribbon notice icon I8 shown in FIG. 423 (Ab)] can be displayed.
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIGS. 416 (49) to (50) and 428 (49)].
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 423 (Ac) and FIG. (Bb)].
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display.
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display is displayed.
When the second notice icon is digested, the second notice display is displayed.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, strong reach shown in FIGS. 416 (51) to (57) and 428 (50-1) to (57). Directing, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a lunar background].
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed.
The game table is characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is executed. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "main control means [for example, main control unit 300, etc.] and
Production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
With
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means.
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.].
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
While displaying the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the third hold, which is the object of pre-reading shown in FIG. 413 (2)], the notice icon is displayed. As a result, the display of the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 413 (9), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Displayed, etc.],
The first notice icon, which is started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display, may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 413 (9) to 414. As shown in (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat which started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 413 (9) is not digested even if the next symbol variation display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 414 (14). ],
The symbol variation display displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, the symbol based on the third hold which is the target of the look-ahead shown in the "second symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 413 (2))" (Variation display, etc.] ”), the first notice icon that was not digested during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested [for example, FIG. 413 (for example, FIG. 413). 9) As shown in FIGS. 414 (25), the notice icon I6 of the hat which started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 413 (9) is a symbol variation display which is a target of pre-reading as shown in FIG. 414 (23). Digested in],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Further, "The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the notice icon of the hat]. The notice icon I6 of this hat is digested by the symbol variation display where the display of I6 has started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "As a pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be started to be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed [for example, FIGS. 413 (9) to FIG. As shown in 414 (25), the symbol variation which is the target of pre-reading so that the notice icon I6 of the hat which started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 413 (9) is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 414 (23). A hat notice icon I6 is displayed as a pre-reading notice of the display]. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "during the display of one symbol variation display, the second number [for example, three, etc.] is higher than when the first notice icon of the first number [for example, one, etc.] is digested. ] Is more likely to be a big hit when the first notice icon is digested.
The second number is larger than the first number.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "a second notice icon [for example, fan notice icon I10, etc.] can be displayed as the notice icon.
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the digested symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 417 (60) to (66), the fan notice icon I10 is digested. Then, the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display [for example, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop pattern advance notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, revariation effect, etc.]. ,
When the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] is digested, the first notice display [for example, the pseudo shown in FIGS. 415 (28) to 415 (31)) is used as the notice display. Continuous production, etc.] may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a fake notice display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect that is out of place, a reach transition effect, etc.].
When the first notice icon [for example, hat notice icon I6, etc.] is digested, the first fake notice table [for example, pseudo-continuous production, etc.] is displayed as the fake notice display. May be
The display mode of the first false notice display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first notice display.
The symbol variation display on which the first false notice display is displayed is configured to be misaligned.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a look-ahead effect display [for example, a look-ahead mode effect, which is an effect of shifting to a special stage shown in FIG. 412 (b)].
As the notice icon, a third notice icon [for example, ribbon notice icon I8, etc.] can be displayed.
When the third notice icon is digested, the look-ahead effect display may be started [For example, when one ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is high, The background shifts to the look-ahead mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.]. Is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. 413 (1), the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing a decorative symbol variable display, etc.]" Is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "based on the hold three before the hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in the first notice icon [for example, FIG. 413 (9)" that was started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon I6, etc. of the hat whose display was started during the symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display [for example, hold which is the target of pre-reading]. The notice icon I6 of the hat is digested during the pattern change display based on],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285, etc.] in the display means.
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 is composed of a notice icon first display area YA1 and a notice icon sixth display area YA6. It is configured so that a notice icon can be displayed in each area],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, it is provided with "effect control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500]].
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "main control means [for example, main control unit 300, etc.] and
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
With
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means.
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 412 (a) and FIG. 4B, a "house" notice icon I21, and a "crest" notice icon I22. , "Den" notice icon I31, "Princess" notice icon I32, "Grandfather" notice icon I33, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 435 (1)]] The display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 435 to 436, “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 during the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to be read ahead to the end of the symbol variation display. Notice icon I21 and "Crest" notice icon I22 are displayed, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of displays is an effect display.
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 414 (23) to 415 (32), the hat. When the notice icon I6 of the above is digested, a pseudo-ream may be performed, and as shown in FIGS. 416 (46) to (57), when the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako is digested, a strong reach effect is produced. May be started, etc.],
The first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons [for example, the combination of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 shown in FIG. 435] changes once. By being digested in the display, the first effect display [for example, the effect image displayed in the family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 436 (21)] is displayed as the effect display. ,
A game table characterized by that.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to continue to have a sense of expectation that the first effect display may be displayed until the notice icon of the first combination is digested.

In addition, according to this game console, it is possible to show a plurality of notice icons during the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is started, which gives a feeling of expectation for a big hit. You may be able to do it.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as a look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Further, when the notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed, and when the notice icon is digested, the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed. A display other than the effect display corresponding to the above may be displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may always be displayed, and when the notice icon is digested, the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed. The effect display corresponding to may not be displayed.

Further, even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display, only the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. It is good, and the first combination of the displayed multiple notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display, so that a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as the effect display. May be done. Further, even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is always displayed as the effect display. Alternatively, the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons may be digested in one symbol variation display, so that the first effect display may not be displayed as the effect display.

Further, even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. It is also configured so that the first effect display is displayed as the effect display even if the first combination of the displayed multiple notice icons is not digested in one symbol variation display. May be done.

Further, "The first combination is a combination consisting of the notice icons of the first number [for example, two or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the first effect display is displayed from the time when the notice icon of one of the first combinations consisting of the first number of notice icons is displayed until the first number of notice icons are digested. It may be possible to continue to have the expectation that may be displayed.

Further, "the first combination is a combination including a first notice icon [for example, a notice icon I21 of a" house "] and a second notice icon [for example, a notice icon I22 of a" crest "]. ,
The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, so that the effect of the effect may be enhanced.

Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination including a notice icon other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. You may. Further, the first combination may be a combination that always includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination that does not include at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. It may be.

Further, after the "second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second hold which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 435 (1)] is suspended, the second symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display of the above is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIG. 436 (19), the symbol variation display to be read ahead is suspended. During the period from the time until the end of the symbol variation display, the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 have been digested],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the first In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be something other than the plurality of notice icons that is digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably exhausted, and the second symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be exhausted only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the second The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Further, "In one symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination is digested, the first effect display is not displayed [for example, Even if only one of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 is digested, the effect image shown in FIG. 436 (21) is not displayed, etc.]. The stand. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the first effect display is not displayed unless the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is digested in one symbol variation display, so that the first effect display is displayed. It may be possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who was able to see.

Here, in one symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, only the first effect display may not be displayed, or once. In the symbol variation display of, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination is digested, the display other than the first effect display may not be displayed. Further, in one symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, the first effect display may not always be displayed, or may be configured so that the first effect display is not always displayed. In the symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination is digested, the first effect display may be displayed.

Further, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination are digested only in one symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed, or the first effect display may be displayed once. In the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination is digested, the first effect display may not be displayed.

Further, "as the notice icon, the third notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 414] is digested, so that the third effect display [for example, FIG. 415 (28)] is used as the effect display. ), The effect display in which the chief character BC displayed in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6 pushes up the right pattern, etc.] is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the variation of the production is increased, and the production effect may be enhanced.

Here, the third notice icon may be digested so that only the third effect display is displayed, or the third notice icon is digested to display the third effect display. It may be configured so that a display other than the effect display is also displayed. Further, it may be configured so that the third effect display is always displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or the third effect display is digested by digesting the third effect icon. It may be configured so that the display may not be displayed.

Further, it may be configured so that the third effect display is displayed only when the third notice icon is digested, or the third notice icon is not digested. It may be configured so that the three effect displays are displayed.

In addition, "the lost symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414 (21) to 417 (66), which is a lost symbol. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the suspension of "variation display, etc.") to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 413. As shown in FIGS. (2) to 417 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended until the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Further, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414 (21) to 417 (66), which is a loss of the symbol variation display, etc.] is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is held. The plurality of notice icons may be digested in the period until the display of the four symbol variation display is completed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413 (2) to 417 (66), the target of pre-reading is Four notice icons have been digested between the time when a certain symbol variation display is suspended and the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably digested, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, "holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 435. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 435 (notice icon I21 of" house "or notice of" crest "". (Icon I22, etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 440, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 443, etc.]
The second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 440, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 443, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The first display means is a display related to the notice icon [for example, a display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIGS. 440 (10) to 441 (13) is digested, or a display in which FIGS. ), The display of the character BC of the chief, which is performed corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, or the pseudo-continuous production, or the display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIGS. 443 (c1) to (c5). Etc.] is a means that can be displayed,
The second display means is a display related to the notice icon [for example, the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 440 (2) to 441 (13) and the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 440 (5) to (9). It is a means capable of displaying the notice icon I6 of the hat, or the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 443 (c6).
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 412 may function as a look-ahead notice display, etc.].
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 443 (c1)]] The display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 443 (c1) to (c9), the notice icon is displayed during the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to be read ahead to the end of the symbol variation display. Two hat notice icons I6 and one shuriken notice icon I7 are displayed in area 285B],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game console, displays related to the notice icon may be displayed on a plurality of display means, so that the player's line of sight looking at the display related to the notice icon should not be concentrated on one display means. It may be possible to entertain the player.

Here, the display means may be composed of only the first display means and the second display means, or may include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. .. Further, the display means may always include a first display means and a second display means, or may not include a first display means and a second display means.

Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the display related to the notice icon, or may be able to display a display other than the display related to the notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display the display related to the notice icon, or may not display the display related to the notice icon.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the display related to the notice icon, or may be able to display a display other than the display related to the notice icon. Further, the second display means may always display the display related to the notice icon, or may not display the display related to the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.
In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Further, after the "second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second hold which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 443 (c1)] is suspended, the second symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display of No. 1 is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 443 (c1) to (c9), they are subject to pre-reading. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the end of the symbol variation display, the shuriken notice icon I7 and the two hat notice icons I6 have been digested, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the first In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be something other than the plurality of notice icons that is digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably exhausted, and the second symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be exhausted only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the second The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Further, the notice icon is displayed in the "second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 440, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 443, etc.]. [For example, as shown in FIG. 440 (5), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the display means on which the stock effect can be performed is defined, it may be possible not to overlook the stocked notice icon.

Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display something other than the notice icon. Good. Further, the second display means may be configured so that the notice icon is always displayed, or the second display means may be configured so that the notice icon may not be displayed.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display means, and the notice icon may be displayed in the display means other than the second display means. May be good.

Further, "the first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 440, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 443, etc.] displays the notice icon. A notice may be displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 440 (2) to (5), a notice icon I6 for a hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. (Direction) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the notice icon may be displayed, it may be possible to draw the player's attention to the display means and prevent the player from overlooking the display of the notice icon. is there.

Here, the first display means may only display a notice that the notice icon will be displayed, or the first display means may display a notice that the notice icon will be displayed. Other displays may also be displayed. In addition, the first display means may always display a notice that the notice icon will be displayed, and the first display means may display a notice that the notice icon will be displayed. It may not be done.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display means, and the notice icon may be displayed in the display means other than the first display means. May be displayed to give notice.

Further, "the first display means includes a first display area [for example, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 440, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 443, and the like]. It is a provided means,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 440, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 443, and the like]. Means,
The notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 440 (4) and (10), the notice icon is the first. 1 Decorative symbol display device 208A and 2nd decorative symbol display device 208B are displayed, etc.]. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to produce an impactful notice icon, which may entertain the player.

Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or may not be provided with the first display area.

Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with a second display area without fail, or may not be provided with a second display area.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area and the second display area, and the notice icon may be displayed in a display other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over an area. Further, the notice icon may always be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, and the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

Further, only the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, and other than the notice icon, the first display area and the second display area may be displayed. It may be displayed over.

Further, "the first display means includes a first display area [for example, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 440, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 443, and the like]. It is a provided means,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 440, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 443, and the like]. Means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type [for example, a plurality of types of notice icons according to the type of effect shown in FIG. 412].
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area [for example, FIG. As shown in 441 (16) to (18), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the enlarged character BC2 of the chief is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device. In the effect display in which the chief character BC pushes up the right symbol, the right symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the pseudo-consecutive symbol is displayed over 208B. Displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to produce an impactful notice icon, which may entertain the player.

Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or may not be provided with the first display area.

Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with a second display area without fail, or may not be provided with a second display area.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in a display mode according to the type, or may not be displayed in a display mode according to the type.

Further, when the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area and the second display area. , When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed over the display area other than the first display area and the second display area. May be good. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may always be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be displayed over the first display area and the second display area.

Further, when the notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. , When the notice icon is digested, the effect display other than the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. Good.

In addition, "the lost symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414 (21) to 417 (66), which is a lost symbol. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the suspension of "variation display, etc.") to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 413. As shown in FIGS. (2) to 417 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended until the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Further, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414 (21) to 417 (66), which is a loss of the symbol variation display, etc.] is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is held. The plurality of notice icons may be digested in the period until the display of the four symbol variation display is completed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413 (2) to 417 (66), the target of pre-reading is Four notice icons have been digested between the time when a certain symbol variation display is suspended and the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably digested, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, "holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 440]. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 440 (hat notice icon I6, etc.) is shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of pending symbol variation display operations, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying multiple types of display [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
The first movable means [for example, an actuator that displaces the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 446 (12), a family crest accessory 224B shown in FIG. 438 (d4-2), etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 412 (a) and FIG. 4B, a "house" notice icon I21, and a "crest" notice icon I22. , Drink notice icon I31, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 413 (2)]] The display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413 (2) to 417 (66) and FIG. 446, in the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to be read ahead to the end of the symbol variation display. Two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, a drink notice icon I31, etc. are displayed in the notice icon display area 285],
The first movable means provides a first movable effect [for example, a movable effect that displaces the effect button 136 from a default position to a protruding position, as shown in FIGS. 446 (12) to (17)]. It ’s a viable means,
When the fourth notice icon [for example, drink notice icon I31, etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be executed. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there was room for improvement in the movable means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a characteristic in the movable means.

Further, according to this game table, when the fourth notice icon is digested by the display means, the first movable effect by the first movable means may be performed, so that the variation of the effect can be increased. In some cases.

Further, according to this game table, the line of sight of the player can be focused not only on the display means but also on the movable means, and the effect of the effect may be enhanced.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in a display mode according to the type, or may not be displayed in a display mode according to the type.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as a look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Further, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the first movable effect. Further, the first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

Further, when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the first movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be executed. When the fourth notice icon is exhausted, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may be executed. Further, when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be executed without fail, or the displayed notice icon may be configured. It may be configured so that the first movable effect may not be executed when the fourth notice icon is exhausted.

Further, the first movable effect may be executed only when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon may be executed. It may be configured so that the first movable effect may be executed even when the fourth notice icon is not digested.

Further, after the "second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the third hold which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 413 (2)] is suspended, the second symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display of the above is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413 (2) to 417 (66) and FIG. 446, the look-ahead During the period from the suspension of the target symbol variation display to the end of the symbol variation display, the notice icon I6 for the two hats, the notice icon I9 for the Senryobako, and the notice icon I31 for the drink are digested, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the first In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be something other than the plurality of notice icons that is digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably exhausted, and the second symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be exhausted only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the second The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Further, when the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 412, the notice icon I21 of the "house", etc.] is digested, the first movable It is configured so that the production is not executed,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, it may be configured so that only the first movable effect is not executed, or among the displayed notice icons. When the fifth notice icon is digested, it may be configured so that a movable effect other than the first movable effect is not executed. Further, when the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may not be executed without fail, or the first of the displayed notice icons may be executed. It may be configured so that the first movable effect may be executed when the five notice icons are digested.

Further, it may be configured so that the first movable effect is not executed only when the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, or the first of the displayed notice icons. It may be configured so that the first movable effect is not executed even when the notice icon of the fifth is not digested.

In addition, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player.
The first movable means is a means for moving the operating means.
The first movable effect shows the mode of the operating means from the first mode [for example, the default position shown in FIG. 446 (12)] to the second mode [for example, FIG. 446 (17)]. It is an effect that changes to the protruding position, etc.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the operation means may be noticed by the notice icon, so that the operation means may also be noticed.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or may be one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, it may be operated by the player without fail, or may not be operated by the player.

Further, the first movable means may be one in which only the operating means can be moved, or one in which other than the operating means can be moved. Further, the first movable means may be one in which the operating means is always movable, or may not be movable.

In addition, "a second movable means [for example, a family crest accessory shown in FIG. 438 (d4-2)] is provided.
The second movable means is a means capable of performing the second movable effect [for example, the family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 438 (d4-2)].
When the sixth notice icon [for example, the notice icon I21 of "house"] among the displayed notice icons is digested, the second movable effect may be executed. ing,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the variety of production by the movable means is abundant, and the interest may be improved.

Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the second movable effect. Further, the second movable means may always execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

Further, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the second movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be executed. When the sixth notice icon is exhausted, a movable effect other than the second movable effect may be executed. In addition, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed without fail, or among the displayed notice icons. It may be configured so that the second movable effect may not be executed when the sixth notice icon is digested.

Further, the second movable effect may be executed only when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon may be executed. The second movable effect may be executed even when the sixth notice icon is not digested.

In addition, "the lost symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414 (21) to 417 (66), which is a lost symbol. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the suspension of "variation display, etc.") to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 413. As shown in FIGS. (2) to 417 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended until the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Further, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414 (21) to 417 (66), which is a loss of the symbol variation display, etc.] is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is held. The plurality of notice icons may be digested in the period until the display of the four symbol variation display is completed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413 (2) to 417 (66), the target of pre-reading is Four notice icons have been digested between the time when a certain symbol variation display is suspended and the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably digested, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, "holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 435. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 446 (the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako, the notice icon I31 of the drink, etc.)). Is not an icon indicating the number of pending symbol variation display operations in Special Figure 1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 412 (a), FIG. 4 (b), etc.].
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 448 (1)]] The display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413 (2) to 417 (66), the notice icon is displayed during the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to be read ahead to the end of the symbol variation display. Two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, a fan notice icon I10, etc. are displayed in area 285],
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon display suggestion display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 448 (2) to (6), a notice that the notice icon produced by the lord is displayed, etc. ], And
The notice icon display suggestion display is a display suggesting that the display of the notice icon may be started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game console, it may be suggested in advance that the display of the notice icon may be started, so that the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon display suggestion display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon display suggestion display, or may not display the notice icon display suggestion display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as a look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may be able to suggest only that the notice icon display may be started, or may be other than the case where the notice icon display may be started. It may be suggestive. In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may always suggest that the notice icon display may be started, or may not suggest that the notice icon display may be started. There may be.

Further, after the "second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second hold which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 448 (1)] is suspended, the second symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display of No. 1 is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413 (2) to 417 (66), it is a target of pre-reading. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the end of the symbol variation display, the two hat advance notice icons I6, the Senryobako notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are exhausted. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the first In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be something other than the plurality of notice icons that is digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably exhausted, and the second symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be exhausted only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the second The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Further, "The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, as shown in FIGS. 448 (2) to (5), twice. There is a notice that the notice icon will be displayed by the director over the pattern change display of], etc.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, so that the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a symbol variation display other than the plurality of symbol variation displays. It may be the one that may occur. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be always displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

Further, "In the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display is terminated [for example, FIG. 448 (2)). -As shown in Fig. (5), the notice that the notice icon directed by the lord is displayed has ended before the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is started.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the notice icon display suggestion display ends before the symbol variation display to be pre-read starts, it may be possible to concentrate on the symbol variation to be pre-read.

Here, during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, only the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated, or the second symbol variation may be terminated. During the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the display, the display other than the display of the warning icon display suggestion display may be terminated. Further, during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end without fail, or the second symbol variation display may be configured. It may be configured so that the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may not end during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before.

Further, the display of the warning icon display suggestion display may be terminated only during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display may be terminated. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated even when the symbol variation display displayed before is not displayed.

Further, "The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may suggest that the display of at least one of the notice icons of a third number [for example, three or the like] may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 450 (a1-4), in the Amida production, at least one of the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the Senryobako notice icon I9 may be started to be displayed. Suggesting that there is, etc.],
The third number is a number of two or more.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, at least one of the previously suggested notice icons may be displayed, so that the player can know which notice icon may be displayed. In some cases, it may be possible to entertain the fluctuation of the design on which the notice icon is displayed.

Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may only suggest that the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third notice icon display suggestion display may be used. It may also suggest something other than that at least one of the number of notice icons may be initiated. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may always suggest that the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third number of notice icons may be started. It may not suggest that at least one of these may be initiated.

In addition, "the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started [for example, FIG. As shown in 450 (a1-1) to FIG. 6 (a-6), as a result of the Amida effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display may be started only by at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon display suggestion display, or the notice may be started. Display other than at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested by the icon display suggestion display may also be started. Further, the display may be configured so that at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested that the display suggestion display of the notice icon may be started is always started. The display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested by the icon display suggestion display may not be started.

In addition, "the lost symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414 (21) to 417 (66), which is a lost symbol. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the suspension of "variation display, etc.") to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 413. As shown in FIGS. (2) to 417 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended until the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Further, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414 (21) to 417 (66), which is a loss of the symbol variation display, etc.] is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is held. The plurality of notice icons may be digested in the period until the display of the four symbol variation display is completed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413 (2) to 417 (66), the target of pre-reading is Four notice icons have been digested between the time when a certain symbol variation display is suspended and the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably digested, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, "holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 448. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 448 (hat notice icon I6, etc.) is shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of pending symbol variation display operations, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 412 (a), FIG. 4 (b), etc.].
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as the first look-ahead notice display.
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is the jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 451 (2)]] ”) Is suspended, and then the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as“ first symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 451 (4) to (13)] ”) is displayed. May be started,
During the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons"). The display may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413 (4) to 417 (66), the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is the jackpot that is the target of pre-reading is suspended. Two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed from the start of the display to the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead. etc],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that starts to be displayed after the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game console, the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be read ahead is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but then started. It may be possible to enjoy the display of the notice icon as the look-ahead notice display related to the second symbol change display that is the target of the look-ahead from the symbol change display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the first look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as the first look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the first look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as the first look-ahead notice display.

Further, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol variation display is started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In some cases, a symbol variation display other than the display of the display may be started. Further, the display of the first symbol variation display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the first symbol variation display may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

Further, the display of the first symbol variation display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, and the display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In some cases, only the display of one symbol variation display may be started.

Further, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, or the first In the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the display of the first symbol variation may be started. The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, "the plurality of notice icons may be digested in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display [for example," As shown in FIGS. 413 (4) to 417 (66), the target of the look-ahead is the target of the look-ahead after the display of the symbol variation display which is the target of the look-ahead is started after the display of the symbol variation which is a big hit is suspended. By the time the big hit symbol variation display is completed, the notice icon I6 for the two hats, the notice icon I9 for the Senryobako, and the notice icon I10 for the fan will be digested.]
,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be read ahead is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but is started after that. It may be possible to enjoy digestion of the notice icon as a look-ahead notice display related to the second symbol change display that is the target of look-ahead from the symbol change display.

Here, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the first In the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be digested without fail, and the first symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the start of display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, "holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 451]. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 451 (hat notice icon I6, etc.) is shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of pending symbol variation display operations, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

Further, when the "second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 451 (2)] is suspended, the second symbol variation display is performed. The display of the hold display [for example, the display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 451 (2)] is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be recognized that the second symbol variation display has been suspended.

Here, the display of the second hold display may be started only when the second symbol variation display is suspended, and the second symbol variation display may be started only when the second symbol variation display is not suspended. The display of the hold display may be started. Further, the display of the second hold display may be started whenever the second symbol change display is suspended, and the display of the second hold display may be started when the second symbol change display is held. It does not have to be started.

Further, "as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display is displayed in the second look-ahead display mode [for example, the look-ahead notice display mode (display mode of Sabohani) shown in FIG. 451 (2)]. May be
In the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode [for example, FIG. 451 (2). ), The third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (sabohani display mode) when the symbol variation display, which is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of look-ahead, is held. Display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the variation of the look-ahead notice display increases, and the interest may be improved.

Here, as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second look-ahead display mode, or as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display may be displayed. It may be displayed in a display mode other than the second look-ahead display mode. Further, as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display may always be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, and as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display is the second look-ahead display. It may not be displayed in the mode.

Further, in the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second look-ahead display mode, or the second In the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display of is suspended, the second hold display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second look-ahead display mode. Further, in the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may always be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, or the second symbol variation display may be displayed. In the symbol variation display displayed when is held, the second hold display may not be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode.

Further, the second hold display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode only in the symbol change display displayed when the second symbol change display is held, or the second In the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display of is suspended, the second hold display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third look-ahead notice display [for example, a look-ahead mode effect display shown in FIGS. 452 (b2) to (b3)].
The third look-ahead notice display is a display in which the display may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended [for example, shown in FIGS. 452 (b1) to (b3). As described above, the effect display of the look-ahead mode is started after the symbol variation display, which is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of the look-ahead, is held.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the variation of the look-ahead notice display increases, so that the interest may be improved.

Here, the third look-ahead notice display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition to the above, the display may be started. Further, the third look-ahead notice display may always start after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or may not start after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be cases.

In addition, "a lost symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter," a fourth symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation that is a loss based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 451 (2)). Display, etc.] ”) is suspended, and then referred to as a symbol variation display (hereinafter,“ third symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display, etc. shown in FIGS. 451 (4) to (13)] ”. ) May start to be displayed,
In the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started [for example, the figure. As shown in 413 (4) to 417 (66), the target of the look-ahead is the target of the look-ahead after the display of the symbol change display that is started after the display of the symbol change that is the target of the look-ahead is suspended. By the time the display of the symbol variation that causes a certain loss is completed, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the Senryobako, the notice icon I10 of the fan, etc. will be displayed],
The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that starts to be displayed after the symbol variation display displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

In addition, there may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variation display is started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. In some cases, a symbol variation display other than the display of the display may be started. Further, the display of the third symbol variation display may be always started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

Further, the display of the third symbol variation display may be started only after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, and the display of the third symbol variation display may be started only after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. In some cases, only the display of the three symbol variation displays may be started.

Further, in the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, or the third symbol variation display may be started. In the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the display of the third symbol variation may be started. The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Further, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414 (21) to 417 (66), which is a loss of the symbol variation display, etc.] is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is held. The plurality of notice icons may be digested in the period until the display of the four symbol variation display is completed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413 (2) to 417 (66), the target of pre-reading is Four notice icons have been digested between the time when a certain symbol variation display is suspended and the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably digested, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 412 (a), each notice icon shown in FIG. 4B, each notice icon shown in FIG. 466 (d), etc.].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon [for example, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 463].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 463].
The first display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of "By digesting the notice icon ..." displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 463 (a1), and a tutorial display shown in FIG. 456 (a). The display of "Den-sama is the Yatsushiro Shogun" displayed in the part TT1, "Panda is the master of the lord" etc. displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in the figure (l)].
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 or the like shown in FIG. 463] in the display means.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 463 (a7), the tutorial display unit TT4 has a swordsman's notice icon I62. And the chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed (stocked), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as a look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be displayable only in the first display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area of the display means. May be good. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be one. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. ..

Further, "In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 463 (a7), when the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4, the notice icon is displayed. The explanation is not displayed in the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be one that is not displayed only in the state where the notice icon is displayed, or may be one that is not displayed even in a state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not always be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed.

Further, "When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed [For example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 463 (a7), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display will be resumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed, or when the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display may be restarted. There may be. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, or when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be restarted.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a character display of" intense heat "in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 462 (d)".
The second display is a notice display, and is
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 462 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 shows "extreme heat". Character display is displayed, etc.],
The explanatory display is an explanatory display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display of "By digesting the notice icon ..." in the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 463 (a1)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be displayable. Further, the second display may always be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. May be good.

Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display related to the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display related to the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may always include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display.
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern shown in FIG. 460].
The third display means is a display that matches the display of the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 460 (a2) to (a4) to give a notice of the swordsman. Display that icon I62 is stocked, etc.] is a means that can be displayed.
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 460 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is located below the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include a display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display. It may be configured without including at least one of the means.

Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. In addition, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display matching the display of the second display means, or may display a display other than the display matching the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display a display that matches the display of the second display means, or may not display a display that matches the display of the second display means. May be good.

Further, the first display area may be provided in a part of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area in the third display means. ..

Further, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display means. It may be the one that was given. Further, the first display area may be always provided in at least a part of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display means. There may be.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 463].
The third display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of the "castle town stage" displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 463 (a1), and a stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 457 (c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.],
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 or the like shown in FIG. 463 (a1)] in the display means.
The notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 463 (a7), the stage name display unit ST2 has a princess notice icon I64. Two pseudo-ream notice icons I65 are displayed (stocked), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area of the display means. You may. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area of the display means.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the second display area, or may not be displayed in the second display area.

Further, "In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 463 (a7), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display unit ST2, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the third display may be a state in which the notice icon is displayed only in the second display area and may not be displayed, or a state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be in the state of or not displayed. Further, the third display may not always be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or is displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be done.

Further, "The first display area is a display area divided by lines [for example, as shown in FIG. 463 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is divided into squares by lines, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by lines, or may be partitioned including items other than lines. Further, the first display area may be always partitioned by a line, or may not be partitioned by a line.

In addition, "holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 463]. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 463 (a7) (princess notice icon I64, pseudo-continuous notice icon I65, The swordsman's notice icon I62, chance-up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons that indicate the number of pending symbol variation displays in Special Figure 1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Also,
The hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 412 (a), each notice icon shown in FIG. 4B, each notice icon shown in FIG. 466 (d), etc.].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The display area in which the notice icon is displayed [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 463, the stage name display unit ST2, etc.] is displayed in the hold icon [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 463]. The display area is different from the display area [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 463] on which the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. are displayed.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 463].
The first display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of "By digesting the notice icon ..." displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 463 (a1), and a tutorial display shown in FIG. 456 (a). The display of "Den-sama is the Yatsushiro Shogun" displayed in the part TT1, "Panda is the master of the lord" etc. displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in the figure (l)].
When displayed, the first display is a display displayed in the first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 or the like shown in FIG. 463] in the display means.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 463 (a9), the tutorial display unit TT4 has a chance up with the swordsman's notice icon I62. Notice icon I63 is displayed (stocked), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as a look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, and when it is displayed, it may be displayed in a field other than the first display area of the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area of. Further, the first display may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Further, "In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 463 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. In the displayed state, the explanation is not displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the state of being displayed in the first display area of the notice icon, only the first display may not be displayed, or in the state of being displayed in the first display area of the notice icon, the first. It is also possible to hide the display other than the display of. Further, the first display may not always be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or the first display may not be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. The display may be displayed.

Further, the first display may not be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or even in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. It is possible that only the first display is not displayed.

Further, "When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed [For example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 463 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display will be resumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display is also restarted. In some cases. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be restarted.

Further, when the first display is, for example, the explanation of the first character, the tenth display, which is an explanation display different from the first display, may be displayed.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a character display of" intense heat "in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 462 (d)".
The second display is a notice display, and is
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 462 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 shows "extreme heat". Character display is displayed, etc.],
The explanatory display is an explanatory display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display of "By digesting the notice icon ..." in the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 463 (a1)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be displayable. Further, the second display may always be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. May be good.

Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display related to the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display related to the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may always include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

The notice display in this description may be one of a number of notice displays.

Further, the notice display may be a notice display by displaying characters. On the other hand, the other notice display may be a display by displaying an image.

In addition, "the display of one of the plurality of types of the display is the third display [for example, the character display of" gold is hotter than red "in the balloon TT2 shown in FIG. 462 (a1), or the same figure. The character display of "Swordsman reach is hot" in the balloon part TT2 and the character display of "When a panda breaks in" in the balloon part TT3 shown in (a6)].
The third display is an explanatory display.
The display content of the third display is a display content different from the display content of the first display.
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means when it is displayed [for example, a balloon portion TT2, a balloon portion TT3, etc. shown in FIG. 462 (a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be completely different.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area of the display means when it is displayed, and when it is displayed, it may be displayed in a field other than the second display area of the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area of. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means when it is displayed, and when it is displayed, it may be displayed in the second display area of the display means. It may not be displayed.

Further, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be completely different from the first display area.

Further, "Even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 462 (a10). Even if the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, the character display "Swordsman reach is hot" is displayed on the balloon display section TT2, and "When a panda breaks in" on the balloon display section TT3. Character display is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in this state, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may always be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

Further, the third display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, and other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in the state of, the third display may be displayed.

In addition, the animation introducing the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

In addition, a notice display (second notice display) different from the first notice display may be displayed in the second display area. In addition, the notice display and the explanation display may be displayed alternately.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 463].
The fourth display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of the "castle town stage" displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 463 (a1), and a stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 457 (c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.],
The display content of the fourth display is a display content different from the display content of the first display.
The fourth display is a display displayed in a third display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 or the like shown in FIG. 463 (a1)] in the display means.
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area.
In a state where the first number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, when three notice icons are displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 463, a new notice icon is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be completely different.

Further, the fourth display may be displayable only in the third display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area of the display means. May be good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the third display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area of the display means.

Further, the third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be completely different.

Further, in the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area, or the first one. In the state where the number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area. Further, in the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may always be displayed in the third display area, or the first one. In the state where the number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may not be displayed in the third display area.

Further, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area only when the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, or the first number. Even in a state other than the state in which the notice icon of is displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area.

Further, here, a type in which the stage name or the like is displayed by a plurality of display means is also included.

Further, "In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 463 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display unit ST2, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth display may be a state in which the notice icon is displayed only in the third display area and may not be displayed, or a state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be in the state of or not displayed. Further, the fourth display may not always be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or is displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be done.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display.
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern shown in FIG. 460].
The third display means is a display linked with the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 460 (a2) to (a4), and the swordsman's notice icon I62 Is a means that can display [displays that are stocked, etc.]
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 460 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is located below the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include a display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display. It may be configured without including at least one of the means.

Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. In addition, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display linked with the display of the second display means, or may display a display other than the display linked with the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display the display linked with the display of the second display means, or may not display the display linked with the display of the second display means. May be good.

Further, the first display area may be provided in a part of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area in the third display means. ..

Further, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display means. It may be the one that was given. Further, the first display area may be always provided in at least a part of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display means. There may be.

Further, "The first display area is a display area divided by lines [for example, as shown in FIG. 463 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is divided into squares by lines, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by lines, or may be partitioned including items other than lines. Further, the first display area may be always partitioned by a line, or may not be partitioned by a line.

Further, the second display area may also be divided by a line, and the third display area may also be divided by a line.

In addition, "holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 463]. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 463 (a9) (princess notice icon I64, pseudo-continuous notice icon I65, The swordsman's notice icon I62, chance-up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons that indicate the number of pending symbol variation displays in Special Figure 1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

It should be noted that the number of holds and the number of notice icons may happen to match.

Further, the maximum number of holds and the maximum number of stocks of the notice icon may be the same or different.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 412 (a), each notice icon shown in FIG. 4B, each notice icon shown in FIG. 466 (d), etc.].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The notice icon is different from the hold icon [for example, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 468].
The notice icon can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.
One of the plurality of types of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the display mode of the swordsman's notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 468 (l)]. ,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is the display of the second display mode [for example, the enlarged notice icon I62 of the swordsman displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 468 (i). Aspects, etc.]
The size of the notice icon is larger in the second display mode than in the first display mode [for example, from the notice icon I62 of the swordsman displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 468 (l). Also, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 468 (i) is larger in size, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode when stocked [for example, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked as shown in FIG. 468 (i), the notice icon I62 is stocked. Swordsman's notice icon I62 is enlarged and displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the plurality of types. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

Further, the size of the notice icon may always be larger in the second display mode than in the first display mode, and the size of the notice icon is larger in the second display mode than in the first display mode. It may not be available.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display mode when stocked, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode when stocked. You may. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the second display mode when stocked, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when stocked.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode. [For example, the swordsman icon I62 is shown in FIG. 468 (i). ), After being enlarged and displayed, as shown in FIG. 468 (l), it is displayed in a normal display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or after being displayed in the second display mode. Therefore, it may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the second display mode and then in the first display mode. It may not be displayed in the display mode of.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only after it is displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the second display mode other than after it is displayed. Also, it may be displayed in the first display mode. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the second display mode and then in the first display mode. It may not be displayed in the display mode of.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 468 (a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs the decorative symbol variation display. etc],
The notice icon is an icon that does not overlap with the decorative symbol variation display in the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 468 (l), a normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area. The pseudo-ream notice icon I65 and the swordsman's notice icon I62 do not overlap with the decorative design being displayed in a variable manner, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the notice icon may not overlap the decorative symbol variation display only in the first display mode, or may not overlap the decorative symbol variation display even in the display modes other than the first display mode. You may. Further, the notice icon may not always overlap the decorative symbol variation display in the first display mode, or may overlap the decorative symbol variation display in the first display mode. ..

Further, "The decorative symbol variation display is a display that does not overlap with the notice icon of the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 468 (l), the decorative symbol during the variation display is a notice icon. It does not overlap with the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 or the swordsman's notice icon I62 in the normal display mode displayed in the display area],
The decorative symbol variation display is a display that may overlap with the notice icon of the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 468 (i), the decorative symbol during the variation display is a notice. It overlaps with the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 of the enlarged display mode displayed on the icon display frame YF and the notice icon I62 of the swordsman],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the decorative symbol variation display may not overlap only with the notice icon of the first display mode, or may not overlap other than the notice icon of the first display mode. .. Further, the decorative symbol variation display may not always overlap with the notice icon of the first display mode, or may overlap with the notice icon of the first display mode.

Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be overlapped only with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may be overlapped with other than the notice icon of the second display mode. There may be something. Further, the decorative symbol variation display may always overlap with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may not overlap with the notice icon of the second display mode.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode even when digested.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode only when it is digested, or it may be displayed in the second display mode even when it is not digested. There may be. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode when it is digested, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when it is digested.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying the notice icon in the hold display area [for example, the notice icon display area in the UI unit UI1 shown in FIG. 468 (a)].
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 468 (l), is displayed in the notice icon display area. The pseudo-ream notice icon I65 and the swordsman's notice icon I62 are displayed in a normal display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be one that can display the notice icon only in the hold display area, or may be one that can display the notice icon in an area other than the hold display area. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon in the hold display area, or may not display the notice icon in the hold display area.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode when it is displayed in the hold display area, and may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode when it is displayed in the hold display area. It may be displayed in the display mode of. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode when it is displayed in the hold display area, or in the first display mode when it is displayed in the hold display area. It may not be displayed.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only when it is displayed in the hold display area, or may be displayed in the first display mode even when it is not displayed in the hold display area. It may be displayed by.

In addition, "when the notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area is displayed in the second display mode [for example, FIG. 468 (i)). As shown in, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the notice icon display area is displayed in an enlarged display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the notice icon is newly stocked, only a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In this case, all of the notice icons displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode. Further, when the notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be always displayed in the second display mode, and the notice icon is newly stocked. In some cases, at least a part of the notice icons displayed in the hold display area may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, "The second display mode is a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is enlarged [for example, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman in the enlarged display mode shown in FIG. 468 (i) is It is an enlarged display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in the normal display mode shown in FIG. 468 (l)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display mode may be a display mode in which only the notice icon of the first display mode is enlarged, or a display mode in which other than the notice icon of the first display mode is also enlarged. May be good. Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is always enlarged, or a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is not enlarged.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol advance, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, revariation effect, etc.]. Yes,
The display means can display a plurality of types of the notice icons [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 412 (a) and FIG. 4B, each notice icon shown in FIG. 466 (d), and the like]. And
When the notice icon is digested, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 414 (23) to (25). When the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 415 (28) to (31) is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

Further, when the notice icon is digested, only the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed, or when the notice icon is digested, it is digested. A type of notice display other than the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon may be displayed. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may always be displayed, and when the notice icon is digested, the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed. There may be cases where the notice display of the type corresponding to is not displayed.

In addition, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed only when the notice icon is digested, and also in cases other than the case where the notice icon is digested. , A type of notice display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of holds the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" hold number ") [for example, FIG. 468 (for example, FIG. 468 ()). In the hold icon display area in the UI section UI1 shown in a), the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the reserved number depending on the displayed number [For example, the notice icon (two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65) shown in FIG. 468 (a) is a special figure 1. It is not an icon indicating the number of pending symbol variation display operations, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds, or may be able to display a display other than the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds. Good. Further, the display means may always display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
A game table provided with "display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The first display is a display including an icon display frame [for example, the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 471 (a)].
Of the icon display frames, an icon related to symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "icon") can be displayed in an area inside the frame (hereinafter, referred to as "frame area") [for example, "icon"). As shown in FIG. 471 (a), the variable icon h0 is housed in the hold display frame FL1],
The icon display frame is a display frame that can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.
One of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the default display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 471 (a)].
One of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode [for example, an extended display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 471 (i)].
The second display mode is a display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is extended [for example, the extended display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 471 (i) is FIG. 471. The hold display frame FL1 of the default display mode shown in (a) is a display mode extended upward, etc.],
The second display is a decorative symbol variation display [for example, a variation display of the first decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 471 (b) and a second decoration in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Display of fluctuations in the design, etc.]
The first display displayed in the first display mode is a display that does not overlap with the second display [for example, the default display mode shown in FIG. 471 (b). The hold display frame FL1 is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, etc.] so,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game table, the player notices that the effect is performed by expanding the icon display frame that is displayed with priority and performing a notice or a look-ahead notice in the expanded part. It may be possible to make it. In recent game consoles, since a plurality of various production displays are performed at the same time, it tends to be complicated and difficult to see. However, according to this game console, icons related to the symbol variation display that the player is always paying attention to. By expanding the icon display frame for displaying the icon, it is possible to distinguish it from other effect displays, and it may be possible to enhance the effect.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. .. Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

Further, the first display may include only the icon display frame. That is, the first display may be an icon display frame. Further, the first display may include something other than the icon display frame. Further, the first display may always include the icon display frame, or may not include the icon display frame.

Here, the "icon display frame" may be referred to as a "hold display frame", a "hold frame", a "UI", a "hold icon display area", or the like. Further, the "icon display frame" is a display that may overlap with at least a part of a hold icon, a variable icon, or the like. Further, since the "icon display frame" is displayed near the edge of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device, it may not be disturbed by other effect displays. Further, the "icon display frame" may be a frame in which one variable icon or hold icon is displayed. Further, the "icon display frame" can be said to be a display frame that does not overlap with the decorative symbol after the stop, or at least a display frame that overlaps with a part of the hold icon or the like. Further, the "icon display frame" is a background display displayed on the back side of the hold icon or the like, and can be said to be a background display different from the background display of the decorative pattern.

Further, here, the "icon display frame" is a part that the player can recognize as a part where the icon is displayed without being caught by the word "frame", and the display of the frame image is It is just an example and is not bound by this.

Further, the icon display frame may be configured so that only the icon can be displayed in the in-frame area, or the icon display frame may be configured so that other than the icon can be displayed in the in-frame area. Further, the icon may be configured so that the icon is always displayed in the area within the frame of the icon display frame, or the icon may not be displayed in the area within the frame of the icon display frame. Good.

Here, the area within the frame constitutes the icon display frame, and is therefore a concept included in the first display.

Further, the icon display frame may be displayable only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayable in a display mode other than the plurality of types of display modes. Further, the icon display frame may be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes without fail, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

Further, the icon display frame may be displayable only in the first display mode and the second display mode, and can also display display modes other than the first display mode and the second display mode. It may be one. Further, the icon display frame may always display the first display mode and the second display mode, or may not display the first display mode and the second display mode. May be good.

In addition, the second display mode may be an extension of only a part of the first display mode, or may be an extension of all of the first display mode.

Here, the "display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded" may be referred to as a second icon display frame.

Further, here, in a broad sense, the "extension" can be said to be a paraphrase display of the "icon display frame", or can be said to increase the area of the image or the area.

Further, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not overlap only with the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. It may be one that does not overlap. Further, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not always overlap with the second display, or may overlap with the second display. There may be.

Here, the "decorative symbol variation display" may include a stop display of the decorative symbol or a display in a state in which the symbol can be identified at the start of the variation. For example, the stop display is being performed during high-speed fluctuation or the like. It may include a display in a state that is more difficult to identify than the display state of the above or the display state at the start of fluctuation (for example, a semi-transparent display during high-speed fluctuation), or a decoration whose size is reduced during SP reach or the like. It may include a variable display of a symbol.

In addition, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The third display is an effect display [for example, the ninja character NJ1 shown in FIGS. 471 (g) to 471 (l) throws a shuriken SH1 to change the display mode of the second hold icon h12. Directive display, etc.]
A portion of the second display mode that is extended from the first display mode (hereinafter, "extended portion [for example, an extended portion in the reserved display frame FL1 of the extended display mode shown in FIG. 471 (i), etc." ] ”), The third display is configured to be displayable in an overlapping manner [for example, as shown in FIGS. 471 (g) to 471 (l), the second hold icon h12. In the effect display that changes the display mode of, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended part of the hold display frame FL1],
The extended portion is a portion that does not overlap with the second display [for example, as shown in FIG. 471 (f), the hold display frame FL1 of the extended display mode is the third display in the variable display. It does not overlap with the 1st decorative pattern or the 2nd decorative pattern],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, at least the expansion display of the icon display frame is given priority over the variation display of the decorative symbol indicating the propriety of the variation, and the effect display such as the notice and the look-ahead notice is performed in the expanded portion. It may be possible to improve the effect.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the third display. Further, the display means may always display the third display, or may not display the third display.

Here, the "effect display" includes a display mode in which the hold icon and the variable icon are changed, an effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon is changed, and the like.

Further, only the third display may be overlapped and displayed in the extended portion, or the display other than the third display may be overlapped and displayed in the extended portion. Further, the third display may be configured to be overlapped and displayed in the extended portion, or the third display may be configured not to be displayed in the extended portion in an overlapping manner. Good.

Here, the "extended part" may be a difference from the part before expansion, or may refer to itself when only a part of the icon display frame before expansion is expanded (or expanded). ..

Further, the extended portion may not overlap only with the second display, or may not overlap with the display other than the second display. Further, the extended portion may not always overlap the second display, or may overlap the second display.

In addition, "the effect display is a look-ahead notice display [for example, an effect display that changes the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 471 (g) to (l)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The effect display is a display that changes the display mode of the icon [for example, as shown in FIGS. 471 (g) to 471 (l), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 blinks in white. An effect display that changes from the display mode to be displayed to the display mode that lights up in green].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The second display is a display that may overlap with the extended portion [for example, as shown in FIG. 471 (f), the decorative symbol during the variable display is a hold of the extended display mode. It overlaps with the display frame FL1 etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may overlap only with the extended portion, or may overlap with a portion other than the extended portion. Further, the second display may always overlap the extended portion, or may not overlap the extended portion.

In addition, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The fourth display is the display of lines [for example, the display of lines by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi in the balloon TT2, the display of the lines by the character GY1 of the grandfather in the balloon TT3, etc., shown in FIG. 471 (i)]. Yes,
The fourth display is a display that does not overlap with the icon display frame of the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 471 (d), a hold display of the default display mode. The frame FL1 does not overlap with the balloon TT2 or the balloon TT3, etc.],
The fourth display is a display that may overlap the extended portion [for example, as shown in FIG. 471 (i), the hold display frame FL1 of the extended display mode is displayed in the balloon TT2. It overlaps with the display of the dialogue by the character CH1 of Princess Tachibi],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

Here, the "display of dialogue" may be referred to as "notice of dialogue" or "notice of conversation", and may include, for example, a notice of the change, a look-ahead notice, a tutorial display, and the like.

Further, the fourth display may not overlap only with the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may overlap other than the icon display frame of the first display mode. There may be something that has never happened. Further, the fourth display may not always overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode. There may be.

Here, "the fourth display does not overlap with the icon display frame of the first display mode" does not overlap with the display position. It is a concept that includes what is structured.

Further, the fourth display may be overlapped only in the extended portion, or may be overlapped in a portion other than the extended portion. Further, the fourth display may always overlap with the extended portion, or may not overlap with the extended portion.

In addition, the "display of lines" includes the display of the first line and the display of the second line, and the display of the first line is a display that may overlap with the extended part. , The display of the second line may be a display that does not overlap with the extended portion.

In addition, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The fifth display is a notice display [for example, an effect display that changes the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX shown in FIGS. 476 (c-1) to (c-6), and FIG. 478 (c). -1) to the effect display that changes the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in the figure (c-4)].
In the extended portion, the fifth display is configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner [for example, the notice icon BX of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 476 (c-1) to (c-6). In the effect display that changes the display mode and the effect display that changes the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIGS. 478 (c-1) to (c-4), the ninja character NJ1 is an extended display mode. It overlaps with the extended part of the hold icon display area FL1],
The third display and the fifth display are partially the same display [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 471 (g) to 471 (l). As for the display, the effect display for changing the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX shown in FIGS. 476 (c-1) to (c-6) is also shown in FIGS. 478 (c-1) to (c-). In the effect display that changes the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in 4), the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold icon display area FL1 in the extended display mode],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, for example, instead of making it difficult to confirm the validity of the fluctuation with a decorative pattern, the icon display frame is displayed by displaying both the third display and the fifth display with the expanded icon display frame. If you look at it, you may be able to see both displays without missing them. In addition, if all of the third display and the fifth display are different modes, it may be clarified whether the change should be expected or the symbol change display performed after the next time. By making a part of the display and the fifth display the same mode, it may be possible to raise the expectation until it becomes possible to recognize which is the expected symbol variation display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fifth display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the fifth display. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display, or may not display the fifth display.

Further, in the extended portion, only the fifth display may be configured to be overlapped and displayable, or in the extended portion, displays other than the fifth display may be configured to be overlapped and displayed. It may be the one that has been done. Further, in the extended portion, the fifth display may be configured to be displayed so as to always overlap, or in the extended portion, the fifth display may not be displayed in an overlapping manner. It may be configured in.

Further, the fifth display may be configured to be overlapped and displayed only in the extended portion, and the fifth display may be overlapped and displayed in the portion other than the extended portion. It may be configured.

Here, the "notice display" may be a change effect of a variable icon, a stop of a special symbol such as a pseudo-continuous symbol, or the like.

Further, "the third display and the fifth display are partially the same display" is a concept including, for example, the same animation until the character appears.

In addition, "the area within the frame in the first display mode (hereinafter," the area within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode shown in "the first frame area [for example, FIG. 471 (a))" Etc.] ”) is the first area,
The in-frame area in the second display mode (hereinafter, "second frame area [for example, an area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode shown in FIG. 471 (i)]". The area of.) Is the second area,
The second area is a larger area than the first area.
The extended portion is a portion of a difference region between the second frame region and the first frame region.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The second frame area is an area including the first frame area [for example, as shown in FIG. 471 (i), the hold display frame FL1 of the extended display mode. The area in the frame is configured to include the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode]. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second frame area may be configured to include a part of the first frame area, or may be configured to include the entire first frame area. There may be.

In addition, the "display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded" according to claim 1 means that "the area of the frame area of the first display mode has increased.""Displaymode" [For example, as shown in FIG. 471 (i), the reserved display frame FL1 in the extended display mode has a larger area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. Display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The icon display frame is configured to be displayable in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed [for example, there is no hold and no symbol variation display is performed. , The hold display frame FL1 is displayed even when neither the variable icon h0 nor the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the icon display frame may be configured to be displayable only in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be displayed even when the icon is not displayed. It may be configured so that it can be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, the icon display frame may be configured to be always displayed in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be configured even when the icon is not displayed. May not be displayed in the first display mode.

In addition, the icon display frame may be displayed in a state where the icon is not displayed, and the icon may be displayed in an area other than the icon display frame.

Further, "The icon that can be displayed in the frame area is a variable icon. [For example, as shown in FIG. 471 (i), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL1 of the extended display mode. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the icon that can be displayed in the frame area may be the hold icon.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon [for example, a first hold icon h11 to a fourth hold icon h14 displayed in the hold icon display area] as the icon.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the hold icon as an icon, or may be one that can display other than the hold icon as an icon. Further, the display means may always display the hold icon as an icon, or may not display the hold icon as an icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of pending start of symbol variation display, or corresponds to the number of pending start of symbol variation display. Hold icons other than the number of hold icons to be displayed may also be displayable. Further, the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of pending start of the symbol variation display may be always displayed, or the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of pending start of the symbol variation display may be displayed. May not be displayed.

Further, "The first display displayed in the second display mode is a display that does not overlap with the second display [for example, FIGS. 471 (f) to 471 (m) to the same (m). ), The hold display frame FL1 of the extended display mode overlaps with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Not, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not overlap only with the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. May also be non-overlapping. Further, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not necessarily overlap with the second display mode, or may overlap with the second display mode. There may be cases.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
A game table equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display [for example, the tutorial display shown in FIGS. 485 (a-2) to (a-4) (or the figure (a-4')). The drinker confrontation reach production, etc. displayed in Part TT6],
The first display is a display including an icon display frame [for example, a UI unit shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)].
The third display is an explanatory display [for example, a character display of "Panda is a master of the lord" displayed on the tutorial display unit TT6 shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)].
The fourth display is a failure pattern [for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-4'), a drink confrontation reach production in which the main character's lord is drunk and the main character's lord is defeated by his grandfather. The production pattern, etc.] and the success pattern [for example, the production pattern of the drink confrontation reach production, in which the grandfather gets drunk and the main character's lord wins the grandfather, as shown in Fig. 485 (a-4)] It is a prepared notice display,
The icon display frame includes a first area [for example, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)] and a second area [for example, the tutorial shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)]. It is a display frame composed of the display unit TT6, etc.].
An icon related to the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "icon [for example, variation icon h0, hold icon h11 to h14, etc.]") can be displayed in the first area.
The third display is configured to be displayable in the second area.
The fourth display is configured to be displayable in the second area.
The icon display frame may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the display mode of the UI unit in which the tutorial display unit TT6 is the display mode shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)].
The icon display frame may be displayed in the second display mode [for example, the display mode of the UI section in which the tutorial display section TT6 is a display mode in which the range is expanded as shown in FIG. 485 (a-2)]. ,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the second area is expanded in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode [for example, shown in FIG. 485 (a-2). The display mode of the UI unit is a display mode in which the tutorial display unit TT6 of the display mode shown in FIG. 485 (a-1) is expanded upward, etc.],
In the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, the third display may be displayed [for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)]. In the tutorial display part TT6 in the UI part of, the character display of "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, etc.],
In the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the fourth display is displayed [for example, in the UI unit of the display mode shown in FIG. 485 (a-2). In the tutorial display section TT6, the drink confrontation reach production is displayed, etc.],
The position of the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, and the position of the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode. Is a different position [for example, the display position of the hold display frame FL1 or the hold icon display area in the UI unit of the display mode shown in FIG. 485 (a-1) and the display mode shown in FIG. 485 (a-2). The display positions of the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area in the UI section are different, etc.],
After the fourth display of the success pattern is displayed, it is configured to develop into a super reach effect.
After the fourth display of the failure pattern is displayed, the icon display frame displayed in the second display mode is configured to be displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Further, "the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode and the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode are [For example, the size of the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area in the UI unit of the display mode shown in FIG. 485 (a-2) is the size of the display mode shown in FIG. 485 (a-1). It is the same size as the hold display frame FL1 and hold icon display area in the UI section],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode is the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, the tutorial display unit TT6 in the UI unit of the display mode shown in FIG. 485 (a-2) is the tutorial display unit in the UI unit of the display mode shown in FIG. 485 (a-1). It is configured to include TT6, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first region and the second region are adjacent to each other [for example, as shown in FIGS. 485 (a-1) and (a-2), the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon". The display area is adjacent to the upper part of the tutorial display unit TT6, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a decorative symbol variation display [for example, a variation display of the first decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), or a variation display of the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 485 (a-2). 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N, such as variable display of the 1st decorative symbol].
The second display does not overlap the front side of the first display displayed in the first display mode [for example, the UI of the display mode shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)). The part is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "when the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the display position of the second display moves [for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6. Is expanded, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The second display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of sizes.
One of the plurality of sizes is the first size [for example, the size of the first decorative pattern shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)].
The size of one of the plurality of types is the size of the second size [for example, the size of the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 485 (a-2) (for example, the size of the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)). Size smaller than size) etc.]
The second size is smaller than the first size.
When the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the second display displayed in the first size is displayed in the second size [for example, FIG. 485 (a). As shown in -2), when the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded, the first decorative symbol is displayed small above the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The UI unit shown in FIG. 485 (a-2) does not overlap the front side of the first display displayed in the second display mode. A game table characterized in that it does not overlap with the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the third decorative symbol display device 208N]. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "a display mode in which the second area is expanded in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode" means "the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode." [For example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-2), the extended tutorial display unit TT6 is shown in FIG. 485 (a-2). -1) is a display mode in which the area of the tutorial display unit TT6 in the UI unit of the display mode is large, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The icon display frame is configured to be displayable in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed [for example, there is no hold and no symbol variation display is performed. Even when neither the variable icon h0 nor the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, the UI unit is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The icon is a variable icon [for example, variable icon h0, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the icon is a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, etc.].
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [for example, the lower plate full tank error display ER shown in FIG. 483 (a-1)].
The fifth display is an error display, and is an error display.
The fifth display may overlap the front side of the first display displayed in the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game table provided with a first display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.].
A certain display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT6 shown in FIG. 485 (a-1) and the figure (a-2)] is a display area capable of taking a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the reduced aspect shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)].
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect [for example, an extended aspect shown in FIG. 485 (a-2)].
The size of the display area of the second aspect is larger than that of the display area of the first aspect.
A certain display area of the second aspect is a display area including a certain display area of the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a-2). , The expanded tutorial display unit TT6 is said to include the reduced tutorial unit TT6, etc.],
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display (hereinafter, "first display [for example, the drink confrontation reach effect shown in FIGS. 485 (a-2) to (a-4)]". ) Can be displayed,
After the display of the first display is completed, a certain display area of the second aspect changes from the second aspect to the first aspect [for example, when the drink confrontation reach effect is completed, the tutorial display unit TT6 returns from the extended mode to the reduced mode, etc.],
In a certain display area of the first aspect, a certain display different from the first display (hereinafter, ""
Second display [For example, the target mini-game shown in FIGS. 296 (a3) to (a4), the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6), and the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to 312 (b4). Golf games, etc. shown in Fig. (B7)] ". ) Can be displayed,
The second display is a display of a mini game.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, a certain display area may be capable of taking only a plurality of modes, or may be capable of taking a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, a certain display area may or may not always take a plurality of modes.

Also, the display area of the second aspect may be larger only in size than the display area of the first aspect, and the display area of the second aspect may be larger than the display area of the first aspect. A display area may be larger than the size. Further, the size of the display area of the second aspect may always be larger than that of the display area of the first aspect, and the size of the display area of the second aspect may be larger than that of the display area of the first aspect. Some display areas may not be larger in size.

Further, the certain display area of the second aspect may include only a certain display area of the first aspect, or may include an area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. You may. Further, a certain display area of the second aspect may always include a certain display area of the first aspect, or may not include a certain display area of the first aspect. There may be.

Further, in a certain display area of the second aspect, only the first display may be displayed, or in a certain display area of the second aspect, a display other than the first display can be displayed. There may be. Further, the first display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the first display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. ..

Further, the first display may be displayed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the first display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. It may be possible.

Further, after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second aspect may be regarded as from the second aspect to the first aspect, or after the display of the first display is finished. , A certain display area of the second aspect may be changed from the second aspect to the aspect other than the first aspect. Further, after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second aspect may always change from the second aspect to the first aspect, or after the display of the first display is finished. , A certain display area of the second aspect may not change from the second aspect to the first aspect.

Further, a certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect only after the display of the first display is finished, or after the display of the first display is finished. Alternatively, a certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect.

In a certain display area of the first aspect, only the second display may be displayed, or in a certain display area of the first aspect, a display other than the second display can be displayed. May be good. Further, the second display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the second display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect.

Further, the second display may be displayed only in a certain display area of the first aspect, and the second display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. It may be possible.

In addition, "the first display of the success pattern (hereinafter, referred to as" first effect display [for example, the effect display in which the hero's lord has won as shown in FIG. 485 (a-4)] ") can be displayed. Yes,
The first display of the failure pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "second effect display [for example, the effect display in which the hero's lord shown in FIG. 485 (a-4') was defeated by his grandfather, etc.]") can be displayed. Yes,
When the display of the second effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect changes from the second aspect to the first aspect [for example, After the production display in which the main character, the lord of the hero, was defeated by the grandfather, as shown in Fig. 485 (a-4'), the tutorial display unit TT6 was animated to shrink downward, and then the UI unit was displayed in Fig. 485. Return to the state shown in (a-1), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the first effect display may be displayed, or an effect display other than the first effect display may be displayed. Further, the first effect display may be displayed without fail, or the first effect display may not be displayed.

Further, only the second effect display may be displayed, or the effect display other than the second effect display may be displayed. Further, the second effect display may be displayed without fail, or the second effect display may not be displayed.

Further, when the display of the second effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect may be regarded as from the second aspect to the first aspect. , In a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the second effect display is completed, even if the certain display area of the second aspect changes from the second aspect to the aspect other than the first aspect. Good. Further, when the display of the second effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect may always change from the second aspect to the first aspect. , In a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the second effect display is completed, the certain display area of the second aspect may not change from the second aspect to the first aspect. ..

Further, when the display of the second effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, only the certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect. , In a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the second effect display is completed, the display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect also changes from the second aspect to the first aspect. Good.

Further, when the display of the second effect display is completed only in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect. , Even in the display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the second effect display is completed, the certain display area of the second aspect changes from the second aspect to the first aspect. May be good.

In addition, "the first super reach effect [for example, the swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 63 (c) to (j)] can be executed.
When the display of the first effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. [For example, after the production display in which the main character's lord has won is performed as shown in FIG. 485 (a-4), the SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 457 (c) to (j) is started. , When the SP reach is completed, the tutorial display unit TT6 is displayed in a reduced mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the first super reach effect may be feasible, or a reach effect other than the first super reach effect may be feasible. Further, the first super reach effect may be always executed, or the first super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, only a certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, after the first super reach effect is performed, the display area other than the certain display area is also the first. It may be one aspect. Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area always becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area does not become the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. There may be cases.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect only after the first super reach effect is performed. It ’s good. When the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, even if the certain display area becomes the first aspect other than after the first super reach effect is performed. Good.

Further, when only the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, even if the display other than the display of the first effect display ends, after the first super reach effect is performed, the certain display area becomes the first. It may be one aspect.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, even in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first after the first super reach effect is performed. It may be one aspect.

In addition, "the second display of the success pattern (hereinafter," display that becomes a strike in the bowling chance game shown in "third effect display [for example, FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6), FIG. 312 (b4)). ~ Display that becomes a cup-in in the golf game shown in the figure (b7)] ”) can be displayed.
The second display of the failure pattern (hereinafter, "fourth effect display [for example, a display that does not cause a strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6), FIGS. 312 (b4) to FIG. (B7), the display that does not cup in in the golf game, etc.] ”) can be displayed.
After the display of the fourth effect display is started, a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6). Even if a display that does not result in a strike in the bowling chance game shown or a display that does not cup in in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7) is displayed, FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a-) are displayed. As shown in 2), the tutorial display unit TT6 may change from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be possible to display only the third effect display, or it may be possible to display an effect display other than the third effect display. Further, the third effect display may be always displayed, or the third effect display may not be displayed.

Further, it may be possible to display only the fourth effect display, or it may be possible to display an effect display other than the fourth effect display. Further, the fourth effect display may be always displayed, or the fourth effect display may not be displayed.

Further, after the display of the fourth effect display is started, a certain display area may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display of the fourth effect display is started. After that, a certain display area may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, a certain display area may always change from the first aspect to the second aspect after the display of the fourth effect display is started, or after the display of the fourth effect display is started. There may be cases where a display area does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, after the display of the fourth effect display is started, only a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display of the fourth effect display is started. After that, a display area other than a certain display area may also change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect only after the display of the fourth effect display is started, or the display of the fourth effect display is started. In addition to the above, a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, "After the display of the third effect display is started, a certain display area changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6). When a strike is displayed in the bowling chance game shown or a cup-in display is displayed in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7), FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a-) are displayed. As shown in 2), the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the display of the third effect display is started, a certain display area may be regarded as from the first aspect to the second aspect, or after the display of the third effect display is started. , A certain display area may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, a certain display area may always change from the first aspect to the second aspect after the display of the third effect display is started, or after the display of the third effect display is started. There may be cases where a display area does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, only a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect after the display of the third effect display is started, or after the display of the third effect display is started, the display area may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. A display area other than a certain display area may also change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect only after the display of the third effect display is started, and other than after the display of the third effect display is started. Also, a display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "the second super reach production [for example, super long reach, triple line reach, Amedori reach, swordsman reach, etc.] can be executed.
After the display of the third effect display is started, the second super reach effect may be started [for example, a strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to 312 (a6)). When the display is displayed or the display shows cup-in in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7), the game shifts to ultra long reach (triple line reach, amedori reach, swordsman reach, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the second super reach effect may be executed, or the reach effect other than the second super reach effect may be executed. Further, the second super reach effect may be executed without fail, or the second super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, only the second super reach effect may be started after the display of the third effect display is started, or the second effect display may be started after the display of the third effect display is started. A reach effect other than the super reach effect may be started. Further, the second super reach effect may always be started after the display of the third effect display is started, or the second super reach effect may be started after the display of the third effect display is started. It may not be started.

Further, the second super reach effect may be started only after the display of the third effect display is started, and the second super reach effect may be started only after the display of the third effect display is started. A second super reach effect may be started.

Further, "The display of the first display may be started after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, FIG. 485 (Fig. 485). As shown in a-1) to Fig. (A-2), the drink confrontation reach effect may be performed after the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a reduced mode to an expanded mode],
After the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of the third display may be started [for example, FIG. 485 (a-1)). -As shown in FIG. 312 (a-2), after the tutorial display unit TT6 has changed from the reduced mode to the expanded mode, the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6), and the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. The golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to 312 (b7) may be played, etc.],
The third display is a display of a mini game.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after a certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of only the first display may be started, or the display of the first aspect may be started. After a certain display area changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of the display other than the first display may be started. Further, the display of the first display may always be started after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display area of the first aspect may be started. May not start displaying the first display after the first aspect has changed to the second aspect.

Further, the display of the first display may be started only after a certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display of the first aspect may be started. The display of the first display may be started other than after the display area has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, the display of the first display may be started after only a certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display of the first aspect may be started. The display of the first display may be started after the display area other than a certain display area changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, after a certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of only the third display may be started, or the display of the first aspect may be started. After the display area is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of the display other than the third display may be started. Further, the display of the third display may always be started after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display area of the first aspect may be started. May not start displaying the third display after the first aspect has changed to the second aspect.

Further, the display of the third display may be started only after a certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display of the first aspect may be started. The display of the third display may be started other than after the display area has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, the display of the third display may be started after only a certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display of the first aspect may be started. The display of the third display may be started after the display area other than the certain display area changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Also, "after the display region of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of the first display is started [for example, FIG. 485 (a-1). )-As shown in Fig. (A-2), the drink confrontation reach effect is performed after the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from the reduced mode to the expanded mode],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of only the first display may be started, or the display area of the first aspect may be started. May be started to display a display other than the first display after the first mode is changed to the second mode. Further, the display of the first display may always be started after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display area of the first aspect may be started. May not start displaying the first display after the first aspect has changed to the second aspect.

Further, the display of the first display may be started only after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display area of the first aspect may be started. The display of the first display may be started other than after the change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, the display of the first display may be started after only the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the certain display area of the first aspect may be started. The display of the first display may be started after the display areas other than the above have changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

It should be noted that the first display may not be started until after a certain display area of the first aspect has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, "the second display is a display including a first partial display [for example, the first part of the mini game] and a second partial display [for example, the second part of the mini game]. ,
After the first partial display is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the first aspect is made. The second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect [for example, a display showing how the character of the lord throws a bowling ball in the manner shown in FIG. 312 (a3). It was performed as the first half of the mini game, and then the tutorial display unit TT6 changed from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, and then the bowling ball became a pin in the manner shown in FIGS. 312 (a4) to (a5). Shows the approaching situation and encourages whether or not it will be a strike, and a success pattern that will eventually become a strike or a failure pattern that leaves an infallible pin will be performed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may include only the first partial display and the second partial display, or may include a display other than the first partial display and the second partial display. You may. Further, the second display may always include the first partial display and the second partial display, or includes at least one of the first partial display and the second partial display. It may not be available.

Further, after the first portion is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second aspect is performed. In some display areas of, only the second partial display may be displayed, or in some display areas of the first aspect, the first part is displayed and some display of the first aspect. After the area changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, a display other than the second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode. Further, after the first portion is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second aspect is performed. The second partial display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the first part is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect is the first. After changing from the display mode of the above to the second display mode, the second partial display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode.

Further, after the first portion is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second aspect is performed. The second partial display may be displayed only in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the first part is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and a certain display of the first aspect is displayed. After the area changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second partial display may be displayed in a display area other than a certain display area of the second mode.

Also, only after the first portion is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second A second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or a first part may be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and a certain display of the first aspect may be displayed. In addition to after the area has changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode.

Further, after the first portion is displayed only in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second display mode is displayed. The second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the first part may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. After a certain display area of is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode.

Further, "an icon related to the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" icon [for example, variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), hold icon h11 to h14, etc.] ") is an icon display area [for example, FIG. 485." It can be displayed in the hold display frame FL0, hold display area, etc. shown in (a-1)].
A certain display area is an area arranged below the icon display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), the tutorial display unit TT6 is a hold display frame FL0 or a hold display area. Located below],
The position of the icon display area is different depending on whether the display area has the first aspect or the second aspect [for example, FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a). As shown in -2), the positions of the hold display frame FL0 and the hold display area are different depending on whether the tutorial display unit TT6 is in the reduced mode or the enlarged mode],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the icon may be displayed only in the icon display area, or the icon may be displayed in a display area other than the icon display area. Further, the icon may always be displayed in the icon display area, or the icon may not be displayed in the icon display area.

Further, only the icon may be displayed in the icon display area, or something other than the icon may be displayed in the icon display area.

A certain display area may be arranged only below the icon display area, or may be arranged at a position other than below the icon display area. Further, a certain display area may be always arranged below the icon display area, or may not be arranged below the icon display area.

Further, depending on whether the display area is the first aspect and the display area is the second aspect, only the position of the icon display area may be different, and the display area is the first aspect. In some cases and in the case where a certain display area is the second aspect, other than the position of the icon display area may be different. Further, the position of the icon display area may always be different depending on whether the display area is the first aspect and the display area is the second aspect, and the display area is the first aspect. There may be a case where the position of the icon display area does not differ between the case and the case where a certain display area is the second aspect.

In addition, "icons related to symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as" icons [for example, variation icons h0 shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), hold icons h11 to h14, etc.] ") can be displayed.
When a certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the icon being displayed is hidden.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, only the icon may be displayed, or something other than the icon may be displayed. In addition, the icon may always be displayed, or the icon may not be displayed.

Further, when the first certain display area changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, only the icon being displayed may be hidden, or the first certain display area may change from the first aspect. In the second aspect, icons other than the displayed icon may be hidden. Further, when the first certain display area changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the icon being displayed may always be hidden, or the first certain display area may change from the first aspect. In the second aspect, the displayed icon may not be hidden.

Further, "timer display [for example, timer display shown in FIGS. 293 (b3) to (b4)] can be displayed.
After the timer countdown in the timer display is started, the timer display becomes a display indicating 0, and then the execution of a certain effect is started [for example, shown in FIGS. 293 (b3) to (b5). As a result of the timer display countdown, when the timer display becomes "0:00", a notice effect is performed, etc.],
As the effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as a result of counting down the timer display, the timer display becomes "0". When it becomes ": 00", as shown in FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a reduced mode to an enlarged mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the timer display may be displayed, or a display other than the timer display may be marked. In addition, the timer display may always be displayed, or the timer display may not be displayed.

Further, only the execution of a certain effect may be started after the timer display shows 0 after the timer countdown in the timer display is started, or the timer countdown in the timer display is started. Later, after the timer display changes to 0, execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, the execution of a certain effect may always be started after the timer display shows 0 after the timer countdown in the timer display is started, or the timer countdown in the timer display is started. There may be a case where the execution of a certain effect is not started after the timer display is displayed to indicate 0 later.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only after the timer display shows 0 after the timer countdown in the timer display is started, or the timer countdown in the timer display is started. The execution of a certain effect may be started other than after the timer display is displayed to indicate 0 later.

Further, as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect only, or as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may be used. The mode may change from the first aspect to a mode other than the second aspect. Further, as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may always change from the first aspect to the second aspect, and as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect is the first aspect. There may be cases where the aspect does not change to the second aspect.

Further, as a certain effect, only a certain display area of the first aspect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect, or as a certain effect, other than a certain display area of the first aspect. The display area of may change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "a display for notifying that the timer display is displayed [for example, the preparation display RDY shown in FIG. 283 (b1)] may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the display for notifying that the timer display is displayed may be displayed, or the display other than the display for notifying that the timer display is displayed may be displayed. Good. Further, the display for notifying that the timer display is displayed may always be displayed, or the display for notifying that the timer display may be displayed may not be displayed.

In addition, "It is possible to display the decorative pattern variation display,
The decorative symbol variation display does not overlap with a certain display area of the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 of the expanded aspect is displaying variation. Decorative designs do not overlap, etc.],
A game table characterized by that.

Here, it may be possible to display only the decorative symbol variation display, or it may be possible to display a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be always displayed, or the decorative symbol variation display may not be displayed.

Further, it is possible that only the decorative symbol variation display does not overlap the certain display area of the second aspect, and the display other than the decorative symbol variation display does not overlap the certain display area of the second aspect. It may be. Further, the decorative symbol variation display may not always overlap with a certain display area of the second aspect, or the decorative symbol variation display may overlap with a certain display area of the second aspect. May be good.

Further, the decorative symbol variation display may not overlap only in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the decorative symbol variation display may overlap in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. You may not do it.

Further, "In a certain display area of the first aspect, a certain explanatory display (hereinafter," displayed on the tutorial display unit TT6 shown in the first explanatory display [for example, FIG. 485 (a-1)) ". "Panda is a lord's master" character display, etc.] "" may be displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), the tutorial display unit TT6 in a reduced form shows "panda". The character display of "Haden-sama's master" is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in a certain display area of the first aspect, only the first explanatory display may be displayed, or in a certain display area of the first aspect, other than the first explanatory display. The display may also be displayed. Further, the first explanatory display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the first explanatory display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. May be good.

Further, the first explanatory display may be displayed only in a certain display area of the first aspect, and the first explanatory display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. An explanation display may be displayed.

In addition, "the first explanatory display is not displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 of the extended aspect". Then, the character display is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it is not necessary that only the first explanatory display is displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the display other than the first explanatory display is also displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. It does not have to be displayed. Further, the first explanatory display may not always be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the first explanatory display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. There may be.

Further, the first explanatory display may not be displayed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the first explanatory display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. Does not have to be displayed.

Further, "In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain explanatory display different from the first explanatory display (hereinafter," second explanatory display [for example, "oolong tea appears in the drink confrontation reach effect" Then, the explanation display of "Gekiatsu!", Etc.] "may be displayed.
A game table characterized in that the second explanatory display is not displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in a certain display area of the second aspect, only the second explanatory display may be displayed, or in a certain display area of the second aspect, other than the second explanatory display. The display may also be displayed. Further, the second explanatory display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the second explanatory display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. May be good.

Further, it is possible that only the second explanatory display is not displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or a display other than the second explanatory display is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. May not be displayed. Further, the second explanatory display may not always be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the second explanatory display may be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. May be the case.

In addition, a display frame (hereinafter, referred to as "area display [for example, display of the tutorial display area TT6 shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)]") including a display for specifying a certain display area (hereinafter, referred to as "area display". "Icon display frame [for example, display of UI unit shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)]") can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon display frame may be displayed, or a display other than the icon display frame may be marked. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed, or the icon display frame may not be displayed.

In addition, "The icon display frame can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.
One of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the default display mode in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed in blue as shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
One of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed in gold as shown in FIG. 291 (e)].
The first display mode is the default display mode.
The second display mode is a look-ahead notice display mode [for example, by displaying the UI unit UI 3 in a gold display mode, the tutorial display unit TT6 is foretold to be expanded in the hold, etc.],
When the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. More likely that a display area of the first aspect will change from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be possible to display only the icon display frame in a plurality of types of display modes, or it may be possible to display a display other than the icon display frame in a plurality of types of display modes. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or the icon display frame may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

Further, the case where the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode is the first than the case where the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. A certain display area of the above aspect may easily change from the first aspect to the second aspect, or when the icon display frame changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, the icon Even if a certain display area of the first aspect is more likely to change from the first aspect to a mode other than the second aspect than when the display frame does not change from the first display aspect to the second display aspect. Good. Further, the case where the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode is the first than the case where the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It may be easy for a certain display area of the above aspect to change from the first aspect to the second aspect, and when the icon display frame changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, the icon Even if a certain display area of the first aspect is less likely to change from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the display frame does not change from the first display aspect to the second display aspect. Good.

When the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, a certain display area of the first mode may always change from the first mode to the second mode. However, a certain display area of the first aspect may or may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, when the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode, make sure that a certain display area of the first mode does not change from the first mode to the second mode. Alternatively, a certain display area of the first aspect may or may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, "a second display means [for example, the sub display device 208P shown in FIG. 482 (a)] is provided.
The second display means is a means arranged below the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 482 (a), the sub display device 208P is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
When a certain display area is the first aspect, the entire area display is displayed on the first display means.
When a certain display area is the second aspect, at least a part of the area display is displayed on the second display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display means may be arranged only below the first display means, or may be arranged at a position other than below the first display means. Good. Further, the second display means may be always arranged below the first display means, or may not be arranged below the first display means.

Further, when a certain display area is the first aspect, the entire area display may be displayed only on the first display means, and when a certain display area is the first aspect, the area may be displayed. The entire display may be displayed on a display device other than the first display means. Further, when a certain display area is the first aspect, the entire area display may be always displayed on the first display means, and when a certain display area is the first aspect, the area may be displayed. In some cases, the entire display may not be displayed in the first display means.

Further, when a certain display area is the second aspect, at least a part of the area display may be displayed only by the second display means, and when a certain display area is the second aspect. , At least a part of the area display may be displayed on a display means other than the second display means. Further, when a certain display area is the second aspect, at least a part of the area display may be always displayed on the second display means, and when a certain display area is the second aspect, it may be displayed. , At least a part of the area display may not be displayed on the second display means.

Further, "It is possible to display an animation in which the area display changes from the display corresponding to a certain display area of the first aspect to the display corresponding to a certain display area of the second aspect [for example, FIG. 485. As shown in (a-1) to (a-2) of the same figure, the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a reduced mode to an expanded mode due to an animation in which the tutorial display unit TT6 expands upward],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the animation in which the area display changes from the display corresponding to a certain display area in the first aspect to the display corresponding to a certain display area in the second aspect may be displayed, or the area display may be displayed. It may be possible to display an animation other than the animation in which the display changes from the display corresponding to a certain display area in the first aspect to the display corresponding to a certain display area in the second aspect. Further, an animation in which the area display changes from the display corresponding to a certain display area in the first aspect to the display corresponding to a certain display area in the second aspect may always be displayed, and the area display is the first. It may not display the animation that changes from the display corresponding to a certain display area of the second aspect to the display corresponding to a certain display area of the second aspect.

Further, it may be possible to display an animation in which the area display changes only from the display corresponding to a certain display area in the first aspect to the display corresponding only to a certain display area in the second aspect, or the area display may be displayed. It may be possible to display an animation that changes from a display corresponding to a certain display area of the first aspect to a display other than the display corresponding to a certain display area of the second aspect.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.].
A certain display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT6 shown in FIG. 485 (a-1) and the figure (a-2)] is a display area capable of taking a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the reduced aspect shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)].
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect [for example, an extended aspect shown in FIG. 485 (a-2)].
The size of the display area of the second aspect is larger than that of the display area of the first aspect.
A certain display area of the second aspect is a display area including a certain display area of the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a-2). , The expanded tutorial display unit TT6 is said to include the reduced tutorial unit TT6, etc.]
,
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display (hereinafter, "first display [for example, the drink confrontation reach effect shown in FIGS. 485 (a-2) to (a-4)]". ) Can be displayed,
After the display of the first display is completed, a certain display area of the second aspect changes from the second aspect to the first aspect [for example, when the drink confrontation reach effect is completed, the tutorial display unit TT6 returns from the extended mode to the reduced mode, etc.],
A display different from the first display (hereinafter, "second display [for example, the target mini-game shown in FIGS. 296 (a3) to (a4), FIGS. 312 (a3) to FIG. The bowling chance game shown in (a6), the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7), etc.] ”) can be displayed.
The second display is a display of a mini game.
After the display of the second display is started, a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6). When a strike is displayed in the bowling chance game or a cup-in display is displayed in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7), FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a-2) are displayed. ), The tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, a certain display area may be capable of taking only a plurality of modes, or may be capable of taking a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, a certain display area may or may not always take a plurality of modes.

Also, the display area of the second aspect may be larger only in size than the display area of the first aspect, and the display area of the second aspect may be larger than the display area of the first aspect. A display area may be larger than the size. Further, the size of the display area of the second aspect may always be larger than that of the display area of the first aspect, and the size of the display area of the second aspect may be larger than that of the display area of the first aspect. Some display areas may not be larger in size.

Further, the certain display area of the second aspect may include only a certain display area of the first aspect, or may include an area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. You may. Further, a certain display area of the second aspect may always include a certain display area of the first aspect, or may not include a certain display area of the first aspect. There may be.

Further, in a certain display area of the second aspect, only the first display may be displayed, or in a certain display area of the second aspect, a display other than the first display can be displayed. There may be. Further, the first display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the first display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. ..

Further, the first display may be displayed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the first display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. It may be possible.

Further, after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second aspect may be regarded as from the second aspect to the first aspect, or after the display of the first display is finished. , A certain display area of the second aspect may be changed from the second aspect to the aspect other than the first aspect. Further, after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second aspect may always change from the second aspect to the first aspect, or after the display of the first display is finished. , A certain display area of the second aspect may not change from the second aspect to the first aspect.

Further, a certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect only after the display of the first display is finished, or after the display of the first display is finished. Alternatively, a certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect.

Further, only the second display may be displayed, or a display other than the second display may be marked. Further, the second display may be displayed without fail, or the second display may not be displayed.

Also, after the display of the second display is started, a certain display area may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect, or after the display of the second display is started. , A certain display area may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Also, a display area may always change from the first aspect to the second aspect after the display of the second display is started, or after the display of the second display is started. The display area may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, after the display of the second display is started, only a certain display area may change from the first mode to the second mode, or after the display of the second display is started. , A display area other than a certain display area may also change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Also, a display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect only after the display of the second display is started, or after the display of the second display is started. In addition, a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "the first display of the success pattern (hereinafter, referred to as" first effect display [for example, the effect display in which the hero's lord has won as shown in FIG. 485 (a-4)] ") can be displayed. Yes,
The first display of the failure pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "second effect display [for example, the effect display in which the hero's lord shown in FIG. 485 (a-4') was defeated by his grandfather, etc.]") can be displayed. Yes,
When the display of the second effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect changes from the second aspect to the first aspect [for example, After the production display in which the main character, the lord of the hero, was defeated by the old man, as shown in Fig. 485 (a-4'), the tutorial display unit TT6 was animated to shrink downward, and then the UI unit was displayed in Fig. 485. Return to the state shown in (a-1), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the first effect display may be displayed, or an effect display other than the first effect display may be displayed. Further, the first effect display may be displayed without fail, or the first effect display may not be displayed.

Further, only the second effect display may be displayed, or the effect display other than the second effect display may be displayed. Further, the second effect display may be displayed without fail, or the second effect display may not be displayed.

Further, when the display of the second effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect may be regarded as from the second aspect to the first aspect. , In a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the second effect display is completed, even if the certain display area of the second aspect changes from the second aspect to the aspect other than the first aspect. Good. Further, when the display of the second effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect may always change from the second aspect to the first aspect. , In a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the second effect display is completed, the certain display area of the second aspect may not change from the second aspect to the first aspect. ..

Further, when the display of the second effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, only the certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect. , In a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the second effect display is completed, the display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect also changes from the second aspect to the first aspect. Good.

Further, when the display of the second effect display is completed only in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect. , Even in the display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the second effect display is completed, the certain display area of the second aspect changes from the second aspect to the first aspect. May be good.

In addition, "the first super reach effect [for example, the swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 63 (c) to (j)] can be executed.
When the display of the first effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. [For example, after the production display in which the main character's lord has won is performed as shown in FIG. 485 (a-4), the SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 457 (c) to (j) is started. , When the SP reach is completed, the tutorial display unit TT6 is displayed in a reduced mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the first super reach effect may be feasible, or a reach effect other than the first super reach effect may be feasible. Further, the first super reach effect may be always executed, or the first super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, only a certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, after the first super reach effect is performed, the display area other than the certain display area is also the first. It may be one aspect. Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area always becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area does not become the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. There may be cases.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect only after the first super reach effect is performed. It ’s good. When the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, even if the certain display area becomes the first aspect other than after the first super reach effect is performed. Good.

Further, when only the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, even if the display other than the display of the first effect display ends, after the first super reach effect is performed, the certain display area becomes the first. It may be one aspect.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, even in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first after the first super reach effect is performed. It may be one aspect.

In addition, "the second display of the success pattern (hereinafter," display that becomes a strike in the bowling chance game shown in "third effect display [for example, FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6), FIG. 312 (b4)). ~ Display that becomes a cup-in in the golf game shown in the figure (b7)] ”) can be displayed.
The second display of the failure pattern (hereinafter, "fourth effect display [for example, a display that does not cause a strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6), FIGS. 312 (b4) to FIG. (B7), the display that does not cup in in the golf game, etc.] ”) can be displayed.
After the display of the third effect display is started, a certain display area changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, the bowling chance shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to 312 (a6)). When a display that causes a strike in the game or a display that cups in in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7) is displayed, it is shown in FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a-2). As shown, the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be possible to display only the third effect display, or it may be possible to display an effect display other than the third effect display. Further, the third effect display may be always displayed, or the third effect display may not be displayed.

Further, it may be possible to display only the fourth effect display, or it may be possible to display an effect display other than the fourth effect display. Further, the fourth effect display may be always displayed, or the fourth effect display may not be displayed.

Further, after the display of the third effect display is started, a certain display area may be regarded as from the first aspect to the second aspect, or after the display of the third effect display is started, the display area may be regarded as the second aspect. A display area may change from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, a certain display area may always change from the first aspect to the second aspect after the display of the third effect display is started, or after the display of the third effect display is started. There may be cases where a display area does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, only a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect after the display of the third effect display is started, or after the display of the third effect display is started, the display area may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. A display area other than a certain display area may also change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect only after the display of the third effect display is started, and other than after the display of the third effect display is started. Also, a display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "after the display of the fourth effect display is started, a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, FIGS. 312 (a3) to FIG. Even if a display that does not result in a strike in the bowling chance game shown in a6) or a display that does not cup in in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7) is displayed, FIGS. 485 (a-1) to FIG. As shown in (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 may change from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, after the display of the fourth effect display is started, a certain display area may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display of the fourth effect display is started. After that, a certain display area may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, a certain display area may always change from the first aspect to the second aspect after the display of the fourth effect display is started, or after the display of the fourth effect display is started. There may be cases where a display area does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, after the display of the fourth effect display is started, only a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display of the fourth effect display is started. After that, a display area other than a certain display area may also change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect only after the display of the fourth effect display is started, or the display of the fourth effect display is started. In addition to the above, a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "the second super reach production [for example, super long reach, triple line reach, Amedori reach, swordsman reach, etc.] can be executed.
After the display of the third effect display is started, the second super reach effect may be started [for example, a strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to 312 (a6)). When the display is displayed or the display shows cup-in in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7), the game shifts to ultra long reach (triple line reach, amedori reach, swordsman reach, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the second super reach effect may be executed, or the reach effect other than the second super reach effect may be executed. Further, the second super reach effect may be executed without fail, or the second super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, only the second super reach effect may be started after the display of the third effect display is started, or the second effect display may be started after the display of the third effect display is started. A reach effect other than the super reach effect may be started. Further, the second super reach effect may always be started after the display of the third effect display is started, or the second super reach effect may be started after the display of the third effect display is started. It may not be started.

Further, the second super reach effect may be started only after the display of the third effect display is started, and the second super reach effect may be started only after the display of the third effect display is started. A second super reach effect may be started.

In addition, "after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of the first display is started [for example, FIG. 485 (a-1). ) ~ Figure (a-2)
), The tutorial display unit TT6 is changed from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, and then the drinker confrontation reach effect is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of only the first display may be started, or the display area of the first aspect may be started. May be started to display a display other than the first display after the first mode is changed to the second mode. Further, the display of the first display may always be started after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display area of the first aspect may be started. May not start displaying the first display after the first aspect has changed to the second aspect.

Further, the display of the first display may be started only after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display area of the first aspect may be started. The display of the first display may be started other than after the change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, the display of the first display may be started after only the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the certain display area of the first aspect may be started. The display of the first display may be started after the display areas other than the above have changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

It should be noted that the first display may not be started until after a certain display area of the first aspect has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, "the second display is a display including a first partial display [for example, the first part of the mini game] and a second partial display [for example, the second part of the mini game]. ,
The second aspect is after the first partial display is displayed in an area other than the certain display area and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the above [For example, as shown in FIG. 312 (a3), a display showing how a bowling ball is thrown by a lord's character is displayed in a mini game. The first half is performed, and then the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, and then the bowling ball approaches the pin as shown in FIGS. 312 (a4) to (a5). Show and incite whether or not it will be a strike, and whether it will be a success pattern that will eventually become a strike or a failure pattern that leaves an indefinite pin, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may include only the first partial display and the second partial display, or may include a display other than the first partial display and the second partial display. You may. Further, the second display may always include the first partial display and the second partial display, or includes at least one of the first partial display and the second partial display. It may not be available.

Further, after the first portion is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second aspect is performed. In some display areas of, only the second partial display may be displayed, or in some display areas of the first aspect, the first part is displayed and some display of the first aspect. After the area changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, a display other than the second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode. Further, after the first portion is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second aspect is performed. The second partial display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the first part is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect is the first. The second partial display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect after the display mode of the above is changed to the second display mode.

Further, after the first portion is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second aspect is performed. The second partial display may be displayed only in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the first part is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and a certain display of the first aspect is displayed. After the area changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second partial display may be displayed in a display area other than a certain display area of the second mode.

Also, only after the first portion is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second A second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or a first part may be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and a certain display of the first aspect may be displayed. In addition to after the area has changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode.

Further, after the first portion is displayed only in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second display mode is displayed. The second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the first part may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. After a certain display area of is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode.

Further, "an icon related to the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" icon [for example, variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), hold icon h11 to h14, etc.] ") is an icon display area [for example, FIG. 485." It can be displayed in the hold display frame FL0, hold display area, etc. shown in (a-1)].
A certain display area is an area arranged below the icon display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), the tutorial display unit TT6 is a hold display frame FL0 or a hold display area. Located below],
The position of the icon display area is different depending on whether the display area has the first aspect or the second aspect [for example, FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a). As shown in -2), the positions of the hold display frame FL0 and the hold display area are different depending on whether the tutorial display unit TT6 is in the reduced mode or the enlarged mode],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the icon may be displayed only in the icon display area, or the icon may be displayed in a display area other than the icon display area. Further, the icon may always be displayed in the icon display area, or the icon may not be displayed in the icon display area.

Further, only the icon may be displayed in the icon display area, or something other than the icon may be displayed in the icon display area.

A certain display area may be arranged only below the icon display area, or may be arranged at a position other than below the icon display area. Further, a certain display area may be always arranged below the icon display area, or may not be arranged below the icon display area.

Further, depending on whether the display area is the first aspect and the display area is the second aspect, only the position of the icon display area may be different, and the display area is the first aspect. In some cases and in the case where a certain display area is the second aspect, other than the position of the icon display area may be different. Further, the position of the icon display area may always be different depending on whether the display area is the first aspect and the display area is the second aspect, and the display area is the first aspect. There may be a case where the position of the icon display area does not differ between the case and the case where a certain display area is the second aspect.

In addition, "icons related to symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as" icons [for example, variation icons h0 shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), hold icons h11 to h14, etc.] ") can be displayed.
When a certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the icon being displayed is hidden.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon may be displayed, or something other than the icon may be displayed. In addition, the icon may always be displayed, or the icon may not be displayed.

Further, when the first certain display area changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, only the icon being displayed may be hidden, or the first certain display area may change from the first aspect. In the second aspect, icons other than the displayed icon may be hidden. Further, when the first certain display area changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the icon being displayed may always be hidden, or the first certain display area may change from the first aspect. In the second aspect, the displayed icon may not be hidden.

In addition, "a certain display different from the first display and the second display (hereinafter," the third display [for example, the target mini-game shown in FIGS. 296 (a3) to (a4), The bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to 312 (a6), the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7), etc.] ”) can be displayed.
The display of the third display is not started when the second display is displayed [for example, a plurality of mini games are not played at the same time].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the third display may be displayable, or a display other than the third display may be marked. Further, the third display may be displayed without fail, or the third display may not be displayed.

Further, the third display may not be started only when the second display is displayed, or may be displayed in a state other than the state where the second display is displayed. May not be started. Further, the third display may not always start when the second display is displayed, or the display starts when the second display is displayed. May be the case.

Further, "timer display [for example, timer display shown in FIGS. 293 (b3) to (b4)] can be displayed.
After the timer countdown in the timer display is started, the timer display becomes a display indicating 0, and then the execution of a certain effect is started [for example, FIGS. 293 (b3) to FIG.
As shown in b5), when the timer display becomes "0:00" as a result of the timer display countdown, a notice effect is performed, etc.],
As the effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as a result of counting down the timer display, the timer display becomes "0". When it becomes ": 00", as shown in FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a reduced mode to an enlarged mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the timer display may be displayed, or a display other than the timer display may be marked. In addition, the timer display may always be displayed, or the timer display may not be displayed.

Further, only the execution of a certain effect may be started after the timer display shows 0 after the timer countdown in the timer display is started, or the timer countdown in the timer display is started. Later, after the timer display changes to 0, execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, the execution of a certain effect may always be started after the timer display shows 0 after the timer countdown in the timer display is started, or the timer countdown in the timer display is started. There may be a case where the execution of a certain effect is not started after the timer display is displayed to indicate 0 later.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only after the timer display shows 0 after the timer countdown in the timer display is started, or the timer countdown in the timer display is started. The execution of a certain effect may be started other than after the timer display is displayed to indicate 0 later.

Further, as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect only, or as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may be used. The mode may change from the first aspect to a mode other than the second aspect. Further, as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may always change from the first aspect to the second aspect, and as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect is the first aspect. There may be cases where the aspect does not change to the second aspect.

Further, as a certain effect, only a certain display area of the first aspect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect, or as a certain effect, other than a certain display area of the first aspect. The display area of may change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "a display for notifying that the timer display is displayed [for example, the preparation display RDY shown in FIG. 283 (b1)] may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the display for notifying that the timer display is displayed may be displayed, or the display other than the display for notifying that the timer display is displayed may be displayed. Good. Further, the display for notifying that the timer display is displayed may always be displayed, or the display for notifying that the timer display may be displayed may not be displayed.

In addition, "It is possible to display the decorative pattern variation display,
The decorative symbol variation display does not overlap with a certain display area of the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 of the expanded aspect is displaying variation. Decorative designs do not overlap, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be possible to display only the decorative symbol variation display, or it may be possible to display a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be always displayed, or the decorative symbol variation display may not be displayed.

Further, it is possible that only the decorative symbol variation display does not overlap the certain display area of the second aspect, and the display other than the decorative symbol variation display does not overlap the certain display area of the second aspect. It may be. Further, the decorative symbol variation display may not always overlap with a certain display area of the second aspect, or the decorative symbol variation display may overlap with a certain display area of the second aspect. May be good.

Further, the decorative symbol variation display may not overlap only in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the decorative symbol variation display may overlap in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. You may not do it.

Further, "In a certain display area of the first aspect, a certain explanatory display (hereinafter," displayed on the tutorial display unit TT6 shown in the first explanatory display [for example, FIG. 485 (a-1)) ". "Panda is a lord's master" character display, etc.] "" may be displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), the tutorial display unit TT6 in a reduced form shows "panda". The character display of "Haden-sama's master" is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in a certain display area of the first aspect, only the first explanatory display may be displayed, or in a certain display area of the first aspect, other than the first explanatory display. The display may also be displayed. Further, the first explanatory display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the first explanatory display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. May be good.

Further, the first explanatory display may be displayed only in a certain display area of the first aspect, and the first explanatory display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. An explanation display may be displayed.

In addition, "the first explanatory display is not displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 of the extended aspect". Then, the character display is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it is not necessary that only the first explanatory display is displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the display other than the first explanatory display is also displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. It does not have to be displayed. Further, the first explanatory display may not always be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the first explanatory display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. There may be.

Further, the first explanatory display may not be displayed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the first explanatory display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. Does not have to be displayed.

Further, "In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain explanatory display different from the first explanatory display (hereinafter," second explanatory display [for example, "oolong tea appears in the drink confrontation reach effect" Then, the explanation display of "Gekiatsu!", Etc.] "may be displayed.
A game table characterized in that the second explanatory display is not displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in a certain display area of the second aspect, only the second explanatory display may be displayed, or in a certain display area of the second aspect, other than the second explanatory display. The display may also be displayed. Further, the second explanatory display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the second explanatory display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. May be good.

Further, it is possible that only the second explanatory display is not displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or a display other than the second explanatory display is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. May not be displayed. Further, the second explanatory display may not always be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the second explanatory display may be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. May be the case.

Further, "a display frame for specifying a certain display area (hereinafter, referred to as" icon display frame [for example, display of the UI unit shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)] ") can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon display frame may be displayed, or a display other than the icon display frame may be marked. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed, or the icon display frame may not be displayed.

In addition, "The icon display frame can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.
One of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the default display mode in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed in blue as shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
One of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed in gold as shown in FIG. 291 (e)].
The first display mode is the default display mode.
The second display mode is a look-ahead notice display mode [for example, by displaying the UI unit UI 3 in a gold display mode, the tutorial display unit TT6 is foretold to be expanded in the hold, etc.],
When the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. More likely that a display area of the first aspect will change from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be possible to display only the icon display frame in a plurality of types of display modes, or it may be possible to display a display other than the icon display frame in a plurality of types of display modes. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or the icon display frame may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

Further, the case where the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode is the first than the case where the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. A certain display area of the above aspect may easily change from the first aspect to the second aspect, or when the icon display frame changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, the icon Even if a certain display area of the first aspect is more likely to change from the first aspect to a mode other than the second aspect than when the display frame does not change from the first display aspect to the second display aspect. Good. Further, the case where the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode is the first than the case where the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It may be easy for a certain display area of the above aspect to change from the first aspect to the second aspect, and when the icon display frame changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, the icon Even if a certain display area of the first aspect is less likely to change from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the display frame does not change from the first display aspect to the second display aspect. Good.

When the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, a certain display area of the first mode may always change from the first mode to the second mode. However, a certain display area of the first aspect may or may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, when the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode, make sure that a certain display area of the first mode does not change from the first mode to the second mode. Alternatively, a certain display area of the first aspect may or may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.].
A certain display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT6 shown in FIG. 485 (a-1) and the figure (a-2)] is a display area capable of taking a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the reduced aspect shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)].
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect [for example, an extended aspect (first extended aspect) shown in FIG. 485 (a-2), etc.].
The size of the display area of the second aspect is larger than that of the display area of the first aspect.
A certain display area of the second aspect is a display area including a certain display area of the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a-2). , The expanded tutorial display unit TT6 is said to include the reduced tutorial unit TT6, etc.],
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display (hereinafter, "first display [for example, the drink confrontation reach effect shown in FIGS. 485 (a-2) to (a-4)]". ) Can be displayed,
After the display of the first display is completed, a certain display area of the second aspect changes from the second aspect to the first aspect [for example, when the drink confrontation reach effect is completed, the tutorial display unit TT6 returns from the extended mode to the reduced mode, etc.],
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect [for example, FIG. 485 (a-1)).
The second extended mode, which is an intermediate size between the size of the tutorial display unit TT6 in the reduced mode shown in FIG. 485 and the size of the tutorial display unit TT6 in the first extended mode shown in FIG. 485 (a-2). ],
The size of the display area of the third aspect is larger than that of the display area of the first aspect.
The size of the display area of the second aspect and the display area of the third aspect are different [for example, the size of the tutorial display unit TT6 of the second extended aspect is shown in FIG. 485 (a-1). The size is intermediate between the size of the tutorial display unit TT6 in the reduced mode shown in FIG. 485 and the size of the tutorial display unit TT6 in the first extended mode shown in FIG. 485 (a-2)],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, a certain display area may be capable of taking only a plurality of modes, or may be capable of taking a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, a certain display area may or may not always take a plurality of modes.

Also, the display area of the second aspect may be larger only in size than the display area of the first aspect, and the display area of the second aspect may be larger than the display area of the first aspect. A display area may be larger than the size. Further, the size of the display area of the second aspect may always be larger than that of the display area of the first aspect, and the size of the display area of the second aspect may be larger than that of the display area of the first aspect. Some display areas may not be larger in size.

Further, the certain display area of the second aspect may include only a certain display area of the first aspect, or may include an area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. You may. Further, a certain display area of the second aspect may always include a certain display area of the first aspect, or may not include a certain display area of the first aspect. There may be.

Further, in a certain display area of the second aspect, only the first display may be displayed, or in a certain display area of the second aspect, a display other than the first display can be displayed. There may be. Further, the first display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the first display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. ..

Further, the first display may be displayed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the first display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. It may be possible.

Further, after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second aspect may be regarded as from the second aspect to the first aspect, or after the display of the first display is finished. , A certain display area of the second aspect may be changed from the second aspect to the aspect other than the first aspect. Further, after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second aspect may always change from the second aspect to the first aspect, or after the display of the first display is finished. , A certain display area of the second aspect may not change from the second aspect to the first aspect.

Further, a certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect only after the display of the first display is finished, or after the display of the first display is finished. Alternatively, a certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect.

Only the size may differ between some display areas of the second aspect and some display areas of the third aspect, or sizes between some display areas of the second aspect and some display areas of the third aspect. Other than may be different. Further, the size may always be different between a certain display area of the second aspect and a certain display area of the third aspect, and a certain display area of the second aspect and a certain display area of the third aspect may be different. The size may not be different.

In addition, "The first display can be displayed in a certain display area of the third aspect.
The first display of the success pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect display [for example, the effect display in which the hero's lord has won as shown in FIG. 485 (a-4)]") can be displayed.
The first display of the failure pattern [for example, the production display in which the main character's lord is defeated by the grandfather shown in FIG.
The first effect display in a certain display area of the third aspect is more likely to start displaying than the first effect display in a certain display area of the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in a certain display area of the third aspect, only the first display may be displayed, or in a certain display area of the third aspect, a display other than the first display can be displayed. It may be. Further, the first display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the third aspect, or the first display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the third aspect. ..

Further, only the first effect display may be displayed, or an effect display other than the first effect display may be displayed. Further, the first effect display may be displayed without fail, or the first effect display may not be displayed.

Further, it may be possible to display only the first display of the failure pattern, or it may be possible to display an effect display other than the first display of the failure pattern. Further, the first display of the failure pattern may be displayed without fail, or the first display of the failure pattern may not be displayed.

In a certain display area of the second aspect, the first effect display does not necessarily have to be started.

Further, in a certain display area of the third aspect, the first effect display may be easily started to be displayed.

Further, "In a certain display area of the third aspect, a certain display different from the first display (hereinafter," a second display [for example, in FIGS. 296 (a3) to (a4)) It is possible to display the target mini-game shown, the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6), the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7), etc.] ”. ,
The second display is a display of a mini game.
The first display of the success pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect display [for example, the effect display in which the hero's lord has won as shown in FIG. 485 (a-4)]") can be displayed.
The first display of the failure pattern [for example, the production display in which the main character's lord is defeated by the grandfather shown in FIG.
The second display of the success pattern (hereinafter, “third effect display [for example, a display that becomes a strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6), FIGS. 312 (b4) to FIG. (B7), a display that is a cup-in in the golf game, etc.] ”) can be displayed.
The second display of the failure pattern [for example, a display that does not cause a strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6), and a cup in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7). Display that does not come in, etc.] can be displayed,
The first effect in a certain display area of the second aspect is more than the symbol variation display being executed when the display of the third effect display is started in a certain display area of the third aspect. The symbol variation display that is being executed when the display of the display is started is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol mode.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, in a certain display area of the third aspect, only the second display may be displayed, or in a certain display area of the third aspect, a display other than the second display can be displayed. It may be. Further, the second display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the third aspect, or the second display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the third aspect.

Further, the second display may be displayed only in a certain display area of the third aspect, and the second display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the third aspect. It may be possible.

Further, only the first effect display may be displayed, or an effect display other than the first effect display may be displayed. Further, the first effect display may be displayed without fail, or the first effect display may not be displayed.

Further, it may be possible to display only the first display of the failure pattern, or it may be possible to display an effect display other than the first display of the failure pattern. Further, the first display of the failure pattern may be displayed without fail, or the first display of the failure pattern may not be displayed.

In addition, in the symbol variation display being executed when the display of the third effect display is started in a certain display area of the third aspect, the jackpot symbol aspect may not always be confirmed and displayed in the end. , The jackpot symbol mode may or may not be finally displayed.

Further, in the symbol variation display being executed when the display of the first effect is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the jackpot symbol aspect may be finally confirmed and displayed. , The jackpot symbol mode may or may not be finally displayed.

In addition, it is possible to display a variable display of a decorative symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "first variable display") in which a certain display area is in the second mode and the first effect display is displayed. It is possible to display a variable display of a decorative pattern (hereinafter referred to as "second variable display") in which the display area is in the third mode and the third effect display is displayed, which is more than the second variable display. The third variable display is more likely to be finally confirmed in the jackpot symbol mode (confirmed display of the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the jackpot will be achieved). "

Further, "the first variable display is a variable display in which a certain display area is in the third mode and the third effect display is not displayed, and the second variable display is a variable display in which a certain display area is the second. It is a variable display in which the first effect display is not displayed in the mode, and may be.

Further, "The first effect display is more likely to be started in the certain display area of the second aspect than in the certain display area of the third aspect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in a certain display area of the second aspect than in a certain display area of the third aspect, only the first effect display may be more likely to be started, or a certain display of the third aspect may be started. In a certain display area of the second aspect, display other than the first effect display may be started more easily than the area. Further, a certain display area of the second aspect may be more likely to start the first effect display than a certain display area of the third aspect, and a certain display area of the third aspect may be started. In some display areas of the second aspect, it may not be easier for the first effect display to start.

In a certain display area of the third aspect, the first effect display may not always be started, and the first effect display may or may not be started.

Further, in a certain display area of the second aspect, the first effect display may or may not always be started.

In addition, "the first super reach effect [for example, the swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 63 (c) to (j)] can be executed.
When the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, after the first super reach effect is performed, the certain display area becomes the first aspect [for example]. , As shown in FIG. 485 (a-4), after the production display in which the main character's lord won in the drink confrontation reach production in the tutorial display area TT6 of the first extended mode is performed, FIGS. 457 (c) to the same. When the SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. (J) is started and the SP reach is completed, the tutorial display unit TT6 is displayed in a reduced mode, etc.],
When the display of the first effect display is completed in the certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. For example, after the main character's lord has won the production display in the tutorial display area TT6 of the second extended mode, the SP reach (swordsman) shown in FIGS. 457 (c) to (j). When reach) is started and SP reach is completed, the tutorial display unit TT6 is displayed in a reduced form, etc.]
A game table characterized by that.

Here, only the first super reach effect may be feasible, or a reach effect other than the first super reach effect may be feasible. Further, the first super reach effect may be always executed, or the first super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, only a certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, after the first super reach effect is performed, the display area other than the certain display area is also the first. It may be one aspect. Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area always becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area does not become the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. There may be cases.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect only after the first super reach effect is performed. It ’s good. When the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, even if the certain display area becomes the first aspect other than after the first super reach effect is performed. Good.

Further, when only the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, even if the display other than the display of the first effect display ends, after the first super reach effect is performed, the certain display area becomes the first. It may be one aspect.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, even in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first after the first super reach effect is performed. It may be one aspect.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the third aspect, only a certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the third aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, after the first super reach effect is performed, the display area other than the certain display area is also the first. It may be one aspect. Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area always becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the third aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area does not become the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. There may be cases.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect only after the first super reach effect is performed. It ’s good. When the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the third aspect, even if the certain display area becomes the first aspect other than after the first super reach effect is performed. Good.

Further, when only the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the third aspect, even if the display other than the display of the first effect display ends, after the first super reach effect is performed, the certain display area becomes the first. It may be one aspect.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed only in a certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, even in a display area other than the certain display area of the third aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first after the first super reach effect is performed. It may be one aspect.

In addition, "after the display of the first effect display is started in the display area of the third aspect, the display area of the third aspect changes from the third aspect to the second aspect. The mode may change [For example, after the production display in which the main character's lord wins in the drink confrontation reach production in the tutorial display area TT6 of the second extended mode is performed, the tutorial display area TT6 is expanded and shown. As shown in 485 (a-2), the tutorial display area TT6 is the first extended mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the display of the first effect display is started in the certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area of the third aspect changes only from the third aspect to the second aspect. In some cases, after the display of the first effect display is started in the certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area of the third aspect is changed from the third aspect to the second. Other than the mode, it may change. Further, after the display of the first effect display is started in the certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area of the third aspect always changes from the third aspect to the second aspect. Alternatively, after the display of the first effect display is started in a certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area of the third aspect does not change from the third aspect to the second aspect. There may be cases.

Further, when only a certain display area of the third aspect changes from the third aspect to the second aspect after the display of the first effect display is started in a certain display area of the third aspect. After the display of the first effect display is started in the certain display area of the third aspect, the display area other than the certain display area of the third aspect is also from the third aspect. It may change to the second aspect.

Further, when the display area of the third aspect changes from the third aspect to the second aspect only after the display of the first effect display is started in the certain display area of the third aspect. There may be, and even after the display of the first effect display is started in the certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area of the third aspect is from the third aspect to the second. It may change to a mode.

In addition, "The first display is a display capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first type of display [for example, Chibihime Musou production shown in FIG. 309 (b)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second type of display [for example, a drinking comparison effect shown in FIG. 309 (b)].
In a certain display area of the second aspect, both the first type of display and the second type of display may be performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 309 (b), Princess Chibi. Both the Musou production and the drinking comparison production are performed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the first display may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, in a certain display area of the second aspect, only the first type of display and the second type of display may be performed, or in a certain display area of the second aspect. , Display other than both the first type display and the second type display may be performed. Further, both the first type of display and the second type of display may always be performed in a certain display area of the second aspect, and in a certain display area of the second aspect, the first type of display may be performed. In some cases, both the type of display and the display of the second type may not be performed.

Further, both the first type of display and the second type of display may be performed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, and other than the certain display area of the second aspect. In the display area of, both the first type of display and the second type of display may be performed.

In addition, "when either one of the first type of display and the second type of display is displayed as the first effect display (hereinafter," the first case [for example, FIG. 309 (b)) When either one of the Chibihime Musou production and the drinking comparison production shown in is displayed] ”.
When both the first type of display and the second type of display are displayed as the first effect display (hereinafter, "the second case [for example, Chibihime Musou shown in FIG. 309 (b))" When both the production and the drinking comparison production are displayed, etc.] ”.
In the first case and the second case, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in the second case.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the first case and the second case, in the second case, it may be easier to finally confirm and display only the big hit symbol in the symbol variation display, and in the first case and the second case. Then, in the second case, it may be easier to finally confirm the symbols other than the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. Further, in the first case and the second case, the second case may be easier to finally confirm the big hit symbol in the symbol variation display, and in the first case and the second case, it may be easier to confirm. In the second case, it may not be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

In the first case, the jackpot symbol may not always be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, and the jackpot symbol may or may not be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display. May be good.

Further, in the second case, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, and the jackpot symbol may or may not be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display. You may.

Further, "The size of the certain display area of the second aspect is larger than that of the certain display area of the third aspect [For example, the size of the tutorial display unit TT6 of the second extended aspect is large. The size is intermediate between the size of the tutorial display unit TT6 in the reduced mode shown in FIG. 485 (a-1) and the size of the tutorial display unit TT6 in the first extended mode shown in FIG. 485 (a-2). Yes, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "an icon related to the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" icon [for example, variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), hold icon h11 to h14, etc.] ") is an icon display area [for example, FIG. 485." It can be displayed in the hold display frame FL0, hold display area, etc. shown in (a-1)].
A certain display area is an area arranged below the icon display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), the tutorial display unit TT6 is a hold display frame FL0 or a hold display area. Located below],
The position of the icon display area is different depending on whether the display area has the first aspect or the second aspect [for example, FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a). As shown in -2), the positions of the hold display frame FL0 and the hold display area are different depending on whether the tutorial display unit TT6 is in the reduced mode or the enlarged mode],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the icon may be displayed only in the icon display area, or the icon may be displayed in a display area other than the icon display area. Further, the icon may always be displayed in the icon display area, or the icon may not be displayed in the icon display area.

Further, only the icon may be displayed in the icon display area, or something other than the icon may be displayed in the icon display area.

Further, a certain display area may be arranged only below the icon display area, or may be arranged at a position other than below the icon display area. Further, a certain display area may be always arranged below the icon display area, or may not be arranged below the icon display area.

Further, depending on whether the display area is the first aspect and the display area is the second aspect, only the position of the icon display area may be different, and the display area is the first aspect. In some cases and in the case where a certain display area is the second aspect, other than the position of the icon display area may be different. Further, the position of the icon display area may always be different depending on whether the display area is the first aspect and the display area is the second aspect, and the display area is the first aspect. There may be a case where the position of the icon display area does not differ between the case and the case where a certain display area is the second aspect.

In addition, "icons related to symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as" icons [for example, variation icons h0 shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), hold icons h11 to h14, etc.] ") can be displayed.
When a certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the icon being displayed is hidden.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon may be displayed, or something other than the icon may be displayed. In addition, the icon may always be displayed, or the icon may not be displayed.

Further, when the first certain display area changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, only the icon being displayed may be hidden, or the first certain display area may change from the first aspect. In the second aspect, icons other than the displayed icon may be hidden. Further, when the first certain display area changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the icon being displayed may always be hidden, or the first certain display area may change from the first aspect. In the second aspect, the displayed icon may not be hidden.

Further, "timer display [for example, timer display shown in FIGS. 293 (b3) to (b4)] can be displayed.
After the timer countdown in the timer display is started, the timer display becomes a display indicating 0, and then the execution of a certain effect is started [for example, shown in FIGS. 293 (b3) to (b5). As a result of the timer display countdown, when the timer display becomes "0:00", a notice effect is performed, etc.],
As the effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as a result of counting down the timer display, the timer display becomes "0". When it becomes ": 00", as shown in FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a reduced mode to an enlarged mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the timer display may be displayed, or a display other than the timer display may be marked. In addition, the timer display may always be displayed, or the timer display may not be displayed.

Further, only the execution of a certain effect may be started after the timer display shows 0 after the timer countdown in the timer display is started, or the timer countdown in the timer display is started. Later, after the timer display changes to 0, execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, the execution of a certain effect may always be started after the timer display shows 0 after the timer countdown in the timer display is started, or the timer countdown in the timer display is started. There may be a case where the execution of a certain effect is not started after the timer display is displayed to indicate 0 later.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only after the timer display shows 0 after the timer countdown in the timer display is started, or the timer countdown in the timer display is started. The execution of a certain effect may be started other than after the timer display is displayed to indicate 0 later.

Further, as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect only, or as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may be used. The mode may change from the first aspect to a mode other than the second aspect. Further, as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may always change from the first aspect to the second aspect, and as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect is the first aspect. There may be cases where the aspect does not change to the second aspect.

Further, as a certain effect, only a certain display area of the first aspect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect, or as a certain effect, other than a certain display area of the first aspect. The display area of may change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "a display for notifying that the timer display is displayed [for example, the preparation display RDY shown in FIG. 283 (b1)] may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the display for notifying that the timer display is displayed may be displayed, or the display other than the display for notifying that the timer display is displayed may be displayed. Good. Further, the display for notifying that the timer display is displayed may always be displayed, or the display for notifying that the timer display may be displayed may not be displayed.

In addition, "It is possible to display the decorative pattern variation display,
The decorative symbol variation display does not overlap with a certain display area of the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 of the expanded aspect is displaying variation. Decorative designs do not overlap, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be possible to display only the decorative symbol variation display, or it may be possible to display a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be always displayed, or the decorative symbol variation display may not be displayed.

Further, it is possible that only the decorative symbol variation display does not overlap the certain display area of the second aspect, and the display other than the decorative symbol variation display does not overlap the certain display area of the second aspect. It may be. Further, the decorative symbol variation display may not always overlap with a certain display area of the second aspect, or the decorative symbol variation display may overlap with a certain display area of the second aspect. May be good.

Further, the decorative symbol variation display may not overlap only in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the decorative symbol variation display may overlap in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. You may not do it.

Further, "In a certain display area of the first aspect, a certain explanatory display (hereinafter," displayed on the tutorial display unit TT6 shown in the first explanatory display [for example, FIG. 485 (a-1)) ". "Panda is a lord's master" character display, etc.] "" may be displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), the tutorial display unit TT6 in a reduced form shows "panda". The character display of "Haden-sama's master" is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in a certain display area of the first aspect, only the first explanatory display may be displayed, or in a certain display area of the first aspect, other than the first explanatory display. The display may also be displayed. Further, the first explanatory display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the first explanatory display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. May be good.

Further, the first explanatory display may be displayed only in a certain display area of the first aspect, and the first explanatory display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. An explanation display may be displayed.

In addition, "the first explanatory display is not displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 of the extended aspect". Then, the character display is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it is not necessary that only the first explanatory display is displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the display other than the first explanatory display is also displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. It does not have to be displayed. Further, the first explanatory display may not always be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the first explanatory display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. There may be.

Further, the first explanatory display may not be displayed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the first explanatory display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. Does not have to be displayed.

Further, "In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain explanatory display different from the first explanatory display (hereinafter," second explanatory display [for example, "oolong tea appears in the drink confrontation reach effect" Then, the explanation display of "Gekiatsu!", Etc.] "is sometimes displayed.
A game table characterized in that the second explanatory display is not displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in a certain display area of the second aspect, only the second explanatory display may be displayed, or in a certain display area of the second aspect, other than the second explanatory display. The display may also be displayed. Further, the second explanatory display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the second explanatory display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. May be good.

Further, it is possible that only the second explanatory display is not displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or a display other than the second explanatory display is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. May not be displayed. Further, the second explanatory display may not always be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the second explanatory display may be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. May be the case.

Further, "a display frame for specifying a certain display area (hereinafter, referred to as" icon display frame [for example, display of the UI unit shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)] ") can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon display frame may be displayed, or a display other than the icon display frame may be marked. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed, or the icon display frame may not be displayed.

In addition, "The icon display frame can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.
One of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the default display mode in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed in blue as shown in FIG. 291 (a)].
One of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed in gold as shown in FIG. 291 (e)].
The first display mode is the default display mode.
The second display mode is a look-ahead notice display mode [for example, by displaying the UI unit UI 3 in a gold display mode, the tutorial display unit TT6 is foretold to be expanded in the hold, etc.],
When the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. More likely that a display area of the first aspect will change from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be possible to display only the icon display frame in a plurality of types of display modes, or it may be possible to display a display other than the icon display frame in a plurality of types of display modes. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or the icon display frame may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

Further, the case where the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode is the first than the case where the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. A certain display area of the above aspect may easily change from the first aspect to the second aspect, or when the icon display frame changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, the icon Even if a certain display area of the first aspect is more likely to change from the first aspect to a mode other than the second aspect than when the display frame does not change from the first display aspect to the second display aspect. Good. Further, the case where the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode is the first than the case where the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It may be easy for a certain display area of the above aspect to change from the first aspect to the second aspect, and when the icon display frame changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, the icon Even if a certain display area of the first aspect is less likely to change from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the display frame does not change from the first display aspect to the second display aspect. Good.

When the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, a certain display area of the first mode may always change from the first mode to the second mode. However, a certain display area of the first aspect may or may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, when the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode, make sure that a certain display area of the first mode does not change from the first mode to the second mode. Alternatively, a certain display area of the first aspect may or may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.].
A certain display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT6 shown in FIG. 485 (a-1) and the figure (a-2)] is a display area capable of taking a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the reduced aspect shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)].
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect [for example, an extended aspect shown in FIG. 485 (a-2)].
The size of the display area of the second aspect is larger than that of the display area of the first aspect.
A certain display area of the second aspect is a display area including a certain display area of the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a-2). , The expanded tutorial display unit TT6 is said to include the reduced tutorial unit TT6, etc.],
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display (hereinafter, "first display [for example, the drink confrontation reach effect shown in FIGS. 485 (a-2) to (a-4)]". ) Can be displayed,
After the display of the first display is completed, a certain display area of the second aspect changes from the second aspect to the first aspect [for example, when the drink confrontation reach effect is completed, the tutorial display unit TT6 returns from the extended mode to the reduced mode, etc.],
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display different from the first display (hereinafter, the target shown in the second display [for example, FIGS. 296 (a3) to (a4)). , The bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6), the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7), etc.] ”).
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, a certain display area may be capable of taking only a plurality of modes, or may be capable of taking a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, a certain display area may or may not always take a plurality of modes.

Also, the display area of the second aspect may be larger only in size than the display area of the first aspect, and the display area of the second aspect may be larger than the display area of the first aspect. A display area may be larger than the size. Further, the size of the display area of the second aspect may always be larger than that of the display area of the first aspect, and the size of the display area of the second aspect may be larger than that of the display area of the first aspect. Some display areas may not be larger in size.

Further, the certain display area of the second aspect may include only a certain display area of the first aspect, or may include an area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. You may. Further, a certain display area of the second aspect may always include a certain display area of the first aspect, or may not include a certain display area of the first aspect. There may be.

Further, in a certain display area of the second aspect, only the first display may be displayed, or in a certain display area of the second aspect, a display other than the first display can be displayed. There may be. Further, the first display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the first display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. ..

Further, the first display may be displayed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the first display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. It may be possible.

Further, after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second aspect may be regarded as from the second aspect to the first aspect, or after the display of the first display is finished. , A certain display area of the second aspect may be changed from the second aspect to the aspect other than the first aspect. Further, after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second aspect may always change from the second aspect to the first aspect, or after the display of the first display is finished. , A certain display area of the second aspect may not change from the second aspect to the first aspect.

Further, a certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect only after the display of the first display is finished, or after the display of the first display is finished. Alternatively, a certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect.

Further, in a certain display area of the second aspect, only the second display may be displayed, or in a certain display area of the second aspect, a display other than the second display can be displayed. There may be. Further, the second display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the second display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect.

Further, the second display may be displayed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the second display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. It may be possible.

In addition, "the first display of the success pattern (hereinafter, referred to as" first effect display [for example, the effect display in which the hero's lord has won as shown in FIG. 485 (a-4)] ") can be displayed. Yes,
The first display of the failure pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "second effect display [for example, the effect display in which the hero's lord shown in FIG. 485 (a-4') was defeated by his grandfather, etc.]") can be displayed. Yes,
The second display of the success pattern (hereinafter, “third effect display [for example, a display that becomes a strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6), FIGS. 312 (b4) to FIG. (B7), a display that is a cup-in in the golf game, etc.] ”) can be displayed.
The second display of the failure pattern (hereinafter, "fourth effect display [for example, a display that does not cause a strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6), FIGS. 312 (b4) to FIG. (B7), the display that does not cup in in the golf game, etc.] ”) can be displayed.
The third effect in a certain display area of the second aspect is more than the symbol variation display being executed when the display of the first effect display is started in a certain display area of the second aspect. A game table characterized in that the symbol variation display that is being executed when the display of the display is started is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol mode. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the first effect display may be displayed, or an effect display other than the first effect display may be displayed. Further, the first effect display may be displayed without fail, or the first effect display may not be displayed.

Further, only the second effect display may be displayed, or the effect display other than the second effect display may be displayed. Further, the second effect display may be displayed without fail, or the second effect display may not be displayed.

Further, it may be possible to display only the third effect display, or it may be possible to display an effect display other than the third effect display. Further, the third effect display may be always displayed, or the third effect display may not be displayed.

Further, it may be possible to display only the fourth effect display, or it may be possible to display an effect display other than the fourth effect display. Further, the fourth effect display may be always displayed, or the fourth effect display may not be displayed.

In addition, in the symbol variation display being executed when the display of the first effect display is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the final display may not always be confirmed in the jackpot symbol aspect. , It may or may not be finally confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol mode.

Further, in the symbol variation display being executed when the display of the third effect display is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the final display may be surely confirmed in the jackpot symbol aspect. However, it may or may not be finally displayed in the jackpot symbol mode.

In addition, "the first super reach effect [for example, the swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 63 (c) to (j)] can be executed.
When the display of the first effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. [For example, after the production display in which the main character's lord has won is performed as shown in FIG. 485 (a-4), the SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 457 (c) to (j) is started. , When the SP reach is completed, the tutorial display unit TT6 is displayed in a reduced mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the first super reach effect may be feasible, or a reach effect other than the first super reach effect may be feasible. Further, the first super reach effect may be always executed, or the first super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, only a certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, after the first super reach effect is performed, the display area other than the certain display area is also the first. It may be one aspect. Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area always becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area does not become the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. There may be cases.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect only after the first super reach effect is performed. It ’s good. When the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, even if the certain display area becomes the first aspect other than after the first super reach effect is performed. Good.

Further, when only the display of the first effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, even if the display other than the display of the first effect display ends, after the first super reach effect is performed, the certain display area becomes the first. It may be one aspect.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, even in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first after the first super reach effect is performed. It may be one aspect.

In addition, "the second super reach production [for example, super long reach, triple line reach, Amedori reach, swordsman reach, etc.] can be executed.
When the second super reach effect is executed, it is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display than when the first super reach effect is executed.
When the display of the third effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the second super reach effect is performed. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the second super reach effect may be executed, or the reach effect other than the second super reach effect may be executed. Further, the second super reach effect may be executed without fail, or the second super reach effect may not be executed.

In addition, when the second super reach effect is executed, it may be easier to finally confirm and display only the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display than when the first super reach effect is executed. , Even if the symbol mode other than the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the second super reach effect is executed than when the first super reach effect is executed. Good. Further, when the second super reach effect is executed than when the first super reach effect is executed, it may be easier to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol mode in the symbol variation display. , Even if the second super reach effect is executed rather than the first super reach effect, it may not be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display. Good.

Further, when the first super reach effect is executed, it may not always be confirmed and finally displayed in the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display, or it may be finally confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display. It may or may not be done.

Further, when the second super reach effect is executed, the symbol variation display may be finally confirmed in the jackpot symbol mode, or the symbol variation display may be finally confirmed in the jackpot symbol mode. It may or may not be displayed.

Further, when the display of the third effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, only a certain display area becomes the first aspect after the second super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, after the second super reach effect is performed, the display area other than the certain display area is also the first. It may be the aspect of. Further, when the display of the third effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area always becomes the first aspect after the second super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, the certain display area does not become the first aspect after the second super reach effect is performed. There may be cases.

Further, when the display of the third effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect only after the second super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first aspect even after the second super reach effect is performed. You may become.

Further, when only the display of the third effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the second super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the display other than the third effect display is completed, after the second super reach effect is performed, the certain display area becomes the first. It may be an embodiment.

Further, when the display of the third effect display is completed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the second super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, even in an area other than a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first after the second super reach effect is performed. It may be the aspect of.

In addition, "the first super reach effect [for example, the swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 63 (c) to (j)] can be executed.
When the display of the third effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the first super reach effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6). After the display of strike in the bowling chance game is displayed, or after the display of cup-in is displayed in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7), FIGS. 457 (c) to FIG. SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in (j) will start, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the first super reach effect may be feasible, or a reach effect other than the first super reach effect may be feasible. Further, the first super reach effect may be always executed, or the first super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, when the display of the third effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, only the first super reach effect may be performed, or in a certain display area of the second aspect. When the display of the third effect display is completed, an effect other than the first super reach effect may be performed. Further, when the display of the third effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the first super reach effect may always be performed, or in a certain display area of the second aspect. When the display of the third effect display is finished, the first super reach effect may not be performed.

Further, when only the display of the third effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the first super reach effect may be performed, or in a certain display area of the second aspect. When the display of the display other than the third effect display is completed, the first super reach effect may be performed.

Further, only in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, the first super reach effect may be performed, or other than the certain display area of the second aspect. Also in the display area, when the display of the third effect display is completed, the first super reach effect may be performed.

Further, "In a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, after the first super reach effect is performed, a certain display area becomes the first effect. [For example, after the display of a strike is displayed in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6), or in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7). After the cup-in display is displayed, the SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 457 (c) to (j) is started, and when the SP reach is completed, the tutorial display unit TT6 is displayed in a reduced mode. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, when the display of the third effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, only a certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, after the first super reach effect is performed, the display area other than the certain display area is also the first. It may be one aspect. Further, when the display of the third effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area always becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, the certain display area does not become the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. There may be cases.

Further, in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first aspect only after the first super reach effect is performed. It ’s good. When the display of the third effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, even if the certain display area becomes the first aspect other than after the first super reach effect is performed. Good.

Further, when only the display of the third effect display is completed in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in a certain display area of the second aspect, even if the display other than the display of the third effect display ends, after the first super reach effect is performed, the certain display area becomes the first. It may be one aspect.

Further, when the display of the third effect display is completed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, even in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first after the first super reach effect is performed. It may be one aspect.

In addition, "the first super reach effect [for example, the swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 63 (c) to (j)] can be executed.
The first effect display is an effect display that can be displayed with a plurality of types of success patterns.
One of the plurality of types of success patterns is the first success pattern [for example, a draw production pattern in which neither the hero's lord nor the grandfather gets drunk].
One of the plurality of types of success patterns is a second success pattern [for example, a production pattern in which the hero's lord wins as shown in FIG. 485 (a-4)].
After the display of the first effect display according to the first success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the normal reach is started [for example, in the drink confrontation reach effect, the main character is also a grandfather. If a draw pattern that does not get drunk is displayed, then shift to normal reach, etc.],
After the display of the first effect display according to the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the first super reach effect can be executed [for example, FIG. 485 (Fig. 485). As shown in a-4), in the drink confrontation reach production, after the main character's lord has won the production display, the SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 457 (c) to (j) is displayed. To be started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the first super reach effect may be feasible, or a reach effect other than the first super reach effect may be feasible. Further, the first super reach effect may be always executed, or the first super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, the first effect display may be one that can be displayed only with a plurality of types of success patterns, or may be one that can be displayed with a pattern other than the plurality of types of success patterns. Further, the first effect display may be displayed with a plurality of types of success patterns without fail, or may not be displayed with a plurality of types of success patterns.

Further, only the normal reach may be started after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second aspect, or the certain display area of the second aspect may be started. After the display of the first effect display according to the first success pattern is started, the reach other than the normal reach may be started. Further, the normal reach may always be started after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second aspect, or the certain display area of the second aspect may be started. In some cases, the normal reach may not be started after the display of the first effect display according to the first success pattern is started.

Further, the normal reach may be started only after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second aspect, or the certain display area of the second aspect may be started. The normal reach may be started other than after the display of the first effect display according to the first success pattern is started.

Further, the normal reach may be started after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started only in the certain display area of the second aspect, or the certain display area of the second aspect may be started. The normal reach may be started even after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the display area other than the above.

Further, after the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, only the first super reach effect may be executed, or the second After the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the aspect of
Reach effects other than the first super reach effect may be feasible. Further, after the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the first super reach effect may be executed without fail, or the second aspect may be performed. After the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of, the first super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, the first super reach effect may be executed only after the display of the first effect display according to the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect. It may be possible to execute the first super reach effect other than after the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the above aspect.

Further, the first super reach effect may be executed after the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started only in a certain display area of the second aspect. It may be possible to execute the first super reach effect even after the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started in the display area other than the certain display area of the above aspect.

Further, "a display frame for specifying a certain display area (hereinafter, referred to as" icon display frame [for example, display of the UI unit shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)] ") can be displayed.
After the display of the first effect display according to the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the icon display frame is hidden and the first super reach effect is performed. It is feasible [For example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-4), in the drink confrontation reach production, after the production display in which the main character's lord wins is performed, the UI part is hidden and the figure is shown. SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in Fig. 457 (c) to figure (j) will be started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon display frame may be displayed, or a display other than the icon display frame may be marked. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed, or the icon display frame may not be displayed.

Further, after the display of the first effect by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the icon display frame is hidden and only the first super reach effect can be executed. It may be present, or after the display of the first effect by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the icon display frame is hidden and other than the first super reach effect. The reach effect of is also feasible. In addition, after the display of the first effect by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the icon display frame is hidden and the first super reach effect is always executed. Alternatively, after the display of the first effect by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the icon display frame is hidden and the first super reach effect is not executed. There may be cases.

In addition, the icon display frame is hidden and the first super reach effect can be executed only after the display of the first effect by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect. It may be present, or the icon display frame is hidden and the first super reach is not displayed even after the display of the first effect by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect. The production may be feasible.

Further, after the display of the first effect by the second success pattern is started only in a certain display area of the second aspect, the icon display frame is hidden and the first super reach effect can be executed. It may be present, or even after the display of the first effect by the second success pattern is started in the display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect, the icon display frame is hidden and the first Super reach production may be feasible.

In addition, "after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the display area of the second aspect, the display area of the second aspect is the second aspect. From the aspect, the normal reach is started in the first aspect. [For example, in the drink confrontation reach production, when the main character's lord and grandfather do not get drunk, the tutorial display unit TT6 is reduced. After the animation is performed and the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from the expanded mode to the reduced mode, it shifts to the normal reach, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect is changed from the second aspect to the first. Only the normal reach may be initiated in the aspect, or there is a second aspect after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is initiated in a certain display area of the second aspect. The display area may change from the second aspect to the first aspect and reach other than the normal reach may be started. Further, after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect changes from the second aspect to the first aspect. The normal reach may always be started, or after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display of the second aspect is started. There may be cases where the region changes from the second aspect to the first aspect and normal reach is not started.

Further, after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second aspect, only the certain display area of the second aspect is the first from the second aspect. The normal reach may be started in the aspect, or after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second aspect, the display of the second aspect is started. The normal reach may be started by changing the display area other than the area from the second aspect to the first aspect.

Also, only after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect is changed from the second aspect to the first. The normal reach may be started in the second aspect, and other than after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the second aspect. Normal reach may be initiated by changing a display area from the second aspect to the first aspect.

Also, after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started only in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect is changed from the second aspect to the first. The normal reach may be started in the mode, or even after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the display area other than a certain display area in the second mode, the second Normal reach may be initiated by changing the display area of an aspect from the second aspect to the first aspect.

Further, "a display frame for specifying a certain display area (hereinafter, referred to as" icon display frame [for example, display of the UI unit shown in FIG. 485 (a-1)] ") can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon display frame may be displayed, or a display other than the icon display frame may be marked. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed, or the icon display frame may not be displayed.

In addition, "the icon display frame may be hidden after the display of the first display is completed [for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-4), in the drink confrontation reach production, the main character After the hero's winning production display is performed, the UI section will be hidden when the SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 457 (c) to (j) is started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the display of the first display is finished, only the icon display frame may be hidden, or after the display of the first display is finished, the display other than the icon display frame is also hidden. It may be displayed. In addition, the icon display frame may always be hidden after the display of the first display is completed, or the icon display frame may not be hidden after the display of the first display is completed. May be good.

In addition, the icon display frame may be hidden only after the display of the first display is finished, and the icon display frame may be hidden only after the display of the first display is finished. May be the case.

Further, "The display of the first display may be started after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, FIG. 485 (Fig. 485). As shown in a-1) to Fig. (A-2), the drink confrontation reach effect is performed after the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a reduced mode to an expanded mode],
After the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of the second display may be started [for example, the tutorial display unit TT6 is reduced. After changing from the above-mentioned aspect to the extended aspect, the target mini-game shown in FIGS. 296 (a3) to (a4), the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312 (a3) to (a6), and FIG. 312. (B4) -The golf game shown in Fig. (B7) is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of only the first display may be started, or the display area of the first aspect may be started. May be started to display a display other than the first display after the first mode is changed to the second mode. Further, the display of the first display may always be started after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display area of the first aspect may be started. May not start displaying the first display after the first aspect has changed to the second aspect.

Further, the display of the first display may be started only after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display area of the first aspect may be started. The display of the first display may be started other than after the change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, the display of the first display may be started after only the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the certain display area of the first aspect may be started. The display of the first display may be started after the display areas other than the above have changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

It should be noted that the first display may not be started until after a certain display area of the first aspect has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of only the second display may be started, or the display area of the first aspect may be displayed. After changing from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of the display other than the second display may be started. Further, the display of the second display may always be started after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display area of the first aspect may be started. May not start displaying the second display after the first aspect has changed to the second aspect.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only after the display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the display area of the first aspect may be started. The display of the second display may be started other than after the change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, the display of the second display may be started after only the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the certain display area of the first aspect may be started. The display of the second display may be started after the display area other than the above has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

It should be noted that the second display may not be started until after a certain display area of the first aspect has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, "the second display is a display including a first partial display [for example, the first part of the mini game] and a second partial display [for example, the second part of the mini game]. ,
After the first partial display is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the first aspect is made. The second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect [for example, a display showing how the character of the lord throws a bowling ball in the manner shown in FIG. 312 (a3). It was performed as the first half of the mini game, and then the tutorial display unit TT6 changed from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, and then the bowling ball became a pin in the manner shown in FIGS. 312 (a4) to (a5). Shows the approaching situation and encourages whether or not it will be a strike, and a success pattern that will eventually become a strike or a failure pattern that leaves an infallible pin will be performed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may include only the first partial display and the second partial display, or may include a display other than the first partial display and the second partial display. You may. Further, the second display may always include the first partial display and the second partial display, or includes at least one of the first partial display and the second partial display. It may not be available.

Further, after the first portion is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second aspect is performed. In some display areas of, only the second partial display may be displayed, or in some display areas of the first aspect, the first part is displayed and some display of the first aspect. After the area changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, a display other than the second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode. Further, after the first portion is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second aspect is performed. The second partial display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the first part is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect is the first. After changing from the display mode of the above to the second display mode, the second partial display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode.

Further, after the first portion is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second aspect is performed. The second partial display may be displayed only in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the first part is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and a certain display of the first aspect is displayed. After the area changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second partial display may be displayed in a display area other than a certain display area of the second mode.

Also, only after the first portion is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second A second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or a first part may be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect and a certain display of the first aspect may be displayed. In addition to after the area has changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode.

Further, after the first portion is displayed only in a certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second display mode is displayed. The second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the first part may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. After a certain display area of is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode.

Further, "an icon related to the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" icon [for example, variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), hold icon h11 to h14, etc.] ") is an icon display area [for example, FIG. 485." It can be displayed in the hold display frame FL0, hold display area, etc. shown in (a-1)].
A certain display area is an area arranged below the icon display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), the tutorial display unit TT6 is a hold display frame FL0 or a hold display area. Located below],
The position of the icon display area is different depending on whether the display area has the first aspect or the second aspect [for example, FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a). As shown in -2), the positions of the hold display frame FL0 and the hold display area are different depending on whether the tutorial display unit TT6 is in the reduced mode or the enlarged mode],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the icon may be displayed only in the icon display area, or the icon may be displayed in a display area other than the icon display area. Further, the icon may always be displayed in the icon display area, or the icon may not be displayed in the icon display area.

Further, only the icon may be displayed in the icon display area, or something other than the icon may be displayed in the icon display area.

A certain display area may be arranged only below the icon display area, or may be arranged at a position other than below the icon display area. Further, a certain display area may be always arranged below the icon display area, or may not be arranged below the icon display area.

Further, depending on whether the display area is the first aspect and the display area is the second aspect, only the position of the icon display area may be different, and the display area is the first aspect. In some cases and in the case where a certain display area is the second aspect, other than the position of the icon display area may be different. Further, the position of the icon display area may always be different depending on whether the display area is the first aspect and the display area is the second aspect, and the display area is the first aspect. There may be a case where the position of the icon display area does not differ between the case and the case where a certain display area is the second aspect.

In addition, "icon related to symbol variation display (hereinafter," icon [for example, FIG. 485 (a)
The variable icon h0 shown in -1), the hold icon h11 to h14, etc.] ”. ) Can be displayed,
When a certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the icon being displayed is hidden.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon may be displayed, or something other than the icon may be displayed. In addition, the icon may always be displayed, or the icon may not be displayed.

Further, when the first certain display area changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, only the icon being displayed may be hidden, or the first certain display area may change from the first aspect. In the second aspect, icons other than the displayed icon may be hidden. Further, when the first certain display area changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the icon being displayed may always be hidden, or the first certain display area may change from the first aspect. In the second aspect, the displayed icon may not be hidden.

Further, "timer display [for example, timer display shown in FIGS. 293 (b3) to (b4)] can be displayed.
After the timer countdown in the timer display is started, the timer display becomes a display indicating 0, and then the execution of a certain effect is started [for example, shown in FIGS. 293 (b3) to (b5). As a result of the timer display countdown, when the timer display becomes "0:00", a notice effect is performed, etc.],
As the effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as a result of counting down the timer display, the timer display becomes "0". When it becomes ": 00", as shown in FIGS. 485 (a-1) to (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a reduced mode to an enlarged mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the timer display may be displayed, or a display other than the timer display may be marked. In addition, the timer display may always be displayed, or the timer display may not be displayed.

Further, only the execution of a certain effect may be started after the timer display shows 0 after the timer countdown in the timer display is started, or the timer countdown in the timer display is started. Later, after the timer display changes to 0, execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, the execution of a certain effect may always be started after the timer display shows 0 after the timer countdown in the timer display is started, or the timer countdown in the timer display is started. There may be a case where the execution of a certain effect is not started after the timer display is displayed to indicate 0 later.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only after the timer display shows 0 after the timer countdown in the timer display is started, or the timer countdown in the timer display is started. The execution of a certain effect may be started other than after the timer display is displayed to indicate 0 later.

Further, as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect only, or as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may be used. The mode may change from the first aspect to a mode other than the second aspect. Further, as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may always change from the first aspect to the second aspect, and as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect is the first aspect. There may be cases where the aspect does not change to the second aspect.

Further, as a certain effect, only a certain display area of the first aspect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect, or as a certain effect, other than a certain display area of the first aspect. The display area of may change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "a display for notifying that the timer display is displayed [for example, the preparation display RDY shown in FIG. 283 (b1)] may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the display for notifying that the timer display is displayed may be displayed, or the display other than the display for notifying that the timer display is displayed may be displayed. Good. Further, the display for notifying that the timer display is displayed may always be displayed, or the display for notifying that the timer display may be displayed may not be displayed.

In addition, "It is possible to display the decorative pattern variation display,
The decorative symbol variation display does not overlap with a certain display area of the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 of the expanded aspect is displaying variation. Decorative designs do not overlap, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be possible to display only the decorative symbol variation display, or it may be possible to display a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be always displayed, or the decorative symbol variation display may not be displayed.

Further, it is possible that only the decorative symbol variation display does not overlap the certain display area of the second aspect, and the display other than the decorative symbol variation display does not overlap the certain display area of the second aspect. It may be. Further, the decorative symbol variation display may not always overlap with a certain display area of the second aspect, or the decorative symbol variation display may overlap with a certain display area of the second aspect. May be good.

Further, the decorative symbol variation display may not overlap only in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the decorative symbol variation display may overlap in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. You may not do it.

Further, "In a certain display area of the first aspect, a certain explanatory display (hereinafter," displayed on the tutorial display unit TT6 shown in the first explanatory display [for example, FIG. 485 (a-1)) ". "Panda is a lord's master" character display, etc.] "" may be displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-1), the tutorial display unit TT6 in a reduced form shows "panda". The character display of "Haden-sama's master" is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in a certain display area of the first aspect, only the first explanatory display may be displayed, or in a certain display area of the first aspect, other than the first explanatory display. The display may also be displayed. Further, the first explanatory display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the first explanatory display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. May be good.

Further, the first explanatory display may be displayed only in a certain display area of the first aspect, and the first explanatory display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. An explanation display may be displayed.

In addition, "the first explanatory display is not displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 of the extended aspect". Then, the character display is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it is not necessary that only the first explanatory display is displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the display other than the first explanatory display is also displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. It does not have to be displayed. Further, the first explanatory display may not always be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the first explanatory display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. There may be.

Further, the first explanatory display may not be displayed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, and the first explanatory display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. Does not have to be displayed.

Further, "In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain explanatory display different from the first explanatory display (hereinafter," second explanatory display [for example, "oolong tea appears in the drink confrontation reach effect" Then, the explanation display of "Gekiatsu!", Etc.] "may be displayed.
A game table characterized in that the second explanatory display is not displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in a certain display area of the second aspect, only the second explanatory display may be displayed, or in a certain display area of the second aspect, other than the second explanatory display. The display may also be displayed. Further, the second explanatory display may always be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the second explanatory display may not be displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. May be good.

Further, it is possible that only the second explanatory display is not displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or a display other than the second explanatory display is displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. May not be displayed. Further, the second explanatory display may not always be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect, or the second explanatory display may be displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. May be the case.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies the time until a certain effect is performed.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a display that may foretell that the time until the certain effect is started will change.
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the "certain effect" may be an effect by a display and effect movable means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa writer, and a light guide plate).

(Appendix 2)
The game console described in Appendix 1.
When the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Further, the display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 3)
The game console described in Appendix 1 or 2.
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means.
The second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The game console described in Appendix 3,
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed.
The second image display means on which the second display is displayed may overlap the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The game console described in any one of Appendix 1 to 4.
Even if the second display is displayed, the time notified by the first display is advanced.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 5.
After the timer reaches 0, a display different from the second display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 6.
It is easier to hit the jackpot when the second display is displayed than when it is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game console described in any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 7.
The display of one of the multiple types of display is the third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means.
The display of the substitute sign is an effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
The game console described in any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 7.
Equipped with directing movable means
The effect movable means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements.
One type of movement among the plurality of types of movements is a directing movement.
The certain effect is an effect operation by the effect movable means.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, an operation other than the effect operation may be executed, and examples of the operation other than the effect operation include an operation at power-on, an initial position return operation, and an evacuation operation. Further, the effect movable means is not limited to the one provided on the game board, and may be, for example, the one provided on the frame (front door).

(Appendix 10)
The game console described in any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 9.
When the above-mentioned certain effect occurs, it is easier to hit the jackpot than when it does not occur.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 10.
A hot effect display may be displayed between the time when the first display is displayed and the time when the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 11.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 11.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach, and is a display.
The period display is a display for notifying the timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing").
The period display may be erased before the first timing is reached.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the period in which the period display is displayed is not limited to the reach, but may be fluctuating or a big hit. Further, even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not in the second reach.

(Appendix 15)
The game console described in Appendix 14,
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third effect display.
The timing of displaying the third effect display may not be notified by the period display.
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is hidden.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, error notification such as a ball removal error, notification indicating the firing position, notification other than an error such as notification for preventing forgetting to remove the prepaid card, light emission by the LED, and production operation by the accessory. May be done. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may be notified by the period display. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed does not have to be notified by the period display.

(Appendix 16)
The game console described in Appendix 15.
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as "big hit symbol variation") in which the result of the hit / fail determination is a jackpot.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game console described in Appendix 16.
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed due to a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as “missing symbol variation”) in which the result of the hit / fail determination is incorrect.
The jackpot symbol variation is configured so that the third effect display is displayed more frequently than the lost symbol variation.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 17.
Equipped with directing movable means
The effect movable means is a means that may perform an effect operation.
A game table characterized in that the electric power movable means may perform the effect operation during the display of the third effect display.

(Appendix 19)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 18.
After the period display is hidden, the period display becomes easily visible.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 19.
The period display is hidden until the end of a certain period during the reach.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 19.
The period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 21.
The period display is a display for notifying the timing of displaying the second effect display (hereinafter, referred to as "second timing").
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, the location for notifying the chance up may be fixed in response to the reach, such that when a certain reach occurs, the chance up is notified three times, and when another reach occurs, the chance up is notified twice. If this is the case, the notification may be made three times, and at other times, the notification may be made only once. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of "not notifying too much", or may be more likely to come off. Further, the susceptibility to a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of notified timings. Further, the larger the number of chance-ups, the easier it is to win a big hit, or the smaller the number of chance-ups, the easier it is to win a big hit.

(Appendix 23)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 22.
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means.
The first image display means is an image display means that may display the period display.
The second image display means is an image display means that may perform an effect operation.
At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 14 to 23.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach, and is a display.
The period display is a display for notifying the timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing").
Before the first timing is reached, the third display may overlap at least a part of the first effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display changes at the first speed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the second display.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed.
The first speed and the second speed are different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 27)
The game console described in Appendix 26.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is a time display.
The time display is a display in which at least a part of the time display changes according to the passage of time within a certain period.
The display of one of the time displays is the first display.
The display of one of the time displays is the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The game console according to Appendix 26 or 27.
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 29)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 26 to 28.
The first display is a display in which the display mode changes until the first time elapses.
The second display is a display in which the display mode changes until the second time elapses.
When the first time elapses, the third display is displayed.
When the second time elapses, the fourth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Further, the third display may be more reliable than the fourth display, and the fourth display may be more reliable than the third display.

(Appendix 30)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 26 to 29.
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is the first type of display.
The first type of display includes the first display and the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of displays.

(Appendix 31)
The game console described in Appendix 30.
The first type of display is a timer notice display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The timer notice display is a display that notifies the time until the first effect display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The game console described in Appendix 30.
Equipped with operating means
The first type of display is an operation validity period display.
The operation valid period display is a display indicating a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
The game console described in Appendix 30.
The first type of display is a period display, and is a period display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The period display is a display that may notify the timing at which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing").
The first timing is notified between the start and the end of the first period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 34)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 26 to 33.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 35)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a countdown display.
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of the time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter, referred to as "time notification") may be executed.
When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in the first display mode.
When the time notification is executed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 36)
The game console described in Appendix 35.
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in the first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in the second display size.
The second display size is larger than the first display size.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The game console according to Appendix 35 or 36.
When the display of the countdown display starts, the countdown display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 37.
When the countdown display is displayed, the first display mode is always changed to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 37.
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the display mode is changed to the second display mode than when the display mode is changed to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 39.
The countdown display is started and ended within the period of one symbol change display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 40.
When the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
The game console described in Appendix 41.
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is continued.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 43)
The game console described in Appendix 41.
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 44)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 43.
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the countdown display notifies that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0.
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0 by the countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 45)
The game console described in Appendix 44.
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 46)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 45.
It may not change to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 47)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 46.
The display means is composed of a plurality of display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the second display means.
The countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 48)
The game console described in Appendix 47.
The countdown display of the second display means may be displayed by the second display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 49)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 48.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 50)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 48.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 51)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the first indication.
The first display is a period display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a second indication,
The second display is a notice display, and is
The first display is a display for notifying the first timing, and is a display for notifying the first timing.
The first timing is a timing at which the second display may start to be displayed.
The first display may be erased after the first display is started and before the first timing is reached.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 52)
The game console described in Appendix 51.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a third indication,
The third display is an effect display, and is
The third display is different from the second display.
The third display may be displayed before the first timing is reached.
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the third display is started.
During the display of the third display, the first display is erased.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
The game console described in Appendix 52.
The third display is a notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 54)
The game console described in Appendix 53.
When the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the third display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 55)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 52 to 54.
Equipped with a directing movable means that can execute multiple types of movements
One of the plurality of types of operations is the first operation,
The first operation is a production operation,
The first operation may be performed during the display of the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 56)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 51 to 55.
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be displayed again.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 57)
The game console according to the appendices 51 to 55.
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured not to be displayed until a certain period of time has elapsed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 58)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 51 to 55.
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be re-displayed by the time when the certain period elapses.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 59)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 51 to 58.
The certain period is the period during which the super reach is in progress.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 60)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 51 to 59.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a fourth indication,
The fourth display is an effect display, and is
The fourth display is different from the second display.
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing.
The second timing is a timing at which the fourth display may start to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 61)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 51 to 60.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 62)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the first indication.
The first display is a display including a countdown display.
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification, and is a display.
The timing notification is a notification performed by updating the display of the countdown display at the timing when a certain effect is performed.
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 63)
The game console described in Appendix 62.
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
The game console described in Appendix 63.
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the second display size.
Of the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 65)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 64.
When the display of the countdown display starts, the first display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 66)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 65.
During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 67)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 65.
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, rather than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 68)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 67.
The display of the first display is started and ended during the execution of one symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 69)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 68.
The first display is a display in which the display position may change.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 70)
The game console described in Appendix 69.
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at the first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at the second position. It may be a game table to play.

(Appendix 71)
The game console according to Appendix 69 or 70.
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed.
The display position of the first display changes due to the movement display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 72)
The game console described in Appendix 71.
Even while the movement display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is continued.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The game console described in Appendix 71.
While the movement display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 74)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 73.
The countdown display is a time countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The game console described in Appendix 74.
The timing notification is a notification that the timing for performing the certain effect is reached by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 76)
The game console according to Appendix 74 or 75.
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 77)
The game console described in Appendix 76.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a second indication,
The second display is a display that is not included in the certain effect.
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is deleted after the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 77.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means.
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
The game console described in Appendix 78.
The first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 80)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 79.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 79.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A1)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays.
One of the plurality of types of meter displays is the first meter display.
One of the plurality of types of meter displays is the fourth meter display.
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states.
One of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is the first state.
One of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is the third state.
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state.
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states.
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is the fourth state.
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is the sixth state.
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state.
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state than when the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. , High expectations for big hits,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state. , High expectations for big hits,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2)
In the game table described in Appendix A1
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is higher than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. high,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3)
The game console described in Appendix A1 or A2.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative pattern.
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped.

(Appendix A4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A3.
The fourth meter display is a display that starts to be displayed in the fourth state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A4.
The state of one of the plurality of states in the first meter display is the second state.
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state.
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state.
The first meter display is a display that may be started in the first state.
The first meter display is a display that may be started in the second state.
The expectation of a big hit is higher when the first meter display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A5.
Of the plurality of types of displays, one display is the first icon.
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state by displaying the first icon the first number of times.
The fourth meter display is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state by displaying the first icon a second number of times.
The second number is less than the first number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A6.
One of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display, and is a jackpot display.
The third state in the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on which the third state is displayed.
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the sixth state is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A8)
The game console described in Appendix A7.
The second state of the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on which the second state is displayed.
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on which the fifth state is displayed.
The jackpot display is more likely to be displayed when the fifth state is displayed than when the second state is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A8.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a pseudo-continuous effect.
The pseudo-continuous notice is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The pseudo-continuous notice is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A9.
One of the plurality of types of displays is an operation promotion display of the operation means.
The operation promotion display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The operation promotion display is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A11)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A10.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a certain effect.
The certain effect is an effect in which the jackpot display is likely to be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the certain effect is displayed.
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A12)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display.
The period display is a display that notifies the start of a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed.
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing during the display of the reach effect display.
The first timing is a timing at which the first effect display may be started while the reach effect display is being displayed.
The notice display is a display for notifying that the first timing is notified by the period display.
The notice display may be displayed before the start of the certain period is notified by the period display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A13)
The game console described in Appendix A12.
The period display is a display including a cursor display, and is a display including a cursor display.
By moving the cursor display from the second position (start position) to the third position (end position) via the first position, the start to end of the first period is notified. It is composed and
The second position is a position prior to the first position.
The first position is a position prior to the third position.
When the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that the first timing is reached.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A14)
The game console described in Appendix A13.
The period display is a display in which a chance-up display (first chance-up display) may be displayed.
The chance-up display is a display for notifying that the first effect display has been started at the first timing.
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A15)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A14.
The period display is a display that may be moved.
A game table whose head is that.

(Appendix A16)
The game console described in Appendix A15.
The movement display is performed before the start of a certain period is notified by the period display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A17)
The game console according to Appendix A15 or A16.
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the period display changes.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A18)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A17.
The notice display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes.
One of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode.
One of the plurality of display modes is the second display mode.
When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, it is finally a big hit (in the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed) than when it is displayed in the first display mode. It is easy to confirm the design mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A19)
The game console described in Appendix A18.
When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first effect display is performed when the first timing is reached, as compared with the case where the notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Is easy to get started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A20)
The game console described in Appendix A18 or A19.
The notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A21)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A20.
The period display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes.
One of the plurality of display modes is a third display mode (for example, a defometer).
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, a red meter).
When the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A22)
The game console described in Appendix A21.
Depending on the display mode of the notice display, it is unknown whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the display mode in the fourth display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A23)
The game console according to Appendix A21 or A22.
When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is more likely to be displayed in the fourth display mode than when the notice display is displayed in the first display mode. , A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A24)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A21 to A23.
When the notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode than when the notice display is displayed in the second display mode. , A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A25)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A24.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a second notice indication,
The notice display is the first notice display, and is
The second notice display may give a notice that the first notice display will be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A26)
The game console described in Appendix A25.
The symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the first notice display is not announced by the second notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A27)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A26.
When the notice display is displayed before the period display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the notice display is not displayed before the period display is displayed. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A28)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A27.
The notice display is a display performed by at least a part of the period display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A29)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A27.
The notice display is a display different from the period display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A30)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A29.
By notifying that the reach effect display will be displayed by the notice display, it is foretold that the period display will be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A31)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A30.
The notice display may be performed in the same symbol variation display as the period display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A32)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A31.
The notice display may be performed in a symbol variation display prior to the symbol variation display in which the period display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A33)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A32.
The notice display also displays the period during which the symbol stop display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A34)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A32.
The notice display will be hidden during the period when the symbol stop display is being performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A35)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A34.
The notice display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A36)
The notice display is a display that may be displayed before the reach effect display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A37)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means that may display the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies the timing when a certain effect may be started.
The display means is a means in which the display A may be displayed as a certain effect.
At the timing when the first display is started (hereinafter, referred to as "the first timing"), the first display may be displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, a certain effect may be the display of A. In addition, the display of the P-th display may be started as a certain effect.

(Appendix A38)
The game console described in Appendix A37.
The first display is a period display, and is
The period display is a display that notifies the timing at which the first display may be displayed in a certain period.
With the passage of time for a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
During the change of at least a part of the display mode of the period display, the timing at which the first display is started is notified.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A39)
The game console described in Appendix A38.
The period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed.
When the display of the A is displayed at the timing of the A, the display of the B is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A40)
The game console described in Appendix A37.
The first display is a timer display.
The timer display is a display that notifies the timing at which the first display is displayed.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes,
When the change of at least a part of the display mode of the timer display is completed, the first display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A41)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A37 to A40.
When the timing of the A is reached, the display of the A may be displayed.
When the timing of the A is reached, the display of the A may not be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A42)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A37 to A40.
When the timing of the A is reached, the display of the A is always displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A43)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A42.
The display means is a means that may display a second display.
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A44)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A43.
The first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed.
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A45)
The game console described in Appendix A44.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
The moving display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A46)
The game console described in Appendix A44.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
The moving display may be performed during the change of at least a part of the display mode of the first display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A47)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A46.
When the first display is displayed at the first timing, at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the first display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A48)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A47.
When the first display is displayed at the first timing, the first display is hidden and the first display overlaps at least a part of the displayed area. A display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A49)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A48.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of types of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of types of image display means is the second image display means.
The second image display means is a means provided in front of the first image display means.
The first display is displayed by the first image display means.
The second display means displays the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A50)
The game console described in Appendix A49.
The second image display means is a means that may perform an effect operation.
When the first display is displayed by the first image display means and the first timing is reached, the second image display means may perform the previous stage effect operation. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A51)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A50.
Equipped with operating means
The first display is a display related to the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A52)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A51.
The display means is a means in which a third display may be displayed as a certain effect.
The C-th display may be displayed at the timing when the C-th display is started (hereinafter, referred to as "C-th timing").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A53)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A52.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A54)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A52.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A55)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means that may display the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies the timing at which a certain effect is started.
The first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

(Appendix A56)
The game console described in Appendix A55.
The first display is a period display, and is
The period display is a display for notifying a timing (hereinafter, referred to as "certain timing") at which a certain effect may be started in a certain period.
With the passage of time for a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
During the change of at least a part of the display mode of the period display, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A57)
The game console described in Appendix A56.
The period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed.
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A58)
The game console described in Appendix A55.
The first display is a timer display.
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and is a display for notifying the certain timing.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes,
When the change in the display mode of at least a part of the timer display is completed, the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A59)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A58.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may not be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A60)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A58.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect is always started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A61)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A60.
The display means is a means that may display a second display.
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A62)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A61.
The first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed.
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A63)
The game console described in Appendix A62.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
The moving display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A64)
The game console described in Appendix A62.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
The moving display may be performed during the change of at least a part of the display mode of the first display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A65)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A64.
In the first symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays, the display of the first display is started.
In the second symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified.
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A66)
The game console described in Appendix A65.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display changes according to the passage of time in a certain period.
In the second symbol variation display, the certain period is started,
In the first symbol variation display, the display mode of the first display is configured not to change.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A67)
The game console described in Appendix A65.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display changes according to the passage of time in a certain period.
In the first symbol variation display, the certain period is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A68)
The game console described in Appendix A67.
The display mode of the first display is not changed between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A68)
The game console described in Appendix A67.
At least a part of the display mode of the first display may be changed between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display. is there,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A69)
The game console described in Appendix A65.
The display means is a means that may display a second display.
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
The second display is a display that may be displayed in the first symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the second display may be displayed in the second symbol variation display. Further, the second display may always be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

(Appendix A70)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A69.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A71)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A69.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A72)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means that may display the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies a timing (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain timing") in which a certain effect may be started.
At least a part of the display mode of the first display may change depending on the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
A notice display may be performed by the first display before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A73)
The game console described in Appendix A72.
The first display is a period display, and is
The period display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and is a display for notifying the certain timing.
With the passage of time for a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
During the change of at least a part of the display mode of the period display, the certain timing is notified.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A74)
The game console described in Appendix A73.
The period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed.
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A75)
The game console described in Appendix A72.
The first display is a timer display.
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and is a display for notifying the certain timing.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes,
When the change in the display mode of at least a part of the timer display is completed, the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A76)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A75.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may not be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A77)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A75.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect is always started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A78)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A77.
The display means is a means that may display a second display.
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A79)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A78.
The first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed.
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A80)
The game console described in Appendix A79.
The moving display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A81)
The game console described in Appendix A79.
The moving display may be performed during the change of at least a part of the display mode of the first display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A82)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A81.
The notice display is a display for notifying the time until the certain effect displayed by the first display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A83)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A82.
Equipped with operating means
The notice display is a display relating to the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A84)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A83.
After the notice display is performed, the time until the certain effect is started is notified by the first display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A85)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A84.
A notice display is always performed by the first display before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until a certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A86)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A85.
When the first display is displayed, at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A87)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A86.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A88)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A86.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A89)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means on which the first display may be displayed.
The first display is a display that notifies a timing (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain timing") in which a certain effect may be started.
The display means is a means on which a second display may be displayed.
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A plurality of the second displays (hereinafter, referred to as "plurality of second displays") may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A90)
The game console described in Appendix A89.
The first display is a period display, and is
The period display is a display that notifies the certain timing in a certain period.
With the passage of time for a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
During the change of at least a part of the display mode of the period display, the certain timing is notified.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A91)
The game console described in Appendix A90.
The period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed.
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A91)
The game console described in Appendix A89.
The first display is a timer display.
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and is a display for notifying the certain timing.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes,
When the change in the display mode of at least a part of the timer display is completed, the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A92)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A91.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may not be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A93)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A91.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect is always started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A94)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A93.
The first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed.
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A95)
The game console described in Appendix A94.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
The moving display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A96)
The game console described in Appendix A94.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time.
The moving display may be performed during the change of at least a part of the display mode of the first display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A97)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A96.
When the second display is displayed, the first display is always displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A98)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A96.
When the second display is displayed, the first display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A99)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A98.
The second display is a display in preparation.
The display of the plurality of older brothers is a display of a plurality of preparations.
The display of one of the plurality of preparing displays is the first preparing display.
The display of one of the plurality of preparing displays is the second preparing display.
The first preparing display is a display displayed before the second preparing display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A100)
The game console described in Appendix A99.
After the first preparing display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the first preparing display (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display") is displayed.
After the second preparing display is displayed, the timer display corresponding to the second preparing display (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display") is displayed.
The first timer display is configured to be displayed before the second timer display.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, one timer notice may be displayed for a plurality of preparation displays.

(Appendix A101)
The game console described in Appendix A99.
After the first preparing display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the first preparing display (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display") is displayed.
After the second preparing display is displayed, the timer display corresponding to the second preparing display (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display") is displayed.
The first timer display may be displayed before the second timer display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A102)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A101.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A103)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A101.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A104)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means that may display the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies the timing at which a certain effect is started.
At least a part of the display mode of the first display may change depending on the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
A notice may be given before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
The notice is a notice for notifying that at least a part of the display mode of the first display will be changed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A105)
The game console described in Appendix A104.
The first display is a period display, and is
The period display is a display that notifies a timing (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain timing") at which the certain effect may be started in a certain period.
During the change of at least a part of the display mode of the period display, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A106)
The game console described in Appendix A105.
The period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed.
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A107)
The game console described in Appendix A104.
The first display is a timer display.
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing (hereinafter, referred to as "certain timing") at which the certain effect is started.
When the change in the display mode of at least a part of the timer display is completed, the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A108)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A107.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may not be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A109)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A107.
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect is always started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A110)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A109.
The display means is a means that may display a second display.
The second display is a display foretelling that the first display will be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A111)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A110.
The first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed.
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A112)
The game console described in Appendix A111.
The moving display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A113)
The game console described in Appendix A111.
The moving display may be performed during the change of at least a part of the display mode of the first display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A114)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A113.
The notice is a notice display by the first display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A115)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 104 to A114.
A false notice may be given before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
Even if the false notice is given, the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is not started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A116)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 104 to A115.
The notice is configured to be given before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A117)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A116.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A118)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A116.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A119)
It is a game table equipped with a production means that can execute a timer effect.
The timer effect is configured so that the effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It is a production
It is configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A120)
The game console described in Appendix A119.
The jackpot game is composed of a plurality of round games.
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one round game.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A121)
The game console described in Appendix A119.
The jackpot game is composed of a plurality of round games.
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed over two or more round games.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A122)
The game console according to Appendix A120 or A121.
The timer display is a display configured to indicate the certain time by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value.
The display indicating a certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0.
The timer display in a certain timer effect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer effect") indicates the first time as the initial value.
The first timer effect may be executed over the first number of round games.
The first timer effect may be executed over a second number of round games.
The second number of times is more than the first number of times.
The first number of times is one or more times.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A123)
The game console according to Appendix A120 or A121.
One round game is configured to end when the first time has passed.
The timer display is a display configured to indicate the certain time by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value.
The display indicating a certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0.
The second time may be displayed as the initial value,
The second time is shorter than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A124)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A123.
The certain effect is an effect in which the timer display may be started without being displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
The certain effect is an effect in which the timer display may be started with a display indicating a certain time (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
The certain effect in the first case is an effect executed in the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect").
The certain effect in the second case is an effect that may be executed in the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second effect").
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A125)
The game console described in Appendix A124.
The timing at which the second effect can be started is more likely to be earlier than the timing at which the first effect can be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A126)
The game console according to Appendix A124 or A125.
The first effect may be executed as the certain effect in the second case.
In the second case, the timing at which the first effect is executed and the timing at which the second effect is executed are different.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A127)
The game console described in Appendix A119 to A126.
The certain effect is a definite effect that notifies the player that an advantageous privilege is given.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A128)
The game console according to Appendix A127, which cites any one of Appendix A124 to A126.
The final effect is an effect of notifying that the hold contains a symbol variation display that is a big hit.
When the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in the hold is one, one of the first effect and the second effect may be executed. ,
When the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in the hold is two or more, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A129)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A124 to A126.
The certain effect is an effect that suggests that a player may be given an advantageous privilege.
The second effect is more likely to give the player a privilege than the first effect.
The first effect may be performed as a definite effect for notifying the player that an advantageous privilege is given (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
The first effect may not be the final effect (hereinafter referred to as "second case").
The second effect is a definite effect that notifies the player that an advantageous privilege is given.
The second case is configured so that the second effect is more easily executed than the first case.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A130)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A129.
The timer display is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the jackpot game, and the timer display may be displayed indicating the certain time during execution of the jackpot game. Has been
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A131)
The game console described in Appendix A130.
The timer effect is configured to be executed in one symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "third case").
The certain effect in the third case is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A132)
The game console described in Appendix A119.
The timer display is configured to be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and may be displayed to indicate the certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. Yes,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A133)
The game console described in Appendix A132.
The timer display is configured to start a display change to indicate the certain time when a certain condition regarding the game is achieved.
It is configured so that the display may indicate the certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed according to the timing when the certain condition is achieved.
It is configured so that a display indicating the certain time may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game depending on the timing when the certain condition is achieved.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A134)
The game console according to Appendix A119, A132 or A133.
As the certain effect, an effect suggesting a game state after the jackpot game is completed (hereinafter, referred to as "11th effect") may be executed.
As the above-mentioned certain effect, an effect (hereinafter referred to as "twelfth effect") for notifying that a symbol variation display that becomes a big hit is included in the hold may be executed.
The certain effect is configured to be executed even when the timer display does not indicate the certain time.
When the timer display does not indicate the certain time during the execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect is configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A135)
It is a game table equipped with a production means that can execute a timer effect.
The timer effect is configured so that the effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It is a production
It is configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game.
During the execution of the jackpot game, an effect suggesting that a privilege advantageous to the player is given (hereinafter referred to as "fourth effect") may be executed.
The fourth effect is an effect that may be executed when the certain effect is executed at least once.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A136)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A135.
The effect means is a display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A137)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A136.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A138)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A137.
The certain time is a time indicating that the remaining time of the timer is 0.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A139)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A138.
The certain effect is an effect that can be executed even at intervals during the execution of the jackpot game.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A140)
It is a game table equipped with a production means that can execute a timer effect.
The timer effect is configured so that the effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It is a production
At least, a timer effect may be performed during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the certain effect may be performed during a period in which a new symbol variation display is not performed after the symbol variation display is completed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A141)
Display means and
Operation means and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means on which an operation display may be displayed.
The operation display is a display related to the operation means.
The display means is a means in which a timer display may be displayed.
The timer display is a display that announces the timing at which the operation display is displayed.
The timer display is a display in which at least a part of the timer display changes according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed.
After the timer display is displayed, the operation display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A142)
The game console described in Appendix A141.
As the timer display, the first timer display may be displayed.
When the first time elapses as a certain time after the change of at least a part of the display of the first timer display is started, the operation display of the first display mode may be displayed.
As the timer display, a second timer display may be displayed.
When the second time elapses as a certain time after the change of at least a part of the display of the second timer display is started, the operation display of the second display mode may be displayed.
The second time is longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A143)
The game console according to Appendix A141 or A142.
Equipped with a second operating means
The operating means is the first operating means, and is
The operation display is the first operation display.
The display means is a display in which a second operation display may be displayed.
The second operation display is a display relating to the second operation means.
While the timer display is being displayed, the second operation display may be displayed after a certain period of time until the operation display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A144)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A141 to A143.
When the operation means is operated during the display of the timer display, the display mode of the timer display may change.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A145)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A141 to A144.
The feature is that the display mode of the timer display may change when the display mode is changed according to the passage of a certain time until the operation display is displayed by the timer display. Game table to play.

(Appendix A146)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A141 to A145.
The display means is a means in which a notice display may be displayed.
The notice display is a display for notifying that the timer notice is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A147)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A141 to 146.
Whether the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed or the lost symbol mode is finally confirmed is configured to be determined by the jackpot determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol.
The result of the jackpot determination does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display.
The jackpot determination is configured to be determined according to the result of a jackpot lottery using a random number acquired when the game ball enters the start port provided on the game board.
The probability of being judged as a big hit in the big hit lottery (hereinafter referred to as "big hit probability") is predetermined.
The jackpot probability does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A148)
It is a game table equipped with a production means that can execute a timer effect.
The timer effect is an effect configured so that a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.
It is configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A149)
The game console according to Appendix A148.
The timer display may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the jackpot game, and the timer display may be displayed indicating the certain time during the execution of the jackpot game. Has been
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A150)
The game console according to Appendix A148 or A149.
The timer display may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the display may indicate a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A151)
The game console described in Appendix A150.
The timer effect is an effect that may start execution when a certain condition related to the game is achieved.
It is configured so that the display may indicate the certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed according to the timing when the certain condition is achieved.
It is configured so that a display indicating the certain time may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game depending on the timing when the certain condition is achieved.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A152)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A148 to A151.
As the certain effect, an effect suggesting a game state after the jackpot game is completed (hereinafter, referred to as "11th effect") may be executed.
As the above-mentioned certain effect, when an effect for notifying that the symbol variation display whose execution is suspended includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit (hereinafter, referred to as "twelfth effect") is executed. There is
The certain effect is an effect configured so that the timer display may be executed even when the display does not indicate the certain time.
When the timer display does not indicate the certain time during the execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect is more likely to be executed than the twelfth effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A153)
The game console according to any one of the appendices A148 to A152.
There is a case where the timer display becomes a display indicating the certain time and the certain effect is started (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
There is a case where the certain effect is started without displaying the timer display (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
The certain effect in the first case is an effect executed in the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect").
The certain effect in the second case is an effect that may be executed in the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second effect").
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The type suggested by performing the first effect and the type suggested by performing the second effect are the same type.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A154)
The game console described in Appendix A153.
The timing at which the first effect can be started is more likely to be earlier than the timing at which the second effect can be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A155)
The game console according to Appendix A153 or A154.
In the second case, the certain effect may be executed in the first aspect as the second effect.
In the first case, the timing at which the certain effect is executed in the first aspect as the first effect, and in the second case, the second effect is the same in the first aspect. The timing when the production is executed is different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A156)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A148 to A155.
The certain effect is a definite effect that notifies the player that an advantageous privilege is given.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A157)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A153 to A155.
The certain effect is a definite effect that notifies the player that an advantageous privilege is given.
The final effect is an effect of notifying that the symbol variation display whose execution is suspended (hereinafter, referred to as "pending symbol variation display") includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit.
When the number of big hit symbol fluctuation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is one, one of the first effect and the second effect may be executed. Has been
When the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in the reserved symbol variation display is two or more, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. ing,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A158)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A148 to A157.
The jackpot game is composed of a plurality of round games.
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one of the plurality of round games.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A159)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A148 to A157.
The jackpot game is composed of a plurality of round games.
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed over two or more round games among the plurality of round games.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A160)
The game console according to Appendix A158 or A159.
The timer display is a display configured to display a display indicating the certain time by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value.
The display indicating a certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0.
The timer display displayed during execution of a certain timer effect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer effect") is a display indicating the first time as the initial value.
The first timer effect is an effect that may be executed over the first number of round games among the plurality of round games.
The first timer effect is an effect that may be executed over a second number of round games out of the plurality of round games.
The second number of times is more than the first number of times.
The first number of times is one or more times.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A161)
The game console according to Appendix A158 or A159.
One round game is configured to end when the second time has passed.
The timer display is a display configured to display a display indicating the certain time by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value.
The display indicating a certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0.
A display indicating the third time may be displayed as the initial value.
The third time is shorter than the second time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A162)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A148 to A161.
It is configured so that the timer effect may be executed in one symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "third case").
The certain effect in the third case is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A163)
It is a game table equipped with a production means that can execute a timer effect.
The timer effect is an effect configured so that a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.
It is configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game.
During the execution of the jackpot game, an effect suggesting that a privilege advantageous to the player is given (hereinafter, referred to as "third effect") may be executed.
The third effect is an effect that may be executed when the certain effect is executed at least once.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A164)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A148 to A163.
The effect means is a display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A165)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A148 to A164.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B1)
Image display means and
A symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
A notice means that can execute multiple types of notices,
It is a game table equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons.
The hold display is a display displayed in the hold display area in the image display means.
The hold display is a display according to the number of times the operation of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter, referred to as "holding number").
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area.
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or more notice icons can be displayed.
The notice means is a means capable of executing the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested.
During the period in which the symbol variation display is executed once, the first notice icon among the plurality of types of notice icons is larger than the first number when the first number is digested. It is configured so that it is easier to get a big hit when two numbers are digested,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B2)
The game console described in Appendix B1
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B3)
The game console described in Appendix B1 or B2.
The notice means is a means capable of executing a fake notice in the same mode as the notice.
The notice means is a means capable of executing the fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. ,
After the false notice is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B4)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B3.
A fourth number in which the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than the third number and larger than the third number during the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is executed. Is configured to be more likely to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B5)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B4.
A hold display means capable of displaying according to the number of holds is provided.
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B6)
The game console described in Appendix B5.
The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B7)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B6.
Equipped with a look-ahead notice means that can execute look-ahead notice
The look-ahead notice means is a means capable of executing the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B8)
The game console described in Appendix B7.
During the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") to be read ahead is being executed, the notice icon may be digested by the fifth number.
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first symbol variation display") executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period during which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B9)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B8.
The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B10)
The game console described in Appendix B9.
The fourth symbol variation is executed during the period during which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "third symbol variation display") is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed. The notice icon, which is digested during the period when the display is being executed, may start to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B11)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B10.
The hold display area is an area in which the hold display can be displayed up to a seventh number.
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to the eighth number.
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by that.

(Appendix B12)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B11.
Equipped with production means that can execute multiple types of production
One of the plurality of types of notices is the first notice,
One of the plurality of types of notices is the second notice,
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice.
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of production is the second production.
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice is a notice that the first effect is executed.
The second notice is a notice that the second effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B13)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B12.
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B14)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B13.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B15)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
While the first symbol variation display is being displayed, the display of the first notice icon may be started as the notice icon.
The first notice icon that was started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
In the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") displayed after the first symbol variation display, the first symbol variation display that was not digested during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon is configured to be digested,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B16)
The game console described in Appendix B15.
The first notice icon, which is started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display, may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B17)
The game console according to Appendix B15 or B16.
As a pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be started to be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B18)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B15 to B17.
During the display of one symbol variation display, the case where the first number of the first notice icons are digested is larger than the case where the second number of the first notice icons are digested. Easy to become
The second number is larger than the first number.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B19)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B15 to B18.
A second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon.
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the digested symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B20)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B15 to B19.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display.
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display may be displayed as the notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B21)
The game console described in Appendix B20.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a fake notice indication.
When the first notice icon is digested, the first fake notice display may be displayed as the fake notice display.
The display mode of the first false notice display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first notice display.
The symbol variation display on which the first false notice display is displayed is configured to be misaligned.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B22)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B15 to B21.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a look-ahead effect display.
A third notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon.
When the third notice icon is digested, the look-ahead effect display may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B23)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B15 to B22.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B24)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B15 to B23.
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative pattern variable display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B25)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B15 to B24.
The first notice icon, which is started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display, is configured to be surely digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B26)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B15 to B25.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area in the display means.
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B27)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B15 to B26.
Equipped with production control means
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B28)
The game console described in Appendix B27.
Main control means and
A symbol display means that can display a symbol variation display,
With
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means.
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B29)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B15 to B28.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B30)
The first display means that can execute the symbol variation display,
The second display means,
It is a game table equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "pending number") in the reserved display area.
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the pending number depending on the displayed number.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area.
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested.
During the period in which the symbol variation display is executed once, the case where the notice icon is digested by the second number larger than the first number is a big hit than the case where the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be easy to become
The second display means is displayed in the notice icon display area as a look-ahead notice display before the symbol change display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol change display”), which is the target of pre-reading, is started. A display means capable of displaying the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B31)
The game console described in Appendix B30.
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B32)
The game console according to Appendix B30 or B31.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display mode.
The second display means can display the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Display means
After the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B33)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B30 to B32.
The second display means is a display means composed of a plurality of display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B34)
The game console described in Appendix B33.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is an image display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is a hold display means.
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area.
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B35)
The game console described in Appendix B34.
The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B36)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B30 to B32.
The second display means is an image display means.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B37)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B30 to B36.
During the period when the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be exhausted by the fifth number.
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first symbol variation display") executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period during which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B38)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B30 to B36.
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be surely digested by the end of the symbol variation display to be read ahead.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B39)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B30 to B38.
The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B40)
The game console described in Appendix B39.
The notice icon that is digested during the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is executed during the period during which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed. May start to appear,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B41)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B30 to B40.
The hold display area is an area capable of displaying up to a seventh number according to the number of holds.
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to the eighth number.
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B42)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B30 to B41.
Equipped with production means that can execute multiple types of production
As the notice icon, the first notice icon can be displayed.
As the notice icon, a second notice icon can be displayed.
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display.
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display.
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display.
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display is displayed.
When the second notice icon is digested, the second notice display is displayed.
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of production is the second production.
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed.
The second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B43)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B30 to B42.
Main control means and
Production control means and
With
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means.
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the first display means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the second display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B44)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B30 to B43.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B45)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the second symbol variation display is displayed after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested.
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is an effect display.
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed.
The notice icon of one of the plurality of notice icons is the first notice icon.
The notice icon of one of the plurality of notice icons is the second notice icon.
By digesting the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "first number notice icons") in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. Is configured to
The first number of notice icons are notice icons including the first notice icon.
The game console characterized in that the first number of notice icons is a notice icon including the second notice icon.

According to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a characteristic display.

Also, according to this game console, there is a possibility that the first effect display will be displayed from the time when one of the first number icons is displayed until the first number icon is digested. It may be possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for something.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation for a big hit by making the number of notice icons appear to be a symbol change before the hold to be read ahead.

Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or three or more notice icons.

Further, when the first notice icon is digested, the effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be performed, or when the second notice icon is digested, the second notice icon is displayed. The corresponding effect display B may be performed, or when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are digested, the effect display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be done.

Also, only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be digested, and only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon is newly added. It may be displayed in.

(Appendix B46)
The game console described in Appendix B45.
Even if the second number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "second number notice icons") is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed. And
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons including one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.
The second number of notice icons are notice icons that do not include the first notice icon and the other notice icon of the second notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game console, a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, and the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon in one symbol variation display is displayed. However, since the first effect display is not displayed, it may be possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who can see the first effect display.

Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, or the second number may be larger than the first number.

Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

In addition, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of notice icons are digested.

Further, even if the second number of notice icons are digested, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or the entire first effect display may be displayed.

Further, the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may change according to the number of digested notice icons, or the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be the same.

Further, when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons may be configured to be digested without fail.

Further, even if the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested and the second number of notice icons are digested. It may be configured so that both the first notice icon and the second notice icon are not erased.

(Appendix B47)
The game console according to Appendix B45 or B46.
The notice icon of one of the plurality of notice icons is a third notice icon.
By digesting the third notice icon, the third effect display is displayed as the effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation of the production and enhance the production effect.

The third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

Further, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix B48)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B45 to B47.
When the lost symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is displayed after the third symbol variation display is started. The multiple notice icons may be digested before the end,
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be read ahead is completed.

Depending on whether the result of the pre-reading target symbol variation display is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the pre-reading target symbol variation display. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

In addition, depending on whether the result of the pre-reading target symbol variation display is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the pre-reading target symbol variation display. The minimum number of warning icons may be the same or different.

In addition, one symbol that is performed before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of pre-reading in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended. The maximum number of notice icons that can be digested in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display to be read ahead is a big hit or a loss. It may be the same or different.

In addition, one symbol that is performed before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of pre-reading in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended. The minimum number of notice icons that can be digested in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display to be read ahead is a big hit or a loss. It may be the same or different.

In addition, the maximum number of notice icons that can be digested by the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of pre-reading in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended is , The result of the symbol variation display of the target of pre-reading may be the same or different depending on whether the result is a big hit or a loss.

In addition, the minimum number of notice icons that are digested by the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of pre-reading in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended is , The result of the symbol variation display of the target of pre-reading may be the same or different depending on whether the result is a big hit or a loss.

(Appendix B49)
The game console described in Appendix B48.
When the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are displayed between the start of the third symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display. In some cases,
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily become a lower jackpot, so it may be possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be read ahead is completed.

(Appendix B50)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B45 to B49.
Equipped with a hold display means
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "hold number").
A game table characterized by that.

The hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means.

(Appendix B51)
The game console described in Appendix B50.
Depending on the number of times the notice icon is displayed, the number of holds is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

(Appendix B52)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B45 to B51.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B53)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B45 to B51.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B54)
A game console with multiple display means
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the second display means.
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to the notice icon.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the second symbol variation display is displayed after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested.
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or a light guide plate may be lens-cut and a pattern may appear by irradiating the light guide plate with a light source from the side. , It may be configured by a light emitting means such as an LED, or it may be configured by a 7-segment display.

Further, the display related to the notice icon may be a display related to the stock of the notice icon, a display related to the digestion of the notice icon, or a notice of stock of the notice icon. It may be a display, or it may be an effect display executed when the notice icon is digested.

Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, or the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, and the display area of the second display means is larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix B55)
The game console described in Appendix B54.
In the second display means, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, one notice icon may be newly displayed.

In addition, the notice icon may be digested by the second display means.

(Appendix B56)
The game console according to Appendix B54 or B55.
In the first display means, a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, "display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed" may be performed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. It may be performed in the symbol variation display.

(Appendix B57)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B54 to B56.
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area.
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area.
The notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B58)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B54 to B56.
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area.
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area.
The effect display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B59)
Display means and
Movable means and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the second symbol variation display is displayed after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested.
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
When the notice icon is digested, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter referred to as "notice icon digestion effect") is performed.
As the notice icon digestion effect, an effect by the movable means (hereinafter, referred to as "first movable means effect") may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, although the effect by the movable means may be performed only by the first movable means effect, a movable means effect different from the first movable means effect may be performed. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means on which the effect is performed may be displayed.

(Appendix B60)
The game console described in Appendix B59.
When the 21st notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, even if the 21st notice icon is digested, the first movable means production may not be performed, and when the 21st notice icon is digested, the first movable means is always produced. Means may be directed.

Further, when the 21st notice icon is digested, an effect different from the first movable means effect (an effect having a different operation) may be performed.

Further, when the 21st notice icon is digested, an effect by a movable means different from the 1st movable means may be performed, or the 21st notice icon is digested. And, the effect by the first movable means may be always performed.

(Appendix B61)
The game console according to Appendix B59 or B60.
When the 22nd notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect is not performed.
A game table characterized by that.

Even if the 22nd notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may be performed, and when the 22nd notice icon is digested, another effect (or effect display) may be performed. May be done.

(Appendix B62)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B59 to B61.
Equipped with operating means
The movable means is the operating means, and is
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the mode of the operating means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, "change" has a meaning including deformation, displacement, movement, and movement.

(Appendix B63)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B59 to B62.
Equipped with a second means of movement,
The movable means is the first movable means, and is
As the notice icon digestion effect, an effect by the second movable means (hereinafter, referred to as "second movable means effect") may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B64)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the second symbol variation display is displayed after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested.
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon increase suggestion display.
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed.
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.
A game table characterized by that.

The notice icon may not be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed whenever the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only once, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only once.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

(Appendix B65)
The game console described in Appendix B64.
In the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end.
A game table characterized by that.

The change in which the display of the notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. By doing so, it may be possible to expect that the notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Appendix B66)
The game console according to Appendix B64 or B65.
An icon of one of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that the notice icon is increased by one.

Further, the notice icon displayed on the notice icon increase suggestion display does not have to increase.

Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of a ghost in which the notice icon does not increase.

Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that a plurality of notice icons are increased. In this case, for example, when the number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is 3, only 2 may be increased.

Further, the notice icons other than the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Appendix B67)
The game console according to Appendix B64 or B65.
A game characterized in that the twelfth number of the notice icons among the eleven number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon. The stand.

(Appendix B68)
Display means and
Hold display means and
It is a game table equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the hold display (hereinafter referred to as "second hold display") of the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol change display") which is the target of pre-reading is displayed, the first A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display.
When the second hold display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be done,
The first symbol variation display is the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display on which the second hold display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B69)
The game console described in Appendix B68.
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a look-ahead display mode.
In the symbol variation display on which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the look-ahead display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B70)
The game console described in Appendix B68 or B69.
When the hold display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth hold display") of the lost symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol change display") which is the target of pre-reading is displayed, the third The plurality of notice icons may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B71)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is an explanatory display.
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed.
The second display is a display displayed in the second display area when it is displayed.
The notice icon is an icon that, when displayed, is displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area.
A game table characterized by that.

The first display may be an explanatory display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanatory display.

Further, the second display may be a display showing the current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of the effect mode name of the selectable effect mode. Here, the effect mode includes, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change in the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, and a mode for changing the frequency of occurrence of the one-shot notification effect. There is a mode for making it.

Further, the display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the appearance animation performed when the notice icon is displayed, and the notice may be made closer to the display position of the animation in the middle. The display position of the icon may be closer to the second display area.

Further, here, the "notice icon" may be only one notice icon, may be only a part of the notice icons among the plurality of notice icons, or may be all of the plurality of notice icons. It may be a notice icon of. Further, the "notice icon" may be only the notice icon displayed first among the plurality of notice icons, or a part including the notice icon displayed first among the plurality of notice icons. It may be an icon.

Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may be completely the same, or a part of the display period of the first display may overlap with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

Further, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the first display. In addition, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the second display.

Further, the second display and the notice icon do not necessarily have to be displayed at the same time.

Further, the frequency of display may differ between the first display and the second display. For example, if the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, the line-of-sight guidance of the notice icon May be easier. Further, the size of the first display area and the second display area may be different, or the roles of the first display area and the second display area may be different. For example, the notice display may not be performed in the first display area, but the notice display may also be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix B72)
The game console described in Appendix B71.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B73)
The game console described in Appendix B71 or B72.
The first display is a variable icon display.
The explanatory display is an explanatory display relating to the notice icon.
The notice icon may be displayed overlapping with at least a part of the second display (hereinafter, referred to as "first part").
When the notice icon is digested, the overlap of the second display with the first part is eliminated.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game console, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened by displaying it in the second display area where the explanation of the notice icon related to the relevant and after the next symbol change display is given, rather than the change icon. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is lost, it may be possible to give new expectations to the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the look-ahead notice display is digested.

It should be noted that the entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first part.

Further, during the period in which the variable icon is displayed, the variable icon may be capable of at least suggesting an expectation for a big hit in the symbol variable display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display or may be digested in a symbol variation display which is a target of look-ahead.

Further, the notice icon may be always digested in the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading, or the notice icon may not be digested in the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading.

Further, the notice icon may be configured to be displayable only by a single number, or may be configured to be displayable by a plurality of notice icons. Here, when displaying a plurality of notice icons, the notice icons may be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the notice icons can be displayed indefinitely without setting the upper limit number. Good.

(Appendix B74)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B71 to B73.
While the notice icon is displayed, the display of the second display may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B75)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B71 to B73.
A game table characterized in that the second display is not started when the notice icon is displayed.

(Appendix B76)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B71 to B75.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The third display is a notice display and is
When the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B77)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B71 to B76.
The second display area is a line-delimited area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B78)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B71 to B77.
"The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed" in the appendix B71 is "the notice icon". Is displayed in the second display area when it is displayed. "
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B79)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B71 to B78.
The number of the above-mentioned notice icons being digested is larger in the big hit symbol variation display than in the lost symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B80)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the explanation display of the notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
The explanatory display of one of the plurality of types of explanatory displays is the first explanatory display.
The first explanatory display is an explanatory display relating to the notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The jackpot fluctuation has more digested notice icons than the loss fluctuation,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B81)
The game console described in Appendix B80.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter, referred to as "first display area") in which the first explanatory display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B82)
The game console described in Appendix B81.
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanatory display is not displayed in the first explanatory display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B83)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B80 to B82.
The explanatory display of one of the plurality of types of explanatory displays is the second explanatory display.
The second explanatory display is a display showing the current production stage.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter, referred to as "second display area") in which the second explanatory display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B84)
The game console described in Appendix B83.
Even when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the effect stage changes.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B85)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B80 to B84.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of types of notice icons") as the notice icons.
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is the first notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon.
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first effect.
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B86)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The first display is an explanatory display.
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area of the display means.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when it is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B87)
The game console described in Appendix B86.
When the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B88)
The game console described in Appendix B87.
When the notice icon is exhausted, the display of the first display may be resumed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B89)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B86 to B88.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a notice display, and is
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed.
The explanatory display is an explanatory display relating to the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B90)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B86 to B89.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means.
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display.
The second display means is a means capable of displaying the effect display.
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display that matches the display of the second display means.
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B91)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B86 to B90.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The third display is an explanatory display.
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means.
The game console is characterized in that the notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix B92)
The game console described in Appendix B91.
When the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display explaining a character displayed on the second display means.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability variation expectation degree.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the reach jackpot expectation level.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the jackpot expectation of the character.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed at the same time as the first notice display.

(Appendix B93)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The display area in which the notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area in which the hold icon is displayed.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The first display is a display including one of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "first notice icon").
The second display is a display including a display showing the first notice icon in a large size.
After the second display is made, the first display may be made,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the notice icon included in the second display may be an enlarged display of the first notice icon, or may be a notice icon different from the first notice icon.

(Appendix B94)
The game console described in Appendix B93.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The third display is a variable display of the decorative pattern.
The first display is a display indicating that the first notice icon is in stock.
The first display is a display that does not overlap with the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B95)
The game console described in Appendix B93 or B94.
The third display is a display that does not overlap with the first display.
The third display is a display that may overlap with the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B96)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B93 to B95.
The first display is a display displayed in the hold display frame.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B97)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B93 to B96.
The game table is characterized in that the second display is a display performed when the first notice icon is acquired.

(Appendix B98)
The game console described in Appendix B97.
The second display is a display that is also performed when the first notice icon is digested.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B99)
The game console described in Appendix B97 or B98.
When the notice icon is acquired, the notice icon acquired together with at least a part of the already acquired notice icons is enlarged and displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B100)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The first display is the display of the hold display frame.
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the first display is extended.
The third display is a display of a decorative pattern.
The first display is a display that does not overlap with the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B101)
The game console described in Appendix B100.
The display of the position among the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The fourth display is an effect display, and is
In the portion of the second display that is extended from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "extended part"), the fourth display is configured to be displayable.
The extended portion is a portion that does not overlap with the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B102)
The game console described in Appendix B101.
The effect display is a look-ahead notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B103)
The game console according to Appendix B101 or B102.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the sixth indication.
The sixth display is a notice display and is
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to be displayable.
The fourth display and the fifth display are partially the same display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B104)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B100 to B103.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the fifth indication,
The fifth display is a line notice display, and is
The fifth display is a display that does not overlap with the first display.
The fifth display is a display that may overlap with the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B105)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The first display is a display including an icon display frame.
The icon display frame is a display frame capable of displaying an icon related to a symbol variation display.
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the first display is extended.
The third display is a decorative pattern variation display, and is
The first display is a display that does not overlap with the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B106)
The game console described in Appendix B105.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The fourth display is an effect display, and is
In the portion of the second display that is extended from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "extended part"), the fourth display is configured to be displayable so as to overlap.
The extended portion is a portion that does not overlap with the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B107)
The game console described in Appendix B106.
The effect display is a look-ahead notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B108)
The game console according to Appendix B106 or B107.
The effect display is a display that changes the display mode of the icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B109)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B106 to B108.
The third display is a display that may overlap the extended portion.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B110)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B106 to B109.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The fifth display is a line display, and is
The fifth display is a display that does not overlap with the first display.
The fifth display is a display that may overlap with the extended portion.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B111)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B106 to B110.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display.
The sixth display is a notice display and is
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to overlap and display.
The fourth display and the sixth display are partially the same display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B112)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B105 to B111.
The icon is a hold icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B113)
The game console described in Appendix B112.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B114)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B105 to B113.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B115)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The first display is a display including an icon display frame.
Among the icon display frames, an icon related to the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “icon”) can be displayed in the area inside the frame (hereinafter, referred to as “frame inner area”).
The icon display frame is a display frame that can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.
One of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode.
One of the plurality of display modes is the second display mode.
The second display mode is a display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is extended.
The second display is a decorative pattern variation display, and is
The first display displayed in the first display mode is a display that does not overlap with the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B116)
The game console described in Appendix B115.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The third display is an effect display, and is
The third display is configured to be displayable so as to overlap the portion (hereinafter, referred to as "extended portion") extended from the first display mode of the second display mode.
The extended portion is a portion that does not overlap with the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B117)
The game console described in Appendix B116.
The effect display is a look-ahead notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B118)
The game console according to Appendix B116 or B117.
The effect display is a display that changes the display mode of the icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B119)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B116 to B118.
The second display is a display that may overlap the extended portion.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B120)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B116 to B119.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The fourth display is a line display, and is
The fourth display is a display that does not overlap with the icon display frame of the first display mode.
The fourth display is a display that may overlap the extended portion.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B121)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B116 to B120.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The fifth display is a notice display, and is
In the extended portion, the fifth display overlaps and can be displayed.
The third display and the fifth display are partially the same display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B122)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B116 to B121.
The area of the frame area (hereinafter referred to as "first frame area") in the first display mode is the first area.
The area of the frame area (hereinafter referred to as "second frame area") in the second display mode is the second area.
The second area is a larger area than the first area.
The extended portion is a portion of a difference region between the second frame region and the first frame region.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B123)
The game console described in Appendix B122.
The second in-frame area is a region including the first in-frame area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B124)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B115 to B123.
The "display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded" according to claim 1 is "a display mode in which the area of the frame area of the first display mode is increased". That is,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B125)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B115 to B124.
The icon display frame is configured to be displayable in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B126)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B115 to B125.
The icon that can be displayed in the frame area is a variable icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B127)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B115 to B126.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon as the icon.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B128)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B115 to B127.
The first display displayed in the second display mode is a display that does not overlap with the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B129)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B115 to B128.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B130)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The first display is a display including an icon display frame.
The third display is an explanatory display.
The fourth display is a notice display, and is
The icon display frame is a display frame including a first area and a second area.
An icon related to the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "icon") can be displayed in the first area.
The third display is configured to be displayable in the second area.
The fourth display is configured to be displayable in the second area.
The icon display frame may be displayed in the first display mode,
The icon display frame may be displayed in the second display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the second area is expanded in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode.
In the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, the third display may be displayed.
In the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the fourth display is displayed.
The position of the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, and the position of the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode. Is in a different position,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B131)
The game console described in Appendix B130.
The first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode and the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode have the same size. Is that
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B132)
The game console according to Appendix B130 or B131.
The second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode includes the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode. It is an area that has been
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B133)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B130 to B132.
The first region and the second region are adjacent to each other.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B134)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B130 to B133.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a decorative pattern variation display, and is
The second display does not overlap with the front side of the first display displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B135)
The game console described in Appendix B134.
When the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the display position of the second display moves.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B136)
The game console described in Appendix B134 or B135.
The second display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of sizes.
The size of one of the plurality of sizes is the first size.
The size of one of the plurality of sizes is the second size.
The second size is smaller than the first size.
When the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the second display displayed in the first size is displayed in the second size.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B137)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B134 to B136.
The second display does not overlap with the front side of the first display displayed in the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B138)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B130 to B137.
The "display mode in which the second area is expanded in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode" described in the appendix B130 means "the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode". It is a display mode in which the area of the second region in the displayed state is increased.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B139)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B130 to B138.
The icon display frame is configured to be displayable in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B140)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B130 to B139.
The icon is a variable icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B141)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B130 to B139.
The icon is a hold icon
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B142)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B130 to B141.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The fifth display is an error display, and is an error display.
The fifth display may overlap the front side of the first display displayed in the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B143)
The game console according to any one of the appendices B130 to B142.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B144)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The first display is a display including an icon display frame.
The third display is an explanatory display.
The fourth display is a notice display, and is
The icon display frame is a display frame including a first area and a second area.
An icon related to the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "icon") can be displayed in the first area.
The third display is configured to be displayable in the second area.
The fourth display is configured to be displayable in the second area.
The icon display frame may be displayed in the first display mode,
The icon display frame may be displayed in the second display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the second area is expanded in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode.
In the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, the third display may be displayed.
In the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the fourth display is displayed.
The position of the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, and the position of the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode. Is in a different position,
By displaying the icon in the notice display mode, the notice can be executed.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display devices.
The display device of one of the plurality of display devices is the first display device.
One of the plurality of display devices is a second display device.
In a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, the entire icon display frame is configured to be displayed on the first display device.
In a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, a part of the icon display frame is configured to be displayed on the first display device.
In a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, a portion other than the part of the icon display frame is displayed on the second display device.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B145)
The game console described in Appendix B144.
The first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode and the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode have the same size. Is that
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B146)
The game console according to Appendix B144 or B145.
The second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode includes the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode. It is an area that has been
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B147)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B144 to B146.
The first region and the second region are adjacent to each other.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B148)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B144 to B147.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a decorative pattern variation display, and is
The second display does not overlap with the front side of the first display displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B149)
The game console described in Appendix B148.
When the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the display position of the second display moves.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B150)
The game console according to Appendix B148 or B149.
The second display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of sizes.
The size of one of the plurality of sizes is the first size.
The size of one of the plurality of sizes is the second size.
The second size is smaller than the first size.
When the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the second display displayed in the first size is displayed in the second size.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B151)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B148 to B150.
The second display does not overlap with the front side of the first display displayed in the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B152)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B144 to B151.
The "display mode in which the second area is expanded in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode" described in the appendix B144 is "a display mode in which the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode". It is a display mode in which the area of the second region in the displayed state is increased.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B153)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B144 to B152.
The icon display frame is configured to be displayable in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B154)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B144 to B153.
The icon is a variable icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B155)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B144 to B153.
The icon is a hold icon
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B156)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B144 to B155.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The fifth display is an error display, and is an error display.
The fifth display may overlap the front side of the first display displayed in the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B157)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B144 to B156.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B158)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The first display is a display including an icon display frame.
The third display is an explanatory display.
The fourth display is a notice display in which a failure pattern and a success pattern are prepared.
The icon display frame is a display frame including a first area and a second area.
An icon related to the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "icon") can be displayed in the first area.
The third display is configured to be displayable in the second area.
The fourth display is configured to be displayable in the second area.
The icon display frame may be displayed in the first display mode,
The icon display frame may be displayed in the second display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the second area is expanded in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode.
In the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, the third display may be displayed.
In the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the fourth display is displayed.
The position of the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, and the position of the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode. Is in a different position,
After the fourth display of the success pattern is displayed, it is configured to develop into a super reach effect.
After the fourth display of the failure pattern is displayed, the icon display frame displayed in the second display mode is configured to be displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B159)
The game console described in Appendix B158.
The first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode and the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode have the same size. Is that
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B160)
The game console according to Appendix B158 or B159.
The second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode includes the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode. It is an area that has been
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B161)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B158 to B160.
The first region and the second region are adjacent to each other.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B162)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B158 to B161.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a decorative pattern variation display, and is
The second display does not overlap with the front side of the first display displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B163)
The game console described in Appendix B162.
When the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the display position of the second display moves.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B164)
The game console according to Appendix B162 or B163.
The second display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of sizes.
The size of one of the plurality of sizes is the first size.
The size of one of the plurality of sizes is the second size.
The second size is smaller than the first size.
When the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the second display displayed in the first size is displayed in the second size.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B165)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B162 to B164.
The second display does not overlap with the front side of the first display displayed in the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B166)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B158 to B165.
The "display mode in which the second area is expanded in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode" according to claim 1 means "the icon display frame is the first display mode." It is a display mode in which the area of the second region is increased in the state indicated by.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B167)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B158 to B166.
The icon display frame is configured to be displayable in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B168)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B158 to B167.
The icon is a variable icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B169)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B158 to B167.
The icon is a hold icon
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B170)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B158 to B169.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The fifth display is an error display, and is an error display.
The fifth display may overlap the front side of the first display displayed in the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B171)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B158 to B170.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C1)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
A display area is a display area that can take multiple aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
The size of a certain display area of the second aspect is larger than the size of a certain display area of the first aspect.
The display area of the second aspect is a display area including a part or all of the display area of the first aspect.
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display") can be displayed.
After the display of the first display is completed, a certain display area is configured to change from the second aspect to the first aspect.
In a certain display area of the first aspect, a certain display different from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display") can be displayed.
The second display is a display of a mini game.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C2)
The game console described in Appendix C1
The first display of the success pattern (hereinafter referred to as "first effect display") can be displayed.
The first display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "second effect display") can be displayed.
In a certain display area of the second aspect, after the second effect display is completed, a certain display area is configured to change from the second aspect to the first aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C3)
The game console described in Appendix C1 or C2.
The second display of the success pattern (hereinafter referred to as "third effect display") can be displayed.
The second display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "fourth effect display") can be displayed.
After the display of the fourth effect display is started, a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C1 to C3.
It is configured to be able to display an icon related to the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "icon").
A display area is an area arranged below the area where the icon is displayed.
The position of the area where the icon is displayed when the certain display area is the first aspect and the position of the area where the icon is displayed when the certain display area is the second aspect are different positions. is there,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C5)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
A display area is a display area that can take multiple aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
The size of a certain display area of the second aspect is larger than the size of a certain display area of the first aspect.
The display area of the second aspect is a display area including a part or all of the display area of the first aspect.
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display") can be displayed.
After the display of the first display is completed, a certain display area is configured to change from the second aspect to the first aspect.
It is configured to be able to display a certain display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display") different from the first display.
The second display is the mini game display,
A display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect after the display of the second display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C6)
The game console described in Appendix C5.
The first display of the success pattern (hereinafter referred to as "first effect display") can be displayed.
The first display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "second effect display") can be displayed.
In a certain display area of the second aspect, after the display of the second effect display is completed, the certain display area is configured to change from the second aspect to the first aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C7)
The game console described in Appendix C5 or C6.
The second display of the success pattern (hereinafter referred to as "third effect display") can be displayed.
The second display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "fourth effect display") can be displayed.
After the display of the third effect display is started, a certain display area is configured to change from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C8)
The game console according to any one of Appendix C5 to C7.
It is configured to be able to display an icon related to the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "icon").
A display area is an area arranged below the area where the icon is displayed.
The position of the area where the icon is displayed when the certain display area is the first aspect and the position of the area where the icon is displayed when the certain display area is the second aspect are different positions. is there,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C9)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
A display area is a display area that can take multiple aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
The size of a certain display area of the second aspect is larger than the size of a certain display area of the first aspect.
The display area of the second aspect is a display area including a part or all of the display area of the first aspect.
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display") can be displayed.
After the display of the first display is completed, a certain display area is configured to change from the second aspect to the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect.
The size of a certain display area of the third aspect is larger than the size of a certain display area of the first aspect.
The size of a certain display area of the second aspect and the size of a certain display area of the third aspect are different sizes.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C10)
The game console described in Appendix C9.
In a certain display area of the third aspect, the first display can be displayed.
The first display of the success pattern (hereinafter referred to as "first effect display") can be displayed.
The first display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "second effect display") can be displayed.
In a certain display area of the third aspect, the first display is displayed more than the ratio of the first effect display of the first display being displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. The ratio of the first effect display is displayed is higher.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C11)
The game console described in Appendix C9.
In a certain display area of the third aspect, a certain display different from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display") can be displayed.
The first display of the success pattern (hereinafter referred to as "first effect display") can be displayed.
The first display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "second effect display") can be displayed.
The second display of the success pattern (hereinafter referred to as "third effect display") can be displayed.
The second display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "fourth effect display") can be displayed.
A variable display in which the third effect display is displayed in a certain display area of the third aspect, rather than a variable display in which the first effect display is displayed in a certain display area of the second aspect. It is configured so that it is easier to finally confirm and display in the jackpot mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C12)
The game console according to any one of Appendix C9 to C11.
It is configured to be able to display an icon related to the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "icon").
A display area is an area arranged below the area where the icon is displayed.
The position of the area where the icon is displayed when the certain display area is the first aspect and the position of the area where the icon is displayed when the certain display area is the second aspect are different positions. is there,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C13)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
A display area is a display area that can take multiple aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
The size of a certain display area of the second aspect is larger than the size of a certain display area of the first aspect.
The display area of the second aspect is a display area including a part or all of the display area of the first aspect.
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display") can be displayed.
After the display of the first display is completed, a certain display area is configured to change from the second aspect to the first aspect.
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display different from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display") can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C14)
The game console described in Appendix C13.
The first display of the success pattern (hereinafter referred to as "first effect display") can be displayed.
The first display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "second effect display") can be displayed.
The second display of the success pattern (hereinafter referred to as "third effect display") can be displayed.
The second display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "fourth effect display") can be displayed.
In a certain display area of the second aspect, the variable display in which the third effect display is displayed is finally confirmed in the jackpot mode than the variable display in which the first effect display is displayed. It is structured so that it is easy to do
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C15)
The game console described in Appendix C13 or C14.
After the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area may be hidden.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C16)
The game console according to any one of Appendix C13 to C15.
It is configured to be able to display an icon related to the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "icon").
A display area is an area arranged below the area where the icon is displayed.
The position of the area where the icon is displayed when the certain display area is the first aspect and the position of the area where the icon is displayed when the certain display area is the second aspect are different positions. is there,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C17)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display.
The timer display is a display including a time display, and is a display including a time display.
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started depending on the satisfaction of a certain condition.
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
When the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display") is started, the certain effect is always started.
The timer display (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display") and the second timer display of the first aspect are the time display after the time display is started and before the change of the time display is started. (Hereinafter referred to as "first period"), at least a part of the mode is different.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C18)
The game console described in Appendix C17.
In the first period, the time display of the first timer display is the first time.
In the first period, the display of the time of the second timer display is the second time.
The first time is a time when a value below a certain level becomes 0.
The second time is a time when the value below a certain level does not become 0.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C19)
The game console according to Appendix C17 or C18.
The color of the time display of the first timer display is the first color.
The color of the time display of the second timer display is the second color.
The first color and the second color are different colors.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C20)
The game console according to any one of Appendix C17 to C19.
The first timer display is a display including the time display and the frame display.
The second timer display is a display including the time display and the frame display.
The color of the frame display of the first timer display and the frame display of the second timer display are different.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C21)
The game console according to any one of Appendix C17 to C20.
The size of the time display in the first timer display and the size of the time display in the second timer display are different.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C22)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display.
The timer display is a display including a time display, and is a display including a time display.
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started depending on the satisfaction of a certain condition.
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
When the timer display of the first aspect is started, an effect different from the certain effect may be started.
When the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display") is started, the certain effect is always started.
The timer display (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display") and the second timer display of the first aspect are the time display after the time display is started and before the change of the time display is started. (Hereinafter referred to as "first period"), at least a part of the mode is different.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C23)
The game console described in Appendix C22.
In the timer display of at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display, the position of the timer display may move during the first period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C24)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display.
The timer display is a display including a time display, and is a display including a time display.
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
When the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display") is started, a certain effect may be started.
When the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display") is started, an effect different from the certain effect may be started.
The second timer display is a display in which the display of the time may disappear after the display of the time is started and before the change of the display of the time starts (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C25)
The game console described in Appendix C24.
In the second timer display, there is a case where the time display starts to change after the display of the coin time is started (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
In the second case, the certain effect is more likely to be started than in the first case.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C26)
The game console described in Appendix C25.
In the first case, the certain effect is not started and
In the second case, the certain effect is started.
A game table that eavesdrops on things.

(Appendix C27)
The game console described in Appendix C24.
In the first case, the certain effect is always started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C28)
The game console described in Appendix C27.
In the first timer display, the time from the start of the display of the time to the start of the change of the display of the time is the first time.
In the second timer display, the time from the start of the time display to the disappearance of the time display is the second time.
The second time is longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C29)
The game console described in Appendix C28.
In the second timer display, the change of the time display may start after the time display is started.
In the second timer display, the time from the start of the display of the time to the start of the change of the display of the time is the third time.
The third time is longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C30)
The game console according to Appendix C28 or C29.
The time first displayed in the second timer display may be the fourth time.
The second time may be longer than the fourth time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C31)
The game console according to any one of Appendix C24 to C30.
In the first case, the display mode of the second timer display other than the time display may change.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C32)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display.
The timer display is a display including a time display, and is a display including a time display.
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started depending on the satisfaction of a certain condition.
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
When the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display") is displayed, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.
In the symbol variation display on which the second timer display is displayed, the second timer display disappears before the large value symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display (hereinafter, "first". There is a case.)
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C33)
The game console described in Appendix C32.
In the symbol variation display on which the second timer display is displayed, there is a case where the time display starts to change after the time display is started (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C34)
The game console according to Appendix C32 or C33.
The certain effect is more likely to be started when the second timer display is displayed than when the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display") is displayed. ,
In the first timer display, the time from the start of the display of the time to the start of the change of the display of the time is the first time.
In the second timer display, the time from the start of the time display to the disappearance of the time display is the second time.
The second time is longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C35)
The game console according to C34 including the appendix C33.
In the second case, the time from the start of the display of the time to the start of the change of the display of the time is the third time.
The third time is longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C36)
The game console according to Appendix C34 or C35.
The time first displayed in the second timer display may be the fourth time.
The second time may be longer than the fourth time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C37)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display.
The timer display is a display including a time display, and is a display including a time display.
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started according to the time when the display of the time becomes a certain time.
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
When the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display") is displayed, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.
When the second timer display is displayed, even if the display of the time becomes the certain time, the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed without starting the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C38)
The game console described in Appendix C37.
The certain effect is more likely to be started when the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display") is displayed than when the second timer display is displayed. , A game table featuring that.

(Appendix C39)
The game console described in Appendix C38.
The time from when the time display in the first timer display reaches the certain time until the first timer display disappears is the first time.
The time from when the display of the time in the second timer display reaches the certain time until the second timer display disappears is the second time.
The second time is longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C40)
The game console according to any one of Appendix C37 to C39.
It is configured so that an effect different from the certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect") is started in response to the display of the time in the second timer display becoming the certain time. Has been
The first effect is an effect that is executed only when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C41)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display.
The timer display is a display including a time display, and is a display including a time display.
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started according to the time when the display of the time becomes a certain time.
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
When the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display") is started, the certain effect may not be started.
When the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display") is started, an effect different from the certain effect is always performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C42)
A game console with multiple display means
One of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means.
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display.
The second display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display, and is a means capable of displaying the timer display.
The timer display is a display including a time display, and is a display including a time display.
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect is started according to the time when the display of the time reaches a certain time.
There is a case where the timer display is displayed by either one of the first display means and the second display means (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
There is a case where the timer display is displayed by both the display means of the first display means and the display means of the second display means (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C43)
The game console described in Appendix C42.
In the second case, the time display of the timer display (hereinafter referred to as "first timer display") displayed on the first display means and the timer displayed on the second display means. There is a case where the time display of the display (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display") is the same (hereinafter, referred to as "third case").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C44)
The game console described in Appendix C43.
The certain effect is an effect that can be performed in a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the certain effect is performed according to the second aspect than when the certain effect is performed according to the first aspect.
When the time displayed first in the timer display is the same in the first case and the third case, the third case is more than the first case. It is easy to start the certain effect depending on the aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C45)
The game console according to Appendix C43 or C44.
In the second case, a third timer display may be displayed on one of the first display means and the second display means.
The time display displayed on the third timer display is different from the time display displayed on the first timer display.
The time display displayed on the third timer display is different from the time display displayed on the second timer display.
After the display of the third timer display is started, an effect different from the certain effect may be started depending on the time when the display of the time reaches a certain time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C46)
The game console described in Appendix C42.
In the second case, the time display of the timer display (hereinafter, referred to as "11th timer display") displayed on the first display means and the display on the second display means. There are cases where the time display of the timer display (hereinafter referred to as "twelfth timer display") is different (hereinafter referred to as "fourth case").
In the fourth case, the certain effect related to the timer display of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C47)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C42 to C46.
The first display means is a display means in which one or a plurality of timer displays may be displayed.
The second display means is a means in which only one timer display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C48)
A game console with multiple display means
One of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means.
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display.
The second display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display, and is a means capable of displaying the timer display.
The timer display is a display including a time display, and is a display including a time display.
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect is started according to the time when the display of the time reaches a certain time.
There is a case where the timer display is displayed by both the first display means and the second display means during the execution of a certain symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
In the second case, the time display of the timer display (hereinafter referred to as "first timer display") displayed on the first display means and the timer displayed on the second display means. The display of the time in the display (hereinafter referred to as "second timer display") may be different.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C49)
The game console described in Appendix C48.
There is a case where one of the first timer display and the second timer display is displayed during the execution of the certain symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C50)
The game console described in Appendix C49.
In the second case, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the certain symbol variation display than in the first case.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C51)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C48 to C50.
The display time of the time displayed first in the second timer display is longer than that in the first timer display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C52)
The game console according to any one of Appendix C48 to C51.
In the second case, the timing at which the first timer display is started and the timing at which the second timer display is started may be the same.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C53)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C48 to C52.
In the second case, the timing at which the first timer display is started and the timing at which the second timer display is started may be different.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C54)
The game console described in Appendix C53.
In the second case, the first timer display is started after the second timer display is started, and the timer display is also performed after the certain effect regarding the first timer display is performed. May be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C55)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The first display is a display of characters related to the second display.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The third display is a display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to be started.
It is configured so that the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started.
It is configured so that the third display may be started in the first state.
The third display, which is started in the first state, may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state.
It is configured so that a certain effect is started after the certain notice display is displayed.
The above-mentioned certain effect is a notice regarding the display of the symbol variation during execution.
It is configured so that the second state may occur after the first state.
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed.
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C56)
The game console described in Appendix C55.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display.
The sixth display is at least a display of an image displayed behind the hold icon.
The hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed.
It is configured so that the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C57)
The game console described in Appendix C56.
In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the third display.
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C58)
The game console according to Appendix C56 or C57.
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the first aspect.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the second aspect.
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , It is configured so that the display of the second display can be easily started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C59)
The game console according to Appendix C56 or C57.
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the first aspect.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the second aspect.
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , It is configured so that the jackpot symbol can be easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C60)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C56 to C59.
It is configured so that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the first display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C61)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C56 to C59.
In a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. Yes,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C62)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C55 to C61.
It is configured to be able to perform a certain reach effect,
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started.
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C63)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C55 to C62.
The certain notice display is a timer notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C64)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C55 to C63.
The certain notice display is a display of a mini game.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C65)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C55 to C64.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
It is configured so that the fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C66)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C55 to C65.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
It is configured so that the fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C67)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C55 to C66.
The third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next start symbol variation display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C68)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C55 to C67.
The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, is configured to be erased before the next start symbol variation display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C69)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C55 to C68.
In the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C70)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C55 to C69.
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the seventh display.
The seventh display is a display that prompts the operation of the operating means.
The seventh display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started.
When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started.
The third display is a display in which the display ends before the display of the seventh display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C71)
The game console described in Appendix C70.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display.
The eighth display is a display foretelling that the display of the seventh display will start.
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C72)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C55 to C71.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display.
The ninth display is a display of a variable icon.
Two of the above third indications may be displayed,
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes.
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C73)
The game console described in Appendix C72.
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C74)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C55 to C73.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the tenth display.
The tenth display is an explanatory display and is an explanatory display.
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C75)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C55 to C74.
The "display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to be started" described in Appendix C55 means
"Character display in preparation",
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C76)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C55 to C75.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the eleventh display.
The eleventh display is a display that encourages the ejection of the game ball.
In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. It is configured,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C77)
The game console described in Appendix C76.
In a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. It is configured,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C78)
The game console according to any one of the appendices C55 to C77.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

The game console according to any one of the appendices C55 to C77.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

The term "notice icon" explained so far is just for convenience, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is named for convenience according to the display mode (motif), and when the notice icon is a tool, it may be called a notice item, and when the notice icon is a character, it is called a notice character. In some cases, if the notice icon is a display indicating the skill, it may be called a notice skill, and if the notice icon is a box-shaped one, it may be called a notice box. , Notice medal). In addition, the term "notice" in the notice icon is also named for convenience only, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be referred to as a charge item or a stock item to indicate that it is to be stored.

FIG. 486 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 486, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 into the gaming area 902 is discharged from the gaming area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

In addition, the mode in which the above-mentioned display means 903 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 may be adopted, and further, the mode in which the touch panel is provided on the display means 903. You may. That is, the touch panel provided on the display means 903 can function as an operating means. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, the continuous stroke operation, or the long press operation by the touch panel, or when the long press auto continuous press function is in the effective state, the touch panel. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous striking function. Further, in some productions, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press auto-striking function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured so that there are many effects to be activated, or may be configured so that there are few effects. .. Further, there are a plurality of effects by the continuous hitting operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be configured so as not to be effective in many cases, or may be configured to be small in number. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 486 is used by enclosing a ball and circulating the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine. The enclosed ball is used as a launching ball and the ball is paid out. May be executed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (rotating machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 487. Here, FIG. 487 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 487 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 487), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and the slot machine 1000 It is configured to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three medals are valid and three medals are bet, the five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three medals are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settlement of medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states like the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operating means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the bottom of the title panel 1062, a medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The game console according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 488 (a), "a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 2008. However, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 3C, electronic data that realizes the present invention. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data according to the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 3B has an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through the mobile phone line, and data related to the acquired game (book). It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game (the present invention). It is provided with a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the above, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. In the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D, an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game ( It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, it may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D via an Internet line.

Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home-use game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as the recording medium for recording the game program.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a rock game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements contained only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendix, etc. are applied to other embodiments, the embodiment, and the modification. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, and appendices, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

In addition, "may be" in the above may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", and "○○ is possible" in the above. It may be replaced with "must be XX".

In addition, the above-mentioned phrases such as "first display" and "second display" are only named to improve readability, and are only named to improve readability. It is added here that "" is not a term with a special meaning.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Direction button 208 Decorative pattern display device 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 224 Production movable body 246 Cloaking device 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 1st sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 Second sub-control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 Game board lamp 542 Game underframe lamp

Claims (1)

It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display.
The third display is a display indicating that the timer notice display is waiting for the start of display.
The display of the timer notice display is started via the display of the third display,
The timer notice display is a display that counts the time until a certain effect is started.
After the symbol variation display is started, the third display may be started in the state before the super reach is started in the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first state").
The display of the third display may end in the middle of the state in which the super reach is being executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second state").
When the count in the timer notice display ends, the certain effect is started.
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display.
In the first state, the hold icon may be displayed,
In the second state, the hold icon may not be displayed,
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed on the back of the hold icon.
The hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed, and the hold icon can be displayed.
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed.
In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the third display.
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display displayed halfway in the second state are the same display position.
A game table characterized by that.

Images